STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

N, R or D indicates pages which are New, Revised or Deleted respectively. Remove

and insert the affected pages and complete the Record of Revisions and the
Record of Temporary Revisions as necessary.

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

R 55 LEP 1 May 01/15 R 55 LEP 43 May 01/15

R 55 LEP 2 May 01/15 R 55 LEP 44 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 3 May 01/15 R 55 LEP 45 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 4 May 01/15 R 55 LEP 46 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 5 May 01/15 R 55 LEP 47 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 6 May 01/15 R 55 LEP 48 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 7 May 01/15 R 55 LEP 49 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 8 May 01/15 R 55 LEP 50 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 9 May 01/15 R 55 LEP 51 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 10 May 01/15 R 55 LEP 52 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 11 May 01/15 N 55 LEP 53 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 12 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 13 May 01/15 R 55 CONTENTS 1 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 14 May 01/15 R 55 CONTENTS 2 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 15 May 01/15 R 55 CONTENTS 3 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 16 May 01/15 R 55 CONTENTS 4 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 17 May 01/15 R 55 CONTENTS 5 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 18 May 01/15 R 55 CONTENTS 6 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 19 May 01/15 R 55 CONTENTS 7 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 20 May 01/15 R 55 CONTENTS 8 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 21 May 01/15 R 55 CONTENTS 9 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 22 May 01/15 R 55 CONTENTS 10 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 23 May 01/15 R 55 CONTENTS 11 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 24 May 01/15 R 55 CONTENTS 12 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 25 May 01/15 R 55 CONTENTS 13 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 26 May 01/15 R 55 CONTENTS 14 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 27 May 01/15 R 55 CONTENTS 15 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 28 May 01/15 R 55 CONTENTS 16 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 29 May 01/15 R 55 CONTENTS 17 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 30 May 01/15 R 55 CONTENTS 18 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 31 May 01/15 R 55 CONTENTS 19 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 32 May 01/15 R 55 CONTENTS 20 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 33 May 01/15 R 55 CONTENTS 21 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 34 May 01/15 55 CONTENTS 22 Blank
R 55 LEP 35 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 36 May 01/15 55-00-00 1 Feb 01/06
R 55 LEP 37 May 01/15 55-00-00 2 Feb 01/02
R 55 LEP 38 May 01/15
R 55 LEP 39 May 01/15 55-10-00 1 Feb 01/15
R 55 LEP 40 May 01/15 55-10-00 2 Feb 01/15
R 55 LEP 41 May 01/15 55-10-00 3 Feb 01/15
R 55 LEP 42 May 01/15 55-10-00 4 Feb 01/15

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 1
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-10-00 5 Feb 01/15 R 55-11-00 1 142 May 01/15

55-10-00 6 Blank R 55-11-00 1 143 May 01/15
55-11-00 1 144 Blank
55-11-00 1 1 Feb 01/09 R 55-11-00 1 145 May 01/15
55-11-00 1 2 Feb 01/03 N 55-11-00 1 146 May 01/15
R 55-11-00 1 101 May 01/15 R 55-11-00 1 147 May 01/15
R 55-11-00 1 102 May 01/15 R 55-11-00 1 148 May 01/15
R 55-11-00 1 103 May 01/15 R 55-11-00 1 149 May 01/15
R 55-11-00 1 104 May 01/15 R 55-11-00 1 150 May 01/15
55-11-00 1 105 Feb 01/10 R 55-11-00 1 151 May 01/15
55-11-00 1 106 Blank R 55-11-00 1 152 May 01/15
R 55-11-00 1 107 May 01/15 R 55-11-00 1 153 May 01/15
R 55-11-00 1 108 May 01/15 R 55-11-00 1 154 May 01/15
55-11-00 1 109 Feb 01/10 R 55-11-00 1 155 May 01/15
55-11-00 1 110 Blank R 55-11-00 1 156 May 01/15
55-11-00 1 111 Feb 01/10 R 55-11-00 1 157 May 01/15
55-11-00 1 112 Blank 55-11-00 1 158 Blank
55-11-00 1 113 Feb 01/10 D 55-11-00 1 159
55-11-00 1 114 Blank D 55-11-00 1 160
55-11-00 1 115 Feb 01/10 55-11-00 1 201 Nov 01/13
55-11-00 1 116 Blank 55-11-00 1 202 Nov 01/13
55-11-00 1 117 Feb 01/10 55-11-00 1 203 Nov 01/13
55-11-00 1 118 Blank 55-11-00 1 204 Nov 01/13
55-11-00 1 119 Feb 01/10 55-11-00 1 205 Nov 01/13
55-11-00 1 120 Blank 55-11-00 1 206 Nov 01/13
55-11-00 1 121 Feb 01/10 55-11-00 1 207 Nov 01/13
55-11-00 1 122 Blank 55-11-00 1 208 Nov 01/13
55-11-00 1 123 Feb 01/10 55-11-00 1 209 Nov 01/13
55-11-00 1 124 Blank 55-11-00 1 210 Nov 01/13
55-11-00 1 125 Feb 01/10 55-11-00 1 211 Nov 01/13
55-11-00 1 126 Blank 55-11-00 1 212 Blank
55-11-00 1 127 Feb 01/10 55-11-00 1 213 Nov 01/13
R 55-11-00 1 128 May 01/15 55-11-00 1 214 Blank
R 55-11-00 1 129 May 01/15 55-11-00 1 215 Nov 01/13
N 55-11-00 1 130 May 01/15 55-11-00 1 216 Blank
R 55-11-00 1 131 May 01/15 55-11-00 1 217 Nov 01/13
R 55-11-00 1 132 May 01/15 55-11-00 1 218 Blank
R 55-11-00 1 133 May 01/15 55-11-00 1 219 Nov 01/13
55-11-00 1 134 Blank 55-11-00 1 220 Nov 01/13
R 55-11-00 1 135 May 01/15 55-11-00 1 221 Nov 01/13
N 55-11-00 1 136 May 01/15 55-11-00 1 222 Nov 01/13
R 55-11-00 1 137 May 01/15 55-11-00 1 223 Nov 01/13
R 55-11-00 1 138 May 01/15 55-11-00 1 224 Blank
R 55-11-00 1 139 May 01/15 55-11-00 1 225 Nov 01/13
R 55-11-00 1 140 May 01/15 55-11-00 1 226 Blank
R 55-11-00 1 141 May 01/15 55-11-00 1 227 Nov 01/13

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 2
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-11-00 1 228 Blank 55-11-00 3 202 Feb 01/09

55-11-00 1 229 Nov 01/13 55-11-00 3 203 Feb 01/09
55-11-00 1 230 Nov 01/13 55-11-00 3 204 Feb 01/03
55-11-00 1 231 Nov 01/13 55-11-00 3 205 Feb 01/03
55-11-00 1 232 Blank 55-11-00 3 206 Feb 01/03
55-11-00 1 233 Nov 01/13 55-11-00 3 207 Feb 01/03
55-11-00 1 234 Nov 01/13 55-11-00 3 208 Feb 01/03
55-11-00 1 235 Nov 01/13 55-11-00 3 209 Feb 01/03
55-11-00 1 236 Nov 01/13 55-11-00 3 210 Feb 01/03
55-11-00 1 237 Nov 01/13 55-11-00 3 211 Feb 01/03
55-11-00 1 238 Nov 01/13 55-11-00 3 212 Nov 01/06
55-11-00 1 239 Nov 01/13 55-11-00 3 213 Feb 01/03
55-11-00 1 240 Nov 01/13 55-11-00 3 214 Blank
55-11-00 1 241 Nov 01/13
55-11-00 1 242 Nov 01/13 55-11-11 1 1 Feb 01/09
55-11-00 1 243 Nov 01/13 55-11-11 1 2 Blank
55-11-00 1 244 Blank 55-11-11 1 3 May 01/02
55-11-00 1 245 Nov 01/13 55-11-11 1 4 Blank
55-11-00 1 246 Nov 01/13 55-11-11 1 5 May 01/02
55-11-00 1 247 Nov 01/13 55-11-11 1 6 Blank
55-11-00 1 248 Nov 01/13 55-11-11 1 7 Feb 01/09
55-11-00 1 249 Nov 01/13 55-11-11 1 8 Feb 01/09
55-11-00 1 250 Nov 01/13 55-11-11 1 9 Feb 01/09
55-11-00 2 1 Feb 01/09 55-11-11 1 10 Blank
55-11-00 2 2 Feb 01/03 55-11-11 1 11 May 01/02
55-11-00 2 101 Feb 01/09 55-11-11 1 12 Blank
55-11-00 2 102 Blank 55-11-11 1 13 May 01/02
55-11-00 2 201 Feb 01/09 55-11-11 1 14 Blank
55-11-00 2 202 Blank 55-11-11 1 15 Feb 01/09
55-11-00 3 1 Aug 01/14 55-11-11 1 16 Blank
55-11-00 3 2 Feb 01/03 55-11-11 1 201 Feb 01/14
55-11-00 3 101 Nov 01/14 55-11-11 1 202 Nov 01/12
55-11-00 3 102 Nov 01/14 55-11-11 1 203 Nov 01/12
55-11-00 3 103 Nov 01/14 55-11-11 1 204 Nov 01/12
55-11-00 3 104 Nov 01/14 55-11-11 1 205 Nov 01/13
55-11-00 3 105 Nov 01/14 55-11-11 1 206 Nov 01/12
55-11-00 3 106 Nov 01/14 55-11-11 1 207 Nov 01/12
55-11-00 3 107 Nov 01/14 55-11-11 1 208 Feb 01/15
55-11-00 3 108 Nov 01/14 55-11-11 1 209 Feb 01/15
55-11-00 3 109 Nov 01/14 55-11-11 1 210 Feb 01/15
55-11-00 3 110 Nov 01/14 55-11-11 1 211 Nov 01/12
55-11-00 3 111 Nov 01/14 55-11-11 1 212 Blank
55-11-00 3 112 Nov 01/14 55-11-11 1 213 Nov 01/12
55-11-00 3 113 Nov 01/14 55-11-11 1 214 Blank
55-11-00 3 114 Blank 55-11-11 1 215 Nov 01/12
55-11-00 3 201 Nov 01/14 55-11-11 1 216 Blank

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 3
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-11-11 1 217 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 263 Feb 01/15

55-11-11 1 218 Blank 55-11-11 1 264 Blank
55-11-11 1 219 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 265 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 220 Blank 55-11-11 1 266 Blank
55-11-11 1 221 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 267 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 222 Nov 01/13 55-11-11 1 268 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 223 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 269 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 224 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 270 Nov 01/13
55-11-11 1 225 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 271 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 226 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 272 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 227 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 273 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 228 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 274 Feb 01/15
55-11-11 1 229 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 275 Feb 01/15
55-11-11 1 230 Blank 55-11-11 1 276 Feb 01/15
55-11-11 1 231 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 277 Feb 01/15
55-11-11 1 232 Blank 55-11-11 1 278 Blank
55-11-11 1 233 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 279 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 234 Blank 55-11-11 1 280 Blank
55-11-11 1 235 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 281 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 236 Blank 55-11-11 1 282 Blank
55-11-11 1 237 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 283 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 238 Blank 55-11-11 1 284 Blank
55-11-11 1 239 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 285 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 240 Blank 55-11-11 1 286 Nov 01/13
55-11-11 1 241 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 287 Feb 01/15
55-11-11 1 242 Nov 01/13 55-11-11 1 288 Blank
55-11-11 1 243 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 289 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 244 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 290 Blank
55-11-11 1 245 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 291 Nov 01/13
55-11-11 1 246 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 292 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 247 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 293 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 248 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 294 Feb 01/15
55-11-11 1 249 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 295 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 250 Blank 55-11-11 1 296 Feb 01/15
55-11-11 1 251 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 297 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 252 Blank 55-11-11 1 298 Blank
55-11-11 1 253 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 299 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 254 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 300 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 255 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 301 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 256 Nov 01/13 55-11-11 1 302 Nov 01/13
55-11-11 1 257 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 303 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 258 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 304 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 259 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 305 Feb 01/15
55-11-11 1 260 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 306 Feb 01/15
55-11-11 1 261 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 307 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 262 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 308 Blank

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 4
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-11-11 1 309 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 355 Nov 01/12

55-11-11 1 310 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 356 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 311 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 357 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 312 Nov 01/13 55-11-11 1 358 Nov 01/13
55-11-11 1 313 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 359 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 314 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 360 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 315 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 361 Feb 01/15
55-11-11 1 316 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 362 Feb 01/15
55-11-11 1 317 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 363 Feb 01/15
55-11-11 1 318 Blank 55-11-11 1 364 Blank
55-11-11 1 319 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 365 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 320 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 366 Blank
55-11-11 1 321 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 367 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 322 Nov 01/13 55-11-11 1 368 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 323 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 369 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 324 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 370 Nov 01/13
55-11-11 1 325 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 371 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 326 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 372 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 327 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 373 Feb 01/15
55-11-11 1 328 Blank 55-11-11 1 374 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 329 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 375 Feb 01/15
55-11-11 1 330 Blank 55-11-11 1 376 Blank
55-11-11 1 331 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 377 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 332 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 378 Blank
55-11-11 1 333 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 379 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 334 Nov 01/13 55-11-11 1 380 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 335 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 381 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 336 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 382 Nov 01/13
55-11-11 1 337 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 383 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 338 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 384 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 339 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 385 Feb 01/15
55-11-11 1 340 Blank 55-11-11 1 386 Feb 01/15
55-11-11 1 341 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 387 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 342 Blank 55-11-11 1 388 Blank
55-11-11 1 343 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 389 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 344 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 390 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 345 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 391 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 346 Nov 01/13 55-11-11 1 392 Nov 01/13
55-11-11 1 347 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 393 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 348 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 394 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 349 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 395 Feb 01/15
55-11-11 1 350 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 396 Feb 01/15
55-11-11 1 351 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 397 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 352 Blank 55-11-11 1 398 Blank
55-11-11 1 353 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 399 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 354 Blank 55-11-11 1 400 Nov 01/12

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 5
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-11-11 1 401 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 447 Nov 01/12

55-11-11 1 402 Nov 01/13 55-11-11 1 448 Nov 01/13
55-11-11 1 403 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 449 Nov 01/13
55-11-11 1 404 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 450 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 405 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 451 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 406 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 452 Feb 01/15
55-11-11 1 407 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 453 Feb 01/15
55-11-11 1 408 Blank 55-11-11 1 454 Feb 01/15
55-11-11 1 409 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 455 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 410 Blank 55-11-11 1 456 Blank
55-11-11 1 411 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 457 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 412 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 458 Blank
55-11-11 1 413 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 459 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 414 Nov 01/13 55-11-11 1 460 Blank
55-11-11 1 415 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 461 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 416 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 462 Blank
55-11-11 1 417 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 463 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 418 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 464 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 419 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 465 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 420 Blank 55-11-11 1 466 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 421 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 467 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 422 Blank 55-11-11 1 468 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 423 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 469 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 424 Blank 55-11-11 1 470 Nov 01/13
55-11-11 1 425 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 471 Nov 01/13
55-11-11 1 426 Blank 55-11-11 1 472 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 427 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 473 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 428 Nov 01/13 55-11-11 1 474 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 429 Nov 01/13 55-11-11 1 475 Feb 01/15
55-11-11 1 430 Nov 01/13 55-11-11 1 476 Feb 01/15
55-11-11 1 431 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 477 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 432 Blank 55-11-11 1 478 Blank
55-11-11 1 433 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 479 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 434 Blank 55-11-11 1 480 Blank
55-11-11 1 435 Nov 01/13 55-11-11 1 481 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 436 Nov 01/13 55-11-11 1 482 Blank
55-11-11 1 437 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 483 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 438 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 484 Blank
55-11-11 1 439 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 485 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 440 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 486 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 441 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 1 487 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 442 Blank 55-11-11 1 488 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 443 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 489 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 444 Blank 55-11-11 1 490 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 445 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 491 Nov 01/12
55-11-11 1 446 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 1 492 Nov 01/12

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 6
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-11-11 1 493 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 3 9 May 01/05

55-11-11 1 494 Nov 01/13 55-11-11 3 10 Blank
55-11-11 1 495 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 3 11 Feb 01/15
55-11-11 1 496 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 3 12 Feb 01/15
55-11-11 1 497 Nov 01/12 R 55-11-11 3 101 May 01/15
55-11-11 1 498 Blank R 55-11-11 3 102 May 01/15
55-11-11 1 499 Nov 01/13 R 55-11-11 3 103 May 01/15
55-11-11 1 500 Nov 01/12 R 55-11-11 3 104 May 01/15
55-11-11 1 501 Nov 01/12 R 55-11-11 3 105 May 01/15
55-11-11 1 502 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 3 106 Blank
55-11-11 1 503 Nov 01/12 R 55-11-11 3 107 May 01/15
55-11-11 1 504 Blank 55-11-11 3 108 Blank
55-11-11 1 505 Nov 01/12 R 55-11-11 3 109 May 01/15
55-11-11 1 506 Nov 01/13 R 55-11-11 3 110 May 01/15
55-11-11 1 507 Nov 01/12 R 55-11-11 3 111 May 01/15
55-11-11 1 508 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 3 112 Blank
55-11-11 1 509 Feb 01/15 R 55-11-11 3 113 May 01/15
55-11-11 1 510 Blank 55-11-11 3 114 Blank
55-11-11 1 511 Nov 01/12 R 55-11-11 3 115 May 01/15
55-11-11 1 512 Blank R 55-11-11 3 116 May 01/15
55-11-11 1 513 Nov 01/12 R 55-11-11 3 117 May 01/15
55-11-11 1 514 Nov 01/13 55-11-11 3 118 Blank
55-11-11 1 515 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 3 201 Nov 01/14
55-11-11 1 516 Blank 55-11-11 3 202 Nov 01/14
55-11-11 1 517 Nov 01/12 55-11-11 3 203 Nov 01/14
55-11-11 1 518 Blank 55-11-11 3 204 Nov 01/14
55-11-11 2 1 Feb 01/09 55-11-11 3 205 Nov 01/14
55-11-11 2 2 Blank 55-11-11 3 206 Nov 01/14
55-11-11 2 3 May 01/02 55-11-11 3 207 Nov 01/14
55-11-11 2 4 Blank 55-11-11 3 208 Blank
55-11-11 2 5 Feb 01/09 55-11-11 3 209 Nov 01/14
55-11-11 2 6 Feb 01/09 55-11-11 3 210 Blank
55-11-11 2 7 May 01/02 55-11-11 3 211 Nov 01/14
55-11-11 2 8 Blank 55-11-11 3 212 Nov 01/14
55-11-11 2 9 Feb 01/09 55-11-11 3 213 Nov 01/14
55-11-11 2 10 Blank 55-11-11 3 214 Nov 01/14
55-11-11 2 201 Jun 01/09 55-11-11 3 215 Nov 01/14
55-11-11 2 202 Blank 55-11-11 3 216 Blank
55-11-11 3 1 Feb 01/14 55-11-11 3 217 Nov 01/14
55-11-11 3 2 Blank 55-11-11 3 218 Blank
55-11-11 3 3 May 01/05 55-11-11 3 219 Nov 01/14
55-11-11 3 4 Blank 55-11-11 3 220 Nov 01/14
55-11-11 3 5 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 3 221 Nov 01/14
55-11-11 3 6 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 3 222 Nov 01/14
55-11-11 3 7 Feb 01/15 55-11-11 3 223 Nov 01/14
55-11-11 3 8 Blank 55-11-11 3 224 Blank

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 7
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-11-11 3 225 Nov 01/14 55-11-12 38 Feb 01/11

55-11-11 3 226 Blank 55-11-12 39 Feb 01/11
55-11-11 3 227 Nov 01/14 55-11-12 40 Feb 01/11
55-11-11 3 228 Nov 01/14 55-11-12 41 Feb 01/11
55-11-11 3 229 Nov 01/14 55-11-12 42 Feb 01/14
55-11-11 3 230 Nov 01/14 55-11-12 43 Feb 01/11
55-11-11 3 231 Nov 01/14 55-11-12 44 Feb 01/11
55-11-11 3 232 Blank 55-11-12 45 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 46 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 1 Feb 01/14 55-11-12 47 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 2 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 48 Feb 01/14
55-11-12 3 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 49 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 4 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 50 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 5 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 51 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 6 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 52 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 7 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 53 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 8 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 54 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 9 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 55 Feb 01/14
55-11-12 10 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 56 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 11 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 57 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 12 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 58 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 13 Feb 01/14 55-11-12 59 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 14 Feb 01/14 55-11-12 60 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 15 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 61 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 16 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 62 Feb 01/14
55-11-12 17 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 63 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 18 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 64 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 19 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 65 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 20 Feb 01/14 55-11-12 66 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 21 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 67 Feb 01/14
55-11-12 22 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 68 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 23 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 69 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 24 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 70 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 25 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 71 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 26 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 72 Feb 01/14
55-11-12 27 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 73 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 28 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 74 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 29 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 75 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 30 Feb 01/14 55-11-12 76 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 31 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 77 Feb 01/14
55-11-12 32 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 78 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 33 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 79 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 34 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 80 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 35 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 81 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 36 Feb 01/11 55-11-12 82 Feb 01/11
55-11-12 37 Feb 01/14 55-11-12 83 Feb 01/11

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 8
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-11-12 84 Feb 01/11 55-11-18 1 205 Nov 01/13

55-11-12 85 Feb 01/14 55-11-18 1 206 Nov 01/13
55-11-12 86 Feb 01/11 55-11-18 1 207 Nov 01/13
55-11-12 87 Feb 01/11 55-11-18 1 208 Blank
55-11-12 88 Feb 01/11 55-11-18 1 209 Nov 01/12
55-11-12 89 Feb 01/11 55-11-18 1 210 Blank
55-11-12 90 Feb 01/14 55-11-18 1 211 Nov 01/12
55-11-12 91 Feb 01/11 55-11-18 1 212 Blank
55-11-12 92 Feb 01/11 55-11-18 1 213 Nov 01/12
55-11-12 93 Feb 01/11 55-11-18 1 214 Blank
55-11-12 94 Feb 01/11 55-11-18 1 215 Nov 01/12
55-11-12 95 Feb 01/14 55-11-18 1 216 Blank
55-11-12 96 Blank 55-11-18 1 217 Nov 01/12
55-11-12 201 Feb 01/15 55-11-18 1 218 Blank
R 55-11-12 202 May 01/15 55-11-18 1 219 Nov 01/12
R 55-11-12 203 May 01/15 55-11-18 1 220 Blank
R 55-11-12 204 May 01/15 55-11-18 1 221 Nov 01/12
R 55-11-12 205 May 01/15 55-11-18 1 222 Blank
N 55-11-12 206 May 01/15 55-11-18 1 223 Nov 01/12
55-11-12 207 Feb 01/13 55-11-18 1 224 Nov 01/13
55-11-12 208 Blank 55-11-18 1 225 Nov 01/12
55-11-12 209 Feb 01/15 55-11-18 1 226 Nov 01/12
55-11-12 210 Feb 01/13 55-11-18 1 227 Nov 01/12
55-11-12 211 Feb 01/15 55-11-18 1 228 Blank
55-11-12 212 Blank 55-11-18 1 229 Nov 01/12
55-11-12 213 Feb 01/13 55-11-18 1 230 Blank
55-11-12 214 Blank 55-11-18 1 231 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 232 Nov 01/13
55-11-18 1 1 Nov 01/13 55-11-18 1 233 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 2 Blank 55-11-18 1 234 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 3 Feb 01/02 55-11-18 1 235 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 4 Blank 55-11-18 1 236 Blank
55-11-18 1 5 May 01/02 55-11-18 1 237 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 6 Blank 55-11-18 1 238 Blank
55-11-18 1 7 Nov 01/13 55-11-18 1 239 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 8 Blank 55-11-18 1 240 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 9 Feb 01/02 55-11-18 1 241 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 10 Blank 55-11-18 1 242 Nov 01/13
55-11-18 1 11 Feb 01/02 55-11-18 1 243 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 12 Blank 55-11-18 1 244 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 13 Nov 01/13 55-11-18 1 245 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 14 Nov 01/13 55-11-18 1 246 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 201 Nov 01/13 55-11-18 1 247 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 202 Nov 01/13 55-11-18 1 248 Blank
55-11-18 1 203 Nov 01/13 55-11-18 1 249 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 204 Nov 01/13 55-11-18 1 250 Nov 01/13

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 9
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-11-18 1 251 Nov 01/13 55-11-18 1 297 Nov 01/12

55-11-18 1 252 Nov 01/13 55-11-18 1 298 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 253 Nov 01/13 55-11-18 1 299 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 254 Nov 01/13 55-11-18 1 300 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 255 Nov 01/12 55-11-18 1 301 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 256 Blank 55-11-18 1 302 Nov 01/13
55-11-18 1 257 Nov 01/12 55-11-18 1 303 Nov 01/13
55-11-18 1 258 Nov 01/13 55-11-18 1 304 Nov 01/13
55-11-18 1 259 Nov 01/12 55-11-18 1 305 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 260 Nov 01/12 55-11-18 1 306 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 261 Nov 01/12 55-11-18 1 307 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 262 Nov 01/12 55-11-18 1 308 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 263 Nov 01/12 55-11-18 1 309 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 264 Blank 55-11-18 1 310 Nov 01/13
55-11-18 1 265 Nov 01/12 55-11-18 1 311 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 266 Blank 55-11-18 1 312 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 267 Nov 01/12 55-11-18 1 313 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 268 Nov 01/13 55-11-18 1 314 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 269 Nov 01/13 55-11-18 1 315 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 270 Nov 01/13 55-11-18 1 316 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 271 Nov 01/13 55-11-18 1 317 Nov 01/13
55-11-18 1 272 Nov 01/13 55-11-18 1 318 Nov 01/13
55-11-18 1 273 Nov 01/12 55-11-18 1 319 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 274 Blank 55-11-18 1 320 Nov 01/13
55-11-18 1 275 Nov 01/12 55-11-18 1 321 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 276 Blank 55-11-18 1 322 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 277 Nov 01/12 55-11-18 1 323 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 278 Blank 55-11-18 1 324 Blank
55-11-18 1 279 Nov 01/12 55-11-18 1 325 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 280 Blank 55-11-18 1 326 Blank
55-11-18 1 281 Nov 01/12 55-11-18 1 327 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 282 Blank 55-11-18 1 328 Nov 01/13
55-11-18 1 283 Nov 01/12 55-11-18 1 329 Nov 01/13
55-11-18 1 284 Blank 55-11-18 1 330 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 285 Nov 01/12 55-11-18 1 331 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 286 Blank 55-11-18 1 332 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 287 Nov 01/12 55-11-18 1 333 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 288 Blank 55-11-18 1 334 Blank
55-11-18 1 289 Nov 01/12 55-11-18 1 335 Nov 01/12
55-11-18 1 290 Blank 55-11-18 1 336 Blank
55-11-18 1 291 Nov 01/12 55-11-18 1 337 Nov 01/13
55-11-18 1 292 Blank 55-11-18 1 338 Nov 01/13
55-11-18 1 293 Nov 01/12 55-11-18 1 339 Nov 01/13
55-11-18 1 294 Blank 55-11-18 1 340 Nov 01/13
55-11-18 1 295 Nov 01/12 55-11-18 1 341 Nov 01/13
55-11-18 1 296 Nov 01/13 55-11-18 1 342 Blank

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 10
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-11-18 1 343 Nov 01/13 R 55-11-18 3 111 May 01/15

55-11-18 1 344 Blank 55-11-18 3 112 Blank
55-11-18 2 1 Nov 01/13 R 55-11-18 3 113 May 01/15
55-11-18 2 2 Blank R 55-11-18 3 114 May 01/15
55-11-18 2 3 May 01/02 R 55-11-18 3 115 May 01/15
55-11-18 2 4 Blank 55-11-18 3 116 Blank
55-11-18 2 5 May 01/02 55-11-18 3 201 Feb 01/15
55-11-18 2 6 Blank 55-11-18 3 202 Feb 01/15
55-11-18 2 7 May 01/02 55-11-18 3 203 Feb 01/15
55-11-18 2 8 Blank 55-11-18 3 204 Feb 01/15
55-11-18 2 9 May 01/02 55-11-18 3 205 Feb 01/15
55-11-18 2 10 Blank 55-11-18 3 206 Blank
55-11-18 2 11 Nov 01/13
55-11-18 2 12 Nov 01/13 55-12-00 1 Aug 01/14
55-11-18 2 13 May 01/02 55-12-00 2 Feb 01/02
55-11-18 2 14 Blank 55-12-00 101 Aug 01/12
55-11-18 2 15 May 01/02 55-12-00 102 Aug 01/12
55-11-18 2 16 Blank 55-12-00 103 Aug 01/12
55-11-18 2 17 Nov 01/13 55-12-00 104 Aug 01/12
55-11-18 2 18 Nov 01/13 55-12-00 105 Aug 01/12
55-11-18 2 201 Feb 01/09 55-12-00 106 Aug 01/12
55-11-18 2 202 Blank 55-12-00 107 Aug 01/12
55-11-18 3 1 May 01/14 55-12-00 108 Aug 01/12
55-11-18 3 2 Blank 55-12-00 109 Aug 01/12
55-11-18 3 3 May 01/02 55-12-00 110 Aug 01/12
55-11-18 3 4 Blank 55-12-00 111 Aug 01/12
55-11-18 3 5 May 01/02 55-12-00 112 Aug 01/12
55-11-18 3 6 Blank 55-12-00 113 Aug 01/12
55-11-18 3 7 Feb 01/14 55-12-00 114 Aug 01/12
55-11-18 3 8 Blank 55-12-00 201 Aug 01/12
55-11-18 3 9 May 01/02 55-12-00 202 Aug 01/12
55-11-18 3 10 Blank 55-12-00 203 Aug 01/12
55-11-18 3 11 May 01/02 55-12-00 204 Blank
55-11-18 3 12 Blank 55-12-00 205 Aug 01/12
55-11-18 3 13 Feb 01/14 55-12-00 206 Blank
55-11-18 3 14 Feb 01/14 55-12-00 207 Aug 01/12
R 55-11-18 3 101 May 01/15 55-12-00 208 Blank
R 55-11-18 3 102 May 01/15 55-12-00 209 Aug 01/12
R 55-11-18 3 103 May 01/15 55-12-00 210 Blank
R 55-11-18 3 104 May 01/15
R 55-11-18 3 105 May 01/15 55-12-11 1 Nov 01/14
55-11-18 3 106 Blank 55-12-11 2 May 01/03
R 55-11-18 3 107 May 01/15 55-12-11 3 May 01/03
R 55-11-18 3 108 May 01/15 55-12-11 4 May 01/03
R 55-11-18 3 109 May 01/15 55-12-11 5 May 01/03
55-11-18 3 110 Blank 55-12-11 6 May 01/03

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 11
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-12-11 7 May 01/03 55-12-11 123 Nov 01/14

55-12-11 8 May 01/03 55-12-11 124 Feb 01/14
55-12-11 9 May 01/03 55-12-11 125 Nov 01/14
55-12-11 10 Nov 01/14 55-12-11 126 Blank
55-12-11 11 Nov 01/14 55-12-11 127 Nov 01/14
55-12-11 12 May 01/03 55-12-11 128 Nov 01/13
55-12-11 13 May 01/03 55-12-11 129 Nov 01/14
55-12-11 14 May 01/03 55-12-11 130 Blank
55-12-11 15 May 01/03 55-12-11 131 Nov 01/14
55-12-11 16 May 01/03 55-12-11 132 Aug 01/13
55-12-11 17 May 01/03 55-12-11 133 Nov 01/14
55-12-11 18 May 01/03 55-12-11 134 Blank
55-12-11 19 Nov 01/14 55-12-11 135 Nov 01/14
55-12-11 20 May 01/03 55-12-11 136 Aug 01/13
55-12-11 21 May 01/03 55-12-11 137 Nov 01/14
55-12-11 22 Blank 55-12-11 138 Blank
55-12-11 23 May 01/03 55-12-11 139 Nov 01/14
55-12-11 24 May 01/03 55-12-11 140 Aug 01/13
55-12-11 25 May 01/03 55-12-11 141 Nov 01/14
55-12-11 26 May 01/03 55-12-11 142 Aug 01/13
55-12-11 27 May 01/03 55-12-11 143 Nov 01/14
55-12-11 28 May 01/03 55-12-11 144 Blank
55-12-11 29 Nov 01/14 55-12-11 145 Nov 01/14
55-12-11 30 Blank 55-12-11 146 Aug 01/13
55-12-11 101 Aug 01/12 55-12-11 147 Nov 01/14
55-12-11 102 Aug 01/12 55-12-11 148 Blank
55-12-11 103 Aug 01/12 55-12-11 149 Nov 01/14
55-12-11 104 Aug 01/13 55-12-11 150 Aug 01/13
55-12-11 105 Aug 01/13 55-12-11 151 Nov 01/14
55-12-11 106 Blank 55-12-11 152 Blank
55-12-11 107 Aug 01/13 55-12-11 153 Nov 01/14
55-12-11 108 Blank 55-12-11 154 Aug 01/13
55-12-11 109 Aug 01/13 55-12-11 155 Nov 01/14
55-12-11 110 Aug 01/13 55-12-11 156 Blank
55-12-11 111 Aug 01/13 55-12-11 157 Nov 01/14
55-12-11 112 Aug 01/13 55-12-11 158 Aug 01/13
55-12-11 113 Aug 01/13 55-12-11 159 Nov 01/14
55-12-11 114 Aug 01/13 55-12-11 160 Blank
55-12-11 115 Aug 01/13 55-12-11 161 Nov 01/14
55-12-11 116 Blank 55-12-11 162 Aug 01/13
55-12-11 117 Aug 01/13 55-12-11 163 Nov 01/14
55-12-11 118 Blank 55-12-11 164 Blank
55-12-11 119 Aug 01/13 55-12-11 201 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 120 Aug 01/13 55-12-11 202 Aug 01/12
55-12-11 121 Aug 01/13 55-12-11 203 Aug 01/12
55-12-11 122 Blank 55-12-11 204 Aug 01/12

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 12
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-12-11 205 Aug 01/12 55-12-11 251 Jun 01/10

55-12-11 206 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 252 Jun 01/10
55-12-11 207 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 253 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 208 Blank 55-12-11 254 Aug 01/12
55-12-11 209 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 255 Aug 01/12
55-12-11 210 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 256 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 211 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 257 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 212 Blank 55-12-11 258 Blank
55-12-11 213 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 259 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 214 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 260 Blank
55-12-11 215 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 261 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 216 Blank 55-12-11 262 Aug 01/12
55-12-11 217 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 263 Aug 01/12
55-12-11 218 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 264 Aug 01/12
55-12-11 219 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 265 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 220 Blank 55-12-11 266 Blank
55-12-11 221 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 267 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 222 Aug 01/12 55-12-11 268 Blank
55-12-11 223 Jun 01/10 55-12-11 269 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 224 Aug 01/12 55-12-11 270 Blank
55-12-11 225 Jun 01/10 55-12-11 271 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 226 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 272 Aug 01/12
55-12-11 227 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 273 Aug 01/12
55-12-11 228 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 274 Aug 01/12
55-12-11 229 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 275 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 230 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 276 Blank
55-12-11 231 Jun 01/10 55-12-11 277 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 232 Aug 01/12 55-12-11 278 Blank
55-12-11 233 Jun 01/10 55-12-11 279 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 234 Jun 01/10 55-12-11 280 Blank
55-12-11 235 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 281 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 236 Blank 55-12-11 282 Aug 01/12
55-12-11 237 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 283 Aug 01/12
55-12-11 238 Blank 55-12-11 284 Aug 01/12
55-12-11 239 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 285 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 240 Jun 01/10 55-12-11 286 Blank
55-12-11 241 Aug 01/12 55-12-11 287 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 242 Jun 01/10 55-12-11 288 Blank
55-12-11 243 Jun 01/10 55-12-11 289 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 244 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 290 Blank
55-12-11 245 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 291 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 246 Blank 55-12-11 292 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 247 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 293 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 248 Jun 01/10 55-12-11 294 Blank
55-12-11 249 Jun 01/10 55-12-11 295 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 250 Jun 01/10 55-12-11 296 Aug 01/12

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 13
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-12-11 297 Aug 01/12 55-12-11 343 Feb 01/13

55-12-11 298 Aug 01/12 55-12-11 344 Blank
55-12-11 299 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 345 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 300 Blank 55-12-11 346 Aug 01/12
55-12-11 301 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 347 Aug 01/12
55-12-11 302 Blank 55-12-11 348 Aug 01/12
55-12-11 303 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 349 Aug 01/12
55-12-11 304 Blank 55-12-11 350 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 305 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 351 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 306 Aug 01/12 55-12-11 352 Blank
55-12-11 307 Aug 01/12 55-12-11 353 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 308 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 354 Blank
55-12-11 309 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 355 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 310 Blank 55-12-11 356 Aug 01/12
55-12-11 311 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 357 Aug 01/12
55-12-11 312 Aug 01/12 55-12-11 358 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 313 Aug 01/12 55-12-11 359 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 314 Aug 01/12 55-12-11 360 Blank
55-12-11 315 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 361 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 316 Blank 55-12-11 362 Blank
55-12-11 317 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 363 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 318 Blank 55-12-11 364 Aug 01/12
55-12-11 319 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 365 Aug 01/12
55-12-11 320 Blank 55-12-11 366 Aug 01/12
55-12-11 321 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 367 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 322 Blank 55-12-11 368 Blank
55-12-11 323 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 369 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 324 Aug 01/12 55-12-11 370 Blank
55-12-11 325 Aug 01/12 55-12-11 371 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 326 Aug 01/12 55-12-11 372 Blank
55-12-11 327 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 373 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 328 Blank 55-12-11 374 Aug 01/12
55-12-11 329 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 375 Aug 01/12
55-12-11 330 Blank 55-12-11 376 Aug 01/12
55-12-11 331 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 377 Aug 01/12
55-12-11 332 Aug 01/12 55-12-11 378 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 333 Aug 01/12 55-12-11 379 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 334 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 380 Blank
55-12-11 335 Feb 01/13 55-12-11 381 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 336 Blank 55-12-11 382 Blank
55-12-11 337 Feb 01/13
55-12-11 338 Aug 01/12 R 55-12-12 1 May 01/15
55-12-11 339 Aug 01/12 55-12-12 2 Feb 01/11
55-12-11 340 Aug 01/12 55-12-12 3 Feb 01/11
55-12-11 341 Feb 01/13 55-12-12 4 Feb 01/11
55-12-11 342 Blank 55-12-12 5 Feb 01/11

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 14
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-12-12 6 Feb 01/11 55-12-12 202 Jun 01/10

55-12-12 7 Feb 01/11 55-12-12 203 Feb 01/13
R 55-12-12 8 May 01/15 55-12-12 204 Aug 01/12
R 55-12-12 9 May 01/15 55-12-12 205 Jun 01/10
R 55-12-12 10 May 01/15 55-12-12 206 Aug 01/12
R 55-12-12 11 May 01/15 55-12-12 207 Aug 01/12
R 55-12-12 12 May 01/15 55-12-12 208 Feb 01/13
R 55-12-12 13 May 01/15 55-12-12 209 Feb 01/13
R 55-12-12 14 May 01/15 55-12-12 210 Blank
55-12-12 15 Feb 01/11 55-12-12 211 Feb 01/13
55-12-12 16 Feb 01/11 55-12-12 212 Feb 01/13
55-12-12 17 Feb 01/11 55-12-12 213 Aug 01/12
55-12-12 18 Feb 01/11 55-12-12 214 Jun 01/10
R 55-12-12 19 May 01/15 55-12-12 215 Aug 01/12
R 55-12-12 20 May 01/15 55-12-12 216 Aug 01/12
R 55-12-12 21 May 01/15 55-12-12 217 Feb 01/13
R 55-12-12 22 May 01/15 55-12-12 218 Blank
R 55-12-12 23 May 01/15 55-12-12 219 Feb 01/13
R 55-12-12 24 May 01/15 55-12-12 220 Blank
R 55-12-12 25 May 01/15 55-12-12 221 Feb 01/13
55-12-12 26 Feb 01/11 55-12-12 222 Feb 01/13
R 55-12-12 27 May 01/15 55-12-12 223 Feb 01/13
R 55-12-12 28 May 01/15 55-12-12 224 Aug 01/12
R 55-12-12 29 May 01/15 55-12-12 225 Jun 01/10
R 55-12-12 30 May 01/15 55-12-12 226 Aug 01/12
R 55-12-12 31 May 01/15 55-12-12 227 Aug 01/12
55-12-12 32 Aug 01/14 55-12-12 228 Feb 01/13
55-12-12 33 Aug 01/14 55-12-12 229 Feb 01/13
55-12-12 34 Aug 01/14 55-12-12 230 Blank
55-12-12 35 Aug 01/14 55-12-12 231 Feb 01/13
55-12-12 36 Aug 01/14 55-12-12 232 Aug 01/12
R 55-12-12 37 May 01/15 55-12-12 233 Jun 01/10
55-12-12 38 Blank 55-12-12 234 Aug 01/12
55-12-12 101 Feb 01/13 55-12-12 235 Aug 01/12
55-12-12 102 Aug 01/12 55-12-12 236 Feb 01/13
55-12-12 103 Feb 01/13 55-12-12 237 Feb 01/13
55-12-12 104 Aug 01/12 55-12-12 238 Blank
55-12-12 105 Aug 01/12 55-12-12 239 Feb 01/13
55-12-12 106 Feb 01/13 55-12-12 240 Feb 01/13
55-12-12 107 Feb 01/13 55-12-12 241 Aug 01/12
55-12-12 108 Blank 55-12-12 242 Aug 01/12
55-12-12 109 Feb 01/13 55-12-12 243 Aug 01/12
55-12-12 110 Feb 01/13 55-12-12 244 Aug 01/12
55-12-12 111 Feb 01/13 55-12-12 245 Feb 01/13
55-12-12 112 Blank 55-12-12 246 Blank
55-12-12 201 Feb 01/13 55-12-12 247 Feb 01/13

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 15
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-12-12 248 Blank 55-13-11 8 Nov 01/07

55-12-12 249 Feb 01/13 55-13-11 9 Feb 01/15
55-12-12 250 Feb 01/13 55-13-11 10 Feb 01/15
55-12-12 251 Aug 01/12 55-13-11 11 Feb 01/11
55-12-12 252 Aug 01/12 55-13-11 12 Nov 01/07
55-12-12 253 Aug 01/12 55-13-11 13 Feb 01/15
55-12-12 254 Aug 01/12 55-13-11 14 Feb 01/15
55-12-12 255 Feb 01/13 55-13-11 15 Feb 01/15
55-12-12 256 Blank 55-13-11 16 Feb 01/15
55-12-12 257 Feb 01/13 55-13-11 17 Feb 01/15
55-12-12 258 Blank 55-13-11 18 Feb 01/15
55-12-12 259 Feb 01/13 55-13-11 19 Feb 01/11
55-12-12 260 Feb 01/13 55-13-11 20 Feb 01/11
55-12-12 261 Feb 01/13 55-13-11 21 Feb 01/15
55-12-12 262 Blank 55-13-11 22 Feb 01/15
55-13-11 23 Feb 01/11
55-13-00 1 Feb 01/02 55-13-11 24 Feb 01/11
55-13-00 2 Feb 01/02 55-13-11 25 Feb 01/15
55-13-00 101 May 01/12 55-13-11 26 Feb 01/15
55-13-00 102 May 01/12 55-13-11 27 Feb 01/11
55-13-00 103 May 01/12 55-13-11 28 Feb 01/11
55-13-00 104 May 01/12 55-13-11 29 Feb 01/15
55-13-00 105 May 01/12 55-13-11 30 Feb 01/15
55-13-00 106 Blank 55-13-11 31 Feb 01/11
55-13-00 107 May 01/12 55-13-11 32 Feb 01/11
55-13-00 108 Blank 55-13-11 33 Feb 01/15
55-13-00 109 May 01/12 55-13-11 34 Feb 01/15
55-13-00 110 Blank 55-13-11 35 Feb 01/11
55-13-00 111 May 01/12 55-13-11 36 Nov 01/07
55-13-00 112 May 01/12 55-13-11 37 Feb 01/15
55-13-00 201 May 01/05 55-13-11 38 Feb 01/15
55-13-00 202 May 01/12 55-13-11 39 Feb 01/11
55-13-00 203 May 01/12 55-13-11 40 Nov 01/07
55-13-00 204 May 01/12 55-13-11 41 Feb 01/15
55-13-00 205 May 01/12 55-13-11 42 Feb 01/15
55-13-00 206 May 01/12 55-13-11 43 Feb 01/11
55-13-00 207 May 01/12 55-13-11 44 Feb 01/11
55-13-00 208 Blank 55-13-11 45 Feb 01/15
55-13-11 46 Feb 01/15
55-13-11 1 Nov 01/14 55-13-11 47 Feb 01/15
55-13-11 2 Feb 01/11 55-13-11 48 Blank
55-13-11 3 Feb 01/15 55-13-11 49 Feb 01/15
55-13-11 4 Feb 01/15 55-13-11 50 Blank
55-13-11 5 Feb 01/15 55-13-11 51 Feb 01/15
55-13-11 6 Feb 01/15 55-13-11 52 Feb 01/15
55-13-11 7 Feb 01/11 55-13-11 53 Feb 01/15

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 16
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-13-11 54 Feb 01/15 55-13-11 202 Aug 01/14

55-13-11 55 Feb 01/15 55-13-11 203 Aug 01/14
55-13-11 56 Feb 01/15 55-13-11 204 Aug 01/14
55-13-11 57 Feb 01/15 55-13-11 205 May 01/12
55-13-11 58 Feb 01/15 55-13-11 206 May 01/12
55-13-11 101 May 01/12 55-13-11 207 May 01/12
55-13-11 102 May 01/12 55-13-11 208 May 01/12
55-13-11 103 May 01/12 55-13-11 209 May 01/12
55-13-11 104 May 01/12 55-13-11 210 Blank
55-13-11 105 May 01/12 55-13-11 211 May 01/12
55-13-11 106 Blank 55-13-11 212 May 01/12
55-13-11 107 Aug 01/14 55-13-11 213 May 01/12
55-13-11 108 Blank 55-13-11 214 Blank
55-13-11 109 May 01/12 55-13-11 215 May 01/12
55-13-11 110 May 01/12 55-13-11 216 Blank
55-13-11 111 May 01/12 55-13-11 217 May 01/12
55-13-11 112 Blank 55-13-11 218 May 01/12
55-13-11 113 May 01/12 55-13-11 219 May 01/12
55-13-11 114 May 01/12 55-13-11 220 May 01/12
55-13-11 115 May 01/12 55-13-11 221 May 01/12
55-13-11 116 May 01/12 55-13-11 222 May 01/12
55-13-11 117 May 01/12 55-13-11 223 May 01/12
55-13-11 118 May 01/12 55-13-11 224 Blank
55-13-11 119 May 01/12 55-13-11 225 May 01/12
55-13-11 120 Blank 55-13-11 226 Blank
55-13-11 121 May 01/12 55-13-11 227 May 01/12
55-13-11 122 May 01/12 55-13-11 228 May 01/12
55-13-11 123 May 01/12 55-13-11 229 May 01/12
55-13-11 124 May 01/12 55-13-11 230 Aug 01/14
55-13-11 125 May 01/12 55-13-11 231 May 01/12
55-13-11 126 Blank 55-13-11 232 May 01/12
55-13-11 127 May 01/12 55-13-11 233 May 01/12
55-13-11 128 May 01/12 55-13-11 234 Blank
55-13-11 129 May 01/12 55-13-11 235 May 01/12
55-13-11 130 Blank 55-13-11 236 May 01/12
55-13-11 131 May 01/12 55-13-11 237 Aug 01/14
55-13-11 132 May 01/12 55-13-11 238 May 01/12
55-13-11 133 May 01/12 55-13-11 239 May 01/12
55-13-11 134 Blank 55-13-11 240 Blank
55-13-11 135 May 01/12 55-13-11 241 May 01/12
55-13-11 136 May 01/12 55-13-11 242 May 01/12
55-13-11 137 May 01/12 55-13-11 243 Aug 01/14
55-13-11 138 Blank 55-13-11 244 May 01/12
55-13-11 139 May 01/12 55-13-11 245 May 01/12
55-13-11 140 May 01/12 55-13-11 246 Blank
55-13-11 201 May 01/12 55-13-11 247 May 01/12

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 17
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-13-11 248 Blank 55-13-11 294 May 01/12

55-13-11 249 May 01/12 55-13-11 295 Aug 01/14
55-13-11 250 May 01/12 55-13-11 296 Blank
55-13-11 251 Aug 01/14 55-13-11 297 May 01/12
55-13-11 252 May 01/12 55-13-11 298 Blank
55-13-11 253 May 01/12 55-13-11 299 May 01/12
55-13-11 254 Blank 55-13-11 300 Blank
55-13-11 255 May 01/12 55-13-11 301 Aug 01/14
55-13-11 256 Blank 55-13-11 302 May 01/12
55-13-11 257 May 01/12 55-13-11 303 May 01/12
55-13-11 258 May 01/12 55-13-11 304 Blank
55-13-11 259 May 01/12 55-13-11 305 May 01/12
55-13-11 260 May 01/12 55-13-11 306 Blank
55-13-11 261 May 01/12 55-13-11 307 Aug 01/14
55-13-11 262 May 01/12 55-13-11 308 Aug 01/14
55-13-11 263 May 01/12 55-13-11 309 Aug 01/14
55-13-11 264 May 01/12 55-13-11 310 Aug 01/14
55-13-11 265 May 01/12 55-13-11 311 Aug 01/14
55-13-11 266 Blank 55-13-11 312 Blank
55-13-11 267 May 01/12 55-13-11 313 Aug 01/14
55-13-11 268 May 01/12 55-13-11 314 Blank
55-13-11 269 May 01/12 55-13-11 315 Aug 01/14
55-13-11 270 Aug 01/14 55-13-11 316 Aug 01/14
55-13-11 271 May 01/12 55-13-11 317 Aug 01/14
55-13-11 272 Blank 55-13-11 318 Blank
55-13-11 273 May 01/12 55-13-11 319 Aug 01/14
55-13-11 274 Blank 55-13-11 320 Blank
55-13-11 275 May 01/12
55-13-11 276 May 01/12 R 55-13-12 1 May 01/15
55-13-11 277 May 01/12 R 55-13-12 2 May 01/15
55-13-11 278 Blank R 55-13-12 3 May 01/15
55-13-11 279 May 01/12 55-13-12 4 Blank
55-13-11 280 Blank R 55-13-12 5 May 01/15
55-13-11 281 May 01/12 55-13-12 6 Blank
55-13-11 282 May 01/12 R 55-13-12 7 May 01/15
55-13-11 283 May 01/12 55-13-12 8 Blank
55-13-11 284 Aug 01/14 R 55-13-12 9 May 01/15
55-13-11 285 May 01/12 55-13-12 10 Blank
55-13-11 286 Blank R 55-13-12 11 May 01/15
55-13-11 287 May 01/12 R 55-13-12 12 May 01/15
55-13-11 288 Blank R 55-13-12 13 May 01/15
55-13-11 289 May 01/12 55-13-12 14 Blank
55-13-11 290 Blank R 55-13-12 15 May 01/15
55-13-11 291 May 01/12 R 55-13-12 16 May 01/15
55-13-11 292 May 01/12 R 55-13-12 17 May 01/15
55-13-11 293 May 01/12 55-13-12 18 Blank

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 18
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

R 55-13-12 19 May 01/15 55-13-12 201 Nov 01/14

R 55-13-12 20 May 01/15 55-13-12 202 May 01/12
R 55-13-12 21 May 01/15 55-13-12 203 Nov 01/14
55-13-12 22 Blank 55-13-12 204 Nov 01/14
R 55-13-12 23 May 01/15 55-13-12 205 Nov 01/14
R 55-13-12 24 May 01/15 55-13-12 206 Blank
R 55-13-12 25 May 01/15 55-13-12 207 May 01/12
55-13-12 26 Blank 55-13-12 208 Blank
R 55-13-12 27 May 01/15 55-13-12 209 Nov 01/14
55-13-12 28 Blank 55-13-12 210 May 01/12
N 55-13-12 29 May 01/15 55-13-12 211 May 01/12
55-13-12 30 Blank 55-13-12 212 May 01/12
N 55-13-12 31 May 01/15 55-13-12 213 May 01/12
N 55-13-12 32 May 01/15 55-13-12 214 Blank
N 55-13-12 33 May 01/15 55-13-12 215 Nov 01/14
55-13-12 34 Blank 55-13-12 216 May 01/12
N 55-13-12 35 May 01/15 55-13-12 217 May 01/12
N 55-13-12 36 May 01/15 55-13-12 218 May 01/12
N 55-13-12 37 May 01/15 55-13-12 219 May 01/12
55-13-12 38 Blank 55-13-12 220 Blank
N 55-13-12 39 May 01/15 55-13-12 221 May 01/12
55-13-12 40 Blank 55-13-12 222 Blank
55-13-12 101 Nov 01/14 55-13-12 223 Nov 01/14
55-13-12 102 Nov 01/14 55-13-12 224 May 01/12
55-13-12 103 Nov 01/14 55-13-12 225 May 01/12
55-13-12 104 May 01/12 55-13-12 226 May 01/12
55-13-12 105 May 01/12 55-13-12 227 May 01/12
55-13-12 106 May 01/12 55-13-12 228 Blank
55-13-12 107 Nov 01/14 55-13-12 229 May 01/12
55-13-12 108 May 01/12 55-13-12 230 Blank
55-13-12 109 May 01/12 55-13-12 231 May 01/12
55-13-12 110 Blank 55-13-12 232 Blank
55-13-12 111 Nov 01/14 55-13-12 233 Nov 01/14
55-13-12 112 May 01/12 55-13-12 234 May 01/12
55-13-12 113 May 01/12 55-13-12 235 May 01/12
55-13-12 114 Blank 55-13-12 236 May 01/12
55-13-12 115 Nov 01/14 55-13-12 237 May 01/12
55-13-12 116 May 01/12 55-13-12 238 Blank
55-13-12 117 May 01/12 55-13-12 239 May 01/12
55-13-12 118 Blank 55-13-12 240 Blank
55-13-12 119 Nov 01/14 55-13-12 241 May 01/12
55-13-12 120 May 01/12 55-13-12 242 Blank
55-13-12 121 May 01/12 55-13-12 243 Nov 01/14
55-13-12 122 Blank 55-13-12 244 May 01/12
55-13-12 123 Nov 01/14 55-13-12 245 May 01/12
55-13-12 124 May 01/12 55-13-12 246 May 01/12

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 19
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-13-12 247 May 01/12 55-14-11 217 Aug 01/12

55-13-12 248 Blank 55-14-11 218 Aug 01/12
55-13-12 249 May 01/12 55-14-11 219 Feb 01/13
55-13-12 250 Nov 01/14 55-14-11 220 Blank
55-13-12 251 Nov 01/14 55-14-11 221 Feb 01/13
55-13-12 252 Blank 55-14-11 222 Blank
55-13-12 253 May 01/12 55-14-11 223 Feb 01/13
55-13-12 254 Blank 55-14-11 224 Aug 01/12
55-14-11 225 Nov 01/09
55-14-00 1 Feb 01/15 55-14-11 226 Aug 01/12
55-14-00 2 Feb 01/15 55-14-11 227 Feb 01/13
55-14-00 101 Feb 01/14 55-14-11 228 Blank
55-14-00 102 Aug 01/12 55-14-11 229 Feb 01/13
55-14-00 103 Aug 01/12 55-14-11 230 Blank
55-14-00 104 Feb 01/14 55-14-11 231 Feb 01/13
55-14-00 105 Aug 01/12 55-14-11 232 Aug 01/12
55-14-00 106 Feb 01/14 55-14-11 233 Feb 01/13
55-14-00 107 Feb 01/14 55-14-11 234 Feb 01/14
55-14-00 108 Blank 55-14-11 235 Feb 01/14
55-14-11 236 Feb 01/14
R 55-14-11 1 May 01/15 55-14-11 237 Feb 01/13
55-14-11 2 Blank 55-14-11 238 Blank
R 55-14-11 3 May 01/15
55-14-11 4 Blank 55-15-00 1 May 01/05
R 55-14-11 5 May 01/15 55-15-00 2 May 01/05
55-14-11 6 Blank
N 55-14-11 7 May 01/15 55-15-11 1 Nov 01/05
N 55-14-11 8 May 01/15 55-15-11 2 Feb 01/02
N 55-14-11 9 May 01/15 55-15-11 3 Nov 01/05
55-14-11 10 Blank 55-15-11 4 Nov 01/05
55-14-11 201 Feb 01/13
55-14-11 202 Feb 01/13 55-16-00 1 Nov 01/14
55-14-11 203 Aug 01/12 55-16-00 2 Nov 01/14
55-14-11 204 Aug 01/12 55-16-00 101 Nov 01/14
55-14-11 205 Feb 01/13 55-16-00 102 Nov 01/14
55-14-11 206 Blank 55-16-00 103 Nov 01/14
55-14-11 207 Feb 01/13 55-16-00 104 Nov 01/14
55-14-11 208 Blank 55-16-00 105 Nov 01/14
55-14-11 209 Feb 01/13 55-16-00 106 Nov 01/14
55-14-11 210 Aug 01/12 55-16-00 107 Nov 01/14
55-14-11 211 Feb 01/13 55-16-00 108 Nov 01/14
55-14-11 212 Feb 01/13 55-16-00 109 Nov 01/14
55-14-11 213 Feb 01/13 55-16-00 110 Nov 01/14
55-14-11 214 Blank 55-16-00 111 Nov 01/14
55-14-11 215 Feb 01/13 55-16-00 112 Nov 01/14
55-14-11 216 Aug 01/12

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 20
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

R 55-16-37 1 May 01/15 R 55-16-38 2 May 01/15

55-16-37 2 May 01/07 R 55-16-38 3 May 01/15
55-16-37 3 May 01/07 R 55-16-38 4 May 01/15
55-16-37 4 May 01/07 R 55-16-38 5 May 01/15
55-16-37 5 May 01/07 55-16-38 6 Blank
55-16-37 6 May 01/07 R 55-16-38 7 May 01/15
55-16-37 7 May 01/03 R 55-16-38 8 May 01/15
55-16-37 8 May 01/07 R 55-16-38 9 May 01/15
55-16-37 9 May 01/07 R 55-16-38 10 May 01/15
55-16-37 10 May 01/07 R 55-16-38 11 May 01/15
55-16-37 11 May 01/07 55-16-38 12 Blank
55-16-37 12 May 01/07 R 55-16-38 13 May 01/15
55-16-37 13 May 01/07 55-16-38 14 Blank
55-16-37 14 May 01/07 N 55-16-38 15 May 01/15
55-16-37 15 May 01/07 N 55-16-38 16 May 01/15
55-16-37 16 May 01/07 N 55-16-38 17 May 01/15
55-16-37 17 May 01/07 55-16-38 18 Blank
55-16-37 18 May 01/07
55-16-37 19 May 01/07 R 55-16-41 1 May 01/15
55-16-37 20 Aug 01/11 R 55-16-41 2 May 01/15
55-16-37 21 Aug 01/11 R 55-16-41 3 May 01/15
55-16-37 22 Blank N 55-16-41 4 May 01/15
55-16-37 23 Aug 01/11
55-16-37 24 Blank R 55-16-42 1 May 01/15
R 55-16-37 25 May 01/15 55-16-42 2 Aug 01/03
55-16-37 26 Nov 01/12 R 55-16-42 3 May 01/15
55-16-37 27 Nov 01/12 55-16-42 4 Blank
55-16-37 28 Nov 01/12 R 55-16-42 5 May 01/15
55-16-37 29 Nov 01/12 R 55-16-42 6 May 01/15
55-16-37 30 Nov 01/12 R 55-16-42 7 May 01/15
55-16-37 31 Nov 01/12 R 55-16-42 8 May 01/15
55-16-37 32 Blank R 55-16-42 9 May 01/15
R 55-16-37 33 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 10 May 01/15
55-16-37 34 Nov 01/12 R 55-16-42 11 May 01/15
55-16-37 35 Nov 01/12 R 55-16-42 12 May 01/15
55-16-37 36 Nov 01/12 R 55-16-42 13 May 01/15
55-16-37 37 Nov 01/12 R 55-16-42 14 May 01/15
55-16-37 38 Nov 01/12 R 55-16-42 15 May 01/15
55-16-37 39 Nov 01/12 R 55-16-42 16 May 01/15
55-16-37 40 Blank R 55-16-42 17 May 01/15
R 55-16-37 41 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 18 May 01/15
55-16-37 42 Nov 01/12 R 55-16-42 19 May 01/15
R 55-16-37 43 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 20 May 01/15
55-16-37 44 Blank R 55-16-42 21 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 22 May 01/15
R 55-16-38 1 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 23 May 01/15

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 21
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

R 55-16-42 24 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 70 May 01/15

R 55-16-42 25 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 71 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 26 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 72 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 27 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 73 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 28 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 74 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 29 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 75 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 30 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 76 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 31 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 77 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 32 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 78 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 33 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 79 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 34 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 80 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 35 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 81 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 36 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 82 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 37 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 83 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 38 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 84 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 39 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 85 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 40 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 86 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 41 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 87 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 42 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 88 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 43 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 89 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 44 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 90 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 45 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 91 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 46 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 92 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 47 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 93 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 48 May 01/15 N 55-16-42 94 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 49 May 01/15 55-16-42 201 Feb 01/15
R 55-16-42 50 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 202 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 51 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 203 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 52 May 01/15 R 55-16-42 204 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 53 May 01/15 55-16-42 205 Feb 01/12
R 55-16-42 54 May 01/15 55-16-42 206 Blank
R 55-16-42 55 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 56 May 01/15 55-16-48 1 Feb 01/15
R 55-16-42 57 May 01/15 55-16-48 2 Feb 01/15
R 55-16-42 58 May 01/15 55-16-48 3 Feb 01/15
R 55-16-42 59 May 01/15 55-16-48 4 Blank
R 55-16-42 60 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 61 May 01/15 55-16-49 1 Feb 01/15
R 55-16-42 62 May 01/15 55-16-49 2 Feb 01/15
R 55-16-42 63 May 01/15 55-16-49 3 Feb 01/15
R 55-16-42 64 May 01/15 55-16-49 4 Feb 01/15
R 55-16-42 65 May 01/15
R 55-16-42 66 May 01/15 55-20-00 1 Nov 01/14
R 55-16-42 67 May 01/15 55-20-00 2 Nov 01/14
R 55-16-42 68 May 01/15 55-20-00 3 Nov 01/14
R 55-16-42 69 May 01/15 55-20-00 4 Blank

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 22
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-20-00 101 Aug 01/12 55-21-00 1 106 Aug 01/10

55-20-00 102 Nov 01/11 55-21-00 1 107 Aug 01/10
55-20-00 103 Nov 01/11 55-21-00 1 108 Aug 01/10
55-20-00 104 Blank 55-21-00 1 109 Aug 01/10
55-20-00 105 Nov 01/11 55-21-00 1 110 Aug 01/10
55-20-00 106 Nov 01/11 55-21-00 1 111 Aug 01/10
55-20-00 107 Aug 01/12 55-21-00 1 112 Aug 01/10
55-20-00 108 Aug 01/12 55-21-00 1 113 Aug 01/10
55-20-00 201 Feb 01/11 55-21-00 1 114 Blank
55-20-00 202 Feb 01/11 55-21-00 1 115 Aug 01/10
55-20-00 203 Feb 01/11 55-21-00 1 116 Blank
55-20-00 204 Feb 01/11 55-21-00 1 117 Aug 01/10
55-20-00 205 Feb 01/11 55-21-00 1 118 Blank
55-20-00 206 Feb 01/11 55-21-00 1 119 Aug 01/10
55-20-00 207 Feb 01/11 55-21-00 1 120 Blank
55-20-00 208 Feb 01/11 55-21-00 1 121 Aug 01/10
55-20-00 209 Feb 01/11 55-21-00 1 122 Blank
55-20-00 210 Nov 01/03 55-21-00 1 123 Aug 01/10
55-20-00 211 Nov 01/03 55-21-00 1 124 Blank
55-20-00 212 Nov 01/03 55-21-00 1 125 Aug 01/10
55-20-00 213 Feb 01/02 55-21-00 1 126 Blank
55-20-00 214 Blank 55-21-00 1 127 Aug 01/10
55-20-00 215 Feb 01/02 55-21-00 1 128 Blank
55-20-00 216 Blank 55-21-00 1 129 Aug 01/10
55-20-00 217 Feb 01/02 55-21-00 1 130 Blank
55-20-00 218 Blank 55-21-00 1 131 Aug 01/10
55-20-00 219 Feb 01/09 55-21-00 1 132 Blank
55-20-00 220 Feb 01/09 55-21-00 1 133 Aug 01/10
55-20-00 221 Feb 01/09 55-21-00 1 134 Blank
55-20-00 222 Blank 55-21-00 1 135 Aug 01/10
55-20-00 223 Feb 01/09 55-21-00 1 136 Blank
55-20-00 224 Blank 55-21-00 1 137 Aug 01/10
55-20-00 225 Feb 01/09 55-21-00 1 138 Blank
55-20-00 226 Feb 01/09 55-21-00 1 139 Aug 01/10
55-21-00 1 140 Aug 01/10
R 55-21-00 1 May 01/15 55-21-00 1 141 Aug 01/10
55-21-00 2 Feb 01/02 55-21-00 1 142 Blank
55-21-00 3 Feb 01/14 55-21-00 1 143 Aug 01/10
55-21-00 4 Feb 01/14 55-21-00 1 144 Blank
55-21-00 201 Feb 01/11 55-21-00 1 145 Aug 01/10
55-21-00 202 Feb 01/11 55-21-00 1 146 Blank
55-21-00 1 101 Aug 01/10 55-21-00 1 147 Aug 01/10
55-21-00 1 102 Aug 01/10 55-21-00 1 148 Aug 01/10
55-21-00 1 103 Aug 01/10 55-21-00 1 149 Aug 01/10
55-21-00 1 104 Aug 01/10 55-21-00 1 150 Blank
55-21-00 1 105 Aug 01/10 55-21-00 1 151 Aug 01/10

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 23
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-21-00 1 152 Aug 01/10 R 55-21-11 1 103 May 01/15

55-21-00 2 101 Aug 01/10 55-21-11 1 104 Feb 01/11
55-21-00 2 102 Aug 01/10 55-21-11 1 105 Feb 01/11
55-21-00 2 103 Aug 01/10 55-21-11 1 106 Nov 01/13
55-21-00 2 104 Aug 01/10 55-21-11 1 107 Nov 01/13
55-21-00 2 105 Aug 01/10 55-21-11 1 108 Blank
55-21-00 2 106 Blank 55-21-11 1 109 Nov 01/13
55-21-00 2 107 Aug 01/10 55-21-11 1 110 Blank
55-21-00 2 108 Blank 55-21-11 1 111 Feb 01/11
55-21-11 1 112 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 1 1 Feb 01/14 R 55-21-11 1 113 May 01/15
55-21-11 1 2 Aug 01/10 55-21-11 1 114 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 1 3 Feb 01/03 55-21-11 1 115 Feb 01/11
55-21-11 1 4 Feb 01/03 55-21-11 1 116 Blank
55-21-11 1 5 Feb 01/03 55-21-11 1 117 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 1 6 Feb 01/09 55-21-11 1 118 Blank
55-21-11 1 7 Feb 01/03 R 55-21-11 1 119 May 01/15
55-21-11 1 8 Feb 01/03 55-21-11 1 120 Feb 01/11
55-21-11 1 9 Feb 01/03 55-21-11 1 121 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 1 10 Feb 01/03 55-21-11 1 122 Blank
55-21-11 1 11 Feb 01/03 R 55-21-11 1 123 May 01/15
55-21-11 1 12 Feb 01/03 55-21-11 1 124 Feb 01/11
55-21-11 1 13 Feb 01/03 55-21-11 1 125 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 1 14 Feb 01/03 55-21-11 1 126 Blank
55-21-11 1 15 Feb 01/03 R 55-21-11 1 127 May 01/15
55-21-11 1 16 Feb 01/03 55-21-11 1 128 Blank
55-21-11 1 17 Feb 01/03 55-21-11 1 129 Feb 01/11
55-21-11 1 18 Feb 01/03 55-21-11 1 130 Blank
55-21-11 1 19 Feb 01/03 55-21-11 1 131 Feb 01/11
55-21-11 1 20 Feb 01/03 55-21-11 1 132 Blank
55-21-11 1 21 Feb 01/03 55-21-11 1 133 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 1 22 Feb 01/03 55-21-11 1 134 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 1 23 Feb 01/03 55-21-11 1 135 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 1 24 Feb 01/03 55-21-11 1 136 Blank
55-21-11 1 25 Feb 01/03 R 55-21-11 1 137 May 01/15
55-21-11 1 26 Feb 01/03 55-21-11 1 138 Blank
55-21-11 1 27 Feb 01/03 55-21-11 1 139 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 1 28 Feb 01/03 55-21-11 1 140 Blank
55-21-11 1 29 Feb 01/03 R 55-21-11 1 141 May 01/15
55-21-11 1 30 Feb 01/03 55-21-11 1 142 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 1 31 Feb 01/03 55-21-11 1 143 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 1 32 Feb 01/03 55-21-11 1 144 Blank
55-21-11 1 33 Aug 01/10 R 55-21-11 1 201 May 01/15
55-21-11 1 34 Aug 01/04 55-21-11 1 202 Nov 01/13
R 55-21-11 1 101 May 01/15 55-21-11 1 203 Nov 01/13
R 55-21-11 1 102 May 01/15 55-21-11 1 204 Nov 01/13

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 24
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-21-11 1 205 May 01/11 R 55-21-11 1 251 May 01/15

55-21-11 1 206 May 01/11 55-21-11 1 252 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 1 207 May 01/11 55-21-11 1 253 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 1 208 Blank 55-21-11 1 254 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 1 209 May 01/11 55-21-11 1 255 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 1 210 Blank 55-21-11 1 256 Blank
55-21-11 1 211 May 01/11 55-21-11 1 257 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 1 212 May 01/11 55-21-11 1 258 Blank
55-21-11 1 213 May 01/11 R 55-21-11 1 259 May 01/15
55-21-11 1 214 Blank 55-21-11 1 260 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 1 215 May 01/11 55-21-11 1 261 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 1 216 Blank 55-21-11 1 262 Blank
R 55-21-11 1 217 May 01/15 55-21-11 1 263 May 01/11
55-21-11 1 218 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 1 264 Blank
55-21-11 1 219 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 1 265 Nov 01/11
55-21-11 1 220 Blank 55-21-11 1 266 Blank
55-21-11 1 221 May 01/11 R 55-21-11 1 267 May 01/15
55-21-11 1 222 Blank R 55-21-11 1 268 May 01/15
R 55-21-11 1 223 May 01/15 R 55-21-11 1 269 May 01/15
55-21-11 1 224 May 01/11 55-21-11 1 270 Blank
55-21-11 1 225 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 1 271 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 1 226 Blank 55-21-11 1 272 Blank
55-21-11 1 227 May 01/11 55-21-11 1 273 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 1 228 Blank 55-21-11 1 274 Blank
55-21-11 1 229 May 01/11 R 55-21-11 1 275 May 01/15
55-21-11 1 230 Blank 55-21-11 1 276 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 1 231 May 01/11 55-21-11 1 277 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 1 232 May 01/11 55-21-11 1 278 Blank
R 55-21-11 1 233 May 01/15 55-21-11 1 279 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 1 234 Nov 01/13 55-21-11 1 280 Blank
55-21-11 1 235 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 1 281 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 1 236 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 1 282 Blank
55-21-11 1 237 Nov 01/14 R 55-21-11 1 283 May 01/15
55-21-11 1 238 Blank 55-21-11 1 284 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 1 239 May 01/11 55-21-11 1 285 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 1 240 Blank 55-21-11 1 286 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 1 241 May 01/11 55-21-11 1 287 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 1 242 Blank 55-21-11 1 288 Blank
55-21-11 1 243 Nov 01/13 55-21-11 1 289 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 1 244 May 01/11 55-21-11 1 290 Blank
55-21-11 1 245 May 01/11 55-21-11 1 291 Nov 01/13
R 55-21-11 1 246 May 01/15 55-21-11 1 292 Blank
55-21-11 1 247 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 1 293 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 1 248 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 1 294 Blank
55-21-11 1 249 May 01/11 R 55-21-11 1 295 May 01/15
55-21-11 1 250 Blank 55-21-11 1 296 Nov 01/14

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 25
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-21-11 1 297 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 1 343 Nov 01/14

55-21-11 1 298 Blank 55-21-11 1 344 Blank
55-21-11 1 299 Nov 01/13 55-21-11 1 345 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 1 300 Blank 55-21-11 1 346 Blank
R 55-21-11 1 301 May 01/15 55-21-11 2 1 Feb 01/14
55-21-11 1 302 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 2 Aug 01/10
55-21-11 1 303 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 3 Aug 01/10
55-21-11 1 304 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 4 Aug 01/10
R 55-21-11 1 305 May 01/15 55-21-11 2 5 Aug 01/10
55-21-11 1 306 Blank 55-21-11 2 6 Aug 01/10
R 55-21-11 1 307 May 01/15 55-21-11 2 7 Aug 01/10
55-21-11 1 308 Blank 55-21-11 2 8 Aug 01/10
R 55-21-11 1 309 May 01/15 55-21-11 2 9 Aug 01/10
55-21-11 1 310 Nov 01/13 55-21-11 2 10 Aug 01/10
55-21-11 1 311 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 11 Aug 01/10
55-21-11 1 312 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 12 Aug 01/10
55-21-11 1 313 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 13 Aug 01/10
55-21-11 1 314 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 14 Aug 01/10
55-21-11 1 315 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 15 Aug 01/10
55-21-11 1 316 Blank 55-21-11 2 16 Aug 01/10
55-21-11 1 317 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 101 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 1 318 Blank 55-21-11 2 102 Nov 01/14
R 55-21-11 1 319 May 01/15 55-21-11 2 103 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 1 320 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 104 May 01/11
55-21-11 1 321 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 105 May 01/11
55-21-11 1 322 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 106 May 01/11
55-21-11 1 323 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 107 May 01/11
55-21-11 1 324 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 108 Blank
55-21-11 1 325 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 109 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 1 326 Blank 55-21-11 2 110 Blank
55-21-11 1 327 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 111 May 01/11
55-21-11 1 328 Blank 55-21-11 2 112 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 1 329 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 113 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 1 330 Blank 55-21-11 2 114 Nov 01/13
R 55-21-11 1 331 May 01/15 55-21-11 2 115 May 01/11
55-21-11 1 332 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 116 Blank
55-21-11 1 333 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 117 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 1 334 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 118 Blank
55-21-11 1 335 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 119 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 1 336 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 120 May 01/11
55-21-11 1 337 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 121 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 1 338 Blank 55-21-11 2 122 Blank
R 55-21-11 1 339 May 01/15 55-21-11 2 123 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 1 340 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 124 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 1 341 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 125 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 1 342 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 126 Blank

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 26
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-21-11 2 127 Nov 01/14 R 55-21-11 2 233 May 01/15

55-21-11 2 128 Blank 55-21-11 2 234 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 2 129 May 01/11 55-21-11 2 235 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 2 130 Blank 55-21-11 2 236 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 2 131 May 01/11 55-21-11 2 237 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 2 132 Blank 55-21-11 2 238 Blank
55-21-11 2 133 Nov 01/13 55-21-11 2 239 May 01/11
55-21-11 2 134 Nov 01/13 55-21-11 2 240 Blank
55-21-11 2 135 Nov 01/13 R 55-21-11 2 241 May 01/15
55-21-11 2 136 Blank 55-21-11 2 242 May 01/11
55-21-11 2 137 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 243 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 2 138 Nov 01/13 55-21-11 2 244 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 2 139 Nov 01/13 55-21-11 2 245 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 2 140 Blank 55-21-11 2 246 Blank
R 55-21-11 2 201 May 01/15 55-21-11 2 247 May 01/11
55-21-11 2 202 Nov 01/13 55-21-11 2 248 Blank
55-21-11 2 203 Nov 01/13 R 55-21-11 2 249 May 01/15
R 55-21-11 2 204 May 01/15 55-21-11 2 250 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 2 205 Nov 01/13 55-21-11 2 251 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 2 206 Nov 01/13 55-21-11 2 252 Blank
55-21-11 2 207 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 253 May 01/11
55-21-11 2 208 Blank 55-21-11 2 254 Blank
55-21-11 2 209 May 01/11 55-21-11 2 255 May 01/11
55-21-11 2 210 Blank 55-21-11 2 256 Blank
55-21-11 2 211 May 01/11 R 55-21-11 2 257 May 01/15
55-21-11 2 212 Blank 55-21-11 2 258 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 2 213 May 01/11 55-21-11 2 259 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 2 214 May 01/11 55-21-11 2 260 Blank
R 55-21-11 2 215 May 01/15 55-21-11 2 261 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 2 216 Nov 01/13 55-21-11 2 262 Blank
55-21-11 2 217 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 263 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 2 218 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 264 Blank
55-21-11 2 219 Nov 01/14 R 55-21-11 2 265 May 01/15
55-21-11 2 220 Blank 55-21-11 2 266 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 2 221 May 01/11 55-21-11 2 267 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 2 222 Blank 55-21-11 2 268 Blank
55-21-11 2 223 May 01/11 55-21-11 2 269 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 2 224 Blank 55-21-11 2 270 Blank
55-21-11 2 225 Nov 01/13 55-21-11 2 271 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 2 226 May 01/11 55-21-11 2 272 Blank
55-21-11 2 227 May 01/11 R 55-21-11 2 273 May 01/15
R 55-21-11 2 228 May 01/15 55-21-11 2 274 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 2 229 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 275 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 2 230 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 2 276 Blank
55-21-11 2 231 Nov 01/13 55-21-11 2 277 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 2 232 Blank 55-21-11 2 278 Blank

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 27
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-21-11 2 279 Nov 01/13 55-21-11 2 325 Nov 01/14

55-21-11 2 280 Blank 55-21-11 2 326 Blank
55-21-11 2 281 Nov 01/13 R 55-21-11 3 1 May 01/15
55-21-11 2 282 Blank 55-21-11 3 2 Aug 01/10
55-21-11 2 283 Nov 01/13 R 55-21-11 3 3 May 01/15
55-21-11 2 284 Blank R 55-21-11 3 4 May 01/15
R 55-21-11 2 285 May 01/15 R 55-21-11 3 5 May 01/15
55-21-11 2 286 Nov 01/14 R 55-21-11 3 6 May 01/15
55-21-11 2 287 Nov 01/14 R 55-21-11 3 7 May 01/15
55-21-11 2 288 Blank R 55-21-11 3 8 May 01/15
55-21-11 2 289 Nov 01/13 R 55-21-11 3 9 May 01/15
55-21-11 2 290 Blank R 55-21-11 3 10 May 01/15
R 55-21-11 2 291 May 01/15 R 55-21-11 3 11 May 01/15
55-21-11 2 292 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 3 12 Blank
55-21-11 2 293 Nov 01/14 R 55-21-11 3 13 May 01/15
55-21-11 2 294 Nov 01/14 R 55-21-11 3 14 May 01/15
R 55-21-11 2 295 May 01/15 N 55-21-11 3 15 May 01/15
55-21-11 2 296 Blank 55-21-11 3 16 Blank
R 55-21-11 2 297 May 01/15 55-21-11 3 101 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 2 298 Nov 01/13 55-21-11 3 102 May 01/13
55-21-11 2 299 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 3 103 May 01/13
55-21-11 2 300 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 3 104 May 01/13
55-21-11 2 301 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 3 105 May 01/13
55-21-11 2 302 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 3 106 May 01/13
55-21-11 2 303 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 3 107 Aug 01/14
55-21-11 2 304 Blank 55-21-11 3 108 Blank
55-21-11 2 305 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 3 109 Aug 01/14
55-21-11 2 306 Blank 55-21-11 3 110 Blank
R 55-21-11 2 307 May 01/15 55-21-11 3 111 May 01/13
55-21-11 2 308 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 3 112 Blank
55-21-11 2 309 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 3 113 May 01/13
55-21-11 2 310 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 3 114 Blank
55-21-11 2 311 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 3 115 May 01/13
55-21-11 2 312 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 3 116 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 2 313 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 3 117 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 2 314 Blank 55-21-11 3 118 May 01/13
55-21-11 2 315 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 3 119 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 2 316 Blank 55-21-11 3 120 Blank
55-21-11 2 317 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 3 121 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 2 318 Blank 55-21-11 3 122 May 01/13
R 55-21-11 2 319 May 01/15 55-21-11 3 123 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 2 320 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 3 124 Blank
55-21-11 2 321 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 3 125 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 2 322 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 3 126 May 01/13
55-21-11 2 323 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 3 127 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 2 324 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 3 128 Blank

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 28
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-21-11 3 129 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 3 235 Aug 01/13

55-21-11 3 130 May 01/13 55-21-11 3 236 Blank
55-21-11 3 131 Nov 01/13 55-21-11 3 237 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 3 132 Blank 55-21-11 3 238 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 3 133 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 3 239 Aug 01/13
55-21-11 3 134 May 01/13 55-21-11 3 240 Blank
55-21-11 3 135 May 01/13 55-21-11 3 241 Aug 01/13
55-21-11 3 136 Blank 55-21-11 3 242 Blank
55-21-11 3 137 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 3 243 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 3 138 May 01/13 55-21-11 3 244 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 3 139 Nov 01/13 55-21-11 3 245 Aug 01/13
55-21-11 3 140 Blank R 55-21-11 3 246 May 01/15
55-21-11 3 201 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 3 247 Aug 01/13
55-21-11 3 202 May 01/13 55-21-11 3 248 Blank
55-21-11 3 203 Nov 01/13 55-21-11 3 249 Aug 01/13
55-21-11 3 204 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 3 250 Blank
R 55-21-11 3 205 May 01/15 55-21-11 3 251 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 3 206 May 01/13 55-21-11 3 252 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 3 207 Nov 01/13 55-21-11 3 253 Aug 01/13
55-21-11 3 208 Blank 55-21-11 3 254 Aug 01/13
55-21-11 3 209 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 3 255 Aug 01/13
R 55-21-11 3 210 May 01/15 55-21-11 3 256 Blank
55-21-11 3 211 Aug 01/13 55-21-11 3 257 Aug 01/13
55-21-11 3 212 Aug 01/13 55-21-11 3 258 Blank
55-21-11 3 213 May 01/13 55-21-11 3 259 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 3 214 Blank R 55-21-11 3 260 May 01/15
55-21-11 3 215 May 01/13 55-21-11 3 261 Aug 01/13
55-21-11 3 216 Blank 55-21-11 3 262 Aug 01/13
55-21-11 3 217 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 3 263 Aug 01/13
R 55-21-11 3 218 May 01/15 55-21-11 3 264 Blank
55-21-11 3 219 Nov 01/13 55-21-11 3 265 Aug 01/13
55-21-11 3 220 May 01/13 55-21-11 3 266 Blank
55-21-11 3 221 May 01/13 55-21-11 3 267 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 3 222 Blank R 55-21-11 3 268 May 01/15
55-21-11 3 223 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 3 269 Aug 01/13
R 55-21-11 3 224 May 01/15 55-21-11 3 270 Blank
55-21-11 3 225 Nov 01/13 55-21-11 3 271 Aug 01/13
55-21-11 3 226 May 01/13 55-21-11 3 272 Blank
55-21-11 3 227 May 01/13 55-21-11 3 273 Aug 01/13
55-21-11 3 228 Blank 55-21-11 3 274 Blank
55-21-11 3 229 Nov 01/14 55-21-11 3 275 Nov 01/14
R 55-21-11 3 230 May 01/15 R 55-21-11 3 276 May 01/15
55-21-11 3 231 Aug 01/13 55-21-11 3 277 Aug 01/13
55-21-11 3 232 May 01/13 55-21-11 3 278 Nov 01/13
55-21-11 3 233 Aug 01/13 R 55-21-11 3 279 May 01/15
55-21-11 3 234 Blank 55-21-11 3 280 Blank

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 29
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-21-11 3 281 Nov 01/14 R 55-21-18 1 107 May 01/15

R 55-21-11 3 282 May 01/15 55-21-18 1 108 Feb 01/11
55-21-11 3 283 Aug 01/13 55-21-18 1 109 Aug 01/11
55-21-11 3 284 Aug 01/13 55-21-18 1 110 Blank
55-21-11 3 285 Aug 01/13 R 55-21-18 1 111 May 01/15
55-21-11 3 286 Nov 01/13 55-21-18 1 112 Feb 01/11
55-21-11 3 287 Nov 01/13 55-21-18 1 113 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 3 288 Blank 55-21-18 1 114 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 3 289 Nov 01/13 R 55-21-18 1 201 May 01/15
55-21-11 3 290 Blank 55-21-18 1 202 Nov 01/14
55-21-11 3 291 Nov 01/13 55-21-18 1 203 Feb 01/11
55-21-11 3 292 Blank 55-21-18 1 204 Nov 01/14
55-21-18 1 205 Nov 01/14
55-21-12 1 Feb 01/02 55-21-18 1 206 Nov 01/14
55-21-12 2 Feb 01/02 55-21-18 1 207 Feb 01/11
55-21-12 3 Aug 01/06 55-21-18 1 208 Blank
55-21-12 4 Aug 01/06 R 55-21-18 1 209 May 01/15
55-21-12 5 Feb 01/02 55-21-18 1 210 Nov 01/14
55-21-12 6 Aug 01/06 55-21-18 1 211 Nov 01/14
55-21-12 7 May 01/13 55-21-18 1 212 Nov 01/14
55-21-12 8 Feb 01/02 55-21-18 1 213 Feb 01/11
55-21-12 9 May 01/13 55-21-18 1 214 Blank
55-21-12 10 Feb 01/02 R 55-21-18 2 1 May 01/15
55-21-12 11 May 01/13 55-21-18 2 2 May 01/06
55-21-12 12 Aug 01/06 55-21-18 2 3 May 01/06
55-21-12 13 Aug 01/06 55-21-18 2 4 May 01/06
55-21-12 14 May 01/13 55-21-18 2 5 May 01/06
55-21-12 201 Feb 01/02 55-21-18 2 6 May 01/06
55-21-12 202 Blank 55-21-18 2 7 May 01/06
55-21-18 2 8 May 01/06
55-21-18 1 1 Feb 01/14 55-21-18 2 9 May 01/06
55-21-18 1 2 Feb 01/02 R 55-21-18 2 10 May 01/15
55-21-18 1 3 Feb 01/02 55-21-18 2 101 Nov 01/14
55-21-18 1 4 Feb 01/02 55-21-18 2 102 Nov 01/14
55-21-18 1 5 Feb 01/02 55-21-18 2 103 Feb 01/11
55-21-18 1 6 Feb 01/02 55-21-18 2 104 Aug 01/10
55-21-18 1 7 Feb 01/02 55-21-18 2 105 Feb 01/11
55-21-18 1 8 Feb 01/02 55-21-18 2 106 Feb 01/11
55-21-18 1 9 Feb 01/09 55-21-18 2 107 Nov 01/14
55-21-18 1 10 Blank 55-21-18 2 108 Feb 01/11
R 55-21-18 1 101 May 01/15 55-21-18 2 109 Aug 01/11
55-21-18 1 102 Nov 01/14 55-21-18 2 110 Blank
55-21-18 1 103 Feb 01/11 55-21-18 2 111 Feb 01/11
55-21-18 1 104 Aug 01/10 55-21-18 2 112 Blank
55-21-18 1 105 Feb 01/11 55-21-18 2 201 Nov 01/14
55-21-18 1 106 Aug 01/10 55-21-18 2 202 Nov 01/14

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 30
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-21-18 2 203 Nov 01/14 55-22-11 12 Blank

55-21-18 2 204 Nov 01/13 R 55-22-11 13 May 01/15
55-21-18 2 205 Nov 01/14 55-22-11 14 Blank
55-21-18 2 206 Nov 01/14 N 55-22-11 15 May 01/15
55-21-18 2 207 Nov 01/14 55-22-11 16 Blank
55-21-18 2 208 Blank N 55-22-11 17 May 01/15
55-21-18 2 209 Nov 01/13 55-22-11 18 Blank
55-21-18 2 210 Blank N 55-22-11 19 May 01/15
N 55-22-11 20 May 01/15
R 55-21-19 1 May 01/15 N 55-22-11 21 May 01/15
R 55-21-19 2 May 01/15 55-22-11 22 Blank
R 55-21-19 3 May 01/15 N 55-22-11 23 May 01/15
R 55-21-19 4 May 01/15 55-22-11 24 Blank
R 55-21-19 5 May 01/15 N 55-22-11 25 May 01/15
R 55-21-19 6 May 01/15 55-22-11 26 Blank
R 55-21-19 7 May 01/15 N 55-22-11 27 May 01/15
R 55-21-19 8 May 01/15 55-22-11 28 Blank
R 55-21-19 9 May 01/15 N 55-22-11 29 May 01/15
55-21-19 10 Blank 55-22-11 30 Blank
55-21-19 101 Aug 01/10 N 55-22-11 31 May 01/15
55-21-19 102 Aug 01/10 55-22-11 32 Blank
55-21-19 103 Aug 01/10 N 55-22-11 33 May 01/15
55-21-19 104 Blank 55-22-11 34 Blank
55-21-19 105 Aug 01/10 N 55-22-11 35 May 01/15
55-21-19 106 Blank 55-22-11 36 Blank
55-21-19 201 Feb 01/02 55-22-11 101 Nov 01/14
55-21-19 202 Blank 55-22-11 102 Nov 01/14
55-22-11 103 Nov 01/14
R 55-22-00 1 May 01/15 55-22-11 104 Nov 01/14
R 55-22-00 2 May 01/15 55-22-11 105 Nov 01/14
55-22-00 101 Nov 01/10 55-22-11 106 Nov 01/14
55-22-00 102 Blank 55-22-11 107 Nov 01/14
55-22-00 201 Feb 01/11 55-22-11 108 Blank
55-22-00 202 Feb 01/11 55-22-11 109 Nov 01/14
55-22-11 110 Blank
R 55-22-11 1 May 01/15 55-22-11 201 Feb 01/02
55-22-11 2 Blank 55-22-11 202 Blank
R 55-22-11 3 May 01/15
55-22-11 4 Blank 55-22-12 1 Feb 01/15
R 55-22-11 5 May 01/15 55-22-12 2 Feb 01/15
55-22-11 6 Blank 55-22-12 3 Feb 01/15
R 55-22-11 7 May 01/15 55-22-12 4 Blank
55-22-11 8 Blank 55-22-12 5 Feb 01/15
R 55-22-11 9 May 01/15 55-22-12 6 Blank
55-22-11 10 Blank 55-22-12 7 Feb 01/15
R 55-22-11 11 May 01/15 55-22-12 8 Blank

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 31
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-22-12 9 Feb 01/15 55-24-00 106 Feb 01/15

55-22-12 10 Blank 55-24-00 107 Feb 01/15
55-22-12 11 Feb 01/15 55-24-00 108 Feb 01/15
55-22-12 12 Blank 55-24-00 109 Feb 01/15
55-22-12 13 Feb 01/15 55-24-00 110 Feb 01/15
55-22-12 14 Blank 55-24-00 111 Feb 01/15
55-22-12 101 Nov 01/14 55-24-00 112 Feb 01/15
55-22-12 102 Nov 01/14 55-24-00 113 Feb 01/15
55-22-12 103 Nov 01/14 55-24-00 114 Feb 01/15
55-22-12 104 Nov 01/14 55-24-00 115 Feb 01/15
55-22-12 105 Nov 01/14 55-24-00 116 Feb 01/15
55-22-12 106 Blank 55-24-00 117 Feb 01/15
55-22-12 107 Nov 01/14 55-24-00 118 Feb 01/15
55-22-12 108 Nov 01/14 55-24-00 119 Feb 01/15
55-22-12 109 Nov 01/14 55-24-00 120 Feb 01/15
55-22-12 110 Blank 55-24-00 121 Feb 01/15
55-22-12 111 Nov 01/14 55-24-00 122 Blank
55-22-12 112 Blank 55-24-00 123 Feb 01/15
55-22-12 113 Nov 01/14 55-24-00 124 Feb 01/15
55-22-12 114 Blank
55-22-12 201 Nov 01/14 55-24-11 1 Aug 01/14
55-22-12 202 Nov 01/14 55-24-11 2 Nov 01/03
55-22-12 203 Nov 01/14 55-24-11 3 Aug 01/14
55-22-12 204 Nov 01/14 55-24-11 4 Nov 01/03
55-22-12 205 Nov 01/14 55-24-11 5 Nov 01/03
55-22-12 206 Nov 01/14 55-24-11 6 Nov 01/03
55-22-12 207 Nov 01/14 55-24-11 7 Nov 01/03
55-22-12 208 Blank 55-24-11 8 Nov 01/03
55-22-12 209 Nov 01/14 55-24-11 9 Aug 01/13
55-22-12 210 Blank 55-24-11 10 Aug 01/13
55-22-12 211 Nov 01/14 55-24-11 11 Nov 01/03
55-22-12 212 Nov 01/14 55-24-11 12 Nov 01/03
55-22-12 213 Nov 01/14 55-24-11 13 Nov 01/03
55-22-12 214 Nov 01/14 55-24-11 14 Nov 01/03
55-22-12 215 Nov 01/14 55-24-11 15 Aug 01/14
55-22-12 216 Nov 01/14 55-24-11 16 Blank
55-22-12 217 Nov 01/14 55-24-11 101 Feb 01/15
55-22-12 218 Blank 55-24-11 102 Feb 01/15
55-24-11 103 Feb 01/15
55-24-00 1 Aug 01/14 55-24-11 104 Feb 01/15
55-24-00 2 Feb 01/02 55-24-11 105 Feb 01/15
55-24-00 101 Feb 01/15 55-24-11 106 Feb 01/15
55-24-00 102 Feb 01/15 55-24-11 107 Feb 01/15
55-24-00 103 Feb 01/15 55-24-11 108 Feb 01/15
55-24-00 104 Feb 01/15 55-24-11 109 Feb 01/15
55-24-00 105 Feb 01/15 55-24-11 110 Blank

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 32
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-24-11 111 Feb 01/15 55-24-11 221 Feb 01/11

55-24-11 112 Blank 55-24-11 222 Blank
55-24-11 113 Feb 01/15 55-24-11 223 Feb 01/11
55-24-11 114 Blank 55-24-11 224 Feb 01/09
55-24-11 115 Feb 01/15 55-24-11 225 Feb 01/09
55-24-11 116 Feb 01/15 55-24-11 226 Feb 01/11
55-24-11 117 Feb 01/15 55-24-11 227 Feb 01/11
55-24-11 118 Blank 55-24-11 228 Blank
55-24-11 119 Feb 01/15 55-24-11 229 Feb 01/13
55-24-11 120 Feb 01/15 55-24-11 230 Nov 01/11
55-24-11 121 Feb 01/15 55-24-11 231 Feb 01/11
55-24-11 122 Blank 55-24-11 232 Blank
55-24-11 123 Feb 01/15 55-24-11 233 Feb 01/11
55-24-11 124 Blank 55-24-11 234 Blank
55-24-11 125 Feb 01/15 55-24-11 235 Feb 01/13
55-24-11 126 Blank 55-24-11 236 Nov 01/11
55-24-11 127 Feb 01/15 55-24-11 237 Nov 01/11
55-24-11 128 Blank 55-24-11 238 Nov 01/11
55-24-11 129 Feb 01/15 55-24-11 239 Feb 01/11
55-24-11 130 Feb 01/15 55-24-11 240 Blank
55-24-11 131 Feb 01/15 55-24-11 241 Feb 01/13
55-24-11 132 Blank 55-24-11 242 Feb 01/11
55-24-11 133 Feb 01/15 55-24-11 243 Feb 01/11
55-24-11 134 Blank 55-24-11 244 Feb 01/11
55-24-11 135 Feb 01/15 55-24-11 245 Feb 01/11
55-24-11 136 Blank 55-24-11 246 Blank
55-24-11 201 Feb 01/13 55-24-11 247 Feb 01/11
55-24-11 202 Nov 01/11 55-24-11 248 Blank
55-24-11 203 Feb 01/13 55-24-11 249 Feb 01/13
55-24-11 204 Feb 01/13 55-24-11 250 Nov 01/11
55-24-11 205 Feb 01/13 55-24-11 251 Feb 01/11
55-24-11 206 Feb 01/13 55-24-11 252 Nov 01/11
55-24-11 207 Feb 01/11 55-24-11 253 Nov 01/11
55-24-11 208 Blank 55-24-11 254 Nov 01/11
55-24-11 209 Feb 01/11 55-24-11 255 Nov 01/11
55-24-11 210 Feb 01/11 55-24-11 256 Blank
55-24-11 211 Feb 01/11 55-24-11 257 Nov 01/11
55-24-11 212 Blank 55-24-11 258 Blank
55-24-11 213 Feb 01/11 55-24-11 259 Feb 01/11
55-24-11 214 Feb 01/11 55-24-11 260 Nov 01/11
55-24-11 215 Feb 01/11 55-24-11 261 Nov 01/11
55-24-11 216 Blank 55-24-11 262 Blank
55-24-11 217 Feb 01/11 55-24-11 263 Nov 01/11
55-24-11 218 Feb 01/09 55-24-11 264 Blank
55-24-11 219 Feb 01/11 55-24-11 265 Feb 01/11
55-24-11 220 Blank 55-24-11 266 Nov 01/11

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 33
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-24-11 267 Nov 01/11 55-26-41 103 Feb 01/15

55-24-11 268 Nov 01/11 55-26-41 104 Feb 01/15
55-24-11 269 Nov 01/11 55-26-41 105 Feb 01/15
55-24-11 270 Blank 55-26-41 106 Feb 01/15
55-24-11 271 Feb 01/11 55-26-41 107 Feb 01/15
55-24-11 272 Nov 01/11 55-26-41 108 Blank
55-24-11 273 Feb 01/09 55-26-41 201 Feb 01/15
55-24-11 274 Feb 01/09 55-26-41 202 Feb 01/15
55-24-11 275 Nov 01/11 55-26-41 203 Feb 01/15
55-24-11 276 Blank 55-26-41 204 Feb 01/15
55-24-11 277 Nov 01/11 55-26-41 205 Feb 01/15
55-24-11 278 Blank 55-26-41 206 Feb 01/15
55-24-11 279 Feb 01/11 55-26-41 207 Feb 01/12
55-24-11 280 Nov 01/11 55-26-41 208 Blank
55-24-11 281 Nov 01/11 55-26-41 209 Feb 01/15
55-24-11 282 Nov 01/11 55-26-41 210 Feb 01/15
55-24-11 283 Feb 01/11 55-26-41 211 Feb 01/12
55-24-11 284 Blank 55-26-41 212 Feb 01/12
55-24-11 285 Nov 01/11 55-26-41 213 Feb 01/12
55-24-11 286 Blank 55-26-41 214 Blank
55-24-11 287 Nov 01/11 55-26-41 215 Feb 01/15
55-24-11 288 Blank 55-26-41 216 Feb 01/15
55-26-41 217 Feb 01/12
55-26-00 1 Aug 01/14 55-26-41 218 Feb 01/12
55-26-00 2 Feb 01/02 55-26-41 219 Feb 01/12
R 55-26-00 101 May 01/15 55-26-41 220 Blank
R 55-26-00 102 May 01/15 R 55-26-41 221 May 01/15
R 55-26-00 103 May 01/15 55-26-41 222 Feb 01/15
R 55-26-00 104 May 01/15 55-26-41 223 Feb 01/15
R 55-26-00 105 May 01/15 55-26-41 224 Blank
R 55-26-00 106 May 01/15 R 55-26-41 225 May 01/15
R 55-26-00 107 May 01/15 55-26-41 226 Blank
R 55-26-00 108 May 01/15 R 55-26-41 227 May 01/15
R 55-26-00 109 May 01/15 55-26-41 228 Feb 01/15
N 55-26-00 110 May 01/15 55-26-41 229 Feb 01/15
N 55-26-00 111 May 01/15 55-26-41 230 Blank
N 55-26-00 112 May 01/15 R 55-26-41 231 May 01/15
55-26-41 232 Blank
55-26-41 1 Aug 01/14 55-26-41 233 May 01/12
55-26-41 2 Feb 01/02 55-26-41 234 Blank
55-26-41 3 Feb 01/02 55-26-41 235 May 01/12
55-26-41 4 Aug 01/14 55-26-41 236 Blank
55-26-41 5 Aug 01/14 R 55-26-41 237 May 01/15
55-26-41 6 Blank 55-26-41 238 Feb 01/15
55-26-41 101 Feb 01/15 55-26-41 239 Feb 01/15
55-26-41 102 Feb 01/15 55-26-41 240 Blank

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 34
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

R 55-26-41 241 May 01/15 55-30-00 2 Aug 01/12

55-26-41 242 Blank 55-30-00 3 Feb 01/13
55-30-00 4 Feb 01/13
55-26-47 1 Aug 01/14 55-30-00 5 Aug 01/08
55-26-47 2 Feb 01/02 55-30-00 6 Nov 01/08
55-26-47 3 Aug 01/14 55-30-00 7 Feb 01/09
55-26-47 4 Blank 55-30-00 8 Aug 01/09
55-26-47 101 Feb 01/15 55-30-00 9 Aug 01/09
55-26-47 102 Feb 01/15 55-30-00 10 Feb 01/10
55-26-47 103 Feb 01/15 55-30-00 11 Feb 01/10
55-26-47 104 Feb 01/15 55-30-00 12 Aug 01/10
55-26-47 105 Feb 01/15 55-30-00 13 Aug 01/10
55-26-47 106 Feb 01/15 55-30-00 14 Nov 01/13
55-26-47 201 Nov 01/14 55-30-00 15 Nov 01/13
55-26-47 202 Nov 01/14 55-30-00 16 Nov 01/13
55-26-47 203 Feb 01/15 55-30-00 17 Nov 01/13
55-26-47 204 Nov 01/14 55-30-00 18 Nov 01/13
55-26-47 205 Nov 01/14 55-30-00 19 Nov 01/13
55-26-47 206 Nov 01/14 55-30-00 20 Nov 01/13
55-26-47 207 Nov 01/14 55-30-00 21 Nov 01/13
55-26-47 208 Blank 55-30-00 22 Nov 01/13
R 55-26-47 209 May 01/15 55-30-00 23 Nov 01/13
55-26-47 210 Nov 01/14 55-30-00 24 Nov 01/13
55-26-47 211 Aug 01/13 55-30-00 25 Nov 01/13
55-26-47 212 Blank 55-30-00 26 Nov 01/13
R 55-26-47 213 May 01/15 55-30-00 27 Nov 01/13
55-26-47 214 Blank 55-30-00 28 Nov 01/13
55-26-47 215 Nov 01/14 55-30-00 29 Nov 01/13
55-26-47 216 Aug 01/13 55-30-00 30 Nov 01/13
55-26-47 217 Aug 01/13 55-30-00 31 Nov 01/13
R 55-26-47 218 May 01/15 55-30-00 32 Nov 01/13
R 55-26-47 219 May 01/15 55-30-00 33 Nov 01/13
R 55-26-47 220 May 01/15 55-30-00 34 Nov 01/13
R 55-26-47 221 May 01/15 55-30-00 35 Nov 01/13
55-26-47 222 Blank 55-30-00 36 May 01/14
R 55-26-47 223 May 01/15 55-30-00 37 May 01/14
55-26-47 224 Blank 55-30-00 38 Feb 01/15
N 55-26-47 225 May 01/15 55-30-00 39 Feb 01/15
55-26-47 226 Blank 55-30-00 40 Feb 01/15
55-30-00 41 Feb 01/15
55-26-48 1 Aug 01/14 55-30-00 42 Feb 01/15
55-26-48 2 Feb 01/02 55-30-00 43 Feb 01/15
55-26-48 3 Aug 01/14 55-30-00 44 Feb 01/15
55-26-48 4 Blank 55-30-00 45 Feb 01/15
55-30-00 46 Feb 01/15
55-30-00 1 Feb 01/06 55-30-00 47 Feb 01/15

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 35
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-30-00 48 Feb 01/15 55-30-00 94 Feb 01/15

55-30-00 49 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 95 May 01/15
55-30-00 50 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 96 May 01/15
55-30-00 51 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 97 May 01/15
55-30-00 52 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 98 May 01/15
55-30-00 53 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A1 May 01/15
55-30-00 54 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A2 May 01/15
55-30-00 55 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A3 May 01/15
55-30-00 56 Feb 01/15 N 55-30-00 A4 May 01/15
55-30-00 57 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A5 May 01/15
55-30-00 58 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A6 May 01/15
55-30-00 59 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A7 May 01/15
55-30-00 60 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A8 May 01/15
55-30-00 61 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A9 May 01/15
55-30-00 62 Feb 01/15 55-30-00 A10 Blank
55-30-00 63 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A11 May 01/15
55-30-00 64 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A12 May 01/15
55-30-00 65 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A13 May 01/15
55-30-00 66 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A14 May 01/15
55-30-00 67 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A15 May 01/15
55-30-00 68 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A16 May 01/15
55-30-00 69 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A17 May 01/15
55-30-00 70 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A18 May 01/15
55-30-00 71 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A19 May 01/15
55-30-00 72 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A20 May 01/15
55-30-00 73 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A21 May 01/15
55-30-00 74 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A22 May 01/15
55-30-00 75 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A23 May 01/15
55-30-00 76 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A24 May 01/15
55-30-00 77 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A25 May 01/15
55-30-00 78 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A26 May 01/15
55-30-00 79 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A27 May 01/15
55-30-00 80 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A28 May 01/15
55-30-00 81 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A29 May 01/15
55-30-00 82 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A30 May 01/15
55-30-00 83 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A31 May 01/15
55-30-00 84 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A32 May 01/15
55-30-00 85 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A33 May 01/15
55-30-00 86 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A34 May 01/15
55-30-00 87 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A35 May 01/15
55-30-00 88 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A36 May 01/15
55-30-00 89 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A37 May 01/15
55-30-00 90 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A38 May 01/15
55-30-00 91 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A39 May 01/15
55-30-00 92 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A40 May 01/15
55-30-00 93 Feb 01/15 R 55-30-00 A41 May 01/15

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 36
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

R 55-30-00 A42 May 01/15 55-30-00 136 Blank

R 55-30-00 A43 May 01/15 55-30-00 201 Nov 01/06
R 55-30-00 A44 May 01/15 55-30-00 202 Nov 01/06
R 55-30-00 A45 May 01/15 55-30-00 203 Nov 01/06
R 55-30-00 A46 May 01/15 55-30-00 204 Nov 01/06
N 55-30-00 A47 May 01/15 55-30-00 205 Nov 01/06
N 55-30-00 A48 May 01/15 55-30-00 206 Aug 01/05
N 55-30-00 A49 May 01/15 55-30-00 207 Aug 01/05
N 55-30-00 A50 May 01/15 55-30-00 208 Aug 01/05
N 55-30-00 A51 May 01/15 55-30-00 209 Feb 01/02
N 55-30-00 A52 May 01/15 55-30-00 210 Blank
55-30-00 101 Aug 01/14 55-30-00 211 Feb 01/02
55-30-00 102 Nov 01/06 55-30-00 212 Feb 01/02
55-30-00 103 Feb 01/05 55-30-00 213 Feb 01/02
55-30-00 104 Feb 01/05 55-30-00 214 Nov 01/04
55-30-00 105 Aug 01/14 55-30-00 215 Feb 01/02
55-30-00 106 Feb 01/05 55-30-00 216 Feb 01/02
55-30-00 107 Aug 01/14 55-30-00 217 Feb 01/02
55-30-00 108 Blank 55-30-00 218 Nov 01/04
55-30-00 109 Aug 01/14 55-30-00 219 Feb 01/02
55-30-00 110 Blank 55-30-00 220 Feb 01/02
55-30-00 111 Aug 01/14 55-30-00 221 Aug 01/02
55-30-00 112 Blank 55-30-00 222 Feb 01/02
55-30-00 113 Aug 01/14 55-30-00 223 Feb 01/02
55-30-00 114 Blank 55-30-00 224 Feb 01/02
55-30-00 115 Aug 01/14 55-30-00 225 Feb 01/02
55-30-00 116 Aug 01/14 55-30-00 226 Blank
55-30-00 117 Aug 01/14 55-30-00 227 Feb 01/02
55-30-00 118 Aug 01/14 55-30-00 228 Feb 01/02
55-30-00 119 Aug 01/14 55-30-00 229 Feb 01/02
55-30-00 120 Aug 01/14 55-30-00 230 Nov 01/04
55-30-00 121 Aug 01/14 55-30-00 231 Feb 01/02
55-30-00 122 Aug 01/14 55-30-00 232 Blank
55-30-00 123 Aug 01/14 55-30-00 233 Feb 01/02
55-30-00 124 Aug 01/14 55-30-00 234 Aug 01/02
55-30-00 125 Aug 01/14 55-30-00 235 Feb 01/02
55-30-00 126 Aug 01/14 55-30-00 236 Feb 01/02
55-30-00 127 Aug 01/14 55-30-00 237 Nov 01/04
55-30-00 128 Aug 01/14 55-30-00 238 Blank
55-30-00 129 Aug 01/14 55-30-00 239 Feb 01/02
55-30-00 130 Aug 01/14 55-30-00 240 Blank
55-30-00 131 Aug 01/14
55-30-00 132 Aug 01/14 55-31-00 1 1 Nov 01/07
55-30-00 133 Aug 01/14 55-31-00 1 2 Aug 01/05
55-30-00 134 Blank 55-31-00 1 3 Aug 01/05
55-30-00 135 Aug 01/14 55-31-00 1 4 Blank

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 37
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-31-00 1 101 Nov 01/14 55-31-00 1 205 Feb 01/02

55-31-00 1 102 Nov 01/14 55-31-00 1 206 Feb 01/02
55-31-00 1 103 Nov 01/14 55-31-00 1 207 Feb 01/02
55-31-00 1 104 Blank 55-31-00 1 208 Feb 01/02
55-31-00 1 105 Feb 01/15 55-31-00 1 209 Feb 01/02
55-31-00 1 106 Feb 01/15 55-31-00 1 210 Feb 01/02
55-31-00 1 107 May 01/11 55-31-00 2 1 Nov 01/07
55-31-00 1 108 Nov 01/14 55-31-00 2 2 Nov 01/07
55-31-00 1 109 May 01/11 55-31-00 2 101 Feb 01/02
55-31-00 1 110 Blank 55-31-00 2 102 Blank
55-31-00 1 111 May 01/11 55-31-00 2 201 Feb 01/02
55-31-00 1 112 Blank 55-31-00 2 202 Blank
55-31-00 1 113 May 01/11
55-31-00 1 114 Blank 55-31-11 1 1 May 01/06
55-31-00 1 115 May 01/11 55-31-11 1 2 May 01/06
55-31-00 1 116 Blank 55-31-11 1 3 May 01/06
55-31-00 1 117 May 01/11 55-31-11 1 4 May 01/06
55-31-00 1 118 Blank 55-31-11 1 5 May 01/06
55-31-00 1 119 May 01/11 55-31-11 1 6 May 01/06
55-31-00 1 120 Blank 55-31-11 1 7 May 01/06
55-31-00 1 121 May 01/11 55-31-11 1 8 Blank
55-31-00 1 122 Blank 55-31-11 1 9 May 01/06
55-31-00 1 123 May 01/11 55-31-11 1 10 Blank
55-31-00 1 124 Blank 55-31-11 1 11 May 01/06
55-31-00 1 125 May 01/11 55-31-11 1 12 Blank
55-31-00 1 126 Blank 55-31-11 1 13 May 01/06
55-31-00 1 127 May 01/11 55-31-11 1 14 Blank
55-31-00 1 128 May 01/11 55-31-11 1 15 May 01/06
55-31-00 1 129 May 01/11 55-31-11 1 16 Blank
55-31-00 1 130 May 01/11 55-31-11 1 17 May 01/06
55-31-00 1 131 May 01/11 55-31-11 1 18 Blank
55-31-00 1 132 May 01/11 55-31-11 1 19 May 01/06
55-31-00 1 133 May 01/11 55-31-11 1 20 Blank
55-31-00 1 134 May 01/11 55-31-11 1 21 May 01/06
55-31-00 1 135 May 01/11 55-31-11 1 22 Blank
55-31-00 1 136 May 01/11 55-31-11 1 23 May 01/06
55-31-00 1 137 May 01/11 55-31-11 1 24 Blank
55-31-00 1 138 May 01/11 55-31-11 1 25 May 01/06
55-31-00 1 139 May 01/11 55-31-11 1 26 Blank
55-31-00 1 140 May 01/11 55-31-11 1 27 May 01/06
55-31-00 1 141 May 01/11 55-31-11 1 28 Blank
55-31-00 1 142 Blank 55-31-11 1 29 May 01/06
55-31-00 1 201 May 01/05 55-31-11 1 30 Blank
55-31-00 1 202 Feb 01/02 55-31-11 1 31 May 01/06
55-31-00 1 203 Aug 01/04 55-31-11 1 32 Blank
55-31-00 1 204 Feb 01/02 55-31-11 1 33 May 01/06

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 38
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-31-11 1 34 Blank 55-31-11 1 244 Feb 01/15

55-31-11 1 101 May 01/05 55-31-11 1 245 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 102 Blank 55-31-11 1 246 Blank
55-31-11 1 201 Feb 01/15 55-31-11 1 247 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 202 Feb 01/13 55-31-11 1 248 Blank
55-31-11 1 203 Feb 01/13 55-31-11 1 249 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 204 Blank 55-31-11 1 250 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 205 Feb 01/15 55-31-11 1 251 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 206 May 01/11 55-31-11 1 252 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 207 Feb 01/13 55-31-11 1 253 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 208 Feb 01/13 55-31-11 1 254 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 209 Feb 01/13 55-31-11 1 255 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 210 Feb 01/13 55-31-11 1 256 Blank
55-31-11 1 211 Feb 01/13 55-31-11 1 257 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 212 Blank 55-31-11 1 258 Blank
55-31-11 1 213 Feb 01/13 55-31-11 1 259 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 214 Blank 55-31-11 1 260 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 215 Feb 01/15 55-31-11 1 261 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 216 May 01/11 55-31-11 1 262 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 217 Feb 01/13 55-31-11 1 263 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 218 Feb 01/13 55-31-11 1 264 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 219 Feb 01/13 55-31-11 1 265 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 220 Blank 55-31-11 1 266 Blank
55-31-11 1 221 Feb 01/13 55-31-11 1 267 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 222 Blank 55-31-11 1 268 Blank
55-31-11 1 223 Feb 01/15 55-31-11 1 269 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 224 May 01/11 55-31-11 1 270 Blank
55-31-11 1 225 Feb 01/13 55-31-11 1 271 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 226 Feb 01/13 55-31-11 1 272 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 227 Feb 01/13 55-31-11 1 273 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 228 Feb 01/13 55-31-11 1 274 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 229 Feb 01/13 55-31-11 1 275 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 230 Blank 55-31-11 1 276 Blank
55-31-11 1 231 Feb 01/13 55-31-11 1 277 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 232 Blank 55-31-11 1 278 Blank
55-31-11 1 233 Feb 01/13 55-31-11 1 279 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 234 Feb 01/15 55-31-11 1 280 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 235 Feb 01/13 55-31-11 1 281 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 236 Feb 01/13 55-31-11 1 282 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 237 Feb 01/13 55-31-11 1 283 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 238 Feb 01/13 55-31-11 1 284 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 239 Feb 01/13 55-31-11 1 285 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 240 Blank 55-31-11 1 286 Blank
55-31-11 1 241 Feb 01/13 55-31-11 1 287 Feb 01/15
55-31-11 1 242 Blank 55-31-11 1 288 Blank
55-31-11 1 243 Feb 01/15 55-31-11 1 289 Feb 01/15

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 39
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-31-11 1 290 Blank 55-31-11 2 22 Blank

55-31-11 1 291 Feb 01/15 55-31-11 2 23 May 01/06
55-31-11 1 292 Feb 01/15 55-31-11 2 24 Blank
55-31-11 1 293 Feb 01/15 55-31-11 2 25 May 01/06
55-31-11 1 294 Feb 01/15 55-31-11 2 26 Blank
55-31-11 1 295 Feb 01/15 55-31-11 2 27 May 01/06
55-31-11 1 296 Blank 55-31-11 2 28 Blank
55-31-11 1 297 Feb 01/15 55-31-11 2 29 May 01/06
55-31-11 1 298 Blank 55-31-11 2 30 Blank
55-31-11 1 299 Feb 01/15 55-31-11 2 31 May 01/06
55-31-11 1 300 Blank 55-31-11 2 32 Blank
55-31-11 1 301 Feb 01/15 55-31-11 2 33 May 01/06
55-31-11 1 302 Blank 55-31-11 2 34 Blank
55-31-11 1 303 Feb 01/15 55-31-11 2 35 May 01/06
55-31-11 1 304 Blank 55-31-11 2 36 Feb 01/08
55-31-11 1 305 Feb 01/15 55-31-11 2 37 Feb 01/08
55-31-11 1 306 Feb 01/15 55-31-11 2 38 Blank
55-31-11 1 307 Feb 01/15 55-31-11 2 39 Feb 01/08
55-31-11 1 308 Feb 01/15 55-31-11 2 40 Blank
55-31-11 1 309 Feb 01/15 55-31-11 2 41 Feb 01/08
55-31-11 1 310 Blank 55-31-11 2 42 Blank
55-31-11 1 311 Feb 01/15 55-31-11 2 43 Feb 01/08
55-31-11 1 312 Blank 55-31-11 2 44 Blank
55-31-11 1 313 Feb 01/15 55-31-11 2 45 Feb 01/08
55-31-11 1 314 Blank 55-31-11 2 46 Blank
55-31-11 2 1 Feb 01/09 55-31-11 2 47 Feb 01/08
55-31-11 2 2 May 01/06 55-31-11 2 48 Blank
55-31-11 2 3 Feb 01/02 55-31-11 2 49 Feb 01/08
55-31-11 2 4 May 01/06 55-31-11 2 50 Blank
55-31-11 2 5 May 01/06 55-31-11 2 51 Feb 01/08
55-31-11 2 6 May 01/06 55-31-11 2 52 Blank
55-31-11 2 7 May 01/06 55-31-11 2 53 Feb 01/08
55-31-11 2 8 May 01/06 55-31-11 2 54 Blank
55-31-11 2 9 May 01/06 55-31-11 2 55 Feb 01/08
55-31-11 2 10 May 01/06 55-31-11 2 56 Blank
55-31-11 2 11 May 01/06 55-31-11 2 57 May 01/14
55-31-11 2 12 May 01/06 55-31-11 2 58 Blank
55-31-11 2 13 May 01/06 55-31-11 2 101 Feb 01/02
55-31-11 2 14 Blank 55-31-11 2 102 Blank
55-31-11 2 15 May 01/06 55-31-11 2 201 Feb 01/02
55-31-11 2 16 Blank 55-31-11 2 202 Blank
55-31-11 2 17 May 01/06
55-31-11 2 18 Blank 55-31-12 1 1 Aug 01/05
55-31-11 2 19 May 01/06 55-31-12 1 2 Feb 01/05
55-31-11 2 20 Blank 55-31-12 1 3 Feb 01/05
55-31-11 2 21 May 01/06 55-31-12 1 4 Feb 01/05

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 40
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-31-12 1 5 Feb 01/05 55-31-12 1 207 Nov 01/14

55-31-12 1 6 Feb 01/05 55-31-12 1 208 Blank
55-31-12 1 7 Feb 01/05 55-31-12 1 209 Feb 01/15
55-31-12 1 8 Feb 01/05 55-31-12 1 210 Nov 01/14
55-31-12 1 9 Feb 01/05 55-31-12 1 211 Nov 01/14
55-31-12 1 10 Feb 01/05 55-31-12 1 212 Blank
55-31-12 1 11 Feb 01/05 55-31-12 1 213 Nov 01/14
55-31-12 1 12 Feb 01/05 55-31-12 1 214 Blank
55-31-12 1 13 Feb 01/05 55-31-12 2 1 Nov 01/08
55-31-12 1 14 Feb 01/05 55-31-12 2 2 Nov 01/08
55-31-12 1 15 Jun 01/10 55-31-12 2 3 Feb 01/02
55-31-12 1 16 Jun 01/10 55-31-12 2 4 Feb 01/02
55-31-12 1 17 Jun 01/10 55-31-12 2 5 Feb 01/02
55-31-12 1 18 Jun 01/10 55-31-12 2 6 Feb 01/02
55-31-12 1 19 Jun 01/10 55-31-12 2 7 Feb 01/02
55-31-12 1 20 Jun 01/10 55-31-12 2 8 Nov 01/08
55-31-12 1 21 Jun 01/10 55-31-12 2 9 Nov 01/08
55-31-12 1 22 Jun 01/10 55-31-12 2 10 Feb 01/02
55-31-12 1 23 Jun 01/10 55-31-12 2 11 Feb 01/02
55-31-12 1 24 Jun 01/10 55-31-12 2 12 Blank
55-31-12 1 25 Jun 01/10 55-31-12 2 13 Feb 01/02
55-31-12 1 26 Jun 01/10 55-31-12 2 14 Blank
55-31-12 1 27 Jun 01/10 55-31-12 2 15 Feb 01/02
55-31-12 1 28 Jun 01/10 55-31-12 2 16 Feb 01/02
55-31-12 1 29 Jun 01/10 55-31-12 2 101 Feb 01/02
55-31-12 1 30 Jun 01/10 55-31-12 2 102 Blank
55-31-12 1 31 Jun 01/10 55-31-12 2 201 Feb 01/02
55-31-12 1 32 Jun 01/10 55-31-12 2 202 Blank
55-31-12 1 33 Jun 01/10
55-31-12 1 34 Jun 01/10 55-31-18 1 1 Aug 01/05
55-31-12 1 35 Jun 01/10 55-31-18 1 2 Feb 01/02
55-31-12 1 36 Jun 01/10 55-31-18 1 3 Feb 01/02
55-31-12 1 37 Jun 01/10 55-31-18 1 4 Nov 01/11
55-31-12 1 38 Jun 01/10 55-31-18 1 5 Nov 01/11
55-31-12 1 39 Jun 01/10 55-31-18 1 6 Nov 01/11
55-31-12 1 40 Jun 01/10 55-31-18 1 7 Nov 01/11
55-31-12 1 41 Jun 01/10 55-31-18 1 8 Nov 01/11
55-31-12 1 42 Jun 01/10 55-31-18 1 9 Nov 01/11
55-31-12 1 101 Feb 01/02 55-31-18 1 10 Nov 01/11
55-31-12 1 102 Blank 55-31-18 1 11 Nov 01/11
55-31-12 1 201 Feb 01/15 55-31-18 1 12 Nov 01/11
55-31-12 1 202 Feb 01/13 55-31-18 1 13 Nov 01/11
55-31-12 1 203 Feb 01/15 55-31-18 1 14 Nov 01/11
55-31-12 1 204 Nov 01/14 55-31-18 1 15 Nov 01/11
55-31-12 1 205 Nov 01/14 55-31-18 1 16 Nov 01/11
55-31-12 1 206 Blank 55-31-18 1 17 Nov 01/11

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 41
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-31-18 1 18 Nov 01/11 55-31-18 2 102 Feb 01/15

55-31-18 1 19 Nov 01/11 55-31-18 2 201 Feb 01/15
55-31-18 1 20 Nov 01/11 55-31-18 2 202 Feb 01/15
55-31-18 1 101 Feb 01/02 55-31-18 2 203 Feb 01/15
55-31-18 1 102 Blank 55-31-18 2 204 Feb 01/15
55-31-18 1 201 Feb 01/15 55-31-18 2 205 Feb 01/15
55-31-18 1 202 Feb 01/15 55-31-18 2 206 Feb 01/15
55-31-18 1 203 Feb 01/15 55-31-18 2 207 Feb 01/13
55-31-18 1 204 Blank 55-31-18 2 208 Blank
55-31-18 1 205 Feb 01/15 55-31-18 2 209 Feb 01/15
55-31-18 1 206 Feb 01/15 55-31-18 2 210 Feb 01/13
55-31-18 1 207 Feb 01/15 55-31-18 2 211 Feb 01/13
55-31-18 1 208 Feb 01/15 55-31-18 2 212 Feb 01/13
55-31-18 1 209 May 01/11 55-31-18 2 213 Feb 01/13
55-31-18 1 210 Blank 55-31-18 2 214 Blank
55-31-18 1 211 May 01/11 55-31-18 2 215 Feb 01/15
55-31-18 1 212 Blank 55-31-18 2 216 Feb 01/15
55-31-18 1 213 Feb 01/15
55-31-18 1 214 May 01/11 55-31-19 1 1 Feb 01/06
55-31-18 1 215 Feb 01/15 55-31-19 1 2 Feb 01/06
55-31-18 1 216 Feb 01/15 55-31-19 1 3 Feb 01/06
55-31-18 1 217 May 01/11 55-31-19 1 4 Feb 01/06
55-31-18 1 218 Blank 55-31-19 1 5 Feb 01/06
55-31-18 1 219 May 01/11 55-31-19 1 6 Feb 01/06
55-31-18 1 220 Blank 55-31-19 1 7 Feb 01/06
55-31-18 1 221 Feb 01/15 55-31-19 1 8 Nov 01/08
55-31-18 1 222 May 01/11 55-31-19 1 9 Nov 01/08
55-31-18 1 223 Feb 01/15 55-31-19 1 10 Feb 01/06
55-31-18 1 224 Feb 01/15 55-31-19 1 11 Feb 01/06
55-31-18 1 225 Feb 01/15 55-31-19 1 12 Feb 01/06
55-31-18 1 226 Feb 01/15 55-31-19 1 13 Feb 01/06
55-31-18 1 227 May 01/11 55-31-19 1 14 Feb 01/06
55-31-18 1 228 Blank 55-31-19 1 15 Nov 01/08
55-31-18 1 229 May 01/11 55-31-19 1 16 Feb 01/06
55-31-18 1 230 Blank 55-31-19 1 17 Feb 01/06
55-31-18 2 1 Aug 01/05 55-31-19 1 18 Feb 01/06
55-31-18 2 2 May 01/05 55-31-19 1 19 Nov 01/08
55-31-18 2 3 May 01/05 55-31-19 1 20 Feb 01/06
55-31-18 2 4 Nov 01/07 55-31-19 1 21 Feb 01/06
55-31-18 2 5 Nov 01/07 55-31-19 1 22 Feb 01/06
55-31-18 2 6 Jun 01/10 55-31-19 1 23 Feb 01/06
55-31-18 2 7 Aug 01/05 55-31-19 1 24 Feb 01/06
55-31-18 2 8 Aug 01/05 55-31-19 1 25 Feb 01/06
55-31-18 2 9 Aug 01/05 55-31-19 1 26 Feb 01/06
55-31-18 2 10 Blank 55-31-19 1 27 Feb 01/06
55-31-18 2 101 Feb 01/15 55-31-19 1 28 Nov 01/08

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 42
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-31-19 1 29 Nov 01/08 55-31-19 1 233 May 01/11

55-31-19 1 30 Nov 01/08 55-31-19 1 234 May 01/13
55-31-19 1 31 Feb 01/06 55-31-19 1 235 May 01/13
55-31-19 1 32 Feb 01/06 55-31-19 1 236 Blank
55-31-19 1 33 Feb 01/06 55-31-19 1 237 May 01/11
55-31-19 1 34 Feb 01/06 55-31-19 1 238 Blank
55-31-19 1 35 Feb 01/06 55-31-19 1 239 May 01/11
55-31-19 1 36 Feb 01/06 55-31-19 1 240 May 01/11
55-31-19 1 37 Feb 01/06 55-31-19 1 241 May 01/13
55-31-19 1 38 Feb 01/06 55-31-19 1 242 May 01/13
55-31-19 1 39 Feb 01/15 55-31-19 1 243 May 01/11
55-31-19 1 40 Nov 01/08 55-31-19 1 244 Blank
55-31-19 1 101 Feb 01/02 55-31-19 1 245 May 01/11
55-31-19 1 102 Blank 55-31-19 1 246 Blank
55-31-19 1 201 May 01/13 55-31-19 2 1 Feb 01/09
55-31-19 1 202 May 01/13 55-31-19 2 2 May 01/06
55-31-19 1 203 May 01/13 55-31-19 2 3 Feb 01/06
55-31-19 1 204 Blank 55-31-19 2 4 Feb 01/06
55-31-19 1 205 May 01/11 55-31-19 2 5 Feb 01/06
55-31-19 1 206 May 01/11 55-31-19 2 6 Feb 01/06
55-31-19 1 207 May 01/13 55-31-19 2 7 Feb 01/06
55-31-19 1 208 May 01/13 55-31-19 2 8 Feb 01/14
55-31-19 1 209 May 01/11 55-31-19 2 9 Feb 01/14
55-31-19 1 210 Blank 55-31-19 2 10 Feb 01/06
55-31-19 1 211 May 01/11 55-31-19 2 11 Feb 01/06
55-31-19 1 212 Feb 01/15 55-31-19 2 12 Feb 01/06
55-31-19 1 213 May 01/11 55-31-19 2 13 Feb 01/09
55-31-19 1 214 May 01/13 55-31-19 2 14 Feb 01/06
55-31-19 1 215 May 01/13 55-31-19 2 15 Feb 01/06
55-31-19 1 216 Blank 55-31-19 2 16 Feb 01/06
55-31-19 1 217 May 01/11 55-31-19 2 17 Feb 01/09
55-31-19 1 218 Blank 55-31-19 2 18 Feb 01/06
55-31-19 1 219 May 01/11 55-31-19 2 19 Feb 01/06
55-31-19 1 220 May 01/13 55-31-19 2 20 Feb 01/06
55-31-19 1 221 May 01/13 55-31-19 2 21 Feb 01/06
55-31-19 1 222 May 01/13 55-31-19 2 22 Feb 01/06
55-31-19 1 223 May 01/11 55-31-19 2 23 Feb 01/06
55-31-19 1 224 Blank 55-31-19 2 24 Feb 01/06
55-31-19 1 225 May 01/11 55-31-19 2 25 Feb 01/06
55-31-19 1 226 Blank 55-31-19 2 26 Feb 01/14
55-31-19 1 227 Feb 01/15 55-31-19 2 27 Feb 01/09
55-31-19 1 228 May 01/13 55-31-19 2 28 Blank
55-31-19 1 229 May 01/13 55-31-19 2 101 Feb 01/02
55-31-19 1 230 Blank 55-31-19 2 102 Blank
55-31-19 1 231 May 01/11 55-31-19 2 201 Feb 01/02
55-31-19 1 232 Blank 55-31-19 2 202 Blank

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 43
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-32-11 101 Feb 01/15

55-32-00 1 Nov 01/06 55-32-11 102 Feb 01/15
55-32-00 2 Feb 01/02 55-32-11 103 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 104 Blank
55-32-11 1 Nov 01/07 55-32-11 105 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 2 Nov 01/07 55-32-11 106 Blank
55-32-11 3 May 01/05 55-32-11 107 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 4 Blank 55-32-11 108 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 5 May 01/05 55-32-11 109 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 6 Blank 55-32-11 110 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 7 May 01/05 55-32-11 111 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 8 Blank 55-32-11 112 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 9 May 01/05 55-32-11 113 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 10 Blank 55-32-11 114 Blank
55-32-11 11 May 01/05 55-32-11 201 Feb 01/13
55-32-11 12 Blank 55-32-11 202 Feb 01/13
55-32-11 13 May 01/05 55-32-11 203 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 14 Blank 55-32-11 204 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 15 May 01/05 55-32-11 205 Feb 01/13
55-32-11 16 Blank 55-32-11 206 Feb 01/13
55-32-11 17 May 01/05 55-32-11 207 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 18 Blank 55-32-11 208 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 19 May 01/05 55-32-11 209 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 20 Blank 55-32-11 210 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 21 Aug 01/10 55-32-11 211 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 22 Nov 01/07 55-32-11 212 Feb 01/13
55-32-11 23 May 01/05 55-32-11 213 Feb 01/13
55-32-11 24 Blank 55-32-11 214 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 25 Feb 01/06 55-32-11 215 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 26 Blank 55-32-11 216 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 27 Feb 01/06 55-32-11 217 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 28 Blank 55-32-11 218 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 29 May 01/05 55-32-11 219 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 30 Blank 55-32-11 220 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 31 Feb 01/06 55-32-11 221 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 32 Blank 55-32-11 222 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 33 Feb 01/06 55-32-11 223 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 34 Blank 55-32-11 224 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 35 May 01/05 55-32-11 225 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 36 Blank 55-32-11 226 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 37 Feb 01/06 55-32-11 227 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 38 Blank 55-32-11 228 Blank
55-32-11 39 Feb 01/06 55-32-11 229 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 40 Blank 55-32-11 230 Blank
R 55-32-11 41 May 01/15 55-32-11 231 Feb 01/15
55-32-11 42 Blank 55-32-11 232 Feb 01/15

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 44
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-32-11 233 Feb 01/15 55-33-13 22 Blank

55-32-11 234 Feb 01/15 55-33-13 23 May 01/05
55-32-11 235 Feb 01/15 55-33-13 24 Blank
55-32-11 236 Blank 55-33-13 25 May 01/05
55-32-11 237 Feb 01/15 55-33-13 26 Blank
55-32-11 238 Feb 01/15 55-33-13 27 May 01/05
55-32-11 239 Feb 01/15 55-33-13 28 Blank
55-32-11 240 Feb 01/15 55-33-13 29 May 01/05
55-32-11 241 Feb 01/15 55-33-13 30 Blank
55-32-11 242 Blank 55-33-13 31 May 01/05
55-33-13 32 Blank
55-32-19 1 Nov 01/07 55-33-13 33 May 01/05
55-32-19 2 Feb 01/09 55-33-13 34 Blank
55-32-19 3 Aug 01/08 55-33-13 35 May 01/05
55-32-19 4 Feb 01/06 55-33-13 36 Blank
55-32-19 5 Nov 01/13 55-33-13 37 May 01/05
55-32-19 6 Blank 55-33-13 38 Blank
55-32-19 101 Feb 01/02 55-33-13 39 May 01/05
55-32-19 102 Blank 55-33-13 40 Blank
55-32-19 201 Feb 01/02 55-33-13 101 Feb 01/15
55-32-19 202 Blank 55-33-13 102 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 103 May 01/06
55-33-00 1 Nov 01/07 55-33-13 104 Blank
55-33-00 2 Nov 01/07 55-33-13 105 May 01/06
55-33-13 106 Blank
55-33-13 1 May 01/05 55-33-13 107 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 2 May 01/05 55-33-13 108 May 01/08
55-33-13 3 May 01/05 55-33-13 109 May 01/08
55-33-13 4 May 01/05 55-33-13 110 Blank
55-33-13 5 May 01/05 55-33-13 201 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 6 May 01/05 55-33-13 202 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 7 May 01/05 55-33-13 203 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 8 Blank 55-33-13 204 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 9 May 01/05 55-33-13 205 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 10 Blank 55-33-13 206 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 11 May 01/05 55-33-13 207 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 12 Blank 55-33-13 208 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 13 May 01/05 55-33-13 209 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 14 Blank 55-33-13 210 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 15 May 01/05 55-33-13 211 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 16 Blank 55-33-13 212 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 17 May 01/05 55-33-13 213 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 18 Feb 01/09 55-33-13 214 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 19 Feb 01/09 55-33-13 215 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 20 Feb 01/09 55-33-13 216 Blank
55-33-13 21 May 01/05 55-33-13 217 Feb 01/15

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 45
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-33-13 218 Blank 55-33-13 264 Feb 01/15

55-33-13 219 Feb 01/15 55-33-13 265 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 220 Feb 01/15 55-33-13 266 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 221 Feb 01/15 55-33-13 267 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 222 Feb 01/15 55-33-13 268 Blank
55-33-13 223 Feb 01/15 55-33-13 269 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 224 Blank 55-33-13 270 Blank
55-33-13 225 Feb 01/15 55-33-13 271 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 226 Blank 55-33-13 272 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 227 Feb 01/15 55-33-13 273 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 228 Feb 01/15 55-33-13 274 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 229 Feb 01/15 55-33-13 275 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 230 Feb 01/15 55-33-13 276 Blank
55-33-13 231 Feb 01/15 55-33-13 277 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 232 Blank 55-33-13 278 Blank
55-33-13 233 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 234 Blank 55-34-00 1 Nov 01/06
55-33-13 235 Feb 01/15 55-34-00 2 Feb 01/02
55-33-13 236 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 237 Feb 01/15 55-34-11 1 Aug 01/10
55-33-13 238 Feb 01/15 55-34-11 2 May 01/05
55-33-13 239 Feb 01/15 55-34-11 3 May 01/05
55-33-13 240 Blank 55-34-11 4 Blank
55-33-13 241 Feb 01/15 55-34-11 5 May 01/05
55-33-13 242 Feb 01/15 55-34-11 6 Blank
55-33-13 243 Feb 01/15 55-34-11 7 Nov 01/07
55-33-13 244 Feb 01/15 55-34-11 8 Nov 01/07
55-33-13 245 Feb 01/15 55-34-11 9 Nov 01/07
55-33-13 246 Blank 55-34-11 10 Blank
55-33-13 247 Feb 01/15 55-34-11 11 Nov 01/07
55-33-13 248 Blank 55-34-11 12 Blank
55-33-13 249 Feb 01/15 55-34-11 13 Aug 01/13
55-33-13 250 Feb 01/15 55-34-11 14 Blank
55-33-13 251 Feb 01/15 55-34-11 101 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 252 Feb 01/15 55-34-11 102 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 253 Feb 01/15 55-34-11 103 Aug 01/05
55-33-13 254 Blank 55-34-11 104 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 255 Feb 01/15 55-34-11 105 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 256 Feb 01/15 55-34-11 106 Blank
55-33-13 257 Feb 01/15 55-34-11 107 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 258 Feb 01/15 55-34-11 108 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 259 Feb 01/15 55-34-11 109 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 260 Blank 55-34-11 110 Blank
55-33-13 261 Feb 01/15 55-34-11 201 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 262 Blank 55-34-11 202 Feb 01/15
55-33-13 263 Feb 01/15 55-34-11 203 Feb 01/15

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 46
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-34-11 204 Feb 01/15 55-36-21 5 May 01/03

55-34-11 205 Feb 01/15 55-36-21 6 Feb 01/02
55-34-11 206 Feb 01/15 55-36-21 7 May 01/03
55-34-11 207 Feb 01/15 55-36-21 8 May 01/03
55-34-11 208 Feb 01/15 55-36-21 101 Feb 01/02
55-34-11 209 Feb 01/15 55-36-21 102 Blank
55-34-11 210 Feb 01/15 55-36-21 201 Feb 01/02
55-34-11 211 Feb 01/15 55-36-21 202 Blank
55-34-11 212 Feb 01/15
55-34-11 213 Feb 01/15 55-36-22 1 May 01/05
55-34-11 214 Feb 01/15 55-36-22 2 May 01/05
55-34-11 215 Feb 01/15 55-36-22 3 May 01/05
55-34-11 216 Feb 01/15 55-36-22 4 Blank
55-34-11 217 Feb 01/15 55-36-22 5 May 01/05
55-34-11 218 Blank 55-36-22 6 Blank
55-34-11 219 Feb 01/15 55-36-22 7 May 01/05
55-34-11 220 Blank 55-36-22 8 May 01/05
55-34-11 221 Feb 01/15 55-36-22 9 May 01/05
55-34-11 222 Feb 01/15 55-36-22 10 Feb 01/15
55-34-11 223 Feb 01/15 55-36-22 101 Feb 01/02
55-34-11 224 Feb 01/15 55-36-22 102 Blank
55-34-11 225 Aug 01/05 55-36-22 201 Feb 01/02
55-34-11 226 Blank 55-36-22 202 Blank

55-36-00 1 May 01/03 55-36-42 1 May 01/05

55-36-00 2 May 01/03 55-36-42 2 May 01/05
55-36-42 3 May 01/05
55-36-20 1 May 01/03 55-36-42 4 May 01/05
55-36-20 2 May 01/05 55-36-42 5 May 01/05
55-36-20 3 May 01/05 55-36-42 6 Nov 01/08
55-36-20 4 May 01/05 55-36-42 7 Nov 01/08
55-36-20 5 May 01/05 55-36-42 8 May 01/05
55-36-20 6 Blank 55-36-42 9 May 01/05
55-36-20 7 Feb 01/02 55-36-42 10 May 01/05
55-36-20 8 Feb 01/15 55-36-42 11 Feb 01/14
55-36-20 9 Feb 01/02 55-36-42 12 Nov 01/08
55-36-20 10 Feb 01/15 55-36-42 13 May 01/05
55-36-20 101 Feb 01/02 55-36-42 14 Blank
55-36-20 102 Blank 55-36-42 15 May 01/05
55-36-20 201 Feb 01/02 55-36-42 16 Blank
55-36-20 202 Blank 55-36-42 101 Feb 01/15
55-36-42 102 Feb 01/15
55-36-21 1 May 01/03 55-36-42 103 Feb 01/15
55-36-21 2 May 01/03 55-36-42 104 Aug 01/13
55-36-21 3 Feb 01/02 55-36-42 105 Aug 01/13
55-36-21 4 May 01/03 55-36-42 106 Feb 01/15

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 47
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-36-42 107 Aug 01/13 55-41-00 1 Feb 01/05

55-36-42 108 Aug 01/13 55-41-00 2 Feb 01/15
55-36-42 109 Aug 01/13 55-41-00 101 Feb 01/12
55-36-42 110 Blank 55-41-00 102 Feb 01/12
55-36-42 111 Aug 01/13 55-41-00 103 Feb 01/12
55-36-42 112 Blank 55-41-00 104 Feb 01/12
55-36-42 201 Feb 01/15 55-41-00 105 Feb 01/12
55-36-42 202 Feb 01/15 55-41-00 106 Feb 01/12
55-36-42 203 Feb 01/15 55-41-00 107 Feb 01/12
55-36-42 204 Feb 01/15 55-41-00 108 Feb 01/12
55-36-42 205 Feb 01/15 55-41-00 109 Feb 01/12
55-36-42 206 Blank 55-41-00 110 Feb 01/12
55-36-42 207 Jun 01/10 55-41-00 111 Feb 01/12
55-36-42 208 Blank 55-41-00 112 Feb 01/12
55-36-42 209 Jun 01/10 55-41-00 113 Feb 01/12
55-36-42 210 Feb 01/15 55-41-00 114 Feb 01/12
55-36-42 211 Jun 01/10 55-41-00 115 Feb 01/12
55-36-42 212 Feb 01/15 55-41-00 116 Feb 01/12
55-36-42 213 Feb 01/15 55-41-00 117 Feb 01/12
55-36-42 214 Blank 55-41-00 118 Feb 01/12
55-36-42 215 Jun 01/10 55-41-00 119 Feb 01/12
55-36-42 216 Blank 55-41-00 120 Blank
55-36-42 217 Feb 01/15 55-41-00 121 Feb 01/12
55-36-42 218 Feb 01/12 55-41-00 122 Blank
55-36-42 219 Feb 01/12 55-41-00 123 Feb 01/12
55-36-42 220 Feb 01/12 55-41-00 124 Blank
55-36-42 221 Feb 01/15 55-41-00 201 May 01/13
55-36-42 222 Feb 01/15 55-41-00 202 May 01/13
55-36-42 223 Feb 01/15 55-41-00 203 May 01/13
55-36-42 224 Feb 01/15 55-41-00 204 May 01/13
55-36-42 225 Feb 01/15 55-41-00 205 May 01/13
55-36-42 226 Blank 55-41-00 206 Feb 01/10
55-36-42 227 Feb 01/15 55-41-00 207 May 01/13
55-36-42 228 Feb 01/15 55-41-00 208 May 01/13
55-36-42 229 Feb 01/15 55-41-00 209 May 01/13
55-36-42 230 Feb 01/15 55-41-00 210 May 01/13
55-36-42 231 Feb 01/15 55-41-00 211 Feb 01/02
55-36-42 232 Feb 01/15 55-41-00 212 Blank
55-36-42 233 Feb 01/15 55-41-00 213 Feb 01/10
55-36-42 234 Feb 01/15 55-41-00 214 May 01/13
55-41-00 215 May 01/13
55-40-00 1 Nov 01/14 55-41-00 216 May 01/13
55-40-00 2 Nov 01/14 55-41-00 217 May 01/13
55-40-00 3 Nov 01/08 55-41-00 218 Blank
55-40-00 4 Blank 55-41-00 219 Feb 01/02
55-41-00 220 Blank

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 48
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-41-00 221 May 01/13 55-41-00 267 Feb 01/10

55-41-00 222 May 01/13 55-41-00 268 Blank
55-41-00 223 May 01/13 55-41-00 269 Feb 01/10
55-41-00 224 May 01/13 55-41-00 270 May 01/13
55-41-00 225 May 01/13 55-41-00 271 May 01/13
55-41-00 226 Blank 55-41-00 272 May 01/13
55-41-00 227 Feb 01/10 55-41-00 273 May 01/13
55-41-00 228 Blank 55-41-00 274 Blank
55-41-00 229 Feb 01/10 55-41-00 275 Feb 01/10
55-41-00 230 May 01/13 55-41-00 276 Blank
55-41-00 231 May 01/13 55-41-00 277 Feb 01/10
55-41-00 232 May 01/13 55-41-00 278 May 01/13
55-41-00 233 Feb 01/10 55-41-00 279 May 01/13
55-41-00 234 Blank 55-41-00 280 May 01/13
55-41-00 235 Feb 01/10 55-41-00 281 May 01/13
55-41-00 236 May 01/13 55-41-00 282 Blank
55-41-00 237 May 01/13 55-41-00 283 Feb 01/10
55-41-00 238 May 01/13 55-41-00 284 Blank
55-41-00 239 Feb 01/10 55-41-00 285 May 01/13
55-41-00 240 Blank 55-41-00 286 May 01/13
55-41-00 241 Feb 01/10 55-41-00 287 May 01/13
55-41-00 242 May 01/13 55-41-00 288 May 01/13
55-41-00 243 May 01/13 55-41-00 289 May 01/13
55-41-00 244 Feb 01/10 55-41-00 290 Blank
55-41-00 245 Feb 01/10 55-41-00 291 Feb 01/10
55-41-00 246 Blank 55-41-00 292 Blank
55-41-00 247 Feb 01/10 55-41-00 293 May 01/13
55-41-00 248 May 01/13 55-41-00 294 Blank
55-41-00 249 May 01/13 55-41-00 295 Feb 01/10
55-41-00 250 May 01/13 55-41-00 296 Blank
55-41-00 251 May 01/13 55-41-00 297 May 01/13
55-41-00 252 Blank 55-41-00 298 May 01/13
55-41-00 253 Feb 01/10 55-41-00 299 May 01/13
55-41-00 254 Blank 55-41-00 300 May 01/13
55-41-00 255 Feb 01/10 55-41-00 301 May 01/13
55-41-00 256 May 01/13 55-41-00 302 Feb 01/10
55-41-00 257 May 01/13 55-41-00 303 Feb 01/10
55-41-00 258 May 01/13 55-41-00 304 Blank
55-41-00 259 May 01/13 55-41-00 305 May 01/13
55-41-00 260 Blank 55-41-00 306 May 01/13
55-41-00 261 Feb 01/10 55-41-00 307 May 01/13
55-41-00 262 Blank 55-41-00 308 May 01/13
55-41-00 263 Feb 01/10 55-41-00 309 May 01/13
55-41-00 264 May 01/13 55-41-00 310 May 01/13
55-41-00 265 May 01/13 55-41-00 311 Feb 01/10
55-41-00 266 May 01/13 55-41-00 312 Blank

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 49
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-41-00 313 Feb 01/10 55-41-12 108 Blank

55-41-00 314 May 01/13 55-41-12 109 May 01/13
55-41-00 315 May 01/13 55-41-12 110 Blank
55-41-00 316 May 01/13 55-41-12 201 Feb 01/12
55-41-00 317 May 01/13 55-41-12 202 Feb 01/12
55-41-00 318 May 01/13 55-41-12 203 Feb 01/15
55-41-00 319 Feb 01/10 55-41-12 204 Feb 01/15
55-41-00 320 Blank 55-41-12 205 Feb 01/15
55-41-00 321 Feb 01/10 55-41-12 206 Blank
55-41-00 322 Feb 01/10
55-41-00 323 Feb 01/10 55-41-13 1 Feb 01/05
55-41-00 324 May 01/13 55-41-13 2 Feb 01/08
55-41-00 325 May 01/13 55-41-13 3 Feb 01/15
55-41-00 326 Feb 01/10 55-41-13 4 Feb 01/15
55-41-00 327 Feb 01/10 55-41-13 5 Feb 01/15
55-41-00 328 Blank 55-41-13 6 Blank
55-41-00 329 Feb 01/10 55-41-13 101 Aug 01/13
55-41-00 330 May 01/13 55-41-13 102 Aug 01/13
55-41-00 331 May 01/13 55-41-13 103 Aug 01/13
55-41-00 332 May 01/13 55-41-13 104 Blank
55-41-00 333 Feb 01/10 55-41-13 105 Aug 01/13
55-41-00 334 Feb 01/10 55-41-13 106 Blank
55-41-00 335 May 01/13 R 55-41-13 107 May 01/15
55-41-00 336 May 01/13 R 55-41-13 108 May 01/15
55-41-00 337 May 01/13 R 55-41-13 109 May 01/15
55-41-00 338 Feb 01/10 R 55-41-13 110 May 01/15
55-41-00 339 May 01/13 R 55-41-13 111 May 01/15
55-41-00 340 May 01/13 55-41-13 112 Feb 01/15
55-41-00 341 May 01/13 55-41-13 113 Nov 01/13
55-41-00 342 May 01/13 55-41-13 114 Aug 01/13
55-41-00 343 May 01/13 55-41-13 115 Aug 01/13
55-41-00 344 Blank 55-41-13 116 May 01/14
55-41-00 345 Feb 01/10 55-41-13 117 Aug 01/13
55-41-00 346 Blank 55-41-13 118 Aug 01/13
55-41-13 119 Aug 01/13
55-41-12 1 Feb 01/02 55-41-13 120 Blank
55-41-12 2 Feb 01/02 55-41-13 201 Aug 01/13
55-41-12 3 Feb 01/15 55-41-13 202 Aug 01/13
55-41-12 4 Blank 55-41-13 203 Aug 01/13
55-41-12 101 Feb 01/12 55-41-13 204 Nov 01/13
55-41-12 102 Feb 01/12 55-41-13 205 Aug 01/13
55-41-12 103 Feb 01/12 55-41-13 206 Aug 01/13
55-41-12 104 Feb 01/15 55-41-13 207 Aug 01/13
55-41-12 105 Feb 01/12 55-41-13 208 Aug 01/13
55-41-12 106 Blank 55-41-13 209 Aug 01/13
55-41-12 107 May 01/13 55-41-13 210 Blank

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 50
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-41-13 211 Feb 01/10 55-41-18 102 Feb 01/12

55-41-13 212 Blank 55-41-18 103 Feb 01/12
55-41-13 213 Feb 01/10 R 55-41-18 104 May 01/15
55-41-13 214 Blank 55-41-18 105 Aug 01/13
55-41-13 215 Aug 01/13 55-41-18 106 Blank
55-41-13 216 Aug 01/13 55-41-18 107 Aug 01/13
55-41-13 217 Nov 01/11 55-41-18 108 Aug 01/13
R 55-41-13 218 May 01/15 55-41-18 201 Aug 01/13
R 55-41-13 219 May 01/15 R 55-41-18 202 May 01/15
R 55-41-13 220 May 01/15 55-41-18 203 Feb 01/15
R 55-41-13 221 May 01/15 55-41-18 204 Blank
R 55-41-13 222 May 01/15 55-41-18 205 Aug 01/13
R 55-41-13 223 May 01/15 55-41-18 206 Blank
55-41-13 224 Blank R 55-41-18 207 May 01/15
R 55-41-13 225 May 01/15 55-41-18 208 Aug 01/13
55-41-13 226 Blank 55-41-18 209 Aug 01/13
R 55-41-13 227 May 01/15 55-41-18 210 Blank
R 55-41-13 228 May 01/15 55-41-18 211 Aug 01/13
R 55-41-13 229 May 01/15 55-41-18 212 Blank
N 55-41-13 230 May 01/15 55-41-18 213 Aug 01/13
R 55-41-13 231 May 01/15 55-41-18 214 Blank
55-41-13 232 Blank R 55-41-18 215 May 01/15
R 55-41-13 233 May 01/15 55-41-18 216 Feb 01/15
55-41-13 234 Blank
R 55-41-13 235 May 01/15 55-41-19 1 Feb 01/02
R 55-41-13 236 May 01/15 55-41-19 2 Feb 01/02
R 55-41-13 237 May 01/15 55-41-19 3 Feb 01/02
N 55-41-13 238 May 01/15 55-41-19 4 Feb 01/02
R 55-41-13 239 May 01/15 55-41-19 5 Feb 01/15
55-41-13 240 Blank 55-41-19 6 Blank
R 55-41-13 241 May 01/15 R 55-41-19 101 May 01/15
R 55-41-13 242 May 01/15 55-41-19 102 Feb 01/15
R 55-41-13 243 May 01/15 55-41-19 103 Feb 01/15
R 55-41-13 244 May 01/15 55-41-19 104 Feb 01/15
R 55-41-13 245 May 01/15 55-41-19 105 Feb 01/15
N 55-41-13 246 May 01/15 55-41-19 106 Feb 01/15
R 55-41-13 247 May 01/15 55-41-19 107 Feb 01/15
55-41-13 248 Blank 55-41-19 108 Blank
R 55-41-13 249 May 01/15 55-41-19 109 Feb 01/15
N 55-41-13 250 May 01/15 55-41-19 110 Blank
R 55-41-13 251 May 01/15 55-41-19 201 Feb 01/15
55-41-13 252 Blank 55-41-19 202 Feb 01/15
N 55-41-13 253 May 01/15 55-41-19 203 Feb 01/15
55-41-13 254 Blank R 55-41-19 204 May 01/15
55-41-19 205 Feb 01/15
55-41-18 101 Feb 01/12 55-41-19 206 Feb 01/15

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 51
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-41-19 207 Feb 01/15 55-44-00 228 Feb 01/15

55-41-19 208 Blank 55-44-00 229 Feb 01/15
55-41-19 209 Feb 01/15 55-44-00 230 Feb 01/15
55-41-19 210 Blank 55-44-00 231 Feb 01/15
55-41-19 211 Feb 01/15 55-44-00 232 Feb 01/15
55-41-19 212 Blank
55-46-00 1 Nov 01/07
55-44-00 1 May 01/05 55-46-00 2 Aug 01/07
55-44-00 2 Feb 01/02 55-46-00 3 Nov 01/07
55-44-00 3 Nov 01/13 55-46-00 4 Nov 01/07
55-44-00 4 Blank 55-46-00 5 Nov 01/07
R 55-44-00 101 May 01/15 55-46-00 6 Nov 01/07
55-44-00 102 Feb 01/15 55-46-00 7 Nov 01/07
55-44-00 103 Aug 01/04 55-46-00 8 Nov 01/07
55-44-00 104 Aug 01/04 55-46-00 9 Nov 01/07
55-44-00 105 Aug 01/04 55-46-00 10 Blank
55-44-00 106 Blank 55-46-00 11 Nov 01/07
55-44-00 107 May 01/12 55-46-00 12 Blank
55-44-00 108 Blank 55-46-00 13 Nov 01/07
R 55-44-00 201 May 01/15 55-46-00 14 Blank
55-44-00 202 Feb 01/15 55-46-00 101 Feb 01/02
55-44-00 203 Feb 01/02 55-46-00 102 Blank
55-44-00 204 Feb 01/15 55-46-00 201 Feb 01/10
55-44-00 205 Feb 01/15 55-46-00 202 Feb 01/10
55-44-00 206 Feb 01/02 55-46-00 203 Feb 01/10
55-44-00 207 Feb 01/15 55-46-00 204 Feb 01/10
55-44-00 208 Feb 01/15 55-46-00 205 Feb 01/10
55-44-00 209 Feb 01/15 55-46-00 206 Feb 01/10
55-44-00 210 Feb 01/15 55-46-00 207 Feb 01/10
55-44-00 211 Feb 01/02 55-46-00 208 Feb 01/10
55-44-00 212 Feb 01/02 55-46-00 209 Feb 01/10
55-44-00 213 Feb 01/02 55-46-00 210 Feb 01/10
55-44-00 214 Feb 01/15 55-46-00 211 Feb 01/10
55-44-00 215 Feb 01/15 55-46-00 212 Feb 01/10
55-44-00 216 Feb 01/02 55-46-00 213 Feb 01/10
55-44-00 217 Feb 01/15 55-46-00 214 Feb 01/10
55-44-00 218 Feb 01/15 55-46-00 215 Feb 01/10
55-44-00 219 Feb 01/02 55-46-00 216 Feb 01/10
55-44-00 220 Feb 01/15 55-46-00 217 Feb 01/10
55-44-00 221 Feb 01/02 55-46-00 218 Feb 01/10
55-44-00 222 Feb 01/15 55-46-00 219 Feb 01/10
55-44-00 223 Feb 01/15 55-46-00 220 Feb 01/10
55-44-00 224 Feb 01/15 55-46-00 221 Feb 01/10
55-44-00 225 Feb 01/15 55-46-00 222 Feb 01/10
55-44-00 226 Feb 01/15 55-46-00 223 Feb 01/10
55-44-00 227 Feb 01/15 55-46-00 224 Feb 01/10

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 52
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER 55

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

55-46-00 225 Feb 01/10

55-46-00 226 Feb 01/10
55-46-00 227 Feb 01/10
55-46-00 228 Feb 01/10
55-46-00 229 Feb 01/10
55-46-00 230 Feb 01/10
55-46-00 231 Feb 01/10
55-46-00 232 Feb 01/10

55-46-11 1 Aug 01/05

55-46-11 2 Aug 01/05
55-46-11 3 Jun 01/10
55-46-11 4 Jun 01/10
55-46-11 5 Aug 01/05
55-46-11 6 Nov 01/13
55-46-11 101 Feb 01/02
55-46-11 102 Blank
55-46-11 201 Feb 01/02
55-46-11 202 Blank

55-46-49 1 May 01/05

55-46-49 2 May 01/08
55-46-49 3 May 01/05
55-46-49 4 Blank
55-46-49 101 Feb 01/02
55-46-49 102 Blank
55-46-49 201 Feb 01/02
55-46-49 202 Blank

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

55
Page 53
May 01/15
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CHAPTER55
TABLE OF CONTENTS

SUBJECT CH/SE/SU C PAGE EFFECTIVITY

STABILIZERS − GENERAL 55−00−00

Service Bulletin List 1
Principal Structural Elements (PSE) 1
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER 55−10−00
Modification/Service Bulletin List 1

55 CONTENTS MayPage
Printed in Germany
1
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SUBJECT CH/SE/SU C PAGE EFFECTIVITY

TRIMMABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER − 55−11−00

SPAR BOX
Structural Arrangement 1 1 B25487G00290
General 1 101 B25487G00290
Damage Evaluation 1 102 B25487G00290
Type of Damage 1 102 B25487G00290
Distance Between Damaged Areas and 1 102 B25487G00290
Distance Between Repair Areas
Repair Zones 1 102 B25487G00290
Allowable Damage 1 102 B25487G00290
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 1 103 B25487G00290
Repair Limits 1 104 B25487G00290
General 1 201 B25487G00290
Safety Precautions 1 201 B25487G00290
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 1 201 B25487G00290
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs 1 202 B25487G00290
Damage Evaluation 1 205 B25487G00290
Access Into the Spar−Box 1 205 B25487G00290
Types of Repair 1 205 B25487G00290
Special Tools 1 206 B25487G00290
Repair Materials 1 206 B25487G00290
Corrosion Prevention Treatment for 1 207 B25487G00290
Repairs
Special Names for Parts of the 1 207 B25487G00290
Structure
Repair Environment 1 208 B25487G00290
Structural Arrangement 2 1 A25487G00290
General 2 101 A25487G00290
General 2 201 A25487G00290
Structural Arrangement 3 1 A30971G0382
General 3 101 A30971G00382
Damage Evaluation 3 102 A30971G00382
Type of Damage 3 102 A30971G00382
Distance Between Damaged Areas and 3 102 A30971G00382
Distance Between Repair Areas
Damage Zones 3 102 A30971G00382
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 3 103 A30971G00382
Allowable Damage / Rework and Repair 3 104 A30971G00382
Limits
General 3 201 A30971G00382
Safety Precautions 3 201 A30971G00382
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 3 201 A30971G00382
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs 3 202 A30971G00382
Damage Evaluation 3 202 A30971G00382
Access Into the Spar−Box 3 202 A30971G00382
Types of Repair 3 202 A30971G00382
Special Tools 3 203 A30971G00382
Repair Materials 3 203 A30971G00382
Repair Environment 3 203 A30971G00382

55 CONTENTS MayPage
Printed in Germany
2
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SUBJECT CH/SE/SU C PAGE EFFECTIVITY

TRIMMABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER − 55−11−11

SKIN PLATES
Identification Scheme 1 1 B25487G00290
General 1 201 B25487G00290
Safety Precautions 1 201 B25487G00290
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 1 202 B25487G00290
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs 1 202 B25487G00290
Skin Repairs 1 205 B25487G00290
Identification Scheme 2 1 A25487G00290
General 2 201 A25487G00290
Identification Scheme 3 1 A30971G0382
General 3 101 A30971G00382
Damage Evaluation 3 101 A30971G00382
Type of Damage 3 101 A30971G00382
Distance Between Damaged Areas and 3 101 A30971G00382
Distance Between Repair Areas
Repair Zones 3 104 A30971G00382
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 3 109 A30971G00382
Allowable Damage 3 109 A30971G00382
Repair Limits 3 109 A30971G00382
THS Spar Box − Allowable Damage 3 110 A30971G00382
General 3 201 A30971G00382
Safety Precautions 3 201 A30971G00382
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 3 201 A30971G00382
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs 3 202 A30971G00382
Skin Repairs 3 202 A30971G00382

TRIMMABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER − RIBS 55−11−12

Identification Scheme 1
General 201
Safety Precautions 201
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 201
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs 202
Ribs Repairs 203

55 CONTENTS MayPage
Printed in Germany
3
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SUBJECT CH/SE/SU C PAGE EFFECTIVITY

TRIMMABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER − 55−11−18

SPARS
Identification Scheme 1 1 B24422G00237
General 1 201 B24422G00237
Safety Precautions 1 201 B24422G00237
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 1 202 B24422G00237
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs 1 202 B24422G00237
Spars Repairs 1 203 B24422G00237
Identification Scheme 2 1 A24422G00237
General 2 201 A24422G00237
Identification Scheme 3 1 A30971G0382
General 3 101 A30971G00382
Damage Evaluation 3 101 A30971G00382
Type of Damage 3 101 A30971G00382
Distance Between Damaged Areas and 3 101 A30971G00382
Distance Between Repair Areas
Repair Zones 3 104 A30971G00382
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 3 107 A30971G00382
Allowable Damage 3 107 A30971G00382
Repair Limits 3 107 A30971G00382
Front and Rear Spars − Allowable 3 108 A30971G00382
Damage
General 3 201 A30971G00382
Safety Precautions 3 201 A30971G00382
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 3 201 A30971G00382
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs 3 202 A30971G00382
Front Spar Repairs 3 202 A30971G00382

TRIMMABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER − 55−12−00

LEADING EDGE
Structural Arrangement 1
General 101
Damage Evaluation 101
Type of Damage 101
Distance Between Damage Areas and 102
Distance Between Repair Areas
Repair Zones 102
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 103
Allowable Damage 106
Repair Limits 107
General 201
Safety Precautions 201
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 201
Damage Evaluation 202
Types of Repairs 202
Special Tools 202
Repair Materials 203
Repair Environment 209

55 CONTENTS MayPage
Printed in Germany
4
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SUBJECT CH/SE/SU C PAGE EFFECTIVITY

SKIN PLATES 55−12−11

Identification Scheme 1
General 101
Damage Evaluation 101
Type of Damage 101
Distance Between Damage Areas and 102
Distance Between Repair Areas
Repair Zones 104
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 111
Allowable Damage 112
Repair Limits 113
Allowable Damage − Skins Plates, 113
Protective Cover and LEX
General 201
Safety Precautions 201
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 201
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs 202
Skin Repairs 204

RIBS 55−12−12
Identification Scheme 1
General 101
Damage Evaluation 101
Type of Damage 101
Distance Between Damage Areas and 101
Distance Between Repair Areas
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 104
Allowable Damage 104
Repair Limits 104
Allowable Damage − Horizontal 105
Stabilizer Leading Edge Ribs
General 201
Safety Precautions 201
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 201
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs 202
Leading Edge Ribs Repairs 202

55 CONTENTS MayPage
Printed in Germany
5
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SUBJECT CH/SE/SU C PAGE EFFECTIVITY

TRIMMABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER − 55−13−00

TRAILING EDGE
Identification Scheme 1
General 101
Damage Evaluation 101
Type of Damage 101
Distance Between Damage Areas and 101
Distance Between Repair Areas
Repair Zones 101
Allowable Damage 102
Repair Limits 102
General 201
Safety Precaution 201
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 201
Damage Evaluation 201
Types of Repairs 201
Special Tools 202
Repair Materials 202
Repair Environment 203

ACCESS DOORS/PANELS − TRAILING EDGE 55−13−11

Identification Scheme 1
General 101
Damage Evaluation 101
Type of Damage 101
Distance Between Damaged Areas and 101
Between Repair Areas
Repair zones 104
Allowable Damage 104
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 104
Repair Limits 105
Trailing Edge Access Doors and 105
Panels, Zones 01 and 02 − Allowable
Damage
Trailing Edge Access Doors VIII, Zone 121
03 − Allowable Damage
General 201
Safety Precautions 201
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 201
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs. 202
Access Doors and Panels Repairs 204
Access Door VIII Repairs 281

55 CONTENTS MayPage
Printed in Germany
6
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SUBJECT CH/SE/SU C PAGE EFFECTIVITY

RIBS − TRAILING EDGE 55−13−12

Identification Scheme 1
General 101
Damage Evaluation 101
Type of Damage 101
Allowable Damage 101
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 102
Distance Between Damaged Areas and 102
Between Repair Areas
Repair Zones 105
Repair Limits 107
Trailing Edge Ribs − Allowable Damage 107
General 201
Safety Precautions 201
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 201
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs 202
Ribs Repairs 203
TRIMMABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TIPS 55−14−00
Structural Arrangement 1
General 101
Damage Evaluation 101
Types of Damage 101
Repair Zones 101
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 102
Allowable Damage 102
Repair Limits 102

TIPS − TRIMABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER 55−14−11

Identification Scheme 1
General 201
Safety Precautions 201
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 201
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs. 201
THS, Tip Repairs 202
TRIMMABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER − 55−15−00
APRON
Structural Arrangement 1

APRON − TRIMMABLE HORIZONTAL 55−15−11

STABILIZER
Identification Scheme 1

55 CONTENTS MayPage
Printed in Germany
7
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SUBJECT CH/SE/SU C PAGE EFFECTIVITY

TRIMMABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER − 55−16−00

ATTACH FITTINGS
Structural Arrangement 1
General 101
Damage Evaluation 101
Type of Damage 101
Distance Between Damage Areas and 102
Distance Between Repair Areas
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 102
Allowable Damage 103
Repair Limits 104

FITTINGS − SUPPORT 55−16−37

Identification Scheme 1

FITTINGS − ACTUATOR 55−16−38

Identification Scheme 1

ATTACH FITTINGS − HINGE ARM 55−16−41

Identification Scheme 1
HINGE ARMS − ELEVATOR 55−16−42
Identification Scheme 1
General 201
Safety Precautions 201
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 201
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs. 201
Hinge Arms Repairs 202

SUPPORT STRUTS − ELEVATOR 55−16−48

Identification Scheme 1

FITTINGS − HOIST POINT 55−16−49

Identification Scheme 1

ELEVATORS 55−20−00
Modification/Service Bulletin List 1
General 101
Allowable Damage 101
General Weight Evaluation 101
General 201
General Repair Procedure 202
General Repair Weight Evaluation 219

55 CONTENTS MayPage
Printed in Germany
8
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SUBJECT CH/SE/SU C PAGE EFFECTIVITY

ELEVATOR SPAR BOX 55−21−00

Structural Arrangement 1
General 201
Safety Precautions 201
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 201
Damage Evaluation 202
Types of Repairs 202
Special Tools 202
Repair Materials 202
Repair Environment 202
General 1 101 B30565G00357
Damage Evaluation 1 102 B30565G00357
Type of Damage 1 102 B30565G00357
Distance between Damage Areas, 1 102 B30565G00357
Distance between Repair Areas and
Distance between Damaged Area per
Liquid Ingress and an existing Repair
Area
Repair Zones 1 102 B30565G00357
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 1 103 B30565G00357
Allowable Damage 1 111 B30565G00357
Repair Limits 1 112 B30565G00357
General 2 101 A30565G00357
Damage Evaluation 2 101 A30565G00357
Type of Damage 2 102 A30565G00357
Distance Between Damage Areas and 2 102 A30565G00357
Distance Between Repair Areas
Repair Zones 2 102 A30565G00357
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 2 102 A30565G00357
Allowable Damage 2 103 A30565G00357
Repair Limits 2 103 A30565G00357

ELEVATOR − SKIN PLATES 55−21−11

Identification Scheme 1 1 B30565G0357
General 1 101 B30565G00357
Damage Evaluation 1 101 B30565G00357
Type of Damage 1 101 B30565G00357
Distance between Damage Areas, 1 102 B30565G00357
Distance between Repair Areas and
Distance between Damaged Area per
Liquid Ingress and an existing Repair
Area
Repair Zones 1 106 B30565G00357
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 1 112 B30565G00357
Allowable Damage 1 112 B30565G00357
Repair Limits 1 113 B30565G00357
Elevator Spar Box Skins − Allowable 1 113 B30565G00357
Damage
Elevator Trailing Edge Filler − 1 137 B30565G00357
Allowable Damage
Elevator Trailing Edge Metallic 1 141 B30565G00357
Profile − Allowable Damage
General 1 201 B30565G0357

55 CONTENTS MayPage
Printed in Germany
9
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SUBJECT CH/SE/SU C PAGE EFFECTIVITY

Safety Precautions 1 202 B30565G0357
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 1 202 B30565G0357
Repair Scheme of Specific Repairs 1 203 B30565G0357
Elevator Spar Box Skin − Repairs 1 204 B30565G0357
Identification Scheme 2 1 A30565G00357
General 2 101 A30565G00357
Damage Evaluation 2 101 A30565G00357
Type of Damage 2 101 A30565G00357
Distance between Damage Areas, 2 102 A30565G00357
Distance between Repair Areas and
Distance between Damaged Area per
Liquid Ingress and an existing Repair
Area
Repair Zones 2 106 A30565G00357
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 2 112 A30565G00357
Allowable Damage 2 112 A30565G00357
Repair Limits 2 113 A30565G00357
Elevator Spar Box Skins − Allowable 2 113 A30565G00357
Damage
Elevator Trailing Edge Metallic 2 137 A30565G00357
Profile − Allowable Damage
General 2 201 A30565G0357
Safety Precautions 2 202 A30565G0357
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 2 202 A30565G0357
Repair Scheme of Specific Repairs 2 203 A30565G0357
Elevator Spar Box Skin − Repairs 2 204 A30565G0357
Identification Scheme 3 1 35515G0455
General 3 101 A35515G00455
Damage evaluation 3 101 A35515G00455
Type of damage 3 101 A35515G00455
Distance between Damage Areas and 3 102 A35515G00455
Distance between repair Areas
Repair Zones 3 106 A35515G00455
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 3 116 A35515G00455
Allowable Damage 3 116 A35515G00455
Repair Limits 3 116 A35515G00455
Elevator Spar Box Skins − Allowable 3 117 A35515G00455
Damage
Elevator Upper Skin, Bronze Mesh − 3 129 A35515G00455
Allowable Damage
Elevator Trailing Edge Metallic 3 137 A35515G00455
Profile − Allowable Damage
General 3 201 A35515G00455
Safety Precautions 3 202 A35515G00455
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 3 202 A35515G00455
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs 3 203 A35515G00455
Elevator Spar Box Skin − Repairs 3 204 A35515G00455

ELEVATOR SPAR BOX RIBS 55−21−12

Identification Scheme 1
General 201

55 CONTENTS MayPage01/15
Printed in Germany
10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SUBJECT CH/SE/SU C PAGE EFFECTIVITY

ELEVATOR SPAR 55−21−18

Identification Scheme 1 1 B22497G0128
General 1 101 B22497G00128
Damage Evaluation 1 101 B22497G00128
Type of Damage 1 101 B22497G00128
Distance between Damage Areas and 1 102 B22497G00128
Distance between Repair Areas
Repair Zones 1 104 B22497G00128
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 1 106 B22497G00128
Allowable Damage 1 106 B22497G00128
Repair Limits 1 106 B22497G00128
Elevator Spar − Allowable Damage 1 107 B22497G00128
General 1 201 B22497G0128
Safety Precautions 1 202 B22497G0128
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 1 202 B22497G0128
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs. 1 203 B22497G0128
Elevator Spar 1 203 B22497G0128
Identification Scheme 2 1 A22497G0128
General 2 101 A22497G00128
Damage Evaluation 2 101 A22497G00128
Type of Damage 2 101 A22497G00128
Distance between Damage Areas and 2 102 A22497G00128
Distance between Repair Areas
Repair Zones 2 104 A22497G00128
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 2 106 A22497G00128
Allowable Damage 2 106 A22497G00128
Repair Limits 2 106 A22497G00128
Elevator Spar − Allowable Damage 2 107 A22497G00128
General 2 201 A22497G00128
Safety Precautions 2 202 A22497G00128
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 2 202 A22497G00128
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs. 2 203 A22497G00128
Elevator Spar 2 203 A22497G00128
ELEVATOR TRAILING EDGE 55−21−19
Identification Scheme 1
General 101
Repair Zones 101
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 102
Allowable and Repairable Damage 102
Limits for the Elevator Trailing Edge
Metallic Profile.
General 201

55 CONTENTS MayPage01/15
Printed in Germany
11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SUBJECT CH/SE/SU C PAGE EFFECTIVITY

ELEVATOR LEADING EDGE 55−22−00

Structural Arrangement 1
General 101
General 201
Safety Precautions 201
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 201
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs 201
Damage Evaluation 202
Types of Repairs 202
Special Tools 202
Repair Environment 202

ELEVATOR LEADING EDGE ACCESS PANELS 55−22−11

Identification Scheme 1
General 101
Damage Evaluation 101
Type of Damage 101
Distance between Damage Areas and 102
Distance between Repair Areas
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 104
Allowable Damage 104
Repair Limits 104
Elevator Leading Edge Access Panels − 105
Allowable Damage
General 201

ELEVATOR LEADING EDGE RIBS 55−22−12

Identification Scheme 1
General 101
Damage Evaluation 101
Type of Damage 101
Distance between Damage Areas and 102
Distance between Repair Areas.
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 104
Allowable Damage 107
Repair Limits 107
Elevator Leading Edge Ribs − 107
Allowable Damage
General 201
Safety Precautions 201
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 202
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs 202
Elevator Leading Edge Rib Repairs 203

55 CONTENTS MayPage01/15
Printed in Germany
12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SUBJECT CH/SE/SU C PAGE EFFECTIVITY

ELEVATOR OUTBOARD TIP AND INBOARD END 55−24−00

CAP
Structural Arrangement 1
General 101
Damage Evaluation 101
Type of Damage 101
Distance Between Damage Areas and 101
Distance Between Repair Areas
Repair Zones 104
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 108
Allowable Damage 111
Repair Limits 112
Elevator Outboard Tip and Inboard End 112
Cap− Allowable Damage

ELEVATOR OUTBOARD TIP AND INBOARD END 55−24−11

CAP
Identification Scheme 1
General 101
Damage Evaluation 101
Type of Damage 101
Distance Between Damage Areas and 102
Distance Between Repair Areas
Repair Zones 104
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 107
Allowable Damage 107
Repair Limits 108
Elevator Outboard Tip − Allowable 108
Damage
Elevator Inboard End Cap − Allowable 120
Damage
General 201
Safety Precautions 201
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 202
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs. 202
Elevator Tip Repairs 204

ELEVATOR ATTACH FITTINGS 55−26−00

Structural Arrangement 1
General 101
Damage Evaluation 101
Type of Damage 102
Repair Zones 102
Allowable Damage − General 102
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 103
Repair Limits 105
Allowable Damage − Attach Fittings 106

55 CONTENTS MayPage01/15
Printed in Germany
13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SUBJECT CH/SE/SU C PAGE EFFECTIVITY

ELEVATOR ATTACH FITTINGS − HINGE ARM 55−26−41

Identification Scheme 1
General 101
Damage Evaluation 101
Type of Damage 101
Damage Zones 101
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 104
Allowable Damage 104
Repair Limits 104
Attach Fittings − Allowable Damage 105
General 201
Safety Precautions 201
Repairs Scheme for General Repairs 201
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs 202
Elevator Hinge Arm Attach Fitting 203
Repairs

ELEVATOR ATTACH FITTINGS − ACTUATOR 55−26−47

Identification Scheme 1
General 101
Damage Evaluation 101
Type of Damage 101
Damage Zones 101
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 103
Allowable Damage 103
Repair Limits 103
Attach Fittings − Allowable Damage 104
General 201
Safety Precautions 201
Repairs Scheme for General Repairs 202
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs 202
Elevator Actuator Attach Fitting 203
Repairs

HOIST POINTS 55−26−48

Identification Scheme 1

55 CONTENTS MayPage01/15
Printed in Germany
14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SUBJECT CH/SE/SU C PAGE EFFECTIVITY

VERTICAL STABILIZER 55−30−00

Modification/Service Bulletin List 1
General 101
Damage Evaluation 101
Delamination Damage 101
The Distance Between Damaged Areas 101
Repair Zones 102
Allowable Damage 102
Repair Limits 102
General 201
Safety Precautions 202
Repair Scheme 202
Damage Evaluation 203
Types of Repairs 203
Special Tools 204
Repair Materials 204
Repair Environment 205
Vertical Stabilizer − Repairs 205

VERTICAL STABILIZER SPAR BOX 55−31−00

Structural Arrangement 1 1 B26500K4924T
General 1 101
Damage Evaluation 1 101
Delamination Damage 1 101
The Distance Between Damaged Areas 1 101
Repair Zones 1 101
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 1 102
Allowable Damage 1 105
Repair Limits 1 105
General 1 201
Safety Precautions 1 201
Repair Scheme 1 201
Damage Evaluation 1 202
Access Into the Spar−Box 1 202
Types of Repairs 1 202
Special Tools 1 203
Repair Material 1 203
Special Names for Parts of the 1 204
Structure
Repair Environment 1 204
Structural Arrangement 2 1 A26500K4924T
General 2 101
General 2 201

55 CONTENTS MayPage01/15
Printed in Germany
15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SUBJECT CH/SE/SU C PAGE EFFECTIVITY

SPAR BOX − VERTICAL STABILIZER 55−31−11

Identification Scheme 1 1 B26500K4924T
General 1 101
Allowable Damage 1 101
General 1 201
Safety Precautions 1 201
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 1 202
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs 1 202
Skin − Repairs 1 205
Identification Scheme 2 1 A26500K4924T
General 2 101
General 2 201
RIBS 55−31−12
Identification Scheme 1 1 B26500K4924T
General 1 101
Allowable Damage 1 101
General 1 201
Safety Precautions 1 201
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 1 202
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs 1 202
Ribs − Repairs 1 203
Identification Scheme 2 1 A26500K4924T
General 2 101
General 2 201

SPARS 55−31−18
Identification Scheme 1 1 B26500K4924T
General 1 101
Allowable Damage 1 101
General 1 201
Safety Precautions 1 201
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 1 202
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs 1 202
Spars − Repairs 1 205
Identification Scheme 2 1 A26500K4924T
General 2 101
Damage Evaluation 2 101
Allowable Damage 2 101
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 2 101
Spars − Allowable Damage 2 102
General 2 201
Safety Precautions 2 201
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 2 202
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs 2 202
Spars − Repairs 2 203

55 CONTENTS MayPage01/15
Printed in Germany
16
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SUBJECT CH/SE/SU C PAGE EFFECTIVITY

MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURE 55−31−19

Identification Scheme 1 1 B26500K4924T
General 1 101
Allowable Damage 1 101
General 1 201
Safety Precautions 1 201
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 1 202
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs 1 202
Miscellaneous Structure − Repairs 1 205
Identification Scheme 2 1 A26500K4924T
General 2 101
General 2 201
VERTICAL STABILIZER LEADING EDGE 55−32−00
Structural Arrangement 1

LEADING EDGE − VERTICAL STABILIZER 55−32−11

Identification Scheme 1
General 101
Damage Evaluation 102
Delamination Damage 102
The Distance Between Damaged Areas 102
Repair Zones 102
Allowable Damage 102
Negligible Damage 102
Repair Limits 102
General 201
Safety Precautions 201
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 202
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs 202
Leading Edge − Vertical Stabilizer − 203
Repairs

MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURE 55−32−19

Identification Scheme 1
General 101
General 201

VERTICAL STABILIZER TRAILING EDGE 55−33−00

Structural Arrangement 1

55 CONTENTS MayPage01/15
Printed in Germany
17
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SUBJECT CH/SE/SU C PAGE EFFECTIVITY

TRAILING EDGE − VERTICAL STABILIZER 55−33−13

Identification Scheme 1
General 101
Damage Evaluation 101
Delamination Damage 101
The Distance Between Damaged Areas 102
Repair Zones 102
Allowable Damage 102
Repair Limits 102
General 201
Safety Precautions 201
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 201
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs 202
Trailing Edge Access Panels − 203
Vertical Stabilizer − Repairs

VERTICAL STABILIZER TIP 55−34−00

Structural Arrangement 1
TIP − VERTICAL STABILIZER 55−34−11
Identification Scheme 1
General 101
Damage Evaluation 101
Delamination Damage 101
The Distance Between Damaged Areas 102
Repair Zones 102
Allowable Damage 102
Repair Limits 102
General 201
Safety Precautions 201
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 202
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs 202
Fin Tip − Vertical Stabilizer − 203
Repairs

VERTICAL STABILIZER ATTACH FITTINGS 55−36−00

Identification Scheme 1

ATTACH FITTINGS − ACTUATOR 55−36−20

Identification Scheme 1
General 101
General 201
ATTACH FITTINGS − CONTROL UNIT 55−36−21
Identification Scheme 1
General 101
General 201

ATTACH FITTINGS − MISCELLANEOUS 55−36−22

Identification Scheme 1
General 101
General 201

55 CONTENTS MayPage01/15
Printed in Germany
18
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SUBJECT CH/SE/SU C PAGE EFFECTIVITY

HINGE ARMS − VERTICAL STABILIZER 55−36−42

Identification Scheme 1
General 101
Damage Evaluation 101
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 101
Type of Damage 102
Allowable Damage 102
Hinge Arms − Vertical Stabilizer 102
General 201
Safety Precautions 201
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 201
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs 202
Hinge Arms − Vertical Stabilizer − 202
Repairs

RUDDER 55−40−00
Modification/Service Bulletin List 1

RUDDER MAIN STRUCTURE 55−41−00

Structural Arrangement 1
General 101
Damage Evaluation 101
Delamination Damage 101
The Distance Between Damaged Areas 101
Repair Zones 102
Allowable Damage 102
Repair Limits 102
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 103
Rudder Main Structure − Allowable 107
Damage
General 201
Safety Precautions 201
Repair Scheme 201
Damage Evaluation 203
Types of Repairs 203
Special Tools 204
Repair Materials 205
Repair Environment 205
Rudder − Main Structure − Repairs 205

55 CONTENTS MayPage01/15
Printed in Germany
19
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SUBJECT CH/SE/SU C PAGE EFFECTIVITY

RIBS 55−41−12
Rib Identification Scheme 1
General 101
Damage Evaluation 101
The Distance Between Damaged Areas 101
Repair Zones 101
Allowable Damage 101
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 102
Rudder Ribs 104
General 201
Safety Precautions 201
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 202
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs 202
Rudder Ribs − Repairs 203

RUDDER ASSY 55−41−13

Identification Scheme 1
General 101
Damage Evaluation 101
Distance between damaged/repaired 101
areas
Repair Zones 101
Type of Damage 102
Allowable Damage 102
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 102
Rudder Assy − Allowable Damage 107
General 201
Safety Precautions 201
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 202
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs 204
Rudder Assy − Repairs 205

RUDDER SPAR 55−41−18

General 101
Damage Evaluation 101
The Distance Between Damaged Areas 101
Repair Zones 101
Allowable Damage 101
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria 102
Rudder Spar 104
General 201
Safety Precautions 201
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 202
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs 202
Rudder Spar − Repairs 202

55 CONTENTS MayPage01/15
Printed in Germany
20
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SUBJECT CH/SE/SU C PAGE EFFECTIVITY

MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURE 55−41−19

Miscellaneous Structure − 1
Identification Scheme
General 101
Allowable Damage 101
General 201
Safety Precautions 202
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 203
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs 203
Miscellaneous Structure − Repairs 204

RUDDER TIP 55−44−00

Identification Scheme 1
General 101
Damage Evaluation 102
Type of Damage 102
Distance between damaged/repaired 102
areas
Component Zoning 102
Allowable and Repairable Damage Limits 102
General 201
Safety Precautions 201
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 202
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs 202
Rudder Tip − Repairs 202

RUDDER ATTACH FITTINGS 55−46−00

Identification Scheme 1
General 101
General 201
Safety Precautions 202
Repair Scheme for General Repairs 202
Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs 202
Rudder Attach Fittings − Repairs 203

HINGE BEARING NO. 6 − RUDDER 55−46−11

Hinge Bearing − Identification Scheme 1
General 101
General 201

FITTINGS − HOIST POINT 55−46−49

Identification Scheme 1
General 101
General 201

55 CONTENTS MayPage01/15
Printed in Germany
21
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

STABILIZERS
−
GENERAL

1. Service
Bulletin
List

This
List
shows
which
Service
Bulletin
(SB),
including
Revision
No.,
has
been
incorporated
into
which
manual
Revision.
It
furthermore
contains
the
title
of
the
SB.

SERVICE SERVICE INCLUDED

BULLETIN BULLETIN IN
MANUAL DESCRIPTION
NUMBER REVISION REVISION

34−1044 01 Nov
01/92 Vertical
Stabilizer
−
Navigation
−
VOR
Sys

tem
−
Install
modified
VOR
Antenna
Fairing.
55−1003 00 Aug
01/94 THS
−
Installation
of
TIP
weights.

55−1010 00 Nov
01/91 Vertical
Stabilizer
−
Modify
No.
7
Hinge

Arm
Fitting
to
improve
Lightning
Strike
Protection.
55−1011 00 May
01/94 THS
−
Add
an
internal
Rib
of
the
assembly.
55−1012 01 Aug
01/94 THS
−
Leading
Edge
Metal
Protection.
55−1016 00 Aug
01/99 Vertical
Stabilizer
−
Leading
Edge
Steel
Cover
for
Erosion
Protection.
55−1026 01 Nov
01/99 Vertical
Stabilizer
−
Reinforcement
of
the
Skin
Attachments
at
the
Front
Spar
(STGR6),
Rear
Spar
and
Rib
11
(LH,
RH)
55−1028 01 Nov
01/00 Vertical
Stabilizer
−
Add
Rivets
on
Fin
Box
at
Side
Shell
bonding
parts
LH
and
RH.
55−1029 05 Feb
01/06 Vertical
Stabilizer
−
Replace
stainless
steel
erosion
protection
covers
with
modi
fied
covers.
2. Principal
Structural
Elements
(PSE)

A. Refer
to
Chapter
51−11−12
for
the
List
of
PSE
items.

Page
1




55−00−00 Feb
01/06
Printed in Germany
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stabilizers - General
Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55-00-00 FebPage 2
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

HORIZONTAL STABILIZER

1. Modification/Service Bulletin List

This list shows the modifications and the Manufacturer Serial Number (MSN)
of the aircraft (A/C) model which have these modifications. Modifications
with the same number, but with a different suffix letter show a different
effectivity, refer to column "S".

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

20004G0001 A320 0008−9999

20004G0001 A A320 0010−0027
20004G0001 B A320 0028−9999
20302G0012 A320 0004−0027
20302G0012 A A320 0012−9999
20302G0012 B A320 0012−0741
20302G0012 C A320 0012−0054,0056−0059
20302G0012 D A320 0012−1902
20302G0022 A320 0012−9999
20365K0367 A320 0028−0050
20365K0367 A A320 0028−9999
20365K1347 A320 0028−9999
20365K1347 A A320 0028−9999
20374G0017 A320 0028−9999
20374G0017 A A320 0028−0075
20374G0020 A320 0028−9999
20374G0020 A A320 0028−0075
20374G0020 B A320 0028−0741
20374G0020 C A320 0028−1902
20374G0020 D A320 0028−3747
20419P0760 A320 0002−0002,0003−0003,0021−9999
20419P0556 A320 0002−0002,0003−0003,0021−0021,0022−99
99
20451K0340 A320 0014−0027
20451K0340 A A320 0014−0050
20451K0340 B A320 0014−9999
20587G0031 A320 0044−9999
20737G0041 A320 0059−9999
20952G0054 A320 0027−9999
21002G0046 A320 0002−0004,0015−0016,0020−0021,0033−00
33,0037−9999
21018G0051 A320 0100−9999
21061G0056 A320 0060−9999
21061G0056 A A320 0055−0055,0060−9999

Printed in Germany
55−10−00 FebPage 1
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

21158G0019 A320 0076−9999

21162G0057 A320 0002−0004,0015−9999 55−1003
21295G0066 A320 0076−9999
21295G0066 A A320 0076−0741
21295G0066 B A320 0076−3747
21471G0070 A320 0061−9999
21481G0072 A320 0047−9999
21514G0068 A320 0100−9999
21514G0068 A A320 0100−0100,0122−0122,0124−0534,0539−06
22,0632−3748
21514G0068 B A320 0100−0100,0122−0122,0124−0534,0539−06
22,0632−0741
21515G0069 A320 0100−9999
21647G1595 A320 0148−9999
22079G0113 A320 0215−0215,0220−9999
22079G0125 A320 0215−0215,0220−9999
22246G0122 A320 0128−9999
22383G0132 A320 0263−0263,0266−0266,0268−9999
22383G0141 A320 0268−9999
22621G0140 A320 0328−9999
22767G0145 A320 0340−9999
22849K2716 A320 0413−9999
22959G0154 A320 0365−9999 55−1011
22988G0156 A320 0423−9999
23001G0153 A320 0387−9999 55−1012
23002G0148 A320 0523−9999
23002G0148 A A320 0536−0537,0624−0630
23101G0157 A320 0367−9999
23190G0161 A320 0428−9999
23493G0171 A320 0542−0543,0580−0622,0632−9999
23640G0160 A320 0542−0543,0554−0622,0632−9999
23944G0196 A320 0440−9999
24422G0237 A320 0542−9999
24596G0242 A320 0523−0534,0539−0540,0542−0543,0545−06
22,0632−9999
24842G0243 A320 0539−0539,0542−0622,0630−0630,0632−99
99
24970G0244 A320 0542−0543,0558−0622,0632−9999
24972G0255 A320 0542−0543,0601−0622,0632−9999
24973G0257 A320 0751−9999
24973G0429 A320 2606−9999
24973G0537 A320 3374−9999

Printed in Germany
55−10−00 FebPage 2
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

25156G0270 A320 0542−0543,0603−0622,0632−9999

25157G0217 A320 0724−9999
25227G0273 A320 0542−0543,0603−0622,0632−9999
25487G0290 A320 0743−9999
25487G0290 A A320 0743−1902
25487G0290 B A320 0743−3747
25728G0296 A320 0718−9999
25892G0301 A320 0696−9999
26360G0309 A320 0753−0753,0766−9999
28415G0353 A320 1083−9999
29998G0050 A320 0001−9999
29998G0351 A320 1030−9999
29998X9998 A320 0028−9999
29999X9999 A320 0050−9999
30565G0357 A320 2182−9999
30940G0376 A320 1696−9999
30971G0382 A320 1903−9999
30971G0382 A A320 1903−3747
31898G0378 A320 2376−9999
32629G0379 A320 1917−9999
33056G0399 A320 2054−9999
33060G0400 A320 2003−9999
33094G0401 A320 1961−9999
33829G0409 A320 2168−9999
36378G0468 A320 2676−2676,2683−2683,2708−2708,2721−27
21,2731−2731,2755−2758,2761−2764,2776
−2778,2783−2783,2787−2787,2791−2791,2
794−2867,2874−9999
36553G0452 A320 2766−2768,2772−9999
36553G0453 A320 2766−2768,2772−9999
39097G0544 A320 3748−9999
150014G0640 A320 3748−9999
151344G0570 A320 4429−4431,4436−4436,4439−4446,4449−44
49,4496−4497,4499−9999
151826G0671 A320 4539−9999
152593G0738 A320 4748−4748,4754−4754,4760−4760,4769−99
99
153776G0749 A320 5151−9999
161092G0860 A320 5977−9999
161079G0861 A320 5942−9999

Printed in Germany
55−10−00 FebPage 3
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer − Structural Arrangement

Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−10−00 FebPage 4
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer − Stations/Ribs Diagram

Figure 2

Printed in Germany
55−10−00 Pages 5/6
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TRIMMABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER − SPAR BOX

1. Structural Arrangement

NOTE: CONFIG−1 is applicable before Modification 25487G00290.

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Structural Arrangement Figure 1

1 Skin Plates Chapter 55−11−11
2 Ribs Chapter 55−11−12
3 Spars Chapter 55−11−18
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−10−00, Page Block 001, where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Page 1
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/09
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structural Arrangement
Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55-11-00
CONFIG-1
Page 2
Feb 01/03
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TRIMMABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER − SPAR BOX

1. Structural Arrangement

NOTE: CONFIG−2 is applicable after Modification 25487G00290.

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Structural Arrangement Figure 1

1 Skin Plates Chapter 55−11−11
2 Ribs Chapter 55−11−12
3 Spars Chapter 55−11−18
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−10−00, Page Block 001, where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Page 1
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/09
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structural Arrangement
Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55-11-00
CONFIG-2
Page 2
Feb 01/03
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TRIMMABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER − SPAR BOX

1. Structural Arrangement

NOTE: CONFIG−3 is applicable after Modification 30971G0382.

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Structural Arrangement Figure 1

1 Skin Plates Chapter 55−11−11
2 Ribs Chapter 55−11−12
3 Spars Chapter 55−11−18
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−10−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Page 1
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−3
Aug 01/14
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structural Arrangement
Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55-11-00
CONFIG-3
Page 2
Feb 01/03
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

HORIZONTAL STABILIZER SPAR BOX − ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT REPAIR.

CAUTION: OBEY THE GIVEN INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE WHICH LEADS TO THE
APPLICABLE INSPECTION PROGRAM DEFINED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPEC
TIONS (SRI) OF THE SRM, IF NECESSARY.

CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO

PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: RIB 1 ALLOWABLE DAMAGE INFORMATION IS APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION

160500/J3283.

CAUTION: RIB 1 ALLOWABLE DAMAGE INFORMATION IS APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION

160080/J3705.
1. General

NOTE: CONFIG−1 is applicable before modification 25487G0290 only. For effec

tivity refer to Modification/Service Bulletin List given in Chapter
55−10−00, Page Block 001.

NOTE: For definition of allowable damage refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14
− CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

NOTE: For Damage Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

This topic contains the allowable damage and related data applicable to the
spar box structure. This data is necessary to find the correct repair pro
cedure.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 101
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUCTION
of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data about all
weight variants and their required information for allowable damage
and repair applicability.

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

2. Damage Evaluation

Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3. for data.

3. Type of Damage

The two main types of damage which can occur to the composite structure
are as follows:
A. Delamination with or without visible cracks and holes.

This is when the structure is hit by an object which results in separa

tion between the plies.

B. Superficial Damage

This is when the structure is damaged only on the external surface, with
no damage to the internal structure. Nicks and scratches are example of
superficial damage.

4. Distance Between Damaged Areas and Distance Between Repair Areas

(Refer to Figure 102)

There is a minimum permitted distance between damaged areas and between re
pair areas as follows:

A. Damaged Areas

The minimum acceptable distance between two damaged areas is the greater
value of the following: 50 mm (1.97 in) or 2.5 × Lmax., where Lmax. is
the longest dimension of the damage. If you have less than the permitted
distance between damaged areas, work on them together as one large dam
aged area.

B. Repair Areas

The minimum acceptable distance between two repair areas is 100 mm (3.94
in). If you have less than this distance, refer to the manufacturer be
fore you do the second repair.

5. Repair Zones

Each of the components of the Spar Box structure is divided into repair
zones. These repair zones show the zones of different structural importance
of the component. When you do a damage evaluation (refer to paragraph 2.),
you must refer to the repair zone data. The repair zone data of the Spar
Box structure is in Figures 103 thru 113.

6. Allowable Damage
Allowable damage is damage that does not affect the necessary strength or
function of a component. You do not have to repair this type of damage. If
this damage has rough or sharp edges, smooth these out with the correct

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

abrasive cloth. Replace the surface paint, if necessary. The allowable dam
age data for the Spar Box structure is in Figures 114 thru 128.
7. Allowable Damage Description/Criteria

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ PARAGRAPH/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION INSTRUCTION REF
TYPE FIGURE CATEGORY
ERENCE
Skin Panels including Superficial 121 B, C 55−11−00−1−002−00
stringer Damage
Skin Panels including Delamina 116, 117, B, C 55−11−00−1−002−00
stringer tion 120 and
125
Front Spar Superficial 126 B, C 55−11−00−1−002−00
Damage
Front Spar Delamina 126 B, C 55−11−00−1−002−00
tion
Rear Spar Superficial 126 B, C 55−11−00−1−002−00
Damage
Rear Spar Delamina 126 B, C 55−11−00−1−002−00
tion
Rib 1 thru 11 <2> Superficial 126 B, C 55−11−00−1−002−00
Damage
Rib 1 thru 11 <2> Delamina 126 B, C 55−11−00−1−002−00
tion
Rib 12 thru 14 Superficial − − −
Damage
Rib 12 thru 14 Delamina − − −
tion
Support Fittings Superficial <1> − −
Damage
Support Fittings Delamina <1> − −
tion
Actuator Fittings Superficial <1> − −
Damage
Actuator Fittings Delamina <1> − −
tion

Table 102

Page 103
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ PARAGRAPH/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION INSTRUCTION REF
TYPE FIGURE CATEGORY
ERENCE
Elevator Hinge Fittings Superficial <1> − −
Damage
Elevator Hinge Fittings Delamina <1> − −
tion

Table 102
<1> Refer to Chapter 55−16−00, Page Block 101 to get the relevant allow
able damage information.

<2> Rib 1 Allowable Damage Information Is Applicable Before Modification

160500/J3283.

Rib 1 Allowable Damage Information Is Applicable Before Modification

160080/J3705.
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

8. Repair Limits

The repair limits data gives the time limits in which to make temporary
and permanent repairs. These time limits are given in flights hours (FH).
The repair limits also tell you which type of repair you can do. To find
the repair limits data applicable to a damaged area, you must know the
subsequent data:
− the repair zone applicable to the damaged area.
− the area, length or depth (as applicable) of the damage to the structure.
− the type of damage (for example, nick, scratch, delamination).
The repair limits of the Spar Box structure are in Figures 116, 117, 120,
121, and 124 thru 126.

Page 104
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CFRP Horizontal Stabilizer Spar Box − Layout

Figure 101

Pages 105/106
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ITEM NAME Refer to the following figures for details of

allowable damage and repair limits according to
damage type
SUPERFICIAL DAMAGE DELAMINATION WITH OR
(NICKS, SCRATCHES, WITHOUT VISIBLE CRACKS
ABRASIONS, GOUGES) AND HOLES
1 Skin panels including Figure 121 Figure 116, 117, 120,
stringer 125
2 Front Spar Figure 126 (sheet 2) Figure 126 (sheet 1)
<1> and (sheet 3)
3 Rear Spar Figure 126 (sheet 2) Figure 126 (sheet 1)
<1> and (sheet 3)
4 Rib 1<2> Figure 126 (sheet 2) Figure 126 (sheet 1)<2>
<1> and (sheet 3)<2>
5 Rib 2 Figure 126 (sheet 2) Figure 126 (sheet 1)
<1> and (sheet 3)
6 Rib 3 Figure 126 (sheet 2) Figure 126 (sheet 1)
<1> and (sheet 3)
7 Rib 4 Figure 126 (sheet 2) Figure 126 (sheet 1)
<1> and (sheet 3)
8 Rib 5 Figure 126 (sheet 2) Figure 126 (sheet 1)
<1> and (sheet 3)
9 Rib 6 Figure 126 (sheet 2) Figure 126 (sheet 1)
<1> and (sheet 3)
10 Rib 7 Figure 126 (sheet 2) Figure 126 (sheet 1)
<1> and (sheet 3)
11 Rib 8 Figure 126 (sheet 2) Figure 126 (sheet 1)
<1> and (sheet 3)
12 Rib 9 Figure 126 (sheet 2) Figure 126 (sheet 1)
<1> and (sheet 3)
13 Rib 10 Figure 126 (sheet 2) Figure 126 (sheet 1)
<1> and (sheet 3)
14 Rib 11 Figure 126 (sheet 2) Figure 126 (sheet 1)
<1> and (sheet 3)
15 Rib 12
16 Rib 13
17 Rib 14
18 Support fittings Chapter 55−16−00, Page Chapter 55−16−00, Page
Block 101 Block 101
Key to Figure 101

Page 107
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ITEM NAME Refer to the following figures for details of

allowable damage and repair limits according to
damage type
SUPERFICIAL DAMAGE DELAMINATION WITH OR
(NICKS, SCRATCHES, WITHOUT VISIBLE CRACKS
ABRASIONS, GOUGES) AND HOLES
19 Actuator fittings Chapter 55−16−00, Page Chapter 55−16−00, Page
Block 101 Block 101
20 Elevator hinge fit Chapter 55−16−00, Page Chapter 55−16−00, Page
tings Block 101 Block 101
Key to Figure 101
<1> This allowable damage information is inactive and superseded since Feb
01/10 revision and superseded by data in sheet 3.

<2> Rib 1 Allowable Damage Information Is Applicable Before Modification

160500/J3283.

Rib 1 Allowable Damage Information Is Applicable Before Modification

160080/J3705.

Page 108
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Distance Between Damaged Areas and Between Repair Areas

Figure 102

Pages 109/110
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer − Upper and Lower Skin Panels, Repair Zones
Figure 103 (sheet 1)

Pages 111/112
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer − Upper and Lower Skin Panels, Repair Zones
and Repair Material Thickness
Figure 103 (sheet 2)
Pages 113/114
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Zones for Stringers (Pre−cured Repairs)

Figure 104

Pages 115/116
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Zones for Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair)

Figure 105

Pages 117/118
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Zones for Upper and Lower Skin Panels (External Patch Repairs)
Figure 106

Pages 119/120
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Zones for Skin Panels (Laminate Repairs with Internal Doubler)
Figure 107

Pages 121/122
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Horizontal Stabilizer Spar Box − Upper and Lower Skin Flanges. Repair Zones
Figure 108

Pages 123/124
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Zones for Ribs (Pre−cured Repairs)

Figure 109

Pages 125/126
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Horizontal Stabilizer Spar Box Front Spar − Access Hole, Repair Zones
Figure 110

Page 127
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Horizontal Stabilizer Spar Box Front Spar. Zones for Access to Spar Box
Figure 111

Page 128
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Horizontal Stabilizer Spar Box, Front and Rear Spar. Stiffener Repair Zones
Figure 112 (sheet 1)

Page 129
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Horizontal Stabilizer Spar Box, Front and Rear Spar. Stiffener Repair Zones
Figure 112 (sheet 2)

Page 130
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Horizontal Stabilizer Spar Box, Front and Rear Spar. Web Repair Zones
Figure 113 (sheet 1)

Page 131
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Horizontal Stabilizer Spar Box, Front and Rear Spar. Web Repair Zones
Figure 113 (sheet 2)

Page 132
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Time Limits Flow Chart. Horizontal Stabilizer
Spar Box Skin, All Zones
Figure 114
Pages 133/134
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Horizontal Stabilizer Spar Box Skin. Allowable Damage Zones (General)

Figure 115

Page 135
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

DAMAGE LOCATED BETWEEN ZONES EQUIVALENT ALLOWABLE DAMAGE ZONE

A and E A
A and B
A, B and E B
B and E
A and C
A, C and E
B and D
B, D and E
C
C and D
C, D and E
C and E
D and E
EQUIVALENT DAMAGE ZONE TO DETERMINE THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE AND REPAIR TIME
LIMITS WHEN THE ACTUAL DAMAGE IS LOCATED BETWEEN TWO OR MORE GENERAL DAMAGE
ZONES
Equivalent Allowable Damage Zones (General). Horizontal Stabilizer Spar Box
Skin.
Table 103

Page 136
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage Limits, Zones A, B and C (General). Horizontal Stabilizer

Spar Box Skin.
Figure 116
Page 137
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits, Zone D (General). Horizontal Stabilizer

Spar Box Skin.
Figure 117
Page 138
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Damage Zones. Zone E (General), Sub Zones a and b. Horizontal Stabi
lizer Spar Box Skin.
Figure 118
Page 139
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

DELAMINATION DAMAGE WITH OR WITHOUT VISIBLE CRACKS AND HOLES

DAMAGE IN
DAMAGE
CLUDED IN SUB TYPE OF REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE
LOCATION
ZONES
FLUSH REPAIR WITH INTERNAL Chapter 55−11−11,
PATCHES. paragraph 5.A
EXTERNAL PATCH REPAIR. Chapter 55−11−11,
PANEL
a paragraph 5.R
LOCATION
LAMINATE 180°C (356°F) FLUSH Chapter 55−11−11,
REPAIR. INACTIVE <1> paragraph 5.S IN
ACTIVE <1>
b OR a AND b RIB FOOT FLUSH REPAIR. RIBFOOT BETWEEN Chapter 55−11−11,
LOCATION STRINGERS. paragraphs 5.G
thru 5.Q
Repair References. Zone E (General), Sub Zones a and b. Horizontal Stabiliz
er Spar Box Skin
Table 104
<1> This allowable damage information is inactive since revision dated Feb
01/10.

Page 140
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage Zones. Zone E (General), Sub Zones c thru f. Horizontal

Stabilizer Spar Box Skin.
Figure 119
Page 141
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

DELAMINATION DAMAGE WITH OR WITHOUT VISIBLE CRACKS AND HOLES

DAMAGE IN
DAMAGE LOCA
CLUDED IN TYPE OF REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE
TION
SUB ZONES
STRINGER LOCA STRINGER FLUSH REPAIR. Chapter 55−11−11,
TION (ONE paragraphs 5.B
STRINGER) thru 5.E
c OR d
STRINGER EXTERNAL PATCH RE Chapter 55−11−11,
PAIR. paragraphs 5.T
thru 5.V
e OR f OR CROSSPOINT CROSSPOINT FLUSH REPAIR.
e AND c LOCATION
OR f AND
d
STRINGER LOCA STRINGER EXTERNAL PATCH REPAIR
c AND d TION (TWO (TWO STRINGERS).
STRINGERS)
CROSSPOINT IF DAMAGE IS MORE THAN THE
e AND f LOCATION (ONLY ALLOWABLE LIMIT, REFER TO
OR c, d, TO CHECK AL MANUFACTURER. REPAIR IMMEDI
e, f. LOWABLE DAM ATELY.
AGE).
Repair References. Zones E (General), Sub Zones c thru f. Horizontal Stabi
lizer Spar Box Skin
Table 105

Page 142
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage Zones. Zone E (General), Sub Zones a thru f. Horizontal

Stabilizer Spar Box Skin.
Figure 120
Pages 143/144
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Time Limits, All Zones. Horizontal Stabilizer
Spar Box Skin.
Figure 121 (sheet 1)
Page 145
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Time Limits, All Zones. Horizontal Stabilizer
Spar Box Skin
Figure 121 (sheet 2)
Page 146
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Time Limits Flow Chart. Horizontal Stabilizer
Spar Box − Stringer Inner Flange, All Zones.
Figure 122
Page 147
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage Zones. Zones A thru E (General), Sub Zones g and h. Hori
zontal Stabilizer Spar Box − Stringer Inner Flange.
Figure 123
Page 148
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

DELAMINATION DAMAGE WITH OR WITHOUT VISIBLE CRACKS AND HOLES

DAMAGE IN
DAMAGE LOCA
CLUDED IN TYPE OF REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE
TION
SUB ZONES
Chapter 55−11−11,
STRINGER FLUSH REPAIR. paragraphs 5.B
STRINGER thru 5.E
g
LOCATION Chapter 55−11−11,
STRINGER EXTERNAL PATCH RE
paragraphs 5.T
PAIR.
thru 5.V
h OR g AND CROSSPOINT
CROSSPOINT FLUSH REPAIR.
h LOCATION
Repair References, Zones A thru E (General), Sub Zones g and h. Horizontal
Stabilizer Spar Box. Stringer Inner Flange
Table 106

Page 149
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Time Limits, Zones A thru E (General), Sub Zones
g and h. Horizontal Stabilizer Spar Box. Stringer Inner Flange
Figure 124
Page 150
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Time Limits, Zones F (General). Horizontal Stabi
lizer Spar Box Skin Flanges
Figure 125
Page 151
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Time Limits, All Zones. Horizontal Stabilizer
Spar Box Ribs and Spars
Figure 126 (sheet 1)
Page 152
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Time Limits, All Zones. Horizontal Stabilizer
Spar Box Ribs and Spars
Figure 126 (sheet 2)
Page 153
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Time Limits, All Zones. Horizontal Stabilizer
Spar Box Ribs and Spars
Figure 126 (sheet 3)
Page 154
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Time Limits. Horizontal Stabilizer Spar Box Fit
tings
Figure 127 (sheet 1)
Page 155
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Time Limits. Horizontal Stabilizer Spar Box Fit
tings
Figure 127 (sheet 2)
Page 156
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Horizontal Stabilizer Spar Box. Location of the Main Support Fitting Compo
nents
Figure 128
Pages 157/158
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

HORIZONTAL STABILIZER SPAR BOX − ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

1. General

NOTE: CONFIG−2 is applicable after modification 25487G0290 only. For

effectivity refer to Modification/Service Bulletin List given in
Chapter 55−10−00, Page Block 001.

For the allowable damage and related data applicable to the Horizontal
Stabilizer Spar Box, Config. 2, refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101,
Config. 1. This data is necessary to find the correct repair procedure.

Pages 101/102
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/09
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

HORIZONTAL STABILIZER SPAR BOX − ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 101.

CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO

PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: OBEY THE GIVEN INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE WHICH LEADS TO THE
APPLICABLE INSPECTION PROGRAM DEFINED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPEC
TIONS (SRI) OF THE SRM, IF NECESSARY.

1. General

NOTE: CONFIG−3 is applicable after modification 30971G0382 only. For effec

tivity refer to Modification/Service Bulletin List given in Chapter
55−10−00, Page Block 001.
NOTE: For definition of allowable damage refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For Damage Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to chapter Chapter

51−11−14 − CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

This topic contains the allowable damage data applicable to the THS Spar
Box, refer to Figure 101, and is valid as shown in Table 101. This data
is necessary to find the correct repair procedure.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 101
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUCTION
of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all weight
variants as well as related information concerning allowable damage
and repair applicability.

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−11−11, Page Block 101, Config 3, Paragraph 1.
− Chapter 55−11−18, Page Block 101, Config 3, Paragraph 1.

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

2. Damage Evaluation

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−11−11, Page Block 101, Config 3, Paragraph 2.
− Chapter 55−11−18, Page Block 101, Config 3, Paragraph 2.

3. Type of Damage

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−11−11, Page Block 101, Config 3, Paragraph 3.
− Chapter 55−11−18, Page Block 101, Config 3, Paragraph 3.
4. Distance Between Damaged Areas and Distance Between Repair Areas

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−11−11, Page Block 101, Config 3, Paragraph 4.
− Chapter 55−11−18, Page Block 101, Config 3, Paragraph 4.
5. Damage Zones

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−11−11, Page Block 101, Config 3, Paragraph 5.
− Chapter 55−11−18, Page Block 101, Config 3, Paragraph 5.

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE 55−11−00−1−001−00 IS NOT APPLICABLE

TO ALL AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANTS. REFER TO THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR IN
SPECTION (SRI) FOR WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY.

6. Allowable Damage Description/Criteria

INSPECTION
PARAGRAPH/ DIA REPAIR
DESCRIPTION CRITERIA/TYPE INSTRUCTION REF
GRAM CATEGORY
ERENCE
Skin Plates Nicks, Gouges, 7.B./101, B, C 55−11−00−1−001−0
Abrasions and Sheet 1 0
Scratches. This INACTIVE
allowable dam
age data is
inactive since
revision dated
Nov 01/14, it
has been moved
to Chapter
55−11−11, Page
Block 101,
Config 3,
Paragraph 9.A.
Skin Plates Delamination 7.B./101, B, C 55−11−00−1−001−0
and Debonding. Sheet 2 0
This allowable INACTIVE
damage data is
inactive since
revision dated
Nov 01/14, it
has been moved
to Chapter
55−11−11, Page
Block 101,
Config 3,
Paragraph 9.B.

Table 102

Page 103
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

INSPECTION
PARAGRAPH/ DIA REPAIR
DESCRIPTION CRITERIA/TYPE INSTRUCTION REF
GRAM CATEGORY
ERENCE
Front and Rear Nicks, Gouges, 7.C./101, B, C 55−11−00−1−001−0
Spars Abrasions and Sheet 1 0
Scratches. This INACTIVE
allowable dam
age data is
inactive since
revision dated
Nov 01/14, it
has been moved
to Chapter
55−11−18, Page
Block 101,
Config 3,
Paragraph 9.A.
Front and Rear Delamination 7.C./101, B, C 55−11−00−1−001−0
Spars and Debonding. Sheet 2 0
This allowable INACTIVE
damage data is
inactive since
revision dated
Nov 01/14, it
has been moved
to Chapter
55−11−18, Page
Block 101,
Config 3,
Paragraph 9.B.

Table 102
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

7. Allowable Damage / Rework and Repair Limits

A. For general information about allowable and repairable damage limits re
fer to Chapter 51−77−10, COMPOSITE COMPONENTS − ALLOWABLE DAMAGE AND RE
PAIR CLASSIFICATION.

B. Specific allowable damage applicable the THS Spar Box, Skin Plates:

(1) Superficial and linear damages (nicks, gouges, abrasions and

scratches).
NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the appli
cable Chapter:

Page 104
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

− Chapter 55−11−11, Page Block 101, Config 3, Paragraph 9.A.

(2) Delaminations (with or without visible cracks and holes).

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the appli
cable Chapter:
− Chapter 55−11−11, Page Block 101, Config 3, Paragraph 9.B.

C. Specific allowable damage applicable the THS Spar Box, Front and Rear
Spars:
(1) Superficial and linear damages (nicks, gouges, abrasions and
scratches).

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the appli
cable Chapter:
− Chapter 55−11−18, Page Block 101, Config 3, Paragraph 9.A.

(2) Delaminations (with or without visible cracks and holes).

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the appli
cable Chapter:
− Chapter 55−11−18, Page Block 101, Config 3, Paragraph 9.B.

Page 105
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

THS Spar Box Structure

Figure 101

Page 106
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ITEM NAME Refer to the following Diagrams for

details of allowable damage and re
pair limits according to damage type
NICKS, GOUGES, DELAMINATION, DE
ABRASION, BONDING.
SCRATCHES.
1 Skin Plates <1> <1>
2 Rib 1 − −
3 Ribs 2 thru 11 − −
4 Ribs 12 thru 14 − −
5 Front and Rear Spars <1> <1>

Table 103
<1> Refer to Table 102.

Page 107
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Distance between Damaged Areas and between Repair Areas

Figure 102

Page 108
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

THS Spar Box, Upper Skin Panel Repair Zones

Figure 103 (sheet 1)

Page 109
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

THS Spar Box, Lower Skin Panel Repair Zones

Figure 103 (sheet 2)

Page 110
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

THS Spar Box, Spar Repair Zones

Figure 103 (sheet 3)

Page 111
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Nicks, Gouges, Abrasion and Scratches

Diagram 101 (sheet 1)

Page 112
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Delaminations (with or without visible cracks and holes) and Debondings

Diagram 101 (sheet 2)

Pages 113/114
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

HORIZONTAL STABILIZER SPAR BOX − REPAIR

1. General

NOTE: CONFIG−1 is applicable before modification 25487G0290 only. For effec

tivity refer to Modification/Service Bulletin List given in Chapter
55−10−00, Page Block 001.

NOTE: For Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14

− CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

This topic contains specific repair data applicable to the Spar−Box struc
ture (for general repair data applicable to composite structures refer to
Chapter 51−77−00). The specific repair procedures for the Spar−Box structure
are in the subsequent chapters:
− Chapter 55−11−11, Page Block 201, Config. 1, Skin Plate Repairs.
− Chapter 55−11−12, Page Block 201, Rib Repairs.
− Chapter 55−11−18, Page Block 201, Config. 1, Spar Repairs.
2. Safety Precautions

WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.

WARNING: WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND FILTER MASK WHEN YOU CUT,
ABRADE OR DRILL COMPOSITE MATERIALS. THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MA
TERIALS CAN GET INTO YOUR LUNGS OR ONTO YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE YOU
INJURY. IMMEDIATELY REMOVE DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.

WHEN YOU WORK WITH CFRP COMPOSITE MATERIAL, IMMEDIATELY REMOVE
DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.
WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAIN ELECTRIC POWER ON
THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST ONLY USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIRS CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE REFER

TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN IN THE
INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER REMARKS

No General Repairs applicable. − −

Table 201

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

4. Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs

SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE

Skin Repair with Internal Patches Chapter 55−11−11, 201
(Flush Repair), All Repair Zones. Page Block 201,
Config. 1, Para 5.A
Stringer Repair with Internal Skin Chapter 55−11−11, 202
Patches (Flush Repair), Zones Page Block 201,
38−46,51,52,55,56,59−61. Config. 1, Para 5.B
Stringer Repair with Internal Skin Chapter 55−11−11, 203
Patches (Flush Repair), Zone 50. Page Block 201,
Config. 1, Para 5.C
Stringer Repair with Internal Skin Chapter 55−11−11, 204
Patches (Flush Repair ), Zones 48 Page Block 201,
and 49. Config. 1, Para 5.D
Stringer Repair with Internal Skin Chapter 55−11−11, 205
Patches (Flush Repair), Zones Page Block 201,
47,54,58 and 63. Config. 1, Para 5.E
Delamination Repair for Stringer, Chapter 55−11−11, 206
Ribfoot or Skin. Page Block 201,
Config. 1, Para 5.F
Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers Chapter 55−11−11, 207
(Flush Repair), Zones Page Block 201,
02−08,11,12,15,16,19,20,23−25,28−30. Config. 1, Para 5.G
Repairs to Ribfoot Stringers (Flush Chapter 55−11−11, 208
Repair), Zones 33−36. Page Block 201,
Config. 1, Para 5.H
Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers Chapter 55−11−11, 209
( Flush Repair), Zones 14,18,22 and Page Block 201,
27. Config. 1, Para 5.I
Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers Chapter 55−11−11, 210
(Flush Repair), Zones 14,18,22 and Page Block 201,
27 (Access through Spar). Config. 1, Para 5.J
Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers Chapter 55−11−11, 211
(Flush Repair), Zones Page Block 201,
02−08,10−12,15,16,19,20,23−25,28−30,33 Config. 1, Para 5.K
−36. (Access through Spar).
Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers Chapter 55−11−11, 212
(Flush Repair), Zones 09,13,17,21 Page Block 201,
and 26. (Access through Spar). Config. 1, Para 5.L

Table 202

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE

Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers Chapter 55−11−11, 213
(Flush Repair), Zones 13,17,21 and Page Block 201,
26. Config. 1,
Para 5.M
Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers Chapter 55−11−11, 214
(Flush Repair), Zone 09. Page Block 201,
Config. 1, Para 5.N
Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers Chapter 55−11−11, 215
(Flush Repair), Zone 10. Page Block 201,
Config. 1, Para 5.O
Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers Chapter 55−11−11, 216
(Flush Repair), Zones 31 and 32. Page Block 201,
Config. 1, Para 5.P
Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers Chapter 55−11−11, 217
(Flush Repair), Zones 31 and 32. Page Block 201,
(Access through Spar). Config. 1, Para 5.Q
Skin Repair with an External Patch. Chapter 55−11−11, 218
All Repair Zones. Page Block 201,
Config. 1, Para 5.R
Skin Repair with laminated Filler Chapter 55−11−11, 219
Patch and Internal Doubler (Flush Page Block 201,
Repair), Zones 01−07. Config. 1, Para 5.S
Stringer Repair with an External Chapter 55−11−11, 220
Skin Patch, Zones 38−42. Page Block 201,
Config. 1, Para 5.T
Stringer Repair with an External Chapter 55−11−11, 221
Skin Patch, Zones Page Block 201,
43−46,48,49,56,59,61. Config. 1, Para 5.U
Stringer Repair with an External Chapter 55−11−11, 222
Skin Patch, Zones Page Block 201,
47,50−55,58,60,62,63. Config. 1, Para 5.V
Repair of Damage to Skin Flange, Chapter 55−11−11, 223
Zone 01. Page Block 201,
Config. 1, Para 5.W
Repair of Damage to Skin and Flange, Chapter 55−11−11, 224
Zones 01A,02A,03A. Page Block 201,
Config. 1, Para 5.X
Repair of Damage to Skin and Flange, Chapter 55−11−11, 225
Zone 04A. Page Block 201,
Config. 1, Para 5.Y

Table 202

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE

Repair of Fairing/Skin Attachment. Chapter 55−11−11, 226
Page Block 201,
Config. 1, Para 5.Z
Repair of Cracks thru Rib Web and Chapter 55−11−12, 201
Fastener, Zone 01. Page Block 201,
Para 5.A
Repair of Cracks at Lightening Hole, Chapter 55−11−12, 202
Zones 02,04,09,10,11, Sub−zone A. Page Block 201,
Para 5.B
Repair of Crack thru Access Hole and Chapter 55−11−18, 201
Fastener, Front Spar Zones 01,03−06 Page Block 201,
and 09−16. Config. 1, Para 5.A
Repair of Crack thru Access Hole and Chapter 55−11−18, 202
Fastener, Front Spar Zone 02. Page Block 201,
Config. 1, Para 5.B
Repair of Crack thru Access Hole and Chapter 55−11−18, 203
Fastener, Front Spar Zones 07 and Page Block 201,
17. Config. 1, Para 5.C
Repair of Damage at Access Hole, Chapter 55−11−18, 204
Front Spar Zone 08. Page Block 201,
Config. 1, Para 5.D
Repair of Cracks thru two Adjacent Chapter 55−11−18, 205
Access Holes and Fastener, Front Page Block 201,
Spar Zones 09 and 10. Config. 1, Para 5.E
Repair of Crack thru Access Hole and Chapter 55−11−18, 206
Fasteners, Front Spar Zones 18. Page Block 201,
Config. 1, Para 5.F
Repair After Removal of Spar Section Chapter 55−11−18, 207
for Access, Front Spar Zones 01−05 Page Block 201,
and 07−15. Config. 1, Para 5.G
Repair After Removal of Spar Section Chapter 55−11−18, 208
for Access, Front Spar Zone 06. Page Block 201,
Config. 1, Para 5.H
Repair of Front and Rear Spar Chapter 55−11−18, 209
Stiffeners, Zones 01−32 and 34−48. Page Block 201,
Config. 1, Para 5.I
Repair of Rear Spar Stiffener, Zone Chapter 55−11−18, 210
33. Page Block 201,
Config. 1, Para 5.J

Table 202

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE

Delamination Repair for Front and Chapter 55−11−18, 211
Rear Spar. All Zones. Page Block 201,
Config. 1, Para 5.K
Repair of Crack thru Fasteners, Chapter 55−11−18, 212
Front and Rear Spar Web, Zones Page Block 201,
01−05. Config. 1, Para 5.L
Repair of Crack thru Fasteners and Chapter 55−11−18, 213
Stiffener, Front and Rear Spar Web. Page Block 201,
Config. 1, Para 5.M

Table 202
5. Damage Evaluation

Before you repair the damage structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

6. Access Into the Spar−Box

It is possible to remove part of the spar to get satisfactory access into

the Spar−Box structure to make a repair. To do this refer to Chapter
55−11−18, Page Block 201, Config. 1 and obey the Spar Splice Repair
instructions.

7. Types of Repair
There are three groups of repairs for the aircraft structure:
− permanent repairs
− temporary repairs
− permanent repairs after temporary repairs.

A. Permanent Repair.
There are three types of permanent repairs for the Spar−Box structure.
These are as follows:

(1) Laminate Repair.

To make a laminate repair you must use one of the subsequent proce
dures:

(a) The hot−bond (180° C (356° F)) laminate repair procedure.

(b) The room−temperature (RT) laminate repair procedure.

NOTE: You must make the laminate repairs contained in this topic
under vacuum conditions (minimum 80%). For room temperature
(RT) laminate repairs, this vacuum condition is necessary
only for the initial 3 hours (minimum) of the curing pro
cess. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11 for data.

Page 205
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(2) Pre−cured Repairs.

To make a pre−cured type repair, you must make the repair pieces
from pre−cured composite materials. These repair pieces are then at
tached to the aircraft structure with fasteners. For a pre−cured re
pair the repair adhesive is only used as a shim. Refer to Chapter
51−77−11 for general data about pre−cured repair procedures.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is used as shim material to a maximum

thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 in).

(3) Delamination Repairs with Fastener.

This type of permanent repair uses fasteners to hold the delaminated

layers inside the composite material together and prevent an increase
in the delaminated area. Refer to Chapter 51−77−13 for general data
about delamination repairs.

B. Temporary Repairs.

You must only make a temporary repair if you have these conditions:
− when you do not have the correct materials to make a permanent repair,
− when you do not have the time to make a permanent repair.

C. Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair.

You must make a permanent repair after a temporary repair in the given
flight hour (FH) limit. Refer to the applicable allowable damage and re
pair limits data to find the FH limit.

8. Special Tools
To work with composite materials, it is necessary to use special tools.
Here are some examples:
− Explosion−proof tools are necessary if you cause CFRP dust
− Tools to cut or drill pre−cured CFRP materials must have very hard cut
ting edges, for example cutting wheels with diamond edges and twist−drills
made from high−speed steel
− Tools to drill composite materials must have specially shaped cutting
edges.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−11 to find data about all the tools and equipment
necessary to make composite repairs.

9. Repair Materials
A. General.

All the materials necessary to make a repair are shown in the applicable
repair materials list in each repair topic.

B. Pre−cured CFRP Materials.

Page 206
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Some of the specific repairs to the Spar−Box have a numbered reference

to pre−cured section or sheet materials. Airbus Industries Material Cen
ter (AIMC) can supply these materials for you to use. Refer to Figures
203 thru 205 and 207 thru 220 for material data. Before you use any
pre−cured CFRP materials not supplied by AIMC, you must make a Non−De
structive Test (NDT) inspection of them.

NOTE: If you make the pre−cured CFRP materials yourself, make sure that
the pre−impregnated layers are in their correct lay−up sequence.

C. Metal Repair Parts for CFRP Structures.

Metal repair materials are used for some of the specific repairs to the
Horizontal Stabilizer. The metal materials are LN9073 3.1364T3 and LN9496
3.1354T3511. They are used for particular repair parts, immaterial of
whether the specific repair is permanent, temporary or permanent after
temporary. Repair procedures, where applicable, give full details.

10. Corrosion Prevention Treatment for Repairs

(Refer to Figure 206)

To prevent corrosion problems in repaired areas, CFRP materials and metal

repair parts must be provided with suitable corrosion prevention treatment.
All metal repair parts must be surface treated. Surfaces of pre−cured CFRP
repair parts which will be in contact with any of the metal repair parts
must be coated with a cured layer of glassfabric (Material No. 05−033, re
fer to Chapter 51−35−00) and resin (Material No. 08−001C, refer to Chapter
51−35−00). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11 for cure times.

A. Skin Panels.

In temporary repairs where metal repair parts are in contact with the
skin inner surface, the skin inner surface must be protected with a
cured layer of glassfabric and resin. The glassfabric layer applied to
the inner skin surface must extend, by 20 mm (0.79 in) all around the
metal parts in contact with the skin. It is also necessary, for tempo
rary repairs, for the whole of the repair area to be covered with a
blanket layer of cured glassfabric and resin. The blanket layer of
glassfabric must extend beyond the repair area by 20 mm (0.79 in).
B. Ribs, Spar Access Holes and Stiffeners.

In temporary repairs, the protective layer of glassfabric and resin must

extend all around the metal parts in contact with CFRP by 20 mm (0.79
in).

11. Special Names for Parts of the Structure

The specific repair procedures often give special names to identify parts
of the spar−box structure (for example crosspoint, stringer inner−flange and

Page 207
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

module). Refer to Figures 201 and 202 to find out what these special names
identify.
12. Repair Environment

Before you make a permanent repair, you must make sure that you have the
correct environmental conditions (for example when the aircraft is in a
warm and dry aircraft hangar). It is important that the repair environment
is clean and has a constant room temperature during the repair procedure.

Page 208
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Identification
Figure 201

Page 209
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Panel Identification

Figure 202

Page 210
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured CFRP Sheet Materials for Skin Panel Repairs Supplied by AIMC
Figure 203 (sheet 1)

Pages 211/212
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured CFRP Sheet Materials for Skin Panel Repairs Supplied by AIMC
Figure 203 (sheet 2)

Pages 213/214
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured CFRP Sheet Materials for Skin Panel Repairs Supplied by AIMC
Figure 204 (sheet 1)

Pages 215/216
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured CFRP Sheet Materials for Skin Panel Repairs Supplied by AIMC
Figure 204 (sheet 2)

Pages 217/218
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured CFRP Section Materials for Skin Panel Repairs Supplied by AIMC
Figure 205

Page 219
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Corrosion Prevention Treatment for Repairs

Figure 206 (sheet 1)

Page 220
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Corrosion Prevention Treatment for Repairs

Figure 206 (sheet 2)

Page 221
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Corrosion Prevention Treatment for Repairs

Figure 206 (sheet 3)

Page 222
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Corrosion Prevention Treatment for Repairs

Figure 206 (sheet 4)

Pages 223/224
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured CFRP Sheet Materials for Skin Panel Repairs Supplied by AIMC
Figure 207 (sheet 1)

Pages 225/226
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured CFRP Sheet Materials for Skin Panel Repairs Supplied by AIMC
Figure 207 (sheet 2)

Pages 227/228
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured CFRP Sheet Materials for Skin Panel Repairs Supplied by AIMC
Figure 207 (sheet 3)

Page 229
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured CFRP Section Materials for Skin Panel Repairs Supplied by AIMC
Figure 208

Page 230
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured CFRP Sheet Materials for Skin Panel Repairs Supplied by AIMC
Figure 209

Pages 231/232
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured CFRP Sheet Materials for Skin Panel Repairs Supplied by AIMC
Figure 210

Page 233
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured CFRP Sheet Materials for Rib Repairs Supplied by AIMC

Figure 211

Page 234
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured CFRP Sheet Materials for Spar Repairs Supplied by AIMC

Figure 212 (sheet 1)

Page 235
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured CFRP Sheet Materials for Spar Repairs Supplied by AIMC

Figure 212 (sheet 2)

Page 236
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured CFRP Sheet Materials for Spar Repairs Supplied by AIMC

Figure 212 (sheet 3)

Page 237
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured CFRP Section Materials for Spar Repairs Supplied by AIMC

Figure 213 (sheet 1)

Page 238
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured CFRP Sheet Materials for Spar Repairs Supplied by AIMC

Figure 213 (sheet 2)

Page 239
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured CFRP Sheet Materials for Spar Repairs Supplied by AIMC

Figure 214 (sheet 1)

Page 240
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured CFRP Sheet Materials for Spar Repairs Supplied by AIMC

Figure 214 (sheet 2)

Page 241
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured CFRP Sheet Materials for Spar Repairs Supplied by AIMC

Figure 215

Page 242
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured CFRP Sheet Materials for Skin Panel Repairs Supplied by AIMC
Figure 216 (sheet 1)

Pages 243/244
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured CFRP Sheet Materials for Skin Panel Repairs Supplied by AIMC
Figure 216 (sheet 2)

Page 245
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured CFRP Section Materials for Skin Panel Repairs Supplied by AIMC
Figure 217

Page 246
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured CFRP Sheet Materials for Skin Panel Repairs Supplied by AIMC
Figure 218

Page 247
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured CFRP Sheet Materials for Skin Panel Repairs Supplied by AIMC
Figure 219

Page 248
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured Sheet Materials for Spar Repairs

Figure 220 (sheet 1)

Page 249
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured Sheet Materials for Spar Repairs

Figure 220 (sheet 2)

Page 250
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

HORIZONTAL STABILIZER SPAR BOX − REPAIR

1. General

NOTE: CONFIG−2 is applicable after modification 25487G0290 only. For

effectivity refer to Modification/Service Bulletin List given in
Chapter 55−10−00, Page Block 001.

For general repair data applicable to the Horizontal Stabilizer Spar Box,
Config. 2, refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1. This data
is necessary to perform the specific repair procedure.

Pages 201/202
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/09
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

HORIZONTAL STABILIZER SPAR BOX − REPAIR

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE GIV
EN IN TABLE 201.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH 3,

GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

1. General

NOTE: CONFIG−3 is applicable after modification 30971G00382 only. For effec

tivity refer to the Modification/Service Bulletin List given in Chap
ter 55−10−00 Page Block 001.

NOTE: For Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

This topic contains specific repair data applicable to the structure of the
THS Spar Box (for general repair data applicable to composite structures
refer to Chapter 51−77−00) and is valid as shown in table 201. The specif
ic repair procedures for the Spar−Box structure are in the subsequent chap
ters:
− Chapter 55−11−11, Page Block 201, Config. 3, Skin Panels Repairs
− Chapter 55−11−18, Page Block 201, Config. 3, Spar Repairs.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 201
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUCTION
of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give the necessary data about
all weight variants and their required information for allowable dam
age and repair applicability.

2. Safety Precautions

Not applicable to this topic.

3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER REMARKS

No General Repairs applicable. − −

Table 202

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

4. Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs

SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE

Skin Repair with an External Doubler Chapter 55−11−11, PB 201
(All Zones) 201, Config. 3,
Para 5.A
Internal Skin Repair (Flush), for Chapter 55−11−11, PB 202
constant skin thickness. Zones A, B 201, Config. 3,
and C Para 5.B
Internal Skin Repair (Flush), for Chapter 55−11−11, PB 203
variable skin thickness. Zones A, B 201, Config. 3,
and C Para 5.C
Internal Skin Repair (Flush), Zone D Chapter 55−11−11, PB 204
201, Config. 3,
Para 5.D
Repair after Removal of Spar Section Chapter 55−11−18, PB 201
for Access, Front Spar Zones I and 201, Config. 3,
II Para 5.A

Table 203
5. Damage Evaluation
Before you repair the damage structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

6. Access Into the Spar−Box

It is possible to remove part of the spar to get satisfactory access into

the THS Spar Box structure to make a repair. To do this refer to Chapter
55−11−18, Page Block 201, Config. 3, Paragraph 5. A.
7. Types of Repair

The type of repair used for the Skin Plates of the THS Spar Box is the
permanent Pre−cured type repair using CFRP materials or alternative metallic
materials.

The type of repair used for the Spar Structure of the THS Spar Box is the
permanent Pre−cured type repair using CFRP materials (no alternative
metallic materials are allowed).

To make a Pre−cured type repair, you must make the repair pieces from
pre−cured composite materials or their metallic alternatives. These repair
pieces are then attached to the aircraft structure with fasteners. For a
pre−cured type repair the repair adhesive is only used as a shim. Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11 for general data about pre−cured repair procedures.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is used as shim material to a maximum thickness

of 0.5 mm (0.020 in).

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−3
Feb 01/09
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

8. Special Tools

To work with composite materials, it is necessary to use special tools.

Here are some examples:
− Explosion−proof tools are necessary if you cause CFRP dust
− Tools to cut or drill pre−cured CFRP materials must have very hard
cutting edges, for example cutting wheels with diamond edges and
twist−drills made from high−speed steel
− Tools to drill composite materials must have specially shaped cutting
edges.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−11 to find data about all the tools and equipment
necessary to make composite repairs.

9. Repair Materials

A. General.
All the materials necessary to make a repair are shown in the applicable
repair materials list in each repair topic.

B. Pre−cured CFRP Materials.

Some of the specific repairs to the Spar Box have a numbered reference
to pre−cured section or sheet materials. Airbus Material Support (AMS)
can supply these materials for you to use. Refer to Figures 201 and 202
for material data. Before you use any pre−cured CFRP materials not
supplied by AMS, you must make a Non−Destructive Test (NDT) inspection
of them.
NOTE: If you make the pre−cured CFRP materials yourself, make sure that
the pre−impregnated layers are in their correct lay−up sequence.

C. Metal Repair Parts for CFRP Structures.

Metal repair material can be used for some of the specific repairs to
the Horizontal Stabilizer. The metal material is 17−7PH−H1050 or
alternative 17−4PH−H1025. Repair procedures, where applicable, give full
details.

10. Repair Environment

Before you make a permanent repair, you must make sure that you have the
correct environmental conditions (for example when the aircraft is in a
warm and dry aircraft hangar). It is important that the repair environment
is clean and has a constant room temperature during the repair procedure.

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−3
Feb 01/09
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre-cured Sheet Materials for Skin Plate Repairs

Figure 201 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-11-00
CONFIG-3
Page 204
Feb 01/03
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre-cured Sheet Materials for Skin Plate Repairs

Figure 201 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-11-00
CONFIG-3
Page 205
Feb 01/03
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre-cured Sheet Materials for Skin Plate Repairs

Figure 201 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55-11-00
CONFIG-3
Page 206
Feb 01/03
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre-cured Sheet Materials for Skin Plate Repairs

Figure 201 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55-11-00
CONFIG-3
Page 207
Feb 01/03
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre-cured Sheet Materials for Skin Plate Repairs

Figure 201 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55-11-00
CONFIG-3
Page 208
Feb 01/03
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre-cured Sheet Materials for Skin Plate Repairs

Figure 201 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55-11-00
CONFIG-3
Page 209
Feb 01/03
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre-cured Sheet Materials for Skin Plate Repairs

Figure 201 (sheet 7)

Printed in Germany
55-11-00
CONFIG-3
Page 210
Feb 01/03
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre-cured Sheet Materials for Skin Plate Repairs

Figure 201 (sheet 8)

Printed in Germany
55-11-00
CONFIG-3
Page 211
Feb 01/03
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured Sheet Materials for Spar Repairs

Figure 202 (sheet 1)

Page 212
Printed in Germany
55−11−00
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre-cured Sheet Materials for Spar Repairs

Figure 202 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-11-00
CONFIG-3
Page 213
Feb 01/03
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TRIMMABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER − SKIN PLATES

1. Identification Scheme

NOTE: CONFIG−1 is applicable before Modification 25487G00290.

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Skin, Assy Upper Figure 1 (Sheet 1 and 2)

− Skin, Assy Lower Figure 2 (Sheet 1 and 2)
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−10−00, Page Block 001, where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Pages 1/2
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/09
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin, Assy Upper

Figure 1 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-11-11
CONFIG-1
Pages 3/4
May 01/02
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin, Assy Upper

Figure 1 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-11-11
CONFIG-1
Pages 5/6
May 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Skin, Upper Assy D55181501000 PB 201

001
5 Skin , Upper Composite D55181511000
001
5A Skin , Upper Composite D55181512000 A20004G0001A
001
5B Skin , Upper Composite D55181513000 A20004G0001B
001
5C Skin , Upper Composite D55181514000 A23002G00148
001
10 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521212
LN9073 1(0.0393)
15 Plate 3.7164.1 D55181521230
LN9297 1,2(0.047)
20 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181524200 A29998X09998
LN9073 1,6(0.0.063)
25 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181523206 A29998X09998
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
30 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181523204 A29998X09998
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
35 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181523202 A29998X09998
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
40 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181523200 A29998X09998
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
45 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181525004 A29998X09998
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
50 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521210
LN9073 1(0.0393)
50A Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521248 A20004G0001B
LN9073 1(0.0393)
50B Plate 3.1364T3 D55181522200 A23002G00148
LN9073 1(0.0393)
55 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521208
LN9073 1(0.0393)
55A Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521246 A20004G0001B
LN9073 1(0.0393)
55B Plate 3.1364T3 D55181522202 A23002G00148
LN9073 1(0.0393)
ASSY Dwg.: D55181000, D55181501

Key to Figure 1

Page 7
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/09
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

60 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521204

LN9073 2(0.0796)
60A Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521242 A20004G0001B
LN9073 2(0.0796)
60B Plate 3.1364T3 D55181522204 A23002G00148
LN9073 205
1(0.0393)
62 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521206
LN9073 1(0.0393)
62A Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521244 A20004G0001B
LN9073 1(0.0393)
64 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521203
LN9073 204
1(0.0393)
64A Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521264 A20004G0001B
LN9073 265
1(0.0393)
66 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521200
LN9073 201
1(0.0393)
66A Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521240 A20004G0001B
LN9073 241
1(0.0393)
70 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521214
LN9073 215
2(0.0796)
75 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521216
LN9073 1(0.0393)
75A Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521250 A23002G00148
LN9073 1(0.0393)
80 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521218
LN9073 1(0.0393)
80A Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521252 A23002G00148
LN9073 1(0.0393)
85 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521220
LN9073 221
2.5(0.9842)
85A Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521254 A23002G00148
LN9073 255
2.5(0.9842)
ASSY Dwg.: D55181501

Key to Figure 1

Page 8
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/09
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

90 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521222

LN9073 1(0.0393)
95 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521224
LN9073 225
2.5(0.9842)
95A Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521256 A23002G00148
LN9073 257
2.5(0.9842)
100 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521226
LN9073 1(0.0393)
105 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521228
LN9073 229
2.5(0.9842)
105A Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521258 A23002G00148
LN9073 259
2.5(0.9842)
110 Support Assy 3.1364T3 D92480025000
LN9073 001
1,6(0.063)
115 Support Assy 3.1364T3 D92480026000
LN9073 001
1,6(0.063)
120 Support Assy 3.1364T3 D92480022000
LN9073 1,2(0.047)
125 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521232
LN9073 1,2(0.047)
130 Support 3.1364T3 D92480008200
LN9073 1(0.0393)
135 Support 3.1364T3 D92480010200
LN9073 1,2(0.047)
140 Support Assy 3.1364T3 D92480065200
LN9073 201
1,6(0.063)
140A Support Assy 3.1364T3 D92480068000 A21471G00070
LN9073 001
1,6(0.063)
145 Support 3.1364T3 D92480006202
LN9073 203
1,6(0.063)
ASSY Dwg.: D55181501

Key to Figure 1

Pages 9/10
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/09
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Assy, Lower

Figure 2 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-11-11
CONFIG-1
Pages 11/12
May 01/02
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Assy, Lower

Figure 2 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-11-11
CONFIG-1
Pages 13/14
May 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Skin, Lower Assy D55181701000 PB 201

001
5 Skin, Lower Composite D55181711000
001
5A Skin, Lower Composite D55181712000 A20004G0001A
001
5B Skin, Lower Composite D55181713000 A20004G0001B
001
5C Skin, Lower Composite D55181714000 A23002G00148
001
10 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181721208
LN9073 1.2(0.047)
15 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181525202 A29998X09998
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
20 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181525200 A29998X09998
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
25 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181524206 A29998X09998
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
30 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181524202 A29998X09998
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
35 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181524204 A29998X09998
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
40 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181525012 A29998X09998
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
45 Plate 3.1354T3 D55181721200
LN9073 201
2,5(0.9842)
50 Plate 3.1354T3 D55181721202
LN9073 203
2,5(0.9842)
55 Plate 3.1354T3 D55181721204
LN9073 205
2,5(0.9842)
60 Plate 3.1354T3 D55181721206
LN9073 207
2,5(0.9842)
65 Support 3.1364T3 D92480010200
LN9073 1,2(0.047)
ASSY Dwg.: D55181000, D55181701

Key to Figure 2

Pages 15/16
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/09
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TRIMMABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER − SKIN PLATES

1. Identification Scheme

NOTE: CONFIG−2 is applicable after Modification 25487G00290.

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Skin, Assy Upper Figure 1

− Skin, Assy Lower Figure 2
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−10−00, Page Block 001, where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Pages 1/2
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/09
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin, Assy Upper

Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55-11-11
CONFIG-2
Pages 3/4
May 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Upper Skin, Assy D55181502000 PB 201

001
5 Skin D55181515000
001
10 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521212
LN9073 1(0.0393)
15 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181527202
LN9073 203
2,5(0.9842)
18 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181527204
LN9073 205
1(0.0393)
20 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181524200
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
20A Plate 3.1364T3 D55181524208 A28415G00353
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
25 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181523206
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
30 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181523204
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
35 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181523202
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
40 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181523200
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
45 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181525204
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
50 Ground Straps 3.1364T3 D55181522000
Assy LN9073 1(0.0393)
55 Ground Straps 3.1364T3 D55181522002
Assy LN9073 1(0.0393)
60 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521242
LN9073 2(0.0796)
65 Ground Straps 3.1364T3 D55181522004
Assy LN9073 005
1(0.0393)
70 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521214
LN9073 215
2(0.0796)
75 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521250
LN9073 1(0.0393)
ASSY Dwg.: D55181001, D55181502

Key to Figure 1

Page 5
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/09
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

80 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521252

LN9073 1(0.0393)
85 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521254
LN9073 255
2,5(0.9842)
90 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521222
LN9073 1(0.0393)
95 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521256
LN9073 257
2,5(0.9842)
100 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521226
LN9073 1(0.0393)
105 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521258
LN9073 259
2,5(0.9842)
110 Support Assy 3.1364T3 D92480025000
LN9073 001
1,6(0.063)
115 Support Assy 3.1364T3 D92480026000
LN9073 001
1,6(0.063)
120 Support Assy 3.1364T3 D92480022000
LN9073 1,2(0.047)
125 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521232
LN9073 1,2(0.047)
130 Support 3.1364T3 D92480008200
LN9073 1(0.0393)
135 Support 3.1364T3 D92480010200
LN9073 1,2(0.047)
140 Support Assy 3.1364T3 D92480068000
LN9073 001
1,6(0.063)
145 Support 3.1364T3 D92480006200
LN9073 201
1,6(0.063)
145A Support 3.1364T3 D92480006202 A28415G00353
LN9073 203
1,6(0.063)
ASSY Dwg.: D55181502

Key to Figure 1

Page 6
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/09
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Assy, Lower

Figure 2

Printed in Germany
55-11-11
CONFIG-2
Pages 7/8
May 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Lower Skin, Assy D55181702000

001
5 Skin Composite D55181715000
001
10 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181527006
LN9073 007
1(0.0393)
15 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181525202
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
15A Plate 3.1364T3 D55181525210 A28415G00353
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
20 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181525200
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
25 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181524206
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
30 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181524202
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
35 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181524204
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
40 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181525206
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
40A Plate 3.1364T3 D55181525212 A28415G00353
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
45 Plate 3.1354T3 D55181721200
LN9073 201
2,5(0.9842)
50 Plate 3.1354T3 D55181721202
LN9073 203
2,5(0.9842)
55 Plate 3.1354T3 D55181721204
LN9073 205
2,5(0.9842)
60 Plate 3.1354T3 D55181721206
LN9073 207
2,5(0.9842)
65 Support 3.1364T3 D92480010200
LN9073 1,2(0.047)
ASSY Dwg.: D55181001, D55181702

Key to Figure 2

Pages 9/10
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/09
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TRIMMABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER − SKIN PLATES

1. Identification Scheme

NOTE: CONFIG−3 is applicable after Modification 30971G0382.

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Skin, Assy Upper Figure 1

− Skin, Assy Lower Figure 2
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−10−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Pages 1/2
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Feb 01/14
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin, Assy Upper

Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55-11-11
CONFIG-3
Pages 3/4
May 01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Skin Plate, Up Composite D55181505000 PB201

per 001 55−11−00
1A Skin Plate, Up Composite D55181505002 PB201 A33056G0399
per 003 55−11−00
1B Skin Plate, Up Composite D55181505004 PB201 A24973G0537
per 005 55−11−00
1C Skin Plate, Up Composite D55181509000 PB201 A161092G0860
per 001 55−11−00
5 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181570200
LN9073 1.2 (0.047)
5A Plate 3.1364T3 D55181570202 A33056G0399
LN9073 1.2 (0.047)
10 Plate Assy 3.1364T3 D55181767000 B33829G0409
LN9073 001
15 Plate Assy 3.1364T3 D55181767002 B33829G0409
LN9073 003
18 Plate Assy 3.1364T3 D55181767014 A33829G0409
LN9073
20 Plate Assy 3.1364T3 D55181767004
LN9073
20A Plate Assy 3.1364T3 D55181767016 A33829G0409
LN9073
25 Plate Assy 3.1364T3 D55181767006
LN9073
30 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181523004
LN9073 1.6 (0.063)
35 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181523002
LN9073 1.6 (0.063)
40 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181523000
LN9073 1.6 (0.063)
45 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181525004
LN9073 1.6 (0.063)
50 Ground Straps 3.1364T3 D55181522000
Assy LN9073 1 (0.039)
50A Ground Straps 3.1364T3 D55181522006 A24973G0429
Assy LN9073 1 (0.039)
55 Ground Straps 3.1364T3 D55181522002
Assy LN9073 1 (0.039)
ASSY Dwg.: D55181504, D55181506

Key to Figure 1

Page 5
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

60 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521242

LN9073 2 (0.078)
65 Ground Straps 3.1364T3 D55181522004
Assy LN9073 005
1 (0.039)
70 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521214
LN9073 215
2.5 (0.098)
75 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521250
LN9073 1 (0.039)
80 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521252
LN9073 1 (0.039)
85 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521254
LN9073 255
2.5 (0.098)
90 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521222
LN9073 1 (0.039)
95 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521256
LN9073 257
2.5 (0.098)
95A Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521356 A318998G0378
LN9073 357
2.5 (0.098)
100 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521226
LN9073 1 (0.039)
105 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521258
LN9073 259
2.5 (0.098)
105A Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521358 A31898G0378
LN9073 359
2.5 (0.098)
110 Support Assy 3.1364T3 D92480025000
LN9073 001
1.6 (0.063)
115 Support Assy 3.1364T3 D92480026000
LN9073 001
1.6 (0.063)
120 Support Assy 3.1364T3 D92480022000
LN9073 1.2 (0.047)
125 Former Upper 3.4364T7351 D55181540200
LN9073 201
ASSY Dwg.: D55181504

Key to Figure 1

Page 6
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

125A Former Upper 3.4364T7351 D55181540202 A33056G0399

LN9073 203
130 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521232
LN9073 1.2 (0.047)
135 Support 3.1364T3 D92480008200
LN9073 1 (0.039)
140 Support 3.1364T3 D92480010200
LN9073 1.2 (0.047)
145 Support Assy 3.1364T3 D92480068000
LN9073 001
1.6 (0.063)
150 Support 3.1364T3 D92480006202
LN9073 203
1.6 (0.063)
ASSY Dwg.: D55181504

Key to Figure 1

Pages 7/8
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Feb 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Assy, Lower

Figure 2

Printed in Germany
55-11-11
CONFIG-3
Pages 9/10
May 01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Skin Plate, Low Composite D55181705000 PB201

er 001 55−11−00
1A Skin Plate, Low Composite D55181705002 PB201 A33056G0399
er 003 55−11−00
1B Skin Plate, Low Composite D55181705004 PB201 A24973G0537
er 005 55−11−00
1C Skin Plate, Low Composite D55181709000 PB201 A161092G0860
er 001 55−11−00
5 Plate Assy 3.1364T3 D55181767008
LN9073 009
10 Plate Assy 3.1364T3 D55181767012
LN9073
15 Plate Assy 3.1364T3 D55181767010
LN9073
20 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181524006
LN9073 1.6 (0.063)
25 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181524002
LN9073 1.6 (0.063)
30 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181524004
LN9073 1.6 (0.063)
35 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181525012
LN9073 1.6 (0.063)
40 Plate 3.1354T3 D55181721200
LN9073 201
2.5 (0.098)
40A Plate 3.1354T3 D55181721210 A33094G0401
LN9073 211
2.5 (0.098)
45 Plate 3.1354T3 D55181721202
LN9073 203
2.5 (0.098)
45A Plate 3.1354T3 D55181721212 A33094G0401
LN9073 213
2.5 (0.098)
50 Plate 3.1354T3 D55181721204
LN9073 205
2.5 (0.098)
50A Plate 3.1354T3 D55181721214 A33094G0401
LN9073 215
2.5 (0.098)
ASSY Dwg.: D55181704, D55181706

Key to Figure 2

Page 11
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

55 Plate 3.1354T3 D55181721206

LN9073 207
2.5 (0.098)
60 Support 3.1364T3 D92480010200
LN9073 1.2 (0.047)
65 Former Lower 3.4364T7351 D55181740200
LN9073 201
65A Former Lower 3.4364T7351 D55181740202 A33056G0399
LN9073 203
ASSY Dwg.: D55181704

Key to Figure 2

Page 12
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TRIMMABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER − SKIN PLATES − ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT PARAGRAPH.

CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO

PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: OBEY THE GIVEN INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE WHICH LEADS TO THE
APPLICABLE INSPECTION PROGRAM DEFINED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPEC
TIONS (SRI) OF THE SRM, IF NECESSARY.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

1. General

NOTE: CONFIG−3 is applicable after modification 30971G0382 only. For effec

tivity refer to Modification/Service Bulletin List given in Chapter
55−10−00, Page Block 001.
NOTE: For definition of allowable damage refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For Damage Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to chapter Chapter

51−11−14 − CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

This topic contains the allowable damage data applicable to the Skin Plates
of the THS Spar Box. Refer to Figure102 and to table 101. This data is
necessary to find the correct repair procedure.

2. Damage Evaluation

Before you repair the damage structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3.A. for the procedure.
3. Type of Damage

For definition about the types of damage, refer to Chapter 51−77−10, para
graph 2.

For the specific types of damage which can occur, refer to Table 101.
4. Distance Between Damaged Areas and Distance Between Repair Areas

There is a minimum permitted distance between damaged areas and between re
pair areas, refer to Figure 101.

A. Damaged Areas
The minimum acceptable distance between two damaged areas (X) is the
greater value of the following: 50 mm (1.97 in) or 2.5 × Lmax., where
Lmax. is the longest dimension of the damage. If you have less than the

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

permitted distance between damaged areas, work on them together as one

large damaged area.
B. Repair Areas

The minimum acceptable distance between two repair areas (Y) is 100 mm
(3.94 in). If you have less than this distance, refer to the manufactur
er before you do the second repair.

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Distance between Damaged Areas and between Repair Areas

Figure 101

Page 103
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

5. Repair Zones

The Skin Plates of the THS Spar Box are divided into repair zones.
For general information about repair zones, refer to Chapter 51−77−10,
paragraph 3.C.

The repair zones data are given in Figure 102.

Page 104
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

THS Spar Box, Upper Skin Panel Repair Zones

Figure 102 (sheet 1)

Pages 105/106
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

THS Spar Box, Lower Skin Panel Repair Zones

Figure 102 (sheet 2)

Pages 107/108
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE 55−11−00−1−001−00 IS NOT APPLICABLE

TO ALL AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANTS. REFER TO THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR IN
SPECTION (SRI) FOR WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY.

6. Allowable Damage Description/Criteria

INSPECTION
PARAGRAPH/ DIA REPAIR
DESCRIPTION CRITERIA/TYPE INSTRUCTION REF
GRAM CATEGORY
ERENCE
Skin Plates Superficial and 9.A./101 B, C 55−11−00−1−001−0
Linear Damages 0
(Nicks, Gouges,
Abrasions and
Scratches)
Skin Plates Delamination 9.B./102 B, C 55−11−00−1−001−0
(with or with 0
out visible
cracks and
holes) and De
bonding

Table 101
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

7. Allowable Damage
A. For general information about allowable and repairable damage limits re
fer to Chapter 51−77−10, COMPOSITE COMPONENTS − ALLOWABLE DAMAGE AND RE
PAIR CLASSIFICATION.

B. Superficial and linear damages (nicks, gouges, abrasions and scratches),

refer to Diagram 101.

Delamination and Debonding damages, refer to Diagram 102.

8. Repair Limits

The repair limits data gives the time limits in which to make temporary
and permanent repairs. These time limits are given in flight cycles/hours
(FC/FH). The repair limits also tell you which type of repair you can do.
To find the repair limits data applicable to a damaged area, you must know
the following data:
− The repair zone applicable to the damaged area.
− The area, length or depth (as applicable) of the damage to the structure.
− The type of damage (for example: nick, scratch, delamination).

Page 109
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

9. THS Spar Box − Allowable Damage

CAUTION: THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE ON SKIN PANELS MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED

INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−00−1−001−00
AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SEC
TION OF THE SRM. INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM
WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 102.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

A. THS Spar Box, Skin Plates − Superficial and Linear Damages (Nicks,
Gouges, Abrasions and Scratches)
NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 102.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 102
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.
(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 101 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.
Damage in the following zones are not allowed:
− Underneath the stringer foot.
− Underneath the rib attachment.
− Underneath the co−cured joint of the spar chord attachment.
− Riveted areas (area around the fastener 3.5 times the fastener di
ameter).

NOTE: Use the design drawings to determine the exact position on the
skin plate of the internal structure (stringer foot, rib at
tachment or the co−cured joint of the spar chord attachment).
(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 103 and perform the corre
sponding repair action.

Page 110
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

THS Spar Box, Skin Plates − Superficial and Linear Damages (Nicks, Gouges,
Abrasions and Scratches)
Diagram 101
Pages 111/112
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE TYPE OF REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TIME LIMIT BE REPAIR LIFE LIM INSPECTION RE MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN MIN. DIS
SIZE REPAIR CATEGORY FORE REPAIR IT QUIRED TANCE
DAMAGE X mm REPAIRS Y FROM FAS
(in) mm (in) TENER
AREA
The greater
Cover with HST,
value of 50
refer to Chapter Chapter 51−77−12,
Temporary C Immediately 600 FH (1.97) or 100 (3.94) −
51−77−12, para paragraph 2.A.
2.5 Lmax.
graph 2.A.
<1>
(1)
The greater
Superficial and value of 50
Chapter 51−77−12, SRI
Linear Damages Permanent B 600 FH<2> − (1.97) or 100 (3.94) −
paragraph 3.B. 55−11−00−1−001−00
(Nicks, Gouges, 2.5 Lmax.
Abrasion and <1>
Scratches) Refer to Repair of Zones
The greater
Chapter A, B, C and D Refer to Chapter
value of 50
55−11−11, refer to Chapter 55−11−11, Page
Permament Immediately − (1.97) or 100 (3.94) −
(2) Page Block 55−11−11, Page Block 201, Con
2.5 Lmax.
201, Con Block 201, Con fig 3.
<1>
fig 3. fig 3.
− − CONTACT AIRBUS Immediately − − − − −
THS Spar Box, Skin Plates − Superficial and Linear Damages (Nicks, Gouges,
Abrasions and Scratches)
Table 103
<1> Lmax is the maximum size of the damage.

<2> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Pages 113/114
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE ON SKIN PANELS MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED

INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−00−1−001−00
AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SEC
TION OF THE SRM. INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM
WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 104.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

B. THS Spar Box, Skin Plates − Delamination (with or without visible cracks
and holes) and Debonding

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 104.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 104
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Internal structure must not be damaged (stringers, rib attachments

and spar chords).

(2) Compare the damage with Diagram 102 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.
Damage in the following zones are not allowed:
− Underneath the stringer foot.
− Underneath the rib attachment.
− Underneath the co−cured joint of the spar chord attachment.
− Riveted areas (area around the fastener 3.5 times the fastener di
ameter).

NOTE: Use the design drawings to determine the exact position on the
skin plate of the internal structure (stringer foot, rib at
tachment or the co−cured joint of the spar chord attachment).

(3) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 105 and perform the corre
sponding repair action.

Page 115
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

THS Spar Box, Skin Plates − Delamination (with or without visible cracks and
holes) and Debonding
Diagram 102
Page 116
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE TYPE OF REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TIME LIMIT BE REPAIR LIFE LIM INSPECTION RE MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN MIN. DIS
SIZE REPAIR CATEGORY FORE REPAIR IT QUIRED TANCE
DAMAGE X mm REPAIRS Y FROM FAS
(in) mm (in) TENER
AREA
The greater
Cover with HST,
value of 50
refer to Chapter Chapter 51−77−12,
Temporary C Immediately 600 FH (1.97) or 100 (3.94) −
51−77−12, para paragraph 2.A.
2.5 Lmax.
graph 2.A.
<1>
(1)
The greater
Delamination value of 50
SRI55−11−00−1−001
(with or without Permanent B <3> 600 FH<2> − (1.97) or 100 (3.94) −
−00
visible cracks 2.5 Lmax.
and holes) and <1>
Debonding Refer to Repair of Zones
The greater
Chapter A, B, C and D Refer to Chapter
value of 50
55−11−11, refer to Chapter 55−11−11, Page
Permament Immediately − (1.97) or 100 (3.94) −
(2) Page Block 55−11−11, Page Block 201, Con
2.5 Lmax.
201, Con Block 201, Con fig 3.
<1>
fig 3. fig 3.
− − Contact AIRBUS Immediately − − − − −
THS Spar Box, Skin Plates − Delamination (with or without visible cracks and
holes) and Debonding
Table 105
<1> Lmax is the maximum size of the damage.

<2> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

<3> For non perforating damage repair refer to Chapter 51−77−12, paragraph 3.B.

For perforating damage repair refer to Chapter 51−77−13, paragraph 2.H.

Pages 117/118
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SKIN PANELS − HORIZONTAL STABILIZER SPAR−BOX

1. General

NOTE: CONFIG−1 is applicable before modification 25487G00290 only. For ef

fectivity refer to the Modification/Service Bulletin List given in
Chapter 55−10−00 Page Block 001.

NOTE: For Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14

− CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

This topic contains all of the specific repair procedures for the skin pan
els of the Spar−Box. The repair zones and allowable damage data for these
repair procedures is in Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101, Config. 1.

NOTE: Full scale drawings of the THS main Box Skin, are available from Air
bus. These drawings give the operator the possibility to locate
stringers and ribs or to determine skin thicknesses, when doing re
pairs. The drawings are respectively R551−20106 for the upper skin and
R551−20107 for the lower skin.

2. Safety Precautions

There are risks to you and other persons when you work with composite re
pair materials. To prevent risks, read and obey the warnings given below.
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.

WARNING: WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND FILTER MASK WHEN YOU CUT,
ABRADE OR DRILL COMPOSITE MATERIALS. THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MA
TERIALS CAN GET INTO YOUR LUNGS OR ONTO YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE YOU
INJURY. IMMEDIATELY REMOVE DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.

WHEN YOU WORK WITH CFRP COMPOSITE MATERIALS, IMMEDIATELY REMOVE
DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRIC POWER ON
THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST ONLY USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT REPAIR.

CAUTION: OBEY THE GIVEN INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE WHICH LEADS TO THE
APPLICABLE INSPECTION PROGRAM DEFINED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR IN
SPECTIONS (SRI) OF THE SRM, IF NECESSARY.

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER REMARKS

No General Repairs applicable. − −

Table 201
4. Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs

SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE REPAIR INSPECTION

CATEGORY INSTRUCTION REF

ERENCE
Skin Repair with Internal 5.A. 201 B, C 55−11−11−2−002−00
Patches (Flush Repair).
All Repair Zones.
Stringer Repair with In
5.B. 202 B, C 55−11−11−2−002−00
ternal Skin Patches
(Flush Repair). Zones
38−46,51,52,55,56,59−61.
Stringer Repair with In
5.C. 203 B, C 55−11−11−2−002−00
ternal Skin Patches
(Flush Repair). Zone 50.
Stringer Repair with In
5.D. 204 B, C 55−11−11−2−002−00
ternal Skin Patches
(Flush Repair ). Zones 48
and 49.
Stringer Repair with In
5.E. 205 B, C 55−11−11−2−002−00
ternal Skin Patches
(Flush Repair). Zones
47,54,58 and 63.
Delamination Repair for 5.F. 206 B 55−11−11−2−002−00
Stringer, Ribfoot or
Skin.
Repair to Ribfoot Between 5.G. 207 B, C 55−11−11−2−002−00
Stringers (Flush Repair).
Zones
02−08,11,12,15,16,19,20,23
−25,28−30.
Repairs to Ribfoot Be
5.H. 208 B, C 55−11−11−2−002−00
tween Stringers (Flush
Repair). Zones 33−36.

Table 202

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repairs to Ribfoot Be
5.I. 209 B, C 55−11−11−2−002−00

tween Stringer ( Flush
Repair). Zones 14,18,22
and 27.
Repairs to Ribfoot Be
5.J. 210 B, C 55−11−11−2−002−00
tween Stringers (Flush
Repair). Zones 14,18,22
and 27 (Access through
Spar).
Repairs to Ribfoot Be
5.K. 211 B, C 55−11−11−2−002−00
tween Stringers (Flush
Repair). Zones
02−08,10−12,15,16,19,20,23
−25,28−30,33−36 (Access
through spar).
Repairs to Ribfoot Be
5.L. 212 B, C 55−11−11−2−002−00
tween Stringers (Flush
Repair). Zones 09,13,17,21
and 26 (Access through
Spar).
Repairs to Ribfoot Be
5.M. 213 B, C 55−11−11−2−002−00
tween Stringers (Flush
Repair). Zones 13,17,21
and 26.
Repairs to Ribfoot Be
5.N. 214 B, C 55−11−11−2−002−00
tween Stringers (Flush
Repair). Zone 09.
Repairs to Ribfoot Be
5.O. 215 B, C 55−11−11−2−002−00
tween Stringers (Flush
Repair). Zone 10.
Repairs to Ribfoot Be
5.P. 216 B, C 55−11−11−2−002−00
tween Stringers (Flush
Repair). Zones 31 and 32.
Repairs to Ribfoot Be
5.Q. 217 B, C 55−11−11−2−002−00
tween Stringers (Flush
Repair). Zones 31 and 32
(Access through Spar).
Skin Repair with an Ex
5.R. 218 B, C 55−11−11−2−002−00
ternal Patch. All Repair
Zones.

Table 202

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Repair with lami
5.S. 219 B 55−11−11−2−002−00

nated Filler Patch and
Internal Doubler (Flush
Repair). Zones 01−07.
Stringer Repair with an 5.T. 220 B, C 55−11−11−2−002−00
External Skin Patch (Ex

ternal Repair). Zones
38−42.
Stringer Repair with an 5.U. 221 B, C 55−11−11−2−002−00
External Skin Patch (Ex

ternal Repair). Zones
43−46,48,49,56,57,59,61.
Stringer Repair with an 5.V. 222 B, C 55−11−11−2−002−00
External Skin Patch (Ex

ternal Repair). Zones
47,50−55,58,60,62,63.
Repair of Damage to Skin 5.W. 223 B 55−11−11−2−002−00
Flange. Zone 01.
Repair of Damage to Skin 5.X. 224 B 55−11−11−2−002−00
and Flange. Zones
01A,02A,03A.
Repair of Damage to Skin 5.Y. 225 B 55−11−11−2−002−00
and Flange. Zone 04A.
Repair of Fairing/ Skin 5.Z. 226 B 55−11−11−2−001−00
Attachment.

Table 202
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

5. Skin Repairs

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 203.

A. Skin Repair with Internal Patches (Flush Repair). All Repair Zones.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 203
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 205
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Figure 201

− Adhesive
− Thickening Agent
− Cleaning Agent
− Release Agent
− Sealant
− Polyurethane Primer
− Glassfabric Ply
− Resin
(2) Permanent Repair (refer to Figure 201).
− Material No. 08−010C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−057, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−020, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00
− Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Remove the surface paint from the repair area (refer to Chapter
51−77−11).

(b) Draw some lines to show you the correct locations at which to
cut the skin to remove the damaged structure.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Cut out the damaged skin structure to the correct repair shape
and dimension.
(d) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
pieces. Refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1,
paragraph 9.

(e) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions nec

essary for the repair area.
(f) Make some marks on the doubler to show the hole locations neces

sary to attach it to the skin structure.

(g) Pilot−drill at the hole locations in the doubler.

(h) Put the doubler in its correct repair location but on the outer
surface of the skin.

Page 206
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(i) Make some marks on the skin to show the locations of the holes
in the doubler. Remove the doubler.
(j) Pilot−drill at the hole locations on the skin.

(k) Attach the packer/s to the doubler in the correct repairs loca

tions with screw clamps. Make some marks on the packer/s to show
the locations of the holes in the doubler. Remove the packer/s.

NOTE: You must use more that one packer for some repairs to the
Spar−Box skin−panels, some of the repairs do not need pack

er/s, Figure 201 shows you which.

(l) Pilot−drill at the hole locations on the packer/s.

(m) Put the doubler and packer/s in their correct repair locations.
Then attach them to the surface of the inner skin with screw−
pins.

(n) Make some marks on the filler at the hole locations necessary to
attach it to the packer/s and the doubler.

(o) Pilot−drill at the hole locations on the filler.

(p) Put the filler in its correct repair location and make some
marks on the packer/s to show the hole locations in the filler.
Remove the filler repair−piece.

(q) Pilot−drill at the hole locations on the packer/s.

(r) Remove the doubler and the packer/s from the skin structure.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(s) Clean the repair area and the repair pieces with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003).
WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(t) Mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) with the thickening agent
(Material No. 05−057).

(u) Apply the adhesive paste to the surfaces of the repair pieces
and the Spar−Box structure that will touch when assembled.
NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a
maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 in).

(v) Attach the repair pieces to the Spar−Box structure with screw
pins.
(w) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(x) Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

Page 207
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(y) After the adhesive has cured, drill all of the holes in the re
pair area to the necessary diameter for the fasteners.

(z) Countersink the holes on the outerface of the Spar−Box skin and
filler piece.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(aa)Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the repair area.

Make sure that you install the fasteners with the sealant (Mate
rial No. 09−005).

(ab)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).
(ac)Repair the surface paint.

(3) Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 201).

(a) Do the steps 5.A.(2)(a) thru 5.A.(2)(c) of the repair procedure

5.A.(2).
(b) Get the equivalent metal materials for the repair pieces. The
subsequent steps will help you to do this:

1 Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block

101, Config. 1, Figure 103) and find the correct pre−cured CFRP
materials necessary to make a permanent repair.
2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page
Block 201, Config. 1, Figure 203) and find the equivalent metal
materials applicable to the pre−cured CFRP materials.

(c) Do the steps 5.A.(2)(e) thru 5.A.(2)(r) of the repair procedure

5.A.(2).
(d) Apply the correct surface treatments to the repair pieces to
prevent corrosion (chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane
primer, Material No. 16−006).

(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg

Glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No.
08−001C) to the edges of the inner skin surface of the opening
you have made in the skin. Refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block
201, Config. 1, paragraph 10 and Figure 206.

(f) Attach the repair pieces to the Spar−Box structure with screw−
pins.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(g) Drill all of the holes to the correct size for the fasteners.

Page 208
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(h) Countersink the holes on the outerface of the Spar Box skin and
the filler piece.
(i) Remove the repair pieces and deburr the holes.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(j) Clean the repair area and the repair pieces with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003).
WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(k) Apply a layer of sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the surfaces

of the repair pieces that will touch each other or the Spar−Box
structure when assembled.

NOTE: An adhesive shim (Material No. 08−010C) can be used with

the thickening agent (Material No. 05−057) when you assemble
the temporary repair piece. Make sure that you apply re
lease agent (Material No. 05−020) to the Spar−Box structure
before you apply the adhesive shim. The use of sealant (Ma
terial No. 05−020 is not necessary when you use the adhe
sive shim. Refer to paragraph 5.A.(2) for data about how to
use adhesive shim material.

(l) Attach the repair pieces to the Spar−Box structure. Make sure
that you install the fastener with the sealant (Material No.
09−005).
(m) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

(n) Repair the surface paint.

(o) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101, Config. 1, Fig
ure 120). Find out the time limit applicable to the temporary
repair. Tell the Inspection Department what the permissible num
ber of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent repair is neces
sary.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 201).

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces, the sealant or adhesive and
glassfabric from the Spar−Box structure.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured sheet materials necessary to make the
permanent repair (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Con
fig. 1, paragraph 9).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shapes and dimensions nec
essary for the repair area. Use the temporary repair pieces to

Page 209
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

get the correct locations for the fastener holes in the permanent
repair pieces.
(d) Do the steps 5.A.(2)(s) thru 5.A.(2)(ac) of the repair procedure
5.A.(2).

NOTE: Use over−size fasteners when you replace the temporary re
pair pieces with permanent repair pieces.

Page 210
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Repair with Internal Patches. Zones 01−09,11−13,16,17,20−22,25−28,30−33.

Figure 201 (sheet 1)

Pages 211/212
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Repair with Internal Patches. Zones 10,14,18,23 and 29.

Figure 201 (sheet 2)

Pages 213/214
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Repair with Internal Patches. Zones 34 and 35.

Figure 201 (sheet 3)

Pages 215/216
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Repair with Internal Patches. Zones 34 and 35.

Figure 201 (sheet 4)

Pages 217/218
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Repair with Internal Patches. Zones 15,19 and 24.

Figure 201 (sheet 5)

Pages 219/220
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Repair with Internal Patches. Zones 15,19 and 24.

Figure 201 (sheet 6)

Page 221
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 204.

B. Stringer Repair with Internal Skin Patches (Flush Repair). Zones 38−46,
51, 52, 55, 56, 59−61.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 204
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 222
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Figure 202

− Adhesive
− Thickening Agent
− Cleaning Agent
− Release Agent
− Sealant
− Polyurethane Primer
− Glassfabric Ply
− Resin
(2) Permanent Repair (refer to Figure 202).
− Material No. 08−010C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−057, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−020, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00
− Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Remove the surface paint from the repair area (refer to Chapter
51−77−11).

(b) Draw some lines to show you the correct locations at which to
cut the skin to remove the damage structure.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Cut out the damaged skin and stringer structure to the correct
repair shape and dimensions.
(d) Pilot−drill the holes at the correct locations in the stringer
inner−flange.

(e) Get the correct pre−cured and the metal materials necessary to
make the repair pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block
201, Config. 1, paragraph 9.
NOTE: You must make the stringer L−section repair pieces and, de

pending on the repair zone, some of the doubler pieces from
metal. Refer to Figure 202, sheet 5 for details.

(f) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

Page 223
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(g) Apply the correct surface treatments to metal repair parts (chro

mic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer Material No.
16−006).

(h) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg

Glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No.
08−001C) to the surfaces of:
− pre−cured repair parts,
− pre−cured structure surfaces,
where these will touch metal parts when assembled. Refer to
Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1, paragraph 10 and
Figure 206.

(i) Attach the stringer repair section and inner−flange support plate
in their repair location with screw clamps.
(j) Pilot−drill through the stringer repair section, and the inner−
flange support plate at the necessary hole locations in the
stringer inner−flange.

(k) Replace the screw clamps with screw pins.

(l) Attach the stringer L−section repair pieces in their repair loca

tion with screw clamps.

(m) Pilot−drill through the stringer L−section repair pieces and the
stringer web at the correct hole locations.

(n) Replace the screw clamps with screw pins.

(o) Pilot−drill the corner holes in the two half−doublers. These
holes will help you to initially attach the half−doublers to the
skin structure.

(p) Put a half−doubler in its repair location and pilot−drill through

the Spar−Box skin at the corner hole locations. Remove the half−
doubler and do this step again for the other half−doubler.

NOTE: It is possible that you must remove the stringer repair

pieces to drill the holes from the half−doublers to the
skin. If you do this, put back all of the repair pieces
that you remove.

(q) Attach the half−doublers in their correct repair locations with

screw pins.

(r) Make some marks on the skin outer−surface to show the locations
of the holes necessary to attach the half−doublers.
(s) Pilot−drill at the hole locations on the skin outer−surface. If
necessary, install screw pins to keep the half−doublers attached
tightly to the skin.

Page 224
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(t) Make some marks on the skin filler−piece to show the locations
of the necessary attachment holes.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(u) Put the filler and the packer (packer in zone 44 only) in the
repair location and pilot−drill at the hole locations on the
filler.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(v) Remove all of the repair pieces and clean them and the repair
area with the cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(w) Mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) with the thickening agent
(Material No. 05−057).

(x) Apply the adhesive to the surfaces of the stringer repair pieces
and the Spar−Box structure and skin that touch when assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a

maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 in).
(y) Attach the stringer repair pieces to the Spar−Box structure with
screw pins.

(z) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
(aa)Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

(ab)After the adhesive has cured, drill the holes in the stringer
repair pieces to the necessary diameter for the fasteners.

(ac)Install the correct fasteners in the stringer inner−flange and

web.
(ad)Do the steps 5.B.(2)(w) thru 5.B.(2)(aa) of the repair procedure
5.B.(2) as applicable for the half−doublers, the packer if neces

sary, and the filler repair pieces.

(ae)After the adhesive has cured, drill and countersink the fastener
holes to the correct dimensions.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(af)Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the repair area

with the sealant (Material No. 09−005).
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(ag)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

Page 225
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ah)Repair the surface paint.

(3) Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 202)

(a) Do the steps 5.B.(2)(a) thru 5.B.(2)(d) of the repair procedure
5.B.(2).

(b) Get the equivalent metal repair materials that you will use in
place of the pre−cured repair pieces. The subsequent steps will
help you to do this:
1 Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block
101, Config. 1, Figure 104) and find the repair zone number
for the damaged area.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 201, Config. 1, Figure 204 and 205) and find the metal
materials to use in place of pre−cured sheets and sections.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(d) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair parts
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, Material
No.16−006).

(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg

Glassfabric refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No.
08−001C) to the edges of the inner skin surface of the opening
you have made in the skin. Refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block
201, Config. 1, paragraph 10 and Figure 206.

(f) Do the steps 5.B.(2)(i) thru 5.B.(2)(u) of the repair procedure

5.B.(2).
WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(g) Drill and countersink, where applicable, the holes in the repair
pieces to the necessary diameter for the fasteners.

(h) Remove all of the repair pieces and deburr the holes.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(i) Clean the repair pieces and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003).

(j) Apply release agent (Material No. 05−020) to the Spar−Box struc
ture in the repair area.
WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(k) Mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) with the thickening agent
(Material No. 05−057).

Page 226
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(l) Apply the adhesive to the surfaces of the repair parts and the
Spar−Box structure that touch when assembled.
NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a
maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 in).

(m) Attach the repair parts to the Spar−Box structure with screw
pins.

(n) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(o) Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

(p) After the adhesive has cured, apply a blanket layer of glassfab
ric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg Glassfabric, refer to Chap
ter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No. 08−001C) over the repair
area on the inside of the Spar−Box. Where metal repair parts are
in contact with the skin, the blanket layer must overlap the
metal parts by 20 mm (0.787 in) (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page
Block 201, Config. 1 Paragraph 10 and Figure 206). Let the resin
cure.
(q) After the resin has cured, drill the holes in the repair parts
and the Spar−Box structure to the necessary diameter for the
fastener.

(r) Counterskin the fastener holes in the Spar−Box skin.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(s) Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the repair area
with the sealant (Material No. 09−005).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(t) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

(u) Repair the surface paint.

(v) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101, Config.
1, Figure 120 or 124) to find out the time limit applicable to
the temporary repair. Tell the Inspection Department what the
permissible number of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent
repair is necessary.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 202)

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces, adhesive and glassfabric from
the repair area.

Page 227
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Do the steps 5.B.(2)(e) thru 5.B.(2)(i) of the repair procedure

5.B.(2).

(c) Pilot−drill through the stringer repair section and the inner−
flange support plate.

(d) Drill the holes through the ends of the stringer support plate,
in line with the holes in the end of the stringer inner−flanges.
Make these holes in the ends of the support plate the same diam
eter as those in the end of the stringer inner−flanges.

(e) Replace the screw clamps with screw pins.

(f) Attach one stringer L−section repair piece in its repair location
with screw clamps.

(g) Pilot−drill through the stringer L−section repair piece and the
web of the stringer repair section.

(h) Drill the holes through the stringer L−section repair piece, in
line with the holes through the skin and also through the webs
of the stringer ends.

(i) Do the same step with the other stringer L−section repair piece.

(j) Replace the screw clamps with screw pins.

(k) Mark the positions of the corner holes in the two half−doublers
to be in line with the holes through the skin. Drill the corner
holes in the two half−doublers the same size as the holes in the
skin. These holes will help you attach the half−doublers to the
skin structure.

(l) Put a half−doubler in its repair location and drill through the
holes in the skin and through the half−doubler. Make the holes
in the half−doubler the same as those in the skin. Remove the
half−doubler and do this step again for the other half−doubler.

(m) Attach the half−doublers in their correct locations with screw

pins.
(n) Make some marks on the skin filler−piece to show the locations
of the necessary attachment holes.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIAL IS DANGEROUS.

(o) Put the filler and the packer (packer in zone 44 only) in the
repair location and pilot−drill at the hole locations on the
filler.

Page 228
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(p) Do the steps 5.B.(2)(v) thru 5.B.(2)(aa) of the repair procedure

5.B.(2).

(q) After the adhesive has cured, drill all the fastener holes that
were pilot−drilled, to the nominal size for the fasteners. Any
holes that were used for the temporary repair must be drilled
one size oversize.
(r) Install the correct fasteners in the stringer inner−flange sup
port plate, the stringer repair section, both stringer L−section
repair pieces and stringer webs.

(s) Do the steps 5.B.(2)(w) thru 5.B.(2)(aa) of the repair procedure

5.B.(2) as applicable for the half−doublers, the packer if neces
sary and the filler repair pieces.

(t) After the adhesive has cured, drill the fastener holes that were
pilot−drilled, to the nominal size for the fasteners. Any holes
that were used for the temporary repair must be drilled one size
oversize. Countersink the fastener holes in the skin to the cor
rect size for the fasteners.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(u) Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the skin with
sealant (Material No. 09−005).
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(v) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

(w) Repair the surface paint.

Pages 229/230
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with Internal Skin Patches (Flush Repair). Zones

38−46,51,52,55,56,59−61.
Figure 202 (sheet 1)
Pages 231/232
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with Internal Skin Patches (Flush Repair). Zones

38−46,51,52,55,56,59−61.
Figure 202 (sheet 2)
Pages 233/234
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with Internal Skin Patches (Flush Repair). Zones

38−46,51,52,55,56,59−61.
Figure 202 (sheet 3)
Pages 235/236
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with Internal Skin Patches (Flush Repair). Zones

38−46,51,52,55,56,59−61.
Figure 202 (sheet 4)
Pages 237/238
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with Internal Skin Patches (Flush Repair). Zones

38−46,51,52,55,56,59−61.
Figure 202 (sheet 5)
Pages 239/240
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with Internal Skin Patches (Flush Repair). Zones

38−46,51,52,55,56,59−61.
Figure 202 (sheet 6)
Page 241
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 205.

C. Stringer Repair with Internal Skin Patches (Flush Repair). Zone 50.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 205
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 242
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Figure 203

− Adhesive
− Thickening Agent
− Cleaning Agent
− Release Agent
− Sealant
− Polyurethane Primer
− Glassfabric Ply
− Resin
(2) Permanent Repair (refer to Figure 203).
− Material No. 08−010C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−057, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−020, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00
− Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Remove the surface paint from the repair area (refer to Chapter
51−77−11).

(b) Draw some lines to show you the correct locations at which to
cut the skin to remove the damage structure.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Cut out the damaged skin and stringer structure to the correct
repair shape and dimensions.
(d) Pilot−drill the holes at the correct locations in the stringer
inner−flange.

(e) Get the correct pre−cured and the metal materials necessary to
make the repair pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block
201, Config. 1, paragraph 9.
NOTE: You must make the stringer L−section and the two half−dou

blers from metal. Refer to Figure 203, sheet 3 for details.

(f) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

Page 243
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(g) Apply the correct surface treatments to metal repair pieces to

prevent corrosion (chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane
primer, Material No. 16−006).

(h) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg

Glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No.
08−001C) to the surfaces of:
− pre−cured repair parts,
− pre−cured structure surfaces,
where these will touch metal parts when assembled. Refer to
Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1, paragraph 10 and
Figure 206.

(i) Attach the stringer repair section and inner−flange support plate
in their repair location with screw clamps.
(j) Pilot−drill through the stringer repair section and the inner−
flange support plate at the necessary hole locations in the
stringer inner−flange.

(k) Replace the screw clamps with screw pins.

(l) Attach the stringer L−section repair pieces in their repair loca

tion with screw clamps.

(m) Pilot−drill through the stringer L−section repair pieces and the
stringer web at the correct hole locations.

(n) Replace the screw clamps with screw pins.

(o) Pilot−drill the corner holes in the two half−doublers. These
holes will help you to initially attach the half−doublers to the
skin structure.

(p) Put a half−doubler in its repair location and pilot−drill through

the Spar−Box skin at the corner hole locations. Remove the half−
doubler and do this step again for the other half−doubler.

NOTE: It is possible that you must remove the stringer repair

pieces to drill the holes from the half−doublers to the
skin. If you do this, put back all of the repair pieces
that you remove.

(q) Attach the half−doublers in their correct repair locations with

screw pins.

(r) Make some marks on the skin outer−surface to show the locations
of the holes necessary to attach the half−doublers.
(s) Pilot−drill at the hole locations on the skin outer−surface. If
necessary, install screw pins to keep the half−doublers attached
tightly to the skin.

Page 244
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(t) Make some marks on the skin filler−piece to show the locations
of the necessary attachment holes.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(u) Put the filler−piece, the packer−piece and the shim plate in the
repair location and pilot−drill at the hole locations on the
filler−piece.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(v) Remove all of the repair pieces and clean them and the repair
area with the cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(w) Mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) with the thickening agent
(Material No. 05−057).

(x) Apply the adhesive to the surfaces of the stringer repair pieces
and the Spar−Box structure and skin that touch when assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a

maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 in).
(y) Attach the stringer repair pieces to the Spar−Box structure with
screw pins.

(z) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
(aa)Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

(ab)After the adhesive has cured, drill the holes in the stringer
repair pieces to the necessary diameter for the fasteners.

(ac)Install the correct fasteners in the stringer inner−flange and

web.
(ad)Do the steps 5.C.(2)(w) thru 5.C.(2)(aa) as applicable, for the
half−doublers, the shim plate, the packer−piece and the filler−
piece.

(ae)After the adhesive has cured, drill and countersink the fastener
holes to the correct dimensions.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(af)Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the repair area

with the sealant (Material No. 09−005).
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(ag)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

Page 245
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ah)Repair the surface paint.

(3) Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 203).

(a) Do the steps 5.C.(2)(a) thru 5.C.(2)(d) of the repair procedure
5.C.(2).

(b) Get the equivalent metal repair materials that you will use in
place of the pre−cured repair pieces. The subsequent steps will
help you to do this:
1 Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block
101, Config. 1, Figure 104) and find the repair zone number
for the damaged area.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 201, Config. 1, Figure 204 and 205) and find the metal
materials to use in place of pre−cured sheets and sections.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(d) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair parts
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, Material
No. 16−006).

(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg

Glassfabric refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No.
08−001C) to the edges of the inner skin surface of the opening
you have made in the skin. Refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block
201, Config. 1, paragraph 10 and Figure 206.

(f) Do the steps 5.C.(2)(i) thru 5.C.(2)(u) of the repair procedure

5.C.(2).
WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(g) Drill, and countersink where applicable, the holes in the repair
pieces to the necessary diameter for the fasteners.

(h) Remove all of the repair pieces and deburr the holes.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(i) Clean the repair pieces and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003).

(j) Apply release agent (Material No. 05−020) to the Spar−Box struc
ture in the repair area.
WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(k) Mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) with the thickening agent
(Material No. 05−057).

Page 246
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(l) Apply the adhesive to the surfaces of the repair parts and the
Spar−Box structure that touch when assembled.
NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a
maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 in).

(m) Attach the repair parts to the Spar−Box structure with screw
pins.

(n) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(o) Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

(p) After the adhesive has cured, apply a blanket layer of glassfab
ric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg Glassfabric, refer to Chap
ter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No. 08−001C) over the repair
area on the inside of the Spar−Box. Where metal repair parts are
in contact with the skin, the blanket layer must overlap the
metal parts by 20 mm (0.787 in) (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page
Block 201, Config. 1, Paragraph 10 and Figure 206). Let the res
in cure.
(q) After the resin has cured, drill the holes in the repair parts
and the Spar−Box structure to the necessary diameter for the
fastener.

(r) Counterskin the fastener holes in the Spar−Box skin.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(s) Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the repair area
with the sealant (Material No. 09−005).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(t) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

(u) Repair the surface paint.

(v) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101, Config.
1 Figure 120 or 124) to find out the time limit applicable to
the temporary repair. Tell the Inspection Department what the
permissible number of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent
repair is necessary.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 203).

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces, adhesive and fiber−glass from
the repair area.

Page 247
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Do the steps 5.C.(2)(e) thru 5.C.(2)(i) of the repair procedure

5.C.(2).

(c) Pilot−drill through the stringer repair section and the inner−
flange support plate.

(d) Drill the holes through the ends of the stringer support plate,
in line with the holes in the ends of the stringer inner−
flanges. Make these holes in the ends of the support plate the
same diameter as those in the ends of the stringer inner−flanges.

(e) Replace the screw clamps with screw pins.

(f) Attach one stringer L−section repair piece in its repair location
with screw clamps.

(g) Pilot−drill through the stringer L−section repair piece and the
web of the stringer repair section.

(h) Drill the holes through the stringer L−section repair piece, in
line with the holes through the skin and also through the webs
of the stringer ends.

(i) Do the same step with the other stringer L−section repair piece.

(j) Replace the screw clamps with screw pins.

(k) Mark the positions of the corner holes in the two half−doublers
to be in line with the holes through the skin. Drill the corner
holes in the two half−doublers the same size as the holes in the
skin. These holes will help you attach the half−doublers to the
skin structure.

(l) Put a half−doubler in its repair location and drill through the
holes in the skin and through the half−doubler. Make the holes
in the half−doubler the same as those in the skin. Remove the
half−doubler and do this step again for the other half−doubler.

(m) Attach the half−doublers in their correct locations with screw

pins.
(n) Mark the skin filler piece to show the location of the attach
ment holes.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIAL IS DANGEROUS.

(o) Put the filler−piece, the packer−piece and the shim plate in the
repair location and pilot−drill at the hole locations on the
filler−piece.

Page 248
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(p) Do the steps 5.C.(2)(v) thru 5.C.(2)(aa) of the repair procedure

5.C.(2).

(q) After the adhesive has cured, drill all the pilot holes of the
fastener holes to the fastener nominal size. The temporary repair
fastener holes must be drilled one size oversize.

(r) Install the correct fasteners in the stringer inner−flange and

web.

(s) Do the steps 5.C.(2)(v) thru 5.C.(2)(aa) of the repair procedure

5.C.(2) as applicable for the half−doublers, the shim plate, the
packer piece and the filler piece.
(t) After the adhesive has cured, drill the fastener holes that were
pilot−drilled, to the nominal size for the fasteners. Any holes
that were used for the temporary repair must be drilled one size
oversize. Counterskin the fastener holes in the skin to the cor
rect size for the fasteners.
WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(u) Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the skin with
sealant (Material No. 09−005).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(v) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

(w) Repair the surface paint.

Pages 249/250
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with Internal Skin Patches (Flush Repair). Zone 50

Figure 203 (sheet 1)

Pages 251/252
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with Internal Skin Patches (Flush Repair). Zone 50

Figure 203 (sheet 2)

Page 253
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with Internal Skin Patches (Flush Repair). Zone 50

Figure 203 (sheet 3)

Page 254
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with Internal Skin Patches (Flush Repair). Zone 50

Figure 203 (sheet 4)

Page 255
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 206.

D. Stringer Repair with Internal Skin Patches (Flush Repair). Zones 48 and
49.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 206
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 256
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Figure 204

− Adhesive
− Thickening Agent
− Cleaning Agent
− Release Agent
− Sealant
− Polyurethane Primer
− Glassfabric Ply
− Resin
(2) Permanent Repair (refer to Figure 204).
− Material No. 08−010C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−057, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−020, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00
− Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Remove the surface paint from the repair area (refer to Chapter
51−77−11).

(b) Draw some lines to show you the correct locations at which to
cut the skin to remove the damaged structure.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Cut out the damaged skin and stringer structure to the correct
repair shape and dimensions.
(d) Pilot−drill the holes at the correct locations in the stringer
inner−flange.

(e) Get the correct pre−cured and the metal materials necessary to
make the repair pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block
201, Config. 1, paragraph 9).
NOTE: You must make the stringer L−section repair pieces from
metal. The half−doubler nearest the rear spar in zone 49
must also be made from metal. Refer to Figure 204, sheet 3
for details.

(f) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

Page 257
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(g) Apply the correct surface treatments to metal repair pieces to

prevent corrosion (chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane
primer, Material No. 16−006).

(h) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg

Glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No.
08−001C) to the surfaces of:
− pre−cured repair parts,
− pre−cured structure surfaces,
where these will touch metal parts when assembled. Refer to
Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1, paragraph 10 and
Figure 206.

(i) Attach the stringer repair section and inner−flange support plate
in their repair location with screw clamps.
(j) Pilot−drill through the stringer repair section and the inner−
flange support plate at the necessary hole locations in the
stringer inner−flange.

(k) Replace the screw clamps with screw pins.

(l) Attach the stringer L−section repair pieces in their repair loca

tion with screw clamps.

(m) Pilot−drill through the stringer L−section repair pieces and the
stringer web at the correct hole locations.

(n) Replace the screw clamps with screw pins.

(o) Pilot−drill the corner holes in the two half−doublers. These
holes will help you to initially attach the half−doublers to the
skin structure.

(p) Put a half−doubler in its repair location and pilot−drill through

the Spar−Box skin at the corner hole locations. Remove the half−
doubler and do this step again for the other half−doubler.

NOTE: It is possible that you must remove the stringer repair

pieces to drill the holes from the half−doublers to the
skin. If you do this, put back all of the repair pieces
that you remove.

(q) Attach the half−doublers in their correct repair locations with

screw pins.

(r) Make some marks on the skin outer−surface to show the locations
of the holes necessary, install screw pins to keep the half−dou

blers attached tightly to the skin.

(s) Pilot−drill at the hole locations on the skin outer−surface. If

necessary, install screw pins to keep the half−doublers attached
tightly to the skin.

Page 258
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(t) Make some marks on the skin filler−piece to show the locations
of the necessary attachment holes.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(u) Put the filler−piece in the repair location and pilot−drill at

the hole locations on the filler−piece.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(v) Remove all of the repair pieces and clean them and the repair
area with the cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(w) Mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) with the thickening agent
(Material No. 05−057).
(x) Apply the adhesive to the surfaces of the stringer repair pieces,
the Spar−Box structure and skin that touch when assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a

maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 in).

(y) Attach the stringer repair pieces to the Spar−Box structure with
screw pins.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(z) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
(aa)Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

(ab)After the adhesive has cured, drill the holes in the stringer
repair pieces to the necessary diameter for the fasteners.

(ac)Install the correct fasteners in the stringer inner−flange and

web.

(ad)Do the steps 5.D.(2)(w) thru 5.D.(2)(aa) of the repair procedure

5.D.(2) as applicable, for the half−doublers and filler repair
pieces.

(ae)After the adhesive has cured, drill and countersink the fastener
holes in the outer skin to the correct dimensions.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(af)Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the repair area

with the sealant (Material No. 09−005).

Page 259
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(ag)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

(ah)Repair the surface paint.

(3) Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 204)

(a) Do the steps 5.D.(2)(a) thru 5.D.(2)(d) of the repair procedure

5.D.(2).
(b) Get the equivalent metal repair materials that you will use in
place of the pre−cured repair pieces. The subsequent steps will
help you to do this:

1 Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block

101, Config. 1, Figure 104) and find the repair zone number
for the damaged area.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 201, Config. 1, Figures 204 and 205) and find the metal
materials to use in place of pre−cured sheets and sections.
(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(d) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair pieces
to prevent corrosion (chromic acid anodizing and then polyure
thane primer, Material No. 16−006).

(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg

Glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No.
08−001C) to the edges of the inner skin surface of the opening
you have made in the skin. Refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block
201, Config. 1, paragraph 10 and Figure 206.

(f) Do the steps 5.D.(2)(i) thru 5.D.(2)(u) of the repair procedure

5.D.(2).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(g) Drill, and countersink where applicable, the holes in the repair
pieces to the necessary diameter for the fasteners.

(h) Remove all of the repair pieces and deburr the holes.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(i) Clean the repair pieces and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003).

(j) Apply release agent (Material No. 05−020) to the Spar−Box struc
ture in the repair area.

Page 260
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(k) Mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) with the thickening agent
(Material No. 05−057).

(l) Apply the adhesive to the surfaces of the repair parts and the
Spar−Box structure that touch when assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a

maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 in).
(m) Attach the repair parts to the Spar−Box structure with screw
pins.

(n) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
(o) Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

(p) After the adhesive has cured, apply a blanket layer of glassfab
ric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg Glassfabric, refer to Chap
ter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No. 08−001C) over the repair
area on the inside of the Spar−Box. Where metal repair parts are
in contact with the skin, the blanket layer must overlap the
metal parts by 20 mm (0.787 in) (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page
Block 201, Config. 1, Paragraph 10 and Figure 206). Let the res
in cure.

(q) After the resin has cured, drill the holes in the repair parts
and the Spar−Box structure to the necessary diameter for the
fastener.

(r) Counterskin the fastener holes in the Spar−Box skin.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(s) Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the repair area
with the sealant (Material No. 09−005).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(t) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).
(u) Repair the surface paint.

(v) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101, Config.
1, Figure 120 or 124) to find out the time limit applicable to
the temporary repair. Tell the Inspection Department what the
permissible number of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent
repair is necessary.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 204).

Page 261
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces, adhesive and glassfabric from
the repair area.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Do the steps 5.D.(2)(e) thru 5.D.(2)(i) of the repair procedure

5.D.(2).

(c) Pilot−drill through the stringer repair section and the inner−
flange support plate.
(d) Drill the holes through the ends of the stringer support plate,
in line with the holes in the end of the stringer inner−flanges.
Make these holes in the ends of the support plate the same diam
eter as those in the end of the stringer inner−flanges.
(e) Replace the screw clamps with screw pins.

(f) Attach one stringer L−section repair piece in its repair location
with screw clamps.

(g) Pilot−drill through the stringer L−section repair piece and the
web of the stringer repair section.
(h) Drill the holes through the stringer L−section repair piece, in−
line with the holes through the skin and also through the webs
of the stringer ends.

(i) Do the same step with the other stringer L−section repair piece.
(j) Replace the screw clamps with screw pins.

(k) Mark the positions of the corner holes in the two half−doublers
to be in−line with the holes through the skin. Drill the corner
holes in the two half−doublers the same size as the holes in the
skin.
(l) Put a half−doubler in its repair location and drill through the
holes in the skin and through the half−doubler. Make the holes
in the half−doubler the same as those in the skin. Remove the
half−doubler and do this step again for the other half−doubler.
(m) Attach the half−doublers in their correct locations with screw
pins.

(n) Make some marks on the skin filler−piece to show the locations
of the necessary attachment holes.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIAL IS DANGEROUS.

(o) Put the filler−piece in its repair location and pilot−drill at
the hole locations on the filler−piece.

Page 262
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(p) Do the steps 5.D.(2)(v) thru 5.D.(2)(aa) of the repair procedure

5.D.(2).

(q) After the adhesive has cured, drill all the fastener holes that
were pilot−drilled, to the nominal size for the fasteners. Any
holes that were used for the temporary repair must be drilled
one size oversize.
(r) Install the correct fasteners in the stringer inner−flange sup
port plate, the stringer repair section, both stringer L−section
repair pieces and stringer webs.

(s) Do the steps 5.D.(2)(w) thru 5.D.(2)(aa) of the repair procedure

5.D.(2) as applicable for the half−doublers and the filler repair
piece.

(t) After the adhesive has cured, drill the fastener holes that were
pilot−drilled, to the nominal size for the fasteners. Any holes
that were used for the temporary repair must be drilled one size
oversize. Counterskin the fastener holes in the skin to the cor
rect size for the fasteners.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(u) Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the skin with
sealant (Material No. 09−005).
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(v) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

(w) Repair the surface paint.

Pages 263/264
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with Internal Skin Patches (Flush Repair). Zones 48 and 49
Figure 204 (sheet 1)

Pages 265/266
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with Internal Skin Patches (Flush Repair). Zones 48 and 49
Figure 204 (sheet 2)

Page 267
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with Internal Skin Patches (Flush Repair). Zones 48 and 49
Figure 204 (sheet 3)

Page 268
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with Internal Skin Patches (Flush Repair). Zones 48 and 49
Figure 204 (sheet 4)

Page 269
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 207.

E. Stringer Repair with Internal Skin Patches (Flush Repair). Zones 47, 54,
58 and 63.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 207
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 270
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Figure 205

− Adhesive
− Thickening Agent
− Cleaning Agent
− Release Agent
− Sealant
− Polyurethane Primer
− Glassfabric Ply
− Resin
(2) Permanent Repair (refer to Figure 205).
− Material No. 08−010C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−057, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−020, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00
− Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Remove the surface paint from the repair area (refer to Chapter
51−77−11).

(b) Draw some lines to show you the correct locations at which to
cut the skin to remove the damaged structure.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Cut out the damaged skin and stringer structure to the correct
repair shape and dimensions.
(d) Pilot−drill the holes at the correct locations in the stringer
inner−flange.

(e) Get the correct pre−cured and the metal materials necessary to
make the repair pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block
201, Config. 1, paragraph 9.
NOTE: You must make the stringer L−section and the two half−dou

blers from metal. Refer to Figure 205, sheet 3 for details.

(f) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

Page 271
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(g) Apply the correct surface treatments to metal repair pieces to

prevent corrosion (chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane
primer, Material No. 16−006).

(h) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg

Glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No.
08−001C) to the surfaces of:
− pre−cured repair parts,
− pre−cured structure surfaces,
where these will touch metal parts when assembled. Refer to
Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1, paragraph 10 and
Figure 206.

(i) Attach the stringer repair section and inner−flange support plate
in their repair location with screw clamps.
(j) Pilot−drill through the stringer repair section and the inner−
flange support plate at the necessary hole locations in the
stringer inner−flange.

(k) Replace the screw clamps with screw pins.

(l) Attach the stringer L−section repair pieces in their repair loca

tion with screw clamps.

(m) Pilot−drill through the stringer L−section repair pieces and the
stringer web at the correct hole locations.

(n) Replace the screw clamps with screw pins.

(o) Pilot−drill the corner holes in the two half−doublers. These
holes will help you to initially attach the half−doublers to the
skin structure.

(p) Put a half−doubler in its repair location and pilot−drill through

the Spar−Box skin at the corner hole locations. Remove the half−
doubler and do this step again for the other half−doubler.

NOTE: It is possible that you must remove the stringer repair

pieces to drill the holes from the half−doublers to the
skin. If you do this, put back all of the repair pieces
that you remove.

(q) Attach the half−doublers in their correct repair locations with

screw pins.

(r) Make some marks on the skin outer−surface to show the locations
of the holes necessary, install screw pins to keep the half−dou

blers attached tightly to the skin.

(s) Pilot−drill at the hole locations on the skin outer−surface. If

necessary, install screw pins to keep the half−doublers attached
tightly to the skin.

Page 272
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(t) Make some marks on the skin filler−piece to show the locations
of the necessary attachment holes.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(u) Put the filler−piece, the packer−piece and the shim plate (shim
plate not necessary for zone 47) in the repair location and pi

lot−drill at the hole locations on the filler−piece.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(v) Remove all of the repair pieces and clean them and the repair
area with the cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(w) Mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) with the thickening agent
(Material No. 05−057).

(x) Apply the adhesive to the surfaces of the stringer repair pieces
and the Spar−Box structure and skin that touch when assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a

maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 in).
(y) Attach the stringer repair pieces to the Spar−Box structure with
screw pins.

(z) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
(aa)Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

(ab)After the adhesive has cured, drill the holes in the stringer
repair pieces to the necessary diameter for the fasteners.

(ac)Install the correct fasteners in the stringer inner−flange and

web.
(ad)Do the steps 5.E.(2)(w) thru 5.E.(2)(aa) of the repair procedure
5.E.(2) as applicable for the half−doublers, the shim plate (shim
plate not necessary for zone 47), the packer−piece and the fill

er−piece.
(ae)After the adhesive has cured, drill and countersink the fastener
holes to the correct dimensions.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(af)Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the repair area

with the sealant (Material No. 09−005).

Page 273
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(ag)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

(ah)Repair the surface paint.

(3) Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 205).

(a) Do the steps 5.E.(2)(a) thru 5.E.(2)(d) of the repair procedure

5.E.(2).
(b) Get the equivalent metal repair materials that you will use in
place of the pre−cured repair pieces. The subsequent steps will
help you do this:

1 Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block

101, Config. 1, Figure 104) and find the repair zone number
for the damaged area.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 201, Config. 1, Figure 204 and 205) and find the metal
materials to use in place of pre−cured sheets and sections.
(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(d) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair parts
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, Material
No. 16−006).

(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg

Glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No.
08−001C) to the edges of the inner skin surface of the opening
you have made in the skin. Refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block
201, Config. 1, paragraph 10 and Figure 206.

(f) Do the steps 5.E.(2)(i) thru 5.E.(2)(u) of the repair procedure

5.E.(2).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(g) Drill, and countersink where applicable, the holes in the repair
pieces to the necessary diameter for the fasteners.

(h) Remove all of the repair pieces and deburr the holes.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(i) Clean the repair pieces and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003).

(j) Apply release agent (Material No. 05−020) to the Spar−Box struc
ture in the repair area.

Page 274
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(k) Mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) with the thickening agent
(Material No. 05−057).

(l) Apply the adhesive to the surfaces of the repair parts and the
Spar−Box structure that touch when assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a

maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 in).
(m) Attach the repair parts to the Spar−Box structure with screw
pins.

(n) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
(o) Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

(p) After the adhesive has cured, apply a blanket layer of glassfab
ric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg Glassfabric, refer to Chap
ter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No. 08−001C) over the repair
area on the inside of the Spar−Box. Where metal repair parts are
in contact with the skin, the blanket layer must overlap the
metal parts by 20 mm (0.787 in) (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page
Block 201, Config. 1, paragraph 10 and Figure 206). Let the res
in cure.

(q) After the resin has cured, drill the holes in the repair parts
and the Spar−Box structure to the necessary diameter for the
fastener.

(r) Counterskin the fastener holes in the Spar−Box skin.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(s) Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the repair area
with the sealant (Material No 09−005).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(t) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).
(u) Repair the surface paint.

(v) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101 Config.
1, Figure 120 or 124) to find out the time limit applicable to
the temporary repair. Tell the Inspection Department what the
permissible number of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent
repair is necessary.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 205).

Page 275
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces, adhesive and glassfabric from
the repair area.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Do the steps 5.E.(2)(e) thru 5.E.(2)(i) of the repair procedure

5.E.(2).

(c) Pilot−drill through the stringer repair section and the inner−
flange support plate.
(d) Drill the holes through the ends of the stringer support plate,
in line with the holes in the ends of the stringer inner−
flanges. Make these holes in the ends of the support plate the
same diameter as those in the ends of the stringer inner−flanges.
(e) Replace the screw clamps with screw pins.

(f) Attach one stringer L−section repair piece in its repair location
with screw clamps.

(g) Pilot−drill through the stringer L−section repair piece and the
web of the stringer repair section.
(h) Drill the holes through the stringer L−section repair piece, in
line with the holes through the skin and also through the webs
of the stringer ends.

(i) Do the same step with the other stringer L−section repair piece.
(j) Replace the screw clamps with screw pins.

(k) Mark the positions of the corner holes in the two half−doublers
to be in line with the holes through the skin. Drill the corner
holes in the two half−doublers the same size as those in the
skin. These holes will help you attach the half−doublers to the
skin structure.

(l) Put a half−doubler in its repair location and drill through the
holes in the skin and through the half−doubler. Make the holes
in the half−doubler the same as those in the skin. Remove the
half−doubler and do this step again for the other half−doubler.
(m) Attach the half−doublers in their correct locations with screw
pins.

(n) Make some marks on the skin filler−piece to show the locations
of the necessary attachment holes.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIAL IS DANGEROUS.

(o) Put the filler−piece, the packer−piece and the shim plate (shim
plate not necessary in zone 47) in the repair location and pi
lot−drill at the hole locations on the filler−piece.

Page 276
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(p) Do the steps 5.E.(2)(v) thru 5.E.(2)(aa) of the repair procedure

5.E.(2).

(q) After the adhesive has cured, drill all the fastener holes that
were pilot−drilled, to the nominal size for the fasteners. Any
holes that were used for the temporary repair must be drilled
one size oversize.
(r) Install the correct fasteners in the stringer inner−flange and
web.

(s) Do the steps 5.E.(2)(v) thru 5.E.(2)(aa) of the repair procedure

5.E.(2) as applicable for the half−doublers, the shim plate (shim
plate not necessary in zone 47), the packer piece and the filler
piece.

(t) After the adhesive has cured, drill the fastener holes that were
pilot−drilled, to the nominal size for the fasteners. Any holes
that were used for the temporary repair must be drilled one size
oversize. Counterskin the fastener holes in the skin to the cor
rect size for the fasteners.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(u) Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the skin with
sealant (Material No. 09−005).
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(v) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

(w) Repair the surface paint.

Pages 277/278
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with Internal Skin Patches (Flush Repair). Zones 47,54,58 and
63
Figure 205 (sheet 1)
Pages 279/280
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with Internal Skin Patches (Flush Repair). Zones 47,54,58 and
63
Figure 205 (sheet 2)
Pages 281/282
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with Internal Skin Patches (Flush Repair). Zones 47,54,58 and
63
Figure 205 (sheet 3)
Pages 283/284
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with Internal Skin Patches (Flush Repair). Zones 47,54,58 and
63
Figure 205 (sheet 4)
Page 285
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 208.

F. Delamination Repair for Stringer, Ribfoot or Skin.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 208
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to

Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 206).

(a) Make some marks to show the locations of the new holes necessary
to repair the delaminated area.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Drill the correct diameter holes at the necessary locations in

the repair area. Start at the outer hole locations and then work
to the inner hole locations. After you drill each hole, put a
screw pin into it to clamp the delaminated layers together. This
will help to stop any more delamination damage.

Page 286
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(c) If applicable, countersink the holes on the outer surface of the

skin the correct dimension for the fasteners.
WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Apply the sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the countersunk holes
in the skin surface.

(e) Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the repair area.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(f) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

Pages 287/288
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Typical Delamination Repair for Stringer, Ribfoot and Skin

Figure 206

Pages 289/290
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 209.

G. Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 02−08, 11, 12,
15, 16, 19, 20, 23−25, 28−30.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 209
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 291
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Figure 207

− Adhesive
− Thickening Agent
− Cleaning Agent
− Sealant
− Polyurethane Primer
− Resin
− Release Agent
− Glassfabric Ply
(2) Permanent Repair (refer to Figure 207).
− Material No. 08−010C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−057, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−020, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut away the skin, the ribfoot structure and the rib to the nec

essary shape and dimensions for the repair. Make sure that you
remove all of the damaged structure.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
pieces (refer to Figure 207, sheet 3).
(c) Make the repair pieces to the necessary shapes and dimensions for
the repair, but do not drill any holes.
NOTE: The packer and the shims are not fitted in all repair
zones, refer to Figure 207, sheet 3 for details. In some
repair zone, liquid shim (Adhesive, Material No. 08−010C,
and Thickening Agent, Material No. 05−057) is used in place
of pre−cured shims. The liquid shim is applied on final as

sembly of repair parts.

(d) Mark the position of the three fastener holes on the leg of the
repair section and pilot−drill these holes.

(e) Position the repair section accurately in its repair location and
secure with screw clamps. Pilot−drill the holes through the rib
and then drill them full size to suit the diameter of the fas

Page 292
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

teners. The fasteners must be the same type and diameter as

those used to attach the same rib to the ribfoot structure.
(f) Remove the repair section, deburr holes in repair section and the
rib.

(g) Install the repair section in its repair location again and se

cure with screw pins.

(h) Use the hole that you have, cut in the skin to position the
fastener tool. Install the three fasteners through the repair
section and the rib.

(i) Mark the positions of skin fasteners onto a scrap piece of sheet
metal and pilot−drill the fasteners holes through the metal to
make a template.

(j) Use the template to pilot−drill the fastener holes in: the dou

bler, the filler piece, the support plate, and if applicable the
packer and the shims.

(k) Locate the template in the correct position on the skin and pi

lot−drill the fastener holes through the skin.

(l) Deburr all pilot−holes in the skin and the repair parts.

(m) Assemble all repair parts in their repair location and secure
with screw pins. From the holes in the skin filler pieces, pi

lot−drill the fastener holes through the two flanges of the re

pair section.

(n) Remove all repair pieces, except the repair section, from the
Spar−Box.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(o) Clean the repair area and the repair pieces with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(p) Mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) with the thickening agent
(Material No. 05−057).

(q) Apply the adhesive to the surfaces of the repair pieces and the
Spar−Box structure that touch when assembled. In some repair
zones, shims are formed by the adhesive when the adhesive has
cured.
NOTE: The repair adhesive, when used as a shim material, is used
to a maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 in).

(r) Pass the repair pieces through the hole in the skin and assemble
them in their repair location. Secure with screw pins.

Page 293
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(s) Where possible, remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area
with the cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003). Access to the in
ternal repair area may be possible through lightening holes in
the Spar.

(t) Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(u) After the adhesive has cured, remove the screw pins and drill
the fastener holes in the skin to the necessary diameter for the
fasteners.

(v) Countersink the fastener holes on the skin outer surface.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(w) Install the countersunk fasteners in the skin with sealant. (Ma
terial No. 09−005).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(x) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).
(y) Restore the surface paint.

(z) Where possible, remove the waste material from Spar−Box interior
with a vacuum cleaner. Access to the Spar−Box interior may be
possible through lightening holes in Spars.
(3) Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 207).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut away the skin, the ribfoot structure and the rib to the nec
essary shape and dimensions for the repair. Make sure that you
remove all of the damaged structure.
(b) Get the equivalent metal repair materials that you will use in
place of the pre−cured repair pieces. The subsequent steps will
help you to do this:

1 Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101
Config. 1, Figure 105) and find the repair zone for the dam
aged area.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 201 Config. 1, Figures 207 and 208) and find the metal
materials to use in place of pre−cured sheets and sections.

Page 294
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.
NOTE: The packer and the shim are not fitted in all repair
zones, refer to Figure 207, sheet 3 for details. In some
repair zones liquid shim the adhesive (Material No.08−010C)
and thickening agent (Material No. 05−057) is used in place
of pre−cured or metal shims. The liquid shim is applied on
final assembly of repair parts.

(d) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair parts
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, Material
No. 16−006).

(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg

Glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No.
08−001C) to the surfaces of:
− pre−cured repair parts
− pre−cured structure surfaces

where these touch metal parts when assembled. Refer to Chapter

55−11−00, Page Block 201 Config. 1, paragraph 10 and Figure 206.
(f) Let the resin cure.

(g) Do the steps 5.G.(2)(d) thru 5.G.(2)(o) of repair procedure

5.G.(2).

(h) Apply release agent (Material No. 05−020) to the Spar−Box struc

ture in the repair area.

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(i) Do the steps 5.G.(2)(p) thru 5.G.(2)(z) of repair procedure

5.G.(2).
(j) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101 Config. 1, Figure
120) to find out the time limit applicable to the temporary re

pair. Tell the Inspection Department what the permissible number
of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent repair is necessary.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 207).

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces, adhesive, sealant and glass

fabric from the repair area.

Page 295
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Do the steps 5.G.(2)(b) thru 5.G.(2)(z) of repair procedure

5.G.(2).
NOTE: You can use the temporary repair pieces to get the correct
locations for the fastener holes in the permanent repair
pieces.

NOTE: All fastener holes in the structure that were used for the
temporary repair must be drilled one size oversize for the
permanent after temporary repair.

Page 296
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair) Zones

02−08,11,12,15,16,19,20,23−25,28−30.
Figure 207 (sheet 1)
Pages 297/298
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair) Zones

02−08,11,12,15,16,19,20,23−25,28−30.
Figure 207 (sheet 2)
Page 299
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair) Zones

02−08,11,12,15,16,19,20,23−25,28−30.
Figure 207 (sheet 3)
Page 300
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair) Zones

02−08,11,12,15,16,19,20,23−25,28−30.
Figure 207 (sheet 4)
Page 301
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 210.

H. Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 33−36.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 210
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 302
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Figure 208

− Adhesive
− Thickening Agent
− Cleaning Agent
− Sealant
− Polyurethane Primer
− Resin
− Release Agent
− Glassfabric Ply
(2) Permanent Repair (refer to Figure 208).
− Material No. 08−010C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−057, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−020, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut away the skin, the ribfoot structure and the rib to the nec

essary shape and dimensions for the repair. Make sure that you
remove all of the damaged structure.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201 Config. 1,
paragraph 9).

(c) Make the repair pieces to the necessary shapes and dimensions for
the repair, but do not drill any holes.

(d) Mark the position of the three fastener holes on the leg of the
repair section and pilot−drill these holes.

(e) Position the repair section accurately in its repair location and
secure with screw clamps. Pilot−drill the holes through the rib
and then drill them full size to suit the diameter of the fas

teners. The fasteners must be the same type and diameter as
those used to attach the same rib to the ribfoot structure.

(f) Remove the repair section, deburr holes in repair section and the
rib.

Page 303
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(g) Install the repair section in its repair location again and se

cure with screw pins.
(h) Use the hole that you have cut in the skin to position the fas

tener tool. Install the three fasteners through the repair sec

tion and the rib.

(i) Mark the positions of skin fasteners onto a scrap piece of sheet
metal and pilot−drill the fasteners holes through the metal to
make a template.

(j) Use the template to pilot−drill the fastener holes in: the dou

bler, the filler piece, the support plate and the shims.

(k) Locate the template in the correct position on the skin and pi

lot−drill the fastener holes through the skin.

(l) Deburr all pilot−holes in the skin and the repair parts.

(m) Assemble all repair parts in their repair location and secure
with screw pins. From the holes in the skin filler pieces, pi

lot−drill the fastener holes through the two flanges of the re

pair section.

(n) Remove all repair pieces, except the repair section, from the
Spar−Box.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(o) Clean the repair area and the repair pieces with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(p) Mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) with the thickening agent
(Material No. 05−057).
(q) Apply the adhesive to the surfaces of the repair pieces and the
Spar−Box structure that touch when assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive when used as a shim material, is used

to a maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 in).
(r) Pass the repair pieces through the hole in the skin and assemble
them in their repair location. Secure with screw pins.

(s) Where possible, remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area
with the cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003). Access to the in

ternal repair area may be possible through lightening holes in
the Spar.

(t) Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

Page 304
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(u) After the adhesive has cured, remove the screw pins and drill
the fastener holes in the skin to the necessary diameter for the
fasteners.

(v) Countersink the fastener holes on the skin outer surface.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(w) Install the countersunk fasteners in the skin with sealant. (Ma
terial No. 09−005).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(x) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).
(y) Restore the surface paint.

(z) Where possible, remove the waste material from Spar−Box interior
with a vacuum cleaner. Access to the Spar−Box interior may be
possible through lightening holes in Spars.
(3) Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 208).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut away the skin, the ribfoot structure and the rib to the nec
essary shape and dimensions for the repair. Make sure that you
remove all of the damaged structure.
(b) Get the equivalent metal repair materials that you will use in
place of the pre−cured repair pieces. The subsequent steps will
help you to do this:

1 Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101
Config. 1, Figure 105) and find the repair zone for the dam
aged area.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 201 Config. 1, Figures 207 and 208) and find the metal
materials to use in place of pre−cured sheets and sections.
(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(d) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair parts
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, Material
No. 16−006).
(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No.
08−001C) to the surfaces of:

Page 305
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

− pre−cured repair parts

− pre−cured structure surfaces
where these touch metal parts when assembled. Refer to Chapter
55−11−00, Page Block 201 Config. 1, paragraph 10 and Figure 206.

(f) Let the resin cure.

(g) Do the steps 5.H.(2)(d) thru 5.H.(2)(o) of repair procedure

5.H.(2).

(h) Apply release agent (Material No. 05−020) to the Spar−Box struc
ture in the repair area.

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(i) Do the steps 5.H.(2)(p) thru 5.H.(2)(z) of repair procedure
5.H.(2).

(j) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101 Config. 1, Figure
120) to find out the time limit applicable to the temporary re
pair. Tell the Inspection Department what the permissible number
of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent repair is necessary.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 208).

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces, adhesive, sealant and glass
fabric from the repair area.
(b) Do the steps 5.H.(2)(b) thru 5.H.(2)(z) of repair procedure
5.H.(2).

NOTE: You can use the temporary repair pieces to get the correct
locations for the fastener holes in the permanent repair
pieces.
NOTE: All fastener holes in the structure that were used for the
temporary repair must be drilled one size oversize for the
permanent after temporary repair.

Page 306
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 33−36.

Figure 208 (sheet 1)

Pages 307/308
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 33−36.

Figure 208 (sheet 2)

Page 309
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 33−36.

Figure 208 (sheet 3)

Page 310
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 33−36.

Figure 208 (sheet 4)

Page 311
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 211.

I. Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 14, 18, 22

and 27.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 211
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 312
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Figure 209

− Adhesive
− Thickening Agent
− Cleaning Agent
− Sealant
− Polyurethane Primer
− Resin
− Release Agent
− Glassfabric Ply
(2) Permanent Repair (refer to Figure 209).
− Material No. 08−010C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−057, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−020, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut away the skin, the ribfoot structure and the rib to the nec

essary shape and dimensions for the repair. Make sure that you
remove all of the damaged structure.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201 Config. 1,
paragraph 9).

(c) Make the repair pieces to the necessary shapes and dimensions for
the repair, but do not drill any holes.

(d) Mark the position of the three fastener holes on the leg of the
repair section and pilot−drill these holes.

(e) Position the repair section accurately in its repair location and
secure with screw clamps. Pilot−drill the holes through the rib
and then drill them full size to suit the diameter of the fas

teners. The fasteners must be the same type and diameter as
those used to attach the same rib to the ribfoot structure.

(f) Remove the repair section, deburr holes in repair section and the
rib.

Page 313
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(g) Install the repair section in its repair location again and se

cure with screw pins.
(h) Use the hole that you have, cut in the skin to position the
fastener tool. Install the three fasteners through the repair
section and the rib.

(i) Mark the positions of skin fasteners onto a scrap piece of sheet
metal and pilot−drill the fasteners holes through the metal to
make a template.

(j) Use the template to pilot−drill the fastener holes in: the dou

bler, the filler piece, the support plate and the shims.

(k) Locate the template in the correct position on the skin and pi

lot−drill the fastener holes through the skin.

(l) Deburr all pilot−holes in the skin and the repair parts.

(m) Assemble all repair parts in their repair location and secure
with screw pins. From the holes in the skin filler pieces, pi

lot−drill the fastener holes through the two flanges of the re

pair section.

(n) Remove all repair pieces, except the repair section, from the
Spar−Box.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(o) Clean the repair area and the repair pieces with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(p) Mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) with the thickening agent
(Material No. 05−057).
(q) Apply the adhesive to the surfaces of the repair pieces and the
Spar−Box structure that touch when assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive when used as a shim material, is used

to a maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 in).
(r) Pass the repair pieces through the hole in the skin and assemble
them in their repair location. Secure with screw pins.

(s) Where possible, remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area
with the cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003). Access to the in

ternal repair area may be possible through lightening holes in
the Spar.

(t) Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

Page 314
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(u) After the adhesive has cured, remove the screw pins and drill
the fastener holes in the skin to the necessary diameter for the
fasteners.

(v) Countersink the fastener holes on the skin outer surface.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(w) Install the countersunk fasteners in the skin with sealant. (Ma
terial No. 09−005).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(x) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).
(y) Restore the surface paint.

(z) Where possible, remove the waste material from Spar−Box interior
with a vacuum cleaner. Access to the Spar−Box interior may be
possible through lightening holes in Spars.
(3) Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 209).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut away the skin, the ribfoot structure and the rib to the nec
essary shape and dimensions for the repair. Make sure that you
remove all of the damaged structure.
(b) Get the equivalent metal repair materials that you will use in
place of the pre−cured repair pieces. The subsequent steps will
help you to do this:

1 Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101
Config. 1, Figure 105) and find the repair zone for the dam
aged area.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 201 Config. 1, Figures 207 and 208) and find the metal
materials to use in place of pre−cured sheets and sections.
(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(d) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair parts
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, Material
No. 16−006).
(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No.
08−001C) to the surfaces of:

Page 315
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

− pre−cured repair parts

− pre−cured structure surfaces
where these will touch metal parts when assembled. Refer to
Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201 Config. 1, paragraph 10 and
Figure 206.

(f) Let the resin cure.

(g) Do the steps 5.I.(2)(d) thru 5.I.(2)(o) of repair procedure
5.I.(2).

(h) Apply release agent (Material No. 05−020) to the Spar−Box struc
ture in the repair area.

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(i) Do the steps 5.I.(2)(p) thru 5.I.(2)(z) of repair procedure
5.I.(2).

(j) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101 Config. 1, Figure
120) to find out the time limit applicable to the temporary re
pair. Tell the Inspection Department what the permissible number
of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent repair is necessary.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 209).

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces, adhesive, sealant and glass
fabric from the repair area.

(b) Do the steps 5.I.(2)(b) thru 5.I.(2)(z) of repair procedure

5.I.(2).

NOTE: You can use the temporary repair pieces to get the correct
locations for the fastener holes in the permanent repair
pieces.

NOTE: All fastener holes in the structure that were used for the
temporary repair must be drilled one size oversize for the
permanent after temporary repair.

Page 316
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 14, 18, 22 and 27.
Figure 209 (sheet 1)

Pages 317/318
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 14, 18, 22 and 27.
Figure 209 (sheet 2)

Page 319
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 14, 18, 22 and 27.
Figure 209 (sheet 3)

Page 320
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 14, 18, 22 and 27.
Figure 209 (sheet 4)

Page 321
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 212.

J. Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 14, 18, 22, 27
(Access through Spar).

NOTE: It is necessary to remove a section of the spar before you can do

this repair. Refer to Chapter 55−11−18, Page Block 201 for data
about removal and replacement of spar sections.

NOTE: Before your repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 212
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 322
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Figure 210

− Adhesive
− Thickening Agent
− Cleaning Agent
− Sealant
− Polyurethane Primer
− Resin
− Release Agent
− Glassfabric Ply
(2) Permanent Repair (refer to Figure 210).
− Material No. 08−010C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−057, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−020, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut away the skin, the ribfoot structure and the rib to the nec

essary shape and dimensions for the repair. Make sure that you
remove all of the damaged structure.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201 Config. 1,
paragraph 9).

(c) Make the repair pieces to the necessary shapes and dimensions for
the repair, but do not drill any holes.

(d) Mark the fastener positions on a scrap piece of sheet metal.

Then pilot−drill the fastener holes through the metal to make a
template.
(e) Use the template to pilot−drill the fastener holes in: the dou

bler, the support plate and the shims A,B,C and D.

(f) Locate the template in the correct position on the skin and pi

lot−drill the fastener holes through the skin.

(g) Deburr all pilot holes in the skin and the repair parts.

Page 323
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(h) Dry assemble the pilot−drilled repair parts in their repair loca

tion and secure with screw pins.
(i) Attach the repair section in its repair location against the in

ner surface of the support plate. Also support it against the
correct side of the rib and support with screw clamps.

(j) Pilot−drill fastener holes through the repair section and the
rib, and then through the support plate, doubler and repair sec

tion.

(k) Replace the screw clamps with screw pins.

(l) Position the skin filler piece in its repair location. Pilot−
drill the fastener holes in the filler piece from the holes
through the doubler and support plate. As you pilot−drill the
first few holes, put a screw pin in each hole to secure the
filler piece.

(m) Remove all of the repair pieces from the Spar−Box structure.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(n) Clean the repair area and the repair pieces with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(o) Mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) with the thickening agent
(Material No. 05−057).

(p) Apply the adhesive to the surfaces of the repair pieces and the
Spar−Box structure that will touch when assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a

maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 in).
(q) Attach the repair pieces to the Spar−Box structure and secure
with screw pins.

(r) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
(s) Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(t) After the adhesive has cured, remove the screw pins and drill
the fastener holes in the repair area.

(u) Countersink the fastener holes on the skin outer surface.

Page 324
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(v) Install countersunk fasteners through the skin with the sealant
(Material No. 09−005).

(w) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No.11−003).

(x) Install the correct fasteners (3 off) in the repair section and
the rib. The fasteners must be of the same type and diameter as
those which attach the same rib to the ribfoot structure next to
the repair. Use the hole that you have made in the spar to
position the fastener tool.

(y) Restore the surface paint.

(z) Install the spar section that was removed (refer to Chapter
55−11−18, Page Block 201 for data about removal and replacement
of spar sections).

(3) Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 210).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut away the skin, the ribfoot structure and the rib to the nec
essary shape and dimensions for the repair. Make sure that you
remove all of the damaged structure.

(b) Get the equivalent metal repair materials that you will use in
place of the pre−cured repair pieces. The subsequent steps will
help you to do this:

1 Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101
Config. 1, Figure 105) and find the repair zone number for the
damaged area.
2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page
Block 201 Config. 1, Figures 207 and 208) and find the metal
materials to use in place of pre−cured sheets and sections.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.
(d) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair parts
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, Material
No. 16−006).

(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg

Glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No.
08−001C) to the surfaces of:
− pre−cured repair parts
− pre−cured structure surfaces

Page 325
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

where these will touch metal parts when assembled. Refer to

Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201 Config. 1, paragraph 10 and
Figure 206.

(f) Let the resin cure.

(g) Do the steps 5.J.(2)(d) thru 5.J.(2)(n) of repair procedure

5.J.(2).

(h) Apply release agent (Material No. 05−020) to the Spar−Box struc
ture in the repair area.

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(i) Mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) with the thickening agent
(Material No. 05−057).
(j) Apply the adhesive to the surface of the repair pieces and the
Spar−Box structure that touch when assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a

maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 in).

(k) Attach the repair pieces to the Spar−Box structure and secure
with screw pins.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(l) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No 11−003).
(m) Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(n) After the adhesive has cured, remove the screw pins and drill
the fastener holes in the repair area.
(o) Countersink the fastener holes on the skin outer surface.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(p) Install the countersunk fasteners through the skin with sealant
(Material No 09−005).
(q) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No 11−003).

(r) Install the correct fasteners (3 off) in the repair section and
the rib. The fasteners must be of the same type and diameter as
those which attach the same rib to the ribfoot structure. Use
the hole that you have made in the spar to position the fastener
tool.

(s) Restore the surface paint.

Page 326
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(t) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101 Config. 1, Figure
120). Find out the time limit applicable to the temporary repair.
Tell the Inspection Department what the permissible number of
flight hours (FH) is before a permanent repair is necessary.

(u) Install the spar section that was removed (refer to Chapter
55−11−18, Page Block 201 for data about removal and replacement
of spar sections).

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 210).

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces, adhesive, sealant and glass
fabric from the repair area.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the perma
nent repair pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201
Config. 1, paragraph 9).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shapes and dimensions nec
essary for the repair area. Use the temporary repair pieces to
get the correct locations for the fastener holes in the repair
pieces.

(d) Do the steps 5.J.(2)(e) thru 5.J.(2)(z) of repair procedure

5.J.(2).
NOTE: Any fastener holes in the structure that were used for the
temporary repair must be drilled one size oversize for the
permanent after temporary repair.

Pages 327/328
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 14, 18, 22 and
27.
Figure 210 (sheet 1)
Pages 329/330
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 14, 18, 22 and
27.
Figure 210 (sheet 2)
Page 331
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 14, 18, 22 and
27.
Figure 210 (sheet 3)
Page 332
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 14, 18, 22 and
27.
Figure 210 (sheet 4)
Page 333
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 213.

K. Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 02−08, 10−12,

15, 16, 19, 20, 23−25, 28−30, 33−36 (Access through spar).

NOTE: It is necessary to remove a section of the spar before you can do

this repair. Refer to Chapter 55−11−18, Page Block 201 for data
about removal and replacement of spar sections.

NOTE: Before your repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 213
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 334
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Figure 211

− Adhesive
− Thickening Agent
− Cleaning Agent
− Sealant
− Polyurethane Primer
− Resin
− Release Agent
− Glassfabric Ply
(2) Permanent Repair (refer to Figure 211).
− Material No. 08−010C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−057, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−020, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut away the skin, the ribfoot structure and the rib to the nec

essary shape and dimensions for the repair. Make sure that you
remove all of the damaged structure.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201 Config. 1,
paragraph 9).

(c) Make the repair pieces to the necessary shapes and dimensions for
the repair, but do not drill any holes.

NOTE: The packer and the shims are not fitted in all repair
zones, refer to Figure 211, sheet 3 for details. In some
repair zones liquid shim (adhesive, Material No. 08−010C,
and thickening agent, Material No. 05−057) is used in place
of pre−cured shims. The liquid shim is applied on final as

sembly of repair parts.

(d) Mark the fastener positions on a scrap piece of sheet metal and
pilot−drill the fastener holes through the metal to make a tem

plate.
(e) Use the template to pilot−drill the fastener holes in: the dou

bler, the support plate, the shims and if applicable, the packer.

Page 335
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Locate the template in the correct position on the skin and pi

lot−drill the fastener holes through the skin.
(g) Deburr all pilot−holes in the skin and the repair parts.

(h) Dry assemble the pilot−drilled repair parts in their repair loca

tion and secure with screw pins.

(i) Attach the repair section in its repair location against the in

ner surface of the support plate and against the correct side of
the rib, and support with screw clamps.

(j) Pilot−drill fastener holes through the repair section and the
rib, and then through the support plate, doubler, packer (if ap

plicable) and repair section.
(k) Replace the screw clamps with screw pins.

(l) Position the skin filler piece in its repair location and pilot−
drill the fastener holes in the filler piece from the holes
through the doubler, the packer (if applicable) and support
plate. As you pilot−drill each of the first few holes, put a
screw pin in each hole to secure the filler piece.

(m) Remove all of the repair pieces from the Spar−Box structure.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(n) Clean the repair area and the repair pieces with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(o) Mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) with the thickening agent
(Material No. 05−057).

(p) Apply the adhesive to the surfaces of the repair pieces and the
Spar−Box structure that will touch when assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a

maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 in).

(q) Attach the repair pieces to the Spar−Box structure and secure
with screw pins.

(r) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(s) Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(t) After the adhesive has cured, remove the screw pins and drill
the fastener holes in the repair area to the necessary diameters
for the fasteners.

Page 336
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(u) Countersink the fastener holes on the skin outer surface.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(v) Install countersunk fasteners through the skin with the sealant
(Material No. 09−005).

(w) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).
(x) Install the correct fasteners (3 off) in the repair section and
the rib. The fasteners must be of the same type and diameter as
those which attach the same rib to the ribfoot structure next to
the repair. Use the hole that you have made in the spar to
position the fastener tool.
(y) Restore the surface paint.

(z) Install the spar section that was removed (refer to Chapter
55−11−18, Page Block 201 for data about removal and replacement
of spar sections).

(3) Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 211).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut away the skin, the ribfoot structure and the rib to the nec
essary shape and dimensions for the repair. Make sure that you
remove all of the damaged structure.
(b) Get the equivalent metal repair materials that you will use in
place of the pre−cured repair pieces. The subsequent steps will
help you to do this:

1 Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101
Config. 1, Figure 105) and find the repair zone number for the
damaged area.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 201 Config. 1, Figures 207 and 208) and find the metal
materials to use in place of pre−cured sheets and sections.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location, but do not drill any holes.

(d) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair parts
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, Material
No. 16−006).
(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No.
08−001C) to the surfaces of:
− pre−cured repair parts

Page 337
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

− pre−cured structure surfaces

where these will touch metal parts when assembled. Refer to

Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201 Config. 1, paragraph 10 and
Figure 206.

(f) Let the resin cure.

(g) Do the steps 5.K.(2)(d) thru 5.K.(2)(n) of repair procedure

5.K.(2).

(h) Apply release agent (Material No. 05−020) to the Spar−Box struc
ture in the repair area.

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(i) Mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) with the thickening agent
(Material No. 05−057).

(j) Apply the adhesive to the surface of the repair pieces and the
Spar−Box structure that touch when assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a

maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 in).

(k) Attach the repair pieces to the Spar−Box structure and secure
with screw pins.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(l) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(m) Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(n) After the adhesive has cured, remove the screw pins and drill
the fastener holes in the repair area to the necessary diameter
for the fasteners.

(o) Countersink the fastener holes on the skin outer surface.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(p) Install the countersunk fasteners through the skin with sealant
(Material No. 09−005).

(q) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

(r) Install the correct fasteners (3 off) in the repair section and
the rib. The fasteners must be of the same type and diameter as
those which attach the same rib to the ribfoot structure. Use

Page 338
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

the hole that you have made in the spar to position the fastener
tool.
(s) Restore the surface paint.

(t) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101 Config. 1, Figure
120) to find out the time limit applicable to the temporary re
pair. Tell the Inspection Department what the permissible number
of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent repair is necessary.

(u) Install the spar section that was removed (refer to Chapter
55−11−18, Page Block 201 for data about removal and replacement
of spar sections).
(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 211).

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces, adhesive, sealant and glass
fabric from the repair area.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the perma
nent repair pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201
Config. 1, paragraph 9).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shapes and dimensions nec
essary for the repair area. Use the temporary repair pieces to
get the correct locations for the fastener holes in the permanent
repair pieces.

NOTE: The packer and the shims are not fitted in all repair
zones, refer to Figure 211, sheet 3 for details. In some
repair zones liquid shim (adhesive, Material No. 08−010C,
and thickening agent, Material No. 05−057) is used in place
of pre−cured shims. The liquid shim is applied on final as
sembly of repair parts.

(d) Do the steps 5.K.(2)(e) thru 5.K.(2)(z) of repair procedure

5.K.(2).

NOTE: Any fastener holes in the structure that were used for the
temporary repair must be drilled one size oversize for the
permanent after temporary repair.

Pages 339/340
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 02−08, 10−12, 15,
16, 19, 20, 23−25, 28−30, 33−36.
Figure 211 (sheet 1)
Pages 341/342
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 02−08, 10−12, 15,
16, 19, 20, 23−25, 28−30, 33−36.
Figure 211 (sheet 2)
Page 343
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 02−08, 10−12, 15,
16, 19, 20, 23−25, 28−30, 33−36.
Figure 211 (sheet 3)
Page 344
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 02−08, 10−12, 15,
16, 19, 20, 23−25, 28−30, 33−36.
Figure 211 (sheet 4)
Page 345
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 214.

L. Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 09, 13, 17, 21
and 26 (Access through spar).

NOTE: It is necessary to remove a section of the spar before you can do

this repair. Refer to Chapter 55−11−18, Page Block 201 for data
about removal and replacement of spar sections.

NOTE: Before your repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 214
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 346
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Figure 212

− Adhesive
− Thickening Agent
− Cleaning Agent
− Sealant
− Polyurethane Primer
− Resin
− Release Agent
− Glassfabric Ply
(2) Permanent Repair (refer to Figure 212).
− Material No. 08−010C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−057, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−020, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut away the skin, the ribfoot structure and the rib to the nec

essary shape and dimensions for the repair. Make sure that you
remove all of the damaged structure.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201 Config. 1,
paragraph 9).

(c) Make the repair pieces to the necessary shapes and dimensions for
the repair, but do not drill any holes.

(d) Mark the fastener positions on a scrap piece of sheet metal and
pilot−drill the fastener holes through the metal to make a tem

plate.
(e) Use the template to pilot−drill the fastener holes in the dou

bler, the support plate, the shims and if applicable, the packer.
(Packer not fitted in zone 13).

(f) Locate the template in the correct position on the skin and pi

lot−drill the fastener holes through the skin.
(g) Deburr all pilot−holes in the skin and the repair parts.

Page 347
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(h) Dry assemble the pilot−drilled repair parts in their repair loca

tion and secure with screw pins.
(i) Attach the repair section in its repair location against the in

ner surface of the support plate and against the correct side of
the rib, and support with screw clamps.

(j) Pilot−drill fastener holes through the repair section and the
rib, and then through the support plate, doubler, packer (if ap

plicable) and the repair section.

(k) Replace the screw clamps with screw pins.

(l) Position the skin filler piece in its repair location and pilot−
drill the fastener holes in the filler piece from the holes
through the doubler, the packer (if applicable) and support
plate. As you pilot−drill each of the first few holes, put a
screw pin in each hole to secure the filler piece.

(m) Remove all of the repair pieces from the Spar−Box structure.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(n) Clean the repair area and the repair pieces with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(o) Mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) with the thickening agent
(Material No. 05−057).

(p) Apply the adhesive to the surfaces of the repair pieces and the
Spar−Box structure that will touch when assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a

maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 in).
(q) Attach the repair pieces to the Spar−Box structure and secure
with screw pins.

(r) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
(s) Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(t) After the adhesive has cured, remove the screw pins and drill
the fastener holes in the repair area to the necessary diameters
for the fasteners.
(u) Countersink the fastener holes on the skin outer surface.

Page 348
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(v) Install countersunk fasteners through the skin with the sealant
(Material No. 09−005).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(w) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No.11−003).

(x) Install the correct fasteners (3 off) in the repair section and
the rib. The fasteners must be of the same type and diameter as
those which attach the same rib to the ribfoot structure next to
the repair. Use the hole that you have made in the spar to
position the fastener tool.
(y) Restore the surface paint.

(z) Install the spar section that was removed (refer to Chapter
55−11−18, Page Block 201 for data about removal and replacement
of spar sections).

(3) Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 212).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut away the skin, the ribfoot structure and the rib to the nec
essary shape and dimensions for the repair. Make sure that you
remove all of the damaged structure.
(b) Get the equivalent metal repair materials that you will use in
place of the pre−cured repair pieces. The subsequent steps will
help you to do this:

1 Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101
Config. 1, Figure 105) and find the repair zone number for the
damaged area.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 201 Config. 1, Figures 207 and 208) and find the metal
materials to use in place of pre−cured sheets and sections.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location, but do not drill any holes.

(d) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair parts
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, Material
No. 16−006).
(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No.
08−001C) to the surfaces of:
− pre−cured repair parts

Page 349
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

− pre−cured structure surfaces

where these will touch metal parts when assembled. Refer to

Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201 Config. 1, paragraph 10 and
Figure 206.

(f) Let the resin cure.

(g) Do the steps 5.L.(2)(d) thru 5.L.(2)(n) of repair procedure

5.L.(2).

(h) Apply release agent (Material No. 05−020) to the Spar−Box struc
ture in the repair area.

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(i) Mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) with the thickening agent
(Material No. 05−057).

(j) Apply the adhesive to the surface of the repair pieces and the
Spar−Box structure that touch when assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a

maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 in).

(k) Attach the repair pieces to the Spar−Box structure and secure
with screw pins.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(l) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No 11−003).

(m) Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(n) After the adhesive has cured, remove the screw pins and drill
the fastener holes in the repair area to the necessary diameter
for the fasteners.

(o) Countersink the fastener holes on the skin outer surface.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(p) Install the countersunk fasteners through the skin with sealant
(Material No 09−005).

(q) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No 11−003).

(r) Install the correct fasteners (3 off) in the repair section and
the rib. The fasteners must be of the same type and diameter as
those which attach the same rib to the ribfoot structure. Use

Page 350
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

the hole that you have made in the spar to position the fastener
tool.
(s) Restore the surface paint.

(t) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101 Config. 1, Figure
120) to find out the time limit applicable to the temporary re
pair. Tell the Inspection Department what the permissible number
of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent repair is necessary.

(u) Install the spar section that was removed (refer to Chapter
55−11−18, Page Block 201 for data about removal and replacement
of spar sections).
(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 212).

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces, adhesive, sealant and glass
fabric from the repair area.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the perma
nent repair pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201
Config. 1, paragraph 9).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shapes and dimensions nec
essary for the repair area. Use the temporary repair pieces to
get the correct locations for the fastener holes in the permanent
repair pieces.

(d) Do the steps 5.L.(2)(e) thru 5.L.(2)(z) of repair procedure

5.L.(2).

NOTE: Any fastener holes in the structure that were used for the
temporary repair must be drilled one size oversize for the
permanent after temporary repair.

Pages 351/352
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 09, 13, 17, 21
and 26.
Figure 212 (sheet 1)
Pages 353/354
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 09, 13, 17, 21
and 26.
Figure 212 (sheet 2)
Page 355
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 09, 13, 17, 21
and 26.
Figure 212 (sheet 3)
Page 356
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 09, 13, 17, 21
and 26.
Figure 212 (sheet 4)
Page 357
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 215.

M. Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 13, 17, 21

and 26.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 215
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 358
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Figure 213

− Adhesive
− Thickening Agent
− Cleaning Agent
− Sealant
− Polyurethane Primer
− Resin
− Release Agent
− Glassfabric Ply
(2) Permanent Repair (refer to Figure 213).
− Material No. 08−010C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−057, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−020, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut away the skin, the ribfoot structure and the rib to the nec

essary shape and dimensions for the repair. Make sure that you
remove all of the damaged structure.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201 Config. 1,
paragraph 9).

(c) Make the repair pieces to the necessary shapes and dimensions for
the repair, but do not drill any holes.

NOTE: The packer is not fitted in all repair zones, refer to

Figure 213, sheet 4 for details.

(d) Mark the position of the three fastener holes on the leg of the
repair section and pilot−drill these holes.

(e) Position the repair section accurately in its repair location and
secure with screw clamps. Pilot−drill the holes through the rib
and then drill them full size to suit the diameter of the fas

teners. The fasteners must be the same type and diameter as
those used to attach the same rib to the ribfoot structure.

Page 359
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Remove the repair section, deburr holes in repair section and the
rib.
(g) Install the repair section in its repair location again and se

cure with screw pins.

(h) Use the hole that you have cut in the skin to position the fas

tener tool. Install the three fasteners through the repair sec

tion and the rib.
(i) Mark the positions of skin fasteners onto a scrap piece of sheet
metal and pilot−drill the fasteners holes through the metal to
make a template.

(j) Use the template to pilot−drill the fastener holes in: the dou

bler, the filler piece, the support plate, the shims and if ap

plicable the packer.

(k) Locate the template in the correct position on the skin and pi

lot−drill the fastener holes through the skin.

(l) Deburr all pilot−holes in the skin and the repair parts.
(m) Assemble all repair parts in their repair location and secure
with screw pins. From the holes in the skin filler pieces, pi

lot−drill the fastener holes through the two flanges of the re

pair section.
(n) Remove all repair pieces, except the repair section, from the
Spar−Box.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(o) Clean the repair area and the repair pieces with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).
WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(p) Mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) with the thickening agent
(Material No. 05−057).

(q) Apply the adhesive to the surfaces of the repair pieces and the
Spar−Box structure that touch when assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive when used as a shim material, is used

to a maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 in).

(r) Pass the repair pieces through the hole in the skin and assemble
them in their repair location. Secure with screw pins.
(s) Where possible, remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area
with the cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003). Access to the in

ternal repair area may be possible through lightening holes in
the Spar.

Page 360
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(t) Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(u) After the adhesive has cured, remove the screw pins and drill
the fastener holes in the skin to the necessary diameter for the
fasteners.

(v) Countersink the fastener holes on the skin outer surface.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(w) Install the fasteners in the skin with sealant. (Material No.
09−005).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(x) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

(y) Restore the surface paint.

(z) Where possible, remove debris material from the Spar−Box interior
with a vacuum cleaner. Access to the Spar−Box interior may be
possible through lightening holes in Spars.

(3) Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 213).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut away the skin, the ribfoot structure and the rib to the nec
essary shape and dimensions for the repair. Make sure that you
remove all of the damaged structure.

(b) Get the equivalent metal repair materials that you will use in
place of the pre−cured repair pieces. The subsequent steps will
help you to do this:
1 Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101
Config. 1, Figure 105) and find the repair zone for the dam
aged area.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 201 Config. 1, Figures 207 and 208) and find the metal
materials to use in place of pre−cured sheets and sections.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

NOTE: The packer is not fitted in all repair zones, refer to

Figure 213, sheet 4 for details.
(d) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair parts
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, Material
No. 16−006).

Page 361
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg

Glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No.
08−001C) to the surfaces of:
− pre−cured repair parts
− pre−cured structure surfaces

where these will touch metal parts when assembled. Refer to

Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201 Config. 1, paragraph 10 and
Figure 206.
(f) Let the resin cure.

(g) Do the steps 5.M.(2)(d) thru 5.M.(2)(o) of repair procedure

5.M.(2).

(h) Apply release agent (Material No. 05−020) to the Spar−Box struc
ture in the repair area.
WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(i) Do the steps 5.M.(2)(p) thru 5.M.(2)(z) of repair procedure

5.M.(2).

(j) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101 Config. 1, Figure
120) to find out the time limit applicable to the temporary re
pair. Tell the Inspection Department what the permissible number
of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent repair is necessary.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 213).

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces, adhesive, sealant and glass
fabric from the repair area.

NOTE: You can use the temporary repair pieces to get the correct
locations for the fastener holes in the permanent repair
pieces.
(b) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the perma
nent repair pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201
Config. 1, paragraph 9).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shapes and dimensions nec
essary for the repair area. Use the temporary repair pieces to
get the correct locations for the fastener holes in the permanent
repair pieces.

Page 362
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(d) Do the steps 5.M.(2)(d) thru 5.M.(2)(z) of repair procedure

5.M.(2).
NOTE: All fastener holes in the structure that were used for the
temporary repair must be drilled one size oversize for the
permanent after temporary repair.

Pages 363/364
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 13, 17, 21 and 26.
Figure 213 (sheet 1)

Pages 365/366
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 13, 17, 21 and 26.
Figure 213 (sheet 2)

Page 367
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 13, 17, 21 and 26.
Figure 213 (sheet 3)

Page 368
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 13, 17, 21 and 26.
Figure 213 (sheet 4)

Page 369
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIRS CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE REFER

TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN IN THE
INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 216.

N. Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zone 09.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 216
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 370
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Figure 214

− Adhesive
− Thickening Agent
− Cleaning Agent
− Sealant
− Polyurethane Primer
− Resin
− Release Agent
− Glassfabric Ply
(2) Permanent Repair (refer to Figure 214).
− Material No. 08−010C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−057, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−020, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric refer to Chapter
51−33−00

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut away the skin, the ribfoot structure and the rib to the nec

essary shape and dimensions for the repair. Make sure that you
remove all of the damaged structure.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201 Config. 1,
paragraph 9).

(c) Make the repair pieces to the necessary shapes and dimensions for
the repair, but do not drill any holes.

NOTE: Liquid shim (adhesive, Material No. 08−010C, and thickening

agent, Material No. 05−057) is used in this repair in Zone
09. It is used in place of a pre−cured shim (refer to sec

tion C−C on sheet 1 of Figure 214). The liquid shim is ap

plied on final assembly of repair parts.

(d) Mark the position of the three fastener holes on the leg of the
repair section and pilot−drill these holes.

(e) Position the repair section accurately in its repair location and
secure with screw clamps. Pilot−drill the holes through the rib
and then drill them full size to suit the diameter of the fas

Page 371
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

teners. The fasteners must be the same type and diameter as

those used to attach the same rib to the ribfoot structure.
(f) Remove the repair section, deburr holes in repair section and the
rib.

(g) Install the repair section in its repair location again and se

cure with screw pins.

(h) Use the hole that you have cut in the skin to position the fas

tener tool. Install the three fasteners through the repair sec

tion and the rib.

(i) Mark the positions of skin fasteners onto a scrap piece of sheet
metal and pilot−drill the fasteners holes through the metal to
make a template.

(j) Use the template to pilot−drill the fastener holes in: the dou

bler, the support plate, the packer, shims A, B, C, D, and F
and filler piece.

(k) Locate the template in the correct position on the skin and pi

lot−drill the fastener holes through the skin.

(l) Deburr all pilot−holes in the skin and the repair parts.

(m) Assemble all repair parts in their repair location and secure
with screw pins. From the holes in the skin filler pieces, pi

lot−drill the fastener holes through the two flanges of the re

pair section.

(n) Remove all repair pieces, except the repair section, from the
Spar−Box.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(o) Clean the repair area and the repair pieces with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(p) Mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) with the thickening agent
(Material No. 05−057).

(q) Apply the adhesive to the surfaces
Spar−Box structure that touch when
adhesive to the Spar−Box structure
formed when the adhesive has cured
fitted).
of the repair pieces and the
assembled. Apply sufficient
to form shim E. (Shim E is
after all repair parts are

NOTE: The repair adhesive when used as a shim material is used

to a maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 in).

(r) Pass the repair pieces through the hole in the skin and assemble
them in their repair location. Secure with screw pins.

Page 372
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(s) Where possible, remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area
with the cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003). Access to the in
ternal repair area may be possible through lightening holes in
the Spar.

(t) Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(u) After the adhesive has cured, remove the screw pins and drill
the fastener holes in the skin to the necessary diameter for the
fasteners.

(v) Countersink the fastener holes on the skin outer surface.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(w) Install the countersunk fasteners in the skin with sealant. (Ma
terial No. 09−005).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(x) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).
(y) Restore the surface paint.

(z) Where possible, remove debris material from Spar−Box interior

with a vacuum cleaner. Access to the Spar−Box interior may be
possible through lightening holes in Spars.
(3) Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 214).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut away the skin, the ribfoot structure and the rib to the nec
essary shapes and dimensions for the repair. Make sure that you
remove all of the damaged structure.
(b) Get the equivalent metal repair materials that you will use in
place of the pre−cured repair pieces. The subsequent steps will
help you to do this:

1 Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101
Config. 1, Figure 105) and find the repair zone for the dam
aged area.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 201 Config. 1, Figures 207 and 208) and find the metal
materials to use in place of pre−cured sheets and sections.

Page 373
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.
NOTE: Liquid shims (adhesive, Material No. 08−010C, and thickening
agent, Material No 05−057) is used in this repair in Zone
09. It is used in place of a metal shim (Refer to section
C−C on sheet 1 of Figure 214). The liquid shim is applied
on final assembly of repair parts.
(d) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair parts
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, Material
No. 16−006).

(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg

Glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No.
08−001C) to the surfaces of:
− pre−cured repair parts
− pre−cured structure surfaces

where these will touch metal parts when assembled. Refer to

Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201 Config. 1, paragraph 10 and
Figure 206.
(f) Let the resin cure.

(g) Do the steps 5.N.(2)(d) thru 5.N.(2)(o) of repair procedure

5.N.(2).

(h) Apply release agent (Material No. 05−020) to the Spar−Box struc

ture in the repair area.

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(i) Do the steps 5.N.(2)(p) thru 5.N.(2)(z) of repair procedure

5.N.(2).
(j) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101 Config. 1, Figure
120) to find out the time limit applicable to the temporary re

pair. Tell the Inspection Department what the permissible number
of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent repair is necessary.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 214).

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces, adhesive, sealant and glass

fabric from the repair area.

Page 374
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Do the steps 5.N.(2)(b) thru 5.N.(2)(z) of repair procedure

5.N.(2).
NOTE: You can use the temporary repair pieces to get the correct
locations for the fastener holes in the permanent repair
pieces.

NOTE: All fastener holes in the structure that were used for the
temporary repair must be drilled one size oversize for the
permanent after temporary repair.

Pages 375/376
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zone 09.

Figure 214 (sheet 1)

Pages 377/378
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zone 09.

Figure 214 (sheet 2)

Page 379
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zone 09.

Figure 214 (sheet 3)

Page 380
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zone 09.

Figure 214 (sheet 4)

Page 381
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 217.

O. Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zone 10.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 217
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 382
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Figure 215

− Adhesive
− Thickening Agent
− Cleaning Agent
− Sealant
− Polyurethane Primer
− Resin
− Release Agent
− Glassfabric Ply
(2) Permanent Repair (refer to Figure 215).
− Material No. 08−010C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−057, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−020, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut away the skin, the ribfoot structure and the rib to the nec

essary shape and dimensions for the repair. Make sure that you
remove all of the damaged structure.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201 Config. 1,
paragraph 9).

(c) Make the repair pieces to the necessary shapes and dimensions for
the repair, but do not drill any holes.

(d) Mark the position of the three fastener holes on the leg of the
repair section and pilot−drill these holes.

(e) Position the repair section accurately in its repair location and
secure with screw clamps. Pilot−drill the holes through the rib
and then drill them full size to suit the diameter of the fas

teners. The fasteners must be the same type and diameter as
those used to attach the same rib to the ribfoot structure.

(f) Remove the repair section, deburr holes in repair section and the
rib.

Page 383
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(g) Install the repair section in its repair location again and se

cure with screw pins.
(h) Use the hole that you have cut in the skin to position the fas

tener tool. Install the three fasteners through the repair sec

tion and the rib.

(i) Mark the positions of skin fasteners onto a scrap piece of sheet
metal and pilot−drill the fasteners holes through the metal to
make a template.

(j) Use the template to pilot−drill the fastener holes in: the dou

bler, the filler piece, the support plate and the shims.

(k) Locate the template in the correct position on the skin and pi

lot−drill the fastener holes through the skin.

(l) Deburr all pilot−holes in the skin and the repair parts.

(m) Assemble all repair parts in their repair location and secure
with screw pins. From the holes in the skin filler pieces, pi

lot−drill the fastener holes through the two flanges of the re

pair section.

(n) Remove all repair pieces, except the repair section, from the
Spar−Box.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(o) Clean the repair area and the repair pieces with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(p) Mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) with the thickening agent
(Material No. 05−057).
(q) Apply the adhesive to the surfaces of the repair pieces and the
Spar−Box structure that touch when assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is used as a shim material to a maxi

mum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 in).
(r) Pass the repair pieces through the hole in the skin and assemble
them in their repair location. Secure with screw pins.

(s) Where possible, remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area
with the cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003). Access to the in

ternal repair area may be possible through lightening holes in
the Spar.

(t) Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

Page 384
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(u) After the adhesive has cured, remove the screw pins and drill
the fastener holes in the skin to the necessary diameter for the
fasteners.

(v) Countersink the fastener holes on the skin outer surface.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(w) Install the countersunk fasteners in the skin with sealant. (Ma
terial No. 09−005).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(x) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).
(y) Restore the surface paint.

(z) Where possible, remove debris material from Spar−Box interior

with a vacuum cleaner. Access to the Spar−Box interior may be
possible through lightening holes in Spars.
(3) Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 215).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut away the skin, the ribfoot structure and the rib to the nec
essary shape and dimensions for the repair. Make sure that you
remove all of the damaged structure.
(b) Get the equivalent metal repair materials that you will use in
place of the pre−cured repair pieces. The subsequent steps will
help you to do this:

1 Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101
Config. 1, Figure 105) and find the repair zone for the dam
aged area.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 201 Config. 1, Figures 207 and 208) and find the metal
materials to use in place of pre−cured sheets and sections.
(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(d) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair parts
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, Material
No. 16−006).
(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No.
08−001C) to the surfaces of:

Page 385
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

− pre−cured repair parts

− pre−cured structure surfaces
where these will touch metal parts when assembled. Refer to
Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201 Config. 1, paragraph 10 and
Figure 206.

(f) Let the resin cure.

(g) Do the steps 5.O.(2)(d) thru 5.O.(2)(o) of repair procedure
5.O.(2).

(h) Apply release agent (Material No. 05−020) to the Spar−Box struc
ture in the repair area.

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(i) Do the steps 5.O.(2)(p) thru 5.O.(2)(z) of repair procedure
5.O.(2).

(j) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101 Config. 1, Figure
120) to find out the time limit applicable to the temporary re
pair. Tell the Inspection Department what the permissible number
of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent repair is necessary.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 215).

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces, adhesive, sealant and glass
fabric from the repair area.

(b) Do the steps 5.O.(2)(b) thru 5.O.(2)(z) of repair procedure

5.O.(2).

NOTE: You can use the temporary repair pieces to get the correct
locations for the fastener holes in the permanent repair
pieces.

NOTE: All fastener holes in the structure that were used for the
temporary repair must be drilled one size oversize for the
permanent after temporary repair.

Page 386
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zone 10.

Figure 215 (sheet 1)

Pages 387/388
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zone 10.

Figure 215 (sheet 2)

Page 389
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zone 10.

Figure 215 (sheet 3)

Page 390
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zone 10.

Figure 215 (sheet 4)

Page 391
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 218.

P. Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 31 and 32.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 218
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 392
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Figure 216

− Adhesive
− Thickening Agent
− Cleaning Agent
− Sealant
− Polyurethane Primer
− Resin
− Release Agent
− Glassfabric Ply
(2) Permanent Repair (refer to Figure 216).
− Material No. 08−010C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−057, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−020, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut away the skin, the ribfoot structure and the rib to the nec

essary shape and dimensions for the repair. Make sure that you
remove all of the damaged structure.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201 Config. 1,
paragraph 9).

(c) Make the repair pieces to the necessary shapes and dimensions for
the repair, but do not drill any holes.

(d) Mark the position of the three fastener holes on the leg of the
repair section and pilot−drill these holes.

(e) Position the repair section accurately in its repair location and
secure with screw clamps. Pilot−drill the holes through the rib
and then drill them full size to suit the diameter of the fas

teners. The fasteners must be the same type and diameter as
those used to attach the same rib to the ribfoot structure.

(f) Remove the repair section, deburr holes in repair section and the
rib.

Page 393
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(g) Install the repair section in its repair location again and se

cure with screw pins.
(h) Use the hole that you have cut in the skin to position the fas

tener tool. Install the three fasteners through the repair sec

tion and the rib.

(i) Mark the positions of skin fasteners onto a scrap piece of sheet
metal and pilot−drill the fasteners holes through the metal to
make a template.

(j) Use the template to pilot−drill the fastener holes in: the dou

bler, the filler piece, the support plate and the shims.

(k) Locate the template in the correct position on the skin and pi

lot−drill the fastener holes through the skin.

(l) Deburr all pilot−holes in the skin and the repair parts.

(m) Assemble all repair parts in their repair location and secure
with screw pins. From the holes in the skin filler pieces, pi

lot−drill the fastener holes through the two flanges of the re

pair section.

(n) Remove all repair pieces, except the repair section, from the
Spar−Box.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(o) Clean the repair area and the repair pieces with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(p) Mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) with the thickening agent
(Material No. 05−057).
(q) Apply the adhesive to the surfaces of the repair pieces and the
Spar−Box structure that touch when assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is used as a shim material to a maxi

mum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 in).
(r) Pass the repair pieces through the hole in the skin and assemble
them in their repair location. Secure with screw pins.

(s) Where possible, remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area
with the cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003). Access to the in

ternal repair area may be possible through lightening holes in
the Spar.

(t) Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

Page 394
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(u) After the adhesive has cured, remove the screw pins and drill
the fastener holes in the skin to the necessary diameter for the
fasteners.

(v) Countersink the fastener holes on the skin outer surface.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(w) Install the countersunk fasteners in the skin with sealant. (Ma
terial No. 09−005).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(x) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).
(y) Restore the surface paint.

(z) Where possible, remove debris material from Spar−Box interior

with a vacuum cleaner. Access to the Spar−Box interior may be
possible through lightening holes in Spars.
(3) Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 216).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut away the skin, the ribfoot structure and the rib to the nec
essary shape and dimensions for the repair. Make sure that you
remove all of the damaged structure.
(b) Get the equivalent metal repair materials that you will use in
place of the pre−cured repair pieces. The subsequent steps will
help you to do this:

1 Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101
Config. 1, Figure 105) and find the repair zone for the dam
aged area.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 201 Config. 1, Figures 207 and 208) and find the metal
materials to use in place of pre−cured sheets and sections.
(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(d) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair parts
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, Material
No. 16−006).
(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No.
08−001C) to the surfaces of:

Page 395
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

− pre−cured repair parts

− pre−cured structure surfaces
where these will touch metal parts when assembled. Refer to
Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201 Config. 1, paragraph 10 and
Figure 206.

(f) Let the resin cure.

(g) Do the steps 5.P.(2)(d) thru 5.P.(2)(o) of repair procedure
5.P.(2).

(h) Apply release agent (Material No. 05−020) to the Spar−Box struc
ture in the repair area.

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(i) Do the steps 5.P.(2)(p) thru 5.P.(2)(z) of repair procedure
5.P.(2).

(j) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101 Config. 1, Figure
120) to find out the time limit applicable to the temporary re
pair. Tell the Inspection Department what the permissible number
of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent repair is necessary.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 216).

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces, adhesive, sealant and glass
fabric from the repair area.

(b) Do the steps 5.P.(2)(b) thru 5.P.(2)(z) of repair procedure

5.P.(2).

NOTE: You can use the temporary repair pieces to get the correct
locations for the fastener holes in the permanent repair
pieces.

NOTE: All fastener holes in the structure that were used for the
temporary repair must be drilled one size oversize of the
permanent after temporary repair.

Page 396
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 31 and 32.

Figure 216 (sheet 1)

Pages 397/398
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 31 and 32.

Figure 216 (sheet 2)

Page 399
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 31 and 32.

Figure 216 (sheet 3)

Page 400
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 31 and 32.

Figure 216 (sheet 4)

Page 401
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 219.

Q. Repair to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 31 and 32 (Ac

cess through Spar).

NOTE: It is necessary to remove a section of the spar before you can do

this repair. Refer to Chapter 55−11−18, Page Block 201 for data
about removal and replacement of spar sections.

NOTE: Before your repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 219
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 402
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Figure 217

− Adhesive − Material No. 08−010C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Thickening Agent − Material No. 05−057, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−013, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane Primer − Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Resin − Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Release Agent − Material No. 05−020, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Glassfabric Ply − Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric refer to Chapter
51−33−00
(2) Permanent Repair (refer to Figure 217).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut away the skin, the ribfoot structure and the rib to the nec

essary shape and dimensions for the repair. Make sure that you
remove all of the damaged structure.
(b) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201 Config. 1,
paragraph 9).

(c) Make the repair pieces to the necessary shapes and dimensions for
the repair, but do not drill any holes.

(d) Mark the fastener positions on a scrap piece of sheet metal and
pilot−drill the fastener holes through the metal to make a tem

plate.
(e) Use the template to pilot−drill the fastener holes in the dou

bler, the support plate, the shims and if applicable the packer.

(f) Locate the template in the correct position on the skin and pi

lot−drill the fastener holes through the skin.

Page 403
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(g) Deburr all pilot−holes in the repair parts.

(h) Dry assemble the pilot−drilled repair parts in their repair loca

tion and secure with screw pins.

(i) Attach the repair section in its repair location against the in

ner surface of the support plate and against the correct side of
the rib. Support with screw clamps.

(j) Pilot−drill fastener holes through the repair section and the
rib, and then through the support plate, doubler, packer and the
repair section.

(k) Replace the screw clamps with screw pins.

(l) Position the skin filler piece in its repair location and pilot−
drill the fastener holes in the filler piece from the holes
through the doubler, the packer (if applicable) and support
plate. As you pilot−drill each of the first few holes, put a
screw pin in each hole to secure the filler piece.

(m) Remove all of the repair pieces from the Spar−Box structure.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(n) Clean the repair area and the repair pieces with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(o) Mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) with the thickening agent
(Material No. 05−057).

(p) Apply the adhesive to the surfaces of the repair pieces and the
Spar−Box structure that will touch when assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a

maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 in).

(q) Attach the repair pieces to the Spar−Box structure and secure
with screw pins.

(r) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(s) Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(t) After the adhesive has cured, remove the screw pins and drill
the fastener holes in the repair area to the necessary diameters
for the fasteners.

(u) Countersink the fastener holes on the skin outer surface.

Page 404
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(v) Install countersunk fasteners through the skin with the sealant
(Material No. 09−005).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(w) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No.11−003).

(x) Install the correct fasteners (3 off) in the repair section and
the rib. The fasteners must be of the same type and diameter as
those which attach the same rib to the ribfoot structure next to
the repair. Use the hole that you have made in the spar to
position the fastener tool.
(y) Restore the surface paint.

(z) Install the spar section that was removed (refer to Chapter
55−11−18, Page Block 201 for data about removal and replacement
of spar sections).

(3) Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 217).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut away the skin, the ribfoot structure and the rib to the nec
essary shape and dimensions for the repair. Make sure that you
remove all of the damaged structure.
(b) Get the equivalent metal repair materials that you will use in
place of the pre−cured repair pieces. The subsequent steps will
help you to do this:

1 Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101
Config. 1, Figure 105) and find the repair zone number for the
damaged area.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 201 Config. 1, Figures 207 and 208) and find the metal
materials to use in place of pre−cured sheets and sections.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location, but do not drill any holes.

(d) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair parts
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, Material
No. 16−006).
(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No.
08−001C) to the surfaces of:
− pre−cured repair parts

Page 405
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

− pre−cured structure surfaces

where these will touch metal parts when assembled. Refer to

Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201 Config. 1, paragraph 10 and
Figure 206.

(f) Let the resin cure.

(g) Do the steps 5.Q.(2)(d) thru 5.Q.(2)(n) of repair procedure

5.Q.(2).

(h) Apply release agent (Material No. 05−020) to the Spar−Box struc
ture in the repair area.

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(i) Mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) with the thickening agent
(Material No. 05−057).

(j) Apply the adhesive to the surface of the repair pieces and the
Spar−Box structure that touch when assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a

maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 in).

(k) Attach the repair pieces to the Spar−Box structure and secure
with screw pins.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(l) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No 11−003).

(m) Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(n) After the adhesive has cured, remove the screw pins and drill
the fastener holes in the repair area to the necessary diameter
for the fasteners.

(o) Countersink the fastener holes on the skin outer surface.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−013) IS DANGEROUS.

(p) Install the countersunk fasteners through the skin with sealant
(Material No. 09−013).

(q) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

(r) Install the correct fasteners (3 off) in the repair section and
the rib. The fasteners must be of the same type and diameter as
those which attach the same rib to the ribfoot structure. Use

Page 406
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

the hole that you have made in the spar to position the fastener
tool.
(s) Restore the surface paint.

(t) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101 Config. 1 Figure
120) to find out the time limit applicable to the temporary re
pair. Tell the Inspection Department what the permissible number
of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent repair is necessary.

(u) Install the spar section that was removed (refer to Chapter
55−11−18, Page Block 201 for data about removal and replacement
of spar sections).
(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 217).

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces, adhesive, sealant and glass
fabric from the repair area.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the perma
nent repair pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201
Config. 1, paragraph 9).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shapes and dimensions nec
essary for the repair. Use the temporary repair pieces to get
the correct locations for the fastener holes in the permanent
repair pieces.

(d) Do the steps 5.Q.(2)(e) thru 5.Q.(2)(z) of repair procedure

5.Q.(2).

NOTE: Any fastener holes in the structure that were used for the
temporary repair must be drilled one size oversize for the
permanent after temporary repair.

Pages 407/408
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 31 and 32.

Figure 217 (sheet 1)

Pages 409/410
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 31 and 32.

Figure 217 (sheet 2)

Page 411
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 31 and 32.

Figure 217 (sheet 3)

Page 412
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repairs to Ribfoot Between Stringers (Flush Repair). Zones 31 and 32.

Figure 217 (sheet 4)

Page 413
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 220.

R. Skin Repair with an External Patch (All Repair Zones).

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10 paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 220
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 414
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Figure 218

− Adhesive − Material No. 08−010C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Thickening Agent − Material No. 05−057, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Release Agent − Material No. 05−020, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−013, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane Primer − Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Glassfabric Ply − Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00
− Resin − Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Permanent Repair (refer to Figure 218).

NOTE: The doubler for the permanent repair in zones 30 and 35 is

made from metal and not CFRP. The metal material to use for
the doubler is LN9073 3.1364T3 and must be 2.5 mm (0.100 in)
thick. To accomplish the permanent repair in zones 30 or 35
follow the procedure for the temporary repair 5.R.(3).
(a) Remove the surface paint from the repair area (refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 4.D).

(b) Draw some lines to show you the correct locations at which to
cut the skin to remove the damaged structure.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Cut out the damaged skin structure to the correct repair shape
and dimension.
(d) Get the correct pre−cured sheet materials necessary to make the
repair doubler. Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter 55−11−00,
Page Block 101 Config. 1, Figure 106) and the pre−cured materials
data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201 Config. 1, Figure 209).

Page 415
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(e) Make the repair doubler to the correct shape and dimensions nec

essary for the repair area.
(f) Make some marks on the doubler to show the hole locations neces

sary to attach it to the skin structure.

(g) Pilot−drill at the hole locations in the doubler.

(h) Put the doubler in its correct repair location but on the outer
surface of the skin.
(i) Make some marks on the skin to show the locations of the holes
in the doubler. Remove the doubler.

(j) Pilot−drill at the hole locations on the skin. Deburr the holes
in the skin and the doubler.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(k) Clean the repair area and the repair pieces with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003).

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(l) Mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) with the thickening agent
(Material No. 05−057).

(m) Apply the adhesive to the surfaces of the doubler and the skin
that will touch when assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a

maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 in).

(n) Attach the doubler to the skin with screw pins.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(o) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(p) Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

(q) After the adhesive has cured, drill all of the holes in the re

pair area to the necessary diameter for the fasteners.
(r) Countersink the holes on the outerface of the doubler.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(s) Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the repair area.
Make sure that you install the fasteners with the sealant (Mate

rial No. 09−005).
(t) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

Page 416
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(u) Restore the surface paint.

(3) Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 218).

(a) Do the steps 5.R.(2)(a) thru 5.R.(2)(c) of the repair procedure
5.R.(2).

(b) Get the equivalent metal materials for the doubler. The subse
quent steps will help you to do this:
1 Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101
Config. 1, Figure 106) and identify the repair zone in which
the damage has occurred.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 201 Config. 1, Figure 209) and find the equivalent metal
material applicable to the pre−cured CFRP material.

(c) Do the steps 5.R.(2)(e) thru 5.R.(2)(k) of the repair proce

dure5.R.(2).

(d) Apply the correct surface treatments to the doubler to prevent

corrosion (chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer,
Material No. 16−006).

(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg

Glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No.
08−001C) on the skin outer surface around the aperture you have
cut in the skin. The glassfabric layer must extend by 20 mm
(0.787 in) around the outside of the area covered by the dou
bler. Let the resin cure (refer to Chapter 55−77−11, for cure
time).

(f) Attach the doubler to the skin with screw−pins.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(g) Drill all of the holes to the correct size for the fasteners.

(h) Countersink the holes on the outerface of the doubler.

(i) Remove the doubler and deburr the holes.

(j) Clean the repair area and the repair pieces with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003).

Page 417
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(k) Apply a layer of sealant (Material No 09−005) to the surface of

the doubler that will touch the skin.

NOTE: If necessary you can use an adhesive shim (Material No.

08−010C) with the thickening agent (Material No. 05−057)
when you assemble the temporary repair pieces. If you do
this, make sure that you apply release agent (Material No.
05−020) to the applicable Spar−Box structure before you ap
ply the adhesive shim. The use of sealant (Material No.
09−013) is not necessary when you use the adhesive shim.
Refer to paragraph 5.R.(2) for data about how to use adhe
sive shim material.
(l) Attach the doubler to the skin. Make sure that you install the
fasteners with the sealant (Material No. 09−005).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(m) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).
(n) Repair the surface paint.

(o) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101 Config. 1, Figure
120) to find out the time limit applicable to the temporary re
pair. Tell the Inspection Department what the permissible number
of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent repair is necessary.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 218)

(a) Remove the temporary repair doubler and the sealant or adhesive
from the skin structure.
(b) Get the correct pre−cured sheet material necessary to make the
permanent repair (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201 Con
fig. 1, paragraph 9).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Make the repair doubler to the correct shape and dimensions nec
essary for the repair area. Use the temporary repair doubler to
get the correct locations for the fastener holes in the permanent
repair doubler.

(d) Do the steps 5.R.(2)(k) thru 5.R.(2)(u) of the repair procedure

5.R.(2).

NOTE: Use oversize fasteners (type ABS 0257−6) when you replace
the temporary repair doubler with the permanent repair dou
bler.

Page 418
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Repair with an External Patch. Zones 01−09, 11−13, 16, 17, 20−22,
25−28, 30−33.
Figure 218 (sheet 1)
Pages 419/420
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Repair with an External Patch. Zones 10, 14, 18, 23 and 29.
Figure 218 (sheet 2)

Pages 421/422
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Repair with an External Patch. Zones 15, 19 and 24.

Figure 218 (sheet 3)

Pages 423/424
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Repair with an External Patch. Zones 34 and 35.

Figure 218 (sheet 4)

Pages 425/426
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Repair with an External Patch.

Figure 218 (sheet 5)

Page 427
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 221.

S. Skin Repair with Laminated Filler and Internal Doubler (Flush Repair).
Zones 01−07.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out with a hot−bond (180°C (356°F))

repair procedure.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 221
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Figure 219

− Adhesive − Material No. 08−010C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Adhesive Film − Material Z−15.425, Adhesive
Film, refer to Chapter 51−33−00
− Thickening Agent − Material No. 05−057, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Porefiller − Material No. 08−008, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

Page 428
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 219).

(a) Remove the paint from the surface repair area (refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 4.D).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Cut out and chamfer the damaged skin structure to the correct
repair shape and dimension.

(c) Get the pre−cured sheet materials necessary to make the doubler
(refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201 Config. 1, Figure
210).

(d) Cut the doubler to the correct shape and dimension applicable to
the repair. Drill and deburr 3 locating holes in the doubler.
(e) Make the mating surfaces of the doubler and the internal skin
structure rough with 100 grade abrasive paper. This will give a
good keying surface for the adhesive.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(f) Clean the doubler and the repair area with the cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

WARNING: ADHESIVE FILM (MATERIAL Z−15.425, ADHESIVE FILM) IS DANGER

OUS.

(g) Cut the adhesive film (Material Z−15.425, Adhesive Film, refer to
Chapter 51−33−00) to size and shape to fit where the doubler
will be in contact with the internal structure.

(h) Remove the protective film from both sides of the adhesive film.
Apply the adhesive film to the internal skin structure.

(i) Secure a suitable length of wire through 2 of the holes in the

repair doubler.

NOTE: This wire is used to prevent the doubler falling into the
Spar−Box whilst being positioned.

(j) Insert the doubler through the hole in the skin and position it
carefully. Secure the doubler in position using a metal plate
wrapped in parting−film, and a screw−pin (refer to Figure 219).
Remove the wire from the doubler.

(k) Use heat lamps and thermocouples to cure the bond between the
doubler and the structure. Cure time must be a 2 hours at 180°C
±5°C (356°F ±9°F).
NOTE: The cure time starts only when the termocouples show the
necessary cure temperature.

Page 429
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(l) After cure time has elapsed, remove the screw−pin, the metal
plate and the parting−film.
WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(m) Mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) with the thickening agent
(Material No. 05−057).

(n) Seal the holes in the doubler with the adhesive paste and allow
to cure. Cure time is 1 hour at 93°C (200°F).
(o) Get the correct pre−impregnated fabric material for the filler
patch. Refer toChapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101 Config. 1, Figure
107.

(p) Prepare the fabric repair plies for the laminate repair. Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C.

WARNING: ADHESIVE FILM (MATERIAL Z−15.425, ADHESIVE FILM) IS DANGER

OUS.

(q) Cut the adhesive film (Material Z−15.425, Adhesive Film, refer to
Chapter 51−33−00) to size and shape to fit the chamfered edges
of the repair area.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(r) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
(s) Remove protective film from both sides of adhesive film. Apply
adhesive film to the repair area.

(t) Lay up the repair plies on the repair area. Refer to Figure 219
and to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C for data. Note that there
must be a ply overlap of 15 mm (0.590 in.).
(u) Install the vacuum−cure equipment over the laminate repair area.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Figure 210.

(v) Cure the repair plies under vacuum conditions (minimum 80% vacu
um. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D for full data.
(w) After the repair plies have cured, remove the vacuum−cure equip
ment from the repair area.

(x) With abrasive paper, make the repair patch smooth and level with
the adjacent skin surface. Initially use 280 grade and finish off
with 400 grade. If necessary apply porefiller (Material No.
08−008).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(y) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

Page 430
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(z) Repair the surface paint.

Pages 431/432
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Repair with Laminated Filler Patch and Internal Doubler (Flush Repair).
Zones 01−07.
Figure 219
Pages 433/434
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 222.

T. Stringer Repair with an External Skin Patch (External Repair). Zones

38−42.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 222
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.
(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials
− Adhesive
− Cleaning Agent
− Sealant
− Polyurethane Primer
− Glassfabric Ply
− Resin
− Refer to Figure 220
− Material No. 08−010C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00
− Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

Page 435
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(2) Permanent Repair (refer to Figure 220).

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D).

(b) Draw some lines to show you the correct locations at which to
cut the skin to remove the damaged structure.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Cut out the damaged skin and stringer structure to the correct
repair shape and dimensions.

(d) Get the correct pre−cured and the metal materials necessary to
make the repair pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201
Config. 1, paragraph 9.
NOTE: The L−section repair pieces must be made from metal. The
inner−flange support plate can be made from pre−cured mate
rials or metal.

(e) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
their repair location.
(f) Apply the correct surface treatment to the metal repair pieces
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, Material
No. 16−006).

(g) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg

Glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No.
08−001C) to the surfaces of:
− pre−cured repair parts
− pre−cured structure surfaces

where these will touch metal parts when assembled. Let the resin
cure, refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201 Config. 1, para
graph 10 and Figure 206.
(h) Attach the stringer repair section and inner flange support plate
to their repair location with screw clamps.

(i) Mark the locations of the fastener holes on the stringer inner
flange and the repair section.
(j) Pilot−drill thru the stringer inner flange, flange support plate
and the repair section at the marked hole locations.

(k) Remove the flange support plate and the repair section from their
repair location.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(l) Clean the flange support plate, repair section and the repair
area with the cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

Page 436
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(m) Apply the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) to the surfaces of the
inner flange support plate, repair section and the structure that
will touch when assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a

maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.04 in).

(n) Attach the inner flange support plate and the stringer repair
section to their repair location with screw pins.

(o) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(p) Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

(q) After the adhesive has cured, drill the holes in the stringer
inner flange, flange support plate and the repair section to the
necessary diameter for the fasteners.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(r) Install the correct fasteners with the sealant (Material No.
09−005) in the holes in the stringer inner flange, flange support
plate and the repair section.

(s) Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners in the
screw pin holes.
(t) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (Material No.11−003).

(u) Attach the stringer L−section repair pieces to their repair loca

tion with screw clamps.

(v) Mark the locations of the fastener holes on one of the L−section
repair pieces.

(w) Pilot−drill thru the L−section repair pieces, the repair section
and the stringer web at the marked hole locations.

(x) Remove the L−section repair pieces from their repair location.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(y) Clean the L−section repair pieces and the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

Page 437
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(z) Apply the adhesive (Material No 08−010C) to the surfaces of the

L−section repair pieces and the structure that will touch when
assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a

maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.04 in).

(aa)Attach the L−section repair pieces to their repair location with

screw pins.

(ab)Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(ac)Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

(ad)After the adhesive has cured, drill the holes in the L−section
repair pieces, the repair section and the stringer web to the
necessary diameter for the fasteners.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(ae)Install the correct fasteners with the sealant (Material No.

09−005) in the holes in the L−section repair pieces, the repair
section and the stringer web.

(af)Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners in the
screw pin holes.
(ag)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (Material No.11−003).

(ah)Mark the locations of the fastener holes on the repair patch.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(ai)Pilot−drill the repair patch at the marked hole locations.

(aj)Put the repair patch in its correct repair position.

(ak)Thru the corner holes in the repair patch, mark the location of
the fastener holes on the skin.

(al)Remove the repair patch from its repair position.

(am)Pilot−drill the skin at the marked hole locations.

(an)Put the repair filler in its repair position.

(ao)Put the repair patch in its repair position and attach it to the
skin with screw pins.
NOTE: In the subsequent step, make sure that the repair filler
does not move from its correct repair position.

Page 438
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ap)Pilot−drill thru the skin, repair filler, and the L−section re
pair pieces at the hole locations in the repair patch.
(aq)Remove the repair patch, filler and doubler from their repair
position.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(ar)Clean the repair patch filler and the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(as)Apply the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) to the surfaces of the

L−section repair pieces, filler, skin patch and the structure
that will touch when assembled.
NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a
maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.04 in).

(at)Attach the repair doubler filler and patch to their repair loca
tion with screw pins.

(au)Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(av)Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

(aw)After the adhesive has cured, drill the holes in the repair
patch, skin, repair filler, and the L−section repair pieces to
the necessary diameter for the fasteners.

(ax)Countersink the holes in the repair patch.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(ay)Install the correct fasteners with the sealant (Material No.

09−005) in the holes made at the step 5.T.(2)(aw).
(az)Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners in the
screw pin holes.

(ba)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No.11−003).
(bb)Remove the waste material from the repair area. To do this a
vacuum cleaner can be used thru the access holes in the front
and rear spars.

(bc)Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
(bd)Repair the surface protection (refer to Chapter 51−75−12).

(3) Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 220).

Page 439
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(a) Do the steps 5.T.(2)(a) thru 5.T.(2)(c) of the repair procedure

5.T.(2).
(b) Get the equivalent metal materials that you will use in place of
the pre−cured materials. The subsequent steps will help you to do
this:

1 Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101
Config. 1, Figure 104) and find the repair zone number for the
damaged area.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 201 Config. 1, Figure 216 and 217) and find the equiva
lent metal materials applicable to the pre−cured materials.
(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(d) Apply the correct surface treatment to the metal repair pieces
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, Material
No. 16−006).
(e) Do the steps 5.T.(2)(g) thru 5.T.(2)(bd) of the repair procedure
5.T.(2).

(f) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101 Config. 1, Figure
120 or 124) to find out the time limit applicable to the tempo
rary repair. Tell the Inspection Department what the permissible
number of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent repair is nec
essary.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 220).

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces, adhesive and glassfabric from
the repair area.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Do the steps 5.T.(2)(d) thru 5.T.(2)(g) of the repair procedure

5.T.(2).
(c) Use the temporary repair pieces to get the correct locations for
the fastener holes in the permanent repair pieces. Mark the
position of the holes.

(d) Pilot−drill the correctly marked holes in the permanent repair

pieces.
(e) Do the steps 5.T.(2)(l) thru 5.T.(2)(p) of the repair procedure
5.T.(2).

(f) Drill the holes in the stringer inner flange, flange support
plate and the repair section, one size oversize to that of the
holes used for the temporary repair.

Page 440
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(g) Do the steps 5.T.(2)(r) thru 5.T.(2)(t) and 5.T.(2)(y) thru

5.T.(2)(ac) of the repair procedure 5.T.(2).
(h) Drill the holes in the L−section repair pieces, the repair sec
tion and the stringer web, one size oversize to that of the
holes used for the temporary repair.

(i) Do the steps 5.T.(2)(ae) thru 5.T.(2)(ag) and 5.T.(2)(ar) thru

5.T.(2)(av) of the repair procedure 5.T.(2).
(j) Drill the holes in the repair patch, skin, repair filler, and
the L−section repair pieces, one size oversize to that of the
holes used for the temporary repair.

(k) Do the steps 5.T.(2)(ax) thru 5.T.(2)(bd) of the repair procedure

5.T.(2).

Pages 441/442
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with and External Patch (External Repair). Zones 38−42.
Figure 220 (sheet 1)

Pages 443/444
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with an External Patch (External Repair). Zones 38−42.

Figure 220 (sheet 2)

Page 445
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with an External Patch (External Repair). Zones 38−42.

Figure 220 (sheet 3)

Page 446
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with an External Patch (External Repair). Zones 38−42.

Figure 220 (sheet 4)

Page 447
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 223.

U. Stringer Repair with an External Skin Patch (External Repair). Zones

43−46, 48, 49, 56, 57, 59, 61.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 223
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.
(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials
− Adhesive
− Cleaning Agent
− Sealant
− Polyurethane Primer
− Glassfabric Ply
− Resin
− Refer to Figure 221
− Material No. 08−010C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00
− Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

Page 448
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(2) Permanent Repair (refer to Figure 221).

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D).

(b) Draw some lines to show you the correct locations at which to
cut the skin to remove the damaged structure.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Cut out the damaged skin and stringer structure to the correct
repair shape and dimensions.

(d) Get the correct pre−cured and the metal materials necessary to
make the repair pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201
Config. 1, paragraph 9.
NOTE: The L−section repair pieces must be made from metal. The
inner−flange support plate can be made from pre−cured mate
rials or metal.

(e) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
their repair location.
(f) Apply the correct surface treatment to the metal repair pieces
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, Material
No. 16−006).

(g) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg

Glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No.
08−001C) to the surfaces of:
− pre−cured repair parts
− pre−cured structure surfaces

where these will touch metal parts when assembled. Let the resin
cure, refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201 Config. 1, para
graph 10 and Figure 206.
(h) Attach the stringer repair section and inner flange support plate
to their repair location with screw clamps.

(i) Mark the locations of the fastener holes on the stringer inner
flange and the repair section.
(j) Pilot−drill thru the stringer inner flange, flange support plate
and the repair section at the marked hole locations.

(k) Remove the flange support plate and the repair section from their
repair location.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(l) Clean the flange support plate, repair section and the repair
area with the cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

Page 449
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(m) Apply the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) to the surfaces of the
inner flange support plate, repair section and the structure that
will touch when assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a

maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.04 in).

(n) Attach the inner flange support plate and the stringer repair
section to their repair location with screw pins.

(o) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(p) Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

(q) After the adhesive has cured, drill the holes in the stringer
inner flange, flange support plate and the repair section to the
necessary diameter for the fasteners.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(r) Install the correct fasteners with the sealant (Material No.
09−005) in the holes in the stringer inner flange, flange support
plate and the repair section.

(s) Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners in the
screw pin holes.
(t) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (Material No.11−003).

(u) Attach the stringer L−section repair pieces to their repair loca

tion with screw clamps.

(v) Mark the locations of the fastener holes on one of the L−section
repair pieces.

(w) Pilot−drill thru the L−section repair pieces, the repair section
and the stringer web at the marked hole locations.

(x) Remove the L−section repair pieces from their repair location.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(y) Clean the L−section repair pieces and the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

Page 450
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(z) Apply the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) to the surfaces of the
L−section repair pieces and the structure that will touch when
assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a

maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.04 in).

(aa)Attach the L−section repair pieces to their repair location with

screw pins.

(ab)Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(ac)Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

(ad)After the adhesive has cured, drill the holes in the L−section
repair pieces, the repair section and the stringer web to the
necessary diameter for the fasteners.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(ae)Install the correct fasteners with the sealant (Material No.

09−005) in the holes in the L−section repair pieces, the repair
section and the stringer web.

(af)Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners in the
screw pin holes.
(ag)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

(ah)Mark the locations of the fastener holes on the repair patch.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(ai)Pilot−drill the repair patch at the marked hole locations.

(aj)Put the repair patch in its correct repair position.

(ak)Thru the corner holes in the repair patch, mark the location of
the fastener holes on the skin.

(al)Remove the repair patch from its repair position.

(am)Pilot−drill the skin at the marked hole locations.

(an)Put the repair doubler and filler in their repair position.

(ao)Put the repair patch in its repair position and attach it to the
skin with screw pins.
NOTE: In the subsequent step, make sure that the repair doubler
and filler do not move from their correct repair position.

Page 451
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ap)Pilot−drill thru the skin, repair filler, doubler and the L−sec
tion repair pieces at the hole locations in the repair patch.
(aq)Remove the repair patch, filler and doubler from their repair
positions.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(ar)Clean the repair patch, filler, doubler and the repair area with
the cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(as)Apply the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) to the surfaces of the

L−section repair pieces, filler, doubler, skin patch and the
structure that will touch when assembled.
NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a
maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.04 in).

(at)Attach the repair doubler filler and patch to their repair loca
tion with screw pins.

(au)Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(av)Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

(aw)After the adhesive has cured, drill the holes in the repair
patch, skin, repair filler, doubler and the L−section repair
pieces to the necessary diameter for the fasteners.

(ax)Countersink the holes in the repair patch.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(ay)Install the correct fasteners with the sealant (Material No.

09−005) in the holes made at the step 5.U.(2)(aw).
(az)Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners in the
screw pin holes.

(ba)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No.11−003).
(bb)Remove the waste material from the repair area. To do this a
vacuum cleaner can be used thru the access holes in the front
and rear spars.

(bc)Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
(bd)Repair the surface protection (refer to Chapter 51−75−12).

(3) Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 221).

Page 452
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(a) Do the steps 5.U.(2)(a) thru 5.U.(2)(c) of the repair procedure

5.U.(2).
(b) Get the equivalent metal materials that you will use in place of
the pre−cured materials. The subsequent steps will help you to do
this:

1 Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101
Config. 1, Figure 104) and find the repair zone number for the
damaged area.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 201 Config. 1, Figure 216 and 217) and find the equiva
lent metal materials applicable to the pre−cured materials.
(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(d) Apply the correct surface treatment to the metal repair pieces
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, Material
No. 16−006).
(e) Do the steps 5.U.(2)(g) thru 5.U.(2)(bd) of the repair procedure
5.U.(2).

(f) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101 Config. 1, Figure
120 or 124) to find out the time limit applicable to the tempo
rary repair. Tell the Inspection Department what the permissible
number of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent repair is nec
essary.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 221).

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces, adhesive and glassfabric from
the repair area.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Do the steps 5.U.(2)(d) thru 5.U.(2)(g) of the repair procedure

5.U.(2).
(c) Use the temporary repair pieces to get the correct locations for
the fastener holes in the permanent repair pieces. Mark the
position of the holes.

(d) Pilot−drill the correctly marked holes in the permanent repair

pieces.
(e) Do the steps 5.U.(2)(l) thru 5.U.(2)(p) of the repair procedure
5.U.(2).

(f) Drill the holes in the stringer inner flange, flange support
plate and the repair section, one size oversize to that of the
holes used for the temporary repair.

Page 453
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(g) Do the steps 5.U.(2)(r) thru 5.U.(2)(t) and 5.U.(2)(y) thru

5.U.(2)(ac) of the repair procedure 5.U.(2).
(h) Drill the holes in the L−section repair pieces, the repair sec
tion and the stringer web, one size oversize to that of the
holes used for the temporary repair.

(i) Do the steps 5.U.(2)(ae) thru 5.U.(2)(ag) and 5.U.(2)(ar) thru

5.U.(2)(av) of the repair procedure 5.U.(2).
(j) Drill the holes in the repair patch, skin, repair filler, doubler
and the L−section repair pieces, one size oversize to that of
the holes used for the temporary repair.

(k) Do the steps 5.U.(2)(ax) thru 5.U.(2)(bd) of the repair procedure

5.U.(2).

Page 454
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with an External Patch (External Repair). Zones 43−46, 56,
59, 61.
Figure 221 (sheet 1)
Pages 455/456
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with an External Patch (External Repair). Zones 43−46, 56,
59, 61.
Figure 221 (sheet 2)
Pages 457/458
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with an External Patch (External Repair). Zones 48 and 49.
Figure 221 (sheet 3)

Pages 459/460
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with an External Patch (External Repair). Zone 57.

Figure 221 (sheet 4)

Pages 461/462
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with an External Patch (External Repair). Zones 43−46, 56,
59, 61.
Figure 221 (sheet 5)
Page 463
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with an External Patch (External Repair). Zones 48 and 49.
Figure 221 (sheet 6)

Page 464
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with an External Patch (External Repair). Zone 57.

Figure 221 (sheet 7)

Page 465
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with an External Patch (External Repair). Zones 43−46, 56,
59, 61.
Figure 221 (sheet 8)
Page 466
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with an External Patch (External Repair) Zones 48 and 49.
Figure 221 (sheet 9)

Page 467
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with an External Patch (External Repair). Zone 57.

Figure 221 (sheet 10)

Page 468
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with an External Patch (External Repair). Zones 43−46, 48,
49, 56, 57, 59, 61.
Figure 221 (sheet 11)
Page 469
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 224.

V. Stringer Repair with an External Skin Patch (External Repair). Zones 47,
50−55, 58, 60, 62, 63.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 224
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.
(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials
− Adhesive
− Cleaning Agent
− Sealant
− Polyurethane Primer
− Glassfabric Ply
− Resin
− Refer to Figure 222
− Material No. 08−010C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00
− Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

Page 470
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(2) Permanent Repair (refer to Figure 222).

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D).

(b) Draw some lines to show you the correct locations at which to
cut the skin to remove the damaged structure.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Cut out the damaged skin and stringer structure to the correct
repair shape and dimensions.

(d) Get the correct pre−cured and the metal materials necessary to
make the repair pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201
Config. 1, paragraph 9).
NOTE: The subsequent repair pieces must be made from metal:
− L−section repair pieces (all zones),
− repair patch (zones 47,50,54,58 and 63).

The inner flange support plate can be made from pre−cured mate
rials or metal.

(e) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
their repair location.

(f) Apply the correct surface treatment to the metal repair pieces
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, Material
No. 16−006).

(g) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg

Glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No.
08−001C) to the surfaces of:
− pre−cured repair parts
− pre−cured structure surfaces

where these will touch metal parts when assembled. Let the resin
cure, refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201 Config. 1, para
graph 10 and Figure 206.

(h) Attach the stringer repair section and inner flange support plate
to their repair location with screw clamps.

(i) Mark the locations of the fastener holes on the stringer inner
flange and the repair section.

(j) Pilot−drill thru the stringer inner flange, flange support plate
and the repair section at the marked hole locations.

(k) Remove the flange support plate and the repair section from their
repair location.

Page 471
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(l) Clean the flange support plate, repair section and the repair
area with the cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(m) Apply the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) to the surfaces of the
inner flange support plate, repair section and the structure that
will touch when assembled.
NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a
maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.04 in).

(n) Attach the inner flange support plate and the stringer repair
section to their repair location with screw pins.
(o) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(p) Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

(q) After the adhesive has cured, drill the holes in the stringer
inner flange, flange support plate and the repair section to the
necessary diameter for the fasteners.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(r) Install the correct fasteners with the sealant (Material No.
09−005) in the holes in the stringer inner flange, flange support
plate and the repair section.

(s) Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners in the
screw pin holes.

(t) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (Material No. 11−003).
(u) Attach the stringer L−section repair pieces to their repair loca

tion with screw clamps.

(v) Mark the locations of the fastener holes on one of the L−section
repair pieces.
(w) Pilot−drill thru the L−section repair pieces, the repair section
and the stringer web at the marked hole locations.

(x) Remove the L−section repair pieces from their repair location.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(y) Clean the L−section repair pieces and the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

Page 472
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(z) Apply the adhesive (Material No 08−010C) to the surfaces of the

L−section repair pieces and the structure that will touch when
assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a

maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.04 in).

(aa)Attach the L−section repair pieces to their repair location with

screw pins.

(ab)Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(ac)Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

(ad)After the adhesive has cured, drill the holes in the L−section
repair pieces, the repair section and the stringer web to the
necessary diameter for the fasteners.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(ae)Install the correct fasteners with the sealant (Material No.

09−005) in the holes in the L−section repair pieces, the repair
section and the stringer web.

(af)Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners in the
screw pin holes.
(ag)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

(ah)Mark the locations of the fastener holes on the repair patch.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(ai)Pilot−drill the repair patch at the marked hole locations.

(aj)Put the repair patch in its correct repair position.

(ak)Thru the corner holes in the repair patch, mark the location of
the fastener holes on the skin.

(al)Remove the repair patch from its repair position.

(am)Pilot−drill the skin at the marked hole locations.

(an)Put the repair doubler, packer and filler in their repair posi

tion.

Page 473
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ao)Put the repair patch in its repair position and attach it to the
skin with screw pins.
NOTE: In the subsequent step, make sure that the repair doubler,
packer and filler do not move from their correct repair
position.

(ap)Pilot−drill thru the skin, repair filler, packer, doubler and the
L−section repair pieces at the hole locations in the repair
patch.

(aq)Remove the repair patch, filler, packer and doubler from their
repair positions.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(ar)Clean the repair patch, filler, packer, doubler and the repair
area with the cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(as)Apply the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) to the surfaces of the

L−section repair pieces, filler, packer, doubler, skin patch and
the structure that will touch when assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a

maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.04 in).

(at)Attach the repair pieces removed at step 5.V.(2)(aq) to their

repair location with screw pins.
(au)Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(av)Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

(aw)After the adhesive has cured, drill the holes in the repair
patch, skin, repair filler, packer, doubler and the L−section re

pair pieces to the necessary diameter for the fasteners.

(ax)Countersink the holes in the repair patch.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(ay)Install the correct fasteners with the sealant (Material No.
09−005) in the holes made at the step 5.V.(2)(aw).

(az)Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners in the
screw pin holes.

(ba)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (Material No.11−003).

Page 474
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(bb)Remove the waste material from the repair area. To do this a

vacuum cleaner can be used thru the access holes in the front
and rear spars.

(bc)Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(bd)Repair the surface protection (refer to Chapter 51−75−12).

(3) Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 222).

(a) Do the steps 5.V.(2)(a) thru 5.V.(2)(c) of the repair procedure
5.V.(2).

(b) Get the equivalent metal materials that you will use in place of
the pre−cured materials. The subsequent steps will help you to do
this:

1 Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101
Config. 1, Figure 104) and find the repair zone number for the
damaged area.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 201 Config. 1, Figure 216 and 217) and find the equiva
lent metal materials applicable to the pre−cured materials.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.
(d) Apply the correct surface treatment to the metal repair pieces
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, Material
No. 16−006).

(e) Do the steps 5.V.(2)(g) thru 5.V.(2)(bd) of the repair procedure

5.V.(2).
(f) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101 Config. 1, Figure
120 or 124) to find out the time limit applicable to the tempo
rary repair. Tell the Inspection Department what the permissible
number of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent repair is nec
essary.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 222).

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces, adhesive and glassfabric from
the repair area.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Do the steps 5.V.(2)(d) thru 5.V.(2)(g) of the repair procedure

5.V.(2).

Page 475
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(c) Use the temporary repair pieces to get the correct locations for
the fastener holes in the permanent repair pieces. Mark the
position of the holes.

(d) Pilot−drill the correctly marked holes in the permanent repair

pieces.

(e) Do the steps 5.V.(2)(l) thru 5.V.(2)(p) of the repair procedure

5.V.(2).
(f) Drill the holes in the stringer inner flange, flange support
plate and the repair section, one size oversize to that of the
holes used for the temporary repair.

(g) Do the steps 5.V.(2)(r) thru 5.V.(2)(t) and 5.V.(2)(y) thru

5.V.(2)(ac) of the repair procedure 5.V.(2).

(h) Drill the holes in the L−section repair pieces, the repair sec
tion and the stringer web, one size oversize to that of the
holes used for the temporary repair.

(i) Do the steps 5.V.(2)(ae) thru 5.V.(2)(ag) and 5.V.(2)(ar) thru

5.V.(2)(av) of the repair procedure 5.V.(2).

(j) Drill the holes in the repair patch, skin, repair filler, packer,
doubler and the L−section repair pieces, one size oversize to
that of the holes used for the temporary repair.
(k) Do the steps 5.V.(2)(ax) thru 5.V.(2)(bd) of the repair procedure
5.V.(2).

Page 476
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with an External Patch (External Repair). Zones 47, 54, 58,
63.
Figure 222 (sheet 1)
Pages 477/478
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with an External Patch (External Repair). Zone 50.

Figure 222 (sheet 2)

Pages 479/480
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with an External Patch (External Repair). Zones 51, 52, 55,
60.
Figure 222 (sheet 3)
Pages 481/482
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with an External Patch (External Repair). Zones 53, 62.
Figure 222 (sheet 4)

Pages 483/484
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with an External Patch (External Repair). Zones 47, 54, 58,
63.
Figure 222 (sheet 5)
Page 485
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with an External Patch (External Repair). Zones 50.

Figure 222 (sheet 6)

Page 486
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with an External Patch (External Repair). Zone 51, 52, 55,
60.
Figure 222 (sheet 7)
Page 487
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with an External Patch (External Repair). Zones 53, 62.
Figure 222 (sheet 8)

Page 488
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with an External Patch (External Repair). Zones 47, 54, 58,
63.
Figure 222 (sheet 9)
Page 489
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with an External Patch (External Repair). Zone 50.

Figure 222 (sheet 10)

Page 490
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with an External Patch (External Repair). Zones 51, 52, 55,
60.
Figure 222 (sheet 11)
Page 491
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with an External Patch (External Repair). Zones 53, 62.
Figure 222 (sheet 12)

Page 492
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with an External Patch (External Repair). Zones 47, 50−55,
58, 60, 62, 63.
Figure 222 (sheet 13)
Page 493
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 225.

W. Repair of Damage to Skin Flange. Zone 01.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure you must do a damage eval
uation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 225
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Figure 223

− Adhesive − Material No. 08−010C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane Primer − Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Glassfabric Ply − Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00
− Resin − Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 223).

Page 494
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D).
(b) Draw some lines to show you the correct locations at which to
cut the skin flange to remove the damaged structure.

(c) Remove the anchor nuts and fasteners from the repair area.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Cut out the damaged skin flange structure to the correct shape
and dimensions. In areas with electrical bonding strip, radius
the corners of the undamaged bonding strip after removing the
damaged structure, (refer to detail A of Figure 223).

(e) Get the correct pre−cured and metal materials necessary to make
the repair pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201
Config. 1, paragraph 9. Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter
55−11−00, Page Block 101 Config. 1, Figure 108).

(f) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
their repair location. Where necessary abrade the repair filler
to make flush with the adjacent flange surface.

(g) Apply the correct surface treatment to the metal repair doubler,
except to those surfaces which will be in contact with electrical
bonding strips when assembled (chromic acid anodizing, then poly

urethane primer, Material No. 16−006).
(h) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No.
08−001C) to the surface of the metal repair doubler which will
be in contact with CFRP parts when assembled. Do not apply
glassfabric between repair doubler areas in contact with electri

cal bonding strips (refer to detail A of Figure 223).

(i) Attach the repair pieces to their repair location with screw
clamps.

(j) Mark the locations of the fastener holes on the skin flange and
the CFRP repair section.
NOTE: Do not mark the locations of the anchor nut fastener loca

tions at this step.

(k) Pilot−drill thru the skin flange, metal repair doubler and the
CFRP repair filler at the marked hole locations.
(l) Remove the repair pieces from their repair location.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(m) Clean the repair pieces and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003).

Page 495
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(n) Apply the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) to the surfaces of the
repair pieces and the skin flange structure that will touch when
assembled. Do not apply adhesive to surfaces which will be in
contact with electrical bonding strip when assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a

maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.04 in).
(o) Attach the repair pieces to their repair location with screw
pins.

(p) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
(q) Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

(r) After the adhesive has cured, drill the holes in the stringer
inner flange, flange support plate and the repair section to the
necessary diameter for the fasteners.

(s) Counterskin the holes in the skin flange and the CFRP repair
filler.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY THE SEALANT TO THOSE FASTENERS WHICH GIVE THE
ELECTRICAL BOND (REFER TO FIGURE 223).
(t) Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the repair area
with the sealant (Material No. 09−005).

(u) Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners in the
screw pin holes.

(v) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No.11−003).

(w) Mark−out and drill all of the holes necessary to install the an
chor nuts in their correct location.

(x) Install the anchor nuts with the sealant (Material No. 09−005).
(y) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

(z) Repair the surface protection (refer to Chapter 51−75−12).

Page 496
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Skin Flanges. Zone 01.

Figure 223

Pages 497/498
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 226.

X. Repair of Damage to Skin and Flange. Zones 01A, 02A, 03A.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure you must do a damage eval
uation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 226
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Figure 224

− Adhesive − Material No. 08−010C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane Primer − Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Glassfabric Ply − Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00
− Resin − Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 224).

Page 499
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D).
(b) Draw some lines to show you the correct locations at which to
cut the skin flange to remove the damaged structure.

(c) Remove the anchor nuts and fasteners from the repair area.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Cut out the damaged skin and flange structure to the correct
shape and dimensions. In areas with electrical bonding strip, ra

dius the corners of the undamaged bonding strip after removing
the damaged structure, (refer to detail A of Figure 224).

(e) Get the correct pre−cured and metal materials necessary to make
the repair pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201
Config. 1, paragraph 9. Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter
55−11−00, Page Block 101 Config. 1, Figure 103).

(f) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
their repair location. Where necessary abrade the skin repair
filler to make flush with adjacent skin surface (refer to detail
B of Figure 224).

(g) Apply the correct surface treatment to the metal L−section repair
piece (chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, Mate

rial No. 16−006). Apply the same treatment to the metal repair
doubler for the flange, except to those surfaces which will be
in contact with electrical bonding strip when assembled.

(h) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg

Glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No.
08−001C) to the surface of the metal L−section repair piece and
the metal repair doubler that will touch CFRP materials when as

sembled.

(i) Mark the position of the fastener holes on the skin surface.

(j) Pilot−drill the skin at the marked hole locations.

(k) Mark the position of the fastener holes at the corners of the
subsequent repair pieces: skin doubler, skin filler, flange fill

er and the metal L−sections.

(l) Pilot−drill the repair pieces at the marked hole locations.

(m) Attach the pilot−drilled repair pieces to their repair location

with screw pins.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(n) Pilot−drill all the fastener holes in the installed repair pieces
thru the holes in the skin and rear spar.

Page 500
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(o) Mark the position of the fastener holes on the skin flange and
the flange repair filler.
NOTE: Do not mark the positions of the anchor nut fasteners loca

tions at this step.

(p) Pilot−drill the skin flange and the flange repair filler at the
marked hole locations.

(q) Mark the position of the fastener holes at the corners of the
flange repair packer and the flange repair doubler.

NOTE: The lower skin of zone 03 does not have a flange repair
packer.

(r) Pilot−drill the flange repair packer and the flange repair dou

bler at the marked hole locations.

(s) Attach the flange repair packer and the flange repair doubler to
their repair location with screw pins.

(t) Pilot−drill the fastener holes in the flange repair packer and
the flange repair doubler thru the holes in the flange.
(u) Remove all the repair pieces from their repair location.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(v) Clean the repair pieces and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003).
WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(w) Apply the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) to the surfaces of the
repair pieces and the Spar−Box structure that will touch when
assembled. Make sure that all gaps are sealed as shown in Figure
224. Do not apply adhesive to surfaces which will be in contact
with electrical bonding strip when assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a

maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.04 in).

(x) Attach the repair pieces to their repair location with screw
pins.
(y) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(z) Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

(aa)After the adhesive has cured, drill all the holes in the repair
area to the necessary diameter for the fasteners.

(ab)Counterskin those holes where it is indicated that countersunk

fasteners are to be installed (refer to Figure 224).

Page 501
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY THE SEALANT TO THOSE FASTENERS WHICH GIVE THE
ELECTRICAL BOND (REFER TO FIGURE 224).

(ac)Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the repair area

with the sealant (Material No. 09−005).

(ad)Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners in the
screw pin holes.
(ae)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

(af)Mark−out and drill all of the holes necessary to install the an
chor nuts in their correct location.
(ag)Install the anchor nuts with the sealant (Material No. 09−005).

(ah)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

(ai)Remove the waste material from the repair area.

(aj)Repair the surface protection (refer to Chapter 51−75−12).

Page 502
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Skin and Flange. Zones 01A, 02A and 03A.
Figure 224 (sheet 1)

Pages 503/504
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Skin and Flange. Zones 01A, 02A and 03A.
Figure 224 (sheet 2)

Page 505
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 227.

Y. Repair of Damage to Skin and Flange, Zone 04A.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure you must do a damage eval
uation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 227
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Figure 225

− Adhesive − Material No. 08−010C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane Primer − Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Glassfabric Ply − Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg
Glassfabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00
− Resin − Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 225).

Page 506
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D).
(b) Draw some lines to show you the correct locations at which to
cut the skin flange to remove the damaged structure.

(c) Remove the anchor nuts and fasteners from the repair area.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Cut out the damaged skin and flange structure to the correct
shape and dimensions. In areas with electrical bonding strip, ra

dius the corners of the undamaged bonding strip after removing
the damaged structure, (refer to detail E of Figure 225).

(e) Get the correct pre−cured and metal materials necessary to make
the repair pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201
Config. 1, paragraph 9. Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter
55−11−00, Page Block 101 Config. 1, Figure 103).

(f) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
their repair location.
NOTE: The metal repair doubler must be joggled to give the cor

rect repair installation. Refer to Chapter 51−26−12 for
joggling data.

(g) Apply the correct surface treatment to the metal L−section repair
piece (chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, Mate

rial No. 16−006). Apply the same treatment to the metal repair
doubler for the flange, except to those surfaces which will be
in contact with electrical bonding strip when assembled.

(h) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy Prepreg

Glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No.
08−001C) to the surface of the metal L−section repair piece and
the metal repair doubler that will touch CFRP materials when as

sembled.

(i) Mark the position of the fastener holes on the skin surface.
(j) Pilot−drill the skin at the marked hole locations.

(k) Mark the position of the fastener holes at the corners of the
subsequent repair pieces: skin doubler, skin filler, flange fill

er and the metal L−sections.

(l) Pilot−drill the repair pieces at the marked hole locations.

(m) Attach the pilot−drilled repair pieces to their repair location
with screw pins.

Page 507
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(n) Pilot−drill all the fastener holes in the installed repair pieces
thru the holes in the skin and the rear spar.

(o) Mark the position of the fastener holes on the skin flange and
the flange repair filler.

NOTE: Do not mark the locations of the anchor nut fasteners loca

tions at this step.
(p) Pilot−drill the skin flange and the flange repair filler at the
marked hole locations.

(q) Mark the position of the fastener holes at the corners of the
flange repair packer and the flange repair doubler.
NOTE: The lower skin does not have a flange repair packer.

(r) Pilot−drill the flange repair packer and the flange repair dou

bler at the marked hole locations.

(s) Attach the flange repair packer and the flange repair doubler to
its repair location with screw pins.
(t) Pilot−drill the fastener holes in the flange repair packer (upper
skin only) and the flange repair doubler thru the holes in the
flange.

(u) Remove all the repair pieces from their repair location.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(v) Clean the repair pieces and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003).

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(w) Apply the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) to the surfaces of the
repair pieces and the stabilizer structure that will touch when
assembled. Make sure that all gaps are sealed as shown in Figure
225. Do not apply adhesive to surfaces which will be in contact
with electrical bonding strip when assembled.
NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a
maximum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.04 in).

(x) Attach the repair pieces to their repair location with screw
pins.

(y) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(z) Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

Page 508
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(aa)After the adhesive has cured, drill all the holes in the repair
area to the necessary diameter for the fasteners.
(ab)Counterskin those holes where it is indicated that countersunk
fasteners are to be installed (refer to Figure 225).

(ac)Remove the waste material from the repair area.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY THE SEALANT TO THOSE FASTENERS WHICH GIVE THE
ELECTRICAL BOND (REFER TO FIGURE 225).

(ad)Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the repair area

with the sealant (Material No. 09−005).

(ae)Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners in the
screw pin holes.

(af)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No.11−003).

(ag)Mark−out and drill all of the holes necessary to install the an
chor nuts in their correct location.
(ah)Install the anchor nuts with the sealant (Material No. 09−005).

(ai)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

(aj)Remove the waste material from the repair area.

(ak)Repair the surface protection (refer to Chapter 51−75−12).

Pages 509/510
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Skin and Flange. Zone 04A.

Figure 225 (sheet 1)

Pages 511/512
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Skin and Flange. Zone 04A.

Figure 225 (sheet 2)

Page 513
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−11−2−001−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 228.

Z. Fairing Attachment Repair.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation refer to Chapter 51−77−10.
NOTE: This repair is valid for Upper and Lower Skin between RS and STGR1
in Rib 4 area, when the nut−plates that fix the fairing have to be
repaired.

NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the access doors of the RS or FS

adjacent to the damaged area before this repair can be accom
plished.

NOTE: It will be necessary to remove the fairing of the THS before this
repair can be accomplished.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 228
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to

Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 226).

Page 514
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(a) Remove and discard the nut−plate and the CFRP plate carefully if
it is still bonded in place.
NOTE: If the plate is not in place, you must search for it, re

move it and discard it.

WARNING: THE CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Drill and countersink the hole in the fastener position to the
final diameter (refer to Figure 226 for full data).

(d) Remove the sharp edges from the hole in the skin in the repair
area with an abrasive cone.

(e) Remove the waste material from the repair area.

WARNING: THE SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE SEALANT IS NOT TOO MUCH TO AVOID FALLING
INTO THE STRUCTURE.
(f) Install the blind nut (refer to Figure 226) with sealant (Mate

rial No. 09−005) in the correct position in the skin.

WARNING: THE CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(g) Remove the remaining sealant from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(h) Install the THS fairing.

Pages 515/516
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of the Fairing/ Skin Attachment Skin Repair.

Figure 226

Pages 517/518
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SKIN PANELS − HORIZONTAL STABILIZER SPAR BOX

1. General

NOTE: CONFIG−2 is applicable after modification 25487G00290 only. For

effectivity refer to the Modification/Service Bulletin List given in
Chapter 55−10−00 Page Block 001.

For specific repair information applicable to the Skin Panels of the

Horizontal Stabilizer Spar Box, Config. 2, refer to Chapter 55−11−11, Page
Block 201, Config. 1.

Pages 201/202
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−2
Jun 01/09
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SKIN PANELS − HORIZONTAL STABILIZER SPAR BOX

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

1. General
NOTE: CONFIG−3 is applicable after modification 30971G00382 only. For effec
tivity refer to the Modification/Service Bulletin List given in Chap
ter 55−10−00 Page Block 001.

NOTE: For Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

This topic contains all the specific repair procedures for the skin panels
of the THS Spar Box. The repair zones and allowable damage data for these
repair procedure is in Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101, Config. 3.

2. Safety Precautions

To prevent injury to you and another persons read and obey the warnings
given below.
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.

WARNING: WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND FILTER MASK WHEN YOU CUT,
ABRADE OR DRILL COMPOSITE MATERIALS. THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MA
TERIALS CAN GET INTO YOUR LUNGS OR ON YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE YOU IN
JURY. IMMEDIATELY REMOVE DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.

WHEN YOU WORK WITH CFRP COMPOSITE MATERIALS, IMMEDIATELY REMOVE
DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRICAL POWER
ON THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT REPAIR.
3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER REMARKS

No General Repairs applicable. − −

Table 201

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

4. Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs

SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE REPAIR INSPECTION

CATEGORY INSTRUCTION REF
ERENCE
Skin Repair with an Ex 5.A. 201 B 55−11−11−2−003−00
ternal Doubler, All Zones
Internal Skin Repair 5.B. 202 B 55−11−11−2−003−00
(Flush), for constant
skin thickness. Zones A,
B and C
Internal Skin Repair 5.C. 203 B 55−11−11−2−003−00
(Flush), for variable
skin thickness. Zones A,
B and C
Internal Skin Repair 5.D. 204 B 55−11−11−2−003−00
(Flush), Zone D

Table 202
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

5. Skin Repairs

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−11−11−2−003−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 203.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

A. Skin Repair with an External Doubler, All Zones

NOTE: Before you repair the damage structure, you must do a damage eval
uation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for general data and
Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101, Config. 3 for allowable damage
limits.

NOTE: This repair is applicable for Skin Panels of the Horizontal Stabi
lizer Spar Box and is valid as shown in Table 203. CFRP or metal
lic doubler can be used. Refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block
101, Config. 3, for repair zones definition.

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 203
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information Table in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

NOTE: Refer to the Weight Variant Identification Table given in the

Introduction of the SRM, to find all necessary information related
to the weight variant and their maximum values and the modification
associated to the aircraft type.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Doubler 1 Refer to Figure 201

− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Laminating Resin − Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para
graph 6.B.(2)
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Epoxy Primer − Material No. 16−006B, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions, refer to Figure 201

(a) Draw some lines to show you the correct locations at which to
cut the skin to remove the damaged structure.

CAUTION: TAKE CARE NOT DAMAGE ANY INTERNAL STRUCTURAL COMPONENT

(STRINGERS OR RIBS).

(b) Cut out the damaged skin structure to the correct repair shape
and dimension, refer to Chapter 51−27−00.

(c) Remove any sharp edge from the cut out with an abrasive cloth.
(d) Clean the CFRP dust with a vacuum cleaner.

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(e) Apply the laminating resin (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph

6.B.(2)) to the skin cut out.
NOTE: Do steps, 5.A.(2)(f) thru 5.A.(2)(y) when pre−cured CFRP
doubler is to be used.

(f) Get the correct CFRP pre−cured sheet material necessary to make
the repair doubler. Refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101,
Config. 3, Figure 102 to determine the repair zone and Chapter
55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 3, Figure 201 to see material
details of the applicable pre−cured sheet material.

(g) Make the CFRP repair doubler from the correct pre−cured sheet
material to the shape and dimensions for the repair. Refer to
Figure 201, sheet 1, for zones A and B or Figure 201, sheet 2,
for zones C and D.

NOTE: Note that for Zone D, CFRP repair doubler is made from
Type 1 plus Type 2 CFRP pre−cured sheet materials.

(h) Make some marks on the CFRP doubler to show the hole locations
necessary to attach it to the skin structure.
(i) Pilot−drill at the hole locations in the CFRP doubler, refer to
Chapter 55−44−21.

(j) Put the doubler in its correct repair locations on the outer
surface of the skin.
CAUTION: IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO PUT THE REPAIR DOUBLER ON THE RE
PAIR AREA IN ITS CORRECT POSITION TO MAKE SURE THAT THE
HOLES ON THE STRINGER FOOT ARE WELL POSITIONED.

(k) Mark the skin plate thru the previously drilled positions on the
CFRP repair doubler.
(l) Pillot−drill at the hole locations on the skin. Deburr the holes
in the skin and the CFRP doubler with and abrasive cone.

(m) Put the CFRP repair doubler on the skin plate in its correct
position and secure with screw pins.
(n) Drill the CFRP repair doubler and skin plate to the final diame
ter for the fastener, refer to Chapter 51−44−21.

(o) Remove the CFRP repair doubler from the skin.

(p) Deburr the holes in the skin and the CFRP doubler with and abra
sive cone.
(q) Countersink the previously drilled holes in the CFRP repair dou
bler, refer to Chapter 51−46−21.

(r) Clean the repair area and the repair pieces with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003).

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(s) Apply sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the surfaces of the dou
bler and the skin that will touch when assembled , refer to
Chapter 51−76−00.

NOTE: As for Zone D Type 1 and Type 2 CFRP pre−cured sheet mate
rials are required, apply a coat of sealant (Material No.
09−005) between both.

(t) Put the CFRP repair doubler in its correct position on the skin
plate and secure with screw pins.

(u) Remove the screw pins in turn and wet install the correct fas
teners in the vacated holes, refer to Chapter 51−42−21, with
sealant (Material No. 09−005).

(v) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

(w) Apply a bead of sealant (Material No. 09−002) to the contour of

the CFRP doubler.

(x) Let the sealants cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for

curing data.

(y) Restore the surface finish. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

NOTE: Do steps, from 5.A.(2)(z) thru 5.A.(2)(at) when metallic

doubler is to be used.
(z) Get the correct metallic material for the doubler. Refer to Fig
ure 201.

(aa)Make the metallic repair doubler to the correct shape and dimen
sion for the repair, refer to Figure 201, sheet 1, for zones A
and B or Figure 201, sheet 2, for zones C and D.
(ab)Make some marks on the metallic doubler to show the hole loca
tions necessary to attach it to the skin structure.

(ac)Pilot−drill at the hole locations in the metallic doubler, refer

to Chapter 51−44−11.
CAUTION: IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO PUT THE REPAIR DOUBLER ON THE RE
PAIR AREA IN ITS CORRECT POSITION TO MAKE SURE THAT THE
HOLES ON THE STRINGER FOOT ARE WELL POSITIONED.

(ad)Put the metallic doubler in its correct repair locations on the

outer surface of the skin.
(ae)Mark the skin plate thru the previously drilled positions on the
metallic repair doubler.

(af)Pillot−drill the hole locations on the skin. Deburr the holes in

the skin and the metallic doubler with an abrasive cone.

Page 205
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ag)Put the metallic repair doubler on the skin plate in its correct
position and secure with screw pins.
(ah)Drill the metallic repair doubler and skin plate to the final
diameter for the fastener, refer to Chapter 51−44−11.

(ai)Remove the metallic repair doubler from the skin.

(aj)Deburr the holes in the skin and the doubler with an abrasive
cone.
(ak)Countersink the previously drilled holes in the repair doubler,
refer to Chapter 51−46−11.

(al)Clean the repair area and the repair doubler with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003).
(am)Apply a coat of epoxy primer (Material No. 16−006B) to the re
pair doubler.

(an)Apply sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the surfaces of the me

tallic doubler and the skin that will touch when assembled, refer
to Chapter 51−24−00.
(ao)Put the metallic repair doubler in its correct position on the
skin plate and secure with screw pins.

(ap)Remove the screw pins in turn and wet install the correct fas
tener in the vacated holes with sealant (Material No. 09−005),
refer to Chapter 51−42−21.

(aq)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003).

(ar)Apply a bead of sealant (Material No. 09−002) to the contour of

the metallic doubler from the outer surface .
(as)Let the sealants cure. Refer to manufacturer s instructions for
curing data.

(at)Restore the surface finish. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 206
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Repair with an External Repair Doubler, Zones A and B

Figure 201 (sheet 1)

Pages 207/208
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Repair with an External Repair Doubler, Zones C and D

Figure 201 (sheet 2)

Pages 209/210
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−11−11−2−003−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 204.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

B. Internal Skin Repair (Flush), for constant skin thickness. Zones A, B

and C.

NOTE: Before you repair the damage structure, you must do a damage eval
uation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for general data and
Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101, Config. 3 for allowable damage
limits.

NOTE: This repair is applicable for Skin Panels of the Horizontal Stabi
lizer THS Spar Box and is valid as shown in Table 204. Refer to
Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101, Config. 3, for repair zones defi
nition.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 204
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information Table in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 211
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Doubler 1 Refer to Figure 202 for Pre−

cured Sheet type material data.
2 Repair Packer 1 Refer to Figure 202 for Pre−
cured Sheet type material data.
3 Repair Filler 1 Refer to Figure 202 for Pre−
cured Sheet type material data.
− Liquid Shim − Material No. 08−051, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Solid Shim − Material Z−19.775, Carbon Fab
ric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00.
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Sealant − Material No. 09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
(2) Repair Instructions, refer to Figure 202.

(a) Remove the applicable front spar panel, to carry out this repair,
refer to Chapter 55−11−18, Page Block 201, Config. 3.

(b) Determine the damage extension on the skin and the applicable
repair Zone.
(c) Draw on the outer skin the cut out lines, the repair doubler
contour and the fastener hole positions.

(d) Put a transparent plastic sheet over the repair area and transfer
all the lines previously drawn. This plastic sheet shall be used
as a template.

CAUTION: TAKE CARE NOT DAMAGE ANY INTERNAL STRUCTURAL COMPONENT

(STRINGERS OR RIBS).

(e) Cut out the damaged skin structure to the correct repair shape
and dimension, refer to Chapter 51−27−00.

(f) Pilot−drill all the marked fastener hole positions on the outer
skin, refer toChapter 51−44−21.

(g) Deburr the skin cut out and the holes with abrasive cloth and
abrasive cone.
(h) Remove the CFRP dust with a vacuum cleaner.

Page 212
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(i) Get the correct pre−cured material necessary to make the repair
pieces. Refer to Figure 202, to determine the applicable pre−
cured sheet type number depending on the damage location and
Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 3, paragraph 9 for pre−
cured sheet material information.

(j) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions nec
essary for the repair area, refer to Figure 202.
NOTE: Thickness of the repair packer and filler to be determined
on assembly.

(k) Chamfer the repair doubler in case of interference with stringer

radius.

(l) Mark on the repair doubler the fastener hole positions. Use the
plastic template.

(m) Mark on the repair filler the fastener hole positions. Use the
plastic template.

(n) Pilot−drill the fastener hole positions on the repair doubler and
repair filler.

(o) Deburr the previously drilled holes with an abrasive cone.

(p) Put the repair doubler, the repair packer and repair filler in
their correct position and secure with screw pins.
(q) Transfer drill to the repair packer the fastener hole positions
from the outer skin and repair filler.

(r) Remove the repair parts from the repair area.

(s) Remove the CFRP dust from the repair area and repair parts with
a vacuum cleaner.
(t) Clean the repair area and repair parts with clening agent (Ma
teiral No. 11−003)

(u) Put the repair parts in their correct position and check the
contact surfaces for gaps.
NOTE: If necessary apply liquid shim made from adhesive paste
(Material No. 08−051) between repair parts up to a maximum
thickness of 0.5 mm (0.019 in.) per joint, or solid shim
made from CFRP prepreg (Material No. Z−19.775, Carbon Fab
ric) up to a maximum thickness of 1,2 mm (0.047in.).
(v) Drill all the fastener hole positions to the final diameter for
the fastener.

(w) Remove the repair parts from the repair area.

Page 213
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(x) Countersink the fastener holes in the outer skin and outer sur
face of the repair filler, refer to Chapter 51−46−21.
(y) Deburr all the fastener holes in the outer skin and repair parts
with an abrasive cone.

(z) Remove the CFRP dust from the repair area and repair parts with
a vacuum cleaner.

(aa)Clean the repair area and repair parts with clening agent (Ma
teiral No. 11−003)

(ab)Apply a layer of sealant (Material No. 09−002), to the contact

surfaces of repair parts.

(ac)Put the repair parts in their correct position on the repair

area and secure with screw pins.

(ad)Wet install the correct fasteners with the sealant (Material No.
09−005), refer to Chapter 51−76−11.

(ae)Remove any excess of sealant from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
(af)Apply a bead of sealant (Material No. 09−002) to the contour of
the repair doubler and to the gap between filler and skin.

(ag)Let the sealants cure. Refer to manufacturer s instructions for

curing data.
(ah)Reinstall the removed front spar panel, made in step 5.B.(2)(a).

(ai)Restore the surface finish. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 214
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Internal Skin Repair (Flush), for constant skin thickness. Zones A and B
Figure 202 (sheet 1)

Pages 215/216
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Internal Skin Repair (Flush), for constant skin thickness. Zone C

Figure 202 (sheet 2)

Pages 217/218
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−11−11−2−003−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 205.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

C. Internal Skin Repair (Flush), for variable skin thickness. Zones A, B

and C.

NOTE: Before you repair the damage structure, you must do a damage eval
uation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for general data and
Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101, Config. 3 for allowable damage
limits.

NOTE: This repair is applicable for Skin Panels of the Horizontal Stabi
lizer THS Spar Box and is valid as shown in Table 205. Refer to
Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101, Config. 3, for repair zones defi
nition.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 205
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information Table in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 219
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Doubler 1 Refer to Figure 203 for Pre−

cured Sheet type material data.
2 Repair Packer 4 Refer to Figure 203 for Pre−
cured Sheet type material data.
3 Repair Filler 1 Refer to Figure 203 for Pre−
cured Sheet type material data.
− Liquid Shim − Material No. 08−051, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Solid Shim − Material Z−19.775, Carbon Fab
ric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00.
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Sealant − Material No. 09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
(2) Repair Instructions, refer to Figure 203.

(a) Remove the applicable front spar panel, to carry out this repair,
refer to Chapter 55−11−18, Page Block 201, Config. 3.

(b) Determine the damage extension on the skin and the applicable
repair Zone.
(c) Draw on the outer skin the cut out lines, the repair doubler
contour and the fastener hole positions.

(d) Put a transparent plastic sheet over the repair area and transfer
all the lines previously drawn. This plastic sheet shall be used
as a template.

CAUTION: TAKE CARE NOT DAMAGE ANY INTERNAL STRUCTURAL COMPONENT

(STRINGERS OR RIBS).

(e) Cut out the damaged skin structure to the correct repair shape
and dimension, refer to Chapter 51−27−00.

(f) Pilot−drill all the marked fastener hole positions on the outer
skin, refer toChapter 51−44−21.

(g) Deburr the skin cut out and the holes with abrasive cloth and
abrasive cone.
(h) Remove the CFRP dust with a vacuum cleaner.

Page 220
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(i) Get the correct pre−cured material necessary to make the repair
pieces. Refer to Figure 203, to determine the applicable pre−
cured sheet type number depending on the damage location and
Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 3, paragraph 9 for pre−
cured sheet material information.

(j) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions nec
essary for the repair area, refer to Figure 203.
NOTE: Thickness of the repair packers and filler to be determined
on assembly.

(k) Chamfer the repair doubler in case of interference with stringer

radius.

(l) Mark on the repair doubler the fastener hole positions. Use the
plastic template.

(m) Mark on the repair filler the fastener hole positions. Use the
plastic template.

(n) Pilot−drill the fastener hole positions on the repair doubler and
repair filler.

(o) Deburr the previously drilled holes with an abrasive cone.

(p) Put the repair doubler, the repair packers and repair filler in
their correct position and secure with screw pins.
(q) Transfer drill to the repair packers the fastener hole positions
from the outer skin and repair filler.

(r) Remove the repair parts from the repair area.

(s) Remove the CFRP dust from the repair area and repair parts with
a vacuum cleaner.
(t) Clean the repair area and repair parts with cleaning agent (Ma
terial No. 11−003)

(u) Put the repair parts in their correct position and check the
contact surfaces for gaps.
NOTE: If necessary apply liquid shim made from adhesive paste
(Material No. 08−051) between repair parts up to a maximum
thickness of 0.5 mm (0.019 in.) per joint, or solid shim
made from CFRP prepreg (Material No. Z−19.775, Carbon Fab
ric) up to a maximum thickness of 1,2 mm (0.047in.).
(v) Drill all the fastener hole positions to the final diameter for
the fastener.

(w) Remove the repair parts from the repair area.

Page 221
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(x) Countersink the fastener holes in the outer skin and outer sur
face of the repair filler, refer to Chapter 51−46−21.
(y) Deburr all the fastener holes in the outer skin and repair parts
with an abrasive cone.

(z) Remove the CFRP dust from the repair area and repair parts with
a vacuum cleaner.

(aa)Clean the repair area and repair parts with clening agent (Ma
teiral No. 11−003)

(ab)Apply a layer of sealant (Material No. 09−002), to the contact

surfaces of repair parts.

(ac)Put the repair parts in their correct position on the repair

area and secure with screw pins.

(ad)Wet install the correct fasteners with the sealant (Material No.
09−005), refer to Chapter 51−76−11.

(ae)Remove any excess of sealant from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
(af)Apply a bead of sealant (Material No. 09−002) to the contour of
the repair doubler and to the gap between filler and skin.

(ag)Let the sealants cure. Refer to manufacturer s instructions for

curing data.
(ah)Reinstall the removed front spar panel, made in step 5.C.(2)(a).

(ai)Restore the surface finish. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 222
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Internal Skin Repair (Flush), for variable skin thickness. Zones A and B
Figure 203 (sheet 1)

Pages 223/224
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Internal Skin Repair (Flush), for variable skin thickness. Zone C

Figure 203 (sheet 2)

Pages 225/226
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−11−11−2−003−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 206.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

D. Internal Skin Repair (Flush). Zone D.

NOTE: Before you repair the damage structure, you must do a damage eval
uation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for general data and
Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101, Config. 3 for allowable damage
limits.

NOTE: This repair is applicable for Skin Panels of the Horizontal Stabi
lizer THS Spar Box and is valid as shown in Table 206. Refer to
Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101, Config. 3, for repair zones defi
nition.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 206
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information Table in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 227
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Doubler 2 Refer to Figure 204 for Pre−

cured Sheet type material data.
2 Repair Packer 4 Refer to Figure 204 for Pre−
cured Sheet type material data.
3 Repair Filler 1 Refer to Figure 204 for Pre−
cured Sheet type material data.
− Liquid Shim − Material No. 08−051, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Solid Shim − Material Z−19.775, Carbon Fab
ric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00.
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Sealant − Material No. 09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
(2) Repair Instructions, refer to Figure 204.

(a) Remove the applicable front spar panel, to carry out this repair,
refer to Chapter 55−11−18, Page Block 201, Config. 3.

(b) Determine the damage extension on the skin and the applicable
repair Zone.
(c) Draw on the outer skin the cut out lines, the repair doubler
contour and the fastener hole positions.

(d) Put a transparent plastic sheet over the repair area and transfer
all the lines previously drawn. This plastic sheet shall be used
as a template.

CAUTION: TAKE CARE NOT DAMAGE ANY INTERNAL STRUCTURAL COMPONENT

(STRINGERS OR RIBS).

(e) Cut out the damaged skin structure to the correct repair shape
and dimension, refer to Chapter 51−27−00.

(f) Pilot−drill all the marked fastener hole positions on the outer
skin, refer toChapter 51−44−21.

(g) Deburr the skin cut out and the holes with abrasive cloth and
abrasive cone.
(h) Remove the CFRP dust with a vacuum cleaner.

Page 228
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(i) Get the correct pre−cured material necessary to make the repair
pieces. Refer to Figure 204, to determine the applicable pre−
cured sheet type number depending on the damage location and
Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 3, paragraph 9 for pre−
cured sheet material information.

(j) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions nec
essary for the repair area, refer to Figure 204.
NOTE: The repair doubler is made from pre−cured sheet numbers 1
and 2 bonded with sealant (Material No. 09−005).

NOTE: Thickness of the repair packers and filler to be determined

on assembly.

(k) Chamfer the repair doubler in case of interference with stringer

radius.

(l) Mark on the repair doubler the fastener hole positions. Use the
plastic template.

(m) Mark on the repair filler the fastener hole positions. Use the
plastic template.

(n) Pilot−drill the fastener hole positions on the repair doubler and
repair filler.

(o) Deburr the previously drilled holes with an abrasive cone.

(p) Put the repair doubler, the repair packers and repair filler in
their correct position and secure with screw pins.

(q) Transfer drill to the repair packers the fastener hole positions
from the outer skin and repair filler.

(r) Remove the repair parts from the repair area.

(s) Remove the CFRP dust from the repair area and repair parts with
a vacuum cleaner.

(t) Clean the repair area and repair parts with clening agent (Ma
teiral No. 11−003)
(u) Put the repair parts in their correct position and check the
contact surfaces for gaps.

NOTE: If necessary apply liquid shim made from adhesive paste

(Material No. 08−051) between repair parts up to a maximum
thickness of 0.5 mm (0.019 in.) per joint, or solid shim
made from CFRP prepreg (Material No. Z−19.775, Carbon Fab
ric) up to a maximum thickness of 1,2 mm (0.047in.).

(v) Drill all the fastener hole positions to the final diameter for
the fastener.

Page 229
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(w) Remove the repair parts from the repair area.

(x) Countersink the fastener holes in the outer skin and outer sur
face of the repair filler, refer to Chapter 51−46−21.

(y) Deburr all the fastener holes in the outer skin and repair parts
with an abrasive cone.

(z) Remove the CFRP dust from the repair area and repair parts with
a vacuum cleaner.
(aa)Clean the repair area and repair parts with clening agent (Ma
teiral No. 11−003)

(ab)Apply a layer of sealant (Material No. 09−002), to the contact

surfaces of repair parts.
(ac)Put the repair parts in their correct position on the repair
area and secure with screw pins.

(ad)Wet install the correct fasteners with the sealant (Material No.
09−005), refer to Chapter 51−76−11.
(ae)Remove any excess of sealant from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(af)Apply a bead of sealant (Material No. 09−002) to the contour of

the repair doubler and to the gap between filler and skin.

(ag)Let the sealants cure. Refer to manufacturer s instructions for

curing data.

(ah)Reinstall the removed front spar panel, made in step 5.D.(2)(a).

(ai)Restore the surface finish. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 230
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Internal Skin Repair (Flush). Zone D

Figure 204

Pages 231/232
Printed in Germany
55−11−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TRIMMABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER − RIBS

1. Identification Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Rib 1 Figure 1
− Rib 2 Figure 2
− Rib 3 Figure 3
− Rib 4 Figure 4
− Rib 5 Figure 5
− Rib 6 Figure 6
− Rib 7 Figure 7
− Rib 8 Figure 8
− Rib 9 Figure 9
− Rib 10 Figure 10
− Rib 11 Figure 11
− Rib 12 Figure 12
− Rib 13 Figure 13
− Rib 14 Figure 14
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−10−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/ Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage 1
01/14
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 1
Figure 1 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage 2
01/11
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 1
Figure 1 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage 3
01/11
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 1
Figure 1 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage 4
01/11
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 1
Figure 1 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage 5
01/11
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 1
Figure 1 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage 6
01/11
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 1
Figure 1 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage 7
01/11
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 1
Figure 1 (sheet 7)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage 8
01/11
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 1
Figure 1 (sheet 8)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage 9
01/11
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 1
Figure 1 (sheet 9)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1110
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 1
Figure 1 (sheet 10)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1111
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 1
Figure 1 (sheet 11)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1112
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 1 Assy D55181101002

1A Rib 1 Assy D55181102000 A23002G0148A
1B Rib 1 Assy D55181103000 A25487G0290A
1C Rib 1 Assy D55181103002 A30971G0382A
1D Rib 1 Assy D55181106000 A150014G0640
5 Web Composite D55181111000 PB201
55−11−00
5A Web Composite D55181111006 PB201 A21514G0068A
55−11−00
5B Web Composite D55181111010 PB201 A23002G0148A
55−11−00
5C Web Composite D55181111018 PB201 A150014G0640
55−11−00
10 Fitting, Upper 3.7164.1 D55181121202
Joint made from
D551811222
02
10A Fitting, Upper D55181125200 A23002G0148A
Joint
15 Fitting, Lower 3.7164.1 D55181131202
Joint made from
D551811322
02
15A Fitting, Lower D55181126200 A23002G0148A
Joint
20 Bracket Joint, Composite D55181114000
R/S
20A Bracket Joint, Composite D55181114002 A29998X9998
R/S
− alternative Composite D55181114000 A29998X9998
25 Angle, Rear Composite D55181113000
25A Angle, Rear Composite D55181113002 A23002G0148A
30 Bracket, Front Composite D55181112000
35 Fitting, Service 3.4364T7351 D55981301000
40 Fitting, Jack Composite D55981201000
001
40A Fitting, Jack Composite D55981201002 A23002G0148A
003
ASSY Dwg.: D55181000, D55181001, D55181101, D55181102, D55181106

Key to Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1413
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

45 Plate 3.1364T3 D55181521232

LN9073 1.2 (0.047)
50 Support, assy 3.1364T3 D93580017000
LN9073 1.6 (0.063)
55 Support, assy 3.1364T3 D93580019000
LN9073 1.6 (0.063)
60 Support, assy 3.1364T3 D93580022000
LN9073 1.6 (0.063)
65 Support, assy 3.1364T3 D93580045000
LN9073 1.6 (0.063)
70 Plate 3.1364T42 D55181521238
LN9073 1.2 (0.047)
75 Film, Adhesive Z−15.435
80 Rowing, CFRP Z−19.785
ASSY Dwg.: D55181101, D55181111

Key to Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1414
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 2
Figure 2 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1115
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 2
Figure 2 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1116
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 2
Figure 2 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1117
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 2
Figure 2 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1118
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 2
Figure 2 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1119
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 2 Assy D55182001000

001
1A Rib 2 Assy D55182005000 A20374G0020
001 A25487G0290
A30971G0382
5 Web Composite D55182002000 PB201
001 55−11−00
5A Web Composite D55182006000 PB201 A20374G0020
001 55−11−00
5B Web Composite D55182006002 PB201 A21295G0066
003 55−11−00
5C Web Composite D55182006004 PB201 A21515G0069
005 55−11−00
10 Bracket, Front Composite D55182003000
ASSY Dwg.: D55181000, D55182001, D55182005

Key to Figure 2

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1420
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 3
Figure 3 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1121
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 3
Figure 3 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1122
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 3
Figure 3 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1123
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 3
Figure 3 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1124
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 3
Figure 3 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1125
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 3
Figure 3 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1126
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 3
Figure 3 (sheet 7)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1127
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 3
Figure 3 (sheet 8)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1128
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 3
Figure 3 (sheet 9)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1129
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 3 Assy D55182031000

001
1A Rib 3 Assy D55182041000 A20374G0020
001 A25487G0290
A30971G0382
5 Web Composite D55182032000 PB201
001 55−11−00
5A Web Composite D55182042000 PB201 A20374G0020
001 55−11−00
5B Web Composite D55182042002 PB201 A21295G0066
003 55−11−00
10 Bracket, Front Composite D55182033000
001
10A Bracket, Front Composite D55182043000 A20374G0020
001
15 Angle, Upper Composite D55182036000
001
20 Bracket, Upper T Composite D55182035000
001
25 Bracket, Lower Composite D55182034000
Rear 001
25A Bracket, Rear Composite D55182044000 A20374G0020
001
25B Bracket, Rear Composite D55182044002 A24422G0237
003
30 Support 3.1364T3 D92480006200
LN9073 201
1.6 (0.063)
ASSY Dwg.: D55181000, D55182031, D55182041

Key to Figure 3

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1430
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 4
Figure 4 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1131
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 4
Figure 4 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1132
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 4
Figure 4 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1133
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 4
Figure 4 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1134
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 4
Figure 4 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1135
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 4
Figure 4 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1136
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 4 Assy D55182061000

001
1A Rib 4 Assy D55182070000 A20374G0020B
001
1B Rib 4 Assy D55182072000 A25487G0290A
001 A30971G0382A
1C Rib 4 Assy D55182072002 A39097G0544
003
5 Web Composite D55182062000 PB201
001 55−11−00
5A Web Composite D55182071000 PB201 A20374G0020A
001 55−11−00
5B Web Composite D55182071002 PB201 A21295G0066A
003 55−11−00
5C Web Composite D55182073000 PB201 A25487G0290B
001 55−11−00
5D Web Composite D55182073002 PB201 A39097G0544
003 55−11−00
10 Bracket, Front Composite D55182063000
15 Bracket, Inboard 3.4364T7351 D55182064202
Gusset 203
15A Bracket, Inboard 3.4364T7351 D55182064204 A20302G0012A
Gusset 205
20 Bracket, Out 3.4364T7351 D55182065202
board Gusset
20A Bracket, Out 3.4364T7351 D55182065204 A20302G0012C
board Gusset 205
20B Bracket, Out 3.4364T7351 D55182065206 A21061G0056A
board Gusset 207
ASSY Dwg.: D55181000, D55181001, D55182061, D55182070, D55182072

Key to Figure 4

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1437
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 5
Figure 5 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1138
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 5
Figure 5 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1139
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 5
Figure 5 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1140
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 5
Figure 5 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1141
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 5 Assy D55182091000

001
1A Rib 5 Assy D55182095000 A20374G0020
001
1B Rib 5 Assy D55182097000 A25487G0290
001
1C Rib 5 Assy D55182097002 A30971G0382
003
1D Rib 5 Assy D55182050000 A161092G0860
001
5 Web Composite D55182092000 PB201
001 55−11−00
5A Web Composite D55182096000 PB201 A20374G0020
001 55−11−00
5B Web Composite D55182096002 PB201 A21295G0066
003 55−11−00
5C Web Composite D55182098000 PB201 A25487G0290
001 55−11−00
5D Web Composite D55182098002 PB201 A30971G0382
003 55−11−00
5E Web Composite D55182051000 PB201 A161092G0860
001 551100
10 Bracket, Front Composite D55182093000 A161092G0860
ASSY Dwg.: D55181000, D55181001, D55181002, D55182050, D55182091, D55182095,
D55182097

Key to Figure 5

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1442
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 6
Figure 6 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1143
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 6
Figure 6 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1144
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 6
Figure 6 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1145
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 6
Figure 6 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1146
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 6
Figure 6 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1147
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 6 Assy D55182121000

001
1A Rib 6 Assy D55182125000 A20374G0020B
001 A25487G0290A
A30971G0382A
1B Rib 6 Assy D55182125002 A39097G0544
003
5 Web Composite D55182122000 PB201
001 55−11−00
5A Web Composite D55182126000 PB201 A20374G0020A
001 55−11−00
5B Web Composite D55182126002 PB201 A21295G0066B
003 55−11−00
5C Web Composite D55182126004 PB201 A39097G0544
005 55−11−00
10 Bracket, Front Composite D55182123000
ASSY Dwg.: D55181000, D55181001, D55182121, D55182125

Key to Figure 6

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1448
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 7
Figure 7 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1149
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 7
Figure 7 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1150
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 7
Figure 7 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1151
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 7
Figure 7 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1152
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 7
Figure 7 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1153
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 7
Figure 7 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1154
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 7 Assy D55182151000

001
1A Rib 7 Assy D55182155000 A20374G0020B
001 A25487G0290A
A30971G0382A
1B Rib 7 Assy D55182155002 A39097G0544
003
5 Web Composite D55182152000 PB201
001 55−11−00
5A Web Composite D55182156000 PB201 A20374G0020A
001 55−11−00
5B Web Composite D55182156002 PB201 A21295G0066B
003 55−11−00
5C Web Composite D55182156004 PB201 A39097G0544
005 55−11−00
10 Bracket, Front Composite D55182153000
15 Bracket, Rear Composite D55182154000
001
15A Bracket, Rear Composite D55182157000 A20374G0020
ASSY Dwg.: D55181000, D55181001, D55182151, D55182155

Key to Figure 7

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1455
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 8
Figure 8 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1156
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 8
Figure 8 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1157
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 8
Figure 8 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1158
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 8
Figure 8 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1159
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 8
Figure 8 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1160
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 8
Figure 8 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1161
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 8 Assy D55182181000

001
1A Rib 8 Assy D55182185000 A20374G0020B
001
1B Rib 8 Assy D55182187000 A25487G0290A
001
1C Rib 8 Assy D55182187002 A30971G0382A
003
1D Rib 8 Assy D55182187004 A39097G0544
005
5 Web Composite D55182182000 PB201
001 55−11−00
5A Web Composite D55182186000 PB201 A20374G0020A
001 55−11−00
5B Web Composite D55182186002 PB201 A21295G0066A
003 55−11−00
5C Web Composite D55182188000 PB201 A25487G0290A
001 55−11−00
5D Web Composite D55182188002 PB201 A30971G0382A
003 55−11−00
5E Web Composite D55182188004 PB201 A39097G0544
005 55−11−00
10 Bracket, Front Composite D55182183000
10A Bracket, Front Composite D55182189000 A25487G0290
15 Bracket, Rear Composite D55182184000
001
15A Bracket, Rear Composite D55182184002 A20374G0020
ASSY Dwg.: D55181000, D55181001, D55182181, D55182185, D55182187

Key to Figure 8

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1462
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 9
Figure 9 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1163
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 9
Figure 9 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1164
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 9
Figure 9 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1165
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 9
Figure 9 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1166
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 9 Assy D55182211000

001
1A Rib 9 Assy D55182215000 A20374G0020
001
1B Rib 9 Assy D55182218000 A25487G0290
001
1C Rib 9 Assy D55182218002 A30971G0382
003
5 Web Composite D55182212000 PB201
001 55−11−00
5A Web Composite D55182216000 PB201 A20374G0020
001 55−11−00
5B Web Composite D55182216002 PB201 A21295G0066
003 55−11−00
5C Web Composite D55182219000 PB201 A25487G0290
001 55−11−00
5D Web Composite D55182219002 PB201 A30971G0382
003 55−11−00
10 Bracket, Front Composite D55182213000
10A Bracket, Front Composite D55182220000 A25487G0290
15 Section, L ASN− D55182211200
A3030−2575
15A Section, L ASN− D55182217200 A20374G0020
A3030−2575 A25487G0290
20 Bracket, Gusset 3.4364T7351 D55182214200
LN9073−35 201
25 Bracket, Gusset 3.4364T7351 D55182214202
LN9073−35 203
ASSY Dwg.: D55181000, D55181001, D55182211, D55182215, D55182218

Key to Figure 9

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1467
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 10
Figure 10 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1168
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 10
Figure 10 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1169
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 10
Figure 10 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1170
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 10
Figure 10 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1171
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 10 Assy D55182241000

001
1A Rib 10 Assy D55182245000 A20374G0020
001
1B Rib 10 Assy D55182247000 A25487G0290
001
1C Rib 10 Assy D55182247002 A30971G0382
003
1D Rib 10 Assy D55182100000 A161092G0860
001
5 Web Composite D55182242000 PB201
001 55−11−00
5A Web Composite D55182246000 PB201 A20374G0020
001 55−11−00
5B Web Composite D55182246002 PB201 A21295G0066
003 55−11−00
5C Web Composite D55182248000 PB201 A25487G0290
001 55−11−00
5D Web Composite D55182248002 PB201 A30971G0382
003 55−11−00
5E Web Composite D55182101000 PB201 A161092G0860
001 55−11−00
10 Bracket, Front Composite D55182243000
10A Bracket, Front Composite D55182244000 A25487G0290
A161092G0860
ASSY Dwg.: D55181000, D55181001, D55181002, D55182100, D55182241, D55182245,
D55182247

Key to Figure 10

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1472
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 11
Figure 11 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1173
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 11
Figure 11 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1174
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 11
Figure 11 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1175
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 11
Figure 11 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1176
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 11 Assy D55182271000

001
1A Rib 11 Assy D55182275000 A20374G0020
001
1B Rib 11 Assy D55182277000 A25487G0290
001
1C Rib 11 Assy D55182277002 A30971G0382
003
5 Web Composite D55182272000 PB201
001 551100
5A Web Composite D55182276000 PB201 A20374G0020
001 551100
5B Web Composite D55182276002 PB201 A21295G0066
003 551100
5C Web Composite D55182278000 PB201 A25487G0290
001 551100
5D Web Composite D55182278002 PB201 A30971G0382
003 551100
10 Bracket, Front Composite D55182273000
10A Bracket, Front Composite D55182274000 A25487G0290
ASSY Dwg.: D55181000, D55181001, D55182271, D55182275, D55182277

Key to Figure 11

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1477
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 12
Figure 12 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1178
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 12
Figure 12 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1179
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 12
Figure 12 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1180
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 12
Figure 12 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1181
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 12
Figure 12 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1182
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 12
Figure 12 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1183
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 12
Figure 12 (sheet 7)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1184
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 12 Assy D55182301000

001
1A Rib 12 Assy D55182311000 A20302G0012B
001
1B Rib 12 Assy D55182313000 A25487G0290A
001
1C Rib 12 Assy D55182313002 A30971G0382A
003
1D Rib 12 Assy D55182313004 A39097G0544
005
5 Web Composite D55182302000 PB201
001 55−11−00
5A Web Composite D55182312000 PB201 A20302G0012B
55−11−00 A25487G0290A
5B Web Composite D55182312002 PB201 A30971G0382A
003 55−11−00
5C Web Composite D55182312004 PB201 A39097G0544
005 55−11−00
10 Bracket, Front Composite D55182303000
10A Bracket, Front Composite D55182304000 A25487G0290
ASSY Dwg.: D55181000, D55181001, D55182301, D55182311, D55182313

Key to Figure 12

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1485
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 13
Figure 13 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1186
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 13
Figure 13 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1187
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 13
Figure 13 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1188
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 13
Figure 13 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1189
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 13 Assy D55182331000

001
1A Rib 13 Assy D55182331002 A30971G0382A
003
1B Rib 13 Assy D55182331004 A39097G0544
005
5 Web Composite D55182332000 PB201
001 55−11−00
5A Web Composite D55182332002 PB201 A20374G0020C
003 55−11−00
5B Web Composite D55182332004 PB201 A30971G0382A
005 55−11−00
5C Web Composite D55182332006 PB201 A39097G0544
007 55−11−00
10 Bracket, Front Composite D55182333000
ASSY Dwg.: D55181000, D55181001, D55182331

Key to Figure 13

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1490
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 14
Figure 14 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1191
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 14
Figure 14 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1192
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 14
Figure 14 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1193
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 14
Figure 14 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 FebPage01/1194
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 14 Assy D55182361000 A25487G0290

001
1A Rib 14 Assy D55182361002 A30971G0382
003
5 Web Composite D55182362000 PB201
001 55−11−00
5A Web Composite D55182362002 PB201 A21295G0066
003 55−11−00
5B Web Composite D55182362004 PB201 A21514G0068
005 55−11−00
5C Web Composite D55182362006 PB201 A22383G0132
007 55−11−00
5D Web Composite D55182362008 PB201 A30971G0382
009 55−11−00
10 Bracket, Rear Composite D55182363000
001
10A Bracket, Rear Composite D55182363002 A21295G0066
003
15 Section, Rubber ABS5304
20 Tip Weight 1.7734.4 D55182364200 A21162G0057
LN1017 201
20A Tip Weight 0.7040.DIN169 D55182365200 A29998X9998
3 201
− alternative 1.7734.4 D55182364200 A29998X9998
LN1017 201
ASSY Dwg.: D55181000, D55181001, D55182361

Key to Figure 14

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 Pages 95/96
Feb 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

RIBS − HORIZONTAL STABILIZER SPAR BOX

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

1. General
NOTE: For Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

This topic contains all of the specific repair procedures for the Horizon
tal Stabilizer Spar Box Ribs. The repair zones and allowable damage data
for these repair procedures are in Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101.

2. Safety Precautions
There are risks to you and other persons when you work with composite re
pair materials. To prevent risks, read and obey the warnings given below.

WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.
WARNING: WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND FILTER MASK WHEN YOU CUT,
ABRADE OR DRILL COMPOSITE MATERIALS. THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MA
TERIALS CAN GET INTO YOUR LUNGS OR ONTO YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE YOU
INJURY. IMMEDIATELY REMOVE DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.

WHEN YOU WORK WITH CFRP COMPOSITE MATERIALS, IMMEDIATELY REMOVE
DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRIC POWER ON
THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST ONLY USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.

3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER REMARKS

No General Repairs applicable. − −

Table 201

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−11−12 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

4. Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs

INSPECTION
REPAIR
SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE INSTRUCTION REF
CATEGORY
ERENCE
Repair of Cracks thru Rib 5.A. 201 B 55−11−12−2−001−00
Web and Fasteners, Zone
01.
Repair of Crack at Light 5.B. 202 B 55−11−12−2−001−00
ening Hole, zones 02, 04,
09, 10, 11, Sub−zone A.

Table 202
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−11−12 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

5. Ribs Repairs

CAUTION: FOR REPAIRS CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE REFER

TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN IN THE
INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−11−12−2−001−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 203.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS APPLICABLE FOR BEFORE AND AFTER MODIFICATION

25487G0290 AND AFTER MODIFICATION 30971G0382.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR PROCEDURE DATA IS APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION

160500/J3283.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR PROCEDURE DATA IS APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION
160080/J3705.

A. Repair of Cracks thru Rib Web and Fasteners, Zone 01.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.
NOTE: Before you can do this repair it is necessary to remove a section
of the front spar. Refer to Chapter 55−11−18, for data on removal
and replacement of spar sections.

NOTE: If a crack is longer than the ones shown in Figure 201, the rib
must be replaced.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 203
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information Table in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−11−12 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP doubler − Refer to Figure 201

− Sealant
− Glassfabric
− Polyurethane Primer
− Polyurethane Top Coat
− Epoxy Resin
− Cleaning Agent
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 201)
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material Z−19.111, Epoxy Prepreg
Glass fabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00
− Material No. 16−001B or No.
16−001C, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Remove the fasteners from the repair area.

(b) With abrasive cloth make the cracks smooth along their total
length. Initially use 280 grade and finish off with 400 grade.
(c) Get the correct pre−cured material necessary to make the repair
doubler, refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201.

(d) Make the repair doubler to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.
(e) Put the repair doubler in its repair position. At the corners of
the repair doubler, mark the position of the existing fastener
holes.

(f) Remove the repair doubler from the structure.

(g) Pilot−drill the holes marked on the repair doubler.

(h) Put the repair doubler in its repair position. Attach it to the
rib with screw pins thru the previously drilled corner holes.

NOTE: Do not drill holes in the repair doubler where it is indi

cated that existing fastener holes are not be used.
(i) Use the rest of the existing fastener holes as a template and
pilot−drill thru the repair doubler.

(j) Remove the repair doubler from the structure.

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−11−12 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(k) Mark the position of the new fastener holes on the repair dou
bler.
(l) Pilot−drill the marked fastener holes on the repair doubler.

(m) Put the repair doubler in its repair position. Attach it to the
rib with some screw pins thru the previously drilled pilot holes.

(n) Drill all the holes in the repair area to the necessary diameter
for the fasteners.
(o) Remove the repair doubler from the structure.

(p) Remove the sharp edges from the holes in the repair doubler and
the repair area with an abrasive cone.

(q) Remove the waste material from the repair area.

(r) Clean the repair doubler and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003).

(s) Put the repair doubler in its repair position. Attach it to the
rib with screw pins.
(t) Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the repair area
with the sealant (Material No. 09−005).

(u) Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners in the
screw pin holes.
(v) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003).

(3) Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 201)

(a) Do the steps 5.A.(2)(a) and 5.A.(2)(b) of the repair procedure

5.A.(2).
(b) Get the equivalent metal materials for the repair doubler. The
subsequent steps will help you to do this:

1 Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block

101) and find the repair zone number for the damaged area.
2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (Chapter 55−11−00, Page
Block 201) and find the metal material to use in place of the
pre−cured doubler.

(c) Make the repair doubler to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.
(d) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair doubler
(chromic acid anodizing and then Polyurethane Primer (Material
No. 16−001B or No. 16−001C), followed by a Polyurethane Top Coat
(Material No. 16−018C)).

Page 205
Printed in Germany
55−11−12 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.111, Epoxy Prepreg

Glass Fabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (Material No.
08−001C) to the repair area. The glassfabric layer must extend
around the repair doubler by 20 mm (0.79 in). Let the resin
cure, refer to Chapter 51−77−11 for cure time.

(f) Do the steps 5.A.(2)(e) thru 5.A.(2)(v) of the repair procedure

5.A.(2).
(g) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101) to find out the
time limit applicable to the temporary repair.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 201)

(a) Remove the temporary repair doubler and glassfabric from the rib
structure.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured material necessary to make the repair
doubler, refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201.

(c) Make the repair doubler to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(d) Use the temporary repair doubler to get the correct locations for
the fastener holes in the permanent repair doubler. Mark the
positions of the holes.

(e) Pilot−drill the correctly marked fastener holes in the permanent

repair doubler.

(f) Put the permanent repair doubler in its correct position and at
tach it to the rib structure with screw pins.

(g) Drill all fastener holes one size oversize to that of the holes
used for the temporary repair.

(h) Do the steps 5.A.(2)(f) thru 5.A.(2)(v) of the repair procedure

5.A.(2).

Page 206
Printed in Germany
55−11−12 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Crack thru Rib Web and Fasteners, Zone 01

Figure 201

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 PagesFeb207/208
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIRS CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE REFER

TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN IN THE
INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−11−12−2−001−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH
3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 204.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS APPLICABLE FOR BEFORE AND AFTER MODIFICATION
25487G0290 AND AFTER MODIFICATION 30971G0382.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

B. Repair of Crack and Lightening Hole, Zones 02, 04, 09, 10, 11, Sub−zone
A.

NOTE: Before you repair the damage structure, you must do a damage eval
uation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: It may be necessary to remove a section of the front spar before

you can do this repair. Refer to Chapter 55−11−18 for data on re
moval and replacement of spar sections.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 204
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information Table in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 209
Printed in Germany
55−11−12 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP doubler − Refer to Figure 202

− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Adhesive paste − Material No. 08−051, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 202)

(a) Remove the flange and the surrounding material from the damaged
lightening hole(s) to the dimensions shown in Figure 202.

(b) With abrasive cloth, make the lightening hole(s) smooth and con

centric. Initially use 280 grade and finish off with 400 grade.

(c) Get the correct pre−cured material necessary to make the repair
doubler(s), refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201.

(d) Make the repair doubler(s) to the correct shape and dimensions
for the repair location.

(e) Mark the locations of the new fasteners holes on the repair dou

bler(s).

(f) Pilot drill the repair doublers at the marked hole locations.
(g) Put the repair doubler(s) in the repair position with the pilot
holes correctly aligned. Attach the doubler(s) to the rib struc

ture with screw clamps.

(h) Use the repair doubler(s) as a template and pilot drill thru the
rib structure.
(i) Remove the screw clamps. Attach the repair doubler(s) to the rib
structure with screw pins thru the previously drilled pilot
holes.

(j) Drill all the holes in the repair area to the necessary diameter
for the fasteners.
(k) Remove the repair doubler(s) from the repair area.

(l) Remove the sharp edges from the holes in the repair area and the
repair doubler(s) with an abrasive cone. Remove the waste materi

al from the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

Page 210
Printed in Germany
55−11−12 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(m) Clean the repairs doubler(s) and the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).
NOTE: Steps (n), (p), and (q) are only to be done if it is nec
essary to shim between the repair doubler(s) and the rib.
The shim is installed as a liquid and may be used up to a
maximum thickness of 0.8 mm (0.03 in).

(n) Apply the adhesive paste (Material No. 08−051) to the surfaces of
the doublers and the rib that will touch when assembled.

(o) Attach the repair doubler(s) to the rib structure with screw
pins.

(p) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
(q) Let the adhesive cure, refer to Chapter 51−77−11.

(r) Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the repair area
with the sealant (Material No. 09−005).

(s) Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners in the
screw pin holes.

(t) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 PagesFeb211/212
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Crack at Lightening Hole Zones 02, 04, 09, 10, 11, Sub−zone A.
Figure 202

Printed in Germany
55−11−12 PagesFeb213/214
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TRIMMABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER − SPARS

1. Identification Scheme

NOTE: CONFIG−1 is applicable before Modification 24422G0237.

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Front Spar Figure 1 (sheet 1 and 2)

− Rear Spar Figure 2 (sheet 1, and 2)
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−10−00, Page Block 001, where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Pages 1/2
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front Spar
Figure 1 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-11-18
CONFIG-1
Pages 3/4
Feb 01/02
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front Spar
Figure 1 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-11-18
CONFIG-1
Pages 5/6
May 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Spar Assy, Front D55182601000

001
1A Spar Assy, Front D55182605000 A21158G0019
001
5 Web, Front Composite D55182601002
003
5A Web, Front Composite D55182601006 A20374G0020
007
5B Web, Front Composite D55182605002 A21158G0019
003
10 Support 3.1364T3 D93580018200
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
15 Support 3.1364T3 D93580020200
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
20 Support 3.1364T3 D93580021200
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
25 Profile Composite D55182610000 A21158G0019
30 Support 3.1364T3 D93580036200
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
35 Angle 3.1364T3 D93580038200
LN9073 2(0.08)
40 Profile Composite D55182611000 A21158G0019
42 Profile Composite D55182612000 A21158G0019
45 Tip Weight 0.7040 D55182618200 A21162G0057
DIN1693 201
−alternative 1.7734 D55182617200 A21162G0057
LN1017−15−100 201
ASSY Dwg.: D55181000, D55182601, D55182605

Key to Figure 1

Pages 7/8
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rear Spar
Figure 2 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-11-18
CONFIG-1
Pages 9/10
Feb 01/02
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rear Spar
Figure 2 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-11-18
CONFIG-1
Pages 11/12
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Spar Assy, Rear D55182501000

001
5 Web, Rear Composite D55182501002
003
5A Web, Rear Composite D55182501004 A21295G0066
005
10 Support, LH Spar 3.1364T3 D93580014200
Only LN9073 1,6(0.063)
15 Support, LH Spar 3.1354T351 D93580015200
Only LN9073
15A Support, LH Spar 3.1354T351 D93580015202 A20587G0031
Only LN9073
20 Support 3.1354T351 D93580016200
LN9073 201
25 Support 3.1364T42 D93580025200
LN9073 201
1,6(0.063)
30 Support 3.1364T3 D93580026200
LN9073 201
1,6(0.063)
35 Cover, Fabric LN9121E115 D55182501272 A21002G0046
40 Cover, Fabric LN9121E115 D55182501273 A21002G0046
45 Cover, Fabric LN9121E115 D55182501274 A21002G0046
50 Support 31354T351 D27380112200 A20419P0760
LN9073−30 201
55 Cover, Fabric LN9121E115 D55182501275 A21002G0046
60 Cover, Fabric LN9121E115 D55182501276 A21002G0046
65 Cover, Fabric LN9121E115 D55182501277 A21002G0046
70 Support 3.1364T3 D93580035200
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
75 Bracket, Upper 3.1354T351 D55981692200
LN9073 201
80 Bracket, Lower 3.1354T351 D55981693200
LN9073 201
85 Angle 3.1364T3 D92480017200
LN9073 201
90 Angle 3.1364T3 D93580039200
LN9073
ASSY Dwg.: D27380111, D55181000, D55182501

Key to Figure 2

Page 13
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

95 Support 3.1364T3 D92480024200

LN9073 1,2(0.047)
100 Tip Weight, In 1.7734.4 D55182512200 A21162G0057
ner LN1017 201
105 Tip Weight, Out 1.7734.4 D55182513200 A21162G0057
er LN1017 201
ASSY Dwg.: D55182501

Key to Figure 2

Page 14
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TRIMMABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER − SPARS

1. Identification Scheme

NOTE: CONFIG−2 is applicable after Modification 24422G0237.

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Front Spar Figura 1 (sheet 1 thru 4).

− Rear Spar Figura 2 (sheet 1 and 2).
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−10−00, Page Block 001, where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Pages 1/2
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front Spar
Figure 1 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-11-18
CONFIG-2
Pages 3/4
May 01/02
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front Spar
Figure 1 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-11-18
CONFIG-2
Pages 5/6
May 01/02
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front Spar
Figure 1 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55-11-18
CONFIG-2
Pages 7/8
May 01/02
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front Spar
Figure 1 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55-11-18
CONFIG-2
Pages 9/10
May 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Spar Assy, Front D55182615000

001
5 Web, Front, In Composite D55182616002
ner 003
10 Web, Front, Out Composite D55182616004
er 005
15 Joint Plate Composite D55182616006
007
15A Joint Plate Composite D55182616008 A22079G0113
009
20 Support 3.1364T3 D93580018200 Replace
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
25 Support 3.1364T3 D93580020200 Replace
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
30 Profile Composite D55182610000 Replace
30A Profile Composite D55182610002 Replace A24973G0257
35 Support 3.1364T3 D93580048200 Replace
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
35A Support 3.1364T3 D93580021202 Replace A22079G0113
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
40 Support 3.1364T3 D93580049200 Replace
LN9073 201
1,6(0.063)
40A Support 3.1364T3 D93580021202 Replace A22079G0113
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
45 Support 3.1364T3 D93580021200 Replace
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
50 Profile Composite D55182611000 Replace
55 Support 3.1364T3 D93580036200 Replace
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
60 Angle 3.1364T3 D93580038200 Replace
LN9073 2(0.0796)
65 Profile Composite D55182612000 Replace
70 Tip Weight 0.7040 D55182618200 Replace
DIN1693 201
− alternative 1.7734.4 D55182617200 Replace
LN1017−15−100 201
75 Spar Assy, Front D55182614000 A25487G0290
001
ASSY Dwg.: D55181000, D55181001, D55182615

Key to Figure 1

Page 11
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

80 Web, Front, In Composite D55182619002

ner 003
80A Web, Front, In Composite D55182619010 A24973G0257
ner 011
85 Web, Front, Out Composite D55182619004
er 005
85A Web, Front, Out Composite D55182619012 A24973G0257
er 013
90 Joint Plate Composite D55182619006
007
ASSY Dwg.: D55182614

Key to Figure 1

Page 12
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rear Spar
Figure 2 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-11-18
CONFIG-2
Pages 13/14
May 01/02
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rear Spar
Figure 2 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-11-18
CONFIG-2
Pages 15/16
May 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Spar Assy, Rear D55182510000

001
1A Spar Assy, Rear D55182522000 A24422G0237
001 A25487G0290
5 Web, Rear, Inner Composite D55182511004
005
5A Web, Rear, Inner Composite D55182511012 A23101G0157
013
5B Web, Rear, Inner Composite D55182521004 A24422G0237
005
5C Web, Rear, Inner Composite D55182521012 A24973G0257
013
10 Web, Rear, Outer Composite D55182511002
003
10A Web, Rear, Outer Composite D55182511010 A23101G0157
011
10B Web, Rear, Outer Composite D55182521002 A24422G0237
003
10C Web, Rear, Outer Composite D55182521010 A24973G0257
011
15 Joint Plate Composite D55182511006
15A Joint Plate Composite D55182511008 A21647G1595
009
15B Joint Plate Composite D55182511014 A23101G0157
015
15C Joint Plate Composite D55182521006 A24422G0237
007
20 Support, LH Spar 3.1364T3 D93580014200 Replace
only LN9073 1,6(0.063)
25 Cover, Fabric LN9121E115 D55182510272 Replace
30 Support, LH Spar 3.1354T351 D93580015204 Replace
only LN9073
35 Support 3.1354T351 D93580016202 Replace
LN9073 203
40 Support 3.1364T42 D93580025202 Replace
LN9073 203
45 Cover, Fabric LN9121E115 D55182510273 Replace
ASSY Dwg.: D55181000, D55182510, D55182522

Key to Figure 2

Page 17
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

50 Support 3.1364T3 D93580026200 Replace

LN9073 201
1,6(0.063)
55 Cover, Fabric LN9121E115 D55182510274 Replace
60 Support 31354T351 D27380112200
LN9073−30 201
65 Cover, Fabric LN9121E115 D55182510275 Replace
70 Support 3.1364T3 D93580035200 Replace
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
75 Bracket, Upper 3.1354T351 D55981692200 Replace
LN9073 201
80 Bracket, Lower 3.1354T351 D55981693200 Replace
LN9073 201
85 Angle 3.1364T3 D92480017200 Replace
LN9073 201
90 Angle 3.1354T42 D93580047200 Replace
LN9073 2(0.0796)
95 Support 3.1364T3 D92480024200 Replace
LN9073 1,2(0.047)
100 Cover, Fabric LN9121E115 D55182510276 Replace
105 Cover, Fabric LN9121E115 D55182510277 Replace
110 Tip Weight 0.7040 D55182519200 Replace
DIN1693
− alternative 1.7734.4 D55182514200 Replace
LN1017
ASSY Dwg.: D27380111, D55182522

Key to Figure 2

Page 18
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TRIMMABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER − SPARS

1. Identification Scheme

NOTE: CONFIG−3 is applicable after Modification 30971G0382.

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Front Spar Figure1 (sheet 1 and 2).

− Rear Spar Figure2 (sheet 1 and 2).
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−10−00,Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Pages 1/2
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−3
May 01/14
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front Spar
Figure 1 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-11-18
CONFIG-3
Pages 3/4
May 01/02
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front Spar
Figure 1 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-11-18
CONFIG-3
Pages 5/6
May 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Spar Assy, Front D55182625000

001
5 Spar Front, In Composite D55182630000
ner 001
10 Spar Front, Out Composite D55182630002 PB201
er 003
15 Joint Plate Composite D55182635004
20 Support 3.1364T3 D93580018200
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
25 Support 3.1364T3 D93580020200
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
30 Profile Z−19.749 D55182610002
35 Support 3.1364T3 D93580021202
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
40 Support 3.1364T3 D93580021200
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
45 Profile Z−19.749 D55182611000
50 Support 3.1364T3 D93580036200
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
55 Angle 3.1364T3 D93580038200
LN9073 2(0.0796)
60 Profile Composite D55182612000
65 Tip Weight 0.7040 D55182618200
DIN1693 201
− alternative 1.7734.4 D55182617200
LN1017−15−100 201
ASSY Dwg.: D55181001, D55182625

Key to Figure 1

Pages 7/8
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−3
Feb 01/14
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rear Spar
Figure 2 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-11-18
CONFIG-3
Pages 9/10
May 01/02
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rear Spar
Figure 2 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-11-18
CONFIG-3
Pages 11/12
May 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Spar Assy, Rear D55182525000

001
5 Spar Rear, Inner Composite D55182535000
001
10 Spar Rear, Outer Composite D55182530000
001
15 Joint Plate Composite D55182535004
005
20 Support, LH Spar 3.1364T3 D93580014200
only LN9073 1,6(0.063)
25 Cover, Fabric LN9121E115 D55182510272
30 Support, LH Spar 3.1354T351 D93580015204
only LN9073
35 Support 3.1354T351 D93580016202
LN9073 203
40 Support 3.1364T42 D93580025202
LN9073 203
45 Cover, Fabric LN9121E115 D55182510273
50 Support 3.1364T3 D93580026200
LN9073 201
1,6(0.063)
55 Cover, Fabric LN9121E115 D55182510274
60 Support 3.1354T351 D27380112200
LN9073−30 201
60A Support 3.1354T351 D27380130200 A161079G0861
LN9073−30 201
65 Cover, Fabric LN9121E115 D55182510275
70 Support 3.1364T3 D93580035200
LN9073 1,6(0.063)
75 Bracket, Upper 3.1354T351 D55981692200
LN9073 201
80 Bracket, Lower 3.1354T351 D55981693200
LN9073 201
85 Angle 3.1364T3 D92480017200
LN9073 201
90 Angle 3.1354T42 D93580047200
LN9073 2(0.0796)
95 Support 3.1364T3 D92480024200
LN9073 1,2(0.047)
ASSY Dwg.: D27380112, D27380130, D55181001, D55182525

Key to Figure 2

Page 13
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−3
Feb 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

100 Cover, Fabric LN9121E115 D55182510276

105 Cover, Fabric LN9121E115 D55182510277
110 Tip Weight 0.7040 D55182519200
DIN1693
− alternative 1.7734.4 D55182514200
LN1017−15−100
ASSY Dwg.: D55182525

Key to Figure 2

Page 14
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−3
Feb 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TRIMMABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER − SPARS − ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT PARAGRAPH.

CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO

PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: OBEY THE GIVEN INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE WHICH LEADS TO THE
APPLICABLE INSPECTION PROGRAM DEFINED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPEC
TIONS (SRI) OF THE SRM, IF NECESSARY.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

1. General

NOTE: CONFIG−3 is applicable after modification 30971G0382 only. For effec

tivity refer to Modification/Service Bulletin List given in Chapter
55−10−00, Page Block 001.
NOTE: For definition of allowable damage refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For Damage Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to chapter Chapter

51−11−14 − CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

This topic contains the allowable damage data applicable to the Skin Plates
of the THS Spar Box. Refer to Figure102 and to table 101. This data is
necessary to find the correct repair procedure.

2. Damage Evaluation

Before you repair the damage structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3.A. for the procedure.
3. Type of Damage

For definition about the types of damage, refer to Chapter 51−77−10, para
graph 2.

For the specific types of damage which can occur, refer to Table 101.
4. Distance Between Damaged Areas and Distance Between Repair Areas

There is a minimum permitted distance between damaged areas and between re
pair areas, refer to Figure 101.

A. Damaged Areas
The minimum acceptable distance between two damaged areas (X) is the
greater value of the following: 50 mm (1.97 in) or 2.5 × Lmax., where
Lmax. is the longest dimension of the damage. If you have less than the

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

permitted distance between damaged areas, work on them together as one

large damaged area.
B. Repair Areas

The minimum acceptable distance between two repair areas (Y) is 100 mm
(3.94 in). If you have less than this distance, refer to the manufactur
er before you do the second repair.

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Distance between Damaged Areas and between Repair Areas

Figure 101

Page 103
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

5. Repair Zones

The Spars of the THS Spar Box are divided into repair zones.
For general information about repair zones, refer to Chapter 51−77−10,
paragraph 3.C.

The repair zones data are given in Figure 102.

Page 104
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

THS Spar Box, Spar Repair Zones

Figure 102

Pages 105/106
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE 55−11−00−1−001−00 IS NOT APPLICABLE

TO ALL AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANTS. REFER TO THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR IN
SPECTION (SRI) FOR WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY.

6. Allowable Damage Description/Criteria

INSPECTION
PARAGRAPH/ DIA REPAIR
DESCRIPTION CRITERIA/TYPE INSTRUCTION REF
GRAM CATEGORY
ERENCE
Front and Rear Superficial and 9.A./101 B, C 55−11−00−1−001−0
Spars Linear Damages 0
(Nicks, Gouges,
Abrasions and
Scratches)
Front and Rear Delamination 9.B./102 B, C 55−11−00−1−001−0
Spars (with or with 0
out visible
cracks and
holes) and De
bonding

Table 101
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

7. Allowable Damage
A. For general information about allowable and repairable damage limits re
fer to Chapter 51−77−10, COMPOSITE COMPONENTS − ALLOWABLE DAMAGE AND RE
PAIR CLASSIFICATION.

B. Superficial and linear damages (nicks, gouges, abrasions and scratches),

refer to Diagram 101.

Delamination and Debonding damages, refer to Diagram 102.

8. Repair Limits

The repair limits data gives the time limits in which to make temporary
and permanent repairs. These time limits are given in flight cycles/hours
(FC/FH). The repair limits also tell you which type of repair you can do.
To find the repair limits data applicable to a damaged area, you must know
the following data:
− The repair zone applicable to the damaged area.
− The area, length or depth (as applicable) of the damage to the structure.
− The type of damage (for example: nick, scratch, delamination).

Page 107
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

9. Front and Rear Spars − Allowable Damage

CAUTION: THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE ON SKIN PANELS MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED

INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−00−1−001−00
AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SEC
TION OF THE SRM. INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM
WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 102.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

A. Front and Rear Spars − Superficial and Linear Damage (Nicks, Gouges,
Abrasions and Scratches)
NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 102.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 102
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.
(1) Minimum distance between damage and the access hole edge shall be 50
mm (1.97 in).
(2) Compare the damage with Diagram 101 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.

(3) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 103 and perform the corre
sponding repair action.

Page 108
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front and Rear Spars − Superficial and Linear Damage (Nicks, Gouges, Abra
sions and Scratches)
Diagram 101
Pages 109/110
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE TYPE OF REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TIME LIMIT BE REPAIR LIFE LIM INSPECTION RE MIN. DIS
SIZE REPAIR CATEGORY FORE REPAIR IT QUIRED MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN TANCE
FROM AC
DAMAGE X mm REPAIRS Y CESS HOLE
(in) mm (in) EDGE mm
(in)
The greater
Cover with HST,
value of 50
refer to Chapter Chapter 51−77−12,
Temporary C Immediately 600 FH (1.97) or 100 (3.94) 50 (1.97)
51−77−12, para paragraph 2.A.
2.5 Lmax.
graph 2.A.
<1>
(1)
The greater
Superficial and value of 50
Chapter 51−77−12, SRI
Linear Damage Permanent B 600 FH<2> − (1.97) or 100 (3.94) 50 (1.97)
paragraph 3.B. 55−11−00−1−001−00
(Nicks, Gouges, 2.5 Lmax.
Abrasions and <1>
Scratches) Refer to Repair of Zones
The greater
Chapter A and B, refer Refer to Chapter
value of 50
55−11−18, to Chapter 55−11−18, Page
Permament Immediately − (1.97) or 100 (3.94) −
(2) Page Block 55−11−18, Page Block 201, Con
2.5 Lmax.
201, Con Block 201, Con fig 3.
<1>
fig 3. fig 3.
− − Contact AIRBUS Immediately − − − − −
Front and Rear Spars − Superficial and Linear Damage (Nicks, Gouges, Abra
sions and Scratches)
Table 103
<1> Lmax is the maximum size of the damage.

<2> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Pages 111/112
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE ON SKIN PANELS MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED

INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−00−1−001−00
AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SEC
TION OF THE SRM. INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM
WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 104.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

B. Front and Rear Spars − Delamination (with or without visible cracks and
holes) and Debonding

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 104.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 104
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Minimum distance between damage and the access hole edge shall be 50
mm (1.97 in).

(2) Compare the damage with Diagram 102 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.
Damage in the following zones are not allowed:
− Underneath the stiffeners.
− Riveted areas (area around the fastener 3.5 times the fastener di
ameter).
NOTE: Use the design drawings to determine the exact position on the
Spar of the internal structure (stiffeners).

(3) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 105 and perform the corre
sponding repair action.

Page 113
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front and Rear Spars − Delamination (with or without visible cracks and
holes) and Debonding
Diagram 102
Page 114
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE TYPE OF REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TIME LIMIT BE REPAIR LIFE LIM INSPECTION RE MIN. DIS
SIZE REPAIR CATEGORY FORE REPAIR IT QUIRED MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN TANCE
FROM AC
DAMAGE X mm REPAIRS Y CESS HOLE
(in) mm (in) EDGE mm
(in)
The greater
Cover with HST,
value of 50
refer to Chapter Chapter 51−77−12,
Temporary C Immediately 600 FH (1.97) or 100 (3.94) 50 (1.97)
51−77−12, para paragraph 2.A.
2.5 Lmax.
graph 2.A.
<1>
(1)
The greater
Delamination value of 50
SRI
(with or without Permanent B <3> 600 FH<2> − (1.97) or 100 (3.94) 50 (1.97)
55−11−00−1−001−00
visible cracks 2.5 Lmax.
and holes) and <1>
Debonding Refer to Repair of Zones
The greater
Chapter A and B, refer Refer to Chapter
value of 50
55−11−18, to Chapter 55−11−18, Page
Permament Immediately − (1.97) or 100 (3.94) −
(2) Page Block 55−11−18, Page Block 201, Con
2.5 Lmax.
201, Con Block 201, Con fig 3.
<1>
fig 3. fig 3.
− − Contact AIRBUS Immediately − − − − −
Front and Rear Spars − Delamination (with or without visible cracks and
holes) and Debonding
Table 105
<1> Lmax is the maximum size of the damage.

<2> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

<3> For non perforating damage repair refer to Chapter 51−77−12, paragraph 3.B.

For perforating damage repair refer to Chapter 51−77−13, paragraph 2.H.

Pages 115/116
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPARS − HORIZONTAL STABILIZER SPAR BOX

1. General

NOTE: CONFIG−1 is applicable before modification 24422G00237 only. For ef

fectivity refer to the Modification/Service Bulletin List given in
Chapter 55−10−00 Page Block 001.

NOTE: For Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14

− CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

This topic contains all of the specific repair procedures for the Horizon
tal Stabilizer Front and Rear Spars. The repair zones and allowable damage
data for these repair procedures is in Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101,
Config. 1.

2. Safety Precautions

There are risks to you and other persons when you work with composite re
pair materials. To prevent risks, read and obey the warnings given below.

WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.

WARNING: WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND FILTER MASK WHEN YOU CUT,
ABRADE OR DRILL COMPOSITE MATERIALS. THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MA
TERIALS CAN GET INTO YOUR LUNGS OR ONTO YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE YOU
INJURY. IMMEDIATELY REMOVE DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.

WHEN YOU WORK WITH CFRP COMPOSITE MATERIALS, IMMEDIATELY REMOVE
DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.
WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRIC POWER ON
THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST ONLY USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT REPAIR.
CAUTION: OBEY THE GIVEN INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE WHICH LEADS TO THE
APPLICABLE INSPECTION PROGRAM DEFINED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR IN
SPECTIONS (SRI) OF THE SRM, IF NECESSARY.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER TO PARA

GRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER REMARKS

No General Repairs applicable − −

Table 201
4. Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs

SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE REPAIR INSPECTION

CATEGORY INSTRUCTION REF
ERENCE
Repair of Crack thru Ac 5.A. 201 B 55−11−18−2−001−00
cess Hole and Fasteners,
Front Spar Zones 01,
03−06 and 09−16
Repair of Crack thru Ac 5.B. 202 B 55−11−18−2−001−00
cess Hole and Fasteners,
Front Spar Zone 02
Repair of Crack thru Ac 5.C. 203 B 55−11−18−2−001−00
cess Hole and Fasteners,
Front Spar Zones 07 and
17
Repair of Damage at Ac 5.D. 204 B 55−11−18−2−001−00
cess Hole, Front Spar
Zone 08
Repair of Cracks thru two 5.E. 205 B 55−11−18−2−001−00
Adjacent Access Holes and
Fasteners, Front Spar
Zone 09 and 10
Repair of Crack thru Ac 5.F. 206 B 55−11−18−2−001−00
cess Hole and Fasteners,
Front Spar Zone 18
Repair after Removal of 5.G. 207 B 55−11−18−2−001−00
Spar Section for Access,
Front Spar Zones 01−05
and 07−15
Repair after Removal of 5.H. 208 B 55−11−18−2−001−00
Spar Section for Access,
Front Spar Zone 06

Table 202

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE REPAIR INSPECTION

CATEGORY INSTRUCTION REF
ERENCE
Repair of Front and Rear 5.I. 209 B 55−11−18−2−001−00
Spar Stiffeners, Zones
01−32 and 34−48
Repair of Rear Spar 5.J. 210 B 55−11−18−2−001−00
Stiffener, Zone 33
Delamination Repair for 5.K. 211 B 55−11−18−2−001−00
Front and Rear Spars, all
Zones
Repair of Crack thru Fas 5.L. 212 B 55−11−18−2−001−00
teners, Front and Rear
Spar Web, Zones 01−05
Repair of Crack thru Fas 5.M. 213 B 55−11−18−2−001−00
teners and Stiffener,
Front and Rear Spar Web,
Zones 01−05
Repair after Removal of 5.N. 214 B 55−11−18−2−003−00
Spar Section for Access

Table 202
5. Spars Repairs

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−18−2−001−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH
3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 203.
A. Repair of Crack thru Access Hole and Fasteners, Front Spar Zones 01,
03−06, 09−16

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3, for data.

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 203
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP materials − Refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 201, Config. 1, Figures
212−213
− Glassfabric − Material No. Z−19.201, Epoxy
Prepreg Glassfabric, refer to
Chapter 51−33−00
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane Primer − Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Resin − Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 201)

(a) Draw some lines to show you the correct locations at which to
cut the structure to be removed.
(b) Remove the fasteners that attach the structure in the repair
area.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Cut out the structure to be removed.

(d) With abrasive cloth, make the repair area smooth and level with
the adjacent surface. Initially use 280 grade and finish off with
400 grade. Use also the abrasive cloth to make the crack smooth
along its total length.

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(e) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1,
paragraph 9).

(f) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(g) Put the repair doubler in its repair position. At the corners of
the repair doubler, mark the locations of the existing fasteners
holes.

(h) Remove the repair doubler from the structure.

(i) Pilot−drill the holes marked on the repair doubler.

(j) Put the repair doubler in its repair position. Attach it to the
structure with screw pins thru the previously drilled corner
holes.

(k) Mark the locations of the remaining existing fastener holes on

the repair doubler.

NOTE: Do not drill holes in the repair doubler where it is indi

cated that existing fastener holes are not to be used.

(l) Pilot−drill thru the repair doubler at the marked hole locations.

(m) Mark the locations of the new fastener holes on the repair dou
bler and pilot−drill thru the doubler and the structure.
(n) Remove the repair doubler from the structure.

(o) Find the center of the repair doubler. Mark the position of the
access hole to the same dimensions as the original hole in the
spar.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(p) Cut the access hole in the repair doubler to the same dimensions
as the original hole in the spar.

(q) Put the repair stiffeners in the correct position and attach them
to the repair doubler with screw clamps.
(r) Use the existing holes in the repair doubler as a template and
pilot−drill thru the repair stiffeners.

(s) Remove the screw clamps and remove the repair stiffeners from the
repair doubler.
(t) Put the repair pieces in their correct position and attach them
to the repair area with screw pins.

(u) Drill all the holes in the repair area to the necessary diameter
for the fasteners.

Page 205
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(v) Remove the repair pieces from the repair area.

(w) Remove the sharp edges from the holes in the repair pieces and
the repair area with an abrasive cone. Remove the waste material
from the repair area.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(x) Clean the repair pieces and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (material No. 11−003).
(y) Put the repair pieces in their correct position and attach them
to the repair area with screw pins.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(z) Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the repair area
with the sealant (material No. 09−005).

(aa)Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners in the
screw pin holes.

(ab)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (material No. 11−003).
(ac)Tell the inspection department to do an inspection at 6000 flight
hours (FH).

(3) Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 201)

(a) Do the steps 5.A.(2)(a) thru 5.A.(2)(d) of the repair procedure

5.A.(2).

(b) Get the equivalent metal materials for the repair pieces. The
subsequent steps will help you to do this:

1 Refer to the repair zone data (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 101, Config. 1, Figure 109) and find the repair zone
number for the damaged area.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (refer to Chapter

55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1, Figure 212 and 213) and
find the metal materials to use in place of pre−cured doublers
and sections.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(d) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair parts
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, material
No. 16−006).

(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy prepreg

Glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (material No.

Page 206
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

08−001C) to the repair area. Refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 201, Config. 1, paragraph 10, and Figure 206 (sheet 2).
(f) On the layer of glassfabric, mark the position of the access
hole to the same dimensions as the original hole in the spar.

(g) Cut the access hole in the layer of glassfabric to the same di
mensions as the original hole in the spar.

(h) Do the steps 5.A.(2)(g) thru 5.A.(2)(ab) of the repair procedure

5.A.(2).

(i) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101, Config.
1, Figure 126) to find out the time limit applicable to the tem
porary repair. Tell the inspection department what the permissi
ble number of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent repair is
necessary.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 201)

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces and glassfabric from the spar.
(b) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1,
Paragraph 9).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair locations.

(d) Use the temporary repair pieces to get the correct locations for
the access and fastener holes in the permanent repair pieces.
Mark the positions of the holes.
(e) Cut the access hole to the correctly marked dimensions on the
permanent repair doubler.

(f) Pilot−drill the correctly marked fastener holes in the permanent

repair pieces.
(g) Put the permanent repair pieces in their correct position and
attach them to the repair area with screw pins.

(h) Drill all fastener holes one size oversize to that of the holes
used for the temporary repair.

(i) Do the steps 5.A.(2)(v) thru 5.A.(2)(ac) of the repair procedure

5.A.(2).

Pages 207/208
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Crack Thru Access Hole and Fasteners, Front Spar Zones 01, 03, 05
and 06
Figure 201 (sheet 1)
Pages 209/210
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Crack Thru Access Hole and Fasteners, Front Spar Zones 01, 03, 05
and 06
Figure 201 (sheet 2)
Pages 211/212
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Crack Thru Access Hole and Fasteners, Front Spar Zone 04
Figure 201 (sheet 3)

Pages 213/214
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Crack Thru Access Hole and Fasteners, Front Spar Zone 04
Figure 201 (sheet 4)

Pages 215/216
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Crack Thru Access Hole and Fasteners, Front Spar Zones 09−11
Figure 201 (sheet 5)

Pages 217/218
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Crack Thru Access Hole and Fasteners, Front Spar Zones 09−11
Figure 201 (sheet 6)

Pages 219/220
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Crack Thru Access Hole and Fasteners, Front Spar Zones 12−16
Figure 201 (sheet 7)

Pages 221/222
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Crack Thru Access Hole and Fasteners, Front Spar Zones 12−16
Figure 201 (sheet 8)

Page 223
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−18−2−001−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 204.

B. Repair of Crack Thru Access Hole and Fasteners, Front Spar Zone 02

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 204
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 201, Config. 1, Figure 212
− Glassfabric − Material No. Z−19.201, Epoxy
Prepreg Glassfabric, refer to
Chapter 51−33−00
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane Primer − Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Resin − Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 202)

Page 224
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(a) Draw some lines to show you the correct locations at which to
cut the structure to be removed.
(b) Remove the fasteners that attach the structure in the repair
area.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Cut out the structure to be removed.

(d) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1,
paragraph 9).

(e) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.
(f) Put the repair filler in its repair position. At the corners of
the repair filler, mark the locations of the existing fastener
holes.

(g) Remove the repair filler from the structure.

(h) Pilot−drill the holes marked on the repair filler.

(i) Put the repair filler in its repair position. Attach it to the
structure with screw pins thru the previously drilled corner
holes.

(j) Mark the locations of the remaining existing fastener holes on

the repair filler.

(k) Pilot−drill thru the repair filler at the marked hole locations.

(l) Remove the repair filler from the structure.

(m) Put the repair filler in its correct position on the repair dou

bler. Attach them together with screw clamps.

(n) Use the pilot holes in the repair filler as a template and pi

lot−drill thru the repair doubler.

(o) Use the structure that was removed as a template and mark the
position of the access hole. Mark the access hole position on
both repair pieces.

(p) Cut the access hole in the repair pieces to the correctly marked
position and dimensions.

(q) Remove the screw clamps from the repair pieces.

(r) Put the repair pieces in their correct position and attach them
to the repair area with screw pins.

Page 225
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(s) Mark the position of the remaining fastener holes on the repair
doubler.
(t) Pilot−drill thru the repair doubler at the marked hole locations.

(u) Mark the position of the new fastener holes and pilot−drill thru
the repair pieces and the structure.

(v) Drill all the holes in the repair area to the necessary diameter
for the fasteners.
(w) Remove the repair pieces from the repair area.

(x) Remove the sharp edges from the holes in the repair pieces and
the repair area with an abrasive cone. Remove the waste material
from the repair area.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(y) Clean the repair pieces and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (material No. 11−003).

(z) Put the repair pieces in their correct position and attach them
to the repair area with screw pins.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(aa)Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the repair area

with the sealant (material No. 09−005).

(ab)Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners in the
screw pin holes.

(ac)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (material No. 11−003).

(ad)Tell the inspection department to do an inspection at 6000 flight

hours (FH).

(3) Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 202)

(a) Do the steps 5.B.(2)(a) thru 5.B.(2)(c) of the repair procedure

5.B.(2).
(b) Get the equivalent metal materials for the repair pieces. The
subsequent steps will help you to do this:

1 Refer to the repair zone data (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 101, Config. 1, Figure 109) and find the repair zone
number for the damaged area.
2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (refer to Chapter
55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1, Figure 212) and find the
metal materials to use in place of the pre−cured doubler and
filler.

Page 226
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.
(d) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair parts
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, (material
No. 16−006)).

(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (material Z−19.201, Epoxy prepreg

Glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (material No.
08−001C) to the repair area. Refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page
Block 201, Config. 1, paragraph 10, and Figure 206 (sheet 3).

(f) Do the steps 5.B.(2)(f) thru 5.B.(2)(ac) of the repair procedure

5.B.(2).
(g) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101, Config.
1, Figure 126) to find out the time limit applicable to the tem

porary repair. Tell the inspection department what the permissi

ble number of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent repair is
necessary.
(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 202)

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces and glassfabric from the spar.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1,
paragraph 9).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair locations.
(d) Use the temporary repair pieces to get the correct locations for
the access and fastener holes in the permanent repair pieces.
Mark the positions of the holes.

(e) Cut the access hole to the correctly marked dimensions on the
permanent repair doubler and filler.
(f) Pilot−drill the correctly marked fastener holes in the permanent
repair pieces.

(g) Put the permanent repair pieces in their correct position and
attach them to the repair area with screw pins.
(h) Drill all fastener holes one size oversize to that of the holes
used for the temporary repair.

(i) Do the steps 5.B.(2)(w) thru 5.B.(2)(ad) of the repair procedure

5.B.(2).

Pages 227/228
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Crack thru Access Hole and Fasteners, Front Spar Zone 02
Figure 202 (sheet 1)

Pages 229/230
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Crack thru Access Hole and Fasteners, Front Spar Zone 02
Figure 202 (sheet 2)

Page 231
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−18−2−001−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 205.

C. Repair of Crack Thru Access Hole and Fasteners, Front Spar Zone 07 and
17

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 205
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.
(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page
Block 201, Config. 1, Figure 212
− Glassfabric − Material No. Z−19.201, Epoxy
Prepreg Glassfabric, refer to
Chapter 51−33−00
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane Primer − Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Resin − Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 203)

Page 232
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(a) Remove the fasteners from the repair area.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) With abrasive cloth make the crack smooth along its total length.
Initially use 280 grade and finish off with 400 grade.

(c) Get the correct pre−cured material necessary to make the repair
doubler (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1,
paragraph 9).
(d) Make the repair doubler to the correct shape and dimension for
the repair location.

(e) Put the repair doubler in its repair position. At the corners of
the repair doubler, mark the locations of the existing fastener
holes.

(f) Remove the repair doubler from the structure.

(g) Pilot−drill the holes marked on the repair doubler.

(h) Put the repair doubler in its repair position. Attach it to the
structure with screw pins thru the previously drilled corner
holes.

(i) Mark the locations of the remaining existing fastener holes on

the repair doubler.

NOTE: Do not drill holes in the repair doubler where it is indi

cated that existing fastener holes are not to be used.

(j) Pilot−drill thru the repair doubler at the marked hole locations.

(k) Mark the locations of the new fastener holes in the repair dou

bler and pilot−drill thru the doubler and the structure.
(l) Remove the repair doubler from the structure.

(m) On the repair doubler, mark the position of the access hole to
the same dimensions as the original hole in the spar.

(n) Cut the access hole in the repair doubler to the same dimensions
as the original hole in the spar.
(o) Put the repair doubler in its correct repair position and attach
it to the structure with screw pins.

(p) Drill all the holes in the repair area to the necessary diameter
for the fasteners.
(q) Remove the repair doubler from the structure.

Page 233
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(r) Remove the sharp edges from the holes in the repair doubler and
the repair area with an abrasive cone. Remove the waste material
from the repair area.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(s) Clean the repair doubler and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (material No. 11−003).

(t) Put the repair doubler in its correct repair position and attach
it to the structure with screw pins.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(u) Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the repair area
with the sealant (material No. 09−005).
(v) Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners in the
screw pin holes.

(w) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (material No. 11−003).

(x) Tell the inspection department to do an inspection at 6000 flight

hours (FH).

(3) Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 203)

(a) Do the steps 5.C.(2)(a) and 5.C.(2)(b) of the repair procedure

5.C.(2).
(b) Get the equivalent mental materials for the repair pieces. The
subsequent steps will help you to do this:

1 Refer to the repair zone data (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 101, Config. 1, Figure 109) and find the repair zone
number for the damaged area.
2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (refer to Chapter
55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1, Figure 212) and find the
metal material to used in place of the pre−cured doubler.

(c) Make the repair doubler to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(d) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair doubler
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, (material
No. 16−006)).

(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy prepreg

glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (material No.
08−001C) to the repair area. Refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page
Block 201, Config. 1, paragraph 10, and Figure 206 (sheet 2).

Page 234
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) On the layer of glassfabric mark the position of the access hole
to the same dimensions as the original hole in the spar.
(g) Cut the access hole in the layer of glassfabric to the same di

mensions as the original hole in the spar.

(h) Do the steps 5.C.(2)(e) and 5.C.(2)(w) of the repair procedure

5.C.(2).

(i) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101, Config.
1, Figure 126) to find out the time limit applicable to the tem

porary repair. Tell the inspection department what the permissi

ble number of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent repair is
necessary.
(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 203)

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces and glassfabric from the spar.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
doubler (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1,
paragraph 9).

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair locations.

(d) Use the temporary repair pieces to get the correct locations for
the access and fastener holes in the permanent repair pieces.
Mark the positions of the holes.

(e) Cut the access hole to the correctly marked dimensions on the
permanent repair doubler.

(f) Pilot−drill the correctly marked fastener holes in the permanent

repair doubler.

(g) Put the permanent repair doubler in its correct position and at

tach it to the repair area with screw pins.

(h) Drill all fastener holes one size oversize to that of the holes
used for the temporary repair.
(i) Do the steps 5.C.(2)(q) thru 5.C.(2)(x) of the repair procedure
5.C.(2).

Pages 235/236
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Crack Thru Access Hole and Fasteners, Front Spar Zone 07
Figure 203 (sheet 1)

Pages 237/238
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Crack Thru Access Hole and Fasteners, Front Spar Zone 07
Figure 203 (sheet 2)

Page 239
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Crack Thru Access Hole and Fasteners, Front Spar Zone 17
Figure 203 (sheet 3)

Page 240
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Crack Thru Access Hole and Fastener, Front Spar Zone 17
Figure 203 (sheet 4)

Page 241
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−18−2−001−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 206.

D. Repair of Damage at Access Hole, Front Spar Zone 08.

NOTE: Before your repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 206
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 201, Config. 1, Figures
212 −213
− Glassfabric − Material No. Z−19.201, Epoxy
Prepreg Glassfabric, refer to
Chapter 51−33−00
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane Primer − Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Resin − Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 204)

Page 242
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(a) Draw some lines to show you the correct location at which to cut
structure to be removed.
(b) Remove the fasteners that attach the structure in the repair
area.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Cut out the structure to be removed.

(d) With abrasive cloth, make the repair area smooth and level. Ini

tially use 280 grade and finish off with 400 grade.

(e) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
pieces (Refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1,
paragraph 9).
(f) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(g) On the repair doubler, mark the position of the access hole to
the same dimensions as the original hole in the spar.
(h) Cut the access hole in the repair doubler to the correctly
marked dimensions.

(i) Put the repair doubler in its repair position and attach it to
the structure with screw clamps. You can do this by using the
previously cut access hole.
(j) Pilot−drill the corners of the repair doubler thru the existing
fastener holes in the structure.

(k) Remove the screw clamps and attach the repair doubler to the
structure with screw pins.
(l) Pilot−drill the repair doubler thru the remaining existing fas

tener holes.

(m) Remove the repair doubler from the structure.

(n) Put the repair filler in its repair position on the repair dou

bler and attach together with screw clamps.
(o) Pilot−drill the repair filler thru the holes in the repair dou

bler.

(p) Remove the screw clamps from the repair doubler and the repair
filler.
(q) Put the repair packer and the repair filler in their repair
positions on the repair doubler. Attach the repair pieces togeth

er with screw clamps.

Page 243
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(r) Use the repair doubler as a template and mark the position of
the access hole on the repair packer.
(s) Cut the access hole in the repair packer and the repair filler
to the correctly marked dimensions.

(t) Remove the screw clamps. Put the repair doubler, the repair
packer and the repair filler in their repair positions on the
structure. Attach the repair doubler and the repair filler to the
structure with screw pins. Attach the repair packer to the repair
doubler and filler with screw clamps.

(u) Mark the position of the new fastener holes on the spar struc

ture.
(v) Pilot−drill the marked fastener holes in the spar structure and
drill thru the repair packer and doubler.

(w) Put the repair stiffeners in their repair position and mark the
position of the existing fastener holes.

(x) Remove the repair stiffeners from the structure.

(y) Pilot−drill the repair stiffeners at the marked hole locations.

(z) Put the repair stiffeners in their repair position and attach
with screw pins thru the previously drilled holes.

(aa)Mark the position of the new fastener holes on the repair stiff

eners. Pilot−drill thru the repair stiffeners, filler, packer and
doubler.

(ab)Drill all the holes in the repair area to the necessary diameter
for the fasteners.

(ac)Remove the repair pieces from the repair area.

(ad)Remove the sharp edges from the holes in the repair area with an
abrasive cone. Remove the waste material from the repair area.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(ae)Clean the repair pieces and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (material No. 11−003).

(af)Put the repair pieces in their correct position and attach them
to the repair area with screw pins.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(ag)Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the repair area
with the sealant (material No. 09−005).

(ah)Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners in the
screw pin holes.

Page 244
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ai)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (material No. 11−003).
(aj)Tell the inspection department to do an inspection at 6000 flight
hours (FH).

(3) Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 204)

(a) Do the steps 5.D.(2)(a) thru 5.D.(2)(d) of the repair procedure

5.D.(2).
(b) Get the equivalent metal materials for the repair pieces. The
subsequent steps will help you to do this:

1 Refer to the repair zone data (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 101, Config. 1, Figure 109) and find the repair zone
number for the damaged area.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (refer to Chapter

55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1, Figure 212 and 213) and
find the metal materials to use in place of pre−cured sheets
and sections.
(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(d) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair parts
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, (material
No. 16−006)).
(e) Do the steps 5.D.(2)(g) thru 5.D.(2)(ad) of the repair procedure
5.D.(2).

(f) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy prepreg

glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (material No.
08−001C) to the repair area. Refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page
Block 201, Config. 1, paragraph 10, and Figure 206 (sheet 4).

(g) Drill thru the layer of glassfabric at the fastener holes in the
repair area. Remove the waste material from the repair area.

(h) Do the steps 5.D.(2)(ae) thru 5.D.(2)(ai) of the repair procedure

5.D.(2).

(i) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101, Config.
1, Figure 126) to find out the time limit applicable to the tem

porary repair. Tell the inspection department what the permissi

ble number of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent repair is
necessary.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 204)

(a) Remove the Temporary repair pieces and glassfabric from the spar.

Page 245
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1,
paragraph 9).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair locations.

(d) Use the temporary repair pieces to get the correct locations for
the access and fastener holes in the permanent repair pieces.
Mark the positions of the holes.

(e) Cut the access hole to the correctly marked dimensions on the
permanent repair pieces.
(f) Pilot−drill the correctly marked fastener holes in the permanent
repair pieces.

(g) Put the permanent repair pieces in their correct position and
attach them to the repair area with screw pins.

(h) Drill all fastener holes one size oversize to that of the holes
used for the temporary repair.

(i) Do the steps 5.D.(2)(ac) thru 5.D.(2)(aj) of the repair procedure

5.D.(2).

Page 246
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage at Access Hole and Fasteners, Front Spar Zone 08

Figure 204 (sheet 1)

Pages 247/248
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage at Access Hole and Fasteners, Front Spar Zone 08

Figure 204 (sheet 2)

Page 249
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−18−2−001−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 207.

E. Repair of Cracks thru two adjacent Access Holes and Fasteners, Front
Spar Zones 09 and 10

NOTE: Before your repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 207
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.
(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page
Block 201, Config. 1, Figures
212 −213
− Glassfabric − Material No. Z−19.201, Epoxy
Prepreg Glassfabric, refer to
Chapter 51−33−00
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane Primer − Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Resin − Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

Page 250
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(2) Permanent repair (Refer to Figure 205)

(a) Draw some lines to show you the correct location at which to cut
the structure to be removed.

(b) Remove the fasteners that attach the structure in the repair
area.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Cut out the structure to be removed.

(d) With abrasive cloth, make the repair area smooth and level. Ini
tially use 280 grade and finish off with 400 grade. Use also the
abrasive cloth to make the cracks smooth along their total
length.
(e) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1,
paragraph 9).

(f) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.
(g) Put the repair doubler in its repair position. At the corners of
the repair doubler, mark the locations of the existing fastener
holes.

(h) Remove the repair doubler from the structure.

(i) Pilot−drill the holes marked on the repair doubler.

(j) Put the repair doubler in its repair position. Attach it to the
structure with screw pins thru the previously drilled corner
holes.

(k) Mark the locations of the remaining existing fastener holes on

the repair doubler.

NOTE: Do not drill holes in the repair doubler where it is indi

cated that existing fastener holes are not to be used.

(l) Pilot−drill thru the repair doubler at the marked hole locations.
(m) Mark the locations of the new fastener holes in the repair dou
bler and pilot−drill thru the doubler and the structure.

(n) Remove the repair doubler from the structure.

(o) On the repair doubler, mark the position of the access holes to
the same dimensions as the original holes in the spar.

Page 251
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(p) Cut the access holes in the repair doubler to the same dimen
sions as the original holes in the spar.

(q) Put the repair stiffeners in the correct position and attach them
to the repair doubler with screw clamps.

(r) Use the existing holes in the repair doubler as a template and
pilot−drill thru the repair stiffeners.
(s) Remove the screw clamps and remove the repair stiffeners from the
repair doubler.

(t) Put the repair pieces in their correct position and attach them
to the repair area with screw pins.
(u) Drill all the holes in the repair area to the necessary diameter
for the fasteners.

(v) Remove the repair pieces from the repair area.

(w) Remove the sharp edges from the holes in the repair pieces and
the repair area with an abrasive cone. Remove the waste material
from the repair area.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(x) Clean the repair pieces and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (material No. 11−003).
(y) Put the repair pieces in their correct position and attach them
to the repair area with screw pins.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(z) Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the repair area
with the sealant (material No. 09−005).

(aa)Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners in the
screw pin holes.

(ab)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (material No. 11−003).
(ac)Tell the inspection department to do an inspection at 6000 flight
hours (FH).

(3) Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 205)

(a) Do the steps 5.E.(2)(a) thru 5.E.(2)(d) of the repair procedure

5.E.(2).

(b) Get the equivalent metal materials for the repair pieces. The
subsequent steps will help you to do this:

Page 252
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

1 Refer to the repair zone data (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 101, Config. 1, Figure 109) and find the repair zone
number for the damaged area.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (refer to Chapter

55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1, Figure 212 and 213) and
find the metal materials to use in place of the pre−cured dou
bler and sections.
(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(d) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair parts
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, material
No. 16−006).
(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (material Z−19.201, Epoxy prepreg
glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (material No.
08−001C) to the repair area. Refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page
Block 201, Config. 1, paragraph 10 and Figure 206 (sheet 2).
(f) On the layer of glassfabric, mark the position of the access
holes to the same dimensions as the original holes in the spar.

(g) Cut the access holes in the layer of glassfabric to the same di
mensions as the original holes in the spar.

(h) Do the steps 5.E.(2)(g) thru 5.E.(2)(ab) of the repair procedure

5.E.(2).

(i) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101, Config.
1, Figure 126) to find out the time limit applicable to the tem
porary repair. Tell the inspection department what the permissi
ble number of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent repair is
necessary.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 205)

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces and glassfabric from the spar.
(b) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1,
paragraph 9).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair locations.

(d) Use the temporary repair pieces to get the correct locations for
the access and fastener holes in the permanent repair pieces.
Mark the positions of the holes.

Page 253
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(e) Cut the access holes to the correctly marked dimensions on the
permanent repair doubler.
(f) Pilot−drill the correctly marked fastener holes in the permanent
repair pieces.

(g) Put the permanent repair pieces in their correct position and
attach them to the repair area with screw pins.

(h) Drill all fastener holes one size oversize to that of the holes
used for the temporary repair.

(i) Do the steps 5.E.(2)(v) thru 5.E.(2)(ac) of the repair procedure

5.E.(2).

Page 254
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Crack thru two adjacent Access Holes and Fasteners, Front Spar
Zone 09 and 10
Figure 205 (sheet 1)
Pages 255/256
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Crack thru two adjacent Access Holes and Fasteners, Front Spar
Zone 09 and 10
Figure 205 (sheet 2)
Page 257
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−18−2−001−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 208.

F. Repair of Crack thru Access Hole and Fasteners, Front Spar Zone 18

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 208
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 258
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Adhesive − Material No. 08−010C, refer to

− Thickening Agent
− Pre−cured CFRP Materials
− Glassfabric
− Cleaning Agent
− Polyurethane Primer
− Sealant
− Resin
(2) Permanent Repair ( Refer to Figure 206)
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−057, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page
Block 201, Config. 1, Figure 212
− Material No. Z−19.201, Epoxy
Prepreg Glassfabric, refer to
Chapter 51−33−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Remove the fasteners from the repair area.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) With abrasive cloth make the crack smooth along its total length.
Initially use 280 grade and finish off with 400 grade.

(c) Get the correct pre−cured material necessary to make the repair
doublers (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1,
paragraph 9).
(d) Make the repair doublers to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(e) Put the inner repair doubler in its repair position. At the cor

ners of the inner repair doubler, mark the locations of the ex

isting fastener holes.
(f) Remove the inner repair doubler from the structure.

(g) Pilot−drill the holes marked on the inner repair doubler.

(h) Put the inner repair doubler in its repair position. Attach it
to the structure with screw pins thru the previously drilled
corner holes.

Page 259
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(i) Mark the locations of the remaining existing fasteners holes on

the inner repair doubler.
NOTE: Do not drill holes in the inner repair doubler where it is
indicated that existing fastener holes are not to be used.

(j) Pilot−drill thru the inner repair doubler at the marked hole
locations.

(k) Remove the inner repair doubler from the structure.

(l) On the inner repair doubler, mark the position of the access
hole to the same dimensions as the original hole in the spar.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(m) Cut the access hole in the inner repair doubler to the same di

mensions as the original hole in the spar.

(n) Put the outer repair doubler in its correct position on the in

ner repair doubler. Attach them together with screw clamps.

(o) Use the pilot holes in the inner repair doubler as a template
and pilot drill thru the outer repair doubler.
(p) Remove the screw clamps from the repair pieces.

(q) Put the repair pieces in their correct position and attach them
to the repair area with screw pins.

(r) Mark the location of the remaining existing fastener holes on the
outer repair doubler.

NOTE: Do not drill holes in the outer repair doubler where it is

indicated that existing fastener holes are not to be used.

(s) Pilot−drill thru the outer repair doubler at the marked hole
locations.

(t) Mark the position of the new fastener hole on the outer repair
doubler. Pilot−drill thru both repair doublers and the structure
at the marked hole location.

(u) Drill all the holes in the repair area to the necessary diameter
for the fasteners.

(v) Remove the repair pieces from the repair area.

(w) Put the outer repair doubler in its correct position on the in

ner repair doubler. Use the inner repair doubler as a template
and mark the location of the access hole contour on the outer
repair doubler.

Page 260
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(x) Cut out the access hole contour in the outer repair doubler to
the correctly marked dimensions.

(y) Remove the sharp edges from the holes in the repair pieces and
the repair area with an abrasive cone. Remove the waste material
from the repair area.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(z) Clean the repair pieces and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (material No. 11−003).

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS..

(aa)Mix the adhesive (material No. 08−010C) with the thickening agent
(material No. 05−057).

(ab)Apply the adhesive to only the surfaces of the repair pieces

that will touch when assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a

maximum thickness of 1,0 mm (0.039 in).
(ac)Put the repair pieces in their correct position and attach them
to the repair area with screw pins.

(ad)Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (material No. 11−003).
(ae)Let the adhesive cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11).

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(af)Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the repair area

with the sealant (material No. 09−005).
(ag)Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners in the
screw pin holes.

(ah)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (material No. 11−003).

(ai)Tell the inspection department to do an inspection at 6000 flight

hours (FH).

(3) Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 206)

(a) Do the steps 5.F.(2)(a) and 5.F.(2)(b) of the repair procedure

5.F.(2).
(b) Get the equivalent metal materials for the repair pieces. The
subsequent steps will help you to do this:

Page 261
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

1 Refer to the repair zone data (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 101, Config. 1, Figure 109) and find the repair zone
number for the damaged area.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (refer to Chapter

55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1, Figure 212) and find the
metal materials to use in place of the pre−cured doublers.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(d) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair parts
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, material
No. 16−006).
(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy prepreg
glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (material No.
08−001C) to the repair area. Refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page
Block 201, Config. 1, paragraph 10 and Figure 206 (sheet 2).

(f) On the layer of glassfabric, mark the position of the access

hole to the same dimensions as the original hole in the spar.

(g) Cut the access hole in the layer of glassfabric to the correct
shape and dimensions.

(h) Do the steps 5.F.(2)(e) thru 5.F.(2)(ah) of the repair procedure

5.F.(2).
(i) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101, Config.
1, Figure 126) to find out the time limit applicable to the tem

porary repair. Tell the inspection department what the permissi

ble number of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent repair is
necessary.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 206)

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces and glassfabric from the spar.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1,
paragraph 9).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair locations.
(d) Use the temporary repair pieces to get the correct locations for
the access and fastener holes in the permanent repair pieces.
Mark the positions of the holes.

(e) Cut the access hole to the correctly marked dimensions on the
permanent repair doublers.

Page 262
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Pilot−drill the correctly marked fastener holes in the permanent

repair doublers.
(g) Put the permanent repair doublers in their correct position and
attach them to the repair area screw pins.

(h) Drill all fastener holes one size oversize to that of the holes
used for the temporary repair.

(i) Remove the repair doublers from the repair area.

(j) Do the steps 5.F.(2)(y) thru 5.F.(2)(ai) of the repair procedure
5.F.(2).

Pages 263/264
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Crack thru Access Hole and Fasteners, Front Spar Zone 18
Figure 206 (sheet 1)

Pages 265/266
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Crack thru Access Hole and Fasteners, Front Spar Zone 18
Figure 206 (sheet 2)

Page 267
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−18−2−001−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 209.

G. Repair after Removal of Spar Section for Access, Front Spar Zones 01−05
and 07−15

NOTE: The subsequent repair paragraphs tell you how to remove parts of
the front spar for access to the spar box. They also tell you how
to repair that part of the spar after removal.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 209
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 268
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page

B lock 201, Config. 1, Figures
213−214
− Glassfabric − Material No. Z−19.201, Epoxy
Prepreg Glassfabric, refer to
Chapter 51−33−00
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane Primer − Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Resin − Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 207)

(a) Remove the fasteners from around the section of spar to be re
moved.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Cut out the section of spar to be removed.

(c) With abrasive cloth, make the cut out area of the spar, smooth
and level with the adjacent structure. Initially use 280 grade
and finish off with 400 grade. Make the area rough where the re
pair doubler is to be installed.
(d) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1,
paragraph 9).

(e) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(f) On the repair doubler, mark the position of the access hole to
the same dimensions as the original hole in the spar.

(g) Cut the access hole in the repair doubler to the correctly
marked dimensions.
(h) Put the repair doubler in its repair position. At the corners of
the repair doubler, mark the locations of the existing fastener
holes.

(i) Remove the repair doubler from the structure.

Page 269
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(j) Pilot−drill the holes marked on the repair doubler.

(k) Put the repair doubler in its repair position. Attach it to the
structure with screw pins thru the previously drilled corner
holes.

(l) Mark the locations of the rest of the existing fastener holes on
the repair doubler.

(m) Pilot−drill thru the repair doubler at the marked hole locations.
(n) Put the repair stiffeners in their repair position and mark the
position of the existing fastener holes.

NOTE: Zones 08, 11, 13 and 15 have only one stiffener adjacent
to the repair area.
(o) Remove the repair stiffeners from the structure.

(p) Pilot−drill the repair stiffeners at the marked hole locations.

(q) Put the repair stiffeners in their repair position. Attach them
to the structure with screw pins thru the previously drilled pi
lot holes.

(r) Mark the locations of the new fastener holes on the repair
stiffeners and the repair doubler.

(s) Pilot−drill the new fastener holes at the marked locations.

(t) Drill all the holes in the repair area to the necessary diameter
for the fasteners.

(u) Remove the repair pieces from the repair area.

(v) Remove the sharp edges from the holes in the repair pieces and
the repair area with an abrasive cone. Remove the waste material
from the repair area.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(w) Clean the repair pieces and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (material No. 11−003).
(x) Put the repair pieces in their correct position and attach them
to the repair area with screw pins.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(y) Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the repair area
with the sealant (material No. 09−005).
(z) Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners in the
screw pin holes.

Page 270
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(aa)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (material No. 11−003).
(ab)Tell the inspection department to do an inspection at 6000 flight
hours (FH).

(3) Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 207)

(a) Do the steps 5.G.(2)(a) thru 5.G.(2)(c) of the repair procedure

5.G.(2).
(b) Get the equivalent metal materials for the repair pieces. The
subsequent steps will help you to do this:

1 Refer to the repair zone data (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 101, Config. 1, Figure 110) and find the repair zone
number for the damaged area.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (refer to Chapter

55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1, Figure 213 and 214) and
find the metal materials to use in place of pre−cured doublers
and sections.
(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(d) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair parts
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, material
No. 16−006).
(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy prepreg
glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00), and resin (material No.
08−001C) to the repair area. Refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page
Block 201, Config. 1, paragraph 10 and Figure 206 (sheet 2).
(f) On the layer of glassfabric, mark the position of the access
hole to the same dimensions as the original hole in the spar.

(g) Cut the access hole in the layer of glassfabric to the same di
mensions as the original hole in the spar.

(h) Do the steps 5.G.(2)(f) thru 5.G.(2)(aa) of the repair procedure

5.G.(2).

(i) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101, Config.
1, Figure 126) to find out the time limit applicable to the tem
porary repair. Tell the inspection department what the permissi
ble number of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent repair is
necessary.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 207)

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces and glassfabric from the spar.

Page 271
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1,
paragraph 9).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair locations.

(d) Use the temporary repair pieces to get the correct locations for
the access and fastener holes in the permanent repair pieces.
Mark the positions of the holes.

(e) Cut the access hole to the correctly marked dimensions on the
permanent repair doubler.
(f) Pilot−drill the correctly marked fastener holes in the permanent
repair pieces.

(g) Put the permanent repair pieces in their correct position and
attach them to the repair area with screw pins.

(h) Drill all fastener holes one size oversize to that of the holes
used for the temporary repair.

(i) Do the steps 5.G.(2)(u) thru 5.G.(2)(ab) of the repair procedure

5.G.(2).

Page 272
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair After Removal of Spar Section for Access, Front Spar Zone 01
Figure 207 (sheet 1)

Pages 273/274
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair After Removal of Spar Section for Access, Front Spar Zone 01
Figure 207 (sheet 2)

Pages 275/276
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair After Removal of Spar Section for Access, Front Spar Zones 02 thru 04
Figure 207 (sheet 3)

Pages 277/278
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair After Removal of Spar Section for Access, Front Spar Zones 02 thru 04
Figure 207 (sheet 4)

Pages 279/280
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair After Removal of Spar Section for Access, Front Spar Zones 05 and 07
Figure 207 (sheet 5)

Pages 281/282
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair After Removal of Spar Section for Access, Front Spar Zones 05 and 07
Figure 207 (sheet 6)

Pages 283/284
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair After Removal of Spar Section for Access, Front Spar Zones 08 and 09
Figure 207 (sheet 7)

Pages 285/286
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair After Removal of Spar Section for Access, Front Spar Zones 08 and 09
Figure 207 (sheet 8)

Pages 287/288
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair After Removal of Spar Section for Access, Front Spar Zones 10 and 11
Figure 207 (sheet 9)

Pages 289/290
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair After Removal of Spar Section for Access, Front Spar Zones 10 and 11
Figure 207 (sheet 10)

Pages 291/292
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair After Removal of Spar Section for Access, Front Spar Zones 12 thru 15
Figure 207 (sheet 11)

Pages 293/294
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair After Removal of Spar Section for Access, Front Spar Zones 12 thru 15
Figure 207 (sheet 12)

Page 295
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−18−2−001−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 210.

H. Repair After Removal of Spar Section for Access, Front Spar Zone 06

NOTE: The subsequent repair paragraphs tell you how to remove part of
the front spar for access to the spar box. They also tell you how
to repair that part of the spar after removal.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 210
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.
(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page
Block 201, Config. 1, Figure 214
− Glassfabric − Material No. Z−19.201, Epoxy
Prepreg Glassfabric, refer to
Chapter 51−33−00
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane Primer − Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Resin − Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 208)

Page 296
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(a) Remove the fasteners from around the section of spar to be re

moved.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Cut out the complete stiffener to be removed.

(c) With abrasive cloth, make the cut out area of the spar, smooth
and level with the adjacent structure. Initially use 280 grade
and finish off with 400 grade. Make the area rough where the re

pair doubler is to be installed.

(d) Get the correct pre−cured material necessary to make the repair
stiffener (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1,
paragraph 9).
(e) Make the repair stiffener to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(f) On the repair doubler, mark the position of the access hole to
the same dimensions as the original hole in the spar.

(g) Cut the access hole in the repair doubler to the correctly
marked dimensions.

(h) Put the repair doubler in its repair position. At the corners of
the repair doubler, mark the locations of the existing fastener
holes.
(i) Remove the repair doubler from the structure.

(j) Pilot−drill the holes marked on the repair doubler.

(k) Put the repair doubler in its repair position. Attach it to the
structure with screw pins thru the previously drilled corner
holes.
(l) Mark the locations of the rest of the existing fastener holes on
the repair doubler.

(m) Pilot−drill thru the repair doubler at the marked hole locations.

(n) Drill all the holes in the repair area to the necessary diameter
for the fasteners.

(o) Remove the repair doubler from the repair area.

(p) Remove the sharp edges from the holes in the repair doubler and
the repair area with an abrasive cone. Remove the waste material
from the repair area.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(q) Clean the repair doubler and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (material No. 11−003).

Page 297
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(r) Put the repair doubler in its correct position and attach it to
the repair area with screw pins.
WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(s) Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the repair area
with the sealant (material No. 09−005).

(t) Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners in the
screw pin holes.
(u) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (material No. 11−003).

(v) Tell the inspection department to do an inspection at 6000 flight

hours (FH).
(3) Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 208)

(a) Do the steps 5.H.(2)(a) thru 5.H.(2)(c) of the repair procedure

5.H.(2).

(b) Get the equivalent metal material for the repair doubler. The
subsequent steps will help you to do this:
1 Refer to the repair zone data (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page
Block 101, Config. 1, Figure 110) and find the repair zone
number for the damaged area.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (refer to Chapter

55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1, Figure 214) and find the
metal material to use in place of the pre−cured doubler.

(c) Make the repair doubler to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(d) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair doubler
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, material
No. 16−006).

(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy prepreg

glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (material No.
08−001C) to the repair area. Refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page
Block 201, Config. 1, paragraph 10 and Figure 206 (sheet 2).

(f) On layer of glassfabric, mark the position of the access hole to

the same dimensions as the original hole in the spar.

(g) Cut the access hole in the layer of glassfabric to the same di

mensions as the original hole in the spar.

(h) Do the steps 5.H.(2)(f) thru 5.H.(2)(u) of the repair procedure

5.H.(2).

Page 298
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(i) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101, Config.
1, Figure 126) to find out the time limit applicable to the tem

porary repair. Tell the inspection department what the permissi

ble number of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent repair is
necessary.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 208)

(a) Remove the temporary repair doubler and glassfabric from the
spar.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured material necessary to make the repair
doubler (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1,
paragraph 9).
(c) Make the repair doubler to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(d) Use the temporary repair doubler to get the correct location for
the access and fastener holes in the permanent repair doubler.
Mark the positions of the holes.
(e) Cut the access hole to the correctly marked dimensions on the
permanent repair doubler.

(f) Pilot−drill the correctly marked fastener holes in the permanent

repair doubler.
(g) Put the permanent repair doubler in its correct position and at

tach it to the repair area with screw pins.

(h) Drill all fastener holes on size oversize to that for the tempo

rary repair.
(i) Do the steps 5.H.(2)(q) thru 5.H.(2)(v) of the repair procedure
5.H.(2).

Page 299
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair After Removal of Spar Section for Access, Front Spar Zone 06
Figure 208 (sheet 1)

Page 300
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair After Removal of Spar Section for Access, Front Spar Zones 06
Figure 208 (sheet 2)

Page 301
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−18−2−001−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 211.

I. Repair of Front and Rear Spar Stiffeners, Zones 01−32, 34−48

NOTE: Before you repair the damage structure, you must do a damage eval
uation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 211
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 201, Config. 1, Figure 213
− Glassfabric − Material No. Z−19.201, Epoxy
Prepreg Glassfabric, refer to
Chapter 51−33−00
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane Primer − Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Resin − Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 209)

Page 302
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(a) Remove the fasteners from the stiffener to be removed.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Cut out the complete stiffener to be removed.

(c) With abrasive cloth, make the stiffener repair area smooth and
level with the adjacent surface. Initially use 280 grade and
finish off with 400 grade.
(d) Get the correct pre−cured material necessary to make the repair
stiffener (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1,
paragraph 9).

(e) Make the repair stiffener to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.
(f) Put the repair stiffener in its repair position. At the corners
of the repair stiffener, mark the locations of the existing fas
tener holes.

(g) Remove the repair stiffener from the spar structure.

(h) Pilot−drill the holes marked on the repair stiffener.

(i) Put the repair stiffener in its repair position. Attach it to

the spar structure with screw pins thru the previously drilled
corner holes.

(j) Where applicable, mark the locations of the remaining existing

fastener holes on the repair stiffener.

(k) Mark the locations of the new fastener holes on the repair
stiffener.

(l) Pilot−drill thru the repair stiffener at all the marked hole
locations.

(m) Drill all the holes in the repair stiffener to the necessary di
ameter for the fastener.

(n) Remove the repair stiffener from the spar structure.

(o) Remove the sharp edges from the holes in the repair stiffener
and the repair area with an abrasive cone. Remove the waste ma
terial from the repair area.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(p) Clean the repair stiffener and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (material No. 11−003).

(q) Put the repair stiffener in its correct position and attach it
to the spar structure with screw pins.

Page 303
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(r) Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the repair stiff
ener with the sealant (material No. 09−005).
(s) Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners in the
screw pin holes.

(t) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (material No. 11−003).

(u) Tell the inspection department to do an inspection at 6000 flight

hours (FH).

(3) Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 209)

(a) Do the steps 5.I.(2)(a) three 5.I.(2)(c) of the repair procedure

5.I.(2).
(b) Get the equivalent metal material for the repair stiffener. The
subsequent steps will help you to do this:

1 Refer to the repair zone data (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 101, Config. 1, Figure 111) and find the repair zone
number for the damaged area.
2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (refer to Chapter
55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1, Figure 213) and find and
metal material to use in place of pre−cured sections.

(c) Make the repair stiffener to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair locations.

(d) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair stiffen
er (chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, material
No. 16−006).

(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (material Z−19.201, Epoxy prepreg

glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (material No.
08−001C) to the repair area. The glassfabric layer must extended
around the repair stiffener by 20 mm (0.79 in). Let the resin
cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11 for cure time).

(f) Do the steps 5.I.(2)(f) thru 5.I.(2)(t) of the repair procedure

5.I.(2).

(g) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101, Config.
1, Figure 126) to find out the time limit applicable to the tem
porary repair. Tell the inspection department what the permissi
ble number of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent repair is
necessary.

(4) Permanent Repair after temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 209)

(a) Remove the temporary repair stiffener and glassfabric from the
spar.

Page 304
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Get the correct pre−cured material necessary to make the repair
stiffener (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1,
paragraph 9).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Make the repair stiffener to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair locations.

(d) Use the temporary repair stiffener to get the correct locations
for the fastener holes in the permanent repair stiffener. Mark
the positions of the holes.

(e) Pilot−drill the correctly marked fastener holes in the permanent

repair stiffener.
(f) Put the permanent repair stiffener in its correct position and
attach it to the spar structure with screw pins.

(g) Drill all fastener holes one size oversize to that of the holes
used for the temporary repair.

(h) Do the steps 5.I.(2)(n) thru 5.I.(2)(u) of the repair procedure

5.I.(2).

Page 305
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Stiffeners, Zones 01−27, 29, 34−48

Figure 209 (sheet 1)

Page 306
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Stiffeners, Zones 01−27, 29, 34−48

Figure 209 (sheet 2)

Page 307
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Stiffeners, Zones 28, 30, 31, 32

Figure 209 (sheet 3)

Page 308
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Stiffeners, Zones 28, 30, 31, 32

Figure 209 (sheet 4)

Page 309
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−18−2−001−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 212.

J. Repair of Rear Spar Stiffener, Zone 33

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−11−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 212
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 201, Config. 1, Figure 213
− Glassfabric − Material No. Z−19.201, Epoxy
Prepreg Glassfabric, refer to
Chapter 51−33−00
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane Primer − Material No. 16−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Resin − Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 210)

Page 310
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(a) Remove the fasteners from the angle fitting adjacent to the
stiffener.
(b) Remove the angle fitting and glassfabric protection from the spar
structure. Keep the angle fitting in a safe place.

(c) Remove the fasteners from the stiffener.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Cut out the complete stiffener.

(e) With abrasive cloth, make the stiffener repair area smooth and
level with the adjacent surface. Initially use 280 grade and
finish off with 400 grade.

(f) Get the correct pre−cured material necessary to make the repair
stiffener (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1,
paragraph 9).

(g) Make the repair stiffener to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.
(h) Put the repair stiffener in its repair position. At the corners
of the repair stiffener, mark the location of the existing fas

tener holes.

(i) Remove the repair stiffener from the spar structure.

(j) Pilot−drill the holes marked on the repair stiffener.

(k) Put the repair stiffener in its repair position. Attach it to
the spar structure with screw pins thru the previously drilled
corner holes.

(l) Mark the locations of the remaining existing fastener holes on

the repair stiffener.

(m) Mark the locations of the new fastener holes on the repair
stiffener.

(n) Pilot−drill thru the repair stiffener at all the marked hole
locations.
(o) Drill all the holes in the repair stiffener to the necessary di

ameter for the fastener.

(p) Put the angle fitting in its correctly installed position on the
spar structure.
(q) Draw a line on the angle fitting to show you where to cut it to
give a clearance of 1 mm (0.04 in) from the repair stiffener.

(r) Remove the angle fitting from the spar structure.

Page 311
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(s) Cut the angle fitting to the correctly marked line.

(t) Radius the corners of the angle fitting where it was cut.
(u) Where the angle fitting was cut, apply the correct metal surface
treatments (chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer,
material No. 16−006).

(v) Put the angle fitting in its correctly installed position and
attach it to the spar structure with screw pins.
(w) Drill all fastener holes in the angle fitting one size oversize
to that of the existing fastener holes.

(x) Remove the angle fitting and the repair stiffener from the spar
structure.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(y) Remove the sharp edges from the holes in the repair stiffener,
the repair area and the angle fitting with an abrasive cone. Re

move the waste material from the repair area.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(z) Clean the repair stiffener, the repair area and the angle fitting
with the cleaning agent (material No. 11−003).

(aa)Put the repair stiffener in its correct position and attach it

to the spar structure with screw pins.
WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(ab)Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the repair stiff

ener with the sealant (material No. 09−005).

(ac)Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners in the
screw pin holes.

(ad)Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy prepreg

glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (material No.
08−001C) to the angle fitting installation area. The glassfabric
must be extended around the metal angle fitting by 20 mm (0.079
in). Let the resin cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11 for cure
time).

(ae)Drill thru the glassfabric at the fastener hole locations on the

angle fitting installation area.

(af)Remove the waste material from the area.

(ag)Put the angle fitting in its correctly installed position and
attach it to the spar structure with screw pins.

Page 312
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ah)Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the angle fitting

with the sealant (material No. 09−005).
(ai)Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners in the
screw pin holes.

(aj)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (material No. 11−003).

(ak)Tell the inspection department to do an inspection at 6000 flight

hours (FH).

(3) Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 210)

(a) Do the steps 5.J.(2)(a) thru 5.J.(2)(e) of the repair procedure

5.J.(2).
(b) Get the equivalent metal material for the repair stiffeners. The
subsequent steps will help you to do this:

1 Refer to the repair zone data (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 101, Config. 1, Figure 111) and find the repair zone
number for the damaged area.
2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (refer to Chapter
55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1, Figure 213) and find the
metal material to use in place of pre−cured sections.

(c) Make the repair stiffener to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(d) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair stiffen

er (chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, material
No. 16−006).

(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy prepreg

glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (material No.
08−001C) to the repair area and the angle fitting area (refer to
detail A of Figure 210). The glassfabric layer must extend
around the repair stiffener and the angle fitting by 20 mm (0.79
in). Let the resin cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11 for cure
time).

(f) Do the steps 5.J.(2)(g) thru 5.J.(2)(ac) and 5.J.(2)(ag) thru

5.J.(2)(aj) of the repair procedure 5.J.(2).

(g) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101, Config.
1, Figure 126) to find out the time limit applicable to the tem

porary repair. Tell the inspection department what the permissi

ble number of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent repair is
necessary.

(4) Permanent Repair After Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 210)

Page 313
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(a) Remove the temporary repair stiffener, angle fitting and glass

fabric from the spar.
(b) Get the correct pre−cured material necessary to make the repair
stiffener (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1,
paragraph 9).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Make the repair stiffener to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(d) Use the temporary repair stiffener to get the correct locations
for the fastener holes in the permanent repair stiffener. Mark
the positions of the holes.
(e) Pilot−drill the correctly marked fastener holes in the permanent
repair stiffener.

(f) Put the permanent repair stiffener in its correct position and
attach it to the spar structure with screw pins.

(g) Drill all fastener holes in the repair stiffener one size over

size to that of the holes used for the temporary repair.

(h) Do the steps 5.J.(2)(w) thru 5.J.(2)(ak) of the repair procedure

5.J.(2).

Page 314
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Stiffener, Zone 33

Figure 210 (sheet 1)

Page 315
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Stiffener, Zone 33

Figure 210 (sheet 2)

Page 316
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−18−2−001−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 213.

K. Delamination Repair for Front and Rear Spars, All Zones

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 213
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to

Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions (Refer to Figure 211)

(a) Make some marks to show the locations of the new holes necessary
to repair the delaminated area.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Drill the correct diameter holes at the necessary locations in

the repair area. Start at the outer hole locations and then work
to the inner hole locations. After you drill each hole, put a
screw pin into it to clamp the delaminated layers together. This
will help to stop any more delamination damage.

Page 317
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(c) Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the repair area.
Keep each screw pin in position until you are ready to install
the fastener.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (material No.
11−003).

(e) Tell the Inspection Department to do an inspection at 6000 flight

hours (FH).

Page 318
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Typical Delamination Repairs for Front and Rear Spars, All Zones.
Figure 211

Page 319
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−18−2−001−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 214.

L. Repair of Crack thru Fasteners, Front and Rear Spar Web Zones 01−05

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 214
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 201, Config. 1, Figure 215
− Glassfabric − Material No. Z−19.201, Epoxy
Prepreg Glassfabric, refer to
Chapter 51−33−00
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Resin − Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 212)

(a) Remove the fasteners from the repair area.

Page 320
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Drill a hole of 4 mm (0.16 in) at the end of the crack (refer
to Chapter 51−73−00, for data on crack−stop drilling).

(c) With abrasive cloth, make the crack smooth along its total
length.

(d) Get the correct pre−cured material necessary to make the repair
doubler (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1,
paragraph 9).

(e) Make the repair doubler to the correct shape and dimensions fro
the repair location.

(f) Put the repair doubler in its repair position. At the top corner
of the repair doubler, mark the locations of the existing fas

tener holes.

(g) Remove the repair doubler from the structure.

(h) Pilot−drill the holes marked on the repair doubler.

(i) Put the repair doubler in its repair position. Attach it to the
structure with screw pins thru the previously drilled corner
holes.

(j) Mark the locations of the rest of the existing fasteners holes
on the repair doubler.
NOTE: Do not drill holes in the repair doubler where it is indi

cated that existing fastener holes are not to be used.

(k) Pilot−drill thru the repair doubler at the marked hole locations.

(l) Mark the locations of the new fastener holes on the repair dou

bler and pilot−drill thru the doubler and the structure.
(m) Drill all holes in the repair doubler and spar structure to the
necessary diameter for the fasteners.

(n) Remove the repair doubler from the structure.

(o) Remove the sharp edges from the holes in the repair doubler and
the repair area with an abrasive cone.

(p) Remove the waste material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(q) Clean the repair doubler and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (material No. 11−003).

Page 321
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(r) Put the repair doubler in its correct position and attach it to
the repair area with screw pins.
WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(s) Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the repair area
with the sealant (material No. 09−005).

(t) Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners in the
screw pins holes.
(u) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (material No. 11−003).

(v) Tell the inspection department to do an inspection at 6000 flight

hours (FH).
(3) Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 212)

(a) Do the steps 5.L.(2)(a) thru 5.L.(2)(c) of the repair procedure

5.L.(2).

(b) Get the equivalent metal material for the repair doubler. The
subsequent steps will help you to do this:
1 Refer to the repair zone data (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page
Block 101, Config. 1, Figure 112) and find the repair zone
number for the damaged area.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (refer to Chapter

55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1, Figure 215) and find the
metal material to use in place of the pre−cured doubler.

(c) Make the repair doubler to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(d) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair doubler
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, material
No. 16−006).

(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy prepreg

glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (material No.
08−001C) to the repair area. The glassfabric layer must extend
around the repair doubler by 20 mm (0.79 in). Let the resin cure
(refer to Chapter 51−77−11 for cure time).

(f) Do the steps 5.L.(2)(f) thru 5.L.(2)(u) of the repair procedure

5.L.(2).
(g) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101, Config.
1, Figure 126) to find out the time limit applicable to the tem

porary repair. Tell the inspection department what the permissi

ble number of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent repair is
necessary.

Page 322
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 212)

(a) Remove the temporary repair doubler and glassfabric from the
spar.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured material necessary to make the repair
doubler (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1,
paragraph 9).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Make the repair doubler to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(d) Use the temporary repair doubler to get the correct locations for
the fastener holes in the permanent repair doubler. Mark the
position of the holes.

(e) Pilot−drill the correctly marked holes in the permanent repair

doubler.

(f) Put the permanent repair doubler in its correct position and at

tach it to the spar structure with screw pins.
(g) Drill all fastener holes one size oversize to that of the holes
used for the temporary repair.

(h) Do the steps 5.L.(2)(n) thru 5.L.(2)(v) of the repair procedure

5.L.(2).

Pages 323/324
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Crack thru Fasteners, Front and Rear Spar Web Zones 01−05
Figure 212 (sheet 1)

Pages 325/326
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Crack thru Fasteners, Front and Rear Spar Web Zones 01−05
Figure 212 (sheet 2)

Page 327
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−18−2−001−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 215.

M. Repair of Crack thru Fasteners and Stiffener, Front and Rear Spar Web
Zones 01−05

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 215
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.
(1) Repair Materials.

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Pre−cured CFRP Materials − Refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page
Block 201, Config. 1, Figures
213−215
− Glassfabric − Material No. Z−19.201, Epoxy
Prepreg Glassfabric, refer to
Chapter 51−33−00
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Resin − Material No. 08−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 213)

Page 328
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(a) Remove the fasteners from the repair area.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Drill a hole of 4 mm (0.16 in) at the end of the crack (refer
to Chapter 51−73−00 for data on crack−stop drilling).

(c) Cut out the complete stiffener to be removed.

(d) With abrasive cloth, make the stiffener repair area smooth and
level with the adjacent surface. Initially use 280 grade and
finish off with 400 grade. Make the crack smooth along its total
length.

(e) Get the correct pre−cured material necessary to make the repair
pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1,
paragraph 9).

(f) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(g) Put the repair doubler in its repair position. At the top cor
ners of the repair doubler, mark the locations of the existing
fastener holes.

(h) Remove the repair doubler from the structure.

(i) Pilot−drill the holes marked on the repair doubler.

(j) Put the repair doubler in its repair position. Attach it to the
structure with screw pins thru the previously drilled corner
holes.

(k) Mark the locations of the rest of the existing fastener holes on
the repair doubler.
NOTE: Do not drill holes in the repair doubler where it is indi
cated that existing fastener holes are not to be used.

(l) Pilot−drill thru the repair doubler at the marked hole locations.

(m) Mark the locations of the new fastener holes on the repair dou
bler and pilot−drill thru the doubler and the structure.
(n) Put the repair stiffener in its repair position. At the top and
bottom of the repair stiffener, mark the location of the existing
fastener holes.

(o) Remove the repair stiffener from the repair area.

(p) Pilot−drill the holes marked on the repair stiffener.

(q) Put the repair filler and the repair stiffener in their correct
repair position. Make sure that a gap of 1 mm (0.04 in) exists
between the repair filler and the repair doubler.

Page 329
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(r) Attach the repair stiffener to the structure with screw pins thru
the previously drilled holes.
NOTE: Make sure that the repair filler remains in its correct re

pair position.

(s) Mark the locations of the new fastener holes on the repair
stiffener.

(t) Pilot−drill thru the repair stiffener, doubler, filler and struc

ture at the marked hole locations.

(u) Secure the repair filler and stiffener to the structure with
screw pins.

(v) Drill all the holes in the repair area to the necessary diameter
for the fasteners.

(w) Remove the repair pieces from the repair area.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(x) Remove the sharp edges from the holes in the repair pieces and
the repair area with an abrasive cone. Remove the waste material
from the repair area.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(y) Clean the repair pieces and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (material No. 11−003).
(z) Put the repair pieces in their correct position and attach them
to the repair area with screw pins.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(aa)Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the repair area

with the sealant (material No. 09−005).
(ab)Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners in the
screw pins holes.

(ac)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (material No. 11−003).
(ad)Tell the inspection department to do an inspection at 6000 flight
hours (FH).

(3) Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 213)

(a) Do the steps 5.M.(2)(a) thru 5.M.(2)(d) of the repair procedure

5.M.(2).

(b) Get the equivalent metal materials for the repair pieces. The
subsequent steps will help you to do this:

Page 330
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

1 Refer to the repair zone data (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page

Block 101, Config. 1, Figures 111 and 112) and find the repair
zone number for the damaged area.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (refer to Chapter

55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1, Figures 213 and 215) and
find the metal materials to use in place of the pre−cured dou

bler, packer and stiffener.
(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(d) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair pieces
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer, material
No. 16−006).
(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.201, Epoxy prepreg
glassfabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) and resin (material No.
08−001C) to the repair area. The glassfabric must be applied be

tween any repair piece or structure of dissimilar material and
extend around the repair piece by 20 mm (0.79 in).
(f) Do the steps 5.M.(2)(g) thru 5.M.(2)(ac) of the repair procedure
5.M.(2).

(g) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 101, Config.
1, Figure 126) to find out the time limit applicable to the tem

porary repair. Tell the inspection department what the permissi

ble number of flight hours (FH) is before a permanent repair is
necessary.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 213)

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces and glassfabric from the spar.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured material necessary to make the repair
pieces (refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block 201, Config. 1,
paragraph 9).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(d) Use the temporary repair pieces to get the correct locations for
the fastener holes in the permanent repair pieces. Mark the
positions of the holes.

(e) Pilot−drill the correctly marked fastener holes in the permanent

repair pieces.

(f) Put the permanent repair pieces in their correct repair position
and attach them to the spar structure with screw pins.

Page 331
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(g) Drill all fastener holes one size oversize to that of the holes
used for the temporary repair.
(h) Do the steps 5.M.(2)(w) thru 5.M.(2)(ad) of the repair procedure
5.M.(2).

Page 332
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Crack thru Fasteners and Stiffener, Front and Rear Spar Web Zones
01−05
Figure 213 (sheet 1)
Pages 333/334
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Crack thru Fasteners and Stiffener, Front and Rear Spar Web Zones
01−05
Figure 213 (sheet 2)
Pages 335/336
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−11−18−2−003−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATIONS 30971G0382 AND

21018G0051.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 216.

N. Repair after Removal of Spar Section for Access

NOTE: This repair procedure describes how to remove a section of the THS
Front Spar for access to the THS Spar Box, and how to reinstall
it. A repair splice installation is explained, the other is simi
lar.

NOTE: This repair procedure is valid as shown in Table 216.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 216
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 337
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 CFRP Splice − Refer to Figure 214

− CFRP Shim − Refer to Figure 214
− Glass Fiber − Material No. 05−107, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Liquid Shim − Material No. 08−078, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Interfay Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Laminating Resin − Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para
graph 6.B.(2).
(2) Repair Instructions, refer to Figure 214

(a) Check if any aircraft system and/or Leading Edge Rib is installed
at the area to be repaired. In that case remove relevant system/
rib. When repair is finished reinstall system/rib assuring inter
changeability condition of Leading Edge.

CAUTION: REMOVE ONLY ONE SPAR SECTION WITH A MAXIMUM LENGTH OF 1350
MM (53.15 IN).

(b) Mark on the Front Spar the section to be removed. Refer to Chap
ter 55−11−00, Page Block 101, Config. 1, Figure 111 to determine
the correct area where the spar cut−out is permitted.

(c) Remove the fasteners from around the section of THS Spar to be
removed to make easier the repair process.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP IS DANGEROUS.

CAUTION: TAKE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE THE UPPER AND LOWER SKIN FLANGES
WHEN CUTTING THE SPAR SECTION. IN ORDER TO AVOID THAT,
INSTALL STEEL PLATE BETWEEN THE SPAR AND THE SKIN FLANGE.
REMOVE ADDITIONAL FASTENER ROWS IF NECESSARY.

(d) Cut−out the section of THS Spar to be removed, refer to Chapter

51−27−21.

(e) With abrasive cloth, make the cut out area of the THS Spar
smooth and level with the adjacent structure. Initially use 280
grade and finish off with 400 grade. Make the area rough where
the CFRP Splice is to be installed.
(f) Seal the edges of the THS Spar cut−out with Laminating Resin,
refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 6.B.(2).

Page 338
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(g) Get the correct material to make the CFRP Splice, refer to Fig
ure 214 for material information.
(h) Make the CFRP Splice to the correct shape and dimensions for the
repair location.

NOTE: Two rows of fastener in both sides of the cut−out must be

installed. Use a template to transfer existing THS Spar
holes.
NOTE: If necessary, chamfer the edges of the CFRP Splice in order
to avoid any interference with the THS Front Spar.

(i) Seal the edges of the CFRP Splice with Laminating Resin, refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 6.B.(2).
(j) Put the removed THS Spar section in its correct position and se
cure with screw pins.

(k) Install a ply of Glass Fiber (Material No 05−107) between the

CFRP Splice and THS Spar to prevent delamination and fiber damage
when drilling.
(l) Put the CFRP Splice on its correct position on the joint between
THS Spar and THS Spar section and check the contact between sur
faces for gaps.

Different materials can be used to fill the gap depending on the

repair thickness:
− For depths less than 0.5 mm (0.019 in) Liquid Shim (Material
No. 08−078) can be used.
− For depths greater than 0.5 mm (0.019 in) CFRP Shim must be
used, bonded to existing structure with Liquid Shim (Material
No. 08−078). Apply Interfay Sealant (Material No. 09−005) be
tween CFRP Splice and set THS Spar plus CFRP Shim.
(m) Mark on the CFRP Splice the position of the existing fastener
holes over the skin flanges.

(n) Mark on the CFRP Splice the rest of the fastener holes.

(o) Pilot drill all the previously marked hole positions on the CFRP
Splice, refer to Chapter 51−44−21.
(p) Put the CFRP Splice on its correct position on the joint and se
cure with screw pins.

(q) Transfer drill the CFRP Splice holes to the THS Front Spar (ex
isting and removed section).

Page 339
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(r) Drill all the fastener holes to the correct diameter, refer to
Chapter 51−44−21.
NOTE: Oversize reused holes if necessary, refer to Chapter
51−43−21.

(s) Remove the CFRP Splice and THS Spar section.

(t) Clean the CFRP Splice and THS Spar section with Cleaning Agent
(Material No. 11−003).
(u) Apply Interfay Sealant (Material No. 09−005) to all the mating
surfaces of the CFRP Splice and THS Spar section, refer to Chap
ter 51−76−00.

(v) Before reinstall THS Spar Section do an ultrasonic inspection ac

cording to NTM, Chapter 51−41−00, to assure damage free condi
tion. If damage is found refer to Chapter 55−11−00, Page Block
101, Config. 1.

(w) Put the CFRP Splice and THS Spar section in their correct posi
tion and attach them to the repair area with screw pins.
(x) Wet install the correct fasteners with Interfay Sealant (Material
No. 09−005), refer to Chapter 51−42−21.

NOTE: Fastener grip length to be determined on assembly.

(y) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with Cleaning
Agent (Material No. 11−003).

(z) Let the sealant cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for

curing data.

(aa)Restore the surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 340
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair after Removal of Spar Section for Access

Figure 214 (sheet 1)

Pages 341/342
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair after Removal of Spar Section for Access

Figure 214 (sheet 2)

Pages 343/344
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPARS − HORIZONTAL STABILIZER SPAR BOX

1. General

NOTE: CONFIG−2 is applicable after modification 24422G00237 only. For

effectivity refer to the Modification/Service Bulletin List given in
Chapter 55−10−00 Page Block 001.

For specific repair information applicable to the Horizontal Stabilizer

Spars, Config. 2, refer to Chapter 55−11−18, Page Block 201, Config. 1.

Pages 201/202
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/09
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPARS − HORIZONTAL STABILIZER SPAR BOX

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

1. General
NOTE: CONFIG−3 is applicable after modification 30971G0382 only. For effec
tivity refer to the Modification/Service Bulletin List given in Chap
ter 55−10−00 Page Block 001.

NOTE: For Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14

− CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

This topic contains all of the specific repair procedures for the Horizon
tal Stabilizer Front Spar. The repair zones and allowable damage data for
these repair procedures are in Chapter 55−11−18, Page Block 101, Config. 3.

2. Safety Precautions
There are risks to you and other persons when you work with composite re
pair materials. To prevent risks, read and obey the warnings given below.

WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.
WARNING: WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND FILTER MASK WHEN YOU CUT,
ABRADE OR DRILL COMPOSITE MATERIALS. THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MA
TERIALS CAN GET INTO YOUR LUNGS OR ONTO YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE YOU
INJURY. IMMEDIATELY REMOVE DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.

WHEN YOU WORK WITH CFRP COMPOSITE MATERIALS, IMMEDIATELY REMOVE
DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRIC POWER ON
THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST ONLY USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT REPAIR.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER TO PARA

GRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER REMARKS

No General Repairs applicable. − −

Table 201

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−3
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

4. Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs

SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE REPAIR INSPECTION

CATEGORY INSTRUCTION REF
ERENCE
Repair after Removal of 5.A. 201 B 55−11−18−2−002−00
Front Spar Section for
Access, Zones A and B

Table 202
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

5. Front Spar Repairs

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−11−18−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 203.

A. Repair after Removal of Spar Section for Access, Zones A and B.

NOTE: This repair procedure describes how to remove a section of the

Front Spar for access to the Spar Box, and how to reinstall it. A
repair splice installation is explained, the other is similar. This
procedure is valid as shown in Table 203.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 203
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information Table in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−3
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Pre−cured CFRP splice 1 Refer to Figure 201.

− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Laminate Resin − Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para
graph 6.B.(2)
(2) Repair Instructions, refer to Figure 201.

(a) Mark on the Front Spar the section to be removed. Refer to Chap
ter 55−11−18, Page Block 101, Config. 3 to determine the correct
area where the spar cut−out is permitted.
(b) Remove the fasteners from around the section of spar to be re
moved.

CAUTION: TAKE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE THE UPPER AND LOWER SKIN FLANGES
WHEN CUTTING THE SPAR SECTION. IN ORDER TO AVOID THAT,
INSTALL STEEL PLATE BETWEEN THE SPAR AND THE SKIN FLANGE.
(c) Cut−out the section of spar to be removed, refer to Chapter
51−27−00, paragraph 5.

(d) With an abrasive cloth, make the cut out area of the Spar smooth
and level with the adjacent structure. Initially use 280 grade
and finish off with 400 grade. Make the area rough where the re
pair splice is to be installed.

(e) Seal the edges of the Spar cut−out with laminating resin, refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 6.B.(2).

(f) Get the correct CFRP pre−cured sheet material necessary to make
the repair splice. Refer to Chapter 55−11−18, Page Block 101,
Config. 3 to determine the repair zone and Chapter 55−11−00, Page
Block 201, Config. 3, Figure 202 for material details of the ap
plicable pre−cured sheet material.

(g) Make the repair slice to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

NOTE: Two rows of fastener in both sides of the cut−out must be

installed.

NOTE: If necessary, chamfer the edges of the repair splice in or

der to avoid any interference with the Front Spar.
(h) Seal the edges of the repair splice with laminating resin, refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 6.B.(2).

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−3
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(i) Put the removed spar section in its correct position and secure
with screw pins.
(j) Put the repair splice on its correct position on the joint be
tween Spar and Spar section.

(k) Mark on the repair splice the position of the existing fastener
holes over the skin flanges.

(l) Mark on the repair splice the rest of the fastener holes.
(m) Pilot drill all the previously marked hole positions on the re
pair splice, refer to Chapter 51−44−21.

(n) Put the repair splice on its correct position on the joint and
secure with screw pins.
(o) Transfer drill the repair splice holes to the Front Spar (exist
ing and removed section).

(p) Drill all the fastener positions to the final diameter for the
fasteners.
NOTE: If necessary, drill to the oversize diameter for the reused
holes in the upper and lower skin flanges, refer to Chapter
51−43−21.

(q) Remove the repair splice and Spar section.

(r) Clean the repair splice and Spar section with the cleaning agent
(Material No.11−003).

(s) Apply the sealant to the surfaces of the repair splice and Spar
section that will touch when assembled (Material No. 09−005), re
fer to Chapter 51−76−00.
(t) Put the repair splice and Spar section in their correct position
and attach them to the repair area with screw pins.

(u) Wet install the correct fasteners in the holes in the repair
area, refer to Chapter 51−42−21, with the sealant (Material No.
09−005).
NOTE: Fastener grip length to be determined on assembly.

(v) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

(w) Let the sealant. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for curing

data.
(x) Restore the surface finish. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−3
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair After Removal of Spar Section for Access, Zones A and B

Figure 201

Pages 205/206
Printed in Germany
55−11−18
CONFIG−3
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TRIMMABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER − LEADING EDGE

1. Structural Arrangement

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Structural Arrangement Figure 1

1 Skin Plates Chapter 55−12−11
2 Ribs Chapter 55−12−12
3 Protective Cover Chapter 55−12−11
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−10−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−12−00 AugPage 1
01/14
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structural Arrangement
Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55-12-00 FebPage 2
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

HORIZONTAL STABILIZER LEADING EDGE − ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 101.

1. General
NOTE: For definition of allowable damage refer to Chapter 51−11−11 .

NOTE: For Damage Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15 .

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14

− CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

This topic contains the allowable damage and related data applicable to the
Horizontal Stabilizer Leading Edge structure, and is valid as shown in
Table 101 . This data is necessary to find the correct repair procedure.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 101
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 "Weight Variant Information" in the INTRODUCTION
of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all weight
variants as well as related information concerning allowable damage
and repair applicability.

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−12−11, Page Block 101.
− Chapter 55−12−12, Page Block 101.

2. Damage Evaluation
NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−12−11, Page Block 101.
− Chapter 55−12−12, Page Block 101.

3. Type of Damage
NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−12−11, Page Block 101.
− Chapter 55−12−12, Page Block 101.

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−12−00 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

4. Distance Between Damage Areas and Distance Between Repair Areas

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−12−11, Page Block 101.
− Chapter 55−12−12, Page Block 101.

5. Repair Zones

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to Chapter 55−12−11,
Page Block 101.

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−12−00 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

6. Allowable Damage Description/Criteria

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION DIAGRAM INSTRUCTION REF

TYPE CATEGORY
ERENCE
Skin Plates Linear or 101 INAC
A −
Superficial TIVE
Damage.
This allow

able damage
data is
inactive
since revi

sion dated
Aug 01/12,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−12−11,
Page Block
101.
Skin Plates Delamina
102 INAC
A, C −
tion with TIVE
or without
Visible
Cracks and
Holes. This
allowable
damage data
is inactive
since revi

sion dated
Aug 01/12,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−12−11,
Page Block
101.

Table 102

Page 103
Printed in Germany
55−12−00 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION DIAGRAM INSTRUCTION REF

TYPE CATEGORY
ERENCE
Ribs Linear or 101 INAC
A −
Superficial TIVE
Damage.
This allow

able damage
data is
inactive
since revi

sion dated
Aug 01/12,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−12−12,
Page Block
101.
Ribs Delamina
102 INAC
A, C −
tion with TIVE
or without
Visible
Cracks and
Holes. This
allowable
damage data
is inactive
since revi

sion dated
Aug 01/12,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−12−12,
Page Block
101.

Table 102

Page 104
Printed in Germany
55−12−00 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION DIAGRAM INSTRUCTION REF

TYPE CATEGORY
ERENCE
Protective Cover Linear or 103 INAC
A, C −
Superficial TIVE
Damage.
This allow

able damage
data is
inactive
since revi

sion dated
Aug 01/12,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−12−11,
Page Block
101.
Protective Cover Delamina
INACTIVE − −
tion with
or without
Visible
Cracks and
Holes. This
allowable
damage data
is inactive
since revi

sion dated
Aug 01/12,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−12−11,
Page Block
101.

Table 102

Page 105
Printed in Germany
55−12−00 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION DIAGRAM INSTRUCTION REF

TYPE CATEGORY
ERENCE
Lex Linear or INACTIVE − −
Superficial
Damage.
This allow

able damage
data is
inactive
since revi

sion dated
Aug 01/12,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−12−11,
Page Block
101.
Lex Delamina
INACTIVE − −
tion with
or without
Visible
Cracks and
Holes. This
allowable
damage data
is inactive
since revi

sion dated
Aug 01/12,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−12−11,
Page Block
101.

Table 102
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14
.

7. Allowable Damage

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−12−11, Page Block 101.

Page 106
Printed in Germany
55−12−00 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

− Chapter 55−12−12, Page Block 101.

8. Repair Limits

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−12−11, Page Block 101.
− Chapter 55−12−12, Page Block 101.

Page 107
Printed in Germany
55−12−00 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Horizontal Stabilizer Leading Edge Structure

Figure 101

Page 108
Printed in Germany
55−12−00 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Distance Between Damaged Areas and Between Repair Areas

Figure 102

Page 109
Printed in Germany
55−12−00 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Horizontal Stabilizer Leading Edge Skin Plates − Repair Zones for CFRP Flush
Repairs
Figure 103 (sheet 1)
Page 110
Printed in Germany
55−12−00 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Horizontal Stabilizer Leading Edge Skin Plates − Repair Zones for Metallic
Patch Repairs
Figure 103 (sheet 2)
Page 111
Printed in Germany
55−12−00 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Plates and Ribs, Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for Linear or Su

perficial Damage. Horizontal Stabilizer Leading Edge. All Zones
Diagram 101
Page 112
Printed in Germany
55−12−00 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Plates and Ribs, Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for Delamination
Damage. Horizontal Stabilizer Leading Edge. All Zones
Diagram 102
Page 113
Printed in Germany
55−12−00 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Protective Cover, Allowable Damage and Repair Limits. Horizontal Stabilizer

Leading Edge
Diagram 103
Page 114
Printed in Germany
55−12−00 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

HORIZONTAL STABILIZER LEADING EDGE − REPAIR

1. General

NOTE: For Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15 .

This topic contains specific repair data applicable to the Horizontal Sta

bilizer Leading Edge structure (for general repair data applicable to com

posite structures refer to Chapter 51−77−00). The specific repair procedures
for the Horizontal Stabilizer Leading edge structure are in the subsequent
Chapters:
− Chapter 55−12−11 , Skin Plate Repairs
− Chapter 55−12−12 , Rib Repairs
2. Safety Precautions

WARNING: OBEY THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS WHEN YOU USE CLEANING AGENTS,
ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND PAINTS. THESE MATERIALS ARE DANGEROUS.

WARNING: WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND FILTER MASK WHEN YOU CUT,
ABRADE OR DRILL COMPOSITE MATERIALS. THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MA

TERIALS CAN GET INTO YOUR LUNGS OR ONTO YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE YOU
INJURY. IMMEDIATELY REMOVE DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.

WHEN YOUR WORK WITH CFRP COMPOSITE MATERIAL, IMMEDIATELY REMOVE
DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.
WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRIC POWER ON
THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST ONLY USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIRS CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE REFER

TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN IN THE
INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER REMARKS

No General Repairs applicable. − −

Table 201

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−12−00 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

4. Damage Evaluation

Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−10 , paragraph 3 for data.

5. Types of Repairs

A. Permanent Repairs

There are three types of permanent repairs for the Horizontal Stabilizer
Leading edge. These are as follows:

(1) Hot Cured and Bonded Repairs

NOTE: You must make all the laminate repairs contained in this topic
under vacuum conditions (a minimum of 0,8 bar (11.6 psi) is
required), refer to Chapter 51−77−11 .
To make a repair you must use the 120° C (248 °F) hot bond laminate
repair procedure. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11 for general data about
laminate repair procedure.

(2) Pre−cured Repairs

To make a pre−cured type repair you must make the repair pieces from
pre−cured composite materials. These repairs are then attached to the
aircraft structure with fasteners. For a pre−cured type repair the
general adhesive is used only as a shim. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11
for general data about pre−cured repair procedures.

(3) Metallic Repairs

To make a metallic type repair the contents of paragraph (2) above
are valid, except that metal is used instead of pre−cured parts.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is used as a shim material to a maximum

thickness of 0.5 mm (0.020 in).

6. Special Tools
To work with composite materials, it is necessary to use special tools.
Here are some examples:
− Explosion−proof tools are necessary if you cause CFRP dust.
− Tools to cut or drill pre−cured CFRP materials must have very hard cut

ting edges (for example cutting wheels with diamond edges and twist−drills
made from high speed steel).
− Tools to drill composite materials must have specially shaped cutting
edges.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−11 , to find data about all of the tools and equip

ment necessary to make composite repairs.

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−12−00 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

7. Repair Materials

A. General
All the necessary materials to make a repair are shown in the repair
materials list, refer to each specific repair subjects.

B. Pre−cured CFRP Materials

Some of the specific repairs to the Horizontal Stabilizer Leading Edge

have a numbered reference to pre−cured section or sheet materials. Airbus
Material Center (AMC) can supply these materials. Before you use pre−
cured CFRP materials supplied by AMC, you must make a visual inspection
of them. Before you use pre−cured CFRP material not supplied by AMC, you
must make a Non−Destructive Test (NDT) inspection of them.
NOTE: If you make the pre−cured CFRP materials yourself, make sure that
the pre−impregnated layers are in their correct lay−up sequence.

Printed in Germany
55−12−00 PagesAug203/204
01/12
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured Repair Materials

Figure 201 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−12−00 PagesAug205/206
01/12
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured Repair Materials

Figure 201 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−12−00 PagesAug207/208
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

8. Repair Environment

Before you make a permanent repair, make sure that you have the correct
environmental conditions (for example when the aircraft is in a warm and
dry aircraft hangar). It is important that the repair environment is clean
and has a stable room temperature during the repair procedure.

Printed in Germany
55−12−00 PagesAug209/210
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SKIN PLATES

1. Identification Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Skin Plates Figure 1

1 Skin Plate − Lex Figure 2
5 Skin Plate − Inboard Leading Edge Figure 3
10 Skin Plate − Outboard Leading Edge Figure 4
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−10−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 NovPage 1
01/14
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Plates
Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55-12-11 MayPage 2
01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Plate - Lex

Figure 2 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-12-11 MayPage 3
01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Plate - Lex

Figure 2 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-12-11 MayPage 4
01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Plate - Lex

Figure 2 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55-12-11 MayPage 5
01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Plate - Lex

Figure 2 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55-12-11 MayPage 6
01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Plate - Lex

Figure 2 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55-12-11 MayPage 7
01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Plate - Lex

Figure 2 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55-12-11 MayPage 8
01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Plate - Lex

Figure 2 (sheet 7)

Printed in Germany
55-12-11 MayPage 9
01/03
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Skin Plate, Lex D55183115000

Assy 001
1A Skin Plate, Lex D55183116000 A20737G0041
Assy 001
1B Skin Plate, Lex D55183116002 A21295G0066
Assy 003
1C Skin Plate, Lex D55183116004 A37706G0454
Assy 005
5 Lex Composite D55183120000 PB 101
001 PB 201
5A Lex Composite D55183120002 A20737G0041
003
5B Lex Composite D55183120004 PB 101 A29998G0050
005 PB 201
5C Lex Composite D55183120006 PB 101 A21481G0072
007 PB 201
5D Lex Composite D55183120008 PB 101 A21295G0066
009 PB 201
5E Lex Composite D55183120010 PB 101 A21514G0068
011 PB 201
5F Lex Composite D55183120012 PB 101 A22079G0113
013 PB 201
5G Lex Composite D55183120014 PB 101 A23493G0171
015 PB 201
5H Lex Composite D55183120016 PB 101 A25227G0273
017 PB 201
5I Lex Composite D55183120018 A37706G0454
019
10 Support, Upper Composite D55183121002
003
10A Support, Upper Composite D55183121004 A22079G0125
005
15 Support, Lower Composite D55183122000
001
15A Support, Lower Composite D55183122002 A22079G0125
003
20 Core 3/16−4 Z−17.151 D55183120200
201
ASSY Dwg.: D55183000, D55183115, D55183116, D55183120

Key to Figure 2

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 NovPage01/1410
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

25 Core 3/16−4 Z−17.151 D55183120202

203
30 Core 3.5F50 Z−17.153 D55183120204
205
35 Core 3.5F50 Z−17.153 D55183120206
207
40 Core 3/16−4 Z−17.151 D55183120208
209
45 Core 3/16−4 Z−17.151 D55183120210
211
50 Core Z−17.615 D55183120212
213
55 Core Z−17.615 D55183120214
215
60 Core 3.5F50 Z−17.153 D55183120216
217
65 Core Z−17.615 D55183120218
219
70 Film, Adhesive Z−15.425
75 Film, Adhesive Z−15.467 A25227G0273
80 Film, Adhesive Z−15.468 A25227G0273
85 Foam, Adhesive Z−15.415
90 Film PVF, Bond Z−14.310
able
95 Film PVF, Bond Z−14.512 A25227G0273
able
ASSY Dwg.: D55183120

Key to Figure 2

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 NovPage01/1411
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Plate - Inboard Leading Edge

Figure 3 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-12-11 MayPage01/0312
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Plate - Inboard Leading Edge

Figure 3 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-12-11 MayPage01/0313
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Plate - Inboard Leading Edge

Figure 3 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55-12-11 MayPage01/0314
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Plate - Inboard Leading Edge

Figure 3 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55-12-11 MayPage01/0315
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Plate - Inboard Leading Edge

Figure 3 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55-12-11 MayPage01/0316
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Plate - Inboard Leading Edge

Figure 3 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55-12-11 MayPage01/0317
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Plate - Inboard Leading Edge

Figure 3 (sheet 7)

Printed in Germany
55-12-11 MayPage01/0318
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Skin Plate, In D55183300000

board Leading 001
Edge Assy
1A Skin Plate, In D55183300002 A23001G0153
board Leading 003
Edge Assy
1B Skin Plate, In D55183300004 A23944G0196
board Leading 005
Edge Assy
5 Skin Plate, In Composite D55183310000
board Leading 001
Edge
5A Skin Plate, In Composite D55183315002 A20302G0022
board Leading 003
Edge
5B Skin Plate, In Composite D55183315004 A21481G0072
board Leading 005
Edge
5C Skin Plate, In Composite D55183315006 A22383G0141
board Leading 007
Edge
10 Plate, Protec 3.1364T42 D55183310200 B20302G0022
tion LN9073 201
1.2 (0.047)
10A Plate, Protec 1.4544.9 D55183300202 A23001G0153
tion LN9450 203
0.4 (0.016)
10B Plate, Protec 1.4544.9 D55183300204 A23944G0196
tion LN9456 205
0.4 (0.016)
15 Primer Z−15.915
20 Plate 3.1364T42 D55183310202 B20302G0022
LN9073 203
25 Plate 3.1364T42 D55183310204 B20302G0022
205
30 Sealant Z−16.104
ASSY Dwg.: D55183000, D55183300, D55183310

Key to Figure 3

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 NovPage01/1419
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Plate - Outboard Leading Edge

Figure 4 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-12-11 MayPage01/0320
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Plate - Outboard Leading Edge

Figure 4 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-12-11 Pages 21/22
May 01/03
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Plate - Outboard Leading Edge

Figure 4 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55-12-11 MayPage01/0323
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Plate - Outboard Leading Edge

Figure 4 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55-12-11 MayPage01/0324
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Plate - Outboard Leading Edge

Figure 4 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55-12-11 MayPage01/0325
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Plate - Outboard Leading Edge

Figure 4 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55-12-11 MayPage01/0326
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Plate - Outboard Leading Edge

Figure 4 (sheet 7)

Printed in Germany
55-12-11 MayPage01/0327
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Plate -Outboard Leading Edge

Figure 4 (sheet 8)

Printed in Germany
55-12-11 MayPage01/0328
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Skin Plate, Out D55183400000

board Leading 001
Edge Assy
1A Skin Plate, Out D55183400002 A23001G0153
board Leading 003
Edge Assy
1B Skin Plate, Out D55183400004 A23944G0196
board Leading 005
Edge Assy
5 Skin Plate, Out Composite D55183410000
board Leading 001
Edge
5A Skin Plate, Out Composite D55183415002 A20302G0022
board Leading 003
Edge
5B Skin Plate, Out Composite D55183415004 A21481G0072
board Leading 005
Edge
5C Skin Plate, Out Composite D55183415006 A22383G0141
board Leading 007
Edge
10 Plate, Protec 3.1364T42 D55183410200 B20302G0022
tion LN9073 201
1.2 (0.047)
10A Plate, Protec 1.4544.9 D55183400202 A23001G0153
tion LN9450 203
0.4 (0.016)
10B Plate, Protec 1.4544.9 D55183400204 A23944G0196
tion LN9456 205
0.4 (0.016)
15 Primer Z−15.915
20 Plate 3.1364T42 D55183410202 B20302G0022
LN9073 203
25 Plate 3.1364T42 D55183410204 B20302G0022
LN9073 205
30 Sealant Z−16.104
ASSY Dwg.: D55183000, D55183400, D55183410

Key to Figure 4

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Pages 29/30
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

HORIZONTAL STABILIZER LEADING EDGE SKIN PLATES − ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT PARAGRAPH.

CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER TO

PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

1. General

NOTE: This chapter describes the number of allowable individual damages for
the components of the THS Leading Edge. If various types of damages
are present, the total number of different damages should not exceed
the limit prescribed in the relevant table.

NOTE: For definition of allowable damage refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For Damage Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14

− CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.
This topic contains the allowable damage and related data applicable to the
Horizontal Stabilizer Skin Plates. This data is necessary to find the cor

rect repair procedure.

2. Damage Evaluation

Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data related to the composite
structure and refer to Chapter 51−11−00, paragraph 2 for data related to
the metallic structure.

3. Type of Damage
The main type of damage which can occur to the metallic structure are
holes, scratches and dents. Refer to Chapter 51−11−00, Table 1 for full
definition of the types of damage that can occur to the metallic structure.

The two main types of damage which can occur to the composites structure
are as follows:
A. Delamination with or without visible cracks and holes.

This is when the structure is hit by an object which results in separa

tion between the plies.

B. Superficial Damage

This is when the structure is damaged only on the external surface, with
no damage to the internal structure. Nicks and scratches are examples of
superficial damage.

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

4. Distance Between Damage Areas and Distance Between Repair Areas

There is a minimum permitted distance between damaged areas and between re

pair areas (refer to Figure 101).

A. Damaged Areas

For the minimum distance between two damaged areas (X) refer to the spe

cific allowable damage table. Depending on the order of the damages,
Lmax is as follows:
− Different Order
If the length of the larger damage is more than 10 × length of the
smaller damage, then Lmax is the length of the smaller damage.
− Same Order
If the length of the larger damage is less or equal than 10 × length
of the smaller damage, then Lmax is the length of the larger damage.

When the distance (X) between two damages areas is less than the minimum
distance, the two damages must be enveloped together and the area of the
envelop is to be considered as one damage area.

B. Repair Areas
For the minimum distance between two repair areas (Y) refer to the spe

cific allowable damage table. If you have less than this distance, refer
to AIRBUS before you do the second repair.

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Distance Between Damaged Areas and Between Repair Areas

Figure 101

Page 103
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

5. Repair Zones

Each of the components of the horizontal stabilizer leading edge structure

is divided into repair zones. These repair zones show the zones of differ

ent structural importance of the component. When you do a damage evaluation
(refer to paragraph 2.), you must refer to the repair zone data. The re

pair zones data applicable to the Skin Plates of the Horizontal Stabilizer
Leading Edge is in Figure 102 and the repair zones applicable to the THS
LEX is in Figure 103.

Page 104
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

THS Leading Edge Skin Plates − Repair Zones

Figure 102 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesAug105/106
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

THS Leading Edge Skin Plates − Repair Zones

Figure 102 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesAug107/108
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

THS Leading Edge Skin Plates − Repair Zones for Metallic Patch Repairs
Figure 102 (sheet 3)

Page 109
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/13
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

THS LEX − Repair Zones

Figure 103

Page 110
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

6. Allowable Damage Description/Criteria

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ PARAGRAPH/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION INSTRUCTION REF

TYPE DIAGRAM CATEGORY
ERENCE
Skin Plates − All Zones Linear or 9.A.(1)/ A, C −
Superficial 101
Damage
Delamina
9.A.(2)/ A, C −
tion with 102
or without
Visible
Cracks and
Holes
Protective Cover Superficial 9.B.(1)/ A, C −
Damage with 103
no damage
to Skin
Plates
Delamina
9.B.(2)/ A, C −
tion with 104
or without
Visible
Damages to
Skin Plates
Debonding 9.B.(2) A, C −
between
Protective
Cover and
Skin Plate
THS LEX − Zones 01 and Linear Dam
9.C.(1)/ A, C −
02 age 105
Delamina
9.C.(2)/ A, C −
tion with 106
or without
Visible
Cracks and
Holes,
Nicks and
Gouges
Missing 9.C.(3)/ C −
Fastener 107

Table 101

Page 111
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ PARAGRAPH/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION INSTRUCTION REF

TYPE DIAGRAM CATEGORY
ERENCE
THS LEX − Zone 03 (Sol
Linear or 9.C.(4)/ A, C −
id Laminate) Superficial 108
Damage
Delamina
9.C.(5)/ A, C −
tion with 109
or without
Visible
Cracks and
Holes
THS LEX − Zone 03 Linear or 9.C.(6)/ A, C −
(Sandwich Laminate) Superficial 110
Damage
Superficial 9.C.(7)/ A, C −
Damage, De
111
lamination
with or
without
Visible
Cracks and
Holes and
Debondings
THS LEX − Zone 04 Linear or 9.C.(8)/ A, C −
Superficial 112
Damage
Superficial 9.C.(9)/ A, C −
Damage, De
113
lamination
with or
without
Visible
Cracks and
Holes and
Debondings

Table 101
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.
7. Allowable Damage

Allowable damage is damage that does not affect the necessary strength or
function of a component. You do not have to make a structural repair for
this type of damage. You must make a non−structural repair. If this type

Page 112
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

of damage has rough or sharp edges, smooth these out with the correct
abrasive cloth. Replace the surface paint, if necessary. The allowable dam

age data for the horizontal stabilizer leading edge Skins, Protective Cover
and Lex are in Diagrams 101 thru 113.

8. Repair Limits

The repair limits data gives the time limits in which to make temporary
and permanent repairs. These time limits are given in flights hours (FH).
The repair limits also tell you which type of repair you can do. To find
the repair limits data applicable to the damaged area, you must know the
subsequent data:
− The repair zone applicable to the damaged area.
− The area, length or depth (as applicable) of the damage to the structure.
− The type of damage (for example, nick, scratch, delamination).
The repair limits of the horizontal stabilizer leading edge are in Diagrams
101 thru 113.

9. Allowable Damage − Skins Plates, Protective Cover and LEX

The following allowable damage limits are applicable to the Skins Plates,
Protective Cover and Lex of the Horizontal Stabilizer Leading Edge.
A. Allowable Damages − Skin Plates

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND
AIRCRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 102.

(1) Skin Plates − All Zones − Linear or Superficial Damage

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in all zones of the THS
Leading Edge Skin Plates, refer to Figure 102 for Repair Zones.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 102.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 102
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information con

cerning allowable damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 101 and find which Damage Size
the damage occurs in.

Page 113
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 103 and perform the
corresponding repair action.

Page 114
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits − Skin Plates (All Zones) − Linear or Su

perficial Damages
Diagram 101

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesAug115/116
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC
REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN
S
SIZE TION
ON CATEGORY
CA GO Y DAMAGES X mm REPAIRS Y mm
(in) (in)
The greater
Chapter 51−77−12, Chapter 51−77−12, value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 600 FH
paragraph 2.A Paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
2.5 Lmax.
Non Structural
Linear or super
(1) Repair, Chapter
The greater
ficial damage to 51−77−12, para
600 FH value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
external surface Permanent A graph 3.B and None None
<1> (1.97 in) or in)
(abrasions, restore surface
2.5 Lmax.
gouges, nicks finish, Chapter
and scratches) 51−75−12.
Structural Re
The greater
pair, Chapter value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(2) Permanent A Immediately None None
55−12−11, Page (1.97 in) or in)
Block 201 2.5 Lmax.
(3) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − −
Skin Plates − All Zones
Table 103
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesAug117/118
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND
AIRCRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 104.
(2) Skin Plates − All Zones − Delamination with or without Visible
Cracks and Holes

NOTE: This delamination damage is applicable in all zones of the THS

Leading Edge Skin Plates, refer to Figure 102 for Repair Zones.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 104.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 104
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information con

cerning allowable damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 102 and find which Damage Size
the damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 105 and perform the
corresponding repair action.

Page 119
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits − Skin Plates (All Zones) − Delamination
with or without Visible Cracks and Holes
Diagram 102
Page 120
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC
REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN
S
SIZE TION
ON CATEGORY
CA GO Y DAMAGES X mm REPAIRS Y mm
(in) (in)
The greater
Chapter 51−77−12, Chapter 51−77−12, value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 600 FH
paragraph 2.A Paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
2.5 Lmax.
(1)
The greater
Delamination with 600 FH value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
or without Vis
Permanent A <1> None None
<2> (1.97 in) or in)
ible Cracks and 2.5 Lmax.
Holes
Structural Re
The greater
pair, Chapter value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(2) Permanent A Immediately None None
55−12−11, Page (1.97 in) or in)
Block 201, 2.5 Lmax.
(3) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − −
Skin Plates − All Zones
Table 105
<1> Repair instructions:

Case 1: Non−perforating damage:

− Repair reference: Chapter 51−77−12, paragraph 3.B.

Case 2: Perforating damage:

− For damage located in Zone 05, repair inner face of the panel in accordance with: Chapter 51−77−13, paragraph 2.H.
− For damage located in other zone, repair both faces in accordance with: Chapter 51−77−13, paragraph 2.H.

<2> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesAug121/122
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

B. Allowable Damages − Protective Cover

CAUTION: THIS ALLOWABLE DAMAGE LIMITS ARE APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION

23001G0153 OR SB 55−1012.

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND
AIRCRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 104.

(1) Protective Cover − Superficial Damage with no damage to Skin Plates

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 104.

NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information con
cerning allowable damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 103 and find which Damage Size
the damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 106 and perform the
corresponding repair action.

Page 123
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits − Protective Cover − Superficial Damage

with no damage to Skin Plates
Diagram 103
Page 124
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN
S
SIZE TION
ON CATEGORY
CA GO Y DAMAGES X mm REPAIRS Y mm
(in) (in)
The greater
Chapter 51−77−12, Chapter 51−77−12, value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 600 FH
paragraph 2.A Paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
2.5 Lmax.
(1)
Superficial Dam The greater
age with no dam 600 FH value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Permanent A <2> None None
age to Skin <1> (1.97 in) or in)
Plates (Dents) 2.5 Lmax.
The greater
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(2) Permanent A <3> Immediately None None
(1.97 in) or in)
2.5 Lmax.
Protective Cover
Table 106
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

<2> Depth greater or equal to 3 mm (0.12 in): Fill the dent with resin (refer toChapter 51−73−00, paragraph 3.C for procedure and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraphs
6.B.(1) or 6.B.(4) for materials). Then repair the surface finish (refer to Chapter 51−75−12).

Depth less than 3 mm (0.12 in): Repair the surface finish (refer to Chapter 51−75−12).

<3> Repair instructions:

− Remove the protective cover.

− Inspect the skin plate and repair according to Chapter 55−12−11, Page Block 201.

− Reinstall protective cover.

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesNov125/126
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THIS ALLOWABLE DAMAGE LIMITS ARE APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION

23001G0153 OR SB 55−1012.
CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND
AIRCRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 107.

(2) Protective Cover − Damages with or without damage to skin plates

(reworks, holes) and Debonding between Protective Cover and Skin
Plate
NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 107.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 107
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information con
cerning allowable damage and repair applicability.
(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 104 and find which Damage Size
the damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 108 and perform the
corresponding repair action.

Page 127
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits − Protective Cover − Delamination with or

without Visible Damages to Skin Plates
Diagram 104
Page 128
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN
S
SIZE TION
ON CATEGORY
CA GO Y DAMAGES X mm REPAIRS Y mm
(in) (in)
The greater
Chapter 51−77−12, Chapter 51−77−12, value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 600 FH
paragraph 2.A Paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
2.5 Lmax.
Delamination with
ith (1)
The greater
or without Vis 600 FH value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
ible Damages to Permanent A <1> None None
<2> (1.97 in) or in)
Skin Plates
2.5 Lmax.
(holes)
Structural Re The greater
pair, Chapter value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(2) Permanent A Immediately None None
55−12−11, Page (1.97 in) or in)
Block 201 2.5 Lmax.
Debonding between − Temporary C <3> <4> Immediately 50 FC (FH not None − −
protective cover relevant)
and
d skin
ki plate
l Permanent A Replace as per Within next 50 FC None None − −
Chapter 55−12−11, (FH not relevant)
Page Block 201, <2>
Paragraph 5.E,
Figure 205 and
206
Protective Cover
Table 108
<1> Fill with resin (refer to Chapter 51−73−00, paragraph 3.C) using the materials specified in Chapter 51−77−11, paragraphs 6.B.(1) or 6.B.(4).

<2> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

<3> Inspection instructions:

− Do a Detailed Visual Inspection in Leading Edges Inboard and Outboard to look for any debonded area between the protective cover and the skin plate, refer
to NTM, Chapter 51−90−00.
− Use a 0.05 mm (0.002 in) gauge to ensure no gap between metallic plate and skin along the spanwise, upper and lower joint. In case of the gauge enters at
the joint, do a temporary repair.

<4> Repair instructions:

− Install High Speed Tape in spanwise direction, upper and lower, along the joint between the metallic cover and composite Leading Edge panel. Strip length
must overlap 50 mm (1.97 in) to adjacent panel/box.
− Install High Speed Tape in chord direction, upper and lower, in each middle area between two consecutive Leading Edge Ribs. Strip length must be of 150 mm
(5.91 in) with an overlap of 75 mm (2.95 in) to adjacent panel/box.

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesNov129/130
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

C. Allowable Damages − THS LEX

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND
AIRCRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 109.

(1) THS LEX − Zones 01 and 02 − Linear Damage

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable to the THS LEX, Zones 01

and 02, refer to Figure 103 for Repair Zones Definition.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 109.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 109
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information con
cerning allowable damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 105 and find which Damage Size
the damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 110 and perform the
corresponding repair action.

Page 131
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits − THS LEX (Zones 01 and 02) − Linear
Damages
Diagram 105
Page 132
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIM INSPECTION MAXIMUM NUM MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN
SIZE TION CATEGORY IT BER OF RE
PAIRS/DAM DAMAGES X REPAIRS Y
AGES PER mm (in) mm (in)
PART
The greater
value of 50
Chapter 51−77−12, 50 mm
Temporary C Immediately 20 months No 3 mm (1.97
paragraph 2.A (1.97 in)
in) or 2.5
Lmax.
(1)
The greater
20 months value of 50
Chapter 51−77−13, 50 mm
Linear damages Permanent A None No 3 mm (1.97
paragraph 2.K <1> (1.97 in)
(scratches) in) or 2.5
Lmax.
The greater
Structural Re
value of 50
pair, Chapter 50 mm
(2) Permanent A Immediately None No 3 mm (1.97
55−12−11, Page (1.97 in)
in) or 2.5
Block 201
Lmax.
(3) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − − −
THS LEX − Zones 01 and 02
Table 110
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesNov133/134
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND
AIRCRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 111.
(2) THS LEX − Zones 01 and 02 − Delamination with or without Visible
Cracks and Holes, Nicks and Gouges

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable to the THS LEX, Zones 01

and 02, refer to Figure 103 for Repair Zones Definition.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 111.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 111
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information con
cerning allowable damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 106 and find which Damage Size
the damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 112 and perform the
corresponding repair action.

Page 135
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits − THS LEX (Zones 01 and 02) − Delamina

tion with or without Visible Cracks and Holes, Nicks and Gouges
Diagram 106
Page 136
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIM INSPECTION MAXIMUM NUM MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN
SIZE TION CATEGORY IT BER OF RE
PAIRS/DAM DAMAGES X REPAIRS Y
AGES PER mm (in) mm (in)
PART
The greater
value of 50
Chapter 51−77−12, 50 mm
Temporary C Immediately 20 months No 3 mm (1.97
paragraph 2.A (1.97 in)
in) or 2.5
Lmax.
(1)
The greater
Delaminations value of 50
(with or without Chapter 51−77−13, 20 months 50 mm
Permanent A None No 3 mm (1.97
visible cracks paragraph 2.K <1> (1.97 in)
in) or 2.5
and holes), Lmax.
nicks and gouges
The greater
Structural Re
value of 50
pair, Chapter 50 mm
(2) Permanent A Immediately None No 3 mm (1.97
55−12−11, Page (1.97 in)
in) or 2.5
Block 201
Lmax.
(3) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − − −
THS LEX − Zones 01 and 02
Table 112
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesNov137/138
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND
AIRCRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 113.
(3) THS LEX − Zones 01 and 02 − Missing Fastener

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable to the THS LEX, Zones 01

and 02, refer to Figure 103 for Repair Zones Definition.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 113.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 113
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information con
cerning allowable damage and repair applicability.

Refer to Diagram 107 flow chart when a fastener lost is found.

Page 139
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits − THS LEX (Zones 01 and 02) − Missing
Fastener
Diagram 107
Page 140
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND
AIRCRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 114.
(4) THS LEX − Zone 03 (Solid Laminate) − Linear or Superficial Damage

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable to the THS LEX, Zone 03,
Solid Laminate Configuration, refer to Figure 103 for Repair
Zones Definition.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 114.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 114
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information con
cerning allowable damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 108 and find which Damage Size
the damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 115 and perform the
corresponding repair action.

Page 141
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits − THS LEX (Zone 03 (Solid Laminate)) −
Linear or Superficial Damages
Diagram 108
Page 142
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIM INSPECTION MAXIMUM NUM MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN
SIZE TION CATEGORY IT BER OF RE
PAIRS/DAM DAMAGES X REPAIRS Y
AGES PER mm (in) mm (in)
PART
The greater
value of 50
Chapter 51−77−12, 50 mm
Temporary C Immediately 20 months No 2 mm (1.97
paragraph 2.A (1.97 in)
in) or 2.5
Lmax.
(1)
Linear or super The greater
ficial damage in 20 months value of 50
Chapter 51−77−12, 50 mm
outer/inner skin Permanent A None No 2 mm (1.97
paragraph 3.B <1> (1.97 in)
− nicks, gouges, in) or 2.5
abrasions and Lmax.
scratches The greater
Structural Re
value of 50
pair, Chapter 50 mm
(2) Permanent A Immediately None No 2 mm (1.97
55−12−11, Page (1.97 in)
in) or 2.5
Block 201
Lmax.
(3) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − − −
THS LEX − Zone 03 (Solid Laminate)
Table 115
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesNov143/144
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND
AIRCRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 116.
(5) THS LEX − Zone 03 (Solid Laminate) − Delamination with or without
Visible Cracks and Holes

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Zone 03 of the THS LEX

with a Solid Laminate Configuration, refer to Figure 103 for
Repair Zones Definition.
NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 116.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 116
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information con
cerning allowable damage and repair applicability.
(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 109 and find which Damage Size
the damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 117 and perform the
corresponding repair action.

Page 145
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits − THS LEX (Zone 03 (Solid Laminate)) −
Delamination with or without Visible Cracks and Holes
Diagram 109
Page 146
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIM INSPECTION MAXIMUM NUM MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN
SIZE TION CATEGORY IT BER OF RE
PAIRS/DAM DAMAGES X REPAIRS Y
AGES PER mm (in) mm (in)
PART
The greater
value of 50
Chapter 51−77−12, 50 mm
Temporary C Immediately 20 months No 2 mm (1.97
paragraph 2.A (1.97 in)
in) or 2.5
Lmax.
(1)
The greater
Delaminations 20 months value of 50
50 mm
with or without Permanent A <2> None No 2 mm (1.97
<1> (1.97 in)
visible cracks in) or 2.5
and holes Lmax.
The greater
Structural Re
value of 50
pair, Chapter 50 mm
(2) Permanent A Immediately None No 2 mm (1.97
55−12−11, Page (1.97 in)
in) or 2.5
Block 201
Lmax.
(3) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − − −
THS LEX − Zone 03 (Solid Laminate)
Table 117
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

<2> Repair Instructions:

− Non−perforating damage must be repaired according to Chapter 51−77−12 paragraph 3.B.

− Perforating damage must be repaired according to Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph 2.H.

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesNov147/148
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND
AIRCRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 118.
(6) THS LEX − Zone 03 (Sandwich Laminate) − Linear or Superficial Damage

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Zone 03 of the THS LEX

with a Sandwich Laminate Configuration, refer to Figure 103 for
Repair Zones Definition.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 118.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 118
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information con
cerning allowable damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 110 and find which Damage
Size the damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 119 and perform
the corresponding repair action.

Page 149
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits − THS LEX (Zone 03 (Sandwich Laminate)) −
Linear or Superficial Damages
Diagram 110
Page 150
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIM INSPECTION MAXIMUM NUM MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN
SIZE TION CATEGORY IT BER OF RE
PAIRS/DAM DAMAGES X REPAIRS Y
AGES PER mm (in) mm (in)
PART
The greater
value of 50
Chapter 51−77−12, 50 mm
Temporary C Immediately 20 months No 2 mm (1.97
paragraph 2.A (1.97 in)
in) or 2.5
Linear or super Lmax.
ficial damage to (1)
external surface The greater
with no damage 20 months value of 50
Chapter 51−77−12, 50 mm
to internal sec Permanent A None No 2 mm (1.97
paragraph 3.B <1> (1.97 in)
tions (Sandwich in) or 2.5
core) − abra Lmax.
sions, gouges, The greater
nicks and Structural Re
value of 50
scratches pair, Chapter 50 mm
(2) Permanent A Immediately None No 2 mm (1.97
55−12−11, Page (1.97 in)
in) or 2.5
Block 201
Lmax.
(3) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − − −
THS LEX − Zone 03 (Sandwich Laminate)
Table 119
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesNov151/152
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND
AIRCRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 120.
(7) THS LEX − Zone 03 (Sandwich Laminate) − Superficial Damage, Dela
mination with or without Visible Cracks and Holes and Debondings

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Zone 03 of the THS LEX

with a Sandwich Laminate Configuration, refer to Figure 103 for
Repair Zones Definition.
NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 120.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 120
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information con
cerning allowable damage and repair applicability.
(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 111 and find which Damage
Size the damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 121 and perform
the corresponding repair action.

Page 153
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits − THS LEX (Zone 03 (Sandwich Laminate)) −
Superficial Damage, Delamination with or without Visible Cracks and Holes and
Debondings
Diagram 111
Page 154
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIM INSPECTION MAXIMUM NUM MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN
SIZE TION CATEGORY IT BER OF RE
PAIR/DAMAGES DAMAGES X REPAIRS Y
PER PART mm (in) mm (in)
The greater
value of 50
Chapter 51−77−12, 50 mm
Temporary C Immediately 20 months No 2 mm (1.97
paragraph 2.A (1.97 in)
in) or 2.5
Lmax.
Superficial dam (1)
The greater
age, delamina value of 50
tions (with or 20 months 50 mm
Permanent A <2> None No 2 mm (1.97
without visible <1> (1.97 in)
in) or 2.5
cracks and Lmax.
holes) and de
bondings The greater
Structural Re
value of 50
pair, Chapter 50 mm
(2) Permanent A Immediately None No 2 mm (1.97
55−12−11, Page (1.97 in)
in) or 2.5
Block 201
Lmax.
(3) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − − −
THS LEX − Zone 03 (Sandwich Laminate)
Table 121
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

<2> Repair Instructions:

(1) If the damage affects only the outer skin and the core is not exposed: repair damage according to Chapter 51−77−12 paragraph 3.B.

(2) If the damage affects the outer skin and the core is exposed or affected, repair as follows:

− For damaged area size up to 1000 mm (1.55 in), perform structural repair according to Chapter 51−77−13, paragraph 2.H.
− For damaged area greater than 1000 mm (1.55 in), perform structural repair according to Chapter 51−77−13, paragraph 2.A.(2), option D, installing 3 repair
plies with ±45/±90/±45 orientation.

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesNov155/156
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND
AIRCRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 122.
(8) THS LEX − Zone 04 − Linear or Superficial Damage

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Zone 04 of the THS LEX

, refer to Figure 103 for Repair Zones Definition.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 122.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 122
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information con
cerning allowable damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 112 and find which Damage Size
the damage occurs in.
(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 123 and perform the
corresponding repair action.

Page 157
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits − THS LEX (Zone 04) − Linear or Superfi

cial Damages
Diagram 112
Page 158
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIM INSPECTION MAXIMUM NUM MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN
SIZE TION CATEGORY IT BER OF RE
PAIR/DAMAGES DAMAGES X REPAIRS Y
PER PART mm (in) mm (in)
The greater
value of 50
Chapter 51−77−12, 50 mm
Temporary C Immediately 20 months No 2 mm (1.97
paragraph 2.A (1.97 in)
in) or 2.5
Linear or super Lmax.
ficial damage to (1)
external surface The greater
with no damage 20 months value of 50
50 mm
to internal sec Permanent A <2> None No 2 mm (1.97
<1> (1.97 in)
tions (Sandwich in) or 2.5
core) − abra Lmax.
sions, gouges, The greater
nicks and Structural Re
value of 50
scratches pair, Chapter 50 mm
(2) Permanent A Immediately None No 2 mm (1.97
55−12−11, Page (1.97 in)
in) or 2.5
Block 201
Lmax.
(3) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − − −
THS LEX − Zone 04
Table 123
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

<2> Repair Instructions:

(1) If the damage affects only the outer skin and the core is not exposed: repair damage according to Chapter 51−77−12, paragraph 3.B.

(2) If the damage affects the outer skin and the core is exposed or affected, repair as follows:

− For damaged area size up to 1000 mm (1.55 in), perform structural repair according to Chapter 51−77−13, paragraph 2.H.
− For damaged area greater than 1000 mm (1.55 in), perform structural repair according to Chapter 51−77−13, paragraph 2.A.(2), option D, installing 3 repair
plies with ±45/±90/±45 orientation.

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesNov159/160
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND
AIRCRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 124.
(9) THS LEX − Zone 04 − Superficial Damage, Delamination with or without
Visible Cracks and Holes and Debondings

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Zone 04 of the THS LEX,

refer to Figure 103 for Repair Zones Definition.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 124.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 124
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information con
cerning allowable damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 113 and find which Damage Size
the damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 125 and perform the
corresponding repair action.

Page 161
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits − THS LEX (Zone 04) − Superficial Damage,
Delamination with or without Visible Cracks and Holes and Debondings
Diagram 113
Page 162
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIM INSPECTION MAXIMUM NUM MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN
SIZE TION CATEGORY IT BER OF RE
PAIR/DAMAGES DAMAGES X REPAIRS Y
PER PART mm (in) mm (in)
The greater
value of 50
Chapter 51−77−12, 50 mm
Temporary C Immediately 20 months No 2 mm (1.97
paragraph 2.A (1.97 in)
in) or 2.5
Lmax.
Superficial dam (1)
The greater
age, delamina Next C−Check or value of 50
tions (with or 20 months 50 mm
Permanent A <2> None No 2 mm (1.97
without visible (1.97 in)
<1> in) or 2.5
cracks and Lmax.
holes) and de
bondings The greater
Structural Re
value of 50
pair, Chapter 50 mm
(2) Permanent A Immediately None No 2 mm (1.97
55−12−11, Page (1.97 in)
in) or 2.5
Block 201
Lmax.
(3) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − − −
THS LEX − Zone 04
Table 125
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

<2> Repair Instructions:

(1) If the damage affects only the skin (inner or outer) and the core is not exposed: repair damage according to Chapter 51−77−12, paragraph 3.B.

(2) If the damage affects the inner or outer skin and the core is exposed or affected, repair as follows:

− For damaged area size up to 1000 mm (1.55 in), perform structural repair according to Chapter 51−77−13, paragraph 2.H.
− For damaged area greater than 1000 mm (1.55 in), perform structural repair according to Chapter 51−77−13, paragraph 2.A.(2), option D, installing 3 repair
plies with ±45/±90/±45 orientation.

(3) If the damage affects both skin and core (perforating damage), repair as follows:

− For damaged area size up to 1000 mm (1.55 in), perform structural repair according to Chapter 51−77−13, paragraph 2.H (if there is access from one side
or from both sides).
− For damaged area greater than 1000 mm (1.55 in), perform structural repair according to Chapter 51−77−13, paragraph 2.A.(2), option D, installing 3 repair
plies with ±45/±90/±45 orientation. It is necessary to perform the repair in 2 steps: first in one face, for one skin and core restoration, and after in the
opposite face for core closing and skin.

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesNov163/164
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

THS LEADING EDGE SKIN PLATES

1. General

NOTE: For Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14

− CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

This topic contains all of the specific repair procedures for the skin
plates of the Horizontal Stabilizer Leading Edge. The repair zones and al

lowable damage data for these repair procedures are in Chapter 55−12−11,
Page Block 101.
2. Safety Precautions

There are risks to you and other persons when you work with composites re

pair materials. To prevent risks, read and obey the warnings given below.

WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.
WARNING: WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND FILTER MASK WHEN YOU CUT,
ABRADE OR DRILL COMPOSITE MATERIALS. THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MA

TERIALS CAN GET INTO YOUR LUNGS OR ONTO YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE YOUR
INJURY. IMMEDIATELY REMOVE DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.

WHEN YOU WORK WITH CFRP COMPOSITE MATERIALS, IMMEDIATELY REMOVE
DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRIC POWER ON
THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST ONLY USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH
3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT REPAIR.
3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER REMARKS

No General Repairs applicable. − −

Table 201

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

4. Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs

SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE REPAIR INSPECTION

CATEGORY INSTRUCTION REF

ERENCE
Repair of Skin Delamina
5.A. IN
201 INAC
− −
tion Damage (Flush Re
ACTIVE TIVE
pair), All Zones, except
contoured Front Section
of Zone 05. This repair
information is inactive
since revision dated Jun
01/10
Repair of Skin Delamina
5.B. IN
202 INAC
− −
tion Damage (Flush Re
ACTIVE TIVE
pair), Contoured Front
Section, Zone 05. This
repair information is in

active since revision
dated Jun 01/10
Repair of Damage thru 5.C. IN
203 INAC
− −
Skin (Flush Repair), ACTIVE TIVE
Zones 02 and 06. This
repair information is in

active since revision
dated Jun 01/10
Repair of Damage to Skin 5.D. IN
204 INAC
− −
Edge (Flush Repair), ACTIVE TIVE
Zones 01, 03, 04. This
repair information is in

active since revision
dated Jun 01/10
Removal/Installation of 5.E. 205, 206 − −
the protective cover.
Repair of Damage on Skin 5.F. 207 A −
Plate with metallic
patch.
Repair of Damage on Anti
5.G. 208 A −
erosion Sheet/Tape, Zone
with metallic patch.

Table 202

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage on Anti
5.H. 209 A −

erosion Sheet/Tape, Zone
and Rib Flange with me

tallic patch.
Flush Repair of Damage on 5.I. 210 A −
Skin Plates− Zones 02 and
06
External Doubler Repair 5.J. 211 A −
of Damage on Skin Plates−
Zones 02 and 06
Repair LE Skin Plates− 5.K. 212 A −
Zones 01, 03 and 04
Hot Bond Repair of Lead
5.L. 213 A −
ing Edge Panels− All
zones
Repair of Damage to the 5.M. 214 A −
LE LEX − Zones 01 and 02
Repair of Damage to the 5.N. 215 A −
Outer Skin of the LE LEX
− Zone 03, Solid Laminate
Area
Repair of Damage to the 5.O. 216 A −
Outer Skin of the LE LEX
− Zone 03, Sandwich
Structure Area
Repair of Damage to the 5.P. 217 A −
Outer Skin and Honeycomb
Core of the LE LEX −
Zone 03, Sandwich Struc

ture Area
Repair of Damage to the 5.Q. 218 A −
Outer or Inner Skin of
the LE LEX − Zone 04,
Constant Thickness Area
Repair of Damage to the 5.R. 219 A −
Outer or Inner Skin and
Honeycomb Core of the LE
LEX − Zone 04, Constant
Thickness Area

Table 202

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to the 5.S. 220 A −

Outer Skin, Inner Skin
and Honeycomb Core of the
LE LEX − Zone 04,
Constant Thickness Area
Repair of Damage to the 5.T. 221 A −
Outer or Inner Skin of
the LE LEX − Zone 04,
Chamfer Area
Repair of Damage to the 5.U. 222 A −
Outer or Inner Skin and
Honeycomb Core of the LE
LEX − Zone 04, Chamfer
Area
Repair of Damage to the 5.V. 223 A −
Outer Skin, Inner Skin
and Honeycomb Core of the
LE LEX − Zone 04, Cham

fer Area

Table 202
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

5. Skin Repairs

CAUTION: FOR REPAIRS CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE REFER

TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN IN THE
INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

A. Repair of Skin Delamination (Flush Repair), All Zones except Contoured

Front Section of Zone 05.

NOTE: This repair information is inactive since revision dated Jun 01/10.
NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out with a hot−bond 180° C (356° F)

repair procedure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E).

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbonfabric prepreg − Material Z−19.749, Epoxy Prepreg

Carbon fabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00
− Glassfabric − Material Z−19.102, Epoxy Prepreg
Glass fabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00
− Adhesive Film − Material Z−15.425, Adhesive
Film, (only FM−300M.03 CYANA

MID), refer to Chapter 51−33−00
− Porefiller − Material No. 08−008, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions (Refer to Figure 201)

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 3).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Cut and remove the damaged plies.

(c) Cut and smooth the repair area into a regular shape and chamfer
the undamaged plies into a overlap (refer to Figure 201 for di

mensions).
(d) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(e) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
WARNING: ADHESIVE FILM (MATERIAL Z−15.425, ADHESIVE FILM) IS DANGER

OUS.

(f) Cut the adhesive film (Material Z−15.425, ADHESIVE FILM) to the
size and shape of the repair area.

(g) Remove the protective sheet from the adhesive film. Apply the
adhesive film to the repair area (refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
paragraph 4.B).

(h) Get the correct pre−impregnated fabric material for the laminate
repair patch (refer to Chapter 55−12−00, Page Block 101, Figure
103).

Page 205
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(i) Prepare the fabric repair plies for the laminate repair patch
(refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C).
NOTE: In the subsequent step, replace the same number of plies as
removed.

(j) Lay−up the repair plies on the repair area (refer to Figure 201
and Chapter 55−12−00, Page Block 101, Figure 103). For more data,
refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C. Note that there must be
an overlap of 15 mm (0.59 in) on subsequent plies.

(k) Install the vacuum cure equipment over the laminate repair area
(refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.B.).

(l) Cure the repair plies under vacuum conditions (minimum 80% vacu

um). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D. for full data.
(m) After the repair plies have cured, remove the vacuum cure equip

ment from the repair area.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(n) With abrasive cloth, make the repair patch smooth and level with
the adjacent skin surface. Initially use 180 grade and finish off
with 400 grade. If necessary apply porefiller (Material No.
08−008).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(o) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(p) Repair the surface protection (refer to Chapter 51−75−12).

Page 206
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Skin Delamination (Flush Repair), All Zones, except Contoured Front
Section of Zone 05
Figure 201

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb207/208
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIRS CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE REFER

TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN IN THE
INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

B. Repair of Skin Delamination Damage (Flush Repair), Contoured Front Sec

tion, Zone 05.

NOTE: This repair information is inactive since revision dated Jun 01/10.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out with a hot−bond 180° C (356°F)

repair procedure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E).

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbonfiber − Material Z−19.749, Epoxy Prepreg

Carbon fabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00
− Glassfabric − Material Z−19.102, Epoxy Prepreg
Glass fabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00
− Adhesive Film − Material Z−15.425, Adhesive
Film, (only FM−300M.03 CYANA

MID), refer to Chapter 51−33−00
− Porefiller − Material No. 08−008, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 202).

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 3).
NOTE: In the following step, a maximum of 5 plies may be re

moved. If the delamination damage is more than 5 plies, re

fer to AIRBUS.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Cut and remove the damaged plies (max. 5).

(c) Cut and smooth the repair area into a regular shape and chamfer
the undamaged plies into an overlap (refer to Figure 202 for di

mensions).

(d) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

Page 209
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 IS DANGEROUS.

(e) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

WARNING: ADHESIVE FILM (MATERIAL Z−15.425, ADHESIVE FILM) IS DANGER

OUS.

(f) Cut the adhesive film (Material Z−15.425, Adhesive film) to the
size and shape of the repair area.
(g) Remove the protective sheet from the adhesive film. Apply the
film to the repair area (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph
4.B).

(h) Get the correct pre−impregnated fabric material for the laminate
repair patch (refer to Chapter 55−12−00, Page Block 101, Figure
103).

(i) Prepare the fabric repair plies for the laminate repair patch
(refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C).

NOTE: In the subsequent step, replace the same number of plies as

removed, plus one extra ply.

(j) Lay−up the repair plies on the repair area (refer to Figure 202
and Chapter 55−12−00, Page Block 101, Figure 103). For more data,
refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C. Note that there must be
an overlap of 15 mm (0.59 in) on subsequent plies.
(k) Install the vacuum cure equipment over the laminate repair area
(refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.B).

(l) Cure the repair plies under vacuum conditions (minimum 80% vacu

um). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D for full data.
(m) After the repair plies have cured, remove the vacuum cure equip

ment from the repair area.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(n) With abrasive cloth, make the repair patch smooth and level with
the adjacent skin surface. Initially use 280 grade and finish off
with 400 grade. If necessary apply porefiller (Material No.
08−008).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NUMBER 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(o) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
(p) Repair the surface protection (refer to Chapter 51−75−12).

Page 210
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Skin Delamination (Flush Repair), Contoured Front Section, Zone 05.
Figure 202

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb211/212
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIRS CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE REFER

TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN IN THE
INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

C. Repair of Damage thru Skin (Flush Repair), Zones 02 and 06

NOTE: This repair information is inactive since revision dated Jun 01/10.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.
NOTE: This repair is to be carried out with a hot−bond 180° C. repair
procedure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E).

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbonfiber − Material Z−19.749, Epoxy Prepreg

Carbon fabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00
− Glassfabric − Material Z−19.102, Epoxy Prepreg
Glass fabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00
− Adhesive Film − Material Z−15.425, Adhesive Film
(only FM−300M.03 CYANAMID), re

fer to Chapter 51−33−00
− Porefiller − Material No. 08−008, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 203)

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 3).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Cut and remove the damaged skin.

(c) Cut the skin into a regular shape and chamfer the undamaged skin
into an overlap (refer to Figure 203 for dimensions).

(d) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(e) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

Page 213
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Make an aluminum backing plate to lay−up the repair plies (refer
to Figure 203).
(g) Put parting film over the aluminum backing plate. Use sticky tape
to attach the backing plate to the repair area (refer to Figure
203).

WARNING: ADHESIVE FILM (MATERIAL Z−15.425, ADHESIVE FILM) IS DANGER

OUS.
(h) Cut the adhesive film (Material Z−15.425, Adhesive film) to the
size and shape of the repair area.

(i) Remove the protective sheet from the adhesive film. Apply the
adhesive film to the repair area (refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
paragraph 4.B).
(j) Get the correct pre−impregnated fabric material for the laminate
repair patch (refer to Chapter 55−12−00, Page Block 101, Figure
103).

(k) Prepare the fabric repair plies for the laminate repair patch
(refer to Chapter 51−77−11 , paragraph 4.C).

(l) Lay− up the repair plies on the repair area (refer to Figure 203
and Chapter 55−12−00, Page Block 101, Figure 103). For more data
refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C. Note that there must be
an overlap of 15 mm (0.59 in) on subsequent plies.
(m) Install the vacuum cure equipment over the laminate repair area
(refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.B).

(n) Cure the repair plies under vacuum conditions (minimum 80% vacu

um). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D for full data.
(o) After the repair plies have cured, remove the vacuum cure equip

ment from the repair area.

(p) Remove the sticky tape, aluminum backing plate and parting film
from the repair area.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS

(q) With abrasive cloth, make the repair patch smooth and level with
the adjacent skin surface. Initially use 280 grade and finish off
with 400 grade. If necessary apply porefiller (Material No.
08−008).
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(r) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(s) Repair the surface protection (refer to Chapter 51−75−12).

Page 214
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage thru Skin (Flush Repair) Zones 02 and 06

Figure 203

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb215/216
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIRS CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE REFER

TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN IN THE
INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

D. Repair of Damage to Skin Edge (Flush Repair), Zones 01, 03 and 04.

NOTE: This repair information is inactive since revision dated Jun 01/10.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.
NOTE: This repair is to be carried out with a hot−bond 180° C (356° F).
repair procedure (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E).

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbonfiber − Material Z−19.749, Epoxy Prepreg

Carbon fabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00
− Glassfabric − Material Z−19.102, Epoxy Prepreg
Glass fabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00
− Adhesive Film − Material Z−15.425, Adhesive Film
(only FM−300M.03 CYANAMID), re

fer to Chapter 51−33−00
− Porefiller − Material No. 08−008, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 204).

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11 , paragraph 4.D).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Cut and remove the damaged skin edge.

(c) Cut the skin into a regular shape and chamfer the undamaged skin
into an overlap (refer to Figure 204 for dimensions).

(d) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(e) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

Page 217
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Make an aluminum backing plate to lay−up the repair plies (refer
to Figure 204).
(g) Put parting film over the aluminium backing plate. Attach the
backing plate to the repair area with clamps (refer to Figure
204).

WARNING: ADHESIVE FILM (MATERIAL Z−15.425, ADHESIVE FILM) IS DANGER

OUS.
(h) Cut the adhesive film to the size and shape of the repair area.

(i) Remove the protective sheet from the adhesive film. Apply the
adhesive film to the repair area (refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
paragraph 4.B).
(j) Get the correct pre−impregnated fabric material for the laminate
repair patch. (refer to Chapter 55−12−00, Page Block 101, Figure
103).

(k) Prepare the fabric repair plies for the laminate repair patch
(refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C).
(l) Lay−up the repair plies on the repair area (refer to Figure 204
and Chapter 55−12−00, Page Block 101, Figure 103). For more data
refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 2.C.

(m) Install the vacuum cure equipment over the laminate repair area
(refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.B).
(n) Cure the repair plies under vacuum conditions (minimum 80% vacu

um). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D for full data.

(o) After the repair plies have cured, remove the vacuum cure equip

ment from the repair area.
(p) Remove the clamps, aluminum backing plate and parting film from
the repair area.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIAL IS DANGEROUS.

(q) Cut and trim the edge of the repair patch smooth and level with
the adjacent skin edge.

(r) With abrasive cloth, make the repair patch smooth and level with
the adjacent skin outer surface. Initially use 280 grade and
finish off with 400 grade. If necessary apply porefiller (Materi

al No. 08−008).
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(s) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(t) Repair the surface protection (refer to Chapter 51−75−12).

Page 218
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of damage to Skin Edge (Flush Repair), Zones 01, 03 and 04.
Figure 204

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb219/220
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIRS CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE REFER

TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN IN THE
INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

E. Removal/Installation of the Leading Edge protective cover.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Glass Fiber Fabric − Material No. 05−033, refer to

Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−001, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealing Compound − Material No. 09−030, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Perforated parting film −
(2) Removal of the Leading Edge protective cover.

NOTE: The removal procedure described below is the one recommended by

AIRBUS, any other alternative procedure, can be used if the
integrity of the structure under the protective cover is as

sured.
NOTE: Removal procedure for one Leading Edge section is described.
The same procedure is applicable to the rest of the sections.
CAUTION: SURFACE UNDER PROTECTIVE COVER IS MADE FROM CFRP. IT MUST
NOT BE DAMAGED.

(a) Put the Leading Edge section on a table or suitable tool, with
the protective cover in the upper position.

(b) Cut the protective cover in two parts along the Leading Edge
nose section using a radial or circular saw and suitable cross
cut disks. The saw shall be installed on a guide template tool,
as showed in Figure 205, to define the cut line. The depth of
the cut shall be 0.2 mm (0.007 in) or 0.5 mm (0.019 in) maxi

mum, depending on the protective cover thickness.

NOTE: Take into account the guide template thickness to calculate

0.2 mm (0.007 in) or 0.5 mm (0.019 in) maximum cut depth.
(c) Debond one edge of the two half parts of the protective cover
using a spatula and roll the protective cover using the tee bar
slotted tool (refer to Figure 205).

Page 221
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(d) Carefully remove the remaining sealant on the Leading Edge nose
using a spatula or suitable putty knife without causing damage to
the CFRP surface.

(e) Sand with abrasive cloth the remaining sealant. Initially, use a
150 grade and finish off with 400 grade.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(f) Clean the Leading Edge section with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(3) Installation of the Leading Edge protective cover.

NOTE: Installation procedure for the one Leading Edge section is de

scribed. The same procedure is applicable to the rest of the
sections.

(a) Preparation of the Leading Edge protective cover.

1 Put the protective cover on the Leading Edge section (refer to

Figure 206).

2 Mark out the cover thru the holes of the Leading Edge skin.
3 Check that the edge of the cover does not interfere with any
other holes in the skin and that the holes nearest the edge
are a minimum distance of 14.25 mm (0.56 in) away from it. If
there is interference or the edge distance is less than the
minimum, do the procedure that follows.
a Mark out the cover around the hole to the shape shown in the
examples in Figure 206. Use a radius of 12 mm (0.47 in) for
all curves.

b Make sure the edge distance is a minimum of 14.25 mm (0.56

in).

c Remove the cover and cut it to the shape(s) marked out. De

burr the edges.

d Protect the cut edges of the protective cover (refer to

Chapter 51−21−11 for application of protective treatment to
metal parts).

4 Use a 5.7 mm (0.224 in) drill and drill out the marked out
positions. Deburr the drilled out holes.

5 Countersink the holes to 100° ± 1° (refer to Figure 206).

6 Protect the holes of the protective cover (refer to Chapter

51−21−11, for application of protective treatment to metal
parts).

Page 222
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

7 Repeat steps 1 thru 6 for the other covers of the Leading

Edge.
(b) Installation of the Leading Edge protective cover.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

1 Clean and degrease the Leading Edge area where the protective
cover will be installed with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
2 Mask off the area.

3 Rub down the masked off area with abrasive cloth grade 150
until the paint has lost its shine.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

4 Clean the rubbed down area with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−001) IS DANGEROUS.

5 Mix the sealant (Material No. 09−001) in accordance with the

manufacturer’s instructions.

6 Apply the sealant (Material No. 09−001) to the masked off area
with a spatula. Make sure the sealant is applied uniformly and
is as thin as possible.

NOTE: This procedure describes a curing method that uses a

vacuum bag. For alternative curing methods (including
accelerated curing) refer to Chapter 51−77−11.

7 Put the protective cover in position on the Leading Edge skin.

8 Put perforated parting film over the protective cover and the
joints between the protective cover and the Leading Edge skin.
9 Put a vacuum bag with two vacuum pipes (one at either end)
over the cover and joint. Make sure the vacuum tubes do not
touch the protective cover by isolating them from the cover
with glass fiber or six layer of bleeder cloth.
WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−030) IS DANGEROUS.

10 Seal the vacuum bag and vacuum tubes with extruded sealing
compound (Material No. 09−030).

11 Remove the air and maintain a vacuum of 600 mm Hg for a

minimum of 16 hours.
12 Remove the vacuum bag and any excess sealant from the area.

Page 223
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

13 Allow the sealant to cure (refer to the manufacturer’s instruc

tions for the curing times).
(4) Alternative Installation Procedure of the Leading Edge Protective
cover.

NOTE: Installation procedure for one Leading Edge section is de

scribed. The same procedure is applicable to the rest of the
sections.
(a) Preparation of the Leading Edge protective cover.

1 Put the protective cover on the Leading Edge section (refer to

Figure 206).

2 Mark out the cover thru the holes of the Leading Edge skin.
3 Check that the edge of the cover does not interfere with any
other holes in the skin and that the holes nearest the edge
are a minimum distance of 14.25 mm. (0.56 in) away from it. If
there is interference or the edge distance is less than the
minimum, do the procedure that follows.
a Mark out the cover around the hole to the shape shown in the
examples in Figure 206. Use a radius of 12 mm (0.47 in) for
all curves.

b Make sure the edge distance is a minimum of 14.25 mm (0.56

in).
c Remove the cover and cut it to the shape(s) marked out. De

burr the edges.

d Protect the cut edges of the protective cover (refer to

Chapter 51−21−11 for application of protective treatment to
metal parts).
4 Put the protective cover on the Leading Edge and mark its
location.

5 Make locating holes in the cover by drilling out the fastener

position nearest the edge with a 3.2 mm (0.120 in) drill.
(b) Installation of the Leading Edge protective cover.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

1 Clean and degrease The Leading Edge area where the protective
cover will be installed with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
2 Mask off the area.

3 Rub down the masked off area with abrasive cloth grade 150 un

til the paint has lost its shine.

Page 224
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

4 Clean the rubbed down area with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−001) IS DANGEROUS.

5 Mix the sealant (Material No. 09−001) in accordance with the

manufacturer’s instructions.

6 Apply the sealant (Material No. 09−001) to the masked off area
with a spatula. Make sure the sealant as applied uniformly and
is as thin as possible.

NOTE: This procedure describes a curing method that uses a

vacuum bag. For alternative curing methods (including
accelerated curing) refer to Chapter 51−77−11.

7 Put the protective cover in position on the Leading Edge skin.

8 Install suitable hardware thru the locating holes made in step

5.E.(4)(a)5 that will allow the cover to slide slightly during
the cure and will keep the cover in position.
9 Put perforated parting film over the protective cover and the
joints between the protective cover and the Leading Edge skin.

10 Put a vacuum bag with two vacuum pipes (one at either end)
over the cover and joint. Make sure the vacuum tubes do not
touch the protective cover by isolating them from the cover
with glass fiber or six layer of bleeder cloth.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−030) IS DANGEROUS.

11 Seal the vacuum bag and vacuum tubes with extruded sealing
compound (Material No. 09−030).
12 Remove the air and maintain a vacuum of 600 mm Hg for a
minimum of 16 hours.

13 Remove the vacuum bag and any excess sealant from the area.

14 Allow the sealant to cure (refer to the manufacturer’s

instructions for the curing times).

15 Use a 5.7 mm (0.224 in) drill and back drill the marked out
positions and open out the location holes. Deburr the drilled
out holes.

16 Countersink the holes to 100° ± 1° (refer to Figure 206).

17 Protect the holes of the protective cover (refer to Chapter
51−21−11 for application of protective treatment to metal
parts).

Page 225
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Jun 01/10
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Removal Tools
Figure 205 (sheet 1)

Page 226
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Leading Edge Protective Cover Removal

Figure 205 (sheet 2)

Page 227
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Leading Edge Protective Cover Installation

Figure 206 (sheet 1)

Page 228
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Leading Edge Protective Cover Installation

Figure 206 (sheet 2)

Page 229
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 203.
F. Removal of Damage on Skin Plate with Metallic Patch.

NOTE: The following repair is valid for the THS Leading Edge Skin Plate,
out of the area of adhesive tape or stainless steel cover sheet.

NOTE: Before you repair the damage structure, you must do a damage eval

uation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.
NOTE: For repairable zone definition, refer to Chapter 55−12−00, Page
Block 101.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 203
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information Table in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 230
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THS LEADING EDGE IS MADE FROM CFRP. IT MUST BE HANDLE WITH
CARE.
(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Patch
2 Shim
− Perforated parting film
− Polyurethane Primer
− Polyurethane Finish Paint
− Adhesive
− Glass Fiber Fabric
− Thickening Agent
− Interfay Sealant
− Cleaning Agent
− Varnish
(2) Repair instructions (refer to Figure 207).
1 Refer to Figure 207
1 Refer to Figure 207
−
− Material No. 16−001B, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−051, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−033, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−057 or 05−067,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 07−001B, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Put the damaged Leading Edge section on a table or suitable tool
with the protective cover in the upper position.

(b) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Cut and remove the damaged plies.

(d) Cut and smooth the repair area into a regular shape and chamfer
the undamaged plies into a overlap (refer to Figure 207 for
dimensions).

(e) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(f) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

Page 231
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(g) Get the correct material to make the repair patch (refer to Fig

ure 207 for material information).
(h) Make the metal repair patch to the correct shape and dimensions
for the repair.

(i) If the repair patch installation interferes with one or more

Leading Edge ribs, then remove the necessary rivets of the rib
installation.
(j) Put the repair patch in its correct repair position on the Lead

ing Edge section.

(k) Mark the repair patch thru the vacated rib fastener holes (only
if step (i) is applicable).
(l) Mark the new fastener positions on the repair patch.

NOTE: Two fasteners rows minimum around the damage.

(m) Remove the repair patch and pilot drill all the previously marked
fastener holes on the repair patch.
(n) Put the repair patch in its repair position on the Leading Edge
section and secure with clamps.

(o) Transfer drill all the previous drilled holes on the repair patch
to the Leading Edge skin plate.

(p) Measure the depth of the damage blend out.

NOTE: If depth of blend is less than 0.5 mm (0.019 in) liquid
shim shall be used. If depth of blend out is greater than
0.5 mm (0.019 in) solid shim shall be used.

NOTE: Do the steps (q) thru (aa) only if blend out depth is
greater than 0.5 mm (0.019 in) and solid shim is to be
used.

(q) Make the solid film.

1 Get the correct material to make the solid shim (2024 T3).

2 Make the solid shim to the correct shape and dimensions for
the damage blend out.

WARNING: POLYURETHANE PRIMER (MATERIAL NO. 16−001B) AND POLYURE

THANE FINISH PAINT (MATERIAL NO. 16−018C) ARE DANGEROUS.

3 Apply the correct surface treatment to the solid shim (chromic

acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer (Material No.
16−001B) followed by a top coat of polyurethane finish paint
(material No. 16−018C)).

Page 232
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(r) Cut a ply of dry glass fabric (Material No. 05−033).

NOTE: Glass fabric dimensions shall exceed 15 mm (0.590 in)

minimum the solid shim contour.

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) IS DANGEROUS.

(s) Prepare the adhesive (Material No. 08−051), refer to Chapter

51−77−11, paragraph 4.A and 6.B for data.

(t) Apply the adhesive (Material No. 08−051) to the blend out area.
(u) Wet lay−up the glass fabric ply (Material No. 05−033) in its
correct position.

(v) Install the vacuum cure equipment over the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.).
(w) Cure the glass fabric ply under vacuum conditions (minimum
absolute pressure inside the bag: 0.2 bar (2.9 psi)) and one
hour to 93° C (199.4° F).

(x) On completion of the cure cycle, remove the vacuum cure equipment
from the repair area.
WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(y) Apply interfay sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the solid shim.

(z) Put the solid shim in its correct position on the repair area
and secure with clamps.
(aa)Let the sealant cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instruction leaflet
for cure time.

NOTE: Do the steps (ab) thru (ag) only if blend out depth is
less than 0.5 mm (0.019 in) and liquid shim is to be used.
WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) AND THICKENING AGENT
(MATERIAL NO. 05−057 OR NO. 05−067) ARE DANGEROUS.

(ab) Prepare and mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−051) with the
thickening agent (Material No. 05−057 or 05−067).

(ac) Apply the mixed compound to the blend out area.

(ad) Cover the repair area with parting film.

(ae) Put the repair patch (or any adequate plate) in position and
secure with screw pins.

(af) Let the adhesive cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instruction

leaflet for cure time.

Page 233
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ag) On completion of the cure cycle, remove the repair patch (or
adequate plate) from the repair area and remove the parting film.
(ah) Put the repair patch in its correct position on the Leading
Edge section and secure with screw pins.

CAUTION: MAKE CERTAIN WHEN DRILLING, THAT THE HOLES ARE PERPENDICULAR
TO THE SURFACE.

(ai)Transfer drill all the previously drilled holes on the repair

patch to the Leading Edge skin plate.

(aj) Drill all the fastener holes full size for the fasteners.

(ak) Remove the screw pins and the repair patch from the repair
area.
(al) Countersink the outer side of the repair patch fastener holes.

(am) Deburr the fastener holes from the repair patch and the Leading
Edge skin plate.

(an) Remove the waste material from the repair area and the repair
patch with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(ao) Clean the repair area and the repair patch with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(ap) Coat the contact surfaces of the repair patch and Leading Edge
skin plate with interfay sealant (Material No. 09−005).

(aq) Put the repair patch in its correct position on the repair area
and secure with screw pins.
WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(ar) Remove each screw pin in turn and wet install the correct
fastener with sealant (Material No. 09−005) in the vacated screw
pin hole.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(as) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(at) Let the sealant cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions

leaflet for cure time.

Page 234
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: VARNISH (MATERIAL NO. 07−001B) IS DANGEROUS.

(au) Protect the sealant around the repair patch with varnish (Mate

rial No. 07−001B).

(av) Let the varnish cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions leaf

let for cure time.

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb235/236
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of damage on Skin Plate with Metallic Patch.

Figure 207

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb237/238
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 204.
G. Repair of Damage on Antierosion Sheet/Tape Zone with Metallic Patch.

NOTE: The following repair is valid for the THS Leading Edge into the
area of the adhesive tape or stainless steel cover sheet.

NOTE: Before you repair the damage structure, you must do a damage eval

uation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.
NOTE: For repairable zone definition, refer to Chapter 55−12−00, Page
Block 101.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 204
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information Table in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 239
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THS LEADING EDGE IS MADE FROM CFRP. IT MUST BE HANDLE WITH
CARE.
(1) Repair Materials.

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Patch
2 Shim
− Perforated parting film
− Polyurethane Primer
− Polyurethane Finish Paint
− Adhesive
− Glass Fiber Fabric
− Thickening Agent
− Interfay Sealant
− Cleaning Agent
− Varnish
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 208).
1 Refer to Figure 208
1 Refer to Figure 208
−
− Material No. 16−001B, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−051, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−033, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−057 or 05−067,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 07−001B, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Put the damaged Leading Edge section on a table or suitable tool
with the protective cover in the upper position.

(b) Remove the protective cover:

1 If the protective cover is made from a metal sheet, refer to

paragraph 5.E.(2) for removal instructions.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

2 If the protective cover is made from adhesive tape, then peel

it and clean the Leading Edge section with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

(c) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Cut and remove the damaged plies.

Page 240
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(e) Cut and smooth the repair area into a regular shape and chamfer
the undamaged plies into an overlap (refer to Figure 208 for di

mensions).

(f) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(g) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
(h) Get the correct material to make the repair patch (refer to Fig

ure 208 for material information).

(i) Make the metal repair patch to the correct shape and dimension
for the repair.

NOTE: Before making the metal repair patch, make sure the fasten

er collars will have a good seat. If not, the repair patch
must be enlarged to line up with the two first fasteners
of the rib installation.

NOTE: If the edge of the repair patch is in an area of Leading

Edge with a tight curvature, it is recommended that patch
is enlarged to line up with the two first fasteners of the
rib installation.

(j) If repair patch installation interferes with one or more Leading

Edge ribs, then remove the necessary rivets of the rib installa

tion.
(k) Put the repair patch in its correct repair position on the Lead

ing Edge section.

(l) Mark the repair patch thru the vacated rib fastener holes (only
if step (j) is applicable).
(m) Mark the new fastener positions on the repair patch.

NOTE: Two fasteners rows minimum around the damage.

(n) Pilot drill all the previously marked fastener holes on the re

pair patch.
(o) Measure the depth of the damage blend out.

NOTE: If depth of blend out is less than 0.5 mm (0.019 in) liq

uid shim shall be used. If depth of blend out is greater
than 0.5 mm (0.019 in) solid shim shall be used.

NOTE: Do the steps (p) thru (z) only if blend out depth is
greater than 0.5 mm (0.019 in) and solid shim is to be
used.

(p) Make the solid shim.

Page 241
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

1 Get the correct material to make the solid shim (2024 T3).

2 Make the solid shim to the correct shape and dimensions for
the damage blend out.

WARNING: POLYURETHANE PRIMER (MATERIAL NO. 16−001B) AND

POLYURETHANE FINISH PAINT (MATERIAL NO. 16−018C) ARE
DANGEROUS.

3 Apply the correct surface treatment to the solid shim (chromic

acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer (Material No.
16−001B) followed by a top coat of polyurethane finish paint
(Material No. 16−018C)).

(q) Cut a ply of dry glass fabric (Material No. 05−033).

NOTE: Glass fabric dimensions shall exceed 15 mm (0.590 in)
minimum the solid shim contour.

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) IS DANGEROUS.

(r) Prepare the adhesive (Material No. 08−051), refer to Chapter

51−77−11, paragraph 4.A and 6.B for data.
(s) Apply the adhesive (Material No. 08−051) to the blend out area.

(t) Wet lay−up the glass fabric ply (Material No. 05−033) in its
correct position.

(u) Install the vacuum cure equipment over the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D).

(v) Cure the glass fabric ply under vacuum conditions (minimum
absolute pressure inside the bag: 0.2 bar (2.9 psi)) and one
hour to 93° C (199.4° F).

(w) On completion of the cure cycle, remove the vacuum cure equipment
from the repair area.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(x) Apply interfay sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the solid shim.

(y) Put the solid shim in its correct position on the repair area
and secure with clamps.

(z) Let the sealant cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instruction leaflet

for cure time.

NOTE: Do the steps (aa) thru (af) only if blend out depth is
less than 0.5 mm (0.019 in) and liquid shim is to be used.

Page 242
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) AND THICKENING AGENT

(MATERIAL NO. 05−057 OR NO. 05−067) ARE DANGEROUS.
(aa)Prepare and mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−051) with the
thickening agent (Material No. 05−057 or 05−067).

(ab)Apply the mixed compound to the blend out area.

(ac)Cover the repair area with parting film.

(ad)Put the repair patch (or any adequate plate) in position and
secure with clamps.

(ae)Let the adhesive cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instruction

leaflet for cure time.

(af)On completion of the cure cycle, remove the repair patch (or
adequate plate) from the repair area and remove the parting film.

(ag)Install a new metallic protective cover (refer to paragraph

5.E.(3)).

NOTE: As an alternative, protective adhesive tape can be installed

instead of the metallic protective cover. If so, install
the repair patch (steps (ah) to (av) and then install the
adhesive tape (steps (aw) to (az)).

(ah)Put the repair patch in its correct position on the Leading Edge
section and secure with clamps.
CAUTION: MAKE CERTAIN WHEN DRILLING, THAT THE HOLES ARE PERPENDICULAR
TO THE SURFACE.

(ai)Transfer drill all the previously drilled holes on the repair

patch to the protective cover (if installed) and Leading Edge
skin Plate.
(aj)Drill all the fastener holes full size for the fasteners.

(ak)Remove the clamps/screws pins and the repair patch from the
repair area.

(al)Countersink the outer side of the repair patch fastener holes.

(am)Deburr the fastener holes from the repair patch and the Leading
Edge skin plate.

(an)Remove the waste material from the repair area and the repair
patch with a vacuum cleaner.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(ao)Clean the repair area and the repair patch with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

Page 243
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(ap)Coat the contact surfaces of the repair patch and Leading Edge
skin plate with interfay sealant (Material No. 09−005).

(aq)Put the repair patch in its correct position on the repair area
and secure with screw pins.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(ar)Remove each screw pin in turn and wet install the correct fas

tener with sealant (Material No. 09−005) in the vacated screw pin
hole.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(as)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

(at)Let the sealant cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instruction leaflet

for cure time.

WARNING: VARNISH (MATERIAL NO. 07−001B) IS DANGEROUS.

(au)Protect the sealant around the repair patch with varnish (Materi

al No. 07−001B).

(av)Let the sealant cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instruction leaflet

for cure time.

NOTE: The following instructions are applicable when the adhesive

protective cover is to be installed.

(aw)Cut a piece of protective adhesive tape to the adequate length

for the leading edge section.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(ax)Clean the Leading Edge section with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(ay)Remove the protective sheet from the adhesive tape.

(az)Install the protective adhesive tape on the Leading Edge section

in its correct position.

Page 244
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage on Antierosion Sheet/Tape Zone with Metallic Patch

Figure 208

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb245/246
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 205.
H. Repair of Damage on Antierosion Sheet/Tape Zone and Rib Flange with Me

tallic Patch

NOTE: The following repair is valid for the THS Leading Edge into the
area of the adhesive tape or stainless steel cover sheet, affecting
the rib flange.
NOTE: Before you repair the damage structure, you must do a damage eval

uation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: For repairable zone definition, refer to Chapter 55−12−00, Page

Block 101.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 205
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information Table in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 247
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials.

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Patch 1 Refer to Figure 209

2 Repair Angle 1 Refer to Figure 209
3 Shim 1 Refer to Figure 209
4 Shim 1 Refer to Figure 209
− Perforated parting film −
− Polyurethane Primer − Material No. 16−001B, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane Finish Paint − Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Adhesive − Material No. 08−051, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Glass Fiber Fabric − Material No. 05−033, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Thickening Agent − Material No. 05−057 or 05−067,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Interfay Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Varnish − Material No. 07−001B, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 209).

(a) Put the damaged Leading Edge section on a table or suitable tool
with the protective cover in the upper position.

(b) Remove the protective cover:

1 If the protective cover is made from a metal sheet, refer to
paragraph 5.E.(2) for removal instructions.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

2 If the protective cover is made from adhesive tape, then peel

it and clean the Leading Edge section with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

(c) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D).

(d) Remove the necessary rivets of the affected rib flange.

Page 248
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(e) Cut out the damaged area of the Leading Edge skin plate into a
regular shape and chamfer the undamaged plies into an overlap
(refer to figure 209 for dimensions).

(f) Cut and smooth the damaged plies of the rib flange into a
regular shape.

NOTE: If necessary, cut out the rib flange with maximum depth up
to the end of the radius (refer to Figure 209).

(g) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(h) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
(i) Get the correct material to make the machined repair angle
(Material 7075 T7351).

(j) Make the machined repair angle to the correct shape and
dimensions for the repair (refer to Figure 209).
NOTE: To define the repair angle dimensions, make sure that
minimum of 3 rivets are installed beyond the blend out in
the rib flange.

(k) Put the repair angle in its correct position on the rib flange
and secure with clamps.
(l) Mark the repair angle thru the existing fastener holes in the
rib flange.

(m) Remove the clamps and the repair angle from the repair area.

(n) Mark the rest of the fastener holes on the repair angle.
(o) Predrill all the fastener holes on the repair angle.

(p) Put the repair angle in its correct position on the rib flange
and secure with screw pins and clamps.

(q) Transfer drill all the fastener holes thru the repair angle to
the rib flange/web and skin plate.
(r) Drill to final diameter for the fasteners only the fastener holes
located in the rib web.

(s) Remove the screw pins and the repair angle from the repair area.

(t) Deburr the fastener holes from the repair angle and the rib web.
(u) Remove the waste material from the repair area and the repair
angle with a vacuum cleaner.

Page 249
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(v) Clean the repair angle and the rib web with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

(w) Install the repair angle on the rib web.

1 Cut a ply of dry glass fabric (Material No. 05−033).

NOTE: Glass fabric dimensions shall exceed 15 mm (0.590 in)

minimum the repair angle contour.

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) IS DANGEROUS.

2 Prepare the adhesive (Material No. 08−051), refer to Chapter

51−77−11, paragraph 4.A and 6.B for data.

3 Apply the adhesive (Material No. 08−051) to the rib web/flange

area where the repair angle is to be installed.

4 Wet lay−up the glass fabric ply (Material No. 05−033) in its
correct position.

5 Install the vacuum cure equipment over the repair area (refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D).

6 Cure the glass fabric ply under vacuum conditions (minimum

absolute pressure inside the bag: 0.2 bar (2.9 psi)) and one
hour to 93° C (199.4° F).

7 On completion of the cure cycle, remove the vacuum cure

equipment from the repair area.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

8 Clean the repair angle with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

9 Apply sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the repair angle in its

contact surfaces with the rib.

10 Put the repair angle in its correct position on the rib and
secure with screw pins.
WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

11 Remove each screw pin in turn ad wet install the correct

fastener with sealant (Material No. 09−005) in the vacated
screw pin hole, only for the rib web fastener holes.

Page 250
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

12 Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

13 Let the sealant cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instruction

leaflet for cure time.

(x) Measure the depth of the rib flange blend cut.

NOTE: If depth of blend out is less than 0.5 mm (0.019 in)
liquid shim shall be used. If depth of blend out is
greater than 0.5 mm (0.019 in) solid shim (Item 3) shall
be used.

NOTE: Do the steps (y) and (z) only if blend out depth is
greater than 0.5 mm (0.019 in) and solid shim (Item 3) is
to be used.

(y) Make the solid shim (Item 3) for the rib flange blend out.

1 Get the correct material to make the solid shim (Item

3)(material 2024 T3).
2 Make the solid shim (Item 3) to the correct shape and
dimensions for the rib flange blend out.

WARNING: POLYURETHANE PRIMER (MATERIAL NO. 16−001B) AND

POLYURETHANE FINISH PAINT (MATERIAL NO. 16−018C) ARE
DANGEROUS.
3 Apply the correct surface treatment to the solid shim (Item 3)
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer (Material
No. 16−001B) followed by a top coat of polyurethane finish
paint (Material No. 16−018C)).
(z) Install the solid shim (Item 3) for rib flange blend out.

1 Cut a ply of dry glass fabric (Material No. 05−033).

NOTE: Glass fabric dimensions shall exceed 15 mm (0.590 in)

minimum the solid shim (Item 3) contour.

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) IS DANGEROUS.

2 Prepare the adhesive (Material No. 08−051), refer to Chapter
51−77−11 paragraph 4.A and 6.B for data.

3 Apply the adhesive (Material No. 08−051) to the blend out area.

4 Wet lay−up the glass fabric ply (Material No. 05−033) in its
correct position.

5 Install the vacuum cure equipment over the repair area (refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D).

Page 251
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

6 Cure the glass fabric ply under vacuum conditions (minimum

absolute pressure inside the bag: 0.2 bar (2.9 psi)) and one
hour to 93° C (199.4° F).

7 On completion of the cure cycle, remove the vacuum cure

equipment from the repair area.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

8 Apply sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the solid shim (Item 3).
9 Put the solid shim (Item 3) in its correct position on the rib
flange and secure with clamps.

10 Let the sealant cure, refer to manufacturer’s instruction

leaflet for cure time.
NOTE: Do the steps (aa) thru (af) only if blend out depth is
less than 0.5 mm (0.019 in) and liquid shim is to be
used.

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) AND THICKENING AGENT

(MATERIAL NO. 05−057 OR NO. 05−067) ARE DANGEROUS.
(aa)Prepare and mix the adhesive (Material No.08−051) with the
thickening agent (Material No. 05−057 or No. 05−067).

(ab)Apply the mixed compound to the rib flange out area.

(ac)Cover the rib flange blend out with parting film.

(ad)Put any adequate caul plate in position and secure with clamps.

NOTE: Caul plate must follow the Leading Edge skin contour.

(ae) Let the adhesive cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instruction

leaflet for cure time.
(af)On completion of the cure cycle, remove the caul plate from the
repair area and remove the parting film.

(ag)Get the correct material to make the repair patch (refer to

Figure 209 for material information).

Page 252
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ah)Make the metal repair patch to the correct shape and dimension
for the repair.
NOTE: Before making the metal repair patch, make sure the fasten

er collars will have a good seat. If not, the repair patch
must be enlarged to line up with the two first fasteners
of the rib installation.

NOTE: If the edge metal of the repair patch is in an area of

Leading Edge with a tight curvature, it is recommended that
patch is enlarged to line up with the two first fasteners
of the rib installation.

(ai)If repair patch installation interferes with one or more Leading

Edge ribs, then remove the necessary rivets of the rib installa

tion.

(aj)Put the repair patch in its correct repair position on the Lead

ing Edge section.

(ak)Mark the repair patch thru the vacated rib fastener holes (only
if step (ai) is applicable).
(al)Mark the new fasteners positions on the repair patch.

NOTE: Two fasteners rows minimum around the damage.

(am)Pilot drill all the previously marked fastener holes on the re

pair patch.
(an)Measure the depth of the damage blend out.

NOTE: If depth of blend out is less than 0.5 mm (0.019 in) liq

uid shim shall be used. If depth of blend out is greater
than 0.5 mm (0.019 in), solid shim shall be used.
NOTE: Do the steps (ao) thru (ay) only if blend out depth is
greater than 0.5 mm (0.019 in) and solid shim is to be
used.

(ao)Make the solid shim (Item 4).

1 Get the correct material to make the solid shim (Item 4) (2024
T3).

2 Make the solid shim (Item 4) to the correct shape and dimen

sions for the damage blend out.

WARNING: POLYURETHANE PRIMER (MATERIAL NO. 16−001B) AND POLYURE

THANE FINISH PAINT (MATERIAL NO. 16−018C) ARE DANGEROUS.
3 Apply the correct surface treatment to the solid shim (Item 4)
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer (Material
No. 16−001B) followed by a top coat of polyurethane finish
paint (Material No. 16−018C)).

Page 253
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ap)Cut a ply of dry glass fabric (Material No. 05−033).

NOTE: Glass fabric dimensions shall exceed 15 mm (0.590 in) mini

mum the solid shim (Item 4) contour.

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) IS DANGEROUS.

(aq)Prepare the adhesive (Material No. 08−051), refer to Chapter

51−77−11, paragraph 4.A and 6.B for data.

(ar)Apply the adhesive (Material No. 08−051) to the blend out area.
(as)Wet lay−up the glass fabric ply (Material No. 05−033) in its
correct position.

(at)Install the vacuum cure equipment over the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D).
(au)Cure the glass fabric ply under vacuum conditions (minimum abso

lute pressure inside the bag: 0.2 bar (2.9 psi)) and one hour to
93°C.

(av)On completion of the cure cycle, remove the vacuum cure equipment
from the repair area.
WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(aw)Apply sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the solid shim (Item 4).

(ax)Put the solid shim (Item 4) in its correct position on the re

pair area and secure with clamps.
(ay)Let the sealant cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instruction leaflet
for cure time.

NOTE: Do the steps (az) thru (be) only if blend out depth is
less than 0.5 mm (0.019 in) and liquid shim is to be used.
WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) AND THICKENING AGENT (MATERI

AL NO. 05−057 OR NO. 05−067) ARE DANGEROUS.

(az)Prepare and mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−051) with the
thickening agent (Material No. 05−057 or No. 05−067).

(ba)Apply the mixed compound to the blend out area.

(bb)Cover the repair area with parting film.

(bc)Put the repair patch (or any adequate caul plate) in position
and secure with clamps.

(bd)Let the adhesive cure, Refer to manufacturer’s instruction leaf

let for cure time.

Page 254
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(be)On completion of the cure cycle, remove the repair patch (or ad

equate plate) from the repair area and remove the parting film.
(bf)Install a new metallic protective cover (refer to paragraph
5.E.(3)).

NOTE: As an alternative, protective adhesive tape can be installed

instead of the metallic protective cover. If so, install
the repair patch completely and then install the adhesive
protective tape.

NOTE: In order to assure a good flat seat for the repair patch
on the metallic protective cover, liquid shim must be used.

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) AND THICKENING AGENT (MATERI

AL NO. 05−057 OR NO. 05−067) ARE DANGEROUS.
(bg)Prepare and mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−051) with the
thickening agent (Material No. 05−057 or No. 05−067).

(bh)Apply the mixed compound on the Leading Edge skin only in the
area where the repair patch is to be installed.
(bi)Cover the repair area with parting film.

(bj)Put the repair patch (or any adequate caul plate) in position
and secure with clamps.

(bk)Let the adhesive cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instruction leaf

let for cure time.
(bl)On completion of the cure cycle, remove the repair patch (or ad

equate caul plate) from the repair area and remove the parting
film.

(bm)Put the repair patch in its correct position on the Leading Edge
section and secure with clamps/screw pins.

CAUTION: MAKE CERTAIN WHEN DRILLING, THAT THE HOLES ARE PERPENDICULAR
TO THE SURFACE.

(bn)Transfer drill all the previously drilled holes on the repair

patch to the protective cover (if installed) and Leading Edge
skin plate.

(bo)Drill all the fastener holes full size for the fasteners.

(bp)Remove the clamps/screw pins and the repair patch from the repair
area.
(bq)Countersink the outer side of the repair patch fastener holes.

(br)Deburr the fastener holes from the repair patch and the Leading
Edge skin plate.

Page 255
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(bs)Remove the waste material from the repair area and the repair
patch with a vacuum cleaner.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(bt)Clean the repair area and the repair patch with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(bu)Coat the contact surfaces of the repair patch, Leading Edge skin
plate and protective cover with interfay sealant (Material No.
09−005).

(bv)Put the repair patch in its correct position on the repair area
and secure with screw pins.
WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(bw)Remove each screw pin in turn and wet install the correct fas

tener with sealant (Material No. 09−005) in the vacated screw pin
hole.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(bx)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

(by)Let the sealant cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instruction leaflet

for cure time.
WARNING: VARNISH (MATERIAL NO. 07−001B) IS DANGEROUS.

(bz)Protect the sealant around the repair patch and repair angle with
varnish (Material No. 07−001B).

(ca)Let the sealant cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instruction leaflet

for cure time.
(cb)If metallic protective cover has not been installed, then cut a
piece of protective adhesive tape to the adequate length for the
Leading Edge section.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(cc)Clean the Leading Edge section with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(cd)Remove the protective sheet from the adhesive tape.

(ce)Install the protective adhesive tape on the Leading Edge section

in its correct position.

Page 256
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of damage on Antierosion Sheet/Tape and Rib Flange Zone with Metallic
Patch
Figure 209 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb257/258
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of damage on Antierosion Sheet/Tape and Rib Flange Zone with Metallic
Patch
Figure 209 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb259/260
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 206.
I. Flush Repair of Damage on Skin Plates, Zones 02 and 06.

NOTE: The following repair is valid for damage (delamination, abrasions,

holes, nicks, gouges, scratches and cracks) to the THS Leading Edge
Skin Plates, Zones 02 and 06. Refer to Chapter 55−12−11, Page
Block 101, Figure 102, for repair zones definition.
NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 206
NOTE: Refer to the paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 261
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THS LEADING EDGE IS MADE FROM CFRP. IT MUST BE HANDLE WITH
CARE.
(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Doubler 1 Refer to Figure 210 for Precured
Sheet type material data and
alternative materials.
2 Repair Filler 1 Refer to Figure 210 for Precured
Sheet type material data and
alternative materials.
− Interfay Sealant AR Material No.09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Cleaning Agent AR Material No.11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant AR Material No.09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Adhesion Promoter AR Material No.09−028C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Anti corrosion primer AR Material No.16−006B, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane primer AR Material No.16−040, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Epoxy resin AR Material No.08−051, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Two part paste adhesive AR Material No.08−078, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 210).

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D.).

(b) Make marks in a rectangular shape on the repair area for the
cutting edge.

NOTE: Be careful not to cause damage to the structure around the

repair area.
(c) Cut and remove the damaged skin.
NOTE: The minimum distance from the cut out edge to the rib fas

tener row is 72 mm (2.835 in.) and to the zones 04 and 05
edge is 42 mm (1.654 in.). Refer to Chapter 55−12−11, Page
Block 101, Figure 102, for repair zones definition.

(d) Smooth the edge of the cut out.

Page 262
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(e) Radius the corners of the cut out.

NOTE: Radius of corners 12 mm (0.47 in.).

(f) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(g) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(h) Get the correct material to make the repair doubler (item 1) and
the repair filler (item 2), refer to Figure 210 for material in

formation.

NOTE: Thickness of the repair filler to be determined on assem

bly.

(i) Radius the corners of the repair parts.

NOTE: Radius of corners 12 mm (0.47 in.).

(j) Put the repair doubler on its correct repair position on the
Leading Edge section (refer to Figure 210).

(k) Mark the fasteners position on the repair doubler.

NOTE: Two fasteners rows minimum around the damage.

(l) Put the repair filler on its correct position on the repair
area.

(m) Mark the fasteners position on the repair filler.

(n) Remove the repair parts from the repair area.

(o) Pilot drill the previously marked holes on the repair doubler and
the repair filler.

NOTE: For fastener hole and drill data Refer to Chapter 51−44−11,
for metallic structure and Chapter 51−44−21, for composite
structure.
(p) Put the repair doubler in the correct position on the repair
area.

NOTE: Be careful to put the repair part on the repair area accu

rately to make sure that the positions of the holes are
correct.

(q) Transfer drill the pilot holes of the four corners of the repair
doubler to the Leading Edge Skin Plates.

NOTE: Make sure that the repair part does not move from the cor

rect position during drilling.
(r) Install screw pins on the four corners.

Page 263
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(s) Transfer drill the remaining pilot holes of the repair doubler to
the skin.
(t) Check the contact surfaces for gaps. For gaps up to 0.5 mm (0.02
in.) apply liquid shim (Material No.08−051 or 08−078) to get a
flat surface for the repair doubler installation.

(u) Put the repair filler in the correct repair position on the re

pair area.
(v) Drill all the holes to the correct diameter for the fasteners.

(w) Remove the repair doubler and the repair filler from the repair
area.

(x) Smooth all of the fasteners holes from the repair doubler, repair
filler and repair area.

(y) Remove the unwanted material from the repair area and the repair
parts with a vacuum cleaner.

(z) Clean the repair area and the repair parts with cleaning agent
(Material No.11−003).
(aa)Apply surface protection to CFRP repair parts. Apply epoxy−poly

urethane primer (Material No.16−040).

(ab)In case of alternative metallic doubler apply the protective

treatment: etching or blasting and polyurethane primer (Material
No.16−006B).

NOTE: Lower Skin Subzones 02−A and 06−A only metallic doubler ac

ceptable. In this case apply epoxy−polyurethane primer (Ma

terial No.16−040) on the original structure surface in con

tact with the repair doubler.
(ac)In case of alternative material, it is possible to install a
precured filler made from Glass Fiber Material as (Material
No.20−009 or 20−012A or 20−012B) or to install a precured filler
made from Carbon Fiber Material as (Material No.05−091 or 05−092)
for lay−up.
(ad)Apply surface treatment (Material No.16−040) to the skin cut out.

NOTE: If necessary apply liquid shim made from adhesive paste

(Material No. 08−051 or 08−078) between repair parts up to
a maximum thickness of 0.5 mm (0.018 in.).
(ae)Apply sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the contact surfaces of
the repair doubler and the repair filler.

(af)Put the repair doubler and the repair filler in their correct
position on the repair area and attach them to the skin with
screw pins.

Page 264
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ag)Remove unwanted sealant from the repair parts with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).
(ah)Apply a bead of sealant (Material No. 09−002) in the gap between
the edge of the repair filler and the skin cut out.

(ai)Remove each screw pin and wet install the correct fasteners.

NOTE: For fastener installation and removal data, refer to Chapter

51−42−11, for metallic structure and Chapter 51−42−21, for
composite structure.

NOTE: For fastener oversize and alternative data refer to Chapter

51−43−00.

(aj)Remove unwanted sealant from the repair area with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

(ak)Apply a bead of sealant (Material No. 09−002) plus adhesion pro

moter (Material No. 09−028C) to the contour of the repair dou

bler.

(al)Remove unwanted sealant from the repair area with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

(am)Let the sealants to cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions

for cure data.

(an)Restore surface protection as per Chapter 51−75−12.

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb265/266
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Flush Repair of Damage on Skin Plates − Zones 02 and 06

Figure 210 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb267/268
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Flush Repair of Damage on Skin Plates − Zones 02 and 06

Figure 210 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb269/270
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 207.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS APPLICABLE ONLY IF THE RIBS ARE FREE OF DAMAGE.

J. External Doubler Repair of Damage on Skin Plates , Zones 02 and 06.

NOTE: The following repair is valid for damage (delamination, abrasions,

holes, nicks, gouges, scratches and cracks) to the THS Leading Edge
Skin Panels, Zones 02 and 06. Refer to Chapter 55−12−11, Page
Block 101, Figure 102, for repair zones definition.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 207
NOTE: Refer to the paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 271
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THS LEADING EDGE IS MADE FROM CFRP. IT MUST BE HANDLE WITH
CARE.
(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Doubler 1 Refer to Figure 211 for Precured
Sheet type material data and
alternative materials.
2 Repair Filler 1 Refer to Figure 211 for Precured
Sheet type material data and
alternative materials.
− Interfay Sealant AR Material No.09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant AR Material No.09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Adhesion Promoter AR Material No.09−028C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Anti corrosion primer AR Material No.16−006B, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane primer AR Material No.16−040, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Epoxy resin AR Material No.08−051, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Two part paste adhesive AR Material No.08−078, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Cleaning Agent AR Material No.11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 211).

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D.).

(b) Make marks in a rectangular shape on the repair area for the
cutting edge.

NOTE: Be careful not to cause damage to the structure around the

repair area.
(c) Cut and remove the damaged skin.
(d) Smooth the edge of the cut out.

(e) Radius the corners of the cut out.

NOTE: Radius of corners 12 mm (0.47 in.).

(f) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

Page 272
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(g) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(h) Get the correct material to make the repair doubler (item 1) and
the repair filler (item 2), refer to Figure 211 for material in

formation.

NOTE: Thickness of the repair filler to be determined on assem

bly.

(i) Radius the corners of the repair parts.

NOTE: Radius of corners 12 mm (0.47 in.).

(j) Remove unwanted materials from the repair parts with a vacuum
cleaner.

(k) Clean the repair parts with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
(l) Put the repair doubler in its correct repair position on the
Leading Edge section (refer to Figure 211).

(m) Make marks on the repair doubler for the existing fastener posi

tion from the rib area.
(n) Remove the repair doubler from the repair area.

(o) Pilot drill the previously marked fastener holes on the repair
doubler.

NOTE: For fastener hole and drill data refer to Chapter 51−44−11,
for metallic structure and Chapter 51−44−21, for composite
structure.

(p) Remove unwanted material from the repair doubler with a vacuum
cleaner.

(q) Put the repair filler in its correct position on the repair
area.

NOTE: Filler can be sanded down as necessary.

(r) Put the repair doubler in its correct position on the repair
area.

NOTE: Be careful to put the repair part on the repair area accu

rately to make sure that the positions of the holes are
correct.

(s) Transfer drill the pilot holes of the four corners of the repair
doubler to the skin.
(t) Install screw pins on the four corners.

(u) Transfer drill the remaining pilot holes from the repair doubler
to the repair filler and to the skin.

Page 273
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(v) Drill all of the holes to the correct diameter for the fasten

ers.
NOTE: If applicable drill original fastener holes to the correct
diameter for the oversize fasteners. For fastener oversize
and alternative data refer to Chapter 51−43−00.

(w) Remove the screw pins.

(x) Remove the repair parts from the repair area.

(y) Smooth all of the fasteners holes from the repair doubler, repair
filler and repair area.

(z) Remove the unwanted materials from the repair area and the repair
parts with a vacuum cleaner.
(aa)Clean the repair area and the repair parts with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

(ab)Apply a surface protection to CFRP repair parts. Apply epoxy−

polyurethane primer (Material No.16−040).
(ac)In case of alternative metallic doubler apply the protective
treatment: etching or blasting and polyurethane primer (Material
No.16−006B).

NOTE: Lower Skin Subzones 02−A and 06−A only metallic doubler ac

ceptable. In this case apply epoxy−polyurethane primer (Ma

terial No.16−040) on the original structure surface in con

tact with the repair doubler.

(ad)In case of alternative material, it is possible to install a

precured filler made from Glass Fiber Material (Material
No.20−009 or 20−012A or 20−012B) or to install a precured filler
made from Carbon Fiber Material (Material No.05−091 or 05−092)
for lay−up.

(ae)Apply surface treatment (Material No.16−040) to the skin cut out.

NOTE: If necessary apply liquid shim made from adhesive paste

(Material No. 08−051 or 08−078) between repair parts up to
a maximum thickness of 0.5 mm (0.018 in.).

(af)Apply a fillet of sealant (Material No.09−005) to the contact

surfaces of the repair filler and the repair area.

(ag)Put the repair filler in its correct repair position on the re

pair area.
(ah)Remove unwanted sealant from the repair parts with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

(ai)Put the repair doubler in its correct position on the repair

area and attach it to the skin with screw pins.

Page 274
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(aj)Remove each screw pin and wet install the correct fasteners with
sealant (Material No.09−005).
NOTE: For fastener installation and removal data, refer to Chapter
51−42−11, for metallic structure and Chapter 51−42−21, for
composite structure.

(ak)Remove unwanted sealant from the repair area with cleaning agent
(Material No.11−003).
(al)Apply a bead of sealant (Material No.09−002) plus adhesion pro

moter (Material No.09−028C) to the contour of the repair doubler.

(am)Remove unwanted sealant from the repair area with cleaning agent
(Material No.11−003).
(an)Let the sealants to cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions
for cure data.

(ao)Restore surface protection as per Chapter 51−75−12.

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb275/276
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

External Doubler Repair of Damage on Skin Plates − Zones 02 and 06

Figure 211 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb277/278
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

External Doubler Repair of Damage on Skin Plates − Zones 02 and 06

Figure 211 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb279/280
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 208.
K. Repair of LE Skin Plates, Zones 01, 03 and 04.

NOTE: The following repair is valid for damage (delamination, abrasions,

holes, nicks, gouges, scratches and cracks) to the THS Leading Edge
Skin Panels, Zones 01, 03 and 04. Refer to Chapter 55−12−11, Page
Block 101, Figure 102, for repair zones definition.
NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 208
NOTE: Refer to the paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 281
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THS LEADING EDGE IS MADE FROM CFRP. IT MUST BE HANDLE WITH
CARE.
(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Doubler 1 Refer to Figure 212 for Precured
Sheet type material data and
alternative materials.
2 Repair Filler 1 Refer to Figure 212 for Precured
Sheet type material data and
alternative materials.
− Interfay Sealant AR Material No.09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant AR Material No.09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Adhesion Promoter AR Material No.09−028C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Anti corrosion primer AR Material No.16−006B, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane primer AR Material No.16−040, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Epoxy resin AR Material No.08−051, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Two part paste adhesive AR Material No.08−078, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Protective varnish AR Material No.16−021, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Cleaning Agent AR Material No.11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 212).

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D.).

(b) Make marks in a rectangular shape on the repair area for the
cutting edge.

NOTE: Be careful not to cause damage to the structure around the

repair area.
(c) Cut and remove the damaged skin.

(d) Smooth the edge of the cut out.

(e) Radius the corners of the cut out.

NOTE: Radius of corners 12 mm (0.47 in.).
Page 282
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(g) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
(h) Get the correct material to make the repair doubler (item 1) and
the repair filler (item 2), refer to Figure 212 for material in

formation, and Chapter 51−71−15.

NOTE: Thickness of the repair filler to be determined on assem

bly.
(i) Radius the corners of the repair parts.

NOTE: Radius of corners 12 mm (0.47 in.).

(j) Remove unwanted materials from the repair parts with a vacuum
cleaner.
(k) Clean the repair parts with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(l) Put the repair doubler in its correct repair position on the
Leading Edge section (refer to Figure 212).

(m) Make marks on the repair doubler for the existing fastener posi

tion.

(n) Remove the repair doubler from the repair area.

(o) Pilot drill the previously marked fastener holes on the repair
doubler.
NOTE: For fastener hole and drill data Refer to Chapter 51−44−11,
for metallic structure and Chapter 51−44−21, for composite
structure.

(p) Remove unwanted material from the repair doubler with a vacuum
cleaner.
(q) Put the repair filler in its correct position on the repair
area.

NOTE: Filler can be sanded down as necessary.

(r) Put the repair doubler in its correct position on the repair
area.
NOTE: Be careful to put the repair part on the repair area accu

rately to make sure that the positions of the holes are
correct.

(s) Transfer drill the pilot holes of the four corners of the repair
doubler to the skin.

(t) Install screw pins on the four corners.

Page 283
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(u) Transfer drill the remaining pilot holes from the repair doubler
to the repair filler and to the skin.
(v) Drill all of the holes to the correct diameter for the fasten

ers.

NOTE: For fastener oversize and alternative data refer to Chapter

51−43−00.

(w) Remove the screw pins.

(x) Remove the repair parts from the repair area.

(y) Smooth all of the fasteners holes from the repair doubler, repair
filler and repair area.

(z) Remove the unwanted materials from the repair area and the repair
parts with a vacuum cleaner.

(aa)Clean the repair area and the repair parts with cleaning agent
(Material No.11−003).

(ab)Apply protective treatment for metallic doubler: etching or

blasting and polyurethane primer (Material No.16−006B).

NOTE: If necessary apply liquid shim made from adhesive paste

(Material No. 08−051 or 08−078) between skin and doubler up
to a maximum thickness of 0.5 mm (0.018 in.) to get a flat
surface to the repair doubler installation.
(ac)Apply epoxy−polyurethane primer (Material No.16−040) if the pre

cured filler is made form CFRP (preferred option).

(ad)As alternative, it is possible to install a precured repair

filler made from glass fiber material (Material No.20−009 or
20−012A or 20−012B) or to install a precured filler made from
carbon fiber material (Material No.05−091 or 05−092) to lay−up.

(ae)Apply a fillet of sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the contact

surfaces of the repair filler and the repair area.

(af)Put the repair filler in its correct repair position on the re

pair area.

(ag)Remove unwanted sealant from the repair parts with cleaning agent
(Material No.11−003).

(ah)Put the repair doubler in its correct position on the repair

area and attach it to the skin with screw pins.

Page 284
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ai)Remove each screw pin and wet install the correct fasteners with
sealant (Material No.09−005).
NOTE: For fastener installation and removal data, refer to Chapter
51−42−11, for metallic structure and Chapter 51−42−21, for
composite structure.

(aj)Remove unwanted sealant from the repair area with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).
(ak)Apply a bead of sealant (Material No.09−002) plus adhesion pro

moter (Material No.09−028C) to the contour of the repair doubler.

(al)Remove unwanted sealant from the repair parts with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).
(am)Let the sealants to cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions
for cure data.

(an)Restore surface protection as per Chapter 51−75−12.

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb285/286
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of LE Skin Plates − Zones 01, 03 and 04

Figure 212 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb287/288
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of LE Skin Plates − Zones 01, 03 and 04

Figure 212 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb289/290
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 209.
L. Hot Bond Repair of Leading Edge Panels − All Zones

NOTE: The following repair is valid for hot bond repair of the THS Lead

ing Edge panels, Zone 05. Refer to Chapter 55−12−11, Page Block
101, Figure 102, for repair zones and lay−up definition.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: If necessary, previously to the repair, remove the existing struc

ture and reinstall after the repair completion.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 209
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

CAUTION: THS LEADING EDGE IS MADE FROM CFRP. IT MUST BE HANDLE WITH
CARE.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Epoxy Carbon PREPREG
− Cleaning Agent
− Adhesive Film
− Glass Fiber Fabric
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 213).
AR Material No.05−091 or 05−092,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.20−009 or 20−012A or
20−012B, refer to Chapter
51−35−00

(a) Remove protective cover, refer to paragraph 5.E.

(b) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D.).

Page 291
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Cut and remove the damaged skin (refer to Figure 213).
NOTE: Remove only the damaged plies.

(d) Cut the skin giving it a stepped finish, refer to Figure 213 for
dimensions.

(e) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(f) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.11−003).

(g) Get the correct repair materials: CFRP repair plies (Material
No.05−091 or 05−092) and adhesive film plies (Material
No.08−042A).

(h) Prepare and cut the CFRP repair plies to the correct size and
orientation. Refer to Figure 213 for repair plies orientation and
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C. for handling data

(i) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.11−003).

(j) Install the repair plies (Material No. 05−091 or 05−092), same
number and orientation as original, plus additional repair plies
(Material No.05−091 or 05−092) and the adhesive film plies (Mate

rial No.08−042A), refer to Figure 213 and Chapter 51−77−11, para

graph 5.B.

NOTE: Before and after repair plies installation, adhesive film

plies (Material No. 08−042A) must be applied on the repair
zone.

NOTE: When damage occurs on Zone 05, install the glass fiber plie
(Material No.20−009 or Material No.20−012A or Material
No.20−012B).
(k) Cure the installed materials, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para

graphs 6.B.(6), 6.B.(9), 5.D.(1) and 5.E.

(l) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(m) Install protective cover, refer to paragraph 5.E.

(n) Restore surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 292
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hot Bond Repair of Leading Edge Panels − All Zones

Figure 213

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb293/294
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS VALID ONLY FOR LEX PART NUMBERS THAT HAVE THE REF

ERENCE PB201 IN THE ACTION OR REPAIR COLUMN, REFER TO CHAPTER
55−12−11, PAGE BLOCK 001.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 210.

M. Repair of Damage to the LE Lex − Zones 01 and 02

NOTE: The following repair is valid for outer and inner skin damage, in
Zones 01 and 02 of the THS Leading Edge interior panel (LEX). Re

fer to Chapter 55−12−11, Page Block 101, Figure 103, for repair
zones definition.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 210
NOTE: Refer to the paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 295
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THS LEADING EDGE IS MADE FROM CFRP. IT MUST BE HANDLE WITH
CARE.
(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbon Fiber PREPREG
− Cleaning Agent
− Adhesive Film
− Pore Filler
− Paste Adhesive
− PVF Film
− Glass Fabric
− Laminating Resin
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 214).
AR Material No.05−091 or 05−092,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
AR Material No.08−078, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.19−016, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.05−033, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.20−022 or 08−090 or
08−098, refer to Chapter
51−35−00

(a) If necessary, previously to the repair, remove the existing

structure and reinstall after the repair completion.

(b) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D.).
WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.
(c) Cut and remove the damaged skin (refer to Figure 214).

(d) Cut the skin as shown in Figure 214.

(e) Remove the PVF Film (Tedlar) in all areas where the repair plies
will be installed.
(f) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(g) Repair of inner skin

1 Make the backing plate. The shape and size of the backing
plate will depend on the damage shape and size.

2 Attach the backing plate to the outer skin using clamps.

Page 296
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

3 Cover exposed core cells with paste adhesive (Material

No.08−078) and cure the installed materials (6 hours at room
temperature plus 70 minutes at 70° C (158° F) or cure for 10
hours at room temperature).

NOTE: The maximum thickness of the paste adhesive to cover the

cells is 5 mm (0.197 in.). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
paragraph 6.B.(2) and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.H.
4 Prepare the carbon fiber repair plies (Material No. 05−091 or
05−092) and the adhesive film plies (Material No. 08−042A), re

fer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C.

5 Install the repair plies (Material No.05−091 or 05−092), same

number and orientation as original, plus additional repair
plies (Material No. 05−091 or 05−092) and the adhesive film
plies (Material No. 08−042A), refer to Figure 214 and Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.B.

6 Cure the installed materials, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para

graphs 6.B.(6), 6.B.(9),5.D.(1) and 5.E.
NOTE: If the total number of repair plies is more than 7, then
their installation must be performed in 2 steps:
− Step 1: A maximum of 7 repair plies must be installed and
cured.
− Step 2: The remaining repair plies must be installed and
cured. Adhesive film (Material No. 08−042A) shall be applied
to the repair zone prior to the installation of the remaining
repair plies.

7 Install the glass fiber ply (Material No. 05−033) with laminat

ing resin (Material No. 20−022 or 08−090 or 08−098) and the
repair PVF Film (Tedlar) (Material No. 19−016), refer to Chap

ter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.K.
NOTE: It is recommended to replace the original PVF Film by a
new PVF Film (Material No. 19−016) even if it is not
damaged. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.K.

(h) Repair of outer skin

1 Remove the backing plate.

2 Cover exposed core cells with paste adhesive (Material No.

08−078) and cure the installed materials (6 hours at room tem

perature plus 70 minutes at 70° C (158° F) or 10 hours at
room temperature).

NOTE: The maximum thickness of the paste adhesive to cover the

cells is 5 mm (0.197 in.). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
paragraph 6.B.(2) and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.H.

Page 297
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

3 Prepare the carbon fiber repair plies (Material No.05−091 or

05−092) and the adhesive film plies (Material No.08−042A), re

fer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C.

4 Install the repair plies (Material No.05−091 or 05−092), same

number and orientation as original, plus additional repair
plies (Material No. 05−091 or 05−092) and the adhesive film
plies (Material No.08−042A), refer to Figure 214 and Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.B.

5 Cure the installed materials, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para

graphs 6.B.(6), 6.B.(9),5.D.(1) and 5.E.

NOTE: If the total number of repair plies is more than 7, then

their installation must be performed in 2 steps:
− Step 1: A maximum of 7 repair plies must be installed and
cured.
− Step 2: The remaining repair plies must be installed and
cured. Adhesive film (Material No. 08−042A) shall be applied
to the repair zone prior to the installation of the remaining
repair plies.
(i) Inspect the repair, refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 5.

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(j) Before restoring surface protection, apply a layer of pore filler

(Material No.16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) on all areas where the
surface protection was removed, as follows:
1 Abrade the surface to be protected using scotch brite type A,
by hand or using an orbital sanding device.

2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−003).

4 Apply pore filler (Material No.16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) to

the panel surfaces with a spatula or a polishing bag, avoiding
a continuous layer.
CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let the pore filler to dry for a minimum of 2 hours at room

temperature before proceeding with the paint operation.

6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded, to improve the surface

appearance, let the pore filler to cure for at least 12 hours
at room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or cure for 7
hours and 30 minutes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding.
This will avoid damages to the product that can affect the re

pair quality.

Page 298
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(k) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.11−003).

(l) Restore surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb299/300
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to the LE Lex − Zones 01 and 02

Figure 214 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb301/302
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to the LE Lex − Zones 01 and 02

Figure 214 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb303/304
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 211.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS VALID FOR LEADING EDGES WITH SOLID LAMINATE NOSE.
REFER TO CHAPTER 55−12−11, PAGE BLOCK 001 ACTION AND REPAIR COLUMN
FOR APPLICABLE PARTS DATA.

N. Repair of Damage to the Outer Skin of the LE LEX − Zone 03, Solid Lam

inate Area
NOTE: The following repair is valid for skin damage in Zone 03, solid
laminate area, of the THS Leading Edge interior panel (LEX). Refer
to Chapter 55−12−11, Page Block 101, Figure 103, for repair zones
definition.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 211
NOTE: Refer to the paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.
CAUTION: THS LEADING EDGE IS MADE FROM CFRP. IT MUST BE HANDLE WITH
CARE.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbon Fiber PREPREG AR Material No.05−091 or 05−092,

refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Cleaning Agent AR Material No.11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Adhesive Film AR Material No.08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Pore Filler AR Material No.16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 215).

Page 305
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D.).
WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Cut and remove the damaged skin (refer to Figure 215).

NOTE: Remove only the damaged plies.

(c) Cut the skin as shown in Figure 215.

(d) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(e) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(f) Prepare the carbon fiber repair plies (Material No.05−091 or

05−092), and the adhesive film plies (Material No.08−042A), refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraphs 4.B. and 4.C.
(g) Install the repair plies (Material No.05−091 or 05−092), same
number and orientation as original, plus additional repair plies
(Material No. 05−091 or 05−092) and the adhesive film plies (Ma

terial No. 08−042A), refer to Figure 215 and Chapter 51−77−11,
paragraph 5.B.
(h) Cure the installed materials, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para

graphs 6.B.(6), 6.B.(9),5.D.(1) and 5.E.

NOTE: If the total number of repair plies is more than 7, then

their installation must be performed in 2 steps:
− Step 1: A maximum of 7 repair plies must be installed and
cured.
− Step 2: The remaining repair plies must be installed and cured.
Adhesive film (Material No.08−042A) shall be applied to the re

pair zone prior to the installation of the remaining repair
plies.
(i) Inspect the repair, refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 5.

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(j) Before restoring surface protection, apply a layer of pore filler

on all areas where the surface protection was removed, as fol

lows:
1 Abrade the surface to be protected using scotch brite type A,
by hand or using an orbital sanding device.

2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−003).

Page 306
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBID

DEN.
4 Apply pore filler (Material No.16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) to
the panel surfaces with a spatula or a polishing bag, avoiding
a continuous layer.

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let the pore filler to dry for a minimum of 2 hours at room

temperature before proceeding with the paint operation.

6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded, to improve the surface

appearance, let the pore filler to cure for at least 12 hours
at room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours and 30
minutes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding. This will
avoid damages to the product that can affect the repair quali

ty.

(k) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.11−003).

(l) Restore surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 307
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to the Outer Skin of the LE LEX − Zone 03, Solid Laminate
Area
Figure 215 (sheet 1)
Page 308
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to the Outer Skin of the LE LEX − Zone 03, Solid Laminate
Area
Figure 215 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb309/310
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 212.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS VALID ONLY FOR LEX PART NUMBERS THAT HAVE THE REF

ERENCE PB201 IN THE ACTION ON REPAIR COLUMN REFER TO CHAPTER
55−12−11, PAGE BLOCK 001 AND HAVE A SANDWICH NOSE.

O. Repair of Damage to the Outer Skin of the LE LEX − Zone 03, Sandwich
Structure Area
NOTE: The following repair is valid for skin damage, not affecting the
honeycomb core, in Zone 03, sandwich structure area, of the THS
Leading Edge interior panel (LEX). Refer to Chapter 55−12−11, Page
Block 101, Figure 103, for repair zones definition.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: This repair is valid also for liquid ingress inside sandwich struc

ture.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 212
NOTE: Refer to the paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 311
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THS LEADING EDGE IS MADE FROM CFRP. IT MUST BE HANDLED WITH
CARE.
(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbon Fiber PREPREG
− Pore Filler
− Cleaning Agent
− Adhesive Film
− Adhesive Paste
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 216).
AR Material No.05−091 or 05−092,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
AR Material No.11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.08−078, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D.).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Cut and remove the damaged skin (refer to Figure 215).

NOTE: Remove only the damaged plies.

(c) Cut the skin as shown in Figure 216.

(d) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(e) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.11−003).

(f) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure, affected

core must be systematically removed and repaired as follows:

1 When core is exposed after skin cut out, perform an initial

drying of the damaged structure, refer to Chapter 55−20−00,
paragraph 2.B.

2 Remove affected core, refer to Chapter 55−20−00, paragraph

2.C., except step B.

3 Perform a final drying, refer to Chapter 55−20−00, paragraph

2.B.

4 Replace affected core as required in the relevant repair.

Page 312
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(g) For repair up to 9 damage plies, if core is exposed, cover cells

with paste adhesive (Material No. 08−078) and cure (6 hours at
room temperature plus 70 minutes at 70° C (158° F)) or 10 hours
at room temperature). The maximum thickness of paste adhesive to
cover the cells is 5 mm (0.197 in.). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
paragraphs 6.B.(2) and 5.H.

(h) Prepare the carbon fiber repair plies (Material No.05−091 or

05−092), and the adhesive film plies (Material No.08−042A), refer
to Figure 216 and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraphs 4.B. and 4.C.

(i) Install the repair plies (Material No.05−091 or 05−092), same

number and orientation as original, plus additional repair plies
(Material No.05−091 or 05−092) and the adhesive film plies (Mate

rial No.08−042A), refer to Figure 216 and Chapter 51−77−11, para

graph 5.B.

(j) Cure the installed materials, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para

graphs 6.B.(6), 6.B.(9),5.D.(1) and 5.E.

NOTE: If the total number of repair plies is more than 7, then

their installation must be performed in 2 steps:
− Step 1: A maximum of 7 repair plies must be installed and
cured.
− Step 2: The remaining repair plies must be installed and cured.
Adhesive film (Material No. 08−042A) shall be applied to the
repair zone prior to the installation of the remaining repair
plies.
(k) Inspect the repair, refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 5.

(l) Before restoring surface protection, apply a layer of pore filler

on all areas where the surface protection was removed, as fol

lows:
1 Abrade the surface to be protected using scotch brite type A,
by hand or using an orbital sanding device.

2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.11−003).

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBID

DEN.

4 Apply pore filler (Material No.16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) to

the panel surfaces with a spatula or a polishing bag, avoiding
a continuous layer.
CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let the pore filler to dry for a minimum of 2 hours at room

temperature before proceeding with the paint operation.

Page 313
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded, to improve the surface

appearance, let the pore filler to cure for at least 12 hours
at room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours and 30
minutes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding. This will
avoid damages to the product that can affect the repair quali

ty.

(m) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.11−003).
(n) Restore surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 314
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to the Outer Skin of the LE LEX − Zone 03, Sandwich Struc

ture Area
Figure 216 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb315/316
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to the Outer Skin of the LE LEX − Zone 03, Sandwich Struc

ture Area
Figure 216 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb317/318
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to the Outer Skin of the LE LEX − Zone 03, Sandwich Struc

ture Area
Figure 216 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb319/320
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to the Outer Skin of the LE LEX − Zone 03, Sandwich Struc

ture Area
Figure 216 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb321/322
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 213.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS VALID ONLY FOR LEX PART NUMBERS THAT HAVE THE REF

ERENCE PB201 IN THE ACTION ON REPAIR COLUMN, REFER TO CHAPTER
55−12−11, PAGE BLOCK 001 HAVING A SANDWICH NOSE.

P. Repair of damage to the Outer Skin and Honeycomb Core of the LE LEX −
Zone 03, Sandwich Structure Area
NOTE: The following repair is valid for skin and honeycomb core damage
in Zone 03, sandwich structure area, of the THS Leading Edge inte

rior panel (LEX). Refer to Chapter 55−12−11, Page Block 101, Figure
103, for repair zones definition.

NOTE: This repair is valid also for liquid ingress inside sandwich struc

ture.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 213
NOTE: Refer to the paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 323
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THS LEADING EDGE IS MADE FROM CFRP. IT MUST BE HANDLE WITH
CARE.
(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbon Fiber PREPREG
− Honeycomb Core
− Pore Filler
− Glass Fiber Fabric
− Cleaning Agent
− Adhesive Film
− Adhesive Foam
− Adhesive Paste
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 217).
AR Material No.05−091 or 05−092,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.05−085, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
AR Material No.20−009 or 20−012A or
20−012B, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
AR Material No.11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.08−047C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.08−078, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D.).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Cut and remove the damaged skin (refer to Figure 217).

NOTE: Remove only the damaged plies.

(c) Cut the skin as shown in Figure 217.

(d) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure, affected

core must be systematically removed and repaired as follows:

1 When core is exposed after skin cut out, perform an initial

drying of the damaged structure, refer to Chapter 55−20−00,
paragraph 2.B.

2 Remove affected core, refer to Chapter 55−20−00, paragraph

2.C., except step B.

3 Perform a final drying, refer to Chapter 55−20−00, paragraph

2.B.

Page 324
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

4 Replace affected core as required in the relevant repair.

(e) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(f) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(g) Cut the honeycomb core (same type as original) to the original
shape.

(h) Install new core, refer to Figure 217,and Chapter 51−77−11, para

graph 5.L.(a) to 5.L.(h).

(i) Cure the installed materials at 90° C (194° F) for 4 hours, re

fer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraphs 6.B.(6), 6.B.(9), 5.D.(2) and
5.E.

(j) If the honeycomb core cell are exposed, cover cells with paste
adhesive (Material No. 08−078) and cure (6 hours at room temper

ature plus 70 minutes at 70° C (158° F) or cure for 10 hours at
room temperature).

NOTE: Maximum thickness of paste adhesive to cover the cells is 5

mm (0.197 in.), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraphs
6.B.(2) and 5.H.

(k) Prepare the carbon fiber repair plies (Material No. 05−091 or
05−092), and the adhesive film plies (Material No. 08−042A), re

fer to Figure 217 and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraphs 4.B. and 4.C.
(l) Install the repair plies (Material No.05−091 or 05−092), same
number and orientation as original, plus additional repair plies
(Material No.05−091 or 05−092) and the adhesive film plies (Mate

rial No.08−042A), refer to Figure 217 and Chapter 51−77−11, para

graph 5.B.
(m) Cure the installed materials, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para

graphs 6.B.(6), 6.B.(9),5.D.(1) and 5.E.

NOTE: If the total number of repair plies is more than 7, then

their installation must be performed in 2 steps:
− Step 1: A maximum of 7 repair plies must be installed and
cured.
− Step 2: The remaining repair plies must be installed and cured.
Adhesive film (Material No. 08−042A) shall be applied to the
repair zone prior to the installation of the remaining repair
plies.

(n) Inspect the repair, refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 5.

(o) Before restoring surface protection, apply a layer of pore filler
on all areas where the surface protection was removed, as fol

lows:

Page 325
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

1 Abrade the surface to be protected using scotch brite type A,

by hand or using an orbital sanding device.
2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.11−003).

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBID

DEN.
4 Apply pore filler (Material No.16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) to
the panel surfaces with a spatula or a polishing bag, avoiding
a continuous layer.

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let the pore filler to dry for a minimum of 2 hours at room

temperature before proceeding with the paint operation.

6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded, to improve the surface

appearance, let the pore filler to cure for at least 12 hours
at room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours and 30
minutes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding. This will
avoid damages to the product that can affect the repair quali

ty.

(p) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.11−003).

(q) Restore surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 326
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of damage to the Outer Skin and Honeycomb Core of the LE LEX − Zone
03, Sandwich Structure Area
Figure 217 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb327/328
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of damage to the Outer Skin and Honeycomb Core of the LE LEX − Zone
03, Sandwich Structure Area
Figure 217 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb329/330
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 214.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS VALID ONLY FOR LEX PARTNUMBERS THAT HAVE THE REF

ERENCE PB201 IN THE ACTION OR REPAIR COLUMN, REFER TO CHAPTER
55−12−11, PAGE BLOCK 001.

Q. Repair of Damage to the Outer or Inner Skin of the LE LEX − Zone 04,
Constant Thickness Area
NOTE: The following repair is applicable for damage to outer or inner
skin, not affecting honeycomb core, of the THS Leading Edge LEX,
Zone 04, constant thickness area. Refer to Chapter 55−12−11, Page
Block 101, Figure 103, for repair zones definition.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: This repair is valid also for liquid ingress inside sandwich struc

ture.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 214
NOTE: Refer to the paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 331
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THS LEADING EDGE IS MADE FROM CFRP. IT MUST BE HANDLE WITH
CARE.
(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbon Fiber PREPREG
− Pore Filler
− Cleaning Agent
− Adhesive Film
− Paste Adhesive
− PVF Film
− Glass Fiber Fabric
− Glass Fiber Fabric
− Laminating Resin
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 218).
AR Material No.05−091 or 05−092,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
AR Material No.11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.08−078, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.19−016, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.20−009 or 20−012A or
20−012B, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
AR Material No.05−033, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.20−022 or 08−090 or
08−098, refer to Chapter
51−35−00

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D.).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Cut and remove the damaged skin (refer to Figure 217).

NOTE: Remove only the damaged plies.

(c) Cut the skin as shown in Figure 218.

(d) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(e) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.11−003).

(f) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure, affected

core must be systematically removed and repaired as follows:

Page 332
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

1 When core is exposed after skin cut out, perform an initial

drying of the damaged structure, refer to Chapter 55−20−00,
paragraph 2.B.

2 Remove affected core, refer to Chapter 55−20−00, paragraph

2.C., except step B.

3 Perform a final drying, refer to Chapter 55−20−00, paragraph

2.B.
4 Replace affected core as required in the relevant repair.

(g) If the honeycomb core cell are exposed, cover cells with paste
adhesive (Material No.08−078) and cure (6 hours at room tempera

ture plus 70 minutes at 70° C (158° F) or cure for 10 hours at
room temperature).

NOTE: Maximum thickness of paste adhesive to cover the cells is 5

mm (0.197 in.), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraphs
6.B.(2) and 5.H.

(h) Prepare the carbon fiber repair plies (Material No.05−091 or

05−092), and the adhesive film plies (Material No.08−042A), refer
to Figure 218 and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraphs 4.B. and 4.C.

(i) For damage up to 3 plies install an additional internal ply (Ma

terial No.05−091 or 05−092),

(j) Install the repair plies (Material No.05−091 or 05−092), same

number and orientation as original, plus additional repair plies
(Material No.05−091 or 05−092) and the adhesive film plies (Mate

rial No.08−042A), refer to Figure 218 and Chapter 51−77−11, para

graph 5.B.

1 For damage up to 3 plies: install an additional internal ply

orientated at 0° and an additional external ply orientated at
45°.

2 For damage up to 4 or 5 plies: install an additional internal

ply orientated at 45° and an additional external plies, orien

tated at 0° and 45°, with adhesive paste (Material No.08−078).
(k) Cure the installed materials, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para

graphs 6.B.(6), 6.B.(9),5.D.(1) and 5.E.

NOTE: If the total number of repair plies is more than 7, then

their installation must be performed in 2 steps:
− Step 1: A maximum of 7 repair plies must be installed and
cured.
− Step 2: The remaining repair plies must be installed and cured.
Adhesive film (Material No. 08−042A) shall be applied to the
repair zone prior to the installation of the remaining repair
plies.

Page 333
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(l) Inspect the repair, refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 5.

(m) In case of inner skin, install the repair PVF Film with a glass
fiber ply (Material No. 05−033) and laminating resin (Material
No.20−022 or 08−090 or 08−098), refer to Figure 220 and Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.K.

NOTE: It is recommended to replace the original PVF Film by the

new PVF Film (Material No.19−016) even if it is not dam

aged.

(n) Before restoring surface protection, of the outer skin, apply a

layer of pore filler on all areas where the surface protection
was removed, as follows:

1 Abrade the surface to be protected using scotch brite type A,

by hand or using an orbital sanding device.

2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.11−003).

4 Apply pore filler (Material No.16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) to

the panel surfaces with a spatula or a polishing bag, avoiding
a continuous layer.

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let the pore filler to dry for a minimum of 2 hours at room

temperature before proceeding with the paint operation.

6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded, to improve the surface

appearance, let the pore filler to cure for at least 12 hours
at room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours and 30
minutes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding. This will
avoid damages to the product that can affect the repair quali

ty.

(o) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.11−003).

(p) Restore surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 334
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to the Outer or Inner Skin of the LE LEX − Zone 04,
Constant Thickness Area
Figure 218

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb335/336
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 215.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS VALID ONLY FOR LEX PART NUMBERS THAT HAVE THE REF

ERENCE PB201 IN THE ACTION OR REPAIR COLUMN, REFER TO CHAPTER
55−12−11, PAGE BLOCK 001.

R. Repair of Damage to the Outer or Inner Skin and Honeycomb Core of the
LE LEX − Zone 04, Constant Thickness Area
NOTE: This is a typical repair applicable to damage to outer or inner
skin and honeycomb core of the THS Leading Edge LEX, Zone 04,
constant thickness area. Refer to Chapter 55−12−11, Page Block 101,
Figure 103, for repair zones definition.

NOTE: This repair is valid also for liquid ingress inside sandwich struc

ture.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 215
NOTE: Refer to the paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 337
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THS LEADING EDGE IS MADE FROM CFRP. IT MUST BE HANDLE WITH
CARE.
(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbon Fiber PREPREG
− Honeycomb Core
− Pore Filler
− Cleaning Agent
− Adhesive Film
− Adhesive Foam
− Adhesive Paste
− PVF Film
− Glass Fiber Fabric
− Glass Fiber Fabric
− Laminating Resin
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 219).
AR Material No.05−091 or 05−092,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.05−085, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
AR Material No.11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.08−047C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.08−078, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.19−016, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.20−009 or 20−012A or
20−012B, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
AR Material No.05−033, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.20−022 or 08−090 or
08−098, refer to Chapter
51−35−00

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D.).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Cut and remove the damaged skin and damaged core (refer to Fig

ure 219).
NOTE: Remove only the damaged plies.

(c) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure, affected

core must be systematically removed and repaired as follows:

Page 338
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

1 When core is exposed after skin cut out, perform an initial

drying of the damaged structure, refer to Chapter 55−20−00,
paragraph 2.B.

2 Remove affected core, refer to Chapter 55−20−00, paragraph

2.C., except step B.

3 Perform a final drying, refer to Chapter 55−20−00, paragraph

2.B.
(d) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(e) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.11−003).

(f) Make the honeycomb core plug, same shape and type as original,
to the correct size for the repair.
(g) Cut two plies of adhesive film (Material No.08−042A) to the cor

rect size to be installed in the bottom of the cut out, refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 6.B.(6).

(h) Cut a ply of glass fiber fabric (Material No.20−009 or 20−012A

or 20−012B) to the correct size to be installed in the bottom of
the cut out.

(i) Prepare sufficient of adhesive foam (Material No.08−047C) to wrap

it around the core plug.

(j) Lay up the adhesive film plies and the glass fiber fabric ply in
the bottom of the cut out, refer to Figure 219.

(k) Put the honeycomb core plug, with the adhesive film wrapped
around, in the repair area.

(l) Install new core according to Figure 219. Refer to Chapter

51−77−11, paragraph 5.L.(a) to 5.L.(h).
(m) Cure installed materials at 90° C (194° F) for 4 hours, refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraphs 6.B.(5), 6.B.(6), 6.B.(9), 6.B.(11),
5.D.(2), and 5.E.

CAUTION: TAKE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE THE HONEYCOMB CORE PLUG.

(n) Remove any excess of adhesive foam.

(o) Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

(p) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.11−003).

Page 339
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(q) Cover exposed honeycomb cells with paste adhesive (Material

No.08−078) and cure (6 hours at room temperature plus 70 minutes
at 70° C (158° F) or cure for 10 hours at room temperature).

NOTE: Maximum thickness of paste adhesive to cover the cells is 5

mm (0.197 in.), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraphs
6.B.(2) and 5.H.

NOTE: Make sure that the cells are completely covered, refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.H. for core closing procedure.

(r) Get the correct repair material: CFRP repair plies (Material
No.05−091 or 05−092) and adhesive film plies (Material
No.08−042A).

(s) Prepare and cut the CFRP repair plies to the correct size and
orientation. Refer to Figure 219 for repair plies orientation and
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C. for handling data.

NOTE: Same number and orientation as original plies plus addi

tional repair plies. Refer to Chapter 55−12−11, Page Block
101 for lay up of original plies.
(t) Cut the adhesive film plies (Material No.08−042A) to suit the
size and shape of the repair, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para

graph 4.B. for handling data.

(u) Install the repair plies (Material No.05−091 or 05−092), same

number and orientation as original, plus additional repair plies
(Material No.05−091 or 05−092) and the adhesive film plies (Mate

rial No. 08−042A), refer to Figure 219 and Chapter 51−77−11,
paragraph 5.B.

(v) Cure the installed materials, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para

graphs 6.B.(6), 6.B.(9),5.D.(1) and 5.E.

NOTE: If the total number of repair plies is more than 7, then

their installation must be performed in 2 steps:
− Step 1: A maximum of 7 repair plies must be installed and
cured.
− Step 2: The remaining repair plies must be installed and cured.
Adhesive film (Material No.08−042A) shall be applied to the re

pair zone prior to the installation of the remaining repair
plies.

(w) Inspect the repair, refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 5.

(x) In case of inner skin, install the repair PVF Film with a glass
fiber ply (Material No. 05−033) and laminating resin (Material

Page 340
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

No.20−022 or 08−090 or 08−098), refer to Figure 220 and Chapter

51−77−11, paragraph 5.K.
NOTE: It is recommended to replace the original PVF Film by the
new PVF Film (Material No.19−016) even if it is not dam

aged.

(y) Before restoring surface protection, of the outer skin, apply a

layer of pore filler on all areas where the surface protection
was removed, as follows:

1 Abrade the surface to be protected using scotch brite type A,

by hand or using an orbital sanding device.

2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.11−003).

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBID

DEN.

4 Apply pore filler (Material No.16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) to

the panel surfaces with a spatula or a polishing bag, avoiding
a continuous layer.

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let the pore filler to dry for a minimum of 2 hours at room

temperature before proceeding with the paint operation.
6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded, to improve the surface
appearance, let the pore filler to cure for at least 12 hours
at room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours and 30
minutes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding. This will
avoid damages to the product that can affect the repair quali

ty.
(z) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.11−003).

(aa)Restore surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb341/342
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to the Outer or Inner Skin and Honeycomb Core of the LE
LEX − Zone 04, Constant Thickness Area
Figure 219 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb343/344
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to the Outer or Inner Skin and Honeycomb Core of the LE
LEX − Zone 04, Constant Thickness Area
Figure 219 (sheet 2)
Page 345
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 216.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS VALID ONLY FOR LEX PART NUMBERS THAT HAVE THE REF

ERENCE PB201 IN THE ACTION OR REPAIR COLUMN, REFER TO CHAPTER
55−12−11, PAGE BLOCK 001.

S. Repair of Damage to the Outer Skin, Inner Skin and Honeycomb Core of
the LE LEX − Zone 04, Constant Thickness Area
NOTE: The following repair is valid for outer skin, inner skin and hon

eycomb core damage in Zone 04, constant thickness area, of the THS
Leading Edge LEX. Refer to Chapter 55−12−11, Page Block 101, Figure
103, for repair zones definition.

NOTE: This repair is valid also for liquid ingress inside sandwich struc

ture.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 216
NOTE: Refer to the paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 346
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THS LEADING EDGE IS MADE FROM CFRP. IT MUST BE HANDLE WITH
CARE.
(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbon Fiber PREPREG
− Honeycomb Core
− Cleaning Agent
− Adhesive Film
− Pore Filler
− Paste Adhesive
− PVF Film
− Glass Fiber Fabric
− Glass Fiber Fabric
− Laminating Resin
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 220).
AR Material No.05−091 or 05−092,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.05−085, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
AR Material No.08−078, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.19−016, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.20−009 or 20−012A or
20−012B, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
AR Material No.05−033, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.20−022 or 08−090 or
08−098, refer to Chapter
51−35−00

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D.).

NOTE: Remove the PVF Film (Tedlar) in all areas where the repair
plies will be installed.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Cut and remove the damaged skin and honeycomb core (refer to
Figure 220).

NOTE: Remove only damaged plies, and damaged honeycomb core.

(c) Repair of inner skin and honeycomb core

1 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−003).

Page 347
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

2 In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure, affected

core must be systematically removed and repaired as follows:
− When core is exposed after skin cut out, perform an initial
drying of the damaged structure, refer to Chapter 55−20−00,
paragraph 2.B.
− Remove affected core, refer to Chapter 55−20−00, paragraph
2.C., except step B.
− Perform a final drying, refer to Chapter 55−20−00, paragraph
2.B.
3 Make the backing plate.

NOTE: The shape and size of the backing plate will depend on
the damage shape and size.

4 Make the honeycomb core plug, same shape and type as original,
with a thickness of 1−2 mm (0.039−0.079 in.) higher than the
panel thickness.

5 Put the new core in position and install the backing plate to
allow the core and inner skin installation. Attach the backing
plate to the repair area using clamps.
NOTE: Use a parting film between the metallic backing plate and
the structure to allow the backing plate removal after
the repair completion of the honeycomb core and inner
skin.

6 Install new core in accordance with Figure 220.

7 Sand down the repair core, to the same level as the original
core, and the inner skin giving it a stepped finish (refer to
Figure 220 for dimensions).

8 Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

9 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.11−003).

10 Cover exposed core cells with paste adhesive (Material No.

08−078) and cure the installed materials (6 hours at room tem

perature plus 70 minutes at 70° C (158° F) or cure for 10
hours at room temperature).
NOTE: The maximum thickness of the paste adhesive to cover the
cells is 5 mm (0.197 in.). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
paragraph 6.B.(2) and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.H.

11 Prepare the carbon fiber repair plies (Material No. 05−091 or

05−092) and the adhesive film plies (Material No.08−042A), re

fer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C.

12 Install the repair plies (Material No.05−091 or 05−092), same

number and orientation as original, plus additional repair
plies (Material No.05−091 or 05−092) and the adhesive film

Page 348
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

plies (Material No.08−042A), refer to Figure 220 and Chapter

51−77−11, paragraph 5.B.
13 Cure the installed materials, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para

graphs 6.B.(6), 6.B.(9),5.D.(1) and 5.E.

NOTE: If the total number of repair plies is more than 7, then

their installation must be performed in 2 steps:
− Step 1: A maximum of 7 repair plies must be installed and
cured.
− Step 2: The remaining repair plies must be installed and
cured. Adhesive film (Material No. 08−042A) shall be applied
to the repair zone prior to the installation of the remaining
repair plies.

14 Install the repair PVF Film (Material No.19−016) with a glass

fiber ply (Material No. 05−033) and laminating resin (Material
No.20−022 or 08−090 or 08−098), refer to Figure 220 and Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.K.

NOTE: It is recommended to replace the original PVF Film by the

new PVF Film (Material No. 19−016) even if it is not
damaged. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.K.

(d) Repair of outer skin

1 Remove the clamps and the metallic backing plate from the re

pair area.
2 Sand down the outer skin giving it a stepped finish (refer to
Figure 220 for dimensions).

3 Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

4 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.11−003).

5 Cover exposed core cells with paste adhesive (Material
No.08−078) and cure the installed materials (6 hours at room
temperature plus 70 minutes at 70° C (158° F) or 10 hours at
room temperature).

NOTE: The maximum thickness of the paste adhesive to cover the

cells is 5 mm (0.197 in.). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
paragraph 6.B.(2) and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.H.

6 Prepare the carbon fiber repair plies (Material No.05−091 or

05−092) and the adhesive film plies (Material No.08−042A), re

fer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C.
7 Install the repair plies (Material No.05−091 or 05−092), same
number and orientation as original, plus additional repair
plies (Material No.05−091 or 05−092) and the adhesive film
plies (Material No.08−042A), refer to Figure 220 and Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.

Page 349
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

8 Cure the installed materials, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para

graphs 6.B.(6), 6.B.(9),5.D.(1) and 5.E.
NOTE: If the total number of repair plies is more than 7, then
their installation must be performed in 2 steps:
− Step 1: A maximum of 7 repair plies must be installed and
cured.
− Step 2: The remaining repair plies must be installed and
cured. Adhesive film (Material No. 08−042A) shall be applied
to the repair zone prior to the installation of the remaining
repair plies.

(e) Inspect the repair, refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 5.

(f) Before restoring surface protection, apply a layer of pore filler

on all areas where the surface protection was removed, as fol

lows:

1 Abrade the surface to be protected using scotch brite type A,

by hand or using an orbital sanding device.

2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.11−003).

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBID

DEN.

4 Apply pore filler (Material No.16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) to

the panel surfaces with a spatula or a polishing bag, avoiding
a continuous layer.

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let the pore filler to dry for a minimum of 2 hours at room

temperature before proceeding with the paint operation.
6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded, to improve the surface
appearance, let the pore filler to cure for at least 12 hours
at room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours and 30
minutes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding. This will
avoid damages to the product that can affect the repair quali

ty.
(g) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.11−003).

(h) Restore surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 350
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to the Outer Skin, Inner Skin and Honeycomb Core of the LE
LEX − Zone 04, Constant Thickness Area
Figure 220 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb351/352
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to the Outer Skin, Inner Skin and Honeycomb Core of the LE
LEX − Zone 04, Constant Thickness Area
Figure 220 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb353/354
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 217.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS VALID ONLY FOR LEX PART NUMBERS THAT HAVE THE REF

ERENCE PB201 IN THE ACTION OR REPAIR COLUMN, REFER TO CHAPTER
55−12−11, PAGE BLOCK 001.

T. Repair of Damage to the Outer or Inner Skin of the LE LEX − Zone 04,
Chamfer Area
NOTE: This repair is applicable for damage to the outer or inner skin,
not affecting the honeycomb core, of the THS Leading Edge LEX,
Zone 04, chamfer area. Refer to Chapter 55−12−11, Page Block 101,
Figure 103, for repair zones definition.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: If necessary, previously to the repair, remove the existing struc

ture and reinstall after the repair completion.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 217
NOTE: Refer to the paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 355
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THS LEADING EDGE IS MADE FROM CFRP. IT MUST BE HANDLE WITH
CARE.
(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbon Fiber PREPREG
− Pore Filler
− Cleaning Agent
− Adhesive Film
− Adhesive Paste
− PVF Film
− Glass Fiber Fabric
− Glass Fiber Fabric
− Laminating Resin
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 221).
AR Material No.05−091 or 05−092,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
AR Material No.11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.08−078, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.19−016, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.20−009 or 20−012A or
20−012B, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
AR Material No.05−033, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.20−022 or 08−090 or
08−098, refer to Chapter
51−35−00

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D.).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Cut and remove the damaged skin (refer to Figure 220).

NOTE: Remove only the damaged plies.

(c) Cut the skin giving it a stepped finish, refer to Figure 221 for
dimensions.

(d) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(e) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.11−003).
(f) If the honeycomb core cell are exposed, cover cells with paste
adhesive (Material No.08−078) and cure (6 hours at room tempera

Page 356
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ture plus 70 minutes at 70° C (158° F) or cure for 10 hours at

room temperature).
NOTE: Maximum thickness of paste adhesive to cover the cells is 5
mm (0.197 in.), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraphs
6.B.(2) and 5.H.

(g) Get the correct repair material: CFRP repair plies (Material
No.05−091 or 05−092) and adhesive film plies (Material
No.08−042A).

(h) Prepare and cut the CFRP repair plies to the correct size and
orientation. Refer to Figure 221 for repair plies orientation and
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C. for handling data

(i) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.11−003).
(j) Install the repair plies (Material No.05−091 or 05−092), same
number and orientation as original, plus additional repair plies
(Material No.05−091 or 05−092) and the adhesive film plies (Mate

rial No.08−042A), refer to Figure 221 and Chapter 51−77−11, para

graph 5.B.
(k) Cure the installed materials, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para

graphs 5.D.(1) and 5.E.

NOTE: If the total number of repair plies is more than 7, then

their installation must be performed in 2 steps:
− Step 1: A maximum of 7 repair plies must be installed and
cured.
− Step 2: The remaining repair plies must be installed and cured.
Adhesive film (Material No. 08−042A) shall be applied to the
repair zone prior to the installation of the remaining repair
plies.
(l) Inspect the repair, refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 5.
(m) In case of inner skin, install the repair PVF Film with a glass
fiber ply (Material No. 05−033) and laminating resin (Material
No.20−022 or 08−090 or 08−098), refer to Figure 223 and Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.K.
NOTE: It is recommended to replace the original PVF Film by the
new PVF Film (Material No.19−016) even if it is not dam

aged.

(n) Before restoring surface protection, of the outer skin, apply a

layer of pore filler on all areas where the surface protection
was removed, as follows:

1 Abrade the surface to be protected using scotch brite type A,

by hand or using an orbital sanding device.

2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

Page 357
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

3 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.11−003).

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBID

DEN.

4 Apply pore filler (Material No.16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) to

the panel surfaces with a spatula or a polishing bag, avoiding
a continuous layer.

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let the pore filler to dry for a minimum of 2 hours at room
temperature before proceeding with the paint operation.

6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded, to improve the surface

appearance, let the pore filler to cure for at least 12 hours
at room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours and 30
minutes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding. This will
avoid damages to the product that can affect the repair quali

ty.

(o) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.11−003).
(p) Restore surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 358
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to the Outer or Inner Skin of the LE LEX − Zone 04, Cham

fer Area
Figure 221 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb359/360
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to the Outer or Inner Skin of the LE LEX − Zone 04, Cham

fer Area
Figure 221 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb361/362
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 218.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS VALID ONLY FOR LEX PARTNUMBERS THAT HAVE THE REF

ERENCE PB201 IN THE ACTION OR REPAIR COLUMN, REFER TO CHAPTER
55−12−11, PAGE BLOCK 001.

U. Repair of Damage to the Outer or Inner Skin and Honeycomb Core of the
LE LEX − Zone 04, Chamfer Area
NOTE: This repair is applicable for damage to the outer or inner skin
and honeycomb core of the THS Leading Edge LEX, Zone 04, Chamfer
area. Refer to Chapter 55−12−11, Page Block 101, Figure 103, for
repair zones definition.

NOTE: This repair is valid also for liquid ingress inside sandwich struc

ture.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: If necessary, previously to the repair, remove the existing struc

ture and reinstall after the repair completion.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 218
NOTE: Refer to the paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 363
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THS LEADING EDGE IS MADE FROM CFRP. IT MUST BE HANDLE WITH
CARE.
(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbon Fiber PREPREG
− Honeycomb Core
− Glass Fiber Fabric
− Pore Filler
− Cleaning Agent
− Adhesive Film
− Adhesive Foam
− Adhesive Paste
− PVF Film
− Glass Fiber Fabric
− Laminating Resin
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 222).
AR Material No.05−091 or 05−092,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.05−085, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.20−009 or 20−012A,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
AR Material No.11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.08−047C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.08−078, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.19−016, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.05−033, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.20−022 or 08−090 or
08−098, refer to Chapter
51−35−00

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D.).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Cut and remove the damaged skin and core (refer to Figure 222).

NOTE: Remove only the damaged plies and damaged core.

(c) Cut the skin giving it a stepped finish, refer to Figure 222 for
dimensions.

(d) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(e) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.11−003).

Page 364
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure, affected

core must be systematically removed and repaired as follows:
1 When core is exposed after skin cut out, perform an initial
drying of the damaged structure, refer to Chapter 55−20−00,
paragraph 2.B.

2 Remove affected core, refer to Chapter 55−20−00, paragraph

2.C., except step B.
3 Perform a final drying, refer to Chapter 55−20−00, paragraph
2.B.

(g) If the damaged core has an area less than 1000 mm
(1.55 in
):
− Remove the damaged core.
− Fill the area with adhesive paste (Material No.08−078).
− Cure the installed materials: 6 hours at room temperature plus
70 minutes at 70° C (158° F) or cure for 10 hours at room
temperature.

(h) If the damaged core has an area equal to or greater than 1000
mm
(1.55 in
) do steps 2.(i) thru 2.(k).
(i) Cover exposed honeycomb cells with paste adhesive (Material
No.08−078) and cure (6 hours at room temperature plus 70 minutes
at 70° C (158° F) or cure for 10 hours at room temperature).

NOTE: Maximum thickness of paste adhesive to cover the cells is 5

mm (0.197 in.), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraphs
6.B.(2) and 5.H.

NOTE: Make sure that the cells are completely covered, refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.H. for core closing procedure.

(j) Make the honeycomb core plug, same shape and type as original,
to the correct size for the repair. Refer to Figure 222 for di

mensions.

(k) Install and cure the new honeycomb core in accordance to Figure
222.

(l) Prepare the carbon fiber repair plies (Material No.05−091 or

05−092) and the adhesive film plies (Material No.08−042A), refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C.

(m) Install the repair plies (Material No.05−091 or 05−092), same

number and orientation as original, plus additional repair plies
(Material No.05−091 or 05−092) and the adhesive film plies (Mate

rial No.08−042A), refer to Figure 222 and Chapter 51−77−11, para

graph 5.B.

Page 365
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(n) Cure the installed materials, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para

graphs 5.D.(1) and 5.E.
NOTE: If the total number of repair plies is more than 7, then
their installation must be performed in 2 steps:
− Step 1: A maximum of 7 repair plies must be installed and
cured.
− Step 2: The remaining repair plies must be installed and cured.
Adhesive film (Material No.08−042A) shall be applied to the re

pair zone prior to the installation of the remaining repair
plies.

(o) Inspect the repair, refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 5.

(p) In case of inner skin, install the repair PVF Film with a glass
fiber ply (Material No. 05−033) and laminating resin (Material
No.20−022 or 08−090 or 08−098), refer to Figure 223 and Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.K.

NOTE: It is recommended to replace the original PVF Film by the

new PVF Film (Material No.19−016) even if it is not dam

aged.
(q) Before restoring surface protection, of the outer skin, apply a
layer of pore filler on all areas where the surface protection
was removed, as follows:

1 Abrade the surface to be protected using scotch brite type A,

by hand or using an orbital sanding device.
2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−003).

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBID

DEN.

4 Apply pore filler (Material No.16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) to

the panel surfaces with a spatula or a polishing bag, avoiding
a continuous layer.

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let the pore filler to dry for a minimum of 2 hours at room
temperature before proceeding with the paint operation.

6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded, to improve the surface

appearance, let the pore filler to cure for at least 12 hours
at room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours and 30
minutes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding. This will
avoid damages to the product that can affect the repair quali

ty.

Page 366
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(r) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(s) Restore surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb367/368
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to the Outer or Inner Skin and Honeycomb Core of the LE
LEX − Zone 04, Chamfer Area
Figure 222 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb369/370
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to the Outer or Inner Skin and Honeycomb Core of the LE
LEX − Zone 04, Chamfer Area
Figure 222 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb371/372
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 219.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS VALID ONLY FOR LEX PART NUMBERS THAT HAVE THE REF

ERENCE PB201 IN THE ACTION OR REPAIR COLUMN, REFER TO CHAPTER
55−12−11, PAGE BLOCK 001.

V. Repair of Damage to the Outer Skin, Inner Skin and Honeycomb Core of
the LE LEX − Zone 04, Chamfer Area
NOTE: The following repair is valid for outer skin, inner skin and hon

eycomb core damage in Zone 04, chamfer area, of the THS Leading
Edge LEX. Refer to Chapter 55−12−11, Page Block 101, Figure 103,
for repair zones definition.

NOTE: This repair is valid also for liquid ingress inside sandwich struc

ture.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: If necessary, previously to the repair, remove the existing struc

ture and reinstall after the repair completion.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 219
NOTE: Refer to the paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 373
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THS LEADING EDGE IS MADE FROM CFRP. IT MUST BE HANDLE WITH
CARE.
(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbon Fiber PREPREG
− Honeycomb Core
− Cleaning Agent
− Adhesive Film
− Pore Filler
− Paste Adhesive
− PVF Film
− Glass Fiber Fabric
− Laminating Resin
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 223).
AR Material No.05−091 or 05−092,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.05−085, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
AR Material No.08−078, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.19−016, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.05−033, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No.20−022 or 08−090 or
08−098, refer to Chapter
51−35−00

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D.).

NOTE: Remove the PVF Film (Tedlar) in all areas where the repair
plies will be installed.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Cut and remove the damaged skin and honeycomb core (refer to
Figure 223).

(c) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(d) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.11−003).

(e) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure, affected

core must be systematically removed and repaired as follows:

Page 374
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

1 When core is exposed after skin cut out, perform an initial

drying of the damaged structure, refer to Chapter 55−20−00,
paragraph 2.B.

2 Remove affected core, refer to Chapter 55−20−00, paragraph

2.C., except step B.

3 Perform a final drying, refer to Chapter 55−20−00, paragraph

2.B.
(f) Repair of inner skin and honeycomb core

1 If the damaged core has an area less than 1000 mm
(1.55 in
):
− Remove the damaged core.
− Fill the area with adhesive paste (Material No.08−078).
− Cure the installed materials: 6 hours at room temperature
plus 70 minutes at 70° C (158° F) or cure for 10 hours at
room temperature.

2 If the damaged core has an area equal to or greater than 1000

mm
(1.55 in
) do steps 5.V.(2)(f)3 thru 5.V.(2)(f)10.

3 Sand down the inner skin giving it a stepped finish (refer to

Figure 223 for dimensions).

4 Make the backing plate.

NOTE: The shape and size of the backing plate will depend on
the damage shape and size.
5 Make the honeycomb core plug (same shape and type as original)
to the original shape.

6 Put the new core in position and install the backing plate to
allow the core and inner skin installation. Attach the backing
plate to the repair area using clamps.
NOTE: Use a parting film between the metallic backing plate and
the structure to allow the backing plate removal after
the repair completion of the honeycomb core and inner
skin.

7 Install new core in accordance with Figure 223.

8 Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

9 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.11−003).

10 Cover exposed core cells with paste adhesive (Material

No.08−078) and cure the installed materials (6 hours at room

Page 375
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

temperature plus 70 minutes at 70° C (158° F) or cure for 10

hours at room temperature).
NOTE: The maximum thickness of the paste adhesive to cover the
cells is 5 mm (0.197 in.). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
paragraph 6.B.(2) and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.H.

11 Prepare the carbon fiber repair plies (Material No.05−091 or

05−092) and the adhesive film plies (Material No.08−042A), re

fer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C.

12 Install the repair plies (Material No.05−091 or 05−092), same

number and orientation as original, plus additional repair
plies (Material No.05−091 or 05−092) and the adhesive film
plies (Material No.08−042A), refer to Figure 223 and Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.B.

13 Cure the installed materials, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para

graphs 5.D.(1) and 5.E.

NOTE: If the total number of repair plies is more than 7, then

their installation must be performed in 2 steps:
− Step 1: A maximum of 7 repair plies must be installed and
cured.
− Step 2: The remaining repair plies must be installed and
cured. Adhesive film (Material No. 08−042A) shall be applied
to the repair zone prior to the installation of the remaining
repair plies.
14 Install the repair PVF Film (Material No.19−016) with a glass
fiber ply (Material No. 05−033) and laminating resin (Material
No.20−022 or 08−090 or 08−098), refer to Figure 223 and Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.K.

NOTE: It is recommended to replace the original PVF Film by the

new PVF Film (Material No.19−016) even if it is not dam

aged. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.K.

(g) Repair of outer skin

1 Remove the clamps and the metallic backing plate from the re

pair area.
2 Sand down the outer skin giving it a stepped finish (refer to
Figure 223 for dimensions).

3 Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

4 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.11−003).

5 Cover exposed core cells with paste adhesive (Material
No.08−078) and cure the installed materials (6 hours at room

Page 376
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

temperature plus 70 minutes at 70° C (158° F) or cure for 10

hours at room temperature).
NOTE: The maximum thickness of the paste adhesive to cover the
cells is 5 mm (0.197 in.). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
paragraph 6.B.(2) and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.H.

6 Prepare the carbon fiber repair plies (Material No.05−091 or

05−092) and the adhesive film plies (Material No.08−042A), re

fer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C.

7 Install the repair plies (Material No.05−091 or 05−092), same

number and orientation as original, plus additional repair
plies (Material No.05−091 or 05−092) and the adhesive film
plies (Material No. 08−042A), refer to Figure 223 and Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.

8 Cure the installed materials, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para

graphs 5.D.(1) and 5.E.

NOTE: If the total number of repair plies is more than 7, then

their installation must be performed in 2 steps:
− Step 1: A maximum of 7 repair plies must be installed and
cured.
− Step 2: The remaining repair plies must be installed and
cured. Adhesive film (Material No. 08−042A) shall be applied
to the repair zone prior to the installation of the remaining
repair plies.
(h) Inspect the repair, refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 5.

(i) Before restoring surface protection, apply a layer of pore filler

on all areas where the surface protection was removed, as fol

lows:
1 Abrade the surface to be protected using scotch brite type A,
by hand or using an orbital sanding device.

2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.11−003).

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBID

DEN.

4 Apply pore filler (Material No.16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) to

the panel surfaces with a spatula or a polishing bag, avoiding
a continuous layer.
CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let the pore filler to dry for a minimum of 2 hours at room

temperature before proceeding with the paint operation.

Page 377
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded, to improve the surface

appearance, let the pore filler to cure for at least 12 hours
at room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours and 30
minutes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding. This will
avoid damages to the product that can affect the repair quali

ty.

(j) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.11−003).
(k) Restore surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 378
Printed in Germany
55−12−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to the Outer Skin, Inner Skin and Honeycomb Core of the LE
LEX − Zone 04, Chamfer Area
Figure 223 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb379/380
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to the Outer Skin, Inner Skin and Honeycomb Core of the LE
LEX − Zone 04, Chamfer Area
Figure 223 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−12−11 PagesFeb381/382
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

RIBS

1. Identification Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− L.E. Ribs Figure 1

1 L.E. Rib 1 Figure 2
2 L.E. Ribs 2 thru 5 Figure 3
3 L.E. Ribs 6 thru 11 Figure 4
4 L.E. Rib 12 Figure 5
5 L.E. Rib 13 Figure 6
6 L.E. Ribs 14 thru 16 Figure 7
7 L.E. Ribs 17 thru 19 Figure 8
8 L.E. Ribs 20 thru 24 Figure 9
9 L.E. Rib 25 Figure 10
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−10−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 MayPage 1
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

L.E. Ribs
Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 FebPage 2
01/11
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

L.E. Rib 1
Figure 2 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 FebPage 3
01/11
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

L.E. Rib 1
Figure 2 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 FebPage 4
01/11
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

L.E. Rib 1
Figure 2 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 FebPage 5
01/11
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

L.E. Rib 1
Figure 2 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 FebPage 6
01/11
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

L.E. Rib 1
Figure 2 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 FebPage 7
01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 1 Assy, D55183205000 PB 101

L.E. 001 PB 201
1A Rib 1 Assy, Composite D55183225000 PB 101 A21158G0019
L.E. 001 PB 201
1B Rib 1 Assy, Composite D55183225002 PB 101 A24973G0314
L.E. 003 PB 201
5 Rib 1 L.E. Composite D55183206000
001
10 Angle Composite D55183207000
001
15 Reinforcement Composite D55183208000
001
20 Rowing Z−19.766 A21158G0019
ASSY Dwg.: D55183000, D55183205, D55183225

Key to Figure 2

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 MayPage 8
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

L.E. Ribs 2 thru 5

Figure 3 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 MayPage 9
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

L.E. Ribs 2 thru 5

Figure 3 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 MayPage01/1510
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 2 Assy, Composite D55183325000 PB 101

L.E. 001
5 Rib 3 Assy, Composite D55183328000 PB 101
L.E. 001
10 Rib 4 Assy, Composite D55183331000 PB 101
L.E. 001
15 Rib 5 Assy, Composite D55183334000 PB 101
L.E. 001
ASSY Dwg.: D55183300

Key to Figure 3

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 MayPage01/1511
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

L.E. Ribs 6 thru 11

Figure 4 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 MayPage01/1512
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

L.E. Ribs 6 thru 11

Figure 4 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 MayPage01/1513
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 6 Assy, Composite D55183337000 PB 101

L.E. 001
5 Rib 7 Assy, Composite D55183340000 PB 101
L.E. 001
10 Rib 8 Assy, Composite D55183343000 PB 101
L.E. 001
15 Rib 9 Assy, Composite D55183346000 PB 101
L.E. 001
20 Rib 10 Assy, Composite D55183349000 PB 101
L.E. 001
25 Rib 11 Assy, Composite D55183352000 PB 101
L.E. 001
ASSY Dwg.: D55183300

Key to Figure 4

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 MayPage01/1514
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

L.E. Rib 12
Figure 5 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 FebPage01/1115
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

L.E. Rib 12
Figure 5 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 FebPage01/1116
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

L.E. Rib 12
Figure 5 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 FebPage01/1117
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

L.E. Rib 12
Figure 5 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 FebPage01/1118
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 12 Assy, D55183210000 PB 101

L.E. 001 PB 201
1A Rib 12 Assy, Composite D55183230000 PB 101 A21158G0019
L.E. 001 PB 201
5 Rib 12, L.E. Composite D55183211000
001
10 Angle Composite D55183212000
001
15 Reinforcement Composite D55183213000
001
20 Rowing Z−19.766 A21158G0019
ASSY Dwg.: D55183000, D55183210, D55183230

Key to Figure 5

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 MayPage01/1519
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

L.E. Rib 13
Figure 6 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 MayPage01/1520
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

L.E. Rib 13
Figure 6 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 MayPage01/1521
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 13 Assy, Composite D55183425000 PB 101

L.E. 001
ASSY Dwg.: D55183400

Key to Figure 6

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 MayPage01/1522
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

L.E. Ribs 14 thru 16

Figure 7 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 MayPage01/1523
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

L.E. Ribs 14 thru 16

Figure 7 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 MayPage01/1524
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 14 Assy, Composite D55183428000 PB 101

L.E. 001
5 Rib 15 Assy, Composite D55183431000
L.E. 001
10 Rib 16 Assy, Composite D55183434000 PB 101
L.E. 001
ASSY Dwg.: D55183400

Key to Figure 7

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 MayPage01/1525
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

L.E. Ribs 17 thru 19

Figure 8 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 FebPage01/1126
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

L.E. Ribs 17 thru 19

Figure 8 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 MayPage01/1527
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 17 Assy, Composite D55183437000 PB 101

L.E. 001
5 Rib 18 Assy, Composite D55183440000 PB 101
L.E. 001
10 Rib 19 Assy, Composite D55183443000 PB 101
L.E. 001
ASSY Dwg.: D55183400

Key to Figure 8

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 MayPage01/1528
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

L.E. Ribs 20 thru 24

Figure 9 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 MayPage01/1529
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

L.E. Ribs 20 thru 24

Figure 9 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 MayPage01/1530
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 20 Assy, Composite D55183446000 PB 101

L.E. 001
5 Rib 21 Assy, Composite D55183449000 PB 101
L.E. 001
10 Rib 22 Assy, Composite D55183452000 PB 101
L.E. 001
15 Rib 23 Assy, Composite D55183455000 PB 101
L.E. 001
20 Rib 24 Assy, Composite D55183458000 PB 101
L.E. 001
ASSY Dwg.: D55183400

Key to Figure 9

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 MayPage01/1531
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

L.E. Rib 25
Figure 10 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 AugPage01/1432
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

L.E. Rib 25
Figure 10 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 AugPage01/1433
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

L.E. Rib 25
Figure 10 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 AugPage01/1434
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

L.E. Rib 25
Figure 10 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 AugPage01/1435
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

L.E. Rib 25
Figure 10 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 AugPage01/1436
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 25 Assy, D55183215000 PB 101

L.E. 001 PB 201
1A Rib 25 Assy, D55183235000 PB 101 A21158G0019
L.E. 001 PB 201
5 Rib 25, L.E. Composite D55183216000 B21158G0019
001
10 Angle Composite D55183217000 B21158G0019
001
15 Reinforcement Composite D55183218000 B21158G0019
001
20 Web 3.1364T3 D55183235200 A21158G0019
LN9073 201
1.0(0.039)
20A Web 3.1364T3 D55183235208 A30940G0376
LN9073 209
1.0(0.039)
25 Profile 3.1364T3 D55183235202 A21158G0019
LN9073 203 B30940G0376
0.8(0.031)
30 Shim 3.1364T3 D55183235204 A21158G0019
LN9073 205
1.0(0.039)
35 Profile 3.1364T3 D55183235210 A30940G0376
LN9073 211
0.8(0.031)
40 Profile 3.1364T3 D55183235212 A30940G0376
LN9073 213
0.8(0.031)
ASSY Dwg.: D55183000, D55183215, D55183235

Key to Figure 10

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Pages 37/38
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

RIBS, HORIZONTAL STABILIZER LEADING EDGE − ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT PARAGRAPH.

1. General
NOTE: For definition of allowable damage refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For Damage Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14

− CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

This topic contains the allowable damage and related data applicable to the
Horizontal Stabilizer Leading Edge Ribs, and is valid as shown in the rele

vant paragraph. This data is necessary to find the correct repair proce

dure.

2. Damage Evaluation

Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data related to the composite
structure and refer to Chapter 51−11−00, paragraph 2 for data related to
the metallic structure.

3. Type of Damage
The main type of damage which can occur to the metallic structure are
holes, scratches and dents. Refer to Chapter 51−11−00, Table 1 for full
definition of the types of damage that can occur to the metallic structure.

The two main types of damage which can occur to the composites structure
are as follows:
A. Delamination with or without visible cracks and holes.

This is when the structure is hit by an object which results in separa

tion between the plies.

B. Superficial Damage

This is when the structure is damaged only on the external surface, with
no damage to the internal structure. Nicks and scratches are examples of
superficial damage.

4. Distance Between Damage Areas and Distance Between Repair Areas

There is a minimum permitted distance between damaged areas and between re

pair areas as follows:

A. Damaged Areas

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

For the minimum distance between two damaged areas (X) refer to the spe

cific allowable damage table. Depending on the order of the damages,
Lmax is as follows:
− Different Order
If the length of the larger damage is more than 10 × length of the
smaller damage, then Lmax is the length of the smaller damage.
− Same Order
If the length of the larger damage is less or equal than 10 × length
of the smaller damage, then Lmax is the length of the larger damage.

When the distance (X) between two damages areas is less than the minimum
distance, the two damages must be enveloped together and the area of the
envelop is to be considered as one damage area.

B. Repair Areas
For the minimum distance between two repair areas (Y) refer to the spe

cific allowable damage table. If you have less than this distance, refer
to AIRBUS before you do the second repair.

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Distance Between Damaged Areas and Between Repair Areas, all Zones
Figure 101

Page 103
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

5. Allowable Damage Description/Criteria

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ PARAGRAPH/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION INSTRUCTION REF

TYPE DIAGRAM CATEGORY
ERENCE
THS Leading Edge Ribs − Linear or 8.A. / A, C −
Allowable Damage and Re
Superficial 101
pair Limits for Linear Damage
or Superficial Damage
THS Leading Edge Ribs − Delamina
8.B. / A, C −
Allowable Damage and Re
tion with 102
pair Limits for Dela
or without
mination Damage (with or Visible
without visible cracks Cracks and
and holes) Holes

Table 101
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

6. Allowable Damage

Allowable damage is damage that does not affect the necessary strength or
function of a component. You do not have to repair this type of damage. If
this damage has rough or sharp edges, smooth these out with the correct
abrasive cloth. Replace the surface paint, if necessary. The allowable dam

age data for the horizontal stabilizer leading edge ribs is shown in Dia

grams 101 and 102.

7. Repair Limits

The repair limits data gives the time limits in which to make temporary
and permanent repairs. These time limits are given in flights hours (FH).
The repair limits also tell you which type of repair you can do. To find
the repair limits data applicable to the damaged area, you must know the
subsequent data:
− The repair zone applicable to the damaged area.
− The area, length or depth (as applicable) of the damage to the structure.
− The type of damage (for example, nick, scratch, delamination).
The repair limits of the horizontal stabilizer leading edge are in Diagrams
101 and 102.

Page 104
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

8. Allowable Damage − Horizontal Stabilizer Leading Edge Ribs

The following allowable damage limits are applicable to the Ribs of the
Horizontal Stabilizer Leading Edge.

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR

CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 102.

A. THS Leading Edge Ribs − Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for Linear or
Superficial Damage
NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable for damage (linear or superfi

cial damage) to the THS Leading Edge Ribs.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 102.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 102
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 101 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 103 and perform the corre

sponding repair action.

Page 105
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

THS Leading Edge Ribs − Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for Linear or Su

perficial Damage
Diagram 101
Page 106
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN

DAMAGE REPAIR AC
REPAIR
TYPE OF DAMAGE REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION DAMAGES X mm REPAIRS Y mm
SIZE TION CATEGORY
(in) (in)
The greater
Chapter 51−77−12, Chapter 51−77−12, value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 600 FH
paragraph 2.A Paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
2.5 Lmax.
(1) Non Structural
Linear or super
Repair, Chapter The greater
ficial damage to 51−77−12,paragraph 600 FH value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
external surface Permanent A None None
3.B and restore <1> (1.97 in) or in)
(abrasions, surface finish 2.5 Lmax.
gouges, nicks Chapter 51−75−12
and scratches)
Structural Re
The greater
pair, Chapter value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(2) Permanent A Immediately None None
55−12−12, Page (1.97 in) or in)
Block 201, 2.5 Lmax.
(3) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − −

Table 103
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 PagesFeb107/108
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR

CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 104.
B. THS Leading Edge Ribs − Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for Delamina

tion Damage (with or without visible cracks and holes)

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid for damage (delamination with or

without visible cracks and holes) to the THS Leading Edge Ribs.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 104.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 104
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 102 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 105 and perform the corre

sponding repair action.

Page 109
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

THS Leading Edge Ribs − Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for Delamination
Damage (with or without visible cracks and holes)
Diagram 102
Page 110
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN

DAMAGE REPAIR AC
REPAIR
TYPE OF DAMAGE REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION DAMAGES X mm REPAIRS Y mm
SIZE TION CATEGORY
(in) (in)
The greater
Chapter 51−77−12, Chapter 51−77−12, value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 600 FH
(1) paragraph 2.A Paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
Superficial dam
2.5 Lmax.
ages, delamina
Permanent A Contact Airbus Immediately − − − −
tion with or
without visible Structural Re
The greater
cracks and holes pair, Chapter value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(2) Permanent A Immediately None None
55−12−12, Page (1.97 in) or in)
Block 201, 2.5 Lmax.
(3) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − −

Table 105

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 PagesFeb111/112
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

RIBS − REPAIRS

1. General

NOTE: For Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14

− CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

This topic contains all of the specific repair procedures for the ribs of
the horizontal stabilizer leading edge. The repair zones and allowable dam

age data for these repair procedures are in Chapter 55−12−00, Page Block
101.
2. Safety Precautions

There are risks to you and other persons when you work with composite re

pair materials. To prevent risks, read and obey the warnings given below.

WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.
WARNING: WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND FILTER MASK WHEN YOU CUT,
ABRADE OR DRILL COMPOSITE MATERIALS. THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MA

TERIALS CAN GET INTO YOUR LUNGS OR INTO YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE YOU
INJURY. IMMEDIATELY REMOVE DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.

WHEN YOU WORK WITH CFRP COMPOSITE MATERIALS, IMMEDIATELY REMOVE
DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRIC POWER ON
THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST ONLY USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT REPAIR.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER TO PARA

GRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER REMARKS

No General Repairs applicable − −

Table 201

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

4. Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE REPAIR INSPECTION

CATEGORY INSTRUCTION
REFERENCE
Repair of Damage to Rib 5.A. 201 A −
Flange, Rib 12 − Before
Mod. 21158G0019
Repair of Damage to Rib 5.B. 202 A −
Flange, Rib 12 − After
Mod. 21158G0019
Repair of Damage to Rib 5.C. 203 A −
Flange, Rib 1 − Before
Mod. 21158G0019
Repair of Damage to Rib 5.D. 204 A −
Flange, Rib 1 − After
Mod. 21158G0019
Repair of Damage to Rib 5.E. 205 A −
Flange, Rib 25
Repair of Damage to Rib 5.F. 206 A −
Web and Flange, Rib 25
Repair of crack to Rib 5.G. 207 A −
Flange, Rib 25

Table 202
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

5. Leading Edge Ribs Repairs

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 203.

A. Repair of Damage to Rib Flange, Rib 12.

NOTE: This repair is applicable to damage to rib flange of Rib 12 before
Mod. 21158G0019.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.
NOTE: This repair is valid where damage has occurred to the flange of
rib 12.

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 203
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information Table in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow

able damage and repair applicability.

The typical types of damage which may occur are as follows:

− Cracks
− Deep scratches (beyond allowable damage limits)
− Delamination with broken plies.
In all cases the repair procedure in paragraph (2) is identical.

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Angle 2 2024T3, 2.5 mm (0.100 in) thick.

2 Flange Repair Packer
3 Web Repair Packer
4 Repair Filler
− Laminating resin
− Adhesive paste
− Glass Fiber Fabric (dry)
− Sealant
− Sealant
− Sealant
− Polyurethane Primer
− Polyurethane Top Coat
− Cleaning Agent
− Parting Film
(2) Repair Instructions (Refer to Figure 201 )
2 2024T3, 2.5 mm (0.100 in) thick.
1 2024T3, 2 mm (0.080 in) thick.
1 2024T3, 3.2 mm (0.125 in) thick.
− Material No. 08−070 or 05−097,
refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para

graph 6.B.
− Material No. 08−051, refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 6.B.
− Material No. 05−033, refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 6.B.
− Material No. 09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−016, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
−

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Remove the anchor nuts and all of the fasteners from the repair
area.
(b) Cut out the damaged structure to the correct shape and dimensions
for the repair.

(c) Make the cut out area smooth. Initially use 280 grade abrasive
cloth and finish off with 400 grade.
(d) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(e) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003 ).

(f) Get the correct materials to make the metal repair pieces.

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(g) Make the repair parts (Items 1, 2, 3, 4, Repair Material List)

to the necessary shapes and dimensions for the repair (when
making the repair angles, refer to Chapter 51−26−11 for bending
data). Round off the edges of all the metal repair pieces to
between 0.1 mm and 0.4 mm (0.004 in and 0.016 in). Refer to
Figure 201.

(h) Put one of the repair angles (Item 1) in its correct repair
position and secure to the rib flange with screws clamps.

(i) Pilot drill the repair angle thru the existing holes in the rib
(web area). Refer to Chapter 51−44−00.

(j) Put the other repair angle (Item 1) in its correct repair
position and secure to the rib flange with screws clamps.
(k) Pilot drill the repair angle thru the existing holes in the rib
(web area). Refer to Chapter 51−44−00.

(l) Remove the screw clamps and the repair angles from the structure.

(m) Mark the position of the new fastener hole on the repair angle
(repair angle and web repair packer interface).

(n) Put the repair angles (Item 1), web repair packer (Item 3) and
flange repair packers (Item 2) in their correct repair position.

(o) Secure the repair parts to the structure with screw pins thru
the previously drilled holes.

(p) Pilot drill the repair angles (Item 1) and the web repair packer
(Item 3) at the new fastener hole position marked at step (m).

NOTE: Make certain that the web repair packer remains in its
correct repair position during the drilling operation at
step (p).

(q) Mark the position of the new fastener holes on the rib flange.

(r) Pilot drill the rib flange, repair angles (Item 1) and the
flange repair packers (Item 2) at the marked hole positions.
NOTE: Make certain that the flange repair packers remain in their
correct repair position during the drilling operation at
step (r).

(s) Pilot drill the repair angles (Item 1) and the flange repair
packers (Item 2) thru the existing anchor nut holes in the rib
flange.

(t) Put the repair filler (Item 4) in its correct repair position
and secure to the rib flange with screw clamps.

(u) Mark the position of the original anchor nut holes on the repair
filler.

Page 205
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(v) Pilot drill the repair filler and the repair angles at the
marked hole positions.
(w) Drill all the holes in the repair area to the correct diameter
for the fasteners.

(x) Countersink the anchor nut attachment holes on the repair filler
to 100°. Refer to Chapter 51−46−21.

(y) Remove all the repair parts from the rib.

(z) Remove the sharp edges from all of the holes drilled in the re

pair pieces and the rib with an abrasive cone.

(aa)Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(ab)Clean the repair pieces and the rib repair area with the clean

ing agent (Material No. 11−003 ).

WARNING: POLYURETHANE PRIMER (MATERIAL NO. 16−001B OR 16−001C ) AND

POLYURETHANE TOP COAT (MATERIAL NO. 16−018C ) ARE DANGEROUS.
(ac)Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair pieces
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer (Material
No. 16−001B or 16−001C ), followed by a polyurethane top coat
(Material No. 16−018C )).

WARNING: LAMINATING RESIN (MATERIAL NO. 08−070 OR 05−097 ) IS DAN

GEROUS.

(ad)Impregnate a layer of dry glassfabric (Material No. 05−033 ) with

laminating resin (Material No. 08−070 or 05−097 ). The glassfab

ric layer must extend around the metal repair pieces (when
installed) by a minimum of 15 mm (0.591 in).
NOTE: Glassfabric layer is necessary to avoid direct contact be

tween CFRP structure and metal parts.

(ae)Lay up the impregnated glass fiber layer in its correct positions

on the rib repair area.
(af)Install the vacuum bag (and heating equipment if the repair cure
is to be accelerated by the application of heat). Refer to Chap

ter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.

(ag)Let the repair cure under vacuum conditions. Refer to Chapter

51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.
NOTE: If the repair cure cycle is to be accelerated by the ap

plication of heat, let the repair cure at the required tem

perature and time. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph
6.B.(2) and 5.E.

Page 206
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ah)On completion of the cure cycle, remove the vacuum bag and heat

ing equipment from the repair area.
(ai)Carefully drill thru the layer of glassfabric and resin thru all
of the fastener holes in the repair area.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(aj)Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 ).
WARNING: ADHESIVE PASTE (MATERIAL NO. 08−051 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(ak)Apply adhesive paste (Material No. 08−051 ) to the surfaces of

the metal repair parts that will be in contact when installed.

NOTE: The adhesive paste (Material No. 08−051 ) is used as a

liquid shim up to a maximum thickness of 0.5 mm (0.020
in).

(al)Apply a parting film to the repair parts surfaces.

(am)Put the repair pieces in their correct repair position and secure
to the rib structure with screw pins.
(an)Let the adhesive paste cure. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph
6.B.(1) for cure time.

(ao)Remove the screw pins and repair parts from the repair area. Re

move the parting films.
(ap)Lightly abrade the liquid shim surfaces with an abrasive cloth
400 grade.

(aq)Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(ar)Clean the repair parts and the rib repair area with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003 ).

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(as)Apply sealant (Material No. 09−005 ) to the surfaces of the met

al repair pieces which will contact to each other or CFRP rib
structure when installed (refer to Chapter 51−24−00 for sealing
data).

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−016 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(at)Put the repair parts in their correct repair position and secure
to the rib structure with screw pins.
NOTE: Before installing the repair filler, fill the gap with
sealant (Material No. 09−016 ).

Page 207
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(au)Remove the excess of sealant from the repair area with a lint
free cloth soaked with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003 ).

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(av)Remove the screw pins in turn and wet install the correct fas

tener in each vacated screw pin hole with sealant (Material No.
09−005 ). Refer to Figure 201 for fastener data and Chapter
51−42−21 for fastener installation.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(aw)Install the new anchor nuts and respective fasteners to the re

pair angles with the sealant (Material No. 09−005 ). Refer to
the repair figure for anchor nut and fastener data and to Chap

ter 51−24−00 for data on fastener sealing.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(ax)Remove the excess of sealant from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003 ).
WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−002 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(ay)Apply a fillet of sealant (Material No. 09−002 ) at the inter

face edges of the CFRP structure and the metal repair pieces.
Refer to Chapter 51−24−00 for data on fillet sealing.

(az)Let the sealants (Material No. 09−002 and 09−005 ) cure. Refer
to the manufacture’s instructions for cure times.

Page 208
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Rib Flange, Rib 12

Figure 201 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 PagesFeb209/210
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Rib Flange, Rib 12

Figure 201 (sheet 2)

Page 211
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 204.
B. Repair of Damage to Rib Flange, Rib 12.

NOTE: This repair procedure is applicable to damage to rib flange of Rib

12 after Mod. 21158G0019.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.
NOTE: This repair is valid where damage has occurred to the flange of
rib 12.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 204
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information Table in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

The typical types of damage which may occur are as follows:

− Cracks
− Deep scratches (beyond allowable damage limits)
− Delamination with broken plies.

In all cases the repair procedure in paragraph (2) is identical.

Page 212
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair T Profile 1 2024T3511, Vertical Section 2.5

2 Repair Angle
3 Web Repair Packer
4 Flange Repair Packer
− Glass Fiber Fabric (dry)
− Laminating resin
− Adhesive paste
− Sealant
− Sealant
− Sealant
− Polyurethane Primer
− Polyurethane Top Coat
− Cleaning Agent
− Parting Film
(2) Repair Instructions (Refer to Figure 202 )
WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.
mm (0.100 in) thick.
2 2024T3, 2.5 mm (0.100 in) thick.
1 2024T3, 1 mm (0.040 in) thick.
3 2024T3, 2.5 mm (0.100 in) thick.
− Material No. 05−033, refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 6.B.
− Material No. 08−070 or 05−097,
refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para

graph 6.B.
− Material No. 08−051, refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 6.B.
− Material No. 09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−016, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
−

(a) Remove the anchor nuts from the repair area.

(b) Cut out the damaged structure to the correct shape and dimensions
for the repair.

(c) Make the cut area smooth. Initially use 280 grade abrasive cloth
and finish off with 400 grade.

(d) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(e) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003 ).

Page 213
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Get the correct materials to make the metal repair pieces.

NOTE: The vertical section of the T profile repair piece shall

have a thickness of 2.5 mm (0.100 in). The horizontal
section shall correspond to that of the original rib
flange.

(g) Make the repair parts (Items 1, 2, 3, 4, Repair Material List)

to the necessary shapes and dimensions for the repair (when
making the repair angles, refer to Chapter 51−26−11 for bending
data). Round off the edges of all the metal repair pieces to
between 0.1 mm and 0.4 mm (0.004 in and 0.016 in). Refer to
Figure 202.

(h) Put all the repair parts in their correct repair position and
secure to the rib structure with screw clamps.

(i) Mark the position of the new fastener holes on the rib flange,
repair angles (Item 2) and the T profile repair part (Item 1).

(j) Pilot drill the marked hole positions, refer to Chapter 51−44−00
for drilling data.
NOTE: Make certain that the repair packers remain in their
correct repair position during the drilling operation at
step (j).

(k) Install sufficient screw pins to secure the repair pieces and
remove all the screw clamps except the screw clamps retaining the
web repair packer (Item 3).

(l) Pilot drill the repair angles (Item 2) and the flange repair
packers (Item 4) thru the existing anchor nut holes in the rib
flange.
(m) Mark the position of the original anchor nut holes on the T
profile repair part (Item 1).

(n) Pilot drill the T profile repair part (Item 1) and the repair
angles (Item 2) at the marked hole positions.
(o) Drill all the pilot holes in the repair area to the correct
diameter for the fasteners.

(p) Countersink the anchor nut attachment holes in the T profile

repair part to 100°, refer to Chapter 51−46−21.

(q) Remove all the screw pins and the screw clamp.
(r) Remove all the repair parts from the rib.

(s) Remove the sharp edges from all the holes drilled in the repair
parts and the rib with an abrasive cone.

(t) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

Page 214
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(u) Clean the repair pieces and the rib repair area with the clean

ing agent (Material No. 11−003 ).

WARNING: POLYURETHANE PRIMER (MATERIAL NO. 16−001B OR 16−001C ) AND

POLYURETHANE TOP COAT (MATERIAL NO. 16−018C ) ARE DANGEROUS.

(v) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair pieces
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane top primer (Materi

al No. 16−001B or 16−001C ), followed by polyurethane top coat
(Material No. 16−018C )).

WARNING: LAMINATING RESIN (MATERIAL NO. 08−070 OR 05−097 ) IS DAN

GEROUS.

(w) Impregnate a layer of dry glassfabric (Material No. 05−033 ) with

laminating resin (Material No. 08−070 or 05−097 ). The glassfab

ric layer must extend around the metal repair pieces (when
installed) by a minimum of 15 mm (0.591 in).

NOTE: Glassfabric layer is necessary to avoid direct contact be

tween CFRP structure and metal parts.
(x) Lay up the impregnated glassfabric layer in its correct position
on the rib repair area.

(y) Install the vacuum bag (and heating equipment if the repair cure
is to be accelerated by the application of heat). Refer to Chap

ter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.

(z) Let the repair cure under vacuum conditions. Refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.

NOTE: If the repair cure cycle is to be accelerated by the ap

plication of heat, let the repair cure at the required tem

perature and time. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph
6.B.(2) and time. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph
6.B.(2) and 5.E.

(aa)On completion of the cure cycle, remove the vacuum bag and heat

ing equipment from the repair area.
(ab)Carefully drill thru the layer of glassfabric and resin thru all
of the fastener holes in the repair area.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(ac)Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 ).

Page 215
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: ADHESIVE PASTE (MATERIAL NO. 08−051 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(ad)Apply adhesive paste (Material No. 08−051 ) to the surfaces of

the metal repair pieces that will be in contact when installed.

NOTE: The resin (Material No. 08−051 ) is used as a liquid shim

up to a maximum thickness of 0.5 mm (0.020 in).

(ae)Apply a parting film to the repair parts surfaces.

(af)Put the repair pieces in their correct repair position and secure
to the rib structure with screw pins.

(ag)Let the adhesive paste cure. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph

6.B.(1) for cure time.

(ah)Remove the screw pins and repair parts from the repair area. Re

move the parting films.

(ai)Lightly abrade the liquid shim surfaces with an abrasive cloth

400 grade.

(aj)Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(ak)Clean the repair parts and the rib with cleaning agent (Material
No. 11−003 ).

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(al)Apply sealant (Material No. 09−005 ) to the surfaces of the met

al repair pieces which will contact to each other or CFRP rib
structure when installed (refer to Chapter 51−24−00 for sealing
data).

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−016 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(am)Put the repair parts in their correct repair position and secure
to the rib structure with screw pins.

NOTE: Before installing the repair angles, fill the gaps with
sealant (Material No. 09−016 ).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(an)Remove the excess of sealant from the repair area with a lint
free cloth soaked with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003 ).

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(ao)Remove the screw pins in turn and wet install the correct fas

tener in each vacated screw pin hole with sealant (Material No.
09−005 ). Refer to Figure 202 for fastener data and Chapter
51−42−21 for fastener installation.

Page 216
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(ap)Install the new anchor nuts and respective fasteners to the re

pair angles with the sealant (Material No. 09−005 ). Refer to
the repair figure for anchor nut and fastener data and to Chap

ter 51−24−00 for data on fastener sealing.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(aq)Remove the excess of sealant from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003 ).

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−002 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(ar)Apply a fillet of sealant (Material No. 09−002 ) at the inter

face edges of the CFRP structure and the metal repair pieces.
Refer to Chapter 51−24−00 for data on fillet sealing.
(as)Let the sealants (Material No. 09−002 and 09−005 ) cure. Refer
to the manufacturer’s instructions for cure times.

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 PagesFeb217/218
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Rib Flange, Rib 12

Figure 202 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 PagesFeb219/220
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Rib Flange, Rib 12

Figure 202 (sheet 2)

Page 221
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Rib Flange, Rib 12

Figure 202 (sheet 3)

Page 222
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 205.
C. Repair of Damage to Rib Flange, Rib 01.

NOTE: This repair is applicable to damage to Rib flange of Rib 01 before

Mod. 21158G0019.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.
NOTE: This repair is valid where damage has occurred to the flange of
rib 01.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 205
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information Table in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

The typical types of damage which may occur are as follows:

− Cracks
− Deep scratches (beyond allowable damage limits)
− Delamination with broken plies.

In all cases the repair procedure in paragraph (2) is identical.

Page 223
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Angle 2 2024T3, 2.5 mm (0.100 in) thick.

2 Flange Repair Packer
3 Web Repair Packer
4 Repair Filler
− Glass Fiber Fabric (dry)
− Laminating resin
− Adhesive paste
− Sealant
− Sealant
− Sealant
− Polyurethane Primer
− Polyurethane Top Coat
− Cleaning Agent
− Parting Film
(2) Repair Instructions (Refer to Figure 203)
2 2024T3, 2.5 mm (0.100 in) thick.
1 2024T3, 3.2 mm (0.125 in) thick.
1 2024T3, 4 mm (0.160 in) thick.
− Material No. 05−033, refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 6.B.
− Material No. 08−070 or 05−097,
refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para

graph 6.B.
− Material No. 08−051, refer to
Chapter 51−77−11 , paragraph
6.B.
− Material No. 09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−016, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
−

WARNING: DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Remove the anchor nuts and all of the fasteners from the repair
area.
(b) Cut out the damaged structure to the correct shape and dimensions
for the repair.

(c) Make the cut out area smooth. Initially use 280 grade abrasive
cloth and finish off with 400 grade.
(d) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(e) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003 ).

Page 224
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Get the correct materials to make the metal repair parts.

(g) Make the repair parts (Items 1, 2, 3, 4, Repair Material List)

to the necessary shapes and dimensions for the repair (when
making the repair angles, refer to Chapter 51−26−11 for bending
data). Round off the edges of all the metal repair pieces to
between 0.1 mm and 0.4 mm (0.004 in and 0.016 in). Refer to
Figure 203.
(h) Put one of the repair angles (Item 1) in its correct repair
position and secure to the rib flange with screws clamps.

(i) Pilot drill the repair angle thru the existing holes in the rib
(web area). Refer to Chapter 51−44−00.
(j) Put the other repair angle (Item 1) in its correct repair
position and secure to the rib flange with screws clamps.

(k) Pilot drill the repair angle thru the existing holes in the rib
(web area). Refer to Chapter 51−44−00.

(l) Remove the screw clamps and the repair angles from the structure.
(m) Mark the position of the new fastener hole on the repair angle
(repair angle and web repair packer interface).

(n) Put the repair angles (Item 1), web repair packer (Item 3) and
flange repair packers (Item 2) in their correct repair position.
(o) Secure the repair parts to the structure with screw pins thru
the previously drilled holes.

(p) Pilot drill the repair angles (Item 1) and the web repair packer
(Item 3) at the new fastener hole position marked at step (m).

NOTE: Make certain that the web repair packer (Item 3) remains in
its correct repair position during the drilling operation at
step (p).

(q) Mark the position of the new fastener holes on the rib flange.

(r) Pilot drill the rib flange, repair angles (Item 1) and the
flange repair packers (Item 2) at the marked hole positions.

NOTE: Make certain that the flange repair packers remain in their
correct repair position during the drilling operation at
step (r).

(s) Pilot drill the repair angles (Item 1) and the flange repair
packers (Item 2) thru the existing anchor nut holes in the rib
flange.

(t) Put the repair filler (Item 4) in its correct repair position
and secure to the rib flange with screw clamps.

Page 225
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(u) Mark the position of the original anchor nut holes on the repair
filler.
(v) Pilot drill the repair filler and the repair angles at the
marked hole position.

(w) Drill all the holes in the repair area to the correct diameter
for the fasteners.

(x) Countersink the anchor nut attachment holes on the repair filler
to 100°. Refer to Chapter 51−46−21.

(y) Remove all the repair parts from the rib.

(z) Remove the sharp edges from all of the holes drilled in the re

pair parts and the rib with an abrasive cone.
(aa)Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(ab)Clean the repair parts and the rib repair area with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003 ).
WARNING: POLYURETHANE PRIMER (MATERIAL NO. 16−001B OR 16−001C ) AND
POLYURETHANE TOP COAT (MATERIAL NO. 16−018C ) ARE DANGEROUS.

(ac)Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair pieces

(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer (Material
No. 16−001B or 16−001C ), followed by a polyurethane top coat
(Material No. 16−018C )).

WARNING: LAMINATING RESIN (MATERIAL NO. 08−070 OR 05−097 ) IS DAN

GEROUS.

(ad)Impregnate a layer of dry glassfabric (Material No. 05−033 ) with

laminating resin (Material No. 08−070 or 05−097 ). The glassfab

ric layer must extend around the metal repair pieces (when
installed) by a minimum of 15 mm (0.591 in).

NOTE: Glassfabric layer is necessary to avoid direct contact be

tween CFRP structure and metal parts.
(ae)Lay up the impregnate glass fiber layer in its correct positions
on the rib repair area.

(af)Install the vacuum bag (and heating equipment if the repair cure
is to be accelerated by the application of heat). Refer to Chap

ter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.

Page 226
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ag)Let the repair cure under vacuum conditions. Refer to Chapter

51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.
NOTE: If the repair cure cycle is to be accelerated by the ap

plication of heat, let the repair cure at the required tem

perature and time. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph
6.B.(2) and 5.E.

(ah)On completion of the cure cycle, remove the vacuum bag and heat

ing equipment from the repair area.

(ai)Carefully drill thru the layer of glassfabric and resin thru all
of the fastener holes in the repair area.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(aj)Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 ).

WARNING: ADHESIVE PASTE (MATERIAL NO. 08−051 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(ak)Apply adhesive paste (Material No. 08−051 ) to the surfaces of

the metal repair parts that will be in contact when installed.
NOTE: The adhesive paste (Material No. 08−051 ) is used as a
liquid shim up to a maximum thickness of 0.5 mm (0.020
in).

(al)Apply a parting film to the repair parts surfaces.

(am)Put the repair parts in their correct repair position and secure
to the rib structure with screw pins.

(an)Let the adhesive paste cure. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph

6.B.(1) for cure time.

(ao)Remove the screw pins and repair parts from the repair area. Re

move the parting films.

(ap)Lightly abrade the liquid shim surfaces with an abrasive cloth

400 grade.

(aq)Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(ar)Clean the repair parts and the rib repair area with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003 ).

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(as)Apply sealant (Material No. 09−005 ) to the surfaces of the met

al repair parts which will contact to each other or CFRP rib
structure when installed (refer to Chapter 51−24−00 for sealing
data).

Page 227
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−016 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(at)Put the repair parts in their correct repair position and secure
to the rib structure with screw pins.

NOTE: Before installing the repair filler, fill the gap with
sealant (Material No. 09−016 ).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(au)Remove the excess of sealant from the repair area with a lint
free cloth soaked with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003 ).

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(av)Remove the screw pins in turn and wet install the correct fas

tener in each vacated screw pin hole with sealant (Material No.
09−005 ). Refer to Figure 203 for fastener data and Chapter
51−42−21 for fastener installation.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(aw)Install the new anchor nuts and respective fasteners to the re

pair angles with the sealant (Material No. 09−005 ). Refer to
the repair figure for anchor nut and fastener data and to Chap

ter 51−24−00 for data on fastener sealing.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(ax)Remove the excess of sealant from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003 ).
WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−002 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(ay)Apply a fillet of sealant (Material No. 09−002 ) at the inter

face edges of the CFRP structure and the metal repair pieces.
Refer to Chapter 51−24−00 for data on fillet sealing.
(az)Let the sealants (Material No. 09−002 and 09−005 ) cure. Refer
to the manufacturer’s instructions for cure times.

Page 228
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Rib Flange, Rib1

Figure 203

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 PagesFeb229/230
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 206.
D. Repair of Damage to Rib Flange, Rib 01

NOTE: This repair procedure is applicable to damage to rib flange of Rib

01 after Mod. 21158G0019.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.
NOTE: This repair is valid where damage has occurred to the flange of
rib 01.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 206
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information Table in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

The typical types of damage which may occur are as follows:

− Cracks
− Deep scratches (beyond allowable damage limits)
− Delamination with broken plies

In all cases the repair procedure in paragraph (2) is identical.

Page 231
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair T Profile 1 2024T3511, Vertical Section 2.5

2 Repair Angle
3 Web Repair Packer
4 Flange Repair Packer
− Glass Fiber Fabric (dry)
− Laminating resin
− Adhesive paste
− Sealant
− Sealant
− Sealant
− Polyurethane Primer
− Polyurethane Top Coat
− Cleaning Agent
− Parting Film
(2) Repair Instructions (Refer to Figure 204 )
WARNING: DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.
mm (0.100 in) thick.
2 2024T3, 2.5 mm (0.100 in) thick.
1 2024T3, 2 mm (0.080 in) thick.
3 2024T3, 2.5 mm (0.100 in) thick.
− Material No. 05−033, refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 6.B.
− Material No. 08−070 or 05−097,
refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para

graph 6.B.
− Material No. 08−051, refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 6.B.
− Material No. 09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−016, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
−

(a) Remove the anchor nuts from the repair area.

(b) Cut out the damaged structure to the correct shape and dimensions
for the repair.

(c) Make the cut out area smooth. Initially use 280 grade abrasive
cloth and finish off with 400 grade.

(d) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(e) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003 ).

Page 232
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Get the correct materials to make the metal repair parts.

NOTE: The vertical section of the T profile repair part shall

have a thickness of 2.5 mm (0.100 in). The horizontal
section shall correspond to that of the original rib
flange.

(g) Make the repair parts (Items 1, 2, 3, 4, Repair Material List)

to the necessary shapes and dimensions for the repair (when
making the repair angles, refer to Chapter 51−26−11 for bending
data). Round off the edges of all the metal repair pieces to
between 0.1 mm and 0.4 mm (0.004 in and 0.016 in). Refer to
Figure 204.

(h) Put all the repair parts in their correct repair position and
secure to the rib structure with screw clamps.

(i) Mark the position of the new fastener holes on the rib flange,
repair angles (Item 2) and the T profile repair part (Item 1).

(j) Pilot drill the marked hole positions, refer to Chapter 51−44−00
for drilling data.
NOTE: Make certain that the repair packers remain in their
correct repair position during the drilling operation at
step (j).

(k) Install sufficient screw pins to secure the repair parts and
remove all the screw clamps except the screw clamps retaining the
web repair packer (Item 3).

(l) Pilot drill the repair angles (Item 2) and the flange repair
packers (Item 4) thru the existing anchor nut holes in the rib
flange.
(m) Mark the position of the original anchor nut holes on the T
profile repair part (Item 1).

(n) Pilot drill the T profile repair part (Item 1) and the repair
angles (Item 2) at the marked hole positions.
(o) Drill all the pilot holes in the repair area to the correct
diameter for the fasteners.

(p) Countersink the anchor nut attachment holes in the T profile

repair part to 100°, refer to Chapter 51−46−21.

(q) Remove all the screw pins and the screw clamp.
(r) Remove all the repair parts from the rib.

(s) Remove the sharp edges from all the holes drilled in the repair
parts and the rib with an abrasive cone.

(t) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

Page 233
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(u) Clean the repair parts and the rib repair area with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003 ).

WARNING: POLYURETHANE PRIMER (MATERIAL NO. 16−001B OR 16−001C ) AND

POLYURETHANE TOP COAT (MATERIAL NO. 16−018C ) ARE DANGEROUS.

(v) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair parts
(chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer (Material
No. 16−001B or 16−001C ), followed by a polyurethane top coat
(Material No. 16−018C )).

WARNING: LAMINATING RESIN (MATERIAL NO. 08−070 OR 05−097 ) IS DAN

GEROUS.

(w) Impregnate a layer of dry glassfabric (Material No. 05−033 ) with

laminating resin (Material No. 08−070 or 05−097 ). The glassfab

ric layer must extend around the metal repair pieces (when
installed) by minimum of 15 mm (0.591 in).

NOTE: Glassfabric layer is necessary to avoid direct contact be

tween CFRP structure and metal parts.
(x) Lay up the impregnate glassfabric layer in its correct position
on the rib repair area.

(y) Install the vacuum bag (and heating equipment if the repair cure
is to be accelerated by the application of heat). Refer to Chap

ter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.

(z) Let the repair cure under vacuum conditions. Refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.

NOTE: If the repair cure cycle is to be accelerated by the ap

plication of heat, let the repair cure at the required tem

perature and time. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph
6.B.(2) and 5.E.

(aa)On completion of the cure cycle, remove the vacuum bag and heat

ing equipment from the repair area.

(ab)Carefully drill thru the layer of glassfabric and resin thru all
of the fastener holes in the repair area.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(ac)Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 ).

Page 234
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: ADHESIVE PASTE (MATERIAL NO. 08−051 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(ad)Apply adhesive paste (Material No. 08−051 ) to the surfaces of

the metal repair pieces that will be in contact when installed.

NOTE: The adhesive paste (Material No. 08−051 ) is used as a

liquid shim up to a maximum thickness of 0.5 mm (0.020
in).

(ae)Apply a parting film to the repair parts surfaces.

(af)Put the repair parts in their correct repair position and secure
to the rib structure with screw pins.

(ag)Let the adhesive paste cure. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph

6.B.(1). for cure time.
(ah)Remove the screw pins and repair parts from the repair area. Re

move the parting films.

(ai)Lightly abrade the liquid shim surfaces with an abrasive cloth

400 grade.

(aj)Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(ak)Clean the repair parts and the rib with cleaning agent (Material
No. 11−003 ).

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(al)Apply sealant (Material No. 09−005 ) to the surfaces of the met

al repair parts which will contact to each other or CFRP rib
structure when installed (refer to Chapter 51−24−00 for sealing
data).

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−016 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(am)Put the repair parts in their correct repair position and secure
to the rib structure with screw pins.

NOTE: Before installing the repair angles, fill the gaps with
sealant (Material No. 09−016 ).
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(an)Remove the excess of sealant from the repair area with a lint
free cloth soaked with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003 ).

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(ao)Remove the screw pins in turn and wet install the correct fas

tener in each vacated screw pin hole with sealant (Material Num

Page 235
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ber 09−005 ). Refer to Figure 204 for fastener data and Chapter
51−42−21 for fastener installation.
WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(ap)Install the new anchor nuts and respective fastener to the repair
angles with the sealant (Material No. 09−005 ). Refer to the re

pair figure for anchor nut and fastener data and to Chapter
51−24−00 for data on fastener sealing.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(aq)Remove the excess of sealant from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003 ).

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(ar)Apply a fillet of sealant (Material No. 09−002 ) at the inter

face edges of the CFRP structure and the metal repair parts. Re

fer to Chapter 51−24−00 for data on fillet sealing.

(as)Let the sealants (Material No. 09−002 and 09−005 ) cure. Refer
to the manufacturer’s instructions for cure times.

Page 236
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Rib Flange, Rib 01

Figure 204 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 PagesFeb237/238
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Rib Flange, Rib 01

Figure 204 (sheet 2)

Page 239
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 207.
E. Repair of Damage to Rib Flange, Rib 25.

NOTE: Before repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage evalua

tion. Refer toChapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: This repair is only applicable to any damage to the flange of the
metallic rib 25 after mod. 21158G0019, except cracks up to a maxi

mum length of 30 mm (1.181 in) which shall be repaired as de

scribed in paragraph 5.G..

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 207
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information Table in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 240
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Angle 2 Material 2024 T3 CLAD, 1.5 mm

2 Repair Flange
3 Flange Repair Packer
− Adhesive Film
− Adhesive Paste
− Sealant
− Polyurethane Primer
− Polyurethane Top Coat
− Chemical Conversion Coating
− Cleaning Agent
(2) Repair Instructions (Refer to Figure 205 )
(0.059 in) thickness
1 Material 2024 T3 CLAD, 0.8 mm
(0.032 in) thickness
1 Material 2024 T3 CLAD, 1 mm
(0.040 in) thickness
− Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 6.B.
− Material No. 08−051, refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 6.B.
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 13−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Remove the leading edge section and tip to get access to the
damaged rib.

(b) Remove the anchor nuts from the repair area.

(c) Cut out the damaged structure to the correct shape and dimensions
for the repair.

NOTE: Limit of blend out is the end of the web radius.

(d) Make the cut area smooth. Use a 400 grade abrasive cloth.
(e) Remove the waste material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(f) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003 ).
(g) Get the correct materials to make the repair parts.

Page 241
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(h) Make the repair parts (Items 1, 2, 3, Repair Material List) to

the necessary shapes and dimensions for the repair. When making
the repair angles, refer to Chapter 51−26−11 for bending data.

(i) Round off the edges off all the metal repair parts to between
0.1 mm (0.004 in) and 0.4 mm (0.016 in).

(j) Put the repair angles (Item 1) in their correct position and se

cure to the rib web with screw clamps.
(k) Transfer drill the existing holes on the rib flange (fastener
holes and anchor nut attachment holes) to the repair angles (Item
1).

(l) Mark the position of the new fastener holes for rivets NAS 1097
DD5 on the rib flange.

(m) Mark the position of the new fastener holes for rivets MS 20470
DD5 on the web of one repair angles.

(n) Predrill the repair angles and the rib in the previously marked
positions (flange and web). Refer to Chapter 51−44−00 for dril

ling data.

(o) Remove the clamps and the repair angles from the rib.

(p) Remove the waste material from the repair parts and rib with a
vacuum cleaner.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(q) Clean the repair parts and the repair area with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003 ).

WARNING: POLYURETHANE PRIMER (MATERIAL NO. 16−001B OR 16−001C ) AND

POLYURETHANE TOP COAT (MATERIAL NO. 16−018C ) ARE DANGEROUS.
(r) Apply the correct surface treatment to all the metal repair parts
(repair angles, repair flange and repair packer): chromic acid
anodizing and then polyurethane primer (Material No. 16−001B or
16−001C ), followed by a polyurethane top coat (Material No.
16−018C ).
WARNING: CHEMICAL CONVERSION COATING (MATERIAL NO. 13−002 ), POLYURE

THANE PRIMER (MATERIAL NO. 16−001B OR 16−001C ) AND POLY

URETHANE TOP COAT (MATERIAL NO. 16−018C ) ARE DANGEROUS.

(s) Apply the correct surface treatment to the rib damage cut out:
chemical conversion coating (Material No. 13−002 ) and then poly

urethane primer (Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C ), followed by a
polyurethane top coat (Material No. 16−018C ).

Page 242
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: ADHESIVE PASTE (MATERIAL NO. 08−051 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(t) Apply a layer of adhesive paste (Material No. 08−051 ) to the

repair angles (Item 1) in the surface to be in contact with the
rib.

NOTE: Adhesive paste (Material No. 08−051 ) is used as a liquid

shim up to a maximum thickness of 0.5 mm (0.020 in).

(u) Cover the adhesive paste with a parting film.

(v) Put the repair angles (Item 1) in their correct position and se

cure with screw pins.

(w) Let the adhesive paste cure. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph
6.B.(1) for cure time.
(x) Remove the screw pins and the repair angles (Item 1) from the
rib. Remove the parting films.

(y) Lightly abrade the adhesive paste with a 400 grade abrasive
cloth.

(z) Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(aa)Clean the repair parts and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003 ).

WARNING: ADHESIVE FILM (MATERIAL NO. 08−042A ) IS DANGEROUS.

(ab)Prepare two tapes of adhesive film (Material No. 08−042A ) to
the correct shape and size of the rib flanges.

(ac)Put the adhesive film (Material No. 08−042A ) on the repair

angles (Item 1) and secure them in the correct position on the
rib with screw pins.
(ad)Put the flange repair packer (Item 3) and the repair flange
(Item 2) in its correct position and secure with clamps.

NOTE: Make sure that the repair flange (Item 2) and repair packer
(Item 3) remain in their correct position during the adhe

sive curing procedure.

(ae)Cure the adhesive film at a temperature between 110 and 120°C

(230 and 240°F) during 90 minutes.

(af)Remove the screw clamps and the screw pins from the repair area.
(ag)Remove any excess of adhesive with a 400 grade abrasive cloth.

(ah)Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

Page 243
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(ai)Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003 ).
(aj)Temporarily install the leading edge section and tip in their
correct position on the rib.

NOTE: Make sure that sufficient number of bolts are fixed to the
THS spar box and to the rib to maintain the leading edge
section and tip in position during drilling.
(ak)Transfer drill the fastener holes from the leading edge section
and tip to the repair flange (Item 2).

(al)Remove the leading edge section and tip from the rib.

(am)Mark the position of the anchor nuts attachment holes of the

previously drilled fastener holes.

(an)Predrill the marked anchor nut attachment holes.

(ao)Drill all the fastener holes (web and flange positions) to the
final diameter for the fasteners.
(ap)Remove the sharp edges from all the holes drilled in the repair
parts and the rib with an abrasive cloth.

(aq)Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(ar)Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003 ).
Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.E.

WARNING: CHEMICAL CONVERSION COATING (MATERIAL NO. 13−002 ) IS DAN

GEROUS.

(as)Apply chemical conversion coating (Material No. 13−002 ) to all

the holes.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(at)Wet install the rivets MS 20470 DD5 in the rib web positions
with sealant (Material No. 09−005 ).
WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(au)Wet install the anchor nuts attachment rivets and the rivets NAS
1097 DD5 in the rib flange positions with sealant (Material No.
09−005 ).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(av)Remove any excess of sealant with the cleaning agent (Material
No. 11−003 ).

Page 244
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(aw)Let the sealant cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instruction leaflet

for cure time.
(ax)Install the leading edge section and tip removed at step (a).

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 PagesFeb245/246
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Rib Flange, Rib 25

Figure 205 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 PagesFeb247/248
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Rib Flange, Rib 25

Figure 205 (sheet 2)

Page 249
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 208.
F. Repair of Damage to Rib Web and Flange, Rib 25.

NOTE: Before you repair the damage structure, you must do a damage eval

uation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: This repair is only applicable to any damage to the flange of the
metallic rib 25 after mod. 21158G0019, except cracks up to a maxi

mum length of 30 mm (1.181 in) which shall be repaired as de

scribed in paragraph 5.G..

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 208
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information Table in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 250
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Angle 2 Material 2024 T3 CLAD, 1.5 mm

2 Repair Flanges
3 Web Repair Packer
4 Flange Repair Packers
− Adhesive Film
− Adhesive Paste
− Sealant
− Polyurethane Primer
− Polyurethane Top Coat
− Chemical Conversion Coating
− Cleaning Agent
(2) Repair Instructions (Refer to Figure 206 )
(0.059 in) thickness
2 Material 2024 T3 CLAD, 0.8 mm
(0.032 in) thickness
1 Material 2024 T3 CLAD, 1mm
(0.040 in) thickness
2 Material 2024 T3 CLAD, 1mm
(0.032 in) thickness
− Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 6.B.
− Material No. 08−051, refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 6.B.
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 13−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Remove the leading edge section and tip to get access to the
damaged rib.
(b) Remove the anchor nuts from the repair area.
(c) Cut out the damaged structure to the correct shape and dimensions
for the repair.

(d) Make the cut out smooth. Use a 400 grade abrasive cloth.

(e) Remove the waste material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(f) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003 ).

(g) Get the correct materials to make the repair parts.

(h) Make the repair parts (Items 1, 2, 3, 4, Repair Material List)
to the necessary shapes and dimensions for the repair. When mak

Page 251
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ing the repair angles, refer to Chapter 51−26−11 for bending

data.
(i) Round off the edges off all the metal repair parts to between
0.1 mm (0.004 in) and 0.4 mm (0.016 in).

(j) Put the repair angles (Item 1) and the web packer (Item 3) in
their correct position and secure to the rib web with screw
clamps.
(k) Transfer drill the existing holes on the rib flange (fastener
holes and anchor nut attachment holes) to the repair angles (Item
1).

(l) Mark the position of the new fastener holes for rivets NAS 1097
DD5 on the rib flange.

(m) Mark the position of the new fastener holes for rivets MS 20470
DD5 on the web of one repair angle.

(n) Predrill the repair angles (Item 1) the web repair packer (Item
3) and the rib in the previously marked positions (flange and
web).

(o) Remove the clamps and the repair angles from the rib.

(p) Remove the waste material from the repair parts and rib with a
vacuum cleaner.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(q) Clean the repair parts and the repair area with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003 ).

WARNING: POLYURETHANE PRIMER (MATERIAL NO. 16−001B OR 16−001C ) AND

POLYURETHANE TOP COAT (MATERIAL NO. 16−018C ) ARE DANGEROUS.
(r) Apply the correct surface treatment to all the metal repair parts
(repair angles, repair flange and repair packer): chromic acid
anodizing and then polyurethane primer (Material No. 16−001B or
16−001C ), followed by a polyurethane top coat (Material No.
16−018C ).
WARNING: CHEMICAL CONVERSION COATING (MATERIAL NO. 13−002 ), POLYURE

THANE PRIMER (MATERIAL NO. 16−001B OR 16−001C ) AND POLY

URETHANE TOP COAT (MATERIAL NO. 16−018C ) ARE DANGEROUS.

(s) Apply the correct surface treatment to the rib damage cut out:
chemical conversion coating (Material No. 13−002 ) and then poly

urethane primer (Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C ), followed by a
polyurethane top coat (Material No. 16−018C ).

Page 252
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: ADHESIVE PASTE (MATERIAL NO. 08−051 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(t) Apply a layer of adhesive paste (Material No. 08−051 ) to the

repair angles (Item 1) in the surface to be in contact with the
rib.

NOTE: Adhesive paste (Material No. 08−051 ) is used as a liquid

shim up to a maximum thickness of 0.5 mm (0.020 in).

(u) Cover the adhesive paste with a parting film.

(v) Put the repair angles (Item 1) in their correct position and se

cure with screw pins.

(w) Let the adhesive paste cure. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph
6.B.(1) for cure time.
(x) Remove the screw pins and the repair angles (Item 1) from the
rib. Remove the parting films.

(y) Lightly abrade the adhesive paste with a 400 grade abrasive
cloth.

(z) Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(aa)Clean the repair parts and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003 ).

WARNING: ADHESIVE FILM (MATERIAL NO. 08−042A ) IS DANGEROUS.

(ab)Prepare two tapes of adhesive film (Material No. 08−042A ) to
the correct shape and size of the rib flanges.

(ac)Put the adhesive film (Material No. 08−042A ) on the repair

angles (Item 1) and secure them in the correct position on the
rib with screw pins.
(ad)Put the flange repair packers (Items 3, 4) and the repair flange
(Item 2) in its correct position and secure with clamps.

NOTE: Make sure that the repair flange (Item 2) and repair packer
(Items 3, 4) remain in their correct position during the
adhesive curing procedure.

(ae)Cure the adhesive film at a temperature between 110 and 120°C

(230 and 240°F) during 90 minutes.

(af)Remove the screw clamps and the screw pins from the repair area.
(ag)Remove any excess of adhesive with a 400 grade abrasive cloth.

(ah)Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

Page 253
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(ai)Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003 ).
(aj)Temporarily install the leading edge section and tip in their
correct position on the rib.

NOTE: Make sure that sufficient number of bolts are fixed to the
THS spar box and to the rib to maintain the leading edge
section and tip in position during drilling.
(ak)Transfer drill the fastener holes from the leading edge section
and tip to the repair flange.

(al)Remove the leading edge section and tip from the rib.

(am)Mark the position of the anchor nuts attachment holes of the

previously drilled fastener holes.

(an)Predrill the marked anchor nut attachment holes.

(ao)Drill all fastener holes (web and flange positions) to the final
diameter for the fasteners.
(ap)Remove the sharp edges from all the holes drilled in the repair
parts and the rib with an abrasive cloth.

(aq)Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(ar)Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003 ).

WARNING: CHEMICAL CONVERSION COATING (MATERIAL NO. 13−002 )IS DANGER

OUS.

(as)Apply chemical conversion coating (Material No. 13−002 ) to all

the holes.
WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(at)Wet install the rivets MS 20470 DD5 in the rib web positions
with sealant (Material No. 09−005 ).

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(au)Wet install the anchor nuts attachment rivets and the rivets NAS
1097 DD5 in the rib flange positions with sealant (Material No.
09−005 ).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(av)Remove any excess of sealant with the cleaning agent (Material

No. 11−003 ).

Page 254
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(aw)Let the sealant cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions leaf

let for cure time.
(ax)Install the leading edge section and tip removed at step (a).

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 PagesFeb255/256
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Rib Web and Flange, Rib 25

Figure 206 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 PagesFeb257/258
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Rib Web and Flange, Rib 25

Figure 206 (sheet 2)

Page 259
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 209.
G. Repair of Crack to Rib Flange, Rib 25

NOTE: Before you repair the damage structure, you must do a damage eval

uation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: This repair is applicable to crack to the nose flange of the me

tallic rib 25 after mod. 21158G0019 up to a maximum length of 30
mm (1.181 in).

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 209
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information Table in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.
(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions (Refer to Figure 207 )

(a) Remove the leading edge section and tip to get access to the
damaged rib.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 ) IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Remove any trace of sealant from the rib flange with cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003 ).
(c) Stop drill the crack, refer to Chapter 51−73−00, paragraph 5.

(d) Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

(e) Install the leading edge section and tip removed at step (a).

Page 260
Printed in Germany
55−12−12 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Crack to Rib Flange, Rib 25

Figure 207

Printed in Germany
55−12−12 PagesFeb261/262
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TRIMMABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER - TRAILING EDGE

1. Identification Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

- Structural Arrangement Figure 1
1 Access Doors/Panels Chapter 55-13-11
2 Ribs Chapter 55-13-12
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55-10-00, Page Block 001, where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55-13-00 FebPage 1
01/02
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structural Arrangement
Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55-13-00 FebPage 2
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRAILING EDGE − ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE

REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN IN
THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO
PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

1. General

NOTE: For definition of allowable damage refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For Damage Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

This topic contains the allowable damage and related data applicable to the
Horizontal Stabilizer Trailing Edge structure (refer to Figure 101). This
data is necessary to find the correct repair procedure.

NOTE: This allowable damage information is inactive, it has been superseded

by applicable Chapter:
− Chapter 55−13−11 Pageblock 101
− Chapter 55−13−12 Pageblock 101
2. Damage Evaluation

NOTE: This allowable damage information is inactive, it has been superseded

by applicable Chapter:
− Chapter 55−13−11 Pageblock 101
− Chapter 55−13−12 Pageblock 101
3. Type of Damage

NOTE: This allowable damage information is inactive, it has been superseded

by applicable Chapter:
− Chapter 55−13−11 Pageblock 101
− Chapter 55−13−12 Pageblock 101

4. Distance Between Damage Areas and Distance Between Repair Areas

NOTE: This allowable damage information is inactive, it has been superseded
by applicable Chapter:
− Chapter 55−13−11 Pageblock 101
− Chapter 55−13−12 Pageblock 101

5. Repair Zones
NOTE: This allowable damage information is inactive, it has been superseded
by applicable Chapter:
− Chapter 55−13−11 Pageblock 101

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−13−00 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

− Chapter 55−13−12 Pageblock 101

6. Allowable Damage

NOTE: This allowable damage information is inactive, it has been superseded

by applicable Chapter:
− Chapter 55−13−11 Pageblock 101
− Chapter 55−13−12 Pageblock 101

7. Repair Limits
NOTE: This allowable damage information is inactive, it has been superseded
by applicable Chapter:
− Chapter 55−13−11 Pageblock 101
− Chapter 55−13−12 Pageblock 101

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−13−00 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Horizontal Stabilizer Trailing Edge Structure

Figure 101

Page 103
Printed in Germany
55−13−00 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ITEM NAME Refer to the following figures for details of

allowable damage and repair limits according to
damage type
SUPERFICIAL DAMAGE DELAMINATION AND DE

(NICK, SCRATCHES, BONDING
ABRASIONS, GOUGES)
1 Access Panels Figure 105 Figure 106
INACTIVE <1> INACTIVE <1>
2 Rib 0 Figure 105 Figures 105, 106
INACTIVE <2> INACTIVE <2>
3 Rib 1 Figure 105 Figures 105, 106
INACTIVE <2> INACTIVE <2>
4 Rib 2 Figure 105 Figures 105, 106
INACTIVE <2> INACTIVE <2>
5 Rib 3 Figure 105 Figures 105, 106
INACTIVE <3> INACTIVE <3>
6 Rib 4 Figure 105 Figures 105, 106
INACTIVE <3> INACTIVE <3>
7 Rib 5 Figure 105 Figures 105, 106
INACTIVE <2> INACTIVE <2>
8 Rib 6 Figure 105 Figures 105, 106
INACTIVE <2> INACTIVE <2>
9 Rib 7 Figure 105 Figures 105, 106
INACTIVE <2> INACTIVE <2>
10 Rib 8 Figure 105 Figures 105, 106
INACTIVE <2> INACTIVE <2>

Table 101
<1> This allowable damage data is inactive since revision dated May 01/12,
it has been moved to the Chapter 55−13−11 Pageblock 101.

<2> This allowable damage data is inactive since revision dated May 01/12,
it has been moved to the Chapter 55−13−12 Pageblock 101.

<3> This allowable damage data is inactive since revision dated May 01/12.

Page 104
Printed in Germany
55−13−00 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Distance Between Damaged Areas and Between Repair Areas

Figure 102

Printed in Germany
55−13−00 PagesMay105/106
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Access Panels − Repair Zones

Figure 103

Printed in Germany
55−13−00 PagesMay107/108
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Ribs − Repair Zones

Figure 104

Printed in Germany
55−13−00 PagesMay109/110
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits, Trailing Edge Access Panel Skins and
Trailing Edge Ribs. All Zones.
Figure 105
Page 111
Printed in Germany
55−13−00 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits, Trailing Edge Access Panel Structure. All
Zones.
Figure 106
Page 112
Printed in Germany
55−13−00 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRAILING EDGE - REPAIRS

1. General
NOTE: For Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51-11-15.
This topic contains specific repair data applicable to the Horizontal
Stabilizer Trailing Edge structure (for general repair data applicable to
composite structure refer to Chapter 51-77-00). The specific repair
procedures for the trailing edge structure are in the subsequent chapters:
- 55-13-11 Access Panels Repairs.
- 55-13-12 Rib Repairs.
2. Safety Precaution
CAUTION: FOR REPAIRS CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE REFER
TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN IN THE
INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH
3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER REMARKS

No General Repairs applicable. - -

Table 201
4. Damage Evaluation
Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51-77-10, paragraph 3, for data.
5. Types of Repairs
There are three groups of repairs for the aircraft structure:
- permanent repairs,
- temporary repairs,
- permanent repairs after temporary repairs.
A. Permanent Repairs.
There are three types of permanent repairs for the trailing edge
structure. These are as follows:
(1) Laminate Repair.
NOTE: You must make all of the laminate repairs contained in this
topic under vacuum conditions (80% minimum). Refer to Chapter
51-77-11, paragraph 5.D.

Printed in Germany
55-13-00 May
Page 201
01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(2) Pre−cured Repairs.

To make a pre−cured type repair, you must make the repair pieces
from pre−cured composite materials. These repair pieces are then at

tached to the aircraft structure with fasteners. For a pre−cured re

pair, the repair adhesive is used only as a shim. Refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 4.K. for general data about pre−cured repair pro

cedures.
NOTE: The repair adhesive is used as shim material to a maximum
thickness of 1,0 mm (0.039 in) .

(3) Delamination Repairs with Fastener.

This type of permanent repair uses fasteners to hold the delaminated

layers, inside the composite material together. Refer to Chapter
51−77−13, paragraph 3.B. for general data about delamination repairs.

B. Temporary Repairs.

You must only make a temporary repair if you have the subsequent condi

tions:
− you do not have the correct materials to make a permanent repair,
− you do not have the time to make a permanent repair.
C. Permanent Repairs after Temporary Repairs.

You must make a permanent repair after a temporary repair in the given
flight hour (FH) limit. Refer to the applicable allowable damage and re

pair limits data to find the FH limit.

6. Special Tools
To work with composite materials, it is necessary to use special tools.
Here are some examples:
− explosion−proof tools are necessary if CFRP dust is caused,
− tools to cut or drill pre−cured CFRP materials must have very hard cut

ting edges (for example cutting wheels with diamond edges and twist−drills
made from high−speed steel),
− tools to drill composite materials must have specially shaped cutting
edges.

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 3.C. to find data about all the
tools and equipment necessary to make composite repairs.

7. Repair Materials
A. General.

All the materials necessary to make a repair are shown in the applicable
repair materials list in each repair topic.

B. Pre−cured CFRP Materials.

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−13−00 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Some of the specific repairs to the Trailing Edge have a numbered refer

ence to pre−cured section or sheet materials. Airbus Spares Department
can supply these materials for you to use. Refer to Figures 201 thru
203 for material data. Before you use any pre−cured CFRP materials not
supplied by Airbus Spares Department, you must make a Non−Destructive
Test (NDT) inspection of them.

NOTE: If you make the pre−cured CFRP materials yourself, make sure that
the pre−impregnated layers are in their correct lay−up sequence.

C. Metal Repair Parts for CFRP Structures.

Metal repair materials are used for some of the specific repairs to the
Horizontal Stabilizer Trailing Edge. It is used for particular repair
parts, material of whether the specific repair is permanent, temporary or
permanent after temporary. Repair procedures, where applicable, give full
details.

8. Repair Environment

Before you make a permanent repair, make sure that you have the correct
environmental conditions (for example when the aircraft is in a warm and
dry aircraft hangar). It is important that the repair environmental is
clean and has a stable room temperature during the repair procedure.

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−13−00 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured CFRP Sheet Materials Supplied by Airbus Spares Department

Figure 201

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−13−00 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured CFRP Sheet Materials Supplied by Airbus Spares Department

Figure 202 (sheet 1)

Page 205
Printed in Germany
55−13−00 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured CFRP Sheet Materials Supplied by Airbus Spares Department

Figure 202 (sheet 2)

Page 206
Printed in Germany
55−13−00 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre−cured CFRP Sheet Materials Supplied by Airbus Spares Department

Figure 203

Printed in Germany
55−13−00 PagesMay207/208
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ACCESS DOORS/PANELS − TRAILING EDGE

1. Identification Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Access Doors/Panels, Trailing Edge Figure 1

1 Panel 1, Trailing Edge Figure 2
2 Panel 2, Trailing Edge LH Figure 3
3 Panel 2, Trailing Edge RH Figure 4
4 Panel 3, Trailing Edge Figure 5
5 Panel 4, Trailing Edge Figure 6
6 Access Door 1, Trailing Edge Figure 7
7 Access Door 2, Trailing Edge Figure 8
8 Access Door 3, Trailing Edge Figure 9
9 Access Door 4, Trailing Edge LH Figure 10
10 Access Door 4, Trailing Edge RH Figure 11
11 Access Door 5, Trailing Edge Figure 12
12 Access Door 6, Trailing Edge Figure 13
13 Access Door 7, Trailing Edge Figure 14
14 Access Door 8, Trailing Edge Figure 15
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−10−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 NovPage 1
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Doors/Panels, Trailing Edge

Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage 2
01/11
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Panel 1, Trailing Edge

Figure 2 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage 3
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Panel 1, Trailing Edge

Figure 2 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage 4
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Panel 1 Assy D55184210000 PB 201

001 PB 101
1A Panel 1 Assy D55184210002 PB 201 A24970G0244
003 PB 101
1B Panel 1 Assy D55184210004 PB 201 A25156G0270
005 PB 101
1C Panel 1 Assy D55184210008 PB 201 A25728G0296
009 PB 101
1D Panel 1 Assy D55184210010 PB 201 A28683G0355
011 PB 101
1E Panel 1 Assy D55184210012 PB 201 A151344G0570
013 PB 101
5 Panel 1 Composite D55184211000 PB 201
001 PB 101
5A Panel 1 Composite D55184211002 PB 201 A23190G0161
003 PB 101
5B Panel 1 Composite D55184211004 PB 201 A24970G0244
005 PB 101
5C Panel 1 Composite D55184211006 PB 201 A25156G0270
007 PB 101
5D Panel 1 Composite D55184211008 PB 201 A25728G0296
009 PB 101
5E Panel 1 Composite D55184211010 PB 201 A28683G0355
011 PB 101
5F Panel 1 Composite D55184211012 PB 201 A151344G0570
013 PB 101
10 Profile 3.1364T3 D55184383200
LN9073 0.8 (0.031)
15 Profile, sealing DAN186−A01 D55184214200
201
20 Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.141 D55184212200
201
2.0(0.787)
20A Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.654 D55184212202 A25728G0296
203
2.0(0.787)
20B Core Z17.681 D55184212204 A151344G0570
205
ASSY Dwg.: D55184000, D55184210, D55184211

Key to Figure 2

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage 5
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

25 Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.141 D55184213200

201
2.0(0.787)
25A Core Z17.681 D55184213204 A151344G0570
205
30 Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.141 D55184382200
201
2.0(0.787)
30A Core Z−17.654 D55184382218 A25728G0296
219
2.0(0.787)
30B Core Z17.681 D55184382230 A151344G0570
231
35 Film, Tedlar Z−14.310 PB 201
PB 101
35A Film, Tedlar Z−14.510 PB 201 A23190G0161
PB 101
35B Film, Tedlar Z−14.512 PB 201 A25156G0270
PB 101
40 Film, Adhesive Z−15.435
40A Film, Adhesive Z−15.468 A25156G0270
45 Film, Adhesive Z−15.425
45A Film, Adhesive Z−15.467 A25156G0270
ASSY Dwg.: D55184211

Key to Figure 2

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage 6
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Panel 2, Trailing Edge − LH

Figure 3 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage 7
01/11
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Panel 2, Trailing Edge − LH

Figure 3 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 NovPage 8
01/07
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Panel 2 Assy, D55184220002 55−13−00

LH PB 101
1A Panel 2 Assy, D55184250000 PB 201 A20738G0042
LH PB 101
1B Panel 2 Assy, D55184250002 PB 201 A25156G0270
LH PB 101
1C Panel 2 Assy, D55184250004 PB 201 A25728G0296
LH PB 101
1D Panel 2 Assy, D55184260000 55−13−00 A36553G0453
LH PB 101
1E Panel 2 Assy, D55184260002 55−13−00 A151344G0570
LH PB 101
5 Panel 2, LH Composite D55184251000 PB 201
PB 101
5A Panel 2, LH Composite D55184251002 PB 201 A22988G0156
PB 101
5B Panel 2, LH Composite D55184251004 PB 201 A23190G0161
PB 101
5C Panel 2, LH Composite D55184251006 PB 201 A25156G0270
PB 101
5D Panel 2, LH Composite D55184251008 PB 201 A25728G0296
PB 101
5E Panel 2, LH Composite D55184261000 55−13−00 A36553G0453
PB 101
5F Panel 2, LH Composite D55184261004 55−13−00 A151344G0570
PB 101
10 Profile 3.1364T3 D55184383202
LN9073 0.8 (0.031)
15 Profile, sealing DAN186−A01 D55184313205
20 Support 3.1364T3 D92480010200
LN9073
25 Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.141 D55184222202
2.0(0.787)
25A Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.654 D55184222204 A25728G0296
2.0(0.787)
25B Core Z17.681 D55184222208 A151344G0570
30 Film, Tedlar Z−14.310 PB 201
PB 101
ASSY Dwg.: D55184000, D55184250, D55184251, D55184260, D55184261

Key to Figure 3

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage 9
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

30A Film, Tedlar Z−14.510 PB 201 A23190G0161

PB 101
30B Film, Tedlar Z−14.512 PB 201 A25156G0270
PB 101
Film, Tedlar Z−14.512 PB 201
PB 101
35 Film, Adhesive Z−15.403
35A Film, Adhesive Z−15.429 A25156G0270
B36553G0453
40 Plate 3.1364T3 D55184251200 55−13−00 B36553G0453
LN9073 0.3(0.012) PB 101
45 Adhesive Film Z−15.468 A36553G0453
50 Adhesive Film Z−15.467 A36553G0453
55 Bronze Mesh Z−22.948 A36553G0453
60 Glass Prepreg Z−19.304 A36553G0453
ASSY Dwg.: D55184251, D55184261

Key to Figure 3

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1510
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Panel 2, Trailing Edge − RH

Figure 4 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1111
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Panel 2, Trailing Edge − RH

Figure 4 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 NovPage01/0712
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Panel 2 Assy, D55184225002 55−13−00

RH PB 101
1A Panel 2 Assy, D55184255000 PB 201 A20738G0042
RH PB 101
1B Panel 2 Assy, D55184255002 PB 201 A25156G0270
RH PB 101
1C Panel 2 Assy, D55184255004 PB 201 A25728G0296
RH PB 101
1D Panel 2 Assy, D55184265000 55−13−00 A36553G0453
RH PB 101
1E Panel 2 Assy, D55184265002 55−13−00 A151344G0570
RH PB 101
5 Panel 2, RH Composite D55184256000 PB 201
PB 101
5A Panel 2, RH Composite D55184256002 PB 201 A22988G0156
PB 101
5B Panel 2, RH Composite D55184256004 PB 201 A23190G0161
PB 101
5C Panel 2, RH Composite D55184256006 PB 201 A25156G0270
PB 101
5D Panel 2, RH Composite D55184256008 PB 201 A25728G0296
PB 101
5E Panel 2, RH Composite D55184266000 55−13−00 A36553G0453
PB 101
5F Panel 2, RH Composite D55184266004 55−13−00 A151344G0570
PB 101
10 Profile 3.1364T3 D55184383202
LN9073 0.8 (0.031)
15 Profile, sealing DAN186−A01 D55184313204
20 Support 3.1364T3 D92480010200
LN9073 1.2(0.047)
25 Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.141 D55184227202
2.0(0.787)
25A Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.654 D55184227204 A25728G0296
2.0(0.787)
25B Core Z17.681 D55184227208 A151344G0570
30 Film, Tedlar Z−14.310 PB 201
PB 101
ASSY Dwg.: D55184000, D55184255, D55184256, D55184265, D55184266

Key to Figure 4

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1513
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

30A Film, Tedlar Z−14.510 PB 201 A23190G0161

PB 101
30B Film, Tedlar Z−14.512 PB 201 A25156G0270
PB 101
Film, Tedlar Z−14.512 PB 201
PB 101
35 Film, Adhesive Z−15.403
35A Film, Adhesive Z−15.429 A25156G0270
B36553G0453
40 Plate 3.1364T3 D55184256200 55−13−00 B36553G0453
LN9073 0.3(0.012) PB 101
45 Adhesive Film Z−15.468 A36553G0453
50 Adhesive Film Z−15.467 A36553G0453
55 Bronze Mesh Z−22.948 A36553G0453
60 Glass Prepeg Z−19.304 A36553G0453
ASSY Dwg.: D55184256, D55184266

Key to Figure 4

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1514
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Panel 3, Trailing Edge

Figure 5 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1515
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Panel 3, Trailing Edge

Figure 5 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1516
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Panel 3 Assy D55184230000 PB 201

001 55−13−00
PB 101
1A Panel 3 Assy D55184230002 PB 201 A24970G0244
003 PB 101
1B Panel 3 Assy D55184230004 PB 201 A25156G0270
005 PB 101
1C Panel 3 Assy D55184230008 PB 201 A25728G0296
009 PB 101
1D Panel 3 Assy D55184230010 PB 201 A28683G0355
011 PB 101
1E Panel 3 Assy D55184230012 PB 201 A151344G0570
013 PB 101
5 Panel 3 Composite D55184231000 PB 201
001 PB 101
5A Panel 3 Composite D55184231002 PB 201 A23190G0161
003 PB 101
5B Panel 3 Composite D55184231004 PB 201 A24970G0244
005 PB 101
5C Panel 3 Composite D55184231006 PB 201 A25156G0270
007 PB 101
5D Panel 3 Composite D55184231008 PB 201 A25728G0296
009 PB 101
5E Panel 3 Composite D55184231010 PB 201 A28683G0355
011 PB 101
5F Panel 3 Composite D55184231012 PB 201 A151344G0570
013 PB 101
10 Cover 3.1364T3 D55184233200
LN9073
15 Profile 3.1364T3 D55184383204
LN9073 0.8 (0.031)
20 Profile, sealing DAN186−A01 D55184232200
201
25 Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.141 D55184234200
201
2.0(0.787)
25A Core Z17.681 D55184234202 A151344G0570
203
ASSY Dwg.: D55184000, D55184230, D55184231

Key to Figure 5

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1517
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

30 Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.141 D55184235200

201
2.0(0.787)
30A Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.141 D55184235202
203
2.0(0.787)
30B Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.654 D55184235204 A25728G0270
205
2.0(0.787)
30C Core Z17.681 D55184235206 A151344G0570
207
35 Film, Tedlar Z−14.310 PB 201
PB 101
35A Film, Tedlar Z−14.510 PB 201 A23190G0161
PB 101
35B Film, Tedlar Z−14.512 PB 201 A25156G0270
PB 101
40 Film, Adhesive Z−15.435
40A Film, Adhesive Z−15.467 A25156G0270
40B Film, Adhesive Z−15.468 A28683G0355
45 Film, Adhesive Z−15.425
45A Film, Adhesive Z−15.468 A25156G0270
45B Film, Adhesive Z−15.467 A28683G0355
ASSY Dwg.: D55184231

Key to Figure 5

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1518
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Panel 4, Trailing Edge

Figure 6 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1119
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Panel 4, Trailing Edge

Figure 6 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1120
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Panel 4 Assy D55184240000 PB 201

001 PB 101
1A Panel 4 Assy D55184240002 PB 201 A24970G0244
003 PB 101
1B Panel 4 Assy D55184240004 PB 201 A25156G0270
005 PB 101
1C Panel 4 Assy D55184240008 PB 201 A25728G0296
009 PB 101
1D Panel 4 Assy D55184240010 PB 201 A28683G0355
011 PB 101
1E Panel 4 Assy D55184240012 PB 201 A151344G0570
013 PB 101
5 Panel 4 Composite D55184241000 PB 201
001 PB 101
5A Panel 4 Composite D55184241002 PB 201 A23190G0161
003 PB 101
5B Panel 4 Composite D55184241004 PB 201 A24970G0244
005 PB 101
5C Panel 4 Composite D55184241006 PB 201 A25156G0270
007 PB 101
5D Panel 4 Composite D55184241008 PB 201 A25728G0296
009 PB 101
5E Panel 4 Composite D55184241010 PB 201 A28683G0355
011 PB 101
5F Panel 4 Composite D55184241012 PB 201 A151344G0570
013 PB 101
10 Profile 3.1364T3 D55184383208
LN9073 0.8 (0.031)
15 Profile, sealing DAN186−A01 D55184232202
203
20 Profile 3.1364T3 D55184383206
LN9073
20A Profile 3.1364T3 D55184383226 A28683G0355
LN9073 227
0.8 (0.031)
25 Profile, sealing DAN186−A01 D55184243200
201
25A Profile, sealing DAN186−A01 D55184243202 A28683G0355
DAN447 203
ASSY Dwg.: D55184000, D55184240

Key to Figure 6

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1521
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

30 Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.141 D55184242200

201
2.0(0.787)
30A Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.654 D55184242202 A25728G0296
203
2.0(0.787)
30B Core Z17.681 D55184242204 A151344G0570
205
35 Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.141 D55184382206
207
2.0(0.787)
35A Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.654 D55184382220 A25728G0296
221
2.0(0.787)
35B Core Z17.681 D55184382232 A151344G0570
233
40 Film, Tedlar Z−14.310 PB 201
PB 101
40A Film, Tedlar Z−14.510 PB 201 A23190G0161
PB 101
40B Film, Tedlar Z−14.512 PB 201 A25156G0270
PB 101
45 Film, Adhesive Z−15.425
45A Film, Adhesive Z−15.435 A24970G0244
45B Film, Adhesive Z−15.468 A25156G0270
50 Film, Adhesive Z−15.425
50A Film, Adhesive Z−15.467 A25156G0270
ASSY Dwg.: D55184241

Key to Figure 6

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1522
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Door 1, Trailing Edge

Figure 7 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1123
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Door 1, Trailing Edge

Figure 7 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1124
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Access Door 1 D55184300000 PB 201

Assy 001 PB 101
1A Access Door 1 D55184300002 PB 201 A23190G0161
Assy 003 PB 101
1B Access Door 1 D55184300004 PB 201 A24970G0244
Assy 005 PB 101
1C Access Door 1 D55184300006 PB 201 A25156G0270
Assy 007 PB 101
1D Access Door 1 D55184300008 PB 201 A25728G0296
Assy 009 PB 101
1E Access Door 1 D55184300010 PB 201 A28683G0355
Assy 011 PB 101
1F Access Door 1 D55184300012 PB 201 A151344G0570
Assy 013 PB 101
5 Access Door 1 Composite D55184301000 PB 201
001 PB 101
5A Access Door 1 Composite D55184301002 PB 201 A23190G0161
003 PB 101
5B Access Door 1 Composite D55184301004 PB 201 A24970G0244
005 PB 101
5C Access Door 1 Composite D55184301006 PB 201 A25156G0270
007 PB 101
5D Access Door 1 Composite D55184301008 PB 201 A25728G0296
009 PB 101
5E Access Door 1 Composite D55184301010 PB 201 A28683G0355
011 PB 101
5F Access Door 1 Composite D55184301012 PB 201 A151344G0570
013 PB 101
10 Profile 3.1364T3 D55184383210
LN9073 0.8 (0.031)
15 Profile, sealing DAN186−A01 D55184303200
201
20 Core 4.0−3/16 Z−17.141 D55184302200
201
2.0(0.787)
20A Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.654 D55184302202 A25728G0296
203
2.0(0.787)
20B Core Z17.681 D55184302204 A151344G0570
205
ASSY Dwg.: D55184000, D55184300, D55184301

Key to Figure 7

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1525
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

25 Film, Tedlar Z−14.310 PB 201

PB 101
25A Film, Tedlar Z−14.510 PB 201 A23190G0161
PB 101
25B Film, Tedlar Z−14.512 PB 201 A25156G0270
PB 101
30 Film, Adhesive Z−15.425
30A Film, Adhesive Z−15.435 A24970G0244
30B Film, Adhesive Z−15.468 A25156G0270
35 Film, Adhesive Z−15.425
35A Film, Adhesive Z−15.467 A25156G0270
ASSY Dwg.: D55184301

Key to Figure 7

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1526
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Door 2, Trailing Edge

Figure 8 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1127
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Door 2, Trailing Edge

Figure 8 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1128
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Access Door 2 D55184310000 PB 201

Assy 001 PB 101
1A Access Door 2 D55184310002 PB 201 A23190G0161
Assy 003 PB 101
1B Access Door 2 D55184310004 PB 201 A24970G0244
Assy 005 PB 101
1C Access Door 2 D55184310006 PB 201 A25156G0270
Assy 007 PB 101
1D Access Door 2 D55184310008 PB 201 A25728G0296
Assy 009 PB 101
1E Access Door 2 D55184310010 PB 201 A28683G0355
Assy 011 PB 101
1F Access Door 2 D55184310012 PB 201 A151344G0570
Assy 013 PB 101
5 Access Door 2 Composite D55184311000 PB 201
001 PB 101
5A Access Door 2 Composite D55184311002 PB 201 A23190G0161
003 PB 101
5B Access Door 2 Composite D55184311004 PB 201 A24970G0244
005 PB 101
5C Access Door 2 Composite D55184311006 PB 201 A25156G0270
007 PB 101
5D Access Door 2 Composite D55184311008 PB 201 A25728G0296
009 PB 101
5E Access Door 2 Composite D55184311010 PB 201 A28683G0355
011 PB 101
5F Access Door 2 Composite D55184311012 PB 201 A151344G0570
013 PB 101
10 Profile 3.1364T3 D55184383212
LN9073 0.8 (0.031)
15 Profile, sealing DAN186−A01 D55184313200
201
20 Profile 1.4544.9 D55184384200
LN9450 0.6 (0.024)
25 Hinge MS20001H9 D55184312000
001
30 Shim 3.1364T3 D55184312200
LN9073 1.2 (0.047)
ASSY Dwg.: D55184000, D55184310, D55184312

Key to Figure 8

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1529
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

35 Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.141 D55184382208

209
2.0(0.787)
35A Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.654 D55184382222 A25728G0296
223
2.0(0.787)
35B Core Z17.681 D55184382234 A151344G0570
235
40 Film, Tedlar Z−14.310 PB 201
55−13−00
PB 101
40A Film, Tedlar Z−14.510 PB 201 A23190G0161
PB 101
40B Film, Tedlar Z−14.512 PB 201 A25156G0270
PB 101
45 Film, Adhesive Z−15.425
45A Film, Adhesive Z−15.435 A24970G0244
45B Film, Adhesive Z−15.468 A25156G0270
50 Film, Adhesive Z−15.425
50A Film, Adhesive Z−15.467 A25156G0270
ASSY Dwg.: D55184000, D55184311

Key to Figure 8

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1530
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Door 3, Trailing Edge

Figure 9 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1131
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Door 3, Trailing Edge

Figure 9 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1132
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Access Door 3 D55184320000 PB 201

Assy 001 PB 101
1A Access Door 3 D55184320002 PB 201 A23190G0161
Assy 003 PB 101
1B Access Door 3 D55184320004 PB 201 A24970G0244
Assy 005 PB 101
1C Access Door 3 D55184320006 PB 201 A25156G0270
Assy 007 PB 101
1D Access Door 3 D55184320008 PB 201 A25728G0296
Assy 009 PB 101
1E Access Door 3 D55184320010 PB 201 A28683G0355
Assy 011 PB 101
1F Access Door 3 D55184320012 PB 201 A151344G0570
Assy 013 PB 101
5 Access Door 3 Composite D55184321000 PB 201
001 PB 101
5A Access Door 3 Composite D55184321002 PB 201 A23190G0161
003 PB 101
5B Access Door 3 Composite D55184321004 PB 201 A24970G0244
005 PB 101
5C Access Door 3 Composite D55184321006 PB 201 A25156G0270
007 PB 101
5D Access Door 3 Composite D55184321008 PB 201 A25728G0296
009 PB 101
5E Access Door 3 Composite D55184321010 PB 201 A28683G0355
011 PB 101
5F Access Door 3 Composite D55184321012 PB 201 A151344G0570
013 PB 101
10 Profile 3.1364T3 D55184383214
LN9073 0.8 (0.031)
15 Profile, sealing DAN186−A01 D55184313202
203
20 Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.141 D55184382210
211
2.0(0.787)
20A Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.654 D55184382224 A25728G0296
225
2.0(0.787)
20B Core Z17.681 D55184382236 A151344G0570
237
ASSY Dwg.: D55184000, D55184320, D55184321

Key to Figure 9

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1533
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

25 Film, Tedlar Z−14.310 PB 201

PB 101
25A Film, Tedlar Z−14.510 PB 201 A23190G0161
PB 101
25B Film, Tedlar Z−14.512 PB 201 A25156G0270
PB 101
30 Film, Adhesive Z−15.425
30A Film, Adhesive Z−15.435 A24970G0244
30B Film, Adhesive Z−15.468 A25156G0270
35 Film, Adhesive Z−15.425
35A Film, Adhesive Z−15.467 A25156G0270
ASSY Dwg.: D55184321

Key to Figure 9

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1534
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Door 4, LH Trailing Edge

Figure 10 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1135
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Door 4, LH Trailing Edge

Figure 10 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 NovPage01/0736
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Access Door 4 D55184390000 PB 201

Assy, LH PB 101
1A Access Door 4 D55184390002 PB 201 A23190G0161
Assy, LH PB 101
1B Access Door 4 D55184390004 PB 201 A25156G0270
Assy, LH PB 101
1C Access Door 4 D55184390006 PB 201 A25728G0296
Assy, LH PB 101
1D Access Door 4 D55184392000 55−13−00 A36553G0453
Assy, LH PB 101
1E Access Door 4 D55184392002 55−13−00 A151344G0570
Assy, LH PB 101
5 Access Door 4, Composite D55184391000 PB 201
LH PB 101
5A Access Door 4, Composite D55184391002 PB 201 A23190G0161
LH PB 101
5B Access Door 4, Composite D55184391004 PB 201 A25156G0270
LH PB 101
5C Access Door 4, Composite D55184391006 PB 201 A25728G0296
LH PB 101
5D Access Door 4, Composite D55184393000 55−13−00 A36553G0453
LH PB 101
5E Access Door 4, Composite D55184393002 55−13−00 A151344G0570
LH PB 101
10 Profile 3.1364T3 D55184383202
LN9073 0.8 (0.031)
15 Profile, sealing DAN186−A01 D55184313204
20 Profile 3.1364T3 D55184384202
20A Profile 1.4544.9 D55184384208 A151344G0570
LN9450 0.6 (0.024)
25 Hinge MS20001H9 D55184332002
30 Shim 3.1364T3 D55184332200
LN9073 1.2 (0.047)
35 Support 3.1364T3 D92480010200
LN9073
40 Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.141 D55184333200
2.0(0.787)
40A Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.654 D55184333206 A25728G0296
2.0(0.787)
ASSY Dwg.: D55184000, D55184332, D55184390, D55184391, D55184392

Key to Figure 10

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1537
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

40B Core Z17.681 D55184333212 A151344G0570

45 Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.141 D55184333202
2.0(0.787)
45A Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.654 D55184333208 A25728G0296
2.0(0.787)
45B Core Z17.681 D55184333214 A151344G0570
50 Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.141 D55184333204
2.0(0.787)
50A Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.654 D55184333210 A25728G0296
2.0(0.787)
50B Core Z17.681 D55184333216 A151344G0570
55 Film, Tedlar Z−14.310 PB 201
PB 101
55A Film, Tedlar Z−14.510 PB 201 A23190G0161
PB 101
55B Film, Tedlar Z−14.512 PB 201 A25156G0270
PB 101
Film, Tedlar Z−14.512 PB 201
PB 101
60 Film, Adhesive Z−15.403
60A Film, Adhesive Z−15.429 A25156G0270
B36553G0453
65 Plate 3.1364T3 D55184391200 55−13−00 B36553G0453
LN9073 0.3(0.012) PB 101
70 Bronze Mesh Z−22.948 A36553G0453
75 Film, Adhesive Z−15.467 A36553G0453
80 Film, Adhesive Z−15.468 A36553G0453
85 Glass Prepreg Z−19.304 A36553G0453
ASSY Dwg.: D55184391, D55184393

Key to Figure 10

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1538
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Door 4, RH Trailing Edge

Figure 11 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1139
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Door 4, RH Trailing Edge

Figure 11 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 NovPage01/0740
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Access Door 4 D55184395000 PB 201

Assy, RH PB 101
1A Access Door 4 D55184395002 PB 201 A23190G0161
Assy, RH PB 101
1B Access Door 4 D55184395004 PB 201 A25156G0270
Assy, RH PB 101
1C Access Door 4 D55184395006 PB 201 A25728G0296
Assy, RH PB 101
1D Access Door 4 D55184397000 55−13−00 A36553G0453
Assy, RH PB 101
1E Access Door 4 D55184397002 55−13−00 A151344G0570
Assy, RH PB 101
5 Access Door 4, Composite D55184396000 PB 201
RH PB 101
5A Access Door 4, Composite D55184396000 PB 201
RH PB 101
5B Access Door 4, Composite D55184396002 PB 201 A23190G0161
RH PB 101
5C Access Door 4, Composite D55184396004 PB 201 A25156G0270
RH PB 101
5D Access Door 4, Composite D55184396006 PB 201 A25728G0296
RH PB 101
5E Access Door 4, Composite D55184398000 55−13−00 A36553G0453
RH PB 101
5F Access Door 4, Composite D55184398002 55−13−00 A151344G0570
RH PB 101
10 Profile 3.1364T3 D55184383202
LN9073 08 (0.031)
15 Profile, sealing DAN186−A01 D55184313205
20 Profile 3.1364T3 D55184384202
LN9073
20A Profile 1.4544.9 D55184384208 A151344G0570
LN9450 0.6 (0.024)
25 Hinge MS20001H9 D55184332003
30 Shim 3.1364T3 D55184332200
LN9073 1.2 (0.047)
35 Support 3.1364T3 D92480010200
LN9073
ASSY Dwg.: D55184000, D55184332, D55184395, D55184397

Key to Figure 11

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1541
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

40 Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.141 D55184337200

2.0(0.787)
40A Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.654 D55184337206 A25728G0296
2.0(0.787)
40B Core Z17.681 D55184337212 A151344G0570
45 Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.141 D55184337202
2.0(0.787)
45A Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.654 D55184337208 A25728G0296
2.0(0.787)
45B Core Z17.681 D55184337214 A151344G0570
50 Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.141 D55184337204
2.0(0.787)
50A Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.654 D55184337210 A25728G0296
2.0(0.787)
50B Core Z17.681 D55184337216 A151344G0570
55 Film, Tedlar Z−14.310 PB 201
PB 101
55A Film, Tedlar Z−14.510 PB 201 A23190G0161
PB 101
55B Film, Tedlar Z−14.512 PB 201 A25156G0270
PB 101
Film, Tedlar Z−14.512 PB 201
PB 101
60 Film, Adhesive Z−15.403
60A Film, Adhesive Z−15.429 A25156G0270
B36553G0453
65 Plate 3.1364T3 D55184396200 55−13−00 B36553G0453
LN9073 0.3(0.012) PB 101
70 Film, Adhesive Z−15.467 A36553G0453
75 Film, Adhesive Z−15.468 A36553G0453
80 Bronze Mesh Z−22.948 A36553G0453
85 Glass Prepreg Z−19.304 A36553G0453
ASSY Dwg.: D55184396, D55184398

Key to Figure 11

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1542
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Door 5, Trailing Edge

Figure 12 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1143
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Door 5, Trailing Edge

Figure 12 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1144
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Access Door 5 D55184340000 PB 201

Assy 001 PB 101
1A Access Door 5 D55184340002 PB 201 A23190G0161
Assy 003 PB 101
1B Access Door 5 D55184340004 PB 201 A24970G0244
Assy 005 PB 101
1C Access Door 5 D55184340006 PB 201 A25156G0270
Assy 007 PB 101
1D Access Door 5 D55184340008 PB 201 A25728G0296
Assy 009 PB 101
1E Access Door 5 D55184340010 PB 201 A28683G0355
Assy 011 PB 101
1F Access Door 5 D55184340012 PB 201 A151344G0570
Assy 013 PB 101
5 Access Door 5 Composite D55184341000 PB 201
001 PB 101
5A Access Door 5 Composite D55184341002 PB 201 A23190G0161
003 PB 101
5B Access Door 5 Composite D55184341004 PB 201 A24970G0244
005 PB 101
5C Access Door 5 Composite D55184341006 PB 201 A25156G0270
007 PB 101
5D Access Door 5 Composite D55184341008 PB 201 A25728G0296
009 PB 101
5E Access Door 5 Composite D55184341010 PB 201 A28683G0355
011 PB 101
5F Access Door 5 Composite D55184341012 PB 201 A151344G0570
013 PB 101
10 Profile 3.1364T3 D55184383216
LN9073 0.8 (0.031)
15 Profile, sealing DAN186−A01 D55184313206
207
20 Core 4.0−3/16 Z−17.141 D55184382214
215
2.0(0.787)
20A Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.654 D55184382226 A25728G0296
227
2.0(0.787)
20B Core Z17.681 D55184382238 A151344G0570
239
ASSY Dwg.: D55184000, D55184340, D55184341

Key to Figure 12

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1545
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

25 Film, Tedlar Z−14.310 PB 201

PB 101
25A Film, Tedlar Z−14.510 PB 201 A23190G0161
PB 101
25B Film, Tedlar Z−14.512 PB 201 A25156G0270
PB 101
30 Film, Adhesive Z−15.425
30A Film, Adhesive Z−15.435 A24970G0244
30B Film, Adhesive Z−15.468 A25156G0270
35 Film, Adhesive Z−15.425
35A Film, Adhesive Z−15.467 A25156G0270
ASSY Dwg.: D55184341

Key to Figure 12

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1546
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Door 6, Trailing Edge

Figure 13 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 Pages 47/48
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Door 6, Trailing Edge

Figure 13 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 Pages 49/50
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Access Door 6 D55184350000 PB 201

Assy 001 PB 101
1A Access Door 6 D55184350002 PB 201 A23190G0161
Assy 003 PB 101
1B Access Door 6 D55184350004 PB 201 A24970G0244
Assy 005 PB 101
1C Access Door 6 D55184350006 PB 201 A25156G0270
Assy 007 PB 101
1D Access Door 6 D55184350008 PB 201 A25728G0296
Assy 009 PB 101
1E Access Door 6 D55184350010 PB 201 A28683G0355
Assy 011 PB 101
1F Access Door 6 D55184350012 PB 201 A151344G0570
Assy 013 PB 101
5 Access Door 6 Composite D55184351000 PB 201
001 PB 101
5A Access Door 6 Composite D55184351002 PB 201 A23190G0161
003 PB 101
5B Access Door 6 Composite D55184351004 PB 201 A24970G0244
005 PB 101
5C Access Door 6 Composite D55184351006 PB 201 A25156G0270
007 PB 101
5D Access Door 6 Composite D55184351008 PB 201 A25728G0296
009 PB 101
5E Access Door 6 Composite D55184351010 PB 201 A28683G0355
011 PB 101
5F Access Door 6 Composite D55184351012 PB 201 A151344G0570
013 PB 101
10 Profile 3.1364T3 D55184383218
LN9073 0.8 (0.031)
15 Profile, sealing DAN186−A01 D55184313208
209
20 Profile 1.4544.9 D55184384204
LN9450 0.6 (0.024)
25 Hinge MS20001H9 D55184352000
001
30 Shim 3.1364T3 D55184352200
LN9073 1.2 (0.047)
ASSY Dwg.: D55184000, D55184350, D55184352

Key to Figure 13

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1551
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

35 Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.141 D55184382216

217
2.0(0.787)
35A Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.654 D55184382228 A25728G0296
229
2.0(0.787)
35B Core Z17.681 D55184382240 A151344G0570
241
40 Film, Tedlar Z−14.310 PB 201
PB 101
40A Film, Tedlar Z−14.510 PB 201 A23190G0161
PB 101
40B Film, Tedlar Z−14.512 PB 201 A25156G0270
PB 101
45 Film, Adhesive Z−15.425
45A Film, Adhesive Z−15.435 A24970G0244
45B Film, Adhesive Z−15.468 A25156G0270
50 Film, Adhesive Z−15.425
50A Film, Adhesive Z−15.467 A25156G0270
ASSY Dwg.: D55184351

Key to Figure 13

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1552
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Door 7, Trailing Edge

Figure 14 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1553
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Door 7, Trailing Edge

Figure 14 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1554
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Access Door 7 D55184360000 PB 201

Assy 001 PB 101
1A Access Door 7 D55184360002 PB 201 A23190G0161
Assy 003 PB 101
1B Access Door 7 D55184360004 PB 201 A24970G0244
Assy 005 PB 101
1C Access Door 7 D55184360006 PB 201 A25156G0270
Assy 007 PB 101
1D Access Door 7 D55184360008 PB 201 A25728G0296
Assy 009 PB 101
1E Access Door 7 D55184360010 PB 201 A28683G0355
Assy 011 PB 101
1F Access Door 7 D55184360012 PB 201 A151344G0570
Assy 013 PB 101
5 Access Door 7 Composite D55184361000 PB 201
001 PB 101
5A Access Door 7 Composite D55184361002 PB 201 A23190G0161
003 PB 101
5B Access Door 7 Composite D55184361004 PB 201 A24970G0244
005 PB 101
5C Access Door 7 Composite D55184361006 PB 201 A25156G0270
007 PB 101
5D Access Door 7 Composite D55184361008 PB 201 A25728G0296
009 PB 101
5E Access Door 7 Composite D55184361010 PB 201 A28683G0355
011 PB 101
5F Access Door 7 Composite D55184361012 PB 201 A151344G0570
013 PB 101
10 Profile 3.1364T3 D55184383220
LN9073 0.8 (0.031)
15 Profile, sealing DAN186−A01 D55184313210
211
20 Core 4.0−3/16 Z−17.141 D55184362200
201
2.0(0.787)
20A Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.654 D55184362202 A25728G0296
203
2.0(0.787)
20B Core Z17.681 D55184362204 A151344G0570
205
ASSY Dwg.: D55184000, D55184360, D55184361

Key to Figure 14

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1555
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

25 Core 4.0−3/16 Z−17.141 D55184363200

201
2.0(0.787)
25A Core, 4.0−3/16 Z−17.654 D55184363202 A25728G0296
203
2.0(0.787)
25B Core Z17.681 D55184363204 A151344G0570
205
30 Film, Tedlar Z−14.310 PB 201
PB 101
30A Film, Tedlar Z−14.510 PB 201 A23190G0161
PB 101
30B Film, Tedlar Z−14.512 PB 201 A25156G0270
PB 101
35 Film, Adhesive Z−15.425
35A Film, Adhesive Z−15.435 A24970G0244
35B Film, Adhesive Z−15.468 A25156G0270
40 Film, Adhesive Z−15.425
40A Film, Adhesive Z−15.467 A25156G0270
ASSY Dwg.: D55184361

Key to Figure 14

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1556
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Door 8, Trailing Edge

Figure 15

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1557
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Access Door 8 D55184370000 PB 201

Assy 001 PB 101
5 Access Door 8 Composite D55184371000 PB 201
001 PB 101
10 Profile 3.1364T3 D55184383222
LN9073 0.8 (0.031)
10A Profile 3.1364T3 D55184383224 A24973G0670
LN9073 225
0.8 (0.031)
15 Profile, sealing DAN186−A01 D55184373200
201
15A Profile, sealing DAN186−A01 D55184373202 A24973G0670
203
20 Profile 1.4511.9 D55184384206
LN9450 0.6 (0.024)
25 Hinge MS20001H9 D55184372000
001
30 Shim 3.1364T3 D55184372200
LN9073 1.2 (0.047)
ASSY Dwg.: D55184000, D55184370, D55184372

Key to Figure 15

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 FebPage01/1558
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TRAILING EDGE ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS − ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

CAUTION: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT PARAGRAPH.

CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO

PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

1. General

NOTE: For definition of allowable damage refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For Damage Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14

− CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

2. Damage Evaluation
Before you repair the damage structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

3. Type of Damage

The two main types of damage which can occur to the composite structure
are as follows:
A. Delamination with or without visible cracks and holes, debonding and
dents.

This is when the structure comes into contact with an object, or water
permeates the composite structure resulting in one or more of the fol

lowing:
− separation between the plies
− broken plies
− structure pushed in with respect to the usual contour.

For more data on damage causes refer to Chapter 51−11−00, paragraph 1.

B. Superficial Damage

This is when the structure is damaged only on the external surface, with
no damage to the internal structure. Nicks and scratches are examples of
superficial damage.

4. Distance Between Damaged Areas and Between Repair Areas

There is a minimum permitted distance between damaged areas and repair

areas (refer to Figure 101):

A. Damaged Areas
Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

For the minimum distance between two damaged areas (X) refer to the spe

cific allowable damage table. Depending on the order of the damages,
Lmax is as follows:
− Different Order
If the length of the larger damage is more than 10 × length of the
smaller damage, then Lmax is the length of the smaller damage.
− Same Order
If the length of the larger damage is less or equal than 10 × length
of the smaller damage, then Lmax is the length of the larger damage.

When the distance (X) between two damages areas is less than the minimum
distance, the two damages must be enveloped together and the area of the
envelop is to be considered as one damage area.

B. Repair Areas
For the minimum distance between two repair areas (Y) refer to the spe

cific allowable damage table. If you have less than this distance, refer
to AIRBUS before you do the second repair.

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Distance Between Damaged Areas and Between Repair Areas, all Zones
Figure 101

Page 103
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

5. Repair zones

The Horizontal Stabilizer Trailing Edge Access Doors and Panels are divided
into repair zones. These repair zones show the zones of different structur

al importance of the component. When you do a damage evaluation (refer to
paragraph 2.) you must refer to the repair zone data.

The THS Trailing Edge is divided into the following repair zones:

− For Trailing Edge Access Doors and Panels, Repair Zones 01 and 02 refer
to figure 102

− For Trailing Edge Access Doors VIII, Repair Zone 03 refer to figure 103

6. Allowable Damage

A. Allowable damage is damage for which a structural repair is not neces

sary. The allowable damage must be assessed after the damaged material
has been removed and the damaged area smoothed. The allowable damage
data for the Horizontal Stabilizer Trailing Edge Access Doors and Panels
is in table 101.

Any damage to the tedlar film installed to the inside surface of the
access doors and panels must be repaired, irrespective of the damage ex

tent. Refer toChapter 55−13−11, Pageblock 201, for repair data.

7. Allowable Damage Description/Criteria

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ PARAGRAPH/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION INSTRUCTION REF

TYPE DIAGRAM CATEGORY
ERENCE
Trailing Edge Access Linear Dam
9.A./101 A, C −
Doors and Panels. Zones age
01 and 02, Subzone A.
Trailing Edge Access Superficial 9.B./102 A, C −
Doors and Panels. Zones Damage
01 and 02, Subzone A.
Trailing Edge Access Linear Dam
9.C./103 A, C −
Doors and Panels. Zones age
01 and 02, Subzone B.
Trailing Edge Access Linear and 10.A./104 A, C −
Door VIII. Zone 03, Sub
Superficial
zone A. Damage
Trailing Edge Access Linear and 10.B./105 A, C −
Door VIII. Zone 03, Sub
Superficial
zone B. Damage

Table 101

Page 104
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ PARAGRAPH/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION INSTRUCTION REF

TYPE DIAGRAM CATEGORY
ERENCE
Trailing Edge Access Linear and 10.C./106 A, C −
Door VIII. Zone 03, Sub
Superficial
zone C. Damage
Trailing Edge Access Linear and 10.D./107 A, C −
Door VIII. Zone 03, Sub
Superficial
zone D. Damage
Trailing Edge Access Missing 10.E./108 A, C −
Door VIII. Zone 03, Sub
Fastener
zones B, C and D.

Table 101
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

8. Repair Limits

The repair limits data gives the time limits in which to make temporary
and permanent repairs. These time limits are given in flight cycles/hours
(FC/FH). The repair limits also tell you which type of repair you can do.
To find the repair limits data applicable to a damaged area, you must know
the following data:
− the repair zone applicable to the damaged area.
− the area, length or depth (as applicable) of the damage to the structure.
− the type of damage (for example: nick, scratch, delamination).
9. Trailing Edge Access Doors and Panels, Zones 01 and 02 − Allowable Damage

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesMay105/106
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Access Door and Panels − Repair Zones

Figure 102

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesAug107/108
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR

CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 102.
A. Trailing Edge Access Doors and Panels. Zones 01 and 02, Subzone A −
Linear Damage

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Zones 01 and 02 of the

Trailing Edge Access Doors and Panels. Refer to Figure 102 for Re

pair Zones.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 102
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 101 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 103 and perform the corre

sponding repair action.

Page 109
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits, Trailing Edge Access Doors and Panels.
Zones 01 and 02, Subzone A
Diagram 101
Page 110
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC
REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN
S
SIZE TION
ON CATEGORY
CA GO Y DAMAGE X mm REPAIRS Y mm
(in) (in)
The greater
Chapter 51−77−13, Chapter 51−77−13, value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 20 months
Paragraph 2.I Paragraph 2.I (1.97 in) or in)
2.5 Lmax.
Linear damage to (1)
external surface The greater
Refer to Chapter
without damage value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Permanent A 51−77−12, Pa 3.B. 20 months <1> None NO
to sandwich core (1.97 in) or in)
<2>
(nicks,
, ggouges,
g , 2.5 Lmax.
scratches, and Structural Re
The greater
abrasions) pair, Chapter value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(2) Permanent A Immediately None NO
55−13−11, Page (1.97 in) or in)
Block 201. 2.5 Lmax.
(3) − − Contact AIRBUS Immediately − − − −
Allowable Damage and Repair Limits, Trailing Edge Access Doors and Panels.
Zones 01 and 02, Subzone A
Table 103
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

<2> After Repair, apply Pore Filler Material No. 16−050 or 16−052, refer to Chapter 51−35−00

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesMay111/112
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR

CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 104.
B. Trailing Edge Access Doors and Panels. Zones 01 and 02, Subzone A − Su

perficial Damage

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Zones 01 and 02 of the

Trailing Edge Access Doors and Panels. Refer to Figure 102 for Re

pair Zones.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 104
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 102 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Tables 105 and 106, and perform
the corresponding repair action.

Page 113
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits, Trailing Edge Access Doors and Panels.
Zones 01 and 02, Subzone A
Diagram 102
Page 114
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC
REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN
S
SIZE TION
ON CATEGORY
CA GO Y DAMAGE X mm REPAIRS Y mm
(in) (in)
The greater
Chapter 51−77−13, Chapter 51−77−13, value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 20 months
Paragraph 2.I Paragraph 2.I (1.97 in) or in)
2.5 Lmax.
Superficial dam
(1)
ages, delamina
The greater
Non Structural
tions with or value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Permanent A Repair. Refer to 20 months <1> None None
without visible (1.97 in) or in)
Table 106
cracks and 2.5 Lmax.
holes, dents and Structural Re
The greater
debondings pair, Chapter value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(2) Permanent A Immediately None None
55−13−11, Page (1.97 in) or in)
Block 201. 2.5 Lmax.
(3) − − Contact AIRBUS Immediately − − − −
Allowable Damage and Repair Limits, Trailing Edge Access Doors and Panels.
Zones 01 and 02, Subzone A
Table 105
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Page 115
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE DEPTH ELEMENT OF SANDWICH PANEL ACCESSIBILITY EXTENSION APPLICABLE REPAIR OF SRM
AFFECTED CHAPTER 51
Damaged area less than
Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph
− or equal to 1000 mm

2.H.<1>
(1.55 in
).
Partial sandwich thick
One sandwich skin plus Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph
ness affected. core. 2.A.(2). Option D, three
Damaged area greater than
− wet lay−up layers,
1000 mm
(1.55 in
).
orientation ±45/0−90/±45.
Superficial damages and Perform core closing.<1>
delamination (with or Damaged area less than
Both skins plus core Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph
without cracks and/or or equal to 1000 mm

(Subzone A and B). 2.H.<2>
holes) (1.55 in
).
Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph
Full sandwich thickness 2.A.(2). Option D, three
Both skins plus core Access from both faces.
affected. wet lay−up layers,
(Subzone A). Damaged area greater than orientation
1000 mm
(1.55 in
). ±45/0−90/±45.<2>
Both skins plus core Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph
(Subzone B). 2.G.(4).<2>
Panels. Zones 01 and 02, Subzone A, Permanent Repairs for Superficial Damages
Table 106
<1> After Repair, apply Pore Filler Material No. 16−050 or 16−052, refer to Chapter 51−35−00

<2> Perform the repair in two steps. First one face (Skin and core restoration). Second, the opposite side (only skin). Apply Pore Filler Material No. 16−050 or
16−052, refer to Chapter 51−35−00

Page 116
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR

CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 107.
C. Trailing Edge Access Doors and Panels. Zones 01 and 02, Subzone B −
Linear Damage

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Zones 01 and 02 of the

Trailing Edge Access Doors and Panels. Refer to Figure 102 for Re

pair Zones.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 107
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 103 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 108 and perform the corre

sponding repair action.

Page 117
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits, Trailing Edge Access Doors and Panels.
Zones 01 and 02, Subzone B
Diagram 103
Page 118
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC
REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN
S
SIZE TION
ON CATEGORY
CA GO Y DAMAGE X mm REPAIRS Y mm
(in) (in)
The greater
Chapter 51−77−13, Chapter 51−77−13, value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 20 months
Linear damages Paragraph 2.I Paragraph 2.I (1.97 in) or in)
to external sur
sur
2.5 Lmax.
(1)
face (nicks, Non Structural The greater
gouges, scratches Repair. Refer to value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Permanent A 20 months <1> None None
and abrasions) Chapter 51−77−12, (1.97 in) or in)
Pa 3.B. <2> 2.5 Lmax.
(2) − − Contact AIRBUS Immediately − − − −
Allowable Damage and Repair Limits, Trailing Edge Access Doors and Panels.
Zones 01 and 02, Subzone B
Table 108
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

<2> After Repair, apply Pore Filler Material No. 16−050 or 16−052, refer to Chapter 51−35−00

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesMay119/120
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

10. Trailing Edge Access Doors VIII, Zone 03 − Allowable Damage

Page 121
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Access Doors VIII, Zone 03 − Repair Zones

Figure 103

Page 122
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR

CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 109.
A. Trailing Edge Access Door VIII. Zone 03, Subzone A − Linear and Superfi

cial Damage

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Subzone A of the Trailing

Edge Access Door VIII. Refer to Figure 103 for Repair Zones.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 109
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 104 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.
(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 110 and perform the corre

sponding repair action.

Page 123
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Access Door VIII. Zone 03, Subzone A − Linear and Superficial
Damage
Diagram 104
Page 124
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC
REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIM
INSPECTION MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN MAX. NUM

SIZE TION CATEGORY IT BER OF
DAMAGE X mm REPAIRS Y REPAIR/
(in) mm (in) DAMAGE
PER PART
The greater
value of 50
Chapter 51−77−12, 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 20 months None mm (1.97 2
Paragraph 2.A in)
in) or 2.5
Lmax.
Linear and su
Refer to Chapter
perficial dam
(1) 51−77−12, Pa.
The greater
ages, scratches, 3.B for non per

value of 50
nicks, gouges, forating damage 50 mm (1.97
Permanent A 20 months <1> None None mm (1.97 2
abrasions and or Chapter in)
in) or 2.5
delaminations 51−77−13, Pa.
Lmax.
(with or without 2.H for perfo

visible cracks rating damage.
and holes). The greater
Structural Re

value of 50
pair, Chapter 50 mm (1.97
(2) Permanent A Immediately None None mm (1.97 2
55−13−11, Page in)
in) or 2.5
Block 201.
Lmax.
(3) − − Contact AIRBUS Immediately − − − − −
Allowable Damage and Repair Limits, Trailing Edge Panels, Zone 03, Subzone A
Table 110
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesMay125/126
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR

CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 111.
B. Trailing Edge Access Door VIII. Zone 03, Subzone B− Linear and Superfi

cial Damage

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Subzone B of the Trailing

Edge Access Door VIII. Refer to Figure 103 for Repair Zones.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 111
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 105 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.
(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 112 and perform the corre

sponding repair action.

Page 127
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Access Door VIII. Zone 03, Subzone B − Linear and Superficial
Damage
Diagram 105
Page 128
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC
REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIM
INSPECTION MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN MAX. NUM

SIZE TION CATEGORY IT BER OF
DAMAGE X mm REPAIRS Y REPAIR/
(in) mm (in) DAMAGE
PER PART
The greater
value of 50
Chapter 51−77−12, 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 20 months None mm (1.97 3
Paragraph 2.A in)
in) or 2.5
Lmax.
Linear and su
Refer to Chapter
perficial dam
(1) 51−77−12, Pa.
The greater
ages, scratches, 3.B for non per

value of 50
nicks, gouges, forating damage 50 mm (1.97
Permanent A 20 months <1> None None mm (1.97 3
abrasions and or Chapter in)
in) or 2.5
delaminations 51−77−13, Pa.
Lmax.
(with or without 2.H for perfo

visible cracks rating damage.
and holes) The greater
Structural Re

value of 50
pair, Chapter 50 mm (1.97
(2) Permanent A Immediately None None mm (1.97 3
55−13−11, Page in)
in) or 2.5
Block 201.
Lmax.
(3) − − Contact AIRBUS Immediately − − − − −
Allowable Damage and Repair Limits, Trailing Edge Panels, Zone 03, Subzone B
Table 112
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesMay129/130
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR

CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 113.
C. Trailing Edge Access Door VIII. Zone 03, Subzone C − Linear and Superfi

cial Damage

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Subzone C of the Trailing

Edge Access Door VIII. Refer to Figure 103 for Repair Zones.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 113
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 106 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.
(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 114 and perform the corre

sponding repair action.

Page 131
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Access Door VIII. Zone 03, Subzone C− Linear and Superficial
Damage
Diagram 106
Page 132
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC
REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIM
INSPECTION MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN MAX. NUM

SIZE TION CATEGORY IT BER OF
DAMAGE X mm REPAIRS Y REPAIR/
(in) mm (in) DAMAGE
PER PART
The greater
value of 50
Chapter 51−77−12, 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 20 months None mm (1.97 1
Paragraph 2.A in)
in) or 2.5
Lmax.
(1)
Linear and su
The greater
perficial dam
Refer to Chapter value of 50
50 mm (1.97
ages, scratches, Permanent A 51−77−12, Pa. 20 months <1> None None mm (1.97 1
in)
nicks, gouges, 3.B. in) or 2.5
abrasions and Lmax.
delaminations The greater
Structural Re

value of 50
pair, Chapter 50 mm (1.97
(2) Permanent A Immediately None None mm (1.97 1
55−13−11, Page in)
in) or 2.5
Block 201.
Lmax.
(3) − − Contact AIRBUS Immediately − − − − −
Allowable Damage and Repair Limits, Trailing Edge Panels, Zone 03, Subzone C
Table 114
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesMay133/134
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR

CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 115.
D. Trailing Edge Access Door VIII. Zone 03, Subzone D− Linear and Superfi

cial Damage

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Subzone D of the Trailing

Edge Access Door VIII. Refer to Figure 103 for Repair Zones.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 115
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 107 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.
(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 116 and perform the corre

sponding repair action.

Page 135
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Access Door VIII. Zone 03, Subzone D− Linear and Superficial
Damage
Diagram 107
Page 136
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC
REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIM
INSPECTION MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN MAX. NUM

SIZE TION CATEGORY IT BER OF
DAMAGE X mm REPAIRS Y REPAIR/
(in) mm (in) DAMAGE
PER PART
The greater
value of 50
Chapter 51−77−12, 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 20 months None mm (1.97 1
Paragraph 2.A in)
in) or 2.5
Lmax.
(1)
Linear and su
The greater
perficial dam
Refer to Chapter value of 50
50 mm (1.97
ages, scratches, Permanent A 51−77−12, Pa. 20 months <1> None None mm (1.97 1
in)
nicks, gouges, 3.B. in) or 2.5
abrasions and Lmax.
delaminations The greater
Structural Re

value of 50
pair, Chapter 50 mm (1.97
(2) Permanent A Immediately None None mm (1.97 1
55−13−11, Page in)
in) or 2.5
Block 201.
Lmax.
(3) − − Contact AIRBUS Immediately − − − − −
Allowable Damage and Repair Limits, Trailing Edge Panels, Zone 03, Subzone D
Table 116
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesMay137/138
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR

CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 117.
E. Trailing Edge Access Door VIII. Zone 03, Subzones B, C and D − Missing
Fastener

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Subzones B, C and D of the

Trailing Edge Access Door VIII. Refer to Figure 103 for Repair
Zones.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 117
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Refer to Diagram 108 flow chart when a fastener lost is found.

Page 139
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Ribs, Upper and Lower Flange Missing Fastener

Diagram 108

Page 140
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TRAILING EDGE ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS − REPAIRS

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE GIV

EN IN THE RELEVANT REPAIR.

1. General
NOTE: For Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

This topic contains all of the specific repair procedures for the Access
Doors and Panels of the Horizontal Stabilizer Trailing Edge. The repair
zones and allowable damage data for these repair procedures are in Chapter
55−13−11, Page Block 101.
2. Safety Precautions

There are risks to you and other persons when you work with composite re

pair materials. To prevent risks, read and obey the warnings given below.

WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.
WARNING: WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND FILTER MASK WHEN YOU CUT,
ABRADE OR DRILL COMPOSITE MATERIALS. THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MA

TERIALS CAN GET INTO YOUR LUNGS OR ONTO YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE YOU
INJURY. IMMEDIATELY REMOVE DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.

WHEN YOU WORK WITH CFRP COMPOSITE MATERIALS, IMMEDIATELY REMOVE
DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRIC POWER ON
THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST ONLY USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.
3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER REMARKS

No General Repairs applicable. − −

Table 201

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

4. Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs.

INSPECTION
REPAIR
SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE INSTRUCTION REF
CATEGORY
ERENCE
Repair to External Skin 5.A. 201 − −
and Honeycomb core. Zone INACTIVE INACTIVE
01−03, Sub−zone A. This
repair information is in
active since revision
dated May 01/12.
Repair of Damage to Ted 5.B. 202 − −
lar − Damage Extent 100 INACTIVE INACTIVE
mm (0.155 in) thru
85000 mm (131.750 in).
All Zones and Sub−zones.
This repair information
is inactive since revi
sion dated May 01/12.
Repair of Damage to Ted 5.C. 203 − −
lar − Damage Extent INACTIVE INACTIVE
greater than 85000 mm
(131.750 in). All Zones
and Sub−zones. This re
pair information is inac
tive since revision dated
May 01/12.
Repair of Damage to Ted 5.D. − − −
lar − Linear Scratches of INACTIVE
Any Length, or Any Other
Type of Damage up to a
maximum of 100 mm (0.155
in). This repair in
formation is inactive
since revision dated May
01/12.
Repair of Outer or Inner 5.E. 204 A −
Skin damage. Zones 01 and
02, Sub−zone A.

Table 202

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

INSPECTION
REPAIR
SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE INSTRUCTION REF
CATEGORY
ERENCE
Repair of Outer or Inner 5.F. 205 A −
Skin and Honeycomb Core
depth less than or equal
to 10 mm (0.391 in).
Zones 01 and 02, Sub−zone
A.
Repair of Outer or Inner 5.G. 206 A −
Skin and Honeycomb Core
depth more than 10 mm
(0.391 in). Zones 01 and
02, Sub−zone A.
Repair of Outer and Inner 5.H. 207 A −
Skins and Honeycomb Core.
Zones 01 and 02, Sub−zone
A.
Repair of Damage to Ted 5.I. 208 A −
lar − Damage Extent
greater than 85000 mm
(131.750 in). All Zones
and Sub−zones.
Repair of Damage to Ted 5.J. − A −
lar − Linear Scratches of
Any Length.
Repair of Outer Skin Dam 5.K. 209 A −
age on Chamfer and Edge
Area. Zones 01 and 02,
Sub−zone A.
Repair of Damage to Ted 5.L. 210 A −
lar − Damage Extent 400
mm (0.62 in) thru 85000
mm (131.750 in). All
Zones and Sub−zones.
Repair of Access Door 6.A. 211 A −
VIII, Zone 03, Subzone A.
Internal Repair (Flush).
Repair of Access Door 6.B. 212 A −
VIII, Zone 03, Subzone A.
External Repair.

Table 202

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

INSPECTION
REPAIR
SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE INSTRUCTION REF
CATEGORY
ERENCE
Repair of Access Door 6.C. 213 A −
VIII Inner and Outer
Skin, Zone 03, Subzones
B, C and D.
Partial Metallic Skin Re 6.D. 214 A −
placement − Trailing Edge
Panel 02 and Access Door
IV − Zone 04, Subzone A
and Subzone B. Before
Modification 36553G0453.
Full Metallic Skin Re 6.E. 215 A −
placement − Trailing Edge
Panel 02 and Access Door
IV − Zone 04, Subzone A
and Subzone B. Before
Modification 36553G0453

Table 202
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

5. Access Doors and Panels Repairs

CAUTION: FOR REPAIRS CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE REFER

TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN IN THE
INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

A. Repair of External Skin and Honeycomb Core. Zones 01−03, Sub−zone A.

NOTE: This repair procedure is inactive since revision dated May 01/12.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out with a hot−bond (180° C (356° F))
repair procedure (refer to Chapter 55−77−11, paragraph 5.E).

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Honeycomb Core − Material No. 05−087, refer to

− Cleaning Agent
− Adhesive Film
− Glass Fabric Prepreg
− Adhesive Foam
− Carbon Fabric Prepreg
− Pore Filler
− Varnish
− Resin Adhesive
− Thickening Agent
− High Speed Tape
(2) Permanent Repair (refer to Figure 201).
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material Z−15.425, Adhesive
Film, (only FM−300M.03 CYANA

MID), refer to Chapter 51−33−00
− Material Z−19.304, Epoxy Prepreg
Glass fabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00
− Material Z−15.415, Adhesive
Foam, refer to Chapter 51−33−00
− Material Z−19.749, Epoxy Prepreg
Carbon fabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00
− Material No. 08−008, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−010C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−057, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−052, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4D.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Cut and remove the damaged skin and honeycomb (refer to Figure
201 and Chapter 55−13−11, Page Block 101, figure 103 for maximum
dimensions applicable to this repair).

(c) Cut the skin and honeycomb into a regular shape and chamfer the
undamaged skin into an overlap (refer to Figure 201 for dimen

sions).

(d) Clean the repair are with a vacuum cleaner.

(e) Make the honeycomb core repair piece (Material No. 05−087) to the
necessary size and shape for the repair.

Page 205
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(f) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

WARNING: ADHESIVE FILM (MATERIAL Z−15.425, ADHESIVE FILM) IS DANGER

OUS.

(g) Cut two pieces of adhesive film (Material Z−15.425, Adhesive

Film) to the size and shape of the cut−out made in the skin.
(h) Remove the protective sheet from one of the adhesive film pieces
and apply the film to the bottom of the repair hole (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.B.).

(i) Cut a layer of glassfabric (Material Z−19.304, Glassfabric Pre

preg) to the size and shape of the cut−out make in the skin.

(j) Apply the layer of glassfabric to the bottom of the repair hole.

(k) Remove the protective sheet from the remaining piece of adhesive
film. Apply the adhesive film to the bottom of the repair hole,
on top of the layer of glassfabric (refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
paragraph 4.B.).

(l) Cut the adhesive foam (Material Z−15.415, Adhesive Foam) to suit
the size and shape of the honeycomb repair piece.

(m) Remove the protective film from the adhesive foam and put it
around the honeycomb repair piece.

(n) Install the honeycomb core repair piece in its repair position.

(o) Prepare the carbon fabric prepreg repair plies (Material

Z−19.749, Carbon Fabric Prepreg) for the repair area.

(p) Cut a piece of adhesive film (Material Z−15.425, Adhesive Film)

to suit the size and shape of the repair area (refer to Figure
201 for dimensions).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(q) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(r) Remove the protective sheet from both sides of the adhesive film.
Apply the adhesive film to the repair area (refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 4.B.).

(s) Lay−up the repair plies on the repair area (refer to Figure 201
and Chapter 55−13−11, Page Block 101, Figure 103). For further
data, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C.

NOTE: There must be an overlap of 15 mm (0.59 in) on subsequent

plies.

Page 206
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(t) Install the vacuum cure equipment over the laminate repair area
(refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D).
(u) Cure the repair plies under vacuum conditions (minimum 80% vacu

um). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D for full data.

(v) After the repair plies have cured, remove the vacuum cure equip

ment from the repair area.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(w) With abrasive cloth, make the repair area smooth and level with
the adjacent skin surface. Initially use 280 grade and finish off
with 400 grade. If necessary, apply porefiller (Material No.
08−008).
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(x) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(y) Restore the surface protection (refer to Chapter 51−75−12).

(z) Tell the Inspection Department to do an inspection at 6000 Flight

Hours (FH).

(3) Temporary Repair

WARNING: VARNISH (MATERIAL NO. 16−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Remove the damaged material that shows above the skin surface.
(b) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) with the thickening agent
(Material No. 05−057).

(e) Fill the damaged skin and exposed honeycomb core material with
the adhesive paste.
(f) Let the adhesive cure for 24 hours at room temperature (RT).

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E. for data.

(g) After the adhesive has cured, smooth the cured adhesive into the
skin contour. Use abrasive cloth 200 grade first, and then finish
off with 400 grade.

Page 207
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(h) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(i) Put a protective layer of High Speed Tape (HST) over the repair
area. Press the edges down tightly.

(j) Restore the surface protection (refer to Chapter 51−75−12).

(k) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair Chapter 55−13−11, Page Block 101, Figure 106) to
find the time limit applicable to the temporary repair. Tell the
Inspection Department what the permissible number of Flight Hours
(FH) is before a permanent repair is necessary.
(4) Permanent Repair After Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 201).

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D).

(b) Remove the High Speed Tape and the filler.

(c) Do the steps (5.A.(2)(b)) thru (5.A.(2)(z)) of the repair proce

dure 5.A.(2).

Page 208
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to External Skin and Honeycomb Core. Zones 01−03, Sub−zone A.

Figure 201

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesMay209/210
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIRS CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE REFER

TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN IN THE
INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

B. Repair of Damage to Tedlar − Damage Extent 100 mm
(0.155 in
) thru
85000 mm
(131.750 in
). All Zones and Sub−zones.
NOTE: This repair procedure is inactive since revision dated May 01/12.

NOTE: Before the damaged tedlar is repaired, a damage evaluation must be

carried out. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to

Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−050, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Tedlar − Material No. 19−015 , or 19−016,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Varnish − Material No. 16−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions − All Zones, Sub−zone A (refer to Figure 202).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Clean the damaged tedlar area with the cleaning agent (Material
No. 11−003).
CAUTION: WHEN REMOVING THE DAMAGED TEDLAR, TAKE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE
THE CFRP PLIES.

(b) Remove the damaged tedlar and make the cut out into a regular
shape. Use a sharp cutting implement and fine abrasive cloth (400
grade).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Thoroughly clean the repair area and the immediate surrounding
undamaged tedlar with the cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

Page 211
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−050) IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Uniformly apply the sealant (Material No. 09−050) to the exposed
CFRP structure and extend 20 mm (0.787 in) around the surrounding
undamaged tedlar. Use a spatula or brush to apply the sealant.

(e) Cut a piece of tedlar (Material No. 19−015 or 19−016) to the

correct shape and dimensions for the repair area. The tedlar
patch shall extend around the undamaged tedlar by 20 mm (0.787
in).

(f) Let the sealant (Material No. 09−050) dry for 30 minutes at room
temperature before applying the tedlar repair patch.

(g) Firmly apply the tedlar repair patch to the repair area. Use a
roller to expel any air bubbles or wrinkles: work from the cen

ter of the tedlar repair patch to the edges.

NOTE: If any wrinkles or other defects persist, small cuts may be

made in the tedlar film.

(h) Let the sealant (Material No. 09−050) cure for 24 hours at room
temperature.

WARNING: VARNISH (MATERIAL NO. 16−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(i) Apply a coat of varnish (Material No. 16−003) to the edges of

the tedlar repair patch and any cuts that were made at step
5.B.(2)(g).
(j) Let the varnish (Material No. 16−003) dry for 24 hours at room
temperature before handling the access door or panel.

(3) Repair Instructions − All Zones, Sub−zone B and Sub−zone A/B (refer
to Figure 202).
(a) If the damage is in the area of a sealing strip, remove the
screws and nuts securing the sealing strip to the flange and re

move the sealing strip, screws and nuts.

(b) If the damage is in the area of a hinge fitting (access doors

2, 4, 6 and 8 only) remove the fasteners from the hinge fitting
(refer to Chapter 51−42−21) and remove the hinge fitting together
with the "U" section channel. Retain the hinge fitting and the
"U" section channel.

(c) Do the steps 5.B.(2)(a) thru 5.B.(2)(j) of repair procedure

5.B.(2).
NOTE: The following steps 5.B.(3)(d) thru 5.B.(3)(g) are applica

ble when the repair is in the area of a sealing strip.

Page 212
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Clean the sealing strip, nuts, bolts and the corresponding flange
mounting area with the cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(e) Put the sealing strip in its original position on the access
door or panel and secure with screw pins.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(f) Install the screws and nuts to the sealing strip with the seal

ant (Material No. 09−005).

(g) Remove the screws pins and install the screws and nuts in the
screw pin holes with the sealant (Material No. 09−005).

NOTE: The following steps 5.B.(3)(h) thru 5.B.(3)(l) are applica

ble when the repair is in the area of a hinge fitting (ac

cess doors 2, 4, 6 and 8 only).

(h) Clean the hinge fitting, the "U" section channel and the corre

sponding flange mounting area, with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
(i) Apply the sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the surfaces of the
hinge fitting that will be in contact when assembled.

(j) Put the hinge fitting and the "U" section channel in their orig

inal position on the access door and secure with screws pins.
(k) Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the hinge fitting
with the sealant (Material No. 09−005).

(l) Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners with the
sealant (Material No. 09−005) in the vacated screw pin holes.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−002) IS DANGEROUS.

(m) Apply a fillet of sealant (Material No. 09−002) along the inner
side of the sealing strip/flange interface, or (if applicable)
along both edges of the "U" section channel/flange interface.

(n) Let the sealants (Material No. 09−002 and 09−005) cure. Refer to
the manufacturer’s instruction leaflets for cure times.

WARNING: VARNISH (MATERIAL NO. 16−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(o) Apply a coat of varnish (Material No. 16−003) on top of the

sealant (Material No. 09−002) applied at the step 5.B.(3)(m).

(p) Let the varnish (Material No. 16−003) dry for 24 hours at room
temperature before handling the repaired access door or panel.

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesMay213/214
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Tedlar − Damage Extent 100 mm
(0.155 in
) thru 85000
mm
(131.750 in
). All Zones and Sub−zones.
Figure 202

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesMay215/216
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIRS CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE REFER

TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN IN THE
INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

C. Repair of Damage to Tedlar − Damage Extent Greater than 85000 mm

(131.750 in
). All Zones and Sub−zones.
NOTE: This repair procedure is inactive since revision dated May 01/12.

NOTE: Before the damaged tedlar is repaired, a damage evaluation must be

carried out. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3.

NOTE: Two solution to this repair are given and are differentiated as
paragraph 5.C.(2) (solution 1) and paragraph 5.C.(3) (solution 2).
Both repair solutions are valid, allowing the operator to select
whichever solution is preferred.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to

Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−050, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Tedlar − Material, No. 19−016, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Varnish − Material No. 16−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Pore Filler − Material No. 16−050 or Material
No. 16−051, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Primer − Material No. 16−040, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Paint − Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Resin − Material No. 08−090, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Wheat Starch 30/ 50 − Centre Industrie
− Polyplus Plastic Particles − US Technology
20/ 40

Page 217
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(2) Repair Instructions − Solution 1 (refer to Figure 203).

(a) Remove the screws and nuts securing the sealing strip to the
flange and remove the sealing strip. Retain the sealing strip,
screws and nuts.

NOTE: The following step 5.C.(2)(b) is applicable for tedlar dam

age to access doors 2, 4, 6 and 8 only.

(b) Remove the fasteners from the hinge fitting and remove the hinge
fitting together with the "U" section channel. Retain the hinge
fitting and the "U" section channel.

NOTE: The following step 5.C.(2)(c) is applicable for tedlar dam

age to panel 2 only.

(c) Remove the fasteners from the bonding lead support brackets and
remove the brackets. Retain the brackets and washers (if undam

aged).

NOTE: Do not remove the bonding leads from the brackets.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Thoroughly clean the access door or panel with the cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

WARNING: BLASTING WITH WHEAT STARCH OR PLASTIC PARTICLES IS DANGER

OUS. WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE CLOTHING.

WARNING: MAKE CERTAIN THAT NO ONE IS IN THE SHOT BLASTING AREA BE

FORE COMMENCING THE OPERATION.

WARNING: BLASTING MUST ONLY BE DONE BY TRAINED PERSONS.

(e) The following equipment is required for the blasting process:

− a pressure pot blasting system with flow and pressure regula

tion,
− a waste sorting device.
The blasting parameters are as follows:

For wheat starch blasting:

− Blasting material − Wheat starch 30/ 50.
− Concentration − 3 to 5 kg/ min (6.614 to 11.023 lbs/ min).
− Working Pressure − 1 to 2 kg/cm
(0,981 to 1,961 bar).
− Stand−off distance (nozzle to target) − 100 to 150 mm (3.937
to 5.906 in).
− Blast angle − 35 to 45°.
− Nozzle − Flat type from Centre Industrie.

For plastic particle blasting:

Page 218
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

− Blasting material − Polyplus plastic particles 20/ 40.

− Concentration − 3 to 4 kg/ min (6.614 to 8.818 lbs/ min).
− Working Pressure − 1 to 1.5 kg/cm
(0,981 to 1,471 bar).
− Stand−off distance (nozzle to target) − 200 to 250 mm (7.874
to 9.843 in).
− Blast angle − 35 to 45°.
− Nozzle − 7 mm (0.276 in) diameter.
NOTE: Either method (wheat starch or plastic particle blasting)
may be used for removing tedlar from the access door or
panel.

WARNING: TAKE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE THE CFRP PLIES WHEN REMOVING THE
TEDLAR FILM BY BLASTING.
(f) Remove the tedlar film by blasting. Keep the number of passes
required to remove the tedlar to a minimum.

(g) Remove dust and any blasting material from the work area with
dry, oil free compressed air.
(h) Visually inspect the worked area to make sure that all the ted

lar is remove and that there is no damage to the CFRP structure.

(i) Do a tap−coin inspection of the worked area.

(j) Lightly abrade the worked are with Scotch brite type A. Take
care not to damage the CFRP plies.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(k) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

WARNING: PORE FILLER (MATERIAL NO. 16−050 OR 16−051) IS DANGEROUS.

CAUTION: PORE FILLER IS INTENDED ONLY TO FILL ANY SURFACE PORES. A
CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(l) Apply the pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051) with a
spatula. Make certain that all the surface pores are covered.
Avoid applying excess pore filler on local areas by keeping the
quantity and thickness to a minimum. Let the pore filler dry.
Refer to the manufacturer’s instruction leaflets for drying time.

NOTE: Do not apply heat during the curing process.

(m) Do a water tightness test of the access door or panel as fol

lows:
CAUTION: USE ONLY DE−MINERALIZED WATER FOR THE WATER TIGHTNESS
TEST.

1 Fill a tank with sufficient de−mineralized water to completely

submerge the access door or panel.

Page 219
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

2 Pre−heat the water to a temperature of 80° C ±5° C (176° F ±9°

F).
CAUTION: DO NOT IMMERSE THE ACCESS DOOR OR PANEL TO DEPTH GREAT

ER THAN 1000 MM (39.37 IN).

3 Immerse the access door or panel in the water tank. Make cer

tain that the access door or panel is completely submerged.

4 If bubbles are observed, mark the source area and immediately

remove the access door or panel from the water tank.

5 Dry the access door or panel with clean, dry compressed air.

6 Repeat the steps 5.C.(2)(l) and 5.C.(2)(m) until no bubbles are

observed.
WARNING: PRIMER (MATERIAL NO. 16−040) IS DANGEROUS.

(n) Apply a coat of primer (Material No. 16−040) to the complete in

side surface of the access door or panel. Let the primer dry.
Refer to the manufacturer’s instruction leatlets for drying time.

WARNING: PAINT (MATERIAL NO. 16−018C) IS DANGEROUS.

(o) Apply a coat of paint (Material No. 16−018C) on top of the prim

er applied at the step 5.C.(2)(n). Let the paint dry. Refer to
the manufacturer’s instruction leaflets for drying time.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(p) Clean the sealing strip, nuts bolts and the corresponding flange
mounting area with the cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(q) Put the sealing strip in its original position on the access
door or panel and secure with screw pins.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(r) Install the screws and nuts to the sealing strip with the seal

ant (Material No. 09−005).

(s) Remove the screw pins and install the screws and nuts in the
screw pin holes with the sealant (Material No. 09−005).
NOTE: The following steps 5.C.(2)(t) thru 5.C.(2)(x) are applica

ble for access doors 2, 4, 6 and 8 only.

(t) Clean the hinge fitting, "U" section channel and the correspond

ing flange mounting area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
(u) Apply the sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the surfaces of the
hinge fitting, the "U" section channel and the access door flange
that will be in contact when assembled.

Page 220
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(v) Put the hinge fitting and the "U" section channel in their orig

inal position on the access door and secure with screw pins.
(w) Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the hinge fitting
with the sealant (Material No. 09−005).

(x) Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners with the
sealant (Material No. 09−005) in the vacated screws pin holes.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−002) IS DANGEROUS.

(y) Apply a fillet of sealant (Material No. 09−002) along the inner
side of the sealing strip/flange interface, and (if applicable)
along both edges of the "U" section channel (access doors 2, 4,
6 and 8 only).
(z) Let the sealants (Material No. 09−005 and 09−002) cure. Refer to
the manufacturer’s instruction leaflets for cure time.

WARNING: VARNISH (MATERIAL NO. 16−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(aa)Apply a coat of varnish (Material No. 16−003) on top of the

sealant (Material No. 09−002) applied at the step 5.C.(2)(y).
(ab)Let the varnish (Material No. 16−003) dry for 24 hours at room
temperature before handling the repaired access door or panel.

NOTE: The following steps 5.C.(2)(ac) thru 5.C.(2)(ai) are appli

cable for panel 2 only.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(ac)Clean the bonding lead support brackets and the corresponding

flange mounting area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003). Clean also the area on the external metal sheet which
will interface with the bonding lead support bracket fasteners
(and washers) when installed.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(ad)Apply a coat of sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the surfaces of

the bonding lead support brackets and the flange of the panel
that will be in contact when installed.
(ae)Put the bonding lead support brackets in their original position
on the flange of the panel and install the correct fasteners and
washers.

NOTE: Do not apply sealant to the bonding fasteners on installa

tion.
(af)Apply a fillet of sealant (Material No. 09−002) along the edges
of the bonding lead support bracket and flange interface.

Page 221
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ag)Let the sealants (Material No. 09−005 and 09−002) cure. Refer to
the manufacturer’s instruction leaflets for cure times.
(ah)Apply a coat of varnish (Material No. 16−003) on top of sealant
(Material No. 09−002) applied at the step 5.C.(2)(af).

(ai)Let the varnish (Material No. 16−003) dry for 24 hours at room
temperature before handling the access door or panel.

(3) Repair Instructions − Solution 2 (refer to Figure 203).

(a) Do the steps 5.C.(2)(a) thru 5.C.(2)(k) of the repair paragraph
5.C.(2).

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−050) IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Apply a coat of sealant (Material No. 09−050) to completely cover

the inside surface of the access door or panel.

(c) Cut a piece of tedlar (Material No. 19−016) which will completely
cover the inside surface of the access door panel. Cut the ted

lar slightly oversize to allow for trimming after application.

NOTE: If necessary (in the case of large access doors or panels)

the tedlar film may be applied in two pieces with an over

lap of 20 mm (0.787 in) at the joint. In this case the
sealant (Material No. 09−050) shall also be applied to both
interfacing surfaces of the tedlar film. Do not let the
tedlar surfaces touch until the step 5.C.(3)(e).
(d) Let the sealant (Material No. 09−050) dry for 30 minutes at room
temperature before applying the tedlar film.

(e) Firmly apply the tedlar film to the inside surface of the access
door or panel. Use a roller to expel any air bubbles: work from
the center of the applied tedlar to the edges. If the tedlar
film is applied in two pieces, make certain that all the air is
expelled from the joint interface.

NOTE: If necessary, make small cuts at the edges of the tedlar

when wrinkles prove impossible to remove with the roller.
Take core not to damage the CFRP plies when making the
cuts.

(f) Let the sealant (Material No. 09−050) cure for 24 hours at room
temperature.

(g) Trim the tedlar film to the boundaries of the access door or
panel flanges.

NOTE: Make certain that the tedlar film does not unstick from the
edges of the access door or panel flanges while trimming.

Page 222
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(h) Do a water tightness test of the access door or panel. Refer to

the step 5.C.(2)(m), sub−steps 5.C.(2)(m)1 thru 5.C.(2)(m)3 for
accomplishment instructions.

(i) If bubbles are observed mark the source area and immediately re

move the access door or panel from the water tank.

(j) Thoroughly dry the access door or panel with clean dry compressed
air.
NOTE: If the bubbles were observed coming from the joint inter

face (tedlar applied in two pieces), do the steps
5.C.(3)(k) and 5.C.(3)(l). If the bubbles were observed
coming from any small defective area, e.g. where small cuts
were make to avoid wrinkles, small holes etc. do the steps
5.C.(3)(m) and 5.C.(3)(n).

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−050) IS DANGEROUS.

(k) Apply the sealant (Material No. 09−050) to the tedlar joint in

terface.
(l) Let the sealant (Material No. 09−050) cure for 24 hours at room
temperature.

WARNING: RESIN (MATERIAL NO. 08−090) IS DANGEROUS.

(m) Locally apply the resin (Material No. 08−090) to the small de

fective area of the tedlar.
(n) Let the resin (Material No. 08−090) cure for 24 hours at room
temperature.

(o) Repeat the water tightness test of the step 5.C.(3)(h) and the
appropriate remedial action of the steps 5.C.(3)(k) and
5.C.(3)(l) or 5.C.(3)(m) and 5.C.(3)(n) until no bubbles are ob

served.

WARNING: VARNISH (MATERIAL NO. 16−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(p) Apply the varnish (Material No. 16−003) to the tedlar joint in

terface (if the tedlar was applied in two pieces) or to any cuts
made in the tedlar to avoid wrinkles.

(q) Let the varnish (Material No. 16−003) dry for 24 hours at room
temperature.

(r) Do the steps 5.C.(2)(p) thru 5.C.(2)(ai) of the repair procedure

5.C.(2).

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesMay223/224
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Tedlar − Damage Extent Greater than 85000 mm
(131.750
in
). All Zones and Sub−zones.
Figure 203 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesMay225/226
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Tedlar − Damage Extent Greater than 85000 mm
(131.750
in
). All Zones and Sub−zones.
Figure 203 (sheet 2)
Page 227
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIRS CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE REFER

TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN IN THE
INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

D. Repair of Damage to Tedlar − Linear Scratches of Any Length or Any oth

er Type of Damage up to a maximum of 100 mm
(0.155 in
). All Zones and
Sub−zones.

NOTE: This repair procedure is inactive since revision dated May 01/12.

NOTE: Before the damaged tedlar is repaired, a damage evaluation must be

carried out. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Resin − Material No. 08−090, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions − Linear Scratches.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Clean the crack along its total length (include the immediate
surrounding area) with the cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

WARNING: RESIN (MATERIAL NO. 08−090) IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Locally apply the resin (Material No. 08−090) to cover the
scratch along its total length.
(c) Let the resin (Material No. 08−090) cure for 24 hours at room
temperature.

(3) Repair Instructions − Any Damage up to a Maximum of 100 mm
(0.155

in
).

(a) Clean the damaged tedlar area with the cleaning agent (Material
No. 11−003).

CAUTION: WHEN REMOVING THE DAMAGED TEDLAR, TAKE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE
THE CFRP PLIES.

(b) Remove the damaged tedlar and make the cut out into a regular
shape maximum area 100 mm
(0.155 in
). Use a sharp cutting im

plement and fine abrasive cloth (400 grade).

Page 228
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(c) Throughly clean the repair area and the immediate surrounding un

damaged tedlar with the cleaning (Material No. 11−003).
(d) Locally apply the resin (Material No. 08−090) to completely cover
the damaged area.

(e) Let the resin (Material No. 08−090) cure for 24 hours at room
temperature.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 203.

E. Repair of Outer or Inner Skin damage. Zones 01 and 02, Sub−zone A.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data, and
Chapter 55−13−11, Page Block 101 for allowable damage limits and
zones definition.

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out with a hot−bond 120° C (248° F)

repair procedure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E).

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 203
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 229
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− CFRP Repair Plies − Material No. 05−091 or 05−092,

− Low Density Compound
− Adhesive Film
− Pore Filler
− Cleaning Agent
(2) Repair Instruction, refer to Figure 204.
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−078, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Prepare the repair area, refer to Figure 204 and Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 4M.

NOTE: Radius all corners by 12 mm (0.472 in).

Remove original plies in 15 mm (0.590 in).

Do not remove the undamaged honeycomb core.

(b) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(c) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

CAUTION: MAXIMUM THICKNESS OF LOW DENSITY COMPOUND 5 MM (0.20 IN).

(d) Cover the honeycomb core cells with low density compound (Materi
al No. 08−078). Make sure all the cells are completely covered.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−11 paragraph 5.H. for core closing proce
dure and paragraph 6.B.(4) for cure time.

CAUTION: TAKE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE THE HONEYCOMB CORE.

(e) Remove any excess of low density compound and level the honeycomb
core plug with the skin cut out. Use abrasive cloth 280 grade.
(f) Clean the waste material with vacuum cleaner.

(g) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent ( Material No.
11−003).

(h) Get the correct repair material: CFRP repair plies (Material No.
05−091 or 05−092) and adhesive film plies (Material No. 08−042A).

Page 230
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(i) Prepare and cut the CFRP repair plies (Material No. 05−091 or
05−092) to the correct size and orientation, refer to Figure 204
and Chapter 55−71−11 paragraph 4.C.

NOTE: Same number and orientation than the original plies plus
two additional repair plies 45° oriented, refer to Chapter
55−13−11, Page Block 101 for lay up of the original plies.

(j) Cut two adhesive film plies (Material No. 08−042A) to suit the
size and shape of the repair area.

(k) Remove the protective sheet from both sides of one adhesive film.
Apply the adhesive film to the repair area, refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 4.B.

(l) Lay−up the CFRP repair plies on the repair area, refer to Figure
204 and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C.

NOTE: There must be an overlap of 15 mm (0.59 in) on subsequent

plies.

(m) Remove the protective sheet from both sides of the remaining
adhesive film. Apply the adhesive film to the repair area, refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.B.

(n) Install the vacuum bag and heating equipment, refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.

(o) Cure the repair materials under vacuum conditions (minimum 80%
vacuum). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D for full data,
and paragraph 6.B. for cure time data.

(p) After the repair materials have cured, remove the vacuum cure
equipment from the repair area.
(q) Do an inspection of the repair area. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10 ,
paragraph 5.

(r) Abrade the surface to be protected using scoth brite type A.

(s) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER (MATERIAL NO. 16−050 OR
16−051 OR 16−052) IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(t) Apply pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) with
a spatula. Make certain that all the surfaces pores are covered.

(u) Avoid filler excess, reduce the pore filler to be used in quan

tity and thickness to a minimum.

(v) Let the pore filler dry a minimum of two hours at room tempera

ture, before the paint operation, do not apply heat during curing
operation.

Page 231
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(w) Smooth the repair surface with abrasive cloth 280 grade initially
and finish off with 400 grade.
(x) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(y) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(z) Repair the surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 232
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Outer or Inner Skin damage. Zones 01 and 02, Sub−zone A.

Figure 204

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesMay233/234
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 204.
F. Repair of Outer or Inner Skin and Honeycomb Core depth less than or
equal to 10 mm (0.391 in). Zones 01 and 02, Sub−zone A.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data, and
Chapter 55−13−11, Page Block 101for allowable damage limits and
zones definition.

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out with a hot−bond 120° C (248° F)

repair procedure, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 204
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− CFRP Repair Plies − Material No. 05−091 or 05−092,

− Glass Fiber Fabric Prepreg
− Low Density Compound
− Honeycomb Core Plug
− Adhesive Film
− Adhesive Foam
− Cleaning Agent
− Pore Filler
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−107, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−078, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 20−007, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−047C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00

Page 235
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(2) Repair Instruction, refer to Figure 205.

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4D.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Cut and remove the damaged skin and damaged honeycomb completely,
refer to Figure 205 and Chapter 55−13−11, Page Block 101, for
maximum dimensions applicable to this repair.
(c) Cut the skin and honeycomb into a regular shape and chamfer the
undamaged skin into an overlap, refer to Figure 205 for dimen

sions.

(d) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(e) Make the honeycomb core plug (Material No. 20−007) to the neces

sary size and shape for the repair, same ribbon as the original
core.

(f) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
(g) Cut two plies of adhesive film (Material No. 08−042A) to the
size and shape of the cut−out made in the skin.

(h) Remove the protective sheet from both of one adhesive film plies
and apply the film to the bottom of the repair hole, refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.B.

(i) Cut a ply of glass fiber fabric prepreg (Material No. 05−107) to
the size and shape of the cut−out make in the skin.

(j) Put the ply of glass fiber fabric prepreg on the bottom of the
repair hole.
(k) Remove the protective sheet from the remaining ply of adhesive
film. Apply the adhesive film on the bottom of the repair hole,
on top of the ply of glass fiber fabric prepreg, refer to Chap

ter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.B.
(l) Cut the adhesive foam (Material No. 08−047C) to suit the size
and shape of the honeycomb core plug.

(m) Remove the protective film from the adhesive foam and put it
around the honeycomb core plug.

(n) Put the honeycomb core plug and the thermocouples in their repair
position, refer to Figure 205 and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph
5.D.

(o) Put the vacuum bag and heating equipment, refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.

Page 236
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(p) Let the core plug cure, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.
for curing procedure and paragraph 6.B. for cure time data.
(q) On completion of the cure cycle remove the vacuum bag and heat
ing equipment from the repair area.

CAUTION: TAKE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE THE HONEYCOMB CORE PLUG.

(r) Remove any excess of adhesive foam and level honeycomb core plug
with the skin cut out. Use abrasive cloth 280 grade.
(s) Clean the waste material with vacuum cleaner.

(t) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

CAUTION: MAXIMUM THICKNESS OF LOW DENSITY COMPOUND 5 MM (0.20 IN).

(u) Cover the honeycomb core plug cells with low density compound
(Material No. 08−078). Make sure all the cells are completely
covered. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11 paragraph 5.H. for core clos
ing procedure and paragraph 6.B.(4) for cure time.

CAUTION: TAKE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE THE HONEYCOMB CORE PLUG.

(v) Remove any excess of low density compound and level the honeycomb
core plug with the skin cut out. Use abrasive cloth 280 grade.

(w) Clean the waste material with vacuum cleaner.

(x) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(y) Get the correct repair material: CFRP repair plies (Material No.
05−091 or 05−092) and adhesive film plies (Material No. 08−042A).

(z) Prepare and cut the CFRP repair plies (Material No. 05−091 or
05−092) to the correct size and orientation, refer to Figure 205
and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C.

NOTE: Same number and orientation than the original plies plus
two additional repair plies 45° oriented, refer to Chapter
55−13−11, Page Block 101 for lay up of the original plies.
(aa)Cut two adhesive film plies (Material No. 08−042A) to suit the
size and shape of the repair area.

(ab)Remove the protective sheet from both sides of one adhesive film.
Apply the adhesive film to the repair area, refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 4.B.

Page 237
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ac)Lay−up the CFRP repair plies on the repair area, refer to Figure
205 and Chapter 55−13−11, Page Block 101. For further data, refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C.

NOTE: There must be an overlap of 15 mm (0.59 in) on subsequent

plies.

(ad)Remove the protective sheet from the remaining adhesive film ply.
Apply the adhesive film to the repair area, refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 4.C.

(ae)Install the vacuum bag and heating equipment, refer to Chapter

51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.

(af)Cure the repair materials under vacuum conditions (minimum 80%

vacuum). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D for full data,
and paragraph 6.B. for cure time data.

(ag)After the repair materials have cured, remove the vacuum cure
equipment from the repair area.

(ah)Do an inspection of the repair area. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10 ,

paragraph 5.

(ai)Abrade the surface to be protected using scotch brite type A.

(aj)Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER (MATERIAL NO. 16−050 OR

16−051 OR 16−052) IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(ak)Apply pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) with

a spatula. Make certain that all the surfaces pores are covered.

(al)Avoid filler excess, reduce the pore filler to be used in quan

tity and thickness to a minimum.
(am)Let the pore filler dry a minimum of two hours at room tempera

ture, before the paint operation, do not apply heat during curing
operation.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(an)With abrasive cloth, make the repair area smooth and level with
the adjacent skin surface. Initially use 280 grade and finish off
with 400 grade.

(ao)Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(ap)Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(aq)Repair the surface protection, refer toChapter 51−75−12.

Page 238
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Outer or Inner Skin and Honeycomb Core depth less than or equal to
10 mm (0.391 in). Zones 01 and 02, Sub−zone A.
Figure 205

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesMay239/240
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 205.
G. Repair damage Outer or Inner Skin and Honeycomb Core depth more than 10
mm (0.391 in). Zones 01 and 02, Sub−zone A.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data, and
Chapter 55−13−11, Page Block 101 for allowable damage limits and
zones definition.

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out with a hot−bond 120° C (248° F)

repair procedure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E). This
repair is also applicable in case of the water ingress.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 205
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 241
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− CFRP Repair Plies − Material No. 05−091 or 05−092,

− Glass Fiber Fabric Prepreg
− Low Density Compound
− Honeycomb Core Plug
− Adhesive Film
− Adhesive Foam
− Pore Filler
− Cleaning Agent
(2) Repair Instruction, refer to Figure 206.
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−107, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−078, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 20−007, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−047C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4D.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Cut and remove the damaged skin and the complete honeycomb in
the damaged area, refer to Figure 206 and Chapter 55−13−11, Page
Block 101, for maximum dimensions applicable to this repair.

(c) Cut the skin and honeycomb into a regular shape and chamfer the
undamaged skin into an overlap, refer to Figure 206 for dimen

sions.

(d) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(e) Make the honeycomb core plug (Material No. 20−007) to the neces

sary size and shape for the repair, same ribbon as the original
core.

(f) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(g) Cut two plies of adhesive film (Material No. 08−042A) to the
size and shape of the cut−out made in the skin.

Page 242
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(h) Remove the protective sheet from both of one adhesive film plies
and apply the film to the bottom of the repair hole, refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.B.

(i) Cut a ply of glass fiber fabric prepreg (Material No. 05−107) to
the size and shape of the cut−out make in the skin.

(j) Put the ply of glass fiber fabric prepreg on the bottom of the
repair hole.
(k) Remove the protective sheet from the remaining ply of adhesive
film. Apply the adhesive film on the bottom of the repair hole,
on top of the ply of glass fiber fabric prepreg, refer to Chap
ter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.B.
(l) Cut the adhesive foam (Material No. 08−047C) to suit the size
and shape of the honeycomb core plug.

(m) Remove the protective film from the adhesive foam and put it
around the honeycomb core plug.

(n) Put the honeycomb core plug and the thermocouples in their repair
position, refer to Figure 206 and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph
5.D.

(o) Install the vacuum bag and heating equipment, refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.
(p) Let the core plug cure, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.
for curing procedure and paragraph 6.B. for cure time data.

(q) On completion of the cure cycle remove the vacuum bag and heat
ing equipment from the repair area.

CAUTION: TAKE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE THE HONEYCOMB CORE PLUG.

(r) Remove any excess of adhesive foam and level honeycomb core plug
with the skin cut out. Use abrasive cloth 280 grade.

(s) Clean the waste material with vacuum cleaner.

(t) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent ( Material No.
11−003).

CAUTION: MAXIMUM THICKNESS OF LOW DENSITY COMPOUND 5 MM (0.20 IN).

(u) Cover the honeycomb core plug cells with low density compound
(Material No. 08−078). Make sure all the cells are completely
covered. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11 paragraph 5.H. for core clos
ing procedure and paragraph 6.B.(4) for cure time.

CAUTION: TAKE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE THE HONEYCOMB CORE PLUG.

(v) Remove any excess of low density compound and level the honeycomb
core plug with the skin cut out. Use abrasive cloth 280 grade.

Page 243
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(w) Clean the waste material with vacuum cleaner.

(x) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(y) Get the correct repair material: CFRP repair plies (Material No.
05−091 or 05−092) and adhesive film plies (Material No. 08−042A).

(z) Prepare and cut the CFRP repair plies (Material No. 05−091 or
05−092) to the correct size and orientation, refer to Figure 206
and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C.

NOTE: Same number and orientation than the original plies plus
two additional repair plies 45° oriented, refer to Chapter
55−13−11, Page Block 101 for lay up of the original plies.
(aa)Cut two adhesive film plies (Material No. 08−042A) to suit the
size and shape of the repair area.

(ab)Remove the protective sheet from both sides of one adhesive film.
Put the adhesive film on the repair area, refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 4.B.
(ac)Lay−up the CFRP repair plies on the repair area, refer to Figure
206 and Chapter 55−13−11, Page Block 101. For further data, refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C.

NOTE: There must be an overlap of 15 mm (0.59 in) on subsequent

plies.
(ad)Remove the protective sheet from the remaining adhesive film ply.
Put the adhesive film on the repair area, refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 4.C.

(ae)Install the vacuum bag and heating equipment, refer to Chapter

51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.

(af)Cure the repair materials under vacuum conditions (minimum 80%

vacuum). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D for full data,
and paragraph 6.B. for cure time data.

(ag)After the repair materials have cured, remove the vacuum cure
equipment from the repair area.

(ah)Do an inspection of the repair area. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10 ,

paragraph 5.

(ai)Abrade the surface to be protected using scotch brite type A.

(aj)Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

Page 244
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER (MATERIAL NO. 16−050 OR

16−051 OR 16−052) IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.
(ak)Apply pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) with
a spatula. Make certain that all the surfaces pores are covered.

(al)Avoid filler excess, reduce the pore filler to be used in quan

tity and thickness to a minimum.

(am)Let the pore filler dry a minimum of two hours at room tempera

ture, before the paint operation, do not apply heat during curing
operation.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(an)With abrasive cloth, make the repair area smooth and level with
the adjacent skin surface. Initially use 280 grade and finish off
with 400 grade.

(ao)Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(ap)Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
(aq)Repair the surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesMay245/246
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair damage Outer or Inner Skin and Honeycomb Core depth more than 10 mm
(0.391 in). Zones 01 and 02, Sub−zone A.
Figure 206

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesMay247/248
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 206.
H. Repair of Outer and Inner Skins and Honeycomb Core. Zones 01 and 02,
Sub−zone A.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data, and
Chapter 55−13−11, Page Block 101 for allowable damage limits and
zones definition.

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out with a hot−bond 120° C (248° F)

repair procedure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E). This
repair is also applicable in case of the water ingress.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 206
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 249
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− CFRP Repair Plies − Material No. 05−091 or 05−092,

refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Glass Fiber Fabric Prepreg − Material No. 05−107, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Low Density Compound − Material No. 08−078, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Honeycomb Core Plug − Material No. 20−007, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Adhesive Foam − Material No. 08−047C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Adhesive Film − Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Pore Filler − Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−050, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Tedlar − Material No. 19−016, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Varnish − Material No. 16−021, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Release Agent − Material No. 05−013A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instruction, refer to Figure 207.
(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4D.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Cut and remove the damaged skins and honeycomb, refer to Figure
207 and Chapter 55−13−11, Page Block 101, for maximum dimensions
applicable to this repair.

(c) Cut the skins and honeycomb into a regular shape and chamfer the
undamaged skins into an overlap, refer to Figure 207 for dimen

sions.

(d) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(e) Make a backing plate with the appropriate shape and size for the
outer skin cut−out, refer to Figure 207.

Page 250
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Apply a coat of release agent (Material No. 05−013A) to the

backing plate and repair area surface.
(g) Place the backing plate in its correct repair position and secure
with clamps.

(h) Make the honeycomb core plug (Material No. 20−007) to the neces
sary size and shape for the repair, same ribbon as the original
core.
(i) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(j) Cut the adhesive foam (Material No. 08−047C) to suit the size
and shape of the honeycomb core plug.
(k) Remove the protective film from the adhesive foam and put it
around the honeycomb core plug.

(l) Put the honeycomb core plug and the thermocouples in their repair
position, refer to Figure 207 and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph
5.D.
(m) Install the vacuum bag and heating equipment, refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.

(n) Let the core plug cure, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.
for curing procedure and paragraph 6.B. for cure time data.
(o) On completion of the cure cycle remove the vacuum bag and heat
ing equipment from the repair area.

CAUTION: TAKE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE THE HONEYCOMB CORE PLUG.

(p) Remove any excess of adhesive foam and level honeycomb core plug
with the skin cut out. Use abrasive cloth 280 grade.
(q) Clean the waste material with vacuum cleaner.

(r) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

CAUTION: MAXIMUM THICKNESS OF LOW DENSITY COMPOUND 5 MM (0.20 IN).

(s) Cover the honeycomb core plug cells with low density compound
(Material No. 08−078). Make sure all the cells are completely
covered. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11 paragraph 5.H. for core clos
ing procedure and paragraph 6.B.(4) for cure time.

CAUTION: TAKE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE THE HONEYCOMB CORE PLUG.

(t) Remove any excess of low density compound and level the honeycomb
core plug with the skin cut out. Use abrasive cloth 280 grade.

(u) Clean the waste material with vacuum cleaner.

Page 251
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(v) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
(w) Get the correct repair material: CFRP repair plies (Material No.
05−091 or 05−092) and adhesive film plies (Material No. 08−042A).

(x) Prepare and cut the CFRP repair plies (Material No. 05−091 or
05−092) to the correct size and orientation, refer to Figure 207
and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C.
NOTE: Same number and orientation than the original plies plus
two additional repair plies 45° oriented, refer to Chapter
55−13−11, Page Block 101 for lay up of the original plies.

(y) Cut two adhesive film plies (Material No. 08−042A) to suit the
size and shape of the repair area.
(z) Remove the protective sheet from both sides of one adhesive film.
Put the adhesive film on the repair area, refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 4.B.

(aa)Lay−up the CFRP repair plies on the repair area, refer to Figure
207 and Chapter 55−13−11, Page Block 101. For further data, refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C.

NOTE: There must be an overlap of 15 mm (0.59 in) on subsequent

plies.

(ab)Remove the protective sheet from the remaining adhesive film ply.
Put the adhesive film on the repair area, refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 4.C.

(ac)Install the vacuum bag and heating equipment, refer to Chapter

51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.
(ad)Cure the repair materials under vacuum conditions (minimum 80%
vacuum). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D for full data,
and paragraph 6.B. for cure time data.

(ae)After the repair materials have cured, remove the vacuum cure
equipment from the repair area.
(af)Do an inspection of the repair area. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10,
paragraph 5.

(ag)Abrade the surface to be protected using scoth brite type A.

(ah)Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
(ai)Uniformly apply the sealant (Material No. 09−050) to the exposed
CFRP structure and extend 20 mm (0.787 in) around the surrounding
undamaged tedlar. Use a spatula or brush to apply the sealant.

Page 252
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(aj)Cut a piece of tedlar (Material No. 19−016) to the correct shape

and dimensions for the repair area. The tedlar patch shall extend
around the undamaged tedlar by 20 mm (0.787 in).

(ak)Let the sealant (Material No. 09−050) dry for 30 minutes at room
temperature before applying the tedlar repair patch.

(al)Firmly apply the tedlar repair piece to the repair area. Use a
roller to expel any air bubbles or wrinkles: work from the cen

ter of the tedlar repair patch to the edges.

NOTE: If any wrinkles or other defects persist, small cuts may be

made in the tedlar film.

(am)Let the sealant (Material No. 09−050) cure for 24 hours at room
temperature.
(an)Apply a coat of varnish (Material No. 16−021) to the edges of
the tedlar repair piece and any cuts that were made at step
5.H.(2)(al).

(ao)Let the varnish (Material No. 16−021) dry for 24 hours at room
temperature before handling the access door or panel.

(ap)Do the steps 5.H.(2)(s) thru 5.H.(2)(ah) for repair of the outer
skin.

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER (MATERIAL NO. 16−050 OR

16−051 OR 16−052) IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.
(aq)Apply pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) on
the outer skin with a spatula. Make certain that all the sur

faces pores are covered.

(ar)Avoid filler excess, reduce the pore filler to be used in quan

tity and thickness to a minimum.

(as)Let the pore filler dry a minimum of two hours at room tempera

ture, before the paint operation, do not apply heat during curing
operation.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(at)With abrasive cloth, make the repair area smooth and level with
the adjacent skin surface. Initially use 280 grade and finish off
with 400 grade.

(au)Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(av)Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(aw)Repair the surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesMay253/254
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Outer and Inner Skins and Honeycomb Core. Zone 01 and 02, Sub−zone
A.
Figure 207

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesMay255/256
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 207.
I. Repair of Damage to Tedlar − Damage Extent Greater than 85000 mm

(131.750 in
). All Zones and Sub−zones.

NOTE: Before the damaged tedlar is repaired, a damage evaluation must be

carried out. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3.

NOTE: Two solution to this repair are given and are differentiated as
paragraph 5.I.(2) (solution 1) and paragraph 5.I.(3) (solution 2).
Both repair solutions are valid, allowing the operator to select
whichever solution is preferred.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 207
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 257
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to

Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−050, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Tedlar − Material, No. 19−016, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Varnish − Material No. 16−021, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Pore Filler − Material No. 16−050 or Material
No. 16−051, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Primer − Material No. 16−040, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Paint − Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Resin − Material No. 08−090, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Wheat Starch 30/ 50 − Centre Industrie
− Polyplus Plastic Particles − US Technology
20/ 40
(2) Repair Instructions − Solution 1 (refer to Figure 208).

(a) Remove the screws and nuts securing the sealing strip to the
flange and remove the sealing strip. Retain the sealing strip,
screws and nuts.
NOTE: The following step 5.I.(2)(b) is applicable for tedlar dam

age to access doors 2, 4, 6 and 8 only.

(b) Remove the fasteners from the hinge fitting and remove the hinge
fitting together with the "U" section channel. Retain the hinge
fitting and the "U" section channel.
NOTE: The following step 5.I.(2)(c) is applicable for tedlar dam

age to panel 2 only.

Page 258
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(c) Remove the fasteners from the bonding lead support brackets and
remove the brackets. Retain the brackets and washers (if undam

aged).

NOTE: Do not remove the bonding leads from the brackets.

(d) Thoroughly clean the access door or panel with the cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

WARNING: BLASTING WITH WHEAT STARCH OR PLASTIC PARTICLES IS DANGER

OUS. WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE CLOTHING.

WARNING: MAKE CERTAIN THAT NO ONE IS IN THE SHOT BLASTING AREA BE

FORE COMMENCING THE OPERATION.

WARNING: BLASTING MUST ONLY BE DONE BY TRAINED PERSONS.

(e) The following equipment is required for the blasting process:
− a pressure pot blasting system with flow and pressure regula

tion,
− a waste sorting device.

The blasting parameters are as follows:

For wheat starch blasting:

− Blasting material − Wheat starch 30/ 50.
− Concentration − 3 to 5 kg/ min (6.614 to 11.023 lbs/ min).
− Working Pressure − 1 to 2 kg/cm
(0,981 to 1,961 bar).
− Stand−off distance (nozzle to target) − 100 to 150 mm (3.937
to 5.906 in).
− Blast angle − 35 to 45°.
− Nozzle − Flat type from Centre Industrie.
For plastic particle blasting:
− Blasting material − Polyplus plastic particles 20/ 40.
− Concentration − 3 to 4 kg/ min (6.614 to 8.818 lbs/ min).
− Working Pressure − 1 to 1.5 kg/cm
(0,981 to 1,471 bar).
− Stand−off distance (nozzle to target) − 200 to 250 mm (7.874
to 9.843 in).
− Blast angle − 35 to 45°.
− Nozzle − 7 mm (0.276 in) diameter.

NOTE: Either method (wheat starch or plastic particle blasting)

may be used for removing tedlar from the access door or
panel.
WARNING: TAKE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE THE CFRP PLIES WHEN REMOVING THE
TEDLAR FILM BY BLASTING.

(f) Remove the tedlar film by blasting. Keep the number of passes
required to remove the tedlar to a minimum.

Page 259
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(g) Remove dust and any blasting material from the work area with
dry, oil free compressed air.
(h) Visually inspect the worked area to make sure that all the ted

lar is remove and that there is no damage to the CFRP structure.

(i) Do a tap−coin inspection of the worked area.

(j) Lightly abrade the worked are with Scotch brite type A. Take
care not to damage the CFRP plies.
(k) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

CAUTION: PORE FILLER IS INTENDED ONLY TO FILL ANY SURFACE PORES. A

CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.
(l) Apply the pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051) with a
spatula. Make certain that all the surface pores are covered.
Avoid applying excess pore filler on local areas by keeping the
quantity and thickness to a minimum. Let the pore filler dry.
Refer to the manufacturer’s instruction leaflets for drying time.
NOTE: Do not apply heat during the curing process.

(m) Do a water tightness test of the access door or panel as fol

lows:

CAUTION: USE ONLY DE−MINERALIZED WATER FOR THE WATER TIGHTNESS

TEST.

1 Fill a tank with sufficient de−mineralized water to completely

submerge the access door or panel.

2 Pre−heat the water to a temperature of 80° C ±5° C (176° F ±9°

F).
CAUTION: DO NOT IMMERSE THE ACCESS DOOR OR PANEL TO DEPTH GREAT

ER THAN 1000 MM (39.37 IN).

3 Immerse the access door or panel in the water tank. Make cer

tain that the access door or panel is completely submerged.
4 If bubbles are observed, mark the source area and immediately
remove the access door or panel from the water tank.

5 Dry the access door or panel with clean, dry compressed air.

6 Repeat the steps 5.I.(2)(l) and 5.I.(2)(m) until no bubbles are

observed.
(n) Apply a coat of primer (Material No. 16−040) to the complete in

side surface of the access door or panel. Let the primer dry.
Refer to the manufacturer’s instruction leatlets for drying time.

Page 260
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(o) Apply a coat of paint (Material No. 16−018C) on top of the prim

er applied at the step 5.I.(2)(n). Let the paint dry. Refer to
the manufacturer’s instruction leaflets for drying time.

(p) Clean the sealing strip, nuts bolts and the corresponding flange
mounting area with the cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(q) Put the sealing strip in its original position on the access
door or panel and secure with screw pins.
(r) Install the screws and nuts to the sealing strip with the seal

ant (Material No. 09−005).

(s) Remove the screw pins and install the screws and nuts in the
screw pin holes with the sealant (Material No. 09−005).
NOTE: The following steps 5.I.(2)(t) thru 5.I.(2)(x) are applica

ble for access doors 2, 4, 6 and 8 only.

(t) Clean the hinge fitting, "U" section channel and the correspond

ing flange mounting area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
(u) Apply the sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the surfaces of the
hinge fitting, the "U" section channel and the access door flange
that will be in contact when assembled.

(v) Put the hinge fitting and the "U" section channel in their orig

inal position on the access door and secure with screw pins.
(w) Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the hinge fitting
with the sealant (Material No. 09−005).

(x) Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners with the
sealant (Material No. 09−005) in the vacated screws pin holes.
(y) Apply a fillet of sealant (Material No. 09−002) along the inner
side of the sealing strip/flange interface, and (if applicable)
along both edges of the "U" section channel (access doors 2, 4,
6 and 8 only).

(z) Let the sealants (Material No. 09−005 and 09−002) cure. Refer to
the manufacturer’s instruction leaflets for cure time.

(aa)Apply a coat of varnish (Material No. 16−021) on top of the

sealant (Material No. 09−002) applied at the step 5.I.(2)(y).

(ab)Let the varnish (Material No. 16−021) dry for 24 hours at room
temperature before handling the repaired access door or panel.

NOTE: The following steps 5.I.(2)(ac) thru 5.I.(2)(ai) are appli

cable for panel 2 only.

(ac)Clean the bonding lead support brackets and the corresponding

flange mounting area with the cleaning agent (Material No.

Page 261
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

11−003). Clean also the area on the external metal sheet which
will interface with the bonding lead support bracket fasteners
(and washers) when installed.

(ad)Apply a coat of sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the surfaces of

the bonding lead support brackets and the flange of the panel
that will be in contact when installed.

(ae)Put the bonding lead support brackets in their original position

on the flange of the panel and install the correct fasteners and
washers.

NOTE: Do not apply sealant to the bonding fasteners on installa

tion.

(af)Apply a fillet of sealant (Material No. 09−002) along the edges

of the bonding lead support bracket and flange interface.

(ag)Let the sealants (Material No. 09−005 and 09−002) cure. Refer to
the manufacturer’s instruction leaflets for cure times.

(ah)Apply a coat of varnish (Material No. 16−021) on top of sealant

(Material No. 09−002) applied at the step 5.I.(2)(af).

(ai)Let the varnish (Material No. 16−021) dry for 24 hours at room
temperature before handling the access door or panel.

(3) Repair Instructions − Solution 2 (refer to Figure 208).

(a) Do the steps 5.I.(2)(a) thru 5.I.(2)(k) of the repair paragraph
5.I.(2).

(b) Apply a coat of sealant (Material No. 09−050) to completely cover

the inside surface of the access door or panel.

(c) Cut a piece of tedlar (Material No. 19−016) which will completely
cover the inside surface of the access door panel. Cut the ted

lar slightly oversize to allow for trimming after application.

NOTE: If necessary (in the case of large access doors or panels)

the tedlar film may be applied in two pieces with an over

lap of 20 mm (0.787 in) at the joint. In this case the
sealant (Material No. 09−050) shall also be applied to both
interfacing surfaces of the tedlar film. Do not let the
tedlar surfaces touch until the step 5.I.(3)(e).

(d) Let the sealant (Material No. 09−050) dry for 30 minutes at room
temperature before applying the tedlar film.
(e) Firmly apply the tedlar film to the inside surface of the access
door or panel. Use a roller to expel any air bubbles: work from
the center of the applied tedlar to the edges. If the tedlar

Page 262
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

film is applied in two pieces, make certain that all the air is
expelled from the joint interface.
NOTE: If necessary, make small cuts at the edges of the tedlar
when wrinkles prove impossible to remove with the roller.
Take core not to damage the CFRP plies when making the
cuts.

(f) Let the sealant (Material No. 09−050) cure for 24 hours at room
temperature.

(g) Trim the tedlar film to the boundaries of the access door or
panel flanges.

NOTE: Make certain that the tedlar film does not unstick from the
edges of the access door or panel flanges while trimming.
(h) Do a water tightness test of the access door or panel. Refer to
the step 5.I.(2)(m), sub−steps 5.I.(2)(m)1 thru 5.I.(2)(m)3 for
accomplishment instructions.

(i) If bubbles are observed mark the source area and immediately re

move the access door or panel from the water tank.

(j) Thoroughly dry the access door or panel with clean dry compressed
air.

NOTE: If the bubbles were observed coming from the joint inter

face (tedlar applied in two pieces), do the steps
5.I.(3)(k) and 5.I.(3)(l). If the bubbles were observed
coming from any small defective area, e.g. where small cuts
were make to avoid wrinkles, small holes etc. do the steps
5.I.(3)(m) and 5.I.(3)(n).

(k) Apply the sealant (Material No. 09−050) to the tedlar joint in

terface.

(l) Let the sealant (Material No. 09−050) cure for 24 hours at room
temperature.

(m) Locally apply the resin (Material No. 08−090) to the small de

fective area of the tedlar.
(n) Let the resin (Material No. 08−090) cure for 24 hours at room
temperature.

(o) Repeat the water tightness test of the step 5.I.(3)(h) and the
appropriate remedial action of the steps 5.I.(3)(k) and
5.I.(3)(l) or 5.I.(3)(m) and 5.I.(3)(n) until no bubbles are ob

served.

(p) Apply the varnish (Material No. 16−021) to the tedlar joint in

terface (if the tedlar was applied in two pieces) or to any cuts
made in the tedlar to avoid wrinkles.

Page 263
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(q) Let the varnish (Material No. 16−021) dry for 24 hours at room
temperature.
(r) Do the steps 5.I.(2)(p) thru 5.I.(2)(ai) of the repair procedure
5.I.(2).

Page 264
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Tedlar − Damage Extent Greater than 85000 mm
(131.750
in
). All Zones and Sub−zones.
Figure 208 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesMay265/266
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Tedlar − Damage Extent Greater than 85000 mm
(131.750
in
). All Zones and Sub−zones.
Figure 208 (sheet 2)
Page 267
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 208.
J. Repair of Damage to Tedlar − Linear Scratches of Any Length.

NOTE: Before the damaged tedlar is repaired, a damage evaluation must be

carried out. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 208
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to

Chapter 51−35−00
− Resin − Material No. 08−090, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions − Linear Scratches.

(a) Clean the crack along its total length (include the immediate
surrounding area) with the cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(b) Locally apply the resin (Material No. 08−090) to cover the
scratch along its total length.
(c) Let the resin (Material No. 08−090) cure for 24 hours at room
temperature.

Page 268
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 209.
K. Repair of Outer Skin Damage on Chamfer and Edge Area. Zones 01 and 02,
Sub−zone A.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data, and
Chapter 55−13−11, Page Block 101 for Allowable Damage limits and
Zones definition.

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out with a hot−bond 120° C (248° F)

repair procedure, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E for hot
bonding repair data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 209
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− CFRP Repair Plies 4 Material No. 05−091 or 05−092,

− Low Density Compound
− Adhesive Film
− Pore Filler
− Cleaning Agent
− Cleaning Agent
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 209)
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−078, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−010, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

Page 269
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(a) Prepare the repair area, refer to Figure 209 and Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 4.M.(2).(a), for surface preparation.
NOTE: Radius all corners by 12 mm (0.472 in).

Remove original plies in 15 mm (0.590 in) steps.

Do not remove the undamaged honeycomb core.

(b) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(c) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.E.

CAUTION: MAXIMUM THICKNESS OF LOW DENSITY COMPOUND 5 MM (0.20 IN).

(d) Cover the honeycomb core cells with low density compound (Materi
al No. 08−078). Make sure all the cells are completely covered.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.H. for core closing proce
dure and paragraph 6.B.(4) for cure time.

(e) Clean the waste material with vacuum cleaner.

(f) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.E.
(g) Get the correct repair materials: CFRP repair plies (Material No.
05−091 or 05−092) and adhesive film plies (Material No. 08−042A).

(h) Prepare and cut the CFRP repair plies (Material No. 05−091 or
05−092) to the correct size and orientation, refer to Figure 209
and Chapter 51−71−11, paragraph 4.C, for handling data.

NOTE: Same number and orientation as the original plies plus two
additional repair plies 45° oriented, refer to Figure 209
for lay up of the original plies.

(i) Cut two adhesive film plies (Material No. 08−042A) to suit the
size and shape of the repair area, refer to Chapter 51−71−11,
paragraph 4.B, for handing data of adhesive film plies.

(j) Lay−up the CFRP repair plies and adhesive film plies on the re
pair area, refer to Figure 209 and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph
5.B.
(k) Install the vacuum bag and heating equipment, refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.(1).

(l) Cure the repair materials, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph

5.E for curing procedure and paragraphs 6.B.(6) and 6.B.(9) for
cure time data.

(m) After the repair materials have cured, remove the vacuum cure
equipment from the repair area.

Page 270
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(n) Do an inspection of the repair area. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10,

paragraph 5.
(o) Abrade the surface to be protected using scoth brite type A, ei

ther by hand or by using an orbital sanding device.

(p) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−010),
refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.E.

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER (MATERIAL NO. 16−050 OR

16−051 OR 16−052) IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(q) Apply pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) to

the panel surfaces with a spatula or polishing bag. Make certain
that all the surfaces pores are covered.
CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY HEATING DURING CURING OPERATION.

(r) Let the pore filler dry a minimum of two hours at room tempera

ture, before proceeding with the paint operation.

NOTE: In case that the pore filler needs to be sanded, to im

prove the surface appearance, the pore filler must be al

lowed to dry for at least 12 hours at room temperature 23
± 2° C (73,4 ± 3,6° F) or 7 hours and 30 minutes at 60 ±
2° C (140 ± 3,6° F) before sanding, to avoid damages that
can affect the repair quality.

(s) Smooth the repair surface with abrasive cloth 280 grade initially
and finish off with 400 grade.

(t) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(u) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.E.
(v) Repair the surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesMay271/272
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Outer Skin Damage on Chamfer and Edge Area. Zones 01 and 02, Sub−
zone A.
Figure 209

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesMay273/274
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 210.
L. Repair of Damage to Tedlar − Damage Extent 400 mm
(0.62 in
) thru 85000
mm
(131.750 in
). All Zones and Sub−zones.

NOTE: Before the damaged tedlar is repaired, a damage evaluation must be

carried out. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 210
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to

Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−050, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Tedlar − Material No. 19−016, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Varnish − Material No. 16−021, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions − All Zones, Sub−zone A (refer to Figure 210)

(a) Clean the damaged tedlar area with the cleaning agent (Material
No. 11−003).
CAUTION: WHEN REMOVING THE DAMAGED TEDLAR, TAKE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE
THE CFRP PLIES.

(b) Remove the damaged tedlar and make the cut out into a regular
shape. Use a sharp cutting implement and fine abrasive cloth (400
grade).

Page 275
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(c) Thoroughly clean the repair area and the immediate surrounding
undamaged tedlar with the cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
(d) Uniformly apply the sealant (Material No. 09−050) to the exposed
CFRP structure and extend 20 mm (0.787 in) around the surrounding
undamaged tedlar. Use a spatula or brush to apply the sealant.

(e) Cut a piece of tedlar (Material No. 19−016) to the correct shape
and dimensions for the repair area. The tedlar patch shall extend
around the undamaged tedlar by 20 mm (0.787 in).

(f) Let the sealant (Material No. 09−050) dry for 30 minutes at room
temperature before applying the tedlar repair patch.

(g) Firmly apply the tedlar repair patch to the repair area. Use a
roller to expel any air bubbles or wrinkles: work from the cen

ter of the tedlar repair patch to the edges.

NOTE: If any wrinkles or other defects persist, small cuts may be

made in the tedlar film.

(h) Let the sealant (Material No. 09−050) cure for 24 hours at room
temperature.

(i) Apply a coat of varnish (Material No. 16−021) to the edges of

the tedlar repair patch and any cuts that were made at step
5.L.(2)(g).

(j) Let the varnish (Material No. 16−021) dry for 24 hours at room
temperature before handling the access door or panel.

(3) Repair Instructions − All Zones, Sub−zone B and Sub−zone A/B (refer
to Figure 210)

(a) If the damage is in the area of a sealing strip, remove the

screws and nuts securing the sealing strip to the flange and re

move the sealing strip, screws and nuts.

(b) If the damage is in the area of a hinge fitting (access doors

2, 4, 6 and 8 only) remove the fasteners from the hinge fitting
(refer to Chapter 51−42−21) and remove the hinge fitting together
with the "U" section channel. Retain the hinge fitting and the
"U" section channel.

(c) Do the steps 5.L.(2)(a) thru 5.L.(2)(j) of repair procedure

5.L.(2).

NOTE: The following steps 5.L.(3)(d) thru 5.L.(3)(g) are applica

ble when the repair is in the area of a sealing strip.

(d) Clean the sealing strip, nuts, bolts and the corresponding flange
mounting area with the cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(e) Put the sealing strip in its original position on the access
door or panel and secure with screw pins.

Page 276
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Install the screws and nuts to the sealing strip with the seal

ant (Material No. 09−005).
(g) Remove the screws pins and install the screws and nuts in the
screw pin holes with the sealant (Material No. 09−005).

NOTE: The following steps 5.L.(3)(h) thru 5.L.(3)(l) are applica

ble when the repair is in the area of a hinge fitting (ac

cess doors 2, 4, 6 and 8 only).
(h) Clean the hinge fitting, the "U" section channel and the corre

sponding flange mounting area, with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(i) Apply the sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the surfaces of the
hinge fitting that will be in contact when assembled.
(j) Put the hinge fitting and the "U" section channel in their orig

inal position on the access door and secure with screws pins.

(k) Install the correct fasteners in the holes in the hinge fitting
with the sealant (Material No. 09−005).
(l) Remove the screw pins and install the correct fasteners with the
sealant (Material No. 09−005) in the vacated screw pin holes.

(m) Apply a fillet of sealant (Material No. 09−002) along the inner
side of the sealing strip/flange interface, or (if applicable)
along both edges of the "U" section channel/flange interface.
(n) Let the sealants (Material No. 09−002 and 09−005) cure. Refer to
the manufacturer’s instruction leaflets for cure times.

(o) Apply a coat of varnish (Material No. 16−021) on top of the

sealant (Material No. 09−002) applied at the step 5.L.(3)(m).
(p) Let the varnish (Material No. 16−021) dry for 24 hours at room
temperature before handling the repaired access door or panel.

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesMay277/278
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Tedlar − Damage Extent 400 mm
(0.62 in
) thru 85000 mm

(131.750 in
). All Zones and Sub−zones.
Figure 210

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesMay279/280
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

6. Access Door VIII Repairs

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 211.

A. Repair of Access Door VIII, Zone 03, Subzone A. Internal Repair (Flush).

NOTE: Before you repair the damage structure, you must do a damage eval

uation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10 , paragraph 3 for general data
and Chapter 55−13−11, Page Block 101, for allowable damage limits.
NOTE: This repair is applicable for Access Door VIII of the Horizontal
Stabilizer THS and is valid as shown in Table 211. Refer to Chap

ter 55−13−11, Page Block 101, for repair zones definition.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 211
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 281
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Doubler 1 Refer to Figure 211 for Pre−

cured Sheet type material data
and alternative materials.
2 Repair Filler 1 Refer to Figure 211 for Pre−
cured Sheet type material data
and alternative materials.
− Liquid Shim − Material No. 08−051 or Material
No. 08−078, refer to Chapter
51−35−00.
− Adhesion Promoter − Material No. 09−028C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Sealant − Material No. 09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Varnish − Material No. 16−021, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Primer − Material No. 16−040, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Top Coat − Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Glass Fiber − Material No. 05−007 or Material
No. 05−033, refer to Chapter
51−35−00. (Only for alternative
metallic Doubler).
− Laminating Resin − Material No. 08−070 or Material
No. 08−090 or Material No.
08−098, refer to Chapter
51−35−00. (Only for alternative
metallic Doubler).
− Polyurethane Primer − Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C
or Material No. 16−006B, refer
to Chapter 51−35−00. (Only for
alternative metallic Doubler).
− Chromic Acid Anodizing − Refer to Chapter 51−21−11. (Only
(CAA) for alternative metallic Dou

bler).
(2) Repair Instructions, refer to Figure 211.

Page 282
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(a) Remove the access door to carry out this repair, refer to AMM
Chapter 55−13−11, Page Block 401.
(b) Determine the damage extension on the skin.

(c) Draw on the outer skin the cut out lines, the repair doubler
contour and the fastener hole positions.

NOTE: The number of fasteners installed shall be according to the

damage size but ensuring one fasteners row minimum beyond
the cut out area.

(d) Put a transparent plastic sheet over the repair area and transfer
all the lines previously drawn. This plastic sheet shall be used
as a template.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(e) Cut out the damaged skin structure to the correct repair shape
and dimension, refer to Chapter 51−27−00.

(f) Remove any sharp edge from the cut out with an abrasive cloth.

(g) Clean the CFRP dust with a vacuum cleaner.

(h) Apply the laminating resin (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph
6.B.(2)) to the skin cut out.

(i) Pilot−drill all the marked fastener hole positions on the outer
skin, refer toChapter 51−44−21.
NOTE: For Hole and Drill Data Refer to Chapter 51−44−11 and Chap

ter 51−44−21.

(j) Deburr the skin cut out and the holes with abrasive cloth and
abrasive cone.
(k) Remove the CFRP dust with a vacuum cleaner.

(l) Get the correct pre−cured material necessary to make the repair
pieces. Refer to Figure 211 for pre−cured sheet material informa

tion.

(m) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions nec

essary for the repair area.

(n) Mark on the repair doubler the fastener hole positions. Use the
plastic template.

(o) Mark on the repair filler the fastener hole positions. Use the
plastic template.

(p) Pilot−drill the fastener hole positions on the repair doubler and
repair filler.

Page 283
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(q) Deburr the previously drilled holes with an abrasive cone.

(r) Put the repair doubler and repair filler in their correct posi
tion and secure with screw pins.

(s) Remove the CFRP dust from the repair area and repair parts with
a vacuum cleaner.

(t) Clean the repair area and repair parts with cleaning agent (Ma
terial No. 11−003).
(u) Put the repair parts in their correct position and check the
contact surfaces for gaps.

NOTE: If necessary apply liquid shim to get a flat surface with

adhesive paste (Material No. 08−051 or Material No. 08−078)
between panel and the doubler, up to a maximum thickness of
0.5 mm (0.019 in.).

(v) Drill all the fastener hole positions to the final diameter for
the fastener.

(w) Remove the repair parts from the repair area.

(x) Countersink the fastener holes in the outer skin and outer sur
face of the repair filler, refer to Chapter 51−46−21.

(y) Deburr all the fastener holes in the outer skin and repair parts
with an abrasive cone.
(z) Remove the CFRP dust from the repair area and repair parts with
a vacuum cleaner.

(aa)Clean the repair area and repair parts with cleaning agent (Ma
terial No. 11−003).
(ab)In case of alternative metallic doubler, apply a chemical conver
sion coating (Material No. 13−002 on the doubler, then primer
(Material No. 16−001B or Material No. 16−001C or Material No.
16−006B) and followed by a top coat of polyurethane finish paint
(Material No. 16−018C). Finally install a glass fiber fabric lay
er (Material No. 05−007 or Material No. 05−033) with laminating
resin (Material No. 08−070 or Material No. 08−090 or Material No.
08−098) on the face of the doubler in contact with the CFRP
structure and which must extend 12 mm (0.47 in) around the alu
minum doubler in all directions.

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 51−21−11 for protective treatment applica

tion data, Chapter 51−23−00 for coatings application data
and Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.A for the material prepa
ration.

(ac)Apply surface protection to the CFRP repair parts. Apply epoxy−

polyurethane primer (Material No. 16−040) plus polyurethane coat

Page 284
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ing (Material No. 16−018C). Refer to Chapter 51−21−00 and Chapter

51−23−00.
(ad)Apply a layer of sealant (Material No. 09−005), to the contact
surfaces of repair parts.

(ae)Put the repair parts in their correct position on the repair

area and secure with screw pins.

(af)Wet install the correct fasteners with the sealant (Material No.
09−005), refer to Chapter 51−76−11.

NOTE: For Fasteners installation and removal Refer to Chapter

51−42−11 and Chapter 51−42−21.

NOTE: Determine Fasteners length on assembly.

(ag)Remove any excess of sealant from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(ah)Apply an adhesion promoter (Material No. 09−028C) to the contour

of the repair doubler. Refer to Figure 211.

(ai)Apply a bead of sealant (Material No. 09−002) to the contour of

the repair doubler and to the gap between filler and skin. Refer
to Figure 211.

(aj)Let the sealants cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for

curing data.
(ak)Apply varnish (Material No. 16−021). Refer to Figure 211.

(al)Restore the surface finish. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

(am)Install the Access Door, Refer to AMM Chapter 55−13−11, Page

Block 401.

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesMay285/286
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Access Door VIII, Zone 03, Subzone A. Internal Repair (Flush).
Figure 211 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesMay287/288
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Access Door VIII, Internal Repair Parts

Figure 211 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesMay289/290
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 212.
B. Repair of Access Door VIII, Zone 03, Subzone A. External Repair.

NOTE: Perform flush repair (refer to paragraph 6.A.) except when profile
area is affected by the repair.

NOTE: Before you repair the damage structure, you must do a damage eval

uation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10 , paragraph 3 for general data
and Chapter 55−13−11, Page Block 101, for allowable damage limits.

This repair is applicable for Access Door VIII of the Horizontal Stabi

lizer THS and is valid as shown in Table 212. Refer to Chapter
55−13−11, Page Block 101, for repair zones definition.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 212
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 291
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Doubler 1 Refer to Figure 212 for Pre−

cured Sheet type material data
and alternative materials.
2 Repair Filler 1 Refer to Figure 212 for Pre−
cured Sheet type material data
and alternative materials.
− Liquid Shim − Material No. 08−051 or Material
No. 08−078, refer to Chapter
51−35−00.
− Adhesion Promoter − Material No. 09−028C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Sealant − Material No. 09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Varnish − Material No. 16−021, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Primer − Material No. 16−040, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Top Coat − Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Glass fiber fabric − Material No. 05−007 or Material
No. 05−033, refer to Chapter
51−35−00. (Only for alternative
metallic Doubler).
− Laminating Resin − Material No. 08−070 or Material
No. 08−090 or Material No.
08−098, refer to Chapter
51−35−00. (Only for alternative
metallic Doubler).
− Polyurethane Primer − Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C
or Material No. 16−006B, refer
to Chapter 51−35−00. (Only for
alternative metallic Doubler).
− Chromic Acid Anodizing − Refer to Chapter 51−21−11. (Only
(CAA) for alternative metallic Dou

bler).
(2) Repair Instructions, refer to Figure 212

Page 292
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(a) Remove the access door to carry out this repair, refer to AMM
Chapter 55−13−11, Page Block 401.
(b) Determine the damage extension on the skin.

(c) Draw on the outer skin the cut out lines, the repair doubler
contour and the fastener hole positions.

NOTE: The number of fasteners installed shall be according to the

damage size.
NOTE: The profile fasteners can be used with the doubler when
this area is affected by the repair.

(d) Put a transparent plastic sheet over the repair area and transfer
all the lines previously drawn. This plastic sheet shall be used
as a template.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(e) Cut out the damaged skin structure to the correct repair shape
and dimension, refer to Chapter 51−27−00.

(f) Remove any sharp edge from the cut out with an abrasive cloth.
(g) Clean the CFRP dust with a vacuum cleaner.

(h) Apply the laminating resin (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph

6.B.(2)) to the skin cut out.

(i) Pilot−drill all the marked fastener hole positions on the outer
skin, refer toChapter 51−44−21.

NOTE: For Hole and Drill Data Refer to Chapter 51−44−11 and Chap

ter 51−44−21.

(j) Deburr the skin cut out and the holes with abrasive cloth and
abrasive cone.
(k) Remove the CFRP dust with a vacuum cleaner.

(l) Get the correct pre−cured material necessary to make the repair
pieces. Refer to Figure 212 for pre−cured sheet material informa

tion.
(m) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions nec

essary for the repair area.

(n) Mark on the repair doubler the fastener hole positions. Use the
plastic template.
(o) Mark on the repair filler the fastener hole positions. Use the
plastic template.

Page 293
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(p) Pilot−drill the fastener hole positions on the repair doubler and
repair filler.
(q) Deburr the previously drilled holes with an abrasive cone.

(r) Put the repair doubler and repair filler in their correct posi

tion and secure with screw pins.

(s) Remove the CFRP dust from the repair area and repair parts with
a vacuum cleaner.
(t) Clean the repair area and repair parts with cleaning agent (Ma

terial No. 11−003).

(u) Put the repair parts in their correct position and check the
contact surfaces for gaps.
NOTE: If necessary apply liquid shim to get a flat surface with
adhesive paste (Material No. 08−051 or Material No. 08−078)
between panel and the doubler, up to a maximum thickness of
0.5 mm (0.019 in.).

(v) Drill all the fastener hole positions to the final diameter for
the fastener.

NOTE: When profile fasteners are installed in the doubler, use

the same fastener type and determine length grip on assem

bly.
(w) Countersink the fastener holes in the outer skin and outer sur

face of the repair doubler, refer to Chapter 51−46−21.

NOTE: When profile fasteners are installed in the doubler, install

before a filler washer in the countersink (refer to Chapter
51−71−15).
(x) Deburr all the fastener holes in the outer skin and repair parts
with an abrasive cone.

(y) Remove the CFRP dust from the repair area and repair parts with
a vacuum cleaner.

(z) Clean the repair area and repair parts with cleaning agent (Ma

terial No. 11−003).

(aa)In case of alternative metallic doubler, apply a chemical conver

sion coating (Material No. 13−002 on the doubler, then primer
(Material No. 16−001B or Material No. 16−001C or Material No.
16−006B) and followed by a top coat of polyurethane finish paint
(Material No. 16−018C). Finally install a glass fiber fabric lay

er (Material No. 05−007 or Material No. 05−033) with laminating
resin (Material No. 08−070 or Material No. 08−090 or Material No.
08−098) on the face of the doubler in contact with the CFRP

Page 294
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

structure and which must extend 12 mm (0.47 in) around the alu
minum doubler in all directions.
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 51−21−11 for protective treatment applica
tion data, Chapter 51−23−00 for coatings application data
and Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.A for the material prepa
ration.

(ab)Apply surface protection to the CFRP repair parts. Apply epoxy−

polyurethane primer (Material No. 16−040) plus polyurethane coat
ing (Material No. 16−018C). Refer to Chapter 51−21−00 and Chapter
51−23−00.

(ac)Apply a layer of sealant (Material No. 09−005), to the contact

surfaces of repair parts.
(ad)Put the repair parts in their correct position on the repair
area and secure with screw pins.

(ae)Wet install the correct fasteners with the sealant (Material No.
09−005), refer to Chapter 51−76−11.
NOTE: For Fasteners installation and removal Refer to Chapter
51−42−11 and Chapter 51−42−21.

NOTE: Determine Fasteners length on assembly.

(af)Remove any excess of sealant from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
(ag)Apply an adhesion promoter (Material No. 09−028C) to the contour
of the repair doubler. Refer to Figure 212.

(ah)Apply a bead of sealant (Material No. 09−002) to the contour of

the repair doubler and to the gap between filler and skin. Refer
to Figure 212.
(ai)Let the sealants cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for
curing data.

(aj)Apply varnish (Material No. 16−021). Refer to Figure 212.

(ak)Restore the surface finish. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

(al)Install the Access Door, Refer to AMM Chapter 55−13−11, Page
Block 401.

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesAug295/296
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Access Door VIII, Zone 03, Subzone A. External Repair.

Figure 212 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesMay297/298
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Door VIII, External Repair Parts

Figure 212 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesMay299/300
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 213.
C. Repair of Access Door VIII Inner and Outer Skin, Zone 03, Subzones B, C
and D.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data, and
Chapter 55−13−11, Page Block 101 for Allowable Damage limits and
Zones definition.

This repair is applicable for Access Door VIII of the Horizontal Stabi
lizer THS inner and outer skin. It is valid as shown in Table 213. Re
fer to Chapter 55−13−11, Page Block 101, for repair zones definition.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 213
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− CFRP Repair Plies 4 Material No. 05−091 or 05−092,

refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Adhesive Film − Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Pore Filler − Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 213)

(a) Remove the access door to carry out this repair, refer to AMM
Chapter 55−13−11, Page Block 401.

Page 301
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Prepare the repair area, refer to Figure 213 and Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 4.M.(2).(a), for surface preparation.
NOTE: Radius all corners by 12 mm (0.472 in).

Remove only damaged plies in 15 mm (0.590 in) steps.

(c) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(d) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.E.
(e) Clean the waste material with vacuum cleaner.

(f) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.E.

(g) Get the correct repair materials: CFRP repair plies (Material No.
05−091 or 05−092) and adhesive film plies (Material No. 08−042A).

(h) Prepare and cut the CFRP repair plies (Material No. 05−091 or
05−092) to the correct size and orientation, refer to Figure 213
and Chapter 51−71−11, paragraph 4.C, for handling data.
NOTE: Same number and orientation as the original plies, plus the
following additional layers depending on the number of plies
affected:

Up to 3 plies affected: One internal ply 0° oriented and

one external ply 45° oriented.
More than 3 plies affected: One internal ply 45° oriented
and two external plies 0° and 45° oriented.

(i) Cut adhesive film plies (Material No. 08−042A) to suit the size
and shape of the repair area, refer to Chapter 51−71−11, para

graph 5.B, for handing data of adhesive film plies.
(j) Lay−up the CFRP repair plies and adhesive film plies on the re

pair area, refer to Figure 213 and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph
5.B.

NOTE: When the number of repair plies is more than 7, install

and cure in a first step four plies (maximum). Install and
cure the remaining repair plies in a second step. Install
one layer of adhesive film before the repair plies on each
step.

(k) Install the vacuum bag and heating equipment, refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.(1).
(l) Cure the repair materials, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraphs
5.D.(1) and 5.E for curing procedure and paragraphs 6.B.(6) and
6.B.(9) for cure time data.

Page 302
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(m) After the repair materials have cured, remove the vacuum cure
equipment from the repair area.
(n) Do an inspection of the repair area. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10,
paragraph 5.

(o) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003),
refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.E.

(p) Repair the surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

(q) Install again the Access Door, Refer to AMM Chapter 55−13−11,
Page Block 401.

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesMay303/304
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Access Door VIII Inner and Outer Skin, Zone 03, Subzones B, C and
D.
Figure 213

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesMay305/306
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 214.
CAUTION: KEEP THE BONDING POINTS TO MAKE SURE THE ELECTRICAL CONDUCTIVITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ONLY APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 36553G0453.

D. Partial Metallic Skin Replacement − Trailing Edge Panel 02 and Access

Door IV − Zone 04, Subzone A and Subzone B.

NOTE: This repair is valid for metallic skin damages less than 30% of
panel area.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−11−00, paragraph 2 for data related
to metallic structure and Chapter 55−13−11, Page Block 101, for re
pair zones definition.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 214
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 307
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Aluminum Sheet 1 Refer to Figure 214 (Sheet 1)

− Epoxy Primer
− Low Density Compound
− Polyurethane Primer
− Adhesive Paste
− Scrim Cloth
− Sealant
− Varnish
− Adhesion Promoter
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 213)
− Material No. 16−006B, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para
graph 6.B.(4).
− Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−078, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−021, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−021, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−028C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) If necessary, remove the panel 02 and/or Access Door IV (refer

to AMM Chapter 55−13−11, Page Block 401).

(b) Do a Tap Test inspection of the sandwich inner skin (refer to

NTM Task 51−10−03−280−801).

(c) Remove the damaged area (refer to Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph

3.A.(1).(a)).

NOTE: Be careful not to damage the core when you remove the dam
aged area. For the required edge margins, Refer to Chapter
51−47−00.

(d) Let dry the Exposed Core (Subzone A) for 24 hours at 80° C
(176° F) (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.G.(2)).

CAUTION: IF DAMAGE DEPTH IS MORE THAN 5 MM (0.20 IN) AND MORE THAN
1000 MM (1.55 IN), CONTACT AIRBUS.

(e) If core is damaged during the removal of the damaged area, re
pair it as follows:
− If damage depth is less than 5 mm (0.20 in), repair it by
core closing up to the original structure (refer to Chapter
51−77−11, Paragraph 5.H.).
− If damage depth is more than 5 mm (0.20 in) and equal or less
than 1000 mm (1.55 in), repair it by core filling up to the

Page 308
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

original structure (refer to Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 3.C.,

steps (1), (3) to (6)).
(f) Do a HFEC Inspection at trimmed edges (refer to NTM Chapter
51−10−08).

(g) If damage is located in Subzone A, do a core closing procedure

with Low Density Compound up to the original structure and cure
it (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.H and 6.B.(4)).

If damage is located in Subzone B, fill the gap with Adhesive

Paste (Material No. 08−078 ) up to the original structure and
cure it (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 6.B. (1)).

NOTE: The maximum thickness of Low Density Compound is 5 mm (0.20

in).

(h) If the original primer and anodized layer is damaged in the mat
ing surface area of the original skin, prepare the mating surface
area (refer to Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 3.A.(1).(b).Method 5).

If the anodized layer is in good condition in the mating surface

area of the original skin, prepare the mating surface area (refer
to Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 3.A.(1).(b).Method 2).

(i) Trim−out the repair aluminum sheet to the required dimensions.

Refer to Figure 214.

NOTE: An overlap of 50 mm (1.97 in) is required between the re

pair aluminum sheet and the original skin.

(j) Put the repair aluminum sheet in its correct position, refer to
Figure 214.

(k) Apply a protection treatment on the outer surface (refer to

Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 3.A.(2).(b).Method 1).

NOTE: The application of anticorrosion bonding primer (Material

No. 08−055) is not required.

(l) Apply the epoxy primer (Material No. 16−006B) or polyurethane

primer (Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C) on the outer surface.
(m) Apply a protection treatment on the inner surface (refer to
Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 3.A.(2).(b).Method 1).

(n) Make sure that existing bonding points remain in the same posi
tion after the repair procedure is done, according to NSA 936002.
(o) Install the aluminum sheet with adhesive paste (Material No.
08−078) and scrim cloth (Material No. 05−021).

(p) Cure the repair under vacuum pressure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
Paragraphs 5.E, 5.D and 6.B.(1)).

Page 309
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(q) Apply adhesion promoter (Material No. 09−028C). Refer to Figure

214.
(r) Apply a bead of sealant (Material No. 09−002). Refer to Figure
214.

(s) Let the sealants cure. Refer to Manufacturer’s Instructions for

curing data.

(t) Apply varnish protection (Material No. 16−021) at bead sealant.

Refer to Figure 214.

(u) Restore the surface protection (refer to Chapter 51−75−12).

(v) Do a Tap Test Inspection of the repair area (refer to NTM Task
51−10−03−280−801).
(w) If necessary, install the panel 02 and/or Access Door IV (refer
to AMM Chapter 55−13−11, Page Block 401).

Page 310
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Replacement of Partial Skin − Trailing Edge Panel 02 and Access Door IV −

Zone 04, Subzone A and Subzone B
Figure 214 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesAug311/312
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Replacement of Partial Skin − Trailing Edge Panel 02 and Access Door IV −

Zone 04, Subzone A and Subzone B
Figure 214 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesAug313/314
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 215.
CAUTION: KEEP THE BONDING POINTS TO MAKE SURE THE ELECTRICAL CONDUCTIVITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ONLY APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 36553G0453.

E. Full Metallic Skin Replacement − Trailing Edge Panel 02 and Access Door
IV − Zone 04, Subzone A and Subzone B.

NOTE: This repair is valid for metallic skin damages more than 30% of
panel area.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−11−00, paragraph 2 for data related
to metallic structure and Chapter 55−13−11, Page Block 101, for re
pair zones definition.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 215
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Aluminum Sheet
− Epoxy Primer
− Low Density Compound
− Polyurethane Primer
− Adhesive Paste
− Scrim Cloth
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 215)
1 Refer to Figure 215
− Material No. 16−006B, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para
graph 6.B.(4).
− Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−078, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−021, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) If necessary, remove the panel 02 and/or Access Door IV (refer

to AMM Chapter 55−13−11, Page Block 401).

Page 315
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Do a Tap Test Inspection of the sandwich inner skin (refer to

NTM Task 51−10−03−280−801).
(c) Remove the outer aluminum sheet.

NOTE: Be careful not to damage the core when you remove the alu
minum sheet.

(d) Let dry the Exposed Core (Subzone A) for 24 hours at 80° C
(176° F) (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.G.(2)).
CAUTION: IF DAMAGE DEPTH IS MORE THAN 5 MM (0.20 IN) AND MORE THAN
1000 MM (1.55 IN), CONTACT AIRBUS.

(e) If core is damaged during the removal of the damaged area, re
pair it as follows:
− If damage depth is less than 5 mm (0.20 in), repair it by
core closing up to the original core thickness (refer to Chap
ter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.H.).
− If damage depth is more than 5 mm (0.20 in) and equal or less
than 1000 mm (1.55 in), repair it by core filling up to the
original core thickness (refer to Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph
3.C., steps (1), (3) to (6)).
(f) Do a core closing procedure in Subzone A with Low density com
pound up to the original structure and cure it (refer to Chapter
51−77−11, Paragraph 5.H. and 6.B.(4)).

NOTE: The maximum thickness of Low Density Compound is 5 mm (0.20

in).

(g) Trim−out the repair aluminum sheet to the panel size, refer to
figure 215.

(h) Put the repair aluminum sheet in its correct position, refer to
Figure 215.
(i) Apply a protection treatment on the outer surface (refer to
Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 3.A.(2).(b).Method 1).

NOTE: The application of anticorrosion bonding primer (Material

No. 08−055) is not required.
(j) Apply the epoxy primer on the outer surface (Material No.
16−006B) or polyurethane primer (Material No. 16−001B or
16−001C).

(k) Apply a protection treatment on the inner surface (refer to

Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 3.A.(2).(b).Method 1).
(l) Make sure that the existing bonding points remain in the same
position after the repair procedure is done, according to NSA
936002.

Page 316
Printed in Germany
55−13−11 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(m) Install the aluminum sheet with adhesive paste (Material

No.08−078) and scrim cloth (Material No. 05−021).
(n) Cure the repair under vacuum pressure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
Paragraphs 5.E, 5.D and 6.B.(1)).

(o) Restore the surface protection (refer to Chapter 51−75−12).

(p) Do a Tap Test Inspection of the repair area (refer to NTM Task
51−10−03−280−801).
(q) If necessary, install the panel 02 and/or Access Door IV (refer
to AMM Chapter 55−13−11, Page Block 401).

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesAug317/318
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Replacement of full skin − Trailing Edge Panel 02 and Access Door IV − Zone
04, Subzone A and Subzone B
Figure 215

Printed in Germany
55−13−11 PagesAug319/320
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

RIBS − TRAILING EDGE

1. Identification Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Ribs, Trailing Edge Figure 1

1 Rib 0, Trailing Edge Figure 2
2 Rib 1, Trailing Edge Figure 3
3 Rib 2, Trailing Edge Figure 4
4 Rib 3, Trailing Edge Figure 5
5 Rib 4, Trailing Edge Figure 6
6 Rib 5, Trailing Edge Figure 7
7 Rib 6, Trailing Edge Figure 8
8 Rib 7, Trailing Edge Figure 9
9 Rib 8, Trailing Edge Figure 10
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−10−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find Modi
fication/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 MayPage 1
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs, Trailing Edge

Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 MayPage 2
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 0, Trailing Edge

Figure 2 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 Pages 3/4
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 0, Trailing Edge

Figure 2 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 Pages 5/6
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 0, Assy D55184500000 PB 101

001 PB 201
1A Rib 0, Assy D55184500002 PB 101 A22383G0132
003 PB 201
1B Rib 0, Assy D55184500004 PB 101 A23101G0157
005 PB 201
1C Rib 0, Assy D55184500006 PB 101 A23640G0160
007 PB 201
5 Rib 0 Composite D55184501000 PB 101
001 PB 201
5A Rib 0 Composite D55184501004 PB 101 A21061G0056
005 PB 201
5B Rib 0 Composite D55184501006 PB 101 A21295G0066
007 PB 201
5C Rib 0 Composite D55184501008 PB 101 A22383G0132
009 PB 201
5D Rib 0 Composite D55184501010 PB 101 A23101G0157
011 PB 201
5E Rib 0 Composite D55184501014 A24973G0652
015
10 Angle, Assy 3.1364T3 D92480017000
LN9073 001
10A Angle, Assy 3.1364T3 D92480017002 A28415G0353
LN9073 003
15 Support, Assy 3.1364T3 D93580044000
LN9073 001
20 Support, Assy 3.1364T3 D92480071000 A23101G0157
LN9073
20A Support, Assy 3.1364T3 D92480071002 A28415G0353
LN9073 003
ASSY Dwg.: D55184000, D55184500

Key to Figure 2

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 Pages 7/8
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 1, Trailing Edge

Figure 3 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 Pages 9/10
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 1, Trailing Edge

Figure 3 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 MayPage01/1511
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 1, Assy D55184510000 PB 101

001 PB 201
1A Rib 1, Assy D55184510002 PB 101 A22383G0132
003 PB 201
1B Rib 1, Assy D55184510004 PB 101 A23101G0157
005 PB 201
1C Rib 1, Assy D55184510006 PB 101 A33094G0401
007 PB 201
5 Rib 1 Composite D55184511000 PB 101
001 PB 201
5A Rib 1 Composite D55184511002 PB 101 A21018G0051
003 PB 201
5B Rib 1 Composite D55184511004 PB 101 A22383G0132
005 PB 201
5C Rib 1 Composite D55184511006 PB 101 A23101G0157
007 PB 201
5D Rib 1 Composite D55184511008 PB 101 A33094G0401
009 PB 201
5E Rib 1 Composite D55184511010 A24973G0475
011
10 Angle, Assy 3.1364T3 D92480017000
LN9073 001
15 Angle 3.1364T3 D92480064200
LN9073 201
20 Support, Assy 3.1364T3 D93580027000 A21018G0051
LN9073 001
ASSY Dwg.: D55184000, D55184510

Key to Figure 3

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 MayPage01/1512
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 2, Trailing Edge

Figure 4 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 Pages 13/14
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 2, Trailing Edge

Figure 4 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 MayPage01/1515
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 2, Assy D55184515000 PB 101

001 PB 201
1A Rib 2, Assy D55184515002 PB 101 A22383G0132
003 PB 201
1B Rib 2, Assy D55184515004 PB 101 A23101G0157
005 PB 201
1C Rib 2, Assy D55184515006 PB 101 A33094G0401
007 PB 201
5 Rib 2 Composite D55184516000 PB 101
001 PB 201
5A Rib 2 Composite D55184516002 PB 101 A22383G0132
003 PB 201
5B Rib 2 Composite D55184516004 PB 101 A23101G0157
005 PB 201
5C Rib 2 Composite D55184516006 PB 101 A33094G0401
007 PB 201
5D Rib 2 Composite D55184516008 A24973G0475
009
10 Angle 3.1364T3 D92480017000
LN9073 001
15 Angle 3.1364T3 D92480064200
LN9073 201
20 Support 3.1364T3 D93580027000
LN9073 001
ASSY Dwg.: D55184000, D55184515

Key to Figure 4

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 MayPage01/1516
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 3, Trailing Edge

Figure 5 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 Pages 17/18
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 3, Trailing Edge

Figure 5 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 MayPage01/1519
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 3, Assy D55184520000 PB 101

001 PB 201
1A Rib 3, Assy D55184520002 PB 101 A22383G0132
003 PB 201
1B Rib 3, Assy D55184520004 PB 101 A23101G0157
005 PB 201
1C Rib 3, Assy D55184520006 PB 101 A33094G0401
007 PB 201
5 Rib 3 Composite D55184521000 PB 101
001 PB 201
5A Rib 3 Composite D55184521002 PB 101 A22383G0132
003 PB 201
5B Rib 3 Composite D55184521004 PB 101 A23101G0157
005 PB 201
5C Rib 3 Composite D55184521006 PB 101 A33094G0401
007 PB 201
5D Rib 3 Composite D55184521008 A36553G0452
009
10 Plate, metal 3.1364T3 D55184520200
LN9073 201
1.0 (0.039)
15 Support 3.1364T3 D93580027000
LN9073 001
20 Angle 3.1364T3 D92480014000
LN9073 001
ASSY Dwg.: D55184000, D55184520

Key to Figure 5

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 MayPage01/1520
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 4, Trailing Edge

Figure 6 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 Pages 21/22
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 4, Trailing Edge

Figure 6 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 MayPage01/1523
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 4, Assy D55184525000 PB 101

001 PB 201
1A Rib 4, Assy D55184525002 PB 101 A23101G0157
003 PB 201
1B Rib 4, Assy D55184525004 PB 101 A33094G0401
005 PB 201
5 Rib 4 Composite D55184526000 PB 101
001 PB 201
5A Rib 4 Composite D55184526002 PB 101 A23101G0157
003 PB 201
5B Rib 4 Composite D55184526004 PB 101 A33094G0401
005 PB 201
5C Rib 4 Composite D55184526006 A24973G0475
007
5D Rib 4 Composite D55184526008 A36553G0452
009
10 Plate, metal 3.1364T3 D55184525200
LN9073 201
1.0 (0.039)
15 Angle, Assy 3.1364T3 D92480013000
LN9073
20 Support, Assy 3.1364T3 D93580040000
LN9073
ASSY Dwg.: D55184000, D55184525

Key to Figure 6

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 MayPage01/1524
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 5, Trailing Edge

Figure 7

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 Pages 25/26
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 5, Assy D55184530000 PB 101

001 PB 201
1A Rib 5, Assy D55184530002 PB 101 A23101G0157
003 PB 201
1B Rib 5, Assy D55184530004 PB 101 A33094G0401
005 PB 201
5 Rib 5 Composite D55184531000 PB 101
001 PB 201
5A Rib 5 Composite D55184531002 PB 101 A23101G0157
003 PB 201
5B Rib 5 Composite D55184531004 PB 101 A33094G0401
005 PB 201
5C Rib 5 Composite D55184531006 A24973G0475
007
ASSY Dwg.: D55184000, D55184530

Key to Figure 7

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 Pages 27/28
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 6, Trailing Edge

Figure 8 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 Pages 29/30
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 6, Trailing Edge

Figure 8 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 MayPage01/1531
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 6, Assy D55184535000 PB 101

001 PB 201
1A Rib 6, Assy D55184535002 PB 101 A23101G0157
003 PB 201
1B Rib 6, Assy D55184535004 PB 101 A33094G0401
005 PB 201
5 Rib 6 Composite D55184536000 PB 101
001 PB 201
5A Rib 6 Composite D55184536002 PB 101 A23101G0157
003 PB 201
5B Rib 6 Composite D55184536004 PB 101 A33094G0401
005 PB 201
5C Rib 6 Composite D55184536006 A24973G0475
007
10 Plate, metal 3.1364T3 D55184535200
LN9073 201
1.0 (0.039)
ASSY Dwg.: D55184000, D55184535

Key to Figure 8

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 MayPage01/1532
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 7, Trailing Edge

Figure 9 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 Pages 33/34
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 7, Trailing Edge

Figure 9 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 MayPage01/1535
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 7, Assy D55184540000 PB 101

001 PB 201
1A Rib 7, Assy D55184540002 PB 101 A23101G0157
003 PB 201
5 Rib 7 Composite D55184541000 PB 101
001 PB 201
5A Rib 7 Composite D55184541002 PB 101 A23101G0157
003 PB 201
10 Plate, metal 3.3214T4 D55184540200
LN9073 201
1.6 (0.063)
15 Plate, metal 3.1364T3 D55184540202
LN9073 1.4 (0.055)
ASSY Dwg.: D55184000, D55184540

Key to Figure 9

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 MayPage01/1536
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 8, Trailing Edge

Figure 10

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 Pages 37/38
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 8, Assy D55184545000 PB 101

001 PB 201
1A Rib 8, Assy D55184545002 PB 101 A23101G0157
003 PB 201
5 Rib 8 Composite D55184546000 PB 101
001 PB 201
5A Rib 8 Composite D55184546002 PB 101 A23101G0157
003 PB 201
ASSY Dwg.: D55184000, D55184545

Key to Figure 10

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 Pages 39/40
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TRAILING EDGE RIBS − ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT PARAGRAPH.

CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO

PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

1. General

NOTE: For definition of allowable damage refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For Damage Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14

− CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

2. Damage Evaluation
Before you repair the damage structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

3. Type of Damage

The two main types of damage which can occur to the composite structure
are as follows:
A. Delamination with or without visible cracks and holes, debonding and
dents.

This is when the structure comes into contact with an object, or water
permeates the composite structure resulting in one or more of the fol
lowing:
− separation between the plies
− broken plies
− structure pushed in with respect to the usual contour.

For more data on damage causes refer to Chapter 51−11−00, paragraph 1.

B. Superficial Damage

This is when the structure is damaged only on the external surface, with
no damage to the internal structure. Nicks and scratches are examples of
superficial damage.

4. Allowable Damage

A. Allowable damage is damage for which a structural repair is not neces

sary. The data in this topic is applicable to the Trailing Edge Ribs.
The allowable damage must be assessed after the damaged material has

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

been removed and the damaged area smoothed. The allowable damage data
for the Horizontal Stabilizer Trailing Edge Ribs is in table 101
5. Allowable Damage Description/Criteria

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ PARAGRAPH/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION INSTRUCTION REF
TYPE DIAGRAM CATEGORY
ERENCE
Trailing Edge Ribs Zone Linear and 9.A./101 A, C −
01 Superficial
Damage
Trailing Edge Ribs Zone Linear and 9.B./102 A, C −
02 Superficial
Damage
Trailing Edge Ribs Zone Linear and 9.C./103 A, C −
03 Superficial
Damage
Trailing Edge Ribs Zone Linear and 9.D./104 A, C −
04 Superficial
Damage
Trailing Edge Ribs, Up Fastener 9.E./105 C −
per and Lower Flanges Lost

Table 101
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

6. Distance Between Damaged Areas and Between Repair Areas

There is a minimum permitted distance between damaged areas and between

damaged areas and repair areas (refer to Figure 101):

A. Damaged Areas

For the minimum distance between two damaged areas (X) refer to the spe
cific allowable damage table. Depending on the order of the damages,
Lmax is as follows:
− Different Order
If the length of the larger damage is more than 10 × length of the
smaller damage, then Lmax is the length of the smaller damage.
− Same Order
If the length of the larger damage is less or equal than 10 × length
of the smaller damage, then Lmax is the length of the larger damage.

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

When the distance (X) between two damages areas is less than the minimum
distance, the two damages must be enveloped together and the area of the
envelop is to be considered as one damage area.

B. Repair Areas

For the minimum distance between two repair areas (Y) refer to the spe
cific allowable damage table. If you have less than this distance, refer
to AIRBUS before you do the second repair.

Page 103
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Distance Between Damaged Areas and Between Repair Areas

Figure 101

Page 104
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

7. Repair Zones

The Horizontal Stabilizer Trailing Edge Ribs structure is divided into re

pair zones. These repair zones show the zones of different structural im

portance of the component. When you do a damage evaluation (refer to para

graph 2.) you must refer to the repair zone data. The repair zone data of
the Ribs is in Figure 102.

Page 105
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Ribs − Repair Zones

Figure 102

Page 106
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

8. Repair Limits

The repair limits data gives the time limits in which to make temporary
and permanent repairs. These time limits are given in flight cycles/hours
(FC/FH). The repair limits also tell you which type and quantity of repairs
you can do in case of different damages and repairs. The number of allow
able individual damages and repairs are specified in the specific para
graphs. When different damages and repairs occur, the total number shall
not exceed the limits in the relevant tables in paragraphs. To find the
repair limits data applicable to a damaged area, you must know the follow
ing data:
− the repair zone applicable to the damaged area.
− the area, length or depth (as applicable) of the damage to the structure.
− the type of damage (for example: nick, scratch, delamination).

9. Trailing Edge Ribs − Allowable Damage

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 102.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
A. Trailing Edge Ribs Zone 01 − Linear and Superficial Damage

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Zone 01 of the following

Trailing Edge Ribs: 0, 1, 2, 5, 6, 7 and 8. Refer to Figure 102
for Repair Zones.

NOTE: For Rib 3 and 4 allowable damage information, contact Airbus.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 102.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 102
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.
(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 101 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 103 and perform the corre
sponding repair action.

Page 107
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits, Trailing Edge Ribs Zone 01

Diagram 101

Page 108
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC
REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIM
INSPECTION MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN MAX. NUM

SIZE TION CATEGORY IT BER OF
DAMAGE X mm REPAIRS Y REPAIRS/
(in) mm (in) DAMAGES
PER PART
The greater
value of 50
Chapter 51−77−12, 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 20 months NO mm (1.97 2
Paragraph 2.A in)
in) or 2.5
Lmax.
Linear damages Refer to Chapter
(nicks, gouges, 51−77−12, Para

scratches, (1)
graph 3.B for The greater
cracks) and su
non perforating value of 50
perficial damages 50 mm (1.97
Permanent A damage or Chap
20 months <1> None NO mm (1.97 2
(holes, dela
in)
ter 51−77−13, in) or 2.5
minations with Paragraph 2.H Lmax.
broken plies, for perforating
abrasions, dela
damage.
minations without
broken plies. The greater
Structural Re

value of 50
pair, Chapter 50 mm (1.97
(2) Permanent A Immediately None NO mm (1.97 2
55−13−12, Page in)
in) or 2.5
Block 201.
Lmax.
(3) − − Contact AIRBUS Immediately − − − − −
Allowable Damage and Repair Limits, Trailing Edge Ribs Zone 01
Table 103
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 PagesMay109/110
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 104.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

B. Trailing Edge Ribs Zone 02 − Linear and Superficial Damage

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Zone 02 of the following

Trailing Edge Ribs: 0, 1, 2, 5, 6, 7 and 8. Refer to Figure 102
for Repair Zones.

NOTE: For Rib 3 and 4 allowable damage information, contact Airbus.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 104.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 104
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 102 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 105 and perform the corre
sponding repair action.

Page 111
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits, Trailing Edge Ribs Zone 02

Diagram 102

Page 112
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC
REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIM
INSPECTION MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN MAX. NUM

SIZE TION CATEGORY IT BER OF
DAMAGE X mm REPAIRS Y REPAIRS/
(in) mm (in) DAMAGES
PER PART
The greater
value of 50
Chapter 51−77−12, 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 20 months NO mm (1.97 2
Paragraph 2.A in)
Linear damages in) or 2.5
(nicks, gouges, Lmax.
scratches, (1)
The greater
cracks) and su
Refer to Chapter value of 50
perficial damages 50 mm (1.97
Permanent A 51−77−12, Para
20 months <1> None NO mm (1.97 2
(holes, dela
in)
graph 3.B. in) or 2.5
minations with Lmax.
broken plies,
plies
abrasions, dela
The greater
Structural Re

minations without value of 50
pair, Chapter 50 mm (1.97
broken plies. (2) Permanent A Immediately None NO mm (1.97 2
55−13−12, Page in)
in) or 2.5
Block 201.
Lmax.
(3) − − Contact AIRBUS Immediately − − − − −
Allowable Damage and Repair Limits, Trailing Edge Ribs Zone 02
Table 105
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 PagesMay113/114
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 106.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

C. Trailing Edge Ribs Zone 03 − Linear and Superficial Damage

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Zone 03 of the following

Trailing Edge Ribs: 0, 1, 2, 5, 6, 7 and 8. Refer to Figure 102
for Repair Zones.

NOTE: For Rib 3 and 4 allowable damage information, contact Airbus.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 106.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 106
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 103 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 107 and perform the corre
sponding repair action.

Page 115
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits, Trailing Edge Ribs Zone 03

Diagram 103

Page 116
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC
REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIM
INSPECTION MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN MAX. NUM

SIZE TION CATEGORY IT BER OF
DAMAGE X mm REPAIRS Y REPAIRS/
(in) mm (in) DAMAGES
PER PART
The greater
value of 50
Chapter 51−77−12, 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 20 months NO mm (1.97 2
Paragraph 2.A in)
Linear damages in) or 2.5
(nicks, gouges, Lmax.
scratches, (1)
The greater
cracks) and su
Refer to Chapter value of 50
perficial damages 50 mm (1.97
Permanent A 51−77−12, Para
20 months <1> None NO mm (1.97 2
(holes, dela
in)
graph 3.B. in) or 2.5
minations with Lmax.
broken plies,
plies
abrasions, dela
The greater
Structural Re

minations without value of 50
pair, Chapter 50 mm (1.97
broken plies. (2) Permanent A Immediately None NO mm (1.97 2
55−13−12, Page in)
in) or 2.5
Block 201.
Lmax.
(3) − − Contact AIRBUS Immediately − − − − −
Allowable Damage and Repair Limits, Trailing Edge Ribs Zone 03
Table 107
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 PagesMay117/118
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 108.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

D. Trailing Edge Ribs Zone 04 − Linear and Superficial Damage

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Zone 04 of the following

Trailing Edge Ribs: 0, 1, 2, 5, 6, 7 and 8. Refer to Figure 102
for Repair Zones.

NOTE: For Rib 3 and 4 allowable damage information, contact Airbus.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 108.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 108
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 104 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 109 and perform the corre
sponding repair action.

Page 119
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits, Trailing Edge Ribs Zone 04

Diagram 104

Page 120
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC
REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIM
INSPECTION MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN MAX. NUM

SIZE TION CATEGORY IT BER OF
DAMAGE X mm REPAIRS Y REPAIRS/
(in) mm (in) DAMAGES
PER PART
The greater
value of 50
Chapter 51−77−12, 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 20 months NO mm (1.97 2
Paragraph 2.A in)
Linear damages in) or 2.5
(nicks, gouges, Lmax.
scratches, (1)
The greater
cracks) and su
Refer to Chapter value of 50
perficial damages 50 mm (1.97
Permanent A 51−77−12, Para
20 months <1> None NO mm (1.97 2
(holes, dela
in)
graph 3.B. in) or 2.5
minations with Lmax.
broken plies,
plies
abrasions, dela
The greater
Structural Re

minations without value of 50
pair, Chapter 50 mm (1.97
broken plies. (2) Permanent A Immediately None NO mm (1.97 2
55−13−12, Page in)
in) or 2.5
Block 201.
Lmax.
(3) − − Contact AIRBUS Immediately − − − − −
Allowable Damage and Repair Limits, Trailing Edge Ribs Zone 04
Table 109
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 PagesMay121/122
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 110.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

E. Trailing Edge Rib Upper and Lower Flange − Fastener Lost

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in the upper and lower flanges
on Zones 02, 03 and 04 of the following Trailing edge Ribs: 0, 1,
2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. Refer to Figure 102 for Repair Zones.

NOTE: For Rib 3 and 4 allowable damage information, contact Airbus.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 110.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 110
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Refer to Diagram 105 flow chart when a fastener lost is found.

Page 123
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Ribs, Upper and Lower Flanges Fastener Lost

Diagram 105

Page 124
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TRAILING EDGE RIBS − REPAIRS

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE GIV
EN IN THE RELEVANT PARAGRAPH.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH 3,

GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

1. General

NOTE: For Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

This topic contains all the specific repair procedures for the ribs of the
horizontal stabilizer. The repair zones and allowable damage data for these
repair procedures is in Chapter 55−13−12, Page Block 101.

2. Safety Precautions

There are risks to you and other persons when you work with composite re
pair materials. To prevent risks, read and obey the warnings given below.

WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.

WARNING: WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND FILTER MASK WHEN YOU CUT,
ABRADE OR DRILL COMPOSITE MATERIALS. THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MA
TERIALS CAN GET INTO YOUR LUNGS OR ONTO YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE YOU
INJURY. IMMEDIATELY REMOVE DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.

WHEN YOU WORK WITH CFRP COMPOSITE MATERIALS, IMMEDIATELY REMOVE
DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.
WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRIC POWER ON
THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST ONLY USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.

3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER REMARKS

No General Repairs applicable. − −

Table 201

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

4. Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs

SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE INSPECTION

REPAIR
INSTRUCTION REF

CATEGORY
ERENCE
Delamination Repair (Flush 5.A. 201 − −
Repair), Zones 01−04. INACTIVE INACTIVE
This repair information
is inactive since revi

sion dated May 01/12.
Repair of Damage to Rib 5.B. 202 A −
Web not near cut out
(Delamination with broken
fibers, cracks and abra

sions). Zone 01.
Repair of Damage to Rib 5.C. 203 A −
Web near cut out (Dela

mination with broken fi

bers, cracks, abrasions).
Zone 01.
Repair of Damage to Up
5.D. 204 A −
per/Lower Rib Flange and
Web affected (Delamination
with broken fibers,
cracks and abrasions).
All Zones.
Repair of Damage to Up
5.E. 205 A −
per/Lower Rib Flange (De

lamination with broken
fibers, cracks and abra

sions). Zones 2, 3 and
4.
Forward Flange Repair 5.F. 206 A −
(Delamination, Cracks and
Abrasions).
Delamination without bro
5.G. 207 A −
ken fibers. Zones 01, 02,
03 and 04 (except forward
flange).

Table 202
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

5. Ribs Repairs

A. Delamination Repair (Flush Repair), Zones 01−04

NOTE: This repair procedure is inactive since revision dated May 01/12.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Page Block 101, paragraph 3
for data.

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out with a hot−bond (180° C (356° F))
repair procedure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Adhesive Film − Material Z−15.425, Adhesive

− Carbon Fabric Prepreg
− Adhesive
− Thickening Agent
− Pore Filler
− High Speed Tape
− Cleaning Agent
(2) Permanent Repair (refer to Figure 201)
Film, refer to Chapter 51−33−00
− Material Z−19.749, Epoxy Prepreg
carbon fabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00
− Material No. 08−010C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−057, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−008, refer to
Chapter 51−33−00
− refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para
graph 3.B.
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Cut out the damaged plies (refer to Figure 201 for shape of
hole).

(b) Chamfer the edge of the hole and radius the ply corners (refer
to Figure 201 for dimensions).
(c) Get the correct pre−impregnated fabric material (material
Z−19.749, Epoxy Prepreg carbon fabric) for the repair (refer to
Chapter 55−13−00, Page Block 101, Figure 104).

(d) Prepare the fabric repair plies to the correct shape and dimen
sions for the repair (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C).
(e) Cut the adhesive film (material Z−15.425, Adhesive Film) to suit
the size and shape of the repair area (refer to Figure 201 for
dimensions).

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (material No. 11−003).

(g) Remove protective film from both sides at adhesive film and apply
adhesive film to repair area.

(h) Lay up the repair plies on the repair area (refer to Figure 201)
and ( refer to Chapter 55−13−00, Page Block 101, Figure 104).
For further data refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C. Note
that there must be an overlap of 15 mm (0.59 in) on subsequent
plies.

(i) Install the vacuum−cure equipment over the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.B.).

(j) Cure the repair plies under vacuum conditions (minimum 80% vacu
um). For further data refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.

(k) After the repair plies have cured, remove the vacuum cure equip
ment from the repair area.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(l) With abrasive cloth, make the repair patch smooth and level with
the adjacent surface. Initially use 280 grade and finish off with
400 grade. If necessary apply pore filler (material No. 08−008).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(m) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (material No.
11−003).

(n) Tell the Inspection Department to do an inspection at 6000 flight

hours (FH).

(3) Temporary Repair

(a) Remove the damaged material that shows above the rib skin sur
face.

(b) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (material No.
11−003).

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Mix the adhesive (material No. 08−010C) with the thickenings
agent (material No. 05−057).
(e) Fill the damaged skin with the adhesive paste.

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Let the adhesive cure for 24 hours at room temperature (RT).

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.C. for data.

(g) After the adhesive has cured, smooth the cured adhesive into the
skin contour. Use abrasive cloth 200 grade first and then finish
with 400 grade.

(h) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (material No.
11−003).

(i) Put a protective layer of High Speed Tape (HST) over the repair
area. Press the edges down tightly.

(j) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (refer to Chapter 55−13−00, Page Block 101, Figure
105) to find the time limit applicable the temporary repair. Tell
the inspection department what the permissible number of flight
hours (FH) is before a permanent repair is necessary.

(4) Permanent Repair After Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 201)

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 3).

(b) Remove the HST and the filler.

(c) Do the steps 5.A.(2)(b) three 5.A.(2)(n) of the repair procedure

5.A.(2).

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 PagesNov205/206
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Delamination Repair − Zones 01−04

Figure 201

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 PagesMay207/208
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 203.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

B. Repair of Damage to Rib Web not near cut out (Delamination with broken
fibers, cracks and abrasions). Zone 01.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data, and
Chapter 55−13−12, Page Block 101 for allowable damage limits and
zones definition.

NOTE: This repair is applicable only to Ribs 0, 1, 2, 5, 6, 7 and 8,

where damage has occurred to the rib web (zone 01). The typical
types of damage which may occur are as follows:
− Delamination with broken plies, abrasions and holes
− Cracks, Nicks, Gouges and Scratches.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 203
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information Table in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 209
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL
(1) Repair Materials
ITEM NOMENCLATURE
1 Repair Doubler
− Epoxy Resin
− Sealant
− Interfay Sealant
− Adhesion Promoter
− Varnish
− Epoxy−polyurethane Primer
− Polyurethane Coating
− Cleaning Agent
− Glass Fiber Fabric
− Laminating Resin
− Polyurethane Primer
− Chromic Acid Anodizing
(CAA)
(2) Repair Instructions, refer to Figure 202
Printed in Germany
QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS
1 Air Spares Reference Number
R55120438−000. For Pre−cured
Sheet type material data and
alternative materials refer to
Chapter 55−13−00, Page Block
201, Figure 203 material table.
− Material No. 08−051, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 09−028C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 16−021, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 16−040, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 20−034 or Material
No. 05−033, refer to Chapter
51−35−00. (Only for alternative
metallic Doubler).
− Material No. 20−022 or Material
No. 20−032 or Material No.
20−028, refer to Chapter
51−35−00. (Only for alternative
metallic Doubler).
− Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C
or Material No. 16−006B, refer
to Chapter 51−35−00. (Only for
alternative metallic Doubler).
− Refer to Chapter 51−21−11. (Only
for alternative metallic Dou

bler).
Page 210
55−13−12 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(a) Prepare the repair area, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph

4.M.(1), for surface preparation.
NOTE: Remove system supports when it is necessary and install
again after repair.

(b) Get the composite material to make the repair doubler. Alterna

tively external doubler can be metallic, refer to Chapter
55−13−00, Page Block 201, Figure 203, Precured Sheet Material.
NOTE: CFRP Doubler is recommended.

(c) Make the repair doubler to the necessary shape and dimension for
the repair. Refer to Figure 202.

(d) Mark the position of the fastener holes on the repair doubler.
Refer to Figure 202.

NOTE: The number of fasteners installed shall be according to the

damage size but ensuring two fasteners row minimum beyond
the cut out area.

(e) Pilot drill the marked fastener hole positions on the repair
doubler.

NOTE: For Hole and Drill Data Refer to Chapter 51−44−11 and Chap

ter 51−44−21.

(f) Put the repair doubler in the correct repair position and attach
to the rib web with screw clamps.
(g) Transfer drill some pilot holes from the repair doubler to the
rib web and attach with screw pins.

(h) Transfer drill the remaining pilot holes from the repair doubler
to the rib web.
(i) Drill all the holes in the repair doubler and rib web to the
correct diameter for the fasteners.

(j) Remove the repair doubler from the rib web.

(k) Remove the sharp edges from the holes in the repair part and re

pair area with an abrasive cone.

(l) Remove the unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

(m) Clean the repair doubler and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003).
(n) If necessary use a liquid shim (Material No. 08−051) up to 0.5
mm (0.020 in) to get flat seat for the installation.

Page 211
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(o) In case of alternative metallic doubler, apply CAA on the dou

bler, then primer (Material No. 16−001B or Material No. 16−001C
or Material No. 16−006B) and followed by a top coat of polyure

thane finish paint (Material No. 16−018C). Finally install a
glass fiber fabric layer (Material No. 20−034 or Material No.
05−033) with laminating resin (Material No. 20−022 or Material
No. 20−032 or Material No. 20−028) on the CFRP face in contact
with the doubler and which must extend 12 mm (0.47 in) minimum
around the aluminium doubler in all directions.

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 51−21−11 for protective treatment applica

tion data, Chapter 51−23−00 for coatings application data
and Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.A for the material prepa

ration.
(p) Apply surface protection to the composite repair parts. Apply
epoxy−polyurethane primer (Material No. 16−040) plus polyurethane
coating (Material No. 16−018C). Refer to Chapter 51−21−00 and
Chapter 51−23−00.
(q) Apply interfay sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the repair dou

bler.

(r) Put the repair parts in their correct position on the repair
area and secure with screw pins.

(s) Wet install the correct fasteners with the sealant (Material No.
09−005), refer to Chapter 51−76−11.

NOTE: For Fasteners installation and removal Refer to Chapter

51−42−11 and Chapter 51−42−21.

NOTE: Determine Fasteners length on assembly.

(t) Remove all unwanted sealant with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(u) Apply adhesion promoter (Material No. 09−028C). Refer to Figure

202.

(v) Apply a bead of sealant (Material No. 09−002) to the contour of

the repair doubler and skin. Let the sealants cure, refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions for cure time. Refer to Figure 202.

(w) Apply varnish protection (Material No. 16−021). Refer to Figure

202.
(x) Restore the surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 212
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Rib Web not near cut out. Zone 01.
Figure 202

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 PagesMay213/214
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 204.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

C. Repair of Damage to Rib Web near cut out (Delamination with broken fi
bers, cracks, abrasions). Zone 01.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data, and
Chapter 55−13−12, Page Block 101 for allowable damage limits and
zones definition.

NOTE: This repair is applicable to ribs 0, 1, 2, 5, 6, 7 and 8, where

damage has occurred near cut out of the rib web. The typical types
of damage which may occur are as follows:
− Delamination with broken plies, abrasions and holes
− Cracks, Nicks, Gouges and Scratches.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 204
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information Table in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 215
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL
(1) Repair Materials
ITEM NOMENCLATURE
1 Repair Doubler
− Liquid Shim
− Sealant
− Interfay Sealant
− Adhesion Promoter
− Varnish
− Epoxy−polyurethane Primer
− Polyurethane Coating
− Cleaning Agent
− Glass Fiber Fabric
− Laminating Resin
− Polyurethane Primer
− Chromic Acid Anodizing
(CAA)
(2) Repair Instructions, refer to Figure 203
Printed in Germany
QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS
1 Air Spares Reference Number
R55120438−000. For Pre−cured
Sheet type material data and
alternative materials refer to
Chapter 55−13−00, Page Block
201, Figure 203 material table.
− Material No. 08−051 or Material
No. 08−078, refer to Chapter
51−35−00.
− Material No. 09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 09−028C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 16−021, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 16−040, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 20−034 or Material
No. 05−033, refer to Chapter
51−35−00. (Only for alternative
metallic Doubler).
− Material No. 20−022 or Material
No. 20−032 or Material No.
20−028, refer to Chapter
51−35−00. (Only for alternative
metallic Doubler).
− Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C
or Material No. 16−006B, refer
to Chapter 51−35−00. (Only for
alternative metallic Doubler).
− Refer to Chapter 51−21−11. (Only
for alternative metallic Dou

bler).
Page 216
55−13−12 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(a) Prepare the repair area, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph

4.M.(1), for surface preparation.
NOTE: Remove system supports when it is necessary and install
again after repair.

(b) Trim out the damaged area and completely fill the damage with
resin (Material No. 09−002).

(c) Let the sealant cure. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions

for the cure times.

(d) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(e) Get the composite material to make the repair doubler. Alterna

tively external doubler can be metallic, refer to Chapter
55−13−00, Page Block 201, Figure 203 Precured Sheet Materials.

NOTE: CFRP Doubler is recommended.

(f) Make the repair doubler to the necessary shape and dimension for
the repair. Refer to Figure 203.
NOTE: Adapt the repair doubler to the rib hole contour.

(g) Mark the position of the fastener holes on the repair doubler.
Refer to Figure 203.

NOTE: The number of fasteners installed shall be according to the

damage size but ensuring two fasteners row minimum beyond
the cut−out area of damage.

(h) Pilot drill the marked fastener hole positions on the repair
doubler.

NOTE: For Hole and Drill Data Refer to Chapter 51−44−11 and Chap

ter 51−44−21.

(i) Put the repair doubler in the correct repair position and attach
to the rib web with screw clamps.

(j) Transfer drill some pilot holes from the repair doubler to the
skin and attach with screw pins.
(k) Transfer drill the remaining pilot holes from the repair doubler
to the rib web.

(l) Drill all the holes in the repair doubler and rib web to the
correct diameter for the fasteners. Refer to Chapter 51−44−21 for
CFRP doubler and Chapter 51−44−11 for metallic doubler.

(m) Remove the repair doubler from the rib web.

Page 217
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(n) Remove the sharp edges from the holes in the repair doubler and
rib web with an abrasive cone.
(o) Remove the unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

(p) Clean the repair doubler and the rib web with the cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

(q) If necessary use a liquid shim (Material No. 08−051 or Material

No. 08−078) up to 0.5 mm (0.020 in) to get flat seat for the
installation.

(r) In case of alternative metallic doubler, apply CAA on doubler,

then primer (Material No. 16−001B or Material No. 16−001C or Ma

terial No. 16−006B) and followed by a top coat of polyurethane
finish paint (Material No. 16−018C). Finally install a glass fi

ber fabric layer (Material No. 20−034 or Material No. 05−033)
with laminating resin (Material No. 20−022 or Material No. 20−032
or Material No. 20−028) on the CFRP face in contact with the
doubler and which must extend 12 mm (0.47 in) minimum around the
aluminium doubler in all directions.

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 51−21−11 for protective treatment applica

tion data, Chapter 51−23−00 for coatings application data
and Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.A for the material prepa

ration.
(s) Apply surface protection to the composite repair parts. Apply
epoxy−polyurethane primer (Material No. 16−040) plus polyurethane
coating (Material No. 16−018C). Refer to Chapter 51−21−00 and
Chapter 51−23−00.
(t) Apply interfay sealant (Material No. 09−005) on the repair dou

bler.

(u) Put the repair parts in their correct position on the repair
area and secure with screw pins.

(v) Remove the screw pins in turn and wet install the fasteners with
sealant (Material No. 09−005). Refer to Chapter 51−42−21 for CFRP
and to Chapter 51−42−11 for metallic structure.

NOTE: Determine Fasteners length on assembly.

(w) Remove all unwanted sealant with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
(x) Apply adhesion promoter (Material No. 09−028C). Refer to Figure
203.

(y) Apply a fillet of sealant (Material No. 09−002) on the edges of

the repair doubler. Let the sealants cure, refer to the manufac

turer’s instructions for cure time. Refer to Figure 203.

Page 218
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(z) Apply varnish protection (Material No. 16−021). Refer to Figure

203.
(aa)Restore the surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 PagesMay219/220
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Rib Web near cut out (Delamination with broken fibers,
cracks, abrasions). Zone 01.
Figure 203

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 PagesMay221/222
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 205.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: REPAIR ON FLANGE WITH ANCHOR NUT SHOWN. EQUIVALENT REPAIR ON

FLANGE WITH RIVETS.

D. Repair of Damage to Upper/Lower Rib Flange and Web affected (Delamination

with broken fibers, cracks and abrasions). All Zones.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data, and
Chapter 55−13−12, Page Block 101 for allowable damage limits and
zones definition.
NOTE: This repair is applicable only to Ribs 0, 1, 2, 5, 6, 7 and 8,
where damage has occurred to the rib flange and web. The typical
damage which may occur are as follows:
− Delamination with broken plies, holes and abrasions
− Cracks and Scratches.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 205
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information Table in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 223
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL
(1) Repair Materials
ITEM NOMENCLATURE
1 Repair Angle
2 Flange Repair Filler
− Liquid Shim
− Sealant
− Interfay Sealant
− Adhesion Promoter
− Varnish
− Epoxy−polyurethane Primer
− Polyurethane Coating
− Cleaning Agent
− Glass Fiber Fabric
− Laminating Resin
− Polyurethane Primer
− Chromic Acid Anodizing
(CAA)
(2) Repair Instructions, refer to Figure 204
Printed in Germany
QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS
1 Refer to Figure 204 for Pre−
cured Sheet type material data
and alternative materials.
1 Refer to Figure 204 for Pre−
cured Sheet type material data
and alternative materials.
− Material No. 08−051 or Material
No. 08−078, refer to Chapter
51−35−00.
− Material No. 09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 09−028C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 16−021, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 16−040, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 20−034 or Material
No. 05−033, refer to Chapter
51−35−00. (Only for alternative
metallic Angle).
− Material No. 20−022 or Material
No. 20−032 or Material No.
20−028, refer to Chapter
51−35−00. (Only for alternative
metallic Angle).
− Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C
or Material No. 16−006B, refer
to Chapter 51−35−00. (Only for
alternative metallic Angle).
− Refer to Chapter 51−21−11. (Only
for alternative metallic Angle).
Page 224
55−13−12 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(a) Prepare the repair area, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph

4.M.(1).
NOTE: Remove the anchor nuts from the repair area.

NOTE: Remove system supports when it is necessary and install af

ter repair.

(b) Get the composite material to make the repair parts. Alternative

ly repair angle can be metallic. Refer to Figure 204 for Pre−
cured Sheet type material data and alternative materials.

NOTE: CFRP angle is recommended.

(c) Make the repair parts to the necessary shape and dimension for
the repair. Refer to Figure 204.
(d) Mark the position of the fastener holes on the repair parts. Re

fer to Figure 204.

NOTE: The number of fasteners installed shall be according to the

damage size but ensuring a minimum of one additional fas

tener row in the upper/lower rib flange beyond the cut−out
of damaged area, and two fasteners rows minimum beyond the
cut out of damaged area on the rib web.

(e) Put the repair parts in their correct position.

(f) Temporary install the correct Trailing Edge Panel. Refer to Chap

ter 55−13−11, Page Block 001.
(g) Mark the original fastener positions and the anchor nuts fastener
positions thru the existing holes.

(h) Remove the Trailing Edge Panel and the repair parts from the re

pair area.
(i) Pilot−drill the marked fastener hole positions on the repair
angle.

NOTE: For Hole and Drill Data Refer to Chapter 51−44−11 and Chap

ter 51−44−21.

(j) Put the repair angle in its correct position on the rib web and
attach with screw clamps.

(k) Transfer drill some pilot holes from the repair angle to the rib
web and attach with screw pins.

(l) Transfer drill the remaining pilot holes from the repair angle to
the rib and filler.

(m) Remove the repair angle from the rib web.

Page 225
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(n) Remove the sharp edges from the holes in the repair parts and
rib web with an abrasive cone.
(o) Put the repair parts in their correct position on the repair
area and attach with screw clamps.

(p) Drill all the holes in the repair parts and rib web to the cor

rect diameter for the fasteners.

(q) Remove the repair parts from the repair area.

(r) Remove the sharp edges from the holes in the repair parts and
the rib web with an abrasive cone.

(s) Countersink the anchor nut fastener holes angle to 100°. Refer to
Chapter 51−46−21 for CFRP parts and Chapter 51−46−11 for metallic
parts.

(t) Remove unwanted material from the repair parts with a vacuum
cleaner.

(u) Clean the repair parts and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003).
(v) If necessary use a liquid shim (Material No. 08−051 or Material
No. 08−078) up to 0.5 mm (0.020 in) to get flat seat for the
installation.

(w) In case of alternative metallic angle, apply CAA on the angle,

then primer (Material No. 16−001B or Material No. 16−001C or Ma

terial No. 16−006B) and followed by a top coat of polyurethane
finish paint (Material No. 16−018C). Finally install a glass fi

ber fabric layer (Material No. 20−034 or Material No. 05−033)
with laminating resin (Material No. 20−022 or Material No. 20−032
or Material No. 20−028) on the CFRP face in contact with the
angle and which must extend 12 mm (0.47 in) minimum around the
aluminium angle in all directions.

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 51−21−11 for protective treatment applica

tion data, Chapter 51−23−00 for coatings application data
and Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.A for the material prepa

ration.

(x) Apply surface protection to the composite repair parts. Apply

epoxy−polyurethane primer (Material No. 16−040) plus polyurethane
coating (Material No. 16−018C). Refer to Chapter 51−21−00 and
Chapter 51−23−00.

CAUTION: DO NOT LET THE SEALANT GO INTO THE HOLE OF THE SCREWS.

(y) Wet install the anchor nuts fasteners with sealant (Material No.
09−005).

NOTE: Anchor nut fastener grip to be determined on assembly.

Page 226
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(z) Apply interfay sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the contact sur

faces of the rib web and filler with repair angle. Refer to Fig

ure 204.

(aa)Put the repair filler in its correct position on the repair

angle and wet install the fastener with sealant (Material No.
09−005). Refer to Chapter 51−42−21 for composite and to Chapter
51−42−11 for metallic structure.
NOTE: Determine Fasteners length on assembly.

(ab)Put the repair angle, that must have the repair filler installed
in its correct position, on the rib and attach it with screw
pins.

(ac)Remove the screw pins in turn and wet install the correct fas

tener with sealant (Material No. 09−005). Refer to Chapter
51−42−21 for composite and to Chapter 51−42−11 for metallic
structure.

NOTE: Determine Fasteners length on assembly.

(ad)Apply adhesion promoter (Material No. 09−028C). Refer to Figure
204.

(ae)Apply a bead of sealant (Material No. 09−002) on the edges of

the repair parts. Let the sealants cure, refer to the manufac

turer’s instructions for cure time and to Figure 204.
(af)Remove all unwanted sealant with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003)

(ag)Apply varnish protection (Material No. 16−021). Refer to Figure

204.
(ah)Restore the surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 PagesMay227/228
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Upper/Lower Rib Flange and Web affected (Delamination

with broken fibers, cracks and abrasions). All Zones.
Figure 204 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 PagesMay229/230
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Spares of Damage to Upper/Lower Rib Flange and Web

Figure 204 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 PagesMay231/232
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 206.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: REPAIR ON FLANGE WITH ANCHOR NUT SHOWN. EQUIVALENT REPAIR ON

FLANGE WITH RIVETS.

E. Repair of Damage to Upper/Lower Rib Flange (Delamination with broken fi

bers, cracks and abrasions). Zones 2, 3 and 4.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data, and
Chapter 55−13−12, Page Block 101 for allowable damage limits and
zones definition.
NOTE: This repair is applicable to Ribs 0, 1, 2, 5, 6, 7 and 8, where
damage has occurred to the rib flange. The typical damage which
may occur are as follows:
− Delamination with broken plies, holes and abrasions
− Cracks, Nicks, Gouges and Scratches.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 206
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information Table in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Angle 1 Refer to Figure 205 for Pre−

2 Repair Angle
3 Flange Repair Filler
cured Sheet type material data
and alternative materials.
1 Refer to Figure 205 for Pre−
cured Sheet type material data
and alternative materials.
1 Refer to Figure 205 for Pre−
cured Sheet type material data
and alternative materials.

Page 233
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

4 Flange Repair Filler 1 Refer to Figure 205 for Pre−

− Liquid Shim
− Sealant
− Interfay Sealant
− Adhesion Promoter
− Varnish
− Epoxy−polyurethane Primer
− Polyurethane Coating
− Cleaning Agent
− Glass Fiber Fabric
− Laminating Resin
− Polyurethane Primer
− Chromic Acid Anodizing
(CAA)
(2) Repair Instructions, refer to Figure 205
cured Sheet type material data
and alternative materials.
− Material No. 08−051, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 09−028C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 16−021, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 16−040, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 20−034 or Material
No. 05−033, refer to Chapter
51−35−00. (Only for alternative
metallic Angle).
− Material No. 20−022 or Material
No. 20−032 or Material No.
20−028, refer to Chapter
51−35−00. (Only for alternative
metallic Angle).
− Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C
or Material No. 16−006B, refer
to Chapter 51−35−00. (Only for
alternative metallic Angle).
− Refer to Chapter 51−21−11. (Only
for alternative metallic Angle).

(a) Prepare the repair area, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph

4.M.(1), for surface preparation.

NOTE: Remove the anchor nuts from the repair area.

NOTE: Remove system supports when it is necessary and install

again after repair.

Page 234
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Get the composite material to make the repair angle. Alternative

ly repair angle can be metallic. Refer to Figure 205 for Pre−
cured Sheet type material data and alternative materials.

NOTE: CFRP angle is recommended.

(c) Make the repair angle and filler to the necessary shape and di

mension for the repair. Refer to Figure 205.

(d) Put the repair angle in the correct position. Fix it with
clamps.

(e) Temporary install the correct Trailing Edge Panel. Refer to Chap

ter 55−13−11, Page Block 001.

(f) Mark the position of the anchor nut screw holes and respective
fasteners on the repair angle thru the existing holes.

(g) Remove the Trailing Edge Panel and the repair parts from the re

pair area.

(h) Mark the position of the fastener holes on the repair angle. Re

fer to Figure 205.
NOTE: The number of fasteners installed shall be according to the
damage size but ensuring two fasteners row minimum in the
rib web and one fasteners row in the flange areas beyond
the cut out area.
(i) Put the repair parts in their correct position.

(j) Pilot−drill the marked fastener on the repair parts.

NOTE: For Hole and Drill Data Refer to Chapter 51−44−11 and Chap

ter 51−44−21.

(k) Put the repair angle in its correct position and attach it to
the rib flange with screw clamps.

(l) Transfer drill some pilot holes from the repair angle to the rib
web and attach with screw pins.

(m) Transfer drill the remaining pilot holes from the repair angle to
the rib and filler.

(n) Transfer drill the anchor nut fastener holes to the correct di

ameter for the fastener.

(o) Drill all the holes in the repair angle and rib to the correct
diameter for the fasteners.
(p) Remove the repair angle from the rib.

(q) Remove the sharp edges from the holes in the repair angle and
the rib with an abrasive cone.

Page 235
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(r) Countersink the anchor nut fastener holes angle to 100°. Refer to
Chapter 51−46−21 for CFRP parts and Chapter 51−46−11 for metallic
parts.

(s) Remove the unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

(t) Clean the repair parts and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003).
(u) If necessary use a liquid shim (Material No. 08−051) up to 0.5
mm (0.020 in) to get flat seat for the installation.

(v) In case of alternative metallic doubler, apply CAA on the dou

bler, then primer (Material No. 16−001B or Material No. 16−001C
or Material No. 16−006B) and followed by a top coat of polyure

thane finish paint (Material No. 16−018C). Finally install a
glass fiber fabric layer (Material No. 20−034 or Material No.
05−033) with laminating resin (Material No. 20−022 or Material
No. 20−032 or Material No. 20−028) on the CFRP face in contact
with the doubler and which must extend 12 mm (0.47 in) minimum
around the aluminium doubler in all directions.

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 51−21−11 for protective treatment applica

tion data, Chapter 51−23−00 for coatings application data
and Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.A for the material prepa

ration.
(w) Apply surface protection to the composite repair parts. Apply
epoxy−polyurethane primer (Material No. 16−040) plus polyurethane
coating (Material No. 16−018C). Refer to Chapter 51−21−00 and
Chapter 51−23−00.
CAUTION: DO NOT LET THE SEALANT GO INTO THE HOLE OF THE SCREWS.

(x) Wet install the anchor nuts fasteners to the flange repair angle
with the sealant (Material No. 09−005).

(y) Apply interfay sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the contact sur

faces of the rib and filler with repair angle.
(z) Put the repair filler in its correct position on the repair dou

bler and wet install the fastener with sealant (Material No.
09−005). Refer to Chapter 51−42−21 for composite and to Chapter
51−42−11 for metallic structure.

NOTE: Determine Fasteners length on assembly.

(aa)Remove all unwanted sealant with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(ab)Apply adhesion promoter (Material No. 09−028C). Refer to Figure

205.

Page 236
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ac)Apply a bead of sealant (Material No. 09−002) between the flange

repair filler, rib web and repair angle. Let the sealants cure,
refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for cure time. Refer to
Figure 205.

(ad)Remove all unwanted sealant with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−003).

(ae)Apply varnish protection (Material No. 16−021). Refer to Figure

205.

(af)Restore the surface protection. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 PagesMay237/238
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Upper/Lower Rib Flange (Delamination with broken fibers,

cracks and abrasions). Zones 2, 3 and 4.
Figure 205 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 PagesMay239/240
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Spares of Damage to Upper/Lower Rib Flange.

Figure 205 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 PagesMay241/242
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 207.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: REPAIR ON FLANGE WITH ANCHOR NUT SHOWN. EQUIVALENT REPAIR ON

FLANGE WITH RIVETS.

F. Forward Flange Repair (Delamination, Cracks and Abrasions).

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data, and
Chapter 55−13−12, Page Block 101 for allowable damage limits and
zones definition.

NOTE: This repair is applicable to ribs 0, 1, 2, 5, 6, 7 and 8, where

damage has occurred to the rib flange. The typical damage which
may occur are as follows:
− Delamination with broken plies, holes and abrasions
− Cracks, Scratches.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 207
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information Table in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 243
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL
(1) Repair Materials
ITEM NOMENCLATURE
1 Repair Angle
− Liquid Shim
− Adhesive Paste
− Sealant
− Interfay Sealant
− Adhesion Promoter
− Varnish
− Epoxy−polyurethane Primer
− Polyurethane Coating
− Cleaning Agent
− Glass Fiber Fabric
− Laminating Resin
− Polyurethane Primer
− Chromic Acid Anodizing
(CAA)
(2) Repair Instructions, refer to Figure 206.
(a) Prepare the repair area, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph
4.M.(1).
Printed in Germany
QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS
1 Refer to Figure 206 for Pre−
cured Sheet type material data
and alternative materials.
− Material No. 08−051, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 08−078, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 09−028C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 16−021, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 16−040, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 20−034 or Material
No. 05−033, refer to Chapter
51−35−00. (Only for alternative
metallic Angle).
− Material No. 20−022 or Material
No. 20−032 or Material No.
20−028, refer to Chapter
51−35−00. (Only for alternative
metallic Angle).
− Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C
or Material No. 16−006B, refer
to Chapter 51−35−00. (Only for
alternative metallic Angle).
− Refer to Chapter 51−21−11. (Only
for alternative metallic Angle).
Page 244
55−13−12 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Blend out the damage and fill with resin (Material No. 08−078).
Let the resin cure, refer to Chapter 51−77−11 paragraph 6.B(1).
(c) Get the composite material to make the repair parts. Alternative

ly repair doubler can be metallic. Refer to Figure 206 for Pre−
cured Sheet type material data and alternative materials.

NOTE: CFRP Doubler is recommended.

(d) Make the repair angle to the necessary shape and dimension for
the repair. Refer to Figure 206.

(e) Mark the position of the fastener holes on the repair angle. Re

fer to Figure 206.

NOTE: The number of fasteners installed shall be according to the

damage size but ensuring one fasteners row minimum at the
rib web.

(f) Pilot−drill the marked fastener holes on the repair angle.

(g) Put the repair angle in its correct repair position and attach
to the rib.
(h) Transfer drill some pilot holes from the repair angle to the rib
web and attach with screw pins.

(i) Transfer drill the remaining pilot holes from the repair angle to
the rib web.
(j) Drill the forward flange holes in the repair angle to the cor

rect diameter for the fasteners.

NOTE: Oversize if necessary.

(k) Drill the remaining holes in the repair angle and rib web to the
correct diameter for the fasteners.
(l) Remove the repair angle from the rib web.

(m) Remove the sharp edges from the holes in the repair angle and
the rib web with an abrasive cone.

(n) Remove the unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

(o) Clean the repair parts and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003).

(p) If necessary, use a liquid shim (Material No. 08−051 or Material

No. 08−078) up to 0.5 mm (0.020 in) to get flat seat for the
installation.

(q) In case of alternative metallic doubler, apply CAA on the dou

bler, then primer (Material No. 16−001B or Material No. 16−001C

Page 245
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

or Material No. 16−006B) and followed by a top coat of polyure

thane finish paint (Material No. 16−018C). Finally install a
glass fiber fabric layer (Material No. 20−034 or Material No.
05−033) with laminating resin (Material No. 20−022 or Material
No. 20−032 or Material No. 20−028) on the CFRP face in contact
with the doubler and which must extend 12 mm (0.47 in) minimum
around the aluminium doubler in all directions.
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 51−21−11 for protective treatment applica

tion data, Chapter 51−23−00 for coatings application data
and Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.A for the material prepa

ration.

(r) Apply surface protection to the composite repair parts. Apply

epoxy−polyurethane primer (Material No. 16−040) plus polyurethane
coating (Material No. 16−018C). Refer to Chapter 51−21−00 and
Chapter 51−23−00.

(s) Apply interfay sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the contact sur

faces of the rib and repair angle.
(t) Put the repair angle in its correct position and attach with
screw pins.

(u) Remove the screw pins in turn and wet install the fastener with
sealant (Material No. 09−005). Refer to Chapter 51−42−21 for CFRP
and to Chapter 51−42−11 for metallic structure.
NOTE: Fasteners grip length to be determined on assembly.

(v) Remove all unwanted sealant with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(w) Apply adhesion promoter (Material No. 09−028C). Refer to Figure

206.

(x) Apply a bead of sealant (Material No. 09−002) between the rib
and repair angle. Let the sealants cure, refer to the manufac

turer’s instructions for cure time. Refer to Figure 206.

(y) Remove all unwanted sealant with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(z) Apply varnish protection (Material No. 16−021). Refer to Figure

206.

(aa)Restore the surface protection. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 246
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Forward Flange Repair (Delamination, Cracks and Abrasions).

Figure 206 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 PagesMay247/248
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Spares of Forward Flange Damage.

Figure 206 (sheet 2)

Page 249
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 May 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 208.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: REPAIR ON FLANGE WITH ANCHOR NUT SHOWN. EQUIVALENT REPAIR ON

FLANGE WITH RIVETS.

G. Delamination without broken fibers. Zones 01, 02, 03 and 04 (except for
ward flange).

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data, and
Chapter 55−13−12, Page Block 101 for allowable damage limits and
zones definition.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 208
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information Table in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to

Chapter 51−35−00.
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
(2) Repair Instructions, refer to figure 207.

(a) Determine the damage extension on the skin.

NOTE: Remove system supports when it is necessary and install
again after repair.

Page 250
Printed in Germany
55−13−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Mark the position of the fastener holes in the repair area.

NOTE: Install screw clamps as close as possible to marked fasten

er holes. The clamps must prevent more delamination of
plies when drilling.

NOTE: The number of fasteners installed shall be according to the

damage size but ensuring one fasteners row minimum beyond
the delamination area.
(c) Pilot−drill the marked fastener holes in the repair area.

(d) Drill all the holes in the repair area to the correct diameter
for the fasteners.

(e) Remove sharp edges from the pilot holes with an abrasive cone.
(f) Countersink the necessary fastener positions on the flange areas.

(g) Remove the unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

(h) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
(i) Wet install the correct fasteners with sealant (Material No.
09−005).

NOTE: Fasteners grip length to be determined on assembly.

(j) Remove all unwanted sealant with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003)

(k) Let the sealant cure. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions

for the cure times.

(l) Restore the surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 PagesNov251/252
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Delamination without broken fibers. Zones 01, 02, 03 and 04 (except forward
flange).
Figure 207

Printed in Germany
55−13−12 PagesMay253/254
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TRIMMABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TIPS

1. Structural Arrangement

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Structural Arrangement Figure 1

1 Tips − Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer Chapter 55−14−11
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−10−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−14−00 FebPage 1
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structural Arrangement
Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−14−00 FebPage 2
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TRIMMABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TIPS − ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 101.

1. General
NOTE: For definition of allowable damage refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For Damage Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14

− CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

This topic contains the allowable damage and related data applicable to the
Horizontal Stabilizer Tip (refer to Figure 101). This data is necessary to
find the correct repair procedure.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 101
NOTE: Refer to the paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about
all weight variants as well as related information concerning allow
able damage and repair applicability.

2. Damage Evaluation

Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−11−00, paragraph 2 for data related to the metallic
structure.
3. Types of Damage

The main types of damage which can occur to the Horizontal Stabilizer Tip
are nicks, abrasions, gouges, cracks, corrosions, holes, scratches and
dents. Refer to Chapter 51−11−00, Table 1 for full definition of the types
of damage that can occur to the metallic structure.
4. Repair Zones

Each of the components of the Horizontal Stabilizer Tip structure, is di

vided into repair zones. These repair zones show the zones of different re
pair applicability of the component. When you do a damage evaluation (refer

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−14−00 Feb 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

to paragraph 2.), you must refer to the repair zone data. The repair zone
data of the Horizontal Stabilizer Tip structure is in Figure 102.
5. Allowable Damage Description/Criteria

INSPECTION
PARAGRAPH/FIG
REPAIR CATE

DESCRIPTION CRITERIA/TYPE INSTRUCTION
URE GORY
REFERENCE
Skin Superficial 6./103 A, C −
Damage (Nicks,
Gouges, Abra

sions and Cor

rosion)
Skin Linear Damage 6./103 A, C −
(Scratches and
Cracks)
Skin Dents 6./104 A, C −
Ribs Superficial 6./103 A, C −
Damages
(Nicks,
Gouges, Abra

sions and Cor

rosion)
Ribs Linear Damage 6./103 A, C −
(Scratches)

Table 102
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

6. Allowable Damage
Allowable damage is damage that does not affect the strength and function
required of the structural component. It does not have to be repaired with
structural considerations. This type of damage does not grow during the
aircraft life; the inspection procedures, intervals, and threshold are not
affected. If this damage has rough or sharp edges, smooth these out with
the correct abrasive cloth. Replace the surface paint if necessary. The al

lowable damage must be assessed after the damaged material has been removed
and the damaged area smoothed. The allowable damage data for the Horizontal
Stabilizer Tip is in Figure 103, Figure 104 and Table 103.

7. Repair Limits

The repair limits data gives the time limits within which a structural re

pair must be carried out. The repair time limits for the Horizontal Stabi

lizer Tip, are in Figures 103 and 104.

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−14−00 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Horizontal Stabilizer − Tip Structure

Figure 101

Page 103
Printed in Germany
55−14−00 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

REFER TO DAMAGE CRITERIA TABLE 104

LINEAR DAM SUPERFICIAL
ITEM NAME AGES DAMAGES
DENTS
(SCRATCHES, (MARKS AND
CRACKS) CORROSION)
1 Skin (Zones 01 and 02) A A B
2 Ribs A<1> A C
1 Skin (Zone 03) D D D

Table 103
<1> Cracks for Ribs are not permitted.

DAMAGE
DESCRIPTION
CODE
A Linear and superficial damages (nicks, gouges, abrasions, corrosions,
scratches and cracks); refer to Figure 103 for limit definition.
B <1> <2> <3>
C Not permitted.
D Nicks, gouges and dents <4>
Damage Criteria
Table 104
<1> Dents Maximum area: area between supports.

<2> Maximum Depth (D): 10% of the shortest distance between the middle of
the dent and the nearest support (D≤10%A).

<3> Exceeding 10% but less than 20% of the shortest distance between the
middle of the dent and the nearest support (10%A≤D≤20%A), without
crack in the skin and without damages in internal structure, must be
repaired before or at next C−check or 4500 FC whichever occurs first,
refer to Figure 104.

<4> Skin damage with an area smaller than 10000 mm (15.50 in) and length
smaller than 250 mm (9.84 in). Refer to Chapter 55−14−11201 for repair
information.

If the damage is greater than the maximum permitted, contact AIRBUS.

Page 104
Printed in Germany
55−14−00 Feb 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Horizontal Stabilizer Tip, Repair Zones.

Figure 102

Page 105
Printed in Germany
55−14−00 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage Horizontal Stabilizer Tip (Zones 01 and 02).

Figure 103

Page 106
Printed in Germany
55−14−00 Feb 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Dents Horizontal Stabilizer Tip (Zones 01 and 02).

Figure 104

Printed in Germany
55−14−00 PagesFeb107/108
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TIPS − TRIMABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER

1. Identification Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Tips − Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer Figure 1

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−10−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−14−11 Pages 1/2
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Tips − Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer

Figure 1 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−14−11 Pages 3/4
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Tips − Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer

Figure 1 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−14−11 Pages 5/6
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Tip, Assy D55183130000

001
1A Tip, Assy D55183130004 A26360G0309
005
1B Tip, Assy D55183130014 A33060G0400
015
5 Skin 3.3214T42 D55183130200 55−14−00
LN9073 201 PB 201
0.8(0.031)
5A Skin 3.3214T42 D55183130222 55−14−00 A22959G0154
LN9073 223 PB 201 ASB55−1011
0.8(0.031)
5B Skin 3.3214T42 D55183130322 A33060G0400
LN9073 323
1.2(0.048)
10 Skin 3.3214T42 D55183130202 55−14−00
LN9073 203 PB 201
0.8(0.031)
10A Skin 3.3214T42 D55183130224 55−14−00 A22959G0154
LN9073 225 PB 201 ASB55−1011
0.8(0.031)
10B Skin 3.3214T42 D55183130324 A33060G0400
LN9073 325
1.2(0.048)
15 Skin 3.3214T42 D55183130204 55−14−00
LN9073 205 PB 201
0.8(0.031)
15A Skin 3.3214T42 D55183130304 A33060G0400
LN9073 305
1.2(0.048)
20 Rib 3.1364T3 D55183130214 55−14−00
LN9073 215 PB 201
1.0(0.039)
20A Rib 3.1364T3 D55183130244 55−14−00 A30940G0376
LN9073 245 PB 201
1.0(0.039)
20B Rib 3.1364T3 D55183130344 A33060G0400
LN9073 345
1.0(0.039)
ASSY Dwg.: D55183000, D55183130

Key to Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−14−11 MayPage 7
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

25 Rib 3.1363T3 D55183130212 55−14−00

LN9073 213 PB 201
1.0(0.039)
25A Rib 3.1364T3 D55183130246 55−14−00 A30940G0376
LN9073 247 PB 201
1.0(0.039)
25B Rib 3.1364T3 D55183130346 A33060G0400
LN9073 347
1.0(0.039)
30 Rib 3.1363T3 D55183130210 55−14−00
LN9073 211 PB 201
1.0(0.039)
30A Rib 3.1363T3 D55183130242 55−14−00 A30940G0376
LN9073 243 PB 201
1.0(0.039)
30B Rib 3.1363T3 D55183130342 A33060G0400
LN9073 343
1.0(0.039)
35 Strap 3.1364T3 D55183130208
LN9073 209
1.6(0.063)
35A Strap 3.1364T3 D55183130230 A22959G0154
LN9073 231 ASB55−1011
1.6(0.063)
35B Strap 3.1364T3 D55183130330 A33060G0400
LN9073 331
1.2(0.048)
40 Strap 3.1364T3 D55183130220
LN9073 221
1.6(0.063)
40A Strap 3.1364T3 D55183130228 A22959G0154
LN9073 229 ASB55−1011
1.6(0.063)
40B Strap 3.1364T3 D55183130328 A33060G0400
LN9073 329
1.2(0.048)
45 Strap 3.1364T3 D55183130216
LN9073 217
2.5(0.098)
ASSY Dwg.: D55183130

Key to Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−14−11 MayPage 8
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

45A Strap 3.1364T3 D55183130316 A33060G0400

LN9073 317
2.0(0.079)
50 Strap 3.1364T3 D55183130218
LN9073 219
1.6(0.063)
50A Strap 3.1364T3 D55183130226 A22959G0154
LN9073 227 ASB55−1011
1.6(0.063)
50B Strap 3.1364T3 D55183130238 A26360G0309
LN9073 239
1.6(0.063)
50C Strap 3.1364T3 D55183130338 A33060G0400
LN9073 339
1.2(0.048)
55 Rib 3.1364T3 D55183130234 55−14−00 A22959G0154
LN9073 235 PB 201 ASB55−1011
1.0(0.039)
55A Rib 3.1364T3 D55183130248 55−14−00 A30940G0376
LN9073 249 PB 201
1,0(0.039)
55B Rib 3.1364T3 D55183130348 A33060G0400
LN9073 349
1.0(0.039)
60 Rib 3.1364T3 D55183130240 55−14−00 A26360G0309
LN9073 241 PB 201
1.0(0.039)
60A Rib 3.1364T3 D55183130250 55−14−00 A30940G0376
LN9073 251 PB 201
1.0(0.039)
60B Rib 3.1364T3 D55183130350 A33060G0400
LN9073 351
1.0(0.039)
ASSY Dwg.: D55183130

Key to Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−14−11 Pages 9/10
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TRIMMABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER, TIP REPAIR

1. General

NOTE: For Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14

− CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

This topic contains all of the specific repair procedures for the Trimmable
Horizontal Stabilizer Tip. The repair zones and allowable damage data for
these repair procedures are in Chapter 55−14−00, Page Block 101.

2. Safety Precautions
There are risks to you and other persons when you work with composite re

pair materials. To prevent risks, read and obey the warnings given below.

WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.
WARNING: OBEY THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS WHEN YOU USE CLEANING AGENTS,
ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND PAINTS. THESE MATERIALS ARE DANGEROUS.

WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRIC POWER ON
THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST ONLY USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER TO PARA

GRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT REPAIR.

3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER REMARKS

No General Repairs applicable. − −

Table 201
4. Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs.

INSPECTION
REPAIR
SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE INSTRUCTION
CATEGORY
REFERENCE
Outer Patch Repair THS 5.A. 201 A −
Tip, Zone 01.
Flush Repair THS Tip, 5.B. 202 A −
Zone 01.

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−14−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

INSPECTION
REPAIR
SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE INSTRUCTION
CATEGORY
REFERENCE
Tip Rib/Spar Repair, Zone 5.C. 203 A −
02.
Tip Rib/Spar Repair 5.D. 204 A −
(Leading Edge), Zone 02
Cosmetic Tip Repair by 5.E. 205 A −
Welding
Skin Area Repair − THS 5.F. 206 A −
Tip, Zone 03

Table 202
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

5. THS, Tip Repairs

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 203.
A. Outer Patch Repair Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer Tip, Zone 01.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged area, you must do a damage evalua

tion. Refer to Chapter 51−11−00 for data, and Chapter 55−14−00,
Page Block 101 for allowable damage.
NOTE: This repair procedure is applicable to the skin in Zone 01 only.
Refer to Chapter 55−14−00, Page Block 101 for repair zones defini

tion.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 203
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−14−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Doubler 1 Refer to Figure 201

− Cleaning Agent
− Sealant
− Chemical Conversion Coating
− Polyurethane Primer
− Polyurethane Top Coat
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 201).
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 13−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−75−11.

(b) Cut out the damaged skin on the repair area. Refer to Figure
201.

(c) Smooth the edges of the cut out and radius the corners.

(d) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(e) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(f) Get correct material to make the metal repair doubler.

(g) Make the repair doubler to the size and shape of the repair
area. Refer to Figure 201.

(h) Radius the corners of the repair doubler and chamfer the edges.

(i) Mark the position of the new fastener holes on the repair dou

bler. Refer to Figure 201.
(j) Pilot−drill the marked fastener holes on the repair doubler.

(k) Place the repair doubler into its correct repair position on the
repair area and secure.

(l) Pilot−drill through the pre−drilled holes in the repair doubler

and trough the skin structure.
(m) Secure the repair doubler with screw pins.

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−14−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(n) Drill the holes full size for the fasteners. Refer to Figure
201.
(o) Remove the screw pins and drill the holes full size for the fas

teners. On completion, remove the repair doubler from the repair
area.

(p) Countersink the fastener holes on the outer surface of the repair
doubler 100°.
(q) Remove any sharp edges with an abrasive cone.

(r) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(s) Cleaning the repair area and repair doubler with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003).

(t) Apply the surface protection to the repairs parts:

WARNING: CHROMIC ACID ANODIZING IS POISONOUS. OBEY THE MANUFAC

TURERS INSTRUCTIONS.
1 Apply chromic acid anodizing to the repair doubler. Refer to
PMS 01−02−08.

Alternatively chemical conversion coating (Material No. 13−002)

can be used.

WARNING: POLYURETHANE PRIMER (MATERIAL NO. 16−001B OR 16−001C) IS

DANGEROUS.

2 Apply a coat of polyurethane primer (Material No. 16−001B or

16−001C) followed by a polyurethane top coat (Material No.
16−018C) to the repair parts.

(u) Apply the correct surface protection to the edges of the skin
cut out (Material No. 13−002).

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(v) Apply a coating of the sealant (Material 09−005) to the surface

of the doubler which will be contact with the tip structure. Re

fer to Figure 201.

(w) Place the repair doubler into its repair position and secure with
screw pins.

(x) Coat the fasteners with the sealant (Material No. 09−005) and
install the fasteners in the fastener holes.
(y) Remove the screw pins and install the fasteners in the screw pin
holes.

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−14−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(z) Remove any unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

(aa)Protect the repair area to prevent contamination ingress.

(ab)Cure the installed repair materials.

NOTE: Refer to the manufacturers instructions for cure time.

(ac) On completion of the cure cycle, remove the protection from the
repair area.

(ad) Repair the surface protection. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Printed in Germany
55−14−11 PagesFeb205/206
01/13
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Outer Patch Repair, Zone 01

Figure 201

Printed in Germany
55−14−11 PagesFeb207/208
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 204.
B. Flush Repair Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer, Tip Zone 01.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged area, you must do a damage evalua

tion. Refer to Chapter 51−11−00 for data, and Chapter 55−14−00,
Page Block 101 for allowable damage.

NOTE: This repair procedure is applicable to the skin in Zone 01 only.

Refer to Chapter 55−14−00, Page Block 101 for repair zones defini

tion.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 204
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Doubler 1 Refer to Figure 202
2 Repair Filler 1 Refer to Figure 202
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Chemical Conversion Coating − Material No. 13−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane Primer − Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane Top Coat − Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 202).
(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−75−11.

(b) Cut out the damaged skin on the repair area. Refer to Figure
202.

Page 209
Printed in Germany
55−14−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(c) Smooth the edges of the cut out and radius the corners.

(d) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(e) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(f) Get correct material to make the metal repair doubler.

(g) Make the repair doubler and the filler piece for the size and
shape of the repair area. Refer to Figure 202.

NOTE: Make the filler piece 1.00 mm (0.039 in) smaller than the
skin cut out dimension. Refer to Figure 202.

(h) Radius the corners of the repair doubler and chamfer the edges.
(i) Mark the position of the new fastener holes on the repair dou

bler. Refer to Figure 202.

(j) Pilot drill the marked fastener holes.

(k) Place the repair doubler into its correct repair position on the
repair area and secure.

(l) Pilot drill through the pre−drilled holes in the repair doubler
and through the skin structure.

(m) Secure the repair doubler with screw pins.

(n) Place the filler piece into its correct repair position on the
repair area.

NOTE: Make certain there is a 1.00 mm (0.039 in) gap between the
outer edges of the filler piece and the skin cut out. Re

fer to Figure 202.
(o) Mark the position of the new fastener holes on the filler.

(p) Remove the filler piece from the repair area and pilot drill the
marked fastener holes.

(q) Place the repair filler into its correct repair position on the
repair area and secure with screw pins.

(r) Pilot drill through the pre−drilled holes in the repair filler
and through the repair doubler.

(s) Drill all the holes full size for the fasteners. Refer to Figure
202.

Page 210
Printed in Germany
55−14−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(t) Remove the screw pins, drill the screw pin holes full size for
the fasteners. On completion, remove the repair filler and repair
doubler from the repair area.

(u) Remove any sharp edges with an abrasive cone.

(v) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003 IS DANGEROUS.

(w) Clean the repair area, repair doubler and filler piece with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(x) Apply the surface protection to the repairs parts:

WARNING: CHROMIC ACID ANODIZING IS POISONOUS. OBEY THE MANUFAC

TURERS INSTRUCTIONS.
1 Apply chromic acid anodizing to the repair doubler, and filler.
Refer to PMS 01−02−08.

Alternatively chemical conversion coating (Material No. 13−002)

can be used.
WARNING: POLYURETHANE PRIMER (MATERIAL NO. 16−001B OR 16−001C) IS
DANGEROUS.

2 Apply a coat of polyurethane primer (Material No. 16−001B or

16−001C) followed by a polyurethane top coat (Material No.
16−018C) to the repair parts.
(y) Apply the correct surface protection to the edges of the skin
cut out (Material No. 13−002).

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(z) Apply a coating of the sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the sur

face of the repair doubler and filler piece.
(aa)Place the repair doubler and filler piece into their correct re

pair positions on the repair area and secure with screw pins.

(ab)Apply a fillet of sealant (Material No. 09−005) between the

filler piece and the inside edge of the cut out area. Refer to
Figure 202.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(ac)Remove any unwanted sealant with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(ad)Protect the repair area to prevent contamination ingress.

Page 211
Printed in Germany
55−14−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ae)Cure the installed repair materials.

NOTE: Refer to manufacturer instructions for cure times.

(af)On completion of the cure cycle, remove the protection from the
repair area.

(ag)Coat the fasteners with the sealant (Material No. 09−005) and
install the fasteners in the fastener holes.
(ah)Remove the screw pins and install the fasteners in the screw pin
holes.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(ai)Remove any unwanted sealant with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
(aj)Cure the installed repair material.

NOTE: Refer to manufacturer instructions for cure times.

(ak) On completion of the cure cycle, remove the protection from the
repair area.
(al)Repair the surface protection. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 212
Printed in Germany
55−14−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Flush Repair Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer Tip, Zone 01

Figure 202

Printed in Germany
55−14−11 PagesFeb213/214
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 205.
C. Tip Rib/Spar Repair, Zone 02.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged area, you must do a damage evalua

tion. Refer to Chapter 51−11−00 for data, and Chapter 55−14−00,
Page Block 101 for allowable damage.

NOTE: If the damage affects a reinforcement hole, you must replace the
rib.

NOTE: This repair procedure is only applicable to Zone 02.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 205
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Doubler 1 Refer to Figure 203

2 Repair Filler 1 Refer to Figure 203
3 Repair Angle 1 Refer to Figure 203
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Chemical Conversion Coating − Material No. 13−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane Primer − Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane Top Coat − Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instruction (refer to Figure 203).
(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−75−11.

Page 215
Printed in Germany
55−14−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Cut out the damaged skin and rib on the repair area. Refer to
Figure 203.
(c) Smooth the edges of the cut out and radius the corners.

(d) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(e) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(f) Get correct material to make the metal repair doubler.

(g) Make the repair doubler to the size and shape of the repair
area. Refer to Figure 203.
(h) Make the repair filler to the size and shape of the rib cut out
area. Refer to Figure 203.

NOTE: Make the filler piece 1.00 mm (0.040 in) smaller than the
rib cut out dimension. Refer to Figure 203.

(i) Make the repair angle to the size and shape of the repair. Refer
to Figure 203.

NOTE: The repair angle shape will depend on the extend of the
damage.

(j) Remove the existing fasteners from the repair area. Refer to
Figure 203.
(k) Mark the position of the new fastener holes on the repair angle
and doubler.

(l) Pilot drill the marked fastener holes.

(m) Place the repair angle into its correct repair position on the
repair area and secure.

(n) Pilot drill through the pre−drilled holes in the repair angle and
through the rib structure.

(o) Secure the repair angle with screw pins.

(p) Transfer drill through the existing fastener holes and through
the repair angle. Refer to Figure 203.

(q) Place the repair filler into its correct repair position on the
repair area and secure.
NOTE: Make sure that there is a 1.00 mm (0.040 in) gap between
the outer edges of the repair filler and the skin cut out.
Refer to Figure 203.

Page 216
Printed in Germany
55−14−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(r) Mark the position of the new fastener holes in the repair filler
through the existing fastener holes in the repair angle.
(s) Remove the repair filler from the repair area, pilot drill the
marked fastener hole positions.

(t) Replace the repair filler on the repair area, place the repair
doubler into its correct repair position on the repair area and
secure.
(u) Pilot drill through the pre−drilled holes in the repair doubler
and through the skin structure.

(v) Secure the repair doubler with screw pins, transfer drill through
the pre−drilled holes in the repair angle, repair filler and
through the repair doubler.

(w) Drill all the holes full size for the fasteners. Refer to Figure
203.

(x) Remove the screw pins and drill the holes full size for the fas

teners. On completion, remove the repair materials from the re

pair area.

(y) Remove any sharp edge with an abrasive cone.

(z) Countersink the fastener holes on the outer surface of the repair
doubler 100°.
(aa)Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(ab)Clean the repair area and repair materials with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003).
(ac)Apply the surface protection to the repairs parts:

WARNING: CHROMIC ACID ANODIZING IS POISONOUS. OBEY THE MANUFAC

TURERS INSTRUCTIONS.

1 Apply chromic acid anodizing to the repair doubler, filler and

angle. Refer to PMS 01−02−08.
Alternatively chemical conversion coating (Material No. 13−002)
can be used.

WARNING: POLYURETHANE PRIMER (MATERIAL NO. 16−001B OR 16−001C) IS

DANGEROUS.

2 Apply a coat of polyurethane primer (Material No. 16−001B or

16−001C) followed by a polyurethane top coat (Material No.
16−018C) to the repair parts.

Page 217
Printed in Germany
55−14−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ad)Apply the correct surface protection to the edges of the cut out
(Material No.13−002).
WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(ae)Apply a coating of the sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the re

pair angle and place repair angle into its correct repair posi

tion on the repair area. Secure the repair angle with screw
pins.
(af)Apply a coating of the sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the re

pair filler and place the repair filler into its correct repair
position on the repair angle. Secure the repair filler with screw
pins.

(ag)Coat the fasteners with the sealant (Material No. 09−005) and
install the fasteners in the repair angle. Refer to Figure 203.

(ah)Remove the screw pins and install the fasteners in the screw pin
holes.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(ai)Remove any unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

(aj)Protect the repair area to prevent contamination ingress.

(ak)Cure the installed repair materials.

NOTE: Refer to the manufacturer instructions for cure times.

(al)On completion of the cure cycle, remove the protection from the
repair area.

(am)Remove the screw pins from the repair filler.

(an)Apply a coating of the sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the sur

face of the repair doubler which will be in contact with the
structure. Refer to Figure 203.

(ao)Apply a coating of the sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the up

per surface of the repair filler. Apply a fillet of the sealant
to the outer edge of the repair filler. Refer to Figure 203.

(ap)Place the repair doubler into its correct repair position on the
repair area and secure with screw pins.

(aq)Coat the fasteners with the sealant (Material No. 09−005) and
install the fasteners in the fasteners holes. Refer to Figure
203.

(ar)Remove the screw pins and install the fasteners in the screw
pins holes.

Page 218
Printed in Germany
55−14−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(as)Remove any unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

(at)Protect the repair area to prevent contamination ingress.

(au)Cure the installed repair materials.

NOTE: Refer to manufacturer instructions for cure times.

(av)On completion of the cure cycle, remove the protection from the
repair area.

(aw)Repair the surface protection. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Printed in Germany
55−14−11 PagesFeb219/220
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Tip Rib/Spar Repair, Zone 02

Figure 203

Printed in Germany
55−14−11 PagesFeb221/222
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 206.
D. Tip Rib/Spar Repair (Leading Edge), Zone 02.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged area, you must do a damage evalua

tion. Refer to Chapter 51−11−00 for data, and Chapter 55−14−00,
Page Block 101 for allowable damage.

NOTE: If the damage affects a reinforcement hole, you must replace the
rib.

NOTE: This repair procedure is applicable to the Leading Edge, Zone 02

only. Refer to Chapter 55−14−00, Page Block 101 for repair zones
definition.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 206
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Doubler 1 Refer to Figure 204

2 Repair Filler
3 Repair Angle
− Cleaning Agent
− Sealant
− Chemical Conversion Coating
− Polyurethane Primer
− Polyurethane Top Coat
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 204).
1 Refer to Figure 204
1 Refer to Figure 204
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 13−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

Page 223
Printed in Germany
55−14−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−75−11, paragraph 3.
(b) Cut out the damaged skin and rib on the repair area. Refer to
Figure 204.

(c) Smooth the edges of the cut out and radius the corners.

(d) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(e) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(f) Get correct material to make the metal repair doubler.

(g) Make the repair doubler to the size and shape of the repair
area. Refer to Figure 204.

(h) Make the repair filler to the size and shape of the rib cut out
area. Refer to Figure 204.

NOTE: Make the filler piece 1.00 mm (0.040 in) smaller than the
rib cut out dimension. Refer to Figure 204.

(i) Make the repair angle to the size and shape of the repair. Refer
to Figure 204.

NOTE: The profile shape will depend on the extend of the damage.
(j) Remove the existing fasteners from the repair area. Refer to
Figure 204.

(k) Mark the position of the new fastener holes on the repair angle
and repair doubler.

(l) Pilot drill the marked fastener holes.

(m) Place the repair angle into its correct repair position on the
repair area and secure.

(n) Pilot drill through the pre−drilled holes in the repair angle and
through the rib structure.
(o) Secure the repair angle with screw pins.

(p) Transfer drill through the existing fastener holes and through
the repair angle. Refer to Figure 204.

Page 224
Printed in Germany
55−14−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(q) Place the repair filler into its correct repair position on the
repair area and secure.
NOTE: Make sure that there is a 1.00 mm (0.040 in) gap between
the rear face of the filler piece and the skin cut out.
Refer to Figure 204.

(r) Mark the position of the new fastener holes in the repair filler
through the existing pilot holes in the repair angle.
(s) Remove the repair filler from the repair area, pilot drill the
marked fastener hole positions.

(t) Replace the repair filler on the repair area, place the repair
doubler into its correct repair position on the repair area and
secure.
(u) Pilot drill through the pre−drilled holes in the repair doubler
and through the skin structure.

(v) Secure the repair doubler with screw pins transfer drill through
the pre−drilled pilot holes in the repair angle, repair filler
and through the repair doubler.

(w) Drill all the holes full size for the fasteners. Refer to Figure
204.

(x) Remove the screw pins and drill the holes full size for the
fasteners. On completion, remove the repair materials from the
repair area.

(y) Remove any sharp edge with an abrasive cone.

(z) Countersink the fastener holes on the outer surface of the repair
doubler 100°.
(aa)Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(ab)Apply the surface protection to the repairs parts:

WARNING: CHROMIC ACID ANODIZING IS POISONOUS. OBEY THE

MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS.
1 Apply chromic acid anodizing to the repair doubler, filler and
angle. Refer to PMS 01−02−08.

Alternatively chemical conversion coating (Material No. 13−002)

can be used.

WARNING: POLYURETHANE PRIMER (MATERIAL NO. 16−001B OR 16−001C) IS

DANGEROUS.

2 Apply a coat of polyurethane primer (Material No. 16−001B or

16−001C) followed by a polyurethane top coat (Material No.
16−018C) to the repair parts.

Page 225
Printed in Germany
55−14−11 Nov 01/09
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ac)Apply the correct surface protection to the edges of the cut out
(Material No.13−002).
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(ad)Clean the repair area and repair pieces with the cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(ae)Apply a coating of the sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the re

pair angle and place repair angle into its correct repair posi

tion on the repair area. Secure the repair angle with screw
pins.

(af)Apply a coating of the sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the re

pair filler and place the repair filler into its correct repair
position on the repair angle. Secure the repair filler with screw
pins.

(ag)Coat the fasteners with the sealant (Material No. 09−005) and
install the fasteners in the repair angle. Refer to Figure 204.
(ah)Remove the screw pins and install the fasteners in the screw pin
holes.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(ai)Remove any unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (Material No. 11−003).
(aj) Protect the repair area to prevent contamination ingress.

(ak) Cure the installed repair materials.

NOTE: Refer to the manufacturer instructions for cure times.

(al)On completion of the cure cycle, remove the protection from the
repair area.

(am)Remove the screw pins from the repair filler.

(an)Apply a coating of the sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the sur

faces of the repair doubler which will be in contact with the
Tip structure. Refer to Figure 204.

(ao)Apply a coating of the sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the up

per surface of the repair filler. Refer to Figure 204.

(ap)Place the repair doubler into its correct repair position on the
repair area and secure with screw pins.
(aq)Coat the fasteners with the sealant (Material No. 09−005) and
install the fasteners in the fasteners holes. Refer to Figure
204.

Page 226
Printed in Germany
55−14−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ar)Remove the screw pins and install the fasteners in the screw
pins holes.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(as)Remove any unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

(at)Protect the repair area to prevent contamination ingress.

(au)Cure the installed repair materials.

NOTE: Refer to manufacturer instructions for cure times.

(av)On completion of the cure cycle, remove the protection from the
repair area.

(aw)Repair the surface protection. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Printed in Germany
55−14−11 PagesFeb227/228
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Tip Rib/Spar Repair (Leading Edge), Zone 02.

Figure 204

Printed in Germany
55−14−11 PagesFeb229/230
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 207.
E. Cosmetic Tip repair by welding.

NOTE: The following repair is valid for damage in all THS Tip surface
except in fastener areas.

NOTE: Before you repair the damage area you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−11−00.
NOTE: For repairable zone definition, refer to Figure 205.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 207
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.
(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Filler material
− Cleaning Agent
− Chemical Conversion Coating
− Polyurethane Primer
− Polyurethane Top Coat
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 205).
− Material 3.2245.20, (4043 alumi

num alloy welding filler)
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 13−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Remove the Tip from the THS.

(b) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−75−11.

(c) Blend out the damage area to eliminate scratches and burrs.

Page 231
Printed in Germany
55−14−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(d) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(e) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(f) Get the correct welding filler Material 3.2245.20, (4043 aluminum
alloy welding filler).
WARNING: OBEY THE MANUFACTURER’S SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS WHEN USING THE
WELDING EQUIPMENT.

CAUTION: IN ORDER TO AVOID TIP DEFORMATIONS DO NOT APPLY HEAT IN

EXCESS.

(g) Fill the damage area with Material 3.2245.20,(4043 aluminum alloy
welding filler). Refer to PMS 01−04−20 for welding procedure
data.

(h) Abrade the welded surface to restore the original contour.

(i) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(j) Clean the welded area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(k) Apply the correct surface protection to the repair area: chemical
conversion coating (Material No. 13−002).

(l) Restore the surface protection. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 232
Printed in Germany
55−14−11 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Cosmetic Tip Repair by Welding

Figure 205

Page 233
Printed in Germany
55−14−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 208.
F. Skin Area Repair − THS Tip, Zone 03.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged area, you must do a damage evalua
tion. Refer to Chapter 51−11−00 for data, and Chapter 55−14−00,
Page Block 101 for allowable damage.

NOTE: This repair procedure is applicable to the skin in Zone 03 only.

Refer to Chapter 55−14−00, Page Block 101 for repair zones defini
tion.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 208
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Doubler 1 Refer to Figure 206
2 Repair Filler 1 Refer to Figure 206
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Chemical Conversion Coating − Material No. 13−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane Primer − Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane Top Coat − Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 206).
(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−75−11.

(b) Cut out the damaged skin on the repair area. Refer to Figure
206.

Page 234
Printed in Germany
55−14−11 Feb 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(c) Smooth the edges of the cut out and radius the corners.

(d) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(e) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(f) Get correct material to make the metal repair doubler.

(g) Make the repair doubler to the size and shape of the repair
area. Refer to Figure 206.

(h) Radius the corners of the repair doubler and chamfer the edges.

(i) Mark the position of the new fastener holes on the repair dou
bler. Refer to Figure 206.
(j) Pilot−drill the marked fastener holes on the repair doubler.

(k) Place the repair doubler into its correct repair position on the
repair area and secure.

(l) Mark the drain holes on doubler when are covered by the repair
doubler.
(m) Pilot−drill through the pre−drilled holes in the repair doubler
and trough the skin structure.

(n) Secure the repair doubler with screw pins.

(o) Drill the holes full size for the fasteners. Refer to Figure
206.

(p) Remove the screw pins and drill the holes full size for the fas
teners. On completion, remove the repair doubler from the repair
area.
(q) Remove any sharp edges with an abrasive cone.

(r) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(s) Countersink the fastener holes on the outer surface of the repair
doubler 100°.
(t) Drill drain holes full size.

(u) Cleaning the repair area and repair doubler with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003).

(v) Apply the surface protection to the repairs parts:

1 Apply chromic acid anodizing to the repair doubler. Refer to
PMS 01−02−08.

Page 235
Printed in Germany
55−14−11 Feb 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Alternatively chemical conversion coating (Material No. 13−002)

can be used.
2 Apply a coat of polyurethane primer (Material No. 16−001B or
16−001C) followed by a polyurethane top coat (Material No.
16−018C) to the repair parts.

(w) Apply the correct surface protection to the edges of the skin
cut out (Material No. 13−002).
(x) Apply a coating of the sealant (Material 09−005) to the surface
of the doubler which will be contact with the tip structure. Re
fer to Figure 206.

(y) Place the repair doubler into its repair position and secure with
screw pins.

(z) Coat the fasteners with the sealant (Material No. 09−005) and
install the fasteners in the fastener holes.

(aa)Remove the screw pins and install the fasteners in the screw pin
holes.
(ab)Remove any unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

(ac)Protect the repair area to prevent contamination ingress.

(ad)Cure the installed repair materials.

NOTE: Refer to the manufacturers instructions for cure time.

(ae)On completion of the cure cycle, remove the protection from the
repair area.

(af)Repair the surface protection. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 236
Printed in Germany
55−14−11 Feb 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Area Repair − THS Tip, Zone 03.

Figure 206

Printed in Germany
55−14−11 PagesFeb237/238
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TRIMMABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER - APRON

1. Structural Arrangement

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

- Apron - Structural Arrangement Figure 1
1 Apron - Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer 55-15-11
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55-10-00, Page Block 001, where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55-15-00 MayPage 1
01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Apron - Structural Arrangement

Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55-15-00 MayPage 2
01/05
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

APRON
−
TRIMMABLE
HORIZONTAL
STABILIZER

1. Identification
Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Apron
−
Trimmable
Horizontal
Stabilizer Figure
1
NOTE: Refer
to
Chapter
55−10−00,
Page
Block
001,
where
you
can
find
the
Modification/Service
Bulletin
List.

Page
1




55−15−11 Nov
01/05
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Apron - Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer

Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55-15-11 FebPage 2
01/02
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS
IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.)
AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION
CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

1 Apron,
upper Composite D55170001000

001
1A Apron,
upper Composite D55170021000 A20451K0340
001
1B Apron,
upper Composite D55170021002 A20365K0367B
003
1C Apron,
upper Composite D55170017000 A22849K2716
001
5 Apron,
lower Composite D55170002000
001
5A Apron,
lower Composite D55170031000 A20451K0340
001
5B Apron,
lower Composite D55170031002 A20365K0367B
003
5C Apron,
Lower Composite D55170018000 A22849K2716
001
10 Strip,
sealing D55170005200
upper 201
15 Strip,
sealing D55170008200
lower 201
20 Strip,
cover
up Composite D55170006000
per 001
20A Strip,
cover
up Composite D55170022000 A20451K0340C
per 001
20B Strip,
cover
up Composite D55170013000 A22849K2716
per 001
25 Strip,
cover
low Composite D55170009000
er 001
25A Strip,
cover
low Composite D55170032000 A20451K0340C
er 001
25B Strip,
cover
low Composite D55170014000 A22849K2716
er 001
30 Retainer,
upper Composite D55170003000
001
30A Retainer,
upper Composite D55170023000 A20451K0340
001
30B Retainer,
upper Composite D55170011000 A20365K1347A
001
ASSY
Dwg.: D55170000,
D55170015,
D55170016,
D55170020,
D55170025,
D55170030,
D55170035,
D55170040

Key
to
Figure
1

Page
3




55−15−11 Nov
01/05
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS
IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.)
AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION
CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

35 Retainer,
lower Composite D55170004000

001
35A Retainer,
lower Composite D55170033000 A20451K0340
001
35B Retainer,
lower Composite D55170012000 A20365K1347A
001
40 Shim Composite D55170020200 A20365K1347A
ASSY
Dwg.: D55170000,
D55170020

Key
to
Figure
1

Page
4




55−15−11 Nov
01/05
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TRIMMABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER − ATTACH FITTINGS

1. Structural Arrangement

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Structural Arrangement Figure 1

1 Fittings − Support Chapter 55−16−37
2 Fittings − Actuator Chapter 55−16−38
3 Attach Fittings − Hinge Arms Chapter 55−16−41
4 Hinge Arms − Elevator Chapter 55−16−42
5 Support Struts − Elevator Chapter 55−16−48
6 Fittings − Hoist Point Chapter 55−16−49
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−10−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−16−00 NovPage 1
01/14
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structural Arrangement
Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−16−00 NovPage 2
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

HORIZONTAL STABILIZER ATTACH FITTINGS − ALLOWABLE DAMAGES

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 101.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: OBEY THE GIVEN INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE WHICH LEADS TO THE
APPLICABLE INSPECTION PROGRAM DEFINED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPEC
TIONS (SRI) OF THE SRM, IF NECESSARY.

CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO

PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

1. General

NOTE: For definition of allowable damage refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories, refer to Chapter

51−11−14 − CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.
NOTE: For Damage Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

This topic contains the allowable damage and related data applicable to the
Horizontal Stabilizer metallic and composite attach fittings. This data is
necessary to find the correct repair procedure.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 101
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUCTION
of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all weight
variants as well as related information concerning allowable damage
and repair applicability.

2. Damage Evaluation

Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data related to the composite
structure and refer to Chapter 51−11−00, paragraph 2 for data related to
the metallic structure.

3. Type of Damage
A. Metallic Structure

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−16−00 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

The different types of damage which can occur to the metallic structure
are fully defined in Chapter 51−11−00, Table 1.
B. Composite Structure

The two main types of damage which can occur to the composite structure
are as follows:

(1) Delamination with or without visible cracks and holes, debonding and
dents.
− Separation between the plies
− Broken plies
− Structure pushed in with respect to the usual contour.

NOTE: For additional information refer to Chapter 51−11−00, paragraph

1.

(2) Superficial Damage

This is when the structure is damaged only on the external surface,
with no damage to the internal structure. Nicks and scratches are
examples of superficial damages.

4. Distance Between Damage Areas and Distance Between Repair Areas

There is a minimum permitted distance between damaged areas and between re
pair areas as follows:

A. Damaged Areas

Refer to Figure 102. The minimum acceptable distance between two damaged
areas (X) is the greater value of the following: 50 mm (1.969 in) or
2.5 x Lmax., where Lmax. is the longest dimension of the damage. If you
have less than the permitted distance between damaged areas, work on
them together as one large damaged area.
B. Repair Areas

Refer to Figure 102. The minimum acceptable distance between two repair
areas (Y) is 50 mm (1.969 in). If you have less than this distance, re
fer to the manufacture before you do the second repair.

5. Allowable Damage Description/Criteria

INSPECTION
CRITERIA PARAGRAPH REPAIR
DESCRIPTION INSTRUCTION REF
TYPE / FIGURE CATEGORY
ERENCE
THS Screw Jack Fitting Superficial 103 B 55−16−00−1−001−00
Damage

Table 102

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−16−00 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

THS Screw Jack Fitting Delamina 104 B 55−16−00−1−001−00

tion
THS Support Fitting Superficial 103 B 55−16−00−1−001−00
Damage
THS Support Fitting Delamina 104 B 55−16−00−1−001−00
tion
THS Support Fitting (Up Superficial 103 B 55−16−00−1−001−00
per/Lower Skin Attachment Damage
Fitting)
THS Support Fitting (Up Delamina 104 B 55−16−00−1−001−00
per/Lower Skin Attachment tion
Fitting)
Elevator Hinge Arms Superficial 103 B 55−16−00−1−001−00
Damage
Elevator Hinge Arms Delamina 104 B 55−16−00−1−001−00
tion
Actuator Attach Fittings Superficial 103 B 55−16−00−1−001−00
Damage
Actuator Attach Fittings Delamina 104 B 55−16−00−1−001−00
tion
Elevator Hinge Arms me Scratches 105 A, C −
tallic end Fittings
Elevator Hinge Arms me Marks and − A −
tallic end Fittings Corrosion
Elevator Hinge Arms me Dents − − −
tallic end Fittings
Support Strut Scratches 105 A, C −
Support Strut Marks and − A −
Corrosion
Support Strut Dents − − −

Table 102
6. Allowable Damage

Allowable damage is damage that does not affect the required strength and
function of component. You do not have to do a structural repair for this
type of damage. If this damage has rough or sharp edges, smooth these out
with the correct abrasive cloth. Replace the surface paint, if necessary.

Page 103
Printed in Germany
55−16−00 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

The allowable data for the THS Attach Fittings are in Figures 103, 104 and
105.
7. Repair Limits

The repair limits data gives the time limits within which a structural re
pair must be carried out. The repair time limits for the THS Attach Fit
tings are given in Figures 103, 104 and 105.

Page 104
Printed in Germany
55−16−00 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Horizontal Stabilizer Attach Fittings − General Arrangement

Figure 101 (sheet 1)

Page 105
Printed in Germany
55−16−00 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Horizontal Stabilizer Attach Fittings − General Arrangement

Figure 101 (sheet 2)

Page 106
Printed in Germany
55−16−00 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ITEM NAME Refer to the following figures for details

of allowable damage and repair limits ac
cording to damage type
SUPERFICIAL DAMAGE DELAMINATION WITH OR
(NICKS, SCRATCHES, WITHOUT VISIBLE
ABRASIONS, GOUGES) CRACKS AND HOLES
1 THS Screw Jack Fitting Figure 103 Figure 104
2 THS Support Fitting Figure 103 Figure 104
3 THS Support Fitting (Upper/ Figure 103 Figure 104
Lower Skin Attachment Fit
ting)
4 Elevator Hinge Arms Figure 103 Figure 104
5 Actuator Attach Fittings Figure 103 Figure 104
Key to Figure 101
REFER TO DAMAGE CRITERIA TABLE 103
ITEM NAME MARKS AND
SCRATCHES DENTS
CORROSION
6 Elevator Hinge Arm metal A B C
lic end Fittings
7 Support Strut A B C
Key to Figure 101
Damage
Description
Code
A Compare the scratches in question with diagram shown in Figure
105.
B 10% of the nominal material thickness over a maximum area of
400 mm (0.62 in).
C Not permitted.
Damage Criteria
Table 103

Page 107
Printed in Germany
55−16−00 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Distance Between Damaged Areas and Distance Between Repair Areas (Example)
Figure 102

Page 108
Printed in Germany
55−16−00 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Time Limits, Horizontal Stabilizer Spar Box Fit
tings
Figure 103 (sheet 1)
Page 109
Printed in Germany
55−16−00 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Time Limits, Horizontal Stabilizer Spar Box Fit
tings
Figure 103 (sheet 2)
Page 110
Printed in Germany
55−16−00 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Time Limits, Horizontal Stabilizer Spar Box Fit
tings
Figure 104
Page 111
Printed in Germany
55−16−00 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Hinge Arm metallic end Fittings and Support Strut − Allowable
scratches
Figure 105
Page 112
Printed in Germany
55−16−00 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

FITTINGS − SUPPORT

1. Identification Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Fittings − Support Figure 1

1 Fitting − Rear Support Figure 2
2 Fitting − Lower Assy Figure 3
3 Fitting − Upper Assy Figure 4
4 Fitting − Y Load Assy Figure 5
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−10−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 MayPage 1
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fittings, Support
Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 MayPage 2
01/07
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Rear Support

Figure 2 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 MayPage 3
01/07
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Rear Support

Figure 2 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 MayPage 4
01/07
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Rear Support

Figure 2 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 MayPage 5
01/07
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Rear Support

Figure 2 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 MayPage 6
01/07
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Rear Support

Figure 2 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55-16-37 MayPage 7
01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Rear Support

Figure 2 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 MayPage 8
01/07
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Rear Support

Figure 2 (sheet 7)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 MayPage 9
01/07
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Rear Support

Figure 2 (sheet 8)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 MayPage01/0710
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Rear Support

Figure 2 (sheet 9)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 MayPage01/0711
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Rear Support

Figure 2 (sheet 10)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 MayPage01/0712
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Rear Support

Figure 2 (sheet 11)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 MayPage01/0713
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Rear Support

Figure 2 (sheet 12)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 MayPage01/0714
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Rear Support

Figure 2 (sheet 13)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 MayPage01/0715
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Rear Support

Figure 2 (sheet 14)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 MayPage01/0716
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Rear Support

Figure 2 (sheet 15)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 MayPage01/0717
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Rear Support

Figure 2 (sheet 16)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 MayPage01/0718
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Rear Support

Figure 2 (sheet 17)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 MayPage01/0719
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Rear Support

Figure 2 (sheet 18)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 AugPage01/1120
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Rear Support

Figure 2 (sheet 19)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 Pages 21/22
Aug 01/11
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Rear Support

Figure 2 (sheet 20)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 Pages 23/24
Aug 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rear Support D55182781000 55−16−00

Assy 001
1A Rear Support D55182781002 55−16−00 A20302G0012
Assy 003
1B Rear Support D55182781004 55−16−00 A24422G0237
Assy 005
1C Rear Support D55182781006 55−16−00 A32629G0379
Assy 007
1D Rear Support D55182781008 55−16−00 A152593G0738
Assy 009
5 Fitting, Rear Composite D55981002000 55−16−00
Support 001
5A Fitting, Rear Composite D55981002002 55−16−00 A20302G0012
Support 003
5B Fitting, Rear Composite D55981002004 55−16−00 A20374G0017
Support 005
5C Fitting, Rear Composite D55981002006 55−16−00 A24422G0237
Support 007
5D Fitting, Rear Composite D55981002008 55−16−00 A24973G0257
Support 009
5E Fitting, Rear Composite D55981003000 55−16−00 A32629G0379
Support 001
5F Fitting, Rear Composite D55981003002 55−16−00 A36378G0468
Support 003
5G Fitting, Rear Composite D55981003004 55−16−00 A152593G0738
Support 005
10 Rowing Z−19.785
ASSY Dwg.: D55181000, D55181001, D55182781, D55981002

Key to Figure 2

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 MayPage01/1525
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Lower Assy

Figure 3 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 NovPage01/1226
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Lower Assy

Figure 3 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 NovPage01/1227
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Lower Assy

Figure 3 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 NovPage01/1228
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Lower Assy

Figure 3 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 NovPage01/1229
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Lower Assy

Figure 3 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 NovPage01/1230
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Lower Assy

Figure 3 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 Pages 31/32
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Lower Fitting D55182784000 55−16−00

Assy 001
1A Lower Fitting D55182784002 55−16−00 A29999G9999
Assy 003
1B Lower Fitting D55182784004 55−16−00 A24422G0237
Assy 005
1C Lower Fitting D55182784006 55−16−00 A25157G0217
Assy 007
1D Lower Fitting D55182784008 55−16−00 A30971G0382
Assy 009
5 Fitting, Lower Composite D55981102000 55−16−00
001
5A Fitting, Lower Composite D55981102002 55−16−00 A24422G0237
003
5B Fitting, Lower Composite D55981102004 55−16−00 A24973G0257
005
5C Fitting, Lower Composite D55981105000 55−16−00 A153776G0749
001
10 Support Assy D93580024000
001
15 Rowing Z−19.785
20 Film Adhesive Z−15.425 A153776G0749
ASSY Dwg.: D55181000, D55181001, D55182784, D55981102, D55981105

Key to Figure 3

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 MayPage01/1533
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Upper Assy

Figure 4 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 NovPage01/1234
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Upper Assy

Figure 4 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 NovPage01/1235
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Upper Assy

Figure 4 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 NovPage01/1236
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Upper Assy

Figure 4 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 NovPage01/1237
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Upper Assy

Figure 4 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 NovPage01/1238
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Upper Assy

Figure 4 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 Pages 39/40
Nov 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Upper Fitting D55182787000 55−16−00

Assy 001
1A Upper Fitting D55182787002 55−16−00 A29999G9999
Assy 003
1B Upper Fitting D55182787004 55−16−00 A24422G0237
Assy 005
1C Upper Fitting D55182787006 55−16−00 A25157G0217
Assy 007
1D Upper Fitting D55182787008 55−16−00 A30971G0382
Assy 009
5 Fitting, Upper Composite D55981112000 55−16−00
001
5A Fitting, Upper Composite D55981112002 55−16−00 A24422G0237
003
5B Fitting, Upper Composite D55981112004 55−16−00 A24973G0257
005
5C Fitting, Upper Composite D55981115000 55−16−00 A153776G0749
001
10 Support Assy D92480028000
001
15 Support Assy D92480029000
001
20 Support Assy D92480019000
001
25 Rowing Z−19.785
30 Film Adhesive Z−15.425 A153776G0749
ASSY Dwg.: D55181000, D55181001, D55182787, D55981112, D55981115

Key to Figure 4

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 MayPage01/1541
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fitting, Y Load Assy

Figure 5

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 NovPage01/1242
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Fitting Assy, Y D55182791000

Load 001
1A Fitting Assy, Y D55182791002 A25157G0217
Load 003
5 Fitting, Y Load D55981800000
001
5A Fitting, Y Load D55981800002 A20302G0012
003
ASSY Dwg.: D55181000, D55182791

Key to Figure 5

Printed in Germany
55−16−37 Pages 43/44
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

FITTINGS − ACTUATOR

1. Identification Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Fittings − Actuator Figure 1

1 Fittings, Actuator 1 Figure 2
2 Fittings, Actuator 2 Figure 3
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−10−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−16−38 MayPage 1
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Actuator Fittings
Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−16−38 MayPage 2
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Actuator 1 Fitting
Figure 2 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−16−38 MayPage 3
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Actuator 1 Fitting
Figure 2 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−16−38 MayPage 4
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Actuator 1 Fitting
Figure 2 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−16−38 Pages 5/6
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Actuator 1 Fitting
Figure 2 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−16−38 MayPage 7
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Actuator 1 Fitting
Figure 2 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55−16−38 MayPage 8
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Actuator Fitting D55981641000 55−16−00

1 Assy 001
1A Actuator Fitting D55981641002 55−16−00 A23101G0157
1 Assy 003
1B Actuator Fitting D55981641004 55−16−00 A24644G0241
1 Assy 005
5 Actuator Fitting Composite D55981642000 55−16−00
1 001
5A Actuator Fitting Composite D55981642002 55−16−00 A23101G0157
1 003
5B Actuator Fitting Composite D55981642004 55−16−00 A24644G0241
1 005
10 Angle Assy D92480015000
001
15 Support Assy, LH 3.1354T351 D93580029200
Fitting Only LN9073
20 Support Assy, RH 3.1354T351 D93580031200
Fitting Only LN9073
25 Rowing, CFRP Z−19.785
ASSY Dwg.: D55182761, D55981641, D55981642

Key to Figure 2

Printed in Germany
55−16−38 MayPage 9
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Actuator 2 Fitting
Figure 3 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−16−38 MayPage01/1510
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Actuator 2 Fitting
Figure 3 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−16−38 Pages 11/12
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Actuator 2 Fitting
Figure 3 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−16−38 Pages 13/14
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Actuator 2 Fitting
Figure 3 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−16−38 MayPage01/1515
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Actuator 2 Fitting
Figure 3 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55−16−38 MayPage01/1516
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Actuator Fitting D55981681000 55−16−00

2 Assy 001
1A Actuator Fitting D55981681002 55−16−00 A23101G0157
2 Assy 003
1B Actuator Fitting D55981681004 55−16−00 A24644G0241
2 Assy 005
5 Actuator Fitting Composite D55981682000 55−16−00
2 001
5A Actuator Fitting Composite D55981682002 55−16−00 A23101G0157
2 003
5B Actuator Fitting Composite D55981682004 55−16−00 A24644G0241
2 005
10 Angle Assy D92480015000
001
15 Support Assy, LH 3.1354T351 D93580029200
Fitting Only LN9073
20 Support Assy, RH 3.1354T351 D93580032200
Fitting Only LN9073
25 Rowing, CFRP Z−19.785
ASSY Dwg.: D55182771, D55981681, D55981682

Key to Figure 3

Printed in Germany
55−16−38 Pages 17/18
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ATTACH FITTINGS − HINGE ARM

1. Identification Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Attach Fittings, Hinge Arm Figure 1

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−10−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−16−41 MayPage 1
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Attach Fittings − Hinge Arm

Figure 1 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−16−41 MayPage 2
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Attach Fittings − Hinge Arm

Figure 1 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−16−41 MayPage 3
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Fitting, Hinge D55981411000 55−16−00

Assy
1A Fitting, Hinge D55981411002 55−16−00 A25892G0301
Assy
1B Fitting, Hinge D55981411004 55−16−00 A29998G0351
Assy
− alternative D55981411002 55−16−00 A29998G0351
5 Fitting, Half 3.4364T7351 D55981412200
LN9073
5A Fitting, Half 3.4364T7351 D55981412202 A25892G0301
LN9073
5B Fitting 3.4364T7351 D55981412204 A29998G0351
LN9073
10 Fitting, Hinge D55981413000 55−16−00
Assy
10A Fitting, Hinge D55981413002 55−16−00 A25892G0301
Assy
10B Fitting, Hinge D55981413004 55−16−00 A29998G0351
Assy
alternative D55981413002 55−16−00 A29998G0351
15 Fitting, Half 3.4364T7351 D55981414200
LN9073 201
15A Fitting, Half 3.4364T7351 D55981414202 A21514G0068
LN9073 203
15B Fitting, Half 3.4364T7351 D55981414204 A25892G0301
LN9073 205
15C Fitting 3.4364T7351 D55981414206 A29998G0351
LN9073
ASSY Dwg.: D55182701, D55182731, D55182732, D55981411, D55981413

Key to Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−16−41 MayPage 4
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

HINGE ARMS − ELEVATOR

1. Identification Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Hinge Arms − Elevator Figure 1

1 Hinge Arms 1 − Elevator Figure 2
2 Hinge Arms 2 − Elevator Figure 3
3 Hinge Arms 3 − Elevator Figure 4
4 Hinge Arms 4 − Elevator Figure 5
5 Hinge Arms 5 − Elevator Figure 6
6 Hinge Arms 6 − Elevator Figure 7
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−10−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage 1
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arms - Elevator

Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55-16-42 AugPage 2
01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 1 − Elevator

Figure 2 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 Pages 3/4
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 1 − Elevator

Figure 2 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage 5
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 1 − Elevator

Figure 2 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage 6
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 1 − Elevator

Figure 2 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage 7
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 1 − Elevator

Figure 2 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage 8
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 1 − Elevator

Figure 2 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage 9
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 1 − Elevator

Figure 2 (sheet 7)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1510
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 1 − Elevator

Figure 2 (sheet 8)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1511
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Arm 1, Hinge D55182701000 55−16−00

Assy − Elevator 001
1A Arm 1, Hinge D55182701002 55−16−00 A23101G0157
Assy − Elevator 003
1B Arm 1, Hinge D55182701004 55−16−00 A23640G0160
Assy − Elevator 005
1C Arm 1, Hinge D55182701006 55−16−00 A24972G0255
Assy − Elevator 007
5 Arm 1, Hinge − Composite D55981401000 55−16−00
Elevator 001
5A Arm 1, Hinge − Composite D55981401002 55−16−00 A23101G0157
Elevator 003
10 Plate, Bonding 3.1364T3 D55181521260 PB 201
Upper LN9073 261
1.4(0.055)
10A Plate, Bonding 3.1364T3 D55181521286 PB 201 A38022G0529
Upper 287
15 Angle Assy Composite D92480074000 55−16−00 A23640G0160
20 Plate, Bonding D92480075000 PB 201 A24972G0255
Lower 001
25 Rowing, CFRP Z−19.785
ASSY Dwg.: D55181000, D55182701, D55981401

Key to Figure 2

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1512
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 2 − Elevator

Figure 3 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1513
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 2 − Elevator

Figure 3 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1514
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 2 − Elevator

Figure 3 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1515
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 2 − Elevator

Figure 3 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1516
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 2 − Elevator

Figure 3 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1517
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 2 − Elevator

Figure 3 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1518
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 2 − Elevator

Figure 3 (sheet 7)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1519
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 2 − Elevator

Figure 3 (sheet 8)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1520
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 2 − Elevator

Figure 3 (sheet 9)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1521
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 2 − Elevator

Figure 3 (sheet 10)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1522
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 2 − Elevator

Figure 3 (sheet 11)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1523
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 2 − Elevator

Figure 3 (sheet 12)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1524
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 2 − Elevator

Figure 3 (sheet 13)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1525
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 2 − Elevator

Figure 3 (sheet 14)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1526
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 2 − Elevator

Figure 3 (sheet 15)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1527
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 2 − Elevator

Figure 3 (sheet 16)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1528
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 2 − Elevator

Figure 3 (sheet 17)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1529
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Arm 2, Hinge D55182711000 55−16−00

Assy − Elevator 001
1A Arm 2, Hinge D55182711002 55−16−00 A20952G0054
Assy − Elevator 003
1B Arm 2, Hinge D55182711004 55−16−00 A23101G0157
Assy − Elevator 005
1C Arm 2, Hinge D55182711006 55−16−00 A22246G0122
Assy − Elevator 007
1D Arm 2, Hinge D55182712002 55−16−00 A22988G0156
Assy − Elevator 003
1E Arm 2, Hinge D55182712004 55−16−00 A23640G0160
Assy − Elevator 005
5 Arm 2, Hinge − Composite D55981441000 55−16−00
Elevator 001
5A Arm 2, Hinge − Composite D55981441002 55−16−00 A22621G0140
Elevator 003
5B Arm 2, Hinge − Composite D55981441004 55−16−00 A22246G0122
Elevator 005
5C Arm 2, Hinge − Composite D55981442002 55−16−00 A22988G0156
Elevator 003
10 Support, T 3.1354T351 D93580029202
LN9073
15 Support Assy 3.1364T3 D93580028000
LN9073 1.6(0.063)
15A Support Assy 3.1364T3 D93580046000 A20419P0760
LN9073 1.6(0.063)
20 Angle Assy 3.1364T3 D92480013000
LN9073 1.2(0.047)
25 Support Assy 3.1364T3 D92480011000
LN9073 001
1.6(0.063)
30 Plate, Bonding 3.1364T42 D55181521266 PB 201 A22621G0140
LN9073 267
1.4(0.055)
35 Rowing Z−19.785
40 Plate, Bonding 3.1364T42 D55181526200 PB 201 A22988G0156
(LH Hinge Arm LN9073 1.4(0.055)
only)
ASSY Dwg.: D55181000, D55182711, D55182712, D55981441

Key to Figure 3

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1530
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

45 Plate, Bonding 3.1364T42 D55181526212 PB 201 A22988G0156

(RH Hinge Arm LN9073 1.4(0.055)
only)
50 Plate, Bonding 3.1364T3 D92480076000 PB 201 A23640G0160
(LH Hinge Arm LN9073 1.4(0.055)
only)
50A Plate, Bonding D92480076002 PB 201 A38022G0529
(LH Hinge Arm
only)
55 Plate, Bonding 3.1364T3 D92480076001 PB 201 A23640G0160
(RH Hinge Arm LN9073 1.4(0.055)
only)
55A Plate, Bonding D92480076003 PB 201 A38022G0529
(RH Hinge Arm
only)
60 Plate Bonding 3.1364T3 D92480077000 PB 201 A23640G0160
LN9073 001
1.4(0.055)
60A Plate Bonding D92480077002 PB 201 A23640G0160
003
ASSY Dwg.: D55182712

Key to Figure 3

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1531
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 3 − Elevator

Figure 4 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1532
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 3 − Elevator

Figure 4 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1533
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 3 − Elevator

Figure 4 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1534
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 3 − Elevator

Figure 4 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1535
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 3 − Elevator

Figure 4 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1536
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 3 − Elevator

Figure 4 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1537
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 3 − Elevator

Figure 4 (sheet 7)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1538
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 3 − Elevator

Figure 4 (sheet 8)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1539
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 3 − Elevator

Figure 4 (sheet 9)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1540
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 3 − Elevator

Figure 4 (sheet 10)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1541
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 3 − Elevator

Figure 4 (sheet 11)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1542
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 3 − Elevator

Figure 4 (sheet 12)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1543
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 3 − Elevator

Figure 4 (sheet 13)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1544
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 3 − Elevator

Figure 4 (sheet 14)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1545
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 3 − Elevator

Figure 4 (sheet 15)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1546
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 3 − Elevator

Figure 4 (sheet 16)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1547
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 3 − Elevator

Figure 4 (sheet 17)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1548
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Arm 3, Hinge D55182721000 55−16−00

Assy − Elevator 001
1A Arm 3, Hinge D55182721002 55−16−00 A20952G0054
Assy − Elevator 003
1B Arm 3, Hinge D55182721004 55−16−00 A23101G0157
Assy − Elevator 005
1C Arm 3, Hinge D55182721006 55−16−00 A22246G0122
Assy − Elevator 007
1D Arm 3, Hinge D55182722002 55−16−00 A22988G0156
Assy − Elevator 003
1E Arm 3, Hinge D55182722004 55−16−00 A24972G0255
Assy − Elevator 005
5 Arm 3, Hinge − Composite D55981481000 55−16−00
Elevator 001
5A Arm 3, Hinge − Composite D55981481002 55−16−00 A22621G0140
Elevator 003
5B Arm 3, Hinge − Composite D55981481004 55−16−00 A22246G0122
Elevator 005
5C Arm 3, Hinge − Composite D55981482002 55−16−00 A22988G0156
Elevator 003
10 Angle Assy 3.1364T3 D92480013000
LN9073 1.2(0.047)
15 Support Assy 3.1364T3 D92480012000
LN9073 001
1.6(0.063)
20 Support T (LH 3.1354T351 D93580030200
Hinge Arm only) LN9073
25 Support T (RH 3.1354T351 D93580031202
Hinge Arm only) LN9073
30 Plate, Bonding 3.1364T42 D55181521270 PB 201 A22621G0140
LN9073 274
1.4(0.055)
35 Rowing Z−19.785
40 Plate, Bonding 3.1364T42 D55181526202 PB 201 A22988G0156
LN9073 208
1.4(0.055)
45 Plate, Bonding 3.1364T3 D92480078000 PB 201 A24972G0255
(LH Hinge Arm LN9073 1.4(0.055)
only)
ASSY Dwg.: D55181000, D55182721, D55182722, D55981481

Key to Figure 4

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1549
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

45A Plate, Bonding D92480078002 PB 201 A38022G0529

(LH Hinge Arm
only)
50 Plate, Bonding 3.1364T3 D92480080000 PB 201 A24972G0255
(RH Hinge Arm LN9073 1.4(0.055)
only)
50A Plate, Bonding D92480080002 PB 201 A38022G0529
(RH Hinge Arm
only)
ASSY Dwg.: D55182722

Key to Figure 4

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1550
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 4 − Elevator

Figure 5 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1551
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 4 − Elevator

Figure 5 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1552
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 4 − Elevator

Figure 5 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1553
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 4 − Elevator

Figure 5 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1554
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 4 − Elevator

Figure 5 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1555
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 4 − Elevator

Figure 5 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1556
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 4 − Elevator

Figure 5 (sheet 7)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1557
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 4 − Elevator

Figure 5 (sheet 8)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1558
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 4 − Elevator

Figure 5 (sheet 9)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1559
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 4 − Elevator

Figure 5 (sheet 10)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1560
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 4 − Elevator

Figure 5 (sheet 11)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1561
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 4 − Elevator

Figure 5 (sheet 12)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1562
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 4 − Elevator

Figure 5 (sheet 13)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1563
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 4 − Elevator

Figure 5 (sheet 14)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1564
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 4 − Elevator

Figure 5 (sheet 15)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1565
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 4 − Elevator

Figure 5 (sheet 16)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1566
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 4 − Elevator

Figure 5 (sheet 17)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1567
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Arm 4, Hinge D55182731000 55−16−00

Assy − Elevator 001
1A Arm 4, Hinge D55182731002 55−16−00 A23101G0157
Assy − Elevator 003
1B Arm 4, Hinge D55182731004 55−16−00 A22246G0122
Assy − Elevator 005
1C Arm 4, Hinge D55182732002 55−16−00 A22988G0156
Assy − Elevator 003
1D Arm 4, Hinge D55182732004 55−16−00 A24972G0255
Assy − Elevator 005
5 Arm 4, Hinge − Composite D55981521000 55−16−00
Elevator 001
5A Arm 4, Hinge − Composite D55981521002 55−16−00 A22621G0140
Elevator 003
5B Arm 4, Hinge − Composite D55981521004 55−16−00 A22246G0122
Elevator 005
5C Arm 4, Hinge − Composite D55981522002 55−16−00 A22988G0156
Elevator 003
10 Support Assy 3.1364T3 D93580028000
LN9073 1.6(0.063)
15 Angle Assy (LH 3.1364T3 D92480013000
Hinge Arm only) LN9073 1.2(0.047)
20 Support T (RH 3.1354T351 D93580031202
Hinge Arm only) LN9073
25 Plate, Bonding 3.1364T42 D55181521268 PB 201 A22621G0140
LN9073 276
1.4(0.055)
30 Rowing Z−19.785
35 Plate, Bonding 3.1364T42 D55181526204 PB 201 A22988G0156
Upper (LH Hinge LN9073 1.4(0.055)
Arm only)
40 Plate, Bonding 3.1364T3 D92480079000 PB 201 A24972G0255
Upper (LH Hinge LN9073 1.4(0.055)
Arm only)
40A Plate, Bonding D92480079002 PB 201 A38022G0529
Upper (LH Hinge
Arm only)
45 Plate, Bonding 3.1364T42 D55181526210 PB 201 A22988G0156
Upper (RH Hinge LN9073 1.4(0.055)
Arm only)
ASSY Dwg.: D55181000, D55182731, D55182732, D55981521

Key to Figure 5

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1568
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

50 Plate, Bonding 3.1364T3 D93580053200 PB 201 A24972G0255

Upper (RH Hinge LN9073 1.4(0.055)
Arm only)
50A Plate, Bonding 3.1364T3 D93580053202 PB 201 A38022G0529
Upper (RH Hinge
Arm only)
55 Plate, Bonding D92480081000 PB 201 A24972G0255
Lower (RH Hinge
Arm only)
60 Support Assy D93580052000 55−16−00 A24972G0255
001
ASSY Dwg.: D55182732

Key to Figure 5

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1569
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 5 − Elevator

Figure 6 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1570
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 5 − Elevator

Figure 6 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1571
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 5 − Elevator

Figure 6 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1572
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 5 − Elevator

Figure 6 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1573
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 5 − Elevator

Figure 6 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1574
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 5 − Elevator

Figure 6 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1575
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 5 − Elevator

Figure 6 (sheet 7)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1576
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 5 − Elevator

Figure 6 (sheet 8)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1577
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 5 − Elevator

Figure 6 (sheet 9)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1578
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 5 − Elevator

Figure 6 (sheet 10)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1579
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 5 − Elevator

Figure 6 (sheet 11)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1580
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 5 − Elevator

Figure 6 (sheet 12)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1581
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 5 − Elevator

Figure 6 (sheet 13)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1582
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 5 − Elevator

Figure 6 (sheet 14)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1583
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 5 − Elevator

Figure 6 (sheet 15)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1584
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 5 − Elevator

Figure 6 (sheet 16)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1585
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 5 − Elevator

Figure 6 (sheet 17)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1586
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Arm 5, Hinge D55182741000 55−16−00

Assy − Elevator 001
1A Arm 5, Hinge D55182741002 55−16−00 A23101G0157
Assy − Elevator 003
1B Arm 5, Hinge D55182742002 55−16−00 A22988G0156
Assy − Elevator 003
5 Arm 5, Hinge − Composite D55981561000 55−16−00
Elevator 001
5A Arm 5, Hinge − Composite D55981561002 55−16−00 A22621G0140
Elevator 003
5B Arm 5, Hinge − Composite D55981561004 55−16−00 A23101G0157
Elevator 005
5C Arm 5, Hinge − Composite D55981562002 55−16−00 A22988G0156
Elevator 003
10 Plate, Bonding 3.1364T42 D55181521272 PB 201 A22621G0140
LN9073 273
1.4(0.055)
15 Rowing Z−19.785
20 Plate, Bonding 3.1364T3 D55181526206 PB 201 A22988G0156
LN9073 207
1.4(0.055)
20A Plate, Bonding 3.1364T3 D55181526214 PB 201 A38022G0529
215
ASSY Dwg.: D55181000, D55182741, D55182742, D55981561

Key to Figure 6

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1587
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 6 − Elevator

Figure 7 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1588
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 6 − Elevator

Figure 7 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1589
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 6 − Elevator

Figure 7 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1590
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 6 − Elevator

Figure 7 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1591
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 6 − Elevator

Figure 7 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1592
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arm 6 − Elevator

Figure 7 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1593
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Arm 6, Hinge D55182751000 55−16−00

Assy − Elevator 001
1A Arm 6, Hinge D55182751002 55−16−00 A23101G0157
Assy − Elevator 003
5 Arm 6, Hinge − Composite D55981601000 55−16−00
Elevator 001
5A Arm 6, Hinge − Composite D55981601002 55−16−00 A23101G0157
Elevator 003
10 Plate, Bonding 3.1364T42 D55181521262 PB 201
LN9073 263
1.4(0.055)
10A Plate, Bonding 3.1364T3 D55181521282 PB 201 A24842G0243
LN9073 283
1.4(0.055)
10B Plate, Bonding 3.1364T3 D55181521288 A38022G0529
289
15 Rowing Z−19.785
ASSY Dwg.: D55181000, D55182751, D55981601

Key to Figure 7

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 MayPage01/1594
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

THS HINGE ARM FITTINGS − REPAIRS

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

1. General
These repairs are applicable for hinge arms. The general repairs are listed
in Table 201, the specific repairs area listed in Table 202.

NOTE: Refer to each repair to determine the repair applicability.

NOTE: For Damage/Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

2. Safety Precautions
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS

WARNING: TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE SURFACE PROTECTION, MECHANICAL AND ELEC

TRICAL SYSTEMS, THE AREA SURROUNDING THE REPAIR MUST BE COVERED
WITH PLASTIC FOIL MASKING TAPE.

CAUTION: HIDDEN DAMAGE CAN LEAD TO A FAILURE OF THE REPAIR OR SURROUNDING

STRUCTURE.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER TO PARA

GRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT REPAIR.

3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER REMARKS

No General Repair applicable. − −

Table 201
4. Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs.

INSPECTION
REPAIR
SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE INSTRUCTION REF
CATEGORY
ERENCE
THS Hinge Fittings 1 to 5.A. 201 A −
6, Upper and Lower Bond
ing Strap Repairs.

Table 202
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−16−42 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

5. Hinge Arms Repairs

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: OBEY THE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN
TABLE 203

A. THS Hinge Fittings 1 to 6, Upper and Lower Bonding Strap Repairs.

NOTE: This repair procedure is applicable to Rear ending of the Hinge

Fitting when upper and lower strap are found broken.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 203
NOTE: Refer to the Weight Variant Identification Table given in the
Introduction of the SRM, to find all necessary information related
to the weight variant and their maximum values and the modification
associated to the aircraft type.
(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Angle − Material 2024T3 Clad or 2024T42

Clad, 1.6 mm (0.063 in) Thick
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−010 , refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005 , refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Low Density Sealant − Material No. 09−060 , refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Chemical Conversion Coating − Material No. 13−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Epoxy Polyamide Primer − Material No. 16−006B, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane Primer − Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Varnish − Material No. 07−001B, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions, refer to Figure 201
(a) Remove carefully the bead sealant and interfay sealant with a non
metallic scraper at hinge fitting and bonding plate, refer to

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−16−42 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Chapter 51−76−11. Remove the damaged bonding plate from the Ele
vator Hinge Arm to allow access for the installation of the re
pair angle.

(b) Perform DVI inspection as per NTM 51−10−09 to ensure there are
no delaminations.

(c) Remove carefully the remaining sealant from the hinge fitting.
Refer to Chapter 51−76−11.
(d) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−010).

(e) Trim out the cracked area in the bonding plate. Refer to Figure
201

(f) Make the repair angle to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair. Refer to Chapter 51−26−11 for bending data.

NOTE: Ensure three rivets minimum on vertical flange of the bond

ing plate and two rivets minimum on the horizontal flange.
Refer to Figure 201.

NOTE: Lug and hole diameter same as original part.

(g) Mark the position of the fastener holes on the repair angle. Re
fer to Chapter 51−47−00, fasteners spacing and edge distance
data.

(h) Pilot drill the marked fastener holes on the repair angle.
(i) Put the repair angle in its correct repair position and secure
to the bonding plate with screw clamps.

(j) Pilot drill the bonding plate thru the previously drilled holes
in the repair angle.

(k) Drill the fastener holes in the repair angle and the bonding
plate to the correct diameter for the fasteners.

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 51−43−00, fasteners oversize and alterna

tives.

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 51−44−00, fasteners holes and drill data.

(l) Countersink bonding plate holes on the side in contact with hinge
arm. Refer to Chapter 51−46−11, countersinking data.

(m) Remove the screw clamps and remove the repair angle from the
bonding plate.

(n) Deburr sharp edges and fastener holes in the repair angle and
bonding plate.

(o) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−16−42 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(p) Clean the repair angle, the repair areas of the bonding plate
and areas on the hinge arm, with the cleaning agent (Material
No. 11−010).

(q) Apply the surface treatments to the repair angle and the bonding
plate reworked areas (chemical conversion coating, (Material No.
13−002), and then epoxy polyamide primer, (Material No. 16−006B)
or polyurethane primer, (Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C), refer
to Chapter 51−21−11 for application data.

(r) Apply the sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the surfaces of the
repair angle and the bonding plate that will touch when as
sembled.

(s) Put the repair angle in its correct repair position and secure
to the bonding plate with screw pins thru the fastener holes.

(t) Remove each screw pin in turn and wet install the correct fas
tener with the sealant (Material No. 09−005) in the vacated screw
pin hole. Refer to Chapter 51−42−00, fasteners installation and
removal data.
NOTE: Bond at least one rivet at the vertical flange. Refer to
PMS Chapter 01−04−058, electrical bonding.

(u) Apply a fillet of sealant (Material No. 09−060) to the repair

angle and bonding plate.
(v) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (Material No. 11−010).

(w) Let the sealant (Material No. 09−005 and Material No. 09−060)
cure. Refer to the manufacturer&apos;s instruction leaflet for
cure time.
(x) Apply blue varnish (Material No. 07−001B) to the bonding fastener
heads.

(y) Let the varnish (Material No. 07−001B) dry. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instruction leaflet for drying time.
(z) Reconnect the bonding lead to the bracket on the hinge arm at
tach fitting.

(aa)With the Elevator installed on the aircraft, do an electrical

bonding test. Measure between the repair angle the repaired bond
ing plate. The maximum resistance value on the joint should be 1
milli−ohm. Measure between the repair angle and the nearest point
on the THS rear spar upper stiffener. The maximum resistance
value should be 5 milli−ohms.

(ab)Restore the surface protection. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−16−42 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

THS Hinge Fittings 1 to 6, Upper and Lower Bonding Strap Repairs.

Figure 201

Printed in Germany
55−16−42 PagesFeb205/206
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SUPPORT STRUTS − ELEVATOR

1. Identification Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Support Strut − Elevator Figure 1

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−16−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−16−48 FebPage 1
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Support Strut − Elevator

Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−16−48 FebPage 2
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Strut, support D55182805000 55−16−00

001
1A Strut, support D55182805004 A161092G0860
005
5 Fitting, Y Load 3.4364T7351 D55981809200
LN9073 201
5A Fitting, Y Load 3.4364T7351 D55981809202 A30971G0382
LN9073 203
ASSY Dwg.: D55181000, D55181002, D55182801

Key to Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−16−48 Pages 3/4
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

FITTINGS − HOIST POINT

1. Identification Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Fittings − Hoist Point Figure 1

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−16−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−16−49 FebPage 1
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fittings − Hoist Point

Figure 1 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−16−49 FebPage 2
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Fittings − Hoist Point

Figure 1 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−16−49 FebPage 3
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Fitting, hoist D55981820002

point
10 Lug, lifting 3.7164.1 NSA9006−12B B22079G0113
15 Point, resting 3.7164.7 D55981821200 B22079G0113
DAN39RD22
20 Plug 5.2206.0 D55182822200 A22079G0113
ASSY Dwg.: D55182811, D55182821

Key to Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−16−49 FebPage 4
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATORS

1. Modification/Service Bulletin List

This list shows the modifications and the Manufacturer Serial Number (MSN)
of the aircraft (A/C) model which have these modifications. Modifications
with the same number, but with a different suffix letter show a different
effectivity, refer to column "S".

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

20302G0012 A320 0012−9999

20419P0760 A320 0002,0003,0021−9999
20587G0031 A320 0044−9999
21020G0055 A320 0002−0004,0044−9999
21295G0066 A320 0076−9999
22163G0116 A320 0177−0178,0185,0190−0191,0195−0198,01
99−0396,0397−9999
22497G0128 A320 0268−9999
22621G0140 A320 0328−9999
22621G0140 A A320 0328−3997
23307G0155 A320 0387−9999
23490G0167 A320 0438−9999
23911G0189 A320 0480−9999
24339G0229 A320 0489−9999
24707G0178 A320 0506−0534,0537−9999
24842G0243 A320 0539,0542−0622,0630,0632−9999
24971G0253 A320 0542−0543,0561−0622,0630−9999
25123G0266 A320 0542,0543,0596−0622,0630−9999
25157G0217 A320 0724−9999
26408G0321 A320 0730−9999
30565G0357 A320 2182−9999
30565G0357 A A320 2182−2529
32441G0391 A320 1874−9999
33296G0406 A320 2044−9999
34329G0424 A320 2259−9999
35515G0419 A320 2531−9999
35515G0455 A320 2531−9999
39573G0606 A320 3999−9999

Printed in Germany
55−20−00 NovPage 1
01/14
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structural Arrangement
Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−20−00 NovPage 2
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator P/N reidentification

Figure 2

Printed in Germany
55−20−00 Pages 3/4
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATORS − ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

1. General

NOTE: For definition of allowable damage, refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For Damage Data Recording, refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

2. Allowable Damage

The allowable damage and related data applicable to the structural compo

nents of the Elevators is in the following chapters:

DESCRIPTION CHAPTER
Spar Box Skins Chapter 55−21−11
Spar Chapter 55−21−18
Leading Edge Access Panels Chapter 55−22−11
Leading Edge Ribs Chapter 55−22−12
Outboard Tip and End Cap Chapter 55−24−00
Attach Fittings Chapter 55−26−00

Table 101
WARNING: ALL ELEVATOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE LIMITS AND REPAIR PRINCIPLES ARE IN A
CATEGORY KNOWN AS A CRITICAL DESIGN CONFIGURATION CONTROL LIMITATION
(CDCCL). YOU MUST KEEP ALL CDCCL ITEMS IN THE APPROVED CONFIGURATION.
MAKE SURE THAT THE WEIGHT OF THE ELEVATOR IS IN THE SPECIFIED LIM

ITS.

3. General Weight Evaluation

Before any damage is evaluated or before any damaged structure is repaired
you must perform an assessment of the weight of the elevator.

Obey the instructions in the Flow Chart for General Weight Assessment of
the elevator shown in the applicable Diagram as follows:
− Diagram 101 for elevators before Mod 150390 and Pre SB 55−1042.
− Diagram 104 for elevators after Mod 150390 or Post SB 55−1042.
where:
− W: real weight of the elevator before the assessment.
− WI1: weight increment due to the relevant adl/repair action to be per

formed as a result of the damage. In case of ADL for water ingress, WI1
is the weight increment due to liquid ingress.
− WT: total elevator weight after the assessment. WT = W + WI1
− WI2: weight increment due to previous maintenance actions (if any).
− WIT: total weight increment. WIT= WI1 + WI2
− WIA: Allowable Weight Increment

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−20−00 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

− WA: Allowable Weight

Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201 for general information in order
to estimate WI2 and WI1 weight increments.

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−20−00 Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Weight Assessment Flow Chart (Before Mod 150390 and Pre SB 55−1042) − Eleva

tor
Diagram 101

Printed in Germany
55−20−00 PagesNov103/104
01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Allowable Weight (WA) Table (Before Mod 150390 and Pre SB 55−1042)
Diagram 102

Page 105
Printed in Germany
55−20−00 Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Allowable Weight Increment (WIA) Table (Before Mod 150390 and Pre SB
55−1042)
Diagram 103
Page 106
Printed in Germany
55−20−00 Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Weight Assessment Flow Chart (After Mod 150390 or Post SB 55−1042) − Eleva

tor
Diagram 104
Page 107
Printed in Germany
55−20−00 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Allowable Weight (WA) Table (After Mod 150390 or Post SB 55−1042)
Diagram 105

Page 108
Printed in Germany
55−20−00 Aug 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR − REPAIRS

CAUTION: FOR REPAIRS CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE REFER TO

THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN IN THE
INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH 3,
GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE CAN
NOT BE DONE.
SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

1. General

NOTE: For Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

A. The general repair data for the components of the Elevators are in the
following chapters:
− Chapter 55−21−00, Spar Box Repairs
− Chapter 55−22−00, Leading Edge Repairs

B. Specific Repair procedures for the components of the Elevators, as listed

in paragraph A., are in the following chapters:
− Chapter 55−21−11, Spar box Skin Plates Repairs
− Chapter 55−21−12, Spar box Ribs Repairs
− Chapter 55−21−18, Spar box Spar Repairs
− Chapter 55−21−19, Elevator Trailing Edge Repairs
− Chapter 55−22−11, Leading Edge Repairs
− Chapter 55−22−12, Elevator Leading Edge Ribs Repairs
− Chapter 55−24−11, Elevator Tips Repairs
− Chapter 55−26−41, Hinge Arm Attach Fitting Repairs
− Chapter 55−26−47, Actuator Attach Fitting Repairs

C. The general repair procedure to be used in the specific repairs (refer

to paragraph B.) are in paragraph 2. of this topic:
− 2.A.(1), Cut out of Damage Area. Figures 201 and 202
− 2.A.(2), Ply Cut out, stepping procedure. Figure 203
− 2.B., Drying of Composite Structure. Figure 202
− 2.C., Honeycomb Core Removal/Replacement. Figures 202 and 204
− 2.C.(3), Cover the Honeycomb Core with Resin. Figure 204
− 2.D., Lay up of adhesive films and Repair Plies. Figure 205
D. The general procedure for repair weight evaluation to be used in the
specific repairs is in paragraph 3. of this topic.

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−20−00 Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

2. General Repair Procedure

NOTE: Before starting a repair, you must do a damage evaluation. Refer to

Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3.

NOTE: This is a general repair procedure for use in the specific repairs
(refer to paragraph 1.B.) and is valid for a total damage up to a
maximum dimension of 60000 mm
(93.00 in
).

A. Cut out of Damage Area and Ply cut out.

(1) Skin cut out.

(a) Make the damage cut out into a regular shape. Refer to relevant
repair Figures201 and 202, radius all the corners by 12 mm
(0.472 in) minimum.
NOTE: The repair areas shown in the repair figures are square.
However, in practice regular geometric shapes such as
circles, triangles, rectangles and trapezoids can be used.
Do not use shape with acute angles.

(b) Mask the area around the outside of the marked cut out.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP PLIES IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Use a suitable pneumatic drill and mini sanding discs to remove
the plies in the damaged area.

NOTE: Determine the number of plies by count as each layer is

removed. Refer to the relevant identification drawing for
number of original plies and orientation.

NOTE: If applicable, remove only the damaged plies.

NOTE: If removing plies down to core level, and the core is not
being removed, care must be taken to prevent damage to the
surface of the core cells.
NOTE: Use a suitable vacuum cleaner or continuous clean, dry air
supply to remove the dust from the repair area.

NOTE: Use the diameter of the mini sanding disc to obtain the
radius of the corners.
NOTE: Carry out Initial Drying prior to stepping the CFRP plies.
Refer to paragraph 2.B.(1).

(2) Ply cut out stepping procedure

(a) Remove the masking tape from around the damage cut out area.
Measure out from the outer edge of the skin cut out 15 mm
(0.591 in) for each ply to be removed, mark the shape of the
outermost ply cut out. Refer to Figure 201.

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−20−00 Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Mask the area around the outermost marked ply cut out.

(c) Remove the CFRP ply down to the first change of orientation
working inwards towards the damage cut out. Refer to Figure 202.

(d) Measure inwards 15 mm (0.591 in) and mark the area for the se

cond ply cut out.

(e) Mask the area between the outermost ply cut out and the second
ply cut out. Refer to Figure 202.
(f) Repeat step (c) for the second ply cut out removing the CFRP ply
down to the second change of orientation.

(g) On completion of ply removal, clean the repair area with a vacu

um cleaner.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(h) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(i) Place a sheet of clear plastic over the repair area and secure
it with adhesive tape. Refer to Figure 201.

(j) Using a suitable marker, draw the outline of the damage cut out
and ply cut outs on to the surface of the plastic sheet.

NOTE: These outlines are to be used as templates when preparing

the repair CFRP plies.
B. Drying of Composite Structure

NOTE: The following paragraph details the different methods for drying
composite structures prior to repair. If the repair area is soaked
with water, it is preferable to carry out an Initial Drying before
starting the repair. The temperatures for Initial Drying should not
exceed 80° C (176° F).

NOTE: For both Initial Drying and Final Drying (prior to repair), the
minimum area to be dried is the area of the repair for R.T. re

pairs and the total area affected by heat for hot−bond repairs.
NOTE: Drying times will depend on the temperature of the repair being
performed. For repairs at 90° C (194° F) max, dry between one and
two hours. For hot bond repairs, dry for twenty four hours. Drying
temperature should be controlled and maintained between 60° C (140°
F) and 80° C (176° F).

(1) Initial Drying

Remove any concentration of water using a suitable syringe or pi

pette, compressed air, hot air gun or by mopping.

(2) Final Drying (prior to repair)

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−20−00 Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Dry the affected area using one of the following methods:

(a) Vacuum Bag and Heater Blanket(s). Refer to Figure 203.

CAUTION: THE FOLLOWING STEP 1 IS APPLICABLE ONLY WHEN DAMAGE
SIZE IS MORE THAN 100 MM (4.0 IN) WIDE.

1 Place a dummy core in the cut out area to act as a support

for the vacuum bag lay up and to prevent heat loss during the
drying cycle.
CAUTION: THE FOLLOWING STEP 2 CAN BE MADE ONLY ON SMALL DAMAGES
NOT EXCEEDING 100 MM (4.0 IN) WIDE.

2 Place a perforated plate or rigid screen (4 mm (0.16 in)

thickness) to support the vacuum bag pressure.
3 Place a thermocouple on the rigid screen surface. Refer to
Figure 203.

4 Cover the screen with the breather cloth.

5 Cover the breather cloth with the heat blanket.

6 Install the vent line on the edge of the heater blanket and
secure.

NOTE: The vent line is to allow a limited air flow over the
area to be dried.

7 Place a thermocouple on the surface of the heater blanket. Re

fer to Figure 203.

8 Cover the repair area with the vacuum bag. Refer to Figure
203.

9 Evacuate the lay up to vacuum (minimum absolute pressure inside

the bag 0,2 bars (2.9 psi)), regulate the vent line to main

tain the vacuum.

10 Dry the affect area for the specified time.

(b) Radiant Heater

NOTE: Before commencing the radiant heat process, a calibration
curve must be calculated to determine the distance from the
composite surface to the heat source. The temperature at
the center of the heated area should not exceed 80° C
(176° F).

1 Position the radiant heat source over the affected area.

NOTE: A combination of several heat sources can be used togeth

er when required.

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−20−00 Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

2 Dry the affected area for the specified time.

(c) Hot Air Gun

1 The method is the same as for radiant heater, a calibration
curve must be calculated to prevent scorching of the composite
structure.

2 Dry the affected area for the specified time.

(d) Oven Drying

1 Oven drying is suitable when the complete part requires to be

dried.

2 Dry the affected area for the specified time.

C. Honeycomb Core Removal/Replacement

(1) Removal

CAUTION: CARE MUST BE TAKEN TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE INNER SKIN.

(a) Remove the honeycomb core in the damage area by suitable mechan

ical means.
CAUTION: STEP (b) APPLICABLE TO STRUCTURAL REPAIRS ONLY.

(b) Leave 10 mm (0.391 in) of undamaged honeycomb core around the

core cut out area (outer skin), refer to Figure 202.

(c) Clean the repair area using a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(2) Replacement
WARNING: ADHESIVE FILM (MATERIAL NO. 08−042A) AND GLASS PREPREG (MA

TERIAL NO. 05−107) ARE DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut two pieces of adhesive film (Material No. 08−042A, only
FM−73M.06) to the shape and size of the repair cut out.

(b) Cut a piece of glassfabric (Material No. 05−107) to the size and
shape of the repair cut out.

(c) Prepare the honeycomb replacement core plug. Refer to Chapter

51−77−11, paragraph 4.J.

NOTE: Ensure same core ribbon as the original.

Page 205
Printed in Germany
55−20−00 Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(d) Lay up the first adhesive film layer on the bottom of the repair
cut out. Refer to paragraph D..
(e) Lay up the glassfabric on top of the adhesive film.

(f) Lay up the second adhesive film layer on top of the glassfabric.
Refer to paragraph D..

WARNING: ADHESIVE FOAM (MATERIAL NO. 08−047) IS DANGEROUS.

(g) Cut a piece of adhesive foam (Material No. 08−047) to the size
and shape of the honeycomb repair plug.

(h) Remove the first protective layer from the adhesive foam and wrap
the adhesive foam around the replacement core plug. Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.B.
(i) Install the cure cycle temperature thermocouples in the repair
area where the honeycomb repair plug is to be installed.

NOTE: The number of thermocouples to be installed depends on the

repair area:

For repair areas between 15000 and 30000 mm
(23.25 and
46.50 in
) 2 thermocouples must be installed.

For repair areas between 30000 and 45000 mm
(46.50 and
69.75 in
) 3 thermocouples must be installed.

For repair areas between 45000 and 60000 mm
(69.75 and
93.00 in
) 4 thermocouples must be installed.
The repair area shall be divided into equal areas and the
thermocouples shall be located in the center of each of
these areas. The thermocouples shall have a turnover of at
least 20 mm (1 in), the whole of which shall make good
contact with the adhesive layer at the bottom of the plug.
(j) Remove the second protective layer from the adhesive foam and
install the replacement core plug into its repair position.

CAUTION: PRIOR TO VACUUM CURE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION, COVER THE EDGES

AROUND THE REPAIR AREA WITH SUITABLE INSULATING MATERIAL TO
PREVENT EXCEEDING 170 °C (338 °F) ON SKIN DURING THE CURE
CYCLE. REFER TO FIGURE 204.

(k) Cover the repair area with the vacuum cure equipment and heat
blanket(s), refer to Figure 204 and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph
5.D.

Page 206
Printed in Germany
55−20−00 Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: ENSURE THAT THE TEMPERATURE MEASURED BY THE BLANKET TEMPERA

TURE CONTROL THERMOCOUPLE DOES NOT EXCEED 170 °C (338 °F).
(l) Cure the installed repair materials at 90 °C + 10/− 0 °C (194 °F
+ 18/− 0 °F) under vacuum conditions (minimum vacuum inside the
bag 0.8 bars (11.6 psi)) for a period of four hours.

(m) On completion of the cure cycle, remove the vacuum cure equipment
and heat blanket(s) from the repair area installed in step (k).
(n) Cut the thermocouple wire as close to the honeycomb core as pos

sible and leave the thermocouples in place.

NOTE: Satisfactory cure of the adhesive foam can be determined by

a change of color of the adhesive foam from blue to green.
(3) Cover the core with resin

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(b) Mask the area around the skin step cut out nearest to the honey

comb core, refer to Figure 202.

NOTE: This is to prevent the resin applied in the following step

from leaking over the ply step cut outs.

WARNING: THE RESIN (MATERIAL NO. 05−090) IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Cover the exposed honeycomb core cells with the resin (Material
No. 05−090) to a depth of approximately 5 mm (0.197 in). Make
sure all the cells are completely covered.

CAUTION: LET THE RESIN GEL FOR TWENTY MINUTES AT ROOM TEMPERATURE
BEFORE CURING.
(d) Protect the repair area to prevent contamination ingress. Cure
the resin at 50° C (122° F) for a period of two hours.

(e) On completion of the cure cycle remove the protection and abrade
the surface of the resin to obtain a smooth finish.

NOTE: Make sure that the surface contour is maintained.

(f) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(g) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

D. Lay up of Adhesive films and Repair Plies (Refer to Figure 205)

Page 207
Printed in Germany
55−20−00 Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Prepare the Carbon Prepreg repair plies (Material No. 05−091 or
05−092) for the laminate repair considering orientation and sequence,
refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C.

NOTE: Use the templates fabricated in paragraph 2.A.(2)(j) to deter

mine the size and shape of the repair plies.

WARNING: ADHESIVE FILM (MATERIAL NO. 08−042 OR 08−042A) IS DANGEROUS.

(2) Cut a piece of adhesive film (Material No. 08−042 or 08−042A) to the
size and shape of the repair area. Refer to relevant repair Figure
205.

(3) Remove the protective layer from one side of the adhesive film and
place the unprotected side over the repair area.

(4) Using a suitable heat source (maximum 60° C (140° F)) apply the heat
to the protected side of the adhesive film.

(5) Working from the centre of the adhesive film, smooth or roller the
adhesive film to ensure a wrinkle free finish and to remove any
trapped air. On completion, remove the remaining protective layer.

(6) Cover the repair area with the following vacuum equipment:
Non−perforated parting film, glass fabric cloth and vacuum bag. Apply
a vacuum of 0.2 bars (2.9 psi) for 5 minutes in order to compact
the ply. Partially remove the vacuum bag to install the next repair
ply.

(7) Remove the protective layer from the next repair ply and place the
repair ply on the adhesive film. Be sure to maintain the correct
orientation.

(8) Repeat steps (4), (5) and (6) for the repair ply.

(9) Lay up the remaining individual repair plies, ensuring a 15 mm

(0.590 in) overlap for each ply. Repeat steps (7), (4), (5) and (6)
for each repair ply.

WARNING: ADHESIVE FILM (MATERIAL NO. 08−042 OR 08−042A) IS DANGEROUS.

(10) Cut one piece of adhesive film (Material No. 08−042 or 08−042A) to
the correct size and shape of the repair area. Refer to relevant re

pair Figure 205.
(11) Repeat steps (3), (4), (5) and (6).

(12) Cover the repair area with the vacuum cure equipment and heat blan

ket(s). Refer to Figure 205 and Chapter 51−77−11.

(13) Cure the installed repair materials at 120° C (248° F) for 90 min

utes under vacuum conditions (minimum vacuum required 0.8 bar (11.6
psi)). Refer Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.

Page 208
Printed in Germany
55−20−00 Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: HEATING RATE MUST NOT EXCEED 1° C/MINUTE (1.8° F/MINUTE).

(14) Remove the vacuum, cure equipment and heat blanket(s) from the repair
area on completion of the cure cycle.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(15) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

WARNING: PORE FILLER (MATERIAL NO. 16−050, NO. 16−051 AND NO. 16−052 ARE
DANGEROUS.
CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(16) Cover the repair surface with pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or
16−051 or 16−052) and remove it, filling only in holes and surface
porous, avoiding a continuous layer.

(17) Let cure the filler repair, material (refer to manufacturer specifi

cation for full data).

NOTE: Do not heat the part during the cure cycle.

Page 209
Printed in Germany
55−20−00 Feb 01/11
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Damage Area and Ply Cut Out

Figure 201

Printed in Germany
55-20-00 Nov
Page 210
01/03
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Damage and Ply Cut Out Stepping Procedure

Figure 202

Printed in Germany
55-20-00 Nov
Page 211
01/03
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Drying of Composite Structure

Figure 203

Printed in Germany
55-20-00 Nov
Page 212
01/03
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Vacuum Bag and Heat Blanket for Honeycomb Core Plug Installation
Figure 204

Printed in Germany
55-20-00 PagesFeb213/214
01/02
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Resin Protection and Lay-Up

Figure 205 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-20-00 PagesFeb215/216
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Vacuum Bag and Heating Blanket for Repair Plies

Figure 205 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-20-00 Feb
Page 217
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

3. General Repair Weight Evaluation

A. Repair Weight Evaluation

(1) Identify the applicable repair Figure for the damage found on the
component. For example, Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 201, Config. 1,
Figure 207. Refer to Figure 206, sheet 1 as example.

(2) Identify the repair materials used in the repair. For example, refer
to the list of repair materials below for Chapter 55−21−11, Page
Block 201, Config. 1, Figure 207.

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbon Fabric Prepreg − Material No. 05−091 or 05−092,

refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Glass Fabric Prepreg − Material No. 05−107, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Adhesive Film − Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Epoxy Resin − Material No. 05−090, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Honeycomb Core Plug − Material No. 05−087, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Adhesive Foam − Material No. 08−047A or 08−047B,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Pore Filler − Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(3) Perform weight removed analysis to calculate the total weight removed
(Wtr). Refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 001, Config. 1,
production drawings of the Elevator and Figure 206, sheet 2 as
example.

(a) Obtain weight removed due to: Paint scheme, external film
adhesive, CFRP plies, film adhesive (Core to outer skin), core,
insert potted areas (in case that repair is affecting inserts),
film adhesive (Core to internal skin).

NOTE: It is not necessary to consider weight removed for the

paint scheme when it is equal to paint scheme applied after
repair.

(b) Obtain Wtr by adding all single weights removed.

NOTE: Material quantity removed depends on the repair type
(Structural or non structural) and the repair
dimensions/details.

Page 219
Printed in Germany
55−20−00 Feb 01/09
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(4) Perform weight added analysis to calculate the total weight added
(Wta). Refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 201, Config. 1, Figure
207 and Figure 206, sheet 3 as example.

(a) Obtain weight added due to:

1 Structural Repairs

Core replacement:
− Film adhesive.
− GFRP prepreg.
− Foam adhesive.
− Core plug.
− Resin applied for core cells closing.

Repair Plies:
− Film adhesive.
− CFRP prepreg.
Surface protection:
− Pore filler.
− Paint scheme.

NOTE: It is not necessary to consider weight added for the

paint scheme when it is equal to original paint scheme.

2 Non Structural Repairs

Core replacement:
− Core Plug and Resin used for the core cells filling for non
structural repairs between 1000 mm
(1.55 in
) and 15000 mm

(23.25 in
).
− Resin used for core filling for non structural repair up to
1000 mm
(1.55 in
).
Repair Plies:
− CFRP dry fabric.
− Laminating resin.

Surface Protection:
− Pore Filler.
− Paint scheme.
NOTE: It is not necessary to consider weight for the paint scheme
when it is equal to original paint scheme.

Page 220
Printed in Germany
55−20−00 Feb 01/09
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Obtain Wta by adding all single weights added.

NOTE: Material quantity added depends on the repair type

(Structural or non structural) and the repair
dimensions/details.

(5) Calculate weight increment due to repair (WI2): the weight increment
due to repair is the result of the difference between the total
weight added (Wta) and the total weight removed (Wtr), WI2 = Wta −
Wtr.

Printed in Germany
55−20−00 PagesFeb221/222
01/09
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Figure Example

Figure 206 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−20−00 PagesFeb223/224
01/09
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Weight Removed Analysis Example

Figure 206 (sheet 2)

Page 225
Printed in Germany
55−20−00 Feb 01/09
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Weight Added Analysis Example

Figure 206 (sheet 3)

Page 226
Printed in Germany
55−20−00 Feb 01/09
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR SPAR BOX

1. Structural Arrangement

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Structural Arrangement Figure 1

− Elevator P/N reidentification Figure 2
− Elevator spars configuration Figure 3
1 Skin Plates Chapter 55−21−11
2 Ribs Chapter 55−21−12
3 Spars Chapter 55−21−18
4 Trailing Edge Chapter 55−21−19
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/ Service Bulletin List.

NOTE: For elevator configuration information, refer to Figure 2.

NOTE: For spar configuration information, refer to Figure 3.

NOTE: It is possible to install the elevator from one A/C to another. It
is the responsibility of the operator to check the P/N of the eleva
tor installed on a given A/C before the supplied table is used.

Printed in Germany
55−21−00 MayPage 1
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structural Arrangement
Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55-21-00 FebPage 2
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator P/N reidentification

Figure 2

Printed in Germany
55−21−00 FebPage 3
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator spars configuration

Figure 3

Printed in Germany
55−21−00 FebPage 4
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR SPAR BOX − ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 101.

CAUTION: OBEY THE GIVEN INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE WHICH LEADS TO THE
APPLICABLE INSPECTION PROGRAM DEFINED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPEC

TIONS (SRI) OF THE SRM, IF NECESSARY.

CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER TO

PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

1. General
NOTE: CONFIG−1 is applicable before modification 30565G00357 only. For ef

fectivity refer to the Modification/Service Bulletin List given in
Chapter 55−20−00 Page Block 001.

NOTE: For definition of allowable damage refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For Damage Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories, refer to Chapter
51−11−14 − CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

This topic contains the allowable damage and related data applicable to the
Elevator Spar Box structure, and it is valid as shown in Table 101. This
data is necessary to find the correct repair procedure.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004,
005, 006, 007, 008, 009,
010, 011, 012, 013, 014,
015, 016
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft
Type
Table 101
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUCTION
of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data about all
weight variants and their required information for allowable damage
and repair applicability.

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 1, Paragraph 1.
− Chapter 55−21−18, Page Block 101, Config 1 and 2, Paragraph 1.
− Chapter 55−22−11, Page Block 101, Paragraph 1.
− Chapter 55−22−12, Page Block 101, Paragraph 1.

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

2. Damage Evaluation

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 1, Paragraph 2.
− Chapter 55−21−18, Page Block 101, Config 1 and 2, Paragraph 2.
− Chapter 55−22−11, Page Block 101, Paragraph 2.
− Chapter 55−22−12, Page Block 101, Paragraph 2.

3. Type of Damage
NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 1, Paragraph 3.
− Chapter 55−21−18, Page Block 101, Config 1 and 2, Paragraph 3.
− Chapter 55−22−11, Page Block 101, Paragraph 3.
− Chapter 55−22−12, Page Block 101, Paragraph 3.
4. Distance between Damage Areas, Distance between Repair Areas and Distance
between Damaged Area per Liquid Ingress and an existing Repair Area

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 1, Paragraph 4.
− Chapter 55−21−18, Page Block 101, Config 1 and 2, Paragraph 4.
− Chapter 55−22−11, Page Block 101, Paragraph 4.
− Chapter 55−22−12, Page Block 101, Paragraph 4.

5. Repair Zones

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 1, Paragraph 5.
− Chapter 55−21−18, Page Block 101, Config 1 and 2, Paragraph 5.

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

6. Allowable Damage Description/Criteria

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION DIAGRAM INSTRUCTION REF

TYPE CATEGORY
ERENCE
Upper Skin (all Zones Delamina
102 INAC
B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
except Leading Edge) tion and TIVE
Debonding
. This al

lowable
damage data
is inactive
since revi

sion dated
Aug 01/10,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−21−11,
Page Block
101, Config
1, Para

graph 9.B.
Upper Skin (all Zones Lineal Dam
101 INAC
B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
except Leading Edge) age. TIVE
This al

lowable
damage data
is inactive
since revi

sion dated
Aug 01/10,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−21−11,
Page Block
101, Config
1, Para

graph 9.A.

Table 102

Page 103
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION DIAGRAM INSTRUCTION REF

TYPE CATEGORY
ERENCE
Upper Skin (Repair Zones Liquid In
109 INAC
C −
1 thru 4 and Sandwich gress TIVE
Areas of Repair Zone 5) . This al

lowable
damage data
is inactive
since revi

sion dated
Aug 01/10,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−21−11,
Page Block
101, Config
1, Para

graph 9.D.
Upper Skin, Leading Edge Delamina
103 INAC
B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
(Zone 06, Sub zone A) tion and TIVE
Debonding
. This al

lowable
damage data
is inactive
since revi

sion dated
Aug 01/10,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−21−11,
Page Block
101, Config
1, Para

graph 9.C.

Table 102

Page 104
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION DIAGRAM INSTRUCTION REF

TYPE CATEGORY
ERENCE
Upper Skin, Leading Edge Lineal Dam
103 INAC
B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
(Zone 06, Sub zone A) age TIVE
. This al

lowable
damage data
is inactive
since revi

sion dated
Aug 01/10,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−21−11,
Page Block
101, Config
1, Para

graph 9.C.
Lower Skin (all Zones Delamina
102 INAC
B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
except Leading Edge) tion and TIVE
Debonding
. This al

lowable
damage data
is inactive
since revi

sion dated
Aug 01/10,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−21−11,
Page Block
101, Config
1, Para

graph 9.B.

Table 102

Page 105
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION DIAGRAM INSTRUCTION REF

TYPE CATEGORY
ERENCE
Lower Skin (all Zones Lineal Dam
101 INAC
B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
except Leading Edge) age TIVE
. This al

lowable
damage data
is inactive
since revi

sion dated
Aug 01/10,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−21−11,
Page Block
101, Config
1, Para

graph 9.A.
Lower Skin (Repair Zones Liquid In
109 INAC
C −
1 thru 4 and Sandwich gress TIVE
Areas of Repair Zone 5) . This al

lowable
damage data
is inactive
since revi

sion dated
Aug 01/10,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−21−11,
Page Block
101, Config
1, Para

graph 9.D.

Table 102

Page 106
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION DIAGRAM INSTRUCTION REF

TYPE CATEGORY
ERENCE
Lower Skin, Leading Edge Delamina
103 INAC
B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
(Zone 06, Sub zone A) tion and TIVE
Debonding
. This al

lowable
damage data
is inactive
since revi

sion dated
Aug 01/10,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−21−11,
Page Block
101, Config
1, Para

graph 9.C.
Lower Skin, Leading Edge Lineal Dam
103 INAC
B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
(Zone 06, Sub zone A) age TIVE
. This al

lowable
damage data
is inactive
since revi

sion dated
Aug 01/10,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−21−11,
Page Block
101, Config
1, Para

graph 9.C.

Table 102

Page 107
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION DIAGRAM INSTRUCTION REF

TYPE CATEGORY
ERENCE
Spar (all Zones), before Delamina
105 INAC
B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
Mod. 22497G0128 tion and TIVE
Debonding
. This al

lowable
damage data
is inactive
since revi

sion dated
Aug 01/10,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−21−18,
Page Block
101, Config
1, Para

graph 9.B.
Spar (all Zones), before Lineal Dam
104 INAC
B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
Mod. 22497G0128 age TIVE
. This al

lowable
damage data
is inactive
since revi

sion dated
Aug 01/10,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−21−18,
Page Block
101, Config
1, Para

graph 9.A.

Table 102

Page 108
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION DIAGRAM INSTRUCTION REF

TYPE CATEGORY
ERENCE
Spar (Zones 01, 02 and Delamina
106 INAC
B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
03), after Mod. tion and TIVE
22497G0128 Debonding
. This al

lowable
damage data
is inactive
since revi

sion dated
Aug 01/10,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−21−18,
Page Block
101, Config
2, Para

graph 9.A.
Spar (Zones 01, 02 and Lineal Dam
106 INAC
B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
03), after Mod. age TIVE
22497G0128 . This al

lowable
damage data
is inactive
since revi

sion dated
Aug 01/10,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−21−18,
Page Block
101, Config
2, Para

graph 9.A.

Table 102

Page 109
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION DIAGRAM INSTRUCTION REF

TYPE CATEGORY
ERENCE
Leading Edge Access Pan
Delamina
107 INAC
B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
els tion and TIVE
Debonding
. This al

lowable
damage data
is inactive
since revi

sion dated
Aug 01/10,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−22−11,
Page Block
101, Para

graph 8.A.
Leading Edge Access Pan
Lineal Dam
107 INAC
B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
els age TIVE
. This al

lowable
damage data
is inactive
since revi

sion dated
Aug 01/10,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−22−11,
Page Block
101, Para

graph 8.A.

Table 102

Page 110
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION DIAGRAM INSTRUCTION REF

TYPE CATEGORY
ERENCE
Leading Edge Ribs Delamina
108 INAC
B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
tion and TIVE
Debonding
. This al

lowable
damage data
is inactive
since revi

sion dated
Aug 01/10,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−22−12,
Page Block
101, Para

graph 8.A.
Leading Edge Ribs Lineal Dam
108 INAC
B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
age TIVE
. This al

lowable
damage data
is inactive
since revi

sion dated
Aug 01/10,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−22−12,
Page Block
101, Para

graph 8.A.

Table 102
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

7. Allowable Damage

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 1, Paragraph 7.
− Chapter 55−21−18, Page Block 101, Config 1 and 2, Paragraph 7.
Page 111
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

− Chapter 55−22−11, Page Block 101, Paragraph 6.

− Chapter 55−22−12, Page Block 101, Paragraph 6.
8. Repair Limits

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 1, Paragraph 8.
− Chapter 55−21−18, Page Block 101, Config 1 and 2, Paragraph 8.
− Chapter 55−22−11, Page Block 101, Paragraph 7.
− Chapter 55−22−12, Page Block 101, Paragraph 7.

Page 112
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits − Outer Skin (of the Skin Panel) of the
Elevator Spar Box − All Zones except Leading Edge
Diagram 101
Pages 113/114
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC
REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN
S
SIZE TION
ON CATEGORY
CA GO Y DAMAGE X mm REPAIRS Y mm
(in) (in)
Next C−Check or The greater
Chapter 51−77−12, 20 months, which
Chapter 51−77−12, value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.969
Temporary C Immediately
Paragraph 2.A <2> ever occurs Paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
first. 2.5 Lmax.
Linear damage
Li d i
in (1) Non Structural
outer skin (with Next C−Check or The greater
Repair, Chapter Chapter SRI
no damage in in
20 months, which
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Permanent B 55−21−11, Page None 55−21−00, Page
ternal sections) ever occurs (1.97 in) or in)
Block 201, Config Block 101
nicks, gouges, first. <3> 2.5 Lmax.
1, <2>
abrasions and
scratches. Structural Re

The greater
pair, Chapter Chapter SRI
<1> value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(2) Permanent B 55−21−11, Page Immediately None 55−21−00, Page
(1.97 in) or in)
Block 201, Config Block 101
2.5 Lmax.
1
(3) − − Contact AIRBUS Immediately − − − −

Table 103
<1> This allowable damage data is inactive since revision dated Aug 01/10, it has been moved to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 1, Paragraph 9.A.

<2> For non structural repairs, rivets and inserts must not be damaged.

<3> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Pages 115/116
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits − Elevator Skin Structure (Inner or Outer
and Core) − All Zones except Leading Edge
Diagram 102
Pages 117/118
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC
REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN
S
SIZE TION
ON CATEGORY
CA GO Y DAMAGES X mm REPAIRS Y mm
(in) (in)
Next C−Check or The greater
Chapter 51−77−12, 20 months, which
Chapter 51−77−12, value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.969
Temporary C Immediately
Paragraph 2.A <2> ever occurs Paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
first. 2.5 Lmax.
(1) Non Structural
Next C−Check or The greater
Repair, Chapter Chapter SRI
20 months, which
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Permanent B 55−21−11, Page None 55−21−00, Page
ever occurs (1.97 in) or in)
Superficial dam
Block 201, Config Block 101
first. <3> 2.5 Lmax.
age, delamination 1 <2>
( ith or without
(with ith t The greater
visible cracks value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
and holes) and Temporary C None Immediately 15 months No
(1.97 in) or in)
debondings. Lin
2.5 Lmax.
ear damage depth
greater than (2) Structural Re
The greater
0.75 mm (0.029 pair, Chapter Chapter SRI value of 50 mm
50 mm (1.97
in). Permanent B 55−21−11, Page 15 months None 55−21−00, Page (1.97 in) or
in)
Block 201, Config Block 101 2.5 Lmax.
<1>
1
Structural Re

The greater
pair, Chapter Chapter SRI
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(3) Permanent B 55−21−11, Page Immediately None 55−21−00, Page
(1.97 in) or in)
Block 201, Config Block 101
2.5 Lmax.
1
(4) − − Contact AIRBUS Immediately − − − −

Table 104
<1> This allowable damage data is inactive since revision dated Aug 01/10, it has been moved to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 1, Paragraph 9.B.

<2> For non structural repairs, rivets and inserts must not be damaged.

<3> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Pages 119/120
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits − Elevator Skin Structure (Outer Skin) −
Leading Edge at Zone 06, Subzone A
Diagram 103
Pages 121/122
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN

DAMAGE REPAIR AC
REPAIR
TYPE OF DAMAGE REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION DAMAGES X mm REPAIRS Y mm
SIZE TION CATEGORY
(in) (in)
Next C−Check or The greater
Chapter 51−77−12 20 months, which
Chapter 51−77−12 value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately
paragraph 2.A ever occurs paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
Linear damage in first. 2.5 Lmax.
leading edge
(scratches) (1) Non Structural
Next C−Check or The greater
Repair, Chapter Chapter SRI
<1> 20 months, which
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Permanent B 55−21−11, Page None 55−21−00, Page
ever occurs first (1.97 in) or in)
Block 201, Config Block 101
<2> 2.5 Lmax.
1
Next C−Check or The greater
Chapter 51−77−12 20 months, which
Chapter 51−77−12 value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately
paragraph 2.A ever occurs paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
first. 2.5 Lmax.
Superficial dam
(2) Non Structural
Next C−Check or The greater
age, delamina
Repair, Chapter Chapter SRI
20 months, which
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
tions with or Permanent B 55−21−11, Page None 55−21−00, Page
ever occurs first (1.97 in) or in)
without visible Block 201, Config Block 101
<2> 2.5 Lmax.
cracks and 1
hl
holes. Structural Re

The greater
<1> pair, Chapter Chapter SRI
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(3) Permanent B 55−21−11, Page Immediately None 55−21−00, Page
(1.97 in) or in)
Block 201, Config Block 101
2.5 Lmax.
1
(4) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − −

Table 105
<1> This allowable damage data is inactive since revision dated Aug 01/10, it has been moved to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 1, Paragraph 9.C.

<2> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Pages 123/124
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits − Outer Skin (of the Spar) of the Eleva

tor Spar Box − Zone 01
Diagram 104
Pages 125/126
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN

DAMAGE REPAIR AC
REPAIR
TYPE OF DAMAGE REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION DAMAGES X mm REPAIRS Y mm
SIZE TION CATEGORY
(in) (in)
Next C−Check or The greater
Chapter 51−77−12 20 months, which
Chapter 51−77−12 value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately
paragraph 2.A ever occurs paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
Linear damage in first. 2.5 Lmax.
outer
t skin
ki (with
( ith (1)
Next C−Check or The greater
no damage in in
Chapter SRI
Chapter 51−77−12 20 months, which
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
ternal sections) Permanent B None 55−21−00, Page
paragraph 3.B ever occurs (1.97 in) or in)
nicks, gouges, Block 101
first. <2> 2.5 Lmax.
abrasions and
scratches The greater
Chapter 55−21−18, Chapter SRI
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
<1> (2) Permanent B Page Block 201, Immediately None 55−21−00, Page
(1.97 in) or in)
Config 1 Block 201
2.5 Lmax.
(3) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − −

Table 106
<1> This allowable damage data is inactive since revision dated Aug 01/10, it has been moved to Chapter 55−21−18, Page Block 101, Config 1, Paragraph 9.A.

<2> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Pages 127/128
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits − Elevator Spar Structure − Zone 01

Diagram 105

Pages 129/130
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN

DAMAGE REPAIR AC
REPAIR
TYPE OF DAMAGE REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION DAMAGES X mm REPAIRS Y mm
SIZE TION CATEGORY
(in) (in)
Next C−Check or The greater
Chapter 51−77−12 20 months, which
Chapter 51−77−12 value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately
paragraph 2.A ever occurs paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
Superficial dam
first. 2.5 Lmax.
ages, ddelamina

l i (1)
Next C−Check or The greater
tions (with or Chapter SRI
Refer to Table 20 months, which
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
without visible Permanent B None 55−21−00, Page
108. ever occurs (1.97 in) or in)
cracks and Block 101
first. <2> 2.5 Lmax.
holes), and de

bondings. The greater
Chapter 55−21−18, Chapter SRI
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
<1> (2) Permanent B Page Block 201, Immediately None 55−21−00, Page
(1.97 in) or in)
Config 1 Block 201
2.5 Lmax.
(3) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − −

Table 107
<1> This allowable damage data is inactive since revision dated Aug 01/10, it has been moved to Chapter 55−21−18, Page Block 101, Config 1, Paragraph 9.B.

<2> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Pages 131/132
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEMENT OF SANDWICH PANEL APPLICABLE REPAIR OF SRM

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE DEPTH ACCESSIBILITY EXTENSION
AFFECTED CHAPTER 51
Superficial damages and
Damaged area less than
delamination (with or Partial sandwich thick
One sandwich skin plus Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph
− or equal to 1000 mm

without cracks and/or ness affected core. 2.H.
(1.50 in
).
holes)
Superficial damages and Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph
delamination (with or Partial sandwich thick
One sandwich skin plus Damaged area greater than 2.A.(2). Option D, three
−
without cracks and/or ness affected core. 1000 mm
(1.50 in
). wet lay−up layers,
holes) orientation ±45/0−90/±45
Superficial damages and
Both skin plus core Damaged area less than
delamination (with or Full sandwich thickness Access only from external Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph
(Center area of sandwich or equal to 1000 mm

without cracks and/or affected. face. 2.H.
panel) (1.50 in
).
holes)

Table 108

Pages 133/134
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits − Elevator Spar Structure − Repair Zones
01, 02, 03
Diagram 106
Pages 135/136
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN

DAMAGE REPAIR AC
REPAIR
TYPE OF DAMAGE REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION DAMAGES X mm REPAIRS Y mm
SIZE TION CATEGORY
(in) (in)
Next C−Check or The greater
Chapter 51−77−12 20 months, which
Chapter 51−77−12 value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately
paragraph 2.A ever occurs paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
first. 2.5 Lmax.
Linear damage (1)
(nicks, gouges, Next C−Check or The greater
Chapter SRI
abrasions and Chapter 51−77−12 20 months, which
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Permanent B None 55−21−00, Page
scratches) with paragraph 3.B ever occurs first (1.97 in) or in)
Block 101
no damage in in
<2> 2.5 Lmax.
ternal
l section
i The greater
Chapter 55−21−18, Chapter SRI
<1> value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(2) Permanent B Page Block 201, Immediately None 55−21−00, Page
(1.97 in) or in)
Config 2 Block 201
2.5 Lmax.
(3) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − −
Next C−Check or The greater
Chapter 51−77−12 20 months, which
Chapter 51−77−12 value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Superficial dam
Temporary C Immediately
ages and dela
paragraph 2.A ever occurs paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
first. 2.5 Lmax.
minations (with (4)
or without vis
Next C−Check or The greater
Chapter SRI
ible cracks and Refer to Table 20 months, which
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Permanent B None 55−21−00, Page
holes). Linear 110 ever occurs first (1.97 in) or in)
Block 101
damages with <2> 2.5 Lmax.
d h greater
depth The greater
than 0.63 mm Chapter 55−21−18, Chapter SRI
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(0.024 in). (5) Permanent B Page Block 201, Immediately None 55−21−00, Page
(1.97 in) or in)
<1> Config 2 Block 201
2.5 Lmax.
(6) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − −

Table 109
<1> This allowable damage data is inactive since revision dated Aug 01/10, it has been moved to Chapter 55−21−18, Page Block 101, Config 2, Paragraph 9.A.

<2> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Pages 137/138
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

APPLICABLE RE

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE DEPTH ACCESSIBILITY EXTENSION PAIR OF SRM
CHAPTER 51
Superficial
According to
damages and
allowable dam
Chapter
delamination Partial thick

− age limit of 51−77−12 para

(with or with
ness affected
relevant chap
graph 3.B.
out cracks
ter.
and/or holes)
Superficial
According to
damages and
Full sandwich Access only allowable dam
Chapter
delamination
thickness af
from external age limit of 51−77−13 para

(with or with

fected face. relevant chap
graph 2.H.
out cracks
ter.
and/or holes)

Table 110

Page 139
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits − Elevator Leading Edge Access Panels
Diagram 107

Page 140
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN

DAMAGE REPAIR AC
REPAIR
TYPE OF DAMAGE REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION DAMAGE X mm REPAIRS Y mm
SIZE TION CATEGORY
(in) (in)
Next C−Check or The greater
Chapter 51−77−12 20 months, which
Chapter 51−77−12 value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately
Linear damage in paragraph 2.A ever occurs paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
leading edge first. 2.5 Lmax.
(scratches) (1)
Next C−Check or The greater
Chapter SRI
<1> Chapter 51−77−12 20 months, which
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Permanent B None 55−21−00, Page
paragraph 3.B ever occurs first (1.97 in) or in)
Block 101
<2> 2.5 Lmax.
Next C−Check or The greater
Superficial dam
Chapter 51−77−12 20 months, which
Chapter 51−77−12 value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately
ages and dela
paragraph 2.A ever occurs paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
minations with first. 2.5 Lmax.
(2)
or without vis
Next C−Check or The greater
ible cracks and Chapter SRI
Refer to Table 20 months, which
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
holes. Permanent B None 55−21−00, Page
110 ever occurs first (1.97 in) or in)
Block 101
<1> <2> 2.5 Lmax.
(3) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − −

Table 111
<1> This allowable damage data is inactive since revision dated Aug 01/10, it has been moved to Chapter 55−22−11, Page Block 101, Paragraph 8.A.

<2> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Pages 141/142
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits − Elevator Leading Edge Ribs

Diagram 108

Pages 143/144
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN

DAMAGE REPAIR AC
REPAIR
TYPE OF DAMAGE REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION DAMAGES X mm REPAIRS Y mm
SIZE TION CATEGORY
(in) (in)
Next C−Check or The greater
Chapter 51−77−12 20 months, which
Chapter 51−77−12 value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately
paragraph 2.A ever occurs paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
first. 2.5 Lmax.
(1)
Linear damage Next C−Check or The greater
(nicks, gouges Chapter SRI
Chapter 51−77−12 20 months, which
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
and scratches). Permanent B None 55−21−00, Page
paragraph 3.B ever occurs (1.97 in) or in)
Block 101
<1> first. <2> 2.5 Lmax.
The greater
Chapter SRI
Chapter 55−22−12, value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(2) Permanent B Immediately None 55−21−00, Page
Page Block 201 (1.97 in) or in)
Block 201
2.5 Lmax.
Next C−Check or The greater
Chapter 51−77−12 20 months, which
Chapter 51−77−12 value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately
paragraph 2.A ever occurs paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
Superficial dam
first. 2.5 Lmax.
ages and dela
(3)
minations (with Next C−Check or The greater
Chapter SRI
or without vis
Refer to Table 20 months, which
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Permanent B None 55−21−00, Page
ible cracks and 110 ever occurs first (1.97 in) or in)
Block 101
holes). <2> 2.5 Lmax.
<1> The greater
Chapter SRI
Chapter 55−22−12, value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(4) Permanent B Immediately None 55−21−00, Page
Page Block 201 (1.97 in) or in)
Block 201
2.5 Lmax.

Table 112
<1> This allowable damage data is inactive since revision dated Aug 01/10, it has been moved to Chapter 55−22−12, Page Block 101, Paragraph 8.A.

<2> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Pages 145/146
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Liquid Ingress Flow Chart − Elevator Sandwich Structure of Upper and Lower
Skins
Diagram 109 (sheet 1)
Page 147
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Weight Assessment − Elevator

Diagram 109 (sheet 2)

Page 148
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for Liquid Ingress − Elevator Sandwich
Structure of Upper and Lower Skins (Repair Zones 1 thru 4 and Sandwich Areas
of Repair Zone 5)
Diagram 109 (sheet 3)
Pages 149/150
55−21−00
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MAXIMUM NUM
MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN

DAMAGE REPAIR AC
REPAIR TIME LIMIT BE
REPAIR LIFE LIM
BER OF DAM

TYPE OF DAMAGE REPAIR REFERENCE INSPECTION DAMAGES X REPAIRS Y
SIZE TION CATEGORY FORE REPAIR IT AGES PER
ELEVATOR mm (in) mm (in)
1200 FH or 1500
FC or 200 Days, Weight Li
Paragraph 4. Paragraph
Temporary C Chapter 51−75−00 Immediately None
whichever occurs mitation <4> <5> 4. <5>
first
(1) Chapter
Liquid Ingress 1200 FH or 1500
55−21−11, Chapter 55−21−11, Chapter 55−21−11,
Damages in Sand
FC or 200 Days, Weight Li
Paragraph
Permanent Page Block Page Block 201, None Page Block 201, Paragraph 4.
wich Structure whichever occurs mitation <4> 4.
201, Con
Config.1 <6> <7> Config.1
of Upper and first <8>
fig.1
Lower Skins <1>
<2> <3> Chapter
55−21−11, Chapter 55−21−11, Chapter 55−21−11,
Weight Li
Paragraph
(2) Permanent Page Block Page Block 201, Immediately None Page Block 201, Paragraph 4.
mitation <4> 4.
201, Con
Config.1 <7> <9> Config.1
fig.1
(3) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − − −

Table 113
<1> This allowable damage data is inactive since revision dated Aug 01/10, it has been moved to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 1, Paragraph 9.D.

<2> This allowable damages table for liquid ingress damaged areas is only valid after thermographic and tap test inspections according to NTM, Chapter 55−20−07. If de

bonding is found at any of the liquid ingress damaged areas after tap test inspection according to NTM, Chapter 51−10−03, Page Block 501, the liquid ingress damaged
areas must be repaired according to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 201, Config. 1.

<3> This allowable damages table for liquid ingress damaged areas are only valid for the Repair Zones 1 thru 4 and Sandwich Areas of Repair Zone 5 of the elevator
skins.

<4> Liquid Ingress allowable damages and repair limits are only applicable if the weight of the Elevator is less than the maximum allowable weight limits. Refer to Dia

gram 109 and CMM, Chapter 55−21−15, Page Block 501.

<5> Distance between allowable damage areas per liquid ingress and repair areas must be also taken into account.

<6> For damaged area size up to 1000 mm
(1.55 in
), perform permanent non structural repair according to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 201, Config.1, paragraph 5.D. For
damaged area size between 1000 mm
(1.55 in
) and 5000 mm
(36.45 in
), perform non structural repair according toChapter 55−21−11, Page Block 201, Config.1, paragraph
5.E.

<7> During repair process, affected core must be systematically removed and repaired as follows:

When core is exposed after outer face cut out, perform an initial drying of damaged structure.

Remove affected core.

Page 151
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Perform a final drying of damaged structure.

Replace affected core by a new one as required in relevant repair.

<8> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

<9> For damaged area size between 5000 mm
(7.75 in
) and 15000 mm
(23.25 in
), perform permanent non structural repair according to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 201,
Config.1, paragraph 5.E. For damaged area size between 15000 mm
(23.25 in
) and 60000 mm
(93 in
), perform structural repair according to Chapter 55−21−11, Page
Block 201, Config.1.

Page 152
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR SPAR BOX − ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 101.

CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER TO

PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: OBEY THE GIVEN INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE WHICH LEADS TO THE
APPLICABLE INSPECTION PROGRAM DEFINED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPEC

TIONS (SRI) OF THE SRM, IF NECESSARY.

1. General
NOTE: CONFIG−2 is applicable after modification 30565G00357 only. For effec

tivity refer to the Modification/Service Bulletin List given in Chap

ter 55−20−00 Page Block 001.

NOTE: For definition of allowable damage refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For Damage Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories, refer to Chapter
51−11−14 − CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

This topic contains the allowable damage and related data applicable to the
Elevator Spar Box structure and it is valid as shown in Table 101. This
data is necessary to find the correct repair procedure.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004,
005, 006, 007, 008, 009,
010, 011, 012, 013, 014,
015, 016
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft
Type
Table 101
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUCTION
of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data about all
weight variants and their required information for allowable damage
and repair applicability.

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−21−18, Page Block 101, Config 2, Paragraph 1.
2. Damage Evaluation

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−2
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

− Chapter 55−21−18, Page Block 101, Config 2, Paragraph 2.

3. Type of Damage

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−21−18, Page Block 101, Config 2, Paragraph 3.

4. Distance Between Damage Areas and Distance Between Repair Areas

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−21−18, Page Block 101, Config 2, Paragraph 4.
5. Repair Zones

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−21−18, Page Block 101, Config 2, Paragraph 5.

CAUTION: ALLOWABLE DAMAGE LIMITS ON SPAR ARE APPLICABLE TO ELEVATORS AFTER

MODIFICATION 22497G0128. FOR THE EFFECTIVITY OF THE GIVEN MODIFI

CATION, REFER TO THE MODIFICATION/SERVICE BULLETIN LIST GIVEN IN
CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 001.

6. Allowable Damage Description/Criteria

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION DIAGRAM INSTRUCTION REF

TYPE CATEGORY
ERENCE
Spar (Zones 01, 02 and Delamina
101 INAC
B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
03) tion and TIVE
Debonding
. This al

lowable
damage data
is inactive
since revi

sion dated
Aug 01/10,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−21−18,
Page Block
101, Config
2, Para

graph 9.A.

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−2
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION DIAGRAM INSTRUCTION REF

TYPE CATEGORY
ERENCE
Spar (Zones 01, 02 and Lineal Dam
101 INAC
B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
03) age TIVE
. This al

lowable
damage data
is inactive
since revi

sion dated
Aug 01/10,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−21−18,
Page Block
101, Config
2, Para

graph 9.A.

Table 102
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

7. Allowable Damage

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−21−18, Page Block 101, Config 2, Paragraph 7.
8. Repair Limits

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−21−18, Page Block 101, Config 2, Paragraph 8.

Page 103
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−2
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits − Elevator Spar Structure − Repair Zones
01, 02, 03
Diagram 101
Page 104
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−2
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN

DAMAGE REPAIR AC
REPAIR
TYPE OF DAMAGE REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION DAMAGES X mm REPAIRS Y mm
SIZE TION CATEGORY
(in) (in)
Next C−Check or The greater
Chapter 51−77−12 20 months, which
Chapter 51−77−12 value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately
paragraph 2.A ever occurs paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
first. 2.5 Lmax. <3>
Linear damage (1)
(nicks, gouges, Next C−Check or The greater
Chapter SRI
abrasions and Chapter 51−77−12 20 months, which
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Permanent B None 55−21−00, Page
scratches) with paragraph 3.B ever occurs first (1.97 in) or in)
Block 101
no damage in in
<2> 2.5 Lmax. <3>
ternal
l section
i The greater
Chapter 55−21−18, Chapter SRI
<1> value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(2) Permanent B Page Block 201, Immediately None 55−21−18, Page
(1.97 in) or in)
Config 2 Block 201
2.5 Lmax. <3>
(3) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − −
Next C−Check or The greater
Chapter 51−77−12 20 months, which
Chapter 51−77−12 value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Superficial dam
Temporary C Immediately
ages and dela
paragraph 2.A ever occurs paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
first. 2.5 Lmax. <3>
minations (with (4)
or without vis
Next C−Check or The greater
Chapter SRI
ible cracks and Refer to Table 20 months, which
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Permanent B None 55−21−00, Page
holes). Linear 104 ever occurs first (1.97 in) or in)
Block 101
damages with <2> 2.5 Lmax. <3>
d h greater
depth The greater
than 0.63 mm Chapter 55−21−18, Chapter SRI
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(0.024 in). (5) Permanent B Page Block 201, Immediately None 55−21−18, Page
(1.97 in) or in)
<1> Config 2 Block 201
2.5 Lmax. <3>
(6) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − −

Table 103
<1> This allowable damage data is inactive since revision dated Aug 01/10, it has been moved to Chapter 55−21−18, Page Block 101, Config 2, Paragraph 9.A.

<2> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

<3> Lmax. is the longest dimension of the damage. If you have less distance than the permitted between damaged areas, work on them as one large damaged area.

Pages 105/106
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−2
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

APPLICABLE RE

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE DEPTH ACCESSIBILITY EXTENSION PAIR OF SRM
CHAPTER 51
Superficial
According to
damages and
allowable dam
Chapter
delamination Partial thick

− age limit of 51−77−12 para

(with or with
ness affected
relevant chap
graph 3.B.
out cracks
ter.
and/or holes)
Superficial
According to
damages and
Access only allowable dam
Chapter
delamination Full thickness
from external age limit of 51−77−13 para

(with or with
affected
face. relevant chap
graph 2.H.
out cracks
ter.
and/or holes)

Table 104

Pages 107/108
Printed in Germany
55−21−00
CONFIG−2
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR SPAR BOX − REPAIR

1. General

NOTE: For Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

This topic contains specific repair data applicable to the Elevator Spar
Box structure (for general repair data applicable to composite structure
refer to Chapter 51−77−00 and Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201). The spe

cific repair procedures for the Elevator Spar Box structure are in the sub

sequent chapters:
− Chapter 55−21−11 Skin Repairs.
− Chapter 55−21−18 Elevator Spar Repairs.
− Chapter 55−21−19 Elevator Trailing Edge Repairs.
2. Safety Precautions

CAUTION: FOR REPAIRS CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE REFER

TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN IN THE
INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH
3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER REMARKS

No General Repairs applicable. − −

Table 201

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−21−00 Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

4. Damage Evaluation

Before you repair the damage structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3, for data.

5. Types of Repairs

There is one type of structural repair for the Elevator Spar Box structure.
This is as follows:

Hot Cured Repairs.

NOTE: You must make all of the hot cured repairs contained in this topic
at 120°C (248°F) under vacuum conditions (minimum vacuum inside the
bag 0,8 bar (11.6 psi)), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D and
5.E.

To make a hot cured repair you must make the general repair procedure, re

fer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201.

6. Special Tools

To work with composite materials, it is necessary to use special tools.

Here are some examples:
− explosion proof tools are necessary if CFRP dust is caused,
− tools to cut or drill pre−cured CFRP materials must have very hard cut

ting edges (for example cutting wheels with diamond edges and twist−drills
made from high speed steel),
− tools to drill composite materials must have specially shaped cutting
edges.
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, to find data about all the tools and
equipment necessary to make composite repairs.

7. Repair Materials
All of the materials necessary to make a repair are shown in the repair
materials list in the specific repair topic.
8. Repair Environment

Before you make a permanent repair, make sure that you have the correct
environmental conditions (for example when the aircraft is in a warm and
dry aircraft hangar). It is important that the repair environmental is
clean and has a stable room temperature during the repair procedure.

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−21−00 Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR − SKIN PLATES

1. Identification Scheme

NOTE: For information of skin panel configuration refer toChapter

55−21−00Page Block 001.

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Structural Arrangement Figure 1

1 Upper Skin Plate Figure 2 (sheet 1 thru
15 )
2 Lower Skin Plate Figure 3 (sheet 1 thru
11 )
3 Bush Insert Figure 4
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Page 1
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/14
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structural Arrangement
Figure 1

Page 2
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Upper Skin Plate

Figure 2 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-21-11
CONFIG-1
Page 3
Feb 01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Upper Skin Plate

Figure 2 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-21-11
CONFIG-1
Page 4
Feb 01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Upper Skin Plate

Figure 2 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55-21-11
CONFIG-1
Page 5
Feb 01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Upper Skin Plate

Figure 2 (sheet 4)

Page 6
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/09
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Upper Skin Plate

Figure 2 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55-21-11
CONFIG-1
Page 7
Feb 01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Upper Skin Plate

Figure 2 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55-21-11
CONFIG-1
Page 8
Feb 01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Upper Skin Plate

Figure 2 (sheet 7)

Printed in Germany
55-21-11
CONFIG-1
Page 9
Feb 01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Upper Skin Plate

Figure 2 (sheet 8)

Printed in Germany
55-21-11
CONFIG-1
Page 10
Feb 01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Upper Skin Plate

Figure 2 (sheet 9)

Printed in Germany
55-21-11
CONFIG-1
Page 11
Feb 01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Upper Skin Plate

Figure 2 (sheet 10)

Printed in Germany
55-21-11
CONFIG-1
Page 12
Feb 01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Upper Skin Plate

Figure 2 (sheet 11)

Printed in Germany
55-21-11
CONFIG-1
Page 13
Feb 01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Upper Skin Plate

Figure 2 (sheet 12)

Printed in Germany
55-21-11
CONFIG-1
Page 14
Feb 01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Upper Skin Plate

Figure 2 (sheet 13)

Printed in Germany
55-21-11
CONFIG-1
Page 15
Feb 01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Upper Skin Plate

Figure 2 (sheet 14)

Printed in Germany
55-21-11
CONFIG-1
Page 16
Feb 01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Upper Skin Plate

Figure 2 (sheet 15)

Printed in Germany
55-21-11
CONFIG-1
Page 17
Feb 01/03
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

1 Skin, Upper Composite D55281225000 PB 101

001 PB 201
1A Skin, Upper Composite D55281225002 PB 101 A23307G00155
003 PB 201
1B Skin, Upper Composite D55281225004 PB 101 A23490G00167
005 PB 201
1C Skin, Upper Composite D55281225006 PB 101 A25123G00266
007 PB 201
1D Skin, Upper Composite D55281225008 PB 101 A32441G00391
009 PB 201
5 Core 3/16-4.0 Z-17.141 D55281226200 PB 101
201 PB 201
15(0.591)
5A Core 3/16-4.0 Z-17.654 D55281226202 PB 101 A25123G00266
203 PB 201
15(0.591)
10 Core 3/16-4.0 Z-17.141 D55281237200 PB 101
201 PB 201
15(0.591)
10A Core 3/16-4.0 Z-17.654 D55281237202 PB 101 A25123G00266
203 PB 201
15(0.591)
15 Core 3/16-4.0 Z-17.141 D55281227200 PB 101
201 PB 201
15(0.591)
15A Core 3/16-4.0 Z-17.654 D55281227202 PB 101 A25123G00266
203 PB 201
15(0.591)
20 Plate, Bonding 3.1364T3 D55281225200 PB 101
LN9073 201 PB 201
0,8(0.031)
25 Plate, Bonding 3.1364T3 D55281225202 PB 101
LN9073 203 PB 201
0,8(0.031)
30 Plate, Bonding 3.1364T3 D55281225204 PB 101
LN9073 205 PB 201
0,8(0.031)
35 Plate, Bonding 3.1364T3 D55281225206 PB 101
LN9073 207 PB 201
0,8(0.031)
ASSY Dwg.: D55280001, D55281225

Key to Figure 2

Printed in Germany
55-21-11
CONFIG-1
Page 18
Feb 01/03
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

40 Plate, Bonding 3.1364T3 D55281225208 PB 101

LN9073 209 PB 201
0,8(0.031)
45 Plate, Bonding 3.1364T3 D55281225210 PB 101
LN9073 211 PB 201
0,8(0.031)
50 Resin, Epoxy Z-18.142
55 Shim Z-19.749 D55281231000
55A Shim Z-19.749 D55281231002 A24971G00253
60 Adhesive, Epoxy Z-15.237
65 Film, Adhesive Z-15.425
70 Tedlar Z-14.310 PB 101
PB 201
75 Film, Adhesive Z-15.435 A23307G00155
80 Tedlar Z-14.510 PB 101 A23490G00167
PB 201
85 Adhesive, Epoxy Z-15.242 A25123G00266
90 Film, Adhesive Z-15.467 A25123G00266
95 Film, Adhesive Z-15.468 A25123G00266
100 Tedlar Z-14.512 PB 101 A25123G00266
PB 201
105 Foam, Adhesive Z-15.415 A25123G00266
110 Adhesive, Epoxy Z-15.201 A25123G00266
ASSY Dwg.: D55281225

Key to Figure 2

Printed in Germany
55-21-11
CONFIG-1
Page 19
Feb 01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Lower Skin Plate

Figure 3 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-21-11
CONFIG-1
Page 20
Feb 01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Lower Skin Plate

Figure 3 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-21-11
CONFIG-1
Page 21
Feb 01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Lower Skin Plate

Figure 3 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55-21-11
CONFIG-1
Page 22
Feb 01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Lower Skin Plate

Figure 3 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55-21-11
CONFIG-1
Page 23
Feb 01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Lower Skin Plate

Figure 3 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55-21-11
CONFIG-1
Page 24
Feb 01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Lower Skin Plate

Figure 3 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55-21-11
CONFIG-1
Page 25
Feb 01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Lower Skin Plate

Figure 3 (sheet 7)

Printed in Germany
55-21-11
CONFIG-1
Page 26
Feb 01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Lower Skin Plate

Figure 3 (sheet 8)

Printed in Germany
55-21-11
CONFIG-1
Page 27
Feb 01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Lower Skin Plate

Figure 3 (sheet 9)

Printed in Germany
55-21-11
CONFIG-1
Page 28
Feb 01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Lower Skin Plate

Figure 3 (sheet 10)

Printed in Germany
55-21-11
CONFIG-1
Page 29
Feb 01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Lower Skin Plate

Figure 3 (sheet 11)

Printed in Germany
55-21-11
CONFIG-1
Page 30
Feb 01/03
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

1 Skin, Lower Composite D55281235000 PB 101

001 PB 201
1A Skin, Lower Composite D55281235002 PB 101 A21020G00055
003 PB 201
1B Skin, Lower Composite D55281235004 PB 101 A23307G00155
005 PB 201
1C Skin, Lower Composite D55281235006 PB 101 A23490G00167
007 PB 201
1D Skin, Lower Composite D55281235008 PB 101 A25123G00266
009 PB 201
1E Skin, Lower Composite D55281235010 PB 101 A32441G00391
011 PB 201
5 Core 3/16-4.0 Z-17.141 D55281236200 PB 101
201 PB 201
15(0.591)
5A Core 3/16-4.0 Z-17.654 D55281236202 PB 101 A25123G00266
203 PB 201
15(0.591)
10 Core 3/16-4.0 Z-17.141 D55281237200 PB 101
201 PB 201
15(0.591)
10A Core 3/16-4.0 Z-17.654 D55281237202 PB 101 A25123G00266
203 PB 201
15(0.591)
15 Core 3/16-4.0 Z-17.141 D55281238200 PB 101
201 PB 201
15(0.591)
15A Core 3/16-4.0 Z-17.654 D55281238202 PB 101 A25123G00266
203 PB 201
15(0.591)
20 Resin, Epoxy Z-18.142
25 Shim Z-19.749 D55281231000
25A Shim Z-19.749 D55281231002 A24971G00253
30 Adhesive, Epoxy Z-15.237
35 Film, Adhesive Z-15.425
40 Tedlar Z-14.310 PB 101
PB 201
45 Film, Adhesive Z-15.435 A23307G00155
50 Tedlar Z-14.510 PB 101 A23490G00167
PB 201
ASSY Dwg.: D55280001, D55281235

Key to Figure 3

Printed in Germany
55-21-11
CONFIG-1
Page 31
Feb 01/03
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

55 Film, Adhesive Z-15.467 A25123G00266

60 Film, Adhesive Z-15.468 A25123G00266
65 Tedlar Z-14.512 PB 101 A25123G00266
PB 201
70 Foam, Adhesive Z-15.415 A25123G00266
75 Adhesive, Epoxy Z-15.201 A25123G00266
ASSY Dwg.: D55281235

Key to Figure 3

Printed in Germany
55-21-11
CONFIG-1
Page 32
Feb 01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Bush Insert
Figure 4

Page 33
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

1 Insert, Bush 1.7734.4 D55281229200 PB 101

LN668.10 PB 201
1A Insert, Bush 1.4544.9 D55281229202 PB 101 A20302G00012
PB 201
ASSY Dwg.: D55280001

Key to Figure 4

Printed in Germany
55-21-11
CONFIG-1
Page 34
Aug 01/04
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR − SKIN PLATES

1. Identification Scheme

NOTE: For information of skin panel configuration refer to Chapter

55−21−00Page Block 001.

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Structural Arrangement Figure 1

1 Upper Skin Plate Figure 2 (sheet 1 thru
6 )
2 Lower Skin Plate Figure 3 (sheet 1 thru
4 )
3 Bush Insert Figure 4
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Page 1
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/14
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structural Arrangement
Figure 1

Page 2
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Aug 01/10
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Upper Skin Plate

Figure 2 (sheet 1)

Page 3
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Aug 01/10
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Upper Skin Plate

Figure 2 (sheet 2)

Page 4
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Aug 01/10
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Upper Skin Plate

Figure 2 (sheet 3)

Page 5
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Aug 01/10
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Upper Skin Plate

Figure 2 (sheet 4)

Page 6
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Aug 01/10
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Upper Skin Plate

Figure 2 (sheet 5)

Page 7
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Aug 01/10
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Upper Skin Plate

Figure 2 (sheet 6)

Page 8
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Skin, Upper Composite D55281232000

001
5 Core Z−17.615 D55281226204
205
10 Core Z−17.615 D55281237204
205
15 Core Z−17.615 D55281227204
205
20 Plate 3.1364T3 D55281225200
LN9073 201
0.8 (0.031)
25 Plate 3.1364T3 D55281225202
LN9073 203
0.8 (0.031)
30 Plate 3.1364T3 D55281225204
LN9073 205
0.8 (0.031)
35 Plate 3.1364T3 D55281225206
LN9073 207
0.8 (0.031)
40 Plate 3.1364T3 D55281225208
LN9073 209
0.8 (0.031)
45 Plate 3.1364T3 D55281225210
LN9073 211
0.8 (0.031)
50 Resin, Epoxy Z−18.142
55 Shim Z−19.749 D55281231002
60 Adhesive, Epoxy Z−15.237
65 Adhesive, Epoxy Z−15.242
70 Adhesive, Epoxy Z−15.201
75 Film, Adhesive Z−15.467
80 Film, Adhesive Z−15.468
85 Tedlar Z−14.512
90 Foam, Adhesive Z−15.415
ASSY Dwg.: D55280001, D55281232

Key to Figure 2

Page 9
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Aug 01/10
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Lower Skin Plate

Figure 3 (sheet 1)

Page 10
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Aug 01/10
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Lower Skin Plate

Figure 3 (sheet 2)

Page 11
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Aug 01/10
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Lower Skin Plate

Figure 3 (sheet 3)

Page 12
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Aug 01/10
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Lower Skin Plate

Figure 3 (sheet 4)

Page 13
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Skin, Lower Composite D55281242000

001
5 Core Z−17.615 D55281236204
205
10 Core Z−17.615 D55281237204
205
15 Core Z−17.615 D55281238204
205
20 Resin, Epoxy Z−18.142
25 Shim Z−19.749 D55281231002
30 Adhesive, Epoxy Z−15.237
35 Foam, Adhesive Z−15.415
40 Tedlar Z−14.512
45 Film, Adhesive Z−15.467
50 Film, Adhesive Z−15.468
55 Adhesive, Epoxy Z−15.201
ASSY Dwg.: D55280001, D55281242

Key to Figure 3

Page 14
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Aug 01/10
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Bush Insert
Figure 4

Page 15
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Insert, Bush 1.4544.9 D55281229202

LN668.10
ASSY Dwg.: D55280001

Key to Figure 4

Page 16
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR − SKIN PLATES

1. Identification Scheme

NOTE: For information of skin panel configuration refer to Chapter

55−21−00Page Block 001.

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Structural Arrangement Figure 1

1 Upper Skin Plate Figure 2 (sheet 1 thru 6
)
2 Lower Skin Plate Figure 3 (sheet 1 thru 4
)
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Page 1
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structural Arrangement
Figure 1

Page 2
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Aug 01/10
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Upper Skin Plate

Figure 2 (sheet 1)

Page 3
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Upper Skin Plate

Figure 2 (sheet 2)

Page 4
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Upper Skin Plate

Figure 2 (sheet 3)

Page 5
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Upper Skin Plate

Figure 2 (sheet 4)

Page 6
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Upper Skin Plate

Figure 2 (sheet 5)

Page 7
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Upper Skin Plate

Figure 2 (sheet 6)

Page 8
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Skin, Upper Composite D55281250000 PB 101

001 PB 201
5 Core Z−17.615 D55281226204
205
10 Core Z−17.615 D55281237204
205
15 Core Z−17.615 D55281227204
205
20 Plate 3.1364T3 D55281201208
LN9073 1.2 (0.047)
25 Plate 3.1364T3 D55281205202
LN9073 203
1.2 (0.047)
30 Plate 3.1364T3 D55281201210
LN9073 1.2 (0.047)
35 Plate 3.1364T3 D55281201212
LN9073 1.2 (0.047)
40 Plate 3.1364T3 D55281201214
LN9073 1.2 (0.047)
45 Plate 1.4544.9 D55281250200
201
0.8 (0.031)
70 Adhesive, Epoxy Z−15.201
75 Film, Adhesive Z−15.467
80 Film, Adhesive Z−15.468
85 Tedlar Z−14.512
90 Foam, Adhesive Z−15.415
95 Bronze Mesh Z−22.948
ASSY Dwg.: D55280002, D55281250

Key to Figure 2

Page 9
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Lower Skin Plate

Figure 3 (sheet 1)

Page 10
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Lower Skin Plate

Figure 3 (sheet 2)

Pages 11/12
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Lower Skin Plate

Figure 3 (sheet 3)

Page 13
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Lower Skin Plate

Figure 3 (sheet 4)

Page 14
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Skin, Lower Composite D55281260000 PB 101

001 PB 201
5 Core Z−17.615 D55281236204
205
10 Core Z−17.615 D55281237204
205
15 Core Z−17.615 D55281238204
205
35 Foam, Adhesive Z−15.415
40 Tedlar Z−14.512
45 Film, Adhesive Z−15.467
50 Film, Adhesive Z−15.468
55 Adhesive, Epoxy Z−15.201
ASSY Dwg.: D55280002, D55281260

Key to Figure 3

Pages 15/16
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR SPAR BOX − ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT PARAGRAPH.

CAUTION: OBEY THE GIVEN INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE WHICH LEADS TO THE
APPLICABLE INSPECTION PROGRAM DEFINED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPEC
TIONS (SRI) OF THE SRM, IF NECESSARY.

CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER TO

PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVALUA
TION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

1. General

NOTE: CONFIG−1 is applicable before modification 30565G0357 only. For effec

tivity refer to Modification/Service Bulletin List given in Chapter
55−20−00, Page Block 001.

NOTE: For definition of allowable damage refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For Damage Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories, refer to Chapter

51−11−14 − CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.
2. Damage Evaluation

Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−10 , paragraph 3 for data.

3. Type of Damage
There are different types of damage which can occur to the composite struc
ture:

A. Delamination with or without visible Cracks and Holes, Debonding and

Dents.

For more data on damage causes refer to Chapter 51−77−10.

B. Superficial Damage

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

This is when the structure is damaged only on the external surface, with
no damage to the internal structure. Nicks and scratches are examples of
superficial damage.

C. Liquid Ingress

This is when the sandwich structure of the elevator panels is damaged

due to liquid ingress.

4. Distance between Damage Areas, Distance between Repair Areas and Distance
between Damaged Area per Liquid Ingress and an existing Repair Area

There is a minimum permitted distance between damaged areas and between re
pair areas (refer to Figure 101)

A. Damaged Areas
If the distance between two areas of damage is (X) more than 50 mm
(1.97 in), the total area to be considered depends on the order of the
two damages.

(1) Different Order

The damages will be considered as being of different orders if LmaxL

of the larger damage is more than 10 × LmaxS of the smaller damage
(LmaxL more than 10 × LmaxS).

(2) Same Order

Two damages will be considered as being of the same order if LmaxL

of the larger damage is less than or equal to 10 × LmaxS of the
smaller damage (LmaxL ≤ 10 × LmaxS).

(3) Calculation of total damage area

Two damages areas will be considered as one damage area according to

their orders and the distance between the two damaged areas (X).
− Minimum distance for different orders: the greater of 50 mm (1.97
in) or 2.5 × LmaxS.
− Minimum distance for same orders: the greater of 50 mm (1.97 in)
or 2.5 × LmaxL.
When the distance (X) between two damages areas is less than the
minimum distance, the two damages must be enveloped together and the
area of the envelop is to considered as one damage area.

B. Repair Areas
If one damaged area is composed of several individual damages according
to paragraph 4.A. , separate structural repairs can be performed in each
original individual area of damage only if the distance Y (see Figure
101, sheet 1) between the separate repairs contours is greater than 50
mm (1.97 in).

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

If a second repair is to be done near to an existing repair the minimum

acceptable distance, Y (see Figure 101, sheet 1) between two repair con
tours is 50 mm (1.967 in). If you have less than this distance, refer
to the manufacturer before you do the second repair. Take into account
10 mm (0.391 in) for the honeycomb cut out and 15 mm (0.591 in) for
each ply step.

For external skin and core only, refer to diagram 102 and table 105:
− If the damage area is lower than or equal to 15000 mm (23.250 in),
a non structural repair must be performed. Refer to the corresponding
figure in Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 201, Config 1 . If the damage
area is greater than 15000 mm (23.250 in) a structural repair must
be performed. Refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 201, Config 1 .
− If the total damaged area is greater than 60000 mm (93.000 in), and
individual areas within an envelope cannot be repaired separately, con
tact AIRBUS.
− When a damage of lower than 15000 mm (23.250 in) is located near to
a damage greater than 15000 mm (23.250 in), if the distances between
the damages are equal to or greater than the LmaX of the larger dam
age then, provided that the larger damage is repaired structurally, the
smaller damage may be repaired non structurally.
C. Damaged Area per liquid ingress and an existing Repair Area

Minimum distance Z between a liquid ingress allowable damaged area and

an existing repair depends on the repair type:
− Minimum distance Z between a liquid ingress allowable damaged area and
an existing structural repair is according to Figure 101, sheet 2.
− Minimum distance Z between a liquid ingress allowable damaged area and
an existing non structural repair depends on the minimum distance be
tween the damage repaired and the relevant liquid ingress allowable
damaged area according to Figure 101, sheet 2.

Page 103
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Distance Between Damaged Areas and Between Repair Areas

Figure 101 (sheet 1)

Page 104
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Damaged Area per Liquid Ingress and an existing Repair Area

Figure 101 (sheet 2)

Page 105
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

5. Repair Zones

Each of the components of the Elevator Spar Box structure is divided into
repair zones. These repair zones show the zones of different structural im
portance of the component. When you do a damage evaluation (refer to para
graph 2.) you must refer to the repair zone data. The repair zone data of
the Spar Box structure is in Figure 102.

Page 106
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Upper Skin − Repair Zones

Figure 102 (sheet 1)

Pages 107/108
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Lower Skin − Repair Zones

Figure 102 (sheet 2)

Pages 109/110
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Trailing Edge Filler and Metallic Profile − Repair Zones

Figure 102 (sheet 3)

Page 111
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

6. Allowable Damage Description/Criteria

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ PARAGRAPH/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION INSTRUCTION REF
TYPE DIAGRAM CATEGORY
ERENCE
Upper Skin (all Zones Lineal Dam 9.A. /101 B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
except Leading Edge) age
Upper Skin (all Zones Delamina 9.B. /102 B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
except Leading Edge) tion and
Debonding
Upper Skin, Leading Edge Delamina 9.C. /103 B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
(Zone 06, Sub zone A) tion
Upper Skin, Leading Edge Lineal Dam 9.C. /103 B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
(Zone 06, Sub zone A) age
Upper Skin (Repair Zones Liquid In 9.D. /104 C −
1 thru 4 and Sandwich gress
Areas of Repair Zone 5)
Lower Skin (all Zones Lineal Dam 9.A. /101 B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
except Leading Edge) age
Lower Skin (all Zones Delamina 9.B. /102 B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
except Leading Edge) tion and
Debonding
Lower Skin, Leading Edge Delamina 9.C. /103 B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
(Zone 06, Sub zone A) tion
Lower Skin, Leading Edge Lineal Dam 9.C. /103 B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
(Zone 06, Sub zone A) age
Lower Skin (Repair Zones Liquid In 9.D. /104 C −
1 thru 4 and Sandwich gress
Areas of Repair Zone 5)
Elevator Trailing Edge Superficial 10.A. A,C −
Filler Damage
Elevator Trailing Edge Linear and 11.A. A,C −
Metallic Profile Superficial /105
Damage

Table 101
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

7. Allowable Damage

Allowable damage is damage that does not affect the necessary strength or
function of a component. You do not have to make a structural repair for
this type of damage. You must make a non structural repair. If this type

Page 112
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

of damage has rough or sharp edges, smooth these out with the correct
abrasive cloth. Replace the surface paint if necessary.
8. Repair Limits

The repair limits data gives the time limits in which to make temporary
and permanent repairs. These time limits are given in flight cycles/hours
(FC/FH). The repair limits also tell you which type of repair you can do.
To find the repair limits data applicable to a damaged area, you must know
the following data:
− the repair zone applicable to the damaged area.
− the area, length or depth (as applicable) of the damage to the structure.
− the type of damage (for example: nick, scratch, delamination).

9. Elevator Spar Box Skins − Allowable Damage

CAUTION: THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE ON SKIN PANELS MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED

INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−21−00−1−001−00
AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SEC
TION OF THE SRM. INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM
WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 102.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.
SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
A. Upper and Lower Skin (all Zones except Leading Edge) − Lineal Damage
NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in all Zones except Leading
Edge, refer to Figure 102 for Repair Zones.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 102.

Page 113
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 102
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 101 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 103 and perform the corre
sponding repair action.

Page 114
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Linear Damage − Outer Skin (of the Skin Panel) of the Elevator Spar Box −
All Zones except Leading Edge
Diagram 101
Pages 115/116
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN
S
SIZE TION
ON CATEGORY
CA GO Y DAMAGE X mm REPAIRS Y mm
(in) (in)
The greater
Chapter 51−77−12
Chapter 51−77−12 value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C , Paragraph 2.A Immediately 20 months
, Paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
<1>
2.5 Lmax.
Linear damage in (1) Non Structural
The greater
outer skin (with Repair, Chapter Chapter SRI
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
no damage in in Permanent B 55−21−11, Page 20 months <2> None 55−21−00, Page
(1.97 in) or in)
ternal sections) Block 201, Config Block 101
2.5 Lmax.
nicks,
, g
gouges,
g , 1 , <1>
abrasions and Structural Re
scratches. The greater
pair, Chapter Chapter SRI
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(2) Permanent B 55−21−11, Page Immediately None 55−21−00, Page
(1.97 in) or in)
Block 201, Config Block 201
2.5 Lmax.
1
(3) − − Contact AIRBUS Immediately − − − −
Outer Skin (of the Skin Panel) of the Elevator Spar Box − All Zones except
Leading Edge
Table 103
<1> For non structural repairs, rivets and inserts must not be damaged.

<2> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Pages 117/118
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE ON SKIN PANELS MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED

INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−21−00−1−001−00
AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SEC
TION OF THE SRM. INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM
WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 104 .
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

B. Upper and Lower Skin (all Zones except Leading Edge) − Delamination and
Debonding
NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in all Zones except Leading
Edge, refer to Figure 102 for Repair Zones.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 104.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 104
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 102 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 105 and perform the corre
sponding repair action.

Page 119
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Delamination and Debonding − Elevator Skin Structure (Inner or Outer and

Core) − All Zones except Leading Edge
Diagram 102
Page 120
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN
S
SIZE TION
ON CATEGORY
CA GO Y DAMAGES X mm REPAIRS Y mm
(in) (in)
The greater
Chapter 51−77−12
Chapter 51−77−12 value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C , Paragraph 2.A Immediately 20 months
, Paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
<1>
2.5 Lmax.
(1) Non Structural
The greater
Repair, Chapter Chapter SRI
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Permanent B 55−21−11, Page 20 months <2> None 55−21−00, Page
(1.97 in) or in)
Block 201, Config Block 101
Superficial dam 2.5 Lmax.
1 <1>
age, delamination
(with or without The greater
visible cracks value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C None Immediately 15 months No
and holes) and (1.97 in) or in)
debondings.
g Lin 2.5 Lmax.
ear damage depth (2) Structural Re The greater
greater than pair, Chapter Chapter SRI value of 50 mm
0.75 mm (0.029 50 mm (1.97
Permanent B 55−21−11, Page 15 months None 55−21−00, Page (1.97 in) or
in). in)
Block 201, Config Block 101 2.5 Lmax.
1
Structural Re
The greater
pair, Chapter Chapter SRI
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(3) Permanent B 55−21−11, Page Immediately None 55−21−00, Page
(1.97 in) or in)
Block 201, Config Block 201
2.5 Lmax.
1
(4) − − Contact AIRBUS Immediately − − − −
Elevator Skin Structure (Inner or Outer and Core) − All Zones except Leading
Edge
Table 105
<1> For non structural repairs, rivets and inserts must not be damaged.

<2> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Pages 121/122
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE ON SKIN PANELS MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED

INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−21−00−1−001−00
AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SEC
TION OF THE SRM. INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM
WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 106.
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

C. Upper and Lower Skin, Leading edge Zone 06, Subzone A

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Leading edge Zone 06, Sub
zone A, refer to Figure 102 for Repair Zones.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 106.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 106
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 103 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 107 and perform the corre
sponding repair action.

Page 123
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits − Elevator Skin Structure (Outer Skin) −
Leading Edge at Zone 06, Subzone A
Diagram 103
Page 124
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN
S
SIZE TION
ON CATEGORY
CA GO Y DAMAGES X mm REPAIRS Y mm
(in) (in)
The greater
Chapter 51−77−12 Chapter 51−77−12 value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 20 months
paragraph 2.A paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
Linear damage
g in 2.5 Lmax.
leading edge (1) Non Structural
(scratches) The greater
Repair, Chapter Chapter SRI
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Permanent B 55−21−11, Page 20 months <1> None 55−21−00, Page
(1.97 in) or in)
Block 201, Config Block 101
2.5 Lmax.
1
The greater
Chapter 51−77−12 Chapter 51−77−12 value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 20 months
paragraph 2.A paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
2.5 Lmax.
(2) Non Structural
Superficial dam The greater
Repair, Chapter Chapter SRI
age, delamina value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Permanent B 55−21−11, Page 20 months <1> None 55−21−00, Page
tions with or (1.97 in) or in)
Block 201, Config Block 101
without visible 2.5 Lmax.
1
cracks and
holes. Structural Re
The greater
pair, Chapter Chapter SRI
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(3) Permanent B 55−21−11, Page Immediately None 55−21−00, Page
(1.97 in) or in)
Block 201, Config Block 201
2.5 Lmax.
1
(4) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − −
Elevator Skin Structure (Outer Skin) − Leading Edge at Zone 06, Subzone A
Table 107
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Pages 125/126
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 108 .
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

D. Upper and Lower Skin − Liquid Ingress

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Repair Zones 1 thru 4 and

Sandwich Areas of Repair Zone 5, refer to Figure 102 for Repair
Zones.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 108.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 108
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.
(1) Follow the Flow chart instructions in Diagram 104.
− Perform the Weight assessment of the Elevator. Refer to Chapter
55−20−00, Page Block 101.
− Check for any debonding found.
− Check for allowable damage and repair limits in Diagram 104 and
Table 109.

Pages 127/128
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Liquid Ingress Flow Chart − Elevator Sandwich Structure of Upper and Lower
Skins
Diagram 104 (sheet 1)
Pages 129/130
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for Liquid Ingress − Elevator Sandwich
Structure of Upper and Lower Skins (Repair Zones 1 thru 4 and Sandwich Areas
of Repair Zone 5)
Diagram 104 (sheet 2)
Pages 131/132
55−21−11
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TIME LIMIT BE REPAIR LIFE LIM INSPECTION MAXIMUM NUM MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN
SIZE TION CATEGORY FORE REPAIR IT BER OF DAM
AGES PER DAMAGES X REPAIRS Y
ELEVATOR mm (in) mm (in)
1200 FH or 1500
FC or 200 Days, Weight Li Paragraph 4. Paragraph
Temporary C Chapter 51−75−00 Immediately None
whichever occurs mitation <3> <4> 4. <4>
first
(1) Chapter
Liquid Ingress 1200 FH or 1500
55−21−11, Chapter 55−21−11,
Damages in Sand FC or 200 Days, Weight Li Paragraph
Permanent Page Block Page Block 201, None − Paragraph 4.
wich Structure whichever occurs mitation <3> 4.
201, Con Config.1 <5> <6>
of Upper and first <7>
fig.1
Lower Skins <1>
<2> Chapter
55−21−11, Chapter 55−21−11,
Weight Li Paragraph
(2) Permanent Page Block Page Block 201, Immediately None − Paragraph 4.
mitation <3> 4.
201, Con Config.1 <6> <8>
fig.1
(3) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − − −
Elevator Sandwich Structure of Upper and Lower Skins (Repair Zones 1 thru 4
and Sandwich Areas of Repair Zone 5)
Table 109
<1> This allowable damages table for liquid ingress damaged areas is only valid after thermographic and tap test inspections according to NTM, Chapter 55−20−07.
If debonding is found at any of the liquid ingress damaged areas after tap test inspection according to NTM, Chapter 51−10−03, Page Block 501, the liquid
ingress damaged areas must be repaired according to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 201, Config. 1.
<2> This allowable damages table for liquid ingress damaged areas are only valid for the Repair Zones 1 thru 4 and Sandwich Areas of Repair Zone 5 of the ele
vator skins. Refer to Figure 102 for Repair Zones.
<3> Liquid Ingress allowable damages and repair limits are only applicable if the weight of the Elevator is less than the maximum allowable weight limits. Refer
to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 101.

<4> Distance between allowable damage areas per liquid ingress and repair areas must be also taken into account.

<5> For damaged area size up to 1000 mm (1.55 in), perform permanent non structural repair according to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 201, Config.1, paragraph
5.D. For damaged area size between 1000 mm (1.55 in) and 5000 mm (36.45 in), perform non structural repair according to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 201,
Config.1, paragraph 5.E.

<6> During repair process, affected core must be systematically removed and repaired as follows:

When core is exposed after outer face cut out, perform an initial drying of damaged structure.

Remove affected core.

Perform a final drying of damaged structure.

Page 133
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Replace affected core by a new one as required in relevant repair.

Page 134
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

<7> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

<8> For damaged area size between 5000 mm (7.75 in) and 15000 mm (23.25 in) and with a maximum length up to 150 mm (5.90 in) only, perform permanent non
structural repair according to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 201, Config.1, paragraph 5.E. For damaged area size between 15000 mm (23.25 in) and 60000 mm
(93 in), perform structural repair according to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 201, Config.1.

Pages 135/136
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

10. Elevator Trailing Edge Filler − Allowable Damage

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 110 .

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.
SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

A. Superficial Damage in Elevator Trailing Edge Filler

NOTE: The Allowable and Repairable Damage Limits for the Elevator Trail
ing Edge Filler are only applicable before Modification 33296G0406.

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in the Elevator Trailing Edge

Filler, refer to Figure 102 for Trailing Edge Filler location.
NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 110.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 110
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.
The purpose of Elevator Trailing Edge filler is to ensure an aerodynamic
contour to the Elevator Trailing Edge.

Repair the damaged or missing trailing edge filler: Any crack affecting
the epoxy filler material only (without any filler material missing) is
allowable as permanent not requiring any further action. Any epoxy filler
material missing requires a repair to restore the aircraft standard and
aerodynamic performance. Two options for the embodiment are accepted:
− Before or at 100 days, whichever occurs first, if no temporary repair
is accomplished.
− Before or at 20 months, whichever occurs first, when a temporary re
pair is accomplished per SRM with HST (High speed tape). Refer to the
Allowable Damages table for all the options, refer to Table 111.

Pages 137/138
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MINIMUM DIS MINIMUM DIS

REPAIR REPAIR REPAIR REF TIME LIMIT BEFORE INSPECTION RE MINIMUM DISTANCE
TYPE OF DAMAGE REPAIR LIFE TIME TANCE FROM TANCE FROM
ACTION CATEGORY ERENCE REPAIR QUIRED BETWEEN DAMAGES
FREE EDGE FASTENER AREA
Perma
Crack A None Not required None No None None None
nent
Tempo
C None Not required 100 days No 50 mm (1.97 in) None None
rary
Chapter
Perma
A 55−21−11 , 100 days None No 50 mm (1.97 in) None None
nent
Figure 203
Material Missing Chapter
Tempo 51−77−12 ,
C Immediately 20 months No 50 mm (1.97 in) None None
rary Paragraph
2.A
Chapter
Perma
A 55−21−11 , 20 months <1> None No 50 mm (1.97 in) None None
nent
Figure 203
Superficial Damage in Elevator Trailing Edge Filler
Table 111
<1> This timeframe is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Pages 139/140
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

11. Elevator Trailing Edge Metallic Profile − Allowable Damage

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 112.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.
SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

A. Linear and Superficial Damage in Elevator Trailing Edge Metallic Profile

− Zone A

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Zone A of the Elevator

Trailing Edge Metallic Profile, refer to Figure 102 for Repair
Zones.
NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 112.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 112
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.
(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 105 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 113 and perform the corre
sponding repair action.

Page 141
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Linear and Superficial Damages (Nicks, Gouges, Holes, Corrosion and

Scratches), Elevator Trailing Edge Metallic Profile − Zone A
Diagram 105
Page 142
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TIME LIMIT BE REPAIR LIFE TIME INSPECTION RE MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN MIN. DIS
SIZE TION CATEGORY FORE REPAIR QUIRED TANCE
DAMAGES mm REPAIRS mm FROM FAS
(in) (in) TENER
AREA
The greater
value of 50 2.5 Fas
Chapter 51−77−12 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 100 days No mm (1.97 tener Di
, Paragraph 2.A in)
in) or 2.5 ameter
Lmax <2>
(1)
The greater
Chapter 51−73−00 value of 50 2.5 Fas
50 mm (1.97
Permanent A and Chapter 100 days <1> None No mm (1.97 tener Di
in)
51−74−00 in) or 2.5 ameter
Lmax <2>
Linear and Su The greater
perficial Damages value of 50 2.5 Fas
Chapter 51−77−12 50 mm (1.97
(Nicks, Gouges, Temporary C Immediately 100 days No mm (1.97 tener Di
, Paragraph 2.A in)
Holes, Corrosion, in) or 2.5 ameter
Scratches) Lmax <2>
(2)
The greater
value of 50 2.5 Fas
Chapter 55−21−11 50 mm (1.97
Permanent A 100 days <1> None No mm (1.97 tener Di
, Figure 213 in)
in) or 2.5 ameter
Lmax <2>
The greater
value of 50 2.5 Fas
Chapter 55−21−11 50 mm (1.97
(3) Permanent A Immediately None No mm (1.97 tener Di
, Figure 213 in)
in) or 2.5 ameter
Lmax <2>
Elevator Trailing Edge Metallic Profile − Zone A
Table 113
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

<2> Lmax. is the maximum size of the damage.

Pages 143/144
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR SPAR BOX − ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT PARAGRAPH.

CAUTION: OBEY THE GIVEN INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE WHICH LEADS TO THE
APPLICABLE INSPECTION PROGRAM DEFINED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPEC
TIONS (SRI) OF THE SRM, IF NECESSARY.

CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER TO

PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVALUA
TION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.
SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101, FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

1. General

NOTE: CONFIG−2 is applicable after modification 30565G0357 only. For effec

tivity refer to Modification/Service Bulletin List given in Chapter
55−20−00, Page Block 001.

NOTE: For definition of allowable damage refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For Damage Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories, refer to Chapter

51−11−14 − CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.
2. Damage Evaluation

Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

3. Type of Damage
There are different types of damage which can occur to the composite struc
ture:

A. Delamination with or without visible Cracks and Holes, Debonding and

Dents.

For more data on damage causes refer to Chapter 51−77−10.

B. Superficial Damage

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

This is when the structure is damaged only on the external surface, with
no damage to the internal structure. Nicks and scratches are examples of
superficial damage.

C. Liquid Ingress

This is when the sandwich structure of the elevator panels is damaged

due to liquid ingress.

4. Distance between Damage Areas, Distance between Repair Areas and Distance
between Damaged Area per Liquid Ingress and an existing Repair Area

There is a minimum permitted distance between damaged areas and between re
pair areas (refer to Figure 101)

A. Damaged Areas
If the distance between two areas of damage is (X) more than 50 mm
(1.97 in), the total area to be considered depends on the order of the
two damages.

(1) Different Order

The damages will be considered as being of different orders if LmaxL

of the larger damage is more than 10 × LmaxS of the smaller damage
(LmaxL more than 10 × LmaxS).

(2) Same Order

Two damages will be considered as being of the same order if LmaxL

of the larger damage is less than or equal to 10 × LmaxS of the
smaller damage (LmaxL ≤ 10 × LmaxS).

(3) Calculation of total damage area

Two damages areas will be considered as one damage area according to

their orders and the distance between the two damaged areas (X).
− Minimum distance for different orders: the greater of 50 mm (1.97
in) or 2.5 × LmaxS.
− Minimum distance for same orders: the greater of 50 mm (1.97 in)
or 2.5 × LmaxL.
When the distance (X) between two damages areas is less than the
minimum distance, the two damages must be enveloped together and the
area of the envelop is to considered as one damage area.

B. Repair Areas
If one damaged area is composed of several individual damages according
to paragraph 4.A., separate structural repairs can be performed in each
original individual area of damage only if the distance Y (see Figure
101, sheet 1) between the separate repairs contours is greater than 50

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

mm (1.97 in). Otherwise, perform one structural repair of the enveloped

damages.
If a second repair is to be done near to an existing repair the minimum
acceptable distance, Y (see Figure 101, sheet 1) between two repair con
tours is 50 mm (1.967 in). If you have less than this distance, refer
to the manufacturer before you do the second repair. Take into account
10 mm (0.391 in) for the honeycomb cut out and 15 mm (0.591 in) for
each ply step.
For external skin and core only, refer to diagram 102 and table 105:
− If the damage area is lower than or equal to 15000 mm (23.250 in),
a non structural repair must be performed. Refer to the corresponding
figure in Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 201, Config 2. If the damage
area is greater than 15000 mm (23.250 in) a structural repair must
be performed. Refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 201, Config 2.
− If the total damaged area is greater than 60000 mm (93.000 in), and
individual areas within an envelope cannot be repaired separately, con
tact AIRBUS.
− When a damage of lower than 15000 mm (23.250 in) is located near to
a damage greater than 15000 mm (23.250 in), if the distances between
the damages are equal to or greater than the Lmax of the larger dam
age then, provided that the larger damage is repaired structurally, the
smaller damage may be repaired non structurally.

C. Damaged Area per liquid ingress and an existing Repair Area

Minimum distance Z between a liquid ingress allowable damaged area and

an existing repair depends on the repair type:
− Minimum distance Z between a liquid ingress allowable damaged area and
an existing structural repair is according to Figure 101, sheet 2.
− Minimum distance Z between a liquid ingress allowable damaged area and
an existing non structural repair depends on the minimum distance be
tween the damage repaired and the relevant liquid ingress allowable
damaged area according to Figure 101, sheet 2.

Page 103
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Distance Between Damaged Areas and Between Repair Areas

Figure 101 (sheet 1)

Page 104
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Damaged Area per Liquid Ingress and an existing Repair Area

Figure 101 (sheet 2)

Page 105
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

5. Repair Zones

Each of the components of the Elevator Spar Box structure is divided into
repair zones. These repair zones show the zones of different structural im

portance of the component. When you do a damage evaluation (refer to para

graph 2.) you must refer to the repair zone data. The repair zone data of
the Spar Box structure is in Figure 102.

Page 106
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Upper Skin − Repair Zones

Figure 102 (sheet 1)

Pages 107/108
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Lower Skin − Repair Zones

Figure 102 (sheet 2)

Pages 109/110
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Trailing Edge Filler and Metallic Profile − Repair Zones

Figure 102 (sheet 3)

Page 111
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

6. Allowable Damage Description/Criteria

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ PARAGRAPH/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION INSTRUCTION REF
TYPE DIAGRAM CATEGORY
ERENCE
Upper Skin (all Zones Lineal Dam 9.A./101 B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
except Leading Edge) age
Upper Skin (all Zones Delamina 9.B./102 B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
except Leading Edge) tion
Upper Skin, Leading Edge Delamina 9.C./103 B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
(Zone 06, Sub zone A) tion
Upper Skin, Leading Edge Lineal Dam 9.C./103 B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
(Zone 06, Sub zone A) age
Upper Skin (Repair Zones Liquid In 9.D./104 C −
1 thru 4 and Sandwich gress
Areas of Repair Zone 5)
Lower Skin (all Zones Lineal Dam 9.A./101 B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
except Leading Edge) age
Lower Skin (all Zones Delamina 9.B./102 B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
except Leading Edge) tion
Lower Skin, Leading Edge Delamina 9.C./103 B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
(Zone 06, Sub zone A) tion
Lower Skin, Leading Edge Lineal Dam 9.C./103 B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
(Zone 06, Sub zone A) age
Lower Skin (Repair Zones Liquid In 9.D./104 C −
1 thru 4 and Sandwich gress
Areas of Repair Zone 5)
Elevator Trailing Edge Linear and 10.A./105 A, C −
Metallic Profile Superficial
Damage

Table 101
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

7. Allowable Damage

Allowable damage is damage that does not affect the necessary strength or
function of a component. You do not have to make a structural repair for
this type of damage. You must make a non structural repair. If this type

Page 112
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

of damage has rough or sharp edges, smooth these out with the correct
abrasive cloth. Replace the surface paint if necessary.
8. Repair Limits

The repair limits data gives the time limits in which to make temporary
and permanent repairs. These time limits are given in flight cycles/hours
(FC/FH). The repair limits also tell you which type of repair you can do.
To find the repair limits data applicable to a damaged area, you must know
the following data:
− the repair zone applicable to the damaged area.
− the area, length or depth (as applicable) of the damage to the structure.
− the type of damage (for example: nick, scratch, delamination).

9. Elevator Spar Box Skins − Allowable Damage

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE ON SKIN PANELS MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED

INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−21−00−1−001−00
AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SEC
TION OF THE SRM. INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM
WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 102.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.
IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE
EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.
A. Upper and Lower Skin (all Zones except Leading Edge) − Lineal Damage
NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in all Zones except Leading
Edge, refer to Figure 102 for Repair Zones.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 102.

Page 113
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 102
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 101 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 103 and perform the corre
sponding repair action.

Page 114
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Linear Damage − Outer Skin (of the Skin Panel) of the Elevator Spar Box −
All Zones except Leading Edge
Diagram 101
Pages 115/116
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN
S
SIZE TION
ON CATEGORY
CA GO Y DAMAGE X mm REPAIRS Y mm
(in) (in)
The greater
Chapter 51−77−12, Chapter 51−77−12, value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 20 months
Paragraph 2.A <1> Paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
2.5 Lmax.
Linear damage in (1) Non Structural
The greater
outer skin (with Repair, Chapter Chapter SRI
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
no damage in in Permanent B 55−21−11, Page 20 months <2> None 55−21−00, Page
(1.97 in) or in)
ternal sections) Block 201, Config Block 101
2.5 Lmax.
nicks,
, g
gouges,
g , 2, <1>
abrasions and Structural Re
scratches. The greater
pair, Chapter Chapter SRI
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(2) Permanent B 55−21−11, Page Immediately None 55−21−00, Page
(1.97 in) or in)
Block 201, Config Block 201
2.5 Lmax.
2
(3) − − Contact AIRBUS Immediately − − − −
Outer Skin (of the Skin Panel) of the Elevator Spar Box − All Zones except
Leading Edge
Table 103
<1> For non structural repairs, rivets and inserts must not be damaged.

<2> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Pages 117/118
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE ON SKIN PANELS MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED
INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−21−00−1−001−00
AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SEC
TION OF THE SRM. INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM
WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 104.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

B. Upper and Lower Skin (all Zones except Leading Edge) − Delamination

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in all Zones except Leading

Edge, refer to Figure 102 for Repair Zones.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 104.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 104
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 102 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 105 and perform the corre
sponding repair action.

Page 119
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Delamination − Elevator Skin Structure (Inner or Outer and Core) − All Zones
except Leading Edge
Diagram 102
Page 120
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN
S
SIZE TION
ON CATEGORY
CA GO Y DAMAGES X mm REPAIRS Y mm
(in) (in)
The greater
Chapter 51−77−12, Chapter 51−77−12, value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 20 months
Paragraph 2.A <1> Paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
2.5 Lmax.
Superficial dam
age, delamination (1) Non Structural
The greater
(with or without Repair, Chapter Chapter SRI
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
visible cracks Permanent B 55−21−11, Page 20 months <2> None 55−21−00, Page
(1.97 in) or in)
and holes). Lin Block 201, Config Block 101
2.5 Lmax.
ear damage
g depth
p 2 <1>
greater than Structural Re
0.75 mm (0.029 The greater
pair, Chapter Chapter SRI
in). value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(2) Permanent B 55−21−11, Page Immediately None 55−21−00, Page
(1.97 in) or in)
Block 201, Config Block 201
2.5 Lmax.
2
(3) − − Contact AIRBUS Immediately − − − −
Elevator Skin Structure (Inner or Outer and Core) − All Zones except Leading
Edge
Table 105
<1> For non structural repairs, rivets and inserts must not be damaged.

<2> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Pages 121/122
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE ON SKIN PANELS MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED
INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−21−00−1−001−00
AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SEC
TION OF THE SRM. INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM
WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 106.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

C. Upper and Lower Skin, Leading edge Zone 06, Subzone A

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Leading edge Zone 06, Sub
zone A, refer to Figure 102 for Repair Zones.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 106.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 106
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 103 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 107 and perform the corre
sponding repair action.

Page 123
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits − Elevator Skin Structure (Outer Skin) −
Leading Edge at Zone 06, Subzone A
Diagram 103
Page 124
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN
S
SIZE TION
ON CATEGORY
CA GO Y DAMAGES X mm REPAIRS Y mm
(in) (in)
The greater
Chapter 51−77−12, Chapter 51−77−12, value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 20 months
paragraph 2.A paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
Linear damage
g in 2.5 Lmax.
leading edge (1) Non Structural
(scratches) The greater
Repair, Chapter Chapter SRI
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Permanent B 55−21−11, Page 20 months <1> None 55−21−00, Page
(1.97 in) or in)
Block 201, Config Block 101
2.5 Lmax.
2
The greater
Chapter 51−77−12, Chapter 51−77−12 value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 20 months
paragraph 2.A paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
2.5 Lmax.
(2) Non Structural
Superficial dam The greater
Repair, Chapter Chapter SRI
age, delamina value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Permanent B 55−21−11, Page 20 months <1> None 55−21−00, Page
tions with or (1.97 in) or in)
Block 201, Config Block 101
without visible 2.5 Lmax.
2
cracks and
holes. Structural Re
The greater
pair, Chapter Chapter SRI
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(3) Permanent B 55−21−11, Page Immediately None 55−21−00, Page
(1.97 in) or in)
Block 201, Config Block 201
2.5 Lmax.
2
(4) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − −
Elevator Skin Structure (Outer Skin) − Leading Edge at Zone 06, Subzone A
Table 107
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Pages 125/126
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 108.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

D. Upper and Lower Skin − Liquid Ingress

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Repair Zones 1 thru 4 and

Sandwich Areas of Repair Zone 5, refer to Figure 102 for Repair
Zones.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 108.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 108
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.
(1) Follow the Flow chart instructions in Diagram 104.
− Perform the Weight assessment of the Elevator. Refer to Chapter
55−20−00, Page Block 101.
− Check for any debonding found.
− Check for allowable damage and repair limits in Diagram 104 and
Table 109.

Pages 127/128
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Liquid Ingress Flow Chart − Elevator Sandwich Structure of Upper and Lower
Skins
Diagram 104 (sheet 1)
Pages 129/130
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for Liquid Ingress − Elevator Sandwich
Structure of Upper and Lower Skins (Repair Zones 1 thru 4 and Sandwich Areas
of Repair Zone 5)
Diagram 104 (sheet 2)
Pages 131/132
55−21−11
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−2
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TIME LIMIT BE REPAIR LIFE LIM INSPECTION MAXIMUM NUM MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN
SIZE TION CATEGORY FORE REPAIR IT BER OF DAM
AGES PER DAMAGES X REPAIRS Y
ELEVATOR mm (in) mm (in)
1200 FH or 1500
FC or 200 Days, Weight Li Paragraph 4. Paragraph
Temporary C Chapter 51−75−00 Immediately None
whichever occurs mitation <3> <4> 4. <4>
first
(1) Chapter
Liquid Ingress 1200 FH or 1500
55−21−11, Chapter 55−21−11,
Damages in Sand FC or 200 Days, Weight Li Paragraph
Permanent Page Block Page Block 201, None − Paragraph 4.
wich Structure whichever occurs mitation <3> 4.
201, Con Config 2 <5> <6>
of Upper and first <7>
fig 2
Lower Skins <1>
<2> Chapter
55−21−11, Chapter 55−21−11,
Weight Li Paragraph
(2) Permanent Page Block Page Block 201, Immediately None − Paragraph 4.
mitation <3> 4.
201, Con Config 2 <6> <8>
fig 2
(3) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − − −
Elevator Sandwich Structure of Upper and Lower Skins (Repair Zones 1 thru 4
and Sandwich Areas of Repair Zone 5)
Table 109
<1> This allowable damages table for liquid ingress damaged areas is only valid after thermographic and tap test inspections according to NTM, Chapter 55−20−07.
If debonding is found at any of the liquid ingress damaged areas after tap test inspection according to NTM, Chapter 51−10−03, Page Block 501, the liquid
ingress damaged areas must be repaired according to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 201, Config 2.
<2> This allowable damages table for liquid ingress damaged areas are only valid for the Repair Zones 1 thru 4 and Sandwich Areas of Repair Zone 5 of the ele
vator skins. Refer to Figure 102 for Repair Zones.
<3> Liquid Ingress allowable damages and repair limits are only applicable if the weight of the Elevator is less than the maximum allowable weight limits. Refer
to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 101 .

<4> Distance between allowable damage areas per liquid ingress and repair areas must be also taken into account.

<5> For damaged area size up to 1000 mm (1.55 in), perform permanent non structural repair according to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 201, Config 2, paragraph
5.A. For damaged area size between 1000 mm (1.55 in) and 5000 mm (36.45 in), perform non structural repair according to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 201,
Config 2, paragraph 5.B.

<6> During repair process, affected core must be systematically removed and repaired as follows:

When core is exposed after outer face cut out, perform an initial drying of damaged structure.

Remove affected core.

Perform a final drying of damaged structure.

Page 133
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Replace affected core by a new one as required in relevant repair.

Page 134
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

<7> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

<8> For damaged area size between 5000 mm (7.75 in) and 15000 mm (23.25 in) and with a maximum length between 100 mm (3.94 in) and 150 mm (5.90 in) only,
perform permanent non structural repair according to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 201, Config 2, paragraph 5.B. For damaged area size between 15000 mm (23.25
in) and 60000 mm (93 in), perform structural repair according to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 201, Config 2.

Pages 135/136
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

10. Elevator Trailing Edge Metallic Profile − Allowable Damage

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 110.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.
IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE
EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

A. Linear and Superficial Damage in Elevator Trailing Edge Metallic Profile

− Zone A

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Zone A of the Elevator

Trailing Edge Metallic Profile, refer to Figure 102 for Repair
Zones.
NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 110.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 110
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.
(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 105 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 111 and perform the corre
sponding repair action.

Page 137
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Linear and Superficial Damages (Nicks, Gouges, Holes, Corrosion and

Scratches), Elevator Trailing Edge Metallic Profile − Zone A
Diagram 105
Page 138
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TIME LIMIT BE REPAIR LIFE TIME INSPECTION RE MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN MIN. DIS
SIZE TION CATEGORY FORE REPAIR QUIRED TANCE
DAMAGES mm REPAIRS mm FROM FAS
(in) (in) TENER
AREA
The greater
value of 50 2.5 Fas
Chapter 51−77−12, 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 100 days No mm (1.97 tener Di
Paragraph 2.A in)
in) or 2.5 ameter
Lmax <2>
(1)
The greater
Chapter 51−73−00 value of 50 2.5 Fas
50 mm (1.97
Permanent A and Chapter 100 days <1> None No mm (1.97 tener Di
in)
51−74−00 in) or 2.5 ameter
Lmax <2>
Linear and Su The greater
perficial Damages value of 50 2.5 Fas
Chapter 51−77−12, 50 mm (1.97
(Nicks, Gouges, Temporary C Immediately 100 days No mm (1.97 tener Di
Paragraph 2.A in)
Holes, Corrosion, in) or 2.5 ameter
Scratches) Lmax <2>
(2)
The greater
value of 50 2.5 Fas
Chapter 55−21−11, 50 mm (1.97
Permanent A 100 days <1> None No mm (1.97 tener Di
Figure 211 in)
in) or 2.5 ameter
Lmax <2>
The greater
value of 50 2.5 Fas
Chapter 55−21−11, 50 mm (1.97
(3) Permanent A Immediately None No mm (1.97 tener Di
Figure 211 in)
in) or 2.5 ameter
Lmax <2>
Elevator Trailing Edge Metallic Profile − Zone A
Table 111
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

<2> Lmax. is the maximum size of the damage.

Pages 139/140
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR SPAR BOX − ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT PARAGRAPH.

CAUTION: OBEY THE GIVEN INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE WHICH LEADS TO THE
APPLICABLE INSPECTION PROGRAM DEFINED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPEC
TIONS (SRI) OF THE SRM, IF NECESSARY.

CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER TO

PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVALUA
TION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.
SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

1. General

NOTE: CONFIG−3 is applicable after modification 35515G0455 only. For effec

tivity refer to Modification/Service Bulletin List given in Chapter
55−20−00, Page Block 001.

NOTE: For definition of allowable damage refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For Damage Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14

− CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.
2. Damage evaluation

Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

3. Type of damage
There are different types of damage which can occur to the composite struc
ture:

A. Delamination with or without visible Cracks and Holes, Debonding and

Dents.

For more data on damage causes refer to Chapter 51−77−10.

B. Linear Damage

Nicks, gouges, abrasions and scratches refer to Chapter 51−11−00.

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

4. Distance between Damage Areas and Distance between repair Areas

There is a minimum permitted distance between damaged areas and between re

pair areas (refer to Figure 101, Sheet 1).

A. Damaged Areas

If the distance between two areas of damage is (X) more than 50 mm

(1.97 in), the total area to be considered depends on the order of the
two damages.
(1) Different Order

The damages will be considered as being of different orders if LmaxL

of the larger damage is more than 10 × LmaxS of the smaller damage
(LmaxL more than 10 × LmaxS).
(2) Same Order

Two damages will be considered as being of the same order if LmaxL

of the larger damage is less than or equal to 10 × LmaxS of the
smaller damage (LmaxL ≤ 10 × LmaxS).

(3) Calculation of total damage area

Two damages areas will be considered as one damage area according to
their orders and the distance between the two damaged areas (X).
− Minimum distance for different orders: the greater of 50 mm (1.97
in) or 2.5 × LmaxS.
− Minimum distance for same orders: the greater of 50 mm (1.97 in)
or 2.5 × LmaxL.

When the distance (X) between two damages areas is less than the
minimum distance, the two damages must be enveloped together and the
area of the envelop is to considered as one damage area.
B. Repair Areas

The minimum acceptable distance Y between two adjacent repairs depends on

the repair type:
− Minimum distance Y between two structural repairs is 50 mm (1.97 in)
(the distance is measured from the most external repair ply of first
structural repair to the most external repair ply of second structural
repair).
− Minimum distance Y between two non−structural repairs depends on the
minimum distance between the damaged areas repaired, according to Fig

ure 101, Sheet 2 (make sure that a non−structural repair only restores
the protection of the structure against external agents).

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

− Minimum distance Y between an structural and a non−structural repair

depends on the minimum distance between the damages repaired according
to Figure 101, Sheet 2.

If one damage area is composed of several individual damages according

to paragraph 4.A., separate structural repairs (maximum area 60.000 mm

(93.000 in
)) can be performed in each original individual area of dam

age only if the distance Y (refer to Figure 101) between the separate
repairs contours is greater than 50 mm (1.97 in). Otherwise perform one
structural repair of the enveloped damages.

For external skin and core only, refer to Diagram 102 and Table 105:
− If the damage area is lower than or equal to 15.000 mm
(23.250 in
),
a non structural repair must be performed. Refer to the corresponding
Figure in Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 201, Config 3. If the damage
area is greater than 15.000 mm
(23.250 in
) a structural repair must
be performed. Refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 201, Config 3.
− If the total damaged area is greater than 60.000 mm
(93.000 in
), and
individual areas within an envelope cannot be repaired separately, con

tact AIRBUS.
− When a damage of lower than 15.000 mm
(23.250 in
) is located near to
a damage greater than 15.000 mm
(23.250 in
), if the distances be

tween the damages are equal to or greater than the Lmax of the larger
damage then, provided that the larger damage is repaired structurally,
the smaller damage may be repaired with a non structural repair.

Page 103
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Distance between Damage Areas and between Repair Areas

Figure 101 (sheet 1)

Page 104
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Distance between two different types of repair

Figure 101 (sheet 2)

Page 105
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

5. Repair Zones

Each of the components of the Elevator Spar Box structure is divided into
repair zones. These repair zones show the zones of different structural im

portance of the component. When you do a damage evaluation (refer to para

graph 2.) you must refer to the repair zone data. The repair zone data of
the Spar Box structure is in Figure 102.

Page 106
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Upper Skin − Repair Zones

Figure 102 (sheet 1)

Pages 107/108
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Lower Skin − Repair Zones

Figure 102 (sheet 2)

Pages 109/110
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Orientation Plies − Skin Damage Zones

Figure 102 (sheet 3)

Pages 111/112
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Upper Skin − Bronze Mesh Zones

Figure 102 (sheet 4)

Pages 113/114
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Trailing Edge Metallic Profile − Repair Zones

Figure 102 (sheet 5)

Page 115
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

6. Allowable Damage Description/Criteria

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ PARAGRAPH/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION INSTRUCTION REF
TYPE DIAGRAM CATEGORY
ERENCE
Upper and Lower Skin Linear Dam 9.A. / B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
(all Zones except Lead age 101
i
ing Edge)
d ) Delamina 9.B. / B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
tion 102
Elevator Leading Edge Linear Dam 9.C. / B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
Skin age 103
Delamina 9.C. / B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
tion 103
Elevator Upper Skin, Linear Dam 10.A. / A, C −
Bronze Mesh − All Zones age 104
Debonding 10.B. / A −
105
Elevator Trailing Edge Linear and 11.A. / A, C −
Metallic Profile Superficial 106
Damage

Table 101
NOTE: For detail definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14.
7. Allowable Damage

Allowable damage is damage that does not affect the necessary strength or
function of a component. You do not have to make a structural repair for
this type of damage. You must make a non−structural repair. If this type
of damage has rough or sharp edges, smooth these out with the correct
abrasive cloth. Replace the surface paint if necessary.

8. Repair Limits

The repair limits data gives the time limits in which to make temporary
and permanent repairs. These time limits are given in Flight Cycles/Flight
Hours (FC/FH). The repair limits also tell you which type of repair you
can do. To find the repair limits data applicable to a damage area, you
must know the following data:
− The repair zone applicable to damage area.
− The area, length or depth (as applicable) of the damage to the structure.
− The type of damage (for example: linear damage, delamination).

Page 116
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

9. Elevator Spar Box Skins − Allowable Damage

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE ON SKIN PANELS MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED

INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−21−00−1−001−00
AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SEC
TION OF THE SRM. INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM
WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 102.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.
IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE
EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

A. Upper and Lower Skin (all Zones except Leading Edge) − Linear Damage
NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in all Zones except Leading
Edge, refer to Figure 102 for Repair Zones Definition.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 102.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 102
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 101 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.
(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 103 and perform the corre
sponding repair action.

Page 117
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Outer Skin (of the Skin Panel) of the Elevator Spar Box − All Zones except
Leading Edge
Diagram 101
Page 118
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN

DAMAGE REPAIR AC REPAIR
TYPE OF DAMAGE REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION DAMAGES X mm REPAIRS Y mm
SIZE TION CATEGORY
(in) (in)
The greater
Chapter
Chapter 51−77−12, value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 20 Months 51−77−12, Para
Paragraph 2.A <1> (1.97 in) or in)
graph 2.A
2.5 L max.
Linear damage in (1) Non Structural
The greater
outer skin (with Repair, refer to Chapter SRI
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
no Damage in in Permanent B Chapter 55−21−11, 20 Months <2> None 55−21−00, Page
(1.97 in) or in)
ternal sections), Page Block 201, Block 101
2.5 L max.
nicks,
, Gouges,
g , Config 3 <1>
abrasions and Structural Re
scratches The greater
pair, refer to Chapter SRI
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(2) Permanent B Chapter 55−21−11, Immediately None 55−21−11, Page
(1.97 in) or in)
Page Block 201, Block 201
2.5 Lmax.
Config 3
(3) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − −
Outer Skin (of the Skin Panel) of the Elevator Spar Box − All Zones except
Leading Edge
Table 103
<1> For non structural repairs, rivets must not be damaged.

<2> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Pages 119/120
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE ON SKIN PANELS MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED
INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−21−00−1−001−00
AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SEC
TION OF THE SRM. INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM
WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 104.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

B. Upper and Lower Skin (all Zones except Leading Edge) − Delamination

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in all Zones except Leading

Edge, refer to Figure 102 for Repair Zones Definition.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 104.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 104
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 102 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 105 and perform the corre
sponding repair action.

Page 121
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Skin Structure (Inner or Outer and Core) − All Zones except Leading
Edge
Diagram 102
Page 122
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN

DAMAGE REPAIR AC REPAIR
TYPE OF DAMAGE REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION DAMAGES X mm REPAIRS Y mm
SIZE TION CATEGORY
(in) (in)
The greater
Chapter 51−77−12,
Chapter 51−77−12 value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Paragraph 2. A Immediately 20 Months
Paragraph 2. A (1.97 in) or in)
<1>
2.5 L max.
Delamination (1) Non structural
(with or without The greater
repair refer to Chapter SRI
visible cracks value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Permanent B Chapter 55−21−11, 20 Months <2> None 55−21−00, Page
and holes). Lin (1.97 in) or in)
Page Block 201, Block 101
ear Damage depth 2.5 L max.
Config 3 <1>
greater than
0,75 mm (0,029 Structural Re
The greater
in) pair, refer to Chapter SRI
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(2) Permanent B Chapter 55−21−11, Immediately None 55−21−11, Page
(1.97 in) or in)
Page Block 201, Block 201
2.5 L max.
Config 3
(3) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − −
Elevator Skin Structure (Inner or Outer and Core) − All Zones except Leading
Edge
Table 105
<1> For non structural repairs, rivets must not be damaged.

<2> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Pages 123/124
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE ON SKIN PANELS MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED
INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−21−00−1−001−00
AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SEC
TION OF THE SRM. INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM
WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 106.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

C. Elevator Leading Edge Outer Skin

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Leading Edge, refer to Fig

ure 102 for Repair Zones Definition.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 106.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 106
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 103 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 107 and perform the corre
sponding repair action.

Page 125
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Skin Structure (Outer Skin) − Leading Edge

Diagram 103

Page 126
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN

DAMAGE REPAIR AC REPAIR
TYPE OF DAMAGE REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION DAMAGES X mm REPAIRS Y mm
SIZE TION CATEGORY
(in) (in)
The greater
Chapter 51−77−12, Chapter 51−77−12, value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 20 Months
Paragraph 2. A Paragraph 2. A (1.97 in) or in)
Linear Damage
g in 2.5 L max.
Leading Edge (1) Non structural
(scratches) The greater
repair refer to Chapter SRI
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Permanent B Chapter 55−21−11, 20 Months <1> None 55−21−00, Page
(1.97 in) or in)
Page Block 201, Block 101
2.5 L max.
Config 3
The greater
Chapter SRI
Chapter 51−77−12, value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 20 Months 55−21−00, Page
Paragraph 2. A (1.97 in) or in)
Block 101
2.5 L max.
(2) Non structural
The greater
repair refer to Chapter SRI
Delamination with value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Permanent B Chapter 55−21−11, 20 Months <1> None 55−21−00, Page
or without vis (1.97 in) or in)
Page Block 201, Block 101
ible cracks and 2.5 L max.
Config 3
holes
Structural Re
The greater
pair, refer to Chapter SRI
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(3) Permanent B Chapter 55−21−11, Immediately None 55−21−11, Page
(1.97 in) or in)
Page Block 201, Block 201
2.5 L max.
Config 3
(4) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − −
Elevator Leading Edge Outer Skin
Table 107
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Pages 127/128
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

10. Elevator Upper Skin, Bronze Mesh − Allowable Damage

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 108.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.
IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE
EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

A. Bronze Mesh − Linear Damage (all Zones)

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Bronze Mesh, refer to Figure
102 for Repair Zones Definition.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 108.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 108
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 104 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.
(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 109 and perform the corre
sponding repair action.

Page 129
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Bronze Mesh − Linear Damage (all Zones)

Diagram 104

Page 130
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

DAMAGE REPAIR AC REPAIR MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN DAMAGES

TYPE OF DAMAGE REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION
SIZE TION CATEGORY
Chapter 51−77−12,
Temporary C Immediately 600 FH − 50 mm (1.97 in)
(1) Paragraph 2. A
Permanent A <1> Immediately None − 50 mm (1.97 in)
Linear Damage
Chapter 55−21−11,
(2) Permanent A Page Block 201, Immediately None − 50 mm (1.97 in)
Config 3
Bronze Mesh − All Zones
Table 109
<1> If the composite structure is in good condition and the damage to Bronze Mesh is within allowable damage limits, proceed as follows:

(1) Clean the damaged Bronze Mesh area with the Cleaning Agent (Material No. 11−003 and 11−026), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.E.(1).(a).

(2) Apply Laminating Resin in the damage area and cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 6.B.(2) and Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A).

(3) Restore the surface protection , refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Pages 131/132
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 110.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

B. Bronze Mesh − Debonding (all Zones)

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Bronze Mesh, refer to Figure

102 for Repair Zones Definition.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 110.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 110
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.
(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 105 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 111 and perform the corre
sponding repair action.

Page 133
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Bronze Mesh − Delamination Damage (all Zones)

Diagram 105

Page 134
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

DAMAGE REPAIR AC
REPAIR REPAIR LIFE LIM
MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN
TYPE OF DAMAGE REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED INSPECTION
SIZE TION CATEGORY IT DAMAGES
Permanent A <1> Immediately None − 50 mm (1.97 in)
(1) Chapter 51−77−12,
Temporary C Immediately 600 FH − 50 mm (1.97 in)
Paragraph 2.A
Delamination
Chapter 55−21−11,
(2) Permanent A Page Block 201, Immediately None − 50 mm (1.97 in)
Config 3
Bronze Mesh − All Zones
Table 111
<1> If the composite structure is in good condition and the damage to Bronze Mesh is within allowable damage limits, proceed as follows:

(1) Prepare and dry the repair area (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.M.)

(2) Drill the sufficient number of holes in the debonded Bronze Mesh. Use a clean twist drill with a diameter just large enough to permit the insertion of a
clean hypodermic needle into the holes (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 3.D).

(3) Prepare the Laminating Resin (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 6.B.(2) and Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A).
(4) Fill a hypodermic syringe with the prepared resin; Inject the resin through the holes. Do this in different directions until all the area is completely
filled.

(5) Place a piece of parting film on the repair area (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 3.B.

(6) Apply pressure to the repair area.

(7) Cure the resin (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 6.B.(2) and Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A.
(8) Remove the parting film from the repair area.

(9) Do an inspection of the repair (refer to Chapter 51−77−10).

(10) Remove any remaining resin from the surface of the repair.

(11) Use abrasive cloth. Start with 280 grade and finish with 400 grade.
(12) Clean the damaged Bronze Mesh area with Cleaning Agent (Material No. 11−003 and 11−026), (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.E.(1).(a)).

(13) Restore the surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Pages 135/136
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

11. Elevator Trailing Edge Metallic Profile − Allowable Damage

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 112.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.
IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE
EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

A. Linear and Superficial Damage in Elevator Trailing Edge Metallic Profile

− Zone A

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Zone A of the Elevator

Trailing Edge Metallic Profile, refer to Figure 102 for Repair
Zones.
NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 112.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 112
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.
(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 106 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 113 and perform the corre
sponding repair action.

Page 137
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Linear and Superficial Damages (Nicks, Gouges, Holes, Corrosion and

Scratches), Elevator Trailing Edge Metallic Profile − Zone A
Diagram 106
Page 138
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TIME LIMIT BE REPAIR LIFE TIME INSPECTION RE MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN MIN. DIS
SIZE TION CATEGORY FORE REPAIR QUIRED TANCE
DAMAGES mm REPAIRS mm FROM FAS
(in) (in) TENER
AREA
The greater
value of 50 2.5 Fas
Chapter 51−77−12, 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 100 days No mm (1.97 tener Di
Paragraph 2.A in)
in) or 2.5 ameter
Lmax. <2>
(1)
The greater
Chapter 51−73−00 value of 50 2.5 Fas
50 mm (1.97
Permanent A and Chapter 100 days <1> None No mm (1.97 tener Di
in)
51−74−00 in) or 2.5 ameter
Lmax. <2>
Linear and Su The greater
perficial Damages value of 50 2.5 Fas
Chapter 51−77−12, 50 mm (1.97
(Nicks, Gouges, Temporary C Immediately 100 days No mm (1.97 tener Di
Paragraph 2.A in)
Holes, Corrosion, in) or 2.5 ameter
Scratches) Lmax. <2>
(2)
The greater
value of 50 2.5 Fas
Chapter 55−21−11, 50 mm (1.97
Permanent A 100 days <1> None No mm (1.97 tener Di
Figure 211 in)
in) or 2.5 ameter
Lmax. <2>
The greater
value of 50 2.5 Fas
Chapter 55−21−11, 50 mm (1.97
(3) Permanent A Immediately None No mm (1.97 tener Di
Figure 211 in)
in) or 2.5 ameter
Lmax. <2>
Elevator Trailing Edge Metallic Profile − Zone A
Table 113
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

<2> Lmax. is the maximum size of the damage.

Pages 139/140
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SKIN − REPAIRS

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

1. General
NOTE: CONFIG−1 is applicable before modification 30565G00357 only.

NOTE: For Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14

− CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

This topic contains all of the specific repair procedures for the skin pan
els of the Elevator Spar Box. The repair zones and allowable damage data
for these repair procedures are in Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config
1. The General Repair Procedure (hot bond repair 120° C (248° F)) is in
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E. and Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201.

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

2. Safety Precautions

There are risk to you and other persons when you work with composite re
pair materials. To prevent risks, read and obey the warnings given below.

WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.

WARNING: OBEY THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS WHEN YOU USE CLEANING AGENTS,
ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND PAINTS. THESE MATERIALS ARE DANGEROUS.
WARNING: WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND FILTER MASK WHEN YOU CUT,
ABRADE OR DRILL COMPOSITE MATERIALS. THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MA
TERIALS CAN GET INTO YOUR LUNGS OR ONTO YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE YOU
INJURY. IMMEDIATELY REMOVE DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.

WHEN YOU WORK WITH CFRP COMPOSITE MATERIALS, IMMEDIATELY REMOVE
DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRIC POWER ON
THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST ONLY USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT REPAIR.

CAUTION: OBEY THE GIVEN INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE WHICH LEADS TO THE
APPLICABLE INSPECTION PROGRAM DEFINED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR IN
SPECTIONS (SRI) OF THE SRM, IF NECESSARY.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER TO PARA
GRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER REMARKS

No General Repairs applicable − −

Table 201

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

4. Repair Scheme of Specific Repairs

SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE REPAIR INSPECTION

CATEGORY INSTRUCTION REF
ERENCE
Repair to External skin 5.A. 201 − −
and Honeycomb Core (Flush
Repair), Zones 01, 03 and
04 (repair inactive from
revision dated Nov.
01/96)
Repair to External Skin, 5.B. 202 − −
Internal Skin and Honey
comb Core (Flush Repair),
Zones 01, 03 and 04 (re
pair inactive from revi
sion dated Nov. 01/96)
Repair of Damage to Fill 5.C. 203 A −
er, Trailing Edge Area,
Zone 03
Non−structural repair for 5.D. 204 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
damage less than 1000 mm
(1.55 in)
Non−structural repair for 5.E. 205 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
damage between 1000 mm
(1.55 in) and 15000 mm
(23.25 in)
Repair to Outer Skin, 5.F. 206 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
Zone 01 (All Subzones)
Repair to Outer Skin and 5.G. 207 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
Core, or debonding of in
ner Skin and Core, Zone
01 (All Subzones)
Repair to inner skin, 5.Q. 219 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
outer skin and core, Zone
01
Repair of damaged/debonded 5.H. 208 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
core, chamfer area, Zone
02 (Subzone F)
Repair of damage to outer 5.I. 209 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
skin or damaged/debonded
core, Zone 02 (Subzone E)

Table 202

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE REPAIR INSPECTION

CATEGORY INSTRUCTION REF
ERENCE
Repair of damage to outer 5.J. 210 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
skin, Zone 03.
Repair of damaged/debonded 5.K. 211 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
core, Zone 03.
Replacement of an insert, 5.L. 212 N/A −
Zone 03.
Repair of damage to an 5.L. 212 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
insert area, Zone 03.
Repair of damage to TE 5.M. 213 A −
aluminum profile
Repair of damage to outer 5.N. 214 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
skin or core under alumi
num strip, Zone 04
Repair to Skin, Zone 06, 5.O. 215, 216, B 55−21−11−2−002−00
with no Bonding Strip 217
Repair to Upper−Skin, 5.P. 218 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
Zone 06, in Bonding Strip
Area

Table 202
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories, refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

5. Elevator Spar Box Skin − Repairs

A. Repair to External Skin and Honeycomb Core, (Flush Repair), Zones 01, 03
and 04.
NOTE: Repair inactive from revision Nov. 01/96. Repair deleted and super
seded by repairs described in paragraphs 5.F. and 5.G..

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.
NOTE: This repair is to be carried out with a hot−bond 180° C repair
procedure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.).

(1) Permanent Repair (refer to Figure 201)

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 3).

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Cut and remove the damaged skin and honeycomb.

(c) Cut the skin and honeycomb into a regular shape and chamber the
undamaged skin into an overlap (refer to Figure 201 for dimen

sions).

(d) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(e) Make the honeycomb core repair piece (Material Z−17.141, Honey

comb Core, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) to the necessary size and
shape for the repair.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(f) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

WARNING: ADHESIVE FILM (MATERIAL FM−300M.03 CYNAMID, ADHESIVE FILM)

IS DANGEROUS.

(g) Cut the adhesive film (Material FM−300M.03 CYNAMID, Adhesive

Film) to the size and shape of the honeycomb core repair piece.
(h) Remove the protective sheet from the adhesive film. Apply the
adhesive film to the bottom of the repair hole (refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 4.B.).

WARNING: ADHESIVE FOAM (MATERIAL FM410−1 CYNAMID, ADHESIVE FOAM) IS

DANGEROUS.

(i) Cut the adhesive foam (Material FM410−1 CYNAMID, Adhesive Foam)
to suit the size and shape of the honeycomb core repair piece.

(j) Remove the protective film from the adhesive foam and put it
around the honeycomb core repair piece.
(k) Install the honeycomb core repair piece in its repair position.

(l) Prepare the fabric repair plies for the laminate repair patch
(refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C.)

(m) Cut out a piece of adhesive film (Material FM−300M.03 CYNAMID,

Adhesive Film) to suit the size and shape of the repair area
(refer to Figure 201 for dimensions).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(n) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
(o) Remove the protective sheet from both sides of the adhesive film.
Apply the adhesive film to the repair area (refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 4.B.).

Page 205
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(p) Lay−up the repair plies on the repair area (refer to Figure 201
and Chapter 55−21−00, Page Block 101). For more data, refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C. Note that there must be an
overlap of 15 mm (0.59 in) on subsequent plies.

(q) Install the vacuum−cure equipment over the laminate repair area
(refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.B.).

(r) Cure the repair plies under vacuum conditions (minimum 80% vacu

um). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D. for full data.

(s) After the repair plies have cured, remove the vacuum−cure equip

ment from the repair area.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(t) With abrasive cloth, make the repair patch smooth and level with
the adjacent skin surface. Initially use 280 grade and finish off
with 400 grade. If necessary apply pore filler (Material No.
08−008).

(u) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(v) Repair the surface protection (refer to Chapter 51−75−12).

(w) Tell the Inspection Department to do an inspection at 6000 flight

hours (FH).
(2) Temporary Repair

(a) Remove the damaged material that shows above the Elevator skin
surface.

(b) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

WARNING: ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. 08−010C) IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) with the thickening agent
(Material No. 05−057).

(e) Fill the damaged skin and exposed honeycomb core material with
the adhesive paste.

(f) Let the adhesive cure for 24 hours at room temperature (RT).
NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E. for data.

Page 206
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(g) After the adhesive has cured, smooth the cured adhesive into the
skin contour. Use abrasive cloth 200 grade first and then finish
with 400 grade.

(h) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent, (Material No.
11−003).

(i) Put a protective layer of High Speed Tape (HST) over the repair
area. Press the edges down tightly.
(j) Repair the surface protection (refer to Chapter 51−75−12).

(k) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair (refer to Chapter 55−21−00, Page Block 101 ) to
find the time limit applicable to the temporary repair. Tell the
inspection department what the permissible number of flight hours
(FH) is before a permanent repair is necessary.

(3) Permanent Repair After Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 201)

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 3).
(b) Remove the HST and the filler.

(c) Do the steps 5.A.(1)(b) thru 5.A.(1)(w) of the repair procedure

5.A..

Pages 207/208
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to External Skin and Honeycomb Core (Flush Repair), Zones 01, 03 and
04
Figure 201
Pages 209/210
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

B. Repair to External Skin, Internal Skin and Honeycomb Core (Flush Repair),
Zones 01, 03 and 04.
NOTE: Repair inactive from revision Nov. 01/96. Repair deleted and super

seded by repairs described in paragraphs 5.F. and 5.G..

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out with a hot−bond 180° C repair

procedure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.).

(1) Permanent Repair (refer to Figure 202)

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 3).
WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Cut and remove the damaged skins and honeycomb.

(c) Cut the skins and honeycomb into a regular shape and chamfer the
external skin into an overlap (refer to Figure 202 for dimen

sions).
(d) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(e) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
doubler (refer to Chapter 55−21−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 7).

(f) Make the repair doubler to the necessary size and shape for the
repair.

(g) Make the honeycomb core repair piece to the necessary size and
shape for the repair.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(h) Clean the repair pieces and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003).

WARNING: ADHESIVE FILM (MATERIAL FM−300M.03 CYNAMID, ADHESIVE FILM)

IS DANGEROUS.

(i) Cut the adhesive film (Material FM−300M.03 CYNAMID, Adhesive

Film) to the size and shape of the repair doubler.

(j) Remove the protective sheet from the adhesive film. Apply the
adhesive film to the repair doubler and cure (refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 4.B).

(k) Cut out a piece of adhesive film (Material FM−300M.03 CYNAMID,

Adhesive Film) to suit the size and shape of the internal skin
repair area.

Page 211
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(l) Remove the protective sheet from the adhesive film. Apply the
adhesive film to the internal skin repair area (refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 4.B.). Do not cure at this stage.

WARNING: ADHESIVE FOAM (MATERIAL FM410−1 CYNAMID, ADHESIVE FOAM) IS

DANGEROUS.

(m) Cut the adhesive foam (Material FM410−1 CYNAMID, Adhesive Foam)
to suit the size and shape of the honeycomb core repair piece.
(n) Remove the protective film from the adhesive foam and put it
around the honeycomb core repair piece.

(o) Install the repair doubler and the honeycomb core repair piece in
their repair positions.
(p) Get the correct pre−impregnated fabric material for the laminate
repair patch (refer to Chapter 55−21−00, Page Block 101 , Figure
103).

(q) Prepare the fabric repair plies for the laminate repair patch
(refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C.)
(r) Cut out a piece of adhesive film (Material FM−300M.03 CYNAMID,
Adhesive Film) to suit the size and shape of the repair area,
refer to Figure 202 for dimensions.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(s) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(t) Remove the protective sheet from the adhesive film. Apply the
adhesive film to the repair area (refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
paragraph 4.B.).
(u) Lay−up the repair plies on the repair area, refer to Figure 202
and Chapter 55−21−00, Page Block 101, Figure 103. For more data,
refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C. Note that there must be
an overlap of 15 mm (0.59 in) on subsequent plies.

(v) Install the vacuum−cure equipment over the laminate repair area
(refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.B).

(w) Cure the repair plies under vacuum conditions (minimum 80% vacu

um). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D. for full data.

(x) After the repair plies have cured, remove the vacuum−cure equip

ment from the repair area.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(y) With abrasive cloth, make the repair patch smooth and level with
the adjacent skin surface. Initially use 280 grade and finish off

Page 212
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

with 400 grade. If necessary apply pore filler (Material No.

08−008).
(z) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (material No.
11−003).

(aa)Repair the surface protection (refer to Chapter 51−75−12).

(ab)Tell the Inspection Department to do and inspection at 6000

flight hours (FH).

Pages 213/214
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to External Skin, Internal Skin and Honeycomb Core (Flush Repair),
Zones 01, 03 and 04
Figure 202
Pages 215/216
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH
3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 203.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.
C. Repair of Damage to Filler, Trailing Edge Area, Zone 03.

NOTE: This repair is only applicable before Modification 33296G0406.

NOTE: This repair procedure is applicable when only the filler is par
tially or totally damaged, in the Elevator Trailing Edge.
NOTE: Before you repair the damaged area you must do a damage evaluation
(refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data).

NOTE: In order to delimit the cracked zone and to identify the existing
filler product, it is possible to test the hardness on the reverse
side of one of the zones of detached filler material. If it in
volves a rigid product, the original filler material is resin Mate
rial No. 08−051 or 16−054, in case of an elastomeric type product,
it is sealant Material No. 09−016. The identification shall be con
ducted on the reverse side of the detected filler; since pore
filler could exist on the outside face and it could cause possible
confusion when trying to identify the product on the side carrying
the outside paint.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 203
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 217
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Epoxy Filler − Material No. 16−054, refer to

Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−016, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Chemical Conversion Coating − Material No. 13−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Epoxy Primer − Material No. 16−006B, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane Primer − Material No. 16−001B, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane Primer − Material No. 16−001C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sandpaper grade 200 −
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 203)

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D.).

CAUTION: USE A STAINLESS STEEL SPATULA WITH ROUNDED EDGES AND TIP TO
REMOVE THE DAMAGED FILLER.

CAUTION: IF THE DAMAGED MATERIAL IS SEALANT, PREHEAT THE TOOL AND

THE FILLER IN THE DAMAGED AREA AT 70° C (158° F) TO REMOVE
THE DAMAGED MATERIAL.

(b) Remove carefully the damaged filler from the repair area, making
sure you do not damage the skin surface and the aluminum pro
file.

(c) Remove the remaining damaged material with a sandpaper grade 200
and a vacuum cleaner in the repair area.
NOTE: Remove also the profile protection if it is scratched.

(d) Use the cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003) to clean the repair
area.

(e) Reprotect the aluminum profile (refer to Figure 203 for materials
data).
(f) Fill with resin or sealant by spatula the damaged area up to the
external contour. Use the correct material as follows:

Page 218
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

− If the damage affects completely the filler (and this must be

completely removed) use (Material No. 16−054).
− If the damage affects only partially the filler:

1 If original filler is sealant (Material No. 09−016) use the

same material as original.

2 If original filler is adhesive (Material No. 08−051) or pore

filler (Material No. 16−054) use pore filler (Material No.
16−054).

NOTE: Make sure that the aerodynamic contour is maintained.

(g) Protect the repair area to prevent contamination ingress.

(h) Make the following step 5.C.(2)(i) only if epoxy filler (Material
No. 16−054) is used to fill the damaged area.

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

(i) Cure the resin for a minimum 2 hours at room temperature in the
repair area.
(j) Make the following step 5.C.(2)(k) only if the sealant (Material
No. 09−016) is used to fill the damaged area.

(k) Let cure the resin or sealant in the repair area (refer to
manufacturer’s specification for full data).
(l) Remove the protection from the repair area.

(m) Restore the surface protection. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

(n) After the repair is finished, make sure that all unwanted mate
rial and dust is removed from the repair and surrounding areas.
Use a vacuum cleaner if necessary.

Pages 219/220
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Filler Elevator Trailing Edge Area, Zone 03

Figure 203

Pages 221/222
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 204.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.
D. Non−structural repair for damage less than 1000 mm (1.55 in)

NOTE: This repair procedure is applicable for Zones 01, 02, 03, 04 and
sandwich areas of Zone 5.

NOTE: For repair zones definition refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block
101, Config 1.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 204
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 223
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbon fabric (dry) − Material No. 05−088 or 20−023,

− Laminating resin
− Low Density Compound
− Precured Doubler
− Pore Filler
− Parting Film
− Scotch Brite, type A
− Cleaning Agent
− Sealant
(2) Repair Instructions
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 20−022 or 20−032 or
20−028, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022 or 20−042,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00 or any
Low Density compound from Chap

ter 51−77−11, paragraph 6.B.(4)
Table 4, except Material No.
05−090
− Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para

graph 6.B.(10), Table 12, item 1
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para

graph 3.B
−
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.

NOTE: Only repairs with access for the upper surface are possible if
the Elevator panels are assembled.

NOTE: When the damage is composed of several individual damages (re

fer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 1, paragraph
4.A), perform the repair as follows: do not remove the undam

aged plies and/or core between the individual damages. Repair
each area as an individual cosmetic repair, but lay up the
carbon fabric repair plies over the entire envelope repair
area. Refer to Figure 204 Sheet 4.

(a) Prepare the repair area, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph

4.M.

(b) Follow the repair instructions given in Chapter 51−77−13, para

graph 2.H, using the repair materials listed above. Refer to the
relevant figure, as follows:

Page 224
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

1 For Zone 01: refer to Figure 204, Sheet 1 (refer to Sheet 2

only in case you can not respect the plies overlap described
in Sheet 1).

2 For Zones 02 and 04: refer to Figure 204, Sheet 2.

3 For Zone 03: refer to Figure 204, Sheet 3. If insert is dam

aged or bushing is debonded, refer to paragraph 5.L. for insert
replacement instructions.
NOTE: In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure follow
the instructions described in paragraph 5.D.(2)(c).

(c) For all Zones, in case of liquid ingress inside sandwich struc
ture, affected core must be systematically removed and repaired
as follows:
− Perform an initial drying of damaged structure. Refer to Chap
ter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.B.
− Remove affected core. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.C.(1) except step (b).
− Perform a final drying. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.B.
− Replace affected core following the instructions of the rele
vant repair.

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(d) Before surface protection restoration apply a layer of pore fill

er material as follows:
1 Abrade the surface to be protected using Scotch Brite type A,
by hand or using an orbital sanding device.

2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−003).

4 Apply the pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052)

with a spatula or polishing bag, remaining only in holes and
surface porous, avoiding a continuous layer.
CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let cure the pore filler for a minimum of two hours at room
temperature.

6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded to improve the surface

appearance, let the pore filler cure for at least 12 hours at
room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours 30 min
utes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding.

(e) Restore the surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Pages 225/226
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Non−structural Repair Zone 01, Damage up to 1000 mm
(1.55 in
)
Figure 204 (sheet 1)

Pages 227/228
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Non−structural Repair Zone 02 and 04, Damage up to 1000 mm
(1.55
in
)
Figure 204 (sheet 2)
Pages 229/230
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Non−structural Repair Zone 03, Damage up to 1000 mm
(1.55 in
)
Figure 204 (sheet 3)

Page 231
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Combined Non−structural Repair

Figure 204 (sheet 4)

Page 232
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 205.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.
E. Non−structural repair for damage between 1000 mm (1.55 in) and 15000
mm (23.25 in)

NOTE: This repair procedure is applicable for Zones 01, 02, 03, 04 and
sandwich areas of Zone 5.

NOTE: For repair zones definition refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block
101, Config 1.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 205
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 233
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbon fabric (dry) − Material No. 05−088 or 20−023,

− Laminating resin
− Low Density Compound
− Honeycomb Core plug
− Adhesive Paste
− Precured Doubler
− Pore Filler
− Parting Film
− Scotch Brite, type A
− Cleaning Agent
− Sealant
(2) Repair Instructions
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 20−022 or 20−032 or
20−028, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022 or 20−042,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00 or any
Low Density Compound from Chap
ter 51−77−11, paragraph 6.B.(4)
table 4, except Material No.
05−090
− Material No. 20−007, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 for alterna
tives refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
Table 15
− Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para
graph 6.B. (1)
− Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para
graph 6.B.(10) table 12 item 1
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para
graph 3.B
−
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.

NOTE: Only repairs with access for the upper surface are possible if
the Elevator panels are assembled.

NOTE: When the damage is composed of several individual damages (re

fer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 1, paragraph
4.A), perform the repair as follows: do not remove the undam
aged plies and/or core between the individual damages. Repair
each area as an individual cosmetic repair, but lay up the
carbon fabric repair plies over the entire envelope repair
area. Refer to Figure 205 Sheet 5.

(a) Prepare the repair area, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph

4.M.

Page 234
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) For damages to outer skin only, refer to Figure 205 Sheet 1 (re
fer to Sheet 2 and 3 only in case you can not respect the plies
overlap described in Sheet 1) and proceed as follows:

1 For the core closing, fill with Low Density Compound (Material
No. 08−022) up to 3 mm (0.12 in) and cure 16 hours at 24° C
(75.20° F), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.H.

NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 20−042 or any low density

compound of Chapter 51−77−11 paragraph 6.B.(4) except Ma
terial No. 05−090.

2 For wet lay up of repair plies, refer to Chapter 51−77−13,

paragraph 2.A.(2), option D, using the repair materials from
the repair material list.
(c) For damages to outer skin and core refer to the relevant figure
from the list below:
− For Zone 01: refer to Figure 205 Sheet 1 (refer to Sheet 2
and 3 only in case you can not respect the plies overlap de
scribed in Sheet 1).
− For Zones 02 and 04: refer to Figure 205, Sheets 2 and 3.
− For Zone 03: refer to Figure 205, Sheet 1. If insert is dam
aged or bushing is debonded, refer to paragraph 5.L. for insert
replacement instructions.

and proceed as follows:

1 For core replacement refer to Chapter 51−77−13, paragraph

2.A.(2), option D, using the following materials:

a For Zone 01 and 03 install the core with Low Density Com
pound (Material No. 08−022).

NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 20−042 or any low den

sity compound of Chapter 51−77−11 paragraph 6.B.(4) ex
cept Material No. 05−090.

b For Zone 02 and 04 install the core with adhesive paste, re
fer to Chapter 51−77−11 paragraph 6.B.(1).

NOTE: In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure fol

low the instructions described in paragraph 5.E.(2)(e).
2 For the core closing, fill with Low Density Compound (Material
No. 08−022) up to 3 mm (0.12 in) and cure 16 hours at 24° C
(75.20° F), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.H.

NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 20−042 or any low density

compound of Chapter 51−77−11 paragraph 6.B.(4) except Ma
terial No. 05−090.

Page 235
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

3 For wet lay up of repair plies, refer to Chapter 51−77−13,

paragraph 2.A.(2), option D, using the repair materials from
the repair material list.

(d) For damages to outer skin, core and inner skin refer to Figure
205 Sheet 1 and proceed as follows:

1 For the installation of internal Composite Doubler, refer to

Chapter 51−77−13, paragraph 2.E, using the repair materials
from the repair material list.

2 For core replacement refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.G,

using Low Density Compound (Material No. 08−022).

NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 20−042 or any low density

compound of Chapter 51−77−11 paragraph 6.B.(4) except Ma
terial No. 05−090.

NOTE: In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure fol

low the instructions described in paragraph 5.E.(2)(e).

3 For the core closing, fill with Low Density Compound (Material
No. 08−022) up to 3 mm (0.12 in) and cure 16 hours at 24° C
(75.20° F), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.H.

NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 20−042 or any low density

compound of Chapter 51−77−11 paragraph 6.B.(4) except Ma
terial No. 05−090.
4 For wet lay up of repair plies, refer to Chapter 51−77−13,
paragraph 2.E, using the repair materials from the repair mate
rial list.

(e) For all Zones, in case of liquid ingress inside sandwich struc
ture, affected core must be systematically removed and repaired
as follows:
− Perform an initial drying of damaged structure. Refer to Chap
ter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.B.
− Remove affected core. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.C.(1) except step (b).
− Perform a final drying. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.B.
− Replace affected core following the instructions of the rele
vant repair.

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(f) Before surface protection restoration apply a layer of pore fill

er material as follows:

1 Abrade the surface to be protected using Scotch Brite type A,

by hand or using an orbital sanding device.

2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

Page 236
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

3 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−003).
4 Apply the pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052)
with a spatula or polishing bag, remaining only in holes and
surface porous, avoiding a continuous layer.

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let cure the pore filler for a minimum of two hours at room
temperature.

6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded to improve the surface

appearance, let the pore filler cure for at least 12 hours at
room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours 30 min
utes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding.
(g) Restore the surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Pages 237/238
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Non−structural Repair Zone 01, Damage between 1000 mm
(1.55 in
)
and 15000 mm
(23.45 in
)
Figure 205 (sheet 1)
Pages 239/240
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Non−structural Repair Zone 02 and 04, Damage between 1000 mm
(1.55
in
) and 15000 mm
(23.45 in
)
Figure 205 (sheet 2)
Pages 241/242
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Non−structural Repair Zone 02 and 04, Damage between 1000 mm (1.55
in) and 15000 mm (23.45 in)
Figure 205 (sheet 3)
Page 243
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Non−structural Repair Zone 03, Damage between 1000 mm
(1.55 in
)
and 15000 mm
(23.45 in
)
Figure 205 (sheet 4)
Page 244
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Combined Non−structural Repair

Figure 205 (sheet 5)

Page 245
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH
3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 206.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.
F. Repair to Outer Skin, Zone 01 (All subzones)

NOTE: This repair is valid for both: delamination/debonding between Outer

Skin/Core and non allowable deep scratch/broken plies on the outer
Skin of the Elevator Spar Box, Zone 01 (All subzones) within the
repairable limits. Refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Con
fig 1 for zones data.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged areas you must do a damage evalua
tion. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out using the hot−bond 120° C (248°
F) repair procedure. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 206
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 246
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbon fabric prepreg − Material No. 05−091 or 05−092,

− Adhesive Film
− Low Density Compound
− Pore Filler
− Cleaning Agent
− Scotch Brite, type A
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 206)
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022, 08−022C or
20−042 refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003 and 11−010
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
−

(a) Prepare the repair area, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph

4.M.

NOTE: Radius all the corners by 12 mm (0.472 in).

NOTE: Step the edges of the cut out in the outer skin by 15 mm
(0.590 in).

(b) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure affected core

must be systematically removed and repaired. Refer to the rele
vant repair procedure in paragraph 5.G..
(c) Cover the exposed honeycomb core cells with Low Density Compound
(Material No. 08−022), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.H.
and cure 16 hours at 24° C (75.2° F).

NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 08−022C or 20−042.

(d) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(e) Prepare the carbon fabric prepreg plies (Material No. 05−091 or
05−092) and the adhesive film plies (Material No. 08−042A). Refer
to Figure 206 and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraphs 4.B and 4.C.
(f) Lay−up the carbon fabric repair plies and the adhesive film plies
in the repair area. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.B.

NOTE: For Lay−up sequence and ply orientation, refer to Chapter

55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 1.
(g) Install the vacuum bag and heating equipment. Refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.

Page 247
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(h) Cure the installed materials at 120° C (248° F) for 90 minutes

under vacuum conditions (a minimum vacuum of 0.8 bar (11.6 psi)
is required), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.

(i) Inspect the repair, refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 5.

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(j) Before surface protection restoration apply a layer of pore fill

er material as follows:
1 Abrade the surface to be protected using Scotch Brite type A,
by hand or using an orbital sanding device.

2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−010).

4 Apply the pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052)

with a spatula or polishing bag, remaining only in holes and
surface porous, avoiding a continuous layer.
CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let cure the pore filler for a minimum of two hours at room
temperature.

6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded to improve the surface

appearance, let the pore filler cure for at least 12 hours at
room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours 30 min
utes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding.

(k) Restore the surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 248
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Outer Skin, Zone 01 (All subzones)

Figure 206

Pages 249/250
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH
3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 207.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.
G. Repair to Outer Skin and Core or debonding of Inner Skin and Core, Zone
01 (All subzones)

NOTE: This repair is valid for damage affecting the outer skin and core
or debonding between inner skin and core or water/fluid ingress in
side sandwich structure of the Elevator Spar Box Skin, Zone 01
(All subzones). Refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config
1, for zones data.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged areas you must do a damage evalua
tion. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out using the hot−bond 120° C (248°
F) repair procedure.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 207
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 251
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbon fabric prepreg − Material No. 05−091 or 05−092,

− Glass Fabric Prepreg
− Adhesive Film
− Low Density Compound
− Honeycomb Core Plug
− Adhesive Foam
− Pore Filler
− Cleaning Agent
− Scotch Brite, type A
(2) Repair Instructions (Refer to Figure 207)
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 20−009 or 20−012,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022 or 08−022C
or 20−042 refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 20−007, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−047C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003 and 11−010
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
−

(a) Prepare the repair area, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph

4.M.

NOTE: Radius all the corners by 12 mm (0.472 in).

NOTE: Step the edges of the cut out in the outer skin by 15 mm
(0.590 in).

(b) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure affected core

must be systematically removed and repaired as follows:
− Perform an initial drying of damaged structure. Refer to Chap
ter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.B.
− Remove affected core. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.C.(1) except step (b).
− Perform a final drying. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.B.
− Replace affected core following the instructions of the rele
vant repair.
(c) Cut two pieces of adhesive film (Material No. 08−042A) to the
shape and size of the repair cut out. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
paragraph 4.B.

Page 252
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(d) Cut a piece of glass fabric prepreg (Material No. 20−009) to the
shape and size of the repair cut out. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
paragraph 4.C.

NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 20−012.

(e) Prepare and dry the honeycomb replacement core plug (Material No.
20−007). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.J.

NOTE: Same core ribbon as the original.

(f) Lay up the first adhesive film ply on the bottom of the repair
cut out. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.B.

(g) Lay up the glass fabric ply on top of the adhesive film. Refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C.
(h) Lay up the second adhesive film ply on top of the glass fabric.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.B.

(i) Cut a piece of adhesive foam (Material No. 08−047C) to the shape
and size of the honeycomb repair plug.

(j) Remove the first protective layer from the adhesive foam and wrap
the adhesive foam around the replacement core plug. Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.B.

(k) Install the cure cycle temperature thermocouples in the repair

area where the honeycomb repair plug is to be installed.
NOTE: The number of thermocouples to be installed depends on the
repair area:

For repair areas between 15000 and 30000 mm (23.25 and
46.50 in) 2 thermocouples must be installed.

For repair areas between 30000 and 45000 mm (46.50 and
69.75 in) 3 thermocouples must be installed.

For repair areas between 45000 and 60000 mm (69.75 and
93.00 in) 4 thermocouples must be installed.

The repair area shall be divided into equal areas and the
thermocouples shall be located in the center of each of
these areas. The thermocouples shall have a turnover of at
least 20 mm (1 in), the whole of which shall make good
contact with the adhesive layer at the bottom of the plug.

(l) Remove the second protective layer from the adhesive foam and
install the replacement honeycomb core plug into its repair posi
tion.

(m) Cure the installed repair materials at 90° C (194° F) under vac
uum conditions for a period of four hours.

Page 253
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(n) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
(o) Cover the exposed honeycomb core cells with Low Density Compound
(Material No. 08−022), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.H.
and cure 16 hours at 24° C (75.2° F).

NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 08−022C or 20−042.

(p) Prepare the carbon fabric prepreg plies (Material No. 05−091 or
05−092) and the adhesive film plies (Material No. 08−042A). Refer
to Figure 207 and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.B. and 4.C.

(q) Lay−up the carbon fabric repair plies and the adhesive film plies
in the repair area. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.B.
NOTE: For Lay−up sequence and ply orientation, refer to Chapter
55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 1.

(r) Install the vacuum bag and heating equipment. Refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.

(s) Cure the installed materials at 120° C (248° F) for 90 minutes

under vacuum conditions (a minimum vacuum of 0.8 bar (11.6 psi)
is required). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.

(t) Inspect the repair, refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 5.

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(u) Before surface protection restoration apply a layer of pore fill
er material as follows:

1 Abrade the surface to be protected using Scotch Brite type A,

by hand or using an orbital sanding device.

2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−010).

4 Apply the pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052)

with a spatula or polishing bag, remaining only in holes and
surface porous, avoiding a continuous layer.

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let cure the pore filler for a minimum of two hours at room
temperature.

6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded to improve the surface

appearance, let the pore filler cure for at least 12 hours at
room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours 30 min
utes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding.

Page 254
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(v) Restore the surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Pages 255/256
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Outer Skin/Core, or Debonding of Inner Skin/Core, Zone 01 (All

subzones)
Figure 207
Pages 257/258
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH
3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 208.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.
H. Repair of damaged/debonding core in chamfer area, Zone 02 (subzone F)

NOTE: This repair is valid for damages to outer skin/core, or core/inner

skin debonded, within the repairable limit (refer to Chapter
55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 1) or water/fluid ingress inside
sandwich structure, in the Elevator Spar Box Skin.
NOTE: Before the damaged structure is repaired, a damage evaluation must
be carried out (refer to Chapter 51−77−10 paragraph 3 for data).

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out using the hot−bond 120° C (248°
F) repair procedure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 208
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 259
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to

− Low Density Compound
− Parting Film
− Pore Filler
− Adhesive Film
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 208)
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022, 08−022C or
20−042, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para
graph 3.B.
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Prepare the repair area, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph

4.M.

NOTE: Radius all the corners by 12 mm (0.472 in).

NOTE: Step the edges of the cut out in the outer skin by 15 mm
(0.590 in).

(b) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure affected core

must be systematically removed and repaired as follows:
− Perform an initial drying of damaged structure. Refer to Chap
ter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.B.
− Remove affected core. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.C.(1) except step (b).
− Perform a final drying. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.B.
− Replace affected core following the instructions of the rele
vant repair.
CAUTION: MAKE EVACUATION AIR HOLE AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE TO THE DAM
AGED AREA. BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE THE INNER FACE.

(c) Drill the necessary air evacuation holes to permit the evacuation
of air and also to verify that the resin is all around in the
damaged area, Zone 02.

(d) Remove the dust from the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(e) Clean the repair area with a cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

Page 260
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Mask the area around the air evacuation holes and on bottom of
the access hole and on the outer skin, to prevent leaking over
other parts.

(g) Prepare the Low Density Compound (Material No. 08−022), refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.A.

NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 08−022C or 20−042.

(h) Cut a piece of parting film equal to the bottom area of the ac
cess hole.

(i) Place the parting film on the bottom of the access hole.

(j) Fill up the access area inside the Zone 02 with Low Density Com
pound (Material No. 08−022).
NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 08−022C or 20−042.

(k) Check the Low Density Compound fills fully up the access area
(inside) through the air evacuation holes.

NOTE: Use an aluminum plate to conform the Low Density Compound

(see the Figure 208), previously covered with parting film.
(l) Remove the parting film only from the bottom of the access hole.

CAUTION: LET THE LOW DENSITY COMPOUND FOR 20 MINUTES AT ROOM TEMPER
ATURE (RT) BEFORE CURING.

(m) Cure the Low Density Compound for five hours at 50° C (122° F)
or 7 days at R.T.

(n) Remove the protection and abrade the surface if necessary.

(o) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(p) Clean the repair area with a cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(q) For core and outer skin repair refer to Figure 208 and follow
the repair instructions from paragraph 5.G..

Pages 261/262
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damaged/Debonding Core, Chamfer Area, Elevator Spar Box Skin, Zone
02 (Subzone F)
Figure 208 (sheet 1)
Pages 263/264
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damaged/Debonding Core, Chamfer Area, Elevator Spar Box Skin, Zone
02 (Subzone F)
Figure 208 (sheet 2)
Pages 265/266
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH
3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 209.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.
I. Repair of Damage to outer skin or damaged/debonded core, Zone 02 (sub
zone E)

NOTE: This repair is valid only for damages to outer skin, or outer
skin/core debonded, or inner skin/core debonded, or water/fluid in
gress inside sandwich structure, Zone 02 (subzone E), within the
repairable limit (refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config
1), in the Elevator Spar Box skin.

NOTE: Repair example shows two different types of damage, each side of
the Elevator rib; inner skin debonded and outer skin damaged/de
bonded. Select the method of repair.
NOTE: Before the damaged structure is repaired, a damage evaluation must
be carried out (refer to Chapter 51−77−10).

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out using the hot−bond 120° C (248°
F) repair procedure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.).

Page 267
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 209
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−010 and 11−003

refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−001, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Carbon prepreg − Material No. 05−091 or 05−092,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00.
− Resin − Material No. 08−022 or 08−022C
or 20−042, refer to Chapter
51−35−00.
− Pore Filler − Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Adhesive − Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 209)

(a) Remove the original fasteners from the repair area.

(b) Prepare the repair area, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph

4.M.

NOTE: Radius all the corners by 12 mm (0.472 in).

NOTE: Step the edges of the cut out in the outer skin by 15 mm
(0.590 in).
(c) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure affected core
must be systematically removed and repaired as follows:
− Perform an initial drying of damaged structure. Refer to Chap
ter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.B.

Page 268
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

− Remove affected core. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block

201, paragraph 2.C.(1) except step (b).
− Perform a final drying. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.B.
− Replace affected core following the instructions of the rele
vant repair.

(d) Do the repair procedure according the damage type, as follows:

1 In case of outer skin delaminated or debonded, refer to figure
209 and follow the repair instructions from paragraph 5.F..

2 In case of core damaged or inner skin debonded, refer to fig

ure 209 and follow the repair instructions from paragraph 5.H..
(e) Wet install repair fasteners with sealant (Material No. 09−001).

NOTE: Determine grip length on assembly.

(f) Restore the surface protection (refer to Chapter 51−75−12).

Pages 269/270
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Outer Skin or Core Debonded/Damaged Elevator Spar Box

Skin, Zone 02 (Subzone E)
Figure 209 (sheet 1)
Pages 271/272
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Outer Skin or Core Debonded/Damaged Elevator Spar Box

Skin, Zone 02 (Subzone E)
Figure 209 (sheet 2)
Pages 273/274
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH
3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) OF THE SRM. INFORM YOUR
PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMA
TION.

CAUTION: DO NOT PASS THE LIMIT LINE FOR THE SKIN CUT OUT.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 210.
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

J. Repair of damage to outer skin, Zone 03

NOTE: These repair is valid only for damage to outer skin, Zone 03, but
adjacent to Zone 01 and 45 mm (1.77 in) far from the chamfer area
of the TE, within the repairable limits in the Elevator Spar Box
skin according to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 1, para
graph 4.A.

NOTE: Before the damaged structure is repaired, a damage evaluation must

be carried out (refer to Chapter 51−77−10).

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out using the hot−bond (120° C (248°
F)) repair procedure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.).

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 210
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 275
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to

− Low Density Compound
− Adhesive Film
− Carbon Epoxy Prepreg
− Pore Filler
− Scotch Brite, type A
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 210)
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022, 08−022C or
20−042, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−091 or 05−092,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
−

CAUTION: DO NOT PASS THE LIMIT LINE FOR THE SKIN CUT OUT (REFER TO
THE FIGURE).

(a) Prepare the repair area (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph

4.M) according the repair Figure 210.

NOTE: Radius all corners by 8 mm (0.31 in).

(b) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure affected core

must be systematically removed and repaired. Refer to the rele
vant repair procedure in paragraph 5.K..
(c) If damage is in an insert area, mechanically remove the bushing,
core and potted area in the affected area through access hole.
Refer to paraparagraph 5.L. for insert repair instructions.

(d) Cover the exposed honeycomb core cells with Low Density Compound
(Material No. 08−022), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.H.
and cure 16 hours at 24° C (75.2° F).

NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 08−022C or 20−042.

(e) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
(f) Prepare the carbon fabric prepreg plies (Material No. 05−091 or
05−092) and the adhesive film plies (Material No. 08−042A). Refer
to Figure 210 and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraphs 4.B and 4.C.

Page 276
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(g) Lay−up the carbon fabric repair plies and the adhesive film plies
in the repair area. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.B.
NOTE: For Lay−up sequence and ply orientation, refer to Figure
210.

(h) Install the vacuum bag and heating equipment. Refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.

(i) Cure the installed materials at 120° C (248° F) for 90 minutes

under vacuum conditions (a minimum vacuum of 0.8 bar (11.6 psi)
is required), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.

(j) Inspect the repair, refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 5.

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(k) Before surface protection restoration apply a layer of pore fill
er material as follows:

1 Abrade the surface to be protected using Scotch Brite type A,

by hand or using an orbital sanding device.

2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

4 Apply the pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052)

with a spatula or polishing bag, remaining only in holes and
surface porous, avoiding a continuous layer.

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let cure the pore filler for a minimum of two hours at room
temperature.
6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded to improve the surface
appearance, let the pore filler cure for at least 12 hours at
room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours 30 min
utes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding.

(l) Restore the surface protection (refer to Chapter 51−75−12).

Pages 277/278
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Outer Skin of Elevator Spar Box Skin, Zone 03

Figure 210 (sheet 1)

Pages 279/280
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Outer Skin of Elevator Spar Box Skin, Zone 03

Figure 210 (sheet 2)

Pages 281/282
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH
3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) OF THE SRM. INFORM YOUR
PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMA
TION.

CAUTION: DO NOT PASS THE LIMIT LINE FOR THE SKIN CUT OUT.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 211.
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

K. Repair of damaged/debonded core, Zone 03

NOTE: This repair is valid only for damages to outer skin/core, or core/
inner skin debonded or water/fluid ingress inside sandwich structure
of the Elevator Spar Box Skin in Zone 03 adjacent to Zone 01
within the repairable limit (refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block
101, Config 1).

NOTE: Before the damaged structure is repaired, a damage evaluation must

be carried out (refer to Chapter 51−77−10).

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out using the hot−bond 120° C (248°
F) repair procedure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.).

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 211
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 283
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to

− Low Density Compound
− Adhesive Film
− Adhesive Foam
− Glass fiber Honeycomb Core
− Glass Epoxy Prepreg
− Parting Film
− Laminating Resin
− Glass Fiber
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 211)
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022 or 08−022C
or 08−042, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−047C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 20−007, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 20−009 or 20−012A
or 20−012B, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para
graph 3.B.
− Material No. 20−022 or 20−032,
or 20−028, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 05−033, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

CAUTION: DO NOT PASS THE LIMIT LINE FOR THE SKIN CUT OUT (REFER TO
THE FIGURE).

(a) Prepare the repair area (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph

4.M) according the repair Figure 211.

NOTE: Radius all corners by 8 mm (0.31 in).

NOTE: It is possible to perform a combined repair according to

global repair areas defined in Figure 211. Finish structur
al repair 1 and protect it before starting structural re
pair 2.

(b) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure affected core

must be systematically removed and repaired as follows:
− Perform an initial drying of damaged structure. Refer to Chap
ter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.B.
− Remove affected core. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.C.(1) except step (b).
− Perform a final drying. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.B.

Page 284
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

− Replace affected core following the instructions of the rele

vant repair.
(c) If damage is in an insert area, mechanically remove the bushing,
core and potted area in the affected area through access hole.
Refer to paraparagraph 5.L. for insert repair instructions.

CAUTION: MAKE EVACUATION AIR HOLE AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE TO THE DAM

AGED AREA. BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE THE INNER FACE.

(d) Drill the necessary air evacuation holes to permit the evacuation
of air and also to verify that the resin is all around in the
damaged area.

(e) Remove the dust from the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.
(f) Clean the repair area with a cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(g) Mask the area around the air evacuation holes and on bottom of
the access hole and on the outer skin, to prevent leaking over
other parts.
(h) Prepare the Low Density Compound (Material No. 08−022), refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.A.

NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 08−022C or 20−042.

(i) Cut a piece of parting film equal to the bottom area of the ac
cess hole.

(j) Place the parting film on the bottom of the access hole.

(k) Fill up the access area inside the Zone 03 with Low Density Com
pound (Material No. 08−022).
NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 08−022C or 20−042.

(l) Check the Low Density Compound fills fully up the access area
(inside) through the air evacuation holes.

NOTE: Use an aluminum plate to conform the Low Density Compound,

previously covered with parting film.
(m) Remove the parting film only from the bottom of the access hole.

(n) Cure the Low Density Compound, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para
graph 6.B.(4).

(o) Remove the protection and abrade the surface if necessary.

(p) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(q) Clean the repair area with a cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

Page 285
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(r) Make the Honeycomb Core Replacement Procedure, refer to Chapter

55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.C.(2). and to Figure 211,
using the repair materials from the repair material list.

(s) For the outer skin repair refer to Figure 211 and follow the re
pair instructions from paragraph 5.J..

Page 286
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damaged/Debonded Core in Elevator Spar Box Skin, Zone 03

Figure 211 (sheet 1)

Pages 287/288
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damaged/Debonded Core in Elevator Spar Box Skin, Zone 03

Figure 211 (sheet 2)

Pages 289/290
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damaged/Debonded Core in Elevator Spar Box Skin, Zone 03

Figure 211 (sheet 3)

Pages 291/292
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damaged/Debonded Core in Elevator Spar Box Skin, Zone 03

Figure 211 (sheet 4)

Pages 293/294
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH
3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 212.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) OF THE SRM. INFORM YOUR
PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMA
TION.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.
L. Insert Replacement/Repair of damage to insert area, Zone 03

NOTE: The replacement is valid only when there is no damage in the

structure and the only damage is the insert debonded from the res
in.

The repair is valid only during a repair of skin/core in the in

sert area, in the Elevator Spar Box Skin, Zone 03, within the re
pairable limits (refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config
1). For Non−structural repairs follow the specific cosmetic repair
(paragraphs 5.D. and 5.E.).

NOTE: Before the damaged structure is repaired, a damage evaluation must

be carried out (refer to Chapter 51−77−10).

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 212
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 295
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to

Chapter 51−35−00
− Low Density Compound − Material No. 08−022 or 08−022C
or 08−042, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Replacement instructions (refer to Figure 212)

(a) Remove the insert from the repair area.

(b) Inspect the insert for corrosion.

(c) Blend out the corrosion from the insert and measure the maximum
corrosion depth. Refer to Chapter 51−74−00.

1 If the depth of the material removed is lower than 0.5 mm

(0.02 in), reinstall the insert with sealant (Material No.
09−005).
2 If the depth of the material removed is greater than 0.5 mm
(0.02 in), install a new insert, same material as original,
with sealant (Material No. 09−005).

(3) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 212)

(a) Remove the insert, washer, and screw from the repair area.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE TO FILL AN AREA NOT LOWER THAN 32 MM (1.26 IN).

(b) Follow the specific repair procedure to repair the skin/core in

Zone 03 filling up from top to bottom the insert area with Low
Density compound (Material No. 08−022).
NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 08−022C or 20−042.

(c) Drill the resin with a pilot drill through the other side, use
the existing bush hole.

CAUTION: FOR THE FOLLOWING STEP USE A WOODEN BLOCK OR OTHER SUITABLE
MATERIAL BLOCK TO PLACE OVER THE EXIT AREA TO PREVENT
BREAKOUT OF THE LAMINATED MATERIAL.

(d) Back drill the previously drilled hole to the final diameter.

(e) Remove the dust from the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.
(f) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

Page 296
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(g) Install the screw, washer and insert with sealant (Material No.
09−005).
(h) Remove all the unwanted sealant with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(i) Let cure the sealant (refer manufacturer’s specification).

(j) Restore the surface protection (refer to Chapter 51−75−12).

Pages 297/298
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Insert Replacement/Repair of Damage to Insert Area in Elevator Spar Box Skin,

Zone 03
Figure 212
Pages 299/300
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH
3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 213.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.
M. Repair of damage to the Elevator Trailing Edge (TE) aluminum profile

NOTE: This repair is valid for damage to the profile of the Elevator TE.

NOTE: Before the damaged structure is repaired, a damage evaluation must

be carried out (refer to Chapter 51−77−10).

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 213
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 301
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to

Chapter 51−35−00
− Polysulfide Sealant − Material No. 09−002 or 09−005,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Chemical Conversion Coating − Material No. 13−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Epoxy Polyamide Primer − Material No. 16−006B, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane Primer − Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Glass Fabric − Material No. 05−033, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Laminating Resin − Material No. 20−022, 20−032 or
20−028 refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Aluminum Joint Clip − 2024T42 Clad Thickness 0.8 mm
(0.031 in)
− Aluminum Repair Profile − Refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page
Block 101, Config 1, (same as
existing material)
NOTE: For repair of the filler of the trailing edge (refer to repair
of damage to filler, trailing edge area, Zone 03) use the Re
pair Materials of the specific repair procedure (refer to
5.C.(1)). This note is only applicable before modification
33296G0406.

(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 213)

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D).

CAUTION: THIS STEP IS ONLY APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 33296G0406.

CAUTION: USE A STAINLESS STEEL SPATULA WITH ROUNDED EDGES AND TIP TO
REMOVE THE NECESSARY FILLER.

(b) Remove carefully the filler from the repair area, making sure
that do not damage the CFRP surface and the undamaged area of
the aluminum profile (refer to Figure 213).
(c) Cut out the damaged profile and remove the necessary rivets.

(d) Remove the damaged profile from the repair area.

(e) Remove the remaining unwanted material with a sandpaper grade 200
and a vacuum cleaner in the repair area.

Page 302
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Use the cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003) to clean the repair
area.
(g) Protect the exposed existing aluminum profile (refer to Figure
213 for materials data).

(h) Make the aluminum repair profile and joint clips for the repair
area (refer to Figure 213 for the repair materials) and mark and
pilot drill the rivet position.
(i) Put the repair aluminum profiles on its repair position with
clamps.

(j) Drill to the final diameter the fastener position and remove the
parts.
CAUTION: USE ABRASIVE CLOTH (GRADE 400) TO CLEAN THE AREA OF THE
EXISTING ALUMINUM PROFILE THAT WILL CONTACT THE REPAIR
PARTS.

(k) Remove the dust from the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(l) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
CAUTION: THE FOLLOWING STEPS 5.M.(2)(m) THRU 5.M.(2)(n) ARE ONLY AP
PLICABLE WHEN THE ORIGINAL GLASS FIBER IS DAMAGED.

(m) Apply a layer of glass fabric (Material No. 05−033) with lami
nating resin (Material No. 20−022, 20−032 or 20−028) with the
following dimensions:

1 If the original GFRP is damaged, use a ply of the same dimen

sion as original.

2 If the original GFRP is partially removed, use a ply with a

minimum of 5 mm (0.20 in) of overlap with the remaining fiber
glass.

(n) Cure the repair materials, refer to manufacturer’s specifications.

CAUTION: MASK THE AREAS OF THE NEW ALUMINUM PLATE, JOINT CLIPS, AND
EXISTING ALUMINUM PROFILE THAT WILL CONTACT METALLIC PARTS
WHEN INSTALLING IT.

CAUTION: MASK THE AREAS OF CARBON FIBER SURFACE CLOSE TO THE EXIST
ING ALUMINUM PROFILE IN THE REPAIR AREA.

(o) Apply the correct surface treatments to the new aluminum strip,
joint clips and existing aluminum profile of the repair area
(chemical conversion coating, (Material No. 13−002), and then
epoxy polyamide primer, (Material No. 16−006B) or polyurethane
primer, (Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C), refer to Chapter
51−21−11 for application data.

Page 303
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(p) Unmask the aluminum parts and carbon fiber surface, and clean the
repair area and repair parts using the cleaning agent (Material
No. 11−003).

(q) Fill the union gap between the new and existing profile with
sealant (Material No. 09−002) (refer to Figure 213).

(r) Put the new aluminum profile with sealant (Material No. 09−005)
on its repair position, installing the necessary rivets with
sealant (Material No. 09−005).

(s) Remove the unwanted sealant with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(t) Put the joint clips on the repair position installing the new
fastener maintaining the electrical conductivity.

(u) Let the sealant cure (refer manufacturer’s specification).

CAUTION: THIS STEP IS ONLY APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 33296G0406.

(v) Use the procedure to repair the filler material (refer to para
graph 5.C.).
(w) Restore the surface protection (refer to Chapter 51−75−12) in the
repair area.

Page 304
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to the Elevator TE Aluminum Profile in Elevator Spar Box

Trailing Edge
Figure 213 (sheet 1)
Pages 305/306
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to the Elevator TE Aluminum Profile in Elevator Spar Box

Trailing Edge
Figure 213 (sheet 2)
Pages 307/308
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH
3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 214.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.
N. Repair of damage to outer skin or core under aluminum strip, Zone 04

NOTE: This repair is valid for damage to outer skin or core under alumi
num strip or water/fluid ingress inside sandwich structure, Zone
04, within the repairable limits (refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page
Block 101, Config 1) of the Elevator Spar Box Skin.
NOTE: Before the damaged structure is repaired, a damage evaluation must
be carried out (refer to Chapter 51−77−10).

NOTE: This repair is to be carried on using the hot−bond 120° C (248° F)

repair procedure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.).

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 214
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 309
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL
(1) Repair Materials
ITEM NOMENCLATURE
− Glass Fiber Fabric, dry
− Honeycomb Core
− CFRP
− Adhesive Paste
− Epoxy Adhesive Film
− Low Density Compound
− Adhesive Foam
− Bonding Primer
− Laminating Resin
− Sealant
− Cleaning Agent
− Chemical Conversion Coating
− Polyurethane Primer
− Epoxy Primer
− Pore Filler
− Glass Fiber Prepreg Plies
− Repair Aluminum Strip
− Chromic Acid Anodizing
(CAA)
− Scotch Brite, type A
Printed in Germany
QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS
− Material No. 05−033, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 20−007, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−091 or 05−092,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−017, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022, 08−022C or
20−042, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 08−047C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−055, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 20−022, 20−032 or
20−028 refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003 refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 13−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−001B and 16−001C
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−006B, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052 and Material No. 16−054,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 20−009, 20−012A or
20−012B refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− From Spares or Local manufac
tured with material 3.1364T3
LN9073−1.2
− Refer to Chapter 51−21−11
−
Page 310
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 214).

(a) Remove all the fasteners from the aluminum strip.

(b) Heat the aluminum strip area, up to 90° C (194° F) maximum.

CAUTION: USE TOOLS WITHOUT SHARP EDGES. TAKE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE THE
SKIN PLIES.

(c) Remove carefully the aluminum strip, beginning from the leading
edge to the trailing edge.
(d) Slightly pull the Trailing edge profile in order to allow the
strip installation underneath it. Remove as many rivets as neces
sary to avoid permanent deformation on the Trailing edge profile.

CAUTION: DO NOT PASS THE LIMIT LINE FOR THE SKIN CUT OUT (REFER TO
THE FIGURE).

(e) Prepare the repair area (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph

4.M) according to the damage type and the repair Figure 214.

NOTE: Radius all corners by 12 mm (0.47 in).

(f) Proceed according to repair Figure 214 and the relevant damage
type, as follows:

1 If outer skin and core is damaged, follow the whole repair

procedure described.

2 If only outer skin is damage, follow the repair procedure be

ginning by step 5.N.(2)(i).

3 If there is no damage on the structure, you must check the

glass fiber for damage. If the glass fiber is damaged, repair
it with a new dry glass fiber fabric Material No. 05−033 and
laminating resin (Material No. 20−022 or 20−032 or 20−028) and
continue the repair procedure in step 5.N.(2)(n).

(g) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure affected core

must be systematically removed and repaired as follows:
− Perform an initial drying of damaged structure. Refer to Chap
ter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.B.
− Remove affected core. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.C.(1) except step (b).
− Perform a final drying. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.B.
− Replace affected core following the instructions of the rele
vant repair.
(h) Make the Honeycomb Core Replacement Procedure, refer to Chapter
55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.C.(2). and to Figure 214,
using the repair materials from the repair material list.

Page 311
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(i) Cover the exposed honeycomb core cells with Low Density Compound
(Material No. 08−022), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.H.
and cure 16 hours at 24° C (75.2° F).

NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 08−022C or 20−042.

(j) Prepare the carbon fabric prepreg plies (Material No. 05−091 or
05−092), the glass fiber prepreg ply (Material No. 20−009,
20−012A or 20−012B) and the adhesive film plies (Material No.
08−042A). Refer to Figure 214 and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph
4.B. and 4.C.

(k) Lay−up the carbon fabric repair plies, the glass fiber prepreg
ply and the adhesive film plies in the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.B.
NOTE: For Lay−up sequence and ply orientation, refer to Chapter
55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 1.

(l) Install the vacuum bag and heating equipment. Refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.
(m) Cure the installed materials at 120° C (248° F) for 90 minutes
under vacuum conditions (a minimum vacuum of 0.8 bar (11.6 psi)
is required). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.

(n) Make the repair aluminum strip. Aluminum strips can be obtained
from either:
1 Spares. You must check the expiry date of the surface protec
tion. In case it has been exceeded, proceed as follows:

a Rub the primer surface to be bonded with wipers soaked in

cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003 only).

b Immediately wipe dry with a clean, dry wiper. Do not allow

the solvent to evaporate to dryness.

NOTE: Frequently change soiled wipers for clean ones.

c Repeat the complete cleaning procedure.

2 Locally manufactured, proceed as follows:

a Use material 3.1364T3 LN9073−1.2.

b Make the repair strip of the same dimensions as the original

ones.

NOTE: Use removed strips as a template for drilling and loca

tion of the new ones.
c Apply the surface protection to the repair strip: Apply Chro
mic Acid Anodizing (CAA) plus a thin coat of anticorrosion
Bonding Primer (Material No. 08−055), refer to Chapter

Page 312
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

51−77−11, paragraph 4.B.(6)) for curing process, plus epoxy

primer (Material No. 16−006B) or polyurethane primer (Material
No. 16−001C).

(o) Pilot drill on the repair aluminum strip the fastener locations
using removed strip as template.

(p) Secure the repair aluminum profile with screw−pins through the 4
corner holes.
(q) Drill and countersink the fastener pilot holes to the final di
ameter oversize.

(r) Drill and countersink to the final diameter oversize the remain
ing four corner holes securing the new aluminum plate through
other 4 holes with fasteners.
(s) Remove the sharp edges from the holes on the aluminum profiles
with an abrasive cone.

(t) Remove the dust from the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(u) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(v) Before surface protection restoration apply a layer of pore fill

er material as follows:

1 Abrade the surface to be protected using Scotch Brite type A,

by hand or using an orbital sanding device.

2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−003).
4 Apply the pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052)
with a spatula or polishing bag, remaining only in holes and
surface porous, avoiding a continuous layer.

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let cure the pore filler for a minimum of two hours at room
temperature.

6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded to improve the surface

appearance, let the pore filler cure for at least 12 hours at
room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours 30 min
utes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding.
(w) If surface protection of the existing aluminum trailing edge C−
Profile is damaged during the aluminum strip removal, reprotect
it with chemical conversion coating (Material No. 13−002) plus

Page 313
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

epoxy primer (Material No. 16−006B) or polyurethane primer (Mate

rial No. 16−001B or 16−001C).
(x) Do an electrical bonding test between the repair aluminum strip
and the connection plates at the leading edge and at the trail
ing edge C−profile before its installation. Refer to Figure 214
for contact points.

(y) Bond the aluminum strip to its repair position with adhesive
paste (Material No. 08−017). Take care to remove the adhesive
paste from the fastener holes.

CAUTION: DURING THE BONDING PROCESS, FIX THE REPAIR ALUMINUM STRIP
TO THE OUTER SKIN WITH A VACUUM BAG.

(z) Cure the adhesive paste during 6 hours at room temperature plus
either 1 hour at 80° C (176° F) or 3 to 5 days at room temper
ature.

(aa)Wet install the new repair fasteners with sealant (Material No.
09−005). Refer to Figure 214.
(ab)Apply a fillet of pore filler (Material No. 16−054) around the
aluminum repair strip.

(ac)Let the pore filler cure (refer to manufacturer’s specification).

(ad)Restore the surface protection (refer to Chapter 51−75−12) in the

repair area.
(ae)Do a conductive test between the elevator metallic trailing edge
profile and the replaced strip end located at the leading edge
(maximum value is 5 milli−ohms). Remove any bonding from the
leading edge strip end to avoid measurement mistakes during the
conductive test.

Page 314
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Outer Skin or Core Under Aluminum Strip in Elevator Spar
Box Skin, Zone 04
Figure 214 (sheet 1)
Pages 315/316
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Outer Skin or Core Under Aluminum Strip in Elevator Spar
Box Skin, Zone 04
Figure 214 (sheet 2)
Pages 317/318
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH
3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 215.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.
O. Repair to the Skin, Zone 06, with no Bonding Strips.

NOTE: Before the damaged structure is repaired, a damage evaluation must

be carried out, refer to Chapter 51−77−10.

NOTE: For repair zone definition, refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block
101, Config 1.
NOTE: Figure 215 is a permanent repair for damage of Elevator Upper Skin
zone 06, close to a Fitting Arm, but it is not valid between Fit
ting Arm 2 and 4.

NOTE: Figure 216 is a permanent repair for damage of Elevator Lower Skin
zone 06, but it is not valid if affects to the skin in Rib areas.
NOTE: Figure 217 is a permanent repair for damage of Elevator Upper Skin
zone 06, with no Hinge Fittings or Ribs and no Bonding strips, but
it is not valid for damage between Fitting Arm 2 and 4.

NOTE: If necessary, for access to do this repair, remove the Elevator.

Refer to the AMM, Chapter 27−34−41, Page Block 401.

Page 319
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 215
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Sheet Metal Repair Filler 1 2024T3 CLAD

(see text)
2 Sheet Metal Repair Doubler,
2 mm (0.080 in) thick.
− Cleaning Agent
− Epoxy Resin
− Resin
− Glass Fabric
− Chromic Acid Anodizing
(CAA)
− Polyurethane Primer
− Polyurethane Finish
− Polysulfide Sealant
− Polysulfide Sealant
− Polyurethane Varnish
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figures 215, 216, 217)
1 2024T42 CLAD
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−051, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 20−022 or 20−032,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−033, refer to
Chapter 51−33−00
− Refer to Chapter 51−21−11
− Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−021, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.

(a) Remove the fasteners and the surface protection from the repair
area (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D).

Page 320
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Make the damage cut out into a regular shape as shown in the
relevant Figure. Remove waste material from the repair area with
a vacuum cleaner.

(c) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(d) Apply resin (Material No. 20−022 or 20−032) to the edges of the
skin cut−out.

(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material No. 05−033) and resin

(Material No. 20−022 or 20−032) around the inner skin surface of
the repair area. The glassfabric must extend beyond the area of
the repair doubler by 12 mm (0.47 in).

(f) Allow the repair to cure at RT.

NOTE: Alternatively the cure time may be accelerated by the use
of heat, let the repair cure at the temperature and time
indicated (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 6.B.(2) and
paragraph 5.E.).

(g) Remove heating equipment after the cure process is complete.

(h) Make and form the repair doubler. Refer to Chapter 51−26−11 for
bending data and Chapter 51−26−12 for joggling data. Use material
2024T42 clad, 2 mm (0.080 in) thick for the repair doubler.

(i) Clean the repair doubler and the repair area with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).
(j) Apply the correct surface treatment to the metal repair doubler
(chromic acid anodizing (refer to Chapter 51−21−11), polyurethane
primer (Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C) and then polyurethane
finish (Material No. 16−018C), refer to Chapter 51−23−00).
(k) Mark the new fastener positions onto the repair doubler.

(l) Install the repair doubler in its repair position and secure with
screw−clamps.

(m) Pilot−drill the new fastener holes thru the repair doubler and
the skin. Drill the holes thru the repair doubler from the ex
isting fastener holes.

(n) Remove the screw−pins and the repair doubler from the repair
area.

(o) Remove sharp edges from fastener holes with an abrasive cone, and
the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

Page 321
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: IF NECESSARY, EPOXY RESIN (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) MAY BE USED

AS A LIQUID SHIM UP TO A MAXIMUM THICKNESS OF 0.5 MM
(0.020 IN), REFER TO STEPS 5.O.(2)(p) THRU 5.O.(2)(v). SOLID
SHIM IS VALID UP TO 1.2 MM (0.047 IN) MATERIAL 2024T3 CLAD.

(p) Apply a layer of epoxy resin (Material No. 08−051) to the sur
face of the repair doubler where it will touch the Elevator Skin
when assembled.
(q) Cut a piece of parting−film to the same size and shape as the
repair doubler.

(r) Put the parting−film over the epoxy resin on the repair doubler.

(s) Put the repair doubler in its repair position and secure with
screw−pins.
(t) Remove unwanted epoxy resin with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(u) Let the epoxy resin cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions

for the cure times.
(v) Remove the screw−pins, parting−film and the repair doubler from
the repair area.

(w) Apply a layer of interfay sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the

surface of the repair doubler where it will touch the Elevator
Skin when assembled.
(x) Put the repair doubler in its repair position and secure with
screw−pins.

(y) Remove unwanted interfay sealant with cleaning agent (Material

No. 11−003).
(z) Let the sealant cure. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions
for the cure times.

(aa)Determine the thickness of metal (2024T3 Clad) required for the

repair filler, maximum thickness must be no more than 1.2 mm
(0.050 in).
NOTE: A combination of the metal repair filler and epoxy resin
(Material No. 08−051) (liquid resin) may be necessary to
achieve the required contour.

(ab)Make and form the repair filler from 2024T3 Clad material of the
required thickness (max. 1.2 mm (0.050 in)). Refer to Chapter
51−26−11 for bending data and Chapter 51−26−12 for joggling data.

(ac)Clean the repair filler with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−003).

Page 322
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ad)Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair filler

(chromic acid anodizing (refer to Chapter 51−21−11), polyurethane
primer (Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C) and then polyurethane
finish (Material No. 16−018C), refer to Chapter 51−23−00).

(ae)Put the repair filler in its repair position and secure with
screw−clamps.

(af)Pilot−drill the marked fastener holes from the repair doubler

thru the repair filler.

(ag)Remove the screw−clamps and the repair filler.

(ah)Remove sharp edges from the repair filler and the repair area
with an abrasive cone.
(ai)Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

(aj)Clean the repair filler with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−003).

(ak)Apply a layer of epoxy resin (Material No. 08−051) to the sur

face of the repair filler that will touch the repair doubler
when assembled.

(al)Cut a piece of parting−film to the same size and shape as the

repair filler.
(am)Put parting−film over the epoxy resin on the repair filler.

(an)Put the repair filler in its repair position and secure with
screw−pins.

(ao)Remove unwanted epoxy resin with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−003).
(ap)Let the epoxy resin cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions
for the cure times.

(aq)Remove the screw−pins, parting−film and the repair filler.

(ar)Apply a layer of interfay sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the

surface of the repair filler where it will touch the repair dou
bler when assembled.

(as)Put the repair filler in its repair position and secure with
screw−pins.
(at)Remove unwanted interfay sealant with cleaning agent (Material
No. 11−003).

(au)Apply a bead of sealant (Material No. 09−002) all around the

edge of the repair filler, the repair doubler and the adjacent
structure.

Page 323
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(av)Let the sealants cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for

the cure times.
(aw)Apply a coat of polyurethane varnish (Material No. 16−021) over
the bead of sealant applied in step 5.O.(2)(au).

(ax)Let the polyurethane varnish dry.

(ay)Leave some screw−pins in position and drill all the fastener

holes to the required diameter.
NOTE: All existing fastener holes in the repair area must be
drilled oversize if necessary.

(az)Countersink the fastener holes, as applicable.

(ba)Wet install the fasteners with sealant (Material No. 09−005).

(bb)Remove unwanted sealant with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(bc)Let the sealant cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for

the cure times.
(bd)Restore the surface protection in the repair area. (Refer to
Chapter 51−75−12).

(be)Install the Elevator if it was removed for access purposes, refer

to the AMM, Chapter 27−34−41, Page Block 401.
(bf)Do the following electrical bonding tests if the Elevator is re
moved/installed:
− Between each end of the aluminum trailing edge. Maximum resis
tance value should be 5 milli−ohms.
− Between the aluminum trailing edge and the aluminum central
tank. Maximum resistance value should be 10 milli−ohms.

Page 324
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Upper Skin, Hinge Fitting Area of Elevator Spar Box, Zone 06, with
No Bonding Strips
Figure 215
Pages 325/326
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Lower−Skin of Elevator Spar Box, Zone 06

Figure 216

Pages 327/328
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Upper−skin of Elevator Spar Box, Zone 06, with No Bonding Strips
Figure 217

Pages 329/330
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH
3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 216.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.
P. Repair to Upper−Skin, in Bonding Strip Area, Zone 06.

NOTE: Before the damaged structure is repaired, a damage evaluation must

be carried out refer to Chapter 51−77−10.

NOTE: For repair zone definition, refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block
101, Config 1.
NOTE: This permanent repair is valid for damage to Elevator Spar Box
Skin, Zone 06, in Bonding Strip area between Elevator rib 8 and 9.

NOTE: If necessary, for access to do this repair, remove the Elevator.

Refer to the AMM, Chapter 27−34−41, Page Block 401.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 216
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 331
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Sheet Metal Repair Filler 1 2024T3 CLAD

2 Sheet Metal Repair Doubler,
2 mm (0.080 in) thick.
− Cleaning Agent
− Epoxy Resin
− Resin
− Glass Fabric
− Chromic Acid Anodizing
(CAA)
− Polyurethane Primer
− Polyurethane Finish
− Polysulfide Sealant
− Polysulfide Sealant
− Polyurethane Varnish
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 218)
1 2024T42 CLAD
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−051, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 20−022 or 20−032,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−033, refer to
Chapter 51−33−00
− Refer to Chapter 51−21−11
− Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−021, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.

(a) Remove all the fasteners and the surface protection from the re
pair area (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D.).

CAUTION: DO NOT REMOVE ANY OF THE EXISTING BONDING STRIPS.

(b) Make the damage cut−out into a regular shape as shown in the
Figure, remove waste material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

(c) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
(d) Apply resin (Material No. 20−022 or 20−032) to the edges of the
skin cut−out.

(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material No. 05−033) and resin

(Material No. 20−022 or 20−032) around the inner skin surface of
the repair area. The glassfabric must extend beyond the area of
the repair doubler by 12 mm (0.47 in).

Page 332
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Allow the repair to cure at RT.

NOTE: Alternatively the cure time may be accelerated by the use

of heat. (refer Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 6.B.(2) and
paragraph 5.E.).

(g) Remove heating equipment after the cure process is complete.

(h) Make and form the repair doubler. Refer to Chapter 51−26−11 for
bending data and Chapter 51−26−12 for joggling data. Use material
2024T42 Clad, 2 mm (0.080 in) thick for the repair doubler.

(i) Clean the repair doubler and the repair area with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

(j) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair doubler
(chromic acid anodizing (refer to Chapter 51−21−11), polyurethane
primer (Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C) and the polyurethane
finish (Material No. 16−018C), refer Chapter 51−23−00).

(k) Mark the new fastener positions onto the repair doubler.

(l) Install the repair doubler in its repair position and secure with
screw−clamps.

(m) Pilot−drill the new fastener holes thru the repair doubler and
the skin. Drill the holes thru the repair doubler from the ex
isting fastener holes.
(n) Remove the screw−pins and the repair doubler from the repair
area.

(o) Remove sharp edges from fastener holes with an abrasive cone, and
waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

CAUTION: IF NECESSARY, EPOXY RESIN (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) MAY BE USED

AS A LIQUID SHIM UP TO A MAXIMUM THICKNESS OF 0.5 MM
(0.020 IN), REFER TO STEPS 5.P.(2)(p) THRU 5.P.(2)(v). SOLID
SHIM IS VALID UP TO 1.2 MM (0.047 IN) MATERIAL 2024T3 CLAD.

(p) Apply a layer of epoxy resin (Material No. 08−051) to the sur
face of the repair doubler where it will touch the Elevator Skin
when assembled.

(q) Cut a piece of parting−film to the same size and shape as the
repair doubler.

(r) Put the parting−film over the epoxy resin on the repair doubler.
(s) Put the repair doubler in its repair position and secure with
screw−pins.

(t) Remove unwanted epoxy resin with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

Page 333
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(u) Let the epoxy resin cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions

for the cure times.
(v) Remove the screw−pins, parting−film and the repair doubler from
the repair area.

(w) Determine the thickness of metal (2024T3 Clad) required for the
repair filler, maximum thickness must be no more than 1.2 mm
(0.050 in).
NOTE: A combination of the metal repair filler and epoxy resin
(Material No. 08−051 (liquid shim) may be necessary to
achieve the required contour.

(x) Make and form the repair filler from 2024T3 Clad material of the
required thickness (max. 1.2 mm (0.050 in)). Refer to Chapter
51−26−11 for bending data and Chapter 51−26−12 for joggling data.

(y) Clean the repair filler with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(z) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair filler
(chromic acid anodizing (refer to Chapter 51−21−11), polyurethane
primer (Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C) and then polyurethane
finish (Material No. 16−018C), refer to Chapter 51−23−00).

(aa)Put the repair filler and repair doubler in their repair position
and secure with screw−clamps.
(ab)Pilot−drill the marked fastener holes from the repair doubler
thru the repair filler.

(ac)Remove the screw−clamps and the repair parts.

(ad)Remove sharp edges from the repair filler and the repair area
with an abrasive cone.

(ae)Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum

cleaner.

(af)Clean the repair filler repair doubler and repair area with
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
(ag)Apply a layer of epoxy resin (Material No. 08−051) to the sur
face of the repair filler that will touch the repair doubler
when assembled.

(ah)Cut a piece of parting−film to the same size and shape as the

repair filler.

(ai)Put parting−film over the epoxy resin on the repair filler.

(aj)Put the repair filler and repair doubler in their repair position
and secure with screw−pins.

Page 334
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ak)Remove unwanted epoxy resin with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−003).
(al)Let the epoxy resin cure. Refer to the manufacturer’s instruc
tions for the cure times.

(am)Remove the screw−pins, parting−film, repair filler, and repair

doubler.

(an)Apply a layer of interfay sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the

surface of the repair filler where it will touch the repair dou
bler and the existing Bonding Strip when assembled.

(ao)Apply a layer of interfay sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the

surface of the repair doubler where it will touch the Elevator
Skin when assembled.

(ap)Put the repair filler and the repair doubler in their repair
position and secure with screw−pins.

(aq)Remove unwanted interfay sealant with cleaning agent (Material

No. 11−003).
(ar)Let the sealant cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for
the cure times.

(as)Remove unwanted interfay sealant with cleaning agent (Material

No. 11−003).
(at)Apply a bead of sealant (Material No. 09−002) all around the
edge of the repair filler, the repair doubler and the adjacent
structure.

(au)Let the sealants cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for

the cure times.
(av)Apply a coat of polyurethane varnish (Material No. 16−021) over
the bead of sealant applied in step 5.P.(2)(at).

(aw)Let the epoxy varnish dry.

(ax)Leave some screw−pins in position and drill all the fastener

holes to the required diameter.

NOTE: All existing fastener holes in the repair area must be

drilled oversize if necessary.

(ay)Countersink the fastener holes, as applicable.

(az)Wet install the fasteners, except those in the Bonding strip,
with sealant (Material No. 09−005).

(ba)Remove unwanted sealant with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−003).

Page 335
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(bb)Let the sealant cure. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions

for the cure times.
(bc)Restore the surface protection in the repair area. (Refer to
Chapter 51−75−12).

(bd)Install the Elevator if it was removed for access purposes, refer

to the AMM, Chapter 27−34−41, Page Block 401.

(be)Do the following electrical bonding tests if the Elevator is re

moved/installed:
− Between each end of the aluminum trailing edge. Maximum resis
tance value should be 5 milli−ohms.
− Between the aluminum trailing edge and the aluminum central
tank. Maximum resistance value should be 10 milli−ohms.

Page 336
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Upper−Skin of Elevator Spar Box, Zone 06, Bonding Strips Area
Figure 218

Pages 337/338
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH
3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 217.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.
Q. Repair to inner skin, outer skin and core, Zone 01.

NOTE: This repair is valid for damage affecting inner, outer skin and
core.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged area you must do a damage evalua
tion. Refer to Chapter 51−11−00 for data.
NOTE: For Repair Zones Definition, refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block
101, Config 1.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 217
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 339
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Honeycomb Core Plug − Material No. 20−007, refer to

− Carbon Fabric Repair Plies
− Support Plate
− Glass Fabric
− Adhesive Epoxy
− Low Density Compound
− Adhesive Film
− Adhesive Foam
− Cleaning Agent
− Pore Filler
− Scotch Brite, type A
(2) Repair Instructions, refer to Figure 219
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−091 or 05−092,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Glass Prepreg, refer to Chapter
51−77−11 paragraph 6.B.(09) or
Glass Wet Lay−up, refer to
Chapter 51−77−11 paragraph
6.B.(02) and 6.B.(08)
− Material No. 20−009 or 20−012A
or 20−012B, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 08−051 or 08−078,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022, 08−022C or
20−042, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−047C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
−

(a) Prepare the repair area in both skins, refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
paragraph 4.M.

NOTE: Radius all the corners by 12 mm (0.472 in).

NOTE: Step the edges of the cut out in the outer skin by 15 mm
(0.590 in).

(b) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure affected core

must be systematically removed and repaired as follows:
− Perform an initial drying of damaged structure. Refer to Chap
ter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.B.
− Remove affected core. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.C.(1) except step (b).

Page 340
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

− Perform a final drying. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block

201, paragraph 2.B.
− Replace affected core following the instructions of the rele
vant repair.

(c) Make the support plate to the correct size and shape for the re
pair area with a minimum thickness of 1.2 mm (0.047 in). Ply
orientation must be ±45°. Refer to Figure 219 and to Chapter
51−77−11 paragraph 3.C for support plate manufacture instructions.
Use one of the following materials:

1 For Glass Prepreg, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph

6.B.(9).
2 For Glass wet lay−up, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraphs
6.B.(2) and 6.B.(8).

NOTE: To allow the installation of the precured support plate the

inner skin cut out must be one side longer than the short
est dimension of the support plate, taking into account the
location of the damage.

(d) Remove 40 mm (1.57 in) of tedlar in the area of inner skin

which will be in contact with the support plate. Refer to Figure
219.

(e) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(f) Clean the repair area and the support plate with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

(g) Bond the support plate to the inner skin in its correct repair
position with adhesive epoxy (Material No. 08−078 or 08−051). Re
fer to Figure 219 and to Chapter 51−77−11 paragraph 3.C for sup
port plate bonding.

(h) Cut a piece of adhesive film (Material No. 08−042A) to the size
and shape of the repair area, refer to Figure 219.

(i) Remove the protective layer from the piece of adhesive film.
(j) Lay up the piece of adhesive film over the support plate, refer
to Figure 219.

(k) Fill the bottom of the repair, on the support plate, with two
CFRP filler plies (Material No. 05−091 or 05−092) up to the bot
tom of the existing honeycomb core.

NOTE: Make sure that the filler plies are flush with the internal
skin surface.

(l) Lay−up the CFRP internal repair plies in the repair area, refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.B. For lay−up sequence and ply
orientation refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 1.

Page 341
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(m) Make the Honeycomb Core Replacement Procedure, refer to Chapter

55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.C.(2). and to Figure 219,
using the repair materials from the repair material list.

(n) Cover the exposed honeycomb core cells with Low Density Compound
(Material No. 08−022), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.H.
and cure 16 hours at 24° C (75.2° F).

NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 08−022C or 20−042.

(o) Prepare the carbon fabric prepreg plies (Material No. 05−091 or
05−092) and the adhesive film plies (Material No. 08−042A). Refer
to Figure 219 and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.B. and 4.C.

(p) Lay−up the carbon fabric repair plies and the adhesive film plies
in the repair area. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.B.
NOTE: For Lay−up sequence and ply orientation, refer to Chapter
55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 1.

(q) Install the vacuum bag and heating equipment. Refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.
(r) Cure the installed materials at 120° C (248° F) for 90 minutes
under vacuum conditions (a minimum vacuum of 0.8 bar (11.6 psi)
is required). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.

(s) Inspect the repair, refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 5.

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(t) Before surface protection restoration apply a layer of pore fill

er material as follows:

1 Abrade the surface to be protected using Scotch Brite type A,

by hand or using an orbital sanding device.
2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−003).

4 Apply the pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052)

with a spatula or polishing bag, remaining only in holes and
surface porous, avoiding a continuous layer.

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let cure the pore filler for a minimum of two hours at room
temperature.
6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded to improve the surface
appearance, let the pore filler cure for at least 12 hours at
room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours 30 min
utes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding.

Page 342
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(u) Restore the surface protection. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Pages 343/344
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to inner skin, outer skin and core, Zone 01

Figure 219

Pages 345/346
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SKIN − REPAIRS

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

1. General
NOTE: CONFIG−2 is applicable after modification 30565G00357 only. For effec
tivity refer to the Modification/Service Bulletin List given in Chap
ter 55−20−00, Page Block 001.

NOTE: For Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14

− CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

This topic contains all of the specific repair procedures for the skin pan
els of the Elevator Spar Box. The repair zones and allowable damage data
for these repair procedures are in Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config
2. The General Repair Procedure (hot bond repair 120° C (248° F)) is in
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E. and Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201.

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

2. Safety Precautions

There are risk to you and other persons when you work with composite re
pair materials. To prevent risks, read and obey the warnings given below.

WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.

WARNING: OBEY THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS WHEN YOU USE CLEANING AGENTS,
ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND PAINTS. THESE MATERIALS ARE DANGEROUS.
WARNING: WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND FILTER MASK WHEN YOU CUT,
ABRADE OR DRILL COMPOSITE MATERIALS. THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MA
TERIALS CAN GET INTO YOUR LUNGS OR ONTO YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE YOU
INJURY. IMMEDIATELY REMOVE DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.

WHEN YOU WORK WITH CFRP COMPOSITE MATERIALS, IMMEDIATELY REMOVE
DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRIC POWER ON
THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST ONLY USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT REPAIR.

CAUTION: OBEY THE GIVEN INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE WHICH LEADS TO THE
APPLICABLE INSPECTION PROGRAM DEFINED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR IN
SPECTIONS (SRI) OF THE SRM, IF NECESSARY.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER TO PARA
GRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER REMARKS

No General Repairs applicable − −

Table 201

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

4. Repair Scheme of Specific Repairs

SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE REPAIR INSPECTION

CATEGORY INSTRUCTION REF
ERENCE
Non−structural repair for 5.A. 201 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
damage less than 1000
mm
(1.55 in)
Non−structural repair for 5.B. 202 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
damage between 1000 mm
(1.55 in) and 15000 mm
(23.25 in)
Repair to Outer Skin, 5.C. 203 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
Zone 01 (All Subzones)
Repair to Outer Skin and 5.D. 204 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
Core, or debonding of
inner Skin and Core,
Zone 01 (All Subzones)
Repair to inner skin, 5.E. 205 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
outer skin and core,
Zone 01
Repair of damaged/de 5.F. 206 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
bonded core, chamfer
area, Zone 02 (Subzone G
and J)
Repair of damage to out 5.G. 207 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
er skin or damaged/de
bonded core, Zone 02
(Subzone M)
Repair of damage to out 5.H. 208 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
er skin, Zone 03.
Repair of damaged/de 5.I. 209 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
bonded core, Zone 03.
Replacement of an in 5.J. 210 N/A −
sert, Zone 03.
Repair of damage to an 5.J. 210 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
insert area, Zone 03.
Repair of damage to TE 5.K. 211 A −
aluminum profile

Table 202

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE REPAIR INSPECTION

CATEGORY INSTRUCTION REF
ERENCE
Repair of damage to out 5.L. 212 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
er skin or core under
aluminum strip, Zone 04
Repair to Skin, Zone 06, 5.M. 213, 214, B 55−21−11−2−002−00
with no Bonding Strip 215
Repair to Upper−Skin, 5.N. 216 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
Zone 06, in Bonding
Strip Area

Table 202
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories, refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

5. Elevator Spar Box Skin − Repairs

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 203.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH
3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
A. Non−structural repair for damage less than 1000 mm (1.55 in)

NOTE: This repair procedure is applicable for Zones 01, 02, 03, 04 and
sandwich areas of Zone 5.

NOTE: For repair zones definition refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block
101, Config 2.

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 203
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbon fabric (dry) − Material No. 05−088 or 20−023,

− Laminating resin
− Low Density Compound
− Pore Filler
− Parting Film
− Scotch Brite, type A
− Cleaning Agent
− Sealant
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 20−022 or 20−032 or
20−028, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022 or any Paste
Adhesive from Chapter 51−77−11
paragraph 6.B.(1) Table 1, or
any Low Density compound from
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph
6.B.(4) Table 4, except Material
No. 05−090
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para
graph 3.B
−
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.

Page 205
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(2) Repair Instructions

NOTE: Only repairs with access for the upper surface are possible if
the Elevator panels are assembled.

NOTE: When the damage is composed of several individual damages (re

fer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 2, paragraph
4.A), perform the repair as follows: do not remove the undam
aged plies and/or core between the individual damages. Repair
each area as an individual cosmetic repair, but lay up the
carbon fabric repair plies over the entire envelope repair
area. Refer to Figure 201 Sheet 4.

(a) Prepare the repair area, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph

4.M.
(b) Follow the repair instructions given in Chapter 51−77−13, para
graph 2.H, using the repair materials listed above. Refer to the
relevant figure, as follows:

1 For Zone 01: refer to Figure 201, Sheet 1 (refer to Sheet 2

only in case you can not respect the plies overlap described
in Sheet 1).

2 For Zones 02 and 04: refer to Figure 201, Sheet 2.

3 For Zone 03: refer to Figure 201, Sheet 3. If insert is dam

aged or bushing is debonded, refer to paragraph 5.J. for insert
replacement instructions.
NOTE: In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure follow
the instructions described in paragraph 5.A.(2)(c).

(c) For all Zones, in case of liquid ingress inside sandwich struc
ture, affected core must be systematically removed and repaired
as follows:
− Perform an initial drying of damaged structure. Refer to Chap
ter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.B.
− Remove affected core. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.C.(1) except step (b).
− Perform a final drying. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.B.
− Replace affected core following the instructions of the rele
vant repair.

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(d) Before surface protection restoration apply a layer of pore fill

er material as follows:

1 Abrade the surface to be protected using Scotch Brite type A,

by hand or using an orbital sanding device.

2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

Page 206
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

3 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−003).
4 Apply the pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052)
with a spatula or polishing bag, remaining only in holes and
surface porous, avoiding a continuous layer.

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let cure the pore filler for a minimum of two hours at room
temperature.

6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded to improve the surface

appearance, let the pore filler cure for at least 12 hours at
room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours 30 min
utes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding.
(e) Restore the surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Pages 207/208
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Non−structural Repair Zone 01, Damage up to 1000 mm
(1.55 in
)
Figure 201 (sheet 1)

Pages 209/210
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Non−structural Repair Zone 02 and 04, Damage up to 1000 mm
(1.55
in
)
Figure 201 (sheet 2)
Pages 211/212
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Non−structural Repair Zone 03, Damage up to 1000 mm
(1.55 in
)
Figure 201 (sheet 3)

Page 213
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Combined Non−structural Repair

Figure 201 (sheet 4)

Page 214
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 204.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH
3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
B. Non−structural repair for damage between 1000 mm (1.55 in) and 15000
mm (23.25 in)

NOTE: This repair procedure is applicable for Zones 01, 02, 03, 04 and
sandwich areas of Zone 5.

NOTE: For repair zones definition refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block
101, Config 2.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 204
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 215
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbon fabric (dry) − Material No. 05−088 or 20−023,

− Laminating resin
− Low Density Compound
− Honeycomb Core plug
− Adhesive Paste
− Precured Doubler
− Pore Filler
− Parting Film
− Scotch Brite, type A
− Cleaning Agent
− Sealant
(2) Repair Instructions
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 20−022 or 20−032 or
20−028, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022 or any
Adhesive Paste from Chapter
51−77−11 paragraph 6.B.(1) Table
1, or any Low Density compound
from Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph
6.B.(4) Table 4, except Material
No. 05−090
− Material No. 05−085, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 for alterna
tives refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
Table 15
− Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para
graph 6.B. (1)
− Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para
graph 6.B.(10) table 12 item 1
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para
graph 3.B
−
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.

NOTE: Only repairs with access for the upper surface are possible if
the Elevator panels are assembled.

NOTE: When the damage is composed of several individual damages (re

fer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 2, paragraph
4.A), perform the repair as follows: do not remove the undam
aged plies and/or core between the individual damages. Repair
each area as an individual cosmetic repair, but lay up the
carbon fabric repair plies over the entire envelope repair
area. Refer to Figure 202 Sheet 5.

Page 216
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(a) Prepare the repair area, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph

4.M.
(b) For a superficial damage on core or if the core is not damaged,
refer to Figure 202 Sheet 1 (refer to Sheet 2 and 3 only in
case you can not respect the plies overlap described in Sheet 1)
and proceed as follows:

1 For the core closing, fill with Low Density Compound (Material
No. 08−022) up to 3 mm (0.12 in) and cure 16 hours at 24° C
(75.20° F), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.H.

NOTE: Use as alternative any Adhesive Paste from Chapter

51−77−11 paragraph 6.B.(1) Table 1, or any Low Density
compound from Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 6.B.(4) Table 4,
except Material No. 05−090.

2 For wet lay up of repair plies, refer to Chapter 51−77−13,

paragraph 2.A.(2), option D, using the repair materials from
the repair material list.

(c) For damages to outer skin and core refer to the relevant figure
from the list below:
− For Zone 01: refer to Figure 202 Sheet 1 (refer to Sheet 2
and 3 only in case you can not respect the plies overlap de
scribed in Sheet 1).
− For Zones 02 and 04: refer to Figure 202, Sheets 2 and 3.
− For Zone 03: refer to Figure 202, Sheet 4. If insert is dam
aged or bushing is debonded, refer to paragraph 5.J. for insert
replacement instructions.

and proceed as follows:

1 For core replacement refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.G,

option D, using Adhesive Paste (refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
paragraph 6.B. (1)).
NOTE: In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure fol
low the instructions described in paragraph 5.B.(2)(e).

2 For the core closing, fill with Low Density Compound (Material
No. 08−022) up to 3 mm (0.12 in) and cure 16 hours at 24° C
(75.20° F), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.H.

NOTE: Use as alternative any Adhesive Paste from Chapter

51−77−11 paragraph 6.B.(1) Table 1, or any Low Density
compound from Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 6.B.(4) Table 4,
except Material No. 05−090.

3 For wet lay up of repair plies, refer to Chapter 51−77−13,

paragraph 2.A.(2), option D, using the repair materials from
the repair material list.

Page 217
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(d) For damages to outer skin, core and inner skin refer to Figure
202 Sheet 1 and proceed as follows:
1 For the installation of internal Composite Doubler, refer to
Chapter 51−77−13, paragraph 2.E, using the repair materials
from the repair material list.

2 For core replacement refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.G,

using Adhesive Paste (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 6.B.
(1)).

NOTE: In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure fol

low the instructions described in paragraph 5.B.(2)(e).

3 For the core closing, fill with Low Density Compound (Material
No. 08−022) up to 3 mm (0.12 in) and cure 16 hours at 24° C
(75.20° F), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.H.

NOTE: Use as alternative any Adhesive Paste from Chapter

51−77−11 paragraph 6.B.(1) Table 1, or any Low Density
compound from Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 6.B.(4) Table 4,
except Material No. 05−090.
4 For wet lay up of repair plies, refer to Chapter 51−77−13,
paragraph 2.E, using the repair materials from the repair mate
rial list.

(e) For all Zones, in case of liquid ingress inside sandwich struc
ture, affected core must be systematically removed and repaired
as follows:
− Perform an initial drying of damaged structure. Refer to Chap
ter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.B.
− Remove affected core. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.C.(1) except step (b).
− Perform a final drying. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.B.
− Replace affected core following the instructions of the rele
vant repair.

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(f) Before surface protection restoration apply a layer of pore fill

er material as follows:

1 Abrade the surface to be protected using Scotch Brite type A,

by hand or using an orbital sanding device.

2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

Page 218
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

4 Apply the pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052)

with a spatula or polishing bag, remaining only in holes and
surface porous, avoiding a continuous layer.

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let cure the pore filler for a minimum of two hours at room
temperature.

6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded to improve the surface

appearance, let the pore filler cure for at least 12 hours at
room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours 30 min
utes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding.

(g) Restore the surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Pages 219/220
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Non−structural Repair Zone 01, Damage between 1000 mm
(1.55 in
)
and 15000 mm
(23.45 in
)
Figure 202 (sheet 1)
Pages 221/222
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Non−structural Repair Zone 02 and 04, Damage between 1000 mm
(1.55
in
) and 15000 mm
(23.45 in
)
Figure 202 (sheet 2)
Pages 223/224
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Non−structural Repair Zone 02 and 04, Damage between 1000 mm (1.55
in) and 15000 mm (23.45 in)
Figure 202 (sheet 3)
Page 225
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Non−structural Repair Zone 03, Damage between 1000 mm
(1.55 in
)
and 15000 mm
(23.45 in
)
Figure 202 (sheet 4)
Page 226
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Combined Non−structural Repair

Figure 202 (sheet 5)

Page 227
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 205.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
C. Repair to Outer Skin, Zone 01 (All subzones)

NOTE: This repair is valid for both: delamination/debonding between Outer

Skin/Core and non allowable deep scratch/broken plies on the outer
Skin of the Elevator Spar Box, Zone 01 (All subzones) within the
repairable limits. Refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Con
fig 2 for zones data.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged areas you must do a damage evalua
tion. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out using the hot−bond 120° C (248°
F) repair procedure. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 205
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 228
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbon fabric prepreg − Material No. 05−091 or 05−092,

− Adhesive Film
− Low Density Compound
− Pore Filler
− Cleaning Agent
− Scotch Brite, type A
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 203)
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022, 08−022C or
20−042 refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
−

(a) Prepare the repair area, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph

4.M.

NOTE: Radius all the corners by 12 mm (0.472 in).

NOTE: Step the edges of the cut out in the outer skin by 15 mm
(0.590 in).

(b) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure affected core

must be systematically removed and repaired. Refer to the rele
vant repair procedure in paragraph 5.D..
(c) Cover the exposed honeycomb core cells with Low Density Compound
(Material No. 08−022), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.H.
and cure 16 hours at 24° C (75.2° F).

NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 08−022C or 20−042.

(d) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(e) Prepare the carbon fabric prepreg plies (Material No. 05−091 or
05−092) and the adhesive film plies (Material No. 08−042A). Refer
to Figure 203 and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraphs 4.B and 4.C.
(f) Lay−up the carbon fabric repair plies and the adhesive film plies
in the repair area. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.B.

NOTE: For Lay−up sequence and ply orientation, refer to Chapter

55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 2.
(g) Install the vacuum bag and heating equipment. Refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.

Page 229
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(h) Cure the installed materials at 120° C (248° F) for 90 minutes

under vacuum conditions (a minimum vacuum of 0.8 bar (11.6 psi)
is required), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.

(i) Inspect the repair, refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 5.

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(j) Before surface protection restoration apply a layer of pore fill

er material as follows:
1 Abrade the surface to be protected using Scotch Brite type A,
by hand or using an orbital sanding device.

2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−003).

4 Apply the pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052)

with a spatula or polishing bag, remaining only in holes and
surface porous, avoiding a continuous layer.
CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let cure the pore filler for a minimum of two hours at room
temperature.

6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded to improve the surface

appearance, let the pore filler cure for at least 12 hours at
room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours 30 min
utes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding.

(k) Restore the surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 230
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Outer Skin, Zone 01 (All subzones)

Figure 203

Pages 231/232
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 206.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
D. Repair to Outer Skin and Core or debonding of Inner Skin and Core, Zone
01 (All subzones)

NOTE: This repair is valid for damage affecting the outer skin and core
or debonding between inner skin and core or water/fluid ingress in
side sandwich structure of the Elevator Spar Box Skin, Zone 01
(All subzones). Refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config
2, for zones data.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged areas you must do a damage evalua
tion. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out using the hot−bond 120° C (248°
F) repair procedure.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 206
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 233
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbon fabric prepreg − Material No. 05−091 or 05−092,

− Glass Fabric Prepreg
− Adhesive Film
− Low Density Compound
− Honeycomb Core Plug
− Adhesive Foam
− Pore Filler
− Cleaning Agent
− Scotch Brite, type A
(2) Repair Instructions (Refer to Figure 204)
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 20−009 or 20−012A
or 20−012B, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022, 08−022C or
20−042 refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−085, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−047C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
−

(a) Prepare the repair area, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph

4.M.

NOTE: Radius all the corners by 12 mm (0.472 in).

NOTE: Step the edges of the cut out in the outer skin by 15 mm
(0.590 in).

(b) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure affected core

must be systematically removed and repaired as follows:
− Perform an initial drying of damaged structure. Refer to Chap
ter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.B.
− Remove affected core. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.C.(1) except step (b).
− Perform a final drying. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.B.
− Replace affected core following the instructions of the rele
vant repair.
(c) Cut two pieces of adhesive film (Material No. 08−042A) to the
shape and size of the repair cut out. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
paragraph 4.B.

Page 234
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(d) Cut a piece of glass fabric prepreg (Material No. 20−009) to the
shape and size of the repair cut out. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
paragraph 4.C.

NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 20−012A or Material No.

20−012B.

(e) Prepare and dry the honeycomb replacement core plug (Material No.
05−085). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.J.
NOTE: Same core ribbon as the original.

(f) Lay up the first adhesive film ply on the bottom of the repair
cut out. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.B.

(g) Lay up the glass fabric ply on top of the adhesive film. Refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C.

(h) Lay up the second adhesive film ply on top of the glass fabric.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.B.

(i) Cut a piece of adhesive foam (Material No. 08−047C) to the shape
and size of the honeycomb repair plug.
(j) Remove the first protective layer from the adhesive foam and wrap
the adhesive foam around the replacement core plug. Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.B.

(k) Install the cure cycle temperature thermocouples in the repair

area where the honeycomb repair plug is to be installed.

NOTE: The number of thermocouples to be installed depends on the

repair area:

For repair areas between 15000 and 30000 mm (23.25 and
46.50 in) 2 thermocouples must be installed.
For repair areas between 30000 and 45000 mm (46.50 and
69.75 in) 3 thermocouples must be installed.

For repair areas between 45000 and 60000 mm (69.75 and
93.00 in) 4 thermocouples must be installed.

The repair area shall be divided into equal areas and the
thermocouples shall be located in the center of each of
these areas. The thermocouples shall have a turnover of at
least 20 mm (1 in), the whole of which shall make good
contact with the adhesive layer at the bottom of the plug.

(l) Remove the second protective layer from the adhesive foam and
install the replacement honeycomb core plug into its repair posi
tion.

(m) Cure the installed repair materials at 90° C (194° F) under vac
uum conditions for a period of four hours.

Page 235
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(n) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
(o) Cover the exposed honeycomb core cells with Low Density Compound
(Material No. 08−022), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.H.
and cure 16 hours at 24° C (75.2° F).

NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 08−022C or 20−042.

(p) Prepare the carbon fabric prepreg plies (Material No. 05−091 or
05−092) and the adhesive film plies (Material No. 08−042A). Refer
to Figure 204 and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.B. and 4.C.

(q) Lay−up the carbon fabric repair plies and the adhesive film plies
in the repair area. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.B.
NOTE: For Lay−up sequence and ply orientation, refer to Chapter
55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 2.

(r) Install the vacuum bag and heating equipment. Refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.

(s) Cure the installed materials at 120° C (248° F) for 90 minutes

under vacuum conditions (a minimum vacuum of 0.8 bar (11.6 psi)
is required). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.

(t) Inspect the repair, refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 5.

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(u) Before surface protection restoration apply a layer of pore fill
er material as follows:

1 Abrade the surface to be protected using Scotch Brite type A,

by hand or using an orbital sanding device.

2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

4 Apply the pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052)

with a spatula or polishing bag, remaining only in holes and
surface porous, avoiding a continuous layer.

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let cure the pore filler for a minimum of two hours at room
temperature.

6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded to improve the surface

appearance, let the pore filler cure for at least 12 hours at
room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours 30 min
utes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding.

Page 236
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(v) Restore the surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Pages 237/238
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Outer Skin/Core, or Debonding of Inner Skin/Core, Zone 01 (All

subzones)
Figure 204
Pages 239/240
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 207.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
E. Repair to inner skin, outer skin and core, Zone 01.

NOTE: This repair is valid for damage affecting inner, outer skin and
core.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged area you must do a damage evalua
tion. Refer to Chapter 51−11−00 for data.
NOTE: For Repair Zones Definition, refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block
101, Config 2.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 207
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 241
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Honeycomb Core Plug − Material No. 05−085, refer to

− Carbon Fabric Repair Plies
− Support Plate
− Glass Fabric
− Adhesive Epoxy
− Low Density Compound
− Adhesive Film
− Adhesive Foam
− Cleaning Agent
− Pore Filler
− Scotch Brite, type A
(2) Repair Instructions, refer to Figure 205
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−091 or 05−092,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Glass Prepreg, refer to Chapter
51−77−11 paragraph 6.B.(09) or
Glass Wet Lay−up, refer to
Chapter 51−77−11 paragraph
6.B.(02) and 6.B.(08)
− Material No. 20−009 or 20−012A
or 20−012B, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 08−051 or 08−078,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022, 08−022C or
20−042, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−047C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
−

(a) Prepare the repair area in both skins, refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
paragraph 4.M.

NOTE: Radius all the corners by 12 mm (0.472 in).

NOTE: Step the edges of the cut out in the outer skin by 15 mm
(0.590 in).

(b) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure affected core

must be systematically removed and repaired as follows:
− Perform an initial drying of damaged structure. Refer to Chap

ter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.B.
− Remove affected core. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.C.(1) except step (b).

Page 242
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

− Perform a final drying. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block

201, paragraph 2.B.
− Replace affected core following the instructions of the rele
vant repair.

(c) Make the support plate to the correct size and shape for the re
pair area with a minimum thickness of 1.2 mm (0.047 in). Ply
orientation must be ±45°. Refer to Figure 205 and to Chapter
51−77−11 paragraph 3.C for support plate manufacture instructions.
Use one of the following materials:

1 For Glass Prepreg, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph

6.B.(9).
2 For Glass wet lay−up, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraphs
6.B.(2) and 6.B.(8).

NOTE: To allow the installation of the precured support plate the

inner skin cut out must be one side longer than the short
est dimension of the support plate, taking into account the
location of the damage.

(d) Remove 40 mm (1.57 in) of tedlar in the area of inner skin

which will be in contact with the support plate. Refer to Figure
205.

(e) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(f) Clean the repair area and the support plate with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

(g) Bond the support plate to the inner skin in its correct repair
position with adhesive epoxy (Material No. 08−078 or 08−051). Re
fer to Figure 205 and to Chapter 51−77−11 paragraph 4.K.(2) for
support plate bonding.

(h) Cut a piece of adhesive film (Material No. 08−042A) to the size
and shape of the repair area, refer to Figure 205.

(i) Remove the protective layer from the piece of adhesive film.
(j) Lay up the piece of adhesive film over the support plate, refer
to Figure 205.

(k) Fill the bottom of the repair, on the support plate, with two
CFRP filler plies (Material No. 05−091 or 05−092) up to the bot
tom of the existing honeycomb core.

NOTE: Make sure that the filler plies are flush with the internal
skin surface.

(l) Lay−up the CFRP internal repair plies in the repair area, refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.B. For lay−up sequence and ply
orientation refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 2.

Page 243
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(m) Make the Honeycomb Core Replacement Procedure, refer to Chapter

55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.C.(2). and to Figure 205,
using the repair materials from the repair material list.

(n) Cover the exposed honeycomb core cells with Low Density Compound
(Material No. 08−022), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.H.
and cure 16 hours at 24° C (75.2° F).

NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 08−022C or 20−042.

(o) Prepare the carbon fabric prepreg plies (Material No. 05−091 or
05−092) and the adhesive film plies (Material No. 08−042A). Refer
to Figure 205 and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.B. and 4.C.

(p) Lay−up the carbon fabric repair plies and the adhesive film plies
in the repair area. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.B.
NOTE: For Lay−up sequence and ply orientation, refer to Chapter
55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 2.

(q) Install the vacuum bag and heating equipment. Refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.
(r) Cure the installed materials at 120° C (248° F) for 90 minutes
under vacuum conditions (a minimum vacuum of 0.8 bar (11.6 psi)
is required). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.

(s) Inspect the repair, refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 5.

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(t) Before surface protection restoration apply a layer of pore fill

er material as follows:

1 Abrade the surface to be protected using Scotch Brite type A,

by hand or using an orbital sanding device.
2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−003).

4 Apply the pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052)

with a spatula or polishing bag, remaining only in holes and
surface porous, avoiding a continuous layer.

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let cure the pore filler for a minimum of two hours at room
temperature.
6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded to improve the surface
appearance, let the pore filler cure for at least 12 hours at
room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours 30 min
utes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding.

Page 244
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(u) Restore the surface protection. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Pages 245/246
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to inner skin, outer skin and core, Zone 01

Figure 205

Pages 247/248
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 208.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
F. Repair of damaged/debonding core in chamfer area, Zone 02 (Subzone G and
J)

NOTE: This repair is valid for damages to outer skin/core, or core/inner

skin debonded, within the repairable limit (refer to Chapter
55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 2) or water/fluid ingress inside
sandwich structure, in the Elevator Spar Box Skin.

NOTE: Before the damaged structure is repaired, a damage evaluation must

be carried out (refer to Chapter 51−77−10 paragraph 3 for data).

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out using the hot−bond 120° C (248°
F) repair procedure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 208
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 249
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to

− Low Density Compound
− Parting Film
− Pore filler
− Adhesive Film
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 206)
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022, 08−022C or
20−042, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para
graph 3.B
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Prepare the repair area, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph

4.M.

NOTE: Radius all the corners by 12 mm (0.472 in).

NOTE: Step the edges of the cut out in the outer skin by 15 mm
(0.590 in).

(b) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure affected core

must be systematically removed and repaired as follows:
− Perform an initial drying of damaged structure. Refer to Chap
ter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.B.
− Remove affected core. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.C.(1) except step (b).
− Perform a final drying. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.B.
− Replace affected core following the instructions of the rele
vant repair.
CAUTION: MAKE EVACUATION AIR HOLE AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE TO THE DAM
AGED AREA. BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE THE INNER FACE.

(c) Drill the necessary air evacuation holes to permit the evacuation
of air and also to verify that the resin is all around in the
damaged area, Zone 02.

(d) Remove the dust from the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(e) Clean the repair area with a cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

Page 250
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Mask the area around the air evacuation holes and on bottom of
the access hole and on the outer skin, to prevent leaking over
other parts.

(g) Prepare the Low Density Compound (Material No. 08−022), refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.A.

NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 08−022C or 20−042.

(h) Cut a piece of parting film equal to the bottom area of the ac
cess hole.

(i) Place the parting film on the bottom of the access hole.

(j) Fill up the access area inside the Zone 02 with Low Density Com
pound (Material No. 08−022).
NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 08−022C or 20−042.

(k) Check the Low Density Compound fills fully up the access area
(inside) through the air evacuation holes.

NOTE: Use an aluminum plate to conform the Low Density Compound

(see the Figure 206), previously covered with parting film.
(l) Remove the parting film only from the bottom of the access hole.

(m) Cure the Low Density Compound for 16 hours at 24° C (75.2° F).

(n) Remove the protection and abrade the surface if necessary.

(o) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(p) Clean the repair area with a cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(q) For core and outer skin repair refer to Figure 206 and follow
the repair instructions from paragraph 5.D..

Pages 251/252
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damaged/Debonding Core, Chamfer Area, Elevator Spar Box Skin, Zone
02 (Subzone G and J)
Figure 206 (sheet 1)
Pages 253/254
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damaged/Debonding Core, Chamfer Area, Elevator Spar Box Skin, Zone
02 (Subzone G and J)
Figure 206 (sheet 2)
Pages 255/256
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 209.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
G. Repair of Damage to outer skin or damaged/debonded core, Zone 02 (Sub
zone M)

NOTE: This repair is valid only for damages to outer skin, or outer
skin/core debonded, or inner skin/core debonded, or water/fluid in
gress inside sandwich structure, Zone 02 (subzone M), within the
repairable limit (refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config
2), in the Elevator Spar Box skin.

NOTE: Repair example shows two different types of damage, each side of
the Elevator rib; inner skin debonded and outer skin damaged/de
bonded. Select the method of repair.
NOTE: Before the damaged structure is repaired, a damage evaluation must
be carried out (refer to Chapter 51−77−10).

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out using the hot−bond 120° C (248°
F) repair procedure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.).

Page 257
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 209
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−010 and 11−003

refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−001, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Carbon prepreg − Material No. 05−091 or 05−092,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Resin − Material No. 08−022 or 08−022C
or 20−042, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Pore Filler − Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Adhesive − Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 207)

(a) Remove the original fasteners from the repair area.

(b) Prepare the repair area, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph

4.M.

NOTE: Radius all the corners by 12 mm (0.472 in).

NOTE: Step the edges of the cut out in the outer skin by 15 mm
(0.590 in).
(c) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure affected core
must be systematically removed and repaired as follows:
− Perform an initial drying of damaged structure. Refer to Chap
ter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.B.

Page 258
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

− Remove affected core. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block

201, paragraph 2.C.(1) except step (b).
− Perform a final drying. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.B.
− Replace affected core following the instructions of the rele
vant repair.

(d) Do the repair procedure according the damage type, as follows:

1 In case of outer skin delaminated or debonded, refer to figure
207 and follow the repair instructions from paragraph 5.C..

2 In case of core damaged or inner skin debonded, refer to fig

ure 207 and follow the repair instructions from paragraph 5.F..
(e) Wet install repair fasteners with sealant (Material No. 09−001).

NOTE: Determine grip length on assembly.

(f) Restore the surface protection (refer to Chapter 51−75−12).

Pages 259/260
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Outer Skin or Core Debonded/Damaged Elevator Spar Box

Skin, Zone 02 (Subzone M)
Figure 207 (sheet 1)
Pages 261/262
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Outer Skin or Core Debonded/Damaged Elevator Spar Box

Skin, Zone 02 (Subzone M)
Figure 207 (sheet 2)
Pages 263/264
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) OF THE SRM. INFORM YOUR
PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMA
TION.
CAUTION: DO NOT PASS THE LIMIT LINE FOR THE SKIN CUT OUT.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 210.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.
IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE
CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

H. Repair of damage to outer skin, Zone 03

NOTE: These repair is valid only for damage to outer skin, Zone 03, but
adjacent to Zone 01 and 45 mm (1.77 in) far from the chamfer area
of the TE, within the repairable limits in the Elevator Spar Box
skin according to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 2, para
graph 4.A.

NOTE: Before the damaged structure is repaired, a damage evaluation must

be carried out (refer to Chapter 51−77−10).

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out using the hot−bond (120° C (248°
F)) repair procedure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.).

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 210
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 265
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to

− Low Density Compound
− Adhesive Film
− Carbon Epoxy Prepreg
− Pore Filler
− Scotch Brite, type A
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 208)
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022, 08−022C or
20−042, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−091 or 05−092,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
−

CAUTION: DO NOT PASS THE LIMIT LINE FOR THE SKIN CUT OUT (REFER TO
THE FIGURE).

(a) Prepare the repair area (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph

4.M) according the repair Figure 208.

NOTE: Radius all corners by 8 mm (0.31 in).

(b) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure affected core

must be systematically removed and repaired. Refer to the rele
vant repair procedure in paragraph 5.I..
(c) If damage is in an insert area, mechanically remove the bushing,
core and potted area in the affected area through access hole.
Refer to paraparagraph 5.J. for insert repair instructions.

(d) Cover the exposed honeycomb core cells with Low Density Compound
(Material No. 08−022), refer to Chapter 51−77−11 paragraph 5.H.
and then cure, refer to Chapter 51−77−11 paragraph 6.B.(4).

NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 08−022C or 20−042.

(e) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
(f) Prepare the carbon fabric prepreg plies (Material No. 05−091 or
05−092) and the adhesive film plies (Material No. 08−042A). Refer
to Figure 208 and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraphs 4.B and 4.C.

Page 266
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(g) Lay−up the carbon fabric repair plies and the adhesive film plies
in the repair area. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.B.
NOTE: For Lay−up sequence and ply orientation, refer to Figure
208.

(h) Install the vacuum bag and heating equipment. Refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.

(i) Cure the installed materials at 120° C (248° F) for 90 minutes

under vacuum conditions (a minimum vacuum of 0.8 bar (11.6 psi)
is required), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.

(j) Inspect the repair, refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 5.

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(k) Before surface protection restoration apply a layer of pore fill
er material as follows:

1 Abrade the surface to be protected using Scotch Brite type A,

by hand or using an orbital sanding device.

2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

4 Apply the pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052)

with a spatula or polishing bag, remaining only in holes and
surface porous, avoiding a continuous layer.

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let cure the pore filler for a minimum of two hours at room
temperature.
6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded to improve the surface
appearance, let the pore filler cure for at least 12 hours at
room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours 30 min
utes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding.

(l) Restore the surface protection (refer to Chapter 51−75−12).

Pages 267/268
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Outer Skin of Elevator Spar Box Skin, Zone 03

Figure 208 (sheet 1)

Pages 269/270
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Outer Skin of Elevator Spar Box Skin, Zone 03

Figure 208 (sheet 2)

Pages 271/272
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) OF THE SRM. INFORM YOUR
PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMA
TION.
CAUTION: DO NOT PASS THE LIMIT LINE FOR THE SKIN CUT OUT.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 211.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.
IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE
CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

I. Repair of damaged/debonded core, Zone 03

NOTE: This repair is valid only for damages to outer skin/core, or core/
inner skin debonded or water/fluid ingress inside sandwich structure
of the Elevator Spar Box Skin in Zone 03 adjacent to Zone 01
within the repairable limit (refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block
101, Config 2).

NOTE: Before the damaged structure is repaired, a damage evaluation must

be carried out (refer to Chapter 51−77−10).

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out using the hot−bond 120° C (248°
F) repair procedure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.).

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 211
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 273
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to

− Low Density Compound
− Adhesive Film
− Adhesive Foam
− Glass fiber Honeycomb Core
− Glass Epoxy Prepreg
− Parting Film
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 209)
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022 or 08−022C
or 08−042, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−047C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−085, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 20−009 or 20−012A
or 20−012B, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para
graph 3.B.

CAUTION: DO NOT PASS THE LIMIT LINE FOR THE SKIN CUT OUT (REFER TO
THE FIGURE).

(a) Prepare the repair area (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph

4.M) according the repair Figure 209.

NOTE: Radius all corners by 8 mm (0.31 in).

NOTE: It is possible to perform a combined repair according to

global repair areas defined in Figure 209. Finish structur
al repair 1 and protect it before starting structural re
pair 2.

(b) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure affected core

must be systematically removed and repaired as follows:
− Perform an initial drying of damaged structure. Refer to Chap
ter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.B.
− Remove affected core. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.C.(1) except step (b).
− Perform a final drying. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.B.
− Replace affected core following the instructions of the rele
vant repair.
(c) If damage is in an insert area, mechanically remove the bushing,
core and potted area in the affected area through access hole.
Refer to paragraph 5.J. for insert repair instructions.

Page 274
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: MAKE EVACUATION AIR HOLE AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE TO THE DAM

AGED AREA. BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE THE INNER FACE.
(d) Drill the necessary air evacuation holes to permit the evacuation
of air and also to verify that the resin is all around in the
damaged area.

(e) Remove the dust from the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(f) Clean the repair area with a cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(g) Mask the area around the air evacuation holes and on bottom of
the access hole and on the outer skin, to prevent leaking over
other parts.
(h) Prepare the Low Density Compound (Material No. 08−022), refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.A.

NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 08−022C or 20−042.

(i) Cut a piece of parting film equal to the bottom area of the ac
cess hole.
(j) Place the parting film on the bottom of the access hole.

(k) Fill up the access area inside the Zone 03 with Low Density Com
pound (Material No. 08−022).

NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 08−022C or 20−042.

(l) Check the Low Density Compound fills fully up the access area
(inside) through the air evacuation holes.

NOTE: Use an aluminum plate to conform the Low Density Compound,

previously covered with parting film.

(m) Remove the parting film only from the bottom of the access hole.
(n) Cure the Low Density Compound, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para
graph 6.B.(4).

(o) Remove the protection and abrade the surface if necessary.

(p) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(q) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(r) Make the Honeycomb Core Replacement Procedure, refer to Chapter

55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.C.(2). and to Figure 209,
using the repair materials from the repair material list.
(s) For the outer skin repair refer to Figure 209 and follow the re
pair instructions from paragraph 5.H..

Pages 275/276
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damaged/Debonded Core in Elevator Spar Box Skin, Zone 03

Figure 209 (sheet 1)

Pages 277/278
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damaged/Debonded Core in Elevator Spar Box Skin, Zone 03

Figure 209 (sheet 2)

Pages 279/280
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damaged/Debonded Core in Elevator Spar Box Skin, Zone 03

Figure 209 (sheet 3)

Pages 281/282
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damaged/Debonded Core in Elevator Spar Box Skin, Zone 03

Figure 209 (sheet 4)

Pages 283/284
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 212.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) OF THE SRM. INFORM YOUR
PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMA
TION.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
J. Replacement of an insert, Zone 03.

NOTE: The replacement is valid only when there is no damage in the

structure and the only damage is the insert debonded from the res
in.

The repair is valid only during a repair of skin/core in the in

sert area, in the Elevator Spar Box Skin, Zone 03, within the re
pairable limits (refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config
2). For Non−structural repairs follow the specific cosmetic repair
(paragraphs 5.A. and 5.B.).

NOTE: Before the damaged structure is repaired, a damage evaluation must

be carried out (refer to Chapter 51−77−10).

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 212
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 285
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to

Chapter 51−35−00
− Low Density Compound − Material No. 08−022 or 08−022C
or 08−042, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
(2) Replacement instructions (refer to Figure 210)

(a) Remove the insert from the repair area.

(b) Inspect the insert for corrosion.

(c) Blend out the corrosion from the insert and measure the maximum
corrosion depth. Refer to Chapter 51−74−00.

1 If the depth of the material removed is lower than 0.5 mm

(0.02 in), reinstall the insert with sealant (Material No.
09−005).
2 If the depth of the material removed is greater than 0.5 mm
(0.02 in), install a new insert, same material as original,
with sealant (Material No. 09−005).

(3) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 210)

(a) Remove the insert, washer, and screw from the repair area.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE TO FILL AN AREA NOT LOWER THAN 32 MM (1.26 IN).

(b) Follow the specific repair procedure to repair the skin/core in

Zone 03 filling up from top to bottom the insert area with Low
Density compound (Material No. 08−022).
NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 08−022C or 20−042.

(c) Drill the resin with a pilot drill through the other side, use
the existing bush hole.

CAUTION: FOR THE FOLLOWING STEP USE A WOODEN BLOCK OR OTHER SUITABLE
MATERIAL BLOCK TO PLACE OVER THE EXIT AREA TO PREVENT
BREAKOUT OF THE LAMINATED MATERIAL.

(d) Back drill the previously drilled hole to the final diameter.

(e) Remove the dust from the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.
(f) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

Page 286
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(g) Install the screw, washer and insert with sealant (Material No.
09−005).
(h) Remove all the unwanted sealant with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(i) Let cure the sealant (refer manufacturer’s specification).

(j) Restore the surface protection (refer to Chapter 51−75−12).

Pages 287/288
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Replacement of an insert, Zone 03

Figure 210

Pages 289/290
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 213.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
K. Repair of damage to TE aluminum profile

NOTE: This repair is valid for damage to the profile of the Elevator TE.

NOTE: Before the damaged structure is repaired, a damage evaluation must

be carried out (refer to Chapter 51−77−10).

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 213
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 291
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to

− Polysulfide Sealant
− Chemical Conversion Coating
− Epoxy Polyamide Primer
− Polyurethane Primer
− Glass Fabric
− Laminating Resin
− Aluminum Joint Clip
− Aluminum Repair Profile
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 211)
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−002 or 09−005,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 13−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−006B, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−033, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 20−022, 20−032 or
20−028 refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− 2024T42 Clad Thickness 0.8 mm
(0.031 in)
− Refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page
Block 101, Config 2, (same as
existing material).

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D).
(b) Cut out the damaged profile and remove the necessary rivets.
(c) Remove the damaged profile from the repair area.

(d) Remove the remaining unwanted material with a sandpaper grade 200
and a vacuum cleaner in the repair area.

(e) Use the cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003) to clean the repair
area.

(f) Protect the exposed existing aluminum profile (refer to Figure

211 for materials data).

(g) Make the aluminum repair profile and joint clips for the repair
area (refer to Figure 211 for the repair materials) and mark and
pilot drill the rivet position.

(h) Put the repair aluminum profiles on its repair position with
clamps.

(i) Drill to the final diameter the fastener position and remove the
parts.
Page 292
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: USE ABRASIVE CLOTH (GRADE 400) TO CLEAN THE AREA OF THE
EXISTING ALUMINUM PROFILE THAT WILL CONTACT THE REPAIR
PARTS.

(j) Remove the dust from the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(k) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

CAUTION: THE FOLLOWING STEPS 5.K.(2)(l) THRU 5.K.(2)(m) ARE ONLY AP
PLICABLE WHEN THE ORIGINAL GLASS FIBER IS DAMAGED.
(l) Apply a layer of glass fabric (Material No. 05−033) with lami
nating resin (Material No. 20−022, 20−032 or 20−028) with the
following dimensions:

1 If the original GFRP is damaged, use a ply of the same dimen

sion as original.

2 If the original GFRP is partially removed, use a ply with a

minimum of 5 mm (0.20 in) of overlap with the remaining fiber
glass.

(m) Cure the repair materials, refer to manufacturer’s specifications.

CAUTION: MASK THE AREAS OF THE NEW ALUMINUM PLATE, JOINT CLIPS, AND
EXISTING ALUMINUM PROFILE THAT WILL CONTACT METALLIC PARTS
WHEN INSTALLING IT.

CAUTION: MASK THE AREAS OF CARBON FIBER SURFACE CLOSE TO THE EXIST
ING ALUMINUM PROFILE IN THE REPAIR AREA.
(n) Apply the correct surface treatments to the new aluminum strip,
joint clips and existing aluminum profile of the repair area
(chemical conversion coating, (Material No. 13−002), and then
epoxy polyamide primer, (Material No. 16−006B) or polyurethane
primer, (Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C), refer to Chapter
51−21−11 for application data.

(o) Unmask the aluminum parts and carbon fiber surface, and clean the
repair area and repair parts using the cleaning agent (Material
No. 11−003).
(p) Fill the union gap between the new and existing profile with
sealant (Material No. 09−002) (refer to Figure 211).

(q) Put the new aluminum profile with sealant (Material No. 09−005)
on its repair position, installing the necessary rivets with
sealant (Material No. 09−005).
(r) Remove the unwanted sealant with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(s) Put the joint clips on the repair position installing the new
fastener maintaining the electrical conductivity.

Page 293
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(t) Let the sealant cure (refer manufacturer’s specification).

(u) Restore the surface protection (refer to Chapter 51−75−12) in the

repair area.

Page 294
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of damage to TE aluminum profile

Figure 211

Pages 295/296
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 214.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
L. Repair of damage to outer skin or core under aluminum strip, Zone 04

NOTE: This repair is valid for damage to outer skin or core under alumi
num strip or water/fluid ingress inside sandwich structure, Zone
04, within the repairable limits (refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page
Block 101, Config 2) of the Elevator Spar Box Skin.
NOTE: Before the damaged structure is repaired, a damage evaluation must
be carried out (refer to Chapter 51−77−10).

NOTE: This repair is to be carried on using the hot−bond 120° C (248° F)

repair procedure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.).

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 214
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 297
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL
(1) Repair Materials
ITEM NOMENCLATURE
− Glass Fiber Fabric, dry
− Honeycomb Core
− Carbon fabric prepreg
− Adhesive Paste
− Epoxy Adhesive Film
− Low Density Compound
− Adhesive Foam
− Bonding Primer
− Laminating Resin
− Sealant
− Cleaning Agent
− Chemical Conversion Coating
− Polyurethane Primer
− Epoxy Primer
− Pore Filler
− Glass Fiber Prepreg Plies
− Repair Aluminum Strip
− Chromic Acid Anodizing
(CAA)
− Scotch Brite, type A
Printed in Germany
QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS
− Material No. 05−033, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−085, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−091 or 05−092,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−017, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022, 08−022C or
20−042, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 08−047C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−055, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 20−022, 20−032 or
20−028 refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003 refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 13−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−001B and 16−001C
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−006B, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052 and Material No. 16−054,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 20−009, 20−012A or
20−012B refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− From Spares or Local manufac
tured with material 3.1364T3
LN9073−1.2
− Refer to Chapter 51−21−11
−
Page 298
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 212).

(a) Remove all the fasteners from the aluminum strip.

(b) Heat the aluminum strip area, up to 90° C (194° F) maximum.

CAUTION: USE TOOLS WITHOUT SHARP EDGES. TAKE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE THE
SKIN PLIES.

(c) Remove carefully the aluminum strip, beginning from the leading
edge to the trailing edge.
(d) Slightly pull the Trailing edge profile in order to allow the
strip installation underneath it. Remove as many rivets as neces
sary to avoid permanent deformation on the Trailing edge profile.

CAUTION: DO NOT PASS THE LIMIT LINE FOR THE SKIN CUT OUT (REFER TO
THE FIGURE).

(e) Prepare the repair area (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph

4.M) according to the damage type and the repair Figure 212.

NOTE: Radius all corners by 12 mm (0.47 in).

(f) Proceed according to repair Figure 212 and the relevant damage
type, as follows:

1 If outer skin and core is damaged, follow the whole repair

procedure described.

2 If only outer skin is damage, follow the repair procedure be

ginning by step 5.L.(2)(i).

3 If there is no damage on the structure, you must check the

glass fiber for damage. If the glass fiber is damaged, repair
it with a new dry glass fiber fabric Material No. 05−033 and
laminating resin (Material No. 20−022 or 20−032 or 20−028) and
continue the repair procedure in step 5.L.(2)(n).

(g) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure affected core

must be systematically removed and repaired as follows:
− Perform an initial drying of damaged structure. Refer to Chap
ter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.B.
− Remove affected core. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.C.(1) except step (b).
− Perform a final drying. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.B.
− Replace affected core following the instructions of the rele
vant repair.
(h) Make the Honeycomb Core Replacement Procedure, refer to Chapter
55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.C.(2). and to Figure 212,
using the repair materials from the repair material list.

Page 299
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(i) Cover the exposed honeycomb core cells with Low Density Compound
(Material No. 08−022), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.H.
and cure 16 hours at 24° C (75.2° F).

NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 08−022C or 20−042.

(j) Prepare the carbon fabric prepreg plies (Material No. 05−091 or
05−092), the glass fiber prepreg ply (Material No. 20−012A or
20−012B) and the adhesive film plies (Material No. 08−042A). Re
fer to Figure 212 and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.B. and 4.C.

(k) Lay−up the carbon fabric repair plies, the glass fiber prepreg
ply and the adhesive film plies in the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.B.

NOTE: For Lay−up sequence and ply orientation, refer to Chapter

55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 2.

(l) Install the vacuum bag and heating equipment. Refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.

(m) Cure the installed materials at 120° C (248° F) for 90 minutes

under vacuum conditions (a minimum vacuum of 0.8 bar (11.6 psi)
is required). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.

(n) Make the repair aluminum strip. Aluminum strips can be obtained
from either:

1 Spares. You must check the expiry date of the surface protec
tion. In case it has been exceeded, proceed as follows:

a Rub the primer surface to be bonded with wipers soaked in

cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003 only).

b Immediately wipe dry with a clean, dry wiper. Do not allow

the solvent to evaporate to dryness.
NOTE: Frequently change soiled wipers for clean ones.

c Repeat the complete cleaning procedure.

2 Locally manufactured, proceed as follows:

a Use material 3.1364T3 LN9073−1.2.

b Make the repair strip of the same dimensions as the original
ones.

NOTE: Use removed strips as a template for drilling and loca

tion of the new ones.

c Apply the surface protection the the repair strip: Apply

Chromic Acid Anodizing (CAA) plus a thin coat of anticorro
sion Bonding Primer (Material No. 08−055), refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 4.B.(6)) for curing process, plus epoxy

Page 300
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

primer (Material No. 16−006B) or polyurethane primer (Material

No. 16−001C).
(o) Pilot drill on the repair aluminum strip the fastener locations
using removed strip as template.

(p) Secure the repair aluminum profile with screw−pins through the 4
corner holes.

(q) Drill and countersink the fastener pilot holes to the final di
ameter oversize.

(r) Drill and countersink to the final diameter oversize the remain
ing four corner holes securing the new aluminum plate through
other 4 holes with fasteners.
(s) Remove the sharp edges from the holes on the aluminum profiles
with an abrasive cone.

(t) Remove the dust from the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(u) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(v) Before surface protection restoration apply a layer of pore fill

er material as follows:

1 Abrade the surface to be protected using Scotch Brite type A,

by hand or using an orbital sanding device.
2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−003).

4 Apply the pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052)

with a spatula or polishing bag, remaining only in holes and
surface porous, avoiding a continuous layer.

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let cure the pore filler for a minimum of two hours at room
temperature.
6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded to improve the surface
appearance, let the pore filler cure for at least 12 hours at
room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours 30 min
utes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding.
(w) If surface protection of the existing aluminum trailing edge C−
Profile is damaged during the aluminum strip removal, reprotect
it with chemical conversion coating (Material No. 13−002) plus
epoxy primer (Material No. 16−006B) or polyurethane primer (Mate
rial No. 16−001B or 16−001C).

Page 301
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(x) Do an electrical bonding test between the repair aluminum strip

and the connection plates at the leading edge and at the trail
ing edge C−profile before its installation. Refer to Figure 212
for contact points.

(y) Bond the aluminum strip to its repair position with adhesive
paste (Material No. 08−017). Take care to remove the adhesive
paste from the fastener holes.
CAUTION: DURING THE BONDING PROCESS, FIX THE REPAIR ALUMINUM STRIP
TO THE OUTER SKIN WITH A VACUUM BAG.

(z) Cure the adhesive paste during 6 hours at room temperature plus
either 1 hour at 80° C (176° F) or 3 to 5 days at room temper
ature.
(aa)Wet install the new repair fasteners with sealant (Material No.
09−005). Refer to Figure 212.

(ab)Apply a fillet of pore filler (Material No. 16−054) around the

aluminum repair strip.
(ac)Let the pore filler cure (refer to manufacturer’s specification).

(ad)Restore the surface protection (refer to Chapter 51−75−12) in the

repair area.

(ae)Do a conductive test between the elevator metallic trailing edge

profile and the replaced strip end located at the leading edge
(maximum value is 5 milli−ohms). Remove any bonding from the
leading edge strip end to avoid measurement mistakes during the
conductive test.

Page 302
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Outer Skin or Core Under Aluminum Strip in Elevator Spar
Box Skin, Zone 04
Figure 212 (sheet 1)
Pages 303/304
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Outer Skin or Core Under Aluminum Strip in Elevator Spar
Box Skin, Zone 04
Figure 212 (sheet 2)
Pages 305/306
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 215.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
M. Repair to the Skin, Zone 06, with no Bonding Strips.

NOTE: Before the damaged structure is repaired, a damage evaluation must

be carried out, refer to Chapter 51−77−10.

NOTE: For repair zone definition, refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block
101, Config 2.
NOTE: Figure 213 is a permanent repair for damage of Elevator Upper Skin
zone 06, close to a Fitting Arm, but it is not valid between Fit
ting Arm 2 and 4.

NOTE: Figure 214 is a permanent repair for damage of Elevator Lower Skin
zone 06, but it is not valid if affects to the skin in Rib areas.
NOTE: Figure 215 is a permanent repair for damage of Elevator Upper Skin
zone 06, with no Hinge Fittings or Ribs and no Bonding strips, but
it is not valid for damage between Fitting Arm 2 and 4.

NOTE: If necessary, for access to do this repair, remove the Elevator.

Refer to the AMM, Chapter 27−34−41, Page Block 401.

Page 307
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 215
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Sheet Metal Repair Filler 1 2024T3 CLAD

(see text)
2 Sheet Metal Repair Doubler,
2 mm (0.080 in) thick.
− Cleaning Agent
− Epoxy Resin
− Resin
− Glass Fabric
− Chemical Conversion Coating
− Epoxy Polyamide Primer
− Polyurethane Primer
− Polysulfide Sealant
− Polysulfide Sealant
− Polyurethane Varnish
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figures 213, 214, 215)
1 2024T42 CLAD
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−051, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 20−022 or 20−032,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−033, refer to
Chapter 51−33−00
− Material No. 13−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−006B, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−021, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.

(a) Remove the fasteners and the surface protection from the repair
area (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D).

Page 308
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Make the damage cut out into a regular shape as shown in the
relevant Figure. Remove waste material from the repair area with
a vacuum cleaner.

(c) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(d) Apply resin (Material No. 20−022 or 20−032) to the edges of the
skin cut−out.

(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material No. 05−033) and resin

(Material No. 20−022 or 20−032) around the inner skin surface of
the repair area. The glassfabric must extend beyond the area of
the repair doubler by 25 mm (0.98 in).

(f) Allow the repair to cure at RT.

NOTE: Alternatively the cure time may be accelerated by the use
of heat, let the repair cure at the temperature and time
indicated (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 6.B.(2) and
paragraph 5.E.).

(g) Remove heating equipment after the cure process is complete.

(h) Make and form the repair doubler. Refer to Chapter 51−26−11 for
bending data and Chapter 51−26−12 for joggling data. Use material
2024T42 clad, 2 mm (0.080 in) thick for the repair doubler.

(i) Clean the repair doubler and the repair area with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).
(j) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair doubler
(chemical conversion coating (Material No. 13−002) and then,
epoxy polyamide primer (Material No. 16−006B) or polyurethane
primer (Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C), refer to Chapter
51−21−11 for application data.
(k) Mark the new fastener positions onto the repair doubler.

(l) Install the repair doubler in its repair position and secure with
screw−clamps.

(m) Pilot−drill the new fastener holes thru the repair doubler and
the skin. Drill the holes thru the repair doubler from the ex
isting fastener holes.

(n) Remove the screw−pins and the repair doubler from the repair
area.
(o) Remove sharp edges from fastener holes with an abrasive cone, and
the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

Page 309
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: IF NECESSARY, EPOXY RESIN (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) MAY BE USED

AS A LIQUID SHIM UP TO A MAXIMUM THICKNESS OF 0.5 MM
(0.020 IN), REFER TO STEPS 5.M.(2)(p) THRU 5.M.(2)(v). SOLID
SHIM IS VALID UP TO 1.2 MM (0.047 IN) MATERIAL 2024T3 CLAD.

(p) Apply a layer of epoxy resin (Material No. 08−051) to the sur
face of the repair doubler where it will touch the Elevator Skin
when assembled.
(q) Cut a piece of parting−film to the same size and shape as the
repair doubler.

(r) Put the parting−film over the epoxy resin on the repair doubler.

(s) Put the repair doubler in its repair position and secure with
screw−pins.
(t) Remove unwanted epoxy resin with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(u) Let the epoxy resin cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions

for the cure times.
(v) Remove the screw−pins, parting−film and the repair doubler from
the repair area.

(w) Apply a layer of interfay sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the

surface of the repair doubler where it will touch the Elevator
Skin when assembled.
(x) Put the repair doubler in its repair position and secure with
screw−pins.

(y) Remove unwanted interfay sealant with cleaning agent (Material

No. 11−003).
(z) Let the sealant cure. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions
for the cure times.

(aa)Determine the thickness of metal (2024T3 Clad) required for the

repair filler, maximum thickness must be no more than 1.2 mm
(0.050 in).
NOTE: A combination of the metal repair filler and epoxy resin
(Material No. 08−051) (liquid resin) may be necessary to
achieve the required contour.

(ab)Make and form the repair filler from 2024T3 Clad material of the
required thickness (max. 1.2 mm (0.050 in)). Refer to Chapter
51−26−11 for bending data and Chapter 51−26−12 for joggling data.

(ac)Clean the repair filler with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−003).

Page 310
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ad)Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair filler

(chemical conversion coating (Material No. 13−002) and then,
epoxy polyamide primer (Material No. 16−006B) or polyurethane
primer (Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C), refer to Chapter
51−21−11 for application data.

(ae)Put the repair filler in its repair position and secure with
screw−clamps.
(af)Pilot−drill the marked fastener holes from the repair doubler
thru the repair filler.

(ag)Remove the screw−clamps and the repair filler.

(ah)Remove sharp edges from the repair filler and the repair area
with an abrasive cone.

(ai)Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum

cleaner.

(aj)Clean the repair filler with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−003).
(ak)Apply a layer of epoxy resin (Material No. 08−051) to the sur
face of the repair filler that will touch the repair doubler
when assembled.

(al)Cut a piece of parting−film to the same size and shape as the

repair filler.

(am)Put parting−film over the epoxy resin on the repair filler.

(an)Put the repair filler in its repair position and secure with
screw−pins.

(ao)Remove unwanted epoxy resin with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−003).

(ap)Let the epoxy resin cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions

for the cure times.

(aq)Remove the screw−pins, parting−film and the repair filler.

(ar)Apply a layer of interfay sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the
surface of the repair filler where it will touch the repair dou
bler when assembled.

(as)Put the repair filler in its repair position and secure with
screw−pins.
(at)Remove unwanted interfay sealant with cleaning agent (Material
No. 11−003).

Page 311
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(au)Apply a bead of sealant (Material No. 09−002) all around the

edge of the repair filler, the repair doubler and the adjacent
structure.

(av)Let the sealants cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for

the cure times.

(aw)Apply a coat of polyurethane varnish (Material No. 16−021) over

the bead of sealant applied in step 5.M.(2)(au).
(ax)Let the polyurethane varnish dry.

(ay)Leave some screw−pins in position and drill all the fastener

holes to the required diameter.

NOTE: All existing fastener holes in the repair area must be

drilled oversize if necessary.

(az)Countersink the fastener holes, as applicable.

(ba)Wet install the fasteners with sealant (Material No. 09−005).

(bb)Remove unwanted sealant with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−003).

(bc)Let the sealant cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for

the cure times.

(bd)Restore the surface protection in the repair area. (Refer to

Chapter 51−75−12).
(be)Install the Elevator if it was removed for access purposes, refer
to the AMM, Chapter 27−34−41, Page Block 401.

(bf)Do the following electrical bonding tests if the Elevator is re

moved/installed:
− Between each end of the aluminum trailing edge. Maximum resis
tance value should be 5 milli−ohms.
− Between the aluminum trailing edge and the aluminum central
tank. Maximum resistance value should be 10 milli−ohms.

Page 312
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Upper Skin, Hinge Fitting Area of Elevator Spar Box, Zone 06, with
No Bonding Strips
Figure 213
Pages 313/314
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Lower−Skin of Elevator Spar Box, Zone 06

Figure 214

Pages 315/316
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Upper−skin of Elevator Spar Box, Zone 06, with No Bonding Strips
Figure 215

Pages 317/318
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 216.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
N. Repair to Upper−Skin, Zone 06, in Bonding Strip Area

NOTE: Before the damaged structure is repaired, a damage evaluation must

be carried out refer to Chapter 51−77−10.

NOTE: For repair zone definition, refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block
101, Config 2.
NOTE: This permanent repair is valid for damage to Elevator Spar Box
Skin, Zone 06, in Bonding Strip area between Elevator rib 8 and 9.

NOTE: If necessary, for access to do this repair, remove the Elevator.

Refer to the AMM, Chapter 27−34−41, Page Block 401.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 216
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

Page 319
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Sheet Metal Repair Filler 1 2024T3 CLAD

2 Sheet Metal Repair Doubler, 1 2024T42 CLAD
2 mm (0.080 in) thick.
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Epoxy Resin − Material No. 08−051, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Resin − Material No. 20−022 or 20−032,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Glass Fabric − Material No. 05−033, refer to
Chapter 51−33−00
− Chemical Conversion Coating − Material No. 13−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Epoxy Polyamide Primer − Material No. 16−006B, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane Primer − Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane Finish − Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Polysulfide Sealant − Material No. 09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Polysulfide Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane Varnish − Material No. 16−021, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 216)
(a) Remove all the fasteners and the surface protection from the re
pair area (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D.).

CAUTION: DO NOT REMOVE ANY OF THE EXISTING BONDING STRIPS.

(b) Make the damage cut−out into a regular shape as shown in the
Figure, remove waste material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

(c) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
(d) Apply resin (Material No. 20−022 or 20−032) to the edges of the
skin cut−out.

(e) Apply a layer of glassfabric (Material No. 05−033) and resin

(Material No. 20−022 or 20−032) around the inner skin surface of

Page 320
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

the repair area. The glassfabric must extend beyond the area of
the repair doubler by 25 mm (0.98 in).
(f) Allow the repair to cure at RT.

NOTE: Alternatively the cure time may be accelerated by the use

of heat. (refer Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 6.B.(2) and
paragraph 5.E.).

(g) Remove heating equipment after the cure process is complete.

(h) Make and form the repair doubler. Refer to Chapter 51−26−11 for
bending data and Chapter 51−26−12 for joggling data. Use material
2024T42 Clad, 2 mm (0.080 in) thick for the repair doubler.

(i) Clean the repair doubler and the repair area with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

(j) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair doubler
(chemical conversion coating (Material No. 13−002) and then,
epoxy polyamide primer (Material No. 16−006B) or polyurethane
primer (Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C), refer to Chapter
51−21−11 for application data.

(k) Mark the new fastener positions onto the repair doubler.

(l) Install the repair doubler in its repair position and secure with
screw−clamps.
(m) Pilot−drill the new fastener holes thru the repair doubler and
the skin. Drill the holes thru the repair doubler from the ex
isting fastener holes.

(n) Remove the screw−pins and the repair doubler from the repair
area.
(o) Remove sharp edges from fastener holes with an abrasive cone, and
waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

CAUTION: IF NECESSARY, EPOXY RESIN (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) MAY BE USED

AS A LIQUID SHIM UP TO A MAXIMUM THICKNESS OF 0.5 MM
(0.020 IN), REFER TO STEPS 5.N.(2)(p) THRU 5.N.(2)(v). SOLID
SHIM IS VALID UP TO 1.2 MM (0.047 IN) MATERIAL 2024T3 CLAD.

(p) Apply a layer of epoxy resin (Material No. 08−051) to the sur
face of the repair doubler where it will touch the Elevator Skin
when assembled.
(q) Cut a piece of parting−film to the same size and shape as the
repair doubler.

(r) Put the parting−film over the epoxy resin on the repair doubler.

(s) Put the repair doubler in its repair position and secure with
screw−pins.

Page 321
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(t) Remove unwanted epoxy resin with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
(u) Let the epoxy resin cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions
for the cure times.

(v) Remove the screw−pins, parting−film and the repair doubler from
the repair area.

(w) Determine the thickness of metal (2024T3 Clad) required for the
repair filler, maximum thickness must be no more than 1.2 mm
(0.050 in).

NOTE: A combination of the metal repair filler and epoxy resin

(Material No. 08−051 (liquid shim)) may be necessary to
achieve the required contour.

(x) Make and form the repair filler from 2024T3 Clad material of the
required thickness (max. 1.2 mm (0.050 in)). Refer to Chapter
51−26−11 for bending data and Chapter 51−26−12 for joggling data.

(y) Clean the repair filler with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(z) Apply the correct surface treatments to the metal repair filler
(chemical conversion coating (Material No. 13−002) and then,
epoxy polyamide primer (Material No. 16−006B) or polyurethane
primer (Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C), refer to Chapter
51−21−11 for application data.

(aa)Put the repair filler and repair doubler in their repair position
and secure with screw−clamps.

(ab)Pilot−drill the marked fastener holes from the repair doubler

thru the repair filler.
(ac)Remove the screw−clamps and the repair parts.

(ad)Remove sharp edges from the repair filler and the repair area
with an abrasive cone.

(ae)Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum

cleaner.

(af)Clean the repair filler repair doubler and repair area with
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(ag)Apply a layer of epoxy resin (Material No. 08−051) to the sur

face of the repair filler that will touch the repair doubler
when assembled.

(ah)Cut a piece of parting−film to the same size and shape as the

repair filler.

(ai)Put parting−film over the epoxy resin on the repair filler.

Page 322
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(aj)Put the repair filler and repair doubler in their repair position
and secure with screw−pins.
(ak)Remove unwanted epoxy resin with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(al)Let the epoxy resin cure. Refer to the manufacturer’s instruc

tions for the cure times.

(am)Remove the screw−pins, parting−film, repair filler, and repair

doubler.

(an)Apply a layer of interfay sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the

surface of the repair filler where it will touch the repair dou
bler and the existing Bonding Strip when assembled.
(ao)Apply a layer of interfay sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the
surface of the repair doubler where it will touch the Elevator
Skin when assembled.

(ap)Put the repair filler and the repair doubler in their repair
position and secure with screw−pins.
(aq)Remove unwanted interfay sealant with cleaning agent (Material
No. 11−003).

(ar)Let the sealant cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for

the cure times.
(as)Remove unwanted interfay sealant with cleaning agent (Material
No. 11−003).

(at)Apply a bead of sealant (Material No. 09−002) all around the

edge of the repair filler, the repair doubler and the adjacent
structure.
(au)Let the sealants cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for
the cure times.

(av)Apply a coat of polyurethane varnish (Material No. 16−021) over

the bead of sealant applied in step 5.N.(2)(at).
(aw)Let the epoxy varnish dry.

(ax)Leave some screw−pins in position and drill all the fastener

holes to the required diameter.

NOTE: All existing fastener holes in the repair area must be

drilled oversize if necessary.
(ay)Countersink the fastener holes, as applicable.

(az)Wet install the fasteners, except those in the Bonding strip,

with sealant (Material No. 09−005).

Page 323
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ba)Remove unwanted sealant with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−003).
(bb)Let the sealant cure. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions
for the cure times.

(bc)Restore the surface protection in the repair area. (Refer to

Chapter 51−75−12).

(bd)Install the Elevator if it was removed for access purposes, refer

to the AMM, Chapter 27−34−41, Page Block 401.

(be)Do the following electrical bonding tests if the Elevator is re

moved/installed:
− Between each end of the aluminum trailing edge. Maximum resis
tance value should be 5 milli−ohms.
− Between the aluminum trailing edge and the aluminum central
tank. Maximum resistance value should be 10 milli−ohms.

Page 324
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Upper−Skin of Elevator Spar Box, Zone 06, Bonding Strips Area
Figure 216

Pages 325/326
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR SPAR BOX − REPAIR

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

1. General
NOTE: CONFIG−3 is applicable after modification 35515G00455 only. For effec
tivity refer to the Modification/Service Bulletin List given in Chap
ter 55−20−00 Page Block 001.

NOTE: For Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14

− CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

This topic contains all of the specific repair procedures for the skin pan
els of the Elevator Spar Box. The repair zones and allowable damage data
for these repair procedures are in Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config
3. The General Repair Procedure (hot bond repair 120° C (248° F)) is in
Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.E. and Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201.

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

2. Safety Precautions

There are risks to you and other persons when you work with composite re

pair materials. To prevent risks, read and obey the warnings given below.

WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.

WARNING: WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND FILTER MASK WHEN YOU CUT,
ABRADE OR DRILL COMPOSITE MATERIALS. THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MA

TERIALS CAN GET INTO YOUR LUNGS OR ONTO YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE YOU
INJURY. IMMEDIATELY REMOVE DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.

WHEN YOU WORK WITH CFRP COMPOSITE MATERIALS, IMMEDIATELY REMOVE
DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.
WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRIC POWER ON
THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST ONLY USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT REPAIR.
CAUTION: OBEY THE GIVEN INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE WHICH LEADS TO THE
APPLICABLE INSPECTION PROGRAM DEFINED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR IN

SPECTIONS (SRI) OF THE SRM, IF NECESSARY.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER TO PARA

GRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER REMARKS

No General Repairs applicable − −

Table 201

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

4. Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs

SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE REPAIR INSPECTION

CATEGORY INSTRUCTION REF
ERENCE
Non−structural repair for 5.A. 201 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
damage less than 1000 mm
(1.55 in), Zone 01.
Non−structural repair for 5.B. 202 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
damage between 1000 mm
(1.55 in) and 15000 mm
(23.25 in), Zone 01.
Non−structural repair for 5.C. 203 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
damage less than 1000 mm
(1.55 in), Zone 02.
Non−structural repair for 5.D. 204 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
damage between 1000 mm
(1.55 in) and 15000 mm
(23.25 in), Zone 02.
Repair to Bronze Mesh, 5.E. 205 A −
Zones 01 and 02.
Repair to Outer Skin and 5.F. 206 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
Core, Zone 01
Repair to Core and Inner 5.G. 207 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
Skin debonded, Zone 01
Repair to Inner Skin, 5.H. 208 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
Outer Skin and Core, Zone
01
Repair of debonding Core 5.I. 209 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
in Chamfer Area, Zone 02
Repair to Outer Skin De 5.J. 210 B 55−21−11−2−002−00
lamination or Broken
Core, Zone 02
Repair to Trailing Edge 5.K. 211 A −
Profile, Zone 03
Repair to Skin, Zone 04 5.L. 212 B 55−21−11−2−002−00

Table 202
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

5. Elevator Spar Box Skin − Repairs

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 203.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.
IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE
CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

A. Non−structural repair for damage less than 1000 mm (1.55 in), Zone 01.

NOTE: For repair zones definition refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block
101, Config 3.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 203
NOTE: Refer to the Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbon Fabric (Dry) − Material No. 05−088 or 20−023,

− Laminating Resin
− Pore Filler
− Parting Film
− Scotch Brite, type A
− Cleaning Agent
− Glass Fiber
− Low Density Compound
(2) Repair Instructions, refer to Figure 201
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Refer to Chapter 51−77−11 Para
graph 6.B.(2)
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para
graph 3.B
−
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−007 or 05−033,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022. Refer to
Figure 201 for alternative mate
rials.

NOTE: Only repairs with access for the upper surface are possible if
the Elevator panels are assembled.

NOTE: If an allowable damage is composed of several individual dam

ages, the corresponding repair shall be performed as follows:
do not remove the undamaged plies and/or core between the in
dividual damages. Repair each area as an individual cosmetic
repair, but lay up the Carbon Fabric repair plies over the en
tire envelope repair area. Refer to Figure 201.
NOTE: Make this repair when the core is debonded, the core deeply
damaged or if fluid or water ingress is detected.

NOTE: For damaged areas with Bronze Mesh see Figure 205.

(a) Prepare the repair area, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

4.M.
(b) Follow the repair instructions given in Chapter 51−77−13 Para
graph 2.H, using the repair materials listed above. Refer to
Figure 201 (refer to Figure 203 only in case you can not respect
the plies overlap described in Figure 201).

NOTE: In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure follow

the instructions described in Paragraph 5.A.(2)(c).

Page 205
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(c) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure, affected

core must be systematically removed and repaired as follows:
− When Core is exposed after Skin Cut−Out, perform an initial
drying of damage structure. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11 Paragraph
4.G.
− Remove affected Core. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11 Paragraph
4.M.(2).
− Perform a final drying. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11 Paragraph
4.G.
− Replace affected core following the instructions of the rele

vant repair.

(d) Before restoring surface protection, apply a layer of pore filler

on all areas where the surface protection was removed, as fol

lows:
1 Abrade the surface to be protected using Scotch Brite type A,
by hand or using an orbital sanding device.

2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−003).

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBID

DEN.

4 Apply pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) to

the panel surfaces with a spatula or a polishing bag, remaining
only in holes and surface porous, avoiding a continuous layer.

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let the pore filler to dry for a minimum of 2 hours at room

temperature.
6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded, to improve the surface
appearance, let the pore filler to cure for at least 12 hours
at room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours and 30
minutes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding.

(e) If original Glass Fiber layer needs to be restored, install a

Glass fiber ply (Material No. 05−007 or 05−033) with Laminating
Resin (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 6. B.(2)). Use the
same Resin used in the repair.

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 3 for

Glass fiber zones information.
(f) Restore the surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 206
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Non−structural repair for damage less than 1000 mm (1.55 in), Zone 01.
Figure 201

Pages 207/208
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 204.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH
3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
B. Non−structural repair for damage between 1000 mm (1.55 in) and 15000
mm(23.25 in), Zone 01.

NOTE: For repair zones definition refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block
101, Config 3.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 204
NOTE: Refer to the Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 209
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbon Fabric (Dry) − Material No. 05−088 or 20−023 or

− Laminating Resin (Wet Lay−
up)
− Laminating Resin (Filler
Plies)
− Pore Filler
− Adhesive Paste
− Parting Film
− Scotch Brite, Type A
− Cleaning Agent
− Glass Fiber
− Low Density Compound
− Honeycomb Core plug
− Precured Doubler
(2) Repair Instructions, refer to Figure 202
05−117, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Refer to Chapter 51−77−11 Para
graph 6.B.(2)
− Material No. 08−070 or 08−090 or
08−098, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para
graph 6.B.(1)
− Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para
graph 3.B
−
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−007 or 05−033,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022. Refer to
Figure 202 for alternative mate
rials.
− Material No. 05−085, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para
graph 6.B.(10) Table 12, Item 1.

NOTE: Only repairs with access for the upper surface are possible if
the Elevator panels are assembled.

NOTE: If an allowable damage is composed of several individual dam

ages, the corresponding repair shall be performed as follows:
do not remove the undamaged plies and/or core between the in
dividual damages. Repair each area as an individual cosmetic
repair, but lay up the Carbon Fabric repair plies over the en
tire envelope repair area. Refer to Figure 202, Sheet 1.
NOTE: For damaged areas with Bronze Mesh see Figure 205.

(a) Prepare the repair area, refer to Chapter 51−77−11 , Paragraph

4.M.

Page 210
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) For a superficial damage on core or if core is not damage, fol

low the repair instructions given in Chapter 51−77−13 Paragraph
2.H and Paragraph 2.A.(2), Option D. Refer to Figure 202, Sheet
1 (refer to Figure 204 only in case you can not respect the
plies overlap described in Figure 202).

(c) For damages to outer skin and core or water ingress, follow the
repair instructions given in Chapter 51−77−13 Paragraph 2.H and
Paragraph 2.A.(2), Option D. Refer to Figure 202, Sheet 2 (refer
to Figure 204 only in case you can not respect the plies overlap
described in Figure 202).

NOTE: In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure follow

the instructions described in Paragraph5.B.(2)(e).
(d) For damages to outer skin, core and inner skin, follow the re

pair instructions given in Chapter 51−77−13 Paragraph 2.E, Option
D. Refer to Figure 202, Sheet 2 (refer to Figure 204 only in
case you can not respect the plies overlap described in Figure
202).
(e) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure, affected
core must be systematically removed and repaired as follows:
− When Core is exposed after Skin Cut−Out, perform an initial
drying of damage structure. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11 Paragraph
4.G.
− Remove affected Core. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph
4.M.(2).
− Perform a final drying. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph
4.G.
− Replace affected Core as required in relevant repair.

(f) Before restoring surface protection, apply a layer of pore filler

on all areas where the surface protection was removed, as fol

lows:
1 Abrade the surface to be protected using Scotch Brite type A,
by hand or using an orbital sanding device.

2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBID

DEN.
4 Apply pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) to
the panel surfaces with a spatula or a polishing bag, remaining
only holes and surface porous, avoiding a continuous layer.

Page 211
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let the pore filler to dry for a minimum of 2 hours at room

temperature before proceeding with the paint operation.

6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded to improve the surface

appearance, let the pore filler to cure for at least 12 hours
at room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours and 30
minutes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding. This will
avoid damages to the product that can affect the repair quali

ty.

(g) If original Glass Fiber layer needs to be restored, install a

Glass fiber ply (Material No. 05−007 or 05−033) with Laminating
Resin (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 6. B.(2)). Use the
same Resin used in the repair.

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 3 for

Glass fiber zones information.

(h) Restore the surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 212
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Non−structural repair for damage between 1000 mm
(1.55 in
) and 15000
mm
(23.25 in
), Zone 01.
Figure 202 (sheet 1)
Pages 213/214
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Non−structural repair for damage between 1000 mm
(1.55 in
) and 15000 mm

(23.45 in
) − Zone 01.
Figure 202 (sheet 2)
Pages 215/216
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 205.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH
3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
C. Non−structural repair for damage less than 1000 mm (1.55 in), Zone 02.

NOTE: This repair is only valid for areas near Rib 1, Rib 10 and Front
Spar of Zone 02.

NOTE: For repair zones definition refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block
101, Config 3.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 205
NOTE: Refer to the Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 217
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbon Fabric (Dry) − Material No. 05−088 or 20−023,

− Laminating Resin
− Pore Filler
− Adhesive Paste
− Parting Film
− Scotch Brite, Type A
− Cleaning Agent
− Glass fiber
− Low Density Compound
(2) Repair Instructions, refer to Figure 203
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Refer to Chapter 51−77−11 Para
graph 6.B.(2)
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para
graph 6.B.(1)
− Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para
graph 3.B
−
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−007 or 05−033,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022. Refer to
Figure 203 for alternative mate
rials.

NOTE: When it is necessary to cut the Panel Skin on not damaged

areas in order to make the repair, total repair area should be
considered as the envelope of the damaged area and the Panel
Skin Cut−Out.

NOTE: If an allowable damage is composed of several individual dam

ages, the corresponding repair shall be performed as follows:
do not remove the undamaged plies and/or core between the in
dividual damages. Repair each area as an individual cosmetic
repair, but lay up the Carbon Fabric repair plies over the en
tire envelope repair area.

NOTE: Make this repair for core debonded or deeply damaged or if

fluid ingress is detected.

NOTE: For damaged areas with Bronze Mesh see Figure 205.
(a) Prepare the repair area, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph
4.M.

Page 218
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Follow the repair instructions given in Chapter 51−77−13, Para

graph 2.H, using the repair materials listed above. Refer to
Figure 203.

NOTE: In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure follow

the instructions described in Paragraph 5.C.(2)(c).

(c) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure, affected

core must be systematically removed and repaired as follows:
− When Core is exposed after Skin Cut−Out, perform an initial
drying of damage structure. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para
graph 4.G.
− Remove affected Core. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph
4.M.(2).
− Perform a final drying. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph
4.G.
− Replace affected Core as required in relevant repair.

(d) Before restoring surface protection, apply a layer of pore filler

on all areas where the surface protection was removed, as fol
lows:
1 Abrade the surface to be protected using Scotch Brite type A,
by hand or using an orbital sanding device.

2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−003).
CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBID
DEN.

4 Apply pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) to

the panel surfaces with a spatula or a polishing bag, remaining
only holes and surface porous, avoiding a continuous layer.
CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let the pore filler to dry for a minimum of 2 hours at room

temperature before proceeding with the paint operation.

6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded, to improve the surface

appearance, let the pore filler to cure for at least 12 hours
at room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours and 30
minutes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding. This will
avoid damages to the product that can affect the repair quali
ty.
(e) If original Glass Fiber layer needs to be restored, install a
Glass fiber ply (Material No. 05−007 or 05−033) with Laminating

Page 219
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Resin (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 6. B.(2)). Use the

same Resin used in the repair.
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 3 for
Glass fiber zones information.

(f) Restore the surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 220
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Non−structural repair for damage less than 1000 mm
(1.55 in
), Zone 02.
Figure 203

Pages 221/222
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 206.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH
3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
D. Non−structural repair for damage between 1000 mm (1.55 in) and 15000
mm (23.25 in), Zone 02.

NOTE: This repair is only valid for areas near Rib 1, Rib 10 and Front
Spar of Zone 02.

NOTE: For repair zones definition refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block
101, Config 3.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 206
NOTE: Refer to the Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 223
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbon Fabric (Dry) − Material No. 05−088 or 20−023,

− Laminating Resin
− Pore Filler
− Adhesive Paste
− Parting Film
− Scotch Brite, Type A
− Cleaning Agent
− Glass fiber
− Low Density Compound
− Honeycomb Core plug
(2) Repair Instructions, refer to Figure 204
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Refer to Chapter 51−77−11 Para
graph 6.B.(2)
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para
graph 6.B.(1)
− Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para
graph 3.B
−
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−007 or 05−033,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022. Refer to
Figure 204 for alternative mate
rials.
− Material No. 05−085, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

NOTE: When it is necessary to cut the Panel Skin on not damaged

areas in order to make the repair, total repair area should be
considered as the envelope of the damaged area and the Panel
Skin Cut−Out.

NOTE: If an allowable damage is composed of several individual dam

ages, the corresponding repair shall be performed as follows:
do not remove the undamaged plies and/or core between the in
dividual damages. Repair each area as an individual cosmetic
repair, but lay up the Carbon Fabric repair plies over the en
tire envelope repair area.

NOTE: Make this repair for core debonded or deeply damaged or if

fluid ingress is detected.

NOTE: For damaged areas with Bronze Mesh see Figure 205.
(a) Prepare the repair area, refer to Chapter 51−77−11 , Paragraph
4.M.

Page 224
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Follow the repair instructions given in Chapter 51−77−13, Para

graph 2.H and Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.A.(2), Option D, us
ing the repair materials listed above. Refer to Figure 204.

NOTE: In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure follow

the instructions described in Paragraph 5.D.(2)(c).

(c) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure, affected

core must be systematically removed and repaired as follows:
− When Core is exposed after Skin Cut−Out, perform an initial
drying of damage structure. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para
graph 4.G.
− Remove affected Core. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph
4.M.(2).
− Perform a final drying. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph
4.G.
− Replace affected Core as required in relevant repair.

(d) Before restoring surface protection, apply a layer of pore filler

on all areas where the surface protection was removed, as fol
lows:
1 Abrade the surface to be protected using Scotch Brite type A,
by hand or using an orbital sanding device.

2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−003).
CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBID
DEN.

4 Apply pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) to

the panel surfaces with a spatula or a polishing bag, avoiding
a continuous layer.
CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let the pore filler to dry for a minimum of 2 hours at room

temperature before proceeding with the paint operation.

6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded, to improve the surface

appearance, let the pore filler to cure for at least 12 hours
at room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours and 30
minutes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding. This will
avoid damages to the product that can affect the repair quali
ty.
(e) If original Glass Fiber layer needs to be restored, install a
Glass fiber ply (Material No. 05−007 or 05−033) with Laminating

Page 225
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Resin (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 6. B.(2)). Use the

same Resin used in the repair.
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 3 for
Glass fiber zones information.

(f) Restore the surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 226
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Non−structural repair for damage between 1000 mm
(1.55 in
) and 15000 mm

(23.25 in
), Zone 02.
Figure 204
Pages 227/228
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 207.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH
3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
E. Repair to Bronze Mesh, Zones 01 and 02.

NOTE: For repair zones definition refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block
101, Config 3.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 207
NOTE: Refer to the Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 229
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Bronze Mesh − Material No. 05−124

− Glass Fiber − Material No. 05−007 or 05−033
− Carbon Fiber − Material No. 05−088 or 20−023,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Carbon Fiber − Material No. 05−091 or 05−092,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Laminating Resin − Refer to Figure 205
− Pore Filler − Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Parting Film − Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para
graph 3.B
− Scotch Brite, type A −
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions, refer to Figure 205

CAUTION: ONLY USE A MECHANICAL PROCEDURE TO REMOVE SURFACE PROTEC

TION.

(a) Remove the surface protection from damaged area, refer to Chapter
51−77−11, Paragraph 4.D.

CAUTION: IF DAMAGE IS CLOSE TO ANY BONDING POINT, ENSURE ELECTRICAL

CONTINUITY BETWEEN BRONZE MESH WITH THE ORIGINAL WASHERS AC
CORDING TO NSA936002.

CAUTION: ON ZONE 02, EXTEND THE BRONZE MESH WITH A MINIMUM LENGTH OF
50 MM (1.97 IN) BEYOND THE NEAREST BONDING FASTENER.

(b) Carefully remove the damaged Bronze Mesh. Refer to Figure 205.

NOTE: Be careful not to damage the top layer of glass fabric if

existing below the Bronze Mesh when you remove the Bronze
Mesh. You must replace glass fabric layer if it is damaged
using Glass Fiber (Material No. 05−007 or 05−033) and the
Laminating Resin used in the repair of the Bronze Mesh.

NOTE: The repair area is the damage cut−out area plus an overlap
ping area.

Page 230
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: DO NOT DAMAGE THE BRONZE MESH ON THIS AREA.

(c) Remove the surface protection to a distance of 50 mm (1.97 in)

minimum around the damage cut−out area.

NOTE: This area gives an overlap between the repair Bronze Mesh
and the existing Bronze Mesh to ensure the electrical con

tinuity.

(d) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(e) Clean the repair area with the Cleaning Agent (Material No.
11−003).

(f) For damages only on the Bronze Mesh, refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
Paragraph 5.I. and the Figure 205, Sheet 1.
CAUTION: WHEN THE STRUCTURE IS DAMAGED, PERFORM THE APPLICABLE STRUC

TURAL REPAIR.

(g) For Non−Structural repairable damages in the elevator skin under

the Bronze Mesh, refer to Figure 205, Sheet 2, Wet Lay−Up Re

pair.
NOTE: Bronze Mesh will be impregnated and installed on the repair
area at the same time as the repair plies of the Non−
Structure repair (using the same resin as the one used in
the repair of the structure).

(h) For Structural repairable damages in the elevator skin under the
Bronze Mesh, refer to Figure 205, Sheet 2, Prepreg Repair.

NOTE: Bronze Mesh will be impregnated and installed on the repair

area at the same time as the repair plies of the Structure
repair (between Carbon Fiber plies and the Adhesive Film).

(i) Before restoring surface protection, apply a layer of pore filler

on all areas where the surface protection was removed, as fol

lows:

1 Abrade the surface to be protected using Scotch Brite type A,

by hand or using an orbital sanding device.
2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−003).

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBID

DEN.
4 Apply pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) to
the panel surfaces with a spatula or a polishing bag, avoiding
a continuous layer.

Page 231
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let the pore filler to dry for a minimum of 2 hours at room

temperature before proceeding with the paint operation.

6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded, to improve the surface

appearance, let the pore filler to cure for at least 12 hours
at room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours and 30
minutes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding. This will
avoid damages to the product that can affect the repair quali

ty.

(j) Restore the surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 232
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Bronze Mesh, Zones 01 and 02.

Figure 205 (sheet 1)

Pages 233/234
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Bronze Mesh Repair Zones and Types

Figure 205 (sheet 2)

Pages 235/236
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 208.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
F. Repair to Outer Skin and Core, Zone 01

NOTE: Before you repair the damage areas you must do a damage evalua
tion. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: This repair is valid for both: Delamination/Debonding between Outer

Skin/Core and non allowable deep scratch/broken plies on the outer
Skin of the Elevator Spar Box, Zone 01 (All subzones) within the
repairable limits. Refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Con
fig 3 for zones data.

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out using the hot−bond 120° C (248°
F) repair procedure. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.E.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 208
NOTE: Refer to the paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 237
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbon Fiber Prepreg − Material No. 05−091 or 05−092,

− Adhesive Film
− Low Density Compound
− Pore Filler
− Scotch Brite, Type A
− Cleaning Agent
(2) Repair Instructions, refer to Figure 206.
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022 or 08−022C
or 20−042, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
−
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

NOTE: For damaged areas with Bronze Mesh see Figure205.

(a) Prepare the repair area, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

4.M.
NOTE: Radius all the corners by 12 mm (0.47 in).

NOTE: Step the edges of the cut out in the Outer Skin by 15 mm
(0.59 in).

(b) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure affected Core

must be systematically removed and repaired. Refer to the rele
vant repair procedure in Paragraph 5.G.(2)(b).
(c) Remove only damaged plies.

(d) Clean the repair area with the Cleaning Agent (Material No.
11−003).
(e) Cover the exposed Honeycomb Core cells with Low Density Compound
(Material No. 08−022), and cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para
graph 6.B.(4)) with a maximum thickness of 3 mm (0.12 in) (refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.H).

NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 08−022C or 20−042.

(f) Clean the repair area with the Cleaning Agent (Material No.
11−003).

(g) Prepare the Carbon Fabric Prepreg plies (Material No. 05−091 or
05−092) and the adhesive film plies (Material No. 08−042A). Refer
to Figure 206 and Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraphs 4.B and 4.C.

Page 238
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(h) Lay−up the Carbon Fabric repair plies and the adhesive film plies
in the repair area. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.B.
NOTE: For damaged areas, ply numbers, additional internal and ex

ternal plies, ply orientation and Carbon Fiber materials
refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 3.

(i) Install the vacuum bag and heating equipment. Refer to Chapter
51−77−11, Paragraph 5.D.
(j) Cure the installed materials at 120° C (248° F) for 90 minutes
under vacuum conditions (a minimum vacuum of 0.8 bar (11.6 psi)
is required), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.E.

(k) Inspect the repair, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(l) Before the surface protection restoration, apply a layer of pore

filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) as follows:

1 Abrade the surface protection using Scotch Brite Type A, by

hand or using an orbital sanding device.
2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with Cleaning Agent (Material No.

11−003).

4 Apply the pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052)

to the panel surfaces with a spatula or polishing bag, avoiding
a continuous layer.

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let the pore filler dry for a minimum of two hours at room
temperature before proceeding with the paint operation.
6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded, to improve the surface
appearance, let the pore filler to cure for at least 12 hours
at room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours and 30
minutes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding. This will
avoid damages to the product that can affect the repair quali

ty.

(m) Restore the surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Pages 239/240
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Outer Skin and Core, Zone 01.

Figure 206

Pages 241/242
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 209.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
G. Repair to Core and Inner Skin debonded, Zone 01

NOTE: Before you repair the damage areas you must do a damage evalua
tion. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: This repair is valid for damage affecting the Outer Skin and Core
or debonding between Inner Skin and Core or water/fluid ingress in
side sandwich structure of the Elevator Spar Box Skin, Zone 01
(All Subzones). Refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 3
for zones data.

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out using the hot−bond 120° C (248°
F) repair procedure. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.E.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 209
NOTE: Refer to the paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 243
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbon Fabric Prepreg − Material No. 05−091 or 05−092,

− Glass Fabric Prepreg
− Adhesive Film
− Low Density Compound
− Honeycomb Core Plug
− Adhesive Foam
− Pore Filler
− Scotch Brite, Type A
− Cleaning Agent
(2) Repair Instructions, refer to Figure 207
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 20−009 or 20−012A
or 20−012B, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022 or 08−022C
or 20−042, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 05−085, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−047C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
−
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

NOTE: For damaged areas with Bronze Mesh refer to Figure 205.
NOTE: These repairs are also applicable for water ingress.

(a) Prepare the repair area, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

4.M.

NOTE: Radius all the corners by 12 mm (0.47 in).

NOTE: Step the edges of the cut out in the Outer Skin by 15 mm
(0.59 in).
(b) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure, affected
Core must be systematically removed and repaired as follows:

1 When Core is exposed after Skin cut−out, perform an initial

drying of damaged structure, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para
graph 4.G.
2 Remove affected Core. Refer to the process described in Chapter
51−77−11, Paragraph 4.M.(2).

Page 244
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

3 Perform a final drying. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

4.G.
4 Repair affected Core as required in relevant repair.

(c) Cut two pieces of adhesive film (Material No. 08−042A) to the
shape and size of the repair cut out. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
Paragraph 4.B.

(d) Cut a piece of Glass Fabric Prepreg (Material No. 20−009) to the
shape and size of the repair cut out. refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
Paragraph 4.C.

NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 20−012A or 20−012B.

(e) Prepare and dry the honeycomb replacement core plug (Material No.
05−085). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.J.

NOTE: Same Core ribbon as the original.

(f) Lay−up the first Adhesive Film ply on the bottom of the repair
cut out. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.B.

(g) Lay−up de Glass Fabric ply on top of the Adhesive Film. Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.C.

(h) Lay−up the second Adhesive Film ply on top of the Glass Fabric.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.B.

(i) Cut a piece of Adhesive Foam (Material No. 08−047C) to the shape
and size of the honeycomb repair plug.

(j) Remove the first protective layer from the Adhesive Foam and wrap
the Adhesive Foam around the replacement core plug. refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.B.

Page 245
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(k) Install the cure cycle temperature thermocouples in the repair

area where the honeycomb plug is to be installed.
NOTE: The number of thermocouples to be installed depends on the
repair area:

For repair areas between 15000 and 30000 mm (23,25 and
46,50 in) 2 thermocouples must be installed.

For repair areas between 30000 and 45000 mm (46,50 and
69,75 in) 3 thermocouples must be installed.

For repair areas between 45000 and 60000 mm (69,75 and
93,00 in) 4 thermocouples must be installed.

The repair area shall be divided into equal areas and the
thermocouples shall be located in the center of each of
these areas. The thermocouples shall have a turnover of at
least 20 mm (0,79 in), the whole of which shall make good
contact with the adhesive layer at the bottom of the plug.

(l) Remove the second protective layer from Adhesive Foam and install
the replacement honeycomb core plug into its repair position.
(m) Cure the installed repair materials at 90° C (194° F) under vac
uum conditions for a period of four hours.

(n) Clean the repair area with the Cleaning Agent (Material No.
11−003).
(o) Cover the exposed Honeycomb Core cells with Low Density Compound
(Material No. 08−022), and cure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para
graph 6.B.(4)) with a maximum thickness of 3 mm (0.12 in) (refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.H).

NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 08−022C or 20−042.

(p) Prepare the Carbon Fabric Prepreg plies (Material No. 05−091 or
05−092) and the adhesive film plies (Material No. 08−042A). Refer
to Figure 207 and Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraphs 4.B and 4.C.

(q) Lay−up the Carbon Fabric repair plies and the adhesive film plies
in the repair area. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.B.
NOTE: For damaged areas, ply numbers, additional internal and ex
ternal plies, ply orientation and Carbon Fiber materials
refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 3.

(r) Install the vacuum bag and heating equipment. Refer to Chapter
51−77−11, Paragraph 5.D.

(s) Cure the installed materials at 120° C (248° F) for 90 minutes

under vacuum conditions (a minimum vacuum of 0.8 bar (11.6 psi)
is required), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.E.

Page 246
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(t) Inspect the repair, refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 5.

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(u) Before the surface protection restoration, apply a layer of pore
filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) as follows:

1 Abrade the surface protection using Scotch Brite Type A, by

hand or using an orbital sanding device.
2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with Cleaning Agent (Material No.

11−003).

4 Apply the pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052)

to the panel surfaces with a spatula or polishing bag, avoiding
a continuous layer.

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let the pore filler dry for a minimum of two hours at room
temperature before proceeding with the paint operation.
6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded, to improve the surface
appearance, let the pore filler to cure for at least 12 hours
at room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours and 30
minutes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding. This will
avoid damages to the product that can affect the repair quali

ty.

(v) Restore the surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Pages 247/248
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Core and Inner Skin debonded, Zone 01

Figure 207

Pages 249/250
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 210.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
H. Repair to Inner Skin, Outer Skin and Core, Zone 01

NOTE: This repair is valid for damage affecting Inner, Outer Skin and
Core of the Elevator Spar Box Skin, Zone 01 (All Subzones). Refer
to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 3, for zones data.

NOTE: Before you repair damage area you must do a damage evaluation. Re
fer to Chapter 51−11−00 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 210
NOTE: Refer to the paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 251
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Honeycomb Core Plug − Material No. 05−085, refer to

− Carbon Fabric Prepreg
− Support Plate
− Glass Fabric
− Adhesive Epoxy
− Low Density Compound
− Adhesive Film
− Adhesive Foam
− Pore Filler
− Scotch Brite, Type A
− Cleaning Agent
(2) Repair Instructions, refer to Figure 208
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−091 or 05−092,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Glass Prepreg, refer to Chapter
51−77−11, Paragraph 6.B.(9) or
Glass Wet Lay−up, refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph
6.B.(2) and 6.B.(8)
− Material No. 20−009 or 20−012A
or 20−012B, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 08−051 or 08−078 or
08−010D, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022 or 08−022C
or 20−042, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−047C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
−
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

NOTE: For damaged areas with Bronze Mesh see Figure 205.

(a) Prepare the repair area, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

4.M.
NOTE: Radius all the corners by 12 mm (0.47 in).

NOTE: Step the edges of the cut out in the Outer Skin by 15 mm
(0.59 in).

(b) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure, affected

Core must be systematically removed and repaired as follows:

Page 252
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

1 When Core is exposed after Skin cut−out, perform an initial

drying of damaged structure, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para

graph 4.G.

2 Remove affected Core. Refer to the process described in Chapter

51−77−11, Paragraph 4.M.(2).

3 Perform a final drying. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

4.G.
4 Repair affected Core as required in relevant repair.

(c) Make the support plate to the correct size and shape for the re

pair area with a minimum thickness of 1.2 mm (0.047 in). Ply
orientation must be +/−45°. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph
4.K.(2) for support plate manufacture instructions. Use one of
the following materials:
− For Glass Prepreg, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph
6.B.(9).
− For Glass wet lay−up, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph
6.B.(2) and 6.B.(8).

NOTE: To allow the installation of the precured Support Plate the

Inner Skin cut out must be one side longer than the short

est dimension of the Support Plate, taking into account the
location of the damage.

(d) Remove 40 mm (1.57 in) of tedlar in the area of inner skin

which will be in contact with the support plate. Refer to Figure
208.
(e) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(f) Clean the repair area and the support plate with Cleaning Agent
(Material No. 11−003).
(g) Bond the Support Plate to the Inner Skin in its correct repair
position with Adhesive Epoxy (Material No. 08−078 or 08−051 or
08−010D). Refer to Figure 208 and Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph
4.K.(2) for Support Plate bonding.

(h) Cut a piece of Adhesive Film (Material No. 08−042A) to the size
and shape of the repair area, refer to Figure 208.
(i) Remove the protective layer from the piece of Adhesive Film.

(j) Lay up the piece of Adhesive Film over the Support Plate, refer
to Figure 208.

Page 253
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(k) Fill the bottom of the repair, on the Support Plate, with two
CFRP filler plies (Material No. 05−091 or 05−092) up to the bot

tom of the existing Honeycomb Core.

NOTE: Make sure that the filler plies are flush with the internal
skin surface.

(l) Lay−up the CFRP internal plies in the repair area, refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.B.
(m) Make the Honeycomb Core replacement procedure, refer to Chapter
55−20−00, Page Block 201, Paragraph 2.C.(2) and Figure 208, using
the repair materials from the Repair Material list.

(n) Cover the exposed Honeycomb Core cells with Low Density Compound
(Material No. 08−022), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.H
and cure 16 hours at 24° C (75.2° F).

NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 08−022C or Material No.

20−042.

(o) Prepare the Carbon Fabric Prepreg plies (Material No. 05−091 or
05−092) and the Adhesive Film plies (Material No. 08−042A). Refer
to Figure 208 and to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.B and 4.C.

(p) Lay−up the Carbon Fabric repair plies and the Adhesive Film plies
in the repair area. refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.B.

NOTE: For damaged areas, ply numbers, additional internal and ex

ternal plies, ply orientation and Carbon Fiber materials
refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 3.

(q) Install the vacuum bag and heating equipment. Refer to Chapter
51−77−11, Paragraph 5.D.

(r) Cure the installed materials at 120° C (248° F) for 90 minutes

under vacuum conditions (a minimum vacuum 0.8 bar (11.6 psi) is
required). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.E.

(s) Inspect the repair, refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 5.

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(t) Before the surface protection restoration, apply a layer of pore
filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) as follows:

1 Abrade the surface protection using Scotch Brite Type A, by

hand or using an orbital sanding device.
2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with Cleaning Agent (Material No.

11−003).

Page 254
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

4 Apply the pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052)

to the panel surfaces with a spatula or polishing bag, avoiding
a continuous layer.

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let the pore filler dry for a minimum of two hours at room
temperature before proceeding with the paint operation.

6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded, to improve the surface

appearance, let the pore filler to cure for at least 12 hours
at room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours and 30
minutes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding. This will
avoid damages to the product that can affect the repair quali

ty.
(u) Restore the surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Pages 255/256
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Inner Skin, Outer Skin and Core, Zone 01

Figure 208

Pages 257/258
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 211.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
I. Repair of debonding Core in Chamfer Area, Zone 02

NOTE: Before you repair the damage areas you must do a damage evalua
tion. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: This repair is valid for damages affecting to Outer Skin/Core, or

Core/Inner Skin debonded, within the repairable limit in (Zone 01,
all subzones, refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 3)
or water/fluid ingress inside sandwich structure, in the Elevator
Spar Box Skin.

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out using the hot−bond 120° C (248°
F) repair procedure. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.E.
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 5.G. for repair data about the access area
shown on this repair.

AIRCRAFT AIRCRAFT
A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 211
NOTE: Refer to the paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 259
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbon Fabric Prepreg − Material No. 05−091 or 05−092,

− Low Density Compound
− Parting Film
− Adhesive Film
− Pore Filler
− Scotch Brite, Type A
− Cleaning Agent
(2) Repair Instructions, refer to Figure 209
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022 or 08−022C
or 20−042, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para
graph 3.B
− Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
−
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

NOTE: This repair is also applicable for water ingress.

NOTE: For damaged areas with Bronze Mesh see Figure 205.

(a) Prepare the repair area, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

4.M.

NOTE: Radius all the corners by 12 mm (0.47 in).

NOTE: Step the edges of the cut out in the Outer Skin by 15 mm
(0.59 in).
NOTE: Access hole dimensions as short as possible.

(b) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure, affected

Core must be systematically removed and repaired as follows:

1 When Core is exposed after Skin cut−out, perform an initial

drying of damaged structure, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para
graph 4.G.

2 Remove affected Core. Refer to the process described in Chapter

51−77−11, Paragraph 4.M.(2).
3 Perform a final drying. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph
4.G.
4 Repair affected Core as required in relevant repair.

Page 260
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: MAKE EVACUATION AIR HOLE AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE TO THE DAMAGE

AREA. BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE THE INNER SKIN.
(c) Drill holes of 2 mm (0.079 in) to permit the evacuation of air
and also to verify that the resin is all around in the damaged
area, Zone 02.

(d) Remove Core in the access and damage area. Refer to the process
described in Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.M.(2).
(e) Remove the dust from the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(f) Clean the repair area with a cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(g) Mask the area around the air evacuation holes and on bottom of
the access hole and on the Outer Skin, to prevent leaking over
other parts.

(h) Prepare the Low Density Compound (Material No. 08−022), refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A.

NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 08−022C or 20−042.

(i) Cut a piece of parting film equal to the bottom area of the ac

cess hole.

(j) Place the parting film on the bottom of the access hole.

(k) Fill up the access area inside the Zone 02 with Low Density Com

pound (Material No. 08−022).

NOTE: Use as alternative Material No. 08−022C or 20−042.

(l) Check the Low Density Compound fills fully up the chamfer area
(inside) through the air evacuation holes.
NOTE: Use an aluminum plate to conform the Low Density Compound
(see the Figure 209), previously covered with the parting
film.

(m) Remove the parting film only from the bottom of the access hole.

(n) Cure the Low Density Compound for 16 hours at 24° C (75.2° F),
refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 6.B.(4).

(o) Remove the protection and abrade the surface if necessary.

(p) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(q) Clean the repair area with a Cleaning Agent (Material No.
11−003).

(r) For Core and Outer Skin repair refer to Figure 207 and follow
the repair instructions from Paragraph 5.G.

Page 261
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(s) Inspect the repair, refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 5.

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(t) Before the surface protection restoration, apply a layer of pore
filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) as follows:

1 Abrade the surface protection using Scotch Brite Type A, by

hand or using an orbital sanding device.
2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with Cleaning Agent (Material No.

11−003).

4 Apply the pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052)

to the panel surfaces with a spatula or polishing bag, avoiding
a continuous layer.

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let the pore filler dry for a minimum of two hours at room
temperature before proceeding with the paint operation.
6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded, to improve the surface
appearance, let the pore filler to cure for at least 12 hours
at room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours and 30
minutes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding. This will
avoid damages to the product that can affect the repair quali

ty.

(u) Restore the surface protection refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 262
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of debonding Core in Chamfer Area, Zone 02

Figure 209 (sheet 1)

Pages 263/264
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of debonding Core in Chamfer Area, Zone 02

Figure 209 (sheet 2)

Pages 265/266
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE
STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 212.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
J. Repair to Outer Skin Delamination or Broken Core, Zone 02

NOTE: Before you repair the damage areas you must do a damage evalua
tion. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: This repair is valid only for damages to Outer Skin, or Outer
Skin/Core debonded, or Inner Skin/Core debonded, or water/fluid in
gress inside sandwich structure, or Zone 02 (subzone K), within the
repairable limit (refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config
3), in the Elevator Spar Box Skin.

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out using the hot−bond 120° C (248°
F) repair procedure. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.E.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 212
NOTE: Refer to the paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 267
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Carbon Fabric Prepreg − Material No. 05−091 or 05−092,

− Low Density Compound
− Sealant
− Adhesive Film
− Pore Filler
− Scotch Brite, Type A
− Cleaning Agent
(2) Repair Instructions, refer to Figure 210
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022 or 08−022C
or 20−042, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
−
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

NOTE: This repair is also applicable for water ingress.

NOTE: For damaged areas with Bronze Mesh see Figure 205.

NOTE: For damaged areas, ply numbers, additional internal and exter
nal plies, ply orientation and Carbon Fiber materials refer to
Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 3.

(a) Remove the original fasteners from the repair area.

CAUTION: REMOVE ONLY DAMAGED PLIES.

(b) Prepare the repair area, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph
4.M.

NOTE: Radius all the corners by 12 mm (0.47 in).

NOTE: Step the edges of the cut out in the Outer Skin by 15 mm
(0.59 in).
(c) In case of liquid ingress inside sandwich structure, affected
Core must be systematically removed and repaired as follows:
1 When Core is exposed after Skin cut−out, perform an initial
drying of damaged structure, refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para
graph 4.G.
2 Remove affected Core. Refer to the process described in Chapter
51−77−11, Paragraph 4.M.(2).

Page 268
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

3 Perform a final drying. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

4.G.
4 Repair affected Core as required in relevant repair.

(d) If broken Core or water ingress is detected, remove the damage

and make the repair Core plug machined to suit the free of dam

age chamfer area. Replace Core, cover cells and repair with Car

bon Fabric Prepreg (Material No. 05−091 or Material No. 05−092)
following the repair instructions from Paragraph 5.G..

(e) Wet install Fasteners with Sealant (Material No. 09−005).

NOTE: Determine grip length on assembly.

(f) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(g) Clean the repair area with a Cleaning Agent (Material No.
11−003).

(h) Inspect the repair, refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 5.

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(i) Before the surface protection restoration, apply a layer of pore
filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) as follows:

1 Abrade the surface protection using Scotch Brite Type A, by

hand or using an orbital sanding device.

2 Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with Cleaning Agent (Material No.
11−003).

4 Apply the pore filler (Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052)

to the panel surfaces with a spatula or polishing bag, avoiding
a continuous layer.

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

5 Let the pore filler dry for a minimum of two hours at room
temperature before proceeding with the paint operation.
6 If the pore filler needs to be sanded, to improve the surface
appearance, let the pore filler to cure for at least 12 hours
at room temperature (23±2° C (73.40±3.6° F)) or 7 hours and 30
minutes at 60±2° C (140±3.6° F) before sanding. This will
avoid damages to the product that can affect the repair quali

ty.
(j) Restore the surface protection refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Pages 269/270
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Outer Skin Delamination or Broken Core, Zone 02

Figure 210 (sheet 1)

Pages 271/272
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Outer Skin Delamination or Broken Core, Zone 02

Figure 210 (sheet 2)

Pages 273/274
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 213.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
K. Repair to Trailing Edge Profile, Zone 03

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out using the hot−bond 120° C (248°
F) repair procedure. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.E.

NOTE: This repair is valid for damages to Outer Skin and Trailing Edge
(TE) profile on Zone 03.
NOTE: Before the damaged structure is repaired, a damage evaluation must
be carried out (refer to Chapter 51−77−10).

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 213
NOTE: Refer to the paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 275
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003

− Sealant
− Sealant
− Chemical Conversion Coating
− Epoxy Polyamide Primer
− Polyuretane Primer
− Glass Fabric
− Laminating Resin
− Aluminum
− Repair Profile
(2) Repair Instructions, refer to Figure 211
− Material No. 09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 13−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−006B, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−033, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 20−022 or 20−032 or
20−028, refer to Chapter
51−77−11, Paragraph 4.H, 5.A and
6.B.(2)
− 2024T42 Clad Thickness 0.8 mm
(0.031 in)
− Refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page
Block 101 (same as original ma
terial)

NOTE: For damaged areas with Bronze Mesh refer to Figure 205.

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.D).
(b) Cut out the damage profile and remove the necessary rivets.

(c) Remove the damage profile from the repair area.

(d) Remove the remaining unwanted material with a sandpaper grade 200
and a vacuum cleaner in the repair area.
(e) Use the Cleaning Agent (Material No. 11−003) to clean the repair
area.
(f) If the skin under the profile is damaged, refer to Figure 209
and follow the repair instructions from Paragraph 5.I..
(g) Protect the exposed existing aluminum profile. Refer to Figure
211 for materials data.

Page 276
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(h) Make the aluminum repair profile and joint clips for the repair
area, and mark and pilot drill the rivet position.
(i) Put the repair aluminum profiles on its repair position with
clamps.

(j) Drill to the final diameter the fastener position and remove the
parts.

CAUTION: USE ABRASIVE CLOTH (GRADE 400) TO CLEAN THE AREA OF THE
EXISTING ALUMINUM PROFILE THAT WILL CONTACT THE REPAIR.

(k) Remove the dust from the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(l) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

CAUTION: THE NEXT STEP IS ONLY APPLICABLE WHEN THE ORIGINAL GLASS
FIBER IS DAMAGED.

(m) If the original GFRP is damaged when removing the TE profile,

restore by installing a Dry Glass Fabric (Material No. 05−033)
with Laminating Resin (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.H,
5.A and 6.B.(2)).
(n) Cure the repair materials, refer to manufacturer’s specifications.

CAUTION: MASK THE AREAS OF THE NEW ALUMINUM PLATE, JOINT CLIPS, AND
EXISTING ALUMINUM PROFILE THAT WILL CONTACT METALLIC PARTS
WHEN INSTALLING IT.
CAUTION: MASK THE AREAS OF CARBON FIBER SURFACE CLOSE TO THE EXIST

ING ALUMINUM PROFILE IN THE REPAIR AREA.

(o) Apply the correct surface treatments to the new aluminum strip,
joint clips and existing aluminum profile of the repair area;
Chemical Conversion Coating (Material No. 13−002), and then Epoxy
Polyamide Primer (Material No. 16−006B) or Polyurethane Primer
(Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C), refer to Chapter 51−21−11 for
application data.

(p) Unmask the aluminum parts and Carbon Fabric surface, and clean
the repair area and repair parts using the Cleaning Agent (Mate

rial No. 11−003).

(q) Fill the union gap between the new and existing profile with
sealant (Material No. 09−002).

(r) Put the new Aluminum profile with Sealant (Material No. 09−005)
on its repair position, installing the necessary rivets with
Sealant (Material No. 09−005).

(s) Remove the unwanted sealant with Cleaning Agent (Material No.
11−003).

Page 277
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: ENSURE ELECTRICAL CONDUCTIVITY BETWEEN PARTS. SEE NSA936002

FOR CONTACT POINTS.
(t) Put the joint clips on the repair position installing the new
fastener maintaining the electrical conductivity.

(u) Let the sealant cure (refer manufacturer’s specification).

(v) Restore the surface protection (refer to Chapter 51−75−12) in the

repair area.

Page 278
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Trailing Edge Profile, Zone 03

Figure 211

Pages 279/280
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−21−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN
THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM
YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY IN
FORMATION.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 214.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH
3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
L. Repair to Skin, Zone 04.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: For repair zones definition, refer to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block
101, Config 3.
NOTE: Figure 212, sheet 1 is a permanent repair for damage of Elevator
Upper Skin zone 04, with no Hinge Fittings or Ribs, but it is not
valid for damage between Fitting Arm 2 and 4.

NOTE: Figure 212, sheet 2 is a permanent repair for damage of Elevator

Upper Skin zone 04, close to a Fitting Arm, but it is not valid
between Fitting Arm 2 and 4.

NOTE: Figure 212, sheet 3 is a permanent repair for damage of Elevator

Lower Skin zone 04, but it is not valid if affects to the skin in
Rib areas.

NOTE: If necessary, for access to do this repair, remove the Elevator.

Refer to the AMM, Chapter 27−34−41, Page Block 401.

Page 281
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 214
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Filler 1 Refer to Figure 212

2 Repair Doubler
− Glass Fabric
− Adhesive Epoxy
− Sealant
− Sealant
− Cleaning Agent
− Polyurethane Primer
− Epoxy Polyamide Primer
− Polyurethane Top Coat
− Varnish
− Laminating Resin
− Chromic Acid Anodizing
(CAA)
(2) Repair Instructions, refer to Figure 212
1 Refer to Figure 212
− Material No. 05−033, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−051 or 08−078,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−006B, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−016B, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−021, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 20−022 or 20−032,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Refer to Chapter 51−21−11

NOTE: For damaged areas with Bronze Mesh see Figure 205.

Page 282
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Remove the fasteners and the surface protection from the repair
area (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.D).

(b) Make the damage cut out into a regular shape as shown in Figure
212. Remove waste material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

(c) Clean the repair area with Cleaning Agent (Material No. 11−003).
(d) Apply Laminating Resin (Material No. 20−022 or 20−032) to the
edges of the skin cut−out.

(e) Apply a layer of Glass Fabric (Material No. 05−033) and Laminat

ing Resin (Material No. 20−022 or 20−032) around the inner skin
surface of the repair area. The glass fabric must extend beyond
the area of the repair doubler by 12 mm (0.47 in).

(f) Allow the repair to cure at room temperature.

NOTE: Alternatively the cure time may be accelerated by the use

of heat, let the repair cure at the temperature and time
indicated (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 6.B.(2) and
Paragraph 5.E.).

(g) Remove heating equipment after the cure process is complete.

(h) Make and form the repair doubler, refer to Figure 212. Refer to
Chapter 51−26−11 for bending data and Chapter 51−26−12 for jog

gling data.

NOTE: Round off edges from 0.1 mm (0.004 in) to 0.4 mm (0.016
in).

NOTE: Install the repair doubler over the front spar flange, if
necessary.

(i) Clean the repair doubler and the repair area with Cleaning Agent
(Material No. 11−003).

(j) Apply the correct surface treatments to the repair doubler CAA
and then, Epoxy Polyamide Primer (Material No. 16−006B) or Poly

urethane Primer (Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C) followed by a
layer of Polyurethane Top Coat (Material No. 16−016B) in the
surface not in contact with the repair filler and the front
spar. Refer to Chapter 51−21−11 for application data.

(k) Mark the new fastener positions onto the repair doubler. Refer to
Figure 212.

NOTE: Fastener spacing only for fastener to fit repair filler.

NOTE: Unless otherwise specified, install two rows of fasteners

minimum around the damage area.

Page 283
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(l) Install the repair doubler in its repair position and secure with
screw−clamps.
(m) Pilot−drill the new fastener holes thru the repair doubler and
the skin. Drill the holes thru the repair doubler from the ex

isting fastener holes.

(n) Remove the screw−pins and the repair doubler from the repair
area.
(o) Remove sharp edges from fastener holes with an abrasive cone, and
the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

CAUTION: IF NECESSARY, ADHESIVE EPOXY (MATERIAL NO. 08−051 OR 08−078)

MAY BE USED AS A LIQUID SHIM UP TO A MAXIMUM THICKNESS OF
0.5 MM (0.020 IN), REFER TO STEPS 5.L.(2)(p) THRU
5.L.(2)(v). SOLID SHIM IS VALID UP TO 1.2 MM (0.047 IN)
MATERIAL 2024 T3 CLAD.

(p) Apply a layer of Adhesive Epoxy (Material No. 08−051 or 08−078)

to the surface of the repair doubler where it will touch the
Elevator Skin when assembled.
(q) Cut a piece of parting−film to the same size and shape as the
repair doubler.

(r) Put the parting−film over the Adhesive Epoxy on the repair dou

bler.
(s) Put the repair doubler in its repair position and secure with
screw−pins.

(t) Remove unwanted Adhesive Epoxy with Cleaning Agent (Material No.
11−003).
(u) Let the Adhesive Epoxy cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions
for the cure times.

(v) Remove the screw−pins, parting−film and the repair doubler from
the repair area.

(w) Apply a layer of Sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the surface of

the repair doubler where it will touch the Elevator Skin when
assembled.

(x) Put the repair doubler in its repair position and secure with
screw−pins.
(y) Remove unwanted sealant with Cleaning Agent (Material No.
11−003).

(z) Let the sealant cure. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions

for the cure times.

Page 284
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(aa)Determine the thickness of metal required for the repair filler,

refer to Figure 212.
NOTE: A combination of the metal repair filler and Adhesive Epoxy
(Material No. 08−051 or 08−078) may be necessary to achieve
the required contour.

(ab)Make and form the repair filler, refer to Figure 212. Refer to
Chapter 51−26−11 for bending data and Chapter 51−26−12 for jog

gling data.

NOTE: Round off edges from 0.1 mm (0.004 in) to 0.4 mm (0.016
in).

(ac)Clean the repair filler with Cleaning Agent (Material No.

11−003).
(ad)Apply the correct surface treatments to the repair filler CAA and
then, Epoxy Polyamide Primer (Material No. 16−006B) or Polyure

thane Primer (Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C). Refer to Chapter
51−21−11 for application data.
(ae)Put the repair filler in its repair position and secure with
screw−clamps.

(af)Pilot−drill the marked fastener holes from the repair doubler

thru the repair filler.

(ag)Remove the screw−clamps and the repair filler.

(ah)Remove sharp edges from the repair filler and the repair area
with an abrasive cone.

(ai)Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum

cleaner.
(aj)Clean the repair filler with Cleaning Agent (Material No.
11−003).

(ak)Apply a layer of Adhesive Epoxy (Material No. 08−051 or 08−078)

to the surface of the repair filler that will touch the repair
doubler when assembled.
(al)Cut a piece of parting−film to the same size and shape as the
repair filler.

(am)Put parting−film over the epoxy resin on the repair filler.

(an)Put the repair filler in its repair position and secure with
screw−pins.

(ao)Remove unwanted epoxy resin with Cleaning Agent (Material No.

11−003).

Page 285
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ap)Let the epoxy resin cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions

for the cure times.
(aq)Remove the screw−pins, parting−film and the repair filler.

(ar)Apply a layer of Sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the surface of

the repair filler where it will touch the repair doubler when
assembled.

(as)Put the repair filler in its repair position and secure with
screw−pins.

(at)Remove unwanted sealant with Cleaning Agent (Material No.

11−003).

(au)Apply a bead of Sealant (Material No. 09−002) all around the

edge of the repair filler, the repair doubler and the adjacent
structure. Refer to Figure 212.

(av)Let the sealants cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for

the cure times.

(aw)Apply a coat of Varnish (Material No. 16−021) over the bead of

sealant applied in step 5.L.(2)(au).

(ax)Let the Varnish dry.

(ay)Leave some screw−pins in position and drill all the fastener

holes to the required diameter.
NOTE: All existing fastener holes in the repair area must be
drilled oversize if necessary.

(az)Countersink the fastener holes, as applicable.

(ba)Wet install the fasteners with Sealant (Material No. 09−005).

(bb)Remove unwanted sealant with Cleaning Agent (Material No.
11−003).

(bc)Let the sealant cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for

the cure times.
(bd)Repair the surface protection, refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

(be)Install the Elevator if it was removed for access purposes, refer

to the AMM, Chapter 27−34−41, Page Block 401.

(bf)Do the following electrical bonding tests if the Elevator is re

moved/installed:
− Between each end of the aluminum trailing edge. Maximum resis
tance value should be 5 milli−ohms.
− Between the aluminum trailing edge and the aluminum central
tank. Maximum resistance value should be 10 milli−ohms.

Page 286
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Upper Skin, with no Hinge Fittings or Ribs, Zone 04

Figure 212 (sheet 1)

Pages 287/288
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Upper Skin, close to a Fitting Arm, Zone 04

Figure 212 (sheet 2)

Pages 289/290
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Lower Skin, Zone 04

Figure 212 (sheet 3)

Pages 291/292
Printed in Germany
55−21−11
CONFIG−3
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR SPAR BOX RIBS

1. Identification Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

- Structural Arrangement Figure 1
1 Rib 1 Figure 2
2 Rib 4 Figure 3
3 Rib 5 Figure 4
4 Rib 10 Figure 5
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55-20-00, Page Block 001, where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55-21-12 FebPage 1
01/02
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structural Arrangement
Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55-21-12 FebPage 2
01/02
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 1
Figure 2 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−21−12 AugPage 3
01/06
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 1
Figure 2 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−21−12 AugPage 4
01/06
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 1
Figure 2 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55-21-12 FebPage 5
01/02
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 1
Figure 2 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−21−12 AugPage 6
01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 1 Assy D55281525000 PB 201

001 55−21−12
1A Rib 1 Assy D55281525002 PB 201 A35515G0431
003 55−21−12
1B Rib 1 Assy D55281525004 PB 201 A153238G0732
005 55−21−12
5 Rib 1 Composite D55281526000 PB 201
001 55−21−12
5A Rib 1 Composite D55281526002 PB 201 A22163G00116
003 55−21−12
10 Joint Part 3.1354T351 D55281527200
LN9073
10A Joint Part 3.1354T351 D55281527202 A21020G0055
LN9073 203
10B Joint Part 3.1354T351 D55281527206 A29998G0321
LN9073 207
−alternative 3.1354T351 D55281527204 A29998G0321
LN9073 205
10C Joint Part 3.1354T351 D55281527210 A26408G00321
LN9073 211
−alternative 3.1354T351 D55281527208 A26408G00321
LN9073 209
15 Bracket Composite D55281504000 PB 201
55−21−12
20 Strap Composite D55281501000 PB 201
001 55−21−12
20A Strap Composite D55281501002 PB 201 A22163G00116
003 55−21−12
ASSY Dwg.: D55280001, D55280002, D55281500, D55281525

Key to Figure 2

Printed in Germany
55−21−12 MayPage 7
01/13
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 4
Figure 3

Printed in Germany
55-21-12 FebPage 8
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 4 Assy D55281535000 PB 201

001 55−21−12
5 Rib 4 Composite D55281535002 PB 201
003 55−21−12
ASSY Dwg.: D55280001, D55281535

Key to Figure 3

Printed in Germany
55−21−12 MayPage 9
01/13
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 4
Figure 4

Printed in Germany
55-21-12 FebPage01/0210
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 5 Assy D55281540000 PB 201

001 55−21−12
5 Rib 5 Composite D55281540002 PB 201
003 55−21−12
ASSY Dwg.: D55280001, D55281540

Key to Figure 4

Printed in Germany
55−21−12 MayPage01/1311
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 10
Figure 5 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−21−12 AugPage01/0612
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 10
Figure 5 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−21−12 AugPage01/0613
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 10 Assy D55281545000

001
1A Rib 10 Assy D55281545002 A32441G0391
003
5 Rib 10 3.1354T351 D55281546200
LN9073 001
5A Rib 10 3.4144T7451 D55281546204 A32441G0391
LN9073 205
10 Angle 3.4374T73 D55281545200 A32441G0391
LN9073
ASSY Dwg.: D55280001, D55281545

Key to Figure 5

Printed in Germany
55−21−12 MayPage01/1314
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR SPAR BOX RIBS - REPAIRS

1. General
No General and/or Specific Repairs specified. In case of any damage contact
AIRBUS.

Printed in Germany
55-21-12 Feb
Page 201
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR SPAR

1. Identification Scheme

NOTE: For information of spar configuration refer to Chapter 55−21−00Page

Block 001.

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Front Spar Figure 1

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Page 1
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/14
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front Spar
Figure 1 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-21-18
CONFIG-1
Page 2
Feb 01/02
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front Spar
Figure 1 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-21-18
CONFIG-1
Page 3
Feb 01/02
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front Spar
Figure 1 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55-21-18
CONFIG-1
Page 4
Feb 01/02
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front Spar
Figure 1 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55-21-18
CONFIG-1
Page 5
Feb 01/02
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front Spar
Figure 1 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55-21-18
CONFIG-1
Page 6
Feb 01/02
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front Spar
Figure 1 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55-21-18
CONFIG-1
Page 7
Feb 01/02
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front Spar
Figure 1 (sheet 7)

Printed in Germany
55-21-18
CONFIG-1
Page 8
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Spar, Front Composite D55281700000 PB 201

001 55−21−00
PB 101
5 Cover LN9121E115−16 D55281700200
0
5A Cover Z−14.510 D55281700206 A24707G00178
10 Cover LN9121E115−16 D55281700202
0
10A Cover Z−14.510 D55281700208 A24707G00178
15 Cover LN9121E115−16 D55281700204
0
15A Cover Z−14.510 D55281700210 A24707G00178
20 Core 4−3/16 Z−17.141 D55281702200 PB 201
201 55−21−00
12(0.472) PB 101
25 Core 4−3/16 Z−17.141 D55281702202 PB 201
203 55−21−00
12(0.472) PB 101
30 Core 4−3/16 Z−17.141 D55281702204 PB 201
205 55−21−00
12(0.472) PB 101
35 Film, Adhesive Z−15.425
40 Tedlar Z−14.310
45 Cyanoacrylic Z−15.601
− alternative Z−15.602
ASSY Dwg.: D55280001

Key to Figure 1

Pages 9/10
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/09
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR SPAR

1. Identification Scheme

NOTE: For information of spar configuration refer to Chapter 55−21−00, Page

Block 001.

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Front Spar Figure 1

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Page 1
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−2
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front Spar
Figure 1 (sheet 1)

Page 2
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front Spar
Figure 1 (sheet 2)

Page 3
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front Spar
Figure 1 (sheet 3)

Page 4
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front Spar
Figure 1 (sheet 4)

Page 5
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front Spar
Figure 1 (sheet 5)

Page 6
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front Spar
Figure 1 (sheet 6)

Page 7
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front Spar
Figure 1 (sheet 7)

Page 8
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front Spar
Figure 1 (sheet 8)

Page 9
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Spar, Front Composite D55281704000 PB 201

001 PB 101
1A Spar, Front Composite D55281704002 PB 201 A25123G0266
003 PB 101
1B Spar, Front Composite D55281704004 PB 201 A32441G0391
005 PB 101
1C Spar, Front Composite D55281704006 A35515G0419
007
5 Cover LN9121E115−16 D55281700200
0
5A Cover Z−14.510 D55281700206 A24707G0178
10 Cover LN9121E115−16 D55281700202
0
10A Cover Z−14.510 D55281700208 A24707G0178
15 Cover LN9121E115−16 D55281700204
0
15A Cover Z−14.510 D55281700210 A24707G0178
20 Film, Adhesive Z−15.425
25 Epoxy Adhesive Z−15.201 A25123G0266
30 Epoxy Resin Z−18.170
− alternative Z−15.602
ASSY Dwg.: D55280001, D55280002, D55281704

Key to Figure 1

Page 10
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−2
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR SPAR − ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT PARAGRAPH.

CAUTION: OBEY THE GIVEN INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE WHICH LEADS TO THE
APPLICABLE INSPECTION PROGRAM DEFINED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPEC
TIONS (SRI) OF THE SRM, IF NECESSARY.

CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER TO

PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVALUA
TION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.
SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

1. General

NOTE: CONFIG−1 is applicable before modification 22497G00128 only. For ef

fectivity refer to Modification/Service Bulletin List given in Chapter
55−20−00, Page Block 001.

NOTE: For definition of allowable damage refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For Damage Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories, refer to Chapter

51−11−14 − CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.
2. Damage Evaluation

Before you repair the damage structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

3. Type of Damage
There are different types of damage which can occur to the composite struc
ture:

A. Delamination with or without visible Cracks and Holes, Debonding and

Dents.

For more data on damage causes refer to Chapter 51−77−10.

B. Superficial Damage

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

This is when the structure is damaged only on the external surface, with
no damage to the internal structure. Nicks and scratches are examples of
superficial damage.

4. Distance between Damage Areas and Distance between Repair Areas

There is a minimum permitted distance between damaged areas and between re
pair areas (refer to Figure 101):

A. Damaged Areas
If the distance between two areas of damage is (X) more than 50 mm
(1.97 in), the total area to be considered depends on the order of the
two damages.

(1) Different Order

The damages will be considered as being of different orders if LmaxL
of the larger damage is more than 10 × LmaxS of the smaller damage
(LmaxL more than 10 × LmaxS).

(2) Same Order

Two damages will be considered as being of the same order if LmaxL

of the larger damage is less than or equal to 10 × LmaxS of the
smaller damage (LmaxL ≤ 10 × LmaxS).

(3) Calculation of total damage area

Two damages areas will be considered as one damage area according to

their orders and the distance between the two damaged areas (X).
− Minimum distance for different orders: the greater of 50 mm (1.97
in) or 2.5 × LmaxS.
− Minimum distance for same orders: the greater of 50 mm (1.97 in)
or 2.5 × LmaxL.
When the distance (X) between two damages areas is less than the
minimum distance, the two damages must be enveloped together and the
area of the envelop is to considered as one damage area.
B. Repair Areas

If one damaged area is composed of several individual damages according

to paragraph 4.A., separate structural repairs can be performed in each
original individual area of damage only if the distance Y (see Figure
101) between the separate repairs contours is greater than 50 mm (1.97
in).

If a second repair is to be done near to an existing repair the minimum

acceptable distance, Y (see Figure 101) between two repair contours is
50 mm (1.967 in). If you have less than this distance, refer to the
manufacturer before you do the second repair.

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Distance Between Damaged Areas and Between Repair Areas

Figure 101

Page 103
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

5. Repair Zones

Each of the components of the Elevator Spar structure is divided into re

pair zones. These repair zones show the zones of different structural im

portance of the component. When you do a damage evaluation (refer to para

graph 2.) you must refer to the repair zone data. The repair zone data of
the Spar structure is in Figure 102.

Page 104
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Spar − Repair Zones

Figure 102

Page 105
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

6. Allowable Damage Description/Criteria

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ PARAGRAPH/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION INSTRUCTION REF

TYPE DIAGRAM CATEGORY
ERENCE
Spar (Zone 01 and 02) Lineal Dam
9.A./101 B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
age
Spar (Zone 01 and 02) Delamina
9.B./102 B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00
tion and
Debonding

Table 101
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

7. Allowable Damage

Allowable damage is damage that does not affect the necessary strength or
function of a component. You do not have to make a structural repair for
this type of damage. You must make a non structural repair. If this type
of damage has rough or sharp edges, smooth these out with the correct
abrasive cloth. Replace the surface paint if necessary.

8. Repair Limits

The repair limits data gives the time limits in which to make temporary
and permanent repairs. These time limits are given in flight cycles/hours
(FC/FH). The repair limits also tell you which type of repair you can do.
To find the repair limits data applicable to a damaged area, you must know
the following data:
− the repair zone applicable to the damaged area.
− the area, length or depth (as applicable) of the damage to the structure.
− the type of damage (for example: nick, scratch, delamination).

Page 106
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

9. Elevator Spar − Allowable Damage

CAUTION: THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE ON ELEVATOR SPAR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED

INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−21−00−1−001−00
AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SEC
TION OF THE SRM. INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM
WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 102.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.
SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

A. Elevator Spar (Zone 01 and 02) − Linear Damage

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Zone 01 and 02, refer to
Figure 102 for Repair Zones.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 102.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 102
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 101 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.
(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 103 and perform the corre
sponding repair action.

Page 107
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits (linear damage) − Outer Skin (of the
Spar) of the Elevator Spar Box − Zone 01 and 02
Diagram 101
Page 108
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN

DAMAGE REPAIR AC
REPAIR
TYPE OF DAMAGE REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION DAMAGES X mm REPAIRS Y mm
SIZE TION CATEGORY
(in) (in)
The greater
Chapter 51−77−12 Chapter 51−77−12 value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 20 months.
paragraph 2.A paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
2.5 Lmax.
Linear damage in (1)
outer skin (with The greater
Chapter SRI
no damage in in
Chapter 51−77−12 value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Permanent B 20 months. <1> None 55−21−00, Page
ternal sections) paragraph 3.B (1.97 in) or in)
Block 101
nicks,
, ggouges,
g , 2.5 Lmax.
abrasions and The greater
scratches Chapter 55−21−18, Chapter SRI
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(2) Permanent B Page Block 201, Immediately None 55−21−18, Page
(1.97 in) or in)
Config 1 Block 201
2.5 Lmax.
(3) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − −
Outer Skin (of the Spar) of the Elevator Spar Box − Zone 01 and 02
Table 103
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Pages 109/110
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−1
Aug 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE ON ELEVATOR SPAR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED

INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS 55−21−00−1−001−00
AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SEC
TION OF THE SRM. INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM
WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 104.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

B. Elevator Spar (Zone 01 and 02) − Delamination and Debonding

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Zone 01 and 02, refer to

Figure 102 for Repair Zones.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 104.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 104
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 102 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 105 and perform the corre
sponding repair action.

Page 111
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits (delamination and debonding) − Elevator

Spar Structure − Zone 01 and 02
Diagram 102
Page 112
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN

DAMAGE REPAIR AC REPAIR
TYPE OF DAMAGE REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION DAMAGES X mm REPAIRS Y mm
SIZE TION CATEGORY
(in) (in)
The greater
Chapter 51−77−12 Chapter 51−77−12 value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 20 months.
paragraph 2.A paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
2.5 Lmax.
Superficial dam (1)
ages, delamina The greater
Chapter SRI
tions (with or Refer to Table value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Permanent B 20 months. <1> None 55−21−00, Page
without visible 106. (1.97 in) or in)
Block 101
cracks and 2.5 Lmax.
holes), and de The greater
bondings. Chapter 55−21−18, Chapter SRI
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(2) Permanent B Page Block 201, Immediately None 55−21−18, Page
(1.97 in) or in)
Config 1 Block 201
2.5 Lmax.
(3) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − −
Elevator Spar Structure − Zone 01 and 02
Table 105
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

ELEMENT OF SANDWICH PANEL APPLICABLE REPAIR OF SRM CHAPTER

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE DEPTH ACCESSIBILITY EXTENSION
AFFECTED 51
Superficial damages and
Damaged area less than or
delamination (with or Partial sandwich thickness One sandwich skin plus
− equal to 1000 mm (1.55 Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph 2.H.
without cracks and/or affected core.
in).
holes)
Superficial damages and Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph
delamination (with or Partial sandwich thickness One sandwich skin plus Damaged area greater than 2.A.(2). Option D. Three wet
−
without cracks and/or affected core. 1000 mm (1.55 in). lay−up layers, orientation
holes) ±45/0−90/±45
Superficial damages and
Both skin plus core (Cen Access only from external Damaged area less than or
delamination (with or Full sandwich thickness
ter area of sandwich pan face or access on both equal to 1000 mm (1.55 Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph 2.H.
without cracks and/or affected.
el) faces. in).
holes)
Elevator Spar Structure
Table 106

Page 113
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Superficial damages and

Both skin plus core (Cen Damaged area greater than
delamination (with or Full sandwich thickness Access only from external Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph 2.E.
ter area of sandwich pan or equal to 1000 mm
without cracks and/or affected. face. Option D. Perform core closing
el) (1.55 in)
holes)
Superficial damages and Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph 2.L.
Both skin plus core (Cen Damaged area greater than
delamination (with or Full sandwich thickness Three wet lay−up layers, orienta
ter area of sandwich pan Access from both faces. or equal to 1000 mm
without cracks and/or affected. tion ±45/0−90/±45, performing
el) (1.55 in)
holes) core closing <1>
Elevator Spar Structure
Table 106
<1> Apply the repair principles in two steps: First step on one face (for Skin and core restoration) and after, second step in the opposite side (only for
skin).

Page 114
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR SPAR − ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT PARAGRAPH.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: OBEY THE GIVEN INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE WHICH LEADS TO THE
APPLICABLE INSPECTION PROGRAM DEFINED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPEC
TIONS (SRI) OF THE SRM, IF NECESSARY.

CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER TO

PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVALUA
TION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.
SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

1. General

NOTE: CONFIG−2 is applicable after modification 22497G00128 only. For effec

tivity refer to Modification/Service Bulletin List given in Chapter
55−20−00, Page Block 001.

NOTE: For definition of allowable damage refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For Damage Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories, refer to Chapter

51−11−14 − CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.
2. Damage Evaluation

Before you repair the damage structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

3. Type of Damage
There are different types of damage which can occur to the composite struc
ture:

A. Delamination with or without visible Cracks and Holes, Debonding and

Dents.

For more data on damage causes refer to Chapter 51−77−10.

B. Superficial Damage

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

This is when the structure is damaged only on the external surface, with
no damage to the internal structure. Nicks and scratches are examples of
superficial damage.

4. Distance between Damage Areas and Distance between Repair Areas

There is a minimum permitted distance between damaged areas and between re
pair areas (refer to Figure 101):

A. Damaged Areas
If the distance between two areas of damage is (X) more than 50 mm
(1.97 in), the total area to be considered depends on the order of the
two damages.

(1) Different Order

The damages will be considered as being of different orders if LmaxL
of the larger damage is more than 10 × LmaxS of the smaller damage
(LmaxL more than 10 × LmaxS).

(2) Same Order

Two damages will be considered as being of the same order if LmaxL

of the larger damage is less than or equal to 10 × LmaxS of the
smaller damage (LmaxL ≤ 10 × LmaxS).

(3) Calculation of total damage area

Two damages areas will be considered as one damage area according to

their orders and the distance between the two damaged areas (X).
− Minimum distance for different orders: the greater of 50 mm (1.97
in) or 2.5 × LmaxS.
− Minimum distance for same orders: the greater of 50 mm (1.97 in)
or 2.5 × LmaxL.
When the distance (X) between two damages areas is less than the
minimum distance, the two damages must be enveloped together and the
area of the envelop is to considered as one damage area.
B. Repair Areas

If one damaged area is composed of several individual damages according

to paragraph 4.A., separate structural repairs can be performed in each
original individual area of damage only if the distance Y (see Figure
101) between the separate repairs contours is greater than 50 mm (1.97
in).

If a second repair is to be done near to an existing repair the minimum

acceptable distance, Y (see Figure 101) between two repair contours is
50 mm (1.967 in). If you have less than this distance, refer to the
manufacturer before you do the second repair.

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Distance Between Damaged Areas and Between Repair Areas

Figure 101

Page 103
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

5. Repair Zones

Each of the components of the Elevator Spar structure is divided into re

pair zones. These repair zones show the zones of different structural im

portance of the component. When you do a damage evaluation (refer to para

graph 2.) you must refer to the repair zone data. The repair zone data of
the Spar structure is in Figure 102.

Page 104
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−2
Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Spar − Repair Zones

Figure 102

Page 105
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

6. Allowable Damage Description/Criteria

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ PARAGRAPH/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION INSTRUCTION REF

TYPE DIAGRAM CATEGORY
ERENCE
Spar (Zone 01, 02, 03) All Damage 9.A./101 B, C 55−21−00−1−001−00

Table 101
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

7. Allowable Damage

Allowable damage is damage that does not affect the necessary strength or
function of a component. You do not have to make a structural repair for
this type of damage. You must make a non structural repair. If this type
of damage has rough or sharp edges, smooth these out with the correct
abrasive cloth. Replace the surface paint if necessary.

8. Repair Limits

The repair limits data gives the time limits in which to make temporary
and permanent repairs. These time limits are given in flight cycles/hours
(FC/FH). The repair limits also tell you which type of repair you can do.
To find the repair limits data applicable to a damaged area, you must know
the following data:
− the repair zone applicable to the damaged area.
− the area, length or depth (as applicable) of the damage to the structure.
− the type of damage (for example: nick, scratch, delamination).

Page 106
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

9. Elevator Spar − Allowable Damage

CAUTION: THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE ON THE ELEVATOR SPAR MUST BE INSPECTED AT

DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS
55−21−00−1−001−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPEC
TIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT
AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 102.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.
IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE
EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

A. Elevator Spar Zones 01, 02 and 03 − All Damage

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Zone 01, 02 and 03. Refer
to Figure 102 for Repair Zones.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 102.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 102
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 101 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.
(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 103 and perform the corre
sponding repair action.

Page 107
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits − Elevator Spar Structure − Repair Zones
01, 02, 03
Diagram 101
Page 108
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN

DAMAGE REPAIR AC
REPAIR
TYPE OF DAMAGE REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION DAMAGES X mm REPAIRS Y mm
SIZE TION CATEGORY
(in) (in)
The greater
Chapter 51−77−12 Chapter 51−77−12 value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 20 months.
paragraph 2.A paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
2.5 Lmax.
Linear damage (1)
The greater
(nicks, gouges, Chapter SRI
Chapter 51−77−12 value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
abrasions and Permanent B 20 months <1> None 55−21−00, Page
paragraph 3.B (1.97 in) or in)
scratches) with Block 101
2.5 Lmax.
no damage in in

ternal section The greater
Chapter 55−21−18, Chapter SRI
value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(2) Permanent B Page Block 201, Immediately None 55−21−18, Page
(1.97 in) or in)
Config 2 Block 201
2.5 Lmax.
(3) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − −
The greater
Chapter 51−77−12 Chapter 51−77−12 value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 20 months.
Superficial dam
paragraph 2.A paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
ages and dela
2.5 Lmax.
minations (with (4)
The greater
or without vis
Chapter SRI
Refer to Table value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
ible cracks and Permanent B 20 months <1> None 55−21−00, Page
104 (1.97 in) or in)
holes). Linear Block 101
2.5 Lmax.
damages with
depth greater The greater
Chapter 55−21−18, Chapter SRI
than 0.63 mm value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(5) Permanent B Page Block 201, Immediately None 55−21−18, Page
(0.024 in). (1.97 in) or in)
Config 2 Block 201
2.5 Lmax.
(6) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − −
Elevator Spar − Zones 01, 02 and 03
Table 103
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Pages 109/110
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−2
Aug 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

APPLICABLE RE

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE DEPTH ACCESSIBILITY EXTENSION PAIR OF SRM
CHAPTER 51
Superficial
According to
damages and
allowable dam
Chapter
delamination Partial thick

− age limit of 51−77−12 para

(with or with
ness affected
relevant chap
graph 3.B.
out cracks
ter.
and/or holes)
Superficial
According to
damages and
Access only allowable dam
Chapter
delamination Full thickness
from external age limit of 51−77−13 para

(with or with
affected
face. relevant chap
graph 2.H.
out cracks
ter.
and/or holes)
Elevator Spar
Table 104

Pages 111/112
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR SPAR − REPAIR

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

1. General
NOTE: CONFIG−1 is applicable before modification 22497G0128 only. For effec
tivity refer to Modification/Service Bulletin List given in Chapter
55−20−00, Page Block 001.

NOTE: For Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14

− CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

This topic contains all of the specific repair procedures for the Spar of
the Elevator Spar Box. The repair zones and allowable damage data for these
repair procedures is in Chapter 55−21−00, Page Block 101. The general re
pair procedure for carbon prepreg is in Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201.

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

2. Safety Precautions

There are risks to you and other persons when you work with composite re
pair materials. To prevent risks, read and obey the warnings given below.

WARNING: WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND FILTER MASK WHEN YOU CUT,
ABRADE OR DRILL COMPOSITE MATERIALS. THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MA
TERIALS CAN GET INTO YOUR LUNGS OR ONTO YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE YOU
INJURY. IMMEDIATELY REMOVE DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.
WARNING: CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.
WHEN YOU WORK WITH CFRP COMPOSITE MATERIALS, IMMEDIATELY REMOVE
DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRIC POWER ON
THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST ONLY USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.

CAUTION: OBEY THE GIVEN INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE WHICH LEADS TO THE
APPLICABLE INSPECTION PROGRAM DEFINED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR IN
SPECTIONS (SRI) OF THE SRM, IF NECESSARY.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT REPAIR.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER TO PARA

GRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.
IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE
CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER REMARKS

Elevator − Repairs 55−20−00 −

Table 201

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IIR 55−21−18−2−001−00 IS NOT APPLICA

BLE TO ALL AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANTS. REFER TO THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR
INSPECTION (SRI) FOR WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY.

4. Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs.

INSPECTION
REPAIR
SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE INSTRUCTION REF

CATEGORY
ERENCE
Repair to External Skin 5.A. 201 − −
and Honeycomb core, Zone
01. (Repair inactive from
revision Nov. 01/96)
Repair to Outer Skin/ 5.B. 202 B IIR
Core or Debonding of In
55−21−18−2−001−00
ner Skin/ Core, Zone 01,
Elevator Spar

Table 202
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

5. Elevator Spar
A. Repair to Spar External Skin and Honeycomb Core, Zone 01

NOTE: Repair deleted and superseded by repair described in paragraph B..

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.
NOTE: This repair is to be carried out with a hot−bond 180° C repair
procedure (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.).

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Honeycomb Core − Material Z−17.141, Honeycomb

− Cleaning Agent
− Adhesive Film
− Adhesive Foam
− Adhesive
− Thickening Agent
(2) Permanent Repair (refer to Figure 201)
Core, refer to Chapter 51−33−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material Z−15.425, Adhesive
Film, refer to Chapter 51−33−00
− Material Z−15.415, Adhesive
Foam, refer to Chapter 51−33−00
− Material No. 08−010C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−057, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Cut and remove the damaged skin and honeycomb.

(b) Cut the skin and honeycomb into a regular shape (refer to Figure
201 for dimensions).
(c) Clean the repair are with a vacuum cleaner.

(d) Make the honeycomb core repair piece (Material Z−17.141 Honey
comb, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) to the necessary size and shape
for the repair.
(e) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(f) Cut of adhesive film (Material Z−15.425, Adhesive Film) to the

size and shape of the honeycomb core repair piece.
(g) Remove the protective sheet from the adhesive film. Apply the
adhesive film to the bottom of the repair hole.

(h) Cut the adhesive (Material Z−15.415, Adhesive Foam) to suit the
size and shape of the honeycomb core repair piece.

(i) Remove the protective film from the adhesive foam and put it
around the honeycomb core repair piece.

(j) Install the honeycomb core repair piece in its repair position.

(k) Get the correct pre−cured material necessary to make the repair
patch (refer to Chapter 55−21−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 4).
(l) Cut the repair patch to the necessary shape and size for the re
pair (refer to Figure 201 for dimensions).

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(m) Cut out a piece of adhesive film (Material Z−15.425, Adhesive

Film) to suit the size and shape of the repair patch.
(n) Clean the repair area and the repair patch with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003).

(o) Remove the protective sheet from both sides of the adhesive film.
Apply the adhesive film to the repair patch.

(p) Put the repair patch in its repair position.

(q) Install the vacuum−cure equipment over the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Figure 10 paragraph 5.D.).

(r) Cure the repair materials under vacuum conditions (minimum 80%
vacuum). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D. for full data.
(s) After the repair materials have cured, remove the vacuum−cure
equipment from the repair area.

(t) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
(u) Tell the Inspection Department to do an inspection at 6000 flight
hours (FH).

(3) Temporary Repair

(a) Remove the damaged material that shows above the skin surface.
(b) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(c) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(d) Mix the adhesive (Material No. 08−010C) with the thickening agent
(Material No. 05−057).
(e) Fill the damaged skin and exposed honeycomb core material with
the adhesive paste.

(f) Let the adhesive cure for 24 hours at room temperature (RT).

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E. for data.

(g) After the adhesive has cured, smooth the cured adhesive into the
spar skin contour. Use abrasive cloth 200 grade first, and then
finish with 400 grade.

(h) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(i) Put a protective layer of High Speed Tape (HST) over the repair
area. Press the edges down tightly.

Page 205
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(j) Repair the surface protection (refer to Chapter 51−75−12).

(k) Refer to the allowable damage and repair limits data applicable
to the repair Chapter 55−21−00, Page Block 101, Figure 107) to
find the time limit applicable to the temporary repair. Tell the
Inspection Department what the permissible number of flight hours
(FH) is before a permanent repair is necessary.

(4) Permanent Repair After Temporary Repair (refer to Figure 201).

(a) Remove the High Speed Tape (HST) and the filler.

(b) Do the steps 1. thru 1. of the repair procedure 1..

Page 206
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Spar External Skin and Honeycomb Core, Zone 01

Figure 201

Pages 207/208
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 203.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: DAMAGE TO OUTER SKIN/CORE OR DEBONDING OF INNER SKIN/CORE MUST BE

INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REF
ERENCE IS IIR 55−21−18−2−001−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL
REPAIR INSPECTION (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. YOU MUST INFORM YOUR
PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMA
TION.

CAUTION: THE MAXIMUM REPAIR AREA AFTER CUT OUT MUST BE LESS OR EQUAL TO
15000 MM (23.25 IN ).
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

B. Repair to Outer Skin/Core or Debonding of Inner Skin/Core, Zone 01, Ele

vator Spar

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure you must do a damage eval
uation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.
NOTE: This repair is to be carried out using the hot bond (120° C (248°
F)) repair procedure (refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 5.E and
to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2).

NOTE: This repair is also applicable for debonding and liquid ingress
damages.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 203
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the introduc
tion of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

Page 209
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−1
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to

− Honeycomb Core
− Epoxy Resin
− Adhesive Film
− Adhesive Foam
− Carbon Fabric Prepreg
− Glass Fabric Prepreg
− Pore Filler
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 202)
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−087, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022 or 08−022C
or Epocast 1619, refer to Chap
ter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−047C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−091 or 05−092,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 20−009 or 20−012A
or 20−012B, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−75−11, paragraph 3).

(b) Make the skin cut out in the damaged area (refer to Chapter
55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.A.(1)).

(c) Remove any concentration of water (initial drying procedure, re

fer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.B.(1)).

(d) Make the core removal procedure (refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page
Block 201, repair steps 2.C.(1).(a) , 2.C.(1).(c) and
2.C.(1).(d)).

(e) Make the ply cut out procedure (refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page
Block 201, paragraph 2.A.(2)).

(f) Make the final drying procedure (refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page
Block 201, paragraph 2.B.(2)).

(g) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

Page 210
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: USE THE FOLLOWING MATERIALS: GLASS FIBER (MATERIAL NO.

20−009 OR NO. 20−012A OR NO. 20−012B) AND ADHESIVE FOAM
(MATERIAL NO. 08−047C.

(h) Make the replacement honeycomb repair plug procedure (Material

No. 05−087) for the repair area (refer to Figure 202 and to
Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.C.(2)).

(i) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(j) Cover the exposed honeycomb core cells with the resin (Material
No. 08−022) to a maximum depth of 3 mm (0.12 in). Make sure all
the cells are completely covered. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
Paragraph 5.H.
NOTE: Alternative materials No. 08−022C and Epocast 1619.

(k) Cure the resin at 24°C (75.20°F) for a period of 16 hours.

(l) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(m) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
(n) Make the Lay−up of the adhesive and repair plies procedure (refer
to Figure 202 and to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, Paragraph
2.D.).

(o) Cover the repair surface with Pore Filler material as follows
(refer to Figure202):

1 Abrade the area to be protected using Scotch Brite type A, ei

ther by hand or by using an orbital sanding device.

2 Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

3 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−010).

CAUTION: REMOVE THE PORE FILLER THAT IS NOT NECESSARY. THE FUNC
TION OF PORE FILLER IS TO FILL SURFACE PORES ONLY. A
CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS NOT PERMITTED.
4 Apply Pore Filler Material No. 16−050, 16−051 or 16−052 with a
spatula or a polishing bag, filling only in holes and surface
porous, avoiding a continuous layer.

CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY HEAT DURING THE CURING PROCEDURE.

5 Let the Pore Filler cure at room temperature for a minimum of

two hours.

6 If necessary, Pore Filler can be sanded to improve the surface

appearance, but it must be allowed to dry first. You can
choose between let the Pore Filler dry at least 12 hours at

Page 211
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

room temperature (23°C ± 2°C) or 7 hours and 30 minutes at

60°C ± 2°C.
Sand the Pore Filler surface with abrasive cloth. Use 280 grade
initially and finish off with 400 grade.

7 Remove unwanted material for the repair area with a vacuum

cleaner.

8 Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(p) Restore the surface protection (refer to Chapter 51−75−12).

Page 212
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Outer Skin/Core or Debonding of Inner Skin/Core, Zone 01, Elevator

Spar
Figure 202
Pages 213/214
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR SPAR − REPAIR

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

1. General
NOTE: CONFIG−2 is applicable after modification 22497G0128 only. For effec
tivity refer to Modification/Service Bulletin List given in Chapter
55−20−00, Page Block 001.

NOTE: For Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14

− CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

This topic contains all of the specific repair procedures for the Spar of
the Elevator Spar Box. The repair zones and allowable damage data for these
repair procedures is in Chapter 55−21−18, Page Block 101, Config 2, Figure
102. The general repair procedure for carbon prepreg is in Chapter
55−20−00, Page Block 201.

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

2. Safety Precautions

There are risks to you and other persons when you work with composite re
pair materials. To prevent risks, read and obey the warnings given below.

WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.

WARNING: WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND FILTER MASK WHEN YOU CUT,
ABRADE OR DRILL COMPOSITE MATERIALS. THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MA
TERIALS CAN GET INTO YOUR LUNGS OR ONTO YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE YOU
INJURY. IMMEDIATELY REMOVE DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.

WHEN YOU WORK WITH CFRP COMPOSITE MATERIALS, IMMEDIATELY REMOVE
DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.
WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRIC POWER ON
THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST ONLY USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER TO PARA

GRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: OBEY THE GIVEN INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE WHICH LEADS TO THE
APPLICABLE INSPECTION PROGRAM DEFINED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR IN
SPECTIONS (SRI) OF THE SRM, IF NECESSARY.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT REPAIR.
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER REMARKS

No General Repairs Applicable − −

Table 201

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IIR 55−21−18−2−002−00 IS NOT APPLICA

BLE TO ALL AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANTS. REFER TO THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR
INSPECTION (SRI) FOR WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY.

4. Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs.

SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE REPAIR INSPECTION

CATEGORY INSTRUCTION REF
ERENCE
Elevator Front Spar Re 5.A. 201 B 55−21−18−2−002−00
pair

Table 202
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

5. Elevator Spar
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 203.
CAUTION: DAMAGE TO ELEVATOR FRONT SPAR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTER
VALS. THE INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS IIR 55−21−18−2−002−00
AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTION (SRI) SECTION
OF THE SRM. YOU MUST INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE
THEM WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.
A. Elevator Front Spar Repair.

NOTE: The following repair is valid for damage affecting the Elevator
Front Spar, Zones 01, 02 and 03. Refer to Figure 201 to see types
of damage for which this repair is applicable.
NOTE: Before you repair the damaged area, you must do a damage evalua
tion. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: For repairable zone definition, refer to Chapter 55−21−18 Page

Block 101, Config 2, Figure 102.

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 203
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about all
weight variant as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Metal Repair Patch, 1.4 mm 1 Material 7075 T76 Clad, Aluminum

(0.056 in) thick. Alloy, refer to Chapter 51−31−00
− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Epoxy Filler − Material No. 16−054, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Glass Fiber Fabric − Material No. 05−033, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Epoxy Resin − Material No. 08−071, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane Primer − Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Polyurethane Finish Paint − Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Carbon Fiber Fabric − Material Z−19.749, Carbon Fiber
Fabric, refer to Chapter
51−33−00
− Epoxy Primer − Material No. 16−033, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant − Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Varnish − Material No. 07−001B, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Chromic Acid Anodizing − Refer to Chapter 51−21−11
(CAA)
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 201)

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D).

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Blend out the damaged area to eliminate sharp edges and burrs.

(c) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(d) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(e) Prepare and mix the epoxy filler (Material No. 16−054), refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.A.(3).

(f) Fill the gap in the repair area with the mixed epoxy filler (Ma
terial No. 16−054) and protect with a film. Refer to manufactur
er’s instruction leaflet for cure time.

(g) On completion of the cure cycle remove the protection from the
repair area and abrade the surface of the resin to obtain a
smooth finish.
NOTE: Repair patch can be made from metal or CFRP. If metallic
repair patch is to be used, prepare it in accordance with
steps 5.A.(2)(h) thru 5.A.(2)(u); if CFRP repair patch is
to be used, prepare it in accordance with steps 5.A.(2)(v)
thru 5.A.(2)(aa).
(h) Cut one ply of glass fiber fabric (Material No. 05−033) to the
size and shape of the repair area.

NOTE: Dimensions of the glass fiber fabric ply must be 12 mm

(0.472 in) minimum larger than the metallic repair patch
contour.
(i) Prepare the epoxy resin (Material No. 08−071, refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 4 and 6.B for data).

(j) Apply the epoxy resin (Material No. 08−071) to the glass fiber
fabric ply (refer to Chapter 51−77−11 paragraph 4.H).
(k) Apply a thin layer of resin (Material No. 08−071) on the repair
area with a brush or spatula.

(l) Lay−up the glass fiber fabric ply (Material No. 05−033), pre
viously impregnated with the resin, on the repair area.
(m) Cover the repair area with the vacuum cure equipment and the
heating blanket (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.).

(n) Cure the installed repair materials under vacuum conditions at

90° C (194° F) for period of four hours, (alternatively, cure at
120° C (248° F) for period of two hours).
NOTE: Vacuum condition: minimum absolute pressure inside the bag
of 0.2 bar (2.9 psi).

(o) Remove the vacuum cure equipment from the repair area when the
cure cycle is finished.

Page 205
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(p) Get the correct material to make the metal repair patch (Material
7075T76, Aluminum Alloy, refer to Chapter 51−31−00).
(q) Make the metal repair patch to the correct size and dimensions
for the repair (refer to Figure 201).

(r) Remove any sharp edges from the metal repair patch.

(s) Remove any waste material from the metal repair patch with a
vacuum cleaner.
(t) Clean the metal repair patch with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(u) Apply the correct surface treatment to the metal repair patch:

1 Apply chromic acid anodizing to the repair patch.

2 Apply a layer of polyurethane primer (Material No. 16−001B or
16−001C). Refer to Chapter 51−23−00 for paint coating applica
tion.

3 Apply a layer of top coat of polyurethane finish paint (Mate

rial No. 16−018C). Refer to Chapter 51−23−00 for paint coating
application.

(v) Get the correct carbon fiber fabric (Material Z−19.749, Carbon
Fiber Fabric, refer to Chapter 51−33−00) to make the CFRP repair
patch.
(w) Cut 12 plies from the carbon fiber fabric material (refer to
Figure 201 for ply dimension and orientation).

(x) Lay up and cure the CFRP repair patch according to instructions
given in Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.C.
(y) On completion of the cure cycle remove the CFRP repair patch
from the cure equipment and match it to the required shape and
dimensions.

(z) Clean the repair patch with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(aa)Apply a layer of epoxy primer (Material No. 16−033) to the CFRP

repair patch (refer to Chapter 51−23−00).

NOTE: The following steps are applicable either the metal or CFRP
repair patch.

(ab)Mark on the repair patch the position of the fastener holes. Re
fer to Figure 201 for fastener spacing and margin.

(ac)Predrill all the previously marked fastener holes in the repair

patch.

Page 206
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ad)Put the repair patch on the Elevator Front Spar (EFS) in its
correct repair position.
(ae)Mark the fastener hole positions in the EFS thru the repair
patch fastener holes.

(af)Predrill the previously marked fastener holes in the EFS.

(ag)Put the repair patch in its correct repair position in the EFS
and secure with screw pins.
(ah)Drill all the fastener holes to the correct diameter for the
fastener.

(ai)Remove the screw pins and the repair patch from the repair area.

(aj)Remove any sharp edges from the fastener holes with an abrasive
cone.

(ak)Remove any waste material from the repair patch with a vacuum
cleaner.

(al)Clean the repair patch and the repair area with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

(am)Apply a layer of sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the surfaces

of the repair patch and repair area which will contact when as
sembled (refer to Chapter 51−24−00 for sealing application).

(an)Put the repair patch in its correct position in the EFS and se
cure with screw pins.

(ao)Remove each screw pin in turn and wet install fasteners ABS
0254−5 with sealant (Material No. 09−005) in the vacated screw
pin hole (refer to Chapter 51−42−00 for fastener installation).
NOTE: Fastener grip length to be determined on assembly.

(ap)Remove any sealant in excess with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−003).

(aq)Let the sealant cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instruction leaflet

for the cure time.
(ar)Protect the sealant around the repair patch with varnish (Materi
al No. 07−001B).

(as)Let the varnish cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instruction leaflet

for the cure time.

Pages 207/208
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/14
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Front Spar Repair

Figure 201

Pages 209/210
Printed in Germany
55−21−18
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR TRAILING EDGE

1. Identification Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Profiles, Trailing Edge Figure 1

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−21−19 MayPage 1
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Profiles, Trailing Edge

Figure 1 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−21−19 MayPage 2
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Profiles, Trailing Edge

Figure 1 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−21−19 MayPage 3
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Profiles, Trailing Edge

Figure 1 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−21−19 MayPage 4
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Profiles, Trailing Edge

Figure 1 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−21−19 MayPage 5
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Profiles, Trailing Edge

Figure 1 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55−21−19 MayPage 6
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Profiles, Trailing Edge

Figure 1 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55−21−19 MayPage 7
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Profile, trail 3.1364T42 D55283005200 PB 101

ing edge LN9073 0.8(0.031) 55−21−11
1A Profile, trail 3.1364T42 D55283005206 PB 101 A24339G0229
ing edge LN9073 207 55−21−11
0.8(0.031)
1B Profile, trail 3.1364T42 D55283005212 PB 101 A33296G0406
ing edge LN9073 213 55−21−11
1.0(0.039)
1C Profile, trail 3.1364T42 D55283006200 PB 101 A34329G0424
ing edge LN9073 201 55−21−11
0.8(0.031)
2 Connection plate 3.1364T3 D55280002200 A35515G0419
LN9073 1.0(0.039)
5 Profile, trail 3.1364T42 D55283005202 PB 101
ing edge LN9073 0.8(0.031) 55−21−11
5A Profile, trail 3.1364T42 D55283005208 PB 101 A24339G0229
ing edge LN9073 209 55−21−11
0.8(0.031)
5B Profile, trail 3.1364T42 D55283005214 PB 101 A33296G0406
ing edge LN9073 215 55−21−11
1.0(0.039)
5C Profile, trail 3.1364T42 D55283006202 PB 101 A34329G0424
ing edge LN9073 203 55−21−11
0.8(0.031)
10 Profile, trail 3.1364T42 D55283005204 PB 101
ing edge LN9073 0.8(0.031) 55−21−11
10A Profile, trail 3.1364T42 D55283005210 PB 101 A24339G0229
ing edge LN9073 211 55−21−11
0.8(0.031)
10B Profile, trail 3.1364T42 D55283005216 PB 101 A33296G0406
ing edge LN9073 217 55−21−11
1.0(0.039)
10C Profile, trail 3.1364T42 D55283006204 PB 101 A34329G0424
ing edge LN9073 205 55−21−11
0.8(0.031)
10D Profile, trail 3.1364T42 D55283006206 PB 101 A35515G0419
ing edge LN9073 207 55−21−11
0.8(0.031)
12 Connection plate 3.1364T3 D55280002202 A35515G0419
LN9073 1.0(0.039)
ASSY Dwg.: D55280001, D55280002

Key to Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−21−19 MayPage 8
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

15 Profile, trail 1.4544.9 D55283006208 PB 101 A35515G0419

ing edge 209 55−21−11
0.8(0.031)
ASSY Dwg.: D55280002

Key to Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−21−19 Pages 9/10
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR TRAILING EDGE − ALLOWABLE DAMAGES

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVE IN TABLE 101.

1. General
This topic contains the allowable damages for the Elevator Trailing Edge.
Refer to Chapter 55−21−00, Page Block 101, Config. 1, for information on
Elevator Spar Box allowable and repairable damage limits.

NOTE: For Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14

− CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft
Type
Table 101
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the Introduction
of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data about all
weight variants and their required information for allowable damage
and repair applicability.
NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 1, Paragraph 1.

2. Repair Zones

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 1, Paragraph 5.

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−21−19 Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

3. Allowable Damage Description/Criteria

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ PARAGRAPH/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION INSTRUCTION REF

TYPE DIAGRAM CATEGORY
ERENCE
Elevator Trailing Edge Linear and 4./101 A, C −
Metallic Profile Superficial INACTIVE
Damages
. This al

lowable
damage data
is inactive
since revi

sion dated
Aug 01/10,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−21−11,
Page Block
101, Config
1, Para

graph 11.A.

Table 102
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

4. Allowable and Repairable Damage Limits for the Elevator Trailing Edge Me

tallic Profile.

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 1, Paragraph 7.

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−21−19 Aug 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Linear and Superficial Damages (Nicks, Gouges, Holes, Corrosion and

Scratches), Zone A
Diagram 101

Printed in Germany
55−21−19 PagesAug103/104
01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE REPAIR AC
REPAIR REPAIR REFERENCE TIME LIMIT BE
REPAIR LIFE TIME INSPECTION RE
MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN MINIMUM
SIZE TION CATEGORY FORE REPAIR QUIRED DISTANCE
DAMAGES mm REPAIRS mm FROM FAS

(in) (in) TENER
AREA
The greater
Next A Check or
value of 50 2.5 Fas

Chapter 51−77−12, 100 days which

Temporary C Immediately No (1.97) or 50 (1.97) tener Di

Paragraph 2.A ever occurs
2.5 (0.098) ameter
first
Lmax. <3>
(1)
The greater
Next A Check or
Chapter 51−73−00 value of 50 2.5 Fas

100 days which

Permanent A and Chapter None No (1.97 ) or 50 (1.97) tener Di

ever occurs
51−74−00 2.5 (0.098) ameter
first <2>
Lmax. <3>
Linear and Su

perficial Damages The greater
Next A Check or
(Nicks, Gouges, value of 50 2.5 Fas

Chapter 51−77−12, 100 days which

Holes, Corrosion, Temporary C Immediately No (1.97) or 50 (1.97) tener Di

Paragraph 2.A ever occurs
Scratches) 2.5 (0.098) ameter
first
Lmax. <3>
<1> (2)
The greater
Next A Check or
value of 50 2.5 Fas

Chapter 55−21−11, 100 days which

Permanent A None No (1.97 ) or 50 (1.97) tener Di

Figure 213 ever occurs
2.5 (0.098) ameter
first <2>
Lmax. <3>
The greater
value of 50 2.5 Fas

Chapter 55−21−11,
(3) Permanent A Immediately None No (1.97 ) or 50 (1.97) tener Di

Figure 213
2.5 (0.098) ameter
Lmax. <3>

Table 103
<1> This allowable damage data is inactive since revision dated Aug 01/10, it has been moved to Chapter 55−21−11, Page Block 101, Config 1, Paragraph 11.A.

<2> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

<3> Lmax. is the maximum size of the damage.

Printed in Germany
55−21−19 PagesAug105/106
01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR TRAILING EDGE - REPAIRS

1. General
Refer to Chapter 55-21-11, Page Block 201 for repairs.

Printed in Germany
55-21-19 Feb
Page 201
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR LEADING EDGE

1. Structural Arrangement

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Structural Arrangement Refer to Figure 1

1 Leading Edge Access Panels Chapter 55−22−11
2 Leading Edge Ribs Chapter 55−22−12
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−22−00 MayPage 1
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structural Arrangement
Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−22−00 MayPage 2
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR LEADING EDGE

1. General

For general data applicable to composite structure refer to Chapter

51−77−00.
The specific allowable damage procedures for the Elevator Leading Edge
structure are in the subsequent chapters:
− Chapter 55−22−11, LE Access Panels Allowable Damage
− Chapter 55−22−12, LE Ribs Allowable Damage.

Printed in Germany
55−22−00 PagesNov101/102
01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR LEADING EDGE − REPAIRS

1. General

NOTE: For Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

This topic contains specific repair data applicable to the Elevator Leading
Edge structure (for general repair data applicable to composite structure
refer to Chapter 51−77−00). The specific repair procedures for the Elevator
Leading Edge structure are in the subsequent chapters:
− Chapter 55−22−11, Access Panels Repairs
− Chapter 55−22−12, Rib Repairs

2. Safety Precautions
CAUTION: FOR REPAIRS CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE REFER
TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN IN THE
INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER REMARKS

No General Repairs applicable. − −

Table 201
4. Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs

SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE

Leading Edge Rib, Flange Repair Chapter 55−22−12, Figure 201
(Skin plates not affected). para 5.A.
Leading Edge Rib/Skin Plate Repair Chapter 55−22−12, Figure 202
(Skin affected). para 5.B.

Table 202

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−22−00 Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

5. Damage Evaluation

Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

6. Types of Repairs

A. Laminate Repair

NOTE: You must make all of the laminate repairs contained in this topic
under vacuum conditions (80% minimum). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11.

To make a laminate repair you must use the hot−bond laminate repair pro

cedure. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11 for general data about laminate repair
procedures.

B. Pre−cured Repairs
To make a pre−cured type repair you must make the repair pieces from
the pre−cured composite materials. These repair pieces are then attached
to the aircraft structure with fasteners. For a pre−cured repair, the
repair adhesive is used only as a shim. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11 for
general data about pre−cured repair procedures.
NOTE: The repair adhesive is used as a shim material to a maximum thick

ness of 1 mm (0.039 in).

7. Special Tools

To work with composite materials, it is necessary to use special tools.

Here are some examples:
− explosion proof tools are necessary if CFRP dust is caused.
− tools to cut or drill pre−cured CFRP materials must have very hard cut

ting edges (for example cutting wheels with diamond edges and twist−drills
made from high speed steel).
− tools to drill composite materials must have specially shaped cutting
edges.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−00 to find data about all of the tools and equip

ment necessary to make composite repairs.

8. Repair Environment

Before you make a permanent repair, make sure that you have the correct
environmental conditions (for example when the aircraft is in a warm and
dry aircraft hangar). It is important that the repair environment is clean
and has a stable room temperature during the repair procedure.

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−22−00 Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR LEADING EDGE ACCESS PANELS

1. Identification Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Leading Edge Access Panels Figure 1

1 Access Panels 1 Figure 2
2 Access Panels 2 Figure 3
3 Access Panels 3 Figure 4
4 Access Panels 4 Figure 5
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−22−11, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−22−11 Pages 1/2
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Leading Edge Access Panels − Elevator

Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−22−11 Pages 3/4
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Panel 1
Figure 2 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−22−11 Pages 5/6
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Panel 1
Figure 2 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−22−11 Pages 7/8
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Panel 1, Access Composite D55282000000 PB 201

001 PB 101
1A Panel 1, Access Composite D55282000002 PB 201 A20302G0012
003 PB 101
1B Panel 1, Access Composite D55282000004 PB 201 A30565G0413
005 PB 101
ASSY Dwg.: D55280001, D55280002

Key to Figure 2

Printed in Germany
55−22−11 Pages 9/10
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Panel 2
Figure 3 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−22−11 Pages 11/12
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Panel 2
Figure 3 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−22−11 Pages 13/14
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Panel 2
Figure 3 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−22−11 Pages 15/16
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Panel 2
Figure 3 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−22−11 Pages 17/18
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Panel 2
Figure 3 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55−22−11 MayPage01/1519
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Panel 2
Figure 3 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55−22−11 MayPage01/1520
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Panel 2, Access Composite D55282005000 PB 201

− LH PB 101
1A Panel 2, Access Composite D55282005002 PB 201 A20419P0760
− LH PB 101
1B Panel 2, Access Composite D55282005004 PB 201 A30565G0413
− LH PB 101
5 Panel 2, Access Composite D55282007000 PB 201
− RH PB 101
5A Panel 2, Access Composite D55282007002 PB 201 A20419P0760
− RH PB 101
5B Panel 2, Access Composite D55282007004 PB 201 A30565G0413
− RH PB 101
ASSY Dwg.: D55280001, D55280002

Key to Figure 3

Printed in Germany
55−22−11 Pages 21/22
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Panel 3
Figure 4 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−22−11 Pages 23/24
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Panel 3
Figure 4 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−22−11 Pages 25/26
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Panel 3, Access Composite D55282010000 PB 201

001 PB 101
1A Panel 3, Access Composite D55282010002 PB 201 A20302G0012
003 PB 101
1B Panel 3, Access Composite D55282010004 PB 201 A30565G0413
005 PB 101
ASSY Dwg.: D55280001, D55280002

Key to Figure 4

Printed in Germany
55−22−11 Pages 27/28
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Panel 4
Figure 5 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−22−11 Pages 29/30
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Panel 4
Figure 5 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−22−11 Pages 31/32
May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Access Panel 4
Figure 5 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−22−11 Pages 33/34
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Panel 4, Access Composite D55282015000 PB 201

001 PB 101
1A Panel 4, Access Composite D55282015002 PB 201 A20302G0012
003 PB 101
1B Panel 4, Access Composite D55282015004 PB 201 A24842G0243
005 PB 101
1C Panel 4, Access Composite D55282015006 PB 201 A30565G0413
007 PB 101
ASSY Dwg.: D55280001, D55280002

Key to Figure 5

Printed in Germany
55−22−11 Pages 35/36
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR LEADING EDGE ACCESS PANELS − ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT PARAGRAPH.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER TO

PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVALUA
TION OF THE DAMAGE.
IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE
EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

1. General
This topic contains the allowable damage and related data applicable to the
Elevator Leading Edge Access Panels. For Leading Edge skin refer to Chapter
55−21−11, Page Block 101.

NOTE: For definition of allowable damage refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For Damage Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories, refer to Chapter
51−11−14 − CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

2. Damage Evaluation

Before you repair the damage structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

3. Type of Damage

There are different types of damage which can occur to the composite struc
ture:

A. Delamination with or without visible Cracks and Holes, Debonding and

Dents.

For more data on damage causes refer to Chapter 51−77−10.

B. Superficial Damage

This is when the structure is damaged only on the external surface, with
no damage to the internal structure. Nicks and scratches are examples of
superficial damage.

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−22−11 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

4. Distance between Damage Areas and Distance between Repair Areas

There is a minimum permitted distance between damaged areas and between re
pair areas (refer to Figure 101):

A. Damaged Areas

If the distance between two areas of damage is (X) more than 50 mm

(1.97 in), the total area to be considered depends on the order of the
two damages.
(1) Different Order

The damages will be considered as being of different orders if

Lmax.L of the larger damage is more than 10 × Lmax.S of the smaller
damage (Lmax.L more than 10 × Lmax.S).
(2) Same Order

Two damages will be considered as being of the same order if Lmax.L

of the larger damage is less than or equal to 10 × Lmax.S of the
smaller damage (Lmax.L ≤ 10 × Lmax.S).

(3) Calculation of total damage area

Two damages areas will be considered as one damage area according to
their orders and the distance between the two damaged areas (X).
− Minimum distance for different orders: the greater of 50 mm (1.97
in) or 2.5 × Lmax.S.
− Minimum distance for same orders: the greater of 50 mm (1.97 in)
or 2.5 × Lmax.L.

When the distance (X) between two damages areas is less than the
minimum distance, the two damages must be enveloped together and the
area of the envelop is to considered as one damage area.
B. Repair Areas

If one damaged area is composed of several individual damages according

to paragraph 4.A., separate structural repairs can be performed in each
original individual area of damage only if the distance Y (see Figure
101) between the separate repairs contours is greater than 50 mm (1.97
in).

If a second repair is to be done near to an existing repair the minimum

acceptable distance, Y (see Figure 101) between two repair contours is
50 mm (1.97 in). If you have less than this distance, refer to the
manufacturer before you do the second repair.

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−22−11 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Distance Between Damaged Areas and Between Repair Areas

Figure 101

Page 103
Printed in Germany
55−22−11 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

5. Allowable Damage Description/Criteria

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ PARAGRAPH/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION INSTRUCTION REF
TYPE DIAGRAM CATEGORY
ERENCE
Leading Edge Access Pan Linear and 8.A./101 A, C −
els Superficial
Damage

Table 101
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

6. Allowable Damage

Allowable damage is damage that does not affect the necessary strength or
function of a component. You do not have to make a structural repair for
this type of damage. You must make a non structural repair. If this type
of damage has rough or sharp edges, smooth these out with the correct
abrasive cloth. Replace the surface paint if necessary.

7. Repair Limits

The repair limits data gives the time limits in which to make temporary
and permanent repairs. These time limits are given in flight cycles/hours
(FC/FH). The repair limits also tell you which type of repair you can do.
To find the repair limits data applicable to a damaged area, you must know
the following data:
− the repair zone applicable to the damaged area.
− the area, length or depth (as applicable) of the damage to the structure.
− the type of damage (for example: nick, scratch, delamination).

Page 104
Printed in Germany
55−22−11 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

8. Elevator Leading Edge Access Panels − Allowable Damage

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 102.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.
SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER

TO PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

A. Leading Edge Access Panels − linear and superficial damage

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 102.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 102
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 101 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.
(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 103 and perform the corre
sponding repair action.

Page 105
Printed in Germany
55−22−11 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits − Elevator Leading Edge Access Panels
Diagram 101

Page 106
Printed in Germany
55−22−11 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

DAMAGE REPAIR AC REPAIR MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN

TYPE OF DAMAGE REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION
SIZE TION CATEGORY
The greater
Chapter 51−77−12 Chapter 51−77−12 value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 20 months.
paragraph 2.A paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
Linear damage in 2.5 Lmax.
leading edge (1)
(scratches) The greater
Chapter 51−77−12 value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Permanent A 20 months <1> None −
paragraph 3.B (1.97 in) or in)
2.5 Lmax.
The greater
Chapter 51−77−12 Chapter 51−77−12 value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Superficial dam Temporary C Immediately 20 months.
paragraph 2.A paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
ages and dela 2.5 Lmax.
minations with (2)
The greater
or without vis
Refer to Table value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
ible cracks and Permanent A 20 months <1> None −
104 (1.97 in) or in)
holes.
2.5 Lmax.
(3) − − Contact Airbus Immediately − − − −
Elevator Leading Edge Access Panels
Table 103
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Printed in Germany
55−22−11 PagesNov107/108
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAM APPLICABLE REPAIR

DAMAGE DEPTH ACCESSIBILITY EXTENSION
AGE OF SRM CHAPTER 51
Superficial
damages and According to
delamination Partial allowable
Chapter 51−77−12
(with or thickness af − damage limit
paragraph 3.B.
without fected of relevant
cracks and/or chapter.
holes)
Superficial
damages and According to
delamination Access only allowable
Full thick Chapter 51−77−13
(with or from external damage limit
ness affected paragraph 2.H.
without face. of relevant
cracks and/or chapter.
holes)
Elevator Leading Edge Access Panels
Table 104

Printed in Germany
55−22−11 PagesNov109/110
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

LEADING EDGE - ELEVATOR

1. General
No General and/or Specific Repairs specified. In case of any damage contact
AIRBUS.

Printed in Germany
55-22-11 Feb
Page 201
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR LEADING EDGE RIBS

1. Identification Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Leading Edge Ribs Figure 1

1 Rib 2 Figure 2
2 Rib 3 Figure 2
3 Rib 6 Figure 3
4 Rib 7 Figure 3
5 Rib 8 Figure 4
6 Rib 9 Figure 4
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−22−12 FebPage 1
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Leading Edge Ribs − Elevator

Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−22−12 FebPage 2
01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 2 and3
Figure 2

Printed in Germany
55−22−12 Pages 3/4
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 2, Assy D55282600000 PB 101

001 PB 201
5 Rib 2 Composite D55282600002 PB 101
003 PB 201
10 Rib 3, Assy D55282605000 PB 101
001 PB 201
15 Rib 3 Composite D55282605002 PB 101
003 PB 201
ASSY Dwg.: D55280001, D55282600, D55282605

Key to Figure 2

Printed in Germany
55−22−12 Pages 5/6
Feb 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 6 and7
Figure 3

Printed in Germany
55−22−12 Pages 7/8
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 6, Assy D55282610000 PB 101

001 PB 201
5 Rib 6 Composite D55282610002 PB 101
003 PB 201
10 Rib 7, Assy D55282615000 PB 101
001 PB 201
15 Rib 7 Composite D55282615002 PB 101
003 PB 201
ASSY Dwg.: D55280001, D55282610, D55282615

Key to Figure 2

Printed in Germany
55−22−12 Pages 9/10
Feb 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 8 and 9
Figure 4

Printed in Germany
55−22−12 Pages 11/12
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 8, Assy D55282620000 PB 101

001 PB 201
5 Rib 8 Composite D55282620002 PB 101
003 PB 201
10 Rib 9, Assy D55282625000 PB 101
001 PB 201
15 Rib 9 Composite D55282625002 PB 101
003 PB 201
ASSY Dwg.: D55280001, D55282620, D55282625

Key to Figure 2

Printed in Germany
55−22−12 Pages 13/14
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR LEADING EDGE RIBS − ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT PARAGRAPH.

CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER TO

PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVALUA
TION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.
SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

1. General
NOTE: For definition of allowable damage refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For Damage Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories, refer to Chapter

51−11−14 − CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.
2. Damage Evaluation

Before you repair the damage structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

3. Type of Damage

There are different types of damage which can occur to the composite struc
ture:

A. Delamination with or without visible Cracks and Holes, Debonding and

Dents.

For more data on damage causes refer to Chapter 51−77−10.

B. Superficial Damage

This is when the structure is damaged only on the external surface, with
no damage to the internal structure. Nicks and scratches are examples of
superficial damage.

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−22−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

4. Distance between Damage Areas and Distance between Repair Areas.

There is a minimum permitted distance between damaged areas and between re
pair areas (refer to Figure 101):

A. Damaged Areas

If the distance between two areas of damage is (X) more than 50 mm

(1.97 in), the total area to be considered depends on the order of the
two damages.
(1) Different Order

The damages will be considered as being of different orders if

Lmax.L of the larger damage is more than 10 * Lmax.S of the smaller
damage (Lmax.L more than 10 * Lmax.S).
(2) Same Order

Two damages will be considered as being of the same order if Lmax.L

of the larger damage is less than or equal to 10 * Lmax.S of the
smaller damage (Lmax.L ≤ 10 * Lmax.S).

(3) Calculation of total damage area

Two damages areas will be considered as one damage area according to
their orders and the distance between the two damaged areas (X).
− Minimum distance for different orders: the greater of 50 mm (1.97
in) or 2.5 * Lmax.S.
− Minimum distance for same orders: the greater of 50 mm (1.97 in)
or 2.5 * Lmax.L.

When the distance (X) between two damages areas is less than the
minimum distance, the two damages must be enveloped together and the
area of the envelop is to considered as one damage area.
B. Repair Areas

If one damaged area is composed of several individual damages according

to paragraph 4.A., separate structural repairs can be performed in each
original individual area of damage only if the distance Y (see Figure
101) between the separate repairs contours is greater than 50 mm (1.97
in).

If a second repair is to be done near to an existing repair the minimum

acceptable distance, Y (see Figure 101) between two repair contours is
50 mm (1.97 in). If you have less than this distance, refer to the
manufacturer before you do the second repair.

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−22−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Distance Between Damaged Areas and Between Repair Areas

Figure 101

Page 103
Printed in Germany
55−22−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

5. Allowable Damage Description/Criteria

Page 104
Printed in Germany
55−22−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

INSPECTION
CRITERIA / REPAIR
DESCRIPTION PARAGRAPH / DIAGRAM INSTRUCTION REF
TYPE CATEGORY
ERENCE
Leading Edge Ribs Linear and 8.A./101 A, C −
Superficial
Damage

Table 101

Printed in Germany
55−22−12 PagesNov105/106
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter

51−11−14.
6. Allowable Damage

Allowable damage is damage that does not affect the necessary strength or
function of a component. You do not have to make a structural repair for
this type of damage. You must make a non structural repair. If this type
of damage has rough or sharp edges, smooth these out with the correct
abrasive cloth. Replace the surface paint if necessary.

7. Repair Limits

The repair limits data gives the time limits in which to make temporary
and permanent repairs. These time limits are given in flight cycles/hours
(FC/FH). The repair limits also tell you which type of repair you can do.
To find the repair limits data applicable to a damaged area, you must know
the following data:
− the repair zone applicable to the damaged area.
− the area, length or depth (as applicable) of the damage to the structure.
− the type of damage (for example: nick, scratch, delamination).

8. Elevator Leading Edge Ribs − Allowable Damage

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 102.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
A. Leading Edge Ribs − linear and superficial damage

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 102.

Page 107
Printed in Germany
55−22−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 102
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 101 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 103 and perform the corre
sponding repair action.

Page 108
Printed in Germany
55−22−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits − Elevator Leading Edge Ribs

Diagram 101

Printed in Germany
55−22−12 PagesNov109/110
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN

DAMAGE REPAIR AC REPAIR
TYPE OF DAMAGE REPAIR REFERENCE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR LIFE LIMIT INSPECTION DAMAGES X mm REPAIRS Y mm
SIZE TION CATEGORY
(in) (in)
The greater
Chapter 51−77−12 Chapter 51−77−12 value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 20 months.
paragraph 2.A paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
2.5 Lmax.
(1)
The greater
Linear damage
Chapter 51−77−12 value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(nicks, gouges Permanent A 20 months <1> None −
paragraph 3.B (1.97 in) or in)
and scratches).
2.5 Lmax.
The greater
Chapter 55−22−12, value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(2) Permanent A Immediately None −
Page Block 201 (1.97 in) or in)
2.5 Lmax.
The greater
Chapter 51−77−12 Chapter 51−77−12 value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Temporary C Immediately 20 months.
paragraph 2.A paragraph 2.A (1.97 in) or in)
Superficial dam
dam 2.5 Lmax.
(3)
ages and dela The greater
minations (with Refer to Table value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
Permanent A 20 months <1> None −
or without vis 104 (1.97 in) or in)
ible cracks and 2.5 Lmax.
hl )
holes). The greater
Chapter 55−22−12, value of 50 mm 50 mm (1.97
(4) Permanent A Immediately None −
Page Block 201 (1.97 in) or in)
2.5 Lmax.
Elevator Leading Edge Ribs
Table 103
<1> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

Printed in Germany
55−22−12 PagesNov111/112
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAM APPLICABLE REPAIR

DAMAGE DEPTH ACCESSIBILITY EXTENSION
AGE OF SRM CHAPTER 51
Superficial
damages and According to
delamination Partial allowable
Chapter 51−77−12
(with or thickness af − damage limit
paragraph 3.B.
without fected of relevant
cracks and/or chapter.
holes)
Superficial
damages and According to
delamination Access only allowable
Full thick Chapter 51−77−13
(with or from external damage limit
ness affected paragraph 2.H.
without face. of relevant
cracks and/or chapter.
holes)
Elevator Leading Edge Ribs
Table 104

Printed in Germany
55−22−12 PagesNov113/114
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR LEADING EDGE RIBS − REPAIRS

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

1. General
NOTE: For Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14

− CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

This topic contains all of the specific repair procedures for the Elevator
Leading Edge Ribs. The repair zones and allowable damage data for these re
pair procedures is in Chapter 55−22−00, Page Block 101.

2. Safety Precautions

There are risk to you and other persons when you work with composite re
pair materials. To prevent risks, read and obey the warnings given below.
WARNING: OBEY THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS WHEN YOU USE CLEANING AGENTS,
ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND PAINTS. THESE MATERIALS ARE DANGEROUS.

WARNING: WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND FILTER MASK WHEN YOU CUT,
ABRADE OR DRILL COMPOSITE MATERIALS. THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MA
TERIALS CAN GET INTO YOUR LUNGS OR ONTO YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE YOU
INJURY. IMMEDIATELY REMOVE DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.
WARNING: CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.
WHEN YOU WORK WITH CFRP COMPOSITE MATERIALS, IMMEDIATELY REMOVE
DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRIC POWER ON
THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST ONLY USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT REPAIR.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER TO PARA

GRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.
SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−22−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER REMARKS

No General Repairs applicable. − −

Table 201
4. Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs

INSPECTION
SPECIFIC REPAIR REPAIR
PARAGRAPH FIGURE INSTRUCTION
PROCEDURE CATEGORY
REFERENCE
Leading Edge 5.A. 201 A −
Rib, Flange
Repair (Skin
Plates not af
fected).
Leading Edge 5.B. 202 A −
Rib/Skin Plate
Repair (Skin
Plate af
fected).

Table 202
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−22−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

5. Elevator Leading Edge Rib Repairs

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 203.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.
SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

A. Leading Edge Rib, Flange Repair (Skin Plates not affected).

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: This repair is applicable to damage to the flange of the Leading

Edge Ribs ER2, ER3, ER6, ER7, ER8, and ER9.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 203
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 Weight Variant Information in the Introduc
tion of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variant and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−22−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Angle − Material 2024 T42 CLAD, 2 mm

− Glass Fiber Fabric
− Laminating Resin
− Liquid shim
− Solid shim
− Chemical Conversion Coating
− Sealant
− Sealant
− Polyurethane Primer
− Polyurethane Top Coat
− Varnish
− Release Agent
− Low adherence sealant
− Cleaning Agent
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 201)
(0.079 in) thickness
− Material No. 05−033, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−090 or 08−070,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−051, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material 2024 T3 CLAD
− Material No. 13−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−001C or 16−001B,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 07−001, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−093A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−015, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Remove the corresponding Leading Edge Access Panel to get access
to the damaged rib.

(b) Remove the existing fasteners installed in the damaged flange

(refer to Chapter 51−42−21).

(c) Mark with a felt tip pen the cut out line in the rib web.

(d) Cut out and remove the damaged rib flange.

NOTE: Maximum depth of blend−out 9 mm (0.35 in).

CAUTION: MAKE SURE THE CFRP MATERIAL IS NOT DAMAGED.

(e) Remove any trace of sealant in the skin with a plastic scraper.

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−22−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

(g) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
(h) Get the correct material (2024 T42 CLAD, 2 mm (0.079 in)) to
make the repair angle.

(i) Make the repair angle to the necessary shape and dimensions for
the repair.
(j) Put the repair angle in its correct position on the repair area
and secure with clamps.

(k) Mark on the repair angle flange the position of the existing
fastener holes.

NOTE: In order to mark the anchor nuts attachment holes, tempo

rally put the L/E access panel in its correct position.

(l) Mark on the repair angle web the new fastener holes.

NOTE: Install two fastener rows minimum. For fastener spacing and
margin data refer to Chapter 51−47−00.
(m) Remove the clamps and repair angle from the repair area.

(n) Pilot drill all the previously marked fastener holes (refer to
Chapter 51−44−00).

(o) Countersink the anchor nuts attachments holes (refer to Chapter

51−46−00).
(p) Put the repair angle in its correct repair position and secure
with screw pins.

(q) Transfer drill the repair angle web fastener holes to the rib
web.
(r) Drill all fastener holes to the final diameter for the fasteners
(refer to Chapter 51−43−00 for fastener oversize and alterna
tive).

(s) Remove the screw pins and the repair angle from the repair area.
(t) Apply the correct surface protection to the repair angle.

1 Apply chromic acid anodizing.

2 Apply a coat of polyurethane primer (Material No. 16−001B or

16−001C), refer to Chapter 51−75−12.
3 Apply a coat of polyurethane top coat (Material No. 16−018C),
refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

(u) Install the anchor nuts on the repair angle.

Page 205
Printed in Germany
55−22−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: IN ORDER TO AVOID CORROSION NEVER INSTALL UNPROTECTED METAL

LIC PARTS AND CFRP PARTS TOGETHER.
(v) Cut two pieces of glass fiber fabric (Material No. 05−033) 12 mm
(0.47 in) minimum larger than the repair angle dimensions.

(w) Impregnate the glass fiber pieces with laminating resin (Material
No. 08−090 or 08−070) (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.A)

(x) Put the glass fiber pieces in their correct positions.

(y) Install the vacuum bag and, if the repair cure is to be acceler
ated by the application of heat, the heating equipment (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D)

(z) Allow the repair to cure under vacuum pressure, (refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.E). If the repair cure is to be accelerated
by the application of heat, let the repair cure at the required
temperature and time, (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph
6.B.(2) and 5.E).

(aa)Remove the heating equipment and vacuum bag.

(ab)Abrade the repair surface with abrasive cloth grade 400.

(ac)Put the repair angle in position and check the possible clear
ances.

NOTE: Use liquid shim (Material No. 08−051) for gaps up to 0.5
mm (0.020 in) or solid shim (material 2024 T3 CLAD) for
gaps between 0.5 mm (0.020 in) up to 1.2 mm (0.047 in)
maximum.

NOTE: If solid shim is to be used then apply the correct surface

protection: chromic acid anodizing, polyurethane primer (Ma
terial No. 16−001B or 16−001C) and polyurethane top coat
(Material No. 16−018C).

(ad)Clean the repair area and repair angle with cleaning agent (Ma
terial No. 11−003).

(ae)Apply a coat of sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the repair

angle in the surfaces which shall contact with the glass fiber.

(af)Put the repair angle in its correct position on the repair area
and secure with screw pins.

(ag)Remove each screw pin in turn and wet install with sealant (Ma
terial No. 09−005) the correct fastener in the vacated screw pin
hole.

(ah)Remove the excess of sealant with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−003) and lint free cloth.

Page 206
Printed in Germany
55−22−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ai)Apply a bead of sealant (Material No. 09−002) to the edges of

the repair angle.
(aj)Let the sealants cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instruction leaf
let for data.

(ak)Apply a coat of varnish (Material No. 07−001) to the sealant

beads.

(al)Let the varnish cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instruction leaflet

for data.

(am)Install the L/E Access Panel.

1 Remove any trace of sealant from the L/E Access Panel with
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
2 Apply three coats of release agent (Material No. 05−093A) to
the inner contour of the panel.

NOTE: Time between coat 15 min. Final drying time 60 min.

3 Apply a coat of low adherence sealant (Material No. 09−015) to

the area of the panel to be in contact with the skin.

4 Reinstall the L/E Access Panel on the skin.

(an)Restore the surface protection. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Printed in Germany
55−22−12 PagesNov207/208
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Leading Edge Rib, Flange Repair (Skin Plates not affected)

Figure 201

Printed in Germany
55−22−12 PagesNov209/210
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 204.
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

B. Leading Edge Rib/Skin Plates Repair (Skin Plate affected)

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: This repair is applicable to damage affecting both the skin plate
and the flange of the Leading Edge Ribs ER2, ER3, ER6, ER7, ER8
and ER9.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 204
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 Weight Variant Information in the Introduc
tion of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

Page 211
Printed in Germany
55−22−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Angle − Material 2024 T42 CLAD, 2 mm

2 Repair Doubler
3 Repair Filler
− Glass Fiber Fabric
− Laminating Resin
− Liquid shim
− Solid shim
− Chemical Conversion Coating
− Sealant
− Sealant
− Polyurethane Primer
− Polyurethane Top Coat
− Varnish
− Low adherence sealant
− Cleaning Agent
− Release Agent
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 202)
(0.080 in) thickness
− Material 2024 T42 CLAD, 2 mm
(0.080 in) thickness
− Material 2024 T3 CLAD
− Material No. 05−033, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−090 or 08−070,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 08−051, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material 2024 T3 CLAD
− Material No. 13−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−001C or 16−001B,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00.
− Material No. 07−001, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−015, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−093A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Remove the corresponding Leading Edge Access Panel to get access
to the damaged rib.

(b) Remove the existing fasteners installed in the damaged flange

(refer to Chapter 51−42−21).

(c) Mark with a felt tip pen the cut out line in the rib web and in
the skin plate.

Page 212
Printed in Germany
55−22−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(d) Cut out and remove the damaged rib flange.

NOTE: Maximum depth of blend−out 9 mm (0.35 in).

(e) Cut out and remove the damaged skin plate.

CAUTION: MAKE SURE THE CFRP MATERIAL IS NOT DAMAGED.

(f) Remove any trace of sealant in the skin with a plastic scraper.

(g) Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

(h) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(i) Get the correct material (2024 T42 CLAD, 2 mm (0.079 in)) to
make the repair doubler.

(j) Make the repair doubler to the necessary shape and dimensions for
the repair.

(k) Put the repair doubler in its correct position on the repair
area and secure with clamps.

(l) In order to mark the anchor nuts holes, temporally put the L/E
access panel in its correct position.
(m) Mark on the repair doubler the position the existing anchor nuts
holes thru the L/E access panel and the existing fastener holes
thru the skin plate.

(n) Remove the L/E access panel, the clamps and the repair doubler
from the repair area.

(o) Mark on the repair doubler the rest of the fastener holes.

(p) Pilot drill all the previously marked fastener hole positions.

(q) Put the repair doubler in its correct position on the skin plate
and secure with clamps.

(r) Transfer the fastener hole positions from the repair doubler to
the skin plate.

(s) Remove the clamps and secure the repair doubler with screw pins.
(t) Get the correct material (2024 T42 CLAD, 2 mm (0.079 in)) to
make the repair angle.

(u) Make the repair angle to the necessary shape and dimensions for
the repair.

(v) Put the repair angle in its correct position on the repair area
and secure with clamps.

Page 213
Printed in Germany
55−22−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(w) Mark on the repair angle flange the position of the repair dou
bler fastener holes.
(x) Mark on the repair angle web the new fastener holes.

NOTE: Install two fastener rows minimum. For fastener spacing and
margin data refer to Chapter 51−47−00.

(y) Remove the clamps and repair angle from the repair area.
(z) Pilot drill all the previously marked fastener holes on the re
pair angle (both, web and flange), (refer to Chapter 51−44−00).

(aa)Drill and countersink the anchor nuts attachments holes, (refer

to Chapter 51−46−00).

(ab)Put the repair angle in its correct repair position and secure
with screw pins.

(ac)Transfer drill the repair angle web fastener holes to the rib
web.

(ad)Get the correct material (2024 T3 CLAD) to make the repair fill
er.

(ae)Make the repair filler to the correct shape and dimensions for
the skin plate cut out.

(af)Put the repair filler in its correct position on the doubler and
secure with clamps.
(ag)Transfer the fastener holes positions from the repair angle/re
pair doubler to the repair filler.

(ah)Remove the repair parts from the repair area.

(ai)Deburr all the repair parts edges with an abrasive cloth grade
400.

(aj)Clean the repair parts with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(ak)Apply the correct surface protection to the repair doubler, re

pair angle and repair filler.
1 Apply chromic acid anodizing.

2 Apply a coat of polyurethane primer (Material No. 16−001B or

16−001C). Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

3 Apply a coat of polyurethane top coat (Material No. 16−018C).

Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

(al)Put the repair parts in their correct position on the repair

area and secure with screw pins.

Page 214
Printed in Germany
55−22−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(am)Drill all the fastener holes to the final diameter for the fas
teners, (refer to Chapter 51−43−00 for fastener oversize and al
ternative).

(an)Remove the screw pins and the repair parts from the repair area.

(ao)Apply chemical conversion coating (Material No. 13−002) to the

fastener holes.

(ap)Install the anchor nuts on the repair angle.

WARNING: IN ORDER TO AVOID CORROSION NEVER INSTALL UNPROTECTED METAL
LIC PARTS AND CFRP PARTS TOGETHER.

(aq)Cut one piece of glass fiber fabric (Material No. 05−033) minimum
12 mm (0.47 in) larger than the repair angle web to isolate the
repair angle from the rib web and Front Spar flange.

(ar)Cut one piece of glass fiber fabric (Material No. 05−033) minimum
12 mm (0.47 in) larger than the repair doubler to isolate the
repair doubler from the skin plate.

(as)Impregnate the glass fiber pieces with laminating resin (Material

No. 08−090 or 08−070), refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.A.

(at)Put the glass fiber pieces in their correct position.

(au)Install the vacuum bag and, if the repair cure is to be acceler

ated by the application of heat, the heating equipment, (refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.).

(av)Allow the repair to cure under vacuum pressure, (refer to Chapter

51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.). If the repair cure is to be acceler
ated by the application of heat, let the repair cure at the re
quired temperature and time, (refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para
graph 6.B.(2) and 5.E.).

(aw)Remove the heating equipment and vacuum bag.

(ax)Abrade the repair surface with abrasive cloth grade 400.

(ay)Put the repair doubler and the repair angle in position and
check the possible clearances.

NOTE: Use liquid shim (Material No. 08−051) for gaps up to 0.5
mm (0.020 in) or solid shim (material 2024 T3 CLAD) for
gaps between 0.5 mm (0.020 in) up to 1.2 mm (0.047 in)
maximum.
NOTE: If solid shim is to be used then apply the correct surface
protection: chromic acid anodizing, polyurethane primer (Ma
terial No. 16−001B or 16−001C) and polyurethane top coat
(Material No. 16−018C).

Page 215
Printed in Germany
55−22−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(az)Clean the repair area and repair parts with cleaning agent (Ma
terial No. 11−003).
(ba)Apply a coat of sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the repair
parts to the surfaces which shall be in contact.

(bb)Put the repair parts in their correct position on the repair

area and secure with screw pins.

(bc)Remove each screw pin in turn and wet install with sealant (Ma
terial No. 09−005) the correct fastener in the vacated screw pin
hole.

(bd)Remove the excess of sealant with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−003) and lint free cloth.
(be)Apply a bead of sealant (Material No. 09−002) to the edges of
the repair parts.

(bf)Let the sealants cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instruction leaf

let for data.

(bg)Apply a coat of varnish (Material No. 07−001) to all the sealant

beads.

(bh)Let the varnish cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instruction leaflet

for data.

(bi)Install the L/E Access Panel.

1 Remove any trace of sealant from the L/E Access Panel with
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

2 Apply three coats of release agent (Material No. 05−093A) to

the inner contour of the panel.
NOTE: Time between coat 15 min. Final drying time 60 min.

3 Apply a coat of low adherence sealant (Material No. 09−015) to

the area of the panel to be in contact with the skin.

4 Reinstall the L/E Access Panel on the skin.

(bj) Restore the surface protection. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 216
Printed in Germany
55−22−12 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Leading Edge Rib/Skin Repair (Skin Plates affected)

Figure 202

Printed in Germany
55−22−12 PagesNov217/218
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR OUTBOARD TIP AND INBOARD END CAP

1. Structural Arrangement

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Structural Arrangement Figure 1

1 Inboard End Cap Chapter 55−24−11
5 Outboard Tip Chapter 55−24−11
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−24−00 AugPage 1
01/14
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structural Arrangement
Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55-24-00 FebPage 2
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR OUTBOARD TIP AND INBOARD END CAP − ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT PARAGRAPH.

CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER TO

PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVALUA
TION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.
SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

1. General

NOTE: For definition of allowable damage refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14

− CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

NOTE: For Damage Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

This topic contains the allowable damage and related data applicable to the
Elevator Outboard Tip and Inboard End Cap (refer to Figures 102 and 103).
This data is necessary to find the correct repair procedure.
NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−24−11, Page Block 101, , Paragraph 1.

2. Damage Evaluation

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−24−11, Page Block 101, , Paragraph 2.
3. Type of Damage

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−24−11, Page Block 101, , Paragraph 3.

4. Distance Between Damage Areas and Distance Between Repair Areas

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−24−00 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

− Chapter 55−24−11, Page Block 101, , Paragraph 4.

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−24−00 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Distance Between Damaged Areas and Between Repair Areas

Figure 101

Page 103
Printed in Germany
55−24−00 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

5. Repair Zones

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−24−11, Page Block 101, , Paragraph 5.

Page 104
Printed in Germany
55−24−00 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Outboard Tip Structure

Figure 102

Page 105
Printed in Germany
55−24−00 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ITEM NAME Refer to the following figures for details of

allowable damage and repair limits according to
damage type
SUPERFICIAL DAMAGE CRACKS, HOLES AND DENTS
(NICKS, SCRATCHES,
ABRASIONS, GOUGES)
1 Skin <1> <1>
2 Ribs <1> <1>
Table 101
<1> Refer to Table 103.

Page 106
Printed in Germany
55−24−00 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Inboard End Cap Structure

Figure 103

Page 107
Printed in Germany
55−24−00 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ITEM NAME Refer to the following figures for details

of allowable damage and repair limits ac
cording to damage type
LINEAR AND SUPERFI DELAMINATION WITH OR
CIAL DAMAGE (NICKS, WITHOUT VISIBLE
SCRATCHES, ABRASIONS, CRACKS AND HOLES
GOUGES)
1 Skin <1> <1>
2 Profile, Trailing Edge <1> <1>
Table 102
<1> Refer to Table 103.

6. Allowable Damage Description/Criteria

DESCRIPTION CRITERIA/ TYPE DIAGRAM/ REPAIR INSPECTION

PARAGRAPH CATEGORY INSTRUCTION REF
ERENCE
Outboard Tip, Superficial Diagram A, C −
Skin Damage (Nicks, 101,
Scratches, Paragraph
Abrasions, 9.A.
Gouges). This INACTIVE
allowable dam
age data is
inactive since
revision dated
Feb 01/15, it
has been moved
to Chapter
55−24−11, Page
Block 101,
Paragraph 9.A.
Outboard Tip, Cracks, Holes Paragraph A, C −
Skin and Dents. This 9.A.
allowable dam INACTIVE
age data is
inactive since
revision dated
Feb 01/15, it
has been moved
to Chapter
55−24−11, Page
Block 101,
Paragraph 9.B.

Table 103

Page 108
Printed in Germany
55−24−00 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

DESCRIPTION CRITERIA/ TYPE DIAGRAM/ REPAIR INSPECTION

PARAGRAPH CATEGORY INSTRUCTION REF
ERENCE
Outboard Tip, Superficial Diagram101 A, C −
Ribs Damage (Nicks, , Para
Scratches, graph
Abrasions, 9.A.
Gouges). This INACTIVE
allowable dam
age data is
inactive since
revision dated
Feb 01/15, it
has been moved
to Chapter
55−24−11, Page
Block 101,
Paragraph 9.A.
Outboard Tip, Cracks, Holes Paragraph A, C −
Ribs and Dents. This 9.A.
allowable dam INACTIVE
age data is
inactive since
revision dated
Feb 01/15, it
has been moved
to Chapter
55−24−11, Page
Block 101,
Paragraph 9.B.

Table 103

Page 109
Printed in Germany
55−24−00 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

DESCRIPTION CRITERIA/ TYPE DIAGRAM/ REPAIR INSPECTION

PARAGRAPH CATEGORY INSTRUCTION REF
ERENCE
Inboard End Cap Linear and Su Diagram A, C −
Skin perficial Dam 102,
age (Nicks, Sheet 1,
Scratches, Paragraph
Abrasions, 9.B.
Gouges). This INACTIVE
allowable dam
age data is
inactive since
revision dated
Feb 01/15, it
has been moved
to Chapter
55−24−11, Page
Block 101,
Paragraph
10.A.<1>
Inboard End Cap Delamination Diagram A, C −
Skin with or without 102,
visible cracks Sheet 2,
and holes. This Paragraph
allowable dam 9.B.
age data is INACTIVE
inactive since
revision dated
Feb 01/15, it
has been moved
to Chapter
55−24−11, Page
Block 101,
Paragraph
10.B.<1>

Table 103

Page 110
Printed in Germany
55−24−00 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

DESCRIPTION CRITERIA/ TYPE DIAGRAM/ REPAIR INSPECTION

PARAGRAPH CATEGORY INSTRUCTION REF
ERENCE
Inboard End Cap Linear and Su Diagram A, C −
Profile, Trail perficial Dam 102,
ing Edge age (Nicks, Sheet 1,
Scratches, Paragraph
Abrasions, 9.B.
Gouges). This INACTIVE
allowable dam
age data is
inactive since
revision dated
Feb 01/15, it
has been moved
to Chapter
55−24−11, Page
Block 101,
Paragraph
10.A.<1>
Inboard End Cap Delamination Diagram A, C −
Profile, Trail with or without 102,
ing Edge visible cracks Sheet 2,
and holes. This Paragraph
allowable dam 9.B.
age data is INACTIVE
inactive since
revision dated
Feb 01/15, it
has been moved
to Chapter
55−24−11, Page
Block 101,
Paragraph
10.B.<1>

Table 103
<1> This allowable damage is only applicable before Modification 23911.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter

51−11−14.

7. Allowable Damage

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:

Page 111
Printed in Germany
55−24−00 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

− Chapter 55−24−11, Page Block 101, , Paragraph 7.

8. Repair Limits

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−24−11, Page Block 101, , Paragraph 8.

9. Elevator Outboard Tip and Inboard End Cap− Allowable Damage

Page 112
Printed in Germany
55−24−00 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Outboard Tip − Repair Zones

Figure 104

Page 113
Printed in Germany
55−24−00 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Inboard End Cap − Repair Zones

Figure 105 (sheet 1)

Page 114
Printed in Germany
55−24−00 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Inboard End Cap − Repair Lay−up and Ply Orientation

Figure 105 (sheet 2)

Page 115
Printed in Germany
55−24−00 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 104.
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

A. Elevator Outboard Tip

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 104
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

The following allowable damage limits are applicable to the Elevator

Outboard Tip:

(1) Linear and superficial damage (nicks, gouges, abrasions, corrosion

and scratches):
NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the appli
cable Chapter:
− Chapter 55−24−11, Page Block 101, , Paragraph 9.A.

(2) Dents:

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the appli
cable Chapter:
− Chapter 55−24−11, Page Block 101, , Paragraph 9.B.
(3) Cracks:
NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the appli
cable Chapter:
− Chapter 55−24−11, Page Block 101, , Paragraph 9.B.

Page 116
Printed in Germany
55−24−00 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage − Elevator Outboard Tip

Diagram 101

Page 117
Printed in Germany
55−24−00 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 105.
CAUTION: THIS ALLOWABLE DAMAGE INFORMATION IS ONLY APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFI
CATION 23911.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

B. Allowable Damage − Elevator Inboard End Cap

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 010
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 105
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

The following allowable damage limits are applicable to the Elevator In
board End Cap:
(1) Linear and superficial damage (nicks, gouges, abrasions and
scratches):

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the appli
cable Chapter:
− Chapter 55−24−11, Page Block 101, , Paragraph 10.A.

(2) Delamination (with or without visible cracks and holes):

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the appli
cable Chapter:
− Chapter 55−24−11, Page Block 101, , Paragraph 10.B.

Page 118
Printed in Germany
55−24−00 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage − Elevator End Cap, All Zones

Diagram 102 (sheet 1)

Page 119
Printed in Germany
55−24−00 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage − Elevator End Cap, All Zones

Diagram 102 (sheet 2)

Page 120
Printed in Germany
55−24−00 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE DEPTH ACCESSIBILITY EXTENSION APPLICABLE RE

PAIR OF SRM
CHAPTER 51
Linear damage Damaged area
(nicks, less than or Chapter
Partial thick
gouges, abra − equal to 5000 51−77−12 para
ness affected
sions and mm (7.75 graph 3.B.<3>
scratches)<1> in).
Damaged area
less than or Chapter
Partial thick
− equal to 5000 51−77−12 para
ness affected
mm (7.75 graph 3.B.<3>
Superficial in).
damages and Damaged area
delamination less than or Chapter
Full thickness Access from
(with or with equal to 5000 51−77−13 para
affected both faces.
out cracks mm (7.75 graph 2.H. <3>
and/or in).
h l )<2>
holes)<2> Damaged area
Access only less than or Chapter
Full thickness
from external equal to 5000 51−77−13 para
affected
face. mm (7.75 graph 2.H. <3>
in).
Inboard End Cap Permanent Repairs on Monolithic Areas
Table 106
<1> This information has been moved to the applicable Chapter:

− Chapter 55−24−11, Page Block 101, , Paragraph 10.A.

<2> This information has been moved to the applicable Chapter:

− Chapter 55−24−11, Page Block 101, , Paragraph 10.B.

<3> After Repair, apply Pore Filler Material No. 16−050 or 16−052,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00

Printed in Germany
55−24−00 PagesFeb121/122
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE DEPTH ELEMENT OF SANDWICH PANEL ACCESSIBILITY EXTENSION APPLICABLE REPAIR OF SRM
AFFECTED CHAPTER 51
Damaged area less than
Partial sandwich thick One sandwich skin (core Chapter 51−77−12 paragraph
− or equal to 5000 mm
Linear damage (nicks, ness affected. not affected). 3.B.<3>
(7.75 in).
gouges abrasions and
gouges,
scratches)<1> Damaged area less than
Partial sandwich thick Chamfer area (core not Chapter 51−77−12 paragraph
− or equal to 5000 mm
ness affected. exposed or damaged). 3.B.<3>
(7.75 in).
Damaged area less than
Partial sandwich thick One sandwich skin plus Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph
− or equal to 1000 mm
ness affected. core. 2.H.<3>
(1.55 in).
Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph
2.A.(2). Option D, three
Partial sandwich thick One sandwich skin plus Damaged area greater than
− wet lay−up layers,
ness affected. core. 1000 mm (1.55 in).
orientation ±45/0−90/±45.
Perform core closing.<3>
Superficial damages and Damaged area less than
Partial sandwich thick Chamfer area (core not Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph
delamination (with or − or equal to 1000 mm
ness affected. exposed or damaged). 2.H.<3>
without cracks and/or (1.55 in).
holes)<2> Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph
Partial sandwich thick Damaged area greater than
Chamfer area. − 2.G.(4). Perform core
ness affected. 1000 mm (1.55 in).
closing.<3>
Damaged area less than
Full sandwich thickness Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph
Center panel area. Access from both faces. or equal to 1000 mm
affected. 2.H.<3><4>
(1.55 in).
Damaged area less than
Full sandwich thickness Access from external Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph
Center panel area. or equal to 1000 mm
affected. face. 2.H.<3>
(1.55 in).
Inboard End Cap Permanent Repairs on Sandwich Areas
Table 107

Page 123
Printed in Germany
55−24−00 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE DEPTH ELEMENT OF SANDWICH PANEL ACCESSIBILITY EXTENSION APPLICABLE REPAIR OF SRM
AFFECTED CHAPTER 51
Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph
2.L, three wet lay−up
Full sandwich thickness Damaged area greater than
Center panel area. Access from both faces. layers, orientation
affected. 1000 mm (1.55 in).
±45/0−90/±45. Perform core
closing.<3><4>
Superficial damages and Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph
Full sandwich thickness Access from external Damaged area greater than
delamination (with or Center panel area. 2.E.Option D. Perform core
affected. face. 1000 mm (1.55 in).
without cracks and/or closing.<3>
holes)<2> Damaged area less than
Full sandwich thickness Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph
Chamfer area. − or equal to 1000 mm
affected. 2.H.<3>
(1.55 in).
Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph
Full sandwich thickness Damaged area greater than
Chamfer area. − 2.G.(4). Perform core
affected. 1000 mm (1.55 in).
closing.<3>
Inboard End Cap Permanent Repairs on Sandwich Areas
Table 107
<1> This information has been moved to the applicable Chapter:

− Chapter 55−24−11, Page Block 101, , Paragraph 10.A.

<2> This information has been moved to the applicable Chapter:

− Chapter 55−24−11, Page Block 101, , Paragraph 10.B.

<3> After Repair, apply Pore Filler Material No. 16−050 or 16−052, refer to Chapter 51−35−00
<4> Perform the repair in two steps. First one face (Skin and core restoration). Second, the opposite side (only skin).

Page 124
Printed in Germany
55−24−00 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR OUTBOARD TIP AND INBOARD END CAP

1. Identification Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Outboard Tip Figure 1

− Inboard End Cap Figure 2
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 AugPage 1
01/14
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Outboard Tip
Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55-24-11 NovPage 2
01/03
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Tip Assy, Out D55282910000 PB 201

board 001 55−24−00
5 Welded Assembly D55282910002 PB 201
003 55−24−00
10 Rib, Front 3.1364T3 D55282910204 PB 201
LN9073 205 55−24−00
1(0.039)
15 Rib, Rear 3.1364T3 D55282910206 PB 201
LN9073 207 55−24−00
1(0.039)
20 Strap 3.1364T3 D55282910208 PB 201
LN9073 209 55−24−00
1,8(0.071)
25 Retainer, Tip 180−12(611R)
30 Dicharger 2−14−SC−1
35 Retainer, Trail NSA936221−01
ing
40 Discharger 2−16−SC−1
45 Adaptor 3.1354T3511 D55282911200
LN1798
ASSY Dwg.: D55280001, D55282910

Key to Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 AugPage 3
01/14
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Inboard End Cap

Figure 2 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-24-11 NovPage 4
01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Inboard End Cap

Figure 2 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-24-11 NovPage 5
01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Inboard End Cap

Figure 2 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55-24-11 NovPage 6
01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Inboard End Cap

Figure 2 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55-24-11 NovPage 7
01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Inboard End Cap

Figure 2 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55-24-11 NovPage 8
01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Inboard End Cap

Figure 2 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 AugPage 9
01/13
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Inboard End Cap

Figure 2 (sheet 7)

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 AugPage01/1310
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Inboard End Cap

Figure 2 (sheet 8)

Printed in Germany
55-24-11 NovPage01/0311
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Inboard End Cap

Figure 2 (sheet 9)

Printed in Germany
55-24-11 NovPage01/0312
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Inboard End Cap

Figure 2 (sheet 10)

Printed in Germany
55-24-11 NovPage01/0313
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Inboard End Cap

Figure 2 (sheet 11)

Printed in Germany
55-24-11 NovPage01/0314
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 End Cap, Inboard Composite D55282900002 PB 201

003 55−24−00
1A End Cap, Inboard Composite D55282902000 PB 201 A23911G0189
001 55−24−00
1B End Cap, Inboard Composite D55282902004 PB 201 A35515G0431
005 55−24−00
5 Profile, Trail Z−14.333 D55282901202 PB 201
ing Edge 203 55−24−00
5A Profile, Trail Z−14.333 D55282901204 PB 201 A23911G0189
ing Edge 205 55−24−00
10 Core 3/16−3 Z−17.152 D55282900200 PB 201
201 55−24−00
10(0.394)
15 Core 3/16−4 Z−17.151 D55282900202 PB 201
203 55−24−00
10(0.394)
20 Core 3/16−3 Z−17.152 D55282900204 PB 201
205 55−24−00
10(0.394)
25 Film, Adhesive Z−15.425
30 Tedlar Z−14.310
ASSY Dwg.: D55280001, D55280002, D55282900, D55282902

Key to Figure 2

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Pages 15/16
Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR OUTBOARD TIP AND INBOARD END CAP − ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT PARAGRAPH.

CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER TO

PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVALUA
TION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.
SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

1. General

NOTE: For definition of allowable damage refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14

− CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

NOTE: For Damage Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

This topic contains the allowable damage and related data applicable to the
Elevator Outboard Tip and Inboard End Cap (refer to Figures 102 and 103).
This data is necessary to find the correct repair procedure.
2. Damage Evaluation

Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−11−00 paragraph 2 for data related to the metallic
structure. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data related to the
composite structure.
3. Type of Damage

The main types of damage which can occur to the Elevator Outboard Tip are
holes, scratches and dents. Refer to Chapter 51−11−00, table 1 for full
definition of the types of damage that can occur to the metallic structure.
The two main types of damage which can occur to the Elevator Inboard End
Cap are as follows (refer to Chapter 51−77−10 for full definition of the
types of damage that can occur to the composite structure):

A. Delamination with or without visible cracks and holes, debonding and

dents.
This is when the structure is hit by an object which results in one or
more of the following:
− broken plies
− separation between the plies
− separation between the skin and honeycomb
Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

− structure pushed in with respect to the usual contour.

B. Superficial Damage

This is when the structure is damaged only on the external surface, with
no damage to the internal structure. Nicks and scratches are examples of
superficial damage.

4. Distance Between Damage Areas and Distance Between Repair Areas

NOTE: This paragraph only affects to the composite structure.

There is a minimum permitted distance between damaged areas and repair

areas (refer to Figure 101):

A. Damaged Areas
If the distance between two areas of damage is (X) more than 50 mm
(1.97 in), the total area to be considered depends on the order of the
two damages.

(1) Different Order

The damages will be considered as being of different orders if LmaxL

of the larger damage is more than 10 × LmaxS of the smaller damage
(LmaxL more than 10 × LmaxS).

(2) Same Order

Two damages will be considered as being of the same order if LmaxL

of the larger damage is less than or equal to 10 × LmaxS of the
smaller damage (LmaxL ≤ 10 × LmaxS).

(3) Calculation of total damage area

Two damages areas will be considered as one damage area according to

their orders and the distance between the two damaged areas (X).
− Minimum distance for different orders: the greater of 50 mm (1.97
in) or 2.5 × LmaxS.
− Minimum distance for same orders: the greater of 50 mm (1.97 in)
or 2.5 × LmaxL.
When the distance (X) between two damages areas is less than the
minimum distance, the two damages must be enveloped together and the
area of the envelop is to considered as one damage area.

B. Repair Areas
The minimum acceptable distance between two repair areas (Y) is 50 mm
(1.97 in). If you have less than this distance, refer to Airbus.

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Distance Between Damaged Areas and Between Repair Areas

Figure 101

Page 103
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

5. Repair Zones

Each of the components of the Elevator Outboard Tip and Inboard End Cap
structure is divided into repair zones. These repair zones show the zones
of different repair configuration of the component and the applicability of
each type of structural repair. When you do a damage evaluation (refer to
paragraph 2.), you must refer to the repair zone data. The repair zone
data of the structure is in Figure 104 and 105.

Page 104
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Outboard Tip Structure

Figure 102

Page 105
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Inboard End Cap Structure

Figure 103

Page 106
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

6. Allowable Damage Description/Criteria

DESCRIPTION CRITERIA/ PARAGRAPH/ REPAIR INSPECTION

TYPE DIAGRAM CATEGORY INSTRUCTION REF
ERENCE
Outboard Tip Skin (Item Superficial Diagram A, C −
1) and Ribs (Item 2) Damage 101,
(Nicks, Paragraph
Scratches, 9.A.
Abrasions,
Gouges and
Corrosion)
Outboard Tip Skin (Item Cracks, Paragraph A, C −
1) and Ribs (Item 2) Holes and 9.B.
Dents
Inboard End Cap Skin Linear and Diagram A, C −
(Item 3) and Trailing Superficial 102,
Edge (Item 4) Damage Paragraph
(Nicks, 10.A.
Scratches,
Abrasions,
Gouges and
Corrosion)
<1>
Inboard End Cap Skin Delamina Diagram A, C −
(Item 3) and Trailing tion (with 103,
Edge (Item 4) or without Paragraph
visible 10.B.
cracks and
holes)<1>

Table 101
<1> This allowable damage is only applicable before Modification 23911.
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

7. Allowable Damage

Allowable damage is damage that does not affect the required strength or
function of the structural component. It does not have to be repaired with
these considerations.

This type of damage does not grow during the aircraft life; the inspection
procedures, intervals and threshold are not affected. If this has rough or
damaged edges, smooth these out with the correct abrasive cloth (refer to
Chapter 51−77−10 paragraph 4.B. for repair data). Replace the surface paint

Page 107
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

if necessary. The allowable damage must be assessed after the damaged mate
rial has been removed and the damaged area smoothed.
8. Repair Limits

The repair limits data gives the time limits in which to make temporary
and permanent repairs. These time limits are given in flight cycles/hours
(FC/FH). The repair limits also tell you which type of repair you can do.
To find the repair limits data applicable to a damaged area, you must know
the following data:
− The repair zone applicable to the damaged area.
− The area, length or depth (as applicable) of the damage to the structure.
− The type of damage (for example: nick, scratch, delamination).

9. Elevator Outboard Tip − Allowable Damage

Page 108
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Outboard Tip − Repair Zones

Figure 104

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesFeb109/110
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Inboard End Cap − Repair Zones

Figure 105 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesFeb111/112
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Inboard End Cap − Repair Lay−up and Ply Orientation

Figure 105 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesFeb113/114
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 102.
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

A. Elevator Outboard Tip, Skin and Ribs − Superficial Damage (Nicks,

Scratches, Abrasions, Gouges and Corrosion)

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 102
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 101 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 103 and perform the corre
sponding repair action.

Page 115
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage − Elevator Outboard Tip

Diagram 101

Page 116
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN MIN. DIS

TANCE
DAMAGE TYPE OF REPAIR TIME LIMIT BE REPAIR LIFE LIM INSPECTION RE
TYPE OF DAMAGE REPAIR REFERENCE FROM FAS
SIZE REPAIR CATEGORY FORE REPAIR IT QUIRED DAMAGE X mm REPAIRS Y TENER
(in) mm (in) AREA
The greater
value of 50
1 Permanent A <1> Immediately None No 50 (1.97) −
(1.97) or
2.5 Lmax.<4>
The greater
Chapter 51−77−12, value of 50
Temporary C Immediately 20 months DVI <2> 50 (1.97) −
paragraph 2.A. (1.97) or
2.5 Lmax.<4>
Linear and S
Su 2
The greater
perficial Damage
Chapter 55−24−11, Next 20 months value of 50
Permanent A None No 50 (1.97) −
Page Block 201 <3> (1.97) or
2.5 Lmax.<4>
The greater
Chapter 55−24−11, value of 50
3 Permanent A Immediately None No 50 (1.97) −
Page Block 201 (1.97) or
2.5 Lmax.<4>
4 − − Contact AIRBUS Immediately − − − − −

Table 103
<1> Smooth out the damaged area.

− For scratches, dents, cracks, blending and rework, Refer to Chapter 51−73−00.

− For corrosion, Refer to Chapter 55−74−00.

Restore de surface protection.

<2> The High Speed tape must be visually inspected each 100 days.
Replace the tape if necessary.

<3> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

<4> Lmax is the maximum size of the damage.

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesFeb117/118
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 104.
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

B. Elevator Outboard Tip, Skin and Ribs − Cracks, Holes and Dents

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 104
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

(1) Dents:
− Maximum area: Area between supports.
− Maximum depth: 10% of the shortest distance between the middle of
the dent and nearest support. Repair category A.
Dents exceeding 10% but less than 20%, without cracks and without
damage to internal structure must be repaired before 20 months.
Repair category C.

(2) Cracks: Cracks up to 100 mm (3.94 in) long must be repaired before
20 months. The damaged area must be protected with high speed tape
(HTS). The HST must be inspected every 100 days. Replace the tape if
required (HTS Repair category C).

Page 119
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

10. Elevator Inboard End Cap − Allowable Damage

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 105.

CAUTION: THIS ALLOWABLE DAMAGE INFORMATION IS ONLY APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFI

CATION 23911.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.
IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE
EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

A. Elevator Inboard End Cap and Trailing Edge − Linear and Superficial Dam
age (Nicks, Scratches, Abrasions, Gouges and Corrosion)

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 010
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 105
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.
(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 102 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 106 and perform the corre
sponding repair action.

Page 120
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage − Elevator End Cap, All Zones

Diagram 102

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesFeb121/122
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN MIN. DIS

TANCE
DAMAGE TYPE OF REPAIR TIME LIMIT BE REPAIR LIFE LIM INSPECTION RE
TYPE OF DAMAGE REPAIR REFERENCE FROM FAS
SIZE REPAIR CATEGORY FORE REPAIR IT QUIRED DAMAGE X mm REPAIRS Y TENER
(in) mm (in) AREA
The greater
Chapter 51−77−12, value of 50
Temporary C Immediately 20 months DVI <1> 50 (1.97) −
paragraph 2.A. (1.97) or
2.5 Lmax.<4>
1
The greater
Next 20 months value of 50
Linear and Su Permanent A <2> None No 50 (1.97) −
<3> (1.97) or
perficial Damage 2.5 Lmax.<4>
The greater
Chapter 55−24−11, value of 50
2 Permanent A Immediately None No 50 (1.97) −
Page Block 201 (1.97) or
2.5 Lmax.<4>
3 − − Contact AIRBUS Immediately − − − − −

Table 106
<1> The High Speed tape must be visually inspected each 100 days.

Replace the tape if necessary.

<2> Refer to Tables 107 and 108.

<3> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

<4> Lmax is the maximum size of the damage.

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesFeb123/124
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE DEPTH ACCESSIBILITY EXTENSION APPLICABLE RE

PAIR OF SRM
CHAPTER 51
Linear and Su
perficial Dam Damaged area
age (nicks, less than or Chapter
Partial thick
gouges, abra − equal to 5000 51−77−12 para
ness affected
sions, mm (7.75 graph 3.B.<1>
scratches and in).
corrosion)
Inboard End Cap Permanent Repairs on Monolithic Areas
Table 107
<1> After Repair, apply Pore Filler Material No. 16−050 or 16−052,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesFeb125/126
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE DEPTH ELEMENT OF SANDWICH PANEL ACCESSIBILITY EXTENSION APPLICABLE REPAIR OF SRM
AFFECTED CHAPTER 51
Damaged area less than
Partial sandwich thick One sandwich skin (core Chapter 51−77−12 paragraph
Linear and Superficial − or equal to 5000 mm
ness affected. not affected). 3.B.<1>
Damage
g (nicks, , gouges,
g g , (7.75 in).
abrasions, scratches and Damaged area less than
corrosion) Partial sandwich thick Chamfer area (core not Chapter 51−77−12 paragraph
− or equal to 5000 mm
ness affected. exposed or damaged). 3.B.<1>
(7.75 in).
Inboard End Cap Permanent Repairs on Sandwich Areas
Table 108
<1> After Repair, apply Pore Filler Material No. 16−050 or 16−052, refer to Chapter 51−35−00

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesFeb127/128
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 109.
CAUTION: THIS ALLOWABLE DAMAGE INFORMATION IS ONLY APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFI
CATION 23911.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

B. Elevator Inboard End Cap and Trailing Edge − Delamination (with or with
out visible cracks and holes)

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 010
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 109
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 103 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.

(2) Find the applicable Damage Size in Table 110 and perform the corre
sponding repair action.

Page 129
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage − Elevator End Cap, All Zones

Diagram 103

Page 130
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN MIN. DIS

TANCE
DAMAGE TYPE OF REPAIR TIME LIMIT BE REPAIR LIFE LIM INSPECTION RE
TYPE OF DAMAGE REPAIR REFERENCE FROM FAS
SIZE REPAIR CATEGORY FORE REPAIR IT QUIRED DAMAGE X mm REPAIRS Y TENER
(in) mm (in) AREA
The greater
Chapter 51−77−12, value of 50
Temporary C Immediately 20 months DVI <1> 50 (1.97) −
paragraph 2.A. (1.97) or
2.5 Lmax.<4>
1
The greater
Delamination Next 20 months value of 50
(with or without Permanent A <2> None No 50 (1.97) −
<3> (1.97) or
cracks and/or 2.5 Lmax.<4>
holes)
The greater
Chapter 55−24−11, value of 50
2 Permanent A Immediately None No 50 (1.97) −
Page Block 201 (1.97) or
2.5 Lmax.<4>
3 − − Contact AIRBUS Immediately − − − − −

Table 110
<1> The High Speed tape must be visually inspected each 100 days.

Replace the tape if necessary.

<2> Refer to Tables 111 and 112.

<3> This time limit before repair is valid only if the damaged area is repaired with a temporary repair before accomplishing the permanent repair.

<4> Lmax is the maximum size of the damage.

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesFeb131/132
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE DEPTH ACCESSIBILITY EXTENSION APPLICABLE RE

PAIR OF SRM
CHAPTER 51
Damaged area
less than or Chapter
Partial thick
− equal to 5000 51−77−12 para
ness affected
mm (7.75 graph 3.B.<1>
in).
Damaged area
Delamination
less than or Chapter
(with or with Full thickness Access from
equal to 5000 51−77−13 para
out cracks affected both faces.
mm (7.75 graph 2.H. <1>
and/or holes)
in).
Damaged area
Access only less than or Chapter
Full thickness
from external equal to 5000 51−77−13 para
affected
face. mm (7.75 graph 2.H. <1>
in).
Inboard End Cap Permanent Repairs on Monolithic Areas
Table 111
<1> After Repair, apply Pore Filler Material No. 16−050 or 16−052,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesFeb133/134
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE DEPTH ELEMENT OF SANDWICH PANEL ACCESSIBILITY EXTENSION APPLICABLE REPAIR OF SRM
AFFECTED CHAPTER 51
Damaged area less than
Partial sandwich thick One sandwich skin plus Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph
− or equal to 1000 mm
ness affected. core. 2.H.<1>
(1.55 in).
Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph
2.A.(2). Option D, three
Partial sandwich thick One sandwich skin plus Damaged area greater than
− wet lay−up layers,
ness affected. core. 1000 mm (1.55 in).
orientation ±45/0−90/±45.
Perform core closing.<1>
Damaged area less than
Partial sandwich thick Chamfer area (core not Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph
− or equal to 1000 mm
ness affected. exposed or damaged). 2.H.<1>
(1.55 in).
Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph
Partial sandwich thick Damaged area greater than
Chamfer area. − 2.G.(4). Perform core
ness affected. 1000 mm (1.55 in).
closing.<1>
Damaged area less than
Full sandwich thickness Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph
Center panel area. Access from both faces. or equal to 1000 mm
Delamination (with or affected. 2.H.<1><2>
(1.55 in).
without cracks and/or
holes) Damaged area less than
Full sandwich thickness Access from external Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph
Center panel area. or equal to 1000 mm
affected. face. 2.H.<1>
(1.55 in).
Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph
2.L, three wet lay−up
Full sandwich thickness Damaged area greater than
Center panel area. Access from both faces. layers, orientation
affected. 1000 mm (1.55 in).
±45/0−90/±45. Perform core
closing.<1><2>
Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph
Full sandwich thickness Access from external Damaged area greater than
Center panel area. 2.E.Option D. Perform core
affected. face. 1000 mm (1.55 in).
closing.<1>
Damaged area less than
Full sandwich thickness Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph
Chamfer area. − or equal to 1000 mm
affected. 2.H.<1>
(1.55 in).
Chapter 51−77−13 paragraph
Full sandwich thickness Damaged area greater than
Chamfer area. − 2.G.(4). Perform core
affected. 1000 mm (1.55 in).
closing.<1>
Inboard End Cap Permanent Repairs on Sandwich Areas
Table 112
<1> After Repair, apply Pore Filler Material No. 16−050 or 16−052, refer to Chapter 51−35−00

<2> Perform the repair in two steps. First one face (Skin and core restoration). Second, the opposite side (only skin).

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesFeb135/136
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR OUTBOARD TIP AND INBOARD END CAP − REPAIRS

1. General

NOTE: For Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14

− CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

This topic contains all of the specific repair procedures for the Elevator
Outboard Tip and Inboard End Cap, all zones. The repair zones and allowable
damage data for these repair procedures is in Chapter 55−24−00, Page Block
101. The general repair procedure for carbon prepreg is in Chapter
55−20−00, Page Block 201.

2. Safety Precautions

There are risks to you and other persons when you work with composite re

pair materials. To prevent risks, read and obey the warnings given below.

WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.

WARNING: WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND FILTER MASK WHEN YOU CUT,
ABRADE OR DRILL COMPOSITE MATERIALS. THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MA

TERIALS CAN GET INTO YOUR LUNGS OR ONTO YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE YOU
INJURY. IMMEDIATELY REMOVE DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.
WARNING: CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.
WHEN YOU WORK WITH CFRP COMPOSITE MATERIALS, IMMEDIATELY REMOVE
DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRIC POWER ON
THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST ONLY USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER TO PARA

GRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT REPAIR.
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER REMARKS

No General Repair applicable. − −

Table 201
4. Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs.

INSPECTION
REPAIR
SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE INSTRUCTION REF

CATEGORY
ERENCE
Repair to Chamfered Area, 5.A.INAC
201INAC
A −
Zone 04 Elevator Inboard TIVE TIVE
End Cap. This repair pro

cedure is deleted and su

perseded by paragraph
5.J. and Figure 210 since
revision dated Feb 01/09.
Delamination Repair, Zones 5.B.INAC
202INAC
A −
01 and 02, Elevator In
TIVE TIVE
board End Cap. This re

pair procedure is deleted
and superseded by para

graph 5.K. and Figure 211
since revision dated Feb
01/09.
Repair to Inner or Outer 5.C.INAC
203INAC
A −
Skin and Core, Zones 01 TIVE TIVE
and 02, Elevator Inboard
End Cap. This repair pro

cedure is deleted and su

perseded by paragraph
5.L. and Figure 212 since
revision dated Feb 01/09.
Repair to Skins and Core, 5.D.INAC
204INAC
A −
Zones 01 and 02, Elevator TIVE TIVE
Inboard End Cap. This re

pair procedure is deleted
and superseded by para

graph 5.M. and Figure 213
since revision dated Feb
01/09.

Table 202

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

INSPECTION
REPAIR
SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE INSTRUCTION REF

CATEGORY
ERENCE
Repair to Inner and Outer 5.E.INAC
205INAC
A −
Skin and Core, Zone 03, TIVE TIVE
Elevator Inboard End Cap.
This repair procedure is
deleted and superseded by
paragraph 5.N. and Figure
214 since revision dated
Feb 01/09.
Outer Patch Repair, Zone 5.F. 206 A −
01, Elevator Outboard
Tip.
Flush Repair, Zone 01, 5.G. 207 A −
Elevator Outboard Tip.
Rib/ Spar Repair, Zones 5.H. 208 A −
02 and 03, Elevator Out

board Tip.
Cosmetic Repair by weld
5.I. 209 A −
ing, Zone 05 Elevator
Outboard Tip.
Repair to Chamfered Area, 5.J. 210 A −
Zone 04 Elevator Inboard
End Cap. <1>
Delamination Repair, Zones 5.K. 211 A −
01 and 02, Elevator In

board End Cap. <1>
Repair to Inner or Outer 5.L. 212 A −
Skin and Core, Zones 01
and 02, Elevator Inboard
End Cap. <1>

Table 202

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

INSPECTION
REPAIR
SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE INSTRUCTION REF

CATEGORY
ERENCE
Repair to Skins and Core, 5.M. 213 A −
Zones 01 and 02, Elevator
Inboard End Cap. <1>
Repair to Inner and Outer 5.N. 214 A −
Skin and Core, Zone 03,
Elevator Inboard End Cap.
<1>

Table 202
<1> This repair procedure is only applicable before Modification 23911.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter

51−11−14.

5. Elevator Tip Repairs

A. Repair to Chamfered Area, Zone 04, Elevator Inboard End Cap
NOTE: This repair procedure is deleted and superseded by paragraph 5.J.
since revision dated Feb 01/09.

NOTE: This repair is valid for core/skin debonding in the chamfer area.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged area, you must do a damage evalua

tion. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out using the hot bond repair proce

dure. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E. and to the general
repair procedure refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, para

graph 2.

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Honeycomb Core − Material No. 05−087, refer to

− Cleaning Agent
− Adhesive Film
− Adhesive Foam
− Resin
− Glass Prepreg
− Carbon Fabric Prepreg
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 201)
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042A or 08−088,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−047A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−090, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−107, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−092 or 05−091,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D. and to Chapter 51−75−11, para

graph 3.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Cut out the surface plies in the access area to obtain entry to
the chamfer area. Refer to Figure 201 for cut out dimensions.
Step the plies 15 mm (0.591 in).

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.A.

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−24−00, Page Block 101, Figure 104 for
Zone 01/02 access areas.

(c) Remove any concentration of water (initial drying). Refer to

Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.B.(1).
(d) Cut out and remove the access area core and the damaged core in
the chamfer area. Refer to Figure 201 and to Chapter 55−20−00,
Page Block 201, paragraph 2.C.(1).

(e) Extend the external skin cut out to leave a minimum 10 mm (0.394
in) of undamaged honeycomb core exposed around three sides of the
access area cut out. Refer to Figure 201.

(f) Carry out the final drying procedure. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00,
Page Block 201, paragraph 2.B.(2).
(g) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

Page 205
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(h) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(i) Drill 2 mm (0.079 in) hole(s) in the outer area of the chamfer
area. Refer to Figure 201.

NOTE: This hole(s) is to allow for evacuation of air during the

resin filling process and to ensure that the chamfer area
is completely filled.

(j) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: RESIN (MATERIAL NO. 05−090) IS DANGEROUS.

(k) Fill the chamfer area with the resin (Material No. 05−090) until
the resin extrudes from the air evacuation hole(s). Refer to
Figure 201.

(l) Protect the repair area to prevent contamination ingress.

CAUTION: LET THE RESIN GEL FOR TWENTY MINUTES AT ROOM TEMPERATURE
BEFORE CURING.
(m) Cure the resin at 50° C (122° F) for a period of two hours.

(n) On completion of the cure cycle, remove the protection from the
repair area.

(o) Make and cure the replacement honeycomb repair plug (Material No.
05−087) to the size and shape of the repair area. Refer to Chap

ter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.C.(2).

(p) Cover and cure the core with resin. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00,
Page Block 201, paragraph 2.C.(3).

(q) Make the lay−up of adhesive films and repair plies. Refer to
Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.D.

(r) Restore the surface protection. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 206
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair in Chamfered Area, Zone 04, Elevator Inboard End Cap

Figure 201

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesFeb207/208
01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

B. Delamination Repair, Zones 01 and 02, Elevator Inboard End Cap

NOTE: This repair procedure is deleted and superseded by paragraph 5.K.

since revision dated Feb 01/09.

NOTE: This repair is valid for delamination, crack or non allowable deep
scratch on the CFRP skin.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged areas you must do a damage evalua

tion. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.
NOTE: This repair is to be carried out using the hot−bond repair proce

dure. Refer toChapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E. and to the general
repair procedure in Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to

Chapter 51−35−00
− Adhesive Film − Material No. 08−042A or 08−088,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Resin − Material No. 05−090, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Carbon Fabric Prepreg − Material No. 05−092 or 05−091,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 202)

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D. and to Chapter 51−75−11, para

graph 3.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Make the skin cut out procedure in the damaged area. Refer to
Figure 202 and to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph
2.A.(1).
NOTE: Remove only the damaged plies. If plies are remove down up
to core level, care must be taken not to damage the honey

comb core.

(c) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(d) Make the ply cut out procedure. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page
Block 201, paragraph 2.A.(2).

(e) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

Page 209
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(f) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

WARNING: RESIN (MATERIAL NO. 05−090) IS DANGEROUS.

(g) If required, cover and cure the exposed honeycomb core cells with
the resin (Material No. 05−090. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page
Block 201, paragraph 2.C.(3).
(h) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(i) Make the carbon prepreg repair plies procedure for the laminate
repair. Refer to Figure 202 and to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.D.

(j) Restore the surface protection. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 210
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Delamination Repair, Zones 01 and 02, Elevator Inboard End Cap

Figure 202

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesFeb211/212
01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

C. Repair to Inner or Outer Skin and Core, Zones 01 and 02, Elevator In

board End Cap
NOTE: This repair procedure is deleted and superseded by paragraph 5.L.
since revision dated Feb 01/09.

NOTE: This repair is valid for damage affecting the skin (inner or out

er) and core or debonding between skin and core.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged areas you must do a damage evalua

tion. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out using the hot bond repair proce

dure. Refer toChapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E. and to the general
repair procedure in Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Honeycomb Core
− Cleaning Agent
− Adhesive Film
− Adhesive Foam
− Resin
− Glass Prepreg
− Carbon Fabric Prepreg
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 203)
− Material No. 05−087, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042A or 08−088,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−047A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−090, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−107, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−092 or 05−091,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−75−11, paragraph 3 and to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph
4.D.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Make the skin cut out procedure in the damaged area. Refer to
Figure 203 for cut out shape. Refer to chapter Chapter 55−20−00,
Page Block 201, paragraph 2.A.(1).

(c) Remove any concentrations of water. (Initial drying). Refer to

Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.B.(1).

Page 213
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(d) Cut out and remove the damaged core. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00,
Page Block 201, paragraph 2.C.(1) and to Figure 203.
(e) Extend the external skin cut out to leave a minimum 10 mm (0.394
in) of undamaged honeycomb core exposed all around the cut out
area. Refer to Figure 203.

(f) Make the ply cut out procedure. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page
Block 201, paragraph 2.A.(2).
(g) Carry out the final drying procedure. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00,
Page Block 201, paragraph 2.B.(2).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(h) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(i) Make the replacement honeycomb repair plug procedure (Material

No. 05−087) to the size and shape of the repair area. Refer to
Figure 203 and Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph
2.C.(2).
(j) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

WARNING: RESIN (MATERIAL NO. 05−090) IS DANGEROUS.

(k) Cover and cure the exposed honeycomb core cells with the resin
(Material No. 05−090). Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201,
paragraph 2.C.(3).

(l) Make the lay−up of adhesive and repair plies. Refer to Figure
203 and to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.D.

(m) Restore the surface protection. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 214
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Inner or Skin and Core, Zones 01 and 02, Elevator Inboard End Cap.
Figure 203

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesFeb215/216
01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

D. Repair to Skins and Core Zones 01 and 02, Elevator Inboard End Cap

NOTE: This repair procedure is deleted and superseded by paragraph 5.M.

since revision dated Feb 01/09.

NOTE: This repair is valid for damage affecting both, inner and outer
skins and core.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged areas you must do a damage evalua

tion. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3.
NOTE: This repair is to be carried out using the hot bond repair proce

dure. Refer toChapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E. and to the general
repair procedure in Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Honeycomb Core − Material No. 05−087, refer to

− Cleaning Agent
− Adhesive Film
− PVF Film (Tedlar)
− Sealant
− Adhesive Foam
− Resin
− Glass Prepreg
− Carbon Fabric Prepreg
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 204)
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042A or 08−088,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 19−015, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−047A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−090, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−107, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−092 or 05−091,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−75−11, paragraph 3 and to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph
4.D.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Make the skin cut out procedure in the damaged area. Refer to
Figure 204 for shape of cut out. Refer to chapter Chapter
55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.A.

Page 217
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(c) Remove any concentrations of water (initial drying), refer to

Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.B.(1).
(d) Make the core removal procedure. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page
Block 201, paragraph 2.C.(1).

(e) Make the ply cut out procedure. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page
Block 201, paragraph 2.A.(2).

(f) Cut out the damaged plies on the inner skin. Refer to Figure
204.

NOTE: Do not step the inner plies.

(g) Remove 40 mm (1.571 in) of PVF tedlar (Material No. 19−015) in

the area of the inner skin which will be in contact with the
pre−cured doubler. Refer to Figure 204.

(h) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(i) Carry out the final drying procedure. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00,
Page Block 201, paragraph 2.B.(2).
(j) Make the pre−cured doubler to the correct size and shape for the
repair area. Refer to Figure 204.

NOTE: For material and manufacture of the pre−cured doubler, refer

to Figure 204.

WARNING: ADHESIVE FILM (MATERIAL NO. 08−042A) IS DANGEROUS.

(k) Cut a piece of adhesive film (Material No. 08−042A) to the size
and shape of the pre−cured repair doubler area which will be in
contact with the internal skin. Refer to Figure 204.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(l) Clean the repair area and the pre−cured repair doubler with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(m) Remove the first protective layer from the adhesive film and
apply the adhesive film to the surface of the pre−cured repair
doubler which will be in contact with the internal skin when
installed. Refer to Figure 204.

NOTE: One surface of the pre−cured repair doubler is tedlar

(Material No. 19−015), the adhesive film must be applied to
the non−tedlar surface of the pre−cured repair doubler.
Refer to Figure 204.
(n) Remove the remaining protective layer from the adhesive film.

(o) Place the pre−cured repair doubler into its correct repair
position on the repair area and secure with screw clamps.

Page 218
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/09
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(p) Cover the repair area with the heating blanket. Place the heating
blanket as close to the repair as possible.
(q) Cure the installed repair materials at 120° C (248° F) for a pe

riod of two hours. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.

(r) On completion of the cure cycle, remove the heating blanket and
screw clamps.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(s) Apply a fillet of the sealant (Material No. 09−005) around the
outer edge of the pre−cured repair doubler. Refer to Figure 204.

WARNING: RESIN (MATERIAL NO. 05−090) IS DANGEROUS.

(t) Fill the gag between the internal skin and the pre−cured doubler
with the resin (Material No. 05−090). Make sure that the resin
is flush with the internal skin surface. Refer to Figure 204.

(u) Protect the repair area to prevent contamination ingress.

CAUTION: LET THE RESIN GEL FOR TWENTY MINUTES AT ROOM TEMPERATURE
BEFORE CURING.
(v) Cure the resin at 50° C (122° F) for a period of two hours.

(w) On completion of the cure cycle. Remove the protection from the
repair area. Abrade the surface of the resin to obtain a smooth
finish.
(x) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(y) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
(z) Make the installation of the replacement honeycomb repair plug
(Material No. 05−087 refer to Figure 204) and procedure Chapter
55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.C.(2).

(aa)Cover and cure the exposed honeycomb core cells with the resin
(Material No. 05−090). Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201,
paragraph 2.C.(3).

(ab)Make the lay−up of adhesive and the repair plies. Refer to Fig

ure 204 and to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.D.

(ac)Restore the surface protection. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12 .

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesFeb219/220
01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Skins and Core, Zone 01 and 02, Elevator Inboard End Cap
Figure 204

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesFeb221/222
01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

E. Repair to Inner and Outer Skins and Core, Zone 03, Elevator Inboard End
Cap
NOTE: This repair procedure is deleted and superseded by paragraph 5.N.
since revision dated Feb 01/09.

NOTE: The following repair is applicable for damage to the skins (inner
and outer) and core or delamination between the skins and core.

NOTE: Before you repair the damage area, you must do a damage evalua

tion. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3.

NOTE: Use the hot−bond repair procedure for this repair. Refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.E and to the general repair procedure in
Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Perforated Parting Film
− Backing Plate
− Aramid Honeycomb Core
− Cleaning Agent
− Adhesive Film
− PVF Film (Tedlar)
− Resin
− Glass Fiber Fabric
− Laminating Resin
− Pore Filler
− Foam
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 205)
− Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para

graph 3.B.
− Aluminum Plate 0.8 − 1 mm
(0.031 − 0.039 in) thick.
− Material No. 05−108, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042A or 08−088,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 19−015, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−090, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−033, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−097, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052 , refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 08−047A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D. and to Chapter 51−75−11, para

graph 3.

Page 223
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Make the inner and outer skin cut−out in the damaged area. Refer
to Figure 205 and Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph
2.A.(1).

(c) Use the initial drying procedure to remove water from the repair
area. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph
2.B.(1).
(d) Remove the damaged core. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.C.(1).

(e) Extend the skin cut−out to give a minimum of 10 mm (0.394 in)

of undamaged core.
(f) Use the ply cut−out procedure to remove the inner and outer
plies. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph
2.A.(2).

(g) Use the final drying procedure to remove any humidity from the
repair area. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph
2.B.(2).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(h) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
(i) Put a piece of perforated parting film on the outer skin. Refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 3.B.

(j) Clamp the backing plate over the perforated parting film.

NOTE: The dimensions of the backing plate should be 25 mm (0.984

in) larger than the repair area.
(k) Make, install and cure the replacement honeycomb core repair plug
(Material No. 05−108). Refer to Figure 205 and Chapter 55−20−00,
Page Block 201, paragraph 2.C.(2).

(l) Remove the clamps, the backing plate and the parting film from
the outer skin.
(m) Abrade the honeycomb core until it is flush with the original
honeycomb core.

WARNING: RESIN (MATERIAL NO. 05−090) IS DANGEROUS.

(n) Cover the upper, lower and edge core cells with the resin
(Material No. 05−090. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201,
paragraph 2.C.(3).

(o) Put a piece of perforated parting film on the outer skin. Refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 3.B.

Page 224
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/09
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(p) Clamp the backing plate over the perforated parting film.

NOTE: The dimensions of the backing plate should be 25 mm (0.984

in) larger than the repair area.

(q) On the inner skin use the lay−up of adhesive film and repair
plies procedure. Refer to Figure 205 and to Chapter 55−20−00,
Page Block 201, paragraph 2.D.

(r) Prepare the glass fiber fabric (Material No. 05−033) and a piece
of PVF film (Material No. 19−015) to size of the repair area
plus 20 mm (0.79 in).

(s) Prepare the laminating resin (Material No. 05−097). Refer to

Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.A.(3).
(t) Impregnate the glass fiber fabric (Material No. 05−033) with the
laminating resin (Material No. 05−097). Refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 4.H.

(u) Apply the impregnated glass fiber ply on the repair area. Refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.A.
(v) Firmly apply the PVF film in the repair area. Work from the
center to the edges, use a squeegee or roller to remove trapped
air and excess resin.

(w) Cover the repair area with the vacuum cure equipment and heating
equipment. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.
NOTE: Peel ply shall not be applied.

(x) Let the repair area cure under the vacuum pressure at room
temperature for 1 hour.

(y) Cure the repair area at 80° C (176° F) for a further 3 hours.
Refer toChapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E.

(z) Remove the vacuum cure equipment and heating equipment.

(aa)Inspect visually the surface and all the edges of the PVF film.
Blisters or debondings are not permitted.
NOTE: If small defects occur, inject laminating resin (Material
No. 05−097) with a syringe and small needle. Apply vacuum
locally and let the resin cure (steps (w) thru (y)).

(ab)Remove the backing plate, the clamps and the parting film from
the outer side.
(ac)On the outer skin use the lay−up of the adhesive film, repair
plies and surface smoother procedure. Refer to Figure 205 and
Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.D.

Page 225
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/09
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ad)Restore the surface finish to the outer skin. Refer to Chapter

51−75−12.

Page 226
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Inner and Outer Skin and Core, Zone 03, Elevator Inboard End Cap
Figure 205

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesFeb227/228
01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 203.
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

F. Outer Patch Repair, Zone 01, Elevator Outboard Tip

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged area you must do a damage evalua

tion. Refer to Chapter 51−11−00, for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016,017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 203
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information Table in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Doubler 1 Refer to Figure 206

− Cleaning Agent
− Sealant
− Chemical Conversion Coating
− Polyurethane Primer
− Polyurethane Top Coat
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 206)
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 13−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−75−11, paragraph 3.

Page 229
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Cut out the damaged skin on the repair area. Refer to Figure
206.
(c) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
(e) Make the repair doubler to the size and shape of the repair
area. Refer to Figure 206.

(f) Mark the position of the new fastener holes on the repair dou

bler.

(g) Pilot−drill the marked fastener holes.

(h) Place the repair doubler into its correct repair position on the
repair area and secure.

(i) Pilot−drill through the pre−drilled holes in the repair doubler

and through the skin structure.
(j) Secure the repair doubler with screw pins.

(k) Drill the holes full size for the fasteners. Refer to Figure
206.

(l) Remove the screw pins and drill the holes full size for the fas

teners. On completion, remove the repair doubler from the repair
area.

(m) Countersink the fastener holes on the outer surface of the repair
doubler 100°.

(n) Remove any sharp edges with an abrasive cone.

(o) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(p) Clean the repair area and repair doubler with the cleaning agent
(Material No.11−003).

WARNING: CHROMIC ACID ANODIZING IS POISONOUS. OBEY THE MANUFACTURER

INSTRUCTIONS.

(q) Apply the correct surface protection to the repair doubler (chro

mic acid anodizing, polyurethane primer (Material No. 16−001B or
16−001C) and polyurethane top coat (Material No. 16−018C)).

(r) Apply the correct surface protection to the edges of the skin
cut out (Material No. 13−002).

Page 230
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(s) Apply a coating of the sealant (Material 09−005) to the surface

of the doubler which will be contact with the tip structure. Re

fer to Figure 206.

(t) Place the repair doubler into its repair position and secure with
screw pins.

(u) Coat the fasteners with the sealant (Material No. 09−005) and
install the fasteners in the fastener holes.

(v) Remove the screw pins and install the fasteners in the screw pin
holes.

(w) Remove any unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

(x) Protect the repair area to prevent contamination ingress.

(y) Cure the installed repair materials.

NOTE: Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for cure times.

(z) On completion of the cure cycle, remove the protection from the
repair area.

(aa) Repair the surface protection. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesFeb231/232
01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Outer Patch Repair, Zone 01, Elevator Outboard Tip.

Figure 206

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesFeb233/234
01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 204.
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

G. Flush Repair, Zone 01, Elevator Outboard Tip

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged area you must do a damage evalua

tion. Refer to Chapter 51−11−00 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 204
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information Table in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Doubler 1 Refer to Figure 207

2 Repair Filler or Laminated
Shim
− Cleaning Agent
− Sealant
− Chemical Conversion Coating
− Polyurethane Primer
− Polyurethane Top Coat
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 207)
1 Refer to Figure 207
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 13−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

Page 235
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−75−11, paragraph 3.
(b) Cut out the damaged skin on the repair area. Refer to Figure
207.

(c) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(e) Make the repair doubler to the size and shape of the repair
area. Refer to Figure 207.

NOTE: Make the filler piece 1.00 mm (0.039 in) smaller than the
skin cut out dimension. Refer to Figure 207.

(f) Mark the position of the new fastener holes on the repair dou

bler.

(g) Pilot−drill the marked fastener holes.

(h) Place the repair doubler into its correct repair position on the
repair area and secure.

(i) Pilot−drill through the pre−drilled holes in the repair doubler

and through the skin structure.

(j) Secure the repair doubler with screw pins.

(k) Place the filler piece into its correct repair position on the
repair area.

NOTE: Make certain there is a 1.00 mm (0.039 in) gap between the
outer edges of the filler piece and the skin cut out. Re

fer to Figure 207.

(l) Mark the position of the new fastener holes.

(m) Remove the filler piece from the repair area and pilot−drill the
marked fastener holes.
(n) Place the repair filler into its correct repair position on the
repair area and secure.

(o) Pilot−drill through the pre−drilled holes in the repair filler

and through the repair doubler.

(p) Secure the repair filler with screw pins.

(q) Drill all the holes full size for the fasteners. Refer to Figure
207.

Page 236
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(r) Remove the screw pins, drill the screw pin holes full size for
the fasteners. On completion, remove the repair filler and repair
doubler from the repair area.

(s) Remove any sharp edges with an abrasive cone.

(t) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(u) Clean the repair area, repair doubler and filler piece with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

WARNING: CHROMIC ACID ANODIZING IS POISONOUS. OBEY THE MANUFACTURER

INSTRUCTIONS.

(v) Apply the correct surface protection to the repair doubler and
filler piece (chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer
(Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C) and polyurethane top coat (Ma

terial No. 16−018C)).

NOTE: 2024T42 CLAD parts only.

(w) Apply the correct surface protection to the edges of the skin
cut out (Material No. 13−002).

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(x) Apply a coating of the sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the sur

face of the repair doubler and filler pieces.
(y) Place the repair doubler and filler piece into their correct re

pair positions on the repair area and secure with screw pins.

(z) Apply a fillet of sealant (Material No. 09−005) between the

filler piece and the inside edge of the cut out area. Refer to
Figure 207.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(aa)Remove any unwanted sealant with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(ab)Protect the repair area to prevent contamination ingress.

(ac)Cure the installed repair materials.

NOTE: Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for cure times.

(ad)On completion of the cure cycle, remove the protection from the
repair area.
(ae)Coat the fasteners with the sealant (Material No. 09−005) and
install the fasteners in the fastener holes.

Page 237
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(af)Remove the screw pins and install the fasteners in the screw pin
holes.
(ag)Remove any unwanted sealant with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(ah)Cure the installed repair material.

NOTE: Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for cure times.

(ai)Repair the surface protection. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 238
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Flush Repair, Zone 01, Elevator Outboard Tip

Figure 207

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesFeb239/240
01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 205.
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

H. Rib/Spar Repair, Zones 02 and 03, Elevator Outboard Tip

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged area you must do a damage evalua

tion. Refer to Chapter 51−11−00 for data.

NOTE: If the damage affects a reinforcement hole you must replace the
rib.

NOTE: If damage to the rib in Zone 03 occurs, replace the rib, and re

pair skin in accordance with this procedure, using filler piece 0.8
mm (0.031 in) thickness.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 205
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information Table in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 241
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Doubler 1 Refer to Figure 208

2 Repair Filler
3 Repair Angle
− Cleaning Agent
− Sealant
− Chemical Conversion Coating
− Polyurethane Primer
− Polyurethane Top Coat
(2) Repair Instruction (refer to Figure 208)
1 Refer to Figure 208
1 Refer to Figure 208
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 13−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−001B or 16−001C,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−75−11, paragraph 3 and to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph
4.D.
(b) Cut out the damaged skin and rib on the repair area. Refer to
Figure 208.

(c) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(e) Make the repair doubler to the size and shape of the repair
area. Refer to Figure 208.

(f) Make the repair filler to the size and shape of the rib cut out
area. Refer to Figure 208.

NOTE: Make the repair filler piece 1.00 mm (0.039 in) smaller
than the rib cut out dimension. Refer to Figure 208.

(g) Make the repair angle to the size and shape of the repair. Refer
to Figure 208.

NOTE: The profile shape will depend on the extent of the damage.

(h) Remove the existing fasteners from the repair area. Refer to
Figure 208.

Page 242
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(i) Mark the position of the new fastener holes on the repair angle
and doubler.
(j) Pilot−drill the marked fastener holes.

(k) Place the repair angle into its correct repair position on the
repair area and secure.

(l) Pilot−drill through the pre−drilled holes in the repair angle and
through the rib structure.
(m) Secure the repair angle with screw pins.

(n) Transfer drill through the existing fastener holes and through
the repair angle. Refer to Figure 208.

(o) Place the repair filler into its correct repair position on the
repair area and secure.

NOTE: Make sure that there is a 1.00 mm (0.039 in) gap between
the outer edges of the repair filler and the skin cut out.
Refer to Figure 208.
(p) Mark the position of the new fastener holes in the repair filler
through the existing fastener holes in the repair angle.

(q) Remove the repair filler from the repair area, pilot−drill the
marked fastener hole positions.

(r) Replace the repair filler on the repair area, place the repair
doubler into its correct repair position on the repair area and
secure.

(s) Pilot−drill through the pre−drilled holes in the repair doubler

and through the skin structure.
(t) Secure the repair doubler with screw pins, transfer drill through
the pre−drilled holes in the repair angle, repair filler and
through the repair doubler.

(u) Drill all the holes full size for the fasteners. Refer to Figure
208.
(v) Remove the screw pins and drill the holes full size for the fas

teners. On completion, remove the repair materials from the re

pair area.

(w) Remove any sharp edges with an abrasive cone.

(x) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(y) Clean the repair area and repair materials with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003).

Page 243
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CHROMIC AND ANODIZING IS POISONOUS. OBEY THE MANUFACTURER

INSTRUCTIONS.
(z) Apply the correct surface protection to the metallic repair mate

rials (chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane primer (Mate

rial No. 16−001B or 16−001C) and polyurethane top coat (Material
No. 16−018C)).

NOTE: 2024T42 CLAD parts only.

(aa)Apply the correct surface protection to the edges of the skin
cut out (Material No.13−002).

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−005) IS DANGEROUS.

(ab)Apply a coating of the sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the re

pair angle and place repair angle into its correct repair posi

tion on the repair area. Secure the repair angle with screw
pins.

(ac)Apply a coating of the sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the re

pair filler and place the repair filler into its correct repair
position on the repair angle. Secure the repair filler with screw
pins.

(ad)Coat the fasteners with the sealant (Material No. 09−005) and
install the fasteners in the repair angle. Refer to Figure 208.

(ae)Remove the screw pins and install the fasteners in the screw pin
holes.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(af)Remove any unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (Material No. 11−003).
(ag)Protect the repair area to prevent contamination ingress.

(ah)Cure the installed repair materials.

NOTE: Refer to the manufacturer instructions for cure times.

(ai)On completion of the cure cycle, remove the protection from the
repair area.
(aj)Remove the screw pins from the repair filler.

(ak)Apply a coating of the sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the sur

face of the repair doubler which will be in contact with the
structure. Refer to Figure 208.
(al)Apply a coating of the sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the up

per surface of the repair filler. Apply a fillet of the sealant
to the outer edge of the repair filler. Refer to Figure 208.

Page 244
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(am)Place the repair doubler into its correct repair position on the
repair area and secure with screw pins.
(an)Coat the fasteners with the sealant (Material No. 09−005) and
install the fasteners in the fasteners holes. Refer to Figure
208.

(ao)Remove the screw pins and install the fasteners in the screw
pins holes.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(ap)Remove any unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (Material No. 11−003).

(aq)Protect the repair area to prevent contamination ingress.

(ar)Cure the installed repair materials.

NOTE: Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for cure times.

(as)On completion of the cure cycle, remove the protection from the
repair area.
(at)Repair the surface protection. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesFeb245/246
01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib/Spar Repair, Zone 02, Elevator Outboard Tip

Figure 208

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesFeb247/248
01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 206.
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

I. Cosmetic Repair by welding, Zone 05, Elevator Outboard Tip

NOTE: The following repair is valid for damage in the Zone 05 of the
Outboard Tip.

NOTE: For definition of zone 05, refer to Chapter 55−24−00, Page Block
101, Figure 104.

NOTE: Before you repair the damage area, you must do a damage evalua

tion. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 206
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information Table in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data
about all weight variants as well as related information concerning
allowable damage and repair applicability.
(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to

Chapter 51−35−00
− Chemical Conversion Coating − Material No. 13−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Filler Material − Material 3.2245.20 (4043 alumi

num alloy welding filler)
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 209)

(a) Remove the Outboard Tip from the Elevator.

Page 249
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−75−11.
(c) Blend out the damage area to eliminate scratches and burrs.

(d) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(e) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(f) Get the correct welding filler material.

WARNING: OBEY THE MANUFACTURER’S SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS WHEN USING THE

WELDING EQUIPMENT.

CAUTION: IN ORDER TO AVOID TIP DEFORMATIONS, DO NOT APPLY HEAT IN

EXCESS.

(g) Fill the damage area with welding filler material. Refer to PMS
01−04−20 for welding procedure data.

(h) Abrade the welded surface to restore the original contour.

(i) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(j) Clean the welded area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(k) Apply the correct surface protection to the repair area: chemical
conversion coating (Material No. 13−002).

(l) Restore the surface protection. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 250
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Cosmetic Repair by welding, Zone 05, Elevator Outboard Tip

Figure 209

Page 251
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR PROCEDURE IS ONLY APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 23911.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 207.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.
SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

J. Repair to Chamfered Area, Zone 04, Elevator Inboard End Cap

NOTE: This repair is valid for core/skin debonding in the chamfer area
in subzones A and B.
NOTE: Before you repair the damaged area, you must do a damage evalua

tion. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out using the hot bond repair proce

dure. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E. and to the general
repair procedure refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, para

graph 2.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 010
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 207
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow

able damage and repair applicability.

Page 252
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Honeycomb Core − Same material as original, refer

− Cleaning Agent
− Adhesive Film
− Adhesive Foam
− Resin
− Glass Prepreg
− Carbon Fabric Prepreg
− Pore Filler
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 210)
to Chapter 55−24−00, Page Block
101, Figure 105.
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−047C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−107, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−092 or 05−091,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D. and to Chapter 51−75−11, para

graph 3.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Cut out the surface plies in the access area to obtain entry to
the chamfer area. Refer to Figure 210 for cut out dimensions.
Step the plies 15 mm (0.591 in).

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.A.

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−24−00, Page Block 101, Figure 105 for
Zone 01, subzone A and Zone 02, Subzone B, access areas.

(c) Remove any concentration of water from damaged structure. Refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.G.
(d) Cut out and remove the access area core and the damaged core in
the chamfer area. Refer to Figure 210.

NOTE: Access hole dimensions as short as possible.

(e) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

Page 253
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(f) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(g) Drill 2 mm (0.079 in) hole(s) in the outer area of the chamfer
area. Refer to Figure 210.

NOTE: Be careful not to cause damage to inner skin when you

drill the holes.
NOTE: This hole(s) is to allow for evacuation of air during the
resin filling process and to ensure that the chamfer area
is completely filled.

(h) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: RESIN (MATERIAL NO. 08−022) IS DANGEROUS.

(i) Fill the chamfer area with the resin (Material No. 08−022) until
the resin extrudes from the air evacuation hole(s). Refer to
Figure 210.

(j) Protect the repair area to prevent contamination ingress.

(k) Cure the resin. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 6.B.(4).

(l) On completion of the cure cycle, remove the protection from the
repair area.

(m) Make the honeycomb repair plug to the correct size for the re

pair. Refer to Figure 212.

NOTE: Use material 20−006 for zone 01 and material 05−085 for
zone 02.

WARNING: ADHESIVE FILM (MATERIAL NO. 08−042A) IS DANGEROUS.

(n) Cut two plies of adhesive film (Material No. 08−042A) to the
shape and size of the repair cut out.

WARNING: GLASS PREPREG (MATERIAL NO. 05−107) IS DANGEROUS.

(o) Cut a ply of glass prepreg (Material No. 05−107) to the shape
and size of the repair cut out.
WARNING: ADHESIVE FOAM (MATERIAL NO. 08−047C) IS DANGEROUS.

(p) Prepare sufficient of adhesive foam (Material No. 08−047C) to

wrap it around the core plug.

(q) Install the adhesive films, the glass prepreg, the adhesive foam
and the honeycomb repair plug. Refer to Figure 212 and Chapter
51−77−11, paragraphs 5.B and 5.G.

Page 254
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(r) Install the vacuum equipment and heat blankets in the repair
area. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.
(s) Cure the repair materials for 90 minutes at 120 °C (248 °F). Re

fer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraphs 6.B.(5), 6.B.(6), 5.D.(2) and
5.E.

NOTE: If only use one blanket on outer skin, cure the repair ma

terials for 4 hours at 90 °C (194 °F).
(t) On completion of the cure cycle, remove the vacuum equipment and
heat blankets from the repair area.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(u) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

WARNING: RESIN (MATERIAL NO. 08−022) IS DANGEROUS.

(v) Cover and cure the exposed honeycomb core cells with the resin
(Material No. 08−022). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.H.

(w) Make the lay−up of adhesive films and repair plies. Refer to
Figure 212 and Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph
2.D.(1) thru 2.D.(14).

NOTE: Only use material No. 08−042A for adhesive film.

(x) Abrade the repair surface with Scotch Brite, type A, by hand or
using an orbital sanding device.

(y) Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: THE CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(z) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(aa)Fill holes and surface porous with the pore filler (Material No.
16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) avoiding a continuous layer.

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

(ab)Let cure the filler repair material for a minimum of two hours
at room temperature.

NOTE: If necessary for the surface appearance, let dry the pore
filler for 12 hours at room temperature or 7 hours 30 min

utes at 60° C (140° F) before you abrade it.
(ac)Restore the surface protection. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesNov255/256
01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair in Chamfered Area, Zone 04, Elevator Inboard End Cap

Figure 210

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesNov257/258
01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR PROCEDURE IS ONLY APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 23911.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 208.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.
SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

K. Delamination Repair, Zones 01 and 02, Elevator Inboard End Cap

NOTE: This repair is valid for delamination, crack or non allowable deep
scratch on the CFRP skin.
NOTE: Before you repair the damaged areas you must do a damage evalua

tion. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out using the hot−bond repair proce

dure. Refer toChapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E. and to the general
repair procedure in Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004,
005, 006, 007, 010
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft
Type
Table 208
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow

able damage and repair applicability.

Page 259
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Cleaning Agent − Material No. 11−003, refer to

Chapter 51−35−00
− Adhesive Film − Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Resin − Material No. 08−022, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Carbon Fabric Prepreg − Material No. 05−092 or 05−091,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Pore Filler − Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 211)

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D. and to Chapter 51−75−11, para

graph 3.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Make the skin cut out procedure in the damaged area. Refer to
Figure 211 and to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph
2.A.(1).

NOTE: Remove only the damaged plies. If plies are remove down up
to core level, care must be taken not to damage the honey

comb core.

(c) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(d) Make the ply cut out procedure. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page
Block 201, paragraph 2.A.(2).

(e) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(f) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
WARNING: RESIN (MATERIAL NO. 08−022) IS DANGEROUS.

(g) If required, cover and cure the exposed honeycomb core cells with
the resin (Material No. 08−022. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para

graph 5.H.
(h) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

Page 260
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(i) Make the lay−up of adhesive films and repair plies. Refer to
Figure 211 and Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph
2.D.(1) thru 2.D.(14).

NOTE: Only use material No. 08−042A for adhesive film.

(j) Abrade the repair surface with Scotch Brite, type A, by hand or
using an orbital sanding device.

(k) Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: THE CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(l) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent Material No.
11−003).

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(m) Fill holes and surface porous with the pore filler (Material No.
16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) avoiding a continuous layer.

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

(n) Let cure the filler repair material for a minimum of two hours
at room temperature.
NOTE: If necessary for the surface appearance, let dry the pore
filler for 12 hours at room temperature or 7 hours 30 min

utes at 60° C (140° F) before you abrade it.

(o) Restore the surface protection. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesNov261/262
01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Delamination Repair, Zones 01 and 02, Elevator Inboard End Cap

Figure 211

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesNov263/264
01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR PROCEDURE IS ONLY APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 23911.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 209.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.
SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

L. Repair to Inner or Outer Skin and Core, Zones 01 and 02, Elevator In

board End Cap

NOTE: This repair is valid for damage affecting the skin (inner or out

er) and core or debonding between skin and core.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged areas you must do a damage evalua

tion. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3 for data.

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out using the hot bond repair proce

dure. Refer toChapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E. and to the general
repair procedure in Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004,
005, 006, 007, 010
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft
Type
Table 209
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow

able damage and repair applicability.

Page 265
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Honeycomb Core − Material No. 05−085 or 20−006,

− Cleaning Agent
− Adhesive Film
− Adhesive Foam
− Resin
− Glass Prepreg
− Carbon Fabric Prepreg
− Pore Filler
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 212)
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−047C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−107, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−092 or 05−091,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−75−11, paragraph 3 and to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph
4.D.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Make the skin cut out procedure in the damaged area. Refer to
Figure 212 for cut out shape. Refer to chapter Chapter 55−20−00,
Page Block 201, paragraph 2.A.(1).

(c) Remove any concentrations of water (Initial drying). Refer to

Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.B.(1).

(d) Cut out and remove the damaged core. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00,
Page Block 201, paragraph 2.C.(1) and to Figure 212.

(e) Make the ply cut out procedure. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page
Block 201, paragraph 2.A.(2).

(f) Carry out the final drying procedure. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00,
Page Block 201, paragraph 2.B.(2).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(g) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

Page 266
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(h) Make the honeycomb repair plug to the correct size for the re

pair. Refer to Figure 212.
NOTE: Use material 20−006 for zone 01 and material 05−085 for
zone 02.

WARNING: ADHESIVE FILM (MATERIAL NO. 08−042A) IS DANGEROUS.

(i) Cut two plies of adhesive film (Material No. 08−042A) to the
shape and size of the repair cut out.
WARNING: GLASS PREPREG (MATERIAL NO. 05−107) IS DANGEROUS.

(j) Cut a ply of glass prepreg (Material No. 05−107) to the shape
and size of the repair cut out.

WARNING: ADHESIVE FOAM (MATERIAL NO. 08−047C) IS DANGEROUS.

(k) Prepare sufficient of adhesive foam (Material No. 08−047C) to
wrap it around the core plug.

(l) Install the adhesive films, the glass prepreg, the adhesive foam
and the honeycomb repair plug. Refer to Figure 212 and Chapter
51−77−11, paragraphs 5.B and 5.G.
(m) Install the vacuum equipment and heat blankets in the repair
area. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.

(n) Cure the repair materials for 90 minutes at 120 °C (248 °F). Re

fer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraphs 6.B.(5), 6.B.(6), 5.D.(2) and
5.E.

NOTE: If only use one blanket on outer skin, cure the repair ma

terials for 4 hours at 90 °C (194 °F).

(o) On completion of the cure cycle, remove the vacuum equipment and
heat blankets from the repair area.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(p) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

WARNING: RESIN (MATERIAL NO. 08−022) IS DANGEROUS.

(q) Cover and cure the exposed honeycomb core cells with the resin
(Material No. 08−022). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.H.

(r) Make the lay−up of adhesive films and repair plies. Refer to
Figure 212 and Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph
2.D.(1) thru 2.D.(14).
NOTE: Only use material No. 08−042A for adhesive film.

Page 267
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(s) Abrade the repair surface with Scotch Brite, type A, by hand or
using an orbital sanding device.
(t) Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: THE CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(u) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).
CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(v) Fill holes and surface porous with the pore filler (Material No.
16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) avoiding a continuous layer.

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

(w) Let cure the filler repair material for a minimum of two hours
at room temperature.

NOTE: If necessary for the surface appearance, let dry the pore
filler for 12 hours at room temperature or 7 hours 30 min

utes at 60° C (140° F) before you abrade it.

(x) Restore the surface protection. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

Page 268
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Inner or Outer Skin and Core, Zones 01 and 02, Elevator Inboard
End Cap.
Figure 212

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesNov269/270
01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR PROCEDURE IS ONLY APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 23911.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 210.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.
SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

M. Repair to Skins and Core Zones 01 and 02, Elevator Inboard End Cap

NOTE: This repair is valid for damage affecting both, inner and outer
skins and core.
NOTE: Before you repair the damaged areas you must do a damage evalua

tion. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3.

NOTE: This repair is to be carried out using the hot bond repair proce

dure. Refer toChapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.E. and to the general
repair procedure in Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004,
005, 006, 007, 010
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft
Type
Table 210
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow

able damage and repair applicability.

Page 271
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Honeycomb Core − Material No. 05−085 or 20−006,

− Cleaning Agent
− Adhesive Film
− PVF Film (Tedlar)
− Adhesive Foam
− Resin
− Glass Prepreg
− Carbon Fabric Prepreg
− Pore Filler
− Adhesive Paste
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 213)
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 19−015, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−047C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−107, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 05−092 or 05−091,
refer to Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para

graph 6.B.(1)

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−75−11, paragraph 3 and to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph
4.D.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Make the skin cut out procedure in the damaged area. Refer to
Figure 213 for shape of cut out. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page
Block 201, paragraph 2.A.

(c) Remove any concentrations of water (Initial drying). Refer to

Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.B.(1).

(d) Make the core removal procedure. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page
Block 201, paragraph 2.C.(1).

(e) Make the ply cut out procedure. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page
Block 201, paragraph 2.A.(2).

Page 272
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Cut out the damaged plies on the inner skin. Refer to Figure
213.
NOTE: Do not step the inner plies.

(g) Remove 40 mm (1.571 in) of PVF tedlar (Material No. 19−015) in

the area of the inner skin which will be in contact with the
pre−cured doubler. Refer to Figure 213.

(h) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(i) Carry out the final drying procedure. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00,
Page Block 201, paragraph 2.B.(2).

(j) Make the pre−cured doubler to the correct size and shape for the
repair area. Refer to Figure 213.
NOTE: For material and manufacture with glass prepreg, refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraphs 6.B.(9), 6.B.(10) and 4.C.

NOTE: For material and manufacture with glass wet lay−up, refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraphs 6.B.(2), 6.B.(8), 4.H and
5.A.
(k) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(l) Clean the repair area and the pre−cured repair doubler with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
(m) Bond the pre−cured doubler to the inner skin in the correct
position with adhesive paste, refer to Chapter 51−77−11 paragraph
6.B.(1) for material data and paragraph 5.C. for material data
application. Refer to Figure 213.

(n) Clean the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(o) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

WARNING: ADHESIVE FILM (MATERIAL NO. 08−042A IS DANGEROUS.

(p) Cut one piece of adhesive film ply (Material No. 08−042A) to
suit the size and shape of the repair area, refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 4.B.

(q) Place the adhesive film in the correct position over the
pre−cured repair doubler, refer to Figure 213.

Page 273
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/09
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CFRP (MATERIAL NO. 05−091 OR 05−092) IS DANGEROUS.

(r) Prepare and cut the CFRP filler plies and CFRP repair plies to
the correct size and orientation. Refer to Figure 213 and Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 4.C.

(s) Lay up the CFRP filler plies and CFRP repair plies, refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.B.

WARNING: ADHESIVE FILM (MATERIAL NO. 08−042A) IS DANGEROUS.

(t) Cut two adhesive film plies (Material No. 08−042A) to suit the
size and shape of the repair area, refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
paragraph 4.B.

WARNING: GLASS FABRIC (MATERIAL NO. 05−107) IS DANGEROUS.

(u) Cut a ply of glass fiber fabric prepreg (Material No. 05−107) to
the correct size and shape.

WARNING: ADHESIVE FOAM (MATERIAL NO. 08−047C) IS DANGEROUS.

(v) Prepare sufficient of adhesive foam (Material No. 08−047C) to

wrap it around the repair plug.
(w) Make the honeycomb repair plug to the correct size for the
repair. Refer to Figure 213.

NOTE: Use aramid honeycomb Material No. 20−006 for zone 01 and
Material No. 05−085 for zone 02.
(x) Install the adhesive films, the glass fiber fabric, the adhesive
foam and the honeycomb repair plug. Refer to Figure 213 and
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.G.

(y) Install the vacuum equipment and heat blankets in the repair
area. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.D.
(z) Cure the repair materials for 90 minutes at 120 °C (248 °F).
Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraphs 6.B.(5), 6.B.(6), 5.D.(2)
and 5.E.

NOTE: If only use one blanket on outer skin, cure the repair
materials for 4 hours at 90 °C (194 °F).
(aa)On completion of the cure cycle, remove the vacuum equipment and
heat blankets from the repair area.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(ab)Clean the repair area and the pre−cured repair doubler with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

Page 274
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/09
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: RESIN (MATERIAL NO. 08−022) IS DANGEROUS.

(ac)Cover and cure the exposed honeycomb core cells with the resin
(Material No. 08−022). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.H.

(ad)Make the lay−up of adhesive films and repair plies. Refer to

Figure 213 and Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph
2.D.(1) thru 2.D.(14).

NOTE: Only use material No. 08−042A for adhesive film.

(ae)Abrade the repair surface with Scotch Brite, type A, by hand or
using an orbital sanding device.

(af)Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: THE CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(ag)Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(ah)Fill holes and surface porous with the pore filler (Material No.
16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) avoiding a continuous layer.
CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

(ai)Let cure the filler repair material for a minimum of two hours
at room temperature.

NOTE: If necessary for the surface appearance, let dry the pore
filler for 12 hours at room temperature or 7 hours 30 min

utes at 60° C (140° F) before you abrade it.

(aj)Restore the surface protection. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12 .

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesNov275/276
01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Skins and Core, Zone 01 and 02, Elevator Inboard End Cap
Figure 213

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesNov277/278
01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR PROCEDURE IS ONLY APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 23911.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 211.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.
SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

N. Repair to Inner and Outer Skins and Core, Zone 03, Elevator Inboard End
Cap

NOTE: The following repair is applicable for damage to the skins (inner
and outer) and core or delamination between the skins and core.

NOTE: Before you repair the damage area, you must do a damage evalua

tion. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, paragraph 3.

NOTE: Use the hot−bond repair procedure for this repair. Refer to Chapter
51−77−11, paragraph 5.E and to the general repair procedure in
Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph 2.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004,
005, 006, 007, 010
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft
Type
Table 211
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC

TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow

able damage and repair applicability.

Page 279
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Feb 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Perforated Parting Film − Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, para

− Backing Plate
− Honeycomb Core
− Cleaning Agent
− Adhesive Film
− PVF Film (Tedlar)
− Resin
− Pore Filler
− Adhesive Foam
− Varnish
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 214)
graph 3.B.
− Aluminum Plate 0.8 − 1 mm
(0.031 − 0.039 in) thick.
− Material No. 20−006, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−042A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 19−015, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 08−022, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−050 or 16−051 or
16−052 , refer to Chapter
51−35−00
− Material No. 08−047C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−021, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 4.D. and to Chapter 51−75−11, para

graph 3.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM CFRP MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Make the inner and outer skin cut−out in the damaged area. Refer
to Figure 214 and Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph
2.A.(1).

(c) Use the initial drying procedure to remove water from the repair
area. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph
2.B.(1).

(d) Remove the damaged core. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block
201, paragraph 2.C.(1).
(e) Use the ply cut−out procedure to remove the inner and outer
plies. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph
2.A.(2).

Page 280
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Use the final drying procedure to remove any humidity from the
repair area. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201, paragraph
2.B.(2).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(g) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

(h) Put a piece of perforated parting film on the outer skin. Refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 3.B.

(i) Clamp the backing plate over the perforated parting film.

NOTE: The dimensions of the backing plate should be 25 mm (0.984

in) larger than the repair area.
WARNING: ADHESIVE FOAM (MATERIAL NO. 08−047C) IS DANGEROUS.

(j) Prepare sufficient of adhesive foam (Material No. 08−047C) to

wrap it around the repair plug.

(k) Make the honeycomb repair plug (Material No. 20−006). Refer to
Figure 214.
(l) Install the adhesive foam and the honeycomb repair plug. Refer to
Figure 214 and Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 5.G.

(m) Install the vacuum equipment and heat blankets and cure the re

pair materials. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraphs 5.D and
5.E.

(n) On completion of the cure cycle, remove the vacuum equipment and
heat blankets from the repair area.

(o) Remove the clamps, the backing plate and the parting film from
the outer skin.
(p) Abrade the honeycomb core until it is flush with the original
honeycomb core.

WARNING: RESIN (MATERIAL NO. 08−022) IS DANGEROUS.

(q) Cover the upper, lower and edge core cells with the resin (Mate

rial No. 08−022. Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201,
paragraph 2.C.(3).

(r) Put a piece of perforated parting film on the outer skin. Refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, paragraph 3.B.

(s) Clamp the backing plate over the perforated parting film.
NOTE: The dimensions of the backing plate should be 25 mm (0.984
in) larger than the repair area.

Page 281
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(t) Make the lay−up of adhesive films and repair plies on the inner
skin. Refer to Figure 214 and Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201,
paragraph 2.D.(1) thru 2.D.(14).

NOTE: Only use material No. 08−042A for adhesive film.

WARNING: POLYSULPHIDE PRIMER (MATERIAL NO. 09−050) IS DANGEROUS.

(u) Prepare the polysulphide primer (Material No. 09−050) and a piece
of PVF film (Material No. 19−015) to size of the repair area
plus 20 mm (0.79 in).

WARNING: POLYSULPHIDE PRIMER (MATERIAL NO. 09−050) IS DANGEROUS.

(v) Apply a layer of polysulphide primer (Material No. 09−050) on the

repair area.
(w) Firmly apply the PVF film in the repair area. Work from the cen

ter to the edges, use a squeegee or roller to remove trapped air
and excess resin.

(x) Let repair materials cure. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions

for full data.
WARNING: VARNISH (MATERIAL NO. 16−021) IS DANGEROUS.

(y) Apply varnish (Material No. 16−021) all the edges of the PVF
film. Refer to Figure 214.

(z) Remove the backing plate, the clamps and the parting film from
the outer side.

(aa)Make the lay−up of adhesive films and repair plies on the outer
skin. Refer to Figure 214 and Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 201,
paragraph 2.D.(1) thru 2.D.(14).

NOTE: Only use material No. 08−042A for adhesive film.

(ab)Abrade the repair surface with Scotch Brite, type A, by hand or
using an orbital sanding device.

(ac)Remove the waste material with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: THE CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

(ad)Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003).

CAUTION: A CONTINUOUS LAYER OF PORE FILLER IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.

(ae)Fill holes and surface porous with the pore filler (Material No.
16−050 or 16−051 or 16−052) avoiding a continuous layer.

Page 282
Printed in Germany
55−24−11 Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE PART DURING THE CURE CYCLE.

(af)Let cure the filler repair material for a minimum of two hours
at room temperature.

NOTE: If necessary for the surface appearance, let dry the pore
filler for 12 hours at room temperature or 7 hours 30 min

utes at 60° C (140° F) before you abrade it.

(ag)Restore the surface finish to the outer skin. Refer to Chapter

51−75−12.

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesFeb283/284
01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Inner and Outer Skin and Core, Zone 03, Elevator Inboard End Cap
Figure 214 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesNov285/286
01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Inner and Outer Skin and Core, Zone 03, Elevator Inboard End Cap
Figure 214 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−24−11 PagesNov287/288
01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR ATTACH FITTINGS

1. Structural Arrangement

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Structural Arrangement Figure 1

1 Attach Fittings − Hinge Arm Chapter 55−26−41
2 Attach Fittings − Actuator Chapter 55−26−47
3 Hoist points Chapter 55−26−48
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−26−00 AugPage 1
01/14
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structural Arrangement
Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55-26-00 FebPage 2
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR ATTACH FITTINGS − ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 101.

CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER TO

PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVALUA
TION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.
SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

1. General

NOTE: For definition of allowable damage refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For Damage Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14
− CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

This topic contains the allowable damage and related data applicable to the
Elevator metallic attach fittings (refer to Figure 101). This data is nec
essary to find the correct repair procedure.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 101
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUCTION
of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data about all
weight variants and their required information for allowable damage
and repair applicability.

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−26−41, Page Block 101, Paragraph 1.
− Chapter 55−26−47, Page Block 101, Paragraph 1.

2. Damage Evaluation

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−26−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

− Chapter 55−26−41, Page Block 101, Paragraph 2.

− Chapter 55−26−47, Page Block 101, Paragraph 2.
3. Type of Damage

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−26−41, Page Block 101, Paragraph 3.
− Chapter 55−26−47, Page Block 101, Paragraph 3.
4. Repair Zones

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−26−41, Page Block 101, Paragraph 4.
− Chapter 55−26−47, Page Block 101, Paragraph 4.

5. Allowable Damage − General

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−26−41, Page Block 101, Paragraph 6.
− Chapter 55−26−47, Page Block 101, Paragraph 6.

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−26−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

6. Allowable Damage Description/Criteria

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ PARAGRAPH/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION INSTRUCTION REF
TYPE FIGURE CATEGORY
ERENCE
Hinge Attach Fittings Linear Dam 104 B, C 55−26−00−1−002−00
age. This INACTIVE
allowable
damage data
is inactive
since revi
sion dated
Nov 01/14,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−26−41,
Page Block
101, Para
graph 8.A.
Hinge Attach Fittings Superficial 8.A. B 55−26−00−1−002−00
Damage. INACTIVE
This allow
able damage
data is
inactive
since revi
sion dated
Nov 01/14,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−26−41,
Page Block
101, Para
graph 8.B.

Table 102

Page 103
Printed in Germany
55−26−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ PARAGRAPH/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION INSTRUCTION REF
TYPE FIGURE CATEGORY
ERENCE
Hinge Attach Fittings Dents. This − − −
allowable INACTIVE
damage data
is inactive
since revi
sion dated
Nov 01/14,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−26−41,
Page Block
101, Para
graph 8.B.
Actuator Attach Fittings Linear Dam 104 B, C 55−26−00−1−002−00
age. This INACTIVE
allowable
damage data
is inactive
since revi
sion dated
Nov 01/14,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−26−47,
Page Block
101, Para
graph 8.A.

Table 102

Page 104
Printed in Germany
55−26−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ PARAGRAPH/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION INSTRUCTION REF
TYPE FIGURE CATEGORY
ERENCE
Actuator Attach Fittings Superficial 8.B. B 55−26−00−1−002−00
Damage. INACTIVE
This allow
able damage
data is
inactive
since revi
sion dated
Nov 01/14,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−26−47,
Page Block
101, Para
graph 8.B.
Actuator Attach Fittings Dents. − − −
This allow INACTIVE
able damage
data is
inactive
since revi
sion dated
Nov 01/14,
it has
been moved
to Chapter
55−26−47,
Page Block
101, Para
graph 8.B.

Table 102
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

7. Repair Limits

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−26−41, Page Block 101, Paragraph 7.
− Chapter 55−26−47, Page Block 101, Paragraph 7.

Page 105
Printed in Germany
55−26−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

8. Allowable Damage − Attach Fittings

The following allowable damage limits are applicable to all Elevator attach
fittings zones, refer to Figures 102 and 103.

A. Hinge Attach Fittings (Zones 01 thru 06), (refer to Figure 102).

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−26−41, Page Block 101, Paragraph 8.A and 8.B.

B. Actuator Attach Fittings (Zones 07 and 08), (refer to Figure 103).

NOTE: This allowable damage information has been moved to the applicable
Chapter:
− Chapter 55−26−47, Page Block 101, Paragraph 8.A and 8.B.

Page 106
Printed in Germany
55−26−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Elevator Attach Fittings − General Arrangement

Figure 101

Page 107
Printed in Germany
55−26−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ITEM NAME Refer to the following figures for details of

allowable damage and repair limits according to
damage type
SUPERFICIAL DAMAGE OTHER DAMAGE
1 Hinge Attach Fittings <1> <1>
2 Actuator Attach Fit <1> <1>
tings
Key to Figure 101
<1> Refer to Table 102.

Page 108
Printed in Germany
55−26−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Zones for Elevator Hinge Attach Fittings

Figure 102 (sheet 1)

Page 109
Printed in Germany
55−26−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Zones for Elevator Hinge Attach Fittings

Figure 102 (sheet 2)

Page 110
Printed in Germany
55−26−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Zones for Elevator Actuator Attach Fittings

Figure 103

Page 111
Printed in Germany
55−26−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits − Attach Fittings, All Zones

Figure 104

Page 112
Printed in Germany
55−26−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR ATTACH FITTINGS − HINGE ARM

1. Identification Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Attach Fittings − Hinge Arm Figure 1

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−26−41 AugPage 1
01/14
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Attach Fittings - Hinge Arm

Figure 1 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-26-41 FebPage 2
01/02
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Attach Fittings - Hinge Arm

Figure 1 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-26-41 FebPage 3
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Fitting Assy, D55281800000 PB 201

Hinge Arm 1 001 55−26−00
5 Fitting, hinge 3.4144T73651 D55982000200 PB 201
Arm 1 LN9073 201 55−26−00
10 Fitting Assy, D55281810000 PB 201
Hinge Arm 2 001 55−26−00
15 Fitting, hinge 3.4144T73651 D55982010200 PB 201
Arm 2 LN9073 201 55−26−00
15A Fitting, hinge 3.4144T73651 D55982010202 PB 201 A22621G0140A
Arm 2 LN9073 203 55−26−00
15B Fitting, hinge 3.4144T73651 D55982010204 PB 201 A39573G0606
Arm 2 LN9073 205 55−26−00
20 Fitting Assy, D55281820000 PB 201
hinge Arm 3 001 55−26−00
25 Fitting, hinge 3.4144T73651 D55982020200 PB 201
Arm 3 LN9073 201 55−26−00
25A Fitting, hinge 3.4144T73651 D55982020202 PB 201 A22621G0140
Arm 3 LN9073 203 55−26−00
30 Fitting Assy, D55281830000 PB 201
Hinge Arm 4 001 55−26−00
30A Fitting Assy, D55281830002 PB 201 A25157G0217
Hinge Arm 4 003 55−26−00
35 Fitting, hinge 3.4144T73651 D55982030200 PB 201
Arm 4 LN9073 201 55−26−00
35A Fitting, hinge 3.4144T73651 D55982030202 PB 201 A22621G0140
Arm 4 LN9073 203 55−26−00
40 Pad, Stop 5.2201.3 D55982031202
LN9392
−alternative Z−14.333 D55982039200
45 Pad Upper, Stop 5.2201.3 D55982037200
LN9392
Alternative Z−14.333 D55982037200
50 Fitting Assy, D55281840000 PB 201
Hinge Arm 5 001 55−26−00
55 Fitting, hinge 3.4144T73651 D55982040200 PB 201
Arm 5 LN9073 201 55−26−00
55A Fitting, hinge 3.4144T73651 D55982040202 PB 201 A22621G0140
Arm 5 LN9073 203 55−26−00
ASSY Dwg.: D55280001, D55281800, D55281810, D55281820, D55281830, D55281840

Key to Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−26−41 AugPage 4
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

60 Fitting Assy, D55281850000 PB 201

Hinge Arm 6 001 55−26−00
65 Fitting, hinge 3.4144T73651 D55982050200 PB 201
Arm 6 LN9073 201 55−26−00
ASSY Dwg.: D55280001, D55281850

Key to Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−26−41 Pages 5/6
Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR HINGE ARM ATTACH FITTINGS − ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT PARAGRAPH.

CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER TO

PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE ON ELEVATOR ATTACH FITTINGS MUST BE INSPECTED AT

DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS
55−26−00−1−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPEC
TIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND
PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVALUA
TION OF THE DAMAGE.
IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE
EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

1. General
NOTE: For definition of allowable damage refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For Damage Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14

− CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

2. Damage Evaluation
Before you repair the damaged structure you must do a damage evaluation re
fer to Chapter 51−11−00, paragraph 2 for data related to the metallic
structure.

3. Type of Damage
The different types of damages which can occur to the metallic structure
are fully defined in Chapter 51−11−00, Table 1.

4. Damage Zones

Each attachment fitting of the Elevator is classified as a complete repair

zone. When you do a damage evaluation (refer to paragraph 2.) you must re
fer to the repair zone data.

The repair zone data of the Elevator Hinge Attach Fittings is in Figure
101.

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−26−41 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Zones for Elevator Hinge Attach Fittings

Figure 101 (sheet 1)

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−26−41 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Zones for Elevator Hinge Attach Fittings

Figure 101 (sheet 2)

Page 103
Printed in Germany
55−26−41 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

5. Allowable Damage Description/Criteria

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ PARAGRAPH/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION INSTRUCTION REF
TYPE FIGURE CATEGORY
ERENCE
Hinge Attach Fittings Linear Dam 8.A./102 B, C 55−26−00−1−002−00
age
(Scratches)
Hinge Attach Fittings Superficial 8.B. B 55−26−00−1−002−00
Damage
(Marks and
corrosion)
Hinge Attach Fittings Dents 8.B. − −
Hinge Attach Fittings − Corrosion <1> − −
Lug Bores

Table 101
<1> Corrosion on the lug bores is not allowed. If you find corrosion, re
fer to Page Block 201, paragraphs 5.D, 5.E and 5.F.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter

51−11−14.

6. Allowable Damage

Allowable damage is damage that does not affect the necessary strength or
function of a component. You do not have to make a structural repair for
this type of damage. You must make a non structural repair. If this type
of damage has rough or sharp edges, smooth these out with the correct
abrasive cloth. Replace the surface paint if necessary.

7. Repair Limits
The repair limits data gives the time limits in which to make temporary
and permanent repairs. These time limits are given in flight cycles/hours
(FC/FH). The repair limits also tell you which type of repair you can do.
To find the repair limits data applicable to a damaged area, you must know
the following data:
− The repair zone applicable to the damaged area.
− The area, length or depth (as applicable) of the damage to the structure.
− The type of damage (for example: nick, scratch, delamination).

Page 104
Printed in Germany
55−26−41 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

8. Attach Fittings − Allowable Damage

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE ON ELEVATOR ATTACH FITTINGS MUST BE INSPECTED

AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS
55−26−00−1−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPEC
TIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT
AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.
SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN THE TABLE 102.

A. Hinge Attach Fittings − Linear Damage (Scratches)

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Zones 01 to 06, refer to
Figure 101 for Repair Zones.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 102.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 102
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 102 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.

Page 105
Printed in Germany
55−26−41 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits − Hinge Attach Fittings, All Zones
Figure 102

Page 106
Printed in Germany
55−26−41 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE ON ELEVATOR ATTACH FITTINGS MUST BE INSPECTED
AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS
55−26−00−1−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPEC
TIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT
AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN THE TABLE 103.

B. Hinge Attach Fittings − Superficial Damage (marks and corrosion) and

Dents
NOTE: Corrosion on the lug bores is not allowed. If you find corrosion,
refer to Page Block 201, paragraphs 5.D, 5.E and 5.F.

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Zones 01 to 06, refer to

Figure 101 for Repair Zones.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 103.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 103
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

The following allowable damage limits are applicable to all Elevator

Hinge Attach Fittings zones (except corrosion on the lug bores):
− Superficial damage (marks and corrosion): 10% of the nominal material
thickness over a maximum area of 400 mm (0.620 in).
− Dents: Not permitted.

Printed in Germany
55−26−41 PagesFeb107/108
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR HINGE ARM ATTACH FITTINGS − REPAIRS

1. General

This topic contains all of the specific repair procedures for the structure
of the Elevator Hinge Arm Attach Fittings. The repair zones and allowable
damage data for these repair procedures are in Chapter 55−26−41, Page Block
101.

NOTE: For Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14

− CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.
2. Safety Precautions

To prevent risk when you do a repair, read and obey the warnings given be
low.

WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.
WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRICAL POWER
ON THE AIRCRAFT. USE ONLY POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE EX
PLOSION PROOF.

CAUTION: OBEY THE INSPECTION INSTRUCTIONS GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT REPAIR.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER TO PARA
GRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR APPLICABILITY PER AIRCRAFT TYPE, WEIGHT VARIANT
AND REPAIR AREA GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT REPAIR.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.
3. Repairs Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER REMARKS

No General Repairs applicable. − −

Table 201

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−26−41 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

4. Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs

INSPECTION
SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCE REPAIR
PARAGRAPH FIGURE INSTRUCTION REF
DURE CATEGORY
ERENCE
Repair of damage to the 5.A. 201 A −
Elevator Hinge Fittings
tab lugs, Zones 01, 02,
03 and 05
Repair of damage to the 5.B. 202 A −
Elevator Hinge Fittings
tab lugs, Zone 04
Repair of damage to the 5.C. 203 A −
Elevator Hinge Fittings
tab lugs, Zone 06
Repair of worn holes of 5.D. 204 B IIR
the Elevator Hinge Fit 55−26−41−2−001−00
tings, Zones 01, 02, 03
and 05.
Repair of worn holes of 5.E. 205 B IIR
the Elevator Hinge Fit 55−26−41−2−001−00
tings, Zone 04.
Repair of worn holes of 5.F. 206 B IIR
the Elevator Hinge Fit 55−26−41−2−001−00
tings, Zone 06.

Table 202
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−26−41 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

5. Elevator Hinge Arm Attach Fitting Repairs

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 203.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.
SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

A. Repair of damage to the Elevator Hinge Fittings tab lugs, Zones 01, 02,
03 and 05
NOTE: This repair is applicable when the tab lugs of the Elevator Hinge
Fittings zones 01, 02, 03 and 05, are damaged.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation, Refer to Chapter 51−11−00 for data.

NOTE: If it is necessary to remove the Elevator for access, Refer to the

AMM, Chapter 27−34−41, Page Block 401.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 203
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−26−41 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair part 1 Material 2024T42 Clad, 1.6 mm

(0.063 in) Thick
− Cleaning Agent AR Material No.11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant AR Material No.09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant AR Material No.09−001, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Epoxy Primer AR Material No.16−006C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Chemical Conversion Coating AR Material No.13−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Chromic Acid Anodizing AR Refer to Chapter 51−21−11
(CAA)
− Polyurethane Finish Paint AR Material No.16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Varnish AR Material No.07−001, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 201)

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−75−11.

(b) Remove the damaged tab lug and make the area smooth and level
with the adjacent surface.

NOTE: If only one tab is affected it is necessary to blend−out

the undamaged tab to allow repair part installation.

NOTE: Perform HFEC inspection as per NTM, Chapter 51−10−08 to

check crack free condition at reworked area.
(c) Get the correct metal material to make the repair part.

(d) Make the repair part to the correct shape and dimensions for the
repair. Refer to Figure 201. If necessary, refer to Chapter
51−26−11 for bending data and Chapter 51−26−12 for joggling data.
NOTE: The repair angle should be formed on ’0’ Condition.

(e) Mark the positions of the two fastener holes on the repair part.

NOTE: For Fasteners installation and removal Refer to Chapter

51−42−11.

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−26−41 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Pilot drill the marked fastener holes on the repair part. For
fastener hole and drill data refer to Chapter 51−44−11.
(g) Put the repair part in the correct repair position and secure to
the structure of the hinge attach fitting with screw clamps.

(h) Transfer−drill one of the fastener holes, from the previously

drilled holes in the repair part, through the hinge attach fit
ting structure. Then drill this hole to the required final diam
eter for the fasteners. Secure with a screw−pin.

(i) Transfer−drill the other fastener hole, from the previously

drilled holes in the repair part, through the hinge attach fit
ting structure. Then drill this hole to the required final diam
eter for the fasteners.
NOTE: For Fasteners oversize and alternative Refer to Chapter
51−43−00.

NOTE: For Fasteners spacing and margin data Refer to Chapter

51−47−00.
(j) Remove the screw−pin, the screw clamps and the repair part from
the repair area.

(k) Remove sharp edges from the fastener holes in the repair part
and hinge fitting, with an abrasive cone.

(l) Remove waste material from the repair area with a vacuum cleaner,
if necessary.

(m) Clean the repair part and the repair area of the hinge attach
fitting with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(n) Apply the correct surface treatments to the repair part ((chromic
acid anodizing) and then epoxy primer (Material No. 16−006C),
followed by a top coat of polyurethane finish paint (Material No.
16−018C)). Refer to Chapter 51−21−11 for protective treatment ap
plication data and Chapter 51−23−00 for coatings application
data.
(o) Apply the correct surface treatments to the repair area of the
hinge attach fittings (chemical conversion coating (Material No.
13−002) and then epoxy primer (Material No. 16−006C), followed by
a top coat of polyurethane finish paint (Material No. 16−018C)).
Refer to Chapter 51−21−11 for protective treatment application
data and Chapter 51−23−00 for coatings application data.
(p) Apply sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the surface of the repair
part and the hinge arm attach fitting that will touch when as
sembled.

(q) Put the repair part in position on the hinge attach fitting and
secure with screw−pins.

Page 205
Printed in Germany
55−26−41 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(r) Remove each screw−pin in turn and wet install the correct fas
tener with sealant (Material No. 09−001).
(s) Apply a fillet of sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the tab lug
and attach fitting interface.

(t) Remove unwanted sealants from the repair area with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

(u) Let the sealants to cure. Refer to the manufacturer’s instruc

tions for the cure times.

(v) Protect the sealant around the tab lug/attach fitting interface
with varnish (Material No. 07−001).

(w) Let the varnish (Material No. 07−001) to dry. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions for the drying time.

(x) Restore the surface protection in the repair areas (Refer to

Chapter 51−75−12).

(y) Install the Elevator if it was removed for access purposes, Refer
to AMM, Chapter 27−34−41, Page Block 401.

Page 206
Printed in Germany
55−26−41 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to the Tab Lugs of the Elevator Hinge Arm Attach Fittings,
Zones 01, 02, 03 and 05
Figure 201

Printed in Germany
55−26−41 PagesFeb207/208
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 204.
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

B. Repair of damage to the Elevator Hinge Fittings tab lugs, Zone 04

NOTE: This repair is applicable when the tab lugs of the Elevator Hinge
Fitting zone 04, are damaged.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation, refer to Chapter 51−11−00 for data.

NOTE: If it is necessary to remove the Elevator for access, Refer to the

AMM, Chapter 27−34−41, Page Block 401.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 204
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

Page 209
Printed in Germany
55−26−41 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair part 1 Material 2024T42 Clad, 1.6 mm

(0.063 in) Thick
− Cleaning Agent AR Material No.11−003, Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant AR Material No.09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant AR Material No.09−001, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Epoxy Primer AR Material No.16−006C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Chemical Conversion Coating AR Material No.13−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Chromic Acid Anodizing AR Refer to Chapter 51−21−11
(CAA)
− Polyurethane Finish Paint AR Material No.16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Varnish AR Material No.07−001, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 202)

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−75−11.

(b) Remove the damaged tab lug and make the area smooth and level
with the adjacent surface.

NOTE: If only one tab is affected it is necessary to blend−out

the undamaged tab to allow repair part installation.

NOTE: Perform HFEC inspection as per NTM, Chapter 51−10−08 to

check crack free condition at reworked area.
(c) Get the correct metal material to make the repair part.

(d) Make the repair part to the correct shape and dimensions for the
repair. Refer to Figure 202. If necessary, refer to Chapter
51−26−11 for bending data and Chapter 51−26−12 for joggling data.
NOTE: The repair angle should be formed on ’0’ Condition.

(e) Mark the positions of the two fastener holes on the repair part.

NOTE: For Fasteners installation and removal Refer to Chapter

51−42−11.

Page 210
Printed in Germany
55−26−41 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Pilot drill the marked fastener holes on the repair part. For
fastener hole and drill data refer to Chapter 51−44−11.
(g) Put the repair part in the correct repair position and secure to
the structure of the hinge attach fitting with screw clamps.

(h) Transfer−drill one of the fastener holes, from the previously

drilled holes in the repair part, through the hinge attach fit

ting structure. Then drill this hole to the required final diam

eter for the fasteners. Secure with a screw−pin.

(i) Transfer−drill the other fastener hole, from the previously

drilled holes in the repair part, through the hinge attach fit

ting structure. Then drill this hole to the required final diam

eter for the fasteners.
NOTE: For Fasteners oversize and alternative Refer to Chapter
51−43−00.

NOTE: For Fasteners spacing and margin data Refer to Chapter

51−47−00.
(j) Remove the screw−pin, the screw clamps and the repair part from
the repair area.

(k) Remove sharp edges from the fastener holes in the repair part
and hinge fitting, with an abrasive cone.

(l) Remove waste material from the repair area with a vacuum cleaner,
if necessary.

(m) Clean the repair part and the repair area of the hinge attach
fitting with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(n) Apply the correct surface treatments to the repair part ((chromic
acid anodizing) and then epoxy primer (Material No. 16−006C),
followed by a top coat of polyurethane finish paint (Material No.
16−018C)). Refer to Chapter 51−21−11 for protective treatment ap

plication data and Chapter 51−23−00 for coatings application
data.
(o) Apply the correct surface treatments to the repair area of the
hinge attach fittings (chemical conversion coating (Material No.
13−002) and then epoxy primer (Material No. 16−006C), followed by
a top coat of polyurethane finish paint (Material No. 16−018C)).
Refer to Chapter 51−21−11 for protective treatment application
data and Chapter 51−23−00 for coatings application data.
(p) Apply sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the surface of the repair
part and the hinge arm attach fitting that will touch when as

sembled.

(q) Put the repair part in position on the hinge attach fitting and
secure with screw−pins.

Page 211
Printed in Germany
55−26−41 Feb 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(r) Remove each screw−pin in turn and wet install the correct fas

tener with sealant (Material No. 09−001).
(s) Apply a fillet of sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the tab lug
and attach fitting interface.

(t) Remove unwanted sealants from the repair area with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

(u) Let the sealants to cure. Refer to the manufacturer’s instruc

tions for the cure times.

(v) Protect the sealant around the tab lug/attach fitting interface
with varnish (Material No. 07−001).

(w) Let the varnish (Material No. 07−001) to dry. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions for the drying time.

(x) Restore the surface protection in the repair areas (Refer to

Chapter 51−75−12).

(y) Install the Elevator if it was removed for access purposes, Refer
to AMM, Chapter 27−34−41, Page Block 401.

Page 212
Printed in Germany
55−26−41 Feb 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to the Tab Lugs of the Elevator Hinge Arm Attach Fittings,
Zone 04
Figure 202

Printed in Germany
55−26−41 PagesFeb213/214
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 205.
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

C. Repair of damage to the Elevator Hinge Fittings tab lugs, Zone 06

NOTE: This repair is applicable when the tab lugs of the Elevator Hinge
Fitting zone 06, are damaged.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation, refer to Chapter 51−11−00 for data.

NOTE: If it is necessary to remove the Elevator for access, Refer to the

AMM, Chapter 27−34−41, Page Block 401.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 205
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

Page 215
Printed in Germany
55−26−41 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair part 1 Material 2024T42 Clad, 1.6 mm

(0.063 in) Thick
− Cleaning Agent AR Material No.11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant AR Material No.09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Sealant AR Material No.09−001, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Epoxy Primer AR Material No.16−006C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Chemical Conversion Coating AR Material No.13−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Chromic Acid Anodizing AR Refer to Chapter 51−21−11
(CAA)
− Polyurethane Finish Paint AR Material No.16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Varnish AR Material No.07−001, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 203)

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−75−11.

(b) Remove the damaged tab lug and make the area smooth and level
with the adjacent surface.

NOTE: If only one tab is affected it is necessary to blend−out

the undamaged tab to allow repair part installation.

NOTE: Perform HFEC inspection as per NTM, Chapter 51−10−08 to

check crack free condition at reworked area.
(c) Get the correct metal material to make the repair part.

(d) Make the repair part to the correct shape and dimensions for the
repair. Refer to Figure 203. If necessary, refer to Chapter
51−26−11 for bending data and Chapter 51−26−12 for joggling data.
NOTE: The repair angle should be formed on ’0’ Condition.

(e) Mark the positions of the two fastener holes on the repair part.

NOTE: For Fasteners installation and removal Refer to Chapter

51−42−11.

Page 216
Printed in Germany
55−26−41 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Pilot drill the marked fastener holes on the repair part. For
fastener hole and drill data refer to Chapter 51−44−11.
(g) Put the repair part in the correct repair position and secure to
the structure of the hinge attach fitting with screw clamps.

(h) Transfer−drill one of the fastener holes, from the previously

drilled holes in the repair part, through the hinge attach fit

ting structure. Then drill this hole to the required final diam

eter for the fasteners. Secure with a screw−pin.

(i) Transfer−drill the other fastener hole, from the previously

drilled holes in the repair part, through the hinge attach fit

ting structure. Then drill this hole to the required final diam

eter for the fasteners.
NOTE: For Fasteners oversize and alternative Refer to Chapter
51−43−00.

NOTE: For Fasteners spacing and margin data Refer to Chapter

51−47−00.
(j) Remove the screw−pin, the screw clamps and the repair part from
the repair area.

(k) Remove sharp edges from the fastener holes in the repair part
and hinge fitting, with an abrasive cone.

(l) Remove waste material from the repair area with a vacuum cleaner,
if necessary.

(m) Clean the repair part and the repair area of the hinge attach
fitting with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).

(n) Apply the correct surface treatments to the repair part ((chromic
acid anodizing) and then epoxy primer (Material No. 16−006C),
followed by a top coat of polyurethane finish paint (Material No.
16−018C)). Refer to Chapter 51−21−11 for protective treatment ap

plication data and Chapter 51−23−00 for coatings application
data.
(o) Apply the correct surface treatments to the repair area of the
hinge attach fittings (chemical conversion coating (Material No.
13−002) and then epoxy primer (Material No. 16−006C), followed by
a top coat of polyurethane finish paint (Material No. 16−018C)).
Refer to Chapter 51−21−11 for protective treatment application
data and Chapter 51−23−00 for coatings application data.
(p) Apply sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the surface of the repair
part and the hinge arm attach fitting that will touch when as

sembled.

(q) Put the repair part in position on the hinge attach fitting and
secure with screw−pins.

Page 217
Printed in Germany
55−26−41 Feb 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(r) Remove each screw−pin in turn and wet install the correct fas

tener with sealant (Material No. 09−001).
(s) Apply a fillet of sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the tab lug
and attach fitting interface.

(t) Remove unwanted sealants from the repair area with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

(u) Let the sealants to cure. Refer to the manufacturer’s instruc

tions for the cure times.

(v) Protect the sealant around the tab lug/attach fitting interface
with varnish (Material No. 07−001).

(w) Let the varnish (Material No. 07−001) to dry. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions for the drying time.

(x) Restore the surface protection in the repair areas (Refer to

Chapter 51−75−12).

(y) Install the Elevator if it was removed for access purposes, Refer
to AMM, Chapter 27−34−41, Page Block 401.

Page 218
Printed in Germany
55−26−41 Feb 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to the Tab Lugs of the Elevator Hinge Arm Attach Fitting,
Zone 06
Figure 203

Printed in Germany
55−26−41 PagesFeb219/220
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 206.
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE (IIR) FOR THIS STRUCTURE IS 55−26−41−2−001−00
AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS (SRI) SEC
TION OF THE SRM. YOU MUST INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND
PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.

CAUTION: YOU MUST NOT DO THIS TYPE OF REPAIR ON MORE THAN TWO HINGE FIT
TINGS ON EACH ELEVATOR.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ONLY APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 155023.

D. Repair of worn holes of the Elevator Hinge Fittings, Zones 01, 02, 03
and 05

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation, refer to Chapter 51−11−00 for data.

NOTE: If it is necessary to remove the Elevator for access, Refer to the

AMM, Chapter 27−34−41, Page Block 401.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 206
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

Page 221
Printed in Germany
55−26−41 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Bush Material 1 Refer to Figure 204

− Cleaning Agent AR Material No.11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Surface Sealant AR Material No.09−016, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Zinc Chromate Paste AR Material No.05−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 204)

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−75−11.

(b) Ream the holes of the affected fittings, as per Chapter 51−22−00,
to completely remove all damage.

NOTE: Make sure the center of the reamed hole is aligned with
the original one.

NOTE: Perform the reaming and HFEC inspection on steps to get the
minimum hole without damage.
NOTE: Optional Airbus tooling 98D27309012−000 has been developed
for this use and is available for loan or purchase at Air
bus Spares Department.

NOTE: Make sure the hole nominal diameter after reaming does not
exceed 16.5 mm (0.6496 in).
(c) Perform HFEC inspection at reamed holes as per NTM, Chapter
51−10−08, Page Block 6 to ensure no cracks remain.

(d) Inspect the lug holes to make sure that the inner face is in
good condition and that the diameter does not exceed the maximum
allowed diameter.

NOTE: If the diameter of the holes in the lugs is larger than

the maximum allowed diameter given in Figure 204 contact
AIRBUS.

(e) Apply corrosion protection to all bare Aluminium surfaces. Refer

to Chapter 51−21−11.

(f) Measure final hole size and manufacture the repair bush using the
dimensions and materials given in Figure 204.

Page 222
Printed in Germany
55−26−41 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(g) Clean and degrease the bush and the hole with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).
NOTE: After you have cleaned the bush and the lug hole, wear
clean gloves when you touch them.

(h) Cadmium plate the bush as per Chapter 51−21−11.

NOTE: The bush must meet the outer diameter requirements after
cadmium plating is accomplished.
(i) Press fit install the Hinge Fitting bushing at room temperature
using Zinc−Chromate Paste (Material No. 05−002). Refer to Chapter
51−72−12 for bushing installation.

(j) Ream the inner bush hole to final diameter. Refer to Figure 204.
(k) Seal the repair area with surface sealant (Material No. 09−016).

(l) Restore the surface protection in the repair area as per Chapter
51−72−12.

(m) Install the Elevator if it was removed for access purposes, Refer
to AMM, Chapter 27−34−41, Page Block 401.

Printed in Germany
55−26−41 PagesFeb223/224
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of worn holes of the Elevator Hinge Fittings, Zones 01, 02, 03 and 05
Figure 204

Printed in Germany
55−26−41 PagesMay225/226
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 207.
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE (IIR) FOR THIS STRUCTURE IS 55−26−41−2−001−00
AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS (SRI) SEC
TION OF THE SRM. YOU MUST INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND
PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.

CAUTION: YOU MUST NOT DO THIS TYPE OF REPAIR ON MORE THAN TWO HINGE FIT
TINGS ON EACH ELEVATOR.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ONLY APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 155023.

E. Repair of worn holes of the Elevator Hinge Fittings, Zone 04

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation, refer to Chapter 51−11−00 for data.

NOTE: If it is necessary to remove the Elevator for access, Refer to the

AMM, Chapter 27−34−41, Page Block 401.

NOTE: If it is necessary to remove the lug tab, refer to the Paragraph

5.B.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 207
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

Page 227
Printed in Germany
55−26−41 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Plain Repair Bush Material 1 Refer to Figure 205

2 Shouldered Repair Bush Ma 1 Refer to Figure 205
terial
− Cleaning Agent AR Material No.11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Surface Sealant AR Material No.09−016, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Zinc Chromate Paste AR Material No.05−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 205)

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−75−11.

(b) Ream the holes of the affected fittings, as per Chapter 51−22−00,
to completely remove all damage.

NOTE: Make sure the center of the reamed hole is aligned with
the original one.

NOTE: Perform the reaming and HFEC inspection on steps to get the
minimum hole without damage.
NOTE: Optional Airbus tooling 98D27309012−000 has been developed
for this use and is available for loan or purchase at Air
bus Spares Department.

NOTE: Make sure the nominal hole diameter after reaming does not
exceed 21.5 mm (0.8464 in).
(c) Perform HFEC inspection at reamed holes as per NTM, Chapter
51−10−08, Page Block 6 to ensure no cracks remain.

(d) Inspect the lug holes to make sure that the inner face is in
good condition and that the diameter does not exceed the maximum
allowed diameter.

NOTE: If the diameter of the holes in the lugs is larger than

the maximum allowed diameter given in Figure 205 contact
AIRBUS.

(e) Apply corrosion protection to all bare Aluminium surfaces. Refer

to Chapter 51−21−11.

Page 228
Printed in Germany
55−26−41 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Measure final hole size and manufacture the repair bush using the
dimensions and materials given in Figure 205.
NOTE: Depending on the lug damage manufacture a plain bush (Item
1) or a shouldered bush (Item 2) given in Figure 205.

(g) Clean and degrease the bush and the hole with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

NOTE: After you have cleaned the bush and the lug hole, wear
clean gloves when you touch them.

(h) Cadmium plate the bush as per Chapter 51−21−11.

NOTE: The bush must meet the outer diameter requirements after
cadmium plating is accomplished.
(i) Press fit install the Hinge Fitting bushing at room temperature
using Zinc−Chromate Paste (Material No. 05−002). Refer to Chapter
51−72−12 for bushing installation.

(j) Ream the inner bush hole to final diameter. Refer to Figure 205.

(k) Seal the repair area with surface sealant (Material No. 09−016).
(l) Restore the surface protection in the repair area as per Chapter
51−72−12.

(m) Install the Elevator if it was removed for access purposes, Refer
to AMM, Chapter 27−34−41, Page Block 401.

Printed in Germany
55−26−41 PagesFeb229/230
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of worn holes of the Elevator Hinge Fittings, Zone 04

Figure 205 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−26−41 PagesMay231/232
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of worn holes of the Elevator Hinge Fittings, Zone 04

Figure 205 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−26−41 PagesMay233/234
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of worn holes of the Elevator Hinge Fittings, Zone 04

Figure 205 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55−26−41 PagesMay235/236
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 208.
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE (IIR) FOR THIS STRUCTURE IS 55−26−41−2−001−00
AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS (SRI) SEC
TION OF THE SRM. YOU MUST INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND
PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.

CAUTION: YOU MUST NOT DO THIS TYPE OF REPAIR ON MORE THAN TWO HINGE FIT
TINGS ON EACH ELEVATOR.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ONLY APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 155023.

F. Repair of worn holes of the Elevator Hinge Fittings, Zone 06

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation, refer to Chapter 51−11−00 for data.

NOTE: If it is necessary to remove the Elevator for access, Refer to the

AMM, Chapter 27−34−41, Page Block 401.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 208
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

Page 237
Printed in Germany
55−26−41 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair bush Material 1 Refer to Figure 206

− Cleaning Agent AR Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Surface Sealant AR Material No. 09−016, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Zinc Chromate Paste AR Material No. 05−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 206)

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−75−11.

(b) Ream the holes of the affected fittings, as per Chapter 51−22−00,
to completely remove all damage.

NOTE: Make sure the center of the reamed hole is aligned with
the original one.

NOTE: Perform the reaming and HFEC inspection on steps to get the
minimum hole without damage.
NOTE: Optional Airbus tooling 98D27309012−000 has been developed
for this use and is available for loan or purchase at Air
bus Spares Department.

NOTE: Make sure the nominal hole diameter after reaming does not
exceed 16.5 mm (0.6496 in).
(c) Perform HFEC inspection at reamed holes as per NTM, Chapter
51−10−08, Page Block 6 to ensure no cracks remain.

(d) Inspect the lug holes to make sure that the inner face is in
good condition and that the diameter does not exceed the original
maximum diameter.

NOTE: If the diameter of the holes in the lugs is larger than

the maximum allowed diameter given in Figure 206 contact
AIRBUS.

(e) Apply corrosion protection to all bare Aluminium surfaces. Refer

to Chapter 51−21−11.

(f) Measure final hole size and manufacture the repair bush using the
dimensions and materials given in Figure 206.

Page 238
Printed in Germany
55−26−41 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(g) Clean and degrease the bush and the hole with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).
NOTE: After you have cleaned the bush and the hole, wear clean
gloves when you touch them.

(h) Cadmium plate the bush as per Chapter 51−21−11.

NOTE: The bush must meet the outer diameter requirements after
cadmium plating is accomplished.
(i) Press fit install the Hinge Fitting bushing at room temperature
using Zinc−Chromate Paste (Material No. 05−002). Refer to Chapter
51−72−12 for bushing installation.

(j) Ream the inner bush hole to final diameter. Refer to Figure 206.
(k) Seal the repair area with surface sealant (Material No. 09−016).

(l) Restore the surface protection as per Chapter 51−72−12.

(m) Install the Elevator if it was removed for access purposes, Refer
to AMM, Chapter 27−34−41, Page Block 401.

Printed in Germany
55−26−41 PagesFeb239/240
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of worn holes of the Elevator Hinge Fittings, Zone 06

Figure 206

Printed in Germany
55−26−41 PagesMay241/242
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR ATTACH FITTINGS − ACTUATOR

1. Identification Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Attach Fittings − Actuator Figure 1

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−26−47 AugPage 1
01/14
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Attach Fittings - Actuator

Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55-26-47 FebPage 2
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Fitting Assy, D55281860000 PB 201

Actuator 1 001 55−26−00
1A Fitting Assy, D55281860002 PB 201 A25157G0217
Actuator 1 003 55−26−00
5 Fitting, Actua 3.4144T73651 D55982500200 PB 201
tor 1 LN9073 201 55−26−00
10 Fitting Assy, D55281870000 PB 201
Actuator 2 001 55−26−00
10A Fitting Assy, D55281870002 PB 201 A25157G0217
Actuator 2 003 55−26−00
15 Fitting, Actua 3.4144T73651 D55982510200 PB 201
tor 2 LN9073 201 55−26−00
ASSY Dwg.: D55280001, D55281860, D55281870

Key to Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−26−47 Pages 3/4
Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR ACTUATOR ATTACH FITTING − ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT PARAGRAPH.

CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER TO

PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE ON ELEVATOR ATTACH FITTINGS MUST BE INSPECTED AT

DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS
55−26−00−1−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPEC
TIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND
PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVALUA
TION OF THE DAMAGE.
IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE
EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

1. General
NOTE: For definition of allowable damage refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For Damage Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14

− CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

2. Damage Evaluation
Before you repair the damaged structure you must do a damage evaluation re
fer to Chapter 51−11−00, paragraph 2 for data related to the metallic
structure.

3. Type of Damage
The different types of damages which can occur to the metallic structure
are fully defined in Chapter 51−11−00, Table 1.

4. Damage Zones

Each attachment fitting of the Elevator is classified as a complete repair

zone. When you do a damage evaluation (refer to paragraph 2.) you must re
fer to the repair zone data.

The repair zone data of the Elevator Actuator Attach Fittings is in Figure
101.

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−26−47 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Zones for Elevator Actuator Attach Fittings

Figure 101

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−26−47 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

5. Allowable Damage Description/Criteria

INSPECTION
CRITERIA/ PARAGRAPH/ REPAIR
DESCRIPTION INSTRUCTION REF
TYPE FIGURE CATEGORY
ERENCE
Actuator Attach Fittings Linear Dam 8.A./102 B, C 55−26−00−1−002−00
age
(Scratches)
Actuator Attach Fittings Superficial 8.B. B 55−26−00−1−002−00
Damage
(Marks and
corrosion)
Actuator Attach Fittings Dents 8.B. − −
Actuator Attach Fittings Corrosion <1> − −
− Lug Bores

Table 101
<1> Corrosion on the lug bores is not allowed. If you find corrosion, re
fer to Page Block 201, paragraph 5.B.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter

51−11−14.

6. Allowable Damage

Allowable damage is damage that does not affect the necessary strength or
function of a component. You do not have to make a structural repair for
this type of damage. You must make a non structural repair. If this type
of damage has rough or sharp edges, smooth these out with the correct
abrasive cloth. Replace the surface paint if necessary.

7. Repair Limits
The repair limits data gives the time limits in which to make temporary
and permanent repairs. These time limits are given in flight cycles/hours
(FC/FH). The repair limits also tell you which type of repair you can do.
To find the repair limits data applicable to a damaged area, you must know
the following data:
− The repair zone applicable to the damaged area.
− The area, length or depth (as applicable) of the damage to the structure.
− The type of damage (for example: nick, scratch, delamination).

Page 103
Printed in Germany
55−26−47 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

8. Attach Fittings − Allowable Damage

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE ON ELEVATOR ATTACH FITTINGS MUST BE INSPECTED

AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS
55−26−00−1−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPEC
TIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT
AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.
SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN THE TABLE 102.

A. Actuator Attach Fittings − Linear Damage (Scratches)

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Zones 01 and 02, refer to
Figure 101 for Repair Zones.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 102.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 102
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

(1) Compare the damage with Diagram 102 and find which Damage Size the
damage occurs in.

Page 104
Printed in Germany
55−26−47 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits − Actuator Attach Fittings, All Zones
Figure 102

Page 105
Printed in Germany
55−26−47 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE ON ELEVATOR ATTACH FITTINGS MUST BE INSPECTED
AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE IS
55−26−00−1−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPEC
TIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT
AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE EVAL
UATION OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE

EVALUATION CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN THE TABLE 103.

B. Actuator Attach Fittings − Superficial Damage (marks and corrosion) and

Dents
NOTE: Corrosion on the lug bores is not allowed. If you find corrosion,
refer to Page Block 201, paragraph 5.B.

NOTE: This allowable damage is applicable in Zones 01 and 02, refer to

Figure 101 for Repair Zones.

NOTE: This allowable damage is valid as shown in Table 103.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 103
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give data about all
weight variants as well as related information concerning allowable
damage and repair applicability.

The following allowable damage limits are applicable to all Elevator Ac
tuator Fittings zones (except corrosion on the lug bores):
− Superficial damage (marks and corrosion): 5% of the nominal material
thickness over a maximum area of 400 mm (0.620 in).
− Dents: Not permitted.

Page 106
Printed in Germany
55−26−47 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ELEVATOR ACTUATOR ATTACH FITTING − REPAIRS

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

1. General
NOTE: For Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter 51−11−14

− CLASSIFICATION − REPAIR APPROVAL.

This topic contains all of the specific repair procedures for the structure
of the Elevator Actuator Attach Fitting. The repair zones and allowable
damage data for these repair procedures is in Chapter 55−26−47, Page Block
101.

2. Safety Precautions

To prevent risk when you do a repair, read and obey the warnings given be
low.
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.

WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRICAL POWER
ON THE AIRCRAFT. USE ONLY POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE EX
PLOSION PROOF.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER TO PARA
GRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT REPAIR.
CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: OBEY THE GIVEN INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE WHICH LEADS TO THE
APPLICABLE INSPECTION PROGRAM DEFINED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR IN
SPECTIONS (SRI) OF THE SRM, IF NECESSARY.

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−26−47 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

3. Repairs Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER REMARKS

No General Repairs applicable. − −

Table 201
4. Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs

INSPECTION
SPECIFIC REPAIR PROCE REPAIR
PARAGRAPH FIGURE INSTRUCTION REF
DURE CATEGORY
ERENCE
Repair of Damage to Ele 5.A. 201 A −
vator Actuator Attach
Fitting, locking lugs,
Zones 01 and 02
Repair of worn holes of 5.B. 202 B 55−26−47−2−001−00
the Elevator Actuator At
tach Fitting, Zones 01
and 02
Replacement of Elevator 5.C. 203 B 55−26−47−2−002−00
Actuator Attach Fittings,
Zones 01 and 02

Table 202
NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−26−47 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

5. Elevator Actuator Attach Fitting Repairs

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 203.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.
SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

A. Repair of damage to locking lug − Elevator Actuator Attach Fittings,

Zones 01 and 02
NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation, refer to Chapter 51−11−00 for data.

NOTE: If it is necessary to remove the Elevator for access, refer to the

AMM, Chapter 27−34−41, Page Block 401.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 203
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information Table in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about
all weight variants as well as related information concerning al
lowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−26−47 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair locking Lug 1 Material 3.1354T351 (2024T351

2 Shim (solid)
− Cleaning Agent
− Sealant
− Sealant
− Polyurethane Primer
− Chemical Conversion Coating
− Chromic Acid Anodizing
(CAA)
− Polyurethane Finish Paint
− Varnish
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 201)
PLATE), 2 mm (0.080 in) thick
or, material 3.4364T7351
(7075T7351 PLATE), 2 mm (0.080
in) thick or, material
3.1354T3511 (2024T3511 EXTRUDED
SECTION) 2 mm (0.080 in) thick
or, material 3.4364T73511
(7075T3511 EXTRUDED SECTION) 2
mm (0.080 in) thick.
2 Material 2024T3 clad, 2 mm
(0.080 in) thick.
− Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−001, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 09−005, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 16−006C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 13−002, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Refer to Chapter 51−21−11
− Material No. 16−018C, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
− Material No. 07−001B, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Remove the fastener securing the end of the Elevator actuator to
the actuator fitting. Retain the fastener. Refer to the AMM,
Chapter 27−34−41, Page Block 401, for data.
(b) Remove the end of the Elevator Actuator from the actuator fitting
and protect the bearing to prevent contamination.

(c) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−75−11.
(d) Remove the damaged locking lug and make the area smooth and lev
el with the adjacent surface.

(e) Get the correct metal material to make the repair locking lug.

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−26−47 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Make the repair locking lug to the correct shape and dimensions
for the repair. Refer to Figure 201. If necessary, refer to
Chapter 51−26−11 for bending data.

(g) Make two solid shims to the correct shape for the repair. Refer
to Figure 201.

(h) Mark the positions of the two fastener holes and the single
locking pin hole on the repair locking lug.
(i) Pilot−drill the marked fastener holes and the locking pin hole
thru the repair locking lug. Make the locking pin hole to the
final size. Refer to Figure 201.

(j) Temporarily install the fastener removed in step (a), thru the
actuator fitting.

(k) Install the repair locking lug and the shims in their repair
position. Secure in position with a screw−clamp.

(l) Transfer−drill one of the fastener holes from the locking lug
thru the shim and the actuator fitting. Then drill this hole to
the required final diameter. Secure with a screw−pin.

(m) Transfer−drill the other fastener hole from the locking lug thru
the shim and the actuator fitting. Then drill this hole to the
required final diameter.
(n) Remove the screw−pin, the screw−clamp and the repair parts from
the repair area.

(o) Remove sharp edges from the fastener holes and the locking pin
hole in the repair parts and the actuator bearing attachment
fitting, with an abrasive cone.
(p) Remove waste material from the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(q) Clean the repair parts and the repair area with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

(r) Apply the correct surface treatments to the repair locking lug
and the shims (chromic acid anodizing and then polyurethane prim
er (Material No. 16−006C), followed by a top coat of polyurethane
finish paint (Material No. 16−018C)). Refer to Chapter 51−21−11
for application data.

(s) Apply the correct surface treatments to the repair area of the
actuator fitting (chemical conversion coating (Material No.
13−002) and then polyurethane primer (Material No. 16−006C), fol
lowed by a top coat polyurethane finish paint (Material No.
16−018C)). Refer to Chapter 51−21−11, for application data.

(t) Apply sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the surface of the repair
locking lug, the shims and the actuator attachment fitting that
will touch when assembled.

Page 205
Printed in Germany
55−26−47 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(u) Put the locking lug and the shims in positions on the actuator
attachment fitting and secure with a screw−pin.
(v) Remove each screw−pin in turn and install the correct fastener
with sealant (Material No. 09−001). Position the fasteners with
the head the correct way round. Refer to Figure201.

(w) Apply a fillet of sealant (Material No. 09−005) to the locking

lug and attach fitting interface.
(x) Remove unwanted sealants from the repair area with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

(y) Let the sealants cure. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions

for the cure times.
(z) Protect the sealant around the locking lug/attach fitting inter
face with varnish (Material No. 07−001B).

(aa)Let the varnish (Material No. 07−001B) dry. Refer to the

manufacturer’s instructions for the drying time.

CAUTION: WHEN YOU INSTALL THE FASTENER REMOVED IN STEP (a), DO NOT
ALLOW THE FASTENER TO TURN, AS THIS MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
REPAIR LOCKING LUG.

(ab)Install the Elevator, if removed to complete the repair. Refer to

the AMM, Chapter 27−34−41, Page Block 401 or, install the origi
nal fastener to secure the Elevator Actuator to the actuator
fitting, as applicable.

(ac)Install the locking pins.

Page 206
Printed in Germany
55−26−47 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Damage to Elevator Actuator Attach Fittings, Locking Lugs, Zones 01

and 02
Figure 201

Printed in Germany
55−26−47 PagesNov207/208
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 204.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE (IIR) FOR THIS STRUCTURE IS 55−26−47−2−001−00
AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS (SRI) SEC
TION OF THE SRM. YOU MUST INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND
PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ONLY APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 155023.

B. Repair of worn holes of the Elevator Actuator Attach Fitting, Zones 01

and 02

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation, refer to Chapter 51−11−00 for data.

NOTE: If it is necessary to remove the Elevator for access, Refer to the

AMM, Chapter 27−34−41, Page Block 401.
NOTE: If it is necessary to remove the lug tab, refer to the Paragraph
5.A.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 204
NOTE: Refer to the paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about
all weight variants as well as related information concerning al
lowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 209
Printed in Germany
55−26−47 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Inboard Repair Bush AR Refer to Figure 202

2 Inboard Repair Washer
3 Outboard Repair Bush
− Cleaning Agent
− Anticorrosive compound
− Sealant
− Sealant
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 202)
AR Refer to Figure 202
AR Refer to Figure 202
AR Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No. 05−002D, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No. 09−005G or Material
No. 09−005H, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
AR Material No. 09−060 or Material
No. 09−062, refer to Chapter
51−35−00

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area. Refer to
Chapter 51−75−11.

(b) Remove the affected bush. Refer to Chapter 51−72−12.

(c) Ream the hole of the affected fitting, as per Chapter 51−22−00,
to completely remove all damage. Refer to Figure 202 tables for
reaming tolerances.

NOTE: Make sure the center of the reamed hole is aligned with
the original one.

NOTE: Perform the reaming and HFEC inspection on steps to get the
minimum hole without damage.
NOTE: Optional Airbus tooling 98D27309010−000 has been developed
for this use and is available for loan or purchase at Air
bus Spares Department.

(d) Make sure that the inner face is in good condition and that the
diameter does not exceed the maximum allowed diameter.

NOTE: If the diameter of the lug hole is larger than the maximum
allowed diameter given in Figure 202 contact AIRBUS.
(e) Perform HFEC inspection to the bore inner surface and the fitting
lug surface. Refer to:
− NTM, Chapter 51−10−08 to ensure no cracks remain.
− NTM, Chapter 51−10−02 to ensure no corrosion remain.

Page 210
Printed in Germany
55−26−47 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Apply corrosion protection to all bare Aluminium surfaces. Refer

to Chapter 51−21−11.
(g) Measure the reamed hole and order the Part Number you need for
the repair to Airbus Spares.

(h) Clean and degrease the bush and the hole with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

NOTE: After you have cleaned the bush and the lug hole, wear
clean gloves when you touch them.

(i) Press fit install the Actuator Attach Fitting bush at room tem

perature using Anticorrosive Compound (Material No. 05−002D) or
Sealant (Material No. 09−005G or Material No. 09−005H). Refer to
Chapter 51−72−12 for bushing installation.
(j) Apply a bead of sealant (Material No. 09−060 or Material No.
09−062) to the joint between the bush and the fitting.

(k) Remove unwanted sealants from the repair area with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).
(l) Let the sealants cure. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions
for the cure time.

(m) If you do the repair of the inboard bush, install correct repair
washer. Refer to Figure 202 table for washer part number.
(n) Apply a bead of sealant (Material No. 09−060 or Material No.
09−062) around the washer at the joint with the fitting lugs.

(o) Remove unwanted sealants from the repair area with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).

(p) Let the sealants cure. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions

for the cure time.

Printed in Germany
55−26−47 PagesAug211/212
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of worn holes of the Elevator Actuator Attach Fitting, Zones 01 and
02
Figure 202

Printed in Germany
55−26−47 PagesMay213/214
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFTS AFTER MODIFICATION 160001J3282 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500J3283, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 205.

CAUTION: DO A WEIGHT ASSESSMENT OF THE ELEVATOR BEFORE YOU START THE REPAIR
OF THE DAMAGE.

IF THE ELEVATOR WEIGHT IS NOT IN THE LIMITS THE REPAIR PROCEDURE

CAN NOT BE DONE.

SEE CHAPTER 55−20−00, PAGE BLOCK 101 FOR GENERAL WEIGHT ASSESSMENT
PROCEDURE.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE (IIR) FOR THIS STRUCTURE IS 55−26−47−2−002−00
AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS (SRI) SEC
TION OF THE SRM. YOU MUST INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND
PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.

C. Replacement of Elevator Actuator Attach Fittings, Zones 01 and 02

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation, refer to Chapter 51−11−00 for data.

NOTE: If it is necessary to remove the lug tab, refer to the Paragraph

5.A.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006,
007, 008, 009, 010, 011, 012, 013,
014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 205
NOTE: Refer to the paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraph give data about
all weight variants as well as related information concerning al
lowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 215
Printed in Germany
55−26−47 Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Actuator Attach Fitting 1 Refer to Figure 203

Spare Part
− Cleaning Agent
− Interfay Sealant
− Sealant
− Varnish
− Epoxy Adhesive
− Glass Epoxy Prepreg
− Epoxy adhesive
− Cleaning Agent
− Tedlar
(2) Repair Instructions (refer to Figure 203)
AR Material No. 11−003, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No. 09−005G or Material
No. 09−005H, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
AR Material No. 09−060 or Material
No. 09−062, refer to Chapter
51−35−00
AR Material No. 16−021, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No. 08−051, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material Z−19.304 refer to
Chapter 51−33−00
AR Material No. 08−017A, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No. 11−010, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00
AR Material No. 19−015, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00

(a) Remove the Elevator for access, refer to the AMM, Chapter
27−34−41, Page Block 401.

NOTE: Hand hole has to be enlarged in order to get access.

NOTE: The trim−out of the hand hole is only applicable for hand
holes located between:

− Elevator Leading Edge Rib 3−Hinge Arm Fitting II.

− Hinge Arm Fitting III−Elevator Leading Edge Rib 5.

− Hinge Arm Fitting IV−Elevator Leading Edge Rib 6.

(b) Trim−out the hand holes to the same original shape but increasing
a maximum distance of 8 mm at every direction. Refer to Figure
203 sheet 2. Refer to Chapter 51−27−21.

NOTE: At least 5 mm (0.197 in) must be kept to the edge of the

fitting in order to restore the tedlar cover after the re

placement procedure.

Page 216
Printed in Germany
55−26−47 Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(c) Remove Leading Edge Access Panel to gain access for repair.

CAUTION: MAKE SURE NOT TO DAMAGE INTERNAL STRUCTURE OR SYSTEM WHEN

DRILLING.

(d) Remove only the fasteners from Upper and Lower Skin as shown in
Figure 203 sheet 1. Refer to Chapter 51−42−21 paragraph 5.D.(3).

(e) Remove the adjacent fasteners in order to grant access to the

repair area. Refer to Figure 203 sheet 1.
CAUTION: PREVIOUSLY TO REMOVE THE FASTENERS, INSERT A NET OR SIMILAR
IN ORDER NOT TO LEAVE ANY LOOSE COMPONENT INSIDE THE ELEVA

TOR.

(f) Remove the fasteners from Spar web of the fitting. Refer to
Chapter 51−42−21 paragraph 5.D.(3).

CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY HEAT TO AVOID CAUSE INTERNAL DAMAGE TO THE

STRUCTURE.

CAUTION: DO NOT USE METAL TOOLS TO REMOVE THE UNWANTED MATERIAL.

METAL TOOLS CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE SURFACE OF THE COM

PONENT.

(g) Remove carefully the bead sealant and interfay sealant with a
non−metallic scraper, Refer to Chapter 51−76−11.Refer to Figure
203 sheet 1 for sealing scheme.

(h) Remove carefully the fitting pushing from the lower skin to the
outside, following the curvature of the panel.

(i) Remove carefully all sealant remnants from the front spar, the
upper skin and lower skin. Refer to Chapter 51−76−11.

(j) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003).
(k) Perform ultrasonic inspection, refer to NTM, Chapter 51−10−06 to
ensure no delaminations and debondings in:

− Upper and lower skin of elevator fitting area.

− Front Spar where fitting was attached.

− Trimmed hand hole area.

(l) Perform DVI, Refer to NTM, Chapter 51−10−09 to ensure no GFRP
debondings damages at front spar where fitting was attached.

(m) Order the new Actuator Attach Fitting Spare Part. Find the ap

plicable Part Number to be ordered in Tables 206 and 207.

Page 217
Printed in Germany
55−26−47 Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ORIGINAL FITTING PART NUMBER PART NUMBER TO BE ORDERED

D552−81860−000 D559−82500−200−01
D559−82502−202−00
D559−82504−202−00
D559−82503−200−00
R559−20773−200−00
D552−81860−001 D559−82500−201−01
D559−82502−202−00
D559−82504−202−00
D559−82503−200−00
R559−20773−200−00
D552−81860−002 D559−82500−200−01
D559−82502−202−00
D559−82504−202−00
D559−82503−200−00
D559−82501−206−00
D552−81860−003 D559−82500−201−01
D559−82502−202−00
D559−82504−202−00
D559−82503−200−00
D559−82501−206−00
ACTUATOR FITTING 1 (ZONE 01) PART NUMBER CORRESPONDENCE
Table 206
ORIGINAL FITTING PART NUMBER PART NUMBER TO BE ORDERED
D552−81870−000 D559−82510−200−01
D559−82502−202−00
D559−82504−202−00
D559−82503−200−00
R559−20773−200−00
D552−81870−001 D559−82510−201−01
D559−82502−202−00
D559−82504−202−00
D559−82503−200−00
R559−20773−200−00
ACTUATOR FITTING 2 (ZONE 02) PART NUMBER CORRESPONDENCE
Table 207

Page 218
Printed in Germany
55−26−47 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ORIGINAL FITTING PART NUMBER PART NUMBER TO BE ORDERED

D552−81870−002 D559−82510−200−01
D559−82502−202−00
D559−82504−202−00
D559−82503−200−00
D559−82501−206−00
D552−81870−003 D559−82510−201−01
D559−82502−202−00
D559−82504−202−00
D559−82503−200−00
D559−82501−206−00
ACTUATOR FITTING 2 (ZONE 02) PART NUMBER CORRESPONDENCE
Table 207
(n) Copy the fitting holes from the old fitting to the new fitting
using the Airbus tooling 98D27309011−000 and follow the tool
instructions.

(o) Once the fastener holes position at fitting is set in the tool:

− Drill the holes with 4.1 mm (0.161 in) using the tool. Refer
to Chapter 51−44−11 for drill data.

− Increase diameter as required. Refer to Chapter 51−44−21 Table

7 for information.

− Deburr the fastener holes. Refer to Chapter 51−44−11.

− Reprotect the fastener hole. Refer to Chapter 51−75−12.

(p) Position the new fitting at Spar web using screw pins.

(q) Reinstall the lower Leading edge access panel.

(r) Mark location of Leading Edge access panel anchor nut holes at
fitting lower flange.
(s) Measure gaps between fitting and upper skin and lower skin and
determine if a liquid shim or solid shim is required:

− For thickness less than 0.5 mm (0.019 in) liquid shim can be
used.
− For thickness between 0.5 mm (0.019 in) and 1.2 mm (0.047 in)
solid shim must be used.

(t) Remove fitting and drill the anchor nut holes from lower skin
Leading Edge access panel to the fitting. Refer to Chapter
51−42−21.

Page 219
Printed in Germany
55−26−47 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(u) Install anchor nut at fitting.

(v) Apply liquid shim (Material No. 08−051) or solid shim (Material
Z−19.304)to the faying surface of the upper and lower skin.

(w) Apply interfay sealant (Material No. 09−005G or Material No.

09−005H) at fitting area in contact with the elevator spar.

(x) Install the Actuator Attach Fitting at Front Spar on its correct
position and secure with screw pins. Refer to figure 203 sheet
1.

NOTE: For fastener installation refer to Chapter 51−42−21.

NOTE: Before install the fasteners, insert a net or similar in

order to recover the collar drive end sheared off during
hi−locks installation.

NOTE: In case of damage at holes during removal operations, refer

to Chapter 51−43−00.

NOTE: Only the installation of fastener second oversize is allowed

, refer to Chapter 51−43−00. If the fastener hole has to
be enlarged above second oversize diameter, contact AIRBUS.

(y) Wet install fasteners with sealant (Material No. 09−005G or Mate
rial No. 09−005H). Refer to figure 203 sheet 1..

(z) Remove unwanted sealants from the repair area with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−003).
(aa)Let the sealant cure. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions
for the cure time.

CAUTION: TAKE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE THE CFRP COUNTERSUNK.

(ab)Transfer drill holes from the upper and lower skin to the fit
ting. Refer to Chapter 51−42−21

(ac)Perform DVI, Refer to NTM, Chapter 51−10−09 to ensure that no

damages have been caused during drilling the upper and the lower
flange of the fitting area.

(ad)Wet install fasteners with sealant (Material No. 09−005G or Mate

rial No. 09−005H) at upper and lower skin. Refer to Chapter
51−42−21.

(ae)Apply a bead of sealant (Material No. 09−060 or Material No.

09−062) refer to Figure 203 sheet 1 for sealing scheme.
(af)Let the sealants cure. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions
for the cure time.

(ag)Apply varnish (Material No. 16−021)to the sealant beads.

Page 220
Printed in Germany
55−26−47 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ah)Let the varnish (Material No. 16−021) dry. Refer to the manufac
turer’s instructions for the drying time.
(ai)If no damage is found after the inspections, seal reworked edge
of the hand hole with Epoxy Adhesive (Material No. 08−017A), re
fer to Chapter 51−77−11 paragraph 6.B (1) and install the hand
hole tedlar cover. Refer to Figure 203 sheet 2.

(aj)Install the hand hole covers, refer to Figure 203 sheet 2.

− Cut a piece of tedlar (Material No. 19−015) with 10 mm (0.394
in) in excess of hand hole dimension.

− Abrade the paint of the front spar using scotch brite type A
on the area where the tedlar will bonded.

− Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.

11−010).

− Bond the tedlar with (Material No. 09−005), install 10 mm

(0.394 in) overlap where possible, please note that at least 5
mm (0.197 in) overlap is required.

− Let the sealants cure. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions

for the cure time.

(ak)Inspect the Attach Fitting bolt:

− Inspect removed bolt, refer to NTM, Chapter 51−90−00.

− Fit between bolt and Fitting must be H7/g6.

(al)Install the Elevator, Refer to the AMM, Chapter 27−34−41, Page
Block 401.

Printed in Germany
55−26−47 PagesMay221/222
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Replacement of Elevator Actuator Attach Fitting, Zones 01 and 02

Figure 203 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−26−47 PagesMay223/224
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Replacement of Elevator Actuator Attach Fitting, Zones 01 and 02

Figure 203 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−26−47 PagesMay225/226
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

HOIST POINTS

1. Identification Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Hoist Points Figure 1

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−20−00, Page Block 001 , where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−26−48 AugPage 1
01/14
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hoist Points
Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55-26-48 FebPage 2
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Point, hoist 3.1354T351 D55982071200

LN9073
5 Point, hoist 3.1354T351 D55982071202
LN9073
10 Coil, helical MS21209F1215P
ASSY Dwg.: D55982070, D55982072

Key to Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−26−48 Pages 3/4
Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

VERTICAL
STABILIZER

1. Modification/Service
Bulletin
List

This
list
shows
the
modifications
and
the
Manufacturer
Serial
Number
(MSN)
of
the
aircraft
(A/C)
model
which
have
these
modifications.
Modifications
with
the
same
number,
but
with
a
different
suffix
letter
show
a
different
effectivity,
refer
to
column
’S’.

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER
SERIAL
NUMBER) BULLETIN

20005K0003 A320 0004−0011

20005K0003 A A320 0012−0027
20005K0003 B A320 0012−0060
20005K0003 C A320 0001−0187
20005K0003 D A320 0001−0266,0268,0269
20005K0003 E A320 0001−1725,1757,1780,1784,1785,1802,
1806,1814,1821,1823,1827,1832,1834,
1845,1857,1860,1868,1877,1879,1889,
1899
20005K0003 F A320 0001−0060
20005K0003 G A320 0001−0011
20005K0003 H A320 0001−0155
20037P0034 A320 0002,0005−0009,0011,0014,0017−0030,
0035,0037−0039,0042,0043,0045−0058,
0061−0067,0069−0072,0074−0083,
0085−0105,0109−0114,0116,0117,0119,
0120,0123,0124,0128,0129,0131−0140,
0142,0143,0146−0148,0151,0153,0157,
0158,0160−0183,0185−0203,0205−0210,
0212,0213,0216−0235,0238,0240−0243,
0245−0251,0253,0256,0257,0262−0264,
0266−0269,0271−0274,0279−0281,
0283−0289,0291−0295,0299−0305,0308,
0309,0312−0317,0322,0323,0325−0328,
0331,0332,0334−0336,0338,0343−0346,
0348,0349,0351,0356,0362−0366,
0369−0371,0374,0375,0379,0382,0383,
0389−0398,0401−0404,0406,0407,0409,
0413−0416,0419−0425,0427−0471,0476,
0478,0480−0482,0486,0490−0499,0501,
0507,0511,0525−0537,0540−0547,
0549−0558,0561,0565,0569,0573,0575,
0579−0584,0590,0594,0601,0605−0611,
0615−0632
20364K0261 A320 0012−0060
20364K0341 A320 0012−0043
20364K0341 A A320 0012−0187
20364K0341 B A320 0012−0266,0268,0269

Page
1




55−30−00 Feb
01/06
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

20365K0284 A320 0028−0266,0268,0269

20365K0284 A A320 0001−0027
20365K0586 A320 0028−0043
20365K0908 A320 0028−0187
20365K0908 A A320 0028−0266,0268,0269
20515K0453 A320 0044−0060
20515K0583 A320 0044−9999
20805K0740 A320 0188−0266,0268,0269
20805K0840 A320 0061−0155
20805K0840 A A320 0156−0219
20805K0840 B A320 0156−0180,0183−0194,0196−0228,
0230−0305
20805K0840 C A320 0061−0122,0124−0155
20805K0840 D A320 0061−0122,0124−0180,0183−0194,
0196−0228,0230−0305
20805K0840 E A320 0156−1725,1757,1780,1784,0185,1802,
1806,1814,1821,1823,1827,1832,1834,
1845,1857,1860,1868,1877,1879,1889,
1899
20805K0840 F A320 0001−0122,0124−0155
20805K0840 G A320 0061−9999
20805K0840 H A320 0061−0122,0124−0180,0183−0194,
0196−0228,0230−0305
20805K0840 J A320 0001−0122,0124−0180,0183−0194,
0196−0228,0230−0305
20911K2155 A320 0156−9999
20911K2155 A A320 0156−0832,0836−0844,0849−0863,
0866−0881,0884,0888−0907,0912−0916,
0919,0921,0925−0928,0936−0950,0953,
0957−0973,0977−0982,0988,0992−0996,
1005,1011,1013,1028,1030,1039,1041,
1047−1052,1061−1067,1072,1079−1085,
1093−1101,1105,1114,1119,1130−1134,
1138,1141,1148,1156−1162,1166,1181,
1183,1192−1196,1200,1208,1210,
1221−1229,1237,1246,1253−1259,1266,
1270,1272,1278−1284,1288−1292,1296,
1300,1306,1308,1312,1316,1318,1327,
1334,1339,1347,1351−1355,1361,1365,
1367,1372,1376,1387,1390,1396,1405,
1409,1450−1454,1482,1486−1493,1497,
1502,1504,1518−1526,1530,1533,1538,
1548,1550,1557,1566,1595,1615,1628,
1631,1635,1637,1652,1661,1665,1678,
1717,1735,1744

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 AugPage 2
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

20911K2155 B A320 0156−0832,0836−0844,0849−0863,

0866−0881,0884,0888−0907,0912−0916,
0919−0921,0925−0928,0936−0950,0953,
0957−0973,0977−0982,0988,0992−0996,
1005,1011−1013,1028−1030,1039−1041,
1047−1052,1061−1067,1072,1079−1085,
1093−1101,1105,1114,1119,1130−1134,
1138−1141,1148,1156−1162,1166,
1181−1183,1192−1196,1200,1208−1210,
1221−1229,1237,1246,1253−1259,1266,
1270−1272,1278−1284,1288−1292,1296,
1300,1306−1308,1312,1316−1318,1327,
1334,1339,1347,1351−1355,1361,
1365−1367,1372,1376,1387−1390,1396,
1405,1409,1450−1454,1482,1486−1493,
1497,1502−1504,1518−1526,1530,1533,
1538,1548−1550,1557,1566,1595,1615,
1628−1631,1635−1637,1652,1661,1665,
1678,1708,1712,1717−1721,1757,1780,
1785,1802,1806,1814,1821−1823,1827,
1832−1834,1845,1857,1860,1868,
1877−1879,1889,1899
20911K2155 C A320 1987−4651,4653−4676,4711,9004
21152K1105 A320 0061−0266,0268,0269
21152K1105 A A320 0061−0155
21153K1106 A320 0061−0266,0268,0269
21153K1106 A A320 0061−0832,0836−0844,0849−0863,
0866−0881,0884,0888−0907,0912−0916,
0919−0921,0925−0928,0936−0950,0953,
0957−0973,0977−0982,0988,0992−0996,
1005,1011−1013,1028−1030,1039−1041,
1047−1052,1061−1067,1072,1079−1085,
1093−1101,1105,1114,1119,1130−1134,
1138−1141,1148,1156−1162,1166,
1181−1183,1192−1196,1200,1208−1210,
1221−1229,1237,1246,1253−1259,1266,
1270−1272,1278−1284,1288−1292,1296,
1300,1306−1308,1312,1316−1318,1327,
1334,1339,1347,1351−1355,1361,
1365−1367,1372,1376,1387−1390,1396,
1405,1409,1450−1454,1482,1486−1493,
1497,1502−1504,1518−1526,1530,1533,
1538,1548−1550,1557,1566,1595,1615,
1628−1631,1635−1637,1652,1661,1665,
1678,1708,1712,1717−1721,1757,1780,
1785,1802,1806,1814,1821−1823,1827,
1832−1834,1845,1857,1860,1868,
1877−1879,1889,1899
21154K1108 A320 0044−0060

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage 3
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

21154K1108 A A320 0061−0187

21238K1248 A320 0156−0266,0268,0269
21238K1248 A A320 0156−9999
21238K1248 B A320 0001−0832,0836−0844,0849−0863,
0866−0881,0884,0888−0907,0912−0916,
0919−0921,0925−0928,0936−0950,0953,
0957−0973,0977−0982,0988,0992−0996,
1005,1011−1013,1028−1030,1039−1041,
1047−1052,1061−1067,1072,1079−1085,
1093−1101,1105,1119,1130−1132,1138,
1156−1162,1166,1181−1183,1192−1196,
1200,1208,1221,1226−1229,1237,1246,
1253−1259,1266,1270−1272,1278−1284,
1288−1292,1300,1306−1308,1316−1318,
1327,1334,1339,1347,1351−1355,
1365−1367,1372,1376,1387−1390,1396,
1405,1409,1450−1454,1482,1486−1493,
1497,1502−1504,1518−1526,1530,1533,
1538,1548−1550,1557,1566,1595,1615,
1628−1631,1635−1637,1652,1661,1665,
1678,1708,1712,1717−1719,1757,1780,
1785,1802,1806,1814,1821−1823,1827,
1832−1834,1845,1857,1860,1868,
1877−1879,1899
21286K2331 A320 0220−0266,0268,0269
21286K2331 A A320 0220−9999

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage 4
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

21286K2331 B A320 0220−1110,1117−1132,1137−1138,

1143−1146,1150−1168,1173−1208,
1213−1221,1226−1262,1266,1270−1284,
1288−1292,1300−1308,1316−1327,
1332−1355,1359,1363−1419,1424−1530,
1533−1540,1544−1559,1564−1637,
1641−1719,1723−1888,1891−1904,
1907−1910,1913−1940,1944−1951,
1957−1958,1968−1969,1975−1979,
1983−2001,2006−2020,2024−2031,
2038−2044,2048,2063−2065,2075−2077,
2082−2084,2092,2097−2108,2116−2128,
2132−2134,2136−2138,2140−2141,
2143−2147,2149−2152,2154,2156−2161,
2163−2169,2175−2180,2185−2187,
2191−2197,2201−2210,2215−2217,
2223−2225,2231−2233,2242,2246−2250,
2254−2256,2259−2272,2278−2288,2294,
2301−2314,2325−2327,2331,2336,2340,
2347−2352,2359,2364−2393,2399,
2405−2411,2415−2422,2425,2430−2434,
2439−2441,2447−2449,2461,2479−2482,
2486−2491,2504,2509,2513,2520,2524,
2529,2535,2540−2542,2564−2566,2571,
2577−2583,2589,2596−2598,2602,
2612−2613,2623,2630−2635,2640,
2645−2649,2656,2661,2668,2671,
2676−2678,2683,2688,2692,2699,2705,
2710−2712,2721−2728,2732−2737,2745,
2749−2752,2755,2760−2764,2776,
2781−2785,2794,2798,2802−2807,
2810−2816,2826−2828,2832,2838,2842,
2848,2859,2867−2871,2875,2880−2881,
2885−2896,2900−2906,2920,2924−2926,
2930−2932,2939,2944−2947,2952−2956,
2962−2964,2970,2977,2982,2987−2989,
2992,2995,3000−3002,3008,3014,3018,
3023,3029,3033−3035,3039−3040,
3044−3047,3052,3058,3063−3066,
3071−3083,3091,3095,3109−3111,
3115−3119,3125−3129,3136−3145,
3150−3152,3154,3156−3157,3161,
3164−3166,3173−3182,3190,3194,
3199−3203,3211−3213,3218,3223,3228,
3232,3237,3240,3246,3261−3263,3266,
3277−3280,3284,3287,3293−3295,3301,
3313−3314,3318−3321,3325,3328,
3343−3348,3351,3354,3361−3362,3373,
3376,3381,3384,3391,3396,3400,
3409−3412,3416,3420,3423−3425,3430,
3439,3444−3446,3451,3464,3468−3470,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 AugPage 5
01/08
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

21286K2331 B A320 3473,3475−3476,3478−3479,3482,3484,

3488,3490−3494,3499−3502,3511,3515,
3517−3519,3526,3529−3535,3540,3545,
3550,3554−3556,3562−3565,3572−3574,
3594−3596,3598,3607−3609,3622,
3626−3627,3630−3640,3643−3644,3649,
3658−3662,3666,3668,3695,3697,3699,
3703,3707−3714,3718,3721−3723,3726,
3731−3732,3736−3741,3745−3747,
3753−3755,3760,3769−3773,3776−3778,
3781,3785,3789−3791,3798−3804,
3809−3812,3815−3817,3821−3829,
3833−9999

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 NovPage 6
01/08
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

21286K2331 C A320 0220−1110,1117−1132,1137−1138,

1143−1146,1150−1168,1173−1208,
1213−1221,1226−1262,1266,1270−1284,
1288−1292,1300−1308,1316−1327,
1332−1355,1359,1363−1419,1424−1530,
1533−1540,1544−1559,1564−1637,
1641−1719,1723−1888,1891−1904,
1907−1910,1913−1940,1944−1951,
1957−1958,1968−1969,1975−1979,
1983−2001,2006−2020,2024−2031,
2038−2044,2048,2063−2065,2075−2077,
2082−2084,2092,2097−2108,2116−2128,
2132−2134,2136−2138,2140−2141,
2143−2147,2149−2152,2154,2156−2161,
2163−2169,2175−2180,2185−2187,
2191−2197,2201−2210,2215−2217,
2223−2225,2231−2233,2242,2246−2250,
2254−2256,2259−2272,2278−2288,2294,
2301−2314,2325−2327,2331,2336,2340,
2347−2352,2359,2364−2393,2399,
2405−2411,2415−2422,2425,2430−2434,
2439−2441,2447−2449,2461,2479−2482,
2486−2491,2504,2509,2513,2520,2524,
2529,2535,2540−2542,2564−2566,2571,
2577−2583,2589,2596−2598,2602,
2612−2613,2623,2630−2635,2640,
2645−2649,2656,2661,2668,2671,
2676−2678,2683,2688,2692,2699,2705,
2710−2712,2721−2728,2732−2737,2745,
2749−2752,2755,2760−2764,2776,
2781−2785,2794,2798,2802−2807,
2810−2816,2826−2828,2832,2838,2842,
2848,2859,2867−2871,2875,2880−2881,
2885−2896,2900−2906,2920,2924−2926,
2930−2932,2939,2944−2947,2952−2956,
2962−2964,2970,2977,2982,2987−2989,
2992,2995,3000−3002,3008,3014,3018,
3023,3029,3033−3035,3039−3040,
3044−3047,3052,3058,3063−3066,
3071−3083,3091,3095,3109−3111,
3115−3119,3125−3129,3136−3145,
3150−3152,3154,3156−3157,3161,
3164−3166,3173−3182,3190,3194,
3199−3203,3211−3213,3218,3223,3228,
3232,3237,3240,3246,3261−3263,3266,
3277−3280,3284,3287,3293−3295,3301,
3313−3314,3318−3321,3325,3328,
3343−3348,3351,3354,3361−3362,3373,
3376,3381,3384,3391,3396,3400,
3409−3412,3416,3420,3423−3425,3430,
3439,3444−3446,3451,3464,3468−3470,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage 7
01/09
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

21286K2331 C A320 3473,3475−3476,3478−3479,3482,3484,

3488,3490−3494,3499−3502,3511,3515,
3517−3519,3526,3529−3535,3540,3545,
3550,3554−3556,3562−3565,3572−3574,
3594,3598,3607−3609,3622,3626−3627,
3630−3640,3643−3644,3649,3658−3662,
3666,3693−3695,3697,3699,3703,
3707−3714,3721−3726,3732,3741,3745,
3750,3755,3760,3771−3773,3778−3781,
3785−3789,3800−3802,3807−3811,
3815−3819,3823,3829−3831,3835,3840,
3846,3850,3857,3861,3866−3868,
3877−3882,3885,3889−3896,3900−3906,
3910−3912,3917,3921−3927,3931−3933,
3937,3941,3945−3952,3956,3959−9999

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 AugPage 8
01/09
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

21286K2331 D A320 0220−1110,1117−1132,1137−1138,

1143−1146,1150−1168,1173−1208,
1213−1221,1226−1262,1266,1270−1284,
1288−1292,1300−1308,1316−1327,
1332−1355,1359,1363−1419,1424−1530,
1533−1540,1544−1559,1564−1637,
1641−1719,1723−1888,1891−1904,
1907−1910,1913−1940,1944−1951,
1957−1958,1968−1969,1975−1979,
1983−2001,2006−2020,2024−2031,
2038−2044,2048,2063−2065,2075−2077,
2082−2084,2092,2097−2108,2116−2128,
2132−2134,2136−2138,2140−2141,
2143−2147,2149−2152,2154,2156−2161,
2163−2169,2175−2180,2185−2187,
2191−2197,2201−2210,2215−2217,
2223−2225,2231−2233,2242,2246−2250,
2254−2256,2259−2272,2278−2288,2294,
2301−2314,2325−2327,2331,2336,2340,
2347−2352,2359,2364−2393,2399,
2405−2411,2415−2422,2425,2430−2434,
2439−2441,2447−2449,2461,2479−2482,
2486−2491,2504,2509,2513,2520,2524,
2529,2535,2540−2542,2564−2566,2571,
2577−2583,2589,2596−2598,2602,
2612−2613,2623,2630−2635,2640,
2645−2649,2656,2661,2668,2671,
2676−2678,2683,2688,2692,2699,2705,
2710−2712,2721−2728,2732−2737,2745,
2749−2752,2755,2760−2764,2776,
2781−2785,2794,2798,2802−2807,
2810−2816,2826−2828,2832,2838,2842,
2848,2859,2867−2871,2875,2880−2881,
2885−2896,2900−2906,2920,2924−2926,
2930−2932,2939,2944−2947,2952−2956,
2962−2964,2970,2977,2982,2987−2989,
2992,2995,3000−3002,3008,3014,3018,
3023,3029,3033−3035,3039−3040,
3044−3047,3052,3058,3063−3066,
3071−3083,3091,3095,3109−3111,
3115−3119,3125−3129,3136−3145,
3150−3152,3154,3156−3157,3161,
3164−3166,3173−3182,3190,3194,
3199−3203,3211−3213,3218,3223,3228,
3232,3237,3240,3246,3261−3263,3266,
3277−3280,3284,3287,3293−3295,3301,
3313−3314,3318−3321,3325,3328,
3343−3348,3351,3354,3361−3362,3373,
3376,3381,3384,3391,3396,3400,
3409−3412,3416,3420,3423−3425,3430,
3439,3444−3446,3451,3464,3468−3470,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 AugPage 9
01/09
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

21286K2331 D A320 3473,3475−3476,3478−3479,3482,3484,

3488,3490−3494,3499−3502,3511,3515,
3517−3519,3526,3529−3535,3540,3545,
3550,3554−3556,3562−3565,3572−3574,
3594,3598,3607−3609,3622,3626−3627,
3630−3640,3643−3644,3649,3658−3662,
3666,3693−3695,3697,3699,3703,
3707−3714,3721−3726,3732,3741,3745,
3750,3755,3760,3771−3773,3778−3781,
3785−3789,3800−3802,3807−3811,
3815−3819,3823,3829−3831,3835,3840,
3846,3850,3857,3861,3866−3868,
3877−3882,3885,3889−3894,3902,3906,
3908,3912,3921,3923,3927,3933,3947,
3952,3954−3956,3968,3972,3976−3978,
3990,4011,4015,4055,4059,4065−4066,
4072−4086,4092−4094,4097,4100−4105,
4108,4110,4115−9999

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1010
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

21286K2331 E A320 0220−1110,1117−1132,1137−1138,

1143−1146,1150−1168,1173−1208,
1213−1221,1226−1262,1266,1270−1284,
1288−1292,1300−1308,1316−1327,
1332−1355,1359,1363−1419,1424−1530,
1533−1540,1544−1559,1564−1637,
1641−1719,1723−1888,1891−1904,
1907−1910,1913−1940,1944−1951,
1957−1958,1968−1969,1975−1979,
1983−2001,2006−2020,2024−2031,
2038−2044,2048,2063−2065,2075−2077,
2082−2084,2092,2097−2108,2116−2128,
2132−2134,2136−2138,2140−2141,
2143−2147,2149−2152,2154,2156−2161,
2163−2169,2175−2180,2185−2187,
2191−2197,2201−2210,2215−2217,
2223−2225,2231−2233,2242,2246−2250,
2254−2256,2259−2272,2278−2288,2294,
2301−2314,2325−2327,2331,2336,2340,
2347−2352,2359,2364−2393,2399,
2405−2411,2415−2422,2425,2430−2434,
2439−2441,2447−2449,2461,2479−2482,
2486−2491,2504,2509,2513,2520,2524,
2529,2535,2540−2542,2564−2566,2571,
2577−2583,2589,2596−2598,2602,
2612−2613,2623,2630−2635,2640,
2645−2649,2656,2661,2668,2671,
2676−2678,2683,2688,2692,2699,2705,
2710−2712,2721−2728,2732−2737,2745,
2749−2752,2755,2760−2764,2776,
2781−2785,2794,2798,2802−2807,
2810−2816,2826−2828,2832,2838,2842,
2848,2859,2867−2871,2875,2880−2881,
2885−2896,2900−2906,2920,2924−2926,
2930−2932,2939,2944−2947,2952−2956,
2962−2964,2970,2977,2982,2987−2989,
2992,2995,3000−3002,3008,3014,3018,
3023,3029,3033−3035,3039−3040,
3044−3047,3052,3058,3063−3066,
3071−3083,3091,3095,3109−3111,
3115−3119,3125−3129,3136−3145,
3150−3152,3154,3156−3157,3161,
3164−3166,3173−3182,3190,3194,
3199−3203,3211−3213,3218,3223,3228,
3232,3237,3240,3246,3261−3263,3266,
3277−3280,3284,3287,3293−3295,3301,
3313−3314,3318−3321,3325,3328,
3343−3348,3351,3354,3361−3362,3373,
3376,3381,3384,3391,3396,3400,
3409−3412,3416,3420,3423−3425,3430,
3439,3444−3446,3451,3464,3468−3470,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1011
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

21286K2331 E A320 3473,3475−3476,3478−3479,3482,3484,

3488,3490−3494,3499−3502,3511,3515,
3517−3519,3526,3529−3535,3540,3545,
3550,3554−3556,3562−3565,3572−3574,
3594,3598,3607−3609,3622,3626−3627,
3630−3640,3643−3644,3649,3658−3662,
3666,3693−3695,3697,3699,3703,
3707−3714,3721−3726,3732,3741,3745,
3750,3755,3760,3771−3773,3778−3781,
3785−3789,3800−3802,3807−3811,
3815−3819,3823,3829−3831,3835,3840,
3846,3850,3857,3861,3866−3868,
3877−3882,3885,3889−3894,3902,3906,
3908,3912,3921,3923,3927,3933,3947,
3952,3954−3956,3968,3972,3976−3978,
3990,4032,4055,4065−4066,4072−4077,
4092−4094,4108−4109,4117,4119,4124,
4133,4143,4150−4152,4160,4165,4174,
4185,4195,4199−4201,4212,4223,4231,
4236−4238,4244,4246,4249,4265,4270,
4273,4305−4308,4311−9999

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 AugPage01/1012
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

21286K2331 F A320 0220−1110,1117−1132,1137−1138,

1143−1146,1150−1168,1173−1208,
1213−1221,1226−1262,1266,1270−1284,
1288−1292,1300−1308,1316−1327,
1332−1355,1359,1363−1419,1424−1530,
1533−1540,1544−1559,1564−1637,
1641−1719,1723−1888,1891−1904,
1907−1910,1913−1940,1944−1951,
1957−1958,1968−1969,1975−1979,
1983−2001,2006−2020,2024−2031,
2038−2044,2048,2063−2065,2075−2077,
2082−2084,2092,2097−2108,2116−2128,
2132−2134,2136−2138,2140−2141,
2143−2147,2149−2152,2154,2156−2161,
2163−2169,2175−2180,2185−2187,
2191−2197,2201−2210,2215−2217,
2223−2225,2231−2233,2242,2246−2250,
2254−2256,2259−2272,2278−2288,2294,
2301−2314,2325−2327,2331,2336,2340,
2347−2352,2359,2364−2393,2399,
2405−2411,2415−2422,2425,2430−2434,
2439−2441,2447−2449,2461,2479−2482,
2486−2491,2504,2509,2513,2520,2524,
2529,2535,2540−2542,2564−2566,2571,
2577−2583,2589,2596−2598,2602,
2612−2613,2623,2630−2635,2640,
2645−2649,2656,2661,2668,2671,
2676−2678,2683,2688,2692,2699,2705,
2710−2712,2721−2728,2732−2737,2745,
2749−2752,2755,2760−2764,2776,
2781−2785,2794,2798,2802−2807,
2810−2816,2826−2828,2832,2838,2842,
2848,2859,2867−2871,2875,2880−2881,
2885−2896,2900−2906,2920,2924−2926,
2930−2932,2939,2944−2947,2952−2956,
2962−2964,2970,2977,2982,2987−2989,
2992,2995,3000−3002,3008,3014,3018,
3023,3029,3033−3035,3039−3040,
3044−3047,3052,3058,3063−3066,
3071−3083,3091,3095,3109−3111,
3115−3119,3125−3129,3136−3145,
3150−3152,3154,3156−3157,3161,
3164−3166,3173−3182,3190,3194,
3199−3203,3211−3213,3218,3223,3228,
3232,3237,3240,3246,3261−3263,3266,
3277−3280,3284,3287,3293−3295,3301,
3313−3314,3318−3321,3325,3328,
3343−3348,3351,3354,3361−3362,3373,
3376,3381,3384,3391,3396,3400,
3409−3412,3416,3420,3423−3425,3430,
3439,3444−3446,3451,3464,3468−3470,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 AugPage01/1013
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

21286K2331 F A320 3473,3475−3476,3478−3479,3482,3484,

3488,3490−3494,3499−3502,3511,3515,
3517−3519,3526,3529−3535,3540,3545,
3550,3554−3556,3562−3565,3572−3574,
3594,3598,3607−3609,3622,3626−3627,
3630−3640,3643−3644,3649,3658−3662,
3666,3693−3695,3697,3699,3703,
3707−3714,3721−3726,3732,3741,3745,
3750,3755,3760,3771−3773,3778−3781,
3785−3789,3800−3802,3807,3811,
3815−3819,3823,3829−3831,3835,3840,
3846,3850,3857,3861,3866−3868,
3877−3882,3885,3889−3894,3902,3906,
3908,3912,3921,3923,3927,3933,3947,
3952,3954−3956,3968,3972,3976−3978,
3990,4032,4055,4065−4066,4072−4077,
4092−4094,4108−4109,4117,4119,4124,
4133,4143,4150−4152,4160,4165,4174,
4185,4195,4199−4201,4212,4223,4231,
4236−4238,4244,4246,4249,4265,4270,
4273,4305−4306,4308,4314,4320,4323,
4331,4344,4347,4351,4366,4371−4373,
4383,4388,4391,4393−4395,4397,4400,
4417−4419,4432,4439,4441−4442,4446,
4448,4453−4454,4459,4464,4468,
4475−4476,4480,4485,4490,4498−4499,
4512,4516−4521,4528−9999
21286K2331 G A320 0220−0266,0268−0269,0274

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 NovPage01/1314
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

21286K2331 H A320 0220−1110,1117−1132,1137−1138,

1143−1146,1150−1168,1173−1208,
1213−1221,1226−1262,1266,1270−1284,
1288−1292,1300−1308,1316−1327,
1332−1355,1359,1363−1419,1424−1530,
1533−1540,1544−1559,1564−1637,
1641−1719,1723−1888,1891−1904,
1907−1910,1913−1940,1944−1951,
1957−1958,1968−1969,1975−1979,
1983−2001,2006−2020,2024−2031,
2038−2044,2048,2063−2065,2075−2077,
2082−2084,2092,2097−2108,2116−2128,
2132−2134,2136−2138,2140−2141,
2143−2147,2149−2152,2154,2156−2161,
2163−2169,2175−2180,2185−2187,
2191−2197,2201−2210,2215−2217,
2223−2225,2231−2233,2242,2246−2250,
2254−2256,2259−2272,2278−2288,2294,
2301−2314,2325−2327,2331,2336,2340,
2347−2352,2359,2364−2393,2399,
2405−2411,2415−2422,2425,2430−2434,
2439−2441,2447−2449,2461,2479−2482,
2486−2491,2504,2509,2513,2520,2524,
2529,2535,2540−2542,2564−2566,2571,
2577−2583,2589,2596−2598,2602,
2612−2613,2623,2630−2635,2640,
2645−2649,2656,2661,2668,2671,
2676−2678,2683,2688,2692,2699,2705,
2710−2712,2721−2728,2732−2737,2745,
2749−2752,2755,2760−2764,2776,
2781−2785,2794,2798,2802−2807,
2810−2816,2826−2828,2832,2838,2842,
2848,2859,2867−2871,2875,2880−2881,
2885−2896,2900−2906,2920,2924−2926,
2930−2932,2939,2944−2947,2952−2956,
2962−2964,2970,2977,2982,2987−2989,
2992,2995,3000−3002,3008,3014,3018,
3023,3029,3033−3035,3039−3040,
3044−3047,3052,3058,3063−3066,
3071−3083,3091,3095,3109−3111,
3115−3119,3125−3129,3136−3145,
3150−3152,3154,3156−3157,3161,
3164−3166,3173−3182,3190,3194,
3199−3203,3211−3213,3218,3223,3228,
3232,3237,3240,3246,3261−3263,3266,
3277−3280,3284,3287,3293−3295,3301,
3313−3314,3318−3321,3325,3328,
3343−3348,3351,3354,3361−3362,3373,
3376,3381,3384,3391,3396,3400,
3409−3412,3416,3420,3423−3425,3430,
3439,3444−3446,3451,3464,3468−3470,
3473,3475−3476,3478−3479,3482,3484,
3488,3490−3494,3499−3502,3511,3515,
3517−3519,3526,3529−3535,3540,3545,
3550,3554−3556,3562−3565,3572−3574,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 NovPage01/1315
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

21286K2331 H A320 3594,3598,3607−3609,3622,3626−3627,

3630−3640,3643−3644,3649,3658−3662,
3666,3693−3695,3697,3699,3703,
3707−3714,3721−3726,3732,3741,3745,
3750,3755,3760,3771−3773,3778−3781,
3785−3789,3800−3802,3807,3811,
3815−3819,3823,3829−3831,3835,3840,
3846,3850,3857,3861,3866−3868,
3877−3882,3885,3889−3894,3902,3906,
3908,3912,3921,3923,3927,3933,3947,
3952,3954−3956,3968,3972,3976−3978,
3990,4032,4055,4065−4066,4072−4077,
4092−4094,4108−4109,4117,4119,4124,
4133,4143,4150−4152,4160,4165,4174,
4185,4195,4199−4201,4212,4223,4231,
4236−4238,4244,4246,4249,4265,4270,
4273,4305−4306,4308,4314,4320,4323,
4331,4344,4347,4351,4366,4371−4373,
4383,4388,4391,4393−4395,4397,4400,
4417−4419,4432,4439,4441−4442,4446,
4453−4454,4464−4465,4476,4485,4492,
4498−4501,4509,4516−4517,4520,4523,
4528,4536,4543−4546,4549,4551,4564,
4572,4576−4579,4581,4586,4594,4597,
4600,4612,4618,4621,4625,4628,4634,
4647−4651,4656−4657,4661,4670,4673,
4678,4681−4684,4689,4692,4697,4712,
4715−4716,4724−4725,4735−4738,
4741−4742,4758,4767,4770,4791,4795,
4815,4817,4823,4835,4839,4853,4892,
4896,4904,4921,4934,4943,4952−4953,
4972,4974−4975,5001,5003,5021,5026,
5037,5060,5066,5069,5075,5095,5101,
5107,5109,5115,5123−5125,5128,5139,
5142,5148,5167,5178,5184,5196,5204,
5209,5213,5222,5229,5234,5240,5263,
5302,5312,5316,5324,5342,5348−5349,
5364,5367,5401,5407−5408,5417,5421,
5443,5453,5474,5483,5486,5493,5501,
5518,5526,5533−5536,5539,5548,5554,
5559,5565,5570,5572,5578,5580−5587,
5590−5591,5604,5607−5610,5613−5617,
5620−5621,5634,5642−5643,5654,5660,
5666,5673,5677,5686,5692,5707,5714,
5723,5729,5734,5748−5749,5752,5764,
5782−5784,5791,5801,5815,5818,5821,
5845,5856,5859,5870,5873,5879,
5882−5883,5902,5921,5924−5926,5929,
5950,5959,5965−5970,5974,5977,
5982−5984,5988−5989,5995,6001−6003,
6010,6015,6018−6019,6022,6025−6030,
6039−9999
21347K0792 A320 0188−9999
21347K0792 A A320 0188−0639

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 NovPage01/1316
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

21347K0792 B A320 0188−1705,1710−1725,1784

21733K1872 A320 0267,0270−9999
21733K1872 A A320 0188−0266,0268,0269
21733K1872 B A320 0267,0270−0399
21733K1872 C A320 0267,0270−0639
21733K1872 D A320 0267,0270−0832,0836−0844,0849−0863,
0866−0881,0884,0888−0907,0912−0916,
0919,0921,0925−0928,0936−0950,0953,
0957−0973,0977−0982,0988,0992−0996,
1005,1011,1013,1028,1030,1039,1041,
1047−1052,1061−1067,1072,1079−1085,
1093−1101,1105,1114,1119,1130−1134,
1138,1141,1148,1156−1162,1166,1181,
1183,1192−1196,1200,1208,1210,
1221−1229,1237,1246,1253−1259,1266,
1270,1272,1278−1284,1288−1292,1296,
1300,1306,1308,1312,1316,1318,1327,
1334,1339,1347,1351−1355,1361,1365,
1367,1372,1376,1387,1390,1396,1405,
1409,1450−1454,1482,1486−1493,1497,
1502,1504,1518−1526,1530,1533,1538,
1548,1550,1557,1566,1595,1615,1628,
1631,1635,1637,1652,1661,1665,1678,
1717,1735,1744
21733K1872 E A320 0002,0003,0020−0639
21733K1872 F A320 0002,0003,0020−0266
21733K1872 G A320 0001−0638
21733K1872 H A320 0267,0270−0638
21733K1872 J A320 0267,0270−1725,1757,1780,1784,1785,
1802,1806,1814,1821,1823,1827,1832,
1834,1845,1857,1860,1868,1877,1879,
1889,1899
21733K1872 K A320 0267,0270−1705,1710−1725,1784

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 NovPage01/1317
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

21733K1872 L A320 0267,0270−0613,0617,0619,0624−0630,

0635−0661,0665−0724,0730−0824,
0846−0859,0865−0866,0870−0918,
0921−0934,0937−1011,1014,1026,
1032−1041,1047,1050,1054−1059,1063,
1067,1072−1110,1117−1132,1137,1138,
1143,1146,1150−1168,1173−1208,
1213−1221,1226−1262,1266,1270−1284,
1288−1292,1300−1308,1316−1327,
1332−1355,1359,1363−1419,1424−1530,
1533−1540,1544−1559,1564−1637,
1641−1719,1723−1888,1891−1904,
1907−1910,1913−1940,1944−1951,1957,
1958,1968,1969,1975,1979,1983−2001,
2006−2020,2024−2031,2038−2044,2048,
2063,2065,2075,2077,2082,2084,2092,
2097−2108,2116−2128,2132−2134,
2136−2138,2140,2141,2143−2147,
2149−2152,2154,2156−2161,2163−2169,
2175−2180,2185,2187,2191−2197,
2201−2210,2215,2217,2223,2225,2231,
2233,2242,2246−2250,2254,2256,2259,
2272,2278−2288,2294,2301−2314,2325,
2327,2331,2336,2340,2347−2352,2359,
2364−2393,2399,2405−2411,2415−2422,
2425,2430−2434,2439,2441,2447,2449,
2461,2479,2482,2486−2491,2504,
2509−2513,2520,2524,2529−2533,
2539−2542,2564−9999
21733K1872 M A320 0267,0270−0832,0836−0844,0849−0863,
0866−0881,0884,0888−0907,0912−0916,
0919−0921,0925−0928,0936−0950,0953,
0957−0973,0977−0982,0988,0992−0996,
1005,1011−1013,1028−1030,1039−1041,
1047−1052,1061−1067,1072,1079−1085,
1093−1101,1105,1114,1119,1130−1134,
1138−1141,1148,1156−1162,1166,
1181−1183,1192−1196,1200,1208−1210,
1221−1229,1237,1246,1253−1259,1266,
1270−1272,1278−1284,1288−1292,1296,
1300,1306−1308,1312

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 NovPage01/1318
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

21733K1872 N A320 0267,0270−0613,0617,0619,0624−0630,

0635−0661,0665−0724,0730−0824,
0846−0859,0865−0866,0870−0918,
0921−0934,0937−1011,1014,1026,
1032−1041,1047,1050,1054−1059,1063,
1067,1072−1110,1117−1132,1137,1138,
1143,1146,1150−1168,1173−1208,
1213−1221,1226−1262,1266,1270−1284,
1288−1292,1300−1308,1316−1327,
1332−1355,1359,1363−1419,1424−1530,
1533−1540,1544−1559,1564−1637,
1641−1719,1723−1888,1891−1904,
1907−1910,1913−1940,1944−1951,1957,
1958,1968,1969,1975,1979,1983−2001,
2006−2020,2024−2031,2038−2044,2048,
2063−2065,2075−2077,2082−2084,2092,
2097−2108,2116−2128,2132−2134,
2136−2138,2140−2141,2143−2147,
2149−2152,2154,2156−2161,2163−2169,
2175−2180,2185−2187,2191−2197,
2201−2210,2215−2217,2223−2225,
2231−2233,2242,2246−2250,2254−2256,
2259−2272,2278−2288,2294,2301−2314,
2325−2327,2331,2336,2340,2347−2352,
2359,2364−2393,2399,2405−2411,
2415−2422,2425,2430−2434,2439−2441,
2447−2449,2461,2479−2482,2486−2491,
2504,2509,2513,2520,2524,2529,2535,
2540−2542,2564−2566,2571,2577−2583,
2589,2596−2598,2602,2612−2613,2623,
2630−2635,2640,2645−2649,2656,2661,
2668,2671,2676−2678,2683,2688,2692,
2699,2705,2710−2712,2721−2737,
2745−2755,2760−2764,2676,2781−2785,
2794,2798,2802−2807,2810−9999
21733K1872 P A320 0001−0266,0268−0269,0274
21733K1872 Q A320 0267,0270−0273,0275−9999

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 NovPage01/1319
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

21733K1872 R A320 0267,0270−0613,0617,0619,0624−0630,

0635−0661,0665−0724,0730−0824,
0846−0859,0865−0866,0870−0918,
0921−0934,0937−1011,1014,1026,
1032−1041,1047,1050,1054−1059,1063,
1067,1072−1110,1117−1132,1137,1138,
1143,1146,1150−1168,1173−1208,
1213−1221,1226−1262,1266,1270−1284,
1288−1292,1300−1308,1316−1327,
1332−1355,1359,1363−1419,1424−1530,
1533−1540,1544−1559,1564−1637,
1641−1719,1723−1888,1891−1904,
1907−1910,1913−1940,1944−1951,1957,
1958,1968,1969,1975,1979,1983
21733K1872 S A320 0267,0270−2928
21733K1872 T A320 0267,0270−0273,0275−0613,0617,0619,
0624−0630,0635−0661,0665−0724,
0730−0824,0846−0859,0865−0866,
0870−0918,0921−0934,0937−1011,1014,
1026,1032−1041,1047,1050,1054−1059,
1063,1067,1072−1110,1117−1132,1137,
1138,1143,1146,1150−1168,1173−1208,
1213−1221,1226−1262,1266,1270−1284,
1288−1292,1300−1308,1316−1327,
1332−1355,1359,1363−1419,1424−1530,
1533−1540,1544−1559,1564−1637,
1641−1719,1723−1888,1891−1904,
1907−1910,1913−1940,1944−1951,1957,
1958,1968,1969,1975,1979,1983
22111K2225 A320 0400−9999
22111K2225 A A320 0400−0638
22111K2225 B A320 0400−0832,0836−0844,0849−0863,
0866−0881,0884,0888−0907,0912−0916,
0919,0921,0925−0928,0936−0950,0953,
0957−0973,0977−0982,0988,0992−0996,
1005,1011,1013,1028,1030,1039,1041,
1047−1052,1061−1067,1072,1079−1085,
1093−1101,1105,1114,1119,1130−1134,
1138,1141,1148,1156−1162,1166,1181,
1183,1192−1196,1200,1208,1210,
1221−1229,1237,1246,1253−1259,1266,
1270,1272,1278−1284,1288−1292,1296,
1300,1306,1308,1312,1316,1318,1327,
1334,1339,1347,1351−1355,1361,1365,
1367,1372,1376,1387,1390,1396,1405,
1409,1450−1454,1482,1486−1493,1497,
1502,1504,1518−1526,1530,1533,1538,
1548,1550,1557,1566,1595,1615,1628,
1631,1635,1637,1652,1661,1665,1678,
1717,1735,1744

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 NovPage01/1320
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

22111K2225 C A320 0400−0832,0836−0844,0849−0863,

0866−0881,0884,0888−0907,0912−0916,
0919−0921,0925−0928,0936−0950,0953,
0957−0973,0977−0982,0988,0992−0996,
1005,1011−1013,1028−1030,1039−1041,
1047−1052,1061−1067,1072,1079−1085,
1093−1101,1105,1114,1119,1130−1134,
1138−1141,1148,1156−1162,1166,
1181−1183,1192−1196,1200,1208−1210,
1221−1229,1237,1246,1253−1259,1266,
1270−1272,1278−1284,1288−1292,1296,
1300,1306−1308,1312,1316−1318,1327,
1334,1339,1347,1351−1355,1361,
1365−1367,1372,1376,1387−1390,1396,
1405,1409,1450−1454,1482,1486−1493,
1497,1502−1504,1518−1526,1530,1533,
1538,1548−1550,1557,1566,1595,1615,
1628−1631,1635−1637,1652,1661,1665,
1678,1708,1712,1717−1721,1757,1780,
1785,1802,1806,1814,1821−1823,1827,
1832−1834,1845,1857,1860,1868,
1877−1879,1889,1899
22169K2275 A320 0267,0270−0639
22956P2798 A320 0123,0181,0182,0195,0229,0306−9999 34−1044
22956P2798 A A320 0123,0181,0182,0195,0229,0306−2885
24979K3895 A320 0640−9999
24979K3895 A A320 0640−0667
25247K3657 A320 0615,0622,0632,0662,0726,0844,
0861−0863,0868,0919,0936,1013,
1028−1030,1044,1052,1061,1065,1070
25247K3657 A A320 0000 55−1016
25484K4399 A320 0640−9999
25484K4399 A A320 0640−0832,0836−0844,0849−0851,0856,
0859,0863,0866−0881,0884,0888−0907,
0912−0916,0919−0921,0925−0928,
0936−0943,0953,0967,0971
25484K4399 B A320 0640−9999
25484K4399 C A320 0640−0801,0803,0805,0807,0809,0812,
0814,0816,0818,0820,0822,0824,0826,
0828,0830,0832,0836,0838−0839,0842,
0844,0849,0851,0854,0856−0857,0859,
0861,0863,0866,0868,0870,0872,0874,
0876−0877,0879,0881,0884,0888,0892,
0894−0895,0897,0899−0900,0902−0903,
0905,0907,0912,0914,0916,0919,0921,
0925,0927−0928,0936−0937,0939,
0942−0943,0953,0967,0971,0977,0982,
0988,0994,1005,1011

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 NovPage01/1321
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

25484K4399 D A320 0669−0786

25484K4399 E A320 0640−0786
25484K4399 F A320 0640−0832,0836−0844,0849−0863,
0866−0881,0884,0888−0907,0912−0916,
0919−0921,0925−0928,0936−0950,0953,
0957−0973,0977−0982,0988,0992−0996,
1005,1011−1013,1028−1030,1039−1041,
1047−1052,1061−1067,1072,1079−1085,
1093−1101,1105,1114,1119,1130−1134,
1138−1141,1148,1156−1162,1166,
1181−1183,1192−1196,1200,1208−1210,
1221−1229,1237,1246,1253−1259,
1266,1270−1272,1278−1284,1288−1292,
1296,1300,1306,1308,1312,1316,1318,
1327,1334,1339,1347,1351,1353,1355,
1361,1365,1367,1372,1376,1387,1390,
1396,1405,1409,1450,1452,1486,1489,
1497,1502,1504,1518,1523,1526,1530,
1533,1538,1548,1550,1557,1566,1595,
1615,1628,1631,1635,1637,1652,1661,
1665,1678,1708,1717,1719,1721,1757,
1780,1785,1802,1806,1814,1821,1823,
1827,1832,1834,1845,1857,1860,1868,
1877,1879,1889,1899
25484K4399 G A320 0883,0886,0909,0918,0930−0934,0951,
0975,0984,0986,0990,0999,1007,1014,
1026,1032,1035,1044,1054−1059,1070,
1076,1087,1108−1112,1117,1121,1123,
1143,1152,1168−1177,1187,1189,1198,
1206,1213−1217,1231,1235,1240,1242,
1251,1262,1264,1268,1286,1294,1298,
1302,1304,1310,1314,1320,1330,1332,
1345,1357,1368−1370,1374,1379,
1381−1385,1394,1398−1402,1407,
1411−1418,1422,1424,1430,1437−1448,
1457−1467,1473,1480,1484,1500,1506,
1509,1516,1528,1532,1540,1542,1546,
1553,1561,1564,1571−1580,1591,1593,
1597,1605,1610,1613,1624,1639,1648,
1650,1655,1657,1663,1667,1672−1676,
1694,1697,1700,1705−1710,1725,1730,
1732,1736,1739,1751,1764−1769,1789,
1793,1799−1802,1809,1814,1816,1823,
1842,1852,1856−1857

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 NovPage01/1322
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

25484K4399 H A320 0002,0005−0009,0011,0014,0017−0030,

0035,0037−0039,0042,0043,0045−0058,
0061−0067,0069−0072,0074−0083,
0085−0105,0109−0114,0116,0117,0119,
0120,0123,0124,0128,0129,0131−0140,
0142,0143,0146−0148,0151,0153,0157,
0158,0160−0183,0185−0203,0205−0210,
0212,0213,0216−0235,0238,0240−0243,
0245−0251,0253,0256,0257,0262−0264,
0266−0269,0271−0274,0279−0281,
0283−0289,0291−0295,0299−0305,0308,
0309,0312−0317,0322,0323,0325−0328,
0331,0332,0334−0336,0338,0343−0346,
0348,0349,0351,0356,0362−0366,
0369−0371,0374,0375,0379,0382,0383,
0389−0398,0401−0404,0406,0407,0409,
0413−0416,0419−0425,0427−0471,0476,
0478,0480−0482,0486,0490−0499,0501,
0507,0511,0525−0537,0540−0547,
0549−0558,0561,0565,0569,0573,0575,
0579−0584,0590,0594,0601,0605−0611,
0615−0632
25484K4399 J A320 0640,0645−0653,0657−0671,0676,
0685−0698,0704−0707,0709−0737,0741,
0745−0749,0753−0764,0770−0774,0784,
0789−0799,0803,0805,0809−0816,0822,
0828,0838,0844,0849,0854,0856,
0859−0863,0866−0881,0884,0888,
0894−0902,0905,0912−0916,0919,0921,
0925−0928,0936−0950,0957−0960,
0966−0973,0977,0978,0982,0992,0994,
1005,1013,1028,1030,1039,1041,1047,
1052,1061−1067,1072,1081,1085,
1093−1101,1114,1119,1130,1134,1138,
1141,1148,1156,1158,1181,1183,1194,
1196,1200,1208,1210,1221−1229,1246,
1253−1259,1270,1278,1280,1288,1292,
1296,1300,1306,1312,1316,1318,1327,
1334,1339,1347,1351−1355,1361,1372,
1376,1390,1396,1450−1454,1482,1486,
1489,1493,1502,1504,1518,1523,1530,
1550,1557,1566,1595,1615,1628,1637,
1652,1665,1717,1744

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 NovPage01/1323
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

25484K4399 K A320 0803−0832,0836−0844,0849−0863,

0866−0881,0884,0888−0907,0912−0916,
0919,0921,0925−0928,0936−0950,0953,
0957−0973,0977−0982,0988,0992−0996,
1005,1011,1013,1028,1030,1039,1041,
1047−1052,1061−1067,1072,1079−1085,
1093−1101,1105,1114,1119,1130−1134,
1138,1141,1148,1156−1162,1166,1181,
1183,1192−1196,1200,1208,1210,
1221−1229,1237,1246,1253−1259,1266,
1270,1272,1278−1284,1288−1292,1296,
1300,1306,1308,1312,1316,1318,1327,
1334,1339,1347,1351−1355,1361,1365,
1367,1372,1376,1387,1390,1396,1405,
1409,1450−1454,1482,1486−1493,1497,
1502,1504,1518−1526,1530,1533,1538,
1548,1550,1557,1566,1595,1615,1628,
1631,1635,1637,1652,1661,1665,1678,
1717,1735,1744
25484K4399 L A320 0640−0832,0836−0844,0849−0863,
0866−0881,0884,0888−0907,0912−0916,
0919−0921,0925−0928,0936−0950,0953,
0957−0973,0977−0982,0988,0992−0996,
1005,1011−1013,1028−1030,1039−1041,
1047−1052,1061−1067,1072,1079−1085,
1093−1101,1105,1119,1130−1132,1138,
1156−1162,1166,1181−1183,1192−1196,
1200,1208,1221,1226−1229,1237,1246,
1253−1259,1266,1270−1272,1278−1284,
1288−1292,1300,1306−1308,1316−1318,
1327,1334,1339,1347,1351−1355,
1365−1367,1372,1376,1387−1390,1396,
1405,1409,1450−1454,1482,1486−1493,
1497,1502−1504,1518−1526,1530,1533,
1538,1548−1550,1557,1566,1595,1615,
1628−1631,1635−1637,1652,1661,1665,
1678,1708,1712,1717−1719,1757,1780,
1785,1802,1806,1814,1821−1823,1827,
1832−1834,1845,1857,1860,1868,
1877−1879,1899

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 NovPage01/1324
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

25484K4399 M A320 0640−0832,0836−0844,0849−0863,

0866−0881,0884,0888−0907,0912−0916,
0919,0921,0925−0928,0936−0950,0953,
0957−0973,0977−0982,0988,0992−0996,
1005,1011,1013,1028,1030,1039,1041,
1047−1052,1061−1067,1072,1079−1085,
1093−1101,1105,1114,1119,1130−1134,
1138,1141,1148,1156−1162,1166,1181,
1183,1192−1196,1200,1208,1210,
1221−1229,1237,1246,1253−1259,1266,
1270,1272,1278−1284,1288−1292,1296,
1300,1306,1308,1312,1316,1318,1327,
1334,1339,1347,1351−1355,1361,1365,
1367,1372,1376,1387,1390,1396,1405,
1409,1450−1454,1482,1486−1493,1497,
1502,1504,1518−1526,1530,1533,1538,
1548,1550,1557,1566,1595,1615,1628,
1631,1635,1637,1652,1661,1665,1678,
1717
25484K4399 N A320 0640−0832,0836−0844,0849−0863,
0866−0881,0884,0888−0907,0912−0916,
0919,0921,0925−0928,0936−0950,0953,
0957−0973,0977−0982,0988,0992−0996,
1005,1011,1013,1028,1030,1039,1041,
1047−1052,1061−1067,1072,1079−1085,
1093−1101,1105,1114,1119,1130−1134,
1138,1141,1148,1156−1162,1166,1181,
1183,1192−1196,1200,1208,1210,
1221−1229,1237,1246,1253−1259,1266,
1270,1272,1278−1284,1288−1292,1296,
1300,1306,1308,1312,1316,1318,1327,
1334,1339,1347,1351−1355,1361,1365,
1367,1372,1376,1387,1390,1396,1405,
1409,1450−1454,1482,1486−1493,1497,
1502,1504,1518−1526,1530,1533,1538,
1548,1550,1557,1566,1595,1615,1628,
1631,1635,1637,1652,1661,1665,1678,
1717,1735,1744

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 NovPage01/1325
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

25484K4399 R A320 0640−0832,0836−0844,0849−0863,

0866−0881,0884,0888−0907,0912−0916,
0919,0921,0925−0928,0936−0950,0953,
0957−0973,0977−0982,0988,0992−0996,
1005,1011,1013,1028,1030,1039,1041,
1047−1052,1061−1067,1072,1079−1085,
1093−1101,1105,1114,1119,1130−1134,
1138,1141,1148,1156−1162,1166,1181,
1183,1192−1196,1200,1208,1210,
1221−1229,1237,1246,1253−1259,1266,
1270,1272,1278−1284,1288−1292,1296,
1300,1306,1308,1312,1316,1318,1327,
1334,1339,1347,1351−1355,1361,1365,
1367,1372,1376,1387,1390,1396,1405,
1409,1450−1454,1482,1486−1493,1497,
1502,1504,1518−1526,1530,1533,1538,
1548,1550,1557,1566,1595,1615,1628,
1631,1635,1637,1652,1661,1665,1678,
1708,1712,1717−1721,1757,1780,1785,
1802,1806,1814,1821,1823,1827,1832,
1834,1845,1857,1860,1868,1877,1879,
1889,1899
25484K4399 S A320 0640,0645−0653,0657−0671,0676,
0685−0698,0704−0737,0741,0745−0749,
0753−0764,0770−0774,0784,0789−0799,
0803−0805,0809−0816,0822,0828,0838,
0844,0849,0854−0856,0859−0863,
0866−0881,0884,0888,0894−0902,0905,
0912−0916,0919−0921,0925−0928,
0936−0950,0957−0960,0966−0973,
0977−0978,0982,0992−0994,1005,1013,
1028−1030,1039−1041,1047,1052,
1061−1067,1072,1081,1085,1093−1101,
1114,1119,1130,1134,1138−1141,1148,
1156−1158,1181−1183,1194−1196,1200,
1208−1210,1221−1229,1246,1253−1259,
1270,1278−1280,1288,1292,1296,1300,
1306,1312,1316−1318,1327,1334,1339,
1347,1351−1355,1361,1372,1376,1390,
1396,1450−1454,1482,1486−1493,
1502−1504,1518−1526,1530,1548−1550,
1557,1566,1595,1615,1628,1637,1652,
1661,1665,1708,1717−1721,1757,1780,
1785,1802,1806,1814,1823,1827,1832,
1857,1860,1868,1877−1879,1889,1899

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 NovPage01/1326
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

25484K4399 T A320 0883,0886,0909,0918,0930−0934,0951,

0975,0984−0986,0990,0999,1007,
1014−1026,1032−1035,1044,1054−1059,
1070,1076,1087,1108−1112,1117,
1121−1123,1143,1152,1168−1177,1187,
1198,1206,1213−1217,1231,1235,
1240−1242,1251,1262−1264,1268,1286,
1294,1298,1302−1204,1310,1314,1320,
1330−1332,1345,1357,1368−1370,1374,
1379−1385,1394,1398−1402,1407,
1411−1418,1422−1424,1430,1437−1448,
1457−1467,1473,1480,1484,1500,1506,
1509−1512,1516,1528,1532,1540−1542,
1546,1553,1561−1564,1568−1580,
1591−1593,1597−1605,1610−1613,
1624−1626,1639,1648−1650,1655−1657,
1663,1667,1672−1676,1686−1700,1705,
1715,1723−1725,1730−1732,1736−1739,
1744−1754,1760−1762,1767−1777,
1782−1784,1787,1793−1799,1804,1809,
1816−1818,1825,1829,1835−1838,
1849−1856,1858,1861−1864,1867,
1871−1874,1883−1888,1891,1894−1898,
1900,1903−1913,1915−1931,1935−1937,
1942−1975,1981−1996,2001−2016,
2020−2024,2031−2075,2079,2084−2090,
2094−2144,2147−2153,2155−2207,
2212−2221,2225−2310,2314−2403,
2407−2419,2423−2428,2432−2479,
2486−2612,2616−2627,2633−2749,
2755−2760,2764−2775,2778−2783,
2787−2789,2792,2796,2800−2802,
2810−2824,2828−2832,2838,2842−2851,
2855,2859−2863,2928,2945

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 NovPage01/1327
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

25484K4399 U A320 0803−0832,0836−0844,0849−0863,

0866−0881,0884,0888−0907,0912−0916,
0919,0921,0925−0928,0936−0950,0953,
0957−0973,0977−0982,0988,0992−0996,
1005,1011,1013,1028,1030,1039,1041,
1047−1052,1061−1067,1072,1079−1085,
1093−1101,1105,1114,1119,1130−1134,
1138,1141,1148,1156−1162,1166,1181,
1183,1192−1196,1200,1208,1210,
1221−1229,1237,1246,1253−1259,1266,
1270,1272,1278−1284,1288−1292,1296,
1300,1306,1308,1312,1316,1318,1327,
1334,1339,1347,1351−1355,1361,1365,
1367,1372,1376,1387,1390,1396,1405,
1409,1450−1454,1482,1486−1493,1497,
1502,1504,1518−1526,1530,1533,1538,
1548,1550,1557,1566,1595,1615,1628,
1631,1635,1637,1652,1661,1665,1678,
1708,1712,1717−1721,1757,1780,1785,
1802,1806,1814,1821,1823,1827,1832,
1834,1845,1857,1860,1868,1877,1879,
1889,1899

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 NovPage01/1328
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

25484K4399 V A320 0883,0886,0909,0918,0930−0934,0951,

0975,0984−0986,0990,0999,1007,
1014−1026,1032−1035,1044,1054−1059,
1070,1076,1087,1108−1112,1117,
1121−1123,1143,1152,1168−1177,1187,
1198,1206,1213−1217,1231,1235,
1240−1242,1251,1262−1264,1268,1286,
1294,1298,1302−1304,1310,1314,1320,
1330−1332,1345,1357,1368−1370,1374,
1379−1385,1394,1398−1402,1407,
1411−1418,1422−1424,1430,1437−1448,
1457−1467,1473,1480,1484,1500,1506,
1509−1512,1516,1528,1532,1540−1542,
1546,1553,1561−1564,1568−1580,
1591−1593,1597−1605,1610−1613,
1624−1626,1639,1648−1650,1655−1657,
1663,1667,1672−1676,1686−1700,1705,
1715,1723−1725,1730−1732,1736−1739,
1744−1754,1760−1762,1767−1777,
1782−1784,1787,1793−1799,1804,1809,
1816−1818,1825,1829,1835−1838,
1849−1856,1858,1861−1864,1867,
1871−1874,1883−1888,1891,1894−1898,
1900,1903−1913,1915−1931,1935−1937,
1942−1975,1981−1996,2001−2016,
2020−2024,2031−2075,2079,2084−2090,
2094−2144,2147−2153,2155−2207,
2212−2221,2225−2310,2314−2403,
2407−2419,2423−2428,2432−2479,
2486−2612,2616−2627,2633−2749,
2755−2760,2764−2775,2778−2783,
2787−2789,2792,2796,2800−2802,
2810−2824,2828−2832,2838,2842−2851,
2853,2855,2859−3125,3129−3141,
3145−3148,3150−3159,3161−3164,
3167−3174,3178−3199

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 NovPage01/1329
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

25484K4399 W A320 0883,0886,0909,0918,0930−0934,0951,

0975,0984−0986,0990,0999,1007,
1014−1026,1032−1035,1044,1054−1059,
1070,1076,1087,1108−1112,1117,
1121−1123,1143,1152,1168−1177,1187,
1198,1206,1213−1217,1231,1235,
1240−1242,1251,1262−1264,1268,1286,
1294,1298,1302−1304,1310,1314,1320,
1330−1332,1345,1357,1368−1370,1374,
1379−1385,1394,1398−1402,1407,
1411−1418,1422−1424,1430,1437−1448,
1457−1467,1473,1480,1484,1500,1506,
1509−1512,1516,1528,1532,1540−1542,
1546,1553,1561−1564,1568−1580,
1591−1593,1597−1605,1610−1613,
1624−1626,1639,1648−1650,1655−1657,
1663,1667,1672−1676,1686−1700,1705,
1715,1723−1725,1730−1732,1736−1739,
1744−1754,1760−1762,1767−1777,
1782−1784,1787,1793−1799,1804,1809,
1816−1818,1825,1829,1835−1838,
1849−1856,1858,1861−1864,1867,
1871−1874,1883−1888,1891,1894−1898,
1900,1903−1913,1915−1931,1935−1937,
1942−1975,1981−1996,2001−2016,
2020−2024,2031−2075,2079,2084−2090,
2094−2144,2147−2153,2155−2207,
2212−2221,2225−2310,2314−2403,
2407−2419,2423−2428,2432−2479,
2486−2612,2616−2627,2633−2749,
2755−2760,2764−2775,2778−2783,
2787−2789,2792,2796,2800−2802,
2810−2824,2828−2832,2838,2842−3125,
3129−3141,3145−3148,3150−3159,
3161−3164,3167−3174,3178−3199

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 NovPage01/1330
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

25484K4399 X A320 0883,0886,0909,0918,0930−0934,0951,

0975,0984−0986,0990,0999,1007,
1014−1026,1032−1035,1044,1054−1059,
1070,1076,1087,1108−1112,1117,
1121−1123,1143,1152,1168−1177,1187,
1198,1206,1213−1217,1231,1235,
1240−1242,1251,1262−1264,1268,1286,
1294,1298,1302−1304,1310,1314,1320,
1330−1332,1345,1357,1368−1370,1374,
1379−1385,1394,1398−1402,1407,
1411−1418,1422−1424,1430,1437−1448,
1457−1467,1473,1480,1484,1500,1506,
1509−1512,1516,1528,1532,1540−1542,
1546,1553,1561−1564,1568−1580,
1591−1593,1597−1605,1610−1613,
1624−1626,1639,1648−1650,1655−1657,
1663,1667,1672−1676,1686−1700,1705,
1715,1723−1725,1730−1732,1736−1739,
1744−1754,1760−1762,1767−1777,
1782−1784,1787,1793−1799,1804,1809,
1816−1818,1825,1829,1835−1838,
1849−1856,1858,1861−1864,1867,
1871−1874,1883−1888,1891,1894−1898,
1900,1903−1913,1915−1931,1935−1937,
1942−1975,1981−1996,2001−2016,
2020−2024,2031−2075,2079,2084−2090,
2094−2144,2147−2153,2155−2207,
2212−2221,2225−2310,2314−2403,
2407−2419,2423−2428,2432−2479,
2484−2612,2616−2627,2633−3125,
3129−3141,3145−3148,3150−3159,
3161−3164,3167−3174,3178−3284,
3287−3299,3303−3310,3313,3316−3349,
3353,3357−3383,3386,3391−3408,
3410−3427,3433−3465,3470−3497,
3501−3506,3510−3511,3515−3529,
3532−3549,3553−3559,3563−3582,
3594−3605,3609−3648,3650−3666,
3670−3679,3692−3696,3698−3701,
3706−3711,3714−3719,3723−3724,
3729−3732,3736,3741−3745,3748−3753,
3756−3767,3773,3776,3778−3780,
3782−3786,3789,3793−3797,3802−3805,
3813−3815,3819,3825,3831−3837,3855

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 NovPage01/1331
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

25484K4399 Y A320 0883,0886,0909,0918,0930−0934,0951,

0975,0984−0986,0990,0999,1007,
1014−1026,1032−1035,1044,1054−1059,
1070,1076,1087,1108−1112,1117,
1121−1123,1143,1152,1168−1177,1187,
1198,1206,1213−1217,1231,1235,
1240−1242,1251,1262−1264,1268,1286,
1294,1298,1302−1304,1310,1314,1320,
1330−1332,1345,1357,1368−1370,1374,
1379−1385,1394,1398−1402,1407,
1411−1418,1422−1424,1430,1437−1448,
1457−1467,1473,1480,1484,1500,1506,
1509−1512,1516,1528,1532,1540−1542,
1546,1553,1561−1564,1568−1580,
1591−1593,1597−1605,1610−1613,
1624−1626,1639,1648−1650,1655−1657,
1663,1667,1672−1676,1686−1700,1705,
1715,1723−1725,1730−1732,1736−1739,
1744−1754,1760−1762,1767−1777,
1782−1784,1787,1793−1799,1804,1809,
1816−1818,1825,1829,1835−1838,
1849−1856,1858,1861−1864,1867,
1871−1874,1883−1888,1891,1894−1898,
1900,1903−1913,1915−1931,1935−1937,
1942−1975,1981−1996,2001−2016,
2020−2024,2031−2075,2079,2084−2090,
2094−2144,2147−2153,2155−2207,
2212−2221,2225−2310,2314−2403,
2407−2419,2423−2428,2432−2479,
2484−2612,2616−2627,2633−3125,
3129−3141,3145−3148,3150−3159,
3161−3164,3167−3174,3178−3284,
3287−3299,3303−3310,3313,3316−3349,
3353,3357−3383,3386,3391−3408,
3410−3427,3433−3465,3470−3497,
3501−3506,3510−3511,3515−3529,
3532−3549,3553−3559,3563−3605,
3609−3648,3650−3666,3668−3679,
3692−3696,3698−3701,3706−3719,
3723−3724,3729−3739,3743−3769,
3773−3805,3809−3875,3880−3910,
3913−3925,3929−3946,3949−3967,
3971−4014,4017−4021,4026−4028,
4032−4037,4046−4053,4061,4068−4070,
4075,4171

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 NovPage01/1332
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

25484K4399 Z A320 0883,0886,0909,0918,0930−0934,0951,

0975,0984−0986,0990,0999,1007,
1014−1026,1032−1035,1044,1054−1059,
1070,1076,1087,1108−1112,1117,
1121−1123,1143,1152,1168−1177,1187,
1198,1206,1213−1217,1231,1235,
1240−1242,1251,1262−1264,1268,1286,
1294,1298,1302−1304,1310,1314,1320,
1330−1332,1345,1357,1368−1370,1374,
1379−1385,1394,1398−1402,1407,
1411−1418,1422−1424,1430,1437−1448,
1457−1467,1473,1480,1484,1500,1506,
1509−1512,1516,1528,1532,1540−1542,
1546,1553,1561−1564,1568−1580,
1591−1593,1597−1605,1610−1613,
1624−1626,1639,1648−1650,1655−1657,
1663,1667,1672−1676,1686−1700,1705,
1715,1723−1725,1730−1732,1736−1739,
1744−1754,1760−1762,1767−1777,
1782−1784,1787,1793−1799,1804,1809,
1816−1818,1825,1829,1835−1838,
1849−1856,1858,1861−1864,1867,
1871−1874,1883−1888,1891,1894−1898,
1900,1903−1913,1915−1931,1935−1937,
1942−1975,1981−1996,2001−2016,
2020−2024,2031−2075,2079,2084−2090,
2094−2144,2147−2153,2155−2207,
2212−2221,2225−2310,2314−2403,
2407−2419,2423−2428,2432−2479,
2484−2612,2616−2627,2633−3125,
3129−3141,3145−3148,3150−3159,
3161−3164,3167−3174,3178−3284,
3287−3299,3303−3310,3313,3316−3349,
3353,3357−3383,3386,3391−3408,
3410−3427,3433−3465,3470−3497,
3501−3506,3510−3511,3515−3529,
3532−3549,3553−3559,3563−3605,
3609−3648,3650−3666,3668−3679,
3692−3696,3698−3701,3706−3719,
3723−3724,3729−3739,3743−3769,
3773−3805,3809−3875,3880−3910,
3913−3925,3929−3946,3949−3967,
3971−4095,4098−4108,4110−4119,
4122−4152,4154−4172,4175−4183,
4186−4190,4193−4201,4203−4218,4220,
4225−4229,4233−4237,4240,4243,4245,
4247,4260−4261,4297,4300,4310

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 NovPage01/1333
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

25484K4399 AA A320 0883,0886,0909,0918,0930−0934,0951,

0975,0984−0986,0990,0999,1007,
1014−1026,1032−1035,1044,1054−1059,
1070,1076,1087,1108−1112,1117,
1121−1123,1143,1152,1168−1177,1187,
1198,1206,1213−1217,1231,1235,
1240−1242,1251,1262−1264,1268,1286,
1294,1298,1302−1304,1310,1314,1320,
1330−1332,1345,1357,1368−1370,1374,
1379−1385,1394,1398−1402,1407,
1411−1418,1422−1424,1430,1437−1448,
1457−1467,1473,1480,1484,1500,1506,
1509−1512,1516,1528,1532,1540−1542,
1546,1553,1561−1564,1568−1580,
1591−1593,1597−1605,1610−1613,
1624−1626,1639,1648−1650,1655−1657,
1663,1667,1672−1676,1686−1700,1705,
1715,1723−1725,1730−1732,1736−1739,
1744−1754,1760−1762,1767−1777,
1782−1784,1787,1793−1799,1804,1809,
1816−1818,1825,1829,1835−1838,
1849−1856,1858,1861−1864,1867,
1871−1874,1883−1888,1891,1894−1898,
1900,1903−1913,1915−1931,1935−1937,
1942−1975,1981−1996,2001−2016,
2020−2024,2031−2075,2079,2084−2090,
2094−2144,2147−2153,2155−2207,
2212−2221,2225−2310,2314−2403,
2407−2419,2423−2428,2432−2479,
2484−2612,2616−2627,2633−3125,
3129−3141,3145−3148,3150−3159,
3161−3164,3167−3174,3178−3284,
3287−3299,3303−3310,3313,3316−3349,
3353,3357−3383,3386,3391−3408,
3410−3427,3433−3465,3470−3497,
3501−3506,3510−3511,3515−3529,
3532−3549,3553−3559,3563−3605,
3609−3648,3650−3666,3668−3679,
3692−3696,3698−3701,3706−3719,
3723−3724,3729−3739,3743−3769,
3773−3805,3809−3875,3880−3910,
3913−3925,3929−3946,3949−3967,
3971−4095,4098−4108,4110−4119,
4122−4152,4154−4172,4175−4183,
4186−4190,4193−4220,4225−4237,
4239−4245,4247−4260,4263−4264,
4267−4288,4290−4305,4307,4309−4322,
4325−4350,4355−4362,4364−4371,
4373−4397,4399−4401,4404−4412,
4414−4448,4450−4463,4465−4506,
4508−4524,4526−4536,4541,4544−4549,
4553,4557,4559,4564,4567−4570,
4572−4573,4579,4581

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 NovPage01/1334
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

25484K4399 AB A320 0883,0886,0909,0918,0930−0934,0951,

0975,0984−0986,0990,0999,1007,
1014−1026,1032−1035,1044,1054−1059,
1070,1076,1087,1108−1112,1117,
1121−1123,1143,1152,1168−1177,1187,
1198,1206,1213−1217,1231,1235,
1240−1242,1251,1262−1264,1268,1286,
1294,1298,1302−1304,1310,1314,1320,
1330−1332,1345,1357,1368−1370,1374,
1379−1385,1394,1398−1402,1407,
1411−1418,1422−1424,1430,1437−1448,
1457−1467,1473,1480,1484,1500,1506,
1509−1512,1516,1528,1532,1540−1542,
1546,1553,1561−1564,1568−1580,
1591−1593,1597−1605,1610−1613,
1624−1626,1639,1648−1650,1655−1657,
1663,1667,1672−1676,1686−1700,1705,
1715,1723−1725,1730−1732,1736−1739,
1744−1754,1760−1762,1767−1777,
1782−1784,1787,1793−1799,1804,1809,
1816−1818,1825,1829,1835−1838,
1849−1856,1858,1861−1864,1867,
1871−1874,1883−1888,1891,1894−1898,
1900,1903−1913,1915−1931,1935−1937,
1942−1975,1981−1996,2001−2016,
2020−2024,2031−2075,2079,2084−2090,
2094−2144,2147−2153,2155−2207,
2212−2221,2225−2310,2314−2403,
2407−2419,2423−2428,2432−2479,
2484−2612,2616−2627,2633−3125,
3129−3141,3145−3148,3150−3159,
3161−3164,3167−3174,3178−3284,
3287−3299,3303−3310,3313,3316−3349,
3353,3357−3383,3386,3391−3408,
3410−3427,3433−3465,3470−3497,
3501−3506,3510−3511,3515−3529,
3532−3549,3553−3559,3563−3605,
3609−3648,3650−3666,3668−3679,
3692−3696,3698−3701,3706−3719,
3723−3724,3729−3739,3743−3769,
3773−3805,3809−3875,3880−3910,
3913−3925,3929−3946,3949−3967,
3971−4095,4098−4108,4110−4119,
4122−4152,4154−4172,4175−4183,
4186−4190,4193−4220,4225−4237,
4239−4245,4247−4260,4263−4264,
4267−4288,4290−4305,4307,4309−4322,
4325−4350,4355−4362,4364−4371,
4373−4397,4399−4401,4404−4412,
4414−4448,4450−4463,4465−4549,
4552−4561,4564−4600,4602−4603,4606,
4609−4616,4619−4620,4623−4627,
4630−4639,4642−4644,4646−4661,
4666−4671,4674−4681,4684−4712,4715,
4718−4724,4726,4729,4735,4738−4740,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 NovPage01/1335
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

25484K4399 AB A320 4742−4745,4748−4789,4793−4799,

4802−4803,4805−4810,4813−4818,
4821−4872,4876−4877,4880−4886,
4888−4890,4892−4907,4909−4912,
4914−4917,4919−4922,4926−4930,4934,
4937−4939,4943−4959,4963−4965,
4968−4969,4972,4974,4978−4986,
4988−4989,4991−4996,4999−5004,
5008−5010,5012,5016−5020,5026−5027,
5031,5036,5046,5052,5056,5062,
5064−5066

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 MayPage01/1436
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

25484K4399 AC A320 0640,0645−0653,0657−0671,0676,

0685−0698,0704−0737,0741,0745−0749,
0753−0764,0770−0774,0784,0789−0799,
0803−0805,0809−0816,0822,0828,0838,
0844,0849,0854−0856,0859−0863,
0866−0888,0894−0902,0905,0909,
0912−0921,0925−0951,0957−0960,
0966−0978,0982−0986,0990−0994,0999,
1005−1007,1013−1035,1039−1047,
1052−1072,1076,1081,1085−1101,
1108−1123,1130,1134,1138−1143,1148,
1152−1158,1168−1177,1181−1187,
1194−1231,1235,1240−1242,1246,
1251−1264,1268−1270,1278−1280,
1286−1288,1292−1306,1310−1320,
1327−1334,1339,1345−1347,1351−1357,
1361,1368−1385,1390−1402,1407,
1411−1418,1422−1424,1430,1437−1467,
1473,1480−1493,1500−1506,1509−1512,
1516−1532,1540−1542,1546−1553,1557,
1561−1580,1591−1605,1610−1615,
1624−1628,1637−1639,1648−1667,
1672−1676,1686−1700,1705−1708,
1715−1725,1730−1732,1736−1739,
1744−1754,1757−1762,1767−1787,
1793−1809,1814−1818,1823−1832,
1835−1838,1849−1864,1867−1891,
1894−1900,1903−1913,1915−1931,
1935−1937,1942−1975,1981−1996,
2001−2016,2020−2024,2031−2075,2079,
2084−2090,2094−2144,2147−2153,
2155−2207,2212−2221,2225−2310,
2314−2403,2407−2419,2423−2428,
2432−2479,2484−2612,2616−2627,
2633−3125,3129−3141,3145−3148,
3150−3159,3161−3164,3167−3174,
3178−3284,3287−3299,3303−3310,3313,
3316−3349,3353,3357−3383,3386,
3391−3408,3410−3427,3433−3465,
3470−3497,3501−3506,3510−3511,
3515−3529,3532−3549,3553−3559,
3563−3605,3609−3648,3650−3666,
3668−3679,3692−3696,3698−3701,
3706−3719,3723−3724,3729−3739,
3743−3769,3773−3805,3809−3875,
3880−3910,3913−3925,3929−3946,
3949−3967,3971−4095,4098−4108,
4110−4119,4122−4152,4154−4172,
4175−4183,4186−4190,4193−4220,
4225−4237,4239−4245,4247−4260,
4263−4264,4267−4288,4290−4305,4307,
4309−4322,4325−4350,4355−4362,
4364−4371,4373−4397,4399−4401,
4404−4412,4414−4448,4450−4463,
4465−4550,4552−4561,4564−4600,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 MayPage01/1437
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

25484K4399 AC A320 4602−4603,4606−4616,4619−4620,

4623−4627,4630−4639,4642−4661,
4666−4671,4674−4681,4684−4712,4715,
4718−4724,4726,4729,4735,4738−4740,
4742−4745,4748−4789,4793−4797,4799,
4802−4818,4821−4827,4829−4831,
4833−4907,4909−4922,4926−4931,
4934−4948,4951−4974,4977−5020,
5022−5036,5039−5061,5063−5068,
5070−5073,5076−5082,5086−5121,
5125−5128,5131−5138,5140−5162,
5165−5179,5182−5195,5198−5202,
5204−5206,5209−5211,5213−5220,
5222−5356,5359−5371,5373−5423,
5426−5440,5442−5486,5489−5496,
5498−5508,5511−5517,5520−5524,
5526−5537,5540−5556,5559−5593,
5596−5600,5602,5605−5607,5610−5614,
5616,5618−5628,5630−5632,5637−5649,
5652,5654−5657,5661−5664,5666−5680,
5683−5693,5695−5740,5742−5766,
5771−5782,5785−5830,5832−5846,
5848−5853,5857−5866,5869−5877,
5879−5934,5937−5945,5950−5959,
5964−5971,5974−5984,5986−5992,
5995−6000,6003−6004,6007−6008,
6011−6026,6029−6032,6034−6048,6167

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1538
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

25484K4399 AD A320 0640,0645−0653,0657−0671,0676,

0685−0698,0704−0737,0741,0745−0749,
0753−0764,0770−0774,0784,0789−0799,
0803−0805,0809−0816,0822,0828,0838,
0844,0849,0854−0856,0859−0863,
0866−0888,0894−0902,0905,0909,
0912−0921,0925−0951,0957−0960,
0966−0978,0982−0986,0990−0994,0999,
1005−1007,1013−1035,1039−1047,
1052−1072,1076,1081,1085−1101,
1108−1123,1130,1134,1138−1143,1148,
1152−1158,1168−1177,1181−1187,
1194−1231,1235,1240−1242,1246,
1251−1264,1268−1270,1278−1280,
1286−1288,1292−1306,1310−1320,
1327−1334,1339,1345−1347,1351−1357,
1361,1368−1385,1390−1402,1407,
1411−1418,1422−1424,1430,1437−1467,
1473,1480−1493,1500−1506,1509−1512,
1516−1532,1540−1542,1546−1553,1557,
1561−1580,1591−1605,1610−1615,
1624−1628,1637−1639,1648−1667,
1672−1676,1686−1700,1705−1708,
1715−1725,1730−1732,1736−1739,
1744−1754,1757−1762,1767−1787,
1793−1809,1814−1818,1823−1832,
1835−1838,1849−1864,1867−1891,
1894−1900,1903−1913,1915−1931,
1935−1937,1942−1975,1981−1996,
2001−2016,2020−2024,2031−2075,2079,
2084−2090,2094−2144,2147−2153,
2155−2207,2212−2221,2225−2310,
2314−2403,2407−2419,2423−2428,
2432−2479,2484−2612,2616−2627,
2633−3125,3129−3141,3145−3148,
3150−3159,3161−3164,3167−3174,
3178−3284,3287−3299,3303−3310,3313,
3316−3349,3353,3357−3383,3386,
3391−3408,3410−3427,3433−3465,
3470−3497,3501−3506,3510−3511,
3515−3529,3532−3549,3553−3559,
3563−3605,3609−3648,3650−3666,
3668−3679,3692−3696,3698−3701,
3706−3719,3723−3724,3729−3739,
3743−3769,3773−3805,3809−3875,
3880−3910,3913−3925,3929−3946,
3949−3967,3971−4095,4098−4108,
4110−4119,4122−4152,4154−4172,
4175−4183,4186−4190,4193−4220,
4225−4237,4239−4245,4247−4260,
4263−4264,4267−4288,4290−4305,4307,
4309−4322,4325−4350,4355−4362,
4364−4371,4373−4397,4399−4401,
4404−4412,4414−4448,4450−4463,
4465−4550,4552−4561,4564−4600,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1539
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

25484K4399 AD A320 4602−4603,4606−4616,4619−4620,

4623−4627,4630−4639,4642−4661,
4666−4671,4674−4681,4684−4712,
4715,4718−47244726, 4729, 4735,
4738−4740, 4742−4745, 4748−4789,
4793−4797, 4799, 4802−4818,
4821−4827, 4829−4831, 4833−4907,
4909−4922, 4926−4931, 4934−4948,
4951−4974, 4977−5020, 5022−5036,
5039−5061, 5063−5068, 5070−5073,
5076−5082, 5086−5121, 5125−5128,
5131−5138, 5140−5162, 5165−5179,
5182−5195, 5198−5202, 5204−5206,
5209−5211, 5213−5220, 5222−5356,
5359−5371, 5373−5423, 5426−5440,
5442−5486, 5489−5496, 5498−5508,
5511−5517, 5520−5524, 5526−5537,
5540−5556, 5559−5593, 5596−5600,
5602, 5605−5607, 5610−5614, 5616,
5618−5628, 5630−5632, 5637−5649,
5652, 5654−5657, 5661−5664,
5666−5680, 5683−5693, 5695−5740,
5742−5766, 5771−5782, 5785−5830,
5832−5846, 5848−5853, 5857−5866,
5869−5877, 5879−5934, 5937−5945,
5950−5959, 5964−5971, 5974−5984,
5986−5992, 5995−6000, 6003−6004,
6007−6026, 6029, 6032, 6034, 6039,
6043−6048
26500K4924 A320 0834,0846,0854,0857,0861,0865,0883,
0886,0909−0911,0918,0923,0930−0934,
0945−0951,0955−0966,0969
26500K4924 A A320 0834,0846,0854,0857,0861,0865,0883,
0886,0909−0911,0918,0923,0930−0934,
0945−0951,0955−0966,0969
26500K4924 B A320 0834,0846,0865,0883,0886,0909,0911,
0918,0923,0930,0932,0934,0945,0947,
0950−0951,0955,0957−0958,0960,0962,
0964,0966,0969,0973,0975,0978,0981,
0984,0986,0990,0992,0996,0999,1001,
1003,1007,1009
26500K4924 C A320 0834,0846,0865,0883,0886,0909−0911,
0918,0923,0930−0934,0945−0951,
0955−0966,0969
26500K4924 D A320 0789−9999

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1540
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

26500K4924 E A320 0834,0846,0865,0883,0886,0909,0911,

0918,0923,0930,0932,0934,0951,0955,
0975,0984,0986,0990,0992,0996,0999,
1001,1003,1007,1009,1035,1037,1044,
1047,1050,1054,1057,1059,1070,1072,
1075−1076,1087,1093,1099,1101,
1104−1105,1108,1110,1112,1117,1119,
1121,1123,1125,1128,1137,1143,1146,
1150,1152,1163,1168,1171,1173,1175,
1177,1179,1181,1183,1187,1189,1196,
1198,1206,1208,1213,1215,1217,1221,
1224,1226,1229,1231,1234−1235,1237,
1240,1242,1244
26500K4924 F A320 0834,0846,0865,0883,0886,0909,0911,
0918,0923,0930,0932,0934,0951,0955,
0975,0984,0986,0990
26500K4924 G A320 0999−1003,1007−1009,1014−1026,
1032−1037,1044,1054−1059,1070,
1075−1076,1087,1104,1108−1112,1117,
1121−1128,1137,1143−1146,1150−1152,
1163,1168−1179,1187−1189,1198,1206,
1213−1217,1231−1235,1240−1244,
1248−1251,1262−1264,1268,1274,1286,
1294,1298
26500K4924 H A320 0834,0846,0865,0883,0886,0909,0911,
0918,0923,0930−0934,0951,0955,0975,
0984,0986,0990,0999−1003,1007,1009,
1014,1026,1032−1037,1044,1054−1059,
1070,1075,1076,1087,1104,1108−1112,
1117,1121−1128,1137,1143,1146,1150,
1152,1163,1168−1179,1187,1189,1198,
1206,1213−1217,1231−1235,1240−1244,
1248,1251,1262,1264,1268,1274,1286,
1294,1298,1302,1304,1310,1314,1320,
1322,1330,1332,1337,1341−1345,1349,
1357,1359,1363,1368,1370,1374,
1379−1385,1394,1398−1402,1407,
1411−1448,1457−1480,1484,1495,1500,
1506−1516,1528,1532,1535,1540−1546,
1553,1555,1559−1564,1568−1593,
1597−1613,1617−1626,1633,1639−1650,
1655,1657,1663,1667−1676,1680−1715,
1719−1732,1736−1741,1747−9999
26500K4924 J A320 0834

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1541
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

26500K4924 K A320 1044,1054−1059,1070,1075−1076,1087,

1104,1108−1112,1117,1121−1128,1137,
1143−1146,1150−1152,1163,1168−1179,
1187−1189,1198,1206,1213−1217,
1231−1235,1240−1244,1248−1251,
1262−1264,1268,1274,1286,1294,1298,
1302,1304,1310,1314,1320,1322,1330,
1332,1337,1341,1343,1345,1349,1357,
1359,1363,1368,1370,1374,1379,1381,
1383,1385,1394,1398,1400,1402,1407,
1411,1413,1416,1418,1422,1424,1427,
1430,1432,1435,1437,1439,1441,1443,
1446,1448,1457,1459,1461−1484,1495,
1500,1505,1509,1512−1516,1528,1532,
1535,1540−1446,1553−1555,1559−1564,
1568−1593,1597−1605,1610−1613,1617,
1621,1624−1626,1633,1639,1641,1650,
1655−1657,1663,1667−1676,1680−1682,
1697−1700,1702,1705−1710,1715,1723,
1725,1784−9999
26500K4924 L A320 0834,0846,0865,0883,0886,0909−0911,
0918,0923,0930−0934,0951,0955,0975,
0984−0986,0990,0999−1003,1007−1009,
1014−1026,1032−1037,1044,1054−1059,
1070,1075−1076,1087,1104,1108−1110,
1121−1128,1137,1143−1146,1150−1152,
1163,1168−1179,1187−1189,1198,1206,
1213−1217,1231−1235,1240−1244,
1248−1251,1262,1274,1286,1302−1304,
1320−1322,1332,1337,1341−1345,1349,
1359,1363,1368−1370,1374,1379−1385,
1394,1398−1402,1407,1411−1419,
1424−1448,1457−1480,1484,1495,1500,
1506−1516,1528,1535,1540,1544−1546,
1553−1555,1559,1564,1568−1593,
1597−1613,1617−1626,1633,1641−1650,
1655−1657,1663,1667−1676,1680−1705,
1710,1715,1723−1725,1784

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1542
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

26500K4924 M A320 0834,0846,0865,0883,0886,0909,0911,

0918,0923,0930−0934,0951,0955,0975,
0984,0986,0990,0999−1003,1007,1009,
1014,1026,1032−1037,1044,1054−1059,
1070,1075,1076,1087,1104,1108−1112,
1117,1121−1128,1137,1143,1146,1150,
1152,1163,1168−1179,1187,1189,1198,
1206,1213−1217,1231−1235,1240−1244,
1248,1251,1262,1264,1268,1274,1286,
1294,1298,1302,1304,1310,1314,1320,
1322,1330,1332,1337,1341−1345,1349,
1357,1359,1363,1368,1370,1374,
1379−1385,1394,1398−1402,1407,
1411−1448,1457−1480,1484,1495,1500,
1506−1516,1528,1532,1535,1540−1546,
1553,1555,1559−1564,1568−1593,
1597−1613,1617−1626,1633,1639−1650,
1655,1657,1663,1667−1676,1680−1700,
1702,1705,1710,1715,1723,1725,1784
26500K4924 N A320 1708,1712,1719,1721,1757,1780,1785,
1802,1806,1814,1821,1823,1827,1832,
1834,1845,1857,1860,1868,1877,1879,
1889,1899
26500K4924 P A320 0834,0846,0865,0883,0886,0909,0911,
0918,0923,0930−0934,0951,0955,0975,
0984,0986,0990,0999−1003,1007,1009,
1014,1026,1032−1037,1044,1054−1059,
1070,1075,1076,1087,1104,1108−1112,
1117,1121−1128,1137,1143,1146,1150,
1152,1163,1168−1179,1187,1189,1198,
1206,1213−1217,1231−1235,1240−1244,
1248,1251,1262,1264,1268,1274,1286,
1294,1298,1302,1304,1310,1314,1320,
1322,1330,1332,1337,1341−1345,1349,
1357,1359,1363,1368,1370,1374,
1379−1385,1394,1398−1402,1407,
1411−1448,1457−1480,1484,1495,1500,
1506−1516,1528,1532,1535,1540−1546,
1553,1555,1559−1564,1568−1593,
1597−1613,1617−1626,1633,1639−1650,
1655,1657,1663,1667−1676,1680−1700,
1702,1705,1708,1710,1715,1723,1725,
1757,1780,1784,1785,1802,1806,1814,
1821,1823,1827,1832,1834,1845,1857,
1860,1868,1877,1879,1889,1899
26500K4924 Q A320 1708,1728−1782,1785−9999

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1543
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

26500K4924 S A320 0834,0846,0865,0883,0886,0909−0911,

0918,0923,0930−0934,0951,0955,0975,
0984−0986,0990,0999−1003,1007−1009,
1014−1026,1032−1037,1044,1054−1059,
1070,1075−1076,1087,1104,1108−1110,
1117,1121−1128,1137,1143−1146,
1150−1152,1163,1168,1173−1179,
1187−1189,1198,1206,1213−1217,
1231−1235,1240−1244,1248−1251,1262,
1274,1286,1302−1304,1320−1322,1332,
1337,1341−1345,1349,1359,1363,
1368−1370,1374,1379−1385,1394,
1398−1402,1407,1411−1419,1424−1448,
1457−1480,1484,1495,1500,1506−1516,
1528,1535,1540,1544−1546,1553−1555,
1559,1564,1568−1593,1597−1613,
1617−1626,1633,1641−1650,1655−1657,
1663,1667−1676,1680−1705,1710,1715,
1723−1725,1784
26500K4924 T A320 0834,0846,0865,0883,0886,0909,0911,
0918,0923,0930−0934,0951,0955,0975,
0984,0986,0990,0999−1003,1007,1009,
1014,1026,1032−1037,1044,1054−1059,
1070,1075,1076,1087,1104,1108−1112,
1117,1121−1128,1137,1143,1146,1150,
1152,1163,1168−1179,1187,1189,1198,
1206,1213−1217,1231−1235,1240−1244,
1248,1251,1262,1264,1268,1274,1286,
1294,1298,1302,1304,1310,1314,1320,
1322,1330,1332,1337,1341−1345,1349,
1357,1359,1363,1368,1370,1374,
1379−1385,1394,1398−1402,1407,
1411−1448,1457−1480,1484,1495,1500,
1506−1516,1528,1532,1535,1540−1546,
1553,1555,1559−1564,1568−1593,
1597−1613,1617−1626,1633,1639−1650,
1655,1657,1663,1667−1676,1680−1705,
1710,1715,1723−1755,1760−1777,1782,
1784,1787−1799,1804,1809,1812,1816,
1818,1825,1829,1835−1842,1847−1856,
1858,1861−1867,1871−1874,1883−1888,
1891−1898,1900−9999

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1544
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

26500K4924 V A320 0999−1003,1007−1009,1014−1026,

1032−1037,1044,1054−1059,1070,
1075−1076,1087,1104,1108−1112,1117,
1121−1128,1137,1143−1146,1150−1152,
1163,1168−1179,1187−1189,1198,1206,
1213−1217,1231−1235,1240−1244,
1248−1251,1262−1264,1268,1274,1286,
1294,1298,1302−1304,1310,1314,
1320−1322,1330−1332,1337,1341−1345,
1349,1357−1359,1363,1368−1370,1374,
1379−1385,1394,1398−1402,1407,
1411−1448,1457−1480,1484,1495,1500,
1506−1516,1528,1532,1535,1540−1446,
1553−1555,1559−1564,1568−1593,
1597−1613,1617−1626,1633,1639−1650,
1655−1657,1663,1667−1676,1680−1705,
1710,1715,1723−1725,1784
26500K4924 W A320 1044,1054−1059,1070,1075−1076,1087,
1104,1108−1112,1117,1121−1128,1137,
1143−1146,1150−1152,1163,1168−1179,
1187−1189,1198,1206,1213−1217,
1231−1235,1240−1244,1248−1251,
1262−1264,1268,1274,1286,1294,1298,
1302−1304,1310,1314,1320−1322,
1330−1332,1337,1341−1345,1349,
1357−1359,1363,1368−1370,1374,
1379−1385,1394,1398−1402,1407,
1411−1448,1457−1480,1484,1495,1500,
1506−1516,1528,1532,1535,1540−1446,
1553−1555,1559−1564,1568−1593,
1597−1613,1617−1626,1633,1639−1650,
1655−1657,1663,1667−1676,1680−1705,
1710,1715,1723−1725,1784

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1545
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

26500K4924 X A320 0834,0846,0865,0883,0886,0909−0911,

0918,0923,0930−0934,0951,0955,0975,
0984−0986,0990,0999−1003,1007−1009,
1014−1026,1032−1037,1044,1054−1059,
1070,1075−1076,1087,1104,1108−1112,
1117,1121−1128,1137,1143−1146,
1150−1152,1163,1168−1179,1187−1189,
1198,1206,1213−1217,1231−1235,
1240−1244,1248−1251,1262−1264,1268,
1274,1286,1294,1298,1302−1304,1310,
1314,1320−1322,1330−1332,1337,
1341−1345,1349,1357−1359,1363,
1368−1370,1374,1379−1385,1394,
1398−1402,1407,1411−1448,1457−1480,
1484,1495,1500,1506−1516,1528,1532,
1535,1540−1546,1553−1555,1559−1564,
1568−1593,1597−1613,1617−1626,1633,
1639−1650,1655−1657,1663,1667−1676,
1680−1705,1710,1715,1723−1725,1784
26806K4941 A320 0789−0832,0836−0844,0849−0863,
0866−0881,0884,0888−0907,0912−0916,
0919,0921,0925−0928,0936−0950,0953,
0957−0973,0977−0982,0988,0992−0996,
1005,1011,1013,1028,1030,1039,1041,
1047−1052,1061−1067,1072,1079−1085,
1093−1101,1105,1114,1119,1130−1134,
1138,1141,1148,1156−1162,1166,1181,
1183,1192−1196,1200,1208,1210,
1221−1229,1237,1246,1253−1259,1266,
1270,1272,1278−1284,1288−1292,1296,
1300,1306,1308,1312,1316,1318,1327,
1334,1339,1347,1351−1355,1361,1365,
1367,1372,1376,1387,1390,1396,1405,
1409,1450−1454,1482,1486−1493,1497,
1502,1504,1518−1526,1530,1533,1538,
1548,1550,1557,1566,1595,1615,1628,
1631,1635,1637,1652,1661,1665,1678,
1717,1735,1744

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1546
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

26806K4941 A A320 0789−0832,0836−0844,0849−0863,

0866−0881,0884,0888−0907,0912−0916,
0919−0921,0925−0928,0936−0950,0953,
0957−0973,0977−0982,0988,0992−0996,
1005,1011−1013,1028−1030,1039−1041,
1047−1052,1061−1067,1072,1079−1085,
1093−1101,1105,1114,1119,1130−1134,
1138−1141,1148,1156−1162,1166,
1181−1183,1192−1196,1200,1208−1210,
1221−1229,1237,1246,1253−1259,1266,
1270−1272,1278−1284,1288−1292,1296,
1300,1306−1308,1312,1316−1318,1327,
1334,1339,1347,1351−1355,1361,
1365−1367,1372,1376,1387−1390,1396,
1405,1409,1450−1454,1482,1486−1493,
1497,1502−1504,1518−1526,1530,1533,
1538,1548−1550,1557,1566,1595,1615,
1628−1631,1635−1637,1652,1661,1665,
1678,1708,1712,1717−1721,1757,1780,
1785,1802,1806,1814,1821−1823,1827,
1832−1834,1845,1857,1860,1868,
1877−1879,1889,1899
27775K6005 A320 1112,1117,1121−1128,1137,1143−1146,
1150,1152,1163,1168−1179,1187,1189,
1198,1206,1213−1217,1231−1235,
1240−1244,1248,1251,1262,1264,1268,
1274,1286,1294,1298,1302,1304,1310,
1314,1320,1322,1330,1332,1337,
1341−1345,1349,1357,1359,1363,1368,
1370,1374,1379−1385,1394,1398−1402,
1407,1411−1448,1457−1480,1484,1495,
1500,1506−1516,1528,1532,1535,
1540−1546,1553,1555,1559−1564,
1568−1593,1597−1613,1617−1626,1633,
1639−1650,1655,1657,1663,1667−1676,
1680−1715,1719−1732,1736−1741,
1747−9999
27775K6005 A A320 1114,1119,1130−1134,1138,1141,1148,
1156−1162,1166,1181,1183,1192−1196,
1200,1208,1210,1221−1229,1237,1246,
1253−1259,1266,1270,1272,1278−1284,
1288−1292,1296,1300,1306,1308,1312,
1316,1318,1327,1334,1339,1347,
1351−1355,1361,1365,1367,1372,1376,
1387,1390,1396,1405,1409,1450−1454,
1482,1486−1493,1497,1502,1504,
1518−1526,1530,1533,1538,1548,1550,
1557,1566,1595,1615,1628,1631,1635,
1637,1652,1661,1665,1678,1717,1735,
1744

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1547
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

27775K6005 B A320 1708,1757,1780,1785,1802,1806,1814,

1821,1823,1827,1832,1834,1845,1857,
1860,1868,1877,1879,1889,1899
27775K6005 C A320 1114,1119,1130−1134,1138−1141,1148,
1156−1162,1166,1181−1183,1192−1196,
1200,1208−1210,1221−1229,1237,1246,
1253−1259,1266,1270−1272,1278−1284,
1288−1292,1296,1300,1306−1308,1312,
1316−1318,1327,1334,1339,1347,
1351−1355,1361,1365−1367,1372,1376,
1387−1390,1396,1405,1409,1450−1454,
1482,1486−1493,1497,1502−1504,
1518−1526,1530,1533,1538,1548−1550,
1557,1566,1595,1615,1628−1631,
1635−1637,1652,1661,1665,1678,1708,
1712,1717−1721,1757,1780,1785,1802,
1806,1814,1821−1823,1827,1832−1834,
1845,1857,1860,1868,1877−1879,1889,
1899
27775K6005 D A320 1112,1117,1121−1128,1137,1143−1146,
1150−1152,1163,1168−1179,1187−1189,
1198,1206,1213−1217,1231−1235,
1240−1244,1248−1251,1262−1264,1268,
1274,1286,1294,1298,1302−1304,1310,
1314,1320−1322,1330−1332,1337,
1341−1345,1349,1357−1359,1363,
1368−1370,1374,1379−1385,1394,
1398−1402,1407,1411−1448,1457−1480,
1484,1495,1500,1506−1516,1528,1532,
1535,1540−1546,1553−1555,1559−1564,
1568−1593,1597−1613,1617−1626,1633,
1639−1650,1655−1657,1663,1667−1676,
1680−1705,1710,1715,1723−1755,
1760−1777,1782−1784,1787−1799,1804,
1809−1812,1816−1818,1825,1829,
1835−1842,1847−1856,1858,1861−1867,
1871−1874,1883−1888,1891−1898,
1900−9999
27775K6005 E A320 1728−1755,1760−1777,1782,1787−1799,
1804,1809−1812,1816−1818,1825,1829,
1835−1842,1847−1856,1858,1861−1867,
1871−1874,1883−1888,1891−1898,
1900−5012,5015−5021,5024−5031,
5033−5039,5042−5050,5052−5060,
5062−5070,5072−5081,5084−5090,
5092−5096,9004

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1548
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

27775K6005 F A320 1728−1755,1760−1777,1782,1787−1799,

1804,1809−1812,1816−1818,1825,1829,
1835−1842,1847−1856,1858,1861−1867,
1871−1874,1883−1888,1891−1898,
1900−5191,5198−9972
27775K6005 G A320 5013−5014,5022,5032,5041,5051,5061,
5071,5082,5091,5098−9972
27775K6005 H A320 1728−1755,1760−1777,1782,1787−1799,
1804,1809−1812,1816−1818,1825,1829,
1835−1842,1847−1856,1858,1861−1867,
1871−1874,1883−1888,1891−1898,
1900−9972

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1549
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

27775K6005 J A320 1728,1730,1732,1735−1736,1739,1741,

1744,1747,1749,1751,1754−1755,1760,
1762,1764,1767,1769,1771,1773,1775,
1777,1782,1787,1789,1792−1793,1797,
1799,1804,1809,1812,1816,1818,1825,
1829,1835,1838,1840,1842,1847,1849,
1852,1854,1856,1858,1861−1862,
1864−1865,1867,1871,1873−1874,1883,
1885,1888,1891−1892,1894−1896,1900,
1902−1904,1906−1907,1909−1911,
1913−1915,1917−1918,1920,1922,1924,
1927,1929,1931,1933,1935,1937,1940,
1942,1944−1945,1948−1949,1951,1954,
1957−1958,1961,1964−1965,1968−1969,
1973,1975,1979,1981,1983,1987,1989,
1992−1993,1996,1998,2001,2003,2006,
2009,2011,2014,2016,2018,2020,2022,
2024,2027,2029,2031,2034,2036,2038,
2040,2042,2044,2046,2048−2049,2054,
2056,2058,2061,2063,2065,2068,2070,
2073,2075,2077,2079,2082,2084−2085,
2088,2090,2092,2094,2097,2099,2102,
2104,2106,2108,2112,2114,2116,2118,
2121,2123,2125,2128,2130,2132−2169,
2171,2173,2175,2177−2178,2180,
2182−2183,2185,2187,2189,2191,2193,
2195,2197,2199,2201,2204,2206−2207,
2210,2212,2215,2217,2219,2221,2223,
2225,2227,2229,2231,2233,2235,
2238−2239,2242,2244,2246,2248,2250,
2252,2254,2256−2257,2259,2272,
2274−2275,2278,2280,2282,2284,2286,
2288,2291−2292,2294,2297,2299,2301,
2307,2310,2312,2314,2316,2322,2325,
2327,2329,2331,2334,2336,2338,2340,
2343,2345,2347,2349,2352,2354,2356,
2359,2361,2364,2366,2368,2372,2374,
2376,2384,2386,2388,2390−2391,2393,
2395,2397,2399,2401,2403,2405,2407,
2409,2411,2413,2415,2417,2419,
2422−2423,2425,2428,2430,2432,2434,
2437,2439,2441,2443,2445,2447,2449,
2451,2453,2455,2457,2459,2461,2475,
2478−2479,2482,2484,2486,2489,2491,
2493,2496,2498,2500,2502,2504,2506,
2509,2511,2513,2515,2517,2520,2522,
2524,2526,2529,2531,2533,2535,2537,
2539−2540,2542,2562,2564,2566,2569,
2571,2573,2576−2577,2580,2583−2584,
2587,2589,2591,2594,2596,2598,2600,
2602,2604,2606,2608−2609,2612−2613,
2616,2619−2620,2623,2626−2627,2630,
2633,2635,2637,2640,2642,2645,2647,
2649,2651,2654,2656,2658,2661,2663,
2665,2668,2670−2671,2674,2676,2678,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1550
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

27775K6005 J A320 2680,2683,2685,2688−2689,2692,

2695−2696,2699,2701,2703,2705,2708,
2710,2712,2714,2717,2719,2721,
2724−2725,2728,2731−2732,2734,2737,
2740,2743,2745,2747,2749,2752−2753,
2755,2758,2760−2761,2764,2766,2768,
2770,2772,2775−2776,2778,2781,2783,
2785,2787,2789,2791−2792,2794,2796,
2798,2800,2802,2804,2807−2808,2810,
2814,2816−2817,2820,2822,2824,2826,
2828,2830,2832,2834−2835,2838,2840,
2842,2844,2846,2848,2851,2853,
2855−2856,2859,2861,2863,2865,2867,
2869,2871,2874−2875,2877,2880−2881,
2883,2885,2896,2899−2900,2902,2904,
2906,2908−2909,2911,2914−2915,2917,
2920,2922,2924,2926,2928,2930,2932,
2934,2937,2939,2941,2943−2945,2947,
2950,2952−2953,2956,2958,2960,2962,
2964,2966,2968,2970,2973,2975,2977,
2980,2982,2984,2986−2995,2998,3000,
3002,3004,3006,3008,3010,3012,3014,
3016,3018,3021,3023,3025,3027,3029,
3031,3033,3035,3037,3039−3040,3042,
3044,3047−3048,3050,3052,3055−3056,
3058,3060,3063−3064,3066,3068,
3071−3072,3074,3076,3079−3080,3083,
3086−3087,3089,3091,3093,3095,3097,
3099,3101,3103,3105,3107,3109,3111,
3113,3115,3117,3119−3121,3123,3125,
3127,3129,3131−3132,3135−3136,3138,
3140−3141,3143,3145,3147−3162,3164,
3166−3167,3170,3173−3174,3177−3178,
3180,3182−3183,3185,3187,3189−3190,
3192,3194,3196−3197,3199,3201,3203,
3205−3206,3208,3210−3211,3213,3215,
3218−3219,3221,3223−3224,3227−3228,
3230,3232,3234,3236−3237,3239−3240,
3242,3244,3246,3256−3257,3259,3261,
3263−3264,3266,3268,3270,3272−3273,
3275,3277−3278,3280,3282,3284,
3286−3287,3289,3291,3293,3295−3296,
3299,3301,3303−3304,3306,3308,3310,
3312−3314,3316,3318−3319,3321,3323,
3325,3327−3328,3330,3332,3335,
3337−3338,3341,3343,3345,3348−3349,
3351,3353−3354,3357,3359,3361−3362,
3365−3366,3368,3370,3373−3374,3376,
3378−3379,3381,3383−3384,3386,3389,
3391−3392,3394,3396,3398,3400,3402,
3404,3408−3410,3412,3414,3416,3418,
3420,3422−3423,3425,3427,3430−3431,
3433,3435,3437,3439−3440,3444,3446,
3448−3449,3451,3453,3455−3457,
3460−3461,3464−3465,3468,3470,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1551
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

27775K6005 J A320 3472−3490,3492,3494−3497,3499,

3501−3503,3505−3506,3508,3510−3511,
3514−3517,3519,3521,3524,3526,
3528−3529,3531−3532,3535−3536,3538,
3540−3541,3543,3545,3547,3549−3550,
3553−3554,3556,3558−3559,3562−3563,
3565,3567−3568,3570,3572,3574,
3576−3577,3579,3581−3582,3591,3594,
3596−3599,3601,3603,3605,3607,
3609−3611,3613,3616,3618,3621−3622,
3624,3626−3628,3630−3631,3640−3641,
3643−3644,3646,3648−3650,3652,3654,
3656,3658−3659,3662,3664,3666−3668,
3670,3672,3674,3676−3677,3679,3690,
3692−3693,3695−3699,3701,3703,
3706−3707,3709,3711,3713−3716,
3718−3719,3721,3723−3724,3726,3729,
3731−3732,3734,3736,3739,3741,3743,
3745,3747−3748,3750,3753,3755−3756,
3758,3760,3762,3765,3767,3769,3771,
3773,3775−3778,3780−3783,3785−3787,
3789,3791,3793,3795,3797−3798,3800,
3802,3804−3805,3807,3809,3811−3813,
3815,3817,3819,3821,3823,3825,3827,
3829,3831,3833,3835,3837,3840,3843,
3846,3848,3850,3852,3855,3857,3859,
3861,3863,3866,3868,3870−3871,3873,
3875,3877,3880,3882−3883,3885,3887,
3889,3891,3894,3896,3898,3900,3902,
3904,3906−3910,3912−3913,3915,3917,
3919,3921−3923,3925,3927,3929,3931,
3933,3935,3937,3939,3941,3943,
3945−3947,3949,3952−3954,3956,3959,
3961,3963,3965,3967−3968,3971−3972,
3974−3976,3978−3980,3984,3986,3988,
3990−3992,3995,3997,3999,4001,4003,
4006,4008,4010−4015,4017,4019,4021,
4023,4026−4028,4030,4032−4035,4037,
4043,4046,4049,4051,4053,4055,4057,
4059,4061,4063−4066,4068,4070,4072,
4075,4077,4079,4081,4083−4084,4086,
4088,4090,4092−4095,4097−4098,
4100−4102,4104−4106,4108−4111,4113,
4115,4117−4120,4122,4124,4126,4128,
4130,4133,4135,4137,4139−4140,
4143−4147,4149−4150,4152−4154,
4156−4162,4165,4167−4168,4170,4172,
4174−4179,4181,4183,4185−4188,
4190−4191,4193,4195−4197,4199,
4201−4203,4205−4208,4210,4212,4214,
4216,4218−4220,4223,4225−4226,4229,
4231−4250,4252−4253,4255,4257,
4260−4261,4263−4265,4267,4269−4270,
4272−4273,4276,4278−4279,4281,4284,
4286,4288−4291,4293−4298,4300,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1552
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

27775K6005 J A320 4302−4310,4312,4314,4316−4317,

4320−4326,4328−4331,4333,4335,4337,
4339−4340,4342−4351,4354−4357,4359,
4361−4368,4370−4373,4375−4376,
4378−4379,4381,4383−4384,4386,4388,
4390−4402,4404−4405,4407−4409,
4411−4415,4417,4419,4421,4423−4424,
4426,4429,4431−4436,4438−4443,
4445−4450,4453−4454,4456−4460,
4462−4466,4468−4469,4471,4473−4493,
4495−4499,4501−4502,4504−4510,
4512−4521,4523−4528,4531−4533,
4535−4537,4539−4541,4543−4544,
4546−4559,4561−4562,4564−4569,
4571−4576,4578−4582,4584,4586−4589,
4591−4597,4599−4604,4606,4608−4610,
4612−4616,4618−4621,4623,4625,
4627−4628,4630−4634,4636−4637,4639,
4641−4642,4644−4647,4649,4651−4653,
4655−4659,4661,4664,4666,4668,
4670−4671,4673−4678,4680−4681,
4683−4690,4692,4694,4696−4697,
4699−4702,4704,4707−4709,4711−4712,
4714−4716,4718,4720−4727,4729−4730,
4733,4735−4736,4738−4743,4745,
4747−4752,4754,4757−4758,4760,
4762−4763,4765,4767,4769−4770,4772,
4775−4777,4780,4782,4784,4786,4789,
4791,4793−4795,4797−4800,4802−4810,
4812−4818,4820−4821,4823,4825,
4827−4829,4831−4833,4835−4836,
4839−4840,4844−4845,4848−4849,
4851−4855,4857−4858,4860−4862,
4864−4870,4872,4874,4876−4877,
4879−4880,4882−4884,4886−4892,
4894−4897,4899−4900,4902−4909,
4911−4915,4917−4922,4924,4926−4931,
4933−4934,4936−4939,4941−4944,
4946−4948,4950−4955,4958−4959,4961,
4963−4965,4967−4970,4972−4975,
4977−4991,4993,4996−4997,4999−5004,
5006−5008,5010−5017,5019−5022,5024,
5026−5027,5029−5034,5036−5037,5039,
5041−5042,5045−5048,5050−5053,
5055−5056,5058,5060−5064,5066−5073,
5075−5076,5078,5080−5082,5084,5086,
5089−5096,5098,5100−5104,5106−5117,
5120−5123,5125,5127−5129,5131−5132,
5134−5153,5155−5156,5158−5159,
5161−5163,5165−5168,5170−5172,
5174−5176,5178−5179,5181−5185,
5187−5191,5194−5196,5198,5200−5204,
5206−5207,5209,5211−5218,5220−5226,
5228−5232,5234,5236,5238,5240,
5242−5243,5245−5246,5248−5250,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1553
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

27775K6005 J A320 5252−5253,5255,5258−5260,5262−5264,

5266,5268,5270,5272,5274,5276,5278,
5281,5283,5288−5291,5296,5298−5299,
5301−5302,5304−5305,5307−5308,
5310−5313,5315−5316,5318−5320,
5322−5326,5329,5331,5333−5335,5337,
5339,5341−5342,5344,5347−5349,
5351−5353,5355−5356,5358−5365,5367,
5369−5373,5375,5378−5379,5381,5384,
5386−5387,5390−5391,5393−5399,5401,
5403,5405,5407−5408,5410−5411,
5414−5417,5419−5421,5423,5425−5426,
5428−5431,5433−5434,5436−5437,
5440−5443,5446,5448−5449,5452−5455,
5458,5460−5461,5463−5464,5466,5468,
5471−5474,5476−5477,5479−5480,
5482−5484,5486−5489,5491−5494,
5496−5499,5501−5503,5505−5508,
5510−5512,5514−5518,5520−5522,
5525−5527,5530−5533,5536−5537,
5539−5542,5544,5547−5548,5550−5554,
5556−5557,5559−5562,5564−5566,5568,
5570−5572,5574,5576−5581,5583,
5585−5587,5589−5593,5595−5602,
5604−5605,5607−5608,5610−5622,
5624−5632,5634−5635,5637−5643,
5645−5646,5648−5649,5651−5654,
5656−5658,5660−5662,5664−5666,
5668−5669,5671−5673,5675−9999

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1554
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

27775K6005 K A320 5013−5017,5019−5022,5024,5026−5027,

5029−5034,5036−5037,5039,5041−5042,
5045−5048,5050−5053,5055−5056,5058,
5060−5064,5066−5073,5075−5076,5078,
5080−5082,5084,5086,5089−5096,5098,
5100−5104,5106−5117,5120−5123,5125,
5127−5129,5131−5132,5134−5153,
5155−5156,5158−5159,5161−5163,
5165−5168,5170−5172,5174−5176,
5178−5179,5181−5185,5187−5191,
5194−5196,5198,5200−5204,5206−5207,
5209,5211−5218,5220−5226,5228−5232,
5234,5236,5238,5240,5242−5243,
5245−5246,5248−5250,5252−5253,5255,
5258−5260,5262−5264,5266,5268,5270,
5272,5274,5276,5278,5281,5283,
5288−5291,5296,5298−5299,5301−5302,
5304−5305,5307−5308,5310−5313,
5315−5316,5318−5320,5322−5326,5329,
5331,5333−5335,5337,5339,5341−5342,
5344,5347−5349,5351−5353,5355−5356,
5358−5365,5367,5369−5373,5375,
5378−5379,5381,5384,5386−5387,
5390−5391,5393−5399,5401,5403,5405,
5407−5408,5410−5411,5414−5417,
5419−5421,5423,5425−5426,5428−5431,
5433−5434,5436−5437,5440−5443,5446,
5448−5449,5452−5455,5458,5460−5461,
5463−5464,5466,5468,5471−5474,
5476−5477,5479−5480,5482−5484,
5486−5489,5491−5494,5496−5499,
5501−5503,5505−5508,5510−5512,
5514−5518,5520−5522,5525−5527,
5530−5533,5536−5537,5539−5542,5544,
5547−5548,5550−5554,5556−5557,
5559−5562,5564−5566,5568,5570−5572,
5574,5576−5581,5583,5585−5587,
5589−5593,5595−5602,5604−5605,
5607−5608,5610−5622,5624−5632,
5634−5635,5637−5643,5645−5646,
5648−5649,5651−5654,5656−5658,
5660−5662,5664−5666,5668−5669,
5671−5673,5675−9999
28484K6104 A320 1112,1114,1134,1141,1148,1171,1210, 55−1029
1224,1264,1268,1286,1294,1296,1298,
1310,1312,1314,1330,1357,1361,1422,
1532,1542,1561,1639,1674,1694,1736,
1769,1799

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1555
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

28484K6104 A A320 0615,0622,0632,0662,0726,0844,0861, 55−1029

0863,0868,0919,0936,1013,1028,1030,
1044,1052,1061,1065,1070,1112,1114,
1134,1141,1148,1171,1210,1224,1264,
1268,1286,1294−1298,1310−1314,1330,
1357,1361,1422,1532,1542,1561,1639,
1721,1889,1906,1911,1942,1954,
1961−1965,1973,1981,2003,2022,2034,
2036,2046,2049−2061,2068−2073,2079,
2085−2090,2094,2112,2114,2130,2135,
2139,2142,2148,2153,2155,2162,2171,
2173,2182,2183,2189,2199,2212,2219,
2221,2227,2229,2235−2239,2244,2252,
2257,2274,2275,2291,2292,2297,2299,
2316,2322,2329,2334,2338,2343,2345,
2354,2356,2361,2395,2397,2401,2403,
2413,2423,2428,2437,2443,2445,
2451−2459,2475,2478,2484,2493−2502,
2506,2515,2517,2522,2526,2535,2537,
2562

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1556
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

28484K6104 B A320 1112−1114,1134,1141,1148,1171,1210,

1224,1264,1268,1286,1294−1298,
1310−1314,1330,1357,1361,1422,1532,
1542,1561,1639,1721,1889,1906,1911,
1942,1954,1961−1965,1973,1981,2003,
2022,2034−2036,2046,2049−2061,
2068−2073,2079,2085−2090,2094,
2112−2114,2130,2135,2139,2142,2148,
2153,2155,2162,2171−2173,2182−2183,
2189,2199,2212,2219−2221,2227−2229,
2235−2239,2244,2252,2257,2274−2275,
2291−2292,2297−2299,2316−2322,2329,
2334,2338,2343−2345,2354−2356,2361,
2395−2397,2401−2403,2413,2423,2428,
2437,2443−2445,2451−2459,2475−2478,
2484,2493−2502,2506,2511,2515−2517,
2522,2526,2531−2533,2537−2539,2562,
2569,2573−2576,2584−2587,2591−2594,
2600,2604−2609,2616−2620,2626−2627,
2637,2642,2651−2654,2658,2663−2665,
2670,2674,2680,2685,2689,2695−2696,
2701−2703,2708,2714−2719,2731,
2740−2743,2747,2753,2758,2766−2775,
2778,2787−2792,2796,2800,2808,
2817−2824,2830,2834−2835,2840,
2844−2846,2851−2856,2861−2865,2874,
2877,2883,2899,2908−2917,2922,2928,
2934−2937,2941−2943,2950,2958−2960,
2966−2968,2973−2975,2980,2984−2986,
2990−2991,2993−2994,2998,3004−3006,
3010−3012,3016,3021,3025−3027,3031,
3037,3042,3048−3050,3055−3056,3060,
3068,3086−3089,3093,3097−3107,3113,
3121−3123,3131−3135,3147−3149,3153,
3155,3158−3160,3162,3167−3170,
3183−3189,3192,3196−3197,3205−3210,
3215,3219−3221,3224−3227,3230,
3234−3236,3239,3242−3244,3256−3259,
3264,3268−3275,3282,3286,3289−3291,
3296−3299,3303−3312,3316,3323,3327,
3330−3341,3349,3353,3357−3359,
3365−3370,3374,3378−3379,3383,
3386−3389,3392−3394,3398,3402−3408,
3414,3418,3422,3427,3431−3437,3440,
3448−3449,3453−3461,3465,3472,3474,
3477,3480−3481,3483,3485−3487,3489,
3495−3497,3503−3510,3514,3516,
3521−3524,3528,3536−3538,3541−3543,
3547−3549,3553,3558−3559,3567−3570,
3576−3591,3596−3597,3599−3605,
3610−3621,3624,3628,3641,3646−3648,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1557
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

28484K6104 B A320 3650−3656,3664,3667−3692,3696,3698,

3701,3706,3715−3719,3729−3731,
3734−3739,3743,3747−3748,3753,
3756−3758,3762−3769,3775−3777,
3782−3783,3791−3798,3804−3805,3809,
3812−3813,3821,3825−3827,3833,3837,
3843,3848,3852−3855,3859,3863,
3870−3875,3883,3887,3896−3900,3904,
3907,3909−3910,3913−3919,3922,3925,
3929−3931,3935−3946,3949,3953,
3959−3967,3971,3974−3975,3979−3988,
3991−4030,4033−4053,4057−4064,
4068−4070,4079−4090,4095−4106,
4110−4115,4118,4120−4122,4126−4130,
4135−4140,4144−4149,4153−4159,
4161−4162,4167−4172,4175−4183,
4186−4193,4196−4197,4202−4210,
4214−4220,4225−4229,4232−4235,
4239−4243,4245,4247−4248,4250−4264,
4267−4269,4272,4276−4304,4307,
4309−4312,4316−4317,4321−4322,
4324−4330,4333−4343,4345−4346,
4348−4350,4354−4365,4367−4370,
4375−4381,4384−4386,4390,4392,4396,
4398−4399,4401−4415,4421−4431,
4433−4438,4440,4443−4445,4447,
4449−4450,4456−4458,4460−4463,4466,
4469−4474,4477−4479,4481−4484,
4486−4489,4491−4497,4501−4510,
4513−4515,4524−4527

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1558
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

28484K6104 C A320 1112−1114,1134,1141,1148,1171,1210,

1224,1264,1268,1286,1294−1298,
1310−1314,1330,1357,1361,1422,1532,
1542,1561,1639,1721,1889,1906,1911,
1942,1954,1961−1965,1973,1981,2003,
2022,2034−2036,2046,2049−2061,
2068−2073,2079,2085−2090,2094,
2112−2114,2130,2135,2139,2142,2148,
2153,2155,2162,2171−2173,2182−2183,
2189,2199,2212,2219−2221,2227−2229,
2235−2239,2244,2252,2257,2274−2275,
2291−2292,2297−2299,2316−2322,2329,
2334,2338,2343−2345,2354−2356,2361,
2395−2397,2401−2403,2413,2423,2428,
2437,2443−2445,2451−2459,2475−2478,
2484,2493−2502,2506,2511,2515−2517,
2522,2526,2531−2533,2537−2539,2562,
2569,2573−2576,2584−2587,2591−2594,
2600,2604−2609,2616−2620,2626−2627,
2637,2642,2651−2654,2658,2663−2665,
2670,2674,2680,2685,2689,2695−2696,
2701−2703,2708,2714−2719,2731,
2740−2743,2747,2753,2758,2766−2775,
2778,2787−2792,2796,2800,2808,
2817−2824,2830,2834−2835,2840,
2844−2846,2851−2856,2861−2865,2874,
2877,2883,2899,2908−2917,2922,2928,
2934−2937,2941−2943,2950,2958−2960,
2966−2968,2973−2975,2980,2984−2986,
2990−2991,2993−2994,2998,3004−3006,
3010−3012,3016,3021,3025−3027,3031,
3037,3042,3048−3050,3055−3056,3060,
3068,3086−3089,3093,3097−3107,3113,
3121−3123,3131−3135,3147−3149,3153,
3155,3158−3160,3162,3167−3170,
3183−3189,3192,3196−3197,3205−3210,
3215,3219−3221,3224−3227,3230,
3234−3236,3239,3242−3244,3256−3259,
3264,3268−3275,3282,3286,3289−3291,
3296−3299,3303−3312,3316,3323,3327,
3330−3341,3349,3353,3357−3359,
3365−3370,3374,3378−3379,3383,
3386−3389,3392−3394,3398,3402−3408,
3414,3418,3422,3427,3431−3437,3440,
3448−3449,3453−3461,3465,3472,3474,
3477,3480−3481,3483,3485−3487,3489,
3495−3497,3503−3510,3514,3516,
3521−3524,3528,3536−3538,3541−3543,
3547−3549,3553,3558−3559,3567−3570,
3576−3591,3597,3599−3605,3610−3621,
3624,3628,3641,3646−3648,3650−3656,
3664,3667,3670−3693,3696,3698,3701,
3706,3715−3716,3719,3724,3729,3743

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1559
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

28484K6104 D A320 1112−1114,1134,1141,1148,1171,1210,

1224,1264,1268,1286,1294−1298,
1310−1314,1330,1357,1361,1422,1532,
1542,1561,1639,1721,1889,1906,1911,
1942,1954,1961−1965,1973,1981,2003,
2022,2034−2036,2046,2049−2061,
2068−2073,2079,2085−2090,2094,
2112−2114,2130,2135,2139,2142,2148,
2153,2155,2162,2171−2173,2182−2183,
2189,2199,2212,2219−2221,2227−2229,
2235−2239,2244,2252,2257,2274−2275,
2291−2292,2297−2299,2316−2322,2329,
2334,2338,2343−2345,2354−2356,2361,
2395−2397,2401−2403,2413,2423,2428,
2437,2443−2445,2451−2459,2475−2478,
2484,2493−2502,2506,2511,2515−2517,
2522,2526,2531−2533,2537−2539,2562,
2569,2573−2576,2584−2587,2591−2594,
2600,2604−2609,2616−2620,2626−2627,
2637,2642,2651−2654,2658,2663−2665,
2670,2674,2680,2685,2689,2695−2696,
2701−2703,2708,2714−2719,2731,
2740−2743,2747,2753,2758,2766−2775,
2778,2787−2792,2796,2800,2808,
2817−2824,2830,2834−2835,2840,
2844−2846,2851−2856,2861−2865,2874,
2877,2883,2899,2908−2917,2922,2928,
2934−2937,2941−2943,2950,2958−2960,
2966−2968,2973−2975,2980,2984−2986,
2990−2991,2993−2994,2998,3004−3006,
3010−3012,3016,3021,3025−3027,3031,
3037,3042,3048−3050,3055−3056,3060,
3068,3086−3089,3093,3097−3107,3113,
3121−3123,3131−3135,3147−3149,3153,
3155,3158−3160,3162,3167−3170,
3183−3189,3192,3196−3197,3205−3210,
3215,3219−3221,3224−3227,3230,
3234−3236,3239,3242−3244,3256−3259,
3264,3268−3275,3282,3286,3289−3291,
3296−3299,3303−3312,3316,3323,3327,
3330−3341,3349,3353,3357−3359,
3365−3370,3374,3378−3379,3383,
3386−3389,3392−3394,3398,3402−3408,
3414,3418,3422,3427,3431−3437,3440,
3448−3449,3453−3461,3465,3472,3474,
3477,3480−3481,3483,3485−3487,3489,
3495−3497,3503−3510,3514,3516,
3521−3524,3528,3536−3538,3541−3543,
3547−3549,3553,3558−3559,3567−3570,
3576−3591,3597,3599−3605,3610−3621,
3624,3628,3641,3646−3648,3650−3656,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1560
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

28484K6104 D A320 3664,3667,3670−3692,3696,3698,3701,

3706,3715−3716,3719,3724,3729,3734,
3743,3748,3756−3758,3762−3767,3775,
3780,3782−3783,3786−3787,3793−3797,
3805−3807,3813,3819,3831

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1561
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

28484K6104 E A320 1112−1114,1134,1141,1148,1171,1210,

1224,1264,1268,1286,1294−1298,
1310−1314,1330,1357,1361,1422,1532,
1542,1561,1639,1721,1889,1906,1911,
1942,1954,1961−1965,1973,1981,2003,
2022,2034−2036,2046,2049−2061,
2068−2073,2079,2085−2090,2094,
2112−2114,2130,2135,2139,2142,2148,
2153,2155,2162,2171−2173,2182−2183,
2189,2199,2212,2219−2221,2227−2229,
2235−2239,2244,2252,2257,2274−2275,
2291−2292,2297−2299,2316−2322,2329,
2334,2338,2343−2345,2354−2356,2361,
2395−2397,2401−2403,2413,2423,2428,
2437,2443−2445,2451−2459,2475−2478,
2484,2493−2502,2506,2511,2515−2517,
2522,2526,2531−2533,2537−2539,2562,
2569,2573−2576,2584−2587,2591−2594,
2600,2604−2609,2616−2620,2626−2627,
2637,2642,2651−2654,2658,2663−2665,
2670,2674,2680,2685,2689,2695−2696,
2701−2703,2708,2714−2719,2731,
2740−2743,2747,2753,2758,2766−2775,
2778,2787−2792,2796,2800,2808,
2817−2824,2830,2834−2835,2840,
2844−2846,2851−2856,2861−2865,2874,
2877,2883,2899,2908−2917,2922,2928,
2934−2937,2941−2943,2950,2958−2960,
2966−2968,2973−2975,2980,2984−2986,
2990−2991,2993−2994,2998,3004−3006,
3010−3012,3016,3021,3025−3027,3031,
3037,3042,3048−3050,3055−3056,3060,
3068,3086−3089,3093,3097−3107,3113,
3121−3123,3131−3135,3147−3149,3153,
3155,3158−3160,3162,3167−3170,
3183−3189,3192,3196−3197,3205−3210,
3215,3219−3221,3224−3227,3230,
3234−3236,3239,3242−3244,3256−3259,
3264,3268−3275,3282,3286,3289−3291,
3296−3299,3303−3312,3316,3323,3327,
3330−3341,3349,3353,3357−3359,
3365−3370,3374,3378−3379,3383,
3386−3389,3392−3394,3398,3402−3408,
3414,3418,3422,3427,3431−3437,3440,
3448−3449,3453−3461,3465,3472,3474,
3477,3480−3481,3483,3485−3487,3489,
3495−3497,3503−3510,3514,3516,
3521−3524,3528,3536−3538,3541−3543,
3547−3549,3553,3558−3559,3567

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1562
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

28484K6104 F A320 1112−1114,1134,1141,1148,1171,1210,

1224,1264,1268,1286,1294−1298,
1310−1314,1330,1357,1361,1422,1532,
1542,1561,1639,1721,1889,1906,1911,
1942,1954,1961−1965,1973,1981,2003,
2022,2034−2036,2046,2049−2061,
2068−2073,2079,2085−2090,2094,
2112−2114,2130,2135,2139,2142,2148,
2153,2155,2162,2171−2173,2182−2183,
2189,2199,2212,2219−2221,2227−2229,
2235−2239,2244,2252,2257,2274−2275,
2291−2292,2297−2299,2316−2322,2329,
2334,2338,2343−2345,2354−2356,2361,
2395−2397,2401−2403,2413,2423,2428,
2437,2443−2445,2451−2459,2475−2478,
2484,2493−2502,2506,2511,2515−2517,
2522,2526,2531−2533,2537−2539,2562,
2569,2573−2576,2584−2587,2591−2594,
2600,2604−2609,2616−2620,2626−2627,
2637,2642,2651−2654,2658,2663−2665,
2670,2674,2680,2685,2689,2695−2696,
2701−2703,2708,2714−2719,2731,
2740−2743,2747,2753,2758,2766−2775,
2778,2787−2792,2796,2800,2808,
2817−2824,2830,2834−2835,2840,
2844−2846,2851−2856,2861−2865,2874,
2877,2883,2899,2908−2917,2922,2928,
2934−2937,2941−2943,2950,2958−2960,
2966−2968,2973−2975,2980,2984−2986,
2990−2991,2993−2994,2998,3004−3006,
3010−3012,3016,3021,3025−3027,3031,
3037,3042,3048−3050,3055−3056,3060,
3068,3086−3089,3093,3097−3107,3113,
3121−3123,3131−3135,3147−3149,3153,
3155,3158−3160,3162,3167−3170,
3183−3189,3192,3196−3197,3205−3210,
3215,3219−3221,3224−3227,3230,
3234−3236,3239,3242−3244,3256−3259,
3264,3268−3275,3282,3286,3289−3291,
3296−3299,3303−3312,3316,3323,3327,
3330−3341,3349,3353,3357−3359,
3365−3370,3374,3378−3379,3383,
3386−3389,3392−3394,3398,3402−3408,
3414,3418,3422,3427,3431−3437,3440,
3448−3449,3453−3461,3465,3472,3474,
3477,3480−3481,3483,3485−3487,3489,
3495−3497,3503−3510,3514,3516,
3521−3524,3528,3536−3538,3541−3543,
3547−3549,3553,3558−3559,3567−3570,
3576−3591,3596−3597,3599−3605,
3610−3621,3624,3628,3641,3646−3648,
3650−3656,3664,3667−3692,3696,3698,
3701,3706,3715−3719,3729−3731,
3734−3739,3743,3747−3748,3753,
3756−3758,3762−3769,3775−3777

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1563
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

28484K6104 F A320 3782−3783,3791−3798,3804−3805,

3812−3813,3821,3825−3827,3833,3837,
3843,3848,3852−3855,3859,3863,
3870−3875,3883,3887,3898,3908,3915,
3919,3929,3935,3939,3943,3954

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1564
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

28484K6104 G A320 1112−1114,1134,1141,1148,1171,1210,

1224,1264,1268,1286,1294−1298,
1310−1314,1330,1357,1361,1422,1532,
1542,1561,1639,1721,1889,1906,1911,
1942,1954,1961−1965,1973,1981,2003,
2022,2034−2036,2046,2049−2061,
2068−2073,2079,2085−2090,2094,
2112−2114,2130,2133,2135,2139,2142,
2148,2153,2155,2162,2171−2173,
2182−2183,2189,2199,2212,2219−2221,
2227,2235−2239,2244,2252,2257,
2274−2275,2291−2292,2297−2299,
2316−2322,2329,2334,2338,2343−2345,
2354−2356,2361,2395−2397,2401,2413,
2423,2428,2437,2443−2445,2451−2459,
2475−2478,2484,2493−2502,2506,2511,
2515−2517,2522,2526,2531−2533,
2537−2539,2562,2569,2573−2576,
2584−2587,2591−2594,2600,2604−2609,
2616−2619,2626−2627,2637,2642,
2651−2654,2658,2663−2665,2670,2674,
2680,2685,2689,2695−2696,2701−2703,
2708,2714−2719,2731,2740−2743,2747,
2753,2758,2766−2775,2778,2787−2792,
2796,2800,2808,2817−2824,2830,
2834−2835,2840,2844−2846,2851−2856,
2861−2865,2874,2877,2883,2899,
2908−2917,2922,2928,2934−2937,
2941−2943,2950,2958−2960,2966−2968,
2973−2975,2980,2984−2986,2990−2991,
2993−2994,2998,3004−3006,3010−3012,
3016,3021,3025−3027,3031,3037,3042,
3048−3050,3055−3056,3060,3068,
3086−3089,3093,3097−3107,3113,
3121−3123,3131−3135,3147−3149,3153,
3155,3158−3160,3162,3167−3170,
3183−3189,3192,3196−3197,3205−3210,
3215,3219−3221,3224−3227,3230,
3234−3236,3239,3242−3244,3256−3259,
3264,3268−3275,3282,3286,3289−3291,
3296−3299,3303−3312,3316,3323,3327,
3330−3341,3349,3353,3357−3359,
3365−3370,3374,3378−3379,3383,
3386−3389,3392−3394,3398,3402−3408,
3414,3418,3422,3427,3431−3437,3440,
3448−3449,3453−3461,3465,3472,3474,
3477,3480−3481,3483,3485−3487,3489,
3495−3497,3503−3510,3514,3516,
3521−3524,3528,3536−3538,3541−3543,
3547−3549,3553,3558−3559,3567−3570,
3576−3591,3596−3597,3599−3605,
3611−3621,3624,3628,3641,3646−3648,
3650−3656,3664,3667−3692,3696,3698,
3701,3706,3715−3719,3729−3731,
3734−3739,3743,3747−3748,3753,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1565
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

28484K6104 G A320 3756−3758,3762−3769,3775−3777,

3782−3783,3791−3798,3804−3805,3809,
3812−3813,3821,3825−3827,3833,3837,
3843,3848,3852−3855,3859,3863,
3870−3875,3883,3887,3896−3900,3904,
3907,3909−3910,3913−3919,3922,3925,
3929−3931,3935−3946,3949,3953,
3959−3967,3971,3974−3975,3979−3988,
3991−4030,4033−4053,4057−4064,
4068−4070,4079−4090,4095−4106,
4110−4115,4118,4120−4122,4126−4130,
4135−4140,4144−4149,4153−4159,
4161−4162,4167−4172,4175−4183,
4186−4193,4196−4197,4202−4210,
4214−4220,4225−4229,4232−4235,
4239−4243,4245,4247−4248,4250−4264,
4267−4269,4272,4276−4304,4307,
4309−4312,4316−4317,4321−4322,
4324−4330,4333−4343,4345−4346,
4348−4350,4354−4365,4367−4370,
4375−4381,4384−4386,4390,4392,4396,
4398−4399,4401−4415,4421−4431,
4433−4438,4440,4443−4445,4447−4450,
4456−4463,4466−4475,4477−4484,
4486−4491,4493−4497,4502−4508,
4510−4515,4518−4519,4521,4524−4527,
4531−4535,4537−4541,4547−4548,4550,
4552−4562,4565−4571,4573−4575,4580,
4582−4584,4587−4593,4595−4596,4599,
4601−4610,4613−4616,4619−4620,4623,
4627,4630−4633,4636−4646,4652−4655,
4658−4659,4664−4668,4671,4674−4677,
4680,4685−4688,4690,4694−4696,
4699−4711,4714,4718−4723,4726−4733,
4739−4740,4743−4757,4760−4765,4769,
4772−4789,4793−4794,4797−4814,4816,
4818−4821,4825−4833,4836,4840−4852,
4854−4891,4894−4895,4897−4903,
4905−4920,4922−4933,4936−4942,
4944−4951,4954−4970,4973,4977−5000,
5002,5004−5020,5022−5024,5027−5036,
5039−5058,5061−5064,5067−5068,
5070−5073,5076−5084,5089−5094,5096,
5102−5107,5109,5111−5112,5114,
5116−5120,5122,5127,5129,5132,
5135−5138,5140,5143−5147,5149−5150,
5153−5156,5159−5161,5166,5168,
5171−5175,5179−5182,5185−5191,
5195−5196,5200−5201,5203,5207

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1566
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

28484K6104 H A320 1112−1114,1134,1141,1148,1171,1210,

1224,1264,1268,1286,1294−1298,
1310−1314,1330,1357,1361,1422,1532,
1542,1561,1639,1721,1889,1906,1911,
1942,1954,1961−1965,1973,1981,2003,
2022,2034−2036,2046,2049−2061,
2068−2073,2079,2085−2090,2094,
2112−2114,2130,2135,2139,2142,2148,
2153,2155,2162,2171−2173,2182−2183,
2189,2199,2212,2219−2221,2227−2229,
2235−2239,2244,2252,2257,2274−2275,
2291−2292,2297−2299,2316−2322,2329,
2334,2338,2343−2345,2354−2356,2361,
2395−2397,2401−2403,2413,2423,2428,
2437,2443−2445,2451−2459,2475−2478,
2484,2493−2502,2506,2511,2515−2517,
2522,2526,2531−2533,2537−2539,2562,
2569,2573−2576,2584−2587,2591−2594,
2600,2604−2609,2616−2620,2626−2627,
2637,2642,2651−2654,2658,2663−2665,
2670,2674,2680,2685,2689,2695−2696,
2701−2703,2708,2714−2719,2731,
2740−2743,2747,2753,2758,2766−2775,
2778,2787−2792,2796,2800,2808,
2817−2824,2830,2834−2835,2840,
2844−2846,2851−2856,2861−2865,2874,
2877,2883,2899,2908−2917,2922,2928,
2934−2937,2941−2943,2950,2958−2960,
2966−2968,2973−2975,2980,2984−2986,
2990−2991,2993−2994,2998,3004−3006,
3010−3012,3016,3021,3025−3027,3031,
3037,3042,3048−3050,3055−3056,3060,
3068,3086−3089,3093,3097−3107,3113,
3121−3123,3131−3135,3147−3149,3153,
3155,3158−3160,3162,3167−3170,
3183−3189,3192,3196−3197,3205−3210,
3215,3219−3221,3224−3227,3230,
3234−3236,3239,3242−3244,3256−3259,
3264,3268−3275,3282,3286,3289−3291,
3296−3299,3303−3312,3316,3323,3327,
3330−3341,3349,3353,3357−3359,
3365−3370,3374,3378−3379,3383,
3386−3389,3392−3394,3398,3402−3408,
3414,3418,3422,3427,3431−3437,3440,
3448−3449,3453−3461,3465,3472,3474,
3477,3480−3481,3483,3485−3487,3489,
3495−3497,3503−3510,3514,3516,
3521−3524,3528,3536−3538,3541−3543,
3547−3549,3553,3558−3559,3567−3570,
3576−3591,3596−3597,3599−3605,
3610−3621,3624,3628,3641,3646−3648,
3650−3656,3664,3667−3692,3696,3698,
3701,3706,3715−3719,3729−3731,
3734−3739,3743,3747−3748,3753,
3756−3758,3762−3769,3775−3777,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1567
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

28484K6104 H A320 3782−3783,3791−3798,3804−3805,3809,

3812−3813,3821,3825−3827,3833,3837,
3843,3848,3852−3855,3859,3863,
3870−3875,3883,3887,3896−3900,3904,
3907,3909−3910,3913−3919,3922,
3925,3929−3931,3935−3946,3949,3953,
3959−3967,3971,3974−3975,3979−3988,
3991−4030,4033−4053,4057−4064,
4068−4070,4079−4090,4095−4106,
4110−4115,4118,4120−4122,4126−4130,
4135−4140,4144−4149,4153−4159,
4161−4162,4167−4172,4175−4183,
4186−4193,4196−4197,4202−4210,
4214−4220,4225−4229,4232−4235,
4239−4243,4245,4247−4248,4250−4264,
4267−4269,4272,4276−4304,4307,
4309−4312,4316−4317,4321−4322,
4324−4330,4333−4343,4345−4346,
4348−4350,4354−4365,4367−4370,
4375−4381,4384−4386,4390,4392,4396,
4398−4399,4401−4415,4421−4431,
4433−4438,4440,4443−4445,4447−4450,
4456−4463,4466−4475,4477−4484,
4486−4491,4493−4497,4502−4508,
4510−4515,4518−4519,4521,4524−4527,
4531−4535,4537−4541,4547−4548,4550,
4552−4562,4565−4571,4573−4575,4580,
4582−4584,4587−4593,4595−4596,4599,
4601−4610,4613−4616,4619−4620,4623,
4627,4630−4633,4636−4646,4652−4655,
4658−4659,4664−4668,4671,4674−4677,
4680,4685−4688,4690,4694−4696,
4699−4711,4714,4718−4723,4726−4733,
4739−4740,4743−4757,4760−4765,4769,
4772−4789,4793−4794,4797−4814,4816,
4818−4821,4825−4833,4836,4840−4852,
4854−4891,4894−4895,4897−4903,
4905−4920,4922−4933,4936−4942,
4944−4951,4954−4970,4973,4977−5000,
5002,5004−5020,5022−5024,5027−5036,
5039−5058,5061−5064,5067−5068,
5070−5073,5076−5094,5096,5100,
5102−5106,5108,5110−5114,5116−5122,
5127,5129−5138,5140−5141,5143−5147,
5149−5163,5166,5168−5175,5179−5182,
5185−5195,5198−5203,5206−5207,
5211−5212,5214−5215,5217−5221,
5223−5225,5228,5230−5232,5236−5238,
5243−5262,5264−5268,5289−5291

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1568
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

28484K6104 J A320 1112−1114,1134,1141,1148,1171,1210,

1224,1264,1268,1286,1294−1298,
1310−1314,1330,1357,1361,1422,1532,
1542,1561,1639,1721,1889,1906,1911,
1942,1954,1961−1965,1973,1981,2003,
2022,2034−2036,2046,2049−2061,
2068−2073,2079,2085−2090,2094,
2112−2114,2130,2135,2139,2142,2148,
2153,2155,2162,2171−2173,2182−2183,
2189,2199,2212,2219−2221,2227−2229,
2235−2239,2244,2252,2257,2274−2275,
2291−2292,2297−2299,2316−2322,2329,
2334,2338,2343−2345,2354−2356,2361,
2395−2397,2401−2403,2413,2423,2428,
2437,2443−2445,2451−2459,2475−2478,
2484,2493−2502,2506,2511,2515−2517,
2522,2526,2531−2533,2537−2539,2562,
2569,2573−2576,2584−2587,2591−2594,
2600,2604−2609,2616−2620,2626−2627,
2637,2642,2651−2654,2658,2663−2665,
2670,2674,2680,2685,2689,2695−2696,
2701−2703,2708,2714−2719,2731,
2740−2743,2747,2753,2758,2766−2775,
2778,2787−2792,2796,2800,2808,
2817−2824,2830,2834−2835,2840,
2844−2846,2851−2856,2861−2865,2874,
2877,2883,2899,2908−2917,2922,2928,
2934−2937,2941−2943,2950,2958−2960,
2966−2968,2973−2975,2980,2984−2986,
2990−2991,2993−2994,2998,3004−3006,
3010−3012,3016,3021,3025−3027,3031,
3037,3042,3048−3050,3055−3056,3060,
3068,3086−3089,3093,3097−3107,3113,
3121−3123,3131−3135,3147−3149,3153,
3155,3158−3160,3162,3167−3170,
3183−3189,3192,3196−3197,3205−3210,
3215,3219−3221,3224−3227,3230,
3234−3236,3239,3242−3244,3256−3259,
3264,3268−3275,3282,3286,3289−3291,
3296−3299,3303−3312,3316,3323,3327,
3330−3341,3349,3353,3357−3359,
3365−3370,3374,3378−3379,3383,
3386−3389,3392−3394,3398,3402−3408,
3414,3418,3422,3427,3431−3437,3440,
3448−3449,3453−3461,3465,3472,3474,
3477,3480−3481,3483,3485−3487,3489,
3495−3497,3503−3510,3514,3516,
3521−3524,3528,3536−3538,3541−3543,
3547−3549,3553,3558−3559,3567−3570,
3576−3591,3596−3597,3599−3605,
3610−3621,3624,3628,3641,3646−3648,
3650−3656,3664,3667−3692,3696,3698,
3701,3706,3715−3719,3729−3731,
3734−3739,3743,3747−3748,3753,
3756−3758,3762−3769,3775−3777,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1569
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

28484K6104 J A320 3782−3783,3791−3798,3804−3805,3809,

3812−3813,3821,3825−3827,3833,3837,
3843,3848,3852−3855,3859,3863,
3870−3875,3883,3887,3896−3900,3904,
3907,3909−3910,3913−3919,3922,3925,
3929−3931,3935−3946,3949,3953,
3959−3967,3971,3974−3975,3979−3988,
3991−4030,4033−4053,4057−4064,
4068−4070,4079−4090,4095−4106,
4110−4115,4118,4120−4122,4126−4130,
4135−4140,4144−4149,4153−4159,
4161−4162,4167−4172,4175−4183,
4186−4193,4196−4197,4202−4210,
4214−4220,4225−4229,4232−4235,
4239−4243,4245,4247−4248,4250−4264,
4267−4269,4272,4276−4304,4307,
4309−4312,4316−4317,4321−4322,
4324−4330,4333−4343,4345−4346,
4348−4350,4354−4365,4367−4370,
4375−4381,4384−4386,4390,4392,4396,
4398−4399,4401−4415,4421−4431,
4433−4438,4440,4443−4445,4447−4450,
4456−4463,4466−4475,4477−4484,
4486−4491,4493−4497,4502−4508,
4510−4515,4518−4519,4521,4524−4527,
4531−4535,4537−4541,4547−4548,4550,
4552−4562,4565−4571,4573−4575,4580,
4582−4584,4587−4593,4595−4596,4599,
4601−4610,4613−4616,4619−4620,4623,
4627,4630−4633,4636−4646,4652−4655,
4658−4659,4664−4668,4671,4674−4677,
4680,4685−4688,4690,4694−4696,
4699−4711,4714,4718−4723,4726−4733,
4739−4740,4743−4757,4760−4765,4769,
4772−4789,4793−4794,4797−4814,4816,
4818−4821,4825−4833,4836,4840−4852,
4854−4891,4894−4895,4897−4903,
4905−4920,4922−4933,4936−4942,
4944−4951,4954−4970,4973,4977−5000,
5002,5004−5020,5022−5024,5027−5036,
5039−5058,5061−5064,5067−5068,
5070−5073,5076−5094,5096,5100,
5102−5106,5108,5110−5114,5116−5122,
5127,5129−5138,5140−5141,5143−5147,
5149−5166,5168−5176,5179−5183,
5185−5195,5198−5203,5206−5207,
5211−5212,5214−5221,5223−5228,
5230−5232,5236−5238,5242−5262,
5264−5301,5304−5311,5313−5315,
5318−5323,5325−5341,5344−5347,
5351−5363,5365,5369−5399,5403−5405,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1570
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

28484K6104 J A320 5410−5416,5419−5420,5423−5442,

5446−5452,5454−5463,5466−5473,
5476−5482,5484,5487−5492,5494−5499,
5502−5517,5520−5521,5524−5525,
5527−5532,5537,5540−5547,5550−5553,
5556−5557,5560−5564,5566−5568,5571,
5574−5577,5579,5589,5592−5598,
5600−5602,5605,5611,5619−5620,
5622−5625,5627−5630,5632,5635,
5638−5639,5641,5643−5645,5651−5652,
5656−5658,5661−5665,5669−5672,
5679−5682

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1571
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

28484K6104 K A320 1112−1114,1134,1141,1148,1171,1210,

1224,1264,1268,1286,1294−1298,
1310−1314,1330,1357,1361,1422,1532,
1542,1561,1639,1721,1889,1906,1911,
1942,1954,1961−1965,1973,1981,2003,
2022,2034−2036,2046,2049−2061,
2068−2073,2079,2085−2090,2094,
2112−2114,2130,2135,2139,2142,2148,
2153,2155,2162,2171−2173,2182−2183,
2189,2199,2212,2219−2221,2227−2229,
2235−2239,2244,2252,2257,2274−2275,
2291−2292,2297−2299,2316−2322,2329,
2334,2338,2343−2345,2354−2356,2361,
2395−2397,2401−2403,2413,2423,2428,
2437,2443−2445,2451−2459,2475−2478,
2484,2493−2502,2506,2511,2515−2517,
2522,2526,2531−2533,2537−2539,2562,
2569,2573−2576,2584−2587,2591−2594,
2600,2604−2609,2616−2620,2626−2627,
2637,2642,2651−2654,2658,2663−2665,
2670,2674,2680,2685,2689,2695−2696,
2701−2703,2708,2714−2719,2731,
2740−2743,2747,2753,2758,2766−2775,
2778,2787−2792,2796,2800,2808,
2817−2824,2830,2834−2835,2840,
2844−2846,2851−2856,2861−2865,2874,
2877,2883,2899,2908−2917,2922,2928,
2934−2937,2941−2943,2950,2958−2960,
2966−2968,2973−2975,2980,2984−2986,
2990−2991,2993−2994,2998,3004−3006,
3010−3012,3016,3021,3025−3027,3031,
3037,3042,3048−3050,3055−3056,3060,
3068,3086−3089,3093,3097−3107,3113,
3121−3123,3131−3135,3147−3149,3153,
3155,3158−3160,3162,3167−3170,
3183−3189,3192,3196−3197,3205−3210,
3215,3219−3221,3224−3227,3230,
3234−3236,3239,3242−3244,3256−3259,
3264,3268−3275,3282,3286,3289−3291,
3296−3299,3303−3312,3316,3323,3327,
3330−3341,3349,3353,3357−3359,
3365−3370,3374,3378−3379,3383,
3386−3389,3392−3394,3398,3402−3408,
3414,3418,3422,3427,3431−3437,3440,
3448−3449,3453−3461,3465,3472,3474,
3477,3480−3481,3483,3485−3487,3489,
3495−3497,3503−3510,3514,3516,
3521−3524,3528,3536−3538,3541−3543,
3547−3549,3553,3558−3559,3567−3570,
3576−3591,3596−3597,3599−3605,
3610−3621,3624,3628,3641,3646−3648,
3650−3656,3664,3667−3692,3696,3698,
3701,3706,3715−3719,3729−3731,
3734−3739,3743,3747−3748,3753,
3756−3758,3762−3769,3775−3777,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1572
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

28484K6104 K A320 3782−3783,3791−3798,3804−3805,3809,

3812−3813,3821,3825−3827,3833,3837,
3843,3848,3852−3855,3859,3863,
3870−3875,3883,3887,3896−3900,3904,
3907,3909−3910,3913−3919,3922,3925,
3929−3931,3935−3946,3949,3953,
3959−3967,3971,3974−3975,3979−3988,
3991−4030,4033−4053,4057−4064,
4068−4070,4079−4090,4095−4106,
4110−4115,4118,4120−4122,4126−4130,
4135−4140,4144−4149,4153−4159,
4161−4162,4167−4172,4175−4183,
4186−4193,4196−4197,4202−4210,
4214−4220,4225−4229,4232−4235,
4239−4243,4245,4247−4248,4250−4264,
4267−4269,4272,4276−4304,4307,
4309−4312,4316−4317,4321−4322,
4324−4330,4333−4343,4345−4346,
4348−4350,4354−4365,4367−4370,
4375−4381,4384−4386,4390,4392,4396,
4398−4399,4401−4415,4421−4431,
4433−4438,4440,4443−4445,4447−4450,
4456−4463,4466−4475,4477−4484,
4486−4491,4493−4497,4502−4508,
4510−4515,4518−4519,4521,4524−4527,
4531−4535,4537−4541,4547−4548,4550,
4552−4562,4565−4571,4573−4575,4580,
4582−4584,4587−4593,4595−4596,4599,
4601−4610,4613−4616,4619−4620,4623,
4627,4630−4633,4636−4646,4652−4655,
4658−4659,4664−4668,4671,4674−4677,
4680,4685−4688,4690,4694−4696,
4699−4711,4714,4718−4723,4726−4733,
4739−4740,4743−4757,4760−4765,4769,
4772−4789,4793−4794,4797−4814,4816,
4818−4821,4825−4833,4836,4840−4852,
4854−4891,4894−4895,4897−4903,
4905−4920,4922−4933,4936−4942,
4944−4951,4954−4970,4973,4977−5000,
5002,5004−5020,5022−5024,5027−5036,
5039−5058,5061−5064,5067−5068,
5070−5073,5076−5094,5096,5100,
5102−5106,5108,5110−5114,5116−5122,
5127,5129−5138,5140−5141,5143−5147,
5149−5166,5168−5176,5179−5183,
5185−5195,5198−5203,5206−5207,
5211−5212,5214−5221,5223−5228,
5230−5232,5236−5238,5242−5262,
5264−5301,5304−5311,5313−5315,
5318−5323,5325−5341,5344−5347,
5351−5363,5365,5369−5399,5403−5405,
5410−5416,5419−5420,5423−5442,
5446−5452,5454−5463,5466−5473,
5476−5482,5484,5487−5492,5494−5499,
5502−5517,5520−5521,5524−5525,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1573
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

28484K6104 K A320 5527−5532,5537,5540−5547,5550−5553,

5556−5557,5560−5564,5566−5568,5571,
5574−5577,5579,5589,5592−5598,
5600−5602,5605,5611,5619−5620,
5622−5625,5627−5630,5632,5635,
5638−5639,5641,5643−5645,5651−5652,
5656−5658,5661−5665,5669−5672,
5679−5682

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1574
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

28484K6104 L A320 1112−1114,1134,1141,1148,1171,1210,

1224,1264,1268,1286,1294−1298,
1310−1314,1330,1357,1361,1422,1532,
1542,1561,1639,1721,1889,1906,1911,
1942,1954,1961−1965,1973,1981,2003,
2022,2034−2036,2046,2049−2061,
2068−2073,2079,2085−2090,2094,
2112−2114,2130,2135,2139,2142,2148,
2153,2155,2162,2171−2173,2182−2183,
21+D2489,2199,2212,2219−2221,
2227−2229,2235−2239,2244,2252,2257,
2274−2275,2291−2292,2297−2299,
2316−2322,2329,2334,2338,2343−2345,
2354−2356,2361,2395−2397,2401−2403,
2413,2423,2428,2437,2443−2445,
2451−2459,2475−2478,2484,2493−2502,
2506,2511,2515−2517,2522,2526,
2531−2533,2537−2539,2562,2569,
2573−2576,2584−2587,2591−2594,2600,
2604−2609,2616−2620,2626−2627,2637,
2642,2651−2654,2658+D11,2663−2665,
2670,2674,2680,2685,2689,2695−2696,
2701−2703,2708,2714−2719,2731,
2740−2743,2747,2753,2758,2766−2775,
2778,2787−2792,2796,2800,2808,
2817−2824,2830,2834−2835,2840,
2844−2846,2851−2856,2861−2865,2874,
2877,2883,2899,2908−2917,2922,2928,
2934−2937,2941−2943,2950,2958−2960,
2966−2968,2973−2975,2980,2984−2986,
2990−2991,2993−2994,2998,3004−3006,
3010−3012,3016,3021,3025−3027,3031,
3037,3042,3048−3050,3055−3056,3060,
3068,3086−3089,3093,3097−3107,3113,
3121−3123,3131−3135,3147−3149,3153,
3155,3158−3160,3162,3167−3170,
3183−3189,3192,3196−3197,3205−3210,
3215,3219−3221,3224−3227,3230,
3234−3236,3239,3242−3244,3256−3259,
3264,3268−3275,3282,3286,3289−3291,
3296−3299,3303−3312,3316,3323,3327,
3330−3341,3349,3353,3357−3359,
3365−3370,3374,3378−3379,3383,
3386−3389,3392−3394,3398,3402−3408,
3414,3418,3422,3427,3431−3437,3440,
3448−3449,3453−3461,3465,3472,3474,
3477,3480−3481,3483,3485−3487,3489,
3495−3497,3503−3510,3514,3516,
3521−3524,3528,3536−3538,3541−3543,
3547−3549,3553,3558−3559,3567−3570,
3576−3591,3596−3597,3599−3605,
3610−3621,3624,3628,3641,3646−3648,
3650−3656,3664,3667−3692,3696,3698,
3701,3706,3715−3719,3729−3731,
3734−3739,3743,3747−3748,3753,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1575
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

28484K6104 L A320 3756−3758,3762−3769,3775−3777,

3782−3783,3791−3798,3804−3805,3809,
3812−3813,3821,3825−3827,3833,3837,
3843,3848,3852−3855,3859,3863,
3870−3875,3883,3887,3896−3900,3904,
3907,3909−3910,3913−3919,3922,3925,
3929−3931,3935−3946,3949,3953,
3959−3967,3971,3974−3975,3979−3988,
3991−4030,4033−4053,4057−4064,
4068−4070,4079−4090,4095−4106,
4110−4115,4118,4120−4122,4126−4130,
4135−4140,4144−4149,4153−4159,
4161−4162,4167−4172,4175−4183,
4186−4193,4196−4197,4202−4210,
4214−4220,4225−4229,4232−4235,
4239−4243,4245,4247−4248,4250−4264,
4267−4269,4272,4276−4304,4307,
4309−4312,4316−4317,4321−4322,
4324−4330,4333−4343,4345−4346,
4348−4350,4354−4365,4367−4370,
4375−4381,4384−4386,4390,4392,4396,
4398−4399,4401−4415,4421−4431,
4433−4438,4440,4443−4445,4447−4450,
4456−4463,4466−4475,4477−4484,
4486−4491,4493−4497,4502−4508,
4510−4515,4518−4519,4521,4524−4527,
4531−4535,4537−4541,4547−4548,4550,
4552−4562,4565−4571,4573−4575,4580,
4582−4584,4587−4593,4595−4596,4599,
4601−4610,4613−4616,4619−4620,4623,
4627,4630−4633,4636−4646,4652−4655,
4658−4659,4664−4668,4671,4674−4677,
4680,4685−4688,4690,4694−4696,
4699−4711,4714,4718−4723,4726−4733,
4739−4740,4743−4757,4760−4765,4769,
4772−4789,4793−4794,4797−4814,4816,
4818−4821,4825−4833,4836,4840−4852,
4854−4891,4894−4895,4897−4903,
4905−4920,4922−4933,4936−4942,
4944−4951,4954−4970,4973,4977−5000,
5002,5004−5020,5022−5024,5027−5036,
5039−5058,5061−5064,5067−5068,
5070−5073,5076−5094,5096−5100,
5102−5106,5108,5110−5114,5116−5122,
5127,5129−5138,5140−5141,5143−5147,
5149−5166,5168−5176,5179−5183,
5185−5195,5198−5203,5206−5207,
5211−5212,5214−5221,5223−5228,
5230−5232,5236−5238,5242−5262,
5264−5301,5304−5311,5313−5315,
5318−5323,5325−5341,5344−5347,
5351−5363,5365,5369−5399,5403−5405,
5410−5416,5419−5420,5423−5442,
5446−5452,5454−5473,5476−5482,5484,
5487−5492,5494−5499,5502−5517,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1576
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

28484K6104 L A320 5520−5525,5527−5532,5537,5540−5547,

5550−5553,5556−5557,5560−5564,
5566−5568,5571,5574−5577,5579,5589,
5592−5602,5605,5611−5612,5618−5619,
5622−5632,5635−5641,5645−5653,
5656−5658,5661−5665,5668−5672,
5675−5676,5679−5685,5687−5691,
5693−5706,5710−5713,5716−5722,
5724−5727,5730−5732,5735−5746,5750,
5754−5762,5766−5780,5785,5793−5799,
5802−5814,5816−5817,5819,5822−5844,
5846−5853,5857−5858,5861−5869,5871,
5875−5878,5880,5885,5888−5889,
5892−5897,5900−5901,5905,5908−5923,
5927,5930−5935,5945,5951−5952,5957,
5962

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1577
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

28484K6104 M A320 1112−1114,1134,1141,1148,1171,1210,

1224,1264,1268,1286,1294−1298,
1310−1314,1330,1357,1361,1422,1532,
1542,1561,1639,1721,1889,1906,1911,
1942,1954,1961−1965,1973,1981,2003,
2022,2034−2036,2046,2049−2061,
2068−2073,2079,2085−2090,2094,
2112−2114,2130,2135,2139,2142,2148,
2153,2155,2162,2171−2173,2182−2183,
21+D2489,2199,2212,2219−2221,
2227−2229,2235−2239,2244,2252,2257,
2274−2275,2291−2292,2297−2299,
2316−2322,2329,2334,2338,2343−2345,
2354−2356,2361,2395−2397,2401−2403,
2413,2423,2428,2437,2443−2445,
2451−2459,2475−2478,2484,2493−2502,
2506,2511,2515−2517,2522,2526,
2531−2533,2537−2539,2562,2569,
2573−2576,2584−2587,2591−2594,2600,
2604−2609,2616−2620,2626−2627,2637,
2642,2651−2654,2658+D11,2663−2665,
2670,2674,2680,2685,2689,2695−2696,
2701−2703,2708,2714−2719,2731,
2740−2743,2747,2753,2758,2766−2775,
2778,2787−2792,2796,2800,2808,
2817−2824,2830,2834−2835,2840,
2844−2846,2851−2856,2861−2865,2874,
2877,2883,2899,2908−2917,2922,2928,
2934−2937,2941−2943,2950,2958−2960,
2966−2968,2973−2975,2980,2984−2986,
2990−2991,2993−2994,2998,3004−3006,
3010−3012,3016,3021,3025−3027,3031,
3037,3042,3048−3050,3055−3056,3060,
3068,3086−3089,3093,3097−3107,3113,
3121−3123,3131−3135,3147−3149,3153,
3155,3158−3160,3162,3167−3170,
3183−3189,3192,3196−3197,3205−3210,
3215,3219−3221,3224−3227,3230,
3234−3236,3239,3242−3244,3256−3259,
3264,3268−3275,3282,3286,3289−3291,
3296−3299,3303−3312,3316,3323,3327,
3330−3341,3349,3353,3357−3359,
3365−3370,3374,3378−3379,3383,
3386−3389,3392−3394,3398,3402−3408,
3414,3418,3422,3427,3431−3437,3440,
3448−3449,3453−3461,3465,3472,3474,
3477,3480−3481,3483,3485−3487,3489,
3495−3497,3503−3510,3514,3516,
3521−3524,3528,3536−3538,3541−3543,
3547−3549,3553,3558−3559,3567−3570,
3576−3591,3596−3597,3599−3605,
3610−3621,3624,3628,3641,3646−3648,
3650−3656,3664,3667−3692,3696,3698,
3701,3706,3715−3719,3729−3731,
3734−3739,3743,3747−3748,3753,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1578
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

28484K6104 M A320 3756−3758,3762−3769,3775−3777,

3782−3783,3791−3798,3804−3805,3809,
3812−3813,3821,3825−3827,3833,3837,
3843,3848,3852−3855,3859,3863,
3870−3875,3883,3887,3896−3900,3904,
3907,3909−3910,3913−3919,3922,3925,
3929−3931,3935−3946,3949,3953,
3959−3967,3971,3974−3975,3979−3988,
3991−4030,4033−4053,4057−4064,
4068−4070,4079−4090,4095−4106,
4110−4115,4118,4120−4122,4126−4130,
4135−4140,4144−4149,4153−4159,
4161−4162,4167−4172,4175−4183,
4186−4193,4196−4197,4202−4210,
4214−4220,4225−4229,4232−4235,
4239−4243,4245,4247−4248,4250−4264,
4267−4269,4272,4276−4304,4307,
4309−4312,4316−4317,4321−4322,
4324−4330,4333−4343,4345−4346,
4348−4350,4354−4365,4367−4370,
4375−4381,4384−4386,4390,4392,4396,
4398−4399,4401−4415,4421−4431,
4433−4438,4440,4443−4445,4447−4450,
4456−4463,4466−4475,4477−4484,
4486−4491,4493−4497,4502−4508,
4510−4515,4518−4519,4521,4524−4527,
4531−4535,4537−4541,4547−4548,4550,
4552−4562,4565−4571,4573−4575,4580,
4582−4584,4587−4593,4595−4596,4599,
4601−4610,4613−4616,4619−4620,4623,
4627,4630−4633,4636−4646,4652−4655,
4658−4659,4664−4668,4671,4674−4677,
4680,4685−4688,4690,4694−4696,
4699−4711,4714,4718−4723,4726−4733,
4739−4740,4743−4757,4760−4765,4769,
4772−4789,4793−4794,4797−4814,4816,
4818−4821,4825−4833,4836,4840−4852,
4854−4891,4894−4895,4897−4903,
4905−4920,4922−4933,4936−4942,
4944−4951,4954−4970,4973,4977−5000,
5002,5004−5020,5022−5024,5027−5036,
5039−5058,5061−5064,5067−5068,
5070−5073,5076−5094,5096−5100,
5102−5106,5108,5110−5114,5116−5122,
5127,5129−5138,5140−5141,5143−5147,
5149−5166,5168−5176,5179−5183,
5185−5195,5198−5203,5206−5207,
5211−5212,5214−5221,5223−5228,
5230−5232,5236−5238,5242−5262,
5264−5301,5304−5311,5313−5315,
5318−5323,5325−5341,5344−5347,
5351−5363,5365,5369−5399,5403−5405,
5410−5416,5419−5420,5423−5442,
5446−5452,5454−5473,5476−5482,5484,
5487−5492,5494−5499,5502−5517,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1579
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

28484K6104 M A320 5520−5525,5527−5532,5537,5540−5547,

5550−5553,5556−5557,5560−5564,
5566−5568,5571,5574−5577,5579,5589,
5592−5602,5605,5611−5612,5618−5619,
5622−5632,5635−5641,5645−5653,
5656−5658,5661−5665,5668−5672,
5675−5676,5679−5685,5687−5691,
5693−5706,5710−5713,5716−5722,
5724−5727,5730−5732,5735−5746,5750,
5754−5762,5766−5780,5785,5793−5799,
5802−5814,5816−5817,5819,5822−5844,
5846−5853,5857−5858,5861−5869,5871,
5875−5878,5880,5885,5888−5889,
5892−5897,5900−5901,5905,5908−5923,
5927,5930−5935,5945,5951−5952,5957,
5962

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1580
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

28484K6104 N A320 1112−1114,1134,1141,1148,1171,1210,

1224,1264,1268,1286,1294−1298,
1310−1314,1330,1357,1361,1422,1532,
1542,1561,1639,1721,1889,1906,1911,
1942,1954,1961−1965,1973,1981,2003,
2022,2034−2036,2046,2049−2061,
2068−2073,2079,2085−2090,2094,
2112−2114,2130,2135,2139,2142,2148,
2153,2155,2162,2171−2173,2182−2183,
2189,2199,2212,2219−2221,2227−2229,
2235−2239,2244,2252,2257,2274−2275,
2291−2292,2297−2299,2316−2322,2329,
2334,2338,2343−2345,2354−2356,2361,
2395−2397,2401−2403,2413,2423,2428,
2437,2443−2445,2451−2459,2475−2478,
2484,2493−2502,2506,2511,2515−2517,
2522,2526,2531−2533,2537−2539,2562,
2569,2573−2576,2584−2587,2591−2594,
2600,2604−2609,2616−2620,2626−2627,
2637,2642,2651−2654,2658,2663−2665,
2670,2674,2680,2685,2689,2695−2696,
2701−2703,2708,2714−2719,2731,
2740−2743,2747,2753,2758,2766−2775,
2778,2787−2792,2796,2800,2808,
2817−2824,2830,2834−2835,2840,
2844−2846,2851−2856,2861−2865,2874,
2877,2883,2899,2908−2917,2922,2928,
2934−2937,2941−2943,2950,2958−2960,
2966−2968,2973−2975,2980,2984−2986,
2990−2991,2993−2994,2998,3004−3006,
3010−3012,3016,3021,3025−3027,3031,
3037,3042,3048−3050,3055−3056,3060,
3068,3086−3089,3093,3097−3107,3113,
3121−3123,3131−3135,3147−3149,3153,
3155,3158−3160,3162,3167−3170,
3183−3189,3192,3196−3197,3205−3210,
3215,3219−3221,3224−3227,3230,
3234−3236,3239,3242−3244,3256−3259,
3264,3268−3275,3282,3286,3289−3291,
3296−3299,3303−3312,3316,3323,3327,
3330−3341,3349,3353,3357−3359,
3365−3370,3374,3378−3379,3383,
3386−3389,3392−3394,3398,3402−3408,
3414,3418,3422,3427,3431−3437,3440,
3448−3449,3453−3461,3465,3472,3474,
3477,3480−3481,3483,3485−3487,3489,
3495−3497,3503−3510,3514,3516,
3521−3524,3528,3536−3538,3541−3543,
3547−3549,3553,3558−3559,3567−3570,
3576−3591,3596−3597,3599−3605,
3610−3621,3624,3628,3641,3646−3648,
3650−3656,3664,3667−3692,3696,3698,
3701,3706,3715−3719,3729−3731,
3734−3739,3743,3747−3748,3753,
3756−3758,3762−3769,3775−3777,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1581
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

28484K6104 N A320 3782−3783,3791−3798,3804−3805,3809,

3812−3813,3821,3825−3827,3833,3837,
3843,3848,3852−3855,3859,3863,
3870−3875,3883,3887,3896−3900,3904,
3907,3909−3910,3913−3919,3922,3925,
3929−3931,3935−3946,3949,3953,
3959−3967,3971,3974−3975,3979−3988,
3991−4030,4033−4053,4057−4064,
4068−4070,4079−4090,4095−4106,
4110−4115,4118,4120−4122,4126−4130,
4135−4140,4144−4149,4153−4159,
4161−4162,4167−4172,4175−4183,
4186−4193,4196−4197,4202−4210,
4214−4220,4225−4229,4232−4235,
4239−4243,4245,4247−4248,4250−4264,
4267−4269,4272,4276−4304,4307,
4309−4312,4316−4317,4321−4322,
4324−4330,4333−4343,4345−4346,
4348−4350,4354−4365,4367−4370,
4375−4381,4384−4386,4390,4392,4396,
4398−4399,4401−4415,4421−4431,
4433−4438,4440,4443−4445,4447−4450,
4456−4463,4466−4475,4477−4484,
4486−4491,4493−4497,4502−4508,
4510−4515,4518−4519,4521,4524−4527,
4531−4535,4537−4541,4547−4548,4550,
4552−4562,4565−4571,4573−4575,4580,
4582−4584,4587−4593,4595−4596,4599,
4601−4610,4613−4616,4619−4620,4623,
4627,4630−4633,4636−4646,4652−4655,
4658−4659,4664−4668,4671,4674−4677,
4680,4685−4688,4690,4694−4696,
4699−4711,4714,4718−4723,4726−4733,
4739−4740,4743−4757,4760−4765,4769,
4772−4789,4793−4794,4797−4814,4816,
4818−4821,4825−4833,4836,4840−4852,
4854−4891,4894−4895,4897−4903,
4905−4920,4922−4933,4936−4942,
4944−4951,4954−4970,4973,4977−5000,
5002,5004−5020,5022−5024,5027−5036,
5039−5058,5061−5064,5067−5068,
5070−5073,5076−5094,5096−5100,
5102−5106,5108,5110−5114,5116−5122,
5127,5129−5138,5140−5141,5143−5147,
5149−5166,5168−5176,5179−5183,
5185−5195,5198−5203,5206−5207,
5211−5212,5214−5221,5223−5228,
5230−5232,5236−5238,5242−5262,
5264−5301,5304−5311,5313−5315,
5318−5323,5325−5341,5344−5347,
5351−5363,5365,5369−5399,5403−5405,
5410−5416,5419−5420,5423−5442,
5446−5452,5454−5473,5476−5482,5484,
5487−5492,5494−5499,5502−5517,
5520−5525,5527−5532,5537,5540−5547,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1582
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

28484K6104 N A320 5550−5553,5556−5557,5560−5564,

5566−5568,5571,5574−5577,5579,5589,
5592−5602,5605,5611−5612,5618−5619,
5622−5632,5635−5641,5645−5653,
5656−5658,5661−5665,5668−5672,
5675−5676,5679−5685,5687−5691,
5693−5706,5708−5713,5716−5722,
5724−5727,5730−5732,5735−5746,5750,
5754−5762,5766−5780,5785,5793−5799,
5802−5814,5816−5817,5819,5822−5844,
5846−5853,5857−5858,5861−5869,5871,
5874−5878,5880,5885−5901,5903−5918,
5923,5927−5928,5930−5948,5951−5957,
5962−5964,5971−5973,5976,5979−5981,
5985,5990−5993,5996−6000,6004−6008,
6011−6014,6017,6021,6023,6032−6037

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1583
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

28484K6104 P A320 1112,1114,1134,1141,1148,1171,1210,

1224,1264,1268,1286,1294,1296,1298,
1310,1312,1314,1330,1357,1361,1422,
1532,1542,1561,1639,1721,1889,1906,
1911,1942,1954,1961,1964−1965,1973,
1981,2003,2022,2034,2036,2046,2049,
2054,2056,2058,2061,2068,2070,2073,
2079,2085,2088,2090,2094,2112,2114,
2130,2135,2139,2142,2148,2153,2155,
2162,2171,2173,2182−2183,2189,2199,
2212,2219,2221,2227,2229,2235,
2238−2239,2244,2252,2257,2274−2275,
2291−2292,2297,2299,2316,2322,2329,
2334,2338,2343,2345,2354,2356,2361,
2395,2397,2401,2403,2413,2423,2428,
2437,2443,2445,2451,2453,2455,2457,
2459,2475,2478,2484,2493,2496,2498,
2500,2502,2506,2511,2515,2517,2522,
2526,2531,2533,2537,2539,2562,2569,
2573,2576,2584,2587,2591,2594,2600,
2604,2606,2608−2609,2616,2619−2620,
2626−2627,2637,2642,2651,2654,2658,
2663,2665,2670,2674,2680,2685,2689,
2695−2696,2701,2703,2708,2714,2717,
2719,2731,2740,2743,2747,2753,2758,
2766,2768,2770,2772,2775,2778,2787,
2789,2791−2792,2796,2800,2808,2817,
2820,2822,2824,2830,2834−2835,2840,
2844,2846,2851,2853,2855−2856,2861,
2863,2865,2874,2877,2883,2899,
2908−2909,2911,2914−2915,2917,2922,
2928,2934,2937,2941,2943,2950,2958,
2960,2966,2968,2973,2975,2980,2984,
2986,2990−2991,2993−2994,2998,3004,
3006,3010,3012,3016,3021,3025,3027,
3031,3037,3042,3048,3050,3055−3056,
3060,3068,3086−3087,3089,3093,3097,
3099,3101,3103,3105,3107,3113,
3120−3121,3123,3131−3132,3135,
3147−3149,3153,3155,3158−3160,3162,
3167,3170,3183,3185,3187,3189,3192,
3196−3197,3205−3206,3208,3210,3215,
3219,3221,3224,3227,3230,3234,3236,
3239,3242,3244,3256−3257,3259,3264,
3268,3270,3272−3273,3275,3282,3286,
3289,3291,3296,3299,3303−3304,3306,
3308,3310,3312,3316,3323,3327,3330,
3332,3335,3337−3338,3341,3349,3353,
3357,3359,3365−3366,3368,3370,3374,
3378−3379,3383,3386,3389,3392,3394,
3398,3402,3404,3408,3414,3418,3422,
3427,3431,3433,3435,3437,3440,
3448−3449,3453,3455−3457,3460−3461,
3465,3472,3474,3477,3480−3481,3483,
3485−3487,3489,3495−3497,3503,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1584
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

28484K6104 P A320 3505−3506,3508,3510,3514,3516,3521,

3524,3528,3536,3538,3541,3543,3547,
3549,3553,3558−3559,3567−3568,3570,
3576−3577,3579,3581−3582,3591,
3596−3597,3599,3601,3603,3605,
3610−3611,3613,3616,3618,3621,3624,
3628,3641,3646,3648,3650,3652,3654,
3656,3664,3667−3668,3670,3672,3674,
3676−3677,3679,3690,3692,3696,3698,
3701,3706,3715−3716,3718−3719,3729,
3731,3734,3736,3739,3743,3747−3748,
3753,3756,3758,3762,3765,3767,3769,
3775−3777,3782−3783,3791,3793,3795,
3797−3798,3804−3805,3809,3812−3813,
3821,3825,3827,3833,3837,3843,3848,
3852,3855,3859,3863,3870−3871,3873,
3875,3883,3887,3896,3898,3900,3904,
3907,3909−3910,3913,3915,3917,3919,
3922,3925,3929,3931,3935,3937,3939,
3941,3943,3945−3946,3949,3953,3959,
3961,3963,3965,3967,3971,3974−3975,
3979−3980,3984,3986,3988,3991−3992,
3995,3997,3999,4001,4003,4006,4008,
4010−4015,4017,4019,4021,4023,
4026−4028,4030,4033−4035,4037,4043,
4046,4049,4051,4053,4057,4059,4061,
4063−4064,4068,4070,4079,4081,
4083−4084,4086,4088,4090,4095,
4097−4098,4100−4102,4104−4106,
4110−4111,4113,4115,4118,4120,4122,
4126,4128,4130,4135,4137,4139−4140,
4144−4147,4149,4153−4154,4156−4159,
4161−4162,4167−4168,4170,4172,
4175−4179,4181,4183,4186−4188,
4190−4191,4193,4196−4197,4202−4203,
4205−4208,4210,4214,4216,4218−4220,
4225−4226,4229,4232−4235,4239−4243,
4245,4247−4248,4250,4252−4253,4255,
4257,4260−4261,4263−4264,4267,4269,
4272,4276,4278−4279,4281,4284,4286,
4288−4291,4293−4298,4300,4302−4304,
4307,4309−4310,4312,4316−4317,
4321−4322,4324−4326,4328−4330,4333,
4335,4337,4339−4340,4342−4343,
4345−4346,4348−4350,4354−4357,4359,
4361−4365,4367−4368,4370,4375−4376,
4378−4379,4381,4384,4386,4390,4392,
4396,4398−4399,4401−4402,4404−4405,
4407−4409,4411−4415,4421,4423−4424,
4426,4429,4431,4433−4436,4438,4440,
4443,4445,4447−4450,4456−4460,
4462−4463,4466,4468−4469,4471,
4473−4475,4477−4484,4486−4491,4493,
4495−4497,4502,4504−4508,4510,
4512−4515,4518−4519,4521,4524−4527,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1585
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

28484K6104 P A320 4531−4533,4535,4537,4539−4541,

4547−4548,4550,4552−4559,4561−4562,
4565−4569,4571,4573−4575,4580,4582,
4584,4587−4589,4591−4593,4595−4596,
4599,4601−4604,4606,4608−4610,
4613−4616,4619−4620,4623,4627,
4630−4633,4636−4637,4639,4641−4642,
4644−4646,4652−4653,4655,4658−4659,
4664,4666,4668,4671,4674−4677,4680,
4685−4688,4690,4694,4696,4699−4702,
4704,4707−4709,4711,4714,4718,
4720−4723,4726−4727,4729−4730,4733,
4739−4740,4743,4745,4747−4752,4754,
4757,4760,4762−4763,4765,4769,4772,
4775−4777,4780,4782,4784,4786,4789,
4793−4794,4797−4800,4802−4810,
4812−4814,4816,4818,4820−4821,4825,
4827−4829,4831−4833,4836,4840,
4844−4845,4848−4849,4851−4852,
4854−4855,4857−4858,4860−4862,
4864−4870,4872,4874,4876−4877,
4879−4880,4882−4884,4886−4891,
4894−4895,4897,4899−4900,4902−4903,
4905−4909,4911−4915,4917−4920,4922,
4924,4926−4931,4933,4936−4939,
4941−4942,4944,4946−4948,4950−4951,
4954−4955,4958−4959,4961,4963−4965,
4967−4970,4973,4977−4991,4993,
4996−4997,4999−5000,5002,5004,
5006−5008,5010−5017,5019−5020,5022,
5024,5027,5029−5034,5036,5039,
5041−5042,5045−5048,5050−5053,
5055−5056,5058,5061−5064,5067−5068,
5070−5073,5076,5078,5080−5082,5084,
5086,5089−5094,5096,5098,5100,
5102−5104,5106,5108,5110−5114,
5116−5117,5120−5122,5127,5129,
5131−5132,5134−5138,5140−5141,
5143−5147,5149−5153,5155−5156,
5158−5159,5161−5163,5165−5166,5168,
5170−5172,5174−5176,5179,5181−5183,
5185,5187−5191,5194−5195,5198,
5200−5203,5206−5207,5211−5212,
5214−5218,5220−5221,5223−5226,5228,
5230−5232,5236,5238,5242−5243,
5245−5246,5248−5250,5252−5253,5255,
5258−5260,5262,5264,5266,5268,5270,
5272,5274,5276,5278,5281,5283,
5288−5291,5296,5298−5299,5301,
5304−5305,5307−5308,5310−5311,5313,
5315,5318−5320,5322−5323,5325−5326,
5329,5331,5333−5335,5337,5339,5341,
5344,5347,5351−5353,5355−5356,
5358−5363,5365,5369−5373,5375,
5378−5379,5381,5384,5386−5387,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1586
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

28484K6104 P A320 5390−5391,5393−5399,5403,5405,

5410−5411,5414−5416,5419−5420,5423,
5425−5426,5428−5431,5433−5434,
5436−5437,5440−5442,5446,5448−5449,
5452,5454−5455,5458,5460−5461,
5463−5464,5466,5468,5471−5473,
5476−5477,5479−5480,5482,5484,
5487−5489,5491−5492,5494,5496−5499,
5502−5503,5505−5508,5510−5512,
5520−5522,5524,5679−5680,5682−5683,
5685,5687−5688,5690−5691,5693−5695,
5697,5701−5703,5706,5708,5710−5713,
5716−5719,5721−5722,5724−5727,
5730−5732,5735,5737−5742,5744,5746,
5750,5754,5756−5757,5759−5760,5762,
5766,5769,5771−5773,5775−5778,5780,
5785,5793−5794,5796−5797,5799,5802,
5804−5807,5809,5811−5814,5816−5817,
5819,5822−5824,5828−5833,5835,5837,
5839−5841,5844,5846−5848,5850−5853,
5857−5858,5861−5864,5866−5867,5869,
5871,5874−5875,5877−5878,5880,5885,
5887−5889,5891−5894,5896−5898,
5900−5901,5903,5905−5906,5908,
5911−5912,5914−5915,5917−5918,5923,
5926−5928,5930−5931,5933−5935,5937,
5940,5942−5943,5945,5951−5952,5954,
5956−5957,5959,5962,5964,5971−5972,
5976−5977,5979,5981,5984,5986,5988,
5990,5992−5993,5996−5997,5999−6000,
6003−6004,6006−6008,6010−6012,
6014−6015,6018−6019,6021,6023,6025,
6030,6032−6034,6036,6041,6047−6048,
6050−6051,6054,6057,6061−6062,6064,
6069,6072−6073,6075−6076,6078,6080,
6082,6084,6088,6092,6095−6096,
6102−6103,6105−6107,6109−6113,
6117−6118,6120,6123−6125,6127−6128,
6136−6137,6139−6142,6145,6147,6149,
6151,6153,6158,6161,6164,6166,
6169−6170,6173,6176−6178,6180,6182,
6184,6187−6189,6192−6193,6197−6198,
6200,6202,6204,6206−6209,6212−6213,
6215−6218,6220,6223−6225,6228−6229,
6231,6234,6237,6239−6240,6242−6243,
6246−6248,6251,6254,6257−6260,6262,
6265,6267,6270,6274−6275,6278,
6280−6285,6287−6289,6292−6293,
6296−6297,6300−6302,6304,6306,6309,
6311,6315,6317,6321−6323,6325,6327,
6331−6333,6335−6336,6338,6340,6343,
6348,6356,6360−6361

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1587
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

28484K6104 Q A320 1112,1114,1134,1141,1148,1171,1210,

1224,1264,1268,1286,1294,1296,1298,
1310,1312,1314,1330,1357,1361,1422,
1532,1542,1561,1639,1721,1889,1906,
1911,1942,1954,1961,1964−1965,1973,
1981,2003,2022,2034,2036,2046,2049,
2054,2056,2058,2061,2068,2070,2073,
2079,2085,2088,2090,2094,2112,2114,
2130,2135,2139,2142,2148,2153,2155,
2162,2171,2173,2182−2183,2189,2199,
2212,2219,2221,2227,2229,2235,
2238−2239,2244,2252,2257,2274−2275,
2291−2292,2297,2299,2316,2322,2329,
2334,2338,2343,2345,2354,2356,2361,
2395,2397,2401,2403,2413,2423,2428,
2437,2443,2445,2451,2453,2455,2457,
2459,2475,2478,2484,2493,2496,2498,
2500,2502,2506,2511,2515,2517,2522,
2526,2531,2533,2537,2539,2562,2569,
2573,2576,2584,2587,2591,2594,2600,
2604,2606,2608−2609,2616,2619−2620,
2626−2627,2637,2642,2651,2654,2658,
2663,2665,2670,2674,2680,2685,2689,
2695−2696,2701,2703,2708,2714,2717,
2719,2731,2740,2743,2747,2753,2758,
2766,2768,2770,2772,2775,2778,2787,
2789,2791−2792,2796,2800,2808,2817,
2820,2822,2824,2830,2834−2835,2840,
2844,2846,2851,2853,2855−2856,2861,
2863,2865,2874,2877,2883,2899,
2908−2909,2911,2914−2915,2917,2922,
2928,2934,2937,2941,2943,2950,2958,
2960,2966,2968,2973,2975,2980,2984,
2986,2990−2991,2993−2994,2998,3004,
3006,3010,3012,3016,3021,3025,3027,
3031,3037,3042,3048,3050,3055−3056,
3060,3068,3086−3087,3089,3093,3097,
3099,3101,3103,3105,3107,3113,
3120−3121,3123,3131−3132,3135,
3147−3149,3153,3155,3158−3160,3162,
3167,3170,3183,3185,3187,3189,3192,
3196−3197,3205−3206,3208,3210,3215,
3219,3221,3224,3227,3230,3234,3236,
3239,3242,3244,3256−3257,3259,3264,
3268,3270,3272−3273,3275,3282,3286,
3289,3291,3296,3299,3303−3304,3306,
3308,3310,3312,3316,3323,3327,3330,
3332,3335,3337−3338,3341,3349,3353,
3357,3359,3365−3366,3368,3370,3374,
3378−3379,3383,3386,3389,3392,3394,
3398,3402,3404,3408,3414,3418,3422,
3427,3431,3433,3435,3437,3440,
3448−3449,3453,3455−3457,3460−3461,
3465,3472,3474,3477,3480−3481,3483,
3485−3487,3489,3495−3497,3503,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1588
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

28484K6104 Q A320 3505−3506,3508,3510,3514,3516,3521,

3524,3528,3536,3538,3541,3543,3547,
3549,3553,3558−3559,3567−3568,3570,
3576−3577,3579,3581−3582,3591,
3596−3597,3599,3601,3603,3605,
3610−3611,3613,3616,3618,3621,3624,
3628,3641,3646,3648,3650,3652,3654,
3656,3664,3667−3668,3670,3672,3674,
3676−3677,3679,3690,3692,3696,3698,
3701,3706,3715−3716,3718−3719,3729,
3731,3734,3736,3739,3743,3747−3748,
3753,3756,3758,3762,3765,3767,3769,
3775−3777,3782−3783,3791,3793,3795,
3797−3798,3804−3805,3809,3812−3813,
3821,3825,3827,3833,3837,3843,3848,
3852,3855,3859,3863,3870−3871,3873,
3875,3883,3887,3896,3898,3900,3904,
3907,3909−3910,3913,3915,3917,3919,
3922,3925,3929,3931,3935,3937,3939,
3941,3943,3945−3946,3949,3953,3959,
3961,3963,3965,3967,3971,3974−3975,
3979−3980,3984,3986,3988,3991−3992,
3995,3997,3999,4001,4003,4006,4008,
4010−4015,4017,4019,4021,4023,
4026−4028,4030,4033−4035,4037,4043,
4046,4049,4051,4053,4057,4059,4061,
4063−4064,4068,4070,4079,4081,
4083−4084,4086,4088,4090,4095,
4097−4098,4100−4102,4104−4106,
4110−4111,4113,4115,4118,4120,4122,
4126,4128,4130,4135,4137,4139−4140,
4144−4147,4149,4153−4154,4156−4159,
4161−4162,4167−4168,4170,4172,
4175−4179,4181,4183,4186−4188,
4190−4191,4193,4196−4197,4202−4203,
4205−4208,4210,4214,4216,4218−4220,
4225−4226,4229,4232−4235,4239−4243,
4245,4247−4248,4250,4252−4253,4255,
4257,4260−4261,4263−4264,4267,4269,
4272,4276,4278−4279,4281,4284,4286,
4288−4291,4293−4298,4300,4302−4304,
4307,4309−4310,4312,4316−4317,
4321−4322,4324−4326,4328−4330,4333,
4335,4337,4339−4340,4342−4343,
4345−4346,4348−4350,4354−4357,4359,
4361−4365,4367−4368,4370,4375−4376,
4378−4379,4381,4384,4386,4390,4392,
4396,4398−4399,4401−4402,4404−4405,
4407−4409,4411−4415,4421,4423−4424,
4426,4429,4431,4433−4436,4438,4440,
4443,4445,4447−4450,4456−4460,
4462−4463,4466,4468−4469,4471,
4473−4475,4477−4484,4486−4491,4493,
4495−4497,4502,4504−4508,4510,
4512−4515,4518−4519,4521,4524−4527,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1589
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

28484K6104 Q A320 4531−4533,4535,4537,4539−4541,

4547−4548,4550,4552−4559,4561−4562,
4565−4569,4571,4573−4575,4580,4582,
4584,4587−4589,4591−4593,4595−4596,
4599,4601−4604,4606,4608−4610,
4613−4616,4619−4620,4623,4627,
4630−4633,4636−4637,4639,4641−4642,
4644−4646,4652−4653,4655,4658−4659,
4664,4666,4668,4671,4674−4677,4680,
4685−4688,4690,4694,4696,4699−4702,
4704,4707−4709,4711,4714,4718,
4720−4723,4726−4727,4729−4730,4733,
4739−4740,4743,4745,4747−4752,4754,
4757,4760,4762−4763,4765,4769,4772,
4775−4777,4780,4782,4784,4786,4789,
4793−4794,4797−4800,4802−4810,
4812−4814,4816,4818,4820−4821,4825,
4827−4829,4831−4833,4836,4840,
4844−4845,4848−4849,4851−4852,
4854−4855,4857−4858,4860−4862,
4864−4870,4872,4874,4876−4877,
4879−4880,4882−4884,4886−4891,
4894−4895,4897,4899−4900,4902−4903,
4905−4909,4911−4915,4917−4920,4922,
4924,4926−4931,4933,4936−4939,
4941−4942,4944,4946−4948,4950−4951,
4954−4955,4958−4959,4961,4963−4965,
4967−4970,4973,4977−4991,4993,
4996−4997,4999−5000,5002,5004,
5006−5008,5010−5017,5019−5020,5022,
5024,5027,5029−5034,5036,5039,
5041−5042,5045−5048,5050−5053,
5055−5056,5058,5061−5064,5067−5068,
5070−5073,5076,5078,5080−5082,5084,
5086,5089−5094,5096,5098,5100,
5102−5104,5106,5108,5110−5114,
5116−5117,5120−5122,5127,5129,
5131−5132,5134−5138,5140−5141,
5143−5147,5149−5153,5155−5156,
5158−5159,5161−5163,5165−5166,5168,
5170−5172,5174−5176,5179,5181−5183,
5185,5187−5191,5194−5195,5198,
5200−5203,5206−5207,5211−5212,
5214−5218,5220−5221,5223−5226,5228,
5230−5232,5236,5238,5242−5243,
5245−5246,5248−5250,5252−5253,5255,
5258−5260,5262,5264,5266,5268,5270,
5272,5274,5276,5278,5281,5283,
5288−5291,5296,5298−5299,5301,
5304−5305,5307−5308,5310−5311,5313,
5315,5318−5320,5322−5323,5325−5326,
5329,5331,5333−5335,5337,5339,5341,
5344,5347,5351−5353,5355−5356,
5358−5363,5365,5369−5373,5375,
5378−5379,5381,5384,5386−5387,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1590
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

28484K6104 Q A320 5390−5391,5393−5399,5403,5405,

5410−5411,5414−5416,5419−5420,5423,
5425−5426,5428−5431,5433−5434,
5436−5437,5440−5442,5446,5448−5449,
5452,5454−5455,5458,5460−5461,
5463−5464,5466,5468,5471−5473,
5476−5477,5479−5480,5482,5484,
5487−5489,5491−5492,5494,5496−5499,
5502−5503,5505−5508,5510−5512,
5514−5517,5520−5522,5524−5525,5527,
5530−5532,5537,5540−5542,5544,5547,
5550−5553,5556−5557,5560−5562,5564,
5566,5568,5571,5574,5576−5577,5579,
5589,5592−5593,5595−5602,5605,
5611−5612,5618−5619,5622,5624−5632,
5635,5637−5641,5645−5646,5648−5649,
5651−5653,5656−5658,5661−5662,
5664−5665,5668−5669,5671−5672,
5675−5676,5679−5680,5682−5683,5685,
5687−5688,5690−5691,5693−5695,5697,
5701−5703,5706,5708,5710−5713,
5716−5719,5721−5722,5724−5727,
5730−5732,5735,5737−5742,5744,5746,
5750,5754,5756−5757,5759−5760,5762,
5766,5769,5771−5773,5775−5778,5780,
5785,5793−5794,5796−5797,5799,5802,
5804−5807,5809,5811−5814,5816−5817,
5819,5822−5824,5828−5833,5835,5837,
5839−5841,5844,5846−5848,5850−5853,
5857−5858,5861−5864,5866−5867,5869,
5871,5874−5875,5877−5878,5880,5885,
5887−5889,5891−5894,5896−5898,
5900−5901,5903,5905−5906,5908,
5911−5912,5914−5915,5917−5918,5923,
5926−5928,5930−5931,5933−5935,5937,
5940,5942−5943,5945,5951−5952,5954,
5956−5957,5959,5962,5964,5971−5972,
5976−5977,5979,5981,5984,5986,5988,
5990,5992−5993,5996−5997,5999−6000,
6003−6004,6006−6008,6010−6012,
6014−6015,6018−6019,6021,6023,6025,
6030,6032−6034,6036,6041,6047−6048,
6050−6051,6054,6057,6061−6062,6064,
6069,6072−6073,6075−6076,6078,6080,
6082,6084,6088,6092,6095−6096,
6102−6103,6105−6107,6109−6113,
6117−6118,6120,6123−6125,6127−6128,
6136−6137,6139−6142,6145,6147,6149,
6151,6153,6158,6161,6164,6166,
6169−6170,6173,6176−6178,6180,6182,
6184,6187−6189,6192−6193,6197−6198,
6200,6202,6204,6206−6209,6212−6213,
6215−6218,6220,6223−6225,6228−6229,
6231,6234,6237,6239−6240,6242−6243,
6246−6248,6251,6254,6257−6260,6262,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1591
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

28484K6104 Q A320 6265,6267,6270,6274−6275,6278,

6280−6285,6287−6289,6292−6293,
6296−6297,6300−6302,6304,6306,6309,
6311,6315,6317,6321−6323,6325,6327,
6331−6333,6335−6336,6338,6340,6343,
6348,6356,6360−6361

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1592
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

28484K6104 R A320 1112−1114,1134,1141,1148,1171,1210,

1224,1264,1268,1286,1294−1298,
1310−1314,1330,1357,1361,1422,1532,
1542,1561,1639,1721,1889,1906,1911,
1942,1954,1961−1965,1973,1981,2003,
2022,2034−2036,2046,2049−2061,
2068−2073,2079,2085−2090,2094,
2112−2114,2130,2135,2139,2142,2148,
2153,2155,2162,2171−2173,2182−2183,
2189,2199,2212,2219−2221,2227−2229,
2235−2239,2244,2252,2257,2274−2275,
2291−2292,2297−2299,2316−2322,2329,
2334,2338,2343−2345,2354−2356,2361,
2395−2397,2401−2403,2413,2423,2428,
2437,2443−2445,2451−2459,2475−2478,
2484,2493−2502,2506,2511,2515−2517,
2522,2526,2531−2533,2537−2539,2562,
2569,2573−2576,2584−2587,2591−2594,
2600,2604−2609,2616−2620,2626−2627,
2637,2642,2651−2654,2658,2663−2665,
2670,2674,2680,2685,2689,2695−2696,
2701−2703,2708,2714−2719,2731,
2740−2743,2747,2753,2758,2766−2775,
2778,2787−2792,2796,2800,2808,
2817−2824,2830,2834−2835,2840,
2844−2846,2851−2856,2861−2865,2874,
2877,2883,2899,2908−2917,2922,2928,
2934−2937,2941−2943,2950,2958−2960,
2966−2968,2973−2975,2980,2984−2986,
2990−2991,2993−2994,2998,3004−3006,
3010−3012,3016,3021,3025−3027,3031,
3037,3042,3048−3050,3055−3056,3060,
3068,3086−3089,3093,3097−3107,3113,
3121−3123,3131−3135,3147−3149,3153,
3155,3158−3160,3162,3167−3170,
3183−3189,3192,3196−3197,3205−3210,
3215,3219−3221,3224−3227,3230,
3234−3236,3239,3242−3244,3256−3259,
3264,3268−3275,3282,3286,3289−3291,
3296−3299,3303−3312,3316,3323,3327,
3330−3341,3349,3353,3357−3359,
3365−3370,3374,3378−3379,3383,
3386−3389,3392−3394,3398,3402−3408,
3414,3418,3422,3427,3431−3437,3440,
3448−3449,3453−3461,3465,3472,3474,
3477,3480−3481,3483,3485−3487,3489,
3495−3497,3503−3510,3514,3516,
3521−3524,3528,3536−3538,3541−3543,
3547−3549,3553,3558−3559,3567−3570,
3576−3591,3596−3597,3599−3605,
3610−3621,3624,3628,3641,3646−3648,
3650−3656,3664,3667−3692,3696,3698,
3701,3706,3715−3719,3729−3731,
3734−3739,3743,3747−3748,3753,
3756−3758,3762−3769,3775−3777,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1593
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

28484K6104 R A320 3782−3783,3791−3798,3804−3805,3809,

3812−3813,3821,3825−3827,3833,3837,
3843,3848,3852−3855,3859,3863,
3870−3875,3883,3887,3896−3900,3904,
3907,3909−3910,3913−3919,3922,3925,
3929−3931,3935−3946,3949,3953,
3959−3967,3971,3974−3975,3979−3988,
3991−4030,4033−4053,4057−4064,
4068−4070,4079−4090,4095−4106,
4110−4115,4118,4120−4122,4126−4130,
4135−4140,4144−4149,4153−4159,
4161−4162,4167−4172,4175−4183,
4186−4193,4196−4197,4202−4210,
4214−4220,4225−4229,4232−4235,
4239−4243,4245,4247−4248,4250−4264,
4267−4269,4272,4276−4304,4307,
4309−4312,4316−4317,4321−4322,
4324−4330,4333−4343,4345−4346,
4348−4350,4354−4365,4367−4370,
4375−4381,4384−4386,4390,4392,4396,
4398−4399,4401−4415,4421−4431,
4433−4438,4440,4443−4445,4447−4450,
4456−4463,4466−4475,4477−4484,
4486−4491,4493−4497,4502−4508,
4510−4515,4518−4519,4521,4524−4527,
4531−4535,4537−4541,4547−4548,4550,
4552−4562,4565−4571,4573−4575,4580,
4582−4584,4587−4593,4595−4596,4599,
4601−4610,4613−4616,4619−4620,4623,
4627,4630−4633,4636−4646,4652−4655,
4658−4659,4664−4668,4671,4674−4677,
4680,4685−4688,4690,4694−4696,
4699−4711,4714,4718−4723,4726−4733,
4739−4740,4743−4757,4760−4765,4769,
4772−4789,4793−4794,4797−4814,4816,
4818−4821,4825−4833,4836,4840−4852,
4854−4891,4894−4895,4897−4903,
4905−4920,4922−4933,4936−4942,
4944−4951,4954−4970,4973,4977−5000,
5002,5004−5020,5022−5024,5027−5036,
5039−5058,5061−5064,5067−5068,
5070−5073,5076−5094,5096−5100,
5102−5106,5108,5110−5114,5116−5122,
5127,5129−5138,5140−5141,5143−5147,
5149−5166,5168−5176,5179−5183,
5185−5195,5198−5203,5206−5207,
5211−5212,5214−5221,5223−5228,
5230−5232,5236−5238,5242−5262,
5264−5301,5304−5311,5313−5315,
5318−5323,5325−5341,5344−5347,
5351−5363,5365,5369−5399,5403−5405,
5410−5416,5419−5420,5423−5442,
5446−5452,5454−5473,5476−5482,5484,
5487−5492,5494−5499,5502−5517,
5520−5525,5527−5532,5537,5540−5547,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 FebPage01/1594
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

28484K6104 R A320 5550−5553,5556−5557,5560−5564,

5566−5568,5571,5574−5577,5579,5589,
5592−5602,5605,5611−5612,5618−5619,
5622−5632,5635−5641,5645−5653,
5656−5658,5661−5665,5668−5672,
5675−5676,5679−5685,5687−5691,
5693−5706,5708−5713,5716−5722,
5724−5727,5730−5732,5735−5746,5750,
5754−5762,5766−5780,5785,5793−5799,
5802−5814,5816−5817,5819,5822−5844,
5846−5853,5857−5858,5861−5869,5871,
5874−5878,5880,5885−5901,5903−5918,
5923,5927−5928,5930−5948,5951−5957,
5962−5964,5971−5973,5976,5979−5981,
5985,5990−5993
5996−6000,6004−6008,6010−6015,
6017−6019,6021,6023,6025,6030−6037,
6041,6047−6048,6050−6051,6054,6057,
6061,6062,6064,6057,6061−6062,6064,
6069,6072−6082,6084,6088,6092,6095,
6102−6103,6105−6107,6109−6118,6120,
6123−6125,6127−6128,6136−6137,
6139−6142,6145,6147,6151,6153,6158,
6161,6169−6170,6173,6176−6180,
6182−6184,6187−6189,6192−6193,
6197−6198,6200,6202,6204,6206−6209,
6212−6213,6215−6218,6220,6223−6225,
6228−6229,6231,6234,6237,6239−6240,
6242,6265,6267,6270,6274−6275,6278,
6280−6285,6287−6289,6292−6293,
6296−6297,6300−6302,6304,6306,6309,
6311,6315,6317−6318,6320−6323,6325,
6327,6329,6331−6333,6335−6336,
6339−6341,6343,6345,6347,6348,6350,
6353,6355−6358,6361−6362,6365,6367,
6369−6370,6372−6375,6378−6379,6381,
6383,6386,6388,6392,6397,6402−6403,
6405,6408,6410−6413,6416−6418,
6421−6424,6426,6428,6430−6431,6434,
6436,6439,6441−6442,6444−6445,6447,
6449,6452,6455,6457−6458,6460,
6462−6463,6465−6467,6470−6471,6474,
6476,6478,6480−6481,6485−6487,6492,
6494,6497−6498,6500,6502−6503,
6505−6507,6509,6513,6516,6518,
6521−6522,6524−6525,6528−6530,6533,
6536,6555,6557

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 MayPage01/1595
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

28484K6104 S A320 6561, 6562, 6564−6566, 6568, 6570,

6572, 6574, 6577, 6578, 6580,
6582−6584, 6586, 6587, 6580,
6582−6584, 6586, 6587, 6591,
6596−6598, 6600, 6602, 6604−6606,
6608, 6610, 6612, 6616, 6619,
6622, 6624, 6626, 6628, 6633−6637,
6640, 6645, 6646, 6648, 6651,
6654, 6659, 6661, 6664−6666, 6668,
6669, 6671, 6674, 6676, 6677,
6679−6681, 6686, 6688, 6689, 6692,
6694, 6695, 6697, 6702, 6704−6706,
6708, 6710, 6712−6714, 6717, 6721,
6722, 6728, 6730, 6732, 6733,
6732, 6733, 6735, 6737−6739,
6741−6743, 6746, 6749,t6750,
6752−6755, 6759

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 MayPage01/1596
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

28484K6104 T A320 1112, 1114, 1134, 1141, 1148,

1171, 1210, 1224, 1264, 1268,
1286, 1294, 1296, 1298, 1310,
1312, 1314, 1330, 1357, 1361,
1422, 1532, 1542, 1561, 1639,
1721, 1889, 1906, 1911, 1942,
1954, 1961, 1964−1965, 1973, 1981,
2003, 2022, 2034, 2036, 2046,
2049, 2054, 2056, 2058, 2061,
2068, 2070, 2073, 2079, 2085,
2088, 2090, 2094, 2112, 2114,
2130, 2135, 2139, 2142, 2148,
2153, 2155, 2162, 2171, 2173,
2182−2183, 2189, 2199, 2212, 2219,
2221, 2227, 2229, 2235, 2238−2239,
2244, 2252, 2257, 2274−2275,
2291−2292, 2297, 2299, 2316, 2322,
2329, 2334, 2338, 2343, 2345,
2354, 2356, 2361, 2395, 2397,
2401, 2403, 2413, 2423, 2428,
2437, 2443, 2445, 2451, 2453,
2455, 2457, 2459, 2475, 2478,
2484, 2493, 2496, 2498, 2500,
2502, 2506, 2511, 2515, 2517,
2522, 2526, 2531, 2533, 2537,
2539, 2562, 2569, 2573, 2576,
2584, 2587, 2591, 2594, 2600,
2604, 2606, 2608−2609, 2616,
2619−2620, 2626−2627, 2637, 2642,
2651, 2654, 2658, 2663, 2665,
2670, 2674, 2680, 2685, 2689,
2695−2696, 2701, 2703, 2708, 2714,
2717, 2719, 2731, 2740, 2743,
2747,2740, 2743, 2747, 2753, 2758,
2766, 2768, 2770, 2772, 2775,
2778, 2787, 2789, 2791−2792, 2796,
2800, 2808, 2817, 2820, 2822,
2824, 2830, 2834−2835, 2840, 2844,
2846, 2851, 2853, 2855−2856, 2861,
2863, 2865, 2874, 2877, 2883,2899,
2908−2909, 2911, 2914−2915, 2917,
2922, 2928, 2934, 2937, 2941,
2943, 2950, 2958, 2960, 2966,
2968, 2973, 2975, 2980, 2984,
2986, 2990−2991, 2993−2994, 2998,
3004, 3006, 3010, 3012, 3016,
3021, 3025, 3027, 3031, 3037,
3042, 3048, 3050, 3055−3056, 3060,
3068, 3086−3087, 3089, 3093, 3097,
3099, 3101, 3103, 3105, 3107,
3113, 3120−3121, 3123, 3131−3132,
3135, 3147−3149, 3153, 3155,
3158−3160, 3162, 3167, 3170, 3183,
3185, 3187, 3189, 3192, 3196−3197,
3205−3206, 3208, 3210, 3215, 3219,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 MayPage01/1597
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

28484K6104 T A320 3221, 3224, 3227, 3230, 3234,

3236, 3239, 3242, 3244, 3256−3257,
3259, 3264, 3268, 3270, 3272−3273,
3275, 3282, 3286, 3289, 3291,
3296, 3299, 3303−3304, 3306, 3308,
3310, 3312, 3316, 3323, 3327,
3330, 3332, 3335, 3337−3338, 3341,
3349, 3353, 3357, 3359, 3365−3366,
3368, 3370, 3374, 3378−3379, 3383,
3386, 3389, 3392, 3394, 3398,
3402, 3404, 3408, 3414, 3418,
3422, 3427, 3431, 3433, 3435,
3437, 3440, 3448−3449, 3453,
3455−3457, 3460−3461, 3465, 3472,
3474, 3477, 3480−3481, 3483,
3485−3487, 3489, 3495−3497, 3503,
3505−3506, 3508, 3510, 3514, 3516,
3521, 3524, 3528, 3536, 3538,
3541, 3543, 3547, 3549, 3553,
3558−3559, 3567−3568, 3570,
3576−3577, 3579, 3581−3582, 3591,
3596−3597, 3599, 3601, 3603, 3605,
3610−3611, 3613, 3616, 3618, 3621,
3624, 3628, 3641, 3646, 3648,
3650, 3652, 3654, 3656, 3664,
3667−3668, 3670, 3672, 3674,
3676−3677, 3679, 3690, 3692, 3696,
3698, 3701, 3706, 3715−3716,
3718−3719, 3729, 3731, 3734, 3736,
3739, 3743, 3747−3748, 3753, 3756,
3758, 3762, 3765, 3767, 3769,
3775−3777, 3782−3783, 3791, 3793,
3795, 3797−3798, 3804−3805, 3809,
3812−3813, 3821, 3825, 3827, 3833,
3837, 3843, 3848, 3852, 3855,
3859, 3863, 3870−3871, 3873, 3875,
3883, 3887, 3896, 3898, 3900,
3904, 3907, 3909−3910, 3913, 3915,
3917, 3919, 3922, 3925, 3929,
3931, 3935, 3937, 3939, 3941,
3943, 3945−3946, 3949, 3953, 3959,
3961, 3963, 3965, 3967, 3971,
3974−3975, 3979−3980, 3984,
3986,3988, 3991−3992, 3995, 3997,
3999, 4001, 4003, 4006, 4008,
4010−4015, 4017, 4019, 4021, 4023,
4026−4028, 4030, 4033−4035, 4037,
4043, 4046, 4049, 4051, 4053,
4057, 4059, 4061, 4063−4064, 4068,
4070, 4079, 4081, 4083−4084, 4086,
4088, 4090, 4095, 4097−4098,
4100−4102, 4104−4106, 4110−4111,
4113, 4115, 4118, 4120, 4122,
4126, 4128, 4130, 4135, 4137,
4139−4140, 4144−4147, 4149,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 MayPage01/1598
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

28484K6104 T A320 4153−4154, 4156−4159, 4161−4162,

4167−4168, 4170, 4172, 4175−4179,
4181, 4183, 4186−4188, 4190−4191,
4193, 4196−4197, 4202−4203,
4205−4208, 4210, 4214, 4216,
4218−4220, 4225−4226, 4229,
4232−4235, 4239−4243, 4245,
4247−4248, 4250, 4252−4253, 4255,
4257, 4260−4261, 4263−4264, 4267,
4269, 4272, 4276, 4278−4279, 4281,
4284, 4286, 4288−4291, 4293−4298,
4300, 4302−4304, 4307, 4309−4310,
4312, 4316−4317, 4321−4322,
4324−4326, 4328−4330, 4333, 4335,
4337, 4339−4340, 4342−4343,
4345−4346, 4348−4350, 4354−4357,
4359, 4361−4365, 4367−4368, 4370,
4375−4376, 4378−4379, 4381, 4384,
4386, 4390, 4392, 4396, 4398−4399,
4401−4402, 4404−4405, 4407−4409,
4411−4415, 4421, 4423−4424, 4426,
4429, 4431, 4433−4436, 4438, 4440,
4443, 4445, 4447−4450, 4456−4460,
4462−4463, 4466, 4468−4469, 4471,
4473−4475, 4477−4484, 4486−4491,
4493, 4495−4497, 4502, 4504−4508,
4510, 4512−4515, 4518−4519, 4521,
4524−4527, 4531−4533, 4535, 4537,
4539−4541,4547−4548, 4550,
4552−4559, 4561−4562, 4565−4569,
4571, 4573−4575, 4580, 4582, 4584,
4587−4589, 4591−4593, 4595−4596,
4599, 4601−4604, 4606, 4608−4610,
4613−4616, 4619−4620, 4623, 4627,
4630−4633, 4636−4637, 4639,
4641−4642, 4644−4646, 4652−4653,
4655, 4658−4659, 4664, 4666, 4668,
4671, 4674−4677, 4680, 4685−4688,
4690, 4694, 4696, 4699−4702, 4704,
4707−4709, 4711, 4714, 4718,
4720−4723, 4726−4727, 4729−4730,
4733, 4739−4740, 4743, 4745,
4747−4752, 4754, 4757, 4760,
4762−4763, 4765, 4769, 4772,
4775−4777, 4780, 4782, 4784, 4786,
4789, 4793−4794, 4797−4800,
4802−4810, 4812−4814, 4816, 4818,
4820−4821, 4825, 4827−4829,
4831−4833, 4836, 4840, 4844−4845,
4848−4849, 4851−4852, 4854−4855,
4857−4858, 4860−4862, 4864−4870,
4872, 4874, 4876−4877, 4879−4880,
4882−4884, 4886−4891, 4894−4895,
4897, 4899−4900, 4902−4903,
4905−4909, 4911−4915, 4917−4920,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 MayPage01/15A1
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

28484K6104 T A320 4922, 4924, 4926−4931, 4933,

4936−4939, 4941−4942, 4944,
4946−4948, 4950−4951, 4954−4955,
4958−4959, 4961, 4963−4965,
4967−4970, 4973, 4977−4991, 4993,
4996−4997, 4999−5000, 5002, 5004,
5006−5008, 5010−5017, 5019−5020,
5022, 5024, 5027, 5029−5034, 5036,
5039, 5041−5042, 5045−5048,
5050−5053, 5055−5056, 5058,
5061−5064, 5067−5068, 5070−5073,
5076, 5078, 5080−5082, 5084, 5086,
5089−5094, 5096, 5098, 5100,
5102−5104, 5106, 5108, 5110−5114,
5116−5117, 5120−5122, 5127, 5129,
5131−5132, 5134−5138, 5140−5141,
5143−5147, 5149−5153, 5155−5156,
5158−5159, 5161−5163, 5165−5166,
5168, 5170−5172, 5174−5176, 5179,
5181−5183, 5185, 5187−5191,
5194−5195, 5198, 5200−5203,
5206−5207, 5211−5212, 5214−5218,
5220−5221, 5223−5226, 5228,
5230−5232, 5236, 5238, 5242−5243,
5245−5246, 5248−5250, 5252−5253,
5255, 5258−5260, 5262, 5264, 5266,
5268, 5270, 5272, 5274, 5276,
5278, 5281, 5283, 5288−5291, 5296,
5298−5299, 5301, 5304−5305,
5307−5308, 5310−5311, 5313, 5315,
5318−5320, 5322−5323, 5325−5326,
5329, 5331, 5333−5335, 5337, 5339,
5341, 5344, 5347, 5351−5353,
5355−5356, 5358−5363, 5365,
5369−5373, 5375, 5378−5379, 5381,
5384, 5386−5387, 5390−5391,
5393−5399, 5403, 5405, 5410−5411,
5414−5416, 5419−5420, 5423,
5425−5426, 5428−5431, 5433−5434,
5436−5437, 5440−5442, 5446,
5448−5449, 5452, 5454−5455, 5458,
5460−5461, 5463−5464, 5466, 5468,
5471−5473, 5476−5477, 5479−5480,
5482, 5484, 5487−5489, 5491−5492,
5494, 5496−5499, 5502−5503,
5505−5508, 5510−5512, 5520−5522,
5524, 5679−5680, 5682−5683, 5685,
5687−5688, 5690−5691, 5693−5695,
5697, 5701−5703, 5706, 5708,
5710−5713, 5716−5719, 5721−5722,
5724−5727, 5730−5732, 5735,
5737−5742, 5744, 5746, 5750, 5754,
5756−5757, 5759−5760, 5762, 5766,
5769, 5771−5773, 5775−5778, 5780,
5785, 5793−5794, 5796−5797, 5799,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 MayPage01/15A2
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

28484K6104 T A320 5802, 5804−5807, 5809, 5811−5814,

5816−5817, 5819, 5822−5824,
5828−5833, 5835, 5837, 5839−5841,
5844, 5846−5848, 5850−5853,
5857−5858, 5861−5864, 5866−5867,
5869, 5871, 5874−5875, 5877−5878,
5880, 5885, 5887−5889, 5891−5894,
5896−5898, 5900−5901, 5903,
5905−5906, 5908, 5911−5912,
5914−5915, 5917−5918, 5923,
5926−5928, 5930−5931, 5933−5935,
5937, 5940, 5942−5943, 5945,
5951−5952, 5954, 5956−5957, 5959,
5962, 5964, 5971−5972, 5976−5977,
5979, 5981, 5984, 5986, 5988,
5990, 5992−5993, 5996−5997,
5999−6000, 6003−6004, 6006−6008,
6010−6012, 6014−6015, 6018−6019,
6021, 6023, 6025, 6030, 6032−6034,
6036, 6041, 6047−6048, 6050−6051,
6054, 6057, 6061−6062, 6064, 6069,
6072−6073, 6075−6076, 6078, 6080,
6082, 6084, 6088, 6092, 6095−6096,
6102−6103, 6105−6107, 6109−6113,
6117−6118, 6120, 6123−6125,
6127−6128, 6136−6137, 6139−6142,
6145, 6147, 6149, 6151, 6153,
6158, 6161, 6164, 6166, 6169−6170,
6173, 6176−6178, 6180, 6182, 6184,
6187−6189, 6192−6193, 6197−6198,
6200, 6202, 6204, 6206−6209,
6212−6213, 6215−6218, 6220,
6223−6225, 6228−6229, 6231, 6234,
6237, 6239−6240, 6242−6243,
6246−6248, 6251, 6254, 6257−6260,
6262, 6265, 6267, 6270, 6274−6275,
6278, 6280−6285, 6287−6289,
6292−6293, 6296−6297, 6300−6302,
6304, 6306, 6309, 6311, 6315,
6317, 6321−6323, 6325, 6327,
6331−6333, 6335−6336, 6338, 6340,
6343, 6348, 6356, 6360−6361,
6561−6562, 6564−6566, 6568, 6570,
6572, 6574, 6577−6578, 6580,
6582−6584, 6586−6587, 6591,
6596−6598, 6600, 6602, 6604−6606,
6608, 6610, 6612, 6622, 6624,
6626, 6628, 6633−6637, 6640,
6645−6646, 6648, 6651, 6654, 6659,
6661, 6664−6666, 6668−6669, 6671,
6674, 6676−6677, 6679−6681, 6686,
6688−6689, 6692, 6694−6695, 6697,
6702,6704−6706, 6708, 6710,
6710−6714, 6717, 6721−6722, 6728,
6730, 6732−6733, 6735, 6737−6739,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 MayPage01/15A3
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

28484K6104 T A320 6741−6743, 6746, 6749−6750,

6752−6755, 6759
29998K2247 A320 0267,0270−0399
29998K2247 A A320 0267,0270−0638
29998K2701 A320 0267,0270−0639
29999K15376 A320 2896−5012
29999K15400 A320 1728−1755,1760−1777,1782,1787−1799,
1804,1809−1812,1816−1818,1825,1829,
1835−1842,1847−1856,1858,1861−1867,
1871−1874,1883−1888,1891−1898,
1900−9999

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 MayPage01/15A4
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

29999K15400 A A320 1728,1730,1732,1735−1736,1739,1741,

1744,1747,1749,1751,1754−1755,1760,
1762,1764,1767,1769,1771,1773,1775,
1777,1782,1787,1789,1792−1793,1797,
1799,1804,1809,1812,1816,1818,1825,
1829,1835,1838,1840,1842,1847,1849,
1852,1854,1856,1858,1861−1862,
1864−1865,1867,1871,1873−1874,1883,
1885,1888,1891−1892,1894−1896,1898,
1900,1902−1904,1906−1907,1909−1911,
1913−1915,1917−1918,1920,1922,1924,
1927,1929,1931,1933,1935,1937,1940,
1942,1944−1945,1948−1949,1951,1954,
1957−1958,1961,1964−1965,1968−1969,
1973,1975,1979,1981−38504,1983,198,
1989,1992−1993,1996,1998,2001,2003,
2006,2009,2011,2014,2016,2018,2020,
2022,2024,2027,2029,2031,2034,2036,
2038,2040,2042,2044,2046,2048−2049,
2054,2056,2058,2061,2063,2065,2068,
2070,2073,2075,2077,2079,2082,
2084−2085,2088,2090,2092,2094,2097,
2099,2102,2104,2106,2108,2112,2114,
2116,2118,2121,2123,2125,2128,2130,
2132−2169,2171,2173,2175,2177−2178,
2180,2182−2183,2185,2187,2189,2191,
2193,2195,2197,2199,2201,2204,
2206−2207,2210,2212,2215,2217,2219,
2221,2223,2225,2227,2229,2231,2233,
2235,2238−2239,2242,2244,2246,2248,
2250,2252,2254,2256−2257,2259,2272,
2274−2275,2278,2280,2282,2284,2286,
2288,2291−2292,2294,2297,2299,2301,
2307,2310,2312,2314,2316,2322,2325,
2327,2329,2331,2334,2336,2338,2340,
2343,2345,2347,2349,2352,2354,2356,
2359,2361,2364,2366,2368,2372,2374,
2376,2384,2386,2388,2390−2391,2393,
2395,2397,2399,2401,2403,2405,2407,
2409,2411,2413,2415,2417,2419,
2422−2423,2425,2428,2430,2432,2434,
2437,2439,2441,2443,2445,2447,2449,
2451,2453,2455,2457,2459,2461,2475,
2478−2479,2482,2484,2486,2489,2491,
2493,2496,2498,2500,2502,2504,2506,
2509,2511,2513,2515,2517,2520,2522,
2524,2526,2529,2531,2533,2535,2537,
2539−2540,2542,2562,2564,2566,2569,
2571,2573,2576−2577,2580,2583−2584,
2587,2589,2591,2594,2596,2598,2600,
2602,2604,2606,2608−2609,2612−2613,
2616,2619−2620,2623,2626−2627,2630,
2633,2635,2637,2640,2642,2645,2647,
2649,2651,2654,2656,2658,2661,2663,
2665,2668,2670−2671,2674,2676,2678,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 MayPage01/15A5
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

29999K15400 A A320 2680,2683,2685,2688−2689,2692,

2695−2696,2699,2701,2703,2705,2708,
2710,2712,2714,2717,2719,2721,
2724−2725,2728,2731−2732,2734,2737,
2740,2743,2745,2747,2749,2752−2753,
2755,2758,2760−2761,2764,2766,2768,
2770,2772,2775−2776,2778,2781,2783,
2785,2787,2789,2791−2792,2794,2796,
2798,2800,2802,2804,2807−2808,2810,
2814,2816−2817,2820,2822,2824,2826,
2828,2830,2832,2834−2835,2838,2840,
2842,2844,2846,2848,2851,2853,
2855−2856,2859,2861,2863,2865,2867,
2869,2871,2874−2875,2877,2880−2881,
2883,2885,2896,2899−2900,2902,2904,
2906,2908−2909,2911,2914−2915,2917,
2920,2922,2924,2926,2928,2930,2932,
2934,2937,2939,2941,2943−2945,2947,
2950,2952−2953,2956,2958,2960,2962,
2964,2966,2968,2970,2973,2975,2977,
2980,2982,2984,2986−2995,2998,3000,
3002,3004,3006,3008,3010,3012,3014,
3016,3018,3021,3023,3025,3027,3029,
3031,3033,3035,3037,3039−3040,3042,
3044,3047−3048,3050,3052,3055−3056,
3058,3060,3063−3064,3066,3068,
3071−3072,3074,3076,3079−3080,3083,
3086−3087,3089,3091,3093,3095,3097,
3099,3101,3103,3105,3107,3109,3111,
3113,3115,3117,3119−3121,3123,3125,
3127,3129,3131−3132,3135−3136,3138,
3140−3141,3143,3145,3147−3162,3164,
3166−3167,3170,3173−3174,3177−3178,
3180,3182−3183,3185,3187,3189−3190,
3192,3194,3196−3197,3199,3201,3203,
3205−3206,3208,3210−3211,3213,3215,
3218−3219,3221,3223−3224,3227−3228,
3230,3232,3234,3236−3237,3239−3240,
3242,3244,3246,3256−3257,3259,3261,
3263−3264,3266,3268,3270,3272−3273,
3275,3277−3278,3280,3282,3284,
3286−3287,3289,3291,3293,3295−3296,
3299,3301,3303−3304,3306,3308,3310,
3312−3314,3316,3318−3319,3321,3323,
3325,3327−3328,3330,3332,3335,
3337−3338,3341,3343,3345,3348−3349,
3351,3353−3354,3357,3359,3361−3362,
3365−3366,3368,3370,3373−3374,3376,
3378−3379,3381,3383−3384,3386,3389,
3391−3392,3394,3396,3398,3400,3402,
3404,3408−3410,3412,3414,3416,3418,
3420,3422−3423,3425,3427,3430−3431,
3433,3435,3437,3439−3440,3444,3446,
3448−3449,3451,3453,3455−3457,
3460−3461,3464−3465,3468,3470,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 MayPage01/15A6
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

29999K15400 A A320 3472−3490,3492,3494−3497,3499,

3501−3503,3505−3506,3508,3510−3511,
3514−3517,3519,3521,3524,3526,
3528−3529,3531−3532,3535−3536,3538,
3540−3541,3543,3545,3547,3549−3550,
3553−3554,3556,3558−3559,3562−3563,
3565,3567−3568,3570,3572,3574,
3576−3577,3579,3581−3582,3591,3594,
3596−3599,3601,3603,3605,3607,
3609−3611,3613,3616,3618,3621−3622,
3624,3626−3628,3630−3631,3640−3641,
3643−3644,3646,3648−3650,3652,3654,
3656,3658−3659,3662,3664,3666−3668,
3670,3672,3674,3676−3677,3679,3690,
3692−3693,3695−3699,3701,3703,
3706−3707,3709,3711,3713−3716,
3718−3719,3721,3723−3724,3726,3729,
3731−3732,3734,3736,3739,3741,3743,
3745,3747−3748,3750,3753,3755−3756,
3758,3760,3762,3765,3767,3769,3771,
3773,3775−3778,3780−3783,3785−3787,
3789,3791,3793,3795,3797−3798,3800,
3802,3804−3805,3807,3809,3811−3813,
3815,3817,3819,3821,3823,3825,3827,
3829,3831,3833,3835,3837,3840,3843,
3846,3848,3850,3852,3855,3857,3859,
3861,3863,3866,3868,3870−3871,3873,
3875,3877,3880,3882−3883,3885,3887,
3889,3891,3894,3896,3898,3900,3902,
3904,3906−3910,3912−3913,3915,3917,
3919,3921−3923,3925,3927,3929,3931,
3933,3935,3937,3939,3941,3943,
3945−3947,3949,3952−3954,3956,3959,
3961,3963,3965,3967−3968,3971−3972,
3974−3976,3978−3980,3984,3986,3988,
3990−3992,3995,3997,3999,4001,4003,
4006,4008,4010−4015,4017,4019,4021,
4023,4026−4028,4030,4032−4035,4037,
4043,4046,4049,4051,4053,4055,4057,
4059,4061,4063−4066,4068,4070,4072,
4075,4077,4079,4081,4083−4084,4086,
4088,4090,4092−4095,4097−4098,
4100−4102,4104−4106,4108−4111,4113,
4115,4117−4120,4122,4124,4126,4128,
4130,4133,4135,4137,4139−4140,
4143−4147,4149−4150,4152−4154,
4156−4162,4165,4167−4168,4170,4172,
4174−4179,4181,4183,4185−4188,
4190−4191,4193,4195−4197,4199,
4201−4203,4205−4208,4210,4212,4214,
4216,4218−4220,4223,4225−4226,4229,
4231−4250,4252−4253,4255,4257,
4260−4261,4263−4265,4267,4269−4270,
4272−4273,4276,4278−4279,4281,4284,
4286,4288−4291,4293−4298,4300,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 MayPage01/15A7
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

29999K15400 A A320 4302−4310,4312,4314,4316−4317,

4320−4326,4328−4331,4333,4335,4337,
4339−4340,4342−4351,4354−4357,4359,
4361−4368,4370−4373,4375−4376,
4378−4379,4381,4383−4384,4386,4388,
4390−4402,4404−4405,4407−4409,
4411−4415,4417,4419,4421,4423−4424,
4426,4429,4431−4436,4438−4443,
4445−4450,4453−4454,4456−4460,
4462−4466,4468−4469,4471,4473−4493,
4495−4499,4501−4502,4504−4510,
4512−4521,4523−4528,4531−4533,
4535−4537,4539−4541,4543−4544,
4546−4559,4561−4562,4564−4569,
4571−4576,4578−4582,4584,4586−4589,
4591−4597,4599−4604,4606,4608−4610,
4612−4616,4618−4621,4623,4625,
4627−4628,4630−4634,4636−4637,4639,
4641−4642,4644−4647,4649,4651−4653,
4655−4659,4661,4664,4666,4668,
4670−4671,4673−4678,4680−4681,
4683−4690,4692,4694,4696−4697,
4699−4702,4704,4707−4709,4711−4712,
4714−4716,4718,4720−4727,4729−4730,
4733,4735−4736,4738−4743,4745,
4747−4752,4754,4757−4758,4760,
4762−4763,4765,4767,4769−4770,4772,
4775−4777,4780,4782,4784,4786,4789,
4791,4793−4795,4797−4800,4802−4810,
4812−4818,4820−4821,4823,4825,
4827−4829,4831−4833,4835−4836,
4839−4840,4844−4845,4848−4849,
4851−4855,4857−4858,4860−4862,
4864−4870,4872,4874,4876−4877,
4879−4880,4882−4884,4886−4892,
4894−4897,4899−4900,4902−4909,
4911−4915,4917−4922,4924,4926−4931,
4933−4934,4936−4939,4941−4944,
4946−4948,4950−4955,4958−4959,4961,
4963−4965,4967−4970,4972−4975,
4977−4991,4993,4996−4997,4999−5004,
5006−5008,5010−5017,5019−5022,5024,
5026−5027,5029−5034,5036−5037,5039,
5041−5042,5045−5048,5050−5053,
5055−5056,5058,5060−5064,5066−5073,
5075−5076,5078,5080−5082,5084,5086,
5089−5096,5098,5100−5104,5106−5117,
5120−5123,5125,5127−5129,5131−5132,
5134−5153,5155−5156,5158−5159,
5161−5163,5165−5168,5170−5172,
5174−5176,5178−5179,5181−5185,
5187−5191,5194−5196,5198,5200−5204,
5206−5207,5209,5211−5218,5220−5226,
5228−5232,5234,5236,5238,5240,
5242−5243,5245−5246,5248−5250,

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 MayPage01/15A8
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

29999K15400 A A320 5252−5253,5255,5258−5260,5262−5264,

5266,5268,5270,5272,5274,5276,5278,
5281,5283,5288−5291,5296,5298−5299,
5301−5302,5304−5305,5307−5308,
5310−5313,5315−5316,5318−5320,
5322−5326,5329,5331,5333−5335,5337,
5339,5341−5342,5344,5347−5349,
5351−5353,5355−5356,5358−5365,5367,
5369−5373,5375,5378−5379,5381,5384,
5386−5387,5390−5391,5393−5399,5401,
5403,5405,5407−5408,5410−5411,
5414−5417,5419−5421,5423,5425−5426,
5428−5431,5433−5434,5436−5437,
5440−5443,5446,5448−5449,5452−5455,
5458,5460−5461,5463−5464,5466,5468,
5471−5474,5476−5477,5479−5480,
5482−5484,5486−5489,5491−5494,
5496−5499,5501−5503,5505−5508,
5510−5512,5514−5518,5520−5522,
5525−5527,5530−5533,5536−5537,
5539−5542,5544,5547−5548,5550−5554,
5556−5557,5559−5562,5564−5566,5568,
5570−5572,5574,5576−5581,5583,
5585−5587,5589−5593,5595−5602,
5604−5605,5607−5608,5610−5622,
5624−5632,5634−5635,5637−5643,
5645−5646,5648−5649,5651−5654,
5656−5658,5660−5662,5664−5666,
5668−5669,5671−5673,5675−9999

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 PagesMayA9/A10
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

30024K6435 A320 1702,1715,1723−1725,1728−1755,

1760−1777,1782,1787−1799,1804,
1809−1812,1816−1818,1825,1829,
1835−1842,1847−1856,1858,1861−1867,
1871−1874,1883−1888,1891−1898,
1900−2164
30024K6435 A A320 1702,1715,1723−1725,1728−1755,
1760−1777,1782,1787−1799,1804,
1809−1812,1816−1818,1825,1829,
1835−1842,1847−1856,1858,1861−1867,
1871−1874,1883−1888,1891−1898,
1900−9999
30216K6445 A320 1316,1318,1327,1334,1339,1347,
1351−1355,1361,1365,1367,1372,1376,
1387,1390,1396,1405,1409,1450−1454,
1482,1486−1493,1497,1502,1504,
1518−1526,1530,1533,1538,1548,1550,
1557,1566,1595,1615,1628,1631,1635,
1637,1652,1661,1665,1678,1717,1735,
1744
30216K6445 A A320 1314,1320,1322,1330,1332,1337,
1341−1345,1349,1357,1359,1363,1368,
1370,1374,1379−1385,1394,1398−1402,
1407,1411−1448,1457−1480,1484,1495,
1500,1506−1516,1528,1532,1535,
1540−1546,1553,1555,1559−1564,
1568−1593,1597−1613,1617−1626,1633,
1639−1650,1655,1657,1663,1667−1676,
1680−1715,1719−1732,1736−1741,
1747−9999
30216K6445 B A320 1316−1318,1327,1334,1339,1347,
1351−1355,1361,1365−1367,1372,1376,
1387−1390,1396,1405,1409,1450−1454,
1482,1486−1493,1497,1502−1504,
1518−1526,1530,1533,1538,1548−1550,
1557,1566,1595,1615,1628−1631,
1635−1637,1652,1661,1665,1678,1708,
1712,1717−1721,1757,1780,1785,1802,
1806,1814,1821−1823,1827,1832−1834,
1845,1857,1860,1868,1877−1879,1889,
1899

Page A11
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

30216K6445 C A320 1314,1320−1322,1330−1332,1337,

1341−1345,1349,1357−1359,1363,
1368−1370,1374,1379−1385,1394,
1398−1402,1407,1411−1448,1457−1480,
1484,1495,1500,1506−1516,1528,1532,
1535,1540−1546,1553−1555,1559−1564,
1568−1593,1597−1613,1617−1626,1633,
1639−1650,1655−1657,1663,1667−1676,
1680−1705,1710,1715,1723−1755,
1760−1777,1782−1784,1787−1799,1804,
1809−1812,1816−1818,1825,1829,
1835−1842,1847−1856,1858,1861−1867,
1871−1874,1883−1888,1891−1898,
1900−9999
30839K6647 A320 0000 55−1029
31448K7354 A320 1728−1755,1760−1777,1782,1787−1799,
1804,1809−1812,1816−1818,1825,1829,
1835−1842,1847−1856,1858,1861−1867,
1871−1874,1883−1888,1891−1898,
1900−1904,1907−1910,1913−1940,
1944−1951,1957−1958,1968−1969,
1975−1979,1983
31448K7354 A A320 1735,1744
31448K7354 B A320 1728−1755,1760−1777,1782,1787−1799,
1804,1809−1812,1816−1818,1825,1829,
1835−1842,1847−1856,1858,1861−1867,
1871−1874,1883−1888,1891−1898,
1900−1904,1907−1910,1913−1940,
1944−1951,1957−1958,1968−1969,
1975−1979,1983−2001,2006−2020,
2024−2031,2038−2044,2048,2063,2065,
2075,2077,2082,2084,2092,2097−2108,
2116−2128,2132−2134,2136−2138,2140,
2141,2143−2147,2149−2152,2154,
2156−2161,2163−2169,2175−2180,2185,
2187,2191−2197,2201−2210,2215,2217,
2223,2225,2231,2233,2242,2246−2250,
2254,2256,2259,2272,2278−2288,2294,
2301−2314,2325,2327,2331,2336,2340,
2347−2352,2359,2364−2393,2399,
2405−2411,2415−2422,2425,2430−2434,
2439,2441,2447,2449,2461,2479,2482,
2486−2491,2504,2509−2513,2520,2524,
2529−2533,2539−2542,2564−9999
31448K7354 C A320 1728−1755,1760−1777,1782,1787−1799,
1804,1809−1812,1816−1818,1825,1829,
1835−1842,1847−1856,1858,1861−1867,
1871−1874,1883−1888,1891−1898,
1900−9999

Page A12
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

31448K7354 D A320 1728−1741,1747−1755,1760−1777,1782,

1787−1799,1804,1809−1812,1816−1818,
1825,1829,1835−1842,1847−1856,1858,
1861−1867,1871−1874,1883−1888,
1891−1898,1900−9999
31448K7354 E A320 1708,1728−1782,1785−2928
31448K7354 F A320 2930−9999
31448K7354 G A320 1728−1755,1760−1777,1782,1787−1799,
1804,1809−1812,1816−1818,1825,1829,
1835−1842,1847−1856,1858,1861−1867,
1871−1874,1883−1888,1891−1898,
1900−3567
31448K7354 H A320 1728−1741,1747−2755,1760−1777,1782,
1787−1799,1804,1809−1812,1816−1818,
1825,1829,1835−1842,1847−1856,1858,
1861−1867,1871−1874,1883−1888,
1891−1898,1900−6029
32111K7831 A320 1702,1715,1723−1755,1760−1777,1782,
1787−1799,1804,1809−1812,1816−1818,
1825,1829,1835−1842,1847−1856,1858,
1861−1867,1871−1874,1883−1888,
1891−1898,1900−2164
32117K7832 A320 0640−1899

Page A13
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

32337K7963 A320 1987−2001,2006−2020,2024−2031,

2038−2044,2048,2063−2065,2075−2077,
2082−2084,2092,2097−2108,2116−2128,
2132−2134,2136−2138,2140−2141,
2143−2147,2149−2152,2154,2156−2161,
2163−2169,2175−2180,2185−2187,
2191−2197,2201−2210,2215−2217,
2223−2225,2231−2233,2242,2246−2250,
2254−2256,2259−2272,2278−2288,2294,
2301−2314,2325−2327,2331,2336,2340,
2347−2352,2359,2364−2393,2399,
2405−2411,2415−2422,2425,2430−2434,
2439−2441,2447−2449,2461,2479−2482,
2486−2491,2504,2509,2513,2520,2524,
2529,2535,2540−2542,2564−2566,2571,
2577−2583,2589,2596−2598,2602,
2612−2613,2623,2630−2635,2640,
2645−2649,2656,2661,2668,2671,
2676−2678,2683,2688,2692,2699,2705,
2710−2712,2721−2728,2732−2737,2745,
2749−2752,2755,2760−2764,2776,
2781−2785,2794,2798,2802−2807,
2810−2816,2826−2828,2832,2838,2842,
2848,2859,2867−2871,2875,2880−2881,
2885−2896,2900−2906,2920,2924−2926,
2930−2932,2939,2944−2947,2952−2956,
2962−2964,2970,2977,2982,2987−2989,
2992,2995,3000−3002,3008,3014,3018,
3023,3029,3033−3035,3039−3040,
3044−3047,3052,3058,3063−3066,
3071−3083,3091,3095,3109−3111,
3115−3119,3125−3129,3136−3145,
3150−3152,3154,3156−3157,3161,
3164−3166,3173−3182,3190,3194,
3199−3203,3211−3213,3218,3223,3228,
3232,3237,3240,3246,3261−3263,3266,
3277−3280,3284,3287,3291−3295,
3299−3301,3313−3314,3318−3321,
3325−3328,3338,3343−3348,3351−3354,
3361−3362,3370−3373,3376,3381,3384,
3391,3394−3396,3400,3404−3412,3416,
3420−3430,3439,3444−3448,3451,3464,
3468−3470,3473−3490,3495−9999

Page A14
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

32337K7963 A A320 1987−2001,2006−2020,2024−2031,

2038−2044,2048,2063−2065,2075−2077,
2082−2084,2092,2097−2108,2116−2128,
2132−2134,2136−2138,2140−2141,
2143−2147,2149−2152,2154,2156−2161,
2163−2169,2175−2180,2185−2187,
2191−2197,2201−2210,2215−2217,
2223−2225,2231−2233,2242,2246−2250,
2254−2256,2259−2272,2278−2288,2294,
2301−2314,2325−2327,2331,2336,2340,
2347−2352,2359,2364−2393,2399,
2405−2411,2415−2422,2425,2430−2434,
2439−2441,2447−2449,2461,2479−2482,
2486−2491,2504,2509,2513,2520,2524,
2529,2535,2540−2542,2564−2566,2571,
2577−2583,2589,2596−2598,2602,
2612−2613,2623,2630−2635,2640,
2645−2649,2656,2661,2668,2671,
2676−2678,2683,2688,2692,2699,2705,
2710−2712,2721−2728,2732−2737,2745,
2749−2752,2755,2760−2764,2776,
2781−2785,2794,2798,2802−2807,
2810−2816,2826−2828,2832,2838,2842,
2848,2859,2867−2871,2875,2880−2881,
2885−2896,2900−2906,2920,2924−2926,
2930−2932,2939,2944−2947,2952−2956,
2962−2964,2970,2977,2982,2987−2989,
2992,2995,3000−3002,3008,3014,3018,
3023,3029,3033−3035,3039−3040,
3044−3047,3052,3058,3063−3066,
3071−3083,3091,3095,3109−3111,
3115−3119,3125−3129,3136−3145,
3150−3152,3154,3156−3157,3161,
3164−3166,3173−3182,3190,3194,
3199−3203,3211−3213,3218,3223,3228,
3232,3237,3240,3246,3261−3263,3266,
3277−3280,3284,3287,3293−3295,3301,
3313−3314,3318−3321,3325,3328,
3343−3348,3351,3354,3361−3362,3373,
3376,3381,3384,3391,3396,3400,
3409−3412,3416,3420,3423−3425,3430,
3439,3444−3446,3451,3464,3468−3470,
3473,3475−3476,3478−3479,3482,3484,
3488,3490−3494,3499−3502,3511,3515,
3517−3519,3526,3529−3535,3540,3545,
3550,3554−3556,3562−3565,3572−3574,
3594−3596,3598,3607−3609,3622,
3626−3627,3630−3640,3643−3644,3649,
3658−3662,3666,3668,3695,3697,3699,
3703,3707−3713,3718,3721−3723,3726,
3731−3741

Page A15
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

32337K7963 B A320 1987−2001,2006−2020,2024−2031,

2038−2044,2048,2063−2065,2075−2077,
2082−2084,2092,2097−2108,2116−2128,
2132−2134,2136−2138,2140−2141,
2143−2147,2149−2152,2154,2156−2161,
2163−2169,2175−2180,2185−2187,
2191−2197,2201−2210,2215−2217,
2223−2225,2231−2233,2242,2246−2250,
2254−2256,2259−2272,2278−2288,2294,
2301−2314,2325−2327,2331,2336,2340,
2347−2352,2359,2364−2393,2399,
2405−2411,2415−2422,2425,2430−2434,
2439−2441,2447−2449,2461,2479−2482,
2486−2491,2504,2509,2513,2520,2524,
2529,2535,2540−2542,2564−2566,2571,
2577−2583,2589,2596−2598,2602,
2612−2613,2623,2630−2635,2640,
2645−2649,2656,2661,2668,2671,
2676−2678,2683,2688,2692,2699,2705,
2710−2712,2721−2728,2732−2737,2745,
2749−2752,2755,2760−2764,2776,
2781−2785,2794,2798,2802−2807,
2810−2816,2826−2828,2832,2838,2842,
2848,2859,2867−2871,2875,2880−2881,
2885−2896,2900−2906,2920,2924−2926,
2930−2932,2939,2944−2947,2952−2956,
2962−2964,2970,2977,2982,2987−2989,
2992,2995,3000−3002,3008,3014,3018,
3023,3029,3033−3035,3039−3040,
3044−3047,3052,3058,3063−3066,
3071−3083,3091,3095,3109−3111,
3115−3119,3125−3129,3136−3145,
3150−3152,3154,3156−3157,3161,
3164−3166,3173−3182,3190,3194,
3199−3203,3211−3213,3218,3223,3228,
3232,3237,3240,3246,3261−3263,3266,
3277−3280,3284,3287,3293−3295,3301,
3313−3314,3318−3321,3325,3328,
3343−3348,3351,3354,3361−3362,3373,
3376,3381,3384,3391,3396,3400,
3409−3412,3416,3420,3423−3425,3430,
3439,3444−3446,3451,3464,3468−3470,
3473,3475−3476,3478−3479,3482,3484,
3488,3490−3494,3499−3502,3511,3515,
3517−3519,3526,3529−3535,3540,3545,
3550,3554−3556,3562−3565

Page A16
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

32337K7963 C A320 1987−2001,2006−2020,2024−2031,

2038−2044,2048,2063−2065,2075−2077,
2082−2084,2092,2097−2108,2116−2128,
2132−2134,2136−2138,2140−2141,
2143−2147,2149−2152,2154,2156−2161,
2163−2169,2175−2180,2185−2187,
2191−2197,2201−2210,2215−2217,
2223−2225,2231−2233,2242,2246−2250,
2254−2256,2259−2272,2278−2288,2294,
2301−2314,2325−2327,2331,2336,2340,
2347−2352,2359,2364−2393,2399,
2405−2411,2415−2422,2425,2430−2434,
2439−2441,2447−2449,2461,2479−2482,
2486−2491,2504,2509,2513,2520,2524,
2529,2535,2540−2542,2564−2566,2571,
2577−2583,2589,2596−2598,2602,
2612−2613,2623,2630−2635,2640,
2645−2649,2656,2661,2668,2671,
2676−2678,2683,2688,2692,2699,2705,
2710−2712,2721−2728,2732−2737,2745,
2749−2752,2755,2760−2764,2776,
2781−2785,2794,2798,2802−2807,
2810−2816,2826−2828,2832,2838,2842,
2848,2859,2867−2871,2875,2880−2881,
2885−2896,2900−2906,2920,2924−2926,
2930−2932,2939,2944−2947,2952−2956,
2962−2964,2970,2977,2982,2987−2989,
2992,2995,3000−3002,3008,3014,3018,
3023,3029,3033−3035,3039−3040,
3044−3047,3052,3058,3063−3066,
3071−3083,3091,3095,3109−3111,
3115−3119,3125−3129,3136−3145,
3150−3152,3154,3156−3157,3161,
3164−3166,3173−3182,3190,3194,
3199−3203,3211−3213,3218,3223,3228,
3232,3237,3240,3246,3261−3263,3266,
3277−3280,3284,3287,3293−3295,3301,
3313−3314,3318−3321,3325,3328,
3343−3348,3351,3354,3361−3362,3373,
3376,3381,3384,3391,3396,3400,
3409−3412,3416,3420,3423−3425,3430,
3439,3444−3446,3451,3464,3468−3470,
3473,3475−3476,3478−3479,3482,3484,
3488,3490−3494,3499−3502,3511,3515,
3517−3519,3526,3529−3535,3540,3545,
3550,3554−3556,3562−3565,3572−3574,
3594,3598,3607−3609,3622,3626−3627,
3630−3640,3643−3644,3649,3658−3662,
3666,3693−3695,3697,3699,3703,
3707−3714,3721−3726,3732,3741,3745,
3750,3755,3760,3771−3773,3778−3781,
3785−3789,3800−3802,3807,3811,
3815−3819,3823,3829−3831,3835,3840,
3846,3850,3857,3861,3866−3868,

Page A17
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

32337K7963 C A320 3877−3882,3885,3889−3894,3902,3906,

3908,3912,3921,3923,3927,3933,3947,
3952,3954−3956,3968,3972,3976−3978,
3990,4011,4015,4030,4055−4059,
4065−4066,4072−4079,4084−4086,
4092−4094,4097,4100,4102−4105,4108,
4110,4115−9999
32337K7963 D A320 3572−3574,3594,3598,3607−3609,3622,
3626−3627,3630−3640,3643−3644,3649,
3658−3662,3666,3693−3695,3697,3699,
3703,3707−3714,3721−3726,3732,3741,
3745,3750,3755,3760,3771−3773,
3778−3781,3785−3789,3800−3802,3807,
3811,3815−3819,3823,3829−3831,3835,
3840,3846,3850,3857,3861,3866−3868,
3877−3882,3885,3889−3894,3902,3906,
3908,3912,3921,3923,3927,3933,3947,
3952,3954−3956,3968,3972,3976−3978,
3990,4011,4015,4030,4055−4059,
4065−4066,4072−4079,4084−4086,
4092−4094,4097,4100,4102−4105,4108,
4110,4115−9999

Page A18
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

32337K7963 E A320 1987−2001,2006−2020,2024−2031,

2038−2044,2048,2063−2065,2075−2077,
2082−2084,2092,2097−2108,2116−2128,
2132−2134,2136−2138,2140−2141,
2143−2147,2149−2152,2154,2156−2161,
2163−2169,2175−2180,2185−2187,
2191−2197,2201−2210,2215−2217,
2223−2225,2231−2233,2242,2246−2250,
2254−2256,2259−2272,2278−2288,2294,
2301−2314,2325−2327,2331,2336,2340,
2347−2352,2359,2364−2393,2399,
2405−2411,2415−2422,2425,2430−2434,
2439−2441,2447−2449,2461,2479−2482,
2486−2491,2504,2509,2513,2520,2524,
2529,2535,2540−2542,2564−2566,2571,
2577−2583,2589,2596−2598,2602,
2612−2613,2623,2630−2635,2640,
2645−2649,2656,2661,2668,2671,
2676−2678,2683,2688,2692,2699,2705,
2710−2712,2721−2728,2732−2737,2745,
2749−2752,2755,2760−2764,2776,
2781−2785,2794,2798,2802−2807,
2810−2816,2826−2828,2832,2838,2842,
2848,2859,2867−2871,2875,2880−2881,
2885−2896,2900−2906,2920,2924−2926,
2930−2932,2939,2944−2947,2952−2956,
2962−2964,2970,2977,2982,2987−2989,
2992,2995,3000−3002,3008,3014,3018,
3023,3029,3033−3035,3039−3040,
3044−3047,3052,3058,3063−3066,
3071−3083,3091,3095,3109−3111,
3115−3119,3125−3129,3136−3145,
3150−3152,3154,3156−3157,3161,
3164−3166,3173−3182,3190,3194,
3199−3203,3211−3213,3218,3223,3228,
3232,3237,3240,3246,3261−3263,3266,
3277−3280,3284,3287,3293−3295,3301,
3313−3314,3318−3321,3325,3328,
3343−3348,3351,3354,3361−3362,3373,
3376,3381,3384,3391,3396,3400,
3409−3412,3416,3420,3423−3425,3430,
3439,3444−3446,3451,3464,3468−3470,
3473,3475−3476,3478−3479,3482,3484,
3488,3490−3494,3499−3502,3511,3515,
3517−3519,3526,3529−3535,3540,3545,
3550,3554−3556,3562−3565,3572−3574,
3594,3598,3607−3609,3622,3626−3627,
3630−3640,3643−3644,3649,3658−3662,
3666,3693−3695,3697,3699,3703,
3707−3714,3721−3726,3732,3741,3745,
3750,3755,3760,3771−3773,3778−3781,

Page A19
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

32337K7963 E A320 3785−3789,3800−3802,3807,3811,

3815−3819,3823,3829−3831,3835,3840,
3846,3850,3857,3861,3866−3868,
3877−3882,3885,3889−3894,3902,3906,
3908,3912,3921,3923,3927,3933,3947,
3952,3954−3956,3968,3972,3976−3978,
3990,4032,4055,4065−4066,4072−4077,
4092−4094,4108−4109,4117,4119,4124,
4133,4143,4150−4152,4160,4165,4174,
4185,4195,4199−4201,4212,4223,4231,
4236−4238,4244,4246,4249,4265,4270,
4273,4305−4308,4311−9999
32337K7963 F A320 3572−3574,3594,3598,3607−3609,3622,
3626−3627,3630−3640,3643−3644,3649,
3658−3662,3666,3693−3695,3697,3699,
3703,3707−3714,3721−3726,3732,3741,
3745,3750,3755,3760,3771−3773,
3778−3781,3785−3789,3800−3802,3807,
3811,3815−3819,3823,3829−3831,3835,
3840,3846,3850,3857,3861,3866−3868,
3877−3882,3885,3889−3894,3902,3906,
3908,3912,3921,3923,3927,3933,3947,
3952,3954−3956,3968,3972,3976−3978,
3990,4032,4055,4065−4066,4072−4077,
4092−4094,4108−4109,4117,4119,4124,
4133,4143,4150−4152,4160,4165,4174,
4185,4195,4199−4201,4212,4223,4231,
4236−4238,4244,4246,4249,4265,4270,
4273,4305−4308,4311−9999

Page A20
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

32337K7963 G A320 1987−2001,2006−2020,2024−2031,

2038−2044,2048,2063−2065,2075−2077,
2082−2084,2092,2097−2108,2116−2128,
2132−2134,2136−2138,2140−2141,
2143−2147,2149−2152,2154,2156−2161,
2163−2169,2175−2180,2185−2187,
2191−2197,2201−2210,2215−2217,
2223−2225,2231−2233,2242,2246−2250,
2254−2256,2259−2272,2278−2288,2294,
2301−2314,2325−2327,2331,2336,2340,
2347−2352,2359,2364−2393,2399,
2405−2411,2415−2422,2425,2430−2434,
2439−2441,2447−2449,2461,2479−2482,
2486−2491,2504,2509,2513,2520,2524,
2529,2535,2540−2542,2564−2566,2571,
2577−2583,2589,2596−2598,2602,
2612−2613,2623,2630−2635,2640,
2645−2649,2656,2661,2668,2671,
2676−2678,2683,2688,2692,2699,2705,
2710−2712,2721−2728,2732−2737,2745,
2749−2752,2755,2760−2764,2776,
2781−2785,2794,2798,2802−2807,
2810−2816,2826−2828,2832,2838,2842,
2848,2859,2867−2871,2875,2880−2881,
2885−2896,2900−2906,2920,2924−2926,
2930−2932,2939,2944−2947,2952−2956,
2962−2964,2970,2977,2982,2987−2989,
2992,2995,3000−3002,3008,3014,3018,
3023,3029,3033−3035,3039−3040,
3044−3047,3052,3058,3063−3066,
3071−3083,3091,3095,3109−3111,
3115−3119,3125−3129,3136−3145,
3150−3152,3154,3156−3157,3161,
3164−3166,3173−3182,3190,3194,
3199−3203,3211−3213,3218,3223,3228,
3232,3237,3240,3246,3261−3263,3266,
3277−3280,3284,3287,3293−3295,3301,
3313−3314,3318−3321,3325,3328,
3343−3348,3351,3354,3361−3362,3373,
3376,3381,3384,3391,3396,3400,
3409−3412,3416,3420,3423−3425,3430,
3439,3444−3446,3451,3464,3468−3470,
3473,3475−3476,3478−3479,3482,3484,
3488,3490−3494,3499−3502,3511,3515,
3517−3519,3526,3529−3535,3540,3545,
3550,3554−3556,3562−3565,3572−3574,
3594,3598,3607−3609,3622,3626−3627,
3630−3640,3643−3644,3649,3658−3662,
3666,3693−3695,3697,3699,3703,
3707−3714,3721−3726,3732,3741,3745,
3750,3755,3760,3771−3773,3778−3781,
3785−3789,3800−3802,3807,3811,
3815−3819,3823,3829−3831,3835,3840,
3846,3850,3857,3861,3866−3868,
3877−3882,3885,3889−3894,3902,3906,
Page A21
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

32337K7963 G A320 3908,3912,3921,3923,3927,3933,3947,

3952,3954−3956,3968,3972,3976−3978,
3990,4032,4055,4065−4066,4072−4077,
4092−4094,4108−4109,4117,4119,4124,
4133,4143,4150−4152,4160,4165,4174,
4185,4195,4199−4201,4212,4223,4231,
4236−4238,4244,4246,4249,4265,4270,
4273,4305−4306,4308,4314,4320,4323,
4331,4344,4347,4351,4366,4371−4373,
4383,4388,4391,4393−4395,4397,4400,
4417−4419,4432,4439,4441−4442,4446,
4448,4453−4454,4459,4464,4468,
4475−4476,4480,4485,4490,4498−4499,
4512,4516−4521,4528−9999
32337K7963 H A320 0123,0181−0182,0195,0229,0306−2088,
2121−9999
32337K7963 J A320 0123,0181−0182,0195,0229,0306−5218
32337K7963 K A320 0123,0181−0182,0195,0229,0306−9999
32951K8291 A320 2165−9999
32951K8291 A A320 2165−2425
32951K8291 B A320 2165−2885

Page A22
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

32951K8291 C A320 2165−2169,2171,2173,2175,2177−2178,

2180,2182−2183,2185,2187,2189,2191,
2193,2195,2197,2199,2201,2204,
2206−2207,2210,2212,2215,2217,2219,
2221,2223,2225,2227,2229,2231,2233,
2235,2238−2239,2242,2244,2246,2248,
2250,2252,2254,2256−2257,2259,2272,
2274−2275,2278,2280,2282,2284,2286,
2288,2291−2292,2294,2297,2299,2301,
2307,2310,2312,2314,2316,2322,2325,
2327,2329,2331,2334,2336,2338,2340,
2343,2345,2347,2349,2352,2354,2356,
2359,2361,2364,2366,2368,2372,2374,
2376,2384,2386,2388,2390−2391,2393,
2395,2397,2399,2401,2403,2405,2407,
2409,2411,2413,2415,2417,2419,
2422−2423,2425,2428,2430,2432,2434,
2437,2439,2441,2443,2445,2447,2449,
2451,2453,2455,2457,2459,2461,2475,
2478−2479,2482,2484,2486,2489,2491,
2493,2496,2498,2500,2502,2504,2506,
2509,2511,2513,2515,2517,2520,2522,
2524,2526,2529,2531,2533,2535,2537,
2539−2540,2542,2562,2564,2566,2569,
2571,2573,2576−2577,2580,2583−2584,
2587,2589,2591,2594,2596,2598,2600,
2602,2604,2606,2608−2609,2612−2613,
2616,2619−2620,2623,2626−2627,2630,
2633,2635,2637,2640,2642,2645,2647,
2649,2651,2654,2656,2658,2661,2663,
2665,2668,2670−2671,2674,2676,2678,
2680,2683,2685,2688−2689,2692,
2695−2696,2699,2701,2703,2705,2708,
2710,2712,2714,2717,2719,2721,
2724−2725,2728,2731−2732,2734,2737,
2740,2743,2745,2747,2749,2752−2753,
2755,2758,2760−2761,2764,2766,2768,
2770,2772,2775−2776,2778,2781,2783,
2785,2787,2789,2791−2792,2794,2796,
2798,2800,2802,2804,2807−2808,2810,
2814,2816−2817,2820,2822,2824,2826,
2828,2830,2832,2834−2835,2838,2840,
2842,2844,2846,2848,2851,2853,
2855−2856,2859,2861,2863,2865,2867,
2869,2871,2874−2875,2877,2880−2881,
2883,2885,2896,2899−2900,2902,2904,
2906,2908−2909,2911,2914−2915,2917,
2920,2922,2924,2926,2928,2930,2932,
2934,2937,2939,2941,2943−2945,2947,
2950,2952−2953,2956,2958,2960,2962,
2964,2966,2968,2970,2973,2975,2977,
2980,2982,2984,2986−2995,2998,3000,
3002,3004,3006,3008,3010,3012,3014,
3016,3018,3021,3023,3025,3027,3029,
3031,3033,3035,3037,3039−3040,3042,
Page A23
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

32951K8291 C A320 3044,3047−3048,3050,3052,3055−3056,

3058,3060,3063−3064,3066,3068,
3071−3072,3074,3076,3079−3080,3083,
3086−3087,3089,3091,3093,3095,3097,
3099,3101,3103,3105,3107,3109,3111,
3113,3115,3117,3119−3121,3123,3125,
3127,3129,3131−3132,3135−3136,3138,
3140−3141,3143,3145,3147−3162,3164,
3166−3167,3170,3173−3174,3177−3178,
3180,3182−3183,3185,3187,3189−3190,
3192,3194,3196−3197,3199,3201,3203,
3205−3206,3208,3210−3211,3213,3215,
3218−3219,3221,3223−3224,3227−3228,
3230,3232,3234,3236−3237,3239−3240,
3242,3244,3246,3256−3257,3259,3261,
3263−3264,3266,3268,3270,3272−3273,
3275,3277−3278,3280,3282,3284,
3286−3287,3289,3291,3293,3295−3296,
3299,3301,3303−3304,3306,3308,3310,
3312−3314,3316,3318−3319,3321,3323,
3325,3327−3328,3330,3332,3335,
3337−3338,3341,3343,3345,3348−3349,
3351,3353−3354,3357,3359,3361−3362,
3365−3366,3368,3370,3373−3374,3376,
3378−3379,3381,3383−3384,3386,3389,
3391−3392,3394,3396,3398,3400,3402,
3404,3408−3410,3412,3414,3416,3418,
3420,3422−3423,3425,3427,3430−3431,
3433,3435,3437,3439−3440,3444,3446,
3448−3449,3451,3453,3455−3457,
3460−3461,3464−3465,3468,3470,
3472−3490,3492,3494−3497,3499,
3501−3503,3505−3506,3508,3510−3511,
3514−3517,3519,3521,3524,3526,
3528−3529,3531−3532,3535−3536,3538,
3540−3541,3543,3545,3547,3549−3550,
3553−3554,3556,3558−3559,3562−3563,
3565,3567−3568,3570,3572,3574,
3576−3577,3579,3581−3582,3591,3594,
3596−3599,3601,3603,3605,3607,
3609−3611,3613,3616,3618,3621−3622,
3624,3626−3628,3630−3631,3640−3641,
3643−3644,3646,3648−3650,3652,3654,
3656,3658−3659,3662,3664,3666−3668,
3670,3672,3674,3676−3677,3679,3690,
3692−3693,3695−3699,3701,3703,
3706−3707,3709,3711,3713−3716,
3718−3719,3721,3723−3724,3726,3729,
3731−3732,3734,3736,3739,3741,3743,
3745,3747−3748,3750,3753,3755−3756,
3758,3760,3762,3765,3767,3769,3771,
3773,3775−3778,3780−3783,3785−3787,
3789,3791,3793,3795,3797−3798,3800,
3802,3804−3805,3807,3809,3811−3813,
3815,3817,3819,3821,3823,3825,3827,
Page A24
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

32951K8291 C A320 3829,3831,3833,3835,3837,3840,3843,

3846,3848,3850,3852,3855,3857,3859,
3861,3863,3866,3868,3870−3871,3873,
3875,3877,3880,3882−3883,3885,3887,
3889,3891,3894,3896,3898,3900,3902,
3904,3906−3910,3912−3913,3915,3917,
3919,3921−3923,3925,3927,3929,3931,
3933,3935,3937,3939,3941,3943,
3945−3947,3949,3952−3954,3956,3959,
3961,3963,3965,3967−3968,3971−3972,
3974−3976,3978−3980,3984,3986,3988,
3990−3992,3995,3997,3999,4001,4003,
4006,4008,4010−4015,4017,4019,4021,
4023,4026−4028,4030,4032−4035,4037,
4043,4046,4049,4051,4053,4055,4057,
4059,4061,4063−4066,4068,4070,4072,
4075,4077,4079,4081,4083−4084,4086,
4088,4090,4092−4095,4097−4098,
4100−4102,4104−4106,4108−4111,4113,
4115,4117−4120,4122,4124,4126,4128,
4130,4133,4135,4137,4139−4140,
4143−4147,4149−4150,4152−4154,
4156−4162,4165,4167−4168,4170,4172,
4174−4179,4181,4183,4185−4188,
4190−4191,4193,4195−4197,4199,
4201−4203,4205−4208,4210,4212,4214,
4216,4218−4220,4223,4225−4226,4229,
4231−4250,4252−4253,4255,4257,
4260−4261,4263−4265,4267,4269−4270,
4272−4273,4276,4278−4279,4281,4284,
4286,4288−4291,4293−4298,4300,
4302−4310,4312,4314,4316−4317,
4320−4326,4328−4331,4333,4335,4337,
4339−4340,4342−4351,4354−4357,4359,
4361−4368,4370−4373,4375−4376,
4378−4379,4381,4383−4384,4386,4388,
4390−4402,4404−4405,4407−4409,
4411−4415,4417,4419,4421,4423−4424,
4426,4429,4431−4436,4438−4443,
4445−4450,4453−4454,4456−4460,
4462−4466,4468−4469,4471,4473−4493,
4495−4499,4501−4502,4504−4510,
4512−4521,4523−4528,4531−4533,
4535−4537,4539−4541,4543−4544,
4546−4559,4561−4562,4564−4569,
4571−4576,4578−4582,4584,4586−4589,
4591−4597,4599−4604,4606,4608−4610,
4612−4616,4618−4621,4623,4625,
4627−4628,4630−4634,4636−4637,4639,
4641−4642,4644−4647,4649,4651−4653,
4655−4659,4661,4664,4666,4668,
4670−4671,4673−4678,4680−4681,
4683−4690,4692,4694,4696−4697,
4699−4702,4704,4707−4709,4711−4712,
4714−4716,4718,4720−4727,4729−4730,
Page A25
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

32951K8291 C A320 4733,4735−4736,4738−4743,4745,

4747−4752,4754,4757−4758,4760,
4762−4763,4765,4767,4769−4770,4772,
4775−4777,4780,4782,4784,4786,4789,
4791,4793−4795,4797−4800,4802−4810,
4812−4818,4820−4821,4823,4825,
4827−4829,4831−4833,4835−4836,
4839−4840,4844−4845,4848−4849,
4851−4855,4857−4858,4860−4862,
4864−4870,4872,4874,4876−4877,
4879−4880,4882−4884,4886−4892,
4894−4897,4899−4900,4902−4909,
4911−4915,4917−4922,4924,4926−4931,
4933−4934,4936−4939,4941−4944,
4946−4948,4950−4955,4958−4959,4961,
4963−4965,4967−4970,4972−4975,
4977−4991,4993,4996−4997,4999−5004,
5006−5008,5010−5017,5019−5022,5024,
5026−5027,5029−5034,5036−5037,5039,
5041−5042,5045−5048,5050−5053,
5055−5056,5058,5060−5064,5066−5073,
5075−5076,5078,5080−5082,5084,5086,
5089−5096,5098,5100−5104,5106−5117,
5120−5123,5125,5127−5129,5131−5132,
5134−5153,5155−5156,5158−5159,
5161−5163,5165−5168,5170−5172,
5174−5176,5178−5179,5181−5185,
5187−5191,5194−5196,5198,5200−5204,
5206−5207,5209,5211−5218,5220−5226,
5228−5232,5234,5236,5238,5240,
5242−5243,5245−5246,5248−5250,
5252−5253,5255,5258−5260,5262−5264,
5266,5268,5270,5272,5274,5276,5278,
5281,5283,5288−5291,5296,5298−5299,
5301−5302,5304−5305,5307−5308,
5310−5313,5315−5316,5318−5320,
5322−5326,5329,5331,5333−5335,5337,
5339,5341−5342,5344,5347−5349,
5351−5353,5355−5356,5358−5365,5367,
5369−5373,5375,5378−5379,5381,5384,
5386−5387,5390−5391,5393−5399,5401,
5403,5405,5407−5408,5410−5411,
5414−5417,5419−5421,5423,5425−5426,
5428−5431,5433−5434,5436−5437,
5440−5443,5446,5448−5449,5452−5455,
5458,5460−5461,5463−5464,5466,5468,
5471−5474,5476−5477,5479−5480,
5482−5484,5486−5489,5491−5494,
5496−5499,5501−5503,5505−5508,
5510−5512,5514−5518,5520−5522,
5525−5527,5530−5533,5536−5537,
5539−5542,5544,5547−5548,5550−5554,
5556−5557,5559−5562,5564−5566,5568,
5570−5572,5574,5576−5581,5583,
5585−5587,5589−5593,5595−5602,
Page A26
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

32951K8291 C A320 5604−5605,5607−5608,5610−5622,

5624−5632,5634−5635,5637−5643,
5645−5646,5648−5649,5651−5654,
5656−5658,5660−5662,5664−5666,
5668−5669,5671−5673,5675−9999
34600K9600 A320 2428−9999

Page A27
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

34600K9600 A A320 2428,2430,2432,2434,2437,2439,2441,

2443,2445,2447,2449,2451,2453,2455,
2457,2459,2461,2475,2478−2479,2482,
2484,2486,2489,2491,2493,2496,2498,
2500,2502,2504,2506,2509,2511,2513,
2515,2517,2520,2522,2524,2526,2529,
2531,2533,2535,2537,2539−2540,2542,
2562,2564,2566,2569,2571,2573,
2576−2577,2580,2583−2584,2587,2589,
2591,2594,2596,2598,2600,2602,2604,
2606,2608−2609,2612−2613,2616,
2619−2620,2623,2626−2627,2630,2633,
2635,2637,2640,2642,2645,2647,2649,
2651,2654,2656,2658,2661,2663,2665,
2668,2670−2671,2674,2676,2678,2680,
2683,2685,2688−2689,2692,2695−2696,
2699,2701,2703,2705,2708,2710,2712,
2714,2717,2719,2721,2724−2725,2728,
2731−2732,2734,2737,2740,2743,2745,
2747,2749,2752−2753,2755,2758,
2760−2761,2764,2766,2768,2770,2772,
2775−2776,2778,2781,2783,2785,2787,
2789,2791−2792,2794,2796,2798,2800,
2802,2804,2807−2808,2810,2814,
2816−2817,2820,2822,2824,2826,2828,
2830,2832,2834−2835,2838,2840,2842,
2844,2846,2848,2851,2853,2855−2856,
2859,2861,2863,2865,2867,2869,2871,
2874−2875,2877,2880−2881,2883,2885,
2896,2899−2900,2902,2904,2906,
2908−2909,2911,2914−2915,2917,2920,
2922,2924,2926,2928,2930,2932,2934,
2937,2939,2941,2943−2945,2947,2950,
2952−2953,2956,2958,2960,2962,2964,
2966,2968,2970,2973,2975,2977,2980,
2982,2984,2986−2995,2998,3000,3002,
3004,3006,3008,3010,3012,3014,3016,
3018,3021,3023,3025,3027,3029,3031,
3033,3035,3037,3039−3040,3042,3044,
3047−3048,3050,3052,3055−3056,3058,
3060,3063−3064,3066,3068,3071−3072,
3074,3076,3079−3080,3083,3086−3087,
3089,3091,3093,3095,3097,3099,3101,
3103,3105,3107,3109,3111,3113,3115,
3117,3119−3121,3123,3125,3127,3129,
3131−3132,3135−3136,3138,3140−3141,
3143,3145,3147−3162,3164,3166−3167,
3170,3173−3174,3177−3178,3180,
3182−3183,3185,3187,3189−3190,3192,
3194,3196−3197,3199,3201,3203,
3205−3206,3208,3210−3211,3213,3215,
3218−3219,3221,3223−3224,3227−3228,
3230,3232,3234,3236−3237,3239−3240,
3242,3244,3246,3256−3257,3259,3261,
3263−3264,3266,3268,3270,3272−3273,
Page A28
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

34600K9600 A A320 3275,3277−3278,3280,3282,3284,

3286−3287,3289,3291,3293,3295−3296,
3299,3301,3303−3304,3306,3308,3310,
3312−3314,3316,3318−3319,3321,3323,
3325,3327−3328,3330,3332,3335,
3337−3338,3341,3343,3345,3348−3349,
3351,3353−3354,3357,3359,3361−3362,
3365−3366,3368,3370,3373−3374,3376,
3378−3379,3381,3383−3384,3386,3389,
3391−3392,3394,3396,3398,3400,3402,
3404,3408−3410,3412,3414,3416,3418,
3420,3422−3423,3425,3427,3430−3431,
3433,3435,3437,3439−3440,3444,3446,
3448−3449,3451,3453,3455−3457,
3460−3461,3464−3465,3468,3470,
3472−3490,3492,3494−3497,3499,
3501−3503,3505−3506,3508,3510−3511,
3514−3517,3519,3521,3524,3526,
3528−3529,3531−3532,3535−3536,3538,
3540−3541,3543,3545,3547,3549−3550,
3553−3554,3556,3558−3559,3562−3563,
3565,3567−3568,3570,3572,3574,
3576−3577,3579,3581−3582,3591,3594,
3596−3599,3601,3603,3605,3607,
3609−3611,3613,3616,3618,3621−3622,
3624,3626−3628,3630−3631,3640−3641,
3643−3644,3646,3648−3650,3652,3654,
3656,3658−3659,3662,3664,3666−3668,
3670,3672,3674,3676−3677,3679,3690,
3692−3693,3695−3699,3701,3703,
3706−3707,3709,3711,3713−3716,
3718−3719,3721,3723−3724,3726,3729,
3731−3732,3734,3736,3739,3741,3743,
3745,3747−3748,3750,3753,3755−3756,
3758,3760,3762,3765,3767,3769,3771,
3773,3775−3778,3780−3783,3785−3787,
3789,3791,3793,3795,3797−3798,3800,
3802,3804−3805,3807,3809,3811−3813,
3815,3817,3819,3821,3823,3825,3827,
3829,3831,3833,3835,3837,3840,3843,
3846,3848,3850,3852,3855,3857,3859,
3861,3863,3866,3868,3870−3871,3873,
3875,3877,3880,3882−3883,3885,3887,
3889,3891,3894,3896,3898,3900,3902,
3904,3906−3910,3912−3913,3915,3917,
3919,3921−3923,3925,3927,3929,3931,
3933,3935,3937,3939,3941,3943,
3945−3947,3949,3952−3954,3956,3959,
3961,3963,3965,3967−3968,3971−3972,
3974−3976,3978−3980,3984,3986,3988,
3990−3992,3995,3997,3999,4001,4003,
4006,4008,4010−4015,4017,4019,4021,
4023,4026−4028,4030,4032−4035,4037,
4043,4046,4049,4051,4053,4055,4057,
4059,4061,4063−4066,4068,4070,4072,
Page A29
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

34600K9600 A A320 4075,4077,4079,4081,4083−4084,4086,

4088,4090,4092−4095,4097−4098,
4100−4102,4104−4106,4108−4111,4113,
4115,4117−4120,4122,4124,4126,4128,
4130,4133,4135,4137,4139−4140,
4143−4147,4149−4150,4152−4154,
4156−4162,4165,4167−4168,4170,4172,
4174−4179,4181,4183,4185−4188,
4190−4191,4193,4195−4197,4199,
4201−4203,4205−4208,4210,4212,4214,
4216,4218−4220,4223,4225−4226,4229,
4231−4250,4252−4253,4255,4257,
4260−4261,4263−4265,4267,4269−4270,
4272−4273,4276,4278−4279,4281,4284,
4286,4288−4291,4293−4298,4300,
4302−4310,4312,4314,4316−4317,
4320−4326,4328−4331,4333,4335,4337,
4339−4340,4342−4351,4354−4357,4359,
4361−4368,4370−4373,4375−4376,
4378−4379,4381,4383−4384,4386,4388,
4390−4402,4404−4405,4407−4409,
4411−4415,4417,4419,4421,4423−4424,
4426,4429,4431−4436,4438−4443,
4445−4450,4453−4454,4456−4460,
4462−4466,4468−4469,4471,4473−4493,
4495−4499,4501−4502,4504−4510,
4512−4521,4523−4528,4531−4533,
4535−4537,4539−4541,4543−4544,
4546−4559,4561−4562,4564−4569,
4571−4576,4578−4582,4584,4586−4589,
4591−4597,4599−4604,4606,4608−4610,
4612−4616,4618−4621,4623,4625,
4627−4628,4630−4634,4636−4637,4639,
4641−4642,4644−4647,4649,4651−4653,
4655−4659,4661,4664,4666,4668,
4670−4671,4673−4678,4680−4681,
4683−4690,4692,4694,4696−4697,
4699−4702,4704,4707−4709,4711−4712,
4714−4716,4718,4720−4727,4729−4730,
4733,4735−4736,4738−4743,4745,
4747−4752,4754,4757−4758,4760,
4762−4763,4765,4767,4769−4770,4772,
4775−4777,4780,4782,4784,4786,4789,
4791,4793−4795,4797−4800,4802−4810,
4812−4818,4820−4821,4823,4825,
4827−4829,4831−4833,4835−4836,
4839−4840,4844−4845,4848−4849,
4851−4855,4857−4858,4860−4862,
4864−4870,4872,4874,4876−4877,
4879−4880,4882−4884,4886−4892,
4894−4897,4899−4900,4902−4909,
4911−4915,4917−4922,4924,4926−4931,
4933−4934,4936−4939,4941−4944,
4946−4948,4950−4955,4958−4959,4961,
4963−4965,4967−4970,4972−4975,
Page A30
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

34600K9600 A A320 4977−4991,4993,4996−4997,4999−5004,

5006−5008,5010−5017,5019−5022,5024,
5026−5027,5029−5034,5036−5037,5039,
5041−5042,5045−5048,5050−5053,
5055−5056,5058,5060−5064,5066−5073,
5075−5076,5078,5080−5082,5084,5086,
5089−5096,5098,5100−5104,5106−5117,
5120−5123,5125,5127−5129,5131−5132,
5134−5153,5155−5156,5158−5159,
5161−5163,5165−5168,5170−5172,
5174−5176,5178−5179,5181−5185,
5187−5191,5194−5196,5198,5200−5204,
5206−5207,5209,5211−5218,5220−5226,
5228−5232,5234,5236,5238,5240,
5242−5243,5245−5246,5248−5250,
5252−5253,5255,5258−5260,5262−5264,
5266,5268,5270,5272,5274,5276,5278,
5281,5283,5288−5291,5296,5298−5299,
5301−5302,5304−5305,5307−5308,
5310−5313,5315−5316,5318−5320,
5322−5326,5329,5331,5333−5335,5337,
5339,5341−5342,5344,5347−5349,
5351−5353,5355−5356,5358−5365,5367,
5369−5373,5375,5378−5379,5381,5384,
5386−5387,5390−5391,5393−5399,5401,
5403,5405,5407−5408,5410−5411,
5414−5417,5419−5421,5423,5425−5426,
5428−5431,5433−5434,5436−5437,
5440−5443,5446,5448−5449,5452−5455,
5458,5460−5461,5463−5464,5466,5468,
5471−5474,5476−5477,5479−5480,
5482−5484,5486−5489,5491−5494,
5496−5499,5501−5503,5505−5508,
5510−5512,5514−5518,5520−5522,
5525−5527,5530−5533,5536−5537,
5539−5542,5544,5547−5548,5550−5554,
5556−5557,5559−5562,5564−5566,5568,
5570−5572,5574,5576−5581,5583,
5585−5587,5589−5593,5595−5602,
5604−5605,5607−5608,5610−5622,
5624−5632,5634−5635,5637−5643,
5645−5646,5648−5649,5651−5654,
5656−5658,5660−5662,5664−5666,
5668−5669,5671−5673,5675−9999

Page A31
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

34600K9600 B A320 1728,1730,1732,1735−1736,1739,1741,

1744,1747,1749,1751,1754−1755,1760,
1762,1764,1767,1769,1771,1773,1775,
1777,1782,1787,1789,1792−1793,1797,
1799,1804,1809,1812,1816,1818,1825,
1829,1835,1838,1840,1842,1847,1849,
1852,1854,1856,1858,1861−1862,
1864−1865,1867,1871,1873−1874,1883,
1885,1888,1891−1892,1894−1896,1898,
1900,1902−1904,1906−1907,1909−1911,
1913−1915,1917−1918,1920,1922,1924,
1927,1929,1931,1933,1935,1937,1940,
1942,1944−1945,1948−1949,1951,1954,
1957−1958,1961,1964−1965,1968−1969,
1973,1975,1979,1981,1983,1987,1989,
1992−1993,1996,1998,2001,2003,2006,
2009,2011,2014,2016,2018,2020,2022,
2024,2027,2029,2031,2034,2036,2038,
2040,2042,2044,2046,2048−2049,2054,
2056,2058,2061,2063,2065,2068,2070,
2073,2075,2077,2079,2082,2084−2085,
2088,2090,2092,2094,2097,2099,2102,
2104,2106,2108,2112,2114,2116,2118,
2121,2123,2125,2128,2130,2132−2169,
2171,2173,2175,2177−2178,2180,
2182−2183,2185,2187,2189,2191,2193,
2195,2197,2199,2201,2204,2206−2207,
2210,2212,2215,2217,2219,2221,2223,
2225,2227,2229,2231,2233,2235,
2238−2239,2242,2244,2246,2248,2250,
2252,2254,2256−2257,2259,2272,
2274−2275,2278,2280,2282,2284,2286,
2288,2291−2292,2294,2297,2299,2301,
2307,2310,2312,2314,2316,2322,2325,
2327,2329,2331,2334,2336,2338,2340,
2343,2345,2347,2349,2352,2354,2356,
2359,2361,2364,2366,2368,2372,2374,
2376,2384,2386,2388,2390−2391,2393,
2395,2397,2399,2401,2403,2405,2407,
2409,2411,2413,2415,2417,2419,
2422−2423,2425,2428,2430,2432,2434,
2437,2439,2441,2443,2445,2447,2449,
2451,2453,2455,2457,2459,2461,2475,
2478−2479,2482,2484,2486,2489,2491,
2493,2496,2498,2500,2502,2504,2506,
2509,2511,2513,2515,2517,2520,2522,
2524,2526,2529,2531,2533,2535,2537,
2539−2540,2542,2562,2564,2566,2569,
2571,2573,2576−2577,2580,2583−2584,
2587,2589,2591,2594,2596,2598,2600,
2602,2604,2606,2608−2609,2612−2613,
2616,2619−2620,2623,2626−2627,2630,
2633,2635,2637,2640,2642,2645,2647,
2649,2651,2654,2656,2658,2661,2663,
2665,2668,2670−2671,2674,2676,2678,
Page A32
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

34600K9600 B A320 2680,2683,2685,2688−2689,2692,

2695−2696,2699,2701,2703,2705,2708,
2710,2712,2714,2717,2719,2721,
2724−2725,2728,2731−2732,2734,2737,
2740,2743,2745,2747,2749,2752−2753,
2755,2758,2760−2761,2764,2766,2768,
2770,2772,2775−2776,2778,2781,2783,
2785,2787,2789,2791−2792,2794,2796,
2798,2800,2802,2804,2807−2808,2810,
2814,2816−2817,2820,2822,2824,2826,
2828,2830,2832,2834−2835,2838,2840,
2842,2844,2846,2848,2851,2853,
2855−2856,2859,2861,2863,2865,2867,
2869,2871,2874−2875,2877,2880−2881,
2883,2885
36606K10593 A320 2896−9999

Page A33
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

36606K10593 A A320 2896,2899−2900,2902,2904,2906,

2908−2909,2911,2914−2915,2917,2920,
2922,2924,2926,2928,2930,2932,2934,
2937,2939,2941,2943−2945,2947,2950,
2952−2953,2956,2958,2960,2962,2964,
2966,2968,2970,2973,2975,2977,2980,
2982,2984,2986−2995,2998,3000,3002,
3004,3006,3008,3010,3012,3014,3016,
3018,3021,3023,3025,3027,3029,3031,
3033,3035,3037,3039−3040,3042,3044,
3047−3048,3050,3052,3055−3056,3058,
3060,3063−3064,3066,3068,3071−3072,
3074,3076,3079−3080,3083,3086−3087,
3089,3091,3093,3095,3097,3099,3101,
3103,3105,3107,3109,3111,3113,3115,
3117,3119−3121,3123,3125,3127,3129,
3131−3132,3135−3136,3138,3140−3141,
3143,3145,3147−3162,3164,3166−3167,
3170,3173−3174,3177−3178,3180,
3182−3183,3185,3187,3189−3190,3192,
3194,3196−3197,3199,3201,3203,
3205−3206,3208,3210−3211,3213,3215,
3218−3219,3221,3223−3224,3227−3228,
3230,3232,3234,3236−3237,3239−3240,
3242,3244,3246,3256−3257,3259,3261,
3263−3264,3266,3268,3270,3272−3273,
3275,3277−3278,3280,3282,3284,
3286−3287,3289,3291,3293,3295−3296,
3299,3301,3303−3304,3306,3308,3310,
3312−3314,3316,3318−3319,3321,3323,
3325,3327−3328,3330,3332,3335,
3337−3338,3341,3343,3345,3348−3349,
3351,3353−3354,3357,3359,3361−3362,
3365−3366,3368,3370,3373−3374,3376,
3378−3379,3381,3383−3384,3386,3389,
3391−3392,3394,3396,3398,3400,3402,
3404,3408−3410,3412,3414,3416,3418,
3420,3422−3423,3425,3427,3430−3431,
3433,3435,3437,3439−3440,3444,3446,
3448−3449,3451,3453,3455−3457,
3460−3461,3464−3465,3468,3470,
3472−3490,3492,3494−3497,3499,
3501−3503,3505−3506,3508,3510−3511,
3514−3517,3519,3521,3524,3526,
3528−3529,3531−3532,3535−3536,3538,
3540−3541,3543,3545,3547,3549−3550,
3553−3554,3556,3558−3559,3562−3563,
3565,3567−3568,3570,3572,3574,
3576−3577,3579,3581−3582,3591,3594,
3596−3599,3601,3603,3605,3607,
3609−3611,3613,3616,3618,3621−3622,
3624,3626−3628,3630−3631,3640−3641,
3643−3644,3646,3648−3650,3652,3654,
3656,3658−3659,3662,3664,3666−3668,
3670,3672,3674,3676−3677,3679,3690,
Page A34
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

36606K10593 A A320 3692−3693,3695−3699,3701,3703,

3706−3707,3709,3711,3713−3716,
3718−3719,3721,3723−3724,3726,3729,
3731−3732,3734,3736,3739,3741,3743,
3745,3747−3748,3750,3753,3755−3756,
3758,3760,3762,3765,3767,3769,3771,
3773,3775−3778,3780−3783,3785−3787,
3789,3791,3793,3795,3797−3798,3800,
3802,3804−3805,3807,3809,3811−3813,
3815,3817,3819,3821,3823,3825,3827,
3829,3831,3833,3835,3837,3840,3843,
3846,3848,3850,3852,3855,3857,3859,
3861,3863,3866,3868,3870−3871,3873,
3875,3877,3880,3882−3883,3885,3887,
3889,3891,3894,3896,3898,3900,3902,
3904,3906−3910,3912−3913,3915,3917,
3919,3921−3923,3925,3927,3929,3931,
3933,3935,3937,3939,3941,3943,
3945−3947,3949,3952−3954,3956,3959,
3961,3963,3965,3967−3968,3971−3972,
3974−3976,3978−3980,3984,3986,3988,
3990−3992,3995,3997,3999,4001,4003,
4006,4008,4010−4015,4017,4019,4021,
4023,4026−4028,4030,4032−4035,4037,
4043,4046,4049,4051,4053,4055,4057,
4059,4061,4063−4066,4068,4070,4072,
4075,4077,4079,4081,4083−4084,4086,
4088,4090,4092−4095,4097−4098,
4100−4102,4104−4106,4108−4111,4113,
4115,4117−4120,4122,4124,4126,4128,
4130,4133,4135,4137,4139−4140,
4143−4147,4149−4150,4152−4154,
4156−4162,4165,4167−4168,4170,4172,
4174−4179,4181,4183,4185−4188,
4190−4191,4193,4195−4197,4199,
4201−4203,4205−4208,4210,4212,4214,
4216,4218−4220,4223,4225−4226,4229,
4231−4250,4252−4253,4255,4257,
4260−4261,4263−4265,4267,4269−4270,
4272−4273,4276,4278−4279,4281,4284,
4286,4288−4291,4293−4298,4300,
4302−4310,4312,4314,4316−4317,
4320−4326,4328−4331,4333,4335,4337,
4339−4340,4342−4351,4354−4357,4359,
4361−4368,4370−4373,4375−4376,
4378−4379,4381,4383−4384,4386,4388,
4390−4402,4404−4405,4407−4409,
4411−4415,4417,4419,4421,4423−4424,
4426,4429,4431−4436,4438−4443,
4445−4450,4453−4454,4456−4460,
4462−4466,4468−4469,4471,4473−4493,
4495−4499,4501−4502,4504−4510,
4512−4521,4523−4528,4531−4533,
4535−4537,4539−4541,4543−4544,
4546−4559,4561−4562,4564−4569,
Page A35
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

36606K10593 A A320 4571−4576,4578−4582,4584,4586−4589,

4591−4597,4599−4604,4606,4608−4610,
4612−4616,4618−4621,4623,4625,
4627−4628,4630−4634,4636−4637,4639,
4641−4642,4644−4647,4649,4651−4653,
4655−4659,4661,4664,4666,4668,
4670−4671,4673−4678,4680−4681,
4683−4690,4692,4694,4696−4697,
4699−4702,4704,4707−4709,4711−4712,
4714−4716,4718,4720−4727,4729−4730,
4733,4735−4736,4738−4743,4745,
4747−4752,4754,4757−4758,4760,
4762−4763,4765,4767,4769−4770,4772,
4775−4777,4780,4782,4784,4786,4789,
4791,4793−4795,4797−4800,4802−4810,
4812−4818,4820−4821,4823,4825,
4827−4829,4831−4833,4835−4836,
4839−4840,4844−4845,4848−4849,
4851−4855,4857−4858,4860−4862,
4864−4870,4872,4874,4876−4877,
4879−4880,4882−4884,4886−4892,
4894−4897,4899−4900,4902−4909,
4911−4915,4917−4922,4924,4926−4931,
4933−4934,4936−4939,4941−4944,
4946−4948,4950−4955,4958−4959,4961,
4963−4965,4967−4970,4972−4975,
4977−4991,4993,4996−4997,4999−5004,
5006−5008,5010−5012,5015−5017,
5019−5021,5024,5026−5027,5029−5031,
5033−5034,5036−5037,5039,5042,
5045−5048,5050,5052−5053,5055−5056,
5058,5060,5062−5064,5066−5070,
5072−5073,5075−5076,5078,5080−5081,
5084,5086,5089−5090,5092−5096
36624K10584 A320 2896−9999
36624K10584 A A320 2896−5218
36733K10862 A320 2930−9999
38520K11784 A320 3568−3570,3576−3591,3596−3597,
3599−3605,3610−3621,3624,3628,3641,
3646−3648,3650−3656,3664,3667−3692,
3696,3698,3701,3706,3715−3719,
3729−3731,3734−3739,3743,3747−3748,
3753,3756−3758,3762−3769,3775−3777,
3782−3783,3791−3798,3804−3805,
3812−3813,3821,3825−3827,3833,3837,
3843,3848,3852−3855,3859,3863,
3870−3875,3883,3887,3898,3908,3915,
3919,3929,3935,3939,3943,3954

Page A36
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

38520K11784 A A320 3568−3570,3576−3591,3596−3597,

3599−3605,3610−3621,3624,3628,3641,
3646−3648,3650−3656,3664,3667−3692,
3696,3698,3701,3706,3715−3719,
3729−3731,3734−3739,3743,3747−3748,
3753,3756−3758,3762−3769,3775−3777,
3782−3783,3791−3798,3804−3805,3809,
3812−3813,3821,3825−3827,3833,3837,
3843,3848,3852−3855,3859,3863,
3870−3875,3883,3887,3896−3900,3904,
3907,3909−3910,3913−3919,3922,3925,
3929−3931,3935−3946,3949,3953,
3959−3967,3971,3974−3975,3979−3988,
3991−4010,4012−4014,4017−4028,
4032−4053,4057,4061−4064,4068−4070,
4088−4090,4095,4098,4106,4109,
4111−4113
38520K11784 B A320 3568−3570,3576−3591,3596−3597,
3599−3605,3610−3621,3624,3628,3641,
3646−3648,3650−3656,3664,3667−3692,
3696,3698,3701,3706,3715−3719,
3729−3731,3734−3739,3743,3747−3748,
3753,3756−3758,3762−3769,3775−3777,
3782−3783,3791−3798,3804−3805,3809,
3812−3813,3821,3825−3827,3833,3837,
3843,3848,3852−3855,3859,3863,
3870−3875,3883,3887,3896−3900,3904,
3907,3909−3910,3913−3919,3922,3925,
3929−3931,3935−3946,3949,3953,
3959−3967,3971,3974−3975,3979−3988,
3991−4030,4033−4053,4057−4064,
4068−4070,4079−4090,4095−4106,
4110−4115,4118,4120−4122,4126−4130,
4135−4140,4144−4149,4153−4159,
4161−4162,4167−4172,4175−4183,
4186−4193,4196−4197,4202−4210,
4214−4220,4225−4229,4232−4235,
4239−4243,4245,4247−4248,4250−4264,
4267−4269,4272,4276−4298,4300−4304,
4309−4310

Page A37
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

38520K11784 C A320 3568−3570,3576−3591,3596−3597,

3599−3605,3610−3621,3624,3628,3641,
3646−3648,3650−3656,3664,3667−3692,
3696,3698,3701,3706,3715−3719,
3729−3731,3734−3739,3743,3747−3748,
3753,3756−3758,3762−3769,3775−3777,
3782−3783,3791−3798,3804−3805,3809,
3812−3813,3821,3825−3827,3833,3837,
3843,3848,3852−3855,3859,3863,
3870−3875,3883,3887,3896−3900,3904,
3907,3909−3910,3913−3919,3922,3925,
3929−3931,3935−3946,3949,3953,
3959−3967,3971,3974−3975,3979−3988,
3991−4030,4033−4053,4057−4064,
4068−4070,4079−4090,4095−4106,
4110−4115,4118,4120−4122,4126−4130,
4135−4140,4144−4149,4153−4159,
4161−4162,4167−4172,4175−4183,
4186−4193,4196−4197,4202−4210,
4214−4220,4225−4229,4232−4235,
4239−4243,4245,4247−4248,4250−4264,
4267−4269,4272,4276−4304,4307,
4309−4312,4316−4317,4321−4322,
4324−4330,4333−4343,4345−4346,
4348−4350,4354−4365,4367−4370,
4375−4381,4384−4386,4390,4392,4396,
4398−4399,4401−4415,4421−4431,
4433−4438,4440,4443−4445,4447,
4449−4450,4456−4458,4460−4463,4466,
4469−4474,4477−4479,4481−4484,
4486−4489,4491−4497,4501−4510,
4513−4515,4524−4527

Page A38
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

38520K11784 D A320 3567−3570,3576−3591,3596−3597,

3599−3605,3611−3621,3624,3628,3641,
3646−3648,3650−3656,3664,3667−3692,
3696,3698,3701,3706,3715−3719,
3729−3731,3734−3739,3743,3747−3748,
3753,3756−3758,3762−3769,3775−3777,
3782−3783,3791−3798,3804−3805,3809,
3812−3813,3821,3825−3827,3833,3837,
3843,3848,3852−3855,3859,3863,
3870−3875,3883,3887,3896−3900,3904,
3907,3909−3910,3913−3919,3922,3925,
3929−3931,3935−3946,3949,3953,
3959−3967,3971,3974−3975,3979−3988,
3991−4030,4033−4053,4057−4064,
4068−4070,4079−4090,4095−4106,
4110−4115,4118,4120−4122,4126−4130,
4135−4140,4144−4149,4153−4159,
4161−4162,4167−4172,4175−4183,
4186−4193,4196−4197,4202−4210,
4214−4220,4225−4229,4232−4235,
4239−4243,4245,4247−4248,4250−4264,
4267−4269,4272,4276−4304,4307,
4309−4312,4316−4317,4321−4322,
4324−4330,4333−4343,4345−4346,
4348−4350,4354−4365,4367−4370,
4375−4381,4384−4386,4390,4392,4396,
4398−4399,4401−4415,4421−4431,
4433−4438,4440,4443−4445,4447−4450,
4456−4463,4466−4475,4477−4484,
4486−4491,4493−4497,4502−4508,
4510−4515,4518−4519,4521,4524−4527,
4531−4535,4537−4541,4547−4548,4550,
4552−4562,4565−4571,4573−4575,4580,
4582−4584,4587−4593,4595−4596,4599,
4601−4610,4613−4616,4619−4620,4623,
4627,4630−4633,4636−4646,4652−4655,
4658−4659,4664−4668,4671,4674−4677,
4680,4685−4688,4690,4694−4696,
4699−4711,4714,4718−4723,4726−4733,
4739−4740,4743−4757,4760−4765,4769,
4772−4789,4793−4794,4797−4814,4816,
4818−4821,4825−4833,4836,4840−4852,
4854−4891,4894−4895,4897−4903,
4905−4920,4922−4933,4936−4942,
4944−4951,4954−4970,4973,4977−5000,
5002,5004−5020,5022−5024,5027−5036,
5039−5058,5061−5064,5067−5068,
5070−5073,5076−5084,5089−5094,5096,
5102−5107,5109,5111−5112,5114,
5116−5120,5122,5127,5129,5132,
5135−5138,5140,5143−5147,5149−5150,
5153−5156,5159−5161,5166,5168,
5171−5175,5179−5182,5185−5191,
5195−5196,5200−5201,5203,5207

Page A39
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

38520K11784 E A320 3568−3570,3576−3591,3596−3597,

3599−3605,3610−3621,3624,3628,3641,
3646−3648,3650−3656,3664,3667−3692,
3696,3698,3701,3706,3715−3719,
3729−3731,3734−3739,3743,3747−3748,
3753,3756−3758,3762−3769,3775−3777,
3782−3783,3791−3798,3804−3805,3809,
3812−3813,3821,3825−3827,3833,3837,
3843,3848,3852−3855,3859,3863,
3870−3875,3883,3887,3896−3900,3904,
3907,3909−3910,3913−3919,3922,3925,
3929−3931,3935−3946,3949,3953,
3959−3967,3971,3974−3975,3979−3988,
3991−4030,4033−4053,4057−4064,
4068−4070,4079−4090,4095−4106,
4110−4115,4118,4120−4122,4126−4130,
4135−4140,4144−4149,4153−4159,
4161−4162,4167−4172,4175−4183,
4186−4193,4196−4197,4202−4210,
4214−4220,4225−4229,4232−4235,
4239−4243,4245,4247−4248,4250−4264,
4267−4269,4272,4276−4304,4307,
4309−4312,4316−4317,4321−4322,
4324−4330,4333−4343,4345−4346,
4348−4350,4354−4365,4367−4370,
4375−4381,4384−4386,4390,4392,4396,
4398−4399,4401−4415,4421−4431,
4433−4438,4440,4443−4445,4447−4450,
4456−4463,4466−4475,4477−4484,
4486−4491,4493−4497,4502−4508,
4510−4515,4518−4519,4521,4524−4527,
4531−4535,4537−4541,4547−4548,4550,
4552−4562,4565−4571,4573−4575,4580,
4582−4584,4587−4593,4595−4596,4599,
4601−4610,4613−4616,4619−4620,4623,
4627,4630−4633,4636−4646,4652−4655,
4658−4659,4664−4668,4671,4674−4677,
4680,4685−4688,4690,4694−4696,
4699−4711,4714,4718−4723,4726−4733,
4739−4740,4743−4757,4760−4765,4769,
4772−4789,4793−4794,4797−4814,4816,
4818−4821,4825−4833,4836,4840−4852,
4854−4891,4894−4895,4897−4903,
4905−4920,4922−4933,4936−4942,
4944−4951,4954−4970,4973,4977−5000,
5002,5004−5020,5022−5024,5027−5036,
5039−5058,5061−5064,5067−5068,
5070−5073,5076−5094,5096,5100,
5102−5106,5108,5110−5114,5116−5122,
5127,5129−5138,5140−5141,5143−5147,
5149−5166,5168−5176,5179−5183,
5185−5195,5198−5203,5206−5207,
5211−5212,5214−5221,5223−5228,
5230−5232,5236−5238,5242−5262,
5264−5301,5304−5311,5313−5315,
Page A40
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

38520K11784 E A320 5318−5323,5325−5341,5344−5347,

5351−5363,5365,5369−5399,5403−5405,
5410−5416,5419−5420,5423−5442,
5446−5452,5454−5463,5466−5473,
5476−5482,5484,5487−5492,5494−5499,
5502−5517,5520−5521,5524−5525,
5527−5532,5537,5540−5547,5550−5553,
5556−5557,5560−5564,5566−5568,5571,
5574−5577,5579,5589,5592−5598,
5600−5602,5605,5611,5619−5620,
5622−5625,5627−5630,5632,5635,
5638−5639,5641,5643−5645,5651−5652,
5656−5658,5661−5665,5669−5672,
5679−5682

Page A41
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

38520K11784 F A320 3568−3570,3576−3591,3596−3597,

3599−3605,3610−3621,3624,3628,3641,
3646−3648,3650−3656,3664,3667−3692,
3696,3698,3701,3706,3715−3719,
3729−3731,3734−3739,3743,3747−3748,
3753,3756−3758,3762−3769,3775−3777,
3782−3783,3791−3798,3804−3805,3809,
3812−3813,3821,3825−3827,3833,3837,
3843,3848,3852−3855,3859,3863,
3870−3875,3883,3887,3896−3900,3904,
3907,3909−3910,3913−3919,3922,3925,
3929−3931,3935−3946,3949,3953,
3959−3967,3971,3974−3975,3979−3988,
3991−4030,4033−4053,4057−4064,
4068−4070,4079−4090,4095−4106,
4110−4115,4118,4120−4122,4126−4130,
4135−4140,4144−4149,4153−4159,
4161−4162,4167−4172,4175−4183,
4186−4193,4196−4197,4202−4210,
4214−4220,4225−4229,4232−4235,
4239−4243,4245,4247−4248,4250−4264,
4267−4269,4272,4276−4304,4307,
4309−4312,4316−4317,4321−4322,
4324−4330,4333−4343,4345−4346,
4348−4350,4354−4365,4367−4370,
4375−4381,4384−4386,4390,4392,4396,
4398−4399,4401−4415,4421−4431,
4433−4438,4440,4443−4445,4447−4450,
4456−4463,4466−4475,4477−4484,
4486−4491,4493−4497,4502−4508,
4510−4515,4518−4519,4521,4524−4527,
4531−4535,4537−4541,4547−4548,4550,
4552−4562,4565−4571,4573−4575,4580,
4582−4584,4587−4593,4595−4596,4599,
4601−4610,4613−4616,4619−4620,4623,
4627,4630−4633,4636−4646,4652−4655,
4658−4659,4664−4668,4671,4674−4677,
4680,4685−4688,4690,4694−4696,
4699−4711,4714,4718−4723,4726−4733,
4739−4740,4743−4757,4760−4765,4769,
4772−4789,4793−4794,4797−4814,4816,
4818−4821,4825−4833,4836,4840−4852,
4854−4891,4894−4895,4897−4903,
4905−4920,4922−4933,4936−4942,
4944−4951,4954−4970,4973,4977−5000,
5002,5004−5020,5022−5024,5027−5036,
5039−5058,5061−5064,5067−5068,
5070−5073,5076−5094,5096−5100,
5102−5106,5108,5110−5114,5116−5122,
5127,5129−5138,5140−5141,5143−5147,
5149−5166,5168−5176,5179−5183,
5185−5195,5198−5203,5206−5207,
5211−5212,5214−5221,5223−5228,
5230−5232,5236−5238,5242−5262,
5264−5301,5304−5311,5313−5315,
Page A42
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

38520K11784 F A320 5318−5323,5325−5341,5344−5347,5351−5

363,5365,5369−5399,5403−5405,5410−54
16,5419−5420,5423−5442,5446−5452,545
4−5473,5476−5482,5484,5487−5492,5494
−5499,5502−5517,5520−5525,5527−5532,
5537,5540−5547,5550−5553,5556−5557,5
560−5564,5566−5568,5571,5574−5577,55
79,5589,5592−5602,5605,5611−5612,561
8−5619,5622−5632,5635−5641,5645−5653
,5656−5658,5661−5665,5668−5672,5675−
5676,5679−5685,5687−5691,5693−5706,5
710−5713,5716−5722,5724−5727,5730−57
32,5735−5746,5750,5754−5762,5766−578
0,5785,5793−5799,5802−5814,5816−5817
,5819,5822−5844,5846−5853,5857−5858,
5861−5869,5871,5875−5878,5880,5885,5
888−5889,5892−5897,5900−5901,5905,59
08−5923,5927,5930−5935,5945,5951−595
2,5957,5962

Page A43
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

38520K11784 G A320 1112−1114,1134,1141,1148,1171,1210,

1224,1264,1268,1286,1294−1298,
1310−1314,1330,1357,1361,1422,1532,
1542,1561,1639,1721,1889,1906,1911,
1942,1954,1961−1965,1973,1981,2003,
2022,2034−2036,2046,2049−2061,
2068−2073,2079,2085−2090,2094,
2112−2114,2130,2135,2139,2142,2148,
2153,2155,2162,2171−2173,2182−2183,
2189,2199,2212,2219−2221,2227−2229,
2235−2239,2244,2252,2257,2274−2275,
2291−2292,2297−2299,2316−2322,2329,
2334,2338,2343−2345,2354−2356,2361,
2395−2397,2401−2403,2413,2423,2428,
2437,2443−2445,2451−2459,2475−2478,
2484,2493−2502,2506,2511,2515−2517,
2522,2526,2531−2533,2537−2539,2562,
2569,2573−2576,2584−2587,2591−2594,
2600,2604−2609,2616−2620,2626−2627,
2637,2642,2651−2654,2658,2663−2665,
2670,2674,2680,2685,2689,2695−2696,
2701−2703,2708,2714−2719,2731,
2740−2743,2747,2753,2758,2766−2775,
2778,2787−2792,2796,2800,2808,
2817−2824,2830,2834−2835,2840,
2844−2846,2851−2856,2861−2865,2874,
2877,2883,2899,2908−2917,2922,2928,
2934−2937,2941−2943,2950,2958−2960,
2966−2968,2973−2975,2980,2984−2986,
2990−2991,2993−2994,2998,3004−3006,
3010−3012,3016,3021,3025−3027,3031,
3037,3042,3048−3050,3055−3056,3060,
3068,3086−3089,3093,3097−3107,3113,
3121−3123,3131−3135,3147−3149,3153,
3155,3158−3160,3162,3167−3170,
3183−3189,3192,3196−3197,3205−3210,
3215,3219−3221,3224−3227,3230,
3234−3236,3239,3242−3244,3256−3259,
3264,3268−3275,3282,3286,3289−3291,
3296−3299,3303−3312,3316,3323,3327,
3330−3341,3349,3353,3357−3359,
3365−3370,3374,3378−3379,3383,
3386−3389,3392−3394,3398,3402−3408,
3414,3418,3422,3427,3431−3437,3440,
3448−3449,3453−3461,3465,3472,3474,
3477,3480−3481,3483,3485−3487,3489,
3495−3497,3503−3510,3514,3516,
3521−3524,3528,3536−3538,3541−3543,
3547−3549,3553,3558−3559,3567−3570,
3576−3591,3596−3597,3599−3605,
3610−3621,3624,3628,3641,3646−3648,
3650−3656,3664,3667−3692,3696,3698,
3701,3706,3715−3719,3729−3731,
3734−3739,3743,3747−3748,3753,
3756−3758,3762−3769,3775−3777,
Page A44
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

38520K11784 G A320 3782−3783,3791−3798,3804−3805,3809,

3812−3813,3821,3825−3827,3833,3837,
3843,3848,3852−3855,3859,3863,
3870−3875,3883,3887,3896−3900,3904,
3907,3909−3910,3913−3919,3922,3925,
3929−3931,3935−3946,3949,3953,
3959−3967,3971,3974−3975,3979−3988,
3991−4030,4033−4053,4057−4064,
4068−4070,4079−4090,4095−4106,
4110−4115,4118,4120−4122,4126−4130,
4135−4140,4144−4149,4153−4159,
4161−4162,4167−4172,4175−4183,
4186−4193,4196−4197,4202−4210,
4214−4220,4225−4229,4232−4235,
4239−4243,4245,4247−4248,4250−4264,
4267−4269,4272,4276−4304,4307,
4309−4312,4316−4317,4321−4322,
4324−4330,4333−4343,4345−4346,
4348−4350,4354−4365,4367−4370,
4375−4381,4384−4386,4390,4392,4396,
4398−4399,4401−4415,4421−4431,
4433−4438,4440,4443−4445,4447−4450,
4456−4463,4466−4475,4477−4484,
4486−4491,4493−4497,4502−4508,
4510−4515,4518−4519,4521,4524−4527,
4531−4535,4537−4541,4547−4548,4550,
4552−4562,4565−4571,4573−4575,4580,
4582−4584,4587−4593,4595−4596,4599,
4601−4610,4613−4616,4619−4620,4623,
4627,4630−4633,4636−4646,4652−4655,
4658−4659,4664−4668,4671,4674−4677,
4680,4685−4688,4690,4694−4696,
4699−4711,4714,4718−4723,4726−4733,
4739−4740,4743−4757,4760−4765,4769,
4772−4789,4793−4794,4797−4814,4816,
4818−4821,4825−4833,4836,4840−4852,
4854−4891,4894−4895,4897−4903,
4905−4920,4922−4933,4936−4942,
4944−4951,4954−4970,4973,4977−5000,
5002,5004−5020,5022−5024,5027−5036,
5039−5058,5061−5064,5067−5068,
5070−5073,5076−5094,5096−5100,
5102−5106,5108,5110−5114,5116−5122,
5127,5129−5138,5140−5141,5143−5147,
5149−5166,5168−5176,5179−5183,
5185−5195,5198−5203,5206−5207,
5211−5212,5214−5221,5223−5228,
5230−5232,5236−5238,5242−5262,
5264−5301,5304−5311,5313−5315,
5318−5323,5325−5341,5344−5347,
5351−5363,5365,5369−5399,5403−5405,
5410−5416,5419−5420,5423−5442,
5446−5452,5454−5473,5476−5482,5484,
5487−5492,5494−5499,5502−5517,
5520−5525,5527−5532,5537,5540−5547,
Page A45
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

38520K11784 G A320 5550−5553,5556−5557,5560−5564,

5566−5568,5571,5574−5577,5579,5589,
5592−5602,5605,5611−5612,5618−5619,
5622−5632,5635−5641,5645−5653,
5656−5658,5661−5665,5668−5672,
5675−5676,5679−5685,5687−5691,
5693−5706,5708−5713,5716−5722,
5724−5727,5730−5732,5735−5746,5750,
5754−5762,5766−5780,5785,5793−5799,
5802−5814,5816−5817,5819,5822−5844,
5846−5853,5857−5858,5861−5869,5871,
5874−5878,5880,5885−5901,5903−5918,
5923,5927−5928,5930−5948,5951−5957,
5962−5964,5971−5973,5976,5979−5981,
5985,5990−5993,5996−6000,6004−6008,
6011−6014,6017,6021,6023,6032−6037

Page A46
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

38520K11784 H A320 3568,3570,3576−3577,3579,3581−3582,

3591,3596−3597,3599,3601,3603,3605,
3610−3611,3613,3616,3618,3621,3624,
3628,3641,3646,3648,3650,3652,3654,
3656,3664,3667−3668,3670,3672,3674,
3676−3677,3679,3690,3692,3696,3698,
3701,3706,3715−3716,3718−3719,3729,
3731,3734,3736,3739,3743,3747−3748,
3753,3756,3758,3762,3765,3767,3769,
3775−3777,3782−3783,3791,3793,3795,
3797−3798,3804−3805,3809,3812−3813,
3821,3825,3827,3833,3837,3843,3848,
3852,3855,3859,3863,3870−3871,3873,
3875,3883,3887,3896,3898,3900,3904,
3907,3909−3910,3913,3915,3917,3919,
3922,3925,3929,3931,3935,3937,3939,
3941,3943,3945−3946,3949,3953,3959,
3961,3963,3965,3967,3971,3974−3975,
3979−3980,3984,3986,3988,3991−3992,
3995,3997,3999,4001,4003,4006,4008,
4010−4015,4017,4019,4021,4023,
4026−4028,4030,4033−4035,4037,4043,
4046,4049,4051,4053,4057,4059,4061,
4063−4064,4068,4070,4079,4081,
4083−4084,4086,4088,4090,4095,
4097−4098,4100−4102,4104−4106,
4110−4111,4113,4115,4118,4120,4122,
4126,4128,4130,4135,4137,4139−4140,
4144−4147,4149,4153−4154,4156−4159,
4161−4162,4167−4168,4170,4172,
4175−4179,4181,4183,4186−4188,
4190−4191,4193,4196−4197,4202−4203,
4205−4208,4210,4214,4216,4218−4220,
4225−4226,4229,4232−4235,4239−4243,
4245,4247−4248,4250,4252−4253,4255,
4257,4260−4261,4263−4264,4267,4269,
4272,4276,4278−4279,4281,4284,4286,
4288−4291,4293−4298,4300,4302−4304,
4307,4309−4310,4312,4316−4317,
4321−4322,4324−4326,4328−4330,4333,
4335,4337,4339−4340,4342−4343,
4345−4346,4348−4350,4354−4357,4359,
4361−4365,4367−4368,4370,4375−4376,
4378−4379,4381,4384,4386,4390,4392,
4396,4398−4399,4401−4402,4404−4405,
4407−4409,4411−4415,4421,4423−4424,
4426,4429,4431,4433−4436,4438,4440,
4443,4445,4447−4450,4456−4460,
4462−4463,4466,4468−4469,4471,
4473−4475,4477−4484,4486−4491,4493,
4495−4497,4502,4504−4508,4510,
4512−4515,4518−4519,4521,4524−4527,
4531−4533,4535,4537,4539−4541,
4547−4548,4550,4552−4559,4561−4562,
4565−4569,4571,4573−4575,4580,4582,
Page A47
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

38520K11784 H A320 4584,4587−4589,4591−4593,4595−4596,

4599,4601−4604,4606,4608−4610,
4613−4616,4619−4620,4623,4627,
4630−4633,4636−4637,4639,4641−4642,
4644−4646,4652−4653,4655,4658−4659,
4664,4666,4668,4671,4674−4677,4680,
4685−4688,4690,4694,4696,4699−4702,
4704,4707−4709,4711,4714,4718,
4720−4723,4726−4727,4729−4730,4733,
4739−4740,4743,4745,4747−4752,4754,
4757,4760,4762−4763,4765,4769,4772,
4775−4777,4780,4782,4784,4786,4789,
4793−4794,4797−4800,4802−4810,
4812−4814,4816,4818,4820−4821,4825,
4827−4829,4831−4833,4836,4840,
4844−4845,4848−4849,4851−4852,
4854−4855,4857−4858,4860−4862,
4864−4870,4872,4874,4876−4877,
4879−4880,4882−4884,4886−4891,
4894−4895,4897,4899−4900,4902−4903,
4905−4909,4911−4915,4917−4920,4922,
4924,4926−4931,4933,4936−4939,
4941−4942,4944,4946−4948,4950−4951,
4954−4955,4958−4959,4961,4963−4965,
4967−4970,4973,4977−4991,4993,
4996−4997,4999−5000,5002,5004,
5006−5008,5010−5017,5019−5020,5022,
5024,5027,5029−5034,5036,5039,
5041−5042,5045−5048,5050−5053,
5055−5056,5058,5061−5064,5067−5068,
5070−5073,5076,5078,5080−5082,5084,
5086,5089−5094,5096,5098,5100,
5102−5104,5106,5108,5110−5114,
5116−5117,5120−5122,5127,5129,
5131−5132,5134−5138,5140−5141,
5143−5147,5149−5153,5155−5156,
5158−5159,5161−5163,5165−5166,5168,
5170−5172,5174−5176,5179,5181−5183,
5185,5187−5191,5194−5195,5198,
5200−5203,5206−5207,5211−5212,
5214−5218,5220−5221,5223−5226,5228,
5230−5232,5236,5238,5242−5243,
5245−5246,5248−5250,5252−5253,5255,
5258−5260,5262,5264,5266,5268,5270,
5272,5274,5276,5278,5281,5283,
5288−5291,5296,5298−5299,5301,
5304−5305,5307−5308,5310−5311,5313,
5315,5318−5320,5322−5323,5325−5326,
5329,5331,5333−5335,5337,5339,5341,
5344,5347,5351−5353,5355−5356,
5358−5363,5365,5369−5373,5375,
5378−5379,5381,5384,5386−5387,
5390−5391,5393−5399,5403,5405,
5410−5411,5414−5416,5419−5420,5423,
5425−5426,5428−5431,5433−5434,
Page A48
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

38520K11784 H A320 5436−5437,5440−5442,5446,5448−5449,

5452,5454−5455,5458,5460−5461,
5463−5464,5466,5468,5471−5473,
5476−5477,5479−5480,5482,5484,
5487−5489,5491−5492,5494,5496−5499,
5502−5503,5505−5508,5510−5512,
5514−5517,5520−5522,5524−5525,5527,
5530−5532,5537,5540−5542,5544,5547,
5550−5553,5556−5557,5560−5562,5564,
5566,5568,5571,5574,5576−5577,5579,
5589,5592−5593,5595−5602,5605,
5611−5612,5618−5619,5622,5624−5632,
5635,5637−5641,5645−5646,5648−5649,
5651−5653,5656−5658,5661−5662,
5664−5665,5668−5669,5671−5672,
5675−5676,5679−5680,5682−5683,5685,
5687−5688,5690−5691,5693−5695,5697,
5701−5703,5706,5708,5710−5713,
5716−5719,5721−5722,5724−5727,
5730−5732,5735,5737−5742,5744,5746,
5750,5754,5756−5757,5759−5760,5762,
5766,5769,5771−5773,5775−5778,5780,
5785,5793−5794,5796−5797,5799,5802,
5804−5807,5809,5811−5814,5816−5817,
5819,5822−5824,5828−5833,5835,5837,
5839−5841,5844,5846−5848,5850−5853,
5857−5858,5861−5864,5866−5867,5869,
5871,5874−5875,5877−5878,5880,5885,
5887−5889,5891−5894,5896−5898,
5900−5901,5903,5905−5906,5908,
5911−5912,5914−5915,5917−5918,5923,
5926−5928,5930−5931,5933−5935,5937,
5940,5942−5943,5945,5951−5952,5954,
5956−5957,5959,5962,5964,5971−5972,
5976−5977,5979,5981,5984,5986,5988,
5990,5992−5993,5996−5997,5999−6000,
6003−6004,6006−6008,6010−6012,
6014−6015,6018−6019,6021,6023,6025,
6030,6032−6034,6036,6041,6047−6048,
6050−6051,6054,6057,6061−6062,6064,
6069,6072−6073,6075−6076,6078,6080,
6082,6084,6088,6092,6095−6096,
6102−6103,6105−6107,6109−6113,
6117−6118,6120,6123−6125,6127−6128,
6136−6137,6139−6142,6145,6147,6149,
6151,6153,6158,6161,6164,6166,
6169−6170,6173,6176−6178,6180,6182,
6184,6187−6189,6192−6193,6197−6198,
6200,6202,6204,6206−6209,6212−6213,
6215−6218,6220,6223−6225,6228−6229,
6231,6234,6237,6239−6240,6242−6243,
6246−6248,6251,6254,6257−6260,6262,
6265,6267,6270,6274−6275,6278,
6280−6285,6287−6289,6292−6293,
6296−6297,6300−6302,6304,6306,6309,
Page A49
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

38520K11784 H A320 6311,6315,6317,6321−6323,6325,6327,

6331−6333,6335−6336,6338,6340,6343,
6348,6356,6360−6361
38552K11749 A320 3572−3574,3594−3596,3598,3607−3609,
3622,3626−3627,3630−3640,3643−3644,
3649,3658−3662,3666,3668,3695,3697,
3699,3703,3707−3713,3718,3721−3723,
3726,3731−3741
38552K11749 A A320 3568−9999
38552K11749 B A320 3572−3574,3594,3598,3607−3609,3622,
3626−3627,3630−3640,3643−3644,3649,
3658−3662,3666,3693−3695,3697,3699,
3703,3707−3714,3721−3726,3732,3741,
3745,3750,3755,3760,3771−3773,
3778−3781,3785−3789,3800−3802,3807,
3811,3815−3819,3823,3829−3831,3835,
3840,3846,3850,3857,3861,3866−3868,
3877−3882,3885,3889−3894,3902,3906,
3908,3912,3921,3923,3927,3933,3947,
3952,3954−3956,3968,3972,3976−3978,
3990,4032,4055,4065−4066,4072−4077,
4092−4094,4108−4109,4117,4119,4124,
4133,4143,4150−4152,4160,4165,4174,
4185,4195,4199−4201,4212,4223,4231,
4236−4238,4244,4246,4249,4265,4270,
4273,4305−4306,4308,4314,4320,4323,
4331,4344,4347,4351,4366,4371−4373,
4383,4388,4391,4393−4395,4397,4400,
4417−4419,4432,4439,4441−4442,4446,
4448,4453−4454,4459,4464,4468,
4475−4476,4480,4485,4490,4498−4499,
4512,4516−4521,4528−9999
38552K11749 C A320 3568−6209
151639K15020 A320 5220−5316,5319−5347,5349−5375,
5379−5405,5408−5411,5416−5429,5431,
5440−9999
151639K15020 A A320 5220−9999
153007K15376 A320 4652,4677−4709,4712−5218
153007K15376 A A320 1728−1755,1760−1777,1782,1787−1799,
1804,1809−1812,1816−1818,1825,1829,
1835−1842,1847−1856,1858,1861−1867,
1871−1874,1883−1888,1891−1898,
1900−9999
153007K15376 B A320 1728−1755,1760−1777,1782,1787−1799,
1804,1809−1812,1816−1818,1825,1829,
1835−1842,1847−1856,1858,1861−1867,
1871−1874,1883−1888,1891−1898,
1900−5522,5525−5677,9004

Page A50
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

153007K15376 C A320 5013−5014,5022,5032,5041,5051,5061,

5071,5082,5091,5098,5100−5104,
5106−5117,5120−5123,5125,5127−5129,
5131−5132,5134−5153,5155−5156,
5158−5159,5161−5163,5165−5168,
5170−5172,5174−5176,5178−5179,
5181−5185,5187−5191,5194−5196,5198,
5200−5204,5206−5207,5209,5211−5218,
5220−5226,5228−5232,5234,5236,5238,
5240,5242−5243,5245−5246,5248−5250,
5252−5253,5255,5258−5260,5262−5264,
5266,5268,5270,5272,5274,5276,5278,
5281,5283,5288−5291,5296,5298−5299,
5301−5302,5304−5305,5307−5308,
5310−5313,5315−5316,5318−5320,
5322−5326,5329,5331,5333−5335,5337,
5339,5341−5342,5344,5347−5349,
5351−5353,5355−5356,5358−5365,5367,
5369−5373,5375,5378−5379,5381,5384,
5386−5387,5390−5391,5393−5399,5401,
5403,5405,5407−5408,5410−5411,
5414−5417,5419−5421,5423,5425−5426,
5428−5431,5433−5434,5436−5437,
5440−5443,5446,5448−5449,5452−5455,
5458,5460−5461,5463−5464,5466,5468,
5471−5474,5476−5477,5479−5480,
5482−5484,5486−5489,5491−5494,
5496−5499,5501−5503,5505−5508,
5510−5512,5514−5518,5520−5522,
5525−5527,5530−5533,5536−5537,
5539−5542,5544,5547−5548,5550−5554,
5556−5557,5559−5562,5564−5566,5568,
5570−5572,5574,5576−5581,5583,
5585−5587,5589−5593,5595−5602,
5604−5605,5607−5608,5610−5622,
5624−5632,5634−5635,5637−5643,
5645−5646,5648−5649,5651−5654,
5656−5658,5660−5662,5664−5666,
5668−5669,5671−5673,5675−5677
153007K15376 D A320 5013−5677
154490K15400 A320 6030−9999
154655K16305 A320 5524,5679−9999

Page A51
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structural Arrangement
Figure 1

Page A52
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

VERTICAL STABILIZER

CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE

REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN IN
THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO
PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

1. General

This topic is deleted and superseded by specific topics:

− for the leading edge of the vertical stabilizer refer to Chapter
55−32−11,
− for the trailing edge of the vertical stabilizer refer to Chapter
55−33−13,
− for the fin tip of the vertical stabilizer refer to Chapter 55−34−11.

This data is necessary to find the correct repair procedure. The allowable
damage and related data for the spar box is given in Chapter 55−31−00.
NOTE: For definition of allowable damage refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For Damage/Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

2. Damage Evaluation

Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.
3. Delamination Damage

The two types of delamination damage which can occur to the composite
structure are as follows:

A. Impact Delamination
This is when the structure is hit by an object and separation is usual
ly caused between many of the plies.

B. Non−Impact Delamination

This is when separation occurs between two plies for a reason other than
when it is hit by an object.
4. The Distance Between Damaged Areas

There is a minimum permitted distance between areas of delamination and be

tween repair areas. The dimension for this distance is given in the appli
cable allowable damage and repair limits figure. If you have less than the
permitted distance between delaminated or repair areas, work on them to

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

gether as one large damaged area. Refer to Figure 102 to find out how to
measure the distance between delaminated or repaired areas.
5. Repair Zones

Each of the components of the vertical stabilizer structure is divided into

repair zones. These repair zones show the zones of different structural im

portance of the component. When you do a damage evaluation (Refer to Para

graph 2.), you must refer to the repair zone data. The repair zone data
for the leading edge, trailing edge and tip is given in Figures 103 thru
106. The repair zone data for the spar box structure is given in Chapter
55−31−00.

6. Allowable Damage

Allowable damage is damage that does not affect the necessary strength or
function of a component. You do not have to repair this type of damage. If
this damage has rough or sharp edges, smooth these out with the correct
abrasive cloth. Replace the surface paint, if necessary.

A. The allowable damage data for the leading edge, trailing edge and tip is
given in Figures 117 thru 135. The allowable damage data for the spar
box structure is given in Chapter 55−31−00.

B. The allowable damage data for cracks running parallel to the leading
edge rib joint is given in Figure 136 and is effective as given in
Table 101.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 101
NOTE: Refer to Table 1 given in the introduction of the SRM, to find all
the necessary information related to the Weight Variant and their
maximum values and the Modification associated to the Aircraft
Type.

7. Repair Limits
The repair limits data gives the time limits in which to make temporary
and permanent repairs. These time limits are given in flight hours (FH).
The repair limits also tell if it is necessary to make a room temperature
(RT) or hot−bond repair. To find the above given repair limits data appli

cable to a damaged area, you must know the subsequent data:
− the repair zone applicable to the damaged area,
− the area, length or depth (as applicable) of the damage to the structure,
− the type of damage (for example abrasion, delamination, scratch),
− the type of structure (for example monolithic or honeycomb).

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 Nov 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

The repair limits data for the leading edge, trailing edge and tip is givÈ
en in Figures 117 thru 135. The repair-limits data for the spar box is
given in Chapter 55-31-00.

Printed in Germany
55-30-00 Feb
Page 103
01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Leading Edge, Tip and Trailing Edge - Layout

Figure 101

Printed in Germany
55-30-00 Feb
Page 104
01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ITEM NAME Refer to the following figures for details of allow

able damage and repair limits according to damage
type
SCRATCHES IMPACT AND OTHER IMPACT ABRASIONS,
AND/OR DELAMINATIONS DELAMINATIONS SCRATCHES,
ABRASIONS WITHOUT VISIBLE WITH CRACKS WRINKLES,
CRACKS AND/OR AND/OR HOLES DEBONDING,
HOLES DENTS AND/OR
CRACKS ONLY
FOR THE
STEEL COVER
121
117 119 INACTIVE
Leading Edge 1, INACTIVE INACTIVE 122 135
1
2 and 3 <3> INACTIVE INACTIVE
118 120 136
INACTIVE INACTIVE INACTIVE
129 131 133
−
INACTIVE INACTIVE INACTIVE
2 Tip <1>
130 132 134
−
INACTIVE INACTIVE INACTIVE
123, 125, 127
−
INACTIVE INACTIVE INACTIVE
3 Trailing Edge <2>
124 126 128
−
INACTIVE INACTIVE INACTIVE
Key to Figure 101
<1> No further application for fin tip. Refer to Chapter 55−34−11.

<2> No further application for trailing edge. Refer to Chapter 55−33−13.

<3> No further application for leading edge. Refer to Chapter 55−32−11.

Page 105
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

How to measure the Distance between damaged Areas

Figure 102

Printed in Germany
55-30-00 Feb
Page 106
01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Zones for Leading Edges 1, 2, 3

Figure 103

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 PagesAug107/108
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Zones for Trailing Edge Access Panels 1 and 2

Figure 104

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 PagesAug109/110
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Zones for Trailing Edge Access Panels 3 and 4

Figure 105

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 PagesAug111/112
01/14
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Zones for Tip

Figure 106

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 PagesAug113/114
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Lay−up Data for Zone A

Figure 107

Repair Lay−up Data for Zone B

Figure 108

Page 115
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Lay−up Data for Zone C

Figure 109

Page 116
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Lay−up Data for Zone D

Figure 110

Page 117
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Lay−up Data for Zone E

Figure 111

Page 118
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Lay−up Data for Zone F

Figure 112

Repair Lay−up Data for Zone G

Figure 113

Page 119
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Lay−up Data for Zone H

Figure 114

Page 120
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Lay−up Data for Zone J

Figure 115

Page 121
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Lay−up Data for Zone K

Figure 116 (sheet 1)

Page 122
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Lay−up Data for Zone L

Figure 116 (sheet 2)

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Leading Edge Zones C and E
Figure 117

Page 123
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Leading Edge Zone A
Figure 118

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Leading Edge Zones C and E
Figure 119

Page 124
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Leading Edge Zone A
Figure 120

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Leading Edge Zones C and E
Figure 121

Page 125
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Leading Edge Zone A
Figure 122

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Trailing Edge Zones B, C, J and K
Figure 123

Page 126
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Trailing Edge Zones A and G
Figure 124

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Trailing Edge Zones B, C, J and K
Figure 125

Page 127
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Trailing Edge Zones A and G
Figure 126

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Trailing Edge Zones B, C, J and K
Figure 127

Page 128
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Trailing Edge Zones A and G
Figure 128

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Tip Zones C and D
Figure 129

Page 129
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Tip Zone A

Figure 130

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Tip Zones C and D
Figure 131

Page 130
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Tip Zone A

Figure 132

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Tip Zones C and D
Figure 133

Page 131
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Tip Zone A

Figure 134

Page 132
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 Aug 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable and Repairable Damage Limits for the Leading Edge with Steel Cover
in Zone ’M’ and ’N’ with surface Damage
Figure 135

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 PagesAug133/134
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Leading Edge Zones C and E
Figure 136

NOTE: Figure 136 is effective as given in Table 101.

Printed in Germany
55−30−00 PagesAug135/136
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

VERTICAL STABILIZER

1. General

A. This topic is deleted and superseded by specific topics:

− for the leading edge of the vertical stabilizer refer to Chapter
55−32−11,
− for the trailing edge of the vertical stabilizer refer to Chapter
55−33−13,
− for the tip of the vertical stabilizer refer to Chapter 55−34−11.

Refer to Table 201 to find the repair scheme for these repair proce

dures. For general repair data applicable to composite structures, refer
to Chapter 51−77−00. The appropriate repairs are described in more detail
in the relevant Chapter.

NOTE: Refer to each repair to determine the repair applicability.

NOTE: For Damage/Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

B. There are also specific repair procedures for the vertical stabilizer
components in the subsequent repair subjects:
− Chapter 55−31−11 Spar Box − Vertical Stabilizer,
− Chapter 55−31−12 Ribs,
− Chapter 55−31−18 Spars,
− Chapter 55−31−19 Miscellaneous Structure,
− Chapter 55−32−00 Vertical Stabilizer Leading−Edge,
− Chapter 55−33−00 Vertical Stabilizer Trailing−Edge,
− Chapter 55−34−00 Vertical Stabilizer Tip.

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 Nov 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

2. Safety Precautions

There are risks to you and other persons when you work with composite re

pair materials. To prevent risks, read and obey the warnings given below:

WARNING: OBEY THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS WHEN YOU USE CLEANING AGENTS,
ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND PAINTS. THESE MATERIALS ARE DANGEROUS.

WARNING: WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND FILTER MASK WHEN YOU CUT,
ABRADE OR DRILL COMPOSITE MATERIALS. THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MA

TERIALS CAN GET INTO YOUR LUNGS OR ONTO YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE YOU
INJURY. IMMEDIATELY REMOVE DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.

WHEN YOU WORK WITH CFRP COMPOSITE MATERIALS IMMEDIATELY REMOVE
DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.
WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRIC POWER ON
THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST ONLY USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIRS CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE REFER

TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN IN THE
INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

3. Repair Scheme

REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE

Repair of Delamination or Impact Delamination 9.A. 201
which does not show Cracks or Holes in Zone INACTIVE INACTIVE
’A’ <1> <2> <3>
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks and Holes 9.B. 202
in Zone ’A’ <1> <2> <3> INACTIVE INACTIVE
Repair of Abrasions or Scratches in Zone ’A’ 9.C. 203
<1> <2> <3> INACTIVE INACTIVE
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes and 9.D. 204
Honeycomb Damage in Zone ’A’ <1> <2> <3> INACTIVE INACTIVE

Table 201

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 Nov 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE

Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes, 9.E. 205
Abrasions, Scratches or Delamination Damage in INACTIVE INACTIVE
Zone ’C’ <1> <2> <3>
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes and 9.F. 206
Honeycomb Damage in Zone ’C’ <1> <2> <3> INACTIVE INACTIVE

Table 201
<1> No further application for tip − vertical stabilizer. Refer to Chapter
55−34−11.

<2> No further application for trailing edge − vertical stabilizer. Refer to

Chapter 55−33−13.

<3> No further application for leading edge − vertical stabilizer. Refer to

Chapter 55−32−11.

4. Damage Evaluation
Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

5. Types of Repairs
There are three groups of repairs for the Aircraft structure:
− permanent repairs,
− temporary repairs,
− permanent repairs after temporary repairs.

A. Permanent Repairs
You can find the permanent repair procedures, if applicable, in the spe

cific Chapters.

There are three types of permanent repairs for the vertical stabilizer
structure. These are as follows:

(1) Laminate Repair

To make a laminate repair, you must use one of the subsequent proce

dures:
− The hot−bond laminate repair procedure,
− The room−temperature (RT) laminate repair procedure.

NOTE: You must make the laminate repairs contained in this topic un

der vacuum conditions (minimum 80%). For room temperature (RT)
laminate repairs, this vacuum condition is necessary only for
the initial 3 hours (minimum) of the curing process. Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11 for data.

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 Nov 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(2) Pre−cured Repair

To make a pre−cured type repair, you must make the repair pieces
from pre−cured composite materials. These repair pieces are then at

tached to the aircraft structure with fasteners. For a pre−cured re

pair, the repair adhesive is only used as a shim. Refer to Chapter
51−77−11 for general data about pre−cured repair procedures.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is used as a shim material to a maximum

thickness of 1.5 mm (0.059 in.).

(3) Delamination Repair with Fasteners

This type of permanent repair uses fasteners to hold the delaminated

layers inside the composite material together and prevent an increase
in the delaminated area.
B. Temporary Repair

You can find the temporary repair procedures, if applicable, in the spe

cific Chapters. You must only make a temporary repair, if you have these
conditions:
− you do not have the correct materials to make a permanent repair,
− you do not have the time to make a permanent repair.
C. Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair

You can find the permanent repair after temporary repair procedures, if
applicable, in the specific Chapters. You must make a permanent repair
after temporary repair in the given flight hour (FH) limit. Refer to the
applicable allowable damage and repair limits data to find this FH lim

it.

6. Special Tools

To work with composite materials, it is necessary to use special tools.

Here are some examples:
− explosion proof tools are necessary if CFRP dust is caused,
− tools to cut or drill pre−cured CFRP materials must have very hard cut

ting edges (for example cutting wheels with diamond edges and twist−drills
made from high−speed steel),
− tools to drill composite materials must have specially shaped cutting
edges.

Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 3.C. to find data about all the tools
and equipment necessary to make composite repairs.

7. Repair Materials

A. General

All of the materials necessary to make a repair are shown in the appli

cable repair materials list (Refer to Paragraph 9.).

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 Nov 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

B. Pre−cured CFRP Materials

Some of the specific repairs to the vertical stabilizer have a numbered

reference to pre−cured section or sheet materials. The Materiel Support
Centre can supply these materials. Refer to Chapter 55−31−00, Figures 203
and 204 for data. Before you use pre−cured CFRP materials supplied by
the Materiel Support Centre, you must make a visual inspection of them.
Before you use pre−cured CFRP materials not supplied by the Materiel
Support Centre, you must make a nondestructive test (NDT) inspection of
them.

NOTE: If you make the pre−cured CFRP materials yourself, make sure that
the pre−impregnated sheets are in their correct lay−up sequence.
The lay−up sequence is given by the repair zones and related data.
8. Repair Environment

Before you make a permanent repair, make sure that you have the correct
environmental conditions (for example, when the aircraft is in a warm and
dry aircraft hangar). It is important that the repair environment is clean
and has a constant room temperature during the repair procedure.
9. Vertical Stabilizer − Repairs

A. Repair of Delamination or Impact Delamination which does not show Cracks

or Holes in Zone ’A’

NOTE: You can use this repair procedure for the leading edge, trailing
edge and the tip of the vertical stabilizer.
NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

Page 205
Printed in Germany
55−30−00 Nov 01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

(1) Repair
Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Bonding
and
Adhesive
Com
pound
(Lamination
Resin)
− Bonding
and
Adhesive
Com
pound
(Epoxy
Resin)
− Special
Material
(Microbal
loons)
− Cleaning
Agent
− Bonding
and
Adhesive
Com
pound
(Masking
Tape)
− Glass
Fabric
(dry)
− Epoxy
Prepreg,
Glass
Fabric
− Epoxy
Prepreg,
Glass
Fabric
− Backing
Material
− Parting
Film
− Abrasive
Cloth
(2) Permanent
Repair
(Refer
to
Figure
201)
AR Material
No.
08−001C
(Refer
to
Chapter
51−35−00)
AR Material
No.
08−051
(Refer
to
Chapter
51−35−00)
AR Material
No.
05−057
(Refer
to
Chapter
51−35−00)
AR Material
No.
11−003
or
11−004
(Refer
to
Chapter
51−35−00)
AR Material
No.
08−074
(Refer
to
Chapter
51−35−00)
AR Refer
to
Chapter
51−77−11,
Para
graph
6.B.(8)
AR LN
29549−8.4321.1A−EP
(Refer
to
Chapter
51−33−00)
AR LN
29549−8.4321.2A−EP
(Refer
to
Chapter
51−33−00)
AR Hostaphan
foil
RN75
or
equiva
lent
AR E−3760
AR Grade
200,
400

WARNING: THE
DUST
FROM
COMPOSITE
MATERIALS
IS
DANGEROUS.

CAUTION: ONLY
USE
A
MECHANICAL
PROCEDURE
TO
REMOVE
THE
SURFACE
PROTECTION.
REFER
TO
CHAPTER
51−77−11,
PARAGRAPH
4.D.
FOR
FULL
DATA.
(a) Remove
the
surface
protection
from
the
repair
area.

(b) Abrade
the
delaminated
layers
to
remove
the
delamination
damage.
Abrade
the
repair
area
into
a
smooth
regular
shape
(Refer
to
Figure
201).
(c) Remove
unwanted
material
from
the
repair
area
with
a
vacuum
cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING
AGENT
(MATERIAL
NO.
11−003)
IS
DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING
AGENT
(MATERIAL
NO.
11−004)
IS
DANGEROUS.
(d) Clean
the
repair
area
with
the
cleaning
agent
(Material
No.
11−003
or
11−004).

Page
206




55−30−00 Aug
01/05
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

(e) Put
some
bonding
and
adhesive
compound
(masking
tape)
(Material
No.
08−074)
around
the
outer
edge
of
the
overlap
area
(Refer
to
Figure
201).
This
will
help
you
to
remove
unwanted
adhesive
from
the
repair
area.

(f) When
all
the
composite
layers
are
removed
after
step
(b),
you
must
obey
these
instructions.

WARNING: SPECIAL
MATERIAL
(MATERIAL
NO.
05−057)
IS
DANGEROUS.
WARNING: BONDING
AND
ADHESIVE
COMPOUND
(MATERIAL
NO.
08−051)
IS
DANGEROUS.

1 Mix
the
bonding
and
adhesive
compound
(epoxy
resin)
(Material
No.
08−051)
with
special
material
(microballoons)
(Material
No.
05−057).
2 Put
the
mixed
adhesive
paste
into
the
honeycomb
core
(Refer
to
Figure
201).

3 Make
the
mixed
adhesive
paste
smooth
with
the
surface
of
the
honeycomb
core
(Refer
to
Figure
201).
4 Let
the
adhesive
cure
for
24
hours
at
room
temperature
(RT).

NOTE: If
a
cure
time
of
less
than
24
hours
is
necessary,
refer
to
Chapter
51−77−11,
Paragraph
4.A.
for
data.

WARNING: CLEANING
AGENT
(MATERIAL
NO.
11−003)
IS
DANGEROUS.
WARNING: CLEANING
AGENT
(MATERIAL
NO.
11−004)
IS
DANGEROUS.

5 Clean
the
repair
area
with
cleaning
agent
(Material
No.
11−003
or
11−004).

(g) Find
out
the
number
of
dry−fabric
layers
necessary
to
make
the
room
temperature
repair
(Refer
to
Figure
201).
(h) Get
the
correct
dry−fabric
material
(Refer
to
Chapter
55−30−00,
Figure
107.)

NOTE: Also
refer
to
Chapter
55−30−00,
Figure
107
for
the
pre−im
pregnated
sheet
data
necessary
to
make
the
hot−bonded
repair
(125
C°
(257.0
F°)).
(i) Prepare
the
repair
layers
(Refer
to
Chapter
51−77−11,
Paragraph
4.H.).

NOTE: Refer
to
Chapter
51−77−11,
Paragraph
4.C.
for
data
about
the
preparation
and
laying−up
of
pre−impregnated
fabric
sheet.

Page
207




55−30−00 Aug
01/05
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

WARNING: BONDING
AND
ADHESIVE
COMPOUND
(MATERIAL
NO.
08−001C)
IS
DAN
GEROUS.
(j) Apply
a
layer
of
bonding
and
adhesive
compound
(lamination
resin)
(Material
No.
08−001C)
to
the
repair
area
with
a
brush
or
a
spatula.

(k) Remove
the
backing
material
from
one
side
of
the
first
repair
layer.
(l) Put
the
first
repair
layer
in
its
repair
position.
Remove
wrinkles
or
air
bubbles
with
a
roller.
Do
this
from
the
center
of
the
repair
layer
to
the
edges.

(m) Remove
the
backing
material
from
the
other
side
of
the
repair
layer.
(n) Do
the
steps
(j)
thru
(m)
for
each
repair
layer
necessary
for
the
room
temperature
repair.
Cover
the
repair
with
a
layer
of
parting
film.

(o) Let
the
lamination
resin
cure
for
24
hours
at
room
temperature
under
vacuum
conditions.

NOTE: If
a
cure
time
of
less
than
24
hours
is
necessary,
refer
to
Chapter
51−77−11,
Paragraph
4.A.
for
data.

(p) After
the
cure
time,
remove
the
parting
film,
masking
tape
and
unwanted
adhesive
from
the
repair
area.
Use
abrasive
cloth
to
smooth
area
of
repair
at
outside
by
grinding
careful
only
outer
cover
layer
(Ply
No.
0)
and
equalize
surface
to
contour.
Use
200
grade
first
and
then
finish
with
400
grade.

WARNING: CLEANING
AGENT
(MATERIAL
NO.
11−003)
IS
DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING
AGENT
(MATERIAL
NO.
11−004)
IS
DANGEROUS.
(q) Clean
the
repair
area
with
the
cleaning
agent
(Material
No.
11−003
or
11−004).

(r) Do
an
inspection
of
the
repair
(Refer
to
Chapter
51−77−10,
Para
graph
5.).
(s) Replace
the
initial
type
of
surface
protection
(Refer
to
Chapter
51−75−12.

(3) Temporary
Repair

There
is
no
temporary
repair
applicable.

Page
208




55−30−00 Aug
01/05
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Delamination or Impact Delamination which does not show Cracks or

Holes in Zone 'A'
Figure 201

Printed in Germany
55-30-00 PagesFeb209/210
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

B. Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks and Holes in Zone 'A

NOTE: You can use this repair procedure for the leading edge, trailing
edge and the tip of the vertical stabilizer.
NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51-77-10, Paragraph 3. for data.
(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

- Bonding and Adhesive ComÈ AR Material No. 08-001C (Refer to
pound (Lamination Resin) Chapter 51-35-00)
- Bonding and Adhesive ComÈ AR Material No. 08-051 (Refer to
pound (Epoxy Resin) Chapter 51-35-00)
- Special Material (MicrobalÈ AR Material No. 05-057 (Refer to
loons) Chapter 51-35-00)
- Cleaning Agent AR Material No. 11-003 or 11-004
(Refer to Chapter 51-35-00)
- Bonding and Adhesive ComÈ AR Material No. 08-074 (Refer to
pound (Masking Tape) Chapter 51-35-00)
- Glass Fabric (dry) AR Refer to Chapter 51-77-11, ParaÈ
graph 6.B.(8)
- Epoxy Prepreg, Glass Fabric AR LN 29549-8.4321.1A-EP (Refer to
Chapter 51-33-00)
- Epoxy Prepreg, Glass Fabric AR LN 29549-8.4321.2A-EP (Refer to
Chapter 51-33-00)
- Bonding and Adhesive ComÈ AR Material No. 08-052 (Refer to
pound (Self Adhesive AluÈ Chapter 51-35-00)
minum Tape)
- Backing Material AR Hostaphan foil RN75 or equivaÈ
lent
- Parting Film AR E-3760
- Abrasive Cloth AR Grade 200, 400
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 202)
WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.
CAUTION: ONLY USE A MECHANICAL PROCEDURE TO REMOVE THE SURFACE
PROTECTION. REFER TO CHAPTER 51-77-11, PARAGRAPH 4.D. FOR
FULL DATA.
(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area.
(b) Abrade the damaged material. Cut the damaged skin into a regular
shape (Refer to Figure 202).

Printed in Germany
55-30-00 Feb
Page 211
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(c) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11-003) IS DANGEROUS.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11-004) IS DANGEROUS.
(d) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11-003 or 11-004).
(e) Put some bonding and adhesive compound (masking tape) (Material
No. 08-074) around the outer edge of the overlap area (Refer to
Figure 202). This will help you to remove unwanted adhesive from
the repair area.
WARNING: SPECIAL MATERIAL (MATERIAL NO. 05-057) IS DANGEROUS.
WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08-051) IS DANÈ
GEROUS.
(f) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08-051) with special material (microballons) (Material No.
05-057).
(g) Put the mixed adhesive paste into the honeycomb core (Refer to
Figure 202). Cover the mixed adhesive paste with parting film.
(h) Let the adhesive paste cure for 24 hours at room temperature
(RT).
NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer
to Chapter 51-77-11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.
(i) Remove the parting film and clean the repair area with cleaning
agent (Material No. 11-003 or 11-004).
(j) Make the cured adhesive paste smooth with the outer surface.
(k) Find out the number of dry-fabric layers necessary to make the
room temperature repair (Refer to Figure 202).
(l) Get the correct dry-fabric material (Refer to Chapter 55-30-00,
Figure 107).
NOTE: Also refer to Chapter 55-30-00, Figure 107 for the pre-imÈ
pregnated sheet data necessary to make the hot-bonded repair
(125 C
(257.0 F
)).
(m) Prepare the repair layers (Refer to Chapter 51-77-11, Paragraph
4.H.).
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 51-77-11, Paragraph 4.C. for data about
the preparation and laying-up of pre-impregnated fabric
sheet.

Printed in Germany
55-30-00 Feb
Page 212
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08-001C) IS DANÈ

GEROUS.
(n) Apply a layer of bonding and adhesive compound (lamination resin)
(Material No. 08-001C) to the repair area with a brush or a
spatula.
(o) Remove the backing material from one side of the first repair
layer.
(p) Put the first repair layer in its repair position. Remove
wrinkles or air bubbles with a roller. Do this from the center
of the repair layer to the edges.
(q) Remove the backing material from the other side of the repair
layer.
(r) Do the steps (n) thru (q) for each repair layer necessary for
the room temperature repair. Cover the repair with a layer of
parting film.
(s) Let the repair cure for 24 hours at room temperature under vacuÈ
um conditions.
NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer
to Chapter 51-77-11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.
(t) After the cure time, remove the parting film, masking tape and
any unwanted adhesive from the repair area. Use abrasive cloth to
smooth area of repair at outside by grinding careful only outer
cover - layer (Ply No. 0) and equalize surface to contour. Use
200 grade first and then finish with 400 grade.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11-003) IS DANGEROUS.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11-004) IS DANGEROUS.
(u) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11-003 or 11-004).
(v) Do an inspection of the repair (Refer to Chapter 51-77-10, ParaÈ
graph 5.).
(w) Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter
51-75-12).
(3) Temporary Repair

Printed in Germany
55-30-00 Feb
Page 213
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: REFER TO THE RELATED ALLOWABLE DAMAGE AND REPAIR LIMITS IN

FIGURES 117 THRU 134, TO FIND OUT THE TIME LIMIT FOR THIS
TEMPORARY REPAIR.
ADVISE THE INSPECTION DEPARTMENT THAT A PERMANENT REPAIR IS
REQUIRED WITHIN THE FLIGHT HOURS (FH) GIVEN IN PAGE BLOCK
101.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.
(a) Remove the damaged material which is above the aircraft skin
surface.
(b) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11-003) IS DANGEROUS.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11-004) IS DANGEROUS.
(c) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11-003 or 11-004).
WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08-052) IS DANÈ
GEROUS.
(d) Put a protective layer of bonding and adhesive compound (self
adhesive aluminum tape) (Material No. 08-052) over the repair
area. Smooth out from the center to remove air and press the
edges down tightly.
(e) Do an inspection of the repair.
(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 202)
(a) Remove the bonding and adhesive compound (self adhesive aluminum
tape).
(b) Do all of the repair steps in Paragraph (2) (Permanent Repair).

Printed in Germany
55-30-00 Nov
Page 214
01/04
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks and Holes in Zone 'A'

Figure 202

Printed in Germany
55-30-00 Feb
Page 215
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

C. Repair of Abrasions or Scratches in Zone 'A'

NOTE: You can use this repair procedure for the leading edge, trailing
edge and the tip of the vertical stabilizer.
NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51-77-10, Paragraph 3. for data.
(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

- Bonding and Adhesive ComÈ AR Material No. 08-001C (Refer to
pound (Lamination Resin) Chapter 51-35-00)
- Cleaning Agent AR Material No. 11-003 or 11-004
(Refer to Chapter 51-35-00)
- Bonding and Adhesive ComÈ AR Material No. 08-074 (Refer to
pound (Masking Tape) Chapter 51-35-00)
- Glass Fabric (dry) AR Refer to Chapter 51-77-11, ParaÈ
graph 6.B.(8)
- Epoxy Prepreg, Glass Fabric AR LN 29549-8.4321.1A-EP (Refer to
Chapter 51-33-00)
- Epoxy Prepreg, Glass Fabric AR LN 29549-8.4321.2A-EP (Refer to
Chapter 51-33-00)
- Bonding and Adhesive ComÈ AR Material No. 08-052 (Refer to
pound (Self Adhesive AluÈ Chapter 51-35-00)
minum Tape)
- Backing Material AR Hostaphan foil RN75 or equivaÈ
lent
- Parting Film AR E-3760
- Abrasive Cloth AR Grade 200, 400
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 203)
WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.
CAUTION: ONLY USE A MECHANICAL PROCEDURE TO REMOVE THE SURFACE
PROTECTION. REFER TO CHAPTER 51-77-11, PARAGRAPH 4.D. FOR
FULL DATA.
(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area.
(b) Remove the damaged material and smooth the damaged fibres. Use
abrasive cloth 200 grade to smooth out the scratch (Refer to
Figure 203).
(c) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

Printed in Germany
55-30-00 Feb
Page 216
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11-003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11-004) IS DANGEROUS.
(d) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11-003 or 11-004).
(e) Put some bonding and adhesive compound (masking tape) (Material
No. 08-074) around the outer edge of the overlap area (Refer to
Figure 203). This will help you to remove unwanted adhesive from
the repair area.
(f) Find out the number of dry-fabric layers necessary to make the
room temperature repair (RT) (Refer to Figure 203).
(g) Get the correct dry-fabric material. Refer to Chapter 55-30-00,
Figure 107.
NOTE: Also refer to Chapter 55-30-00, Figure 107 for the pre-imÈ
pregnated sheet data necessary to make the hot-bonded repair
(125 C
(257.0 F
)).
(h) Prepare the repair layers (Refer to Chapter 51-77-11, Paragraph
4.H.).
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 51-77-11, Paragraph 4.C. for data about
the preparation and laying up of pre-impregnated fabric
sheet.
WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08-001C) IS DANÈ
GEROUS.
(i) Apply a layer of bonding and adhesive compound (lamination resin)
(Material No. 08-001C) to the repair area with a brush or a
spatula.
(j) Remove backing material from one side of the first repair layer.
(k) Put the first repair layer in its repair position. Remove
wrinkles or air bubbles with a roller. Do this from the center
of the repair layer to the edges.
(l) Remove the backing material from the other side of the repair
layer.
(m) Do the steps (i) thru (l) for each repair layer necessary for
the room temperature repair. Cover the repair with a layer of
parting film.
(n) Let the lamination resin cure for 24 hours at room temperature
under vacuum conditions.
NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer
to Chapter 51-77-11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.

Printed in Germany
55-30-00 Feb
Page 217
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(o) After the cure time, remove the parting film, masking tape and
any unwanted adhesive from the repair area. Use abrasive cloth to
smooth area of repair at outside by grinding careful only outer
cover - layer (Ply No. 0) and equalize surface to contour. Use
200 grade first and then finish with 400 grade.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11-003) IS DANGEROUS.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11-004) IS DANGEROUS.
(p) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11-003 or 11-004).
(q) Do an inspection of the repair (Refer to Chapter 51-77-10, ParaÈ
graph 5.).
(r) Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter
51-75-12).
(3) Temporary Repair
CAUTION: REFER TO THE RELATED ALLOWABLE DAMAGE AND REPAIR LIMITS IN
FIGURES 117 THRU 134, TO FIND OUT THE TIME LIMIT FOR THIS
TEMPORARY REPAIR.
ADVISE THE INSPECTION DEPARTMENT THAT A PERMANENT REPAIR IS
REQUIRED WIHIN THE FLIGHT HOURS (FH) GIVEN IN PAGE BLOCK
101.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.
(a) Remove the damaged material and smooth the damaged fibres.
(b) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.
(c) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11-003 or 11-004).
WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08-052) IS DANÈ
GEROUS.
(d) Put a protective layer of bonding and adhesive compound (self
adhesive aluminum tape) (Material No. 08-052) over the repair
area. Smooth out from the center to remove air and press the
edges down tightly.
(e) Do an inspection of the repair.
(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 203)
(a) Remove the bonding and adhesive compound (self adhesive aluminum
tape).
(b) Do all of the repair steps in Paragraph (2) (Permanent Repair).

Printed in Germany
55-30-00 Nov
Page 218
01/04
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Abrasions or Scratches in Zone 'A'

Figure 203

Printed in Germany
55-30-00 Feb
Page 219
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

D. Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes and Honeycomb Damage in Zone

'A'
NOTE: You can use this repair procedure for the leading edge, trailing
edge and the tip of the vertical stabilizer.
NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51-77-10, Paragraph 3. for data.
(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

- Bonding and Adhesive ComÈ
pound (Lamination Resin)
- Bonding and Adhesive ComÈ
pound (Epoxy Resin)
- Special Material (MicrobalÈ
loons)
- Honeycomb Hexagonal, Nomex-
Cured
- Honeycomb Hexagonal, Nomex-
Cured
- Cleaning Agent
- Bonding and Adhesive ComÈ
pound (Masking Tape)
- Glass Fabric (dry)
- Epoxy Prepreg, Glass Fabric
- Epoxy Prepreg, Glass Fabric
- Bonding and Adhesive ComÈ
pound (Self Adhesive AluÈ
minum Tape)
- Backing Material
- Parting Film
- Abrasive Cloth
NOTE: Honeycomb LN 29967 A2 is only used for trailing edge repairs.
Honeycomb LN 29967 A4 is only used for leading edge and tip
repairs.
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 204)
AR Material No. 08-001C (Refer to
Chapter 51-35-00)
AR Material No. 08-051 (Refer to
Chapter 51-35-00)
AR Material No. 05-057 (Refer to
Chapter 51-35-00)
AR Material No. LN29967 A2 (Refer
to Chapter 51-33-00)
AR Material No. LN29967 A4 (Refer
to Chapter 51-33-00)
AR Material No. 11-003 or 11-004
(Refer to Chapter 51-35-00)
AR Material No. 08-074 (Refer to
Chapter 51-35-00)
AR Refer to Chapter 51-77-11, ParaÈ
graph 6.B.(8)
AR LN 29549-8.4321.1A-EP (Refer to
Chapter 51-33-00)
AR LN 29549-8.4321.2A-EP (Refer to
Chapter 51-33-00)
AR Material No. 08-052 (Refer to
Chapter 51-35-00)
AR Hostaphan foil RN75 or equivaÈ
lent
AR E-3760
AR Grade 200, 400

Printed in Germany
55-30-00 Feb
Page 220
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

CAUTION: ONLY USE A MECHANICAL PROCEDURE TO REMOVE THE SURFACE
PROTECTION. REFER TO CHAPTER 51-77-11, PARAGRAPH 4.D. FOR
FULL DATA.
(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area.
(b) Remove the damaged material. Cut the skin into a regular shape
(Refer to Figure 204).
(c) Remove the damaged honeycomb core (Refer to Figure 204).
(d) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11-003) IS DANGEROUS.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11-004) IS DANGEROUS.
(e) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11-003 or 11-004).
(f) Put some bonding and adhesive compound (masking tape) (Material
No. 08-074) around the outer edge of the overlap area (Refer to
Figure 204). This will help you to remove unwanted adhesive from
the repair area.
(g) If you have access from one side only, you must make a doubler
(Refer to Figure 204 and Chapter 51-77-11, Paragraph 4.K.(2)).
NOTE: When you have access to both sides of the repair, do the
steps (m) thru (ab) (Refer to Figure 204).
(h) Cut the cured doubler to size (Refer to Figure 204).
WARNING: SPECIAL MATERIAL (MATERIAL NO. 05-057) IS DANGEROUS.
WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08-051) IS DANÈ
GEROUS.
(i) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08-051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05-057).
(j) Put the adhesive paste onto the doubler and then put the doubler
in its repair position (Refer to Figure 204).
(k) Cure the epoxy resin in accordance with Chapter 51-77-11, ParaÈ
graph 5.C..
(l) Make the Nomex honeycomb core plug (Refer to Chapter 51-77-11,
Paragraph 4.I.).

Printed in Germany
55-30-00 Aug
Page 221
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: SPECIAL MATERIAL (MATERIAL NO. 05-057) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08-051) IS DANÈ
GEROUS.
(m) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08-051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05-057).
(n) Fill the honeycomb cells at the joint of the honeycomb plug to
the adjacent honeycomb material with the adhesive paste (Refer to
Figure 204).
(o) Put the Nomex honeycomb core plug in its repair position. The
plug must be level with the aircraft skin.
(p) Let the adhesive paste cure for 24 hours at room temperature.
NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer
to Chapter 51-77-11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11-003) IS DANGEROUS.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11-004) IS DANGEROUS.
(q) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11-003 or 11-004).
(r) Find out the number of dry-fabric layers necessary to make the
room temperature repair (Refer to Figure 204).
(s) Get the correct dry-fabric material (Refer to Chapter 55-30-00,
Figure 107).
NOTE: Also refer to Chapter 55-30-00, Figure 107 for the pre-imÈ
pregnated sheet data necessary to make the hot-bonded repair
(125 C
(257.0 F
)).
(t) Prepare the repair layers (Refer to Chapter 51-77-11, Paragraph
4.H.)
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 51-77-11, Paragraph 4.C. for data about
the preparation and laying up of pre-impregnated fabric
sheet.
WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08-001C) IS DANÈ
GEROUS.
(u) Apply a layer of bonding and adhesive compound (lamination resin)
(Material No. 08-001C) to the repair area with a brush or a
spatula.
(v) Remove the backing material from one side of the first repair
layer.

Printed in Germany
55-30-00 Feb
Page 222
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(w) Put the first repair layer in its repair position. Remove
wrinkles or air bubbles with a roller. Do this from the center
of the repair layer to the edges.
(x) Remove the backing material from the other side of the repair
layer.
(y) Do the steps (v) thru (y) for each repair layer necessary for
the room temperature repair. Cover the repair with a layer of
parting film.
(z) Let the lamination resin cure for 24 hours at room temperature
under vacuum conditions.
NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer
to Chapter 51-77-11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.
(aa)After the cure time remove the parting film, masking tape and
any unwanted adhesive from the repair area. Use abrasive cloth to
smooth area of repair at outside by grinding careful only outer
cover - layer (Ply No. 0) and equalize surface to contour. Use
200 grade first and then finish with 400 grade.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11-003) IS DANGEROUS.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11-004) IS DANGEROUS.
(ab)Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11-003 or 11-004).
(ac)Do an inspection of the repair (Refer to Chapter 51-77-10, ParaÈ
graph 5.).
(ad)Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter
51-75-12).
(3) Temporary Repair
CAUTION: REFER TO THE RELATED ALLOWABLE DAMAGE AND REPAIR LIMITS IN
FIGURES 117 THRU 134, TO FIND OUT THE TIME LIMIT FOR THIS
TEMPORARY REPAIR.
ADVISE THE INSPECTION DEPARTMENT THAT A PERMANENT REPAIR IS
REQUIRED WITHIN THE FLIGHT HOURS (FH) GIVEN IN PAGE BLOCK
101.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.
(a) Remove the damaged material which is above the aircraft skin
surface.
(b) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

Printed in Germany
55-30-00 Feb
Page 223
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11-003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11-004) IS DANGEROUS.
(c) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11-003 or 11-004).
WARNING: SPECIAL MATERIAL (MATERIAL NO. 05-057) IS DANGEROUS.
WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08-051) IS DANÈ
GEROUS.
(d) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08-051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05-057).
(e) Fill the damaged skin and exposed honeycomb material with the
adhesive paste.
(f) Let the adhesive paste cure for 24 hours at room temperature.
NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer
to Chapter 51-77-11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.
(g) After the cure time, use abrasive cloth to smooth area of repair
by grinding careful and equalize surface to contour. Use abrasive
cloth 200 grade first and then finish with 400 grade.
(h) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11-003 or 11-004).
(i) Put a protective layer of bonding and adhesive compound (self
adhesive aluminum tape) over the repair area. Smooth out from the
center to remove air and press the edges down tightly.
(j) Do an inspection of the repair.
(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 204).
(a) Remove the bonding and adhesive compound (self adhesive aluminum
tape) and the filler.
(b) Do all the repair steps in Paragraph (2) (Permanent Repair).

Printed in Germany
55-30-00 Feb
Page 224
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes and Honeycomb Damage in Zone 'A'
Figure 204

Printed in Germany
55-30-00 PagesFeb225/226
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

E. Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes, Abrasions, Scratches or DeÈ

lamination Damage in Zone 'C'
NOTE: You can use this repair procedure for the leading edge and the tip
of the vertical stabilizer.
NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51-77-10, Paragraph 3. for data.
(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

- Bonding and Adhesive ComÈ AR Material No. 08-001C (Refer to
pound (Lamination Resin) Chapter 51-35-00)
- Bonding and Adhesive ComÈ AR Material No. 08-051 (Refer to
pound (Epoxy Resin) Chapter 51-35-00)
- Special Material (MicrobalÈ AR Material No. 05-057 (Refer to
loons) Chapter 51-35-00)
- Cleaning Agent AR Material No. 11-003 or 11-004
(Refer to Chapter 51-35-00)
- Bonding and Adhesive ComÈ AR Material No. 08-074 (Refer to
pound (Masking Tape) Chapter 51-35-00)
- Glass Fabric (dry) AR Refer to Chapter 51-77-11, ParaÈ
graph 6.B.(8)
- Epoxy Prepreg, Glass Fabric AR LN 29549-8.4321.1A-EP (Refer to
Chapter 51-33-00)
- Epoxy Prepreg, Glass Fabric AR LN 29549-8.4321.2A-EP (Refer to
Chapter 51-33-00)
- Bonding and Adhesive ComÈ AR Material No. 08-052 (Refer to
pound (Self Adhesive AluÈ Chapter 51-35-00)
minum Tape)
- Backing Material AR Hostaphan foil RN75 or equivaÈ
lent
- Parting Film AR E-3760
- Abrasive Cloth AR Grade 200, 400
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 205)
WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.
CAUTION: ONLY USE A MECHANICAL PROCEDURE TO REMOVE THE SURFACE
PROTECTION. REFER TO CHAPTER 51-77-11, PARAGRAPH 4.D. FOR
FULL DATA.
(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area.
(b) Remove the damaged material. Cut the skin into a regular shape
and chamfer the undamaged skin into an overlap (Refer to Figure
205).

Printed in Germany
55-30-00 Feb
Page 227
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(c) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11-003) IS DANGEROUS.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11-004) IS DANGEROUS.
(d) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11-003 or 11-004).
(e) Put some bonding and adhesive compound (masking tape) (Material
No. 08-074) around the outer edge of the overlap area (Refer to
Figure 205). This will help you to remove unwanted adhesive from
the repair area.
(f) If total material thickness is removed, you must make an aluminum
backing plate to lay up the repair plies (Refer to Figure 205).
(g) Put parting film over the aluminum backing plate. Use clamps to
attach the backing plate to the repair area (Refer to Figure
205).
(h) Find out the number of dry-fabric layers necessary to make the
room temperature (RT) repair (Refer to Figure 205).
(i) Get the correct dry-fabric material (Refer to Chapter 55-30-00,
Figure 109).
NOTE: Also refer to Chapter 55-30-00, Figure 109 for the pre-imÈ
pregnated sheet data necessary to make the hot-bonded repair
(125 C
(257.0 F
)).
(j) Prepare the repair layers (Refer to Chapter 51-77-11, Paragraph
4.H.).
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 51-77-11, Paragraph 4.C. for data about
the preparation and laying-up of pre-impregnated fabric
sheet.
WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08-001C) IS DANÈ
GEROUS.
(k) Apply a layer of bonding and adhesive compound (lamination resin)
(Material No. 08-001C) to the repair area with a brush or a
spatula.
(l) Remove the backing material from one side of the first repair
layer.
(m) Put the first repair layer in its repair position. Remove
wrinkles or air bubbles with a roller. Do this from the center
of the repair layer to the edges.
(n) Remove the backing material from the other side of the repair
layer.

Printed in Germany
55-30-00 Feb
Page 228
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(o) Do the steps (k) thru (n) for each repair layer necessary for
the room temperature repair. Cover the repair with a layer of
parting film.
(p) Let the lamination resin cure for 24 hours at room temperature
under vacuum conditions.
NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer
to Chapter 51-77-11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.
(q) After the cure time, remove the parting film, masking tape and
any unwanted adhesive from the repair area. Use abrasive cloth to
smooth area of repair at outside by grinding careful only outer
cover - layer (Ply No. 0) and equalize surface to contour. Use
200 grade first and then finish with 400 grade.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11-003) IS DANGEROUS.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11-004) IS DANGEROUS.
(r) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11-003 or 11-004).
(s) Remove the aluminum backing plate from the repair.
(t) Do the steps (h) thru (r) to the other side of the repair (ReÈ
fer to Figure 205).
WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.
(u) Cut the edge of the repair to blend with the existing edge (ReÈ
fer to Figure 205).
(v) Do an inspection of the repair (Refer to Chapter 51-77-10, ParaÈ
graph 5.).
(w) Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter
51-75-12.
(3) Temporary Repair
CAUTION: REFER TO THE RELATED ALLOWABLE DAMAGE AND REPAIR LIMITS IN
FIGURES 117 THRU 134, TO FIND OUT THE TIME LIMIT FOR THIS
TEMPORARY REPAIR.
ADVISE THE INSPECTION DEPARTMENT THAT A PERMANENT REPAIR IS
REQUIRED WITHIN THE FLIGHT HOURS (FH) GIVEN IN PAGE BLOCK
101.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.
(a) Remove the damaged material which is above the aircraft skin
surface.

Printed in Germany
55-30-00 Feb
Page 229
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11-003) IS DANGEROUS.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11-004) IS DANGEROUS.
(c) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11-003 or 11-004).
WARNING: SPECIAL MATERIAL (MATERIAL NO. 05-057) IS DANGEROUS.
WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08-051) IS DANÈ
GEROUS.
(d) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08-051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05-057).
(e) Fill the damaged area with the adhesive paste.
(f) Let the adhesive paste cure for 24 hours at room temperature.
NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer
to Chapter 51-77-11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.
(g) After the cure time, use abrasive cloth to smooth area of repair
by grinding careful and equalize surface to contour. Use abrasive
cloth 200 grade first and then finish with 400 grade.
(h) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11-003 or 11-004).
WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08-052) IS DANÈ
GEROUS.
(i) Put a protective layer of bonding and adhesive compound (self
adhesive aluminum tape) (Material No. 08-052) over the repair
area. Smooth out from the center to remove air and press the
edges down tightly.
(j) Do an inspection of the repair.
(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 205)
(a) Remove the bonding and adhesive compound (self adhesive aluminum
tape) and the filler.
(b) Do all the repair steps in Paragraph (2) (Permanent Repair).

Printed in Germany
55-30-00 Nov
Page 230
01/04
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes, Abrasions, Scratches or DelaÈ

mination Damage in Zone 'C'
Figure 205

Printed in Germany
55-30-00 PagesFeb231/232
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

F. Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes and Honeycomb Damage in Zone

'C'
NOTE: You can use this repair procedure for the leading edge and the tip
of the vertical stabilizer.
NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51-77-10, Paragraph 3. for data.
(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

- Bonding and Adhesive ComÈ AR Material No. 08-001C (Refer to
pound (Lamination Resin) Chapter 51-35-00)
- Bonding and Adhesive ComÈ AR Material No. 08-051 (Refer to
pound (Epoxy Resin) Chapter 51-35-00)
- Special Material (MicrobalÈ AR Material No. 05-057 (Refer to
loons) Chapter 51-35-00)
- Honeycomb Hexagonal, Nomex- AR Material No. LN29967 A4 (Refer
Cured to Chapter 51-33-00)
- Cleaning Agent AR Material No. 11-003 or 11-004
(Refer to Chapter 51-35-00)
- Bonding and Adhesive ComÈ AR Material No. 08-074 (Refer to
pound (Masking Tape) Chapter 51-35-00)
- Glass Fabric (dry) AR Refer to Chapter 51-77-11, ParaÈ
graph 6.B.(8)
- Epoxy Prepreg, Glass Fabric AR LN 29549-8.4321.1A-EP (Refer to
Chapter 51-33-00)
- Epoxy Prepreg, Glass Fabric AR LN 29549-8.4321.2A-EP (Refer to
Chapter 51-33-00)
- Bonding and Adhesive ComÈ AR Material No. 08-052 (Refer to
pound (Self Adhesive AluÈ Chapter 51-35-00)
minum Tape)
- Backing Material AR Hostaphan foil RN75 or equivaÈ
lent
- Parting Film AR E-3760
- Abrasive Cloth AR Grade 200, 400
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 206)
WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.
CAUTION: ONLY USE A MECHANICAL PROCEDURE TO REMOVE THE SURFACE
PROTECTION. REFER TO CHAPTER 51-77-11, PARAGRAPH 4.D. FOR
FULL DATA.
(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area.

Printed in Germany
55-30-00 Feb
Page 233
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Remove the damaged material. Cut the skin and honeycomb into a
regular shape and chamfer the undamaged skin into an overlap
(Refer to Figure 206).
(c) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11-003) IS DANGEROUS.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11-004) IS DANGEROUS.
(d) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11-003 or 11-004).
(e) Put some bonding and adhesive compound (masking tape) (Material
No. 08-074) around the outer edge of the overlap area (Refer to
Figure 206). This will help you to remove unwanted adhesive from
the repair area.
(f) Make the Nomex honeycomb core plug. Refer to Chapter 51-77-11,
Paragraph 4.I..
WARNING: SPECIAL MATERIAL (MATERIAL NO. 05-057) IS DANGEROUS.
WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08-051) IS DANÈ
GEROUS.
(g) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08-051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05-057).
(h) Fill the honeycomb cells at the joint of the honeycomb core plug
to the adjacent honeycomb material with the adhesive paste (Refer
to Figure 206).
(i) Put the Nomex honeycomb core plug in its repair position. The
plug must be level with the inside of the aircraft skin (Refer
to Figure 206).
(j) Let the adhesive paste cure for 24 hours at room temperature
(RT).
NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer
to Chapter 51-77-11, Paragraph 4.A..
(k) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11-003 or 11-004).
(l) You must make an aluminum backing plate to lay up the repair
plies (Refer to Figure 206).
(m) Put parting film over the aluminum backing plate. Use clamps to
attach the backing plate to the repair area (Refer to Figure
206).

Printed in Germany
55-30-00 Aug
Page 234
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(n) Find out the number of dry-fabric layers necessary to make the
room temperature repair (Refer to Figure 206).
(o) Get the correct dry-fabric material (Refer to Chapter 55-30-00,
Figure 109).
NOTE: Also refer to Chapter 55-30-00, Figure 109 for the pre-imÈ
pregnated sheet data necessary to make the hot-bonded repair
(125 C
(257.0 F
)).
(p) Prepare the repair layers (Refer to Chapter 51-77-11, Paragraph
4.H.).
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 51-77-11, Paragraph 4.C. for data about
the preparation and laying-up of pre-impregnated fabric
sheet.
WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08-001C) IS DANÈ
GEROUS.
(q) Apply a layer of bonding and adhesive compound (lamination resin)
(Material No. 08-001C) to the repair area with a brush or a
spatula.
(r) Remove the backing material from one side of the first repair
layer.
(s) Put the first repair layer in its repair position. Remove
wrinkles or air bubbles with a roller. Do this from the center
of the repair layer to the edges.
(t) Remove the backing material from the other side of the repair
layer.
(u) Do the steps (q) thru (t) for each repair layer necessary for
the room temperature repair. Cover the repair with a layer of
parting film.
(v) Let the lamination resin cure for 24 hours at room temperature
under vacuum conditions.
NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer
to Chapter 51-77-11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.
(w) After the cure time, remove the parting film, masking tape and
any unwanted adhesive from the repair area. Use abrasive cloth to
smooth area of repair at outside by grinding careful only outer
cover - layer (Ply No. 0) and equalize surface to contour. Use
200 grade first and then finish with 400 grade.

Printed in Germany
55-30-00 Feb
Page 235
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11-003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11-004) IS DANGEROUS.
(x) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11-003 or 11-004).
(y) Remove the aluminum backing plate from the repair area.
(z) Do the steps (n) thru (x) to the other side of this repair (ReÈ
fer to Figure 206).
(aa)Cut the edge of the repair to blend with the existing edge (ReÈ
fer to Figure 206).
(ab)Do an inspection of the repair (Refer to Chapter 51-77-10, ParaÈ
graph 5.).
(ac)Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter
51-75-12).
(3) Temporary Repair
CAUTION: REFER TO THE RELATED ALLOWABLE DAMAGE AND REPAIR LIMITS IN
FIGURES 117 THRU 134, TO FIND OUT THE TIME LIMIT FOR THIS
TEMPORARY REPAIR.
ADVISE THE INSPECTION DEPARTMENT THAT A PERMANENT REPAIR IS
REQUIRED WITHIN THE FLIGHT HOURS (FH) GIVEN IN PAGE BLOCK
101.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.
(a) Remove the damaged material which is above the aircraft skin
surface.
(b) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.
(c) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11-003 or 11-004).
WARNING: SPECIAL MATERIAL (MATERIAL NO. 05-057) IS DANGEROUS.
WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08-051) IS DANÈ
GEROUS.
(d) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08-051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05-057).
(e) Fill the damaged skin and exposed honeycomb material with the
adhesive paste.

Printed in Germany
55-30-00 Feb
Page 236
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Let the adhesive paste cure for 24 hours at room temperature.
NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer
to Chapter 51-77-11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.
(g) After the cure time, use abrasive cloth to smooth area of repair
by grinding careful and equalize surface to contour. Use abrasive
cloth 200 grade first and then finish with 400 grade.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11-003) IS DANGEROUS.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11-004) IS DANGEROUS.
(h) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11-003 or 11-004).
WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08-052) IS DANÈ
GEROUS.
(i) Put a protective layer of bonding and adhesive compound (self
adhesive aluminum tape) (Material No. 08-052) over the repair
area. Smooth out from the center to remove air and press the
edges down tightly.
(j) Do an inspection of the repair.
(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 206).
(a) Remove the bonding and adhesive compound (self adhesive aluminum
tape) and the filler.
(b) Do all the repair steps in Paragraph (2) (Permanent Repair).

Printed in Germany
55-30-00 PagesNov237/238
01/04
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes and Honeycomb Damage in Zone 'C'
Figure 206

Printed in Germany
55-30-00 PagesFeb239/240
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

VERTICAL STABILIZER SPAR BOX

1. Structural Arrangement

NOTE: CONFIG−1 is applicable before Modification 26500K4924T.

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Structural Arrangement Figure 1 (sheet 1 and 2)

1 Spar Box − Vertical Stabilizer 55−31−11
2 Ribs 55−31−12
3 Spars 55−31−18
− Miscellaneous Structure 55−31−19
(not illustrated)
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−30−00, Page Block 001, where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Page 1
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/07
STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Structural
Arrangement
Figure
1
(sheet
1)

Page
2




55−31−00
Printed in Germany CONFIG−1
Aug
01/05
STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Structural
Arrangement
Figure
1
(sheet
2)

Pages
3/4




55−31−00
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−1
Aug
01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

VERTICAL STABILIZER SPAR BOX

1. Structural Arrangement

NOTE: CONFIG−2 is applicable after Modification 26500K4924T.

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Structural Arrangement Figure 1

1 Spar Box − Vertical Stabilizer 55−31−11
2 Ribs 55−31−12
3 Spars 55−31−18
− Miscellaneous Structure 55−31−19
(not illustrated)
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−30−00, Page Block 001, where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Page 1
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/07
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structural Arrangement
Figure 1

Page 2
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/07
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

VERTICAL STABILIZER SPAR BOX

CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO

PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: OBEY THE EFFECTIVITY BY MODIFICATION GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT FIGURE.

1. General

This topic contains the allowable damage and related data applicable to the
spar box structure. This data is necessary to find the correct repair pro
cedure.

NOTE: CONFIG−1 is applicable before Modification 26500K4924.

NOTE: For definition of allowable damage, refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For the definition of the repair categories, refer to Chapter

51−11−14.

NOTE: For Damage/Repair Data Recording, refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

2. Damage Evaluation

Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

3. Delamination Damage

The two types of delamination damage which can occur to the composite
structure are as follows:

A. Impact Delamination

This is when the structure is hit by an object and separation is usual

ly caused between many of the plies.
B. Non−Impact Delamination

This is when separation occurs between two plies for a reason other than
when it is hit by an object.

4. The Distance Between Damaged Areas

There is a minimum permitted distance between areas of delamination and be

tween repair areas. The dimension for this distance is given in the appli
cable allowable damage and repair limits figure. If you have less than the
permitted distance between delaminated or repair areas, work on them to
gether as one large damaged area. Refer to Figure 102 to find out how to
measure the distances between delaminated or repair areas.
5. Repair Zones

Each of the components of the spar−box structure is divided into repair

zones. These repair zones show the zones of different structural importance
Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

of the component. When you do a damage evaluation (Refer to Paragraph 2),

you must refer to the repair zone data. The repair zone data for the spar−
box skin structure is given in Figures 103 thru 109:
− The whole rib surface is one unique zone
− The whole spar surface is one unique zone
− The whole fitting or lug surface is one unique zone.

6. Allowable Damage Description/Criteria

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

INSPECTION
REPAIR
DESCRIPTION CRITERIA/ TYPE FIGURE INSTRUCTION
CATEGORY
REFERENCE (IIR)
B 55−31−00−1−001−00
Abrasions/Scratches 112
C −
Skin p
panel and the Impact
p Delaminations Damage
g with Cracks and B 55−31−00−1−001−00
110
Stringer Outer Flange with Holes C −
B 55−31−00−1−001−00
Delamination or Impact Delamination Damage 111
C −
Impact
p Delaminations Damage
g with Cracks and B 55−31−00−1−002−00
113
with Holes C −
B 55−31−00−1−002−00
Stringer Inner Flange Abrasions/Scratches 114
C −
B 55−31−00−1−002−00
Delamination or Impact Delamination Damage 115
C −
Impact
p Delaminations Damage
g with Cracks and B 55−31−00−1−003−00
116
with Holes C −
B 55−31−00−1−003−00
Spars and Ribs Abrasions/Scratches 117
C −
B 55−31−00−1−003−00
Delamination or Impact Delamination Damage 118
C −
Abrasions/Scratches 119 B 55−31−00−1−004−00
Fittings
Delamination or Impact Delamination Damage 120 B 55−31−00−1−004−00
Abrasions/Scratches 121 B 55−31−00−1−005−00
Lugs and Shear Lugs
Delamination or Impact Delamination Damage 122 B 55−31−00−1−005−00
All zones − Between Skin Debonding
g Allowable and Repairable
p Damage
g B 55−31−00−1−006−00
124
and Ribfoot Limits C −
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria
Table 101

Pages 103/104
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

7. Allowable Damage

Allowable damage is damage that does not affect the necessary strength or
function of a component. You do not have to repair this type of damage. If
this damage has rough or sharp edges, smooth these out with the correct
abrasive cloth. Replace the surface paint, if necessary.

CAUTION: ALL THE TEMPORARY REPAIRS MUST BE REPLACED BY A PERMANENT REPAIR

SOLUTION WITHIN THE LIFE LIMITS GIVEN ON EACH FIGURES.
CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 102.

CAUTION: THIS ALLOWABLE DAMAGE IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: THIS ALLOWABLE DAMAGE IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001
AND AFTER MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS ALLOWABLE DAMAGE IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 39020.

A. The allowable damage data is given as follows:

− Spar−box skin structure, refer to Figures 110 thru 115 and 124 and the
Key to Figure 101
− Spar box ribs, refer to Figures 116 thru 118 and the Key to Figure
101
− Spar structure, refer to Figures 116 thru 118 and the Key to Figure
101
− Spar box structure fitting and lugs, refer to Figure 119 thru 123 and
to the Key to Figure 101.

Aircraft Weight Variant

A320−100 000, 001, 002
A320−200 000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005,
006, 007, 008, 009 010, 011, 012,
013, 014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variants and Aircraft
Table 102
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23. ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary
data about all weight variants and their required information for
allowable damage and repair applicability.
8. Repair Limits

The repair limits data gives the time limits in which to make temporary
and permanent repairs. These time limits are given in flight hours (FH).
The repair limits also tell if it is necessary to make a room temperature

Page 105
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(RT) or hot−bond repair. To find the above given repair limits data appli
cable to a damaged area, you must know the subsequent data:
− The repair zone applicable to the damaged area,
− the area, length or depth (as applicable) of the damage to the structure,
− the type of structure (for example, monolithic or honeycomb),
− the type of damage (for example, abrasion, delamination, scratch).

The repair limits are given as follows:

− Spar−box skin structure, refer to Figures 110 thru 115 and 124
− Spar box ribs, refer to Figures 116 thru 118
− Spar structure, refer to Figures 116 thru 118
− Spar−box structure fitting and lugs, refer to Figures 119 thru 123.

Page 106
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CFRP Vertical Stabilizer Spar−Box − Layout

Figure 101

Page 107
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Refer to the following figures for details of

allowable damage and repair limits according to
damage type
ITEM NOMENCLATURE IMPACT IMPACT AND
SCRATCHES OTHER DELAMINA
AND/OR DELAMINATIONS TIONS WITHOUT
WITH CRACKS VISIBLE CRACKS
ABRASIONS AND/OR HOLES AND/OR HOLES
1 Skin panels including
112, 114 110, 113 111, 115
stringers
1 Skin panels over
112, 114 110, 113 124
ribfoot
2 Front spar 117 116 118
3 Center spar 117 116 118
4 Rear spar 117 116 118
5 Rib1, front 117 116 118
6 Rib1, rear 117 116 118
7 Rib2 117 116 118
8 Rib3 117 116 118
9 Rib4 117 116 118
10 Rib5 117 116 118
11 Rib6 117 116 118
12 Rib7 117 116 118
13 Rib8 117 116 118
14 Rib9 117 116 118
15 Rib10 117 116 118
16 Rib11 117 116 118
*17 Shear Lugs 121 − 122
*18 Lugs 121 − 122
19 Fittings 119 − 120
* For Definition of these Areas refer to Figure 123.
Key to Figure 101

Page 108
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

How to measure the Distance between damaged Areas

Figure 102

Pages 109/110
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Zones for the Skin Panel (Pre−cured Repairs)

Figure 103

Pages 111/112
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Zones for the Skin Panel (Laminate Repair)

Figure 104

Pages 113/114
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Zones for Stringer Outer Flange (Pre−cured Repairs)

Figure 105

Pages 115/116
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Zones for Stringer Outer Flange (Laminate Repair)

Figure 106

Pages 117/118
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Zones for Stringer Inner Flange (Laminate Repair)

Figure 107

Pages 119/120
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Zones for Stringer Inner Flange (Pre−cured Repairs)

Figure 108

Pages 121/122
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Zones for Module Panel (Laminate Repair)

Figure 109

Pages 123/124
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Skin Panel and Stringer Outer
Flange
Figure 110
Pages 125/126
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Skin Panel and Stringer Outer
Flange
Figure 111
Page 127
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Skin Panel and Stringer Outer
Flange
Figure 112
Page 128
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Stringer Inner Flange
Figure 113

Page 129
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Stringer Inner Flange
Figure 114

Page 130
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Stringer Inner Flange
Figure 115

Page 131
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Spars and Ribs
Figure 116

Page 132
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Spars and Ribs
Figure 117 (sheet 1)

Page 133
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Spars and Ribs
Figure 117 (sheet 2)

Page 134
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Spars and Ribs
Figure 118

Page 135
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Fittings

Figure 119

Page 136
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Fittings

Figure 120

Page 137
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Lugs and Shear Lugs
Figure 121

Page 138
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Lugs and Shear Lugs
Figure 122

Page 139
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Definition of the Lugs and Shear Lugs Areas

Figure 123

Page 140
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for Debonding between Skin and Ribfoot in
all Zones
Figure 124
Pages 141/142
Printed in Germany
55−31−00
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

VERTICAL STABILIZER SPAR BOX

1. General
No Allowable Damage information is specified. In case of any damage contact
AIRBUS INDUSTRIE.

Printed in Germany
55-31-00
CONFIG-2
Page 101
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

VERTICAL STABILIZER SPAR BOX

1. General
This topic contains specific repair data applicable to the Spar Box of the
Vertical Stabilizer. The general repairs are listed in Table 201.
The appropriate repairs are described in more detail in the relevant ChapÈ
ter.
NOTE: Refer to each repair to determine the repair applicability.
NOTE: For Damage/Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51-11-15.
2. Safety Precautions
There are risks to you and other persons when you work with composite reÈ
pair materials. To prevent risks, read and obey the warnings given below.
WARNING: OBEY THE MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS WHEN YOU USE CLEANING AGENTS,
ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND PAINTS. THESE MATERIALS ARE DANGEROUS.
WARNING: WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND FILTER MASK WHEN YOU CUT,
ABRADE OR DRILL COMPOSITE MATERIALS. THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MAÈ
TERIALS CAN GET INTO YOUR LUNGS OR ONTO YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE YOU
INJURY. IMMEDIATELY REMOVE DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.
WARNING: CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.
WHEN YOU WORK WITH CFRP COMPOSITE MATERIALS, IMMEDIATELY REMOVE
DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.
WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRIC POWER ON
THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST ONLY USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIRS CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE REFER
TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN IN THE
INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH
3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
3. Repair Scheme

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER FIGURE REMARKS

For General Repair data applicaÈ - - -
ble to composite structures, reÈ
fer to Chapter 51-77-00.

Table 201

Printed in Germany
55-31-00
CONFIG-1
Page 201
May 01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

4. Damage Evaluation
Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51-77-10, Paragraph 3. for data.
5. Access Into the Spar-Box
It is possible to remove parts of the spar to get satisfactory access into
the spar-box structure to make a repair. To do this refer to Chapter
55-31-18 and obey the Spar Splice Repair instructions.
6. Types of Repairs
There are three groups of repairs for the aircraft structure:
- permanent repairs,
- temporary repairs,
- permanent repairs after temporary repairs.
A. Permanent Repairs
You can find the permanent repair procedures, if applicable, in the speÈ
cific chapters.
There are three types of permanent repairs for the spar-box structure.
These are as follows:
(1) Laminate Repairs
To make a laminate repair you must use one of the subsequent proceÈ
dures:
(a) The hot-bond laminate repair procedure.
(b) The room-temperature (RT) laminate repair procedure.
NOTE: You can refer to Chapter 51-77-11 for general data about
laminate repair procedures.
(2) Pre-cured Repairs
To make a pre-cured type repair, you must make the repair pieces
from pre-cured composite materials. These repair pieces are then atÈ
tached to the aircraft structure with fasteners. For a pre-cured reÈ
pair, the repair adhesive is only used as a shim. Refer to Chapter
51-77-11 for general data about pre-cured repair procedures.
NOTE: The repair adhesive is used as shim material to a maximum
thickness of 1.5 mm (0.059 in.).
(3) Delamination Repairs with Fasteners
This type of permanent repair uses fasteners to hold the delaminated
layers inside the composite material together and prevent an increase
in the delaminated area.

Printed in Germany
55-31-00
CONFIG-1
Page 202
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

B. Temporary Repairs
You can find the temporary repair procedures, if applicable, in the speÈ
cific chapters. You must only make a temporary repair if you have these
conditions:
- you do not have the correct materials to make a permanent repair,
- you do not have the time to make a permanent repair.
NOTE: Some of the specific repair procedures do not have temporary repair
solutions.
C. Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair
You can find the permanent repair after temporary repair procedures, if
applicable, in the specific chapters. You must make a permanent repair
after a temporary repair in the given flight hour (FH) limit. Refer to
the applicable allowable damage and repair limits data to find the FH
limit.
7. Special Tools
To work with composite materials, it is necessary to use special tools.
Here are some examples:
- explosion-proof tools are necessary if you will cause CFRP dust,
- tools to cut or drill pre-cured CFRP materials must have very hard cutÈ
ting edges, for example cutting wheels with diamond edges and twist-drills
made from high-speed steel.
- tools to drill composite materials must have specially shaped cutting
edges.
Refer to Chapter 51-77-11 to find data about all the tools and equipment
necessary to make composite repairs.
8. Repair Material
A. General
All the materials necessary to make a repair are shown in the applicable
repair materials list.
B. Pre-cured CFRP Materials
Some of the specific repairs to the spar-box have a numbered reference
to pre-cured section or sheet materials. Airspares can supply these maÈ
terials for you to use. Refer to Figures 203 and 204 for material data.
Before you use any pre-cured CFRP materials not supplied by Airspares,
you must make a nondestructive test (NDT) inspection of them.
NOTE: If you make the pre-cured CFRP materials yourself, make sure that
the pre-impregnated sheets are in their correct lay-up sequence.

Printed in Germany
55-31-00
CONFIG-1
Page 203
Aug 01/04
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

9. Special Names for Parts of the Structure

The specific repair procedures often give special names to identify parts
of the spar-box structure (for example crosspoint, stringer inner-flange and
module). Refer to Figures 201 and 202 to find out what these special names
identify.
10. Repair Environment
Before you make a permanent repair, you must make sure that you have the
correct environmental conditions (for example when the aircraft is in a
warm and dry aircraft hangar). It is important that the repair environment
is clean and has a constant room temperature during the repair procedure.

Stringer Identification
Figure 201

Printed in Germany
55-31-00
CONFIG-1
Page 204
Feb 01/02
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Panel Identification

Figure 202

Printed in Germany
55-31-00
CONFIG-1
Page 205
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre-cured CFRP Sheet-Material supplied by Airspares

Figure 203

Printed in Germany
55-31-00
CONFIG-1
Page 206
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre-cured CFRP Section-Material supplied by Airspares

Figure 204 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-31-00
CONFIG-1
Page 207
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre-cured CFRP Section-Material

Figure 204 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-31-00
CONFIG-1
Page 208
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre-cured CFRP Section-Material

Figure 204 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55-31-00
CONFIG-1
Page 209
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Pre-cured CFRP Section-Material

Figure 204 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55-31-00
CONFIG-1
Page 210
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

VERTICAL STABILIZER SPAR BOX

1. General
No General and/or Specific Repairs are specified. In case of any damage
contact AIRBUS INDUSTRIE.

Printed in Germany
55-31-00
CONFIG-2
Page 201
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPAR BOX − VERTICAL STABILIZER

1. Identification Scheme

NOTE: CONFIG−1 is applicable before Modification 26500K4924T.

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Skin Panel Figure 1

− Skin, Stringer and Ribfoot Dimensions Figure 2
− Structure Cross−sectional Dimensions Figure 3
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−30−00 Page Block 001, where you can find the Mod

ification/Service Bulletin List.

Page 1
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/06
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Panel
Figure 1

Page 2
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

1 Module panel Composite D55371100000

002
1A Module panel Composite D55371100004 A20005K0003
006
1B Module panel Composite D55371100008 A20005K0003A
010
1C Module panel Composite D55371100012 A20365K0586
014
1D Module panel Composite D55371100016 A20515K0453
018
1E Module panel Composite D55371100020 A21153K1106
022
1F Module panel Composite D55371100024 A29998K2247
026
1G Module panel Composite D55371100028 A22111K2225A
030
1H Module panel Composite D55371100032 01 A24979K3895A
034
1I Module panel Composite D55371100036 A25484K4399D
038
1J Module panel Composite D55371100040 A26806K4941A
042
ASSY Dwg.: D55371030, D55371044

Key to Figure 1

Page 3
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin, Stringer and Ribfoot Dimensions

Figure 2 (sheet 1)

Page 4
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin, Stringer and Ribfoot Dimensions

Figure 2 (sheet 2)

Page 5
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin, Stringer and Ribfoot Dimensions

Figure 2 (sheet 3)

Page 6
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

1 Module panel, Composite D55371110000 PB101

bonding part 001 PB201
1A Module panel, Composite D55371110002 PB101 A20005K0003
bonding part 003 PB201
1B Module panel, Composite D55371110004 PB101 A20005K0003A
bonding part 005 PB201
1C Module panel, Composite D55371110006 PB101 A20365K0586
bonding part 007 PB201
1D Module panel, Composite D55371110008 PB101 A20515K0453
bonding part 009 PB201
1E Module panel, Composite D55371110010 PB101 A21153K1106
bonding part 011 PB201
1F Module panel, Composite D55371110012 PB101 A29998K2247
bonding part 013 PB201
1G Module panel, Composite D55371110014 PB101 A22111K2225A
bonding part 015 PB201
1H Module panel, Composite D55371110016 01 PB101 A24979K3895A
bonding part 017 PB201
1I Module panel, Composite D55371110018 PB101 A25484K4399D
bonding part 019 PB201
1J Module panel, Composite D55371110020 PB101 A26806K4941A
bonding part 021 PB201
ASSY Dwg.: D55371100

Key to Figure 2

Pages 7/8
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure Cross−sectional Dimensions

Figure 3 (sheet 1)

Pages 9/10
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure Cross−sectional Dimensions

Figure 3 (sheet 2)

Pages 11/12
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure Cross−sectional Dimensions

Figure 3 (sheet 3)

Pages 13/14
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure Cross−sectional Dimensions

Figure 3 (sheet 4)

Pages 15/16
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure Cross−sectional Dimensions

Figure 3 (sheet 5)

Pages 17/18
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure Cross−sectional Dimensions

Figure 3 (sheet 6)

Pages 19/20
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure Cross−sectional Dimensions

Figure 3 (sheet 7)

Pages 21/22
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure Cross−sectional Dimensions

Figure 3 (sheet 8)

Pages 23/24
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure Cross−sectional Dimensions

Figure 3 (sheet 9)

Pages 25/26
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure Cross−sectional Dimensions

Figure 3 (sheet 10)

Pages 27/28
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure Cross−sectional Dimensions

Figure 3 (sheet 11)

Pages 29/30
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure Cross−sectional Dimensions

Figure 3 (sheet 12)

Pages 31/32
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

1 Module panel, Composite D55371110000 PB101

bonding part 001 PB201
1A Module panel, Composite D55371110002 PB101 A20005K0003
bonding part 003 PB201
1B Module panel, Composite D55371110004 PB101 A20005K0003A
bonding part 005 PB201
1C Module panel, Composite D55371110006 PB101 A20365K0586
bonding part 007 PB201
1D Module panel, Composite D55371110008 PB101 A20515K0453
bonding part 009 PB201
1E Module panel, Composite D55371110010 PB101 A21153K1106
bonding part 011 PB201
1F Module panel, Composite D55371110012 PB101 A29998K2247
bonding part 013 PB201
1G Module panel, Composite D55371110014 PB101 A22111K2225A
bonding part 015 PB201
1H Module panel, Composite D55371110016 01 PB101 A24979K3895A
bonding part 017 PB201
1I Module panel, Composite D55371110018 PB101 A25484K4399D
bonding part 019 PB201
1J Module panel, Composite D55371110020 PB101 A26806K4941A
bonding part 021 PB201
ASSY Dwg.: D55371100

Key to Figure 3

Pages 33/34
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPAR BOX − VERTICAL STABILIZER

1. Identification Scheme

NOTE: CONFIG−2 is applicable after Modification 26500K4924T.

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Skin Panel Figure 1

− Skin, Stringer and Ribfoot Dimensions Figure 2
− Structure, Cross−sectional Dimensions Figure 3
− Structure, Cross−sectional Dimensions Figure 4
after Modification 30024K6435A
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−30−00, Page Block 001 where you can find the Mod

ification/Service Bulletin List.

NOTE: The Serial Number given in the column "NOMENCLATURE", is related to

the assembled Spar Box and not to the identified panel Part Number.

Page 1
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/09
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Panel
Figure 1

Page 2
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

ASSY Dwg.:

Key to Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55-31-11
CONFIG-2
Page 3
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

1 Panel, machining Composite D55371393000 A26500K4924J

002
Panel, machining Composite D55371393000 ASB55−1026
(SN:TS−2212) 002 ASB55−1028
Panel, machining Composite D55371393000 ASB55−1026
(SN:TS−2230) 002 ASB55−1028
Panel, machining Composite D55371393000 ASB55−1026
(SN:TS−2247) 002 ASB55−1028
Panel, machining Composite D55371393000 ASB55−1026
(SN:TS−2250) 002 ASB55−1028
Panel, machining Composite D55371393000 ASB55−1026
(SN:TS−2276) 002 ASB55−1028
Panel, machining Composite D55371393000 ASB55−1026
(SN:TS−2278) 002 ASB55−1028
Panel, machining Composite D55371393000 ATS−082879C
(SN:TS−2285) 002 (MSN 0918)
ASB55−1028
Panel, machining Composite D55371393000 ASB55−1026
(SN:TS−2291) 002 ASB55−1028
Panel, machining Composite D55371393000 ASB55−1026
(SN:TS−2298) 002 ASB55−1028
Panel, machining Composite D55371393000 ASB55−1026
(SN:TS−2300) 002 ASB55−1028
Panel, machining Composite D55371393000 ASB55−1026
(SN:TS−2301) 002 ASB55−1028
Panel, machining Composite D55371393000 ATS−082793C
(SN:TS−2319) 002 (MSN 0951)
ASB55−1028
Panel, machining Composite D55371393000 ATS−082808C
(SN:TS−2323) 002 (MSN 0955)
ASB55−1028
Panel, machining Composite D55371393000 ATS−082812C
(SN:TS−2347) 002 (MSN 0975)
ASB55−1028
Panel, machining Composite D55371393000 ATS−082821C
(SN:TS−2356) 002 (MSN 0984)
ASB55−1028
Panel, machining Composite D55371393000 ATS−082824C
(SN:TS−2359) 002 (MSN 0986)
ASB55−1028

Key to Figure 1

Page 4
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

Panel, machining Composite D55371393000 ATS−082825C

(SN:TS−2364) 002 (MSN 0990)
ASB55−1028
ASSY Dwg.: D55371390

Key to Figure 1

Page 5
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

1A Panel, machining Composite D55371393004 A26500K4924W

006
Panel, machining Composite D55371393004 ATS−082819C
(SN:TS−2354) 006 (MSN 1001)
ASB55−1028
Panel, machining Composite D55371393004 ATS−082826C
(SN:TS−2374) 006 (MSN 0999)
ASB55−1028
Panel, machining Composite D55371393004 ATS−082827C
(SN:TS−2380) 006 (MSN 1003)
ASB55−1028
Panel, machining Composite D55371393004 ATS−082869C
(SN:TS−2385) 006 (MSN 1007)
ASB55−1028
Panel, machining Composite D55371393004 ATS−082870C
(SN:TS−2387) 006 (MSN 1009)
ASB55−1028
Panel, machining Composite D55371393004 ATS−082886C
(SN:TS−2393) 006 (MSN 1014)
ASB55−1028
Panel, machining Composite D55371393004 ATS−082887C
(SN:TS−2396) 006 (MSN 1026)
ASB55−1028
Panel, machining Composite D55371393004 ATS−082938C
(SN:TS−2402) 006 (MSN 1032)
ASB55−1028
Panel, machining Composite D55371393004 ATS−082939C
(SN:TS−2405) 006 (MSN 1035)
ASB55−1028
Panel, machining Composite D55371393004 ATS−082940C
(SN:TS−2407) 006 (MSN 1037)
ASB55−1028
1B Panel, machining Composite D55371394000 A32111K7831
002
1C Panel, machining Composite D55371394004 A32951K8291A
006
1D Panel, machining Composite D55371394008 A34600K9600
010
ASSY Dwg.: D55371390, D55371392

Key to Figure 1

Page 6
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin, Stringer and Ribfoot Dimensions

Figure 2 (sheet 1)

Page 7
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin, Stringer and Ribfoot Dimensions

Figure 2 (sheet 2)

Page 8
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin, Stringer and Ribfoot Dimensions

Figure 2 (sheet 3)

Page 9
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin, Stringer and Ribfoot Dimensions

Figure 2 (sheet 4)

Page 10
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin, Stringer and Ribfoot Dimensions

Figure 2 (sheet 5)

Page 11
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

1 Panel, complete Composite D55371396000

001
1A Panel, complete Composite D55371396004 A26500K4924V
006
1B Panel, complete Composite D55371397000 A30024K6435
002
1C Panel, complete Composite D55371397004 A32951K8291
006
ASSY Dwg.: D55371393, D55371394

Key to Figure 2

Page 12
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure, Cross−sectional Dimensions

Figure 3 (sheet 1)

Pages 13/14
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure, Cross−sectional Dimensions

Figure 3 (sheet 2)

Pages 15/16
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure, Cross−sectional Dimensions

Figure 3 (sheet 3)

Pages 17/18
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure, Cross−sectional Dimensions

Figure 3 (sheet 4)

Pages 19/20
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure, Cross−sectional Dimensions

Figure 3 (sheet 5)

Pages 21/22
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure, Cross−sectional Dimensions

Figure 3 (sheet 6)

Pages 23/24
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure, Cross−sectional Dimensions

Figure 3 (sheet 7)

Pages 25/26
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure, Cross−sectional Dimensions

Figure 3 (sheet 8)

Pages 27/28
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure, Cross−sectional Dimensions

Figure 3 (sheet 9)

Pages 29/30
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure, Cross−sectional Dimensions

Figure 3 (sheet 10)

Pages 31/32
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure, Cross−sectional Dimensions

Figure 3 (sheet 11)

Pages 33/34
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

1 Part, bonding Composite D55371400000

001
1A Part, bonding Composite D55371400004 A26500K4924V
006
ASSY Dwg.: D55371396

Key to Figure 3

Page 35
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure, Cross−sectional Dimensions after Modification 30024K6435A

Figure 4 (sheet 1)

Page 36
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/08
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure, Cross−sectional Dimensions after Modification 30024K6435A

Figure 4 (sheet 2)

Pages 37/38
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/08
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure, Cross−sectional Dimensions after Modification 30024K6435A

Figure 4 (sheet 3)

Pages 39/40
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/08
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure, Cross−sectional Dimensions after Modification 30024K6435A

Figure 4 (sheet 4)

Pages 41/42
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/08
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure, Cross−sectional Dimensions after Modification 30024K6435A

Figure 4 (sheet 5)

Pages 43/44
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/08
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure, Cross−sectional Dimensions after Modification 30024K6435A

Figure 4 (sheet 6)

Pages 45/46
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/08
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure, Cross−sectional Dimensions after Modification 30024K6435A

Figure 4 (sheet 7)

Pages 47/48
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/08
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure, Cross−sectional Dimensions after Modification 30024K6435A

Figure 4 (sheet 8)

Pages 49/50
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/08
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure, Cross−sectional Dimensions after Modification 30024K6435A

Figure 4 (sheet 9)

Pages 51/52
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/08
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure, Cross−sectional Dimensions after Modification 30024K6435A

Figure 4 (sheet 10)

Pages 53/54
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/08
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structure, Cross−sectional Dimensions after Modification 30024K6435A

Figure 4 (sheet 11)

Pages 55/56
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/08
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Part, bonding Composite D55371401000 A30024K6435

002
1A Part, bonding Composite D55371401004 A32951K8291B
006
1B Part, bonding Composite D55371401008 A36606K10593A
010
1C Part, bonding Composite D55371401012 A153007K15376C
014
ASSY Dwg.: D55371397

Key to Figure 4

Pages 57/58
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−2
May 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPAR BOX - VERTICAL STABILIZER

1. General
This topic contains Allowable Damage data for the Spar Box of the Vertical
Stabilizer. For the general definition of Allowable Damage refer to Chapter
51-77-10 - COMPOSITE COMPONENTS - DAMAGE AND REPAIR CLASSIFICATION.
NOTE: For definition of allowable damage refer to Chapter 51-11-11.
NOTE: For Damage/Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51-11-15.
2. Allowable Damage
Compare the damage in question with the relevant Figures, given in Chapter
55-31-00, Page Block 101, Config. 1 - VERTICAL STABILIZER SPAR BOX.
CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE
REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN
IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO
PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

Printed in Germany
55-31-11
CONFIG-1
Pages 101/102
May 01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPAR BOX - VERTICAL STABILIZER

1. General
No Allowable Damage information is specified. In case of any damage contact
AIRBUS INDUSTRIE.

Printed in Germany
55-31-11
CONFIG-2
Page 101
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPAR BOX − VERTICAL STABILIZER

1. General

These repairs are applicable for the Skin Panel of the Vertical Stabilizer
Spar Box. Refer to Chapter 55−31−00 Page Block 101 Config. 1 for the re
pair zones and allowable damage data. The General repairs are listed in
Table 201, the Specific repairs are listed in Table 202. The appropriate
repairs are described in more detail in the relevant Chapter.

NOTE: Refer to each repair to determine the repair applicability.

NOTE: For definition of Repair Categories, refer to Chapter 51−11−14.

NOTE: For Damage/Repair Data Recording, refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

2. Safety Precautions

There are risks to you and other persons when you work with composite re
pair materials. To prevent risks, read and obey the warnings given below:
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.

WARNING: OBEY THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS WHEN YOU USE CLEANING AGENTS,
ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND PAINTS. THESE MATERIALS ARE DANGEROUS.

WARNING: WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND FILTER MASK WHEN YOU CUT,
ABRADE OR DRILL COMPOSITE MATERIALS. THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MA
TERIALS CAN GET INTO YOUR LUNGS OR ONTO YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE YOU
INJURY. IMMEDIATELY REMOVE DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.

WHEN YOU WORK WITH CFRP COMPOSITE MATERIALS, IMMEDIATELY REMOVE
DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.
WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRIC POWER ON
THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST ONLY USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT REPAIR.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIRS CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE REFER

TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN IN THE
INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: OBEY THE GIVEN INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE WHICH LEADS TO THE
APPLICABLE INSPECTION PROGRAM DEFINED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR IN
SPECTIONS, IF NECESSARY.

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER FIGURE REMARKS

No General Repairs applicable − − −
General Repairs
Table 201
4. Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

REPAIR CATEGORY FOR SUB−PARAGRAPH INSPECTION

REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE INSTRUCTION
(2) (3) (4) REFERENCE (IIR)
Skin Repair with Internal Patches
5.A. 201 B C B 55−31−11−2−001−00
(Flush Repair)
Skin Repair with an External Patch 5.B. 202 B C B 55−31−11−2−002−00
Stringer Repair with Internal Skin
5.C. 203 B C B 55−31−11−2−003−00
Patches (Flush Repair)
Stringer Repair with an External Skin
5.D. 204 B C B 55−31−11−2−004−00
Patch (External Repair)
Repair for Delamination Damage at
Stringer and Ribfoot / Debonding Dam
5.E. 205 B C B 55−31−11−2−005−00
age at Ribfoot
Crosspoint Repair for which Access
into the Spar−Box is necessary (Flush 5.F. 206 B C B 55−31−11−2−006−00
Repair)
Crosspoint Repair for which Access
into the Spar−Box is not necessary 5.G. 207 B C B 55−31−11−2−007−00
(External Repair Patch)
Skin Repair with a Laminated Filler
5.H. 208 B Not applicable Not applicable 55−31−11−2−008−00
Patch (Flush Repair)
Skin and Stringer Laminated Repair
5.I. 209 B Not applicable Not applicable 55−31−11−2−009−00
(Flush Repair)
Ribfoot Flush Repair 5.J. 210 or 211 B C B 55−31−11−2−010−00
Ribfoot Repair for which Access into
the Spar−Box Structure is not neces
5.K. 212 or 213 B C B 55−31−11−2−011−00
sary (External Repair)
Specific Repairs
Table 202

Pages 203/204
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

A. Permanent and Temporary Repair Information

Permanent and temporary repair information can be found in the subsequent

paragraphs of the specific repair procedures:
− permanent repair information is in paragraph (2),
− temporary repair information is in paragraph (3),
− permanent repair after temporary repair information is in paragraph
(4).

5. Skin − Repairs
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 203.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE (IIR) IS 55−31−11−2−001−00 AND IS DESCRIBED
IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. IN
FORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY
INFORMATION.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT
VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 39020.

A. Skin Repair with Internal Patches (Flush Repair)

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.
NOTE: This repair is applicable for skin repair with internal patches
(flush repair) and is effective as follows:

Aircraft Weight Variant

A320−100 000, 001, 002
000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005,
A320−200 006, 007, 008, 009, 010, 011,
012, 013, 014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 203
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23. ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary
data about all weight variants and their required information for
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 205
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Pre−Cured Sheet (Filler) AR Refer to Figure 201

2 Pre−Cured Sheet (Filler) AR Refer to Figure 201
3 Pre−Cured Sheet (Doubler) AR Refer to Figure 201

− Special Material (Fluoro
AR Material No. 05−020 (Refer to

carbon Release Agent)
− Special Material (Microbal

loons)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com

pound (Epoxy Resin)
− Sealant (Corrosion Inhibit

ing Brush Cosistancy)
− Cleaning Agent (Methyl−
Ethyl−Ketone)
− Cleaning Agent (Trichloroe

thane Methly Chloroform)
− Pretreatment for Painting
(Chemical Conversion Coat

ing Yellow Aluminum)
− Structure Paint (Polyure

thane Anti Corrosion Prim

er)
− Structure Paint (Polyure

thane Finish Paint)
− Chromic Acid Anodizing
(CAA)
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 201)
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 09−013 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−003 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−004 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 13−002 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−001 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−018 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Refer to Chapter 51−21−11

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

CAUTION: ONLY USE A MECHANICAL PROCEDURE TO REMOVE THE SURFACE

PROTECTION. REFER TO CHAPTER 51−77−11, PARAGRAPH 4.D. FOR
FULL DATA.

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area.

(b) Draw some lines to show you the correct locations at which to
cut the skin to remove the damaged structure.
(c) Cut out the damaged skin structure to the correct repair shape
and dimensions.

(d) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
pieces (Refer to Figure 201).

Page 206
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(e) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions nec

essary for the repair area.
(f) Make some marks on the doubler to show the hole locations neces

sary to attach it to the skin structure.

(g) Pilot−drill at the hole locations in the doubler.

(h) Put the doubler in its correct repair location but on the outer
surface of the skin.
(i) Make some marks on the skin to show the locations of the holes
in the doubler. Remove the doubler.

(j) Pilot−drill at the hole locations on the skin.

(k) Attach the filler (item 2) to the doubler in its correct repair
location with screw clamps. Make some marks on the filler (item
2) to show the locations of the holes in the doubler. Remove the
filler (item 2).

(l) Pilot−drill at the hole locations on the filler (item 2).

(m) Put the doubler and the filler (item 2) in their correct repair
locations. Then attach them to the surface of the inner skin
with screw−pins.

(n) Make some marks on the filler (item 1) at the hole locations
necessary to attach it to the filler (item 2) and the doubler.
(o) Pilot−drill at the hole locations on the filler (item 1).

(p) Put the filler (item 1) in its correct repair location and make
some marks on the filler (item 2) to show the hole locations in
the filler (item 1). Remove the filler repair piece (item 1).
(q) Pilot−drill at the hole locations on the filler (item 2).

(r) Remove the doubler and the filler (item 2) from the skin struc

ture.

(s) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.
(t) Clean the repair area and the repair pieces with the cleaning
agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning
agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004)

(u) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).

Page 207
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(v) Apply the adhesive paste to the surfaces of the repair pieces
and the spar−box structure that will touch when assembled.
NOTE: The repair adhesive paste is a shim material and is used
to a maximum thickness of 1.5 mm (0.059 in).

(w) Attach the repair pieces to the spar−box structure with screw
pins.

(x) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or
cleaning agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No.
11−004).

(y) Let the adhesive cure (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

4.A.).
WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(z) After the adhesive has cured, drill all of the holes in the re

pair area to the necessary diameter for the fasteners.

(aa)Countersink the holes on the outerface of the spar−box skin and

the filler piece (item 1).

(ab)Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum

cleaner.

(ac)Clean the repair area and the repair pieces with cleaning agent
(methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent
(trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

(ad)Install the correct fasteners in the repair area. Make sure that
you install the fasteners with the sealant (corrosion inhibiting
brush consistency) (Material No. 09−013).
(ae)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning
agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

(af)Do an inspection of the repair.

(ag)Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter
51−75−12).

Page 208
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR A320−100 ONLY, REFER TO THE RELATED ALLOWABLE DAMAGE AND
REPAIR LIMITS IN CHAPTER 55−31−00 PAGE BLOCK 101 CONFIG. 1,
FIGURES 110, 111 OR 112, TO FIND OUT THE TIME LIMIT FOR THIS
TEMPORARY REPAIR.

ADVISE THE INSPECTION DEPARTMENT THAT A PERMANENT REPAIR IS RE

QUIRED WITHIN THE FLIGHT HOURS (FH) GIVEN IN CHAPTER 55−31−00
PAGE BLOCK 101 CONFIG 1.
CAUTION: FOR A320−200 ONLY, THIS TEMPORARY REPAIR MUST BE REPLACED BY A
PERMANENT REPAIR WITHIN 2 500 FH.

(3) Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 201)

(a) Do the steps (a) thru (c) of the repair procedure in Paragraph
(2).
(b) Get the equivalent metal materials for the repair pieces. The
subsequent steps will help you to do this:

1 Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter 55−31−00 Page Block 101
Config. 1, Figure 103) and find the correct pre−cured CFRP ma

terials necessary to make a permanent repair.
2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (Chapter 55−31−00 Page
Block 201 Config. 1, Figure 203) to find the equivalent metal
material applicable to the pre−cured CFRP material.

(c) Do the steps (e) thru (s) of the repair procedure in Paragraph
(2).

WARNING: CHROMIC ACID ANODIZING (CAA) IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Clean the repair parts using cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone)

(Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent (trichloroethane methly
chloroform) (Material No. 11−004) and treat the repair parts with
chromic acid anodizing (CAA) or pretreatment for painting (chemi

cal conversion coating yellow aluminum) (Material No. 13−002)
(Refer to Chapter 51−21−11).

(e) Apply structure paint (polyurethane anti corrosion primer) (Mate

rial No. 16−001) to the repair parts (Refer to Chapter 51−23−00).
(f) Attach the repair pieces to the spar−box structure with screw−
pins.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(g) Drill all of the holes to the correct size for the fasteners.
(h) Countersink the holes on the outerface of the spar−box skin and
the filler piece (item 1).

(i) Remove the repair pieces and deburr the holes.

Page 209
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(j) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.
(k) Clean the repair area and the repair pieces with the cleaning
agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning
agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

(l) Apply a layer of sealant (corrosion inhibiting brush consistency)

(Material No. 09−013) to the surfaces of the repair pieces that
will touch each other or the spar−box structure when assembled.

NOTE: If necessary you can use a bonding and adhesive compound

(epoxy resin) (Material No. 08−051) with special material
(microballoons) (Material No. 05−057) when you assemble the
temporary repair pieces. If you do this, make sure that you
apply special material (fluorocarbon release agent) (Materi

al No. 05−020) to the applicable spar−box structure before
you apply the epoxy resin. The use of sealant (corrosion
inhibiting brush consistency) (Material No. 09−013) is not
necessary when you use the epoxy resin. Refer to Paragraph
(2) for data about how to use epoxy resin material.

(m) Attach the repair pieces to the spar−box structure. Make sure
that you install the fasteners with sealant (corrosion inhibiting
brush consistency) (Material No. 09−013).

(n) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning
agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

(o) Do an inspection of the repair.

(p) Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter

51−75−12).

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 201)

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces and the sealant or adhesive
from the spar−box structure.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured sheet materials necessary to make the
permanent repair (Refer to Figure 201).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shapes and dimensions nec

essary for the repair area. Use the temporary repair pieces to
get the correct locations for the fastener holes in the permanent
repair pieces.

Page 210
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(d) Do the steps (t) thru (ag) of the repair procedure in Paragraph
(2).
NOTE: Use oversize fasteners when you replace the temporary repair
pieces with permanent repair pieces (Refer to Chapter
51−43−21).

Pages 211/212
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Repair with Internal Patches (Flush Repair)

Figure 201

Pages 213/214
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 204.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE (IIR) IS 55−31−11−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED
IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. IN
FORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY
INFORMATION.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT
VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 39020.

B. Skin Repair with an External Patch

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.
NOTE: This repair is applicable for skin repair with an external patch
and is effective as follows:

Aircraft Weight Variant

A320−100 000, 001, 002
000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005,
A320−200 006, 007, 008, 009, 010, 011,
012, 013, 014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 204
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23. ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary
data about all weight variants and their required information for
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 215
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Pre−Cured Sheet (Doubler) AR Refer to Figure 202

− Special Material (Fluoro
AR Material No. 05−020 (Refer to

carbon Release Agent)
− Special Material (Microbal

loons)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com

pound (Epoxy Resin)
− Sealant (Corrosion Inhibit

ing Brush Consistency)
− Cleaning Agent (Methyl−
Ethyl−Ketone)
− Cleaning Agent (Trichloroe

thane Methly Chloroform)
− Pretreatment for Painting
(Chemical Conversion Coat

ing Yellow Aluminum)
− Structure Paint (Polyure

thane Anti Corrosion Prim

er)
− Structure Paint (Polyure

thane Finish Paint)
− Chromic Acid Anodizing
(CAA)
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 202)
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 09−013 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−003 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−004 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 13−002 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−001 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−018 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Refer to Chapter 51−21−11

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

CAUTION: ONLY USE A MECHANICAL PROCEDURE TO REMOVE THE SURFACE

PROTECTION. REFER TO CHAPTER 51−77−11, PARAGRAPH 4.D. FOR
FULL DATA.

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area.

(b) Mark cut−lines before removing the damaged area.

(c) Cut out the damaged skin structure.

(d) Get the correct pre−cured sheet for the repair (Refer to Figure
202).

(e) Make the repair doubler.

(f) Mark the fastener holes on the doubler.

Page 216
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(g) Drill pilot−holes in the doubler.

(h) Position the doubler on the outer surface of the skin.

(i) Transfer−drill the fastener holes through the skin. Remove the
doubler.

(j) Drill pilot−holes through the skin.

(k) Clean the repair area and the repair pieces with the cleaning
agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning
agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

(l) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).
(m) Apply the adhesive paste to the faying surfaces of the doubler
and the skin.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material. Maximum thickness

is 1.5 mm (0.059 in).
(n) Attach the doubler to the skin with screw pins.

(o) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or
cleaning agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No.
11−004).
(p) Let the adhesive cure (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph
4.A.).

(q) Drill the fastener holes.

(r) Countersink the holes on the outerface of the doubler.

(s) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

(t) Wet−install the fasteners with the sealant (corosion inhibiting

brush consistency) (Material No. 09−013).
(u) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning
agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

(v) Do an inspection of the repair.

(w) Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter

51−75−12).

Page 217
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR A320−100 ONLY, REFER TO THE RELATED ALLOWABLE DAMAGE AND
REPAIR LIMITS IN CHAPTER 55−31−00 PAGE BLOCK 101 CONFIG. 1,
FIGURES 110, 111 OR 112, TO FIND OUT THE TIME LIMIT FOR THIS
TEMPORARY REPAIR.

ADVISE THE INSPECTION DEPARTMENT THAT A PERMANENT REPAIR IS RE

QUIRED WITHIN THE FLIGHT HOURS (FH) GIVEN IN CHAPTER 55−31−00
PAGE BLOCK 101 CONFIG 1.
CAUTION: FOR A320−200 ONLY, THIS TEMPORARY REPAIR MUST BE REPLACED BY A
PERMANENT REPAIR WITHIN 2 500 FH.

(3) Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 202)

(a) Do the steps (a) thru (c) of the repair procedure in Paragraph
(2).
1 Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter 55−31−00 Page Block 101
Config. 1, Figure 103) and find the correct pre−cured CFRP ma

terials necessary to make a permanent repair.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (Chapter 55−31−00 Page

Block 201 Config. 1, Figure 203) and find the equivalent metal
material applicable to the pre−cured CFRP material.

(b) Do the steps (e) thru (k) of the repair procedure in Paragraph
(2).

WARNING: CHROMIC ACID ANODIZING (CAA) IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Clean the repair parts using cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone)
(Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent (trichloroethane methly
chloroform) (Material No. 11−004) and treat the repair parts with
chromic acid anodizing (CAA) or pretreatment for painting (chemi

cal conversion coating yellow aluminum) (Material No. 13−002)
(Refer to Chapter 51−21−11).

(d) Apply structure paint (polyurethane anti corrosion primer) (Mate

rial No. 16−001) to the repair parts (Refer to Chapter 51−23−00).

(e) Attach the doubler to the skin with screw pins.

(f) Drill the fastener holes.

(g) Countersink the holes.

(h) Remove the doubler and deburr the holes.

(i) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

Page 218
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(j) Apply a layer of sealant (corrosion inhibiting brush consistency)

(Material No. 09−013) to the faying surface of the doubler.
NOTE: If necessary you can use a bonding and adhesive compound
(epoxy resin) (Material No. 08−051) with special material
(microballoons) (Material No. 05−057) when you assemble the
temporary repair pieces. If you do this, make sure that you
apply special material (fluorocarbon release agent) (Materi

al No. 05−020) to the applicable spar−box structure before
you apply the epoxy resin. The use of sealant (corrosion
inhibiting brush consistency) (Material No. 09−013) is not
necessary when you use the epoxy resin. Refer to Paragraph
(2) for data about the use of epoxy resin material.
(k) Attach the doubler to the skin. Make sure that you install the
fasteners wet with the sealant (corrosion inhibiting brush con

sistency) (Material No. 09−013).

(l) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning
agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

(m) Do an inspection of the repair.

(n) Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter

51−75−12).

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 202)

(a) Remove the temporary repair doubler and the sealant or adhesive
from the skin structure.

(b) Get the pre−cured sheet for the repair (Refer to Figure 202).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Make the repair doubler. Use the temporary repair doubler to
transfer the fastener hole positions.

(d) Do the steps (k) thru (w) of the repair procedure in Paragraph
(2).
NOTE: Use oversize fasteners when you replace the temporary−repair
doubler with the permanent−repair doubler (Refer to Chapter
51−43−21).

Pages 219/220
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Repair with an External Patch

Figure 202

Pages 221/222
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 205.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE (IIR) IS 55−31−11−2−003−00 AND IS DESCRIBED
IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. IN
FORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY
INFORMATION.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT
VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 39020.

C. Stringer Repair with Internal Skin Patches (Flush Repair)

NOTE: According to the damage size there are two types of this repair.
Type 1 is illustrated on sheet 1, Type 2 is illustrated on sheet 2
and 3.
NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

NOTE: This repair is applicable for stringer repair with internal skin
patches (flush repair) and is effective as follows:

Aircraft Weight Variant

A320−100 000, 001, 002
000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005,
A320−200 006, 007, 008, 009, 010, 011,
012, 013, 014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 205
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23. ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary
data about all weight variants and their required information for
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 223
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Pre−Cured Sheet (Doubler) AR Refer to Figure 203

2 Pre−Cured Sheet (Filler) AR Refer to Figure 203
3 Pre−Cured Section AR Refer to Figure 203

− Special Material (Fluoro
AR Material No. 05−020 (Refer to

carbon Release Agent)
− Special Material (Microbal

loons)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com

pound (Epoxy Resin)
− Sealant (Corrosion Inhibit

ing Brush Consistency)
− Cleaning Agent (Methyl−
Ethyl−Ketone)
− Cleaning Agent (Trichloroe

thane Methly Chloroform)
− Pretreatment for Painting
(Chemical Conversion Coat

ing Yellow Aluminum)
− Structure Paint (Polyure

thane Anti Corrosion Prim

er)
− Structure Paint (Polyure

thane Finish Paint)
− Chromic Acid Anodizing
(CAA)
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 09−013 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−003 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−004 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 13−002 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−001 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−018 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Refer to Chapter 51−21−11

(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 203)

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

CAUTION: ONLY USE A MECHANICAL PROCEDURE TO REMOVE THE SURFACE

PROTECTION. REFER TO CHAPTER 51−77−11, PARAGRAPH 4.D. FOR
FULL DATA.

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area.

(b) Draw some lines to show you the correct locations at which to
cut the skin to remove the damaged structure.
(c) Cut out the damaged skin and stringer structure to the correct
repair shape and dimensions.

Page 224
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(d) Pilot−drill the holes at the correct locations in the stringer

innerflange.
(e) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
pieces (Refer to Figure 203, sheet 1 and 2).

(f) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

(g) Attach the stringer repair pieces in their repair location with
screw clamps.

(h) Pilot−drill through the repair pieces and the stringer at the
necessary hole locations in the stringer web and inner−flange.

(i) Replace the screw clamps with screw pins.

(j) Pilot−drill through the skin and stringer outer−flange at the
correct hole locations.

(k) Pilot−drill the corner holes in the two doublers. These holes
will help you to initially attach the doublers to the skin
structure.
(l) Put a doubler in its repair location and pilot−drill through the
spar−box skin at the corner hole locations. Remove the doubler
and do this step again for the other doubler.

NOTE: It is possible that you must remove the stringer repair

pieces to drill the holes from the doublers to the skin.
If you do this, put back all of the repair pieces that you
remove.

(m) Attach the doublers in their correct repair locations with screw
pins.
(n) Make some marks on the skin outer−surface to show the locations
of the holes necessary to attach the doublers.

(o) Pilot−drill at the hole locations on the skin outer−surface. If

necessary, install screw pins to keep the doublers attached
tightly to the skin.
(p) Make some marks on the skin filler−piece to show the locations
of the necessary attachment holes.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(q) Put the filler in its repair location and pilot−drill at the
hole locations on the filler.

(r) Remove all of the repair pieces and clean them and the repair
area with the cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No.
11−003) or cleaning agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Ma

terial No. 11−004).

Page 225
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(s) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).

(t) Apply the adhesive paste to the surfaces of the stringer repair
pieces and the spar−box structure that touch when assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a

maximum thickness of 1.5 mm (0.059 in).
(u) Attach the stringer repair pieces to the spar−box structure with
screw pins.

(v) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or
cleaning agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No.
11−004).

(w) Let the adhesive cure (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

4.A.).

(x) After the adhesive has cured, drill the holes in the stringer
repair pieces to the necessary diameter for the fasteners.

(y) Install the correct fasteners in the stringer inner−flange and

web.

(z) Do the steps (s) thru (w) as applicable for the doublers and the
filler repair pieces.
(aa)After the adhesive has cured, drill and countersink the fastener
holes to the correct dimensions.

(ab)Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum

cleaner.
(ac)Install the correct fasteners in the repair area with the sealant
(corrosion inhibiting brush consistency) (Material No. 09−013).

(ad)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning
agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).
(ae)Do an inspection of the repair.

(af)Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter

51−75−12).

Page 226
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: FOR A320−100 ONLY, REFER TO THE RELATED ALLOWABLE DAMAGE AND
REPAIR LIMITS IN CHAPTER 55−31−00 PAGE BLOCK 101 CONFIG. 1,
FIGURES 110 OR 112 TO FIND OUT THE TIME LIMIT FOR THIS TEM

PORARY REPAIR.

ADVISE THE INSPECTION DEPARTMENT THAT A PERMANENT REPAIR IS RE

QUIRED WITHIN THE FLIGHT HOURS (FH) GIVEN IN CHAPTER 55−31−00
PAGE BLOCK 101 CONFIG 1.
CAUTION: FOR A320−200 ONLY, THIS TEMPORARY REPAIR MUST BE REPLACED BY A
PERMANENT REPAIR WITHIN 2 500 FH.

(3) Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 203)

(a) Do the steps (a) thru (d) of the repair procedure in Paragraph
(2).
(b) Get the equivalent metal materials for the repair pieces. The
subsequent steps will help you to do this:

1 Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter 55−31−00 Page Block 101
Config. 1, Figures 103, 105 and 108) and find the correct pre−
cured CFRP materials necessary to make a permanent repair.
2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (Chapter 55−31−00 Page
Block 201 Config. 1, Figures 203 and 204) and find the equiva

lent metal material applicable to the precured CFRP materials.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions for
the repair location.

WARNING: CHROMIC ACID ANODIZING (CAA) IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Clean the repair parts using cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone)

(Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent (trichloroethane methly
chloroform) (Material No. 11−004) and treat the repair parts with
chromic acid anodizing (CAA) or pretreatment for painting (chemi

cal conversion coating yellow aluminum) (Material No. 13−002)
(Refer to Chapter 51−21−11).

(e) Apply structure paint (polyurethane anti corrosion primer) (Mate

rial No. 16−001) to the repair parts (Refer to Chapter 51−23−00).
(f) Do the steps (g) thru (q) of the repair procedure in Paragraph
(2).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(g) Drill and countersink, where applicable, the holes in the repair
pieces to the necessary diameter for the fasteners.

(h) Remove all of the repair pieces and deburr the holes.

Page 227
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(i) Clean the repair pieces and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning
agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

(j) Apply a layer of sealant (corrosion inhibiting brush consistency)

(Material No. 09−013) to the surfaces of the repair pieces that
touch other surfaces when assembled.

NOTE: If necessary you can use a bonding and adhesive compound

(epoxy resin) (Material No. 08−051) with special material
(microballoons) (Material No. 05−057) when you assemble the
temporary repair pieces. If you do this, make sure that you
apply the special material (fluorocarbon release agent) (Ma

terial No. 05−020) to the applicable spar box structure be

fore you apply the epoxy resin. The use of sealant (corro

sion inhibiting brush consistency) (Material No. 09−013) is
not necessary when you use the epoxy resin. Refer to Para

graph (2) for data about how to use epoxy resin material.

(k) Attach the repair pieces to the spar−box structure. Make sure
that you install the countersink fasteners with the sealant (cor

rosion inhibiting brush consistency) (Material No. 09−013).

(l) Remove the unwanted sealant with the cleaning agent (methyl−
ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent (trichloroe

thane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).
(m) Do an inspection of the repair.

(n) Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter

51−75−12).

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 203)

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces and the sealant or adhesive
from the skin structure.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured sheet material necessary to make the
permanent repair (Refer to Figure 203, sheet 1 and 2).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shapes and dimensions nec

essary for the repair area. Use the temporary repair pieces to
get the correct locations for the fastener holes in the permanent
repair pieces.
(d) Do the steps (r) thru (af) of the repair procedure in Paragraph
(2).

NOTE: Use oversize fasteners when you replace the temporary repair
pieces with the permanent repair pieces (Refer to Chapter
51−43−21).

Page 228
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with Internal Skin Patches (Flush Repair)

Figure 203 (sheet 1)

Pages 229/230
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with Internal Skin Patches (Flush Repair)

Figure 203 (sheet 2)

Pages 231/232
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with Internal Skin Patches (Flush Repair)

Figure 203 (sheet 3)

Page 233
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 206.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE (IIR) IS 55−31−11−2−004−00 AND IS DESCRIBED
IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. IN
FORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY
INFORMATION.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT
VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 39020.

D. Stringer Repair with an External Skin Patch (External Repair)

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.
NOTE: This repair is applicable for stringer repair with an external skin
patch (external repair) and is effective as follows:

Aircraft Weight Variant

A320−100 000, 001, 002
000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005,
A320−200 006, 007, 008, 009, 010, 011,
012, 013, 014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 206
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23. ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary
data about all weight variants and their required information for
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 234
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Pre−Cured Sheet (Doubler) AR Refer to Figure 204

2 Pre−Cured Sheet (Filler) AR Refer to Figure 204
3 Pre−Cured Section AR Refer to Figure 204

− Special Material (Microbal
AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to

loons)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com

pound (Epoxy Resin)
− Sealant (Corrosion Inhibit

ing Brush Consistency)
− Cleaning Agent (Methyl−
Ethyl−Ketone)
− Cleaning Agent (Trichloroe

thane Methly Chloroform)
− Pretreatment for Painting
(Chemical Conversion Coat

ing Yellow Aluminum)
− Structure Paint (Polyure

thane Anti Corrosion Prim

er)
− Structure Paint (Polyure

thane Finish Paint)
− Chromic Acid Anodizing
(CAA)
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 204)
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 09−013 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−003 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−004 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 13−002 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−001 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−018 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Refer to Chapter 51−21−11

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

CAUTION: ONLY USE A MECHANICAL PROCEDURE TO REMOVE THE SURFACE

PROTECTION. REFER TO CHAPTER 51−77−11, PARAGRAPH 4.D. FOR
FULL DATA.

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area.

(b) Cut out the damaged skin and stringer structure to the correct
repair shape and dimensions.
(c) Pilot−drill the holes at the correct locations in the stringer
inner flange.

(d) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
pieces (Refer to Figure 204).

(e) Attach the stringer repair pieces in their repair location with
screw clamps.
Page 235
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Pilot−drill through the repair pieces and the stringer at the
necessary hole locations in the stringer−web and inner−flange.
(g) Remove the stringer repair pieces and clean them and the repair
area with the cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No.
11−003) or cleaning agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Ma

terial No. 11−004).

(h) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).

(i) Apply the adhesive paste to the surfaces of the stringer repair
pieces and the spar−box structure that touch when assembled.
NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a
maximum thickness of 1.5 mm (0.059 in).

(j) Attach the stringer repair pieces to the spar−box structure with
screw−clamps and screw pins.

(k) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or
cleaning agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No.
11−004).

(l) Let the adhesive cure (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

4.A.).
(m) Drill the holes in the stringer inner−flange and web to the nec

essary diameter for the fasteners.

(n) Install the correct fasteners in the stringer inner−flange and

web.
(o) Pilot−drill the holes in the doubler necessary to attach it to
the skin−panel structure.

(p) Put the doubler in its repair location and pilot−drill the at

tachment holes in the skin and stringer structure.

(q) Do the steps (h) thru (l) as applicable for the doubler.
(r) Drill and countersink the fastener holes to the correct dimen

sions.

(s) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.
(t) Install the correct fasteners in the repair area with sealant
(corrosion inhibiting brush consistency) (Material No. 09−013).

(u) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning
agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

Page 236
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(v) Do an inspection of the repair.

(w) Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter

51−75−12).

CAUTION: FOR A320−100 ONLY, REFER TO THE RELATED ALLOWABLE DAMAGE AND
REPAIR LIMITS IN CHAPTER 55−31−00 PAGE BLOCK 101 CONFIG. 1,
FIGURES 110 OR 112, TO FIND OUT THE TIME LIMIT FOR THIS TEM

PORARY REPAIR.
ADVISE THE INSPECTION DEPARTMENT THAT A PERMANENT REPAIR IS RE

QUIRED WITHIN THE FLIGHT HOURS (FH) GIVEN IN CHAPTER 55−31−00
PAGE BLOCK 101 CONFIG 1.

CAUTION: FOR A320−200 ONLY, THIS TEMPORARY REPAIR MUST BE REPLACED BY A

PERMANENT REPAIR WITHIN 2 500 FH.
(3) Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 204)

(a) Do the steps (a) thru (c) of the repair procedure in Paragraph
(2).

(b) Get the equivalent metal materials for the repair pieces. The
subsequent steps will help you to do this:

1 Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter 55−31−00 Page Block 101
Config. 1, Figures 103, 105 and 108) and find the correct CFRP
materials necessary to make a permanent repair.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (Chapter 55−31−00 Page

Block 201 Config. 1, Figures 203 and 204) and find the equiva

lent metal materials applicable to the precured CFRP materials.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shapes and dimensions for
the repair location.
WARNING: CHROMIC ACID ANODIZING (CAA) IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Clean the repair parts using cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone)

(Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent (trichloroethane methly
chloroform) (Material No. 11−004) and treat the repair parts with
chromic acid anodizing (CAA) or pretreatment for painting (chemi

cal conversion coating yellow aluminum) (Material No. 13−002)
(Refer to Chapter 51−21−11).

(e) Apply structure paint (polyurethane anti corrosion primer) (Mate

rial No. 16−001) to the repair parts (Refer to Chapter 51−23−00).

(f) Attach the stringer repair−pieces in their repair locations with

screw−clamps.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(g) Drill the holes in the stringer web and inner−flange to the cor

rect diameter for the fasteners.

Page 237
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(h) Pilot−drill at the attachement−hole locations on the doubler.

(i) Put the filler and the doubler in their repair locations.
(j) Drill the holes in the doubler and the spar−box structure to the
correct diameter for the fasteners.

(k) Countersink the holes on the outer surface of the doubler.

(l) Remove all of the repair parts from the spar−box structure and
deburr the holes.

(m) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

(n) Clean the repair pieces and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning
agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

(o) Apply a layer of sealant (corrosion inhibiting brush consistency)

(Material No. 09−013) to the surfaces of the repair pieces that
touch other surfaces when assembled.
NOTE: If necessary you can use a bonding and adhesive compound
(epoxy resin) (Material No. 08−051) with special material
(microballoons) (Material No. 05−057) when you assemble the
temporary repair pieces. If you do this, make sure that you
apply the special material (fluorocarbon release agent) (Ma

terial No. 05−020) to the applicable spar−box structure be

fore you apply the epoxy resin. The use of sealant (corro

sion inhibiting brush consistency) (Material No. 09−013) is
not necessary when you use the epoxy resin. Refer to Para

graph (2) for data about how to use epoxy resin material.

(p) Attach the repair pieces to the spar−box structure. Make sure
that you install the countersink fasteners with the sealant (cor

rosion inhibiting brush consistency) (Material No. 09−013).

(q) Remove the unwanted sealant with the cleaning agent (methyl−
ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent (trichloroe

thane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).
(r) Do an inspection of the repair.

(s) Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter

51−75−12).

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 204)

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces and the sealant or adhesive
from the spar−box structure.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured sheet material necessary to make the
permanent repair (Refer to Figure 204).

Page 238
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shapes and dimensions nec

essary for the repair area. Use the temporary repair pieces to
get the correct locations for the fastener holes in the permanent
repair pieces.

(d) Do the steps (e) thru (w) of the repair procedure in Paragraph
(2), as applicable to the repair pieces.

NOTE: Use oversize fasteners when you replace the temporary repair
pieces with the permanent repair pieces (Refer to Chapter
51−43−21).

Pages 239/240
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Stringer Repair with an External Skin Patch (External Repair)

Figure 204

Pages 241/242
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 207.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPEC
TION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE (IIR) IS 55−31−11−2−005−00 AND IS DE
SCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF
THE SRM. INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH
THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001, MUST REFER TO THE
WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 39020.

E. Repair for Delamination at Stringer and Ribfoot / Debonding Damage at

Ribfoot.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.
NOTE: This repair is applicable for delamination at stringer and ribfoot
/ debonding damage at ribfoot and is effective as follows:

Aircraft Weight Variant

A320−100 000, 001, 002
000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005,
A320−200 006, 007, 008, 009, 010, 011,
012, 013, 014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 207
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23. ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary
data about all weight variants and their required information for
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 243
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Sealant (Corrosion Inhibit AR Material No. 09−013 (Refer to

ing Brush Consistency) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Cleaning Agent (Methyl− AR Material No. 11−003 (Refer to
Ethyl−Ketone) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Cleaning Agent (Trichloroe AR Material No. 11−004 (Refer to
thane Methly Chloroform) Chapter 51−35−00)
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 205)

(a) Make some marks to show the locations of the new holes necessary
to repair the delaminated / debonded area.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Drill the correct diameter holes at the necessary locations in
the repair area. Start at the outer hole locations and then work
to the inner hole locations. After you drill each hole, put a
screw pin into it to clamp the delaminated layers together. This
will help to stop any more delamination damage.
(c) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

(d) If applicable, countersink the holes on the outer surface of the

skin to the correct dimensions for the fasteners.
(e) Apply the sealant (corrosion inhibiting brush consistency) (Mate
rial No. 09−013) to the countersunk holes in the skin surface.

(f) Install the correct fasteners in the repair area.

(g) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ke
tone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent (trichloroethane
methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

(h) Do an inspection of the repair.

CAUTION: FOR A320−200 ONLY, THIS TEMPORARY REPAIR MUST BE REPLACED BY A

PERMANENT REPAIR WITHIN 2 500 FH.
(3) Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 205)

Do all the repair steps of Paragraph (2). Instead of Hi−loks it is

permitted to use Blind Fasteners (Refer to Figure 205).

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 205)

(a) Remove the Blind Fasteners.

Page 244
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Clear the repair area with the cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ke
tone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent (trichloroethane
methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

(c) Do the repair steps (e) thru (h) of Paragraph (2).

NOTE: Use oversize fasteners (Refer to Chapter 51−43−21).

Pages 245/246
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair for Delamination Damage at Stringer and Ribfoot / Debonding Damage at

Ribfoot.
Figure 205
Pages 247/248
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 208.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE (IIR) IS 55−31−11−2−006−00 AND IS DESCRIBED
IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. IN
FORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY
INFORMATION.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT
VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 39020.

F. Crosspoint Repair for which Access into the Spar−Box is necessary (Flush
Repair)

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.
NOTE: You can make this repair with the rib installed in or removed from
its correct structural location. When you make this repair with the
rib installed, you must make and assemble the skin doubler in two
pieces (Refer to Figure 206, sheet 1, Section C−C).

NOTE: This repair is applicable for crosspoint repair for which access
into the spar−box is necessary (flush repair) and is effective as
follows:

Aircraft Weight Variant

A320−100 000, 001, 002
000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005,
A320−200 006, 007, 008, 009, 010, 011,
012, 013, 014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 208
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23. ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary
data about all weight variants and their required information for
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 249
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Pre−Cured Sheet (Doubler) AR Refer to Figure 206

2 Pre−Cured Sheet (Filler) AR Refer to Figure 206
3 Pre−Cured Sheet (Filler) AR Refer to Figure 206
4 Pre−Cured Section AR Refer to Figure 206
5 Pre−Cured Section AR Refer to Figure 206
6 Pre−Cured Sheet AR Refer to Figure 206
7 Pre−Cured Section AR Refer to Figure 206

− Special Material (Fluoro AR Material No. 05−020 (Refer to

carbon Release Agent)
− Special Material (Microbal
loons)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Epoxy Resin)
− Sealant (Corrosion Inhibit
ing Brush Consistency)
− Cleaning Agent (Methyl−
Ethyl−Ketone)
− Cleaning Agent (Trichloroe
thane Methly Chloroform)
− Pretreatment for Painting
(Chemical Conversion Coat
ing Yellow Aluminum)
− Structure Paint (Polyure
thane Anti Corrosion Prim
er)
− Structure Paint (Polyure
thane Finish Paint)
− Chromic Acid Anodizing
(CAA)
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 206)
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 09−013 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−003 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−004 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 13−002 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−001 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−018 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Refer to Chapter 51−21−11

(a) If applicable, remove the rib from the repair location.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Cut away the skin and crosspoint structure to the necessary shape
and dimensions for the repair. Make sure that you remove all the
damaged structure.

(c) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
pieces (Refer to Figure 206, sheet 3).

Page 250
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(d) Make the repair pieces to the necessary shapes and dimensions for
the repair, but do not drill any holes.
(e) Pilot−drill the holes necessary to attach the skin doubler to the
skin only.

(f) Put the doubler in its repair location and pilot−drill the holes
from the doubler into the skin.

(g) Attach the doubler to the skin with screw pins.

(h) Put the skin filler piece in its repair location and pilot−drill
the holes necessary to attach it to the doubler only.

(i) Attach the skin filler piece to the doubler with screw pins.

(j) Attach the stringer repair pieces in their correct repair loca
tions with screw clamps.

(k) Pilot−drill the holes necessary to attach the stringer repair

pieces to the spar−box structure. Do not drill those holes which
are necessary to attach the ribfoot repair pieces to the stringer
repair pieces.
(l) Replace the screw clamps with screw pins.

(m) Attach the ribfoot repair pieces in their correct repair loca
tions with screw clamps.

(n) Pilot−drill all of the holes necessary to attach the ribfoot re
pair pieces to the spar−box structure.

(o) Remove all of the repair pieces from the spar−box structure.

(p) Clean the repair pieces and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning
agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

(q) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).

(r) Apply the adhesive paste to the surfaces of the repair pieces
and the spar−box structure that will touch when assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a

maximum thickness of 1.5 mm (0.059 in).

(s) Attach the repair pieces to the spar−box structure with screw
pins.

(t) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or
cleaning agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No.
11−004).

Page 251
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(u) Let the adhesive cure (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

4.A.).
WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(v) Drill the holes in the repair pieces to the correct diameters
for the applicable fasteners.

(w) Countersink the holes on the outer surface of the skin and the
skin filler piece.
(x) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

(y) Apply the sealant (corrosion inhibiting brush consistency) (Mate

rial No. 09−013) to the countersunk holes in the skin surface
and filler piece.

(z) Install the correct fasteners in the repair pieces and spar−box
structure.

(aa)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning
agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

(ab)Do an inspection of the repair.

(ac)Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter

51−75−12).
CAUTION: FOR A320−100 ONLY, REFER TO THE RELATED ALLOWABLE DAMAGE AND
REPAIR LIMITS IN CHAPTER 55−31−00 PAGE BLOCK 101 CONFIG. 1,
FIGURES 110 OR 113, TO FIND OUT THE TIME LIMIT FOR THIS TEM
PORARY REPAIR.

ADVISE THE INSPECTION DEPARTMENT THAT A PERMANENT REPAIR IS RE

QUIRED WITHIN THE FLIGHT HOURS (FH) GIVEN IN CHAPTER 55−31−00
PAGE BLOCK 101 CONFIG 1.

CAUTION: FOR A320−200 ONLY, THIS TEMPORARY REPAIR MUST BE REPLACED BY A

PERMANENT REPAIR WITHIN 2 500 FH.

(3) Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 206)

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut away the skin and crosspoint structure to the necessary shape
and dimensions for the repair. Make sure that you remove all of
the damaged structure.
(b) Get the equivalent metal materials for the repair pieces. The
subsequent steps will help you to do this:

Page 252
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

1 Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter 55−31−00 Page Block 101
Config. 1, Figures 103, 105 and 108) and find the correct CFRP
materials necessary to make a permanent repair.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (Chapter 55−31−00 Page

Block 201 Config. 1, Figures 203 and 204) and find the equiva
lent metal materials applicable to the precured CFRP materials.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shapes and dimensions for
the repair location.

WARNING: CHROMIC ACID ANODIZING (CAA) IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Clean the repair parts using cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone)

(Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent (trichloroethane methly
chloroform) (Material No. 11−004) and treat the repair parts with
chromic acid anodizing (CAA) or pretreatment for painting (chemi
cal conversion coating yellow aluminum) (Material No. 13−002)
(Refer to Chapter 51−21−11).

(e) Apply structure paint (polyurethane anti corrosion primer) (Mate

rial No. 16−001) to the repair parts (Refer to Chapter 51−23−00).
(f) Drill and countersink, where applicable, all of the holes neces
sary to attach the repair pieces to the spar−box structure. Drill
all of the holes to agree with their correct fastener diameters.

(g) Apply the sealant (corrosion inhibiting brush consistency) (Mate

rial No. 09−013) to the surfaces of the repair pieces that touch
other surfaces when assembled.

NOTE: If necessary you can use a bonding and adhesive compound

(epoxy resin) (Material No. 08−051) with special material
(microballoons) (Material No. 05−057) when you assemble the
temporary repair pieces. If you do this, make sure that you
apply the special material (fluorocarbon release agent) (Ma
terial No. 05−020) to the applicable spar−box structure be
fore you apply the epoxy resin. The use of the sealant
(corrosion inhibiting brush consistency) (Material No.
09−013) is not necessary when you use the epoxy resin. Re
fer to Paragraph (2) for data about how to use epoxy resin
material.

(h) Attach the repair pieces to the spar−box structure. Make sure
that you install the countersunk fasteners with the sealant (cor
rosion inhibiting brush consistency) (Material No. 09−013).
(i) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

(j) Remove the unwanted sealant with the cleaning agent (methyl−
ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent (trichloroe
thane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

(k) Do an inspection of the repair.

Page 253
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(l) Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter

51−75−12).
(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 206)

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces and the sealant or adhesive
from the spar−box structure.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the perma
nent repair pieces (Refer to Figure 206, sheet 3).
WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shapes and dimensions nec
essary for the repair area. Use the temporary repair pieces to
get the correct locations for the fastener holes in the permanent
repair pieces.

(d) Do the steps (p) thru (ac) of the repair procedure in Paragraph
(2), as applicable to the repair pieces.

NOTE: Use oversize fasteners when you replace the temporary repair
pieces with the permanent repair pieces (Refer to Chapter
51−43−21).

Page 254
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Crosspoint Repair for which Access into the Spar−Box is necessary (Flush Re
pair)
Figure 206 (sheet 1)
Pages 255/256
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Crosspoint Repair for which Access into the Spar−Box is necessary (Flush Re
pair)
Figure 206 (sheet 2)
Pages 257/258
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Crosspoint Repair for which Access into the Spar−Box is necessary (Flush Re
pair)
Figure 206 (sheet 3)
Page 259
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 209.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE (IIR) IS 55−31−11−2−007−00 AND IS DESCRIBED
IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. IN
FORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY
INFORMATION.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT
VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 39020.

G. Crosspoint Repair for which Access into the Spar−Box is not necessary
(External Repair Patch)

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.
NOTE: This repair is applicable for crosspoint repair for which access
into the spar−box is not necessary (external repair patch) and is
effective as follows:

Aircraft Weight Variant

A320−100 000, 001, 002
000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005,
A320−200 006, 007, 008, 009, 010, 011,
012, 013, 014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 209
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23. ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary
data about all weight variants and their required information for
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 260
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Pre−Cured Sheet (Filler) AR Refer to Figure 207

2 Pre−Cured Section AR Refer to Figure 207
3 Pre−Cured Sheet AR Refer to Figure 207
4 Pre−Cured Section AR Refer to Figure 207
5 Pre−Cured Section AR Refer to Figure 207
6 Pre−Cured Sheet (Doubler) AR Refer to Figure 207

− Special Material (Fluoro AR Material No. 05−020 (Refer to

carbon Release Agent)
− Special Material (Microbal
loons)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Epoxy Resin)
− Sealant (Corrosion Inhibit
ing Brush Consistency)
− Cleaning Agent (Methyl−
Ethyl−Ketone)
− Cleaning Agent (Trichloroe
thane Methly Chloroform)
− Pretreatment for Painting
(Chemical Conversion Coat
ing Yellow Aluminum)
− Structure Paint (Polyure
thane Anti Corrosion Prim
er)
− Structure Paint (Polyure
thane Finish Paint)
− Chromic Acid Anodizing
(CAA)
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 207)
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 09−013 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−003 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−004 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 13−002 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−001 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−018 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Refer to Chapter 51−21−11

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut away the skin and crosspoint structure to the necessary shape
and dimensions for the repair. Make sure that you remove all of
the damaged structure.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
pieces (Refer to Figure 207, sheet 3).

(c) Make the repair pieces to the necessary shapes and dimensions for
the repair, but do not drill holes.

Page 261
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(d) Pilot−drill the holes at the correct locations on the stringer

inner−flange.
(e) Attach the stringer repair pieces in their repair locations with
screw clamps.

(f) Pilot−drill through the repair pieces and the stringer at the
necessary hole locations in the stringer web and inner−flange.

(g) Remove the stringer repair pieces for better access to do the
subsequent steps.

(h) Attach the ribfoot repair pieces in their repair locations with
screw clamps.

(i) Pilot−drill the holes necessary to attach these repair pieces to

the ribfoot structure.

(j) Drill the holes, at the same size, from the rib to the ribfoot
repair pieces.

(k) Attach the stringer repair pieces to the spar−box structure

again.
(l) Pilot−drill the holes in the repair angles which will attach the
ribfoot to the stringer repair pieces.

(m) Remove all of the repair pieces from the spar−box structure.

(n) Clean the repair area and repair pieces with the cleaning agent
(methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent
(trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

(o) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).
(p) Apply the adhesive paste to the surfaces of the repair pieces
and the spar box structure that will touch when assembled.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a

maximum thickness of 1.5 mm (0.059 in).
(q) Attach the repair pieces to the spar box structure with screw
pins and screw clamps as necessary.

(r) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or
cleaning agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No.
11−004).

(s) Let the adhesive cure (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

4.A.).

Page 262
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(t) Drill the holes in the repair pieces to the correct diameters
for the fasteners.

(u) Install the correct fasteners in the repair pieces and the spar−
box structure.

(v) Pilot−drill the necessary holes in the doubler to attach it to

the spar−box structure.
(w) Put the doubler in its repair location and pilot−drill the holes
from the doubler into the spar−box structure.

(x) Do the steps (p) thru (t) as applicable for the doubler.

(y) Countersink the holes on the outer surface of the doubler.

(z) Apply the sealant (corrosion inhibiting brush consistency) (Mate
rial No. 09−013) to the countersunk holes in the doubler.

(aa)Install the correct fasteners in the doubler and the spar−box

structure.
(ab)Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

(ac)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean
ing agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning
agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).
(ad)Do an inspection of the repair.

(ae)Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter

51−75−12).

CAUTION: FOR A320−100 ONLY, REFER TO THE RELATED ALLOWABLE DAMAGE AND
REPAIR LIMITS IN CHAPTER 55−31−00 PAGE BLOCK 101 CONFIG. 1,
FIGURES 110 OR 113, TO FIND OUT THE TIME LIMIT FOR THIS TEM
PORARY REPAIR.

ADVISE THE INSPECTION DEPARTMENT THAT A PERMANENT REPAIR IS RE

QUIRED WITHIN THE FLIGHT HOURS (FH) GIVEN IN CHAPTER 55−31−00
PAGE BLOCK 101 CONFIG 1.

CAUTION: FOR A320−200 ONLY, THIS TEMPORARY REPAIR MUST BE REPLACED BY A

PERMANENT REPAIR WITHIN 2 500 FH.

(3) Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 207)

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS

(a) Cut away the skin and crosspoint structure to the necessary shape
and dimensions for the repair. Make sure that you remove all of
the damaged structure.

Page 263
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Get the equivalent metal materials for the repair pieces. The
subsequent steps will help you to do this:
1 Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter 55−31−00 Page Block 101
Config. 1, Figures 103, 105 and 108) and find the correct CFRP
materials necessary to make a permanent repair.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (Chapter 55−31−00 Page

Block 201 Config. 1, Figures 203 and 204) and find the equiva
lent metal materials applicable to the precured CFRP materials.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shapes and dimensions for
the repair location.

WARNING: CHROMIC ACID ANODIZING (CAA) IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Clean the repair parts using cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone)
(Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent (trichloroethane methly
chloroform) (Material No. 11−004) and treat the repair parts with
chromic acid anodizing (CAA) or pretreatment for painting (chemi
cal conversion coating yellow aluminum) (Material No. 13−002)
(Refer to Chapter 51−21−11).
(e) Apply structure paint (polyurethane anti corrosion primer) (Mate
rial No. 16−001) to the repair parts (Refer to Chapter 51−23−00).

(f) Drill and countersink, where applicable, all of the holes neces
sary to attach the repair pieces to the spar−box structure. Drill
all of the holes to agree with their correct fastener diameters.

(g) Apply the sealant (corrosion inhibiting brush consistency) (Mate

rial No. 09−013) to the surfaces of the repair pieces that touch
other surfaces when assembled.

NOTE: If necessary you can use a bonding and adhesive compound

(epoxy resin) (Material No. 08−051) with special material
(microballoons) (Material No. 05−057) when you assemble the
temporary repair pieces. If you do this, make sure that you
apply the special material (fluorocarbon release agent) (Ma
terial No. 05−020) to the applicable spar−box structure be
fore you apply the epoxy resin. The use of the sealant
(corrosion inhibiting brush consistency) (Material No.
09−013) is not necessary when you use the epoxy resin. Re
fer to Paragraph (2) for data about how to use epoxy resin
material.
(h) Attach the repair pieces to the spar−box structure. Make sure
that you install the countersunk fasteners with the sealant (cor
rosion inhibiting brush consistency) (Material No. 09−013).

(i) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

Page 264
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(j) Remove the unwanted sealant with the cleaning agent (methyl−
ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent (trichloroe
thane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

(k) Do an inspection of the repair.

(l) Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter

51−75−12).

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 207)

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces and the sealant or adhesive
from the spar−box structure.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the perma
nent repair pieces (Refer to Figure 207, Sheet 3).
WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shapes and dimensions nec
essary for the repair area. Use the temporary repair pieces to
get the correct locations for the fastener holes in the permanent
repair pieces.
(d) Do the steps (n) thru (ae) of the repair procedure in Paragraph
(2), as applicable to the repair pieces.

NOTE: Use oversize fasteners when you replace the temporary repair
pieces with the permanent repair pieces (Refer to Chapter
51−43−21).

Pages 265/266
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Crosspoint Repair for which Access into the Spar−Box is not necessary (Exter
nal Repair Patch)
Figure 207 (sheet 1)
Pages 267/268
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Crosspoint Repair for which Access into the Spar−Box is not necessary (Exter
nal Repair Patch)
Figure 207 (sheet 2)
Pages 269/270
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Crosspoint Repair for which Access into the Spar−Box is not necessary (Exter
nal Repair Patch)
Figure 207 (sheet 3)
Page 271
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 210.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE (IIR) IS 55−31−11−2−008−00 AND IS DESCRIBED
IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. IN
FORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY
INFORMATION.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT
VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 39020.

H. Skin Repair with a Laminated Filler Patch (Flush Repair)

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.
NOTE: It is possible to make this repair with the room temperature (RT)
or hot−bond repair procedures. Refer to the applicable allowable
damage and repair limits data to find the correct procedure for
your damage conditions.

NOTE: This repair is applicable for skin repair with a laminated filler
patch (flush repair) and is effective as follows:

Aircraft Weight Variant

A320−100 000, 001, 002
000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005,
A320−200 006, 007, 008, 009, 010, 011,
012, 013, 014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 210
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23. ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary
data about all weight variants and their required information for
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 272
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Pre−Cured Sheet (Doubler) AR Refer to Figure 208

− Abrasive Cloth AR Grade 100, 280, 400

− Glass Fabric (dry) AR Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para
graph 6.B.(8)
− Carbon Fabric (dry) AR Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para
graph 6.B.(8)
− Epoxy Prepreg Carbon Tape AR DAN1050B40 (Refer to Chapter
51−33−00)
− Epoxy Prepreg Carbon Fabric AR DAN1208B40 (Refer to Chapter
51−33−00)
− Epoxy Prepreg Glass Fabric AR LN29549−8.4321.1A−EP (Refer to
Chapter 51−33−00)
− Special Material (Microbal AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to
loons) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−008 (Refer to
pound (Polyester Filler) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−010A (Refer to
pound (Epoxy Resin and Chapter 51−35−00)
Hardener Adhesive)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
pound (Epoxy Resin) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Cleaning Agent (Methyl− AR Material No. 11−003 (Refer to
Ethyl−Ketone) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Cleaning Agent (Trichloroe AR Material No. 11−004 (Refer to
thane Methly Chloroform) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Structure Paint (Polyure AR Material No. 16−001 (Refer to
thane Anti Corrosion Prim Chapter 51−35−00)
er)
− Structure Paint (Polyure AR Material No. 16−018 (Refer to
thane Finish Paint) Chapter 51−35−00)
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 208)

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

CAUTION: ONLY USE A MECHANICAL PROCEDURE TO REMOVE THE SURFACE

PROTECTION. REFER TO CHAPTER 51−77−11, PARAGRAPH 4.D. FOR
FULL DATA.

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area.

(b) Cut out and chamfer the damaged skin structure to the correct
repair shape and dimensions.

Page 273
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(c) Get the pre−cured sheet material necessary to make the doubler
(Refer to Figure 208).
(d) Cut the doubler to the correct shape and dimensions applicable to
the repair.

(e) Make the mating surfaces of the doubler and the skin structure
rough with the abrasive cloth grade 100. This is to give the
adhesive a good keying surface to help a strong bond result.
(f) Clean the doubler and the repair area with the cleaning agent
(methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent
(trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

(g) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051). If necessary add the special material (microballoons)
(Material No. 05−057) to make an adhesive paste.

(h) Apply the adhesive to the mating surfaces of the doubler and the
skin sructure.

(i) Put the doubler in its repair location and use clamps to lightly
push it against the inner skin surface.

(j) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or
cleaning agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No.
11−004).
(k) Let the adhesive cure for 24 hours at room temperature and then
remove the clamps.

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.
(l) Get the correct dry−fabric material for the room temperature re
pair, or the pre−impregnated fabric material if a hot−bond repair
is applicable.

(m) Prepare the repair layers (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

4.H. for dry−fabric material and 4.C. for pre−impregnated materi
al data).

NOTE: Use bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin and hardener
adhesive) (Material No. 08−010A) in the preparation of the
dry fabric material.

(n) Lay up the repair layers on the repair area (Refer to Chapter
51−77−11, Paragraph 5.A. for the room temperature repair layers
and 4.C. for the hot−bond repair layers data).

Page 274
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(o) Install the vacuum−cure equipment over the laminate repair area.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Figure 11 for the room temperature
repair and Figure 10 for the hot−bond repair data.

NOTE: For the best results from the hot−bond and room temperature
repair procedures, install a caul−plate with the vacuum−cure
equipment. The caul−plate will apply the heat and pressure
equally over the repair area.
(p) Cure the repair layers under vacuum conditions (minimum 80% vacu
um). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.D. for full data.

NOTE: For room temperature laminate repairs this vacuum condition

is necessary only for the initial 3 hours (minimum) of the
curing process.
NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary for the
room temperature repair, use radiant heat equipment (for
example infrared heat lamps). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
Paragraph 5.D. for data.

(q) After the repair layers have cured, remove the vacuum−cure equip
ment from the repair area.

(r) With abrasive cloth, make the repair patch smooth and level with
the adjacent skin surface. Initially use cloth 280 grade and then
finish with 400 grade. If necessary apply the polyester filler
(Material No. 08−008).
(s) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ke
tone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent (trichloroethane
methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

(t) Do an inspection of the repair (Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Para

graph 5.).

(u) Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter

51−75−12).

(3) There is no temporary repair applicable.

(4) There is no permanent repair after temporary repair applicable.

Pages 275/276
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin Repair with a Laminated Filler Patch (Flush Repair)

Figure 208

Pages 277/278
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 211.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE (IIR) IS 55−31−11−2−009−00 AND IS DESCRIBED
IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. IN
FORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY
INFORMATION.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT
VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 39020.

I. Skin and Stringer Laminated Repair (Flush repair)

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you do a damage evalua
tion. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.
NOTE: This repair is applicable for skin and stringer laminated repair
(flush repair) and is effective as follows:

Aircraft Weight Variant

A320−100 000, 001, 002
000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005,
A320−200 006, 007, 008, 009, 010, 011,
012, 013, 014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 211
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23. ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary
data about all weight variants and their required information for
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 279
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Pre−Cured Section AR Refer to Figure 209

2 Aluminium Mandrel AR Refer to Figure 209

− Parting Film AR E−3760

− Abrasive Cloth
− Epoxy Prepreg Carbon Tape
− Epoxy Prepreg Carbon Fabric
− Epoxy Prepreg Glass Fabric
− Special Material (Microbal
loons)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Polyester Filler)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Adhesive Film)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Epoxy Resin)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Masking Tape)
− Cleaning Agent (Methyl−
Ethyl−Ketone)
− Cleaning Agent (Trichloroe
thane Methly Chloroform)
− Structure Paint (Polyure
thane Anti Corrosion Prim
er)
− Structure Paint (Polyure
thane Finish Paint)
(2) Permanent repair (Refer to Figure 209)
AR Grade 200, 280, 400
AR DAN1050B40 (Refer to Chapter
51−33−00)
AR DAN1208B40 (Refer to Chapter
51−33−00)
AR LN29549−8.4321.1A−EP (Refer to
Chapter 51−33−00)
AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 08−008 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 08−042 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 08−074 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−003 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−004 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−001 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−018 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

CAUTION: ONLY USE A MECHANICAL PROCEDURE TO REMOVE THE SURFACE

PROTECTION. REFER TO CHAPTER 51−77−11, PARAGRAPH 4.D. FOR
THE FULL DATA.

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area.

(b) Remove the damaged material. Cut the damaged skin into a regular
shape and chamfer the undamaged skin into an overlap (Refer to
Figure 209).

Page 280
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(c) Cut the damaged stringer and chamfer the undamaged stringer (Re
fer to Figure 209).
(d) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

(e) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ke
tone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent (trichloroethane
methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).
(f) Make an aluminum backing plate to lay up the skin repair layers
(Refer to Figure 209).

(g) Put parting film over the aluminum backing plate. Use bonding and
adhesive compound (masking tape) (Material No. 08−074) to attach
the backing plate to the inside surface of the repair area (Re
fer to Figure 209).

(h) Find out the number of fabric layers necessary to make the lami
nate skin repair (Refer to Chapter 55−31−00 Page Block 101 Con
fig. 1, Figure 104).
(i) Get the correct prepreg fabric material necessary for the repair.

(j) Prepare and Lay−up the repair layers on the repair area. (Refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.C.).

(k) Install the vacuum cure equipment over the laminate repair area.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Figure 10 for the hot−bond repair
data.

NOTE: For the best results from the hot−bond and room temperature
repair procedures, install a caul−plate with the vacuum−cure
equipment. The caul−plate will apply the heat and pressure
equally over the repair area.

(l) Cure the repair layers under vacuum conditions (minimum 80% vacu
um). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.D. for full data.

(m) After the repair layers have cured, remove the vacuum−cure equip
ment and the aluminium backing plate from the repair area.
(n) With abrasive cloth, make the repair patch smooth and level with
the adjacent skin surface. Initially use abrasive cloth 280 grade
and then finish with 400 grade. If necessary apply the polyester
filler (Material Number 08−008).

(o) Get the correct pre−cured material necessary to make the stringer
repair pieces (Refer to Figure 209, Sheet 2).

(p) Cut the stringer repair pieces to the correct dimensions (Refer
to Figure 209).

Page 281
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(q) Make some marks to show the position of holes necessary for
screw pins. Drill the holes large enough for a screw pin shank
(Refer to Figure 209).

(r) Clean the stringer repair pieces with the cleaning agent (methyl−
ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent (trichloroe
thane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

(s) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).

(t) Apply the adhesive paste to the mating surfaces of the stringer
repair pieces.
(u) Clamp the stringer repair pieces together with screw−pins (Refer
to Figure 209).

(v) Remove any unwanted adhesive from the stringer repair pieces with
the cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or
cleaning agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No.
11−004).

(w) Let the adhesive cure for 24 hours at room temperature.

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.

(x) After the cure time remove the screw pins from the stringer re
pair pieces.

(y) Clean the assembled repair pieces with the cleaning agent (meth
yl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent (trichlo
roethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).
(z) Make two aluminum mandrels to fit inside the stringer inner and
outer flanges. The mandrel will be 100 mm (3.937 in) longer than
the pre−cured stringer repair pieces (Refer to Figure 209). AIR
BUS can supply the mandrels.

(aa)Find out the number of prepreg layers necessary to make the

stringer outer flange (Refer to Chapter 55−31−00 Page Block 101
Config. 1, Figure 106).

(ab)Get the correct prepreg material (Refer to the Material List).

(ac)Cut−out the necessary strip of bonding and adhesive compound

(adhesive film) (Material No. 08−042) for the stringer outer
flange.

(ad)Prepare and lay−up the adhesive film and the pre−preg repair
layers on the repair area (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraphs
4.B. and 4.C.).
(ae)Put the pre−cured stringer repair piece into its repair position.

Page 282
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(af)Put parting film over the aluminum mandrels. Use clamps to hold
the mandrels to the repair area. The mandrels will hold the pre−
cured repair pieces in the correct repair position during the
cure time (Refer to Figure 209).

(ag)Repeat steps (k) thru (m) of this repair.

NOTE: No caul−plate is required to cure the stringer outer−flange

layers.
(ah)Find out the number of prepreg layers necessary to make the
stringer inner flange (Refer to Chapter 55−31−00 Page Block 101
Config. 1, Figure 107).

(ai)Repeat steps (ab) thru (ad) and (af) thru (ag) to make the
stringer inner flange.
(aj)After the cure time, remove the vacuum bag, clamps, mandrels and
unwanted adhesive from the repair area.

(ak)Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ke

tone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent (trichloroethane
methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

(al)You must make 4 packing strips to be put in the stringer outer

flange root. Roll a strip of epoxy prepreg carbon tape (Material
No. DAN1050B40) that is the same length as the repair into the 3
mm (0.118 in) diameter packing strip (Refer to Figure 209).
(am)Put the four 3 mm (0.118 in) diameter packing strips in their
repair positions.

(an)Get the correct prepreg fabric material necessary for the repair
(Refer to Chapter 55−31−00 Page Block 101 Config. 1, Figure
106/107 for layer information).
(ao)Do steps (j) thru (m) as applicable to the stringer web repair.

NOTE: For the best results it is possible to use the repair man
drels in addition to the caul−plates. Use bonding and adhe
sive compound (masking tape) (Material No. 08−074) to keep
these in their repair locations.

(ap)After the cure time, remove the vacuum bag, aluminum plates,
mandrels and tape from the repair area. Use 200 grade abrasive
cloth to remove any rough cured adhesive from the repair area.

(aq)Do an inspection of the repair (Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Para

graph 5.).

(ar)Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter

51−75−12).

(3) There is no temporary repair applicable.

Page 283
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(4) There is no permanent repair after temporary repair applicable.

Page 284
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin and Stringer Laminated Repair (Flush Repair)

Figure 209 (sheet 1)

Pages 285/286
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin and Stringer Laminated Repair (Flush Repair)

Figure 209 (sheet 2)

Pages 287/288
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Skin and Stringer Laminated Repair (Flush Repair)

Figure 209 (sheet 3)

Pages 289/290
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 212.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE (IIR) IS 55−31−11−2−010−00 AND IS DESCRIBED
IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. IN
FORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY
INFORMATION.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT
VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 39020.

J. Ribfoot Flush Repair

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.
NOTE: It is possible to make this repair with two different configura
tions of the ribfoot repair pieces (Refer to Figures 210 and 211).
You must use the configuration which is the better for your repair
conditions.

NOTE: You can make this repair with the rib installed in, or removed
from its correct structural location. When you make this repair
with the rib installed, you must make and assemble the doubler in
two pieces (Refer to Figures 210 or 211, section D−D).

NOTE: This repair is applicable for ribfoot flush repair and is effective
as follows:

Aircraft Weight Variant

A320−100 000, 001, 002
000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005,
A320−200 006, 007, 008, 009, 010, 011,
012, 013, 014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 212
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23. ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary
data about all weight variants and their required information for
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 291
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Pre−Cured Sheet (Filler) AR Refer to Figure 210 or 211

2 Pre−Cured Sheet (Doubler) AR Refer to Figure 210 or 211
3 Pre−Cured Sheet (Doubler) AR Refer to Figure 210 or 211
4 Pre−Cured Sheet (Doubler) AR Refer to Figure 210 or 211
5 Pre−Cured Sheet (Filler) AR Refer to Figure 210 or 211
6 Pre−Cured Sheet (Filler) AR Refer to Figure 210 or 211
7 Pre−Cured Section AR Refer to Figure 210 or 211

− Epoxy Prepreg Carbon Fabric AR DAN1208B40 (Refer to Chapter

− Epoxy Prepreg Glass Fabric
− Special Material (Fluoro
carbon Release Agent)
− Special Material (Microbal
loons)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Epoxy Resin)
− Sealant (Corrosion Inhibit
ing Brush Consistency)
− Cleaning Agent (Methyl
Ethyl−Ketone)
− Cleaning Agent (Trichloroe
thane Methly Chloroform)
− Pretreatment for Painting
(Chemical Conversion Coat
ing Yellow Aluminum)
− Structure Paint (Polyure
thane Anti Corrosion Prim
er)
− Structure Paint (Polyure
thane Finish Paint)
− Chromic Acid Anodizing
(CAA)
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 210 or 211)
51−33−00)
AR LN29549−8.4321.1A−EP (Refer to
Chapter 51−33−00)
AR Material No. 05−020 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 09−013 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−003 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−004 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 13−002 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−001 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−018 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Refer to Chapter 51−21−11

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) If applicable, remove the rib from the repair location.

(b) Cut away the damaged skin and ribfoot structure to the necessary
shape and dimensions for the repair.

Page 292
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(c) Get the correct pre−cured repair materials necessary to make the
repair pieces (Refer to Figure 210, sheet 2).
(d) Make the repair pieces to the correct shapes and dimensions.

(e) Mark out and pilot−drill at all of the new hole locations neces
sary to attach the repair pieces to the spar−box structure.

NOTE: At the two hole locations of the rib attachment, drill with
the existing diameter into the ribfoot repair piece.
(f) Clean the repair area and the repair pieces with the cleaning
agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning
agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

(g) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).

(h) Apply the adhesive to the mating surface of the repair pieces
and the spar−box structure.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a

maximum thickness of 1.5 mm (0.059 in).

(i) Attach the repair pieces to the spar−box structure with screw
pins.

(j) Remove unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the cleaning
agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning
agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

(k) Let the adhesive cure for 24 hours at room temperature and then
remove the screw pins.

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.C..

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(l) Drill the holes in the repair pieces to the correct diameters
for the applicable fasteners.
(m) Countersink the holes on the outer surface of the skin and the
skin filler patch (item 3).

(n) Install the fasteners with sealant (corrosion inhibiting brush

consistency) (Material No. 09−013) in the repair pieces and the
spar−box structure.
(o) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

Page 293
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(p) Remove unwanted sealant from the repair area with the cleaning
agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning
agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

(q) Do an inspection of the repair.

(r) Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter

51−75−12).

CAUTION: FOR A320−100 ONLY, REFER TO THE RELATED ALLOWABLE DAMAGE AND
REPAIR LIMITS IN CHAPTER 55−31−00 PAGE BLOCK 101 CONFIG. 1,
FIGURES 110 OR 113, TO FIND OUT THE TIME LIMIT FOR THIS TEM
PORARY REPAIR.

ADVISE THE INSPECTION DEPARTMENT THAT A PERMANENT REPAIR IS RE

QUIRED WITHIN THE FLIGHT HOURS (FH) GIVEN IN CHAPTER 55−31−00
PAGE BLOCK 101 CONFIG 1.

CAUTION: FOR A320−200 ONLY, THIS TEMPORARY REPAIR MUST BE REPLACED BY A

PERMANENT REPAIR WITHIN 2 500 FH.

(3) Temporary Repair (Refer to Figures 210 or 211)

(a) Do steps (a) and (b) if applicable, of the repair procedure in
Paragraph (2).

(b) Get the equivalent metal materials for the repair pieces. The
subsequent steps will help you to do this:

1 Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter 55−31−00 Page Block 101
Config. 1, Figure 103) and find the correct CFRP materials
necessary to make a permanent repair.

2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (Chapter 55−31−00 Page

Block 201 Config. 1, Figures 203 and 204) and find the equiva
lent metal materials applicable to the precured CFRP materials.
(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shapes and dimensions.

WARNING: CHROMIC ACID ANODIZING (CAA) IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Clean the repair parts using cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone)

(Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent (trichloroethane methly
chloroform) (Material No. 11−004) and treat the repair parts with
chromic acid anodizing (CAA) or pretreatment for painting (chemi
cal conversion coating yellow aluminum) (Material No. 13−002)
(Refer to Chapter 51−21−11).

(e) Apply structure paint (polyurethane anti corrosion primer) (Mate

rial No. 16−001) to the repair parts (Refer to Chapter 51−23−00).

(f) Drill and countersink, where applicable, all of the holes neces
sary to attach the repair pieces to the spar−box structure. Drill
all of the holes to agree with their correct fastener diameters.

Page 294
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(g) Apply the sealant (corrosion inhibiting brush consistency) (Mate

rial No. 09−013) to the mating surfaces of the repair pieces and
the spar−box structure.

NOTE: If necessary you can use a bonding and adhesive compound

(epoxy resin) (Material No. 08−051) with special material
(microballoons) (Material No. 05−057) when you assemble the
temporary repair pieces. If you do this, make sure that you
apply the special material (fluorocarbon release agent) (Ma
terial No. 05−020) to the applicable spar−box structure be
fore you apply the epoxy resin. Refer to Paragraph (2) for
data about how to use epoxy resin material.

(h) Attach the repair pieces to the spar−box structure. Make sure
that you install the fasteners with sealant (corrosion inhibiting
brush consistency) (Material No. 09−013).

(i) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

(j) Remove unwanted sealant with the cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ke

tone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent (trichloroethane
methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

(k) Do an inspection of the repair.

(l) Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter

51−75−12).
(4) Permanent after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 210 or 211)

(a) Do step (a) if applicable, of the repair procedure in Paragraph

(2).

(b) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the perma
nent repair pieces (Refer to Figure 210, sheet 2).

(c) Remove the temporary repair pieces and the sealant or adhesive
from the spar−box structure.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Make the repair pieces to the correct shapes and dimensions nec
essary for the repair area. Use the temporary repair pieces to
get the correct locations for the fastener holes in the permanent
repair pieces.

(e) Do steps (f) thru (r) of the repair procedure in Paragraph (2)
as applicable to the repair pieces.

NOTE: Use oversize fasteners when you replace the temporary repair
pieces with the permanent repair pieces (Refer to Chapter
51−43−21).

Pages 295/296
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribfoot Flush Repair

Figure 210 (sheet 1)

Pages 297/298
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribfoot Flush Repair

Figure 210 (sheet 2)

Pages 299/300
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribfoot Flush Repair

Figure 211 (sheet 1)

Pages 301/302
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribfoot Flush Repair

Figure 211 (sheet 2)

Pages 303/304
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 213.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE (IIR) IS 55−31−11−2−011−00 AND IS DESCRIBED
IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. IN
FORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY
INFORMATION.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT
VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 39020.

K. Ribfoot Repair for which Access into the Spar−Box Structure is not nec
essary (External Repair)

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure you must do a damage eval
uation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.
NOTE: It is possible to make this repair with two different configura
tions of the ribfoot repair pieces (Refer to Figures 212 and 213).
You must use the configuration which is better for your repair
conditions.

NOTE: This repair is applicable for ribfoot repair for which access into
the spar−box structure is not necessary (external repair) and is
effective as follows:

Aircraft Weight Variant

A320−100 000, 001, 002
000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005,
A320−200 006, 007, 008, 009, 010, 011,
012, 013, 014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 213
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23. ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary
data about all weight variants and their required information for
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 305
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Pre−Cured Sheet (Filler) AR Refer to Figure 212

2 Pre−Cured Section AR Refer to Figure 212
3 Pre−Cured Sheet (Doubler) AR Refer to Figure 212 or 213
4 Pre−Cured Section AR Refer to Figure 213
5 Pre−Cured Sheet AR Refer to Figure 213

− Pre−Cured CFRP Materials AR Figures 203 and 204 (Refer to

− Special Material (Fluoro
carbon Release Agent)
− Special Material (Microbal
loons)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Epoxy Resin)
− Sealant (Corrosion Inhibit
ing Brush Consistency)
− Cleaning Agent (Methyl−
Ethyl−Ketone)
− Cleaning Agent (Trichloroe
thane Methly Chloroform)
− Pretreatment for Painting
(Chemical Conversion Coat
ing Yellow Aluminum)
− Structure Paint (Polyure
thane Anti Corrosion Prim
er)
− Structure Paint (Polyure
thane Finish Paint)
− Chromic Acid Anodizing
(CAA)
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 212 or 213)
Chapter 55−31−00)
AR Material No. 05−020 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 09−013 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−003 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−004 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 13−002 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−001 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−018 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Refer to Chapter 51−21−11

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut away the damaged skin and ribfoot structure to the necessary
shape and dimensions for the repair.
(b) Get the correct pre−cured repair materials necessary to make the
repair pieces (Refer to Figure 212 or 213).

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shapes and dimensions.

Page 306
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(d) Mark out and pilot−drill at all of the new hole locations neces
sary to attach the repair pieces to the spar box structure.
NOTE: At the two hole locations of the rib attachment, drill with
the existing diameter into the ribfoot repair pieces.

(e) Clean the repair area and the repair pieces with the cleaning
agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning
agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).
(f) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).

(g) Apply the adhesive to the mating surfaces of the ribfoot repair
pieces and the spar−box structure.
NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a
maximum thickness of 1.5 mm (0.059 in).

(h) Attach the repair pieces to the spar−box structure with screw
pins.
(i) Remove unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the cleaning
agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning
agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

(j) Let the adhesive cure for 24 hours at room temperature and then
remove the screw pins.
NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.C..

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(k) Drill the holes in the ribfoot repair pieces to the correct di
ameter for the applicable fasteners.

(l) Install the fasteners in the ribfoot repair pieces and spar−box
structure.

(m) Do steps (e) thru (l) as applicable for the doubler repair
piece.
NOTE: Install the countersink fasteners in the doubler with seal
ant (corrosion inhibiting brush consistency) (Material No.
09−013).

(n) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.
(o) Remove unwanted sealant from the repair area with cleaning agent
(methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent
(trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

Page 307
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(p) Do an inspection of the repair.

(q) Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter

51−75−12).

CAUTION: FOR A320−100 ONLY, REFER TO THE RELATED ALLOWABLE DAMAGE AND
REPAIR LIMITS IN CHAPTER 55−31−00 PAGE BLOCK 101 CONFIG. 1,
FIGURES 110 THRU 112, TO FIND OUT THE TIME LIMIT FOR THIS TEM
PORARY REPAIR.
ADVISE THE INSPECTION DEPARTMENT THAT A PERMANENT REPAIR IS RE
QUIRED WITHIN THE FLIGHT HOURS (FH) GIVEN IN CHAPTER 55−31−00
PAGE BLOCK 101 CONFIG 1.

CAUTION: FOR A320−200 ONLY, THIS TEMPORARY REPAIR MUST BE REPLACED BY A

PERMANENT REPAIR WITHIN 2 500 FH.
(3) Temporary Repair (Refer to Figures 212 or 213)

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut away the damaged skin and ribfoot structure to the necessary
shape and dimensions for the repair.
(b) Get the equivalent metal materials for the repair pieces. The
subsequent steps will help you do this:

1 Refer to the repair zone data (Chapter 55−31−00 Page Block 101
Config. 1, Figure 103) and find the correct CFRP materials
necessary to make a permanent repair.
2 Refer to the pre−cured materials data (Chapter 55−31−00 Page
Block 201 Config. 1, Figures 203 and 204) and find the equiva
lent metal materials applicable to the precured CFRP materials.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shapes and dimensions.
WARNING: CHROMIC ACID ANODIZING (CAA) IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Clean the repair parts using cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone)

(Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent (trichloroethane methly
chloroform) (Material No. 11−004) and treat the repair parts with
chromic acid anodizing (CAA) or pretreatment for painting (chemi
cal conversion coating yellow aluminum) (Material No. 13−002)
(Refer to Chapter 51−21−11).

(e) Apply structure paint (polyurethane anti corrosion primer) (Mate

rial No. 16−001) to the repair parts (Refer to Chapter 51−23−00).

(f) Drill and countersink where necessary, all of the holes to the
applicable dimensions for the fasteners.

Page 308
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(g) Apply the sealant (corrosion inhibiting brush consistency) (Mate

rial No. 09−013) to the mating surfaces of the repair pieces and
the spar box structure.

NOTE: If necessary you can use a bonding and adhesive compound

(epoxy resin) (Material No. 08−051) with special material
(microballoons) (Material No. 05−057) when you assemble the
temporary repair pieces. If you do this, make sure that you
apply the special material (fluorocarbon release agent) (Ma
terial No. 05−020) to the applicable spar−box structure be
fore you apply the epoxy resin shim. The use of the seal
ant (corrosion inhibiting brush consistency) (Material No.
09−013) is not necessary when you use the epoxy resin shim.
Refer to Paragraph (2) for data about how to use epoxy
resin shim material.

(h) Attach the repair pieces to the spar−box structure. Make sure
that you install the fasteners with sealant (corrosion inhibiting
brush consistency) (Material No. 09−013).
(i) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

(j) Remove unwanted sealant with the cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ke

tone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent (trichloroethane
methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).
(k) Do an inspection of the repair.

(l) Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter

51−75−12).

(4) Permanent after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 212 or 213)

(a) Remove the temporary repair pieces and the sealant or adhesive
from the spar−box structure.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the perma
nent repair pieces (Refer to Figure 212 or 213).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shapes and dimensions nec
essary for the repair area. Use the temporary repair pieces to
get the correct locations for the fastener holes in the permanent
repair pieces.
(d) Do steps (e) thru (q) of the repair procedure in Paragraph (2)
as applicable to the repair pieces.

NOTE: Use oversize fasteners when you replace the temporary repair
pieces with the permanent repair pieces (Refer to Chapter
51−43−21).

Pages 309/310
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribfoot Repair for which Access into the Spar−Box Structure is not necessary
(External Repair)
Figure 212
Pages 311/312
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribfoot Repair for which Access into the Spar−Box Structure is not necessary
(External Repair)
Figure 213
Pages 313/314
Printed in Germany
55−31−11
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPAR BOX - VERTICAL STABILIZER

1. General
No General and/or Specific Repairs are specified. In case of any damage
contact AIRBUS INDUSTRIE.

Printed in Germany
55-31-11
CONFIG-2
Page 201
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

RIBS

1. Identification
Scheme

NOTE: CONFIG−1
is
applicable
before
Modification
26500K4924T.

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Ribs Figure
1
(sheet
1)
− Rib
01,
Front
Part Figure
1
(sheet
2)
− Rib
01,
Rear
Part Figure
1
(sheet
3)
− Rib
02 Figure
1
(sheet
4)
− Rib
03 Figure
1
(sheet
5)
− Rib
04 Figure
1
(sheet
6)
− Rib
05 Figure
1
(sheet
7)
− Rib
06 Figure
1
(sheet
8)
− Rib
07 Figure
1
(sheet
9)
− Rib
08 Figure
1
(sheet
10)
− Rib
09 Figure
1
(sheet
11)
− Rib
10 Figure
1
(sheet
12)
− Rib
11 Figure
1
(sheet
13)
− Ribs
01
thru
11,
Cross−sectional
Dimen Figure
2
sions
before
Modification
25484K4399
− Ribs
01
thru
11,
Cross−sectional
Dimen Figure
3
sions
after
Modification
25484K4399R
NOTE: Refer
to
Chapter
55−30−00
Page
Block
001,
where
you
can
find
the
Mod
ification/Service
Bulletin
List.

Page
1




55−31−12
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−1
Aug
01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs
Figure 1 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-31-12
CONFIG-1
Page 2
Feb 01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 01 Front Part

Figure 1 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-31-12
CONFIG-1
Page 3
Feb 01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 01 Rear Part

Figure 1 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55-31-12
CONFIG-1
Page 4
Feb 01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 02
Figure 1 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55-31-12
CONFIG-1
Page 5
Feb 01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 03
Figure 1 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55-31-12
CONFIG-1
Page 6
Feb 01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 04
Figure 1 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55-31-12
CONFIG-1
Page 7
Feb 01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 05
Figure 1 (sheet 7)

Printed in Germany
55-31-12
CONFIG-1
Page 8
Feb 01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 06
Figure 1 (sheet 8)

Printed in Germany
55-31-12
CONFIG-1
Page 9
Feb 01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 07
Figure 1 (sheet 9)

Printed in Germany
55-31-12
CONFIG-1
Page 10
Feb 01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 08
Figure 1 (sheet 10)

Printed in Germany
55-31-12
CONFIG-1
Page 11
Feb 01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 09
Figure 1 (sheet 11)

Printed in Germany
55-31-12
CONFIG-1
Page 12
Feb 01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 10
Figure 1 (sheet 12)

Printed in Germany
55-31-12
CONFIG-1
Page 13
Feb 01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 11
Figure 1 (sheet 13)

Printed in Germany
55-31-12
CONFIG-1
Page 14
Feb 01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib, 1 front Composite D55371150000 PB101

PB201
1A Rib, 1 front Composite D55371150002 01 PB101 A21733K1872H
PB201
1B Rib, 1 front Composite D55371350000 PB101 A25484K4399R
plate PB201
5 Angle, R1 − FS Composite D55371162200
5A Angle, R1 − FS Composite D55371162208 A21733K1872H
5B Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364200 A25484K4399R
FS
10 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371362200 A25484K4399R
CS
15 Rib, 1 rear Composite D55371151000 PB101
PB201
15A Rib, 1 rear Composite D55371151002 01 PB101 A21733K1872H
PB201
15B Rib, 1 rear Composite D55371351000 A25484K4399R
plate
20 Angle, R1 − CS Composite D55371162202
20A Angle, R1 − CS Composite D55371162210 A21733K1872H
20B Angle, ribs − Composite D55371362202 A25484K4399R
CS
25 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371363200 A25484K4399R
RS
30 Rib, 2 Composite D55371152000 PB101
PB201
30A Rib, 2 Composite D55371352000 A25484K4399R
35 Angle, R2 − FS Composite D55371164200
35A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364202 A25484K4399R
FS
40 Angle, R2 − CS Composite D55371164220
40A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371362204 A25484K4399R
CS
45 Angle, R2 − RS Composite D55371163200
45A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371363202 A25484K4399R
RS
50 Rib, 3 Composite D55371153000 PB101
PB201
50A Rib, 3 Composite D55371353000 A25484K4399R
ASSY Dwg.: D55371030, D55371044, D55371370, D55371371

Key to Figure 1

Page 15
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

55 Angle, R3 − FS Composite D55371164202

55A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364204 A25484K4399R
FS
60 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371363204 A25484K4399R
RS
65 Rib, 4 Composite D55371154000 PB101
PB201
65A Rib, 4 Composite D55371354000 A25484K4399R
70 Angle, R4 − FS Composite D55371164204
70A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364206 A25484K4399R
FS
75 Angle, R4 − RS Composite D55371163202
75A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371363206 A25484K4399R
RS
80 Rib, 5 Composite D55371155000 PB101
PB201
80A Rib, 5 Composite D55371355000 A25484K4399R
85 Angle, R5 − FS Composite D55371164206
85A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364208 A25484K4399R
FS
90 Angle, R5 − RS Composite D55371163204
90A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371363208 A25484K4399R
RS
95 Rib, 6 Composite D55371156000 PB101
PB201
95A Rib, 6 Composite D55371356000 A25484K4399R
100 Angle, R6 − FS Composite D55371164208
100A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364210 A25484K4399R
FS
105 Angle, R6 − RS Composite D55371163206
105A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371363210 A25484K4399R
RS
110 Rib, 7 Composite D55371157000 PB101
PB201
110A Rib, 7 Composite D55371357000 A25484K4399R
115 Angle, R7 − FS Composite D55371164210
115A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364212 A25484K4399R
FS
ASSY Dwg.: D55371030, D55371044

Key to Figure 1

Page 16
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

120 Angle, R7 − RS Composite D55371163208

120A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371363212 A25484K4399R
RS
125 Rib, 8 Composite D55371158000 PB101
PB201
125A Rib, 8 Composite D55371358000 A25484K4399R
130 Angle, R8 − FS Composite D55371164212
130A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364214 A25484K4399R
FS
135 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371363214 A25484K4399R
RS
140 Rib, 9 Composite D55371159000 PB101
PB201
140A Rib, 9 Composite D55371359000 A25484K4399R
145 Angle, R9 − FS Composite D55371164214
145A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364216 A25484K4399R
FS
150 Angle, R9 − RS Composite D55371163210
150A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371363216 A25484K4399R
RS
155 Rib, 10 Composite D55371160000 PB101
PB201
155A Rib, 10 Composite D55371360000 A25484K4399R
160 Angle, R10 − FS Composite D55371164216
160A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364218 A25484K4399R
FS
165 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371363218 A25484K4399R
RS
170 Rib, 11 Composite D55371161000 PB101
PB201
170A Rib, 11 Composite D55371161002 PB101 A20365K0284
PB201
170B Rib, 11 Composite D55371161004 PB101 A21733K1872H
PB201
170C Rib, 11 Composite D55371361000 A25484K4399R
175 Angle, R11 − FS Composite D55371164218
175A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364220 A25484K4399R
FS
180 Angle, R11 − RS Composite D55371163212
ASSY Dwg.: D55371030, D55371044

Key to Figure 1
Page 17
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

180A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371363220 A25484K4399R

RS
ASSY Dwg.: D55371044

Key to Figure 1

Page 18
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 01 thru 11, Cross−sectional Dimensions before Modification 25484K4399

Figure 2 (sheet 1)

Page 19
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 01 thru 11, Cross−sectional Dimensions before Modification 25484K4399

Figure 2 (sheet 2)

Page 20
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 01 thru 11, Cross−sectional Dimensions before Modification 25484K4399

Figure 2 (sheet 3)

Page 21
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 01 thru 11, Cross−sectional Dimensions before Modification 25484K4399

Figure 2 (sheet 4)

Page 22
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 01 thru 11, Cross−sectional Dimensions before Modification 25484K4399

Figure 2 (sheet 5)

Page 23
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 01 thru 11, Cross−sectional Dimensions before Modification 25484K4399

Figure 2 (sheet 6)

Page 24
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 01 thru 11, Cross−sectional Dimensions before Modification 25484K4399

Figure 2 (sheet 7)

Page 25
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 01 thru 11, Cross−sectional Dimensions before Modification 25484K4399

Figure 2 (sheet 8)

Page 26
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 01 thru 11, Cross−sectional Dimensions before Modification 25484K4399

Figure 2 (sheet 9)

Page 27
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 01 thru 11, Cross−sectional Dimensions before Modification 25484K4399

Figure 2 (sheet 10)

Page 28
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 01 thru 11, Cross−sectional Dimensions before Modification 25484K4399

Figure 2 (sheet 11)

Page 29
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 01 thru 11, Cross−sectional Dimensions before Modification 25484K4399

Figure 2 (sheet 12)

Page 30
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 01 thru 11, Cross−sectional Dimensions after Modification 25484K4399R

Figure 3 (sheet 1)

Page 31
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 01 thru 11, Cross−sectional Dimensions after Modification 25484K4399R

Figure 3 (sheet 2)

Page 32
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 01 thru 11, Cross−sectional Dimensions after Modification 25484K4399R

Figure 3 (sheet 3)

Page 33
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 01 thru 11, Cross−sectional Dimensions after Modification 25484K4399R

Figure 3 (sheet 4)

Page 34
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 01 thru 11, Cross−sectional Dimensions after Modification 25484K4399R

Figure 3 (sheet 5)

Page 35
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 01 thru 11, Cross−sectional Dimensions after Modification 25484K4399R

Figure 3 (sheet 6)

Page 36
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 01 thru 11, Cross−sectional Dimensions after Modification 25484K4399R

Figure 3 (sheet 7)

Page 37
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 01 thru 11, Cross−sectional Dimensions after Modification 25484K4399R

Figure 3 (sheet 8)

Page 38
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 01 thru 11, Cross−sectional Dimensions after Modification 25484K4399R

Figure 3 (sheet 9)

Page 39
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 01 thru 11, Cross−sectional Dimensions after Modification 25484K4399R

Figure 3 (sheet 10)

Page 40
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 01 thru 11, Cross−sectional Dimensions after Modification 25484K4399R

Figure 3 (sheet 11)

Page 41
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 01 thru 11, Cross−sectional Dimensions after Modification 25484K4399R

Figure 3 (sheet 12)

Page 42
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

RIBS

1. Identification Scheme

NOTE: CONFIG−2 is applicable after Modification 26500K4924T.

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Ribs − General view Figure 1 (sheet 1)

− Ribs 01 thru 03 Figure 1 (sheet 2)
− Ribs 04 and 05 Figure 1 (sheet 3)
− Ribs 06 and 07 Figure 1 (sheet 4)
− Ribs 08 and 09 Figure 1 (sheet 5)
− Ribs 10 and 11 Figure 1 (sheet 6)
− Rib 01 − Cross−sectional Dimension Figure 2 (sheet 1)
− Ribs 02 and 03 − Cross−sectional Figure 2 (sheet 2)
Dimension
− Ribs 04 thru 06 − Cross−sectional Figure 2 (sheet 3)
Dimension
− Ribs 07 and 08 − Cross−sectional Figure 2 (sheet 4)
Dimension
− Ribs 09 thru 11 − Cross−sectional Figure 2 (sheet 5)
Dimension
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−30−00, Page Block 001, where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Page 1
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/08
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs − General view

Figure 1 (sheet 1)

Page 2
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/08
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 01 thru 03
Figure 1 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-31-12
CONFIG-2
Page 3
Feb 01/02
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 04 and 05
Figure 1 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55-31-12
CONFIG-2
Page 4
Feb 01/02
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 06 and 07
Figure 1 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55-31-12
CONFIG-2
Page 5
Feb 01/02
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 08 and 09
Figure 1 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55-31-12
CONFIG-2
Page 6
Feb 01/02
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 10 and 11
Figure 1 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55-31-12
CONFIG-2
Page 7
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

1 Rib 1, front Composite D55371350002

5 Angle, ribs/FS Composite D55371364242
5A Angle, ribs/FS Composite D55371369242 A31448K7354C
10 Angle, ribs/CS Composite D55371362208
10A Angle, ribs/CS Composite D53371366208 A31448K7354C
15 Rib 1, rear Composite D55371351002
20 Angle, ribs/RS Composite D55371363226
20A Angle, ribs/RS Composite D55371367226 A31448K7354C
25 Angle, ribs/CS Composite D55371362210
25A Angle, ribs/CS Composite D55371366210 A31448K7354C
30 Rib 2 Composite D55371352002
35 Angle, ribs/FS Composite D55371364202
35A Angle, ribs/FS Composite D55371369202 A31448K7354C
40 Angle, ribs/CS Composite D55371362204
40A Angle, ribs/CS Composite D55371366204 A31448K7354C
45 Angle, ribs/RS Composite D55371363228
45A Angle, ribs/RS Composite D55371367228 A31448K7354C
50 Rib 3 Composite D55371353002
55 Angle, ribs/FS Composite D55371364204
55A Angle, ribs/FS Composite D55371369204 A31448K7354C
60 Angle, ribs/RS Composite D55371363204
60A Angle, ribs/RS Composite D55371367204 A31448K7354C
65 Rib 4 Composite D55371354002
70 Angle, ribs/FS Composite D55371364206
70A Angle, ribs/FS Composite D55371369206 A31448K7354C
75 Angle, ribs/RS Composite D55371363230
75A Angle, ribs/RS Composite D55371367230 A31448K7354C
80 Rib 5 Composite D55371355002
85 Angle, ribs/FS Composite D55371364208
85A Angle, ribs/FS Composite D55371369208 A31448K7354C
90 Angle, ribs/RS Composite D55371363232
90A Angle, ribs/RS Composite D55371367232 A31448K7354C
95 Rib 6 Composite D55371356002
100 Angle, ribs/FS Composite D55371364210
100A Angle, ribs/FS Composite D55371369210 A31448K7354C
105 Angle, ribs/RS Composite D55371363234
105A Angle, ribs/RS Composite D55371367234 A31448K7354C
ASSY Dwg.: D55371045, D55371047, D55371053

Key to Figure 1

Page 8
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/08
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

110 Rib 7 Composite D55371357002

115 Angle, ribs/FS Composite D55371364212
115A Angle, ribs/FS Composite D55371369212 A31448K7354C
120 Angle, ribs/RS Composite D55371363236
120A Angle, ribs/RS Composite D55371367236 A31448K7354C
125 Rib 8 Composite D55371358002
130 Angle, ribs/FS Composite D55371364214
130A Angle, ribs/FS Composite D55371369214 A31448K7354C
135 Angle, ribs/RS Composite D55371363214
135A Angle, ribs/RS Composite D55371367214 A31448K7354C
140 Rib 9 Composite D55371359002
145 Angle, ribs/FS Composite D55371364216
145A Angle, ribs/FS Composite D55371369216 A31448K7354C
150 Angle, ribs/RS Composite D55371363216
150A Angle, ribs/RS Composite D55371367216 A31448K7354C
155 Rib 10 Composite D55371360002
160 Angle, ribs/FS Composite D55371364218
160A Angle, ribs/FS Composite D55371369218 A31448K7354C
165 Angle, ribs/RS Composite D55371363218
165A Angle, ribs/RS Composite D55371367218 A31448K7354C
170 Rib 11 Composite D55371361000
175 Angle, ribs/FS Composite D55371364220
175A Angle, ribs/FS Composite D55371369220 A31448K7354C
180 Angle, ribs/RS Composite D55371363220
180A Angle, ribs/RS Composite D55371367220 A31448K7354C
ASSY Dwg.: D55371045, D55371047, D55371053

Key to Figure 1

Page 9
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/08
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib 01 - Cross-sectional Dimension

Figure 2 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-31-12
CONFIG-2
Page 10
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 02 and 03 - Cross-sectional Dimension

Figure 2 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-31-12
CONFIG-2
Pages 11/12
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 04 thru 06 - Cross-sectional Dimension

Figure 2 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55-31-12
CONFIG-2
Pages 13/14
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 07 and 08 - Cross-sectional Dimension

Figure 2 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55-31-12
CONFIG-2
Page 15
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs 09 thru 11 - Cross-sectional Dimension

Figure 2 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55-31-12
CONFIG-2
Page 16
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

RIBS

1. General
This topic contains Allowable Damage data for the Ribs of the Vertical StaÈ
bilizer Spar Box. For the general definition of Allowable Damage refer to
Chapter 51-77-10 - COMPOSITE COMPONENTS - DAMAGE AND REPAIR CLASSIFICATION.
2. Allowable Damage
Compare the damage in question with the relevant Figures, given in Chapter
55-31-00, Page Block 101, Config. 1- VERTICAL STABILIZER SPAR BOX.

Printed in Germany
55-31-12
CONFIG-1
Page 101
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

RIBS

1. General
No Allowable Damage information is specified. In case of any damage contact
AIRBUS INDUSTRIE.

Printed in Germany
55-31-12
CONFIG-2
Page 101
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

RIBS

1. General

These repairs are applicable for the Ribs of the Vertical Stabilizer Spar
Box. The general repairs are listed in Table 201, the specific repairs are
listed in Table 202. The appropriate repairs are described in more detail
in the relevant Chapter. The repair Zones and Allowable Damage data for
these repair procedures is given in Chapter 55−31−00 Page Block 101 Config.
1.

NOTE: Refer to each repair to determine the repair applicability.

NOTE: For definition of Repair Categories, refer to Chapter 51−11−14.

NOTE: For Damage/Repair Data Recording, refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

2. Safety Precautions

There are risks to you and other persons when you work with composite re
pair materials. To prevent risks, read and obey the warnings given below:
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.

WARNING: OBEY THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS WHEN YOU USE CLEANING AGENTS,
ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND PAINTS. THESE MATERIALS ARE DANGEROUS.
WARNING: WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND FILTER MASK WHEN YOU CUT,
ABRADE OR DRILL COMPOSITE MATERIALS. THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MA
TERIALS CAN GET INTO YOUR LUNGS OR ONTO YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE YOU
INJURY. IMMEDIATELY REMOVE DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.

WHEN YOU WORK WITH CFRP COMPOSITE MATERIALS, IMMEDIATELY REMOVE
DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRIC POWER ON
THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST ONLY USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH
3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: OBEY THE EFFECTIVITY BY MODIFICATION GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT PARA

GRAPH.

CAUTION: OBEY THE GIVEN INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE WHICH LEADS TO THE
APPLICABLE INSPECTION PROGRAM DEFINED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR IN
SPECTIONS (SRI) OF THE SRM, IF NECESSARY.

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER FIGURE REMARKS

No General Repairs applicable − − −
General Repairs
Table 201
4. Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

INSPECTION
REPAIR
REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE INSTRUCTION REF
CATEGORY
ERENCE (IIR)
Rib to Ribfoot Attach
5.A. 201 B 55−31−12−2−001−00
ment−Lug Repair
Repair to Cracked Rib 5.B. 202 B 55−31−12−2−002−00
Specific Repairs
Table 202
5. Ribs − Repairs

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 203.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE (IIR) IS 55−31−12−2−001−00 AND IS DESCRIBED
IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. IN
FORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY
INFORMATION.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT
VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR PROCEDURE IS APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 39020.

A. Rib to Ribfoot Attachment−Lug Repair

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

NOTE: This repair is applicable for Rib to Ribfoot Attachment−Lug Repair

and is valid as follows:

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005,
A320−200 006, 007, 008, 009, 010, 011,
012, 013, 014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 203
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23. ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary
data about all weight variants and their required information for
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Pre−Cured Sheet (Doubler) AR Refer to Figure 201

2 Pre−Cured Sheet (Filler) AR Refer to Figure 201
3 Pre−Cured Section AR Refer to Figure 201

− Special Material (Microbal AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to

loons)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Epoxy Resin)
− Sealant (Corrosion Inhibit
ing Brush Consistency)
− Cleaning Agent (Methyl−
Ethyl−Ketone)
− Cleaning Agent (Trichloroe
thane Methly Chloroform)
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 201)
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 09−013 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−003 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−004 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)

(a) Remove the fasteners that attach the rib to the ribfoot in the
repair area.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Cut back the damaged attachment−lug and rib stiffener.

(c) Get the correct pre−cured materials as necessary to make the re
pair pieces (Refer to Figure 201).

(d) Cut the repair pieces to the correct shapes and dimensions.
(e) Put the repair pieces in their repair positions and attach them
to the rib and ribfoot structure with screw−clamps.

(f) Drill the holes from the ribfoot through to the repair pieces.

(g) Make some marks to show the locations of the new holes necessary
to attach the repair pieces to the structure. Drill these holes
with a pilot−size twist drill.

(h) Remove the repair pieces from the structure.

(i) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.
(j) Clean the repair pieces and the repair area with cleaning agent
(methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent
(trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(k) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).

(l) Apply the adhesive paste to the mating surfaces of the repair
pieces and the sparbox structure.

NOTE: The repair adhesive paste is used as a shim material up to

a maximum thickness of 1.5 mm (0.059 in).
(m) Assemble the repair pieces to the rib and ribfoot structure with
screw−pins.

(n) Remove unwanted adhesive from the repair area with cleaning agent
(methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent
(trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).
(o) Let the adhesive cure (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph
5.C.).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(p) After the adhesive has cured, drill the holes in the repair area
to the correct diameter for the fasteners.

(q) Remove sharp edges from the holes with an abrasive cone. Do this
only to the edges of the holes which touch the heads of the
fasteners.
(r) Install the correct type of fasteners wet with sealant (corrosion
inhibiting brush consistency) (Material No. 09−013).

(s) Do an inspection of the repair.

(3) Temporary Repair

There is no temporary repair applicable.

Pages 205/206
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rib to Ribfoot, Attachment−Lug Repair

Figure 201

Pages 207/208
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 204.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE (IIR) IS 55−31−12−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED
IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. IN
FORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY
INFORMATION.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 25484K4399. FOR THE
EFFECTIVITY OF THE GIVEN MODIFICATION, REFER TO THE MODIFICATION/
SERVICE BULLETIN LIST IN CHAPTER 55−30−00 PAGE BLOCK 001.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT
VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR PROCEDURE IS APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 39020.

B. Repair to Cracked Rib

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

NOTE: This repair is applicable for Repair to Cracked Rib and is valid
as follows:

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005,
A320−200 006, 007, 008, 009, 010, 011,
012, 013, 014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 204
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23. ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary
data about all weight variants and their required information for
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 209
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1−3 Pre−Cured Sheet AR Refer to Figure 202

4−5 Pre−Cured Section AR Refer to Figure 202

− Special Material (Microbal AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to

loons)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Epoxy Resin)
− Sealant (Corrosion Inhibit
ing Brush Consistency)
− Cleaning Agent (Methyl−
Ethyl−Ketone)
− Cleaning Agent (Trichloroe
thane Methly Chloroform)
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 202)
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 09−013 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−003 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−004 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)

(a) Remove the fasteners that attach the rib to the ribfoot in the
repair area.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured materials as necessary to make the re
pair pieces (Refer to Figure 202).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Cut the repair pieces to the correct shape and dimensions.

(d) Put the repair pieces in their repair positions and attach them
to the rib and ribfoot structure with screw−clamps.

(e) Drill the holes from the ribfoot through to the repair piece.

(f) Make some marks to show the locations of the new holes necessary
to attach the repair pieces to the structure. Drill these new
holes with a pilot−size twist drill.
(g) Remove the repair pieces from the structure.

(h) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

(i) Clean the repair pieces and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning
agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

Page 210
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: SPECIAL MATERIAL (MATERIAL NO. 05−057) IS DANGEROUS.

(j) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).

(k) Apply the adhesive paste to the mating surfaces of the repair
pieces and the sparbox structure.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is used as a shim material up to a

maximum thickness of 1.5 mm (0.059 in).

(l) Assemble the repair pieces to the rib and ribfoot structure with
screw pins.

(m) Remove unwanted adhesive from the repair area with cleaning agent
(methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent
(trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

(n) Let the adhesive cure (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

5.C.).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(o) After the adhesive has cured, drill the holes in the repair area
to the correct diameter for the fasteners.

(p) Remove any sharp edges from the holes with an abrasive cone. Do
this only to the edges of the holes which touch the heads of
the fasteners.
(q) Install the correct type of fasteners wet with sealant (corrosion
inhibiting brush consistency) (Material No. 09−013).

(r) Do an inspection of the repair.

(3) Temporary Repair

There is no temporary repair applicable.

Pages 211/212
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair to Cracked Rib

Figure 202

Pages 213/214
Printed in Germany
55−31−12
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

RIBS

1. General
No General and/or Specific Repairs are specified. In case of any damage
contact AIRBUS INDUSTRIES.

Printed in Germany
55-31-12
CONFIG-2
Page 201
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

SPARS

1. Identification
Scheme

NOTE: CONFIG−1
is
applicable
before
Modification
26500K4924T.

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Front
Spar
before
Modification Figure
1
(sheet
1)
25484K4399
− Center
Spar
before
Modification Figure
1
(sheet
2)
25484K4399
− Rear
Spar
before
Modification
25484K4399 Figure
1
(sheet
3)
− Front
Spar
−
Cross−sectional
Dimensions Figure
2
(sheets
1
thru
3)
before
Modification
25484K4399
− Center
Spar
−
Cross−sectional
Dimensions Figure
2
(sheet
4)
before
Modification
25484K4399
− Rear
Spar
−
Cross−sectional
Dimensions Figure
2
(sheets
5
and
6)
before
Modification
25484K4399
− Front
Spar
after
Modification Figure
3
(sheet
1)
25484K4399R
− Center
Spar
after
Modification Figure
3
(sheet
2)
25484K4399R
− Rear
Spar
after
Modification
25484K4399R Figure
3
(sheet
3)
− Front
Spar
−
Cross−sectional
Dimensions Figure
4
(sheet
1)
after
Modification
25484K4399R
− Center
Spar
−
Cross−sectional
Dimensions Figure
4
(sheet
2)
after
Modification
25484K4399R
− Rear
Spar
−
Cross−sectional
Dimensions Figure
4
(sheet
3)
after
Modification
25484K4399R
NOTE: Refer
to
Chapter
55−30−00
Page
Block
001,
where
you
can
find
the
Mod
ification/Service
Bulletin
List.

Page
1




55−31−18
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−1
Aug
01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front Spar
Figure 1 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-31-18
CONFIG-1
Page 2
Feb 01/02
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Center Spar
Figure 1 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-31-18
CONFIG-1
Page 3
Feb 01/02
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rear Spar
Figure 1 (sheet 3)

Page 4
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Spar, front Composite D55371175000 PB101

PB201
1A Spar, front Composite D55371175002 PB101 A20364K0341
PB201
1B Spar, front Composite D55371175004 PB101 A21154K1108
PB201
1C Spar, front Composite D55371175006 PB101 A21154K1108A
PB201
1D Spar, front Composite D55371175010 PB101 A21733K1872A
PB201
1E Spar, front Composite D55371175008 PB101 A21733K1872B
PB201
1F Spar, front Composite D55371175012 PB101 A22111K2225A
PB201 B25484K4399
5 Spar, center Composite D55371180000 PB101
PB201
5A Spar, center Composite D55371180002 PB101 A21733K1872C
PB201 B25484K4399
10 Spar, rear Composite D55371185000 PB101
PB201
10A Spar, rear Composite D55371185002 PB101 A20364K0341A
PB201
10B Spar, rear Composite D55371185006 PB101 A21733K1872A
PB201
10C Spar, rear Composite D55371185004 PB101 A21733K1872C
PB201 B25484K4399
15 Washer 1.4546.9 D55371024204 B25484K4399
LN1013−40
20 Bearing NSA8131−07 B25484K4399
25 Bush 1.4546.9 D55371023202
LN1013−40
25A Bush 1.4546.9 D55371023210 A21733K1872C
LN1013−40 B25484K4399
30 Foil DAN220−01 D55370012204

35 Foil DAN220−02 D55370012202

40 Foil DAN220−01 D55370012200

ASSY Dwg.: D55370010, D55371030, D55371175

Key to Figure 1

Page 5
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

45 Foil DAN220−01 D55370012206

ASSY Dwg.: D55370010

Key to Figure 1

Page 6
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front Spar − Cross−sectional Dimensions

Figure 2 (sheet 1)

Page 7
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front Spar − Cross−sectional Dimensions

Figure 2 (sheet 2)

Page 8
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front Spar − Cross−sectional Dimensions

Figure 2 (sheet 3)

Page 9
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Center Spar − Cross−sectional Dimensions

Figure 2 (sheet 4)

Page 10
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rear Spar − Cross−sectional Dimensions

Figure 2 (sheet 5)

Page 11
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rear Spar − Cross−sectional Dimensions

Figure 2 (sheet 6)

Page 12
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front Spar after Modification 25484K4399R

Figure 3 (sheet 1)

Page 13
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Center Spar after Modification 25484K4399R

Figure 3 (sheet 2)

Page 14
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rear Spar after Modification 25484K4399R

Figure 3 (sheet 3)

Page 15
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Spar, front Composite D55371375000 PB101

PB201
1A Spar, front Composite D55371375002 PB101 A27775K6005B
PB201
5 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364222
FS
10 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364224
FS
15 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364226
FS
20 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364228
FS
25 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364230
FS
30 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364232
FS
35 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364234
FS
40 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364236
FS
45 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364238
FS
50 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364240
FS
55 Spar, center Composite D55371380000 PB101
PB201
60 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371362206
CS 207
70 Spar, rear Composite D55371385000 PB101
PB201
70A Spar, rear Composite D55371385002 02 PB101 A27775K6005B
PB201
75 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371363222
RS
80 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371363224
RS
85 Washer 1.4546.9 D55371024204
LN1013AN40
90 Bearing, plain NSA8131−07
ASSY Dwg.: D55371044, D55371375

Key to Figure 3

Page 16
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

95 Bush 1.4546.9 D55371023210

LN1013AN40
100 Foil DAN220−01 D55370012208 A32117K7832
105 Foil DAN220−01 D55370012210 A32117K7832
110 Foil DAN220−01 D55370012200 A32117K7832
ASSY Dwg.: D55370110, D55371375

Key to Figure 3

Page 17
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front Spar − Cross−sectional Dimensions after Modification 25484K4399R

Figure 4 (sheet 1)

Page 18
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Center Spar − Cross−sectional Dimensions after Modification 25484K4399R

Figure 4 (sheet 2)

Page 19
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rear Spar − Cross−sectional Dimensions after Modification 25484K4399R

Figure 4 (sheet 3)

Page 20
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/11
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

SPARS

1. Identification
Scheme

NOTE: CONFIG−2
is
applicable
after
Modification
26500K4924T.

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Front
Spar Figure
1
(sheet
1)
− Center
Spar Figure
1
(sheet
2)
− Rear
Spar Figure
1
(sheet
3)
− Front
Spar
−
Cross−sectional
Dimensions Figure
2
(sheet
1)
− Center
Spar
−
Cross−sectional
Dimensions Figure
2
(sheet
2)
− Rear
Spar
−
Cross−sectional
Dimensions Figure
2
(sheet
3)
NOTE: Refer
to
Chapter
55−30−00,
Page
Block
001,
where
you
can
find
the
Modification/Service
Bulletin
List.

Page
1




55−31−18
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−2
Aug
01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Front Spar
Figure 1 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-31-18
CONFIG-2
Page 2
May 01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Center Spar
Figure 1 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-31-18
CONFIG-2
Page 3
May 01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rear Spar
Figure 1 (sheet 3)

Page 4
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/07
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

1 Spar, front Composite D55371375000 PB101

PB201
1A Spar, front Composite D55371375002 PB101 A31448K7354C
PB201
5 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364222
FS
5A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371369222 A31448K7354C
FS
10 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364224
FS
10A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371369224 A31448K7354C
FS
15 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364226
FS
15A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371369226 A31448K7354C
FS
20 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364228
FS
20A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371369228 A31448K7354C
FS
25 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364230
FS
25A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371369230 A31448K7354C
FS
30 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364232
FS
30A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371369232 A31448K7354C
FS
35 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364234
FS
35A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371369234 A31448K7354C
FS
40 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364236
FS
40A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371369236 A31448K7354C
FS
45 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364238
FS
ASSY Dwg.: D55371045, D55371053

Key to Figure 1

Page 5
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−2
Nov 01/07
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

45A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371369238 A31448K7354C

FS
50 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371364240
FS
50A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371369240 A31448K7354C
FS
55 Spar, center Composite D55371380000 PB101
PB201
60 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371362206
CS 207
60A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371366206 A31448K7354C
CS 207
70 Spar, rear Composite D55371385000 PB101
PB201
70A Spar, rear Composite D55371385002 02 PB101 A31448K7354G
PB201
70B Spar, rear Composite D55371385004 PB101 A38552K11749A
PB201
75 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371363222
RS
75A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371367222 A31448K7354C
RS
80 Angle, ribs − Composite D55371363224
RS
80A Angle, ribs − Composite D55371367224 A31448K7354C
RS
85 Washer 1.4546.9 D55371024204
LN1013AN40
90 Bearing, plain NSA8131−07
95 Bush 1.4546.9 D55371023210
LN1013AN40
100 Foil DAN220−01 D55370012200
105 Foil DAN220−01 D55370012208
110 Foil DAN220−01 D55370012210
ASSY Dwg.: D55370111, D55371045, D55371047, D55371053, D55371054, D55371375

Key to Figure 1

Page 6
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−2
Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Front
Spar
−
Cross−sectional
Dimensions
Figure
2
(sheet
1)

Page
7




55−31−18
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−2
Aug
01/05
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Center
Spar
−
Cross−sectional
Dimensions
Figure
2
(sheet
2)

Page
8




55−31−18
Printed in Germany CONFIG−2
Aug
01/05
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Rear
Spar
−
Cross−sectional
Dimensions
Figure
2
(sheet
3)

Pages
9/10




55−31−18
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−2
Aug
01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPARS

1. General
This topic contains Allowable Damage data for the Spars of the Vertical
Stabilizer Spar Box. For the general definition of Allowable Damage refer
to Chapter 51-77-10 - COMPOSITE COMPONENTS - DAMAGE AND REPAIR CLASSIFIÈ
CATION.
2. Allowable Damage
Compare the damage in question with the relevant Figures, given in Chapter
55-31-00, Page Block 101, Config. 1 - VERTICAL STABILIZER SPAR BOX.

Printed in Germany
55-31-18
CONFIG-1
Page 101
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPARS

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN RELEVANT PARAGRAPH.

CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER TO

PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

1. General

A. This topic contains Allowable Damage data for the Spars of the Vertical
Stabilizer Spar Box. For the general definition of Allowable Damage refer
to Chapter 51−77−10 − COMPOSITE COMPONENTS − DAMAGE AND REPAIR CLASSIFI
CATION.

Allowable damage is damage for which a structural repair is not neces

sary. You must remove the damage down to a smooth contour and compare
with the allowable damage limits in the relevant Chapter.

NOTE: For the definition of allowable damage, refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For damage/repair data recording, refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For the definition of repair categories, refer to Chapter 51−11−14.

2. Damage Evaluation

Before you repair the damaged structure you must do a damage evaluation,
refer to Chapter 51−77−10 for data.

3. Allowable Damage

NOTE: For DESCRIPTION and CRITERIA of allowable damage given in this Chap
ter, refer to Table 101.

4. Allowable Damage Description/Criteria

CRITERIA/ PARA REPAIR

DESCRIPTION
TYPE GRAPH CATEGORY
Vertical Stabilizer Spar Box, Rear Spar − Missing or
5.A. C
Handhole Coverfoil Perforated
Damage Description and Criteria
Table 101

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

5. Spars − Allowable Damage

CAUTION: IF THE HANDHOLE COVERFOIL IS MISSING OR PERFORATED, MAKE A TEM

PORARY OR PERMANENT COVERFOIL REPAIR GIVEN IN CHAPTER 55−31−18,
PAGE BLOCK 201, CONFIG−2, WITHIN ONE MONTH (FH NOT RELEVANT).

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 102.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS ALLOWABLE DAMAGE IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001

AND AFTER MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS ALLOWABLE DAMAGE IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

A. Handhole Coverfoil − Missing or perforated

NOTE: This allowable damage data is valid as shown in Table 102.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 102
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23. "Weight Variant information" in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary
data about all the weight variants and their required information
for the allowable damage and repair applicability.

(1) For damage at the handhole coverfoil, apply a temporary or permanent

repair within 1 month (FH not relevant), refer to Chapter 55−31−18,
Pageblock 201, Config.2.

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPARS

1. General

These repairs are applicable for the Spars of the Vertical Stabilizer Spar
Box. The general repairs are listed in Table 201, the specific repairs are
listed in Table 202. The appropriate repairs are described in more detail
in the relevant Chapter. The repair Zones and Allowable Damage data for
these repair procedures are given in Chapter 55−31−00 Page Block 101 Con
fig. 1.

NOTE: Refer to each repair to determine the repair applicability.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories, refer to Chapter
51−11−14.

NOTE: For Damage/Repair Data Recording, refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

2. Safety Precautions

There are risks to you and other persons when you work with composite re
pair materials. To prevent risks, read and obey the warnings given below.

WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.

WARNING: OBEY THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS WHEN YOU USE CLEANING AGENTS,
ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND PAINTS. THESE MATERIALS ARE DANGEROUS.
WARNING: WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND FILTER MASK WHEN YOU CUT,
ABRADE OR DRILL COMPOSITE MATERIALS. THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MA
TERIALS CAN GET INTO YOUR LUNGS OR ONTO YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE YOU
INJURY. IMMEDIATELY REMOVE DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.

WHEN YOU WORK WITH CFRP COMPOSITE MATERIALS, IMMEDIATELY REMOVE
DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRIC POWER ON
THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST ONLY USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH
3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: OBEY THE GIVEN INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE WHICH LEADS TO THE
APPLICABLE INSPECTION PROGRAM DEFINED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR IN
SPECTIONS (SRI) OF THE SRM, IF NECESSARY.
CAUTION: OBEY THE EFFECTIVITY BY MODIFICATION GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT PARA
GRAPH.

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER FIGURE REMARKS

No General Repairs applicable − − −
General Repairs
Table 201
4. Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

REPAIR CATEGORY FOR SUB− INSPECTION

REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE PARAGRAPH INSTRUCTION
(2) (3) REFERENCE (IIR)
Spar Splice Repair 5.A. 201 B Not applicable 55−31−18−2−001−00
Spar Stiffener Repair 5.B. 202 B Not applicable 55−31−18−2−002−00
Spar Delamination Repair 5.C. 203 B C 55−31−18−2−003−00
Specific Repairs
Table 202

Pages 203/204
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

5. Spars − Repairs

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 203.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE (IIR) IS 55−31−18−2−001−00 AND IS DESCRIBED
IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. IN
FORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY
INFORMATION.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 160001 AND BEFORE

MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 39020.

A. Spar Splice Repair

NOTE: You can use this repair procedure for the front and rear spars of
the spar box.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation (Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3.).

NOTE: This repair is applicable for spar splice repair and is effective
as follows:

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005,
A320−200 006, 007, 008, 009, 010, 011,
012, 013, 014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 203
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23. ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary
data about all weight variants and their required information for
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 205
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Pre−Cured Sheet (Doubler) AR Refer to Figure 201

− Special Material (Microbal AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to

loons)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Epoxy Resin)
− Sealant (Corrosion Inhibit
ing Brush Consistency)
− Cleaning Agent (Methyl−
Ethyl−Ketone)
− Cleaning Agent (Trichloroe
thane Methly Chloroform)
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 201 sheet 1 or 2).
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 09−013 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−003 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−004 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)

NOTE: You can use this repair procedure, if you have one or both of
the subsequent conditions:
− the spar is damaged and you can not repair it correctly with an
easier specific repair procedure given in this section,
− it is necessary to get access to repair another part of the spar−
box structure.

(a) Draw a line at the correct positions where you must cut the
spar. Refer to Figure 201 sheet 1 or 2, to see these correct
positions in relation to the spar stiffeners and the spar−box
ribs.
(b) Remove all of the fasteners in the repair area which attach the
spar to the spar attachment flanges. If applicable, also remove
the fasteners which attach the spar to the ribs in the repair
area.
(c) Carefully move the spar and the attachment flanges apart with
wedges. Do this to give clearance, so that you can cut the spar
and cause no damage to the attachment flanges.

NOTE: Make sure that the wedges are made of a nonmetallic materi
al that will not cause damage to the CFRP material (for
example wood or plastic).

Page 206
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Cut the spar at the correct locations and then remove the part
of the spar which is loose.

NOTE: If you must attach this part of the spar to the aircraft
structure again, keep it in a safe place.

NOTE: If you must make a replacement part for the spar, refer to
Airspares for the pre−cured spar material.
(e) Get the correct pre−cured material necessary to make the repair
doubler and if applicable the replacement part for the spar (Re
fer to Figure 201 sheet 1 or 2).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(f) Make the repair doubler to the correct shape and dimension ap
plicable to the location of the splice on the spar.

(g) If a replacement part for the spar is necessary, cut the pre−
cured spar−section material to the correct dimensions.

(h) Put the doubler in its repair position and attach it to the
spar−box with clamps.

(i) Drill at the same diameter the holes from the attachment flange
through the spar and into the doubler. If the doubler is located
over a rib to a spar joint, also drill these holes at the same
diameter.
(j) Remove the doubler from the spar−box structure.

(k) Put the spar−section and the doubler in their repair locations.
Attach them to the spar−box structure with screw−pins.

(l) Make some marks to show the locations of the holes necessary to
attach the doubler to the spar.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(m) Pilot−drill the holes from the doubler to the spar.

(n) Drill at the same diameter all of the holes in the spar flange
through the spar and doubler where necessary.

(o) Remove the spar−section and doubler from the spar−box structure.

(p) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

Page 207
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(q) Clean the repair area and the repair pieces with the cleaning
agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning
agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

WARNING: SPECIAL MATERIAL (MATERIAL NO. 05−057) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) IS DAN

GEROUS.

(r) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).
(s) Apply the adhesive paste to the mating surfaces of the repair
pieces and the spar box structure.

NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a

maximum thickness of 1.5 mm (0.059 in).

(t) Attach the spar section and doubler to the spar−box structure
with screw−pins.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(u) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or
cleaning agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No.
11−004).

(v) Let the adhesive cure (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

5.C.).
(w) After the adhesive has cured drill all of the holes in the re
pair area to the necessary size for the fasteners.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−013) IS DANGEROUS.

(x) Install the correct type of fasteners wet with sealant (corrosion
inhibiting brush consistency) (Material No. 09−013).
(y) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

(z) Do an inspection of the repair.

(3) Temporary Repair

There is no temporary repair applicable.

Page 208
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Spar Splice Repair

Figure 201 (sheet 1)

Pages 209/210
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Spar Splice Repair

Figure 201 (sheet 2)

Pages 211/212
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 204.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE (IIR) IS 55−31−18−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED
IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. IN
FORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY
INFORMATION.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 25484K4399. FOR THE
EFFECTIVITY OF THE GIVEN MODIFICATION, REFER TO THE MODIFICATION/
SERVICE BULLETIN LIST IN CHAPTER 55−30−00 PAGE BLOCK 001.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 160001 AND BEFORE

MODIFICATION 160500.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 39020.

B. Spar Stiffener Repair

NOTE: You can use this repair procedure for the front and rear spars of
the spar box.
NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation (Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3.).

NOTE: This repair is applicable for spar stiffener repair and is effec
tive as follows:

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005,
A320−200 006, 007, 008, 009, 010, 011,
012, 013, 014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 204
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23. ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary
data about all weight variants and their required information for
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 213
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Pre−Cured Sheet (Doubler) AR Refer to Figure 202

2 Pre−Cured Sheet (Filler) AR Refer to Figure 202
3 Pre−Cured Section AR Refer to Figure 202

− Special Material (Microbal
AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to

loons)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com

pound (Epoxy Resin)
− Sealant (Corrosion Inhibit

ing Brush Consistency)
− Cleaning Agent (Methyl−
Ethyl−Ketone)
− Cleaning Agent (Trichloroe

thane Methly Chloroform)
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 202 sheet 1 and 2)
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 09−013 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−003 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−004 (refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)

(a) Remove the first pitch of fasteners, which attach the spar to
the attachment flange, either side of the damaged spar stiffener.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Cut−back the stiffener to agree with the shape shown in Figure
202 sheet 1. Make sure that you remove all of the damaged
structure and keep the maximum amount of serviceable structure.

(c) Get the correct pre−cured CFRP material necessary to make the
repair pieces (Refer to Figure 202 sheet 2).
WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Make the repair doublers and filler to the correct shape and di

mensions applicable to the repair area.

(e) Put the repair pieces in their repair locations and attach them
to the spar with screw clamps.

(f) Make some marks to show the locations of the new holes necessary
to attach the repair pieces to the spar.

(g) Drill the repair pieces and spar structure at the new hole loca

tions with a pilot−diameter twist−drill.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(h) Transfer−drill, at the same diameter, the holes from the attach

ment flange through the spar and into the repair doublers.

Page 214
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(i) Remove the repair pieces from the spar structure and remove un
wanted material from the repair area.
(j) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(k) Clean the repair area and repair pieces with the cleaning agent
(methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent
(trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

WARNING: SPECIAL MATERIAL (MATERIAL NO. 05−057) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) IS DAN

GEROUS.

(l) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).

(m) Apply the adhesive paste to the mating surfaces of the repair
pieces and the spar structure.

NOTE: The repair adhesive paste is a shim material and is used

to maximum thickness of 1.5 mm (0.059 in).

(n) Attach the repair pieces to the spar structure with screw pins.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(o) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or
cleaning agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No.
11−004).

(p) Let the adhesive cure (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

5.C.).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(q) After the adhesive has cured drill all of the holes in the re
pair area to the necessary diameter for the fasteners.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−013) IS DANGEROUS.

(r) Install the correct type of fasteners wet with sealant (corrosion
inhibiting brush consistency) (Material No. 09−013).
(s) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

Page 215
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(t) Do an inspection of the repair.

(3) Temporary Repair

There is no temporary repair applicable.

Page 216
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Spar Stiffener Repair

Figure 202 (sheet 1)

Pages 217/218
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Spar Stiffener Repair

Figure 202 (sheet 2)

Pages 219/220
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 205.
CAUTION: SPAR DELAMINATION PERMANENT REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED
INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE (IIR) IS
55−31−18−2−003−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPEC
TIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT
AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.
CAUTION: THIS PERMANENT REPAIR IS APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 25484K4399.
FOR THE EFFECTIVITY OF THE GIVEN MODIFICATION, REFER TO THE MOD
IFICATION/SERVICE BULLETIN LIST IN CHAPTER 55−30−00 PAGE BLOCK 001.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 160001 AND BEFORE

MODIFICATION 160500.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 39020.

C. Spar Delamination Repair

NOTE: You can use this repair procedure for the front and rear spars of
the spar box.
NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation (Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3.).

NOTE: This repair is applicable for spar delamination repair and is ef
fective as follows:

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005,
A320−200 006, 007, 008, 009, 010, 011,
012, 013, 014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 205
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23. ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary
data about all weight variants and their required information for
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 221
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Pre−Cured Sheet (Doubler) AR Refer to Figure 203

− Special Material (Microbal
AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to

loons)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com

pound (Epoxy Resin)
− Sealant (Corrosion Inhibit

ing Brush Consistency)
− Cleaning Agent (Methyl−
Ethyl−Ketone)
− Cleaning Agent (Trichloroe

thane Methly Chloroform)
− Pretreatment for Painting
(Chemical Conversion Coat

ing Yellow Aluminium)
− Structure Paint (Polyure

thane Anti Corrosion Prim

er)
− Structure Paint (Polyure

thane Top Coat, Grey)
− Chromic Acid Anodizing
(CAA)
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 203 sheet 1)
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 09−013 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−003 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−004 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 13−002 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−001 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−002 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Refer to Chapter 51−21−11

(a) Repair Procedure

1 Make some marks to show the locations of the new holes neces

sary to repair the delaminated area.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

2 Drill the correct diameter holes at the necessary locations in

the repair area. Start at the outer hole locations and then
work to the inner hole locations. After you drill each hole,
put a screw pin into it to clamp the delaminated layers to

gether. This will help to stop more delamination damage.

3 Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum

cleaner.

Page 222
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

4 Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ke
tone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent (trichloroethane
methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−013) IS DANGEROUS.

5 Install the correct type of fasteners wet with sealant (corro

sion inhibiting brush consistency) (Material No. 09−013).

6 Do an inspection of the repair.

(b) Repair Procedure for Effectivity after Modification 25484K4399

(Refer to Figure 203 sheet 2).
1 Get the correct pre−cured material necessary to make the repair
doubler (Refer to Figure 203 sheet 2).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

2 Make the repair doubler to the correct shape and dimensions

applicable to the location of the delamination area.
3 Attach the doubler to the repair area with screw−clamps.

4 Mark the fastener holes on the doubler.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

5 Drill pilot−holes through the doubler and Spar.

6 Remove the doubler from the repair area.

7 Remove unwanted material from the repair area and the doubler
with a vacuum cleaner.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

8 Clean the repair area and the doubler with cleaning agent
(methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent
(trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).
WARNING: SPECIAL MATERIAL (MATERIAL NO. 08−057) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) IS

DANGEROUS.

9 Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material

No. 08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).

Page 223
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

10 Apply the adhesive paste to the mating surfaces of the doubler

and the spar.
NOTE: The repair adhesive paste is a shim material and is used
to a maximum thickness of 1.5 mm (0.059 in).

11 Attach the doubler to the repair area with screw−pins.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

12 Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with cleaning
agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning
agent (trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

13 Let the adhesive cure (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

5.C.).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

14 After the adhesive has cured, drill all of the holes in the
repair area to the necessary size for the fasteners.

15 Remove the doubler from the repair area.

16 Remove unwanted material from the repair area and the doubler
with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

17 Clean the repair area and the doubler with cleaning agent
(methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent
(trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

18 Attach the doubler to the repair area with screw−pins.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−013) IS DANGEROUS.

19 Install the correct type of fasteners wet with sealant (corro

sion inhbiting brush consistency) (Material No. 09−013).

20 Do an inspection of the repair.

(3) Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 203 sheet 2)

Page 224
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: THIS TEMPORARY REPAIR IS ONLY APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION

25484K4399. FOR THE EFFECTIVITY OF THE GIVEN MODIFICATION,
REFER TO THE MODIFICATION/SERVICE BULLETIN LIST IN CHAPTER
55−30−00 PAGE BLOCK 001.

CAUTION: THIS TEMPORARY REPAIR MUST BE REPLACED BY A PERMANENT RE

PAIR WITHIN 2 500 FH.

(a) Get the correct equivalent metal material necessary to make the
repair doubler (Refer to Figure 203 sheet 2).

(b) Make the repair doubler to the correct shape and dimensions ap
plicable to the location of the delamination area.

(c) Attach the doubler to the repair area with screw−clamps.

(d) Mark the fastener holes on the doubler.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(e) Drill pilot−holes through the doubler and Spar.

(f) Drill all of the holes in the repair area to the necessary size
for the fasteners.
(g) Remove the doubler from the repair area.

(h) Remove unwanted material from the repair area and the doubler
with a vacuum cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(i) Clean the repair area and the doubler with cleaning agent (meth
yl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent (trich
loroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).
WARNING: CHROMIC ACID ANODIZING (CAA) IS POISONOUS.

WARNING: PRETREATMENT FOR PAINTING (MATERIAL NO. 13−002) IS POI

SONOUS.

(j) Treat the doubler with Chromic Acid Anodizing (CAA) or pretreat
ment for painting (chemical conversion coating yellow aluminium)
(Material No. 13−002) (Refer to Chapter 51−21−11).

WARNING: STRUCTURE PAINT (MATERIAL NO. 16−001) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: STRUCTURE PAINT (MATERIAL NO. 16−002) IS DANGEROUS.

(k) First apply structure paint (polyurethane anti corrosion primer)

(Material No. 16−001) to the doubler and then structure paint
(polyurethane top coat, grey) (Material No. 16−002).

Page 225
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−013) IS DANGEROUS.

(l) After the surface protection has cured, apply sealant (corrosion
inhibiting brush consistency) (Material No. 09−013) to the mating
surface of the doubler. Make sure, that you have an equalize
thickness of sealant.

NOTE: The sealant is used, to seperate the two different materi

als.
(m) After the sealant has cured, attach the doubler to the repair
area with screw−pins.

WARNING: SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−013) IS DANGEROUS.

(n) Install the correct type of fasteners wet with sealant (corrosion
inhibiting brush consistency) (Material No. 09−013).
(o) Do an inspection of the repair.

Page 226
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Spar Delamination Repair

Figure 203 (sheet 1)

Pages 227/228
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Spar Delamination Repair

Figure 203 (sheet 2)

Pages 229/230
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPARS

1. General

These repairs are applicable for the Spars of the Vertical Stabilizer Spar
Box. The general repairs are listed in Table 201, the specific repairs are
listed in Table 202. The appropriate repairs are described in more detail
in the relevant Chapter. The repair Zones and Allowable Damage data for
these repair procedures is given in Chapter 55−31−00 Page Block 101 Con
fig.1 and Chapter 55−31−18 Page Block 101 Config 2.

NOTE: Refer to each repair to determine the repair applicability.

NOTE: For Damage/Repair Data Recording, refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For the definition of repair categories, refer to Chapter 51−11−14.

2. Safety Precautions

There are risks to you and other persons when you work with composite re
pair materials. To prevent risks, read and obey the warnings given below.
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.

WARNING: OBEY THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS WHEN YOU USE CLEANING AGENTS,
ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND PAINTS. THESE MATERIALS ARE DANGEROUS.
WARNING: WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND FILTER MASK WHEN YOU CUT,
ABRADE OR DRILL COMPOSITE MATERIALS. THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MA
TERIALS CAN GET INTO YOUR LUNGS OR ONTO YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE YOU
INJURY. IMMEDIATELY REMOVE DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.

WHEN YOU WORK WITH CFRP COMPOSITE MATERIALS, IMMEDIATELY REMOVE
DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRIC POWER ON
THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST ONLY USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIRS CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE REFER
TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN IN THE
INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT PARAGRAPH.

CAUTION: OBEY THE GIVEN INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE WHICH LEADS TO THE
APPLICABLE INSPECTION PROGRAM DEFINED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR IN
SPECTIONS (SRI) OF THE SRM, IF NECESSARY.

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER FIGURE REMARKS

No General Repairs applicable − − −
Repairs − General
Table 201
4. Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs

INSPECTION
INSTRUC
REPAIR
REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE TION REF
CATEGORY
ERENCE
(IIR)
55−31−18−2
Spar Splice Repair 5.A. B 201
−001−00
55−31−18−2
B
Spar
p Delamination Repair
p 5.B. 202 −002−00
C −
Rear Spar Handhole Coverfoil Re
5.C. A, C − −
pair
Repairs − Specific
Table 202

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

5. Spars − Repairs

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 203.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION

INSTRUCTION REFERENCE (IIR) IS 55−31−18−2−001−00 AND IS DESCRIBED
IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. IN
FORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY
INFORMATION.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND AFTER
MODIFICATION 160500.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 39020.

A. Spar Splice Repair

NOTE: You can use this repair procedure for the front and rear spars of
the spar box.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005,
A320−200 006, 007, 008, 009, 010, 011,
012, 013, 014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 203
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23. "Weight Variant information" in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary
data about all the weight variants and their required information
for the allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Pre−Cured Sheet (Doubler) AR Refer to Figure 201

− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to

pound (Epoxy Resin) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Special Material (Microbal AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to
loons) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Cleaning Agent AR Material No. 11−003 or 11−004
(Refer to Chapter 51−35−00)
− Sealant (Sealant, Polysul AR Material No. 09−013 (Refer to
fide Dichromate Cured) Chapter 51−35−00)
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 201).

NOTE: You can use this repair procedure, if you have one or both of
the subsequent conditions:

− the spar is damaged and you can not repair it correctly with
an easier specific repair procedure given in this section,

− it is necessary to get access to repair another part of the

spar−box structure.

(a) Draw a line at the correct positions where you must cut the
spar. Refer to Figure 201, to see these correct positions in
relation to the spar stiffeners and the spar−box ribs.

(b) Remove all of the fasteners in the repair area which attach the
spar to the spar attachment flanges. If applicable, also remove
the fasteners which attach the spar to the ribs in the repair
area.
(c) Carefully move the spar and the attachment flanges apart with
wedges. Do this to give clearance, so that you can cut the spar
and cause no damage to the attachment flanges.

NOTE: Make sure that the wedges are made of a nonmetallic materi
al that will not cause damage to the CFRP material (for
example wood or plastic).

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Cut the spar at the correct locations and then remove the part
of the spar which is loose.

NOTE: If you must attach this part of the spar to the aircraft
structure again, keep it in a safe place.

NOTE: If you must make a replacement part for the spar, refer to
Airspares for the pre−cured spar material.
(e) Get the correct pre−cured material necessary to make the repair
doubler and if applicable the replacement part for the spar (Re
fer to Figure 201).

(f) Make the repair doubler to the correct shape and dimension ap
plicable to the location of the splice on the spar.
(g) If a replacement part for the spar is necessary, cut the pre−
cured spar−section material to the correct dimensions.

(h) Put the doubler in its repair position and attach it to the
spar−box with clamps.
(i) Drill at the same diameter the holes from the attachment flange
through the spar and into the doubler. If the doubler is located
over a rib to a spar joint, also drill these holes at the same
diameter.

(j) Remove the doubler from the spar−box structure.

(k) Put the spar−section and the doubler in their repair locations.
Attach them to the spar−box structure with screw−pins.

(l) Make some marks to show the locations of the holes necessary to
attach the doubler to the spar.
(m) Pilot−drill the holes from the doubler to the spar.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(n) Drill at the same diameter all of the holes in the spar flange
through the spar and doubler where necessary.
(o) Remove the spar−section and doubler from the spar−box structure.

(p) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

(q) Clean the repair area and the repair pieces with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003 or 11−004).
(r) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).

Page 205
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(s) Apply the adhesive paste to the mating surfaces of the repair
pieces and the spar box structure.
NOTE: The repair adhesive is a shim material and is used to a
maximum thickness of 1.5 mm (0.059 in.).

(t) Attach the spar section and doubler to the spar−box structure
with screw−pins.

(u) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003 or 11−004).

(v) Let the adhesive cure (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

5.C.).

(w) After the adhesive has cured drill all of the holes in the re
pair area to the necessary size for the fasteners.

(x) Install the correct type of fasteners wet with sealant (Material
No. 09−013).

(y) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.
(z) Do an inspection of the repair.

(3) Temporary Repair

There is no temporary repair applicable.

Page 206
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Spar Splice Repair

Figure 201

Pages 207/208
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 204.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE (IIR) IS 55−31−18−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED
IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. IN
FORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY
INFORMATION.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND AFTER
MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 39020.

B. Spar Delamination Repair

NOTE: You can use this repair procedure for the front and rear spars of
the spar box.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005,
A320−200 006, 007, 008, 009, 010, 011,
012, 013, 014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 204
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23. "Weight Variant information" in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary
data about all the weight variants and their required information
for the allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 209
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Pre−Cured Sheet (Doubler) AR Refer to Figure 202

− Bonding and Adhesive Com
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to

pound (Epoxy Resin)
− Special Material (Microbal

loons)
− Cleaning Agent
− Sealant (Sealant, Polysul

fide Dichromate Cured)
− Chromic Acid Anodizing
(CAA)
− Pretreatment for Painting
(Chemical Conversion Coat

ing Yellow Aluminium)
− Structure Paint (Polyure

thane Primer)
− Structure Paint (Polyure

thane Topcoat, Grey (For
Internal Application))
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 202)
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−003 or 11−004
(Refer to Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 09−013 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Refer to Chapter 51−21−11
AR Material No. 13−002 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−001 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−002 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)

(a) Get the correct pre−cured material necessary to make the repair
doubler (Refer to Figure 202).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(b) Make the repair doubler to the correct shape and dimensions ap

plicable to the location of the delamination area.

(c) Attach the doubler to the repair area with screw−clamps.

(d) Mark the fastener holes on the doubler.

(e) Drill pilot−holes through the doubler and Spar.

(f) Remove the doubler from the repair area.

(g) Remove unwanted material from the repair area and the doubler
with a vacuum cleaner.
(h) Clean the repair area and the doubler with cleaning agent (Mate

rial No. 11−003 or 11−004).

Page 210
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(i) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).

(j) Apply the adhesive paste to the mating surfaces of the doubler
and the spar.

NOTE: The repair adhesive paste is a shim material and is used

to a maximum thickness of 1.5 mm (0.059 in.).
(k) Attach the doubler to the repair area with screw−pins.

(l) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003 or 11−004).

(m) Let the adhesive cure (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

5.C.).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(n) After the adhesive has cured, drill all of the holes in the re

pair area to the necessary size for the fasteners.

(o) Remove the doubler from the repair area.

(p) Remove unwanted material from the repair area and the doubler
with a vacuum cleaner.

(q) Clean the repair area and the doubler with cleaning agent (Mate

rial No. 11−003 or 11−004).
(r) Attach the doubler to the repair area with screw−pins.

(s) Install the correct type of fasteners wet with sealant (Material
No. 09−013).

(t) Do an inspection of the repair.

CAUTION: THIS TEMPORARY REPAIR MUST BE REPLACED BY A PERMANENT REPAIR
SOLUTION WITHIN 2 500 FH.

(3) Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 202)

(a) Get the correct equivalent metal material necessary to make the
repair doubler (Refer to Figure 202).
(b) Make the repair doubler to the correct shape and dimensions ap

plicable to the location of the delamination area.

(c) Attach the doubler to the repair area with screw−clamps.

(d) Mark the fastener holes on the doubler.

Page 211
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(e) Drill pilot−holes through the doubler and Spar.

(f) Drill all of the holes in the repair area to the necessary size
for the fasteners.

(g) Remove the doubler from the repair area.

(h) Remove unwanted material from the repair area and the doubler
with a vacuum cleaner.

(i) Clean the repair area and the doubler with cleaning agent (Mate

rial No. 11−003 or 11−004).

WARNING: CHROMIC ACID ANODIZING (CAA) IS POISONOUS.

(j) Treat the doubler with Chromic Acid Anodizing (CAA) or pretreat

ment for painting (chemical conversion coating) (Material No.
13−002). Refer to Chapter 51−21−11.

(k) First apply structure paint (polyurethane primer) (Material No.

16−001) to the doubler and then structure paint (polyurethane
topcoat) (Material No. 16−002).
(l) After the surface protection has cured, apply sealant (Material
No. 09−013) to the mating surface of the doubler. Make sure,
that you have an equalize thickness of sealant.

NOTE: The sealant is used, to separate the two different materi

als.

(m) After the sealant has cured, attach the doubler to the repair
area with screw−pins.

(n) Install the correct type of fasteners wet with sealant (Material
No. 09−013).
(o) Do an inspection of the repair.

Page 212
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/13
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Spar Delamination Repair

Figure 202

Pages 213/214
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 205.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: A TEMPORARY REPAIR MUST BE REPLACED BY A PERMANENT REPAIR WITHIN 6

MONTHS (FH NOT RELEVANT).

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND AFTER
MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 39020.

C. Handhole Coverfoil Repair

NOTE: This repair is applicable for a missing or perforated handhole cov
erfoil at the rear spar of the VST spar box.

NOTE: This repair data is valid as shown in Table 205.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−200 ALL
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 205
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 23. "Weight Variant information" in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary
data about all the weight variants and their required information
for the allowable damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Aluminum Foil Adhesive Film AR Material No. 05RAB9 (Refer to

Tape Chapter 51−35−00)
− Cleaning Agent (General AR Material No. 11−026 (Refer to
Purpose Solvent) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Transparent Protective AR Material No. 07−023 (Refer to
Coating Chapter 51−35−00)
(2) Temporary Repair
(a) Determine the damage where the repair is practicable.

(b) Remove the old coverfoil.

Page 215
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(c) Clean the area around the handhole, where you will install the
new coverfoil, with cleaning agent (general purpose solvent) (Ma
terial No. 11−026).

(d) Clean the area behind the handhole with cleaning agent (general
purpose solvent) (Material No. 11−026) and do a check for hy
draulic leakage.

(e) Install a new coverfoil, made from:

− Aluminum foil adhesive film tape (Material No. 05RAB9, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00), two overlapping layers in crosswise direction
or
− Aluminum foil adhesive film tape (Material No. 05RAB9, refer to
Chapter 51−35−00) with size and shape in accordance with the
original item, refer to Chapter 55−31−18 Page Block 001, Con
fig.2.
(3) Permanent Repair

(a) Do steps 5.C.(2)(a) thru 5.C.(2)(e).

(b) Seal the edges of the handhole cover with lacquer (transparent
protective coating) (Material No. 07−023).
NOTE: If applied within six months (FH not relevant), the tempo
rary repair is also classified as permanent.

Page 216
Printed in Germany
55−31−18
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

MISCELLANEOUS
STRUCTURE

1. Identification
Scheme

NOTE: CONFIG−1
is
applicable
before
Modification
26500K4924T.

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Bonding
Plates
and
Bonding
Angles Figure
1
(sheet
1
thru
4)
− Nut
Plates
and
Receptacles Figure
1
(sheet
5)
− Hoisting
Points Figure
1
(sheet
6)
− Access
Panel
Supports
before Figure
2
(sheet
1)
Modification
30216K6445B
− Ply
Lay−up
before
Modification Figure
2
(sheet
2
thru
5)
30216K6445B
− Access
Panel
Supports
after
Modification Figure
3
30216K6445B
− Brackets
and
Angles
before
Modification Figure
4
25484K4399
− Brackets
and
Angles
after
Modification Figure
5
25484K4399R
NOTE: Refer
to
Chapter
55−30−00
Page
Block
001,
where
you
can
find
the
Mod
ification/Service
Bulletin
List.

Page
1




55−31−19
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Bonding
Plates
and
Bonding
Angles
Figure
1
(sheet
1)

Page
2




55−31−19
Printed in Germany CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Bonding
Plates
and
Bonding
Angles
Figure
1
(sheet
2)

Page
3




55−31−19
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Bonding
Plates
and
Bonding
Angles
Figure
1
(sheet
3)

Page
4




55−31−19
Printed in Germany CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Bonding
Plates
and
Bonding
Angles
Figure
1
(sheet
4)

Page
5




55−31−19
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Nut
Plates
and
Receptacles
Figure
1
(sheet
5)

Page
6




55−31−19
Printed in Germany CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Hoisting
Points
Figure
1
(sheet
6)

Page
7




55−31−19
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

1 Plate, bonding T351 D55371256220

ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
1A Plate, bonding T351 D55371256260 A27775K6005C
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
5 Plate, bonding T351 D55371256222 B27775K6005C
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
10 Plate, bonding T351 D55371256224 B27775K6005C
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
15 Plate, bonding T351 D55371256226
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
15A Plate, bonding T351 D55371256262 A27775K6005C
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
20 Section, bonding T3511 D92491012200
LN9497A070
25 Plate, bonding T351 D55371256214 B27775K6005C
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
30 Plate, bonding T351 D55371256216
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
35 Plate, bonding T351 D55371256218 B27775K6005C
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
40 Angle, bonding D55371256000
LH
45 Angle, bonding D55371256000 A22111K2225C
RH
50 Plate, light
T42 D55371254208
ningprotection ABS5044A010 209
1.0 (0.039)
55 Plate, bonding T351 D55371256212
ABS5044A018 1.8 (0.071)
60 Plate, bonding T351 D55371256210
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
65 Plate, bonding T351 D55371256208
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
70 Plate, bonding T351 D55371256206
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
75 Plate, bonding T351 D55371256234
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
80 Section, bonding T3511 D92491012200 B21733K1872M
LN9497A070
ASSY Dwg.: D55371000, D55371035

Key to Figure 1

Page 8
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/08
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

85 Plate, bonding T351 D55371256204

ABS5044A010 205
1.0 (0.039)
90 Angle, bonding T351 D55371256228
ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
95 Plate, bonding T351 D55371256200
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
100 Plate, bonding T351 D55371256202
ABS5044A010 203
1.0 (0.039)
105 Plate, shim LH LN40606B060 D55371136200
110 Plate, nut MS21060−6
115 Receptacle LH NSA9501−000
Receptacle RH NSA9501−000 B20515K0583
120 Plate, shim LH LN40606B100 D55371136202
Plate, shim RH LN40606B100 D55371136202 B20515K0583
125 Plate, shim LH LN40606B060 D55371136208
Plate, shim RH LN40606B060 D55371136208 B20515K0583
130 Plate, shim LH LN40606B080 D55371136204
Plate, shim RH LN40606B080 D55371136206 B20515K0583
135 Plate, shim LH LN40606B080 D55371136206
Plate, shim RH LN40606B080 D55371136204 B20515K0583
140 Bush, hoisting A55371593000
point
145 Lug, hoisting NSA9006−12 B20911K2155B
150 Plug, plastic 5.2206.0 D53370217200 A20911K2155B
ASSY Dwg.: D55370000, D55371000, D55371100

Key to Figure 1

Page 9
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/08
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Access
Panel
Supports
before
Modification
30216K6445B
Figure
2
(sheet
1)

Page
10




55−31−19
Printed in Germany CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Ply
Lay−up
before
Modification
30216K6445B
Figure
2
(sheet
2)

Page
11




55−31−19
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Ply
Lay−up
before
Modification
30216K6445B
Figure
2
(sheet
3)

Page
12




55−31−19
Printed in Germany CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Ply
Lay−up
before
Modification
30216K6445B
Figure
2
(sheet
4)

Page
13




55−31−19
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Ply
Lay−up
before
Modification
30216K6445B
Figure
2
(sheet
5)

Page
14




55−31−19
Printed in Germany CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

1 Support, access Composite D55371262000

panel assy
1A Support, access Composite D55371265000 A21733K1872M
panel assy B30216K6445B
5 Support, access Composite D55371261000
panel assy
5A Support, access Composite D55371264000 A21733K1872M
panel assy B30216K6445B
10 Support, access Composite D55371260000
panel assy
10A Support, access Composite D55371263000 A21733K1872M
panel assy B30216K6445B
ASSY Dwg.: D55371000, D55371020

Key to Figure 2

Page 15
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/08
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Access
Panel
Supports
after
Modification
30216K6445B
Figure
3
(sheet
1)

Page
16




55−31−19
Printed in Germany CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Access
Panel
Supports
after
Modification
30216K6445B
Figure
3
(sheet
2)

Page
17




55−31−19
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Access
Panel
Supports
after
Modification
30216K6445B
Figure
3
(sheet
3)

Page
18




55−31−19
Printed in Germany CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

1 Support 4, ac
D55371471000 A30216K6445B

cess panel assy
5 Support 3, ac
D55371470000 A30216K6445B
cess panel assy
10 Support 1, ac
D55371469000 A30216K6445B
cess panel assy
15 Support 4, ac
T42 D55371466200 A30216K6445B
cess panel ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
20 Doubler BR6 T42 D55371466202 A30216K6445B
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
25 Doubler BR6 T42 D55371466203 A30216K6445B
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
30 Doubler BR7 T42 D55371466204 A30216K6445B
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
35 Doubler BR7 T42 D55371466205 A30216K6445B
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
40 Angle, assy D55371468000 A30216K6445B
45 Support 3, ac
T42 D55371465200 A30216K6445B
cess panel ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
50 Doubler BR5 T42 D55371465202 A30216K6445B
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
55 Doubler BR5 T42 D55371465203 A30216K6445B
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
60 Doubler BR6 T42 D55371465204 A30216K6445B
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
65 Doubler BR6 T42 D55371465205 A30216K6445B
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
70 Support 1, ac
T42 D55371464200 A30216K6445B
cess panel ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
75 Doubler BR2 T42 D55371464204 A30216K6445B
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
80 Doubler BR2 T42 D55371464205 A30216K6445B
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
85 Angle, assy D55371468002 A30216K6445B
90 Doubler BR1 T42 D55371464202 A30216K6445B
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
95 Doubler BR1 T42 D55371464203 A30216K6445B
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
ASSY Dwg.: D55371033, D55371469, D55371470, D55371471

Key to Figure 3

Page 19
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/08
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Brackets
and
Angles
before
Modification
25484K4399
Figure
4
(sheet
1)

Page
20




55−31−19
Printed in Germany CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Brackets
and
Angles
before
Modification
25484K4399
Figure
4
(sheet
2)

Page
21




55−31−19
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Brackets
and
Angles
before
Modification
25484K4399
Figure
4
(sheet
3)

Page
22




55−31−19
Printed in Germany CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Brackets
and
Angles
before
Modification
25484K4399
Figure
4
(sheet
4)

Page
23




55−31−19
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Brackets
and
Angles
before
Modification
25484K4399
Figure
4
(sheet
5)

Page
24




55−31−19
Printed in Germany CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Brackets
and
Angles
before
Modification
25484K4399
Figure
4
(sheet
6)

Page
25




55−31−19
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Brackets
and
Angles
before
Modification
25484K4399
Figure
4
(sheet
7)

Page
26




55−31−19
Printed in Germany CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Brackets
and
Angles
before
Modification
25484K4399
Figure
4
(sheet
8)

Page
27




55−31−19
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

1 Angle, hf−anten
T351 D92491109200 A20037P0034

na ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
5 Profile−A T42 D92491005210 B21733K1872C
ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
5A Profile−A T42 D92491005214 A21733K1872C
ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
10 Bracket T351 D93570791200 B25484K4399
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
15 Angle, hf−anten
T351 D92491110200 A20037P0034
na ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
20 Angle T3511 A92491727202 B25484K4399
LN9496A210
25 Bracket T3511 A92491873200 B25484K4399
LN9496A140
30 Bracket T3 D93570788202 B25484K4399
LN9411AB 1.0 (0.039)
301510
35 Angle, hf−anten
T3 D92491112200 A20037P0034
na LN9411AB 1.0 (0.039)
252510
40 Angle T3511 D92491015200 B21733K1872C
LN9496A250
40A Angle T3511 D92491015204 A21733K1872C
LN9496A250
45 Angle, hf−anten
T351 D92491108202 B25484K4399
na ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
50 Angle, hf−anten
T3 D92491113200 A20037P0034
na LN9411AB 1.0 (0.039)
252510
55 Bracket T3 D93570788204 B25484K4399
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
60 Bracket T351 D93570794200 B25484K4399
ABS5044A020 2.0 (0.079)
65 Bracket T3511 A92491873200 B25484K4399
LN9496A140
70 Angle 3.1364.4 A92493691201 B25484K4399
ABS5044A016 1.6 (0.063)
75 Section−T T3511 D92491016202 B25484K4399
LN9497A250
ASSY Dwg.: D92490130, D92491062, D92491110, D92491111, D93570780

Key to Figure 4

Page 28
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/08
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

80 Section−T T3511 D92491016200 B25484K4399

LN9497A390
85 Bracket, attach
3.1364.4 A92491911200 B21733K1872E
ing ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
85A Angle T42 D92491029200 A21733K1872E
ABS5044A014 1.4 (0.055)
90 Angle 3.1354.6 A92491727202 B21733K1872E
LN9496A210
90A Angle T42 D92491029201 A21733K1872E
ABS5044A014 1.4 (0.055)
95 Angle 3.1354.6 A92491727204 B25484K4399
LN9496A210
100 Mounting T42 D92491009226 B21733K1872C
ABS5044A014 1.4 (0.055)
100A Mounting T42 D92491009234 A21733K1872C
ABS5044A014 1.4 (0.055)
105 Bracket T3 D93570790200 B25484K4399
LN9415AB
251510
110 Angle, mounting 3.1354.6 A92491874200 B25484K4399
LN9496A010
115 Bracket T3511 D93570787200 B25484K4399
LN9496A350
120 Bracket T3511 D93570787201 B25484K4399
LN9496A350
125 Bracket, attach
3.1364.4 A92491911200 B25484K4399
ing ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
130 Bracket T3511 D93570785200 B25484K4399
LN9496A410
135 Bracket T3 D93570788200 B21733K1872C
LN9411AB 1.0 (0.039)
301510
135A Bracket T3 D93570788206 A21733K1872C
ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
140 Bracket T3511 D93570786200 B21733K1872C
LN9496A590
140A Bracket T3511 D93570786208 A21733K1872C
LN9496A590
145 Bracket T3511 A92491873200 B21733K1872C
LN9496A140
ASSY Dwg.: D92490130, D92491062, D93570780, D93570781

Key to Figure 4

Page 29
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/08
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

145A Bracket T42 A92496355202 A21733K1872C

ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
150 Bracket T3511 D93570786202 B21733K1872C
LN9496A590
150A Bracket T3511 D93570786206 A21733K1872C
LN9496A590
155 Bracket T3 D93570792200 B21733K1872C
LN9411AB 1.0 (0.039)
201510
155A Bracket T3 D93570792202 A21733K1872C
ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
160 Mounting T351 D92491009218 B21733K1872C
ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
165 Bracket T3511 D93570786204 B21733K1872C
LN9496A590
165A Bracket T3511 D93570786208 A21733K1872C
LN9496A590
170 Mounting T351 D92491009224 B21733K1872C
ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
170A Mounting T351 D92491009232 A21733K1872C
ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
175 Bracket T3511 D93570793200 B21733K1872C
LN9496A080
175A Bracket T3511 D93570793202 A21733K1872C
ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
180 Bracket T3511 A92491873200 A21733K1872C
LN9496A140
ASSY Dwg.: D92490130, D92491009, D93570780

Key to Figure 4

Page 30
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/08
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Brackets
and
Angles
after
Modification
25484K4399R
Figure
5
(sheet
1)

Page
31




55−31−19
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Brackets
and
Angles
after
Modification
25484K4399R
Figure
5
(sheet
2)

Page
32




55−31−19
Printed in Germany CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Brackets
and
Angles
after
Modification
25484K4399R
Figure
5
(sheet
3)

Page
33




55−31−19
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Brackets
and
Angles
after
Modification
25484K4399R
Figure
5
(sheet
4)

Page
34




55−31−19
Printed in Germany CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Brackets
and
Angles
after
Modification
25484K4399R
Figure
5
(sheet
5)

Page
35




55−31−19
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Brackets
and
Angles
after
Modification
25484K4399R
Figure
5
(sheet
6)

Page
36




55−31−19
Printed in Germany CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Brackets
and
Angles
after
Modification
25484K4399R
Figure
5
(sheet
7)

Page
37




55−31−19
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Brackets
and
Angles
after
Modification
25484K4399R
Figure
5
(sheet
8)

Page
38




55−31−19
Printed in Germany CONFIG−1
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Angle, hf−anten T351 D92491109200 A25484K4399AD

na ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
5 Profile−A T42 D92491005214 A25484K4399R
ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
10 Bracket T351 D93570784200 A25484K4399R
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
15 Angle, hf−anten T351 D92491110202 A25484K4399AC
na ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
20 Angle DAN1259−01 D92491046204 A25484K4399R
25 Bracket T351 D93570784202 A25484K4399R
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
30 Angle DAN1259−01 D92491046200 A25484K4399R
35 Angle, hf−anten T351 D92491110204 A25484K4399AD
na ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
40 Angle, hf−anten T351 D92491108204 A25484K4399AD
na ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
45 Angle, hf−anten T351 D92491110208 A25484K4399AD
na ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
50 Angle, hf−anten T351 D92491110206 A25484K4399AD
na ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
55 Bracket T73511 D93570783200 A25484K4399R
LN9496P560
60 Bracket T3511 A92491873200 A25484K4399R
LN9496P140
65 Angle 3.1364.4 A92493691201 A25484K4399R
ABS5044A016 1.6 (0.063)
70 Section−T T3511 D92491016202 A25484K4399R
LN9497A250
75 Angle 3.1354.6 A92491727204 A25484K4399R
LN9496A210
80 Section−T T3511 D92491016200 A25484K4399R
LN9497A390
85 Angle T42 D92491029200 A25484K4399R
ABS5044A014 1.4 (0.055)
90 Angle T42 D92491029201 A25484K4399R
ABS5044A014 1.4 (0.055)
95 Mounting T42 D92491009234 A25484K4399R
ABS5044A014 1.4 (0.055)
ASSY Dwg.: D92490130, D92491062, D92491111, D93570780

Key to Figure 5

Page 39
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

100 Bracket T3 D93570790200 A25484K4399R

LN9415AB−2515
10
105 Angle, mounting 3.1354.6 A92491874200 A25484K4399R
LN9496A010
110 Bracket T73511 D93570783203 A25484K4399R
LN9496P480
115 Bracket T73511 D93570783202 A25484K4399R
LN9496P480
120 Angle DAN1259−01 D92491046202
120A Bracket, attach
3.1364.4 A92491911200 A25484K4399U
ing ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
125 Bracket T3511 D93570785200 A25484K4399R
LN9496A410
130 Bracket T3 D93570788206 A25484K4399R
ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
135 Bracket T351 D93570788208 A25484K4399R
ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
140 Bracket T42 A92496355202 A25484K4399R
ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
145 Bracket T3511 D93570786208 A25484K4399R
LN9496A590
150 Bracket T3511 D93570786206 A25484K4399R
LN9496A590
155 Bracket T3 D93570792202 A25484K4399R
ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
160 Bracket T3511 A92491873200 A25484K4399R
LN9496A140
165 Mounting T351 D92491009232 A25484K4399R
ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
170 Bracket T3511 D93570793202 A25484K4399R
ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
ASSY Dwg.: D92490130, D93570780, D93570781

Key to Figure 5

Page 40
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
Nov 01/08
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURE

1. Identification Scheme

NOTE: CONFIG−2 is applicable after Modification 26500K4924T.

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Bonding Plates and Shim Plates Figure 1 (sheet 1 thru 4)

− Nut Plates and Receptacle Figure 1 (sheet 5)
− Hoist Fittings Figure 1 (sheet 6)
− Access Panel Supports before Figure 2 (sheet 1)
Modification 30216K6445C
− Ply Lay−up before Modification Figure 2 (sheet 2 and 3)
30216K6445C
− Access Panel Supports after Modification Figure 3
30216K6445C
− Brackets and Angles Figure 4
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−30−00, Page Block 001, where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Page 1
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/09
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Bonding Plates and Shim Plates

Figure 1 (sheet 1)

Page 2
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−2
May 01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Bonding
Plates
and
Shim
Plates
Figure
1
(sheet
2)

Page
3




55−31−19
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−2
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Bonding
Plates
and
Shim
Plates
Figure
1
(sheet
3)

Page
4




55−31−19
Printed in Germany CONFIG−2
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Bonding
Plates
and
Shim
Plates
Figure
1
(sheet
4)

Page
5




55−31−19
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−2
Feb
01/06
STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Nut
Plates
and
Receptacle
Figure
1
(sheet
5)

Page
6




55−31−19
Printed in Germany CONFIG−2
Feb
01/06
STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Hoist
Fittings
Figure
1
(sheet
6)

Page
7




55−31−19
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−2
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Plate, bonding T351 D55371256220

ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
1A Plate, bonding T351 D55371256260 A27775K6005D
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039) A27775K6005J
5 Plate, bonding T351 D55371256222 B27775K6005D
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
10 Plate, bonding T351 D55371256224 B27775K6005D
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
15 Plate, bonding T351 D55371256226
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
15A Plate, bonding T351 D55371256264 A27775K6005D
ABS5044A010 265 A27775K6005J
1.0 (0.039)
20 Section, bonding T3511 D92491012200
LN9497A070
25 Plate, bonding T351 D55371256214 B27775K6005D
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
30 Plate, bonding T351 D55371256216 A27775K6005J
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
35 Plate, bonding T351 D55371256218 B27775K6005D
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
45 Angle, bonding D55371256000
assy
50 Plate, light T42 D55371254218
ningprotection ABS5044A010 219
1.0 (0.039)
50A Plate, light T42 D55371254220 A32951K8291C
ningprotection ABS5044A012 221
1.2 (0.047)
55 Plate, bonding T351 D55371256212
ABS5044A018 1.8 (0.071)
60 Plate, bonding T351 D55371256210
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
65 Plate, bonding T351 D55371256208
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
70 Plate, bonding T351 D55371256206
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
75 Plate, bonding T351 D55371256234
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
ASSY Dwg.: D55371036, D55371390, D55371392

Key to Figure 1

Page 8
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

80 Plate, bonding T351 D55371256204

ABS5044A010 205
1.0 (0.039)
85 Angle, bonding T351 D55371256228 A34600K9600B
ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047) A27775K6005J
90 Plate, bonding T351 D55371256200
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
95 Plate, bonding T351 D55371256202
ABS5044A010 203
1.0 (0.039)
100 Plate, shim LN40606B060 D55371136200
100A Plate, shim LN40606B060 D55371136218 A27775K6005J
105 Plate, nut MS21060L6 A27775K6005J
110 Receptacle LH NSA9501−000 D55371445200 A27775K6005J
115 Plate, shim LH LN40606B100 D55371136202
115A Plate, shim LH LN40606B100 D55371136210 A27775K6005D
A27775K6005J
120 Plate, shim LH LN40606B060 D55371136208
120A Plate, shim LH LN40606B060 D55371136216 A27775K6005D
A27775K6005J
125 Plate, shim LH LN40606B080 D55371136204
125A Plate, shim LH LN40606B080 D55371136212 A27775K6005D
A27775K6005J
130 Plate, shim LH LN40606B080 D55371136206
130A Plate, shim LH LN40606B080 D55371136214 A27775K6005D
A27775K6005J
135 Fitting, hoist D55371338000 A29999K34600
lower assy 001
135A Fitting, hoist D55371338004 A34600K9600A
lower assy 005
140 Fitting, hoist D55371338002 A29999K34600
upper assy 003
140A Fitting, hoist D55371338006 A34600K9600A
lower assy 007
145 Angle, bonding T351 D55371256232 A27775K6005E
ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
145A Angle, bonding T351 D55371256266 A27775K6005K
ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
ASSY Dwg.: D55371036, D55371390, D55371392

Key to Figure 1

Page 9
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/14
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Access
Panel
Supports
before
Modification
30216K6445C
Figure
2
(sheet
1)

Page
10




55−31−19
Printed in Germany CONFIG−2
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Ply
Lay−up
before
Modification
30216K6445C
Figure
2
(sheet
2)

Page
11




55−31−19
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−2
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Ply
Lay−up
before
Modification
30216K6445C
Figure
2
(sheet
3)

Page
12




55−31−19
Printed in Germany CONFIG−2
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Support, access Composite D55371265000

panel assy
5 Support, access Composite D55371264000
panel assy
10 Support, access Composite D55371263000
panel assy
ASSY Dwg.: D55371036

Key to Figure 2

Page 13
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/09
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Access
Panel
Supports
after
Modification
30216K6445C
Figure
3
(sheet
1)

Page
14




55−31−19
Printed in Germany CONFIG−2
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Access
Panel
Supports
after
Modification
30216K6445C
Figure
3
(sheet
2)

Page
15




55−31−19
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−2
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Access
Panel
Supports
after
Modification
30216K6445C
Figure
3
(sheet
3)

Page
16




55−31−19
Printed in Germany CONFIG−2
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Support 4, ac
D55371471000

cess panel assy
5 Support 3, ac
D55371470000
cess panel assy
10 Support 1, ac
D55371469000
cess panel assy
15 Support 4, ac
T42 D55371466200
cess panel ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
20 Doubler BR6 T42 D55371466202
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
25 Doubler BR6 T42 D55371466203
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
30 Doubler BR7 T42 D55371466204
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
35 Doubler BR7 T42 D55371466205
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
40 Angle, assy D55371468000
45 Support 3, ac
T42 D55371465200
cess panel ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
50 Doubler BR5 T42 D55371465202
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
55 Doubler BR5 T42 D55371465203
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
60 Doubler BR6 T42 D55371465204
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
65 Doubler BR6 T42 D55371465205
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
70 Support 1, ac
T42 D55371464200
cess panel ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
75 Doubler BR2 T42 D55371464204
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
80 Doubler BR2 T42 D55371464205
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
85 Angle, assy D55371468002
90 Doubler BR1 T42 D55371464202
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
95 Doubler BR1 T42 D55371464203
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
ASSY Dwg.: D55371034, D55371469, D55371470, D55371471

Key to Figure 3

Page 17
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/09
STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Brackets
and
Angles
Figure
4
(sheet
1)

Page
18




55−31−19
Printed in Germany CONFIG−2
Feb
01/06
STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Brackets
and
Angles
Figure
4
(sheet
2)

Page
19




55−31−19
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−2
Feb
01/06
STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Brackets
and
Angles
Figure
4
(sheet
3)

Page
20




55−31−19
Printed in Germany CONFIG−2
Feb
01/06
STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Brackets
and
Angles
Figure
4
(sheet
4)

Page
21




55−31−19
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−2
Feb
01/06
STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Brackets
and
Angles
Figure
4
(sheet
5)

Page
22




55−31−19
Printed in Germany CONFIG−2
Feb
01/06
STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Brackets
and
Angles
Figure
4
(sheet
6)

Page
23




55−31−19
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−2
Feb
01/06
STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Brackets
and
Angles
Figure
4
(sheet
7)

Page
24




55−31−19
Printed in Germany CONFIG−2
Feb
01/06
STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Brackets
and
Angles
Figure
4
(sheet
8)

Page
25




55−31−19
Printed in Germany
CONFIG−2
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Angle, hf−anten T351 D92491109200 A25484K4399AC

na ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
5 Profile−A T42 D92491005214
ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
10 Bracket T351 D93570784200
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
15 Angle, hf−anten T351 D92491110202 A25484K4399AC
na ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
20 Angle DAN1259−01 D92491046204
25 Bracket T351 D93570784202
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
30 Angle DAN1259−01 D92491046200
35 Angle, hf−anten T351 D92491110204 A25484K4399AC
na ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
40 Angle, hf−anten T351 D92491108204 A25484K4399AC
na ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
45 Angle, hf−anten T351 D92491110208 A25484K4399AC
na ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
50 Angle, hf−anten T351 D92491110206 A25484K4399AC
na ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
55 Bracket T73511 D93570783200
LN9496P560
60 Bracket T3511 A92491873200
LN9496A140
65 Angle 3.13644 A92493691201
ABS5044A016 1.6 (0.063)
70 Section−T T3511 D92491016202
LN9497A250
75 Angle 3.1354.6 A92491727204
LN9496A210
80 Section−T T3511 D92491016200
LN9497A390
85 Angle T42 D92491029200
ABS5044A014 1.4 (0.055)
90 Angle T42 D92491029201
ABS5044A014 1.4 (0.055)
95 Mounting T42 D92491009234
ABS5044A014 1.4 (0.055)
ASSY Dwg.: D92490130, D92491062, D92491111, D93570780

Key to Figure 4

Page 26
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

100 Bracket T3 D93570790200

LN9415AB−2515
10
105 Angle, mounting 3.1354.6 A92491874200
LN9496A010
110 Bracket T73511 D93570783203
LN9496P480
115 Bracket T73511 D93570783202
LN9496P480
120 Bracket, attach
T351 A92491911200
ing ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
125 Bracket T3511 D93570785200
LN9496A410
130 Bracket T3 D93570788206
ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
135 Bracket T351 D93570788208
ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
140 Bracket T42 A92496355202
ABS5044A010 1.0 (0.039)
145 Bracket T3511 D93570786208
LN9496A590
150 Bracket T3511 D93570786206
LN9496A590
155 Bracket T3 D93570792202
ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
160 Bracket T3511 A92491873200
LN9496A140
165 Mounting T351 D92491009232
ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
170 Bracket T3511 D93570793202
ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
ASSY Dwg.: D92490130, D93570780, D93570781

Key to Figure 4

Pages 27/28
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−2
Feb 01/09
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURE

1. General
This topic contains Allowable Damage data for the Miscellaneous Structure of
the Vertical Stabilizer Spar Box. For the general definition of Allowable
Damage refer to Chapter 51-77-10 - COMPOSITE COMPONENTS - DAMAGE AND REPAIR
CLASSIFICATION.
2. Allowable Damage
Compare the damage in question with the relevant Figures, given in Chapter
55-31-00, Page Block 101, Config. 1 - VERTICAL STABILIZER SPAR BOX.

Printed in Germany
55-31-19
CONFIG-1
Page 101
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURE

1. General
No Allowable Damage information is specified. In case of any damage contact
AIRBUS INDUSTRIE.

Printed in Germany
55-31-19
CONFIG-2
Page 101
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURE

1. General

These repairs are applicable for the Miscellaneous Structure of the Vertical
Stabilizer Spar Box. The general repairs are listed in Table 201, the spe

cific repairs are listed in Table 202 . The appropriate repairs are de

scribed in more detail in the relevant Chapter. The Repair Zones and Allow

able Damage data for these repair procedures is given in Chapter 55−31−00
Page Block 101 Config. 1

NOTE: Refer to each repair to determine the repair applicability.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Category, refer to Chapter 51−11−14.

NOTE: For Damage/Repair Data Recording, refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

2. Safety Precautions

There are risks to you and other persons when you work with composite re

pair materials. To prevent risks, read and obey the warnings given below.
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.

WARNING: OBEY THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS WHEN YOU USE CLEANING AGENTS,
ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND PAINTS. THESE MATERIALS ARE DANGEROUS.
WARNING: WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND FILTER MASK WHEN YOU CUT,
ABRADE OR DRILL COMPOSITE MATERIALS. THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MA

TERIALS CAN GET INTO YOUR LUNGS OR ON TO YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE YOU
INJURY. IMMEDIATELY REMOVE DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.

WHEN YOU WORK WITH CFRP COMPOSITE MATERIALS, IMMEDIATELY REMOVE
DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRIC POWER ON
THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST ONLY USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIRS CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE REFER
TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN IN THE
INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: OBEY THE GIVEN INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE WHICH LEADS TO THE
APPLICABLE INSPECTION PROGRAM DEFINED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR IN

SPECTIONS (SRI) OF THE SRM, IF NECESSARY.

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER FIGURE REMARKS

No General Repairs applicable − − −
General Repairs
Table 201
4. Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

REPAIR CATEGORY FOR SUB− INSPECTION

REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE PARAGRAPH INSTRUCTION
(2) (3) REFERENCE (IIR)
Impact Delamination Repair for the
Trailing Edge Attachment−Flange and the
5.A. 201
Skin Panel Not applicable −
INACTIVE INACTIVE
This repair information is inactive
since revision dated May 01/11
Repair for the Trailing Edge Attach

5.B. 202 B Not applicable 55−31−19−2−001−00
ment−Flange
Impact Delamination Repair for the
Leading Edge Attachment−Flange and the
5.C. 203
Skin Panel Not applicable −
INACTIVE INACTIVE
This repair information is inactive
since revision dated May 01/11
Repair for the Leading Edge Attach

5.D. 204 B Not applicable 55−31−19−2−002−00
ment−Flange
Repair for the Trailing Edge Attach

ment−Flange and Skin Panel 5.E. 205
Not applicable −
This repair information is inactive INACTIVE INACTIVE
since revision dated May 01/11
Repair for the Leading Edge Attach

ment−Flange and the Skin Panel 5.F. 206
Not applicable −
This repair information is inactive INACTIVE INACTIVE
since revision dated May 01/11
Specific Repairs
Table 202

Pages 203/204
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

A. Permanent and Temporary Repair Information

Permanent and temporary repair information can be found in the subsequent

paragraphs of the specific repair procedures:
− permanent repair information is in paragraph (2),
− temporary repair information is in paragraph (3),
− permanent repair after temporary repair information is in paragraph
(4).

NOTE: Some of the specific repair procedures do not have temporary repair
solutions.

5. Miscellaneous Structure − Repairs

A. Impact Delamination Repair for the Trailing Edge Attachment−Flange and

the Skin Panel

NOTE: This repair information is inactive since revision dated May 01/11.
NOTE: This repair procedure is only applicable to the trailing edge at

tachment−flange from rib 7 to rib 11.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

Page 205
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Pre−Cured Section AR Refer to Figure 201

2 Pre−Cured Sheet (Filler)
3 Pre−Cured Sheet (Coupling
Plate)
4 Pre−Cured Sheet (Filler)
5 Pre−Cured Sheet (Filler)
6 Anchor Nut
AR Refer to Figure 201
AR Refer to Figure 201
AR Refer to Figure 201
AR Refer to Figure 201
AR Refer to Figure 201

− Bonding and Adhesive Com
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to

pound (Epoxy Resin)
− Special Material (Microbal

loons)
− Cleaning Agent
− Sealant (Sealant, Polsul

fide Dichromate Cured)
− Structure Paint (Polyure

thane Primer)
− Structure Paint (Polyure

thane Finish Paint)
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 201)
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−003 or 11−004
(Refer to Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 09−013 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−001 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−018 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut out the damaged area of the attachment−flange for the trail

ing edge.
(b) Cut out the slot in the spar attachment−flange.

(c) Get the correct pre−cured CFRP materials necessary to make the
repair pieces (Refer to Figure 201, sheet 1).

(d) Make the pre−cured repair pieces to the correct shapes and di

mensions applicable to the repair locations.

(e) Remove the fasteners that attach the spar to the spar attachment
flange in the repair area.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(f) Pilot−drill at the fastener hole locations necessary to attach
the procured section to the spar−box skin.

Page 206
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(g) Assemble the filler−pieces and the coupling−plate but do not

drill holes for the anchor nuts.
NOTE: If a shim material is necessary, use bonding and adhesive
compound (epoxy resin) (Material No. 08−051) mixed with
special material (microballoons) (Material No. 05−057) to a
maximum shim thickness of 1.5 mm (0.059 in.). Refer to
steps (l) thru (q) for data about the use of epoxy resin
as a shim.

(h) Attach the filler pieces and coupling plate, in the correct re

pair locations, to the spar−box structure with screw clamps.

(i) Put the section repair−piece in its repair location.

(j) Drill the holes from the rear spar through the attachment−flange
and into the section repair piece. Keep these holes at their
initial diameter.

(k) Remove all the repair pieces from the spar−box structure.

(l) Clean the repair area and the repair pieces with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003 or 11−004).

(m) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).

(n) Apply the adhesive paste to the mating surfaces of the repair
pieces and the spar−box structure.

NOTE: The repair adhesive paste is a shim material and is used

to a maximum thickness of 1.5 mm (0.059 in.).

(o) Attach the repair pieces to the spar−box structure with screw
pins.

(p) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003 or 11−004).

(q) Let the adhesive cure (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

5.C.).
(r) After the adhesive has cured, drill all the holes in the repair
area to the necessary diameter for the fasteners (Refer to Figure
201).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(s) Countersink the holes on the outer surface of the spar−box skin
to the correct dimensions for the fasteners.

(t) Install the correct fasteners in the holes of the repair area.
Make sure that you install the fasteners in the spar−box with
the sealant (Material No. 09−013).

Page 207
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(u) Refer to the applicable trailing edge panel to find the correct
anchor nut locations for the attachment flange.
(v) Make a mark at the correct anchor nut locations on the filler
repair piece. Then drill, countersink and assemble the anchor
nuts with the sealant (Material No. 09−013).

(w) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.
(x) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (Material No. 11−003 or 11−004).

(y) Do an inspection of the repair.

(z) Repair the surface protection. Use structure paint (polyurethane

primer) (Material No. 16−001) and then structure paint (polyure

thane finish paint) (Material No. 16−018).

(3) Temporary Repair

There is no temporary repair applicable.

Page 208
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Impact Delamination Repair for the Trailing Edge Attachment−Flange and the
Skin Panel
Figure 201 (sheet 1)
Pages 209/210
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Impact Delamination Repair for the Trailing Edge Attachment−Flange and the
Skin Panel
Figure 201 (sheet 2)
Page 211
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 203.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE (IIR) IS 55−31−19−2−001−00 AND IS DESCRIBED
IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. IN
FORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY
INFORMATION.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND

160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 39020.

B. Repair for the Trailing Edge Attachment−Flange

NOTE: This repair procedure is only applicable to the trailing edge at
tachment−flange from rib 7 to rib 11.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

NOTE: This repair is applicable for the Trailing Edge Attachment−Flange

and is valid as follows:

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 203
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23. ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary
data about all weight variants and their required information for
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 212
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Pre−Cured Sheet (Filler) AR Refer to Figure 202

2 Pre−Cured Sheet (Doubler) AR Refer to Figure 202

− Anchor Nut AR MS 21060−3

− Special Material (Microbal

loons)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com

pound (Epoxy Resin)
− Sealant (Corrosion Inhibit

ing Brush Consistancy)
− Cleaning Agent (Methyl−
Ethyl−Ketone)
− Cleaning Agent (Trichlore

thane Methyl Chloroform)
− Structure Paint (Polyure

thane Anti Corrosion Prim

er)
− Structure Paint (Polyure

thane Finish Paint)
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 202)
AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 09−013 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−003 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−004 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−001 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−018 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut out the damaged area of the attachment−flange.

(b) Get the pre−cured sheet material necessary to make the filler and
doubler (Refer to Figure 202).

(c) Cut the doubler and filler to the correct shape and dimensions
applicable to the repair.

(d) Remove the anchor nuts from the attachment−flange in the repair
area.

(e) Attach the repair pieces in their repair locations with screw
clamps.

(f) Mark−out the hole positions necessary to attach the repair pieces
and the new anchor nuts.
NOTE: Make sure that the anchor nut positions agree with the at

tachment hole positions in the applicable trailing edge
panel.

Page 213
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(g) Pilot−drill at the hole positions necessary to attach the repair

pieces to the attachment−flange.

(h) Remove the repair pieces from the aircraft structure.

(i) Clean the repair pieces and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning
agent (trichlorethane methyl chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).
(j) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051). If necessary, add the special material (microballoons)
(Material No. 05−057) to make an adhesive paste.

(k) Apply the adhesive to the mating surfaces of the repair pieces
and the attachment flange structure.

NOTE: The repair adhesive paste is a shim material and is used

to a maximum thickness of 1.5 mm (0.059 in).

(l) Attach the repair pieces in their repair locations with screw−
pins.
(m) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or
cleaning agent (trichlorethane methyl chloroform) (Material No.
11−004).
(n) Let the adhesive cure for 24 hours at room temperature (RT).

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary for the

repair, use radiant heat equipment (for example an infrared
heat lamp). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.C. for
data.
(o) After the adhesive has cured, drill and countersink the holes in
the repair area to the correct dimensions.

(p) Install the fasteners with the sealant (corrosion inhibiting

brush consistancy) (Material No. 09−013).

(q) Drill the holes for the anchor nuts.

(r) Assemble the anchor nuts to the attachment−flange with the seal

ant (corrosion inhibiting brush consistancy) (Material No.
09−013).

(s) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

(t) Remove the unwanted sealant with the cleaning agent (methyl−
ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent (trichlore

thane methyl chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

Page 214
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(u) Do an inspection of the repair.

(v) Repair the surface protection. Use structure paint (polyurethane

anti corrosion primer) (Material No. 16−001) and then structure
paint (polyurethane finish paint) (Material No. 16−018).

(3) Temporary Repair

There is no temporary repair applicable.

Pages 215/216
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair for the Trailing Edge Attachment−Flange

Figure 202

Pages 217/218
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

C. Impact Delamination Repair for the Leading Edge Attachment−Flange and the
Skin Panel
NOTE: This repair information is inactive since revision dated May 01/11.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Pre−Cured Section AR Refer to Figure 203

2 Pre−Cured Sheet (Coupling AR Refer to Figure 203
(Plate)
3 Pre−Cured Sheet (Filler) AR Refer to Figure 203
4 Pre−Cured Sheet (Filler) AR Refer to Figure 203
5 Pre−Cured Sheet (Filler) AR Refer to Figure 203
6 Aluminum Sheet (Strip) AR Refer to Figure 203
7 Aluminum Sheet (Filler) AR Refer to Figure 203

− Bonding and Adhesive Com
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to

pound (Epoxy Resin)
− Special Material (Microbal

loons)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com

pound (Epoxy Resin and
Hardener Adhesive)
− Glass Fabric (dry)
− Anchor Nut
− Cleaning Agent
− Sealant (Sealant, Polsul

fide Dichromate Cured)
− Structure Paint (Polyure

thane Primer)
− Structure Paint (Polyure

thane Finish Paint)
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 203)
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 08−010A (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para

graph 6.B.(8)
AR MS 21060−3
AR Material No. 11−003 or 11−004
(Refer to Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 09−013 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−001 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−018 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut out the damaged area of the attachment−flange for the leading
edge.
(b) Cut out the slot in the spar attachment−flange and remove the
stiffener.

Page 219
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(c) Get the correct aluminum and pre−cured CFRP materials necessary
to make the repair pieces (Refer to Figure 203, sheet 2).
(d) Make the repair pieces to the correct shapes and dimensions.

(e) Attach the layer of glass fabric (dry), soaked with bonding and
adhesive compound (epoxy resin and hardener adhesive) (Material
No. 08−010A), to the coupling−plate.

NOTE: The glass fabric layer is to isolate the CFRP material from
the aluminum lightning−conductor strip.

(f) Let the adhesive cure for 24 hours at room temperature (RT).

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A.(5).
(g) Remove the anchor nuts and the fasteners which are installed in
the front spar and the attachment−flange in the repair area.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(h) Mark−out and pilot−drill the holes in the spar−box skin which are
necessary to attach the repair pieces. Start at the outer hole
locations and then work to the inner hole locations. After you
drill each hole, put a screw pin into it to clamp the delami

nated layers together. This will help to stop more delamination
damage.

(i) Remove the screw pins and put the coupling plate and the section
repair piece in their repair locations.

(j) Pilot−drill the holes from the spar−box skin, through the cou

pling plate and the section repair piece.

(k) Attach the repair pieces to the spar−box skin with screw pins.
(l) Drill the holes from the front spar through the attachment−flange
and into the section repair piece. Keep these holes at their
initial diameter.

(m) Attach the section repair piece to the front spar and the at

tachment flange with screw−pins.
(n) Attach the pre−cured (CFRP) filler pieces and the aluminum light

ning−conductor pieces in their repair locations with screw−clamps.

(o) Mark−out and pilot−drill the attachment holes for the filler and
the lightning conductor pieces.
NOTE: Do not drill the anchor nut holes with this step.

(p) Remove all of the repair pieces from the spar box structure.

Page 220
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(q) Clean the repair pieces and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003 or 11−004).
(r) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051), if necessary add special material (microballoons) (Mate

rial No. 05−057) to make an adhesive paste.

(s) Apply the adhesive paste to the mating surfaces of the pre−cured
CFRP repair pieces and the spar box structure.
NOTE: The repair adhesive paste is a shim material and is used
to a maximum thickness of 1.5 mm (0.059 in.).

(t) Attach the repair pieces to the spar box structure with screw
pins.
(u) Remove the unwanted adhesive with the cleaning agent (Material
No. 11−003 or 11−004).

(v) Let the adhesive cure for 24 hours at room temperature and then
remove the screw−pins.

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.C.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(w) Drill and countersink where necessary all of the holes to their
final dimensions.
(x) Install the fasteners with the sealant (Material No. 09−013).

NOTE: Do not install the fasteners which give the electrical bond
with the sealant.

(y) Mark−out and drill all of the holes necessary to install the an

chor nuts.
NOTE: Refer to the applicable leading−edge panel to find the cor

rect anchor nut locations for the filler repair piece.

(z) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.
(aa)Install the anchor nut with the sealant (Material No. 09−013).

(ab)Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (Material No. 11−003 or 11−004).

(ac)Do an inspection of the repair.

(ad)Repair the surface protection. Use structure paint (polyurethane
primer) (Material No. 16−001) and then structure paint (polyure

thane finish paint) (Material No. 16−018).

Page 221
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(3) Temporary Repair

There is no temporary repair applicable.

Page 222
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Impact Delamination Repair for the Leading Edge Attachment−Flange and the
Skin Panel
Figure 203 (sheet 1)
Pages 223/224
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Impact Delamination Repair for the Leading Edge Attachment−Flange and the
Skin Panel
Figure 203 (sheet 2)
Pages 225/226
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 204.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR MUST BE INSPECTED AT DEFINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION
INSTRUCTION REFERENCE (IIR) IS 55−31−19−2−002−00 AND IS DESCRIBED
IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPECTIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. IN
FORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY
INFORMATION.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND

160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 39020.

D. Repair for the Leading Edge Attachment−Flange

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

NOTE: This repair is applicable for the Leading Edge Attachment−Flange

and is valid as follows:

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 204
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23. ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary
data about all weight variants and their required information for
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 227
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Aluminum Sheet (Strip) AR Refer to Figure 204

2 Pre−Cured Sheet (Filler) AR Refer to Figure 204
3 Aluminum Sheet (Filler) AR Refer to Figure 204

− Anchor Nut AR MS 21060−3

− Glass Fabric (dry)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com

pound (Epoxy Resin and
Hardener Adhesive)
− Sealant (Corrosion Inhibit

ing Brush Consistancy)
− Cleaning Agent (Methyl−
Ethyl−Ketone)
− Cleaning Agent (Trichlore

thane Methyl Chloroform)
− Structure Paint (Polyure

thane Anti Corrosion Prim

er)
− Structure Paint (Polyure

thane Finish Paint)
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 204)
AR Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para

graph 6.B.(8)
AR Material No. 08−010A (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 09−013 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−003 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−004 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−001 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−018 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut out the damaged area of the attachment flange.

(b) Get the correct aluminum and pre−cured CFRP materials necessary
to make the repair pieces (Refer to Figure 204).

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shapes and dimensions.

(d) Attach the layer of glass fabric, soaked with the bonding and
adhesive compound (epoxy resin and hardener adhesive) (Material
No. 08−010A), to the inner face of the filler repair piece.

NOTE: The glass fabric layer is to isolate the CFRP material from
the aluminum lightning−conductor strip.

(e) Let the adhesive cure for 24 hours at room temperature (RT).
NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A.(5).

Page 228
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Remove the anchor nuts installed on the leading edge attachment

flange in the repair area.
(g) Attach the repair pieces in their repair locations with screw
clamps.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(h) Mark−out, drill and countersink the holes necessary to attach the
repair pieces and the anchor nuts to the leading edge structure.
NOTE: Make sure that the anchor nut positions agree with the at

tachment hole positions in the applicable leading edge.

(i) Remove the repair pieces from the structure.

(j) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

(k) Clean the repair pieces with the cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ke

tone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent (trichlorethane
methyl chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

(l) Assemble the repair pieces in their repair locations, install the
fasteners and anchor nuts with sealant (corrosion inhibiting
brush consistency) (Material No. 09−013).

NOTE: Do not install the fasteners which give the electrical bond
with the sealant.
(m) Fill the gap between the filler piece and the attachment flange
with the sealant (corrosion inhibiting brush consistancy) (Materi

al No. 09−013).

(n) Remove the unwanted adhesive from the repair area with the
cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or
cleaning agent (trichlorethane methyl chloroform) (Material No.
11−004).

(o) Do an inspection of the repair.

(p) Repair the surface protection. Use structure paint (polyurethane

primer) (Material No. 16−001) and then structure paint (polyure

thane finish paint) (Material No. 16−018).

(3) Temporary Repair

There is no temporary repair applicable.

Pages 229/230
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair for the Leading Edge Attachment−Flange

Figure 204

Pages 231/232
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

E. Repair for the Trailing Edge Attachment−Flange and the Skin Panel

NOTE: This repair information is inactive since revision dated May 01/11.
NOTE: This repair procedure is only applicable to the trailing edge at

tachment−flange from rib 7 to rib 11.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Pre−Cured Section AR Refer to Figure 205
2 Pre−Cured Sheet (Doubler) AR Refer to Figure 205
3 Pre−Cured Sheet (Filler) AR Refer to Figure 205
4 Pre−Cured Sheet (Filler) AR Refer to Figure 205

− Bonding and Adhesive Com
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to

pound (Epoxy Resin)
− Special Material (Microbal

loons)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com

pound (Epoxy Resin and
Hardener Adhesive)
− Glass Fabric (dry)
− Anchor Nut
− Cleaning Agent
− Sealant (Sealant, Polsul

fide Dichromate Cured)
− Structure Paint (Polyure

thane Primer)
− Structure Paint (Polyure

thane Finish Paint)
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 205)
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 08−010A (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para

graph 6.B.(8)
AR MS 21060−3
AR Material No. 11−003 or 11−004
(Refer to Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 09−013 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−001 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−018 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut out the damaged trailing edge and skin panel structure.

(b) Get the correct pre−cured materials necessary to make the repair
(Refer to Figure 205, sheet 1).

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shapes and dimensions.

Page 233
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(d) Remove the fasteners which attach the spar to the spar attachment
flange in the repair area.
(e) Put the repair pieces in their repair locations and mark−out the
new hole positions necessary to attach the repair pieces.

(f) Pilot−drill at the new hole positions.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(g) Drill the holes from the rear−spar through the attachment−flange
and into the section repair piece. Keep these holes at their
initial diameter.

(h) Remove all of the repair pieces from the spar−box structure.

(i) Clean the repair pieces and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003 or 11−004).

(j) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051), if necessary add special material (microballons) (Materi

al No. 05−057) to make an adhesive paste.
(k) Apply the adhesive paste to the mating surfaces of the pre−cured
CFRP repair pieces and the spar box structure.

NOTE: The repair adhesive paste is a shim material and is used

to a maximum thickness of 1.5 mm (0.059 in.).

(l) Attach the repair pieces in their repair locations with screw
pins.

(m) Let the adhesive cure for 24 hours at room temperature and then
remove the screw pins.

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.C.
(n) Drill and countersink where necessary all of the holes to their
final dimensions.

(o) Install the fasteners with the sealant (Material No. 09−013).

(p) Mark−out and drill all of the holes necessary to install the an

chor nuts.

NOTE: Refer to the applicable trailing−edge panel to find the

correct anchor nut locations for the filler repair piece.

(q) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.
(r) Install the anchor nuts with the sealant (Material No. 09−013).

Page 234
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(s) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (Material No. 11−003 or 11−004).
(t) Do an inspection of the repair.

(u) Repair the surface protection. Use structure paint (polyurethane

primer) (Material No. 16−001) and then structure paint (polyure

thane finish paint) (Material No. 16−018).

(3) Temporary Repair

There is no temporary repair applicable.

Pages 235/236
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair for the Trailing Edge Attachment−Flange and the Skin Panel
Figure 205 (sheet 1)

Pages 237/238
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair for the Trailing Edge Attachment−Flange and the Skin Panel
Figure 205 (sheet 2)

Page 239
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

F. Repair for the Leading Edge Attachment Flange and the Skin Panel

NOTE: This repair information is inactive since revision dated May 01/11.
NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Pre−Cured Section AR Refer to Figure 206

2 Pre−Cured Sheet (Filler) AR Refer to Figure 206
3 Pre−Cured Sheet (Doubler) AR Refer to Figure 206
4 Pre−Cured Sheet (Filler AR Refer to Figure 206
5 Aluminum Sheet (Filler) AR Refer to Figure 206
6 Aluminum Conductor Repair AR Refer to Figure 206
Strip

− Bonding and Adhesive Com
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to

pound (Epoxy Resin)
− Special Material (Microbal

loons)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com

pound (Epoxy Resin and
Hardener Adhesive)
− Glass Fabric (dry)
− Anchor Nut
− Cleaning Agent
− Sealant (Sealant, Polsul

fide Dichromate Cured)
− Structure Paint (Polyure

thane Primer)
− Structure Paint (Polyure

thane Finish Paint)
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 206)
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 08−010A (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para

graph 6.B.(8)
AR MS 21060−3
AR Material No. 11−003 or 11−004
(Refer to Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 09−013 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−001 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−018 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Cut out the damaged leading edge and skin panel structure. Then
cut back the stringer and remove the stiffener.
(b) Get the correct aluminum and pre−cured CFRP materials necessary
to make the repair pieces (Refer to Figure 206, sheet 2).

(c) Make the repair pieces to the correct shapes and dimensions.

Page 240
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(d) Attach the layer of glass fabric, soaked with the bonding and
adhesive compound (epoxy resin and hardener adhesive) (Material
No. 08−010A), to the inner surface of the attachment−flange re

pair piece.

NOTE: The glass fabric layer is to isolate the CFRP material from
the aluminum lightning−conductor strip.

(e) Let the adhesive cure for 24 hours at room temperature (RT).
NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A.(5).

(f) Remove the anchor nuts and the fasteners installed in the at

tachment−flange and the front spar of the repair area.
(g) Put the repair pieces in their repair locations and mark−out the
new hole positions necessary to attach the repair pieces.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(h) Pilot−drill at the new hole positions.

(i) Drill the holes from the front−spar, through the attachment−
flange and into the section repair piece. Keep these holes at
their initial diameter.

(j) Remove all of the repair pieces from the spar−box structure.

(k) Clean the repair pieces and the repair area with the cleaning
agent (Material No. 11−003 or 11−004).

(l) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) if necessary add special material (microballoons) (Materi

al No. 05−057) to make an adhesive paste.

(m) Apply the adhesive paste to the mating surfaces of the CFRP re

pair pieces and the spar box structure.

NOTE: The repair adhesive paste is a shim material and is used

to a maximum thickness of 1.5 mm (0.059 in.).

(n) Attach the repair pieces in their repair locations with screw
pins.

(o) Let the adhesive cure for 24 hours at room temperature and then
remove the screw pins.

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.C.
(p) Drill and countersink where necessary all of the holes to their
final dimensions.

(q) Install the fasteners with the sealant (Material No. 09−013).

Page 241
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(r) Mark−out and drill all of the holes necessary to install the an

chor nuts.

NOTE: Refer to the applicable leading−edge panel to find the cor

rect anchor nut locations for the filler repair piece.

(s) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.
(t) Install the anchor nuts with the sealant (Material No. 09−013).

(u) Remove the unwanted sealant from the repair area with the clean

ing agent (Material No. 11−003 or 11−004).

(v) Do an inspection of the repair.

(w) Repair the surface protection. Use structure paint (polyurethane
primer) (Material No. 16−001) and then structure paint (polyure

thane finish paint) (Material No. 16−018).

(3) Temporary Repair

There is no temporary repair applicable.

Page 242
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair for the Leading Edge Attachment−Flange and the Skin Panel
Figure 206 (sheet 1)

Pages 243/244
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair for the Leading Edge Attachment−Flange and the Skin Panel
Figure 206 (sheet 2)

Pages 245/246
Printed in Germany
55−31−19
CONFIG−1
May 01/11
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURE

1. General
No General and/or Specific Repairs are specified. In case of any damage
contact AIRBUS INDUSTRIE.

Printed in Germany
55-31-19
CONFIG-2
Page 201
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

VERTICAL STABILIZER LEADING EDGE

1. Structural Arrangement

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Structural Arrangement Figure 1

1 Leading Edge − Vertical Stabilizer 55−32−11
− Miscellaneous Structure 55−32−19
(not illustrated)
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−30−00 Page Block 001, where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−32−00 NovPage 1
01/06
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structural Arrangement
Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55-32-00 FebPage 2
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

LEADING EDGE − VERTICAL STABILIZER

1. Identification Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Leading Edges without Steel Cover Figure 1 (sheet 1)

Before Modifications 25247K3657,
28484K6104B and SB 55−1016
− Leading Edge 1 − Ply Lay−up Figure 1 (sheet 2 thru 4)
− Leading Edge 2 − Ply Lay−up Figure 1 (sheet 5 thru 7)
− Leading Edge 3 − Ply Lay−up Figure 1 (sheet 8 thru 10)

− Leading Edges with Steel Cover Figure 2 (sheet 1)

After Modifications 25247K3657,
28484K6104B, SB 55−1016 and SB 55−1029
− Leading Edge 1 − Ply Lay−up Figure 2 (sheet 2 thru 4)
− Leading Edge 2 − Ply Lay−up Figure 2 (sheet 5 thru 7)
− Leading Edge 3 − Ply Lay−up Figure 2 (sheet 8 thru 10)

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−30−00, Page Block 001, where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−32−11 NovPage 1
01/07
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Leading Edges without Steel Cover

Before Modifications 25247K3657, 28484K6104B and SB 55−1016
Figure 1 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−32−11 NovPage 2
01/07
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Leading Edge 1 - Ply Lay-up

Figure 1 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-32-11 Pages 3/4
May 01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Leading Edge 1 - Ply Lay-up

Figure 1 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55-32-11 Pages 5/6
May 01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Leading Edge 1 - Ply Lay-up

Figure 1 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55-32-11 Pages 7/8
May 01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Leading Edge 2 - Ply Lay-up

Figure 1 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55-32-11 Pages 9/10
May 01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Leading Edge 2 - Ply Lay-up

Figure 1 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55-32-11 Pages 11/12
May 01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Leading Edge 2 - Ply Lay-up

Figure 1 (sheet 7)

Printed in Germany
55-32-11 Pages 13/14
May 01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Leading Edge 3 - Ply Lay-up

Figure 1 (sheet 8)

Printed in Germany
55-32-11 Pages 15/16
May 01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Leading Edge 3 - Ply Lay-up

Figure 1 (sheet 9)

Printed in Germany
55-32-11 Pages 17/18
May 01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Leading Edge 3 - Ply Lay-up

Figure 1 (sheet 10)

Printed in Germany
55-32-11 Pages 19/20
May 01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Edge, leading 1 Composite D55370025000 PB101

assy PB201
1A Edge, leading 1 Composite D55370025002 01 PB101 A20005K0003B
assy PB201
1B Edge, leading 1 Composite D55370025004 02 PB101 A20805K0840
assy PB201
1C Edge, leading 1 Composite D55370025006 PB101 A20805K0840A
assy PB201
1D Edge, leading 1 Composite D55370025008 01 PB101 A21286K2331G
assy PB201
1E Edge, leading 1 Composite D55370025010 01 PB101 A21733K1872T
assy PB201 A32337K7963G
5 Edge, leading 2 Composite D55370026000 PB101
assy PB201
5A Edge, leading 2 Composite D55370026002 01 PB101 A20005K0003B
assy PB201
5B Edge, leading 2 Composite D55370026004 02 PB101 A20805K0840
assy PB201
5C Edge, leading 2 Composite D55370026006 PB101 A20805K0840A
assy PB201
5D Edge, leading 2 Composite D55370026008 01 PB101 A21286K2331G
assy PB201
5E Edge, leading 2 Composite D55370026010 01 PB101 A21733K1872T
assy PB201 A32337K7963G
10 Edge, leading 3 Composite D55370027000 PB101
assy PB201
10A Edge, leading 3 Composite D55370027002 01 PB101 A20005K0003B
assy PB201
10B Edge, leading 3 Composite D55370027004 02 PB101 A20805K0840
assy PB201
10C Edge, leading 3 Composite D55370027006 PB101 A20805K0840A
assy PB201
10D Edge, leading 3 Composite D55370027008 01 PB101 A21286K2331G
assy PB201
10E Edge, leading 3 Composite D55370027010 01 PB101 A21733K1872T
assy PB201 A32337K7963B
10F Edge, leading 3 Composite D55370027012 01 PB101 A38552K11749B
assy PB201
ASSY Dwg.: D55370010, D55370211

Key to Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−32−11 AugPage01/1021
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Leading Edges with Steel Cover

After Modifications 25247K3657, 28484K6104B, SB 55−1016 and SB 55−1029
Figure 2 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−32−11 NovPage01/0722
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Leading Edge 1 - Ply Lay-up

Figure 2 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-32-11 Pages 23/24
May 01/05
STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Leading
Edge
1
−
Ply
Lay−up
Figure
2
(sheet
3)

55−32−11 Pages
25/26
Printed in Germany
Feb
01/06
STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Leading
Edge
1
−
Ply
Lay−up
Figure
2
(sheet
4)

55−32−11 Pages
27/28
Printed in Germany
Feb
01/06
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Leading Edge 2 - Ply Lay-up

Figure 2 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55-32-11 Pages 29/30
May 01/05
STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Leading
Edge
2
−
Ply
Lay−up
Figure
2
(sheet
6)

55−32−11 Pages
31/32
Printed in Germany
Feb
01/06
STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Leading
Edge
2
−
Ply
Lay−up
Figure
2
(sheet
7)

55−32−11 Pages
33/34
Printed in Germany
Feb
01/06
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Leading Edge 3 - Ply Lay-up

Figure 2 (sheet 8)

Printed in Germany
55-32-11 Pages 35/36
May 01/05
STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Leading
Edge
3
−
Ply
Lay−up
Figure
2
(sheet
9)

55−32−11 Pages
37/38
Printed in Germany
Feb
01/06
STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Leading
Edge
3
−
Ply
Lay−up
Figure
2
(sheet
10)

55−32−11 Pages
39/40
Printed in Germany
Feb
01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Edge, leading 1 Composite D55370025010 PB101 A25247K3657

assy PB201
1A Edge, leading 1 Composite D55370225000 PB101 A28484K6104R
assy PB201
1B Edge, leading 1 Composite D55370225002 A28484K6104R
assy
5 Cover, steel 1.4544.9 D55370107200 PB101 A25247K3657
LN9456G02 PB201
5A Cover, steel 1.4544.9 D55370107206 PB101 ASB55−1016
LN9456G02 PB201
5B Cover, steel 1.4544.9 D55370115202 PB101 A28484K6104T
DIN65389AG0−5 PB201 ASB55−1029
10 Edge, leading 2 Composite D55370026010 PB101 A25247K3657
assy PB201
10A Edge, leading 2 Composite D55370226000 PB101 A28484K6104R
assy PB201
15 Cover, steel 1.4544.9 D55370107202 PB101 A25247K3657
LN9456G02 PB201
15A Cover, steel 1.4544.9 D55370107208 PB101 ASB55−1016
LN9456G02 PB201
15B Cover, steel 1.4544.9 D55370115204 PB101 A28484K6104T
DIN65389AG0−5 PB201 ASB55−1029
20 Edge, leading 3 Composite D55370027010 PB101 A25247K3657
assy PB201
20A Edge, leading 3 Composite D55370227000 PB101 A28484K6104E
assy PB201
20B Edge, leading 3 Composite D55370227002 PB101 A28484K6104E
assy PB201
20C Edge, leading 3 Composite D55370227002 A38520K11784J
assy
25 Cover, steel 1.4544.9 D55370107204 PB101 A25247K3657
LN9456G02 PB201
25A Cover, steel 1.4544.9 D55370107210 PB101 ASB55−1016
LN9456G02 PB201
25B Cover, steel 1.4544.9 D55370115206 PB101 A28484K6104T
DIN65389AG0−5 PB201 ASB55−1029
ASSY Dwg.: D55370104, D55370105, D55370106, D55370109, D55370116, D55370225,
D55370226, D55370227

Key to Figure 2

Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Pages 41/42
May 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

LEADING EDGE − VERTICAL STABILIZER

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 101.

CAUTION: FOR ALL ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE, REFER
TO PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION 160500,

MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS ALLOWABLE DAMAGE IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001

AND 160500.
CAUTION: THIS ALLOWABLE DAMAGE IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: THIS ALLOWABLE DAMAGE IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 39020.

1. General

This topic contains the allowable damage, negligible damage and related data
for the Leading Edge of the vertical stabilizer. This data is necessary for
you to find the correct repair procedure.

NOTE: For definition of allowable damage, refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For a detailed definition of repair categories, refer to Chapter

51−11−14.
NOTE: For damage/repair data recording, refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

NOTE: For definition of negligible damage, refer to Chapter 51−73−11.

This allowable damage, negligible damage and related data are for the lead
ing edge of the vertical stabilizer and are effective as follows:

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 101
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUCTION
of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data about all
weight variants and their required information for allowable damage
and repair applicability.

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

2. Damage Evaluation

Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−10 for data.

3. Delamination Damage

The two types of delamination damage which can occur to the composite
structure are as follows:
A. Impact Delamination

This is when the structure is hit by an object and separation is usual

ly caused between many of the plies.

B. Non−Impact Delamination

This is when separation occurs between two plies for a reason other than
when it is hit by an object.

4. The Distance Between Damaged Areas

There is a minimum permitted distance between areas of delamination and be

tween repair areas. The dimension for this distance is given in the appli
cable allowable damage and repair limits figure. If you have less than the
permitted distance between delaminated or repair areas, work on them to
gether as one large damaged area. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Para. 3 to
find out how to measure the distances between delaminated or repair areas.

5. Repair Zones
The Leading Edge of the vertical stabilizer structure is divided into re
pair zones. These repair zones show the zones of different structural im
portance of the component. When you do a damage evaluation (Refer to Para
graph 2. ), you must refer to the repair zone data in Figure 101.

6. Allowable Damage
Allowable damage is damage that does not affect the necessary strength or
function of a component. You do not have to repair this type of damage. If
this damage has rough or sharp edges, smooth these out with the correct
abrasive cloth. Replace the surface paint, if necessary. The allowable dam
age data for the leading edge is listed in Figure 102 thru 104.
7. Negligible Damage

Negligible damage is defined as very small levels of damage that are always
allowable, whenever allowable damage limits are specified or not (area shown
then as excluded area) in the SRM.

8. Repair Limits
The repair limits data gives the time limits in which to make temporary
and permanent repairs. These time limits are given in flight cycles (FC).
The repair limits also tell if it is necessary to make a room temperature

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(RT) or hot−bond repair. To find the above given repair limits data appli
cable to a damaged area, you must know the subsequent data:
− the repair zone applicable to the damaged area,
− the area length or depth (as applicable) of the damage to the structure,
− the type of structure (for example, monolithic or honeycomb),
− the type of damage (for example, abrasion, delamination, scratch).

The repair limits data for the leading edges are listed in Figure 102 thru
104 and Table 102 thru 104.

Printed in Germany
55−32−11 PagesFeb103/104
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair Zones Leading Edges 1, 2, 3

Figure 101

Printed in Germany
55−32−11 PagesFeb105/106
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable and Repairable Damage Size for Surface Damage at Leading Edges
Zone A
Figure 102

Allowable and Repairable Damage Size for Surface Damage at Leading Edges
Zones B and C
Figure 103

Page 107
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable and Repairable Damage Size for Erosion Damage at Leading Edges in
Zone C
Figure 104

Page 108
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

REPAIR MAXIMUM NUMBER OF

ZONE TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE LIMIT REPAIR ACTION TIME LIMIT REPAIR REFERENCE
CATEGORY ALLOWABLE DAMAGE
Abrasion, Scratches,
No Limit A No Action _ _ No Limit
Wrinkles, Debonding
Depth < 2 mm (0.079 in) A No Action _ − No Limit
1. Remove steel cover (refer to Chapter
55−32−11, Page Block 201 Paragraph 5.A.)
D 2. Inspect GFRP structure (refer to Chapter
51−77−10)
Dents
Depth > 2 mm (0.079 in) A Permanent Immediately 3. Refer to Table 103 for allowable damage 0
and repair limits of the GFRP structure
4. Install new steel cover (refer to Chap
ter 55−32−11 Page Block 201, Paragraph
5.C.)
1. Remove steel cover (refer to Chapter
55−32−11, Page Block 201 Paragraph 5.A.)
2. Inspect GFRP structure (refer to Chapter
51−77−10)
D, E Cracks Any Size A Permanent Immediately 3. Refer to Table 103 for allowable damage 0
and repair limits of the GFRP structure
4. Install new steel cover (refer to Chap
ter 55−32−11 Page Block 201, Paragraph
5.C.)
Allowable and Repairable Damage Limits for Surface Damage at the Leading
Edges − with Steel Cover in Zone D and E
Table 102

Page 109
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

REPAIR MAXIMUM NUMBER OF

ZONE TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE LIMIT REPAIR ACTION TIME LIMIT REPAIR REFERENCE
CATEGORY ALLOWABLE DAMAGE
Depth < 1 mm (0.039 in) A No Action − − No Limit
Remove steel cover (refer to Chapter 1 at RH side
C Temporary Immediately
55−32−11, Page Block 201 Paragraph 5.A.) 1 at LH side

1. Remove steel cover (refer to Chapter

55−32−11, Page Block 201 Paragraph 5.A.)
Dents
Depth > 1 mm (0.039 in) 2. Inspect GFRP structure (refer to Chapter
Within next 600 51−77−10) 1 at RH side
A Permanent
Flight Cycles (FC) 3. Refer to Table 103 for allowable damage 1 at LH side
and repair limits of the GFRP structure
4. Install new steel cover (refer to Chap
ter 55−32−11 Page Block 201, Paragraph
5.C.)
Length < 50 mm (1.969
A No Action − − No Limit
in)
Remove steel cover (refer to Chapter 1 at RH side
C Temporary Immediately
55−32−11, Page Block 201 Paragraph 5.A.) 1 at LH side
E
1. Remove steel cover (refer to Chapter
55−32−11, Page Block 201 Paragraph 5.A.)
Wrinkles, Debonding 2. Inspect GFRP structure (refer to Chapter
Length > 50 mm (1.969
in) 51−77−10)
Within next 600 1 at RH side
A Permanent
Flight Cycles (FC) 3. Refer to Table 103 for allowable damage 1 at LH side
and repair limits of the GFRP structure
4. Install new steel cover (refer to Chap
ter 55−32−11 Page Block 201, Paragraph
5.C.)
Depth < 0.075 mm (0.003
A No Action − − No Limit
in)
1. Sand the affected area smoothly with a
sand paper grade 180 and must not exceed
Depth > 0.075 mm (0.003 grade 200, depending upon the scratch depth
Scratches
in) and < 0.2 mm (0.008
in) A Permanent Immediately 2. Make sure that the depth of the scratch No Limit
is not increased
3. Polish reworked area with sand paper
grade 400 and scotch−brite
Allowable and Repairable Damage Limits for Surface Damage at the Leading
Edges − with Steel Cover in Zone D and E
Table 102

Page 110
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN MAXIMUM

DAMAGE REPAIR INSPECTION
TYPE OF DAMAGE TYPE OF REPAIR TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR REFERENCE DAMAGE REPAIRS NUMBER OF
SIZE CATEGORY REQUIRED
X = mm (in) Y = mm (in) DAMAGE
WITHIN NEXT 3500 FC
<1> A PERMANENT Chapter 51−77−12, Paragraph 3.A. NO 200 (7.874) − UNLIMITED
(FH not relevant)
C TEMPORARY IMMEDIATELY Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.I. NO − 75 (2.953) 5
SURFACE DAMAGE <2> WITHIN NEXT 3500 FC
A PERMANENT Chapter 55−32−11, Paragraph 5.D. NO − 75 (2.953) 5
IN ZONE A (FH not relevant)
REFER TO FIGURE C TEMPORARY IMMEDIATELY Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.I. NO − 75 (2.953) 5
102 <3> WITHIN NEXT 600 FC
A PERMANENT Chapter 55−32−11, Paragraph 5.D. NO − 75 (2.953) 5
(FH not relevant)
<4> A PERMANENT IMMEDIATELY Chapter 55−32−11, Paragraph 5.E. NO − 75 (2.953) 5
<5> PERMANENT IMMEDIATELY CONTACT AIRBUS NO
WITHIN NEXT 3500 FC
<1> A PERMANENT Chapter 51−77−12, Paragraph 3.A. NO 200 (7.874) − UNLIMITED
(FH not relevant)
SURFACE DAMAGE C TEMPORARY IMMEDIATELY Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.I. NO − 75 (2.953) 3
IN ZONE B AND C
<3> WITHIN NEXT 600 FC
REFER TO FIGURE A PERMANENT Chapter 55−32−11, Paragraph 5.D. NO − 75 (2.953) 3
103 (FH not relevant)
<4> A PERMANENT IMMEDIATELY Chapter 55−32−11, Paragraph 5.E. NO − 75 (2.953) 3
<5> PERMANENT IMMEDIATELY CONTACT AIRBUS NO
WITHIN NEXT 3500 FC
<6> A PERMANENT Chapter 51−77−12, Paragraph 3.B. NO 200 (7.874) − UNLIMITED
(FH not relevant)
EROSION DAMAGE C TEMPORARY IMMEDIATELY Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.I. NO − 75 (2.953) 3
IN ZONE C
<7> WITHIN NEXT 600 FC
REFER TO FIGURE A PERMANENT Chapter 55−32−11, Paragraph 5.F. NO − 75 (2.953) 3
104 (FH not relevant)
<8> A PERMANENT IMMEDIATELY Chapter 55−32−11, Paragraph 5.G. NO − 75 (2.953) 3
<5> PERMANENT IMMEDIATELY CONTACT AIRBUS NO
Allowable and Repairable Damage Limits for Surface Damage at the Leading
Edges
Table 103

Page 111
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN MAXIMUM

DAMAGE SIZE REPAIR TYPE OF INSPECTION
TYPE OF DAMAGE TIME LIMIT REPAIR REFERENCE DAMAGE "X" REPAIRS "Y" NUMBER OF
CATEGORY REPAIR REQUIRED
mm  in  mm in mm in DAMAGE
AMAG
<6000 <9.300 A No Action 200 7.874 − − 5
>6000 >9.300
Debonding Damage
and and A Permanent within next 600 FC Chapter 55−32−11, Paragraph 5.D. NO − − 100 3.937 5
in Zone A
<22500 <34.875
>22500 >34.875 A Permanent immediately Chapter 55−32−11, Paragraph 5.E. NO − − 100 3.937 5
<2500 <3.875 A no action 200 7.874 − − 3
>2500 >3.875 within next 600 FC
Debonding Damage
and and A Permanent Chapter 55−32−11, Paragraph 5.D. NO − − 100 3.937 3
in Zone B or C (FH not relevant)
<6000 <9.300
>6000 >9.300 A Permanent immediately Chapter 55−32−11, Paragraph 5.E. NO − − 100 3.937 3
C Temporary immediately Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.I.
<5000 <7.750 within next 3500 FC NO 200 7.874 − − 5
A Permanent Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.H.
(FH not relevant)
>5000 >7.750 C Temporary immediately Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.I.
Delamination and
Perforating Damage and and within next 600 FC NO − − 100 3.937 5
<22500 <34.875 A Permanent Chapter 55−32−11, Paragraph 5.H.
in Zone A (FH not relevant)
>22500 >34.875
and and A Permanent immediately Chapter 55−32−11, Paragraph 5.I. NO − − 100 3.937 5
<50000 <77.500
>50000 >77.500 − Permanent immediately CONTACT AIRBUS
C Temporary immediately Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.I.
<2500 <3.875 within next 3500 FC NO 200 7.874 − − 3
A Permanent Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.H.
(FH not relevant)
>2500 >3.875 C Temporary immediately Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.I.
Delamination and
Perforating Damage and and within next 600 FC NO − − 100 3.937 3
<6000 <9.300 A Permanent Chapter 55−32−11, Paragraph 5.J.
in Zone B or C (FH not relevant)
>6000 >9.300
and and A Permanent immediately Chapter 55−32−11, Paragraph 5.K. NO − − 100 3.937 3
<30000 <46.500
>30000 >46.500 − Permanent immediately CONTACT AIRBUS
Allowable and Repairable Damage Limits for Delamination and Perforating Damage
at the Leading Edges in all Zones
Table 104

Page 112
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN MAXIMUM

DAMAGE SIZE REPAIR TYPE OF INSPECTION
TYPE OF DAMAGE TIME LIMIT REPAIR REFERENCE DAMAGE "X" REPAIRS "Y" NUMBER OF
CATEGORY REPAIR REQUIRED
mm  in  mm in mm in DAMAGE

Length C Temporary immediately Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.I.

Length
Cracks parallel to <4.921 within next 100FH NO − − 100 3.937 4
<125 mm A Permanent Chapter 55−32−11, Paragraph 5.L.
leading edge rib in (FC not relevant)
joint in Zone B or
Length
C Length
>4.921 A Permanent immediately Chapter 55−32−11, Paragraph 5.L. NO − − 100 3.937 4
>125 mm
in
Allowable and Repairable Damage Limits for Delamination and Perforating Damage
at the Leading Edges in all Zones
Table 104

Printed in Germany
55−32−11 PagesFeb113/114
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

LEADING EDGE − VERTICAL STABILIZER

1. General

These repairs are applicable for the Leading Edges of the Vertical Stabi

lizer. The general repairs are listed in Table 201, the specific repairs
are listed in Table 202. The appropriate repairs are described in more de

tail in the relevant Chapter or Paragraph.

NOTE: Refer to each repair to determine the repair applicability.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories refer to Chapter

51−11−14.
NOTE: For Damage/Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

2. Safety Precautions

There are risks to you and other persons when you work with composite re

pair materials. To prevent risks, read and obey the warnings given below.
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL
MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.

WARNING: OBEY THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS WHEN YOU USE CLEANING AGENTS,
ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND PAINTS. THESE MATERIALS ARE DANGEROUS.

WARNING: WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND FILTER MASK WHEN YOU CUT,
ABRADE OR DRILL COMPOSITE MATERIALS. THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MA

TERIALS CAN GET INTO YOUR LUNGS OR ONTO YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE YOU
INJURY. IMMEDIATELY REMOVE DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.

WHEN YOU WORK WITH CFRP COMPOSITE MATERIALS, IMMEDIATELY REMOVE
DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.
WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRIC POWER ON
THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST ONLY USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR APPLICABILITY PER AIRCRAFT TYPE, WEIGHT VARIANT
AND REPAIR AREA GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT REPAIR.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER FIGURE REMARKS

No General Repairs Applicable − − −
Repair of Delamination or Impact De
55−30−00 201 −
lamination which does not show Cracks INACTIVE INAC

or Holes in Zone ’A’ TIVE
No further application
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks 55−30−00 202 −
and Holes in Zone ’A’ INACTIVE INAC

No further application TIVE
Repair of Abrasions or Scratches in 55−30−00 203 −
Zone ’A’ INACTIVE INAC

No further application TIVE
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, 55−30−00 204 −
Holes and Honeycomb Damage in Zone INACTIVE INAC

’A’ TIVE
No further application
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, 55−30−00 205 −
Holes, Abrasions, Scratches or Dela
INACTIVE INAC

mination Damage in Zone ’C’ TIVE
No further application
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, 55−30−00 206 −
Holes and Honeycomb Damage in Zone INACTIVE INAC

’C’ TIVE
No further application

Table 201
4. Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE REPAIR

CATEGORY
Removal of Steel Cover from Leading Edge in 5.A. 201 A
Zone D and E
Surface repair prior installation of re
5.B. 202 A
placement Steel Cover
Installation of Replacement Steel Cover 5.C. 203 A
Surface Repair in Sandwich Areas (Wet lay 5.D. − A
up)
Surface Repair in Sandwich Areas (Hot bond) 5.E. − A

Table 202

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE REPAIR

CATEGORY
Surface Repair in Ram Air Area (Wet lay up) 5.F. − A
Surface Repair in Ram Air Area (Hot bond) 5.G. − A
Repair in Sandwich Areas (Wet lay up) 5.H. − A
Repair in Sandwich Areas (Hot bond) 5.I. − A
Edge Band Repair (Wet lay up) 5.J. − A
Edge Band Repair (Hot bond) 5.K. − A
Outer Skin Repair of Cracks running paral 5.L. 204 A
lel to the leading edge rib joint in Zone
’B’ and ’C’
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, 5.M. 205 −
Holes, Abrasions, Scratches or Delamination INACTIVE INACTIVE
Damage in Zone ’E’
This Repair is deleted and superseded by
Paragraph 5.A thru 5.K.
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, 5.N. 206 −
Holes, Abrasions, Scratches, Delamination or INACTIVE INACTIVE
Honeycomb Damage in Zone ’E’
This Repair is deleted and superseded by
Paragraph 5.A thru 5.K.

Table 202
5. Leading Edge − Vertical Stabilizer − Repairs
CAUTION: OBEY THE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN
THE TABLE 203.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND AFTER
MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

A. Removal of Steel Cover from Leading Edge in Zones ’D’ and ’E’
NOTE: This instruction is applicable to Leading Edge Panels 322AL, 322BL
and 322CL with steel cover.

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−32−11 Page Block 101 for Allowable and Repair
able Damage limits of the steel cover.

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Repair Effectivity per Aircraft Type and Weight Vari
ant
Table 203
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Cleaning Agent AR Material No. 11−003 or 11−004

(Refer to Chapter 51−35−00)
− Scotch Brite AR Local purchase
(2) Repair procedure (Refer to Figure 201)

(a) Cut the steel sheet each 200 mm (7.874 in.) rectangular to the
steel sheet edge without damaging the composite structure under
neath (Refer to Figure 201). The cutting depth has to be
− between 0.6 mm (0.024 in.) and 0.8 mm (0.031 in.) for steel
cover thickness 0.5 mm (0.020 in.) (Modification 28484 or Ser
vice Bulletin 55−1029).
− between 0.3 mm (0.012 in.) and 0.5 mm (0.020 in.) for steel
cover thickness 0.2 mm (0.008 in.) (Modification 25247 or Ser
vice Bulletin 55−1016).
NOTE: Use a sabre saw or a router bit with adjustable cutting
depth (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, 3.C. and 3.D.).

(b) Remove the fillet sealant from the border of the steel cover.

(c) Carefully lift one edge of the first sheet. Fold this corner for
approximately 180° and peel the sheet from the surface.
NOTE: The steel cover can be warmed up to max 60 °C (140.0 °F).

(d) Do step (c) again until all sheets are removed.

(e) Remove the remaining sealant from the surface.

NOTE: Use wooden or plastic spatulas or a rotating rubber faced

sealant remover in a drilling machine.

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Continue with scotch brite wetted with cleaning agent (Material
No. 11−003 or 11−004).
(g) Clean the surface with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003 or
11−004). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.E..

Page 205
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Removal of Steel Cover from Leading Edge in Zones ’D’ and ’E’
Figure 201

Page 206
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN
THE TABLE 204.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND

160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

B. Surface repair prior installation of replacement Steel Cover (Refer to
Figure 202)

NOTE: This repair is applicable to Leading Edge Panels 322AL,322BL and

322CL with Steel Cover.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Repair Effectivity per Aircraft Type and Weight Vari
ant
Table 204
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Lamination Resin)
− Special Material (Glass
Fabric)
AR Material No. 08−070 or 08−001C
(Refer to Chapter 51−35−00 and
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.(2))
AR Material No. 05−007 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (8))

NOTE: Ply lay−up: Filler plies as require red and one cover ply on
top of the repair laminate.

NOTE: Ply orientation: All plies 0/90° orientation.

(2) Repair Instruction

Page 207
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(a) Use general repair procedure as per Chapter 51−77−12

Para.3.D.(1).
NOTE: Supplementing Instructions: A chamfer is not necessary be
fore application of the filler plies.

Surface repair prior installation of replacement Steel Cover in Zone D and E

Figure 202

CAUTION: OBEY THE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN
THE TABLE 205.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND AFTER
MODIFICATION 160500.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

C. Installation of Replacement Steel Cover (Refer to Figure 203)

NOTE: This repair is applicable to Leading Edge Panels 322AL, 322BL and
322CL with steel cover.

Page 208
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Repair Effectivity per Aircraft Type and Weight Vari
ant
Table 205
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Special material
− Sealant (adhesive tape)
− Cleaning agent
(2) Repair Instruction
AR Material No. 05−068 (refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 09−030 (refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−026 (refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)

(a) Prepare the leading edge panel and new steel cover for installa
tion (Refer to Figure 203).

1 Inspect the leading edge panel for damage, for allowable damage
limits refer to Chapter 55−32−11 Page Block 101.
NOTE: Scratches and tool marks not deeper than one ply 0.25 mm
(0.010 in.) do not need a repair.
2 After the removal of a steel cover applied as per Modification
25247 or Modification 28484 the gap in the surface of the
leading edge has to be closed as per Para. 5.B.

3 Put temporarily new steel cover in position at the leading

edge.

4 Mark the positions of the holes for the hoisting point.

5 Mask the boundaries along the edge of the cover with sealant
adhesive tape (Material No. 09−030).
6 Remove the steel cover, drill and deburr the hole for the
hoisting point.

Page 209
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

7 From holes that were previously covered by the old cover but
will not be covered by the new one. Remove and discard the
washers. Clean the holes with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−026).

8 Abrade the inner surface of the replacement steel cover and the
mating surface of the leading egde panel with abrasive cloth
(180 grade).
9 Clean the cover and the leading edge panels with cleaning agent
(Material No. 11−026).

(b) Prepare the leading edge panel for steel cover installation.

1 Attach strip of porous felt approximately 300 mm (11.811 in.)

wide along both sides of the leading edge panel, just below
the adhesive tape.

2 Completely seal the ends of the cardboard tubes with sealant

adhesive tape (Material No. 09−030).

3 Attach the cardboard tubes to the porous felt, on both sides

of the panel with adhesive tape sealant (Material No. 09−030).

NOTE: The cardboard tubes are necessary to gain optimum pres

sure when vacuum clamping the cover to the leading edge.

The cardboard tube should be 80 mm (3.150 in.) dia. with

a wall thickness of 6 mm (0.236 in.). Alternative cylin
drical bodies can be used instead of the cardboard tubes.
It is important that they have approximate the same
weight and strength.

(c) Install the new steel cover (Refer to Figure 203)

1 With a roller, apply a thin even layer of sealant to the cover
and mating surface of the the panel.

NOTE: Select sealant from the Table of Applicable Sealants, re

fer to Figure 203.

2 Put replacement steel cover in position and secure at both ends

with sealant adhesive tape (Material No. 09−030).

NOTE: To ensure good adhesion on installation slide the steel

cover until it becomes difficult to move.

3 Remove any excess of sealant.

4 Put a layer of vacuum foil (Material No. 05−068) with sealant
adhesive tape (Material No. 09−030).

NOTE: The vacuum foil (Material No. 05−068) must be wrinkle

free over the steel cover.

Page 210
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

5 Insert a suitable vacuum pipe under the vacuum foil (Material

No. 05−068) and seal it with sealant adhesive tape (Material
No. 09−030).

6 Seal all the edges of the vacuum foil (Material No. 05−068)
with sealant adhesive tape (Material No. 09−030).

7 Connect the vacuum pipe to a vacuum pump.

8 Extract the air and maintain a vacuum of approximately 0.8 bar

(11.6 psi) for the required cure time.

NOTE: The correct cure time is given in Table of Applicable

Sealants (Refer to Figure 203 (sheet2)).

9 Remove all the sealing tape, vacuum foil and porous felt.
10 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No.
11−026).

11 Apply fillet sealant (Material No. 09−013) around the edges of

the cover and around the hoisting point hole of the cover. For
details refer to Figure 203.
12 If the antistatic paint was damaged during the abrasion of the
panel mating surface, it must be restored as per SRM 51−75−12
Page Block 001.

13 Restore the surface protection.

NOTE: Apply paint to the fillet seal but not the stainless
steel cover.

14 Transfer drill the existing attachment screw holes to the cov

er.

15 Open up the attachment screw holes with a 100° countersink

tool.

Page 211
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Replacement of Steel Cover

Figure 203 (sheet 1)

Page 212
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/13
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Replacement of Steel Cover

Figure 203 (sheet 2)

Page 213
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN
THE TABLE 206.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND AFTER
MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

D. Surface Repair in Sandwich Areas (Wet lay up).

NOTE: This repair is applicable to the surface of the leading edges, if

the honeycomb core is not damaged.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Repair Effectivity per Aircraft Type and Weight Vari
ant
Table 206
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Laminating Resin)
− Special Material (Glass
Fabric)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Low Density Comp.)
(2) Repair Instruction
AR Material No. 08−070 or 08−001C
(Refer to Chapter 51−35−00) and
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(2))
AR Material No. 05−007 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (8))
AR Material No. 08−022 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00) and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (4))

Page 214
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Perform the repair procedure as given in Chapter 51−77−13, Para.

2.A.(2) without core restoration.
NOTE: For ply lay up/orientation refer to Chapter 55−32−11, Figure 1
(PB 001). Apply one additional ply on top of the repair plies
with 0/90° orientation.

NOTE: Close core cells as given in Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 5. H.

CAUTION: OBEY THE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN
THE TABLE 207.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND AFTER
MODIFICATION 160500.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

E. Surface Repair in Sandwich Areas (Hot bond).

NOTE: This repair is applicable to the surface of the leading edges, if

the honeycomb core is not damaged.
NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Repair Effectivity per Aircraft Type and Weight Vari
ant
Table 207
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Glass Prepreg AR AIK EHG−250−68−37 (Refer to

− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Low Density Comp.)
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(9))
AR Material No. 08−022 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (4))

Page 215
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(2) Repair Instruction

Perform the repair procedure as given in Chapter 51−77−13, Para.

2.A.(3) or 2.A.(5) without core restoration.

NOTE: For ply lay up/orientation refer to Chapter 55−32−11, Figure 1

(PB 001). Apply one additional ply on top of the repair plies
with 0/90° orientation.

NOTE: Close core cells as given in Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 5. H.

CAUTION: OBEY THE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN
THE TABLE 208.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND AFTER
MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

F. Surface Repair in Ram Air Area (Wet lay up).

NOTE: This repair applicable to the leading edges, if the surface is

damaged by erosion.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Repair Effectivity per Aircraft Type and Weight Vari
ant
Table 208
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

Page 216
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−070 or 08−001C

pound (Lamination Resin)
− Special Material (Glass
Fabric)
(2) Repair Instruction
(Refer to Chapter 51−35−00 and
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(2))
AR Material No. 05−007 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00) and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (8))

Perform the repair procedure as given in Chapter 51−77−12, Para.

3.D.(1).

NOTE: Restore only the number of plies, which are damaged by erosion.
NOTE: For ply lay up/orientation refer to Chapter 55−32−11, Figure 1
(PB 001). Apply one additional ply on top of the repair plies
with 0/90° orientation.

CAUTION: OBEY THE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN
THE TABLE 209.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND AFTER
MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

G. Surface Repair in Ram Air Area (Hot bond).

NOTE: This repair is applicable to the leading edges, if the surface is

damaged by erosion.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3.

Page 217
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Repair Effectivity per Aircraft Type and Weight Vari
ant
Table 209
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Glass Prepreg AR AIK EHG−250−68−37 (Refer to

Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(9))
(2) Repair Instruction

Perform the repair procedure as given in Chapter 51−77−12, Para.

3.D.(2).
NOTE: Restore only the number of plies, which are damaged by erosion.

NOTE: For ply lay up/orientation refer to Chapter 55−32−11, Figure 1

(PB 001). Apply one additional ply on top of the repair plies
with 0/90° orientation.

CAUTION: OBEY THE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN
THE TABLE 210.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND AFTER
MODIFICATION 160500.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

H. Repair in Sandwich Areas (Wet lay up).

NOTE: This repair is applicable to the leading edges, if the skin and
honeycomb core are damaged.
NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3.

Page 218
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Repair Effectivity per Aircraft Type and Weight Vari
ant
Table 210
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−070 or 08−001C

pound (Lamination Resin)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Adhesive Paste)
− Special Material (Glass
Fabric)
− Honeycomb Core
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Low Density Comp.)
(2) Repair Instruction
(Refer to Chapter 51−35−00 and
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(2))
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (1))
AR Material No. 05−007 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (8))
AR Hexagonal Core 3.2−48 (Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(11))
AR Material No. 08−022 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (4))

Perform the repair procedure as given in Chapter 51−77−13, Para.

2.A.(2).
NOTE: For ply lay up/orientation refer to Chapter 55−32−11, Figure 1
(PB 001). Apply one additional ply on top of the repair plies
with 0/90° orientation.

NOTE: Close core cells as given in Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 5. H.

Page 219
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN
THE TABLE 211.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND AFTER
MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

I. Repair in Sandwich Areas (Hot bond).

NOTE: This repair is applicable to the leading edges, if the skin and
honeycomb core are damaged.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Repair Effectivity per Aircraft Type and Weight Vari
ant
Table 211
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

Page 220
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Glass Prepreg AR AIK EHG−250−68−37 (Refer to

− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Low Density Comp.)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Adhesive Film)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Foaming Adhesive)
− Honeycomb Core
(2) Repair Instruction
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(9))
AR Material No. 08−022 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (4))
AR Material No. 08−042A (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (6))
AR Material No. 08−047A (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (5))
AR Hexagonal Core 3.2−48 (Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(11))

Perform the repair procedure as given in Chapter 51−77−13, Para.

2.A.(3) from both sides.

NOTE: For ply lay up/orientation refer to Chapter 55−32−11, Figure 1

(PB 001). Apply one additional ply on top of the repair plies
with 0/90° orientation.

NOTE: Close core cells as given in Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 5. H.

CAUTION: OBEY THE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN
THE TABLE 212.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND AFTER
MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

J. Edge Band Repair (Wet lay up).

NOTE: This repair is applicable if either the edge, or the edge includ
ing honeycomb core is damaged.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3.

Page 221
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Repair Effectivity per Aircraft Type and Weight Vari
ant
Table 212
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−070 or 08−001C

pound (Lamination Resin)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Adhesive Paste)
− Special Material (Glass
Fabric)
− Honeycomb Core
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Low Density Comp.)
(2) Repair Instruction
(Refer to Chapter 51−35−00 and
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.(2))
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (1))
AR Material No. 05−007 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (8))
AR Hexagonal Core 3.2−48 (Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(11))
AR Material No. 08−022 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (4))

Perform the repair procedure as given in Chapter 51−77−13, Para. 2.F.

or 2.G.
NOTE: For ply lay up/orientation refer to Chapter 55−32−11, Figure 1
(PB 001). Apply one additional ply on top of the repair plies
with 0/90° orientation.

NOTE: Close core cells as given in Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 5. H.

Page 222
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN
THE TABLE 213.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND AFTER
MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

K. Edge Band Repair (Hot bond).

NOTE: This repair is applicable if either the edge, or the edge includ
ing honeycomb core is damaged.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Repair Effectivity per Aircraft Type and Weight Vari
ant
Table 213
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

Page 223
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Glass Prepreg AR AIK EHG−250−68−37 (Refer to

− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Low Density Comp.)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Adhesive Film)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Foaming Adhesive)
− Honeycomb Core
(2) Repair Instruction
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(9))
AR Material No. 08−022 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (4))
AR Material No. 08−042A (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (6))
AR Material No. 08−047A (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (5))
AR Hexagonal Core 3.2−48 (Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(11))

Perform the repair procedure as given in Chapter 51−77−13, Para. 2.F.

or 2.G..

NOTE: For ply lay up/orientation refer to Chapter 55−32−11, Figure 1

(PB 001). Apply one additional ply on top of the repair plies
with 0/90° orientation.

NOTE: Close core cells as given in Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 5. H.

CAUTION: OBEY THE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN
THE TABLE 214.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND AFTER
MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

L. Outer Skin Repair of cracks running parallel to the leading edge rib
joint in Zone ‘B‘ and ‘C‘

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3.

Page 224
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Aircraft Weight Variant

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 214
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No.Material No. 08−070

pound (Lamination Resin)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Epoxy Resin)
− Special Material (Microbal
loons)
− Cleaning Agent
− Masking Tape
− Glass Fabric (dry)
− Parting Film
− Abrasive cloth
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 204)
(refer to Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−003 or 11−004
(Refer to Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 08−074 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 05−007 (refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11 paragraph 6.B.(8))
AR E−3760
AR Grade 200, 400

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

CAUTION: ONLY USE A MECHANICAL PROCEDURE TO REMOVE THE SURFACE

PROTECTION. REFER TO CHAPTER 51−77−11, PARAGRAPH 4.D. FOR
FULL DATA.

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area.

(b) Abrade the delaminated Layers to remove the delamination damage.

Abrade the repair area into a smooth regular shape (Refer to
Figure 204).

(c) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

(d) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003)
or cleaning agent (Material No. 11−004).

Page 225
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(e) Put some masking tape (Material No. 08−074) around the outer edge
of the overlap area. This will help you to remove unwanted adhe
sive from the repair area.

(f) When all the composite Layers are removed after step (b), you
must obey these instructions.

1 Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (Material No. 08−051)

with special material (Material No. 05−057).
2 Put the mixed adhesive paste into the honeycomb core (Refer to
Figure 204).

3 Make the mixed adhesive paste smooth with the surface of the
honeycomb core (Refer to Figure 204).
4 Let the adhesive cure for 24 hours at room temperature (RT).

NOTE: If a cure time less than 24 hours is necessary, refer to

Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.

5 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003)
or cleaning agent (Material No. 11−004).
(g) Find out the number of dry−fabric layers necessary to make the
wet lay−up repair (Refer to Figure 204).

(h) Get the correct dry−fabric material (Material No. 05−007).

(i) Prepare the layers (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.H.).

(j) Apply a layer of bonding and adhesive compound (Material No.
08−070) to the repair area with a brush or a spatula.

(k) Remove the backing material from one side of the first repair
layer.
(l) Put the first repair layer in its repair position. Remove
wrinkles or air bubbles with a roller. Do this from the center
of the repair layer to the edges.

(m) Remove the backing material from the other side of the repair
layer.
(n) Do the steps (j) thru (m) for each repair layer necessary for
the wet lay−up repair. Cover the repair with a layer of parting
film.

(o) Allow the repair to cure under vacuum pressure (refer to Chapter
51−77−11, Paragraph 5.E.), required temperature and time (refer
to Chapter 51−77−11 Paragraph 6.B.(2) and Paragraph 5.E.).

(p) After the cure time, remove the parting film, masking tape and
unwanted adhesive from the repair area from outside by grinding

Page 226
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

carefully only outer cover layer (Ply No. 0) and equalize surface
to contour. Use 200 grade first then finish with 400 grade.
(q) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (Material No. 11−003)
or cleaning agent (Material No. 11−004).

(r) Do an inspection of the repair area (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,

Paragraph 5.).

(s) Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter

51−75−12).

(3) Temporary Repair

Refer to Chapter 51−77−13 Paragraph 2.I..

Printed in Germany
55−32−11 PagesFeb227/228
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Outer skin repair in Zone B and C for Cracks running parallel to the leading
edge rib joint
Figure 204

Printed in Germany
55−32−11 PagesFeb229/230
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

M. Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes, Abrasions, Scratches or De

lamination Damage in Zone ’E’
NOTE: This Repair is deleted and superseded by Paragraph 5.A. thru 5.K..

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−001C (Refer to

pound (Lamination Resin) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
pound (Epoxy Resin) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Special Material (Microbal AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to
loons) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Cleaning Agent AR Material No. 11−003 or 11−004
(Refer to Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−074 (Refer to
pound (Masking Tape) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−052 (Refer to
pound (Self Adhesive Alu Chapter 51−35−00)
minum Tape)
− Glass Fabric (dry) AR Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para
graph 6.B.(8)
− Epoxy Prepreg Glass Fabric AR LN29549−8.4321.1A−EP (Refer to
Chapter 51−33−00)
− Epoxy Prepreg Glass Fabric AR LN29549−8.4321.2A−EP (Refer to
Chapter 51−33−00)
− Backing Material AR Hostaphan foil RN75 or equiva
lent
− Parting Film AR E−3760
− Abrasive cloth AR Grade 200, 400
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 205)

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

CAUTION: ONLY USE A MECHANICAL PROCEDURE TO REMOVE THE SURFACE

PROTECTION. REFER TO CHAPTER 51−77−11, PARAGRAPH 4.D. FOR
FULL DATA.

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area.

(b) Remove the damaged material. Cut the skin into a regular shape
and chamfer the undamaged skin into an overlap (Refer to Figure
205).

Page 231
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(c) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.
(d) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(e) Put some bonding and adhesive compound (masking tape) (Material
No. 08−074) around the outer edge of the overlap area (Refer to
Figure 205). This will help you to remove unwanted adhesive from
the repair area.

(f) If the damage depth is more than 3.0 mm (0.118 in.) an aluminum
backing plate must be made to lay up the repair plies (Refer to
Figure 205).
(g) Put parting film over the aluminum backing plate. Use bonding and
adhesive compound (masking tape) (Material No. 08−074) to attach
the aluminum backing plate to the inside surface of the repair
area (Refer to Figure 205).

(h) Find out the number of dry−fabric layers necessary to make the
room temperature (RT) repair. Refer to Figure 205.

(i) Get the correct dry−fabric material (Refer to Chapter 55−30−00

Figure 111).

NOTE: Also refer to Chapter 55−30−00, Figure 111 for the pre−im
pregnated sheet data necessary to make the hot−bonded repair
(125 C° (257.0 F°)).

(j) Prepare the repair layers (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

4.H.).

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.C. for data about

the preparation and laying−up of pre−impregnated fabric
sheet.

(k) Apply a layer of bonding and adhesive compound (lamination resin)

(Material No. 08−001C) to the repair area with a brush or a
spatula.
(l) Remove the backing material from one side of the first repair
layer.

(m) Put the first repair layer in its repair position. Remove
wrinkles or air bubbles with a roller. Do this from the center
of the repair layer to the edges.
(n) Remove the backing material from the other side of the repair
layer.

(o) Do the steps (k) thru (n) for each repair layer necessary for
the room temperature repair. Cover the repair with a layer of
parting film.

Page 232
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(p) Let the lamination resin cure for 24 hours at room temperature
under vacuum conditions.
NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.

(q) After the cure time, remove the parting film, masking tape and
any unwanted lamination resin from the repair area. Use abrasive
cloth to smooth area of repair at outside by grinding careful
only outer cover − layer (Ply No. 0) and equalize surface to
contour. Use 200 grade first and finish with 400 grade.

(r) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(s) Remove the aluminum backing plate from the repair area.
(t) Do the steps (h) thru (r) on the other side of the repair (Re
fer to Figure 205).

(u) Do an inspection of the repair (Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Para

graph 5.).
(v) Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter
51−75−12).

(3) Temporary Repair

CAUTION: REFER TO THE RELATED ALLOWABLE DAMAGE AND REPAIR LIMITS IN

CHAPTER 55−30−00, FIGURES 117, 119 OR 121 TO FIND OUT THE
TIME LIMIT FOR THIS TEMPORARY REPAIR.

ADVISE THE INSPECTION DEPARTMENT THAT A PERMANENT REPAIR IS

REQUIRED WITHIN THE FLIGHT HOURS (FH) GIVEN IN CHAPTER
55−30−00.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Remove damaged material which is above the aircraft surface.

(b) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

(c) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(d) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).
(e) Fill the damaged area with the adhesive paste.

Page 233
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Let the adhesive cure for 24 hours at room temperature.

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A.for data.

(g) After the cure time, use abrasive cloth to smooth area of repair
by grinding careful and equalize surface to contour. Use abrasive
cloth 200 grade first and then finish with 400 grade.

(h) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(i) Put a protective layer of bonding and adhesive compound (self

adhesive aluminum tape) (Material No. 08−052) over the repair
area. Smooth out from the center to remove air and press the
edges down tightly.
(j) Do an inspection of the repair.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 205).

(a) Remove the bonding and adhesive compound (self adhesive aluminum
tape) and the filler.
(b) Do all the repair steps in Paragraph (2) (Permanent Repair).

Page 234
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes, Abrasions, Scratches or Dela

mination Damage in Zone ’E’
Figure 205

Printed in Germany
55−32−11 PagesFeb235/236
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

N. Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes, Abrasions, Scratches, Dela

mination or Honeycomb Damage in Zone ’E’
NOTE: This Repair is deleted and superseded by Paragraph 5.A. thru 5.K..

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−001C (Refer to

pound (Lamination Resin) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
pound (Epoxy Resin) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Special Material (Microbal AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to
loons) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Cleaning Agent AR Material No. 11−003 or 11−004
(Refer to Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−074 (Refer to
pound (Masking Tape) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−052 (Refer to
pound (Self Adhesive Alu Chapter 51−35−00)
minum Tape)
− Glassfabric (dry) AR Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para
graph 6.B.(8)
− Epoxy Prepreg Glass Fabric AR LN29549−8.4321.1A−EP (Refer to
Chapter 51−33−00)
− Epoxy Prepreg Glass Fabric AR LN29549−8.4321.2A−EP (Refer to
Chapter 51−33−00)
− Honeycomb Hexagonal Nomex − AR LN29967A4 (Refer to Chapter
Cured 51−33−00)
− Backing Material AR Hostaphan foil RN75 or equiva
lent
− Parting Film AR E−3760
− Abrasive cloth AR Grade 200, 400
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 206)

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

CAUTION: ONLY USE A MECHANICAL PROCEDURE TO REMOVE THE SURFACE

PROTECTION. REFER TO CHAPTER 51−77−11, PARAGRAPH 4.D. FOR
FULL DATA.

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area.

Page 237
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Remove the damaged material. Cut the skin and honeycomb into a
regular shape and chamfer the undamaged skin into an overlap
(Refer to Figue 202).

(c) Remove unwanted material with a vacuum cleaner.

(d) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(e) Put some bonding and adhesive compound (masking tape) (Material
No. 08−074) around the outer edge of the overlap area (Refer to
Figure 206). This will help you to remove unwanted adhesive from
the repair area.

(f) Make the Nomex repair pieces. Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para
graph 4.I.).

(g) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).

(h) Fill honeycomb cells at the joint of the honeycomb repair pieces
and the adjacent honeycomb material with adhesive paste (Refer to
Figure 206).

(i) Put the Nomex honeycomb repair pieces in its repair position. The
surface of the honeycomb repair pieces must follow the contour of
the chamfered overlap (Refer to Figure 206).
(j) Let the adhesive cure for 24 hours at room temperature (RT).

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A..

(k) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(l) If the damage depth is more than 3.0 mm (0.118 in.) an aluminum
backing plate must be made to lay up the repair plies (Refer to
Figure 206).

(m) Put parting film over the aluminum backing plate. Use bonding and
adhesive compound (masking tape) (Material No. 08−074) to attach
the backing plate to the inside surface of the repair area (Re
fer to Figure 206).

(n) Find out the number of dry−fabric layers necessary to make the
room temperature (RT) repair. Refer to Figure 206.
(o) Get the correct dry−fabric material (Refer to Chapter 55−30−00,
Figure 111).

NOTE: Also refer to Chapter 55−30−00, Figure 111 for the pre−im
pregnated sheet data necessary to make the hot−bonded repair
(125 C° (257.0 F°)).

Page 238
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(p) Prepare the repair layers (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

4.H.).
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.C. for data about
the preparation and laying−up of pre−impregnated fabric
sheet.

(q) Apply a layer of bonding and adhesive compound (lamination resin)

(Material No. 08−001C) to the repair area with a brush or a
spatula.

(r) Remove the backing material from one side of the first repair
layer.

(s) Put the first repair layer in its repair position. Remove
wrinkles or air bubbles with a roller. Do this from the center
of the repair layer to the edges.

(t) Remove the backing material from the other side of the repair
layer.

(u) Do the steps (q) thru (t) for each repair layer necessary for
the room temperature repair. Cover the repair with a layer of
parting film.

(v) Let the lamination resin cure for 24 hours at room temperature
under vacuum conditions.

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.

(w) After the cure time, remove the parting film, masking tape and
any unwanted lamination resin from the repair area. Use abrasive
cloth to smooth area of repair at outside by grinding careful
only outer cover − layer (Ply No. 0) and equalize surface to
contour. Use 200 grade first and finish with 400 grade.

(x) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003) or 11−004).

(y) Remove the aluminum backing plate from the repair area.
(z) Do the steps (n) thru (x) on the other side of the repair (Re
fer to Figure 206).

(aa)Do an inspection of the repair (Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Para

graph 5.).
(ab)Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter
51−75−12).

(3) Temporary Repair

Page 239
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: REFER TO THE RELATED ALLOWABLE DAMAGE AND REPAIR LIMITS IN

CHAPTER 55−30−00, FIGURES 117, 119 OR 121 TO FIND OUT THE
TIME LIMIT FOR THIS TEMPORARY REPAIR.

ADVISE THE INSPECTION DEPARTMENT THAT A PERMANENT REPAIR IS

REQUIRED WITHIN THE FLIGHT HOURS (FH) GIVEN IN CHAPTER
55−30−00.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Remove damaged material which is above the aircraft skin surface.

(b) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

(c) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).
(d) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).

(e) Fill damaged skin and exposed honeycomb material with the adhe
sive paste.

(f) Let the adhesive cure for 24 hours at room temperature.

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.
(g) After the cure time, use abrasive cloth to smooth area of repair
by grinding careful and equalize surface to contour. Use abrasive
cloth 200 grade first and then finish with 400 grade.

(h) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).
(i) Put a protective layer of bonding and adhesive compound (self
adhesive aluminum tape) (Material No. 08−052) over the repair
area. Smooth out from the center to remove air and press the
edges down tightly.

(j) Do an inspection of the repair.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 206)

(a) Remove the bonding and adhesive compound (self adhesive aluminum
tape) and the filler.

(b) Do all the repair steps in paragraph (2) (Permanent Repair).

Page 240
Printed in Germany
55−32−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes, Abrasions, Scratches, Delamina

tion or Honeycomb Damage in Zone ’E’
Figure 206

Printed in Germany
55−32−11 PagesFeb241/242
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURE

1. Identification Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Ribs and Hoist Points Figure 1

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−30−00, Page Block 001, where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−32−19 NovPage 1
01/07
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs and Hoist Points

Figure 1 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−32−19 FebPage 2
01/09
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ribs and Hoist Points

Figure 1 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−32−19 AugPage 3
01/08
STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Ribs
and
Hoist
Points
Figure
1
(sheet
3)

Page
4




55−32−19 Feb
01/06
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Plug, mounting Composite D55370057202 B21286K2331A

5 Bush, assy A55371593000 B21286K2331A
10 Lug, hoisting NSA9006−12 B20911K2155
15 Hoistpoint, assy D55370033002 A21286K2331A
17 Plug 5.2206.0 D53370217200 A20911K2155
A20911K2155C
A153007K15376
20 Rib 1, leading D55370029000 B28484K6104B
edge assy
25 Plug, mounting Composite D55370057204 B21286K2331A
30 Hoistpoint, assy D55370033004 A21286K2331A
35 Rib 2, leading D55370030000 A20911K2155C
edge assy A153007K15376
40 Plug, mounting Composite D55370057206 B21286K2331A
45 Hoistpoint, assy D55370033006 A21286K2331H
A38520K11784G
50 Rib 3, leading D55370031000 A20911K2155C
edge assy A153007K15376
55 Rib 4, leading D55370032000 A20911K2155C
edge assy A153007K15376
60 Rib 1 LH/RH, D55370229000 A28484K6104N
leading edge 001 ASB55−1016
assy
65 Rib 1 center, D55370229002 A28484K6104N
leading edge ASB55−1016
assy
ASSY Dwg.: D55370010, D55370025, D55370026, D55370027, D55370116

Key to Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−32−19 Pages 5/6
Nov 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURE

1. General
No Allowable Damage information is specified. In case of any damage contact
AIRBUS INDUSTRIE.

Printed in Germany
55-32-19 Page 101
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURE

1. General
No General and/or Specific Repairs specified. In case of any damage contact
AIRBUS INDUSTRIE.

Printed in Germany
55-32-19 Page 201
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

VERTICAL STABILIZER TRAILING EDGE

1. Structural Arrangement

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Structural Arrangement Figure 1

1 Trailing Edge − Vertical Stabilizer 55−33−13

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−30−00, Page Block 001, where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−33−00 NovPage 1
01/07
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structural Arrangement
Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−33−00 NovPage 2
01/07
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TRAILING EDGE - VERTICAL STABILIZER

1. Identification Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

- Trailing Edge Panel 1 Figure 1 (sheet 1)
- Trailing Edge Panel 2 Figure 1 (sheet 2)
- Trailing Edge Panel 3 LH Figure 1 (sheet 3)
- Trailing Edge Panel 3 RH Figure 1 (sheet 4)
- Trailing Edge Panel 4 Figure 1 (sheet 5)
- Trailing Edge Panel 1 - Ply Lay-up Figure 1 (sheet 6)
- Trailing Edge Panel 2 - Ply Lay-up Figure 1 (sheet 7)
- Trailing Edge Panel 3 LH - Ply Lay-up Figure 1 (sheet 8)
- Trailing Edge Panel 3 RH - Ply Lay-up Figure 1 (sheet 9)
- Trailing Edge Panel 4 - Ply Lay-up Figure 1 (sheet 10 and 11)
- Trailing Edge Panels - Cross-sectional Figure 2 (sheets 1 thru
Dimensions 10)
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55-30-00 Page Block 001, where you can find the ModÈ
ification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55-33-13 MayPage 1
01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Panel 1

Figure 1 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-33-13 MayPage 2
01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Panel 2

Figure 1 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-33-13 MayPage 3
01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Panel 3 LH

Figure 1 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55-33-13 MayPage 4
01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Panel 3 RH

Figure 1 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55-33-13 MayPage 5
01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Panel 4

Figure 1 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55-33-13 MayPage 6
01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Panel 1 - Ply Lay-up

Figure 1 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55-33-13 Pages 7/8
May 01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Panel 2 - Ply Lay-up

Figure 1 (sheet 7)

Printed in Germany
55-33-13 Pages 9/10
May 01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Panel 3 LH - Ply Lay-up

Figure 1 (sheet 8)

Printed in Germany
55-33-13 Pages 11/12
May 01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Panel 3 RH - Ply Lay-up

Figure 1 (sheet 9)

Printed in Germany
55-33-13 Pages 13/14
May 01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Panel 4 - Ply Lay-up

Figure 1 (sheet 10)

Printed in Germany
55-33-13 Pages 15/16
May 01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Panel 4 - Ply Lay-up

Figure 1 (sheet 11)

Printed in Germany
55-33-13 MayPage01/0517
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Edge, trailing Composite D55371250000 PB101 A20005K0003F

panel 1 001 PB201
1A Edge, trailing Composite D55371250002 01 PB101 A21152K1105
panel 1 003 PB201
1B Edge, trailing Composite D55371250004 03 PB101 A21733K1872S
panel 1 005 PB201
1C Edge, trailing Composite D55371250006 A36733K10862
panel 1 008
5 Edge, trailing Composite D55371251000 PB101 A20005K0003F
panel 2 001 PB201
5A Edge, trailing Composite D55371251002 01 PB101 A21152K1105
panel 2 003 PB201
5B Edge, trailing Composite D55371251004 03 PB101 A21733K1872K
panel 2 005 PB201
5C Edge, trailing Composite D55371258000 A31448K7354E
panel 2 001
5D Edge, trailing Composite D55371258002 A36733K10862
panel 2 004
10 Edge, trailing Composite D55371252000 PB101 A20005K0003F
panel 3 LH PB201
10A Edge, trailing Composite D55371252002 01 PB101 A21152K1105
panel 3 LH PB201
10B Edge, trailing Composite D55371252006 03 PB101 A21733K1872S
panel 3 LH PB201
10C Edge, trailing Composite D55371252010 A36733K10862
panel 3 LH
15 Edge, trailing Composite D55371252001 PB101 A20005K0003F
panel 3 RH PB201
15A Edge, trailing Composite D55371252003 01 PB101 A21152K1105A
panel 3 RH PB201
15B Edge, trailing Composite D55371252004 03 PB101 A21238K1248
panel 3 RH PB201
15C Edge, trailing Composite D55371252008 03 PB101 A21733K1872S
panel 3 RH PB201
15D Edge, trailing Composite D55371252012 A36733K10862
panel 3 RH
20 Edge, trailing Composite D55371253000 PB101 A20005K0003G
panel 4 001 PB201
ASSY Dwg.: D55370010, D55370110, D55371050

Key to Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−33−13 FebPage01/0918
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

20A Edge, trailing Composite D55371253002 01 PB101 A20364K0261

panel 4 003 PB201
20B Edge, trailing Composite D55371253004 01 PB101 A21152K1105A
panel 4 005 PB201
20C Edge, trailing Composite D55371253006 03 PB101 A21238K1248
panel 4 007 PB201
20D Edge, trailing Composite D55371253008 03 PB101 A21733K1872S
panel 4 009 PB201
20E Edge, trailing Composite D55371253010 A36733K10862
panel 4 012
25 Strip, joint T3511 D55371255200
MS20001P14 201
25A Strip, joint T3511 D55371255216 01 A21733K1872Q
MS20001P14 217
30 Strip, joint T3511 D55371255202
MS20001P14 203
30A Strip, joint T3511 D55371255218 01 A21733K1872Q
MS20001P14 219
35 Strip, joint LH T3511 D55371255204
MS20001P14
35A Strip, joint LH T3511 D55371255220 01 A21733K1872Q
MS20001P14
40 Strip, joint RH T3511 D55371255205
MS20001P14
40A Part, connection T351 D55371255211 A21238K1248A
RH ABS5044A040
45 Strip, joint T3511 D55371255206
MS20001P14 207
45A Part, connection T351 D55371255212 A21238K1248A
ABS5044A040 213
50 Strip, joint T3511 D55371255208
MS20001P14 209
50A Part, connection T351 D55371255214 A21238K1248A
ABS5044A040 215
55 Assembly, con
D55371276002
necting 003
60 Assembly, con
D55371276000
necting 001
ASSY Dwg.: D53370010, D55370010, D55371050, D55371250, D55371251, D55371252,
D55371253

Key to Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−33−13 FebPage01/0919
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

65 Assembly, con
D55371276004 A20005K0003H

necting 005
70 Assembly, con
D55371276000 A20005K0003H
necting 001
ASSY Dwg.: D55370010

Key to Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−33−13 FebPage01/0920
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Panels - Cross-sectional Dimensions

Figure 2 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-33-13 Pages 21/22
May 01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Panels - Cross-sectional Dimensions

Figure 2 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-33-13 Pages 23/24
May 01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Panels - Cross-sectional Dimensions

Figure 2 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55-33-13 Pages 25/26
May 01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Panels - Cross-sectional Dimensions

Figure 2 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55-33-13 Pages 27/28
May 01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Panels - Cross-sectional Dimensions

Figure 2 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55-33-13 Pages 29/30
May 01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Panels - Cross-sectional Dimensions

Figure 2 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55-33-13 Pages 31/32
May 01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Panels - Cross-sectional Dimensions

Figure 2 (sheet 7)

Printed in Germany
55-33-13 Pages 33/34
May 01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Panels - Cross-sectional Dimensions

Figure 2 (sheet 8)

Printed in Germany
55-33-13 Pages 35/36
May 01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Panels - Cross-sectional Dimensions

Figure 2 (sheet 9)

Printed in Germany
55-33-13 Pages 37/38
May 01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Panels - Cross-sectional Dimensions

Figure 2 (sheet 10)

Printed in Germany
55-33-13 Pages 39/40
May 01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TRAILING EDGE − VERTICAL STABILIZER

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 101.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION 160500,

MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS ALLOWABLE DAMAGE IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: THIS ALLOWABLE DAMAGE IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001

AND AFTER MODIFICATION 160500.

1. General
This topic contains the allowable damage and related data for the Trailing
Edge Access Panels of the Vertical Stabilizer. This data is necessary for
you to find the correct repair procedure.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 101
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUCTION
of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data about all
weight variants and their required information for allowable damage
and repair applicability.

2. Damage Evaluation

Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−10 for data.
3. Delamination Damage

The two types of delamination damage which can occur to the composite
structure are as follows:

A. Impact Delamination
This is when the structure is hit by an object and separation is usual
ly caused between many of the plies.

B. Non−Impact Delamination
This is when separation occurs between two plies for a reason other than
when it is hit by an object.

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

4. The Distance Between Damaged Areas

There is a minimum permitted distance between areas of delamination and be

tween repair areas. The dimension for this distance is given in the appli
cable allowable damage and repair limits figure. If you have less than the
permitted distance between delaminated or repair areas, work on them to
gether as one large damaged area. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Para. 3 to
find out how to measure the distances between delaminated or repair areas.
5. Repair Zones

The Trailing Edge Access Panels of the vertical stabilizer structure is di
vided into repair zones. These repair zones show the zones of different
structural importance of the component. When you do a damage evaluation
(Refer to Paragraph 2. ), you must refer to the repair zone data in Figure
101.

6. Allowable Damage

Allowable damage is damage that does not affect the necessary strength or
function of a component. You do not have to repair this type of damage. If
this damage has rough or sharp edges, smooth these out with the correct
abrasive cloth. Replace the surface paint, if necessary. The allowable dam
age data for the Trailing Edge is listed in Figure 102 thru 103.

7. Repair Limits

The repair limits data gives the time limits in which to make temporary
and permanent repairs. These time limits are given in flight cycles (FC).
The repair limits also tell if it is necessary to make a room temperature
(RT) or hot−bond repair. To find the above given repair limits data appli
cable to a damaged area, you must know the subsequent data:
− the repair zone applicable to the damaged area,
− the area length or depth (as applicable) of the damage to the structure,
− the type of structure (for example, monolithic or honeycomb),
− the type of damage (for example, abrasion, delamination, scratch).
The repair limits data for the Trailing Edges are listed in Figure 102
thru 103 and Table 102 thru 103.

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Access Panel Zones A to C

Figure 101

Printed in Germany
55−33−13 PagesMay103/104
01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable and Repairable Damage Size for Surface Damage at Trailing Edge
Access Panels in Zone A
Figure 102

Allowable and Repairable Damage Size for Surface Damage at Trailing Edge
Access Panels in Zones B and C
Figure 103

Printed in Germany
55−33−13 PagesMay105/106
01/06
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN MAXIMUM

DAMAGE REPAIR INSPECTION
TYPE OF DAMAGE TYPE OF REPAIR TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR REFERENCE DAMAGE REPAIRS NUMBER OF
SIZE CATEGORY REQUIRED
X = mm (in.) Y = mm (in.) DAMAGE
WITHIN NEXT 3500 FC
<1> PERMANENT A Chapter 51−77−12, Paragraph 3.A. NO 200 (7.874) − UNLIMITED
(FH not relevant)
TEMPORARY C IMMEDIATELY Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.I. NO − 75 (2.953) 3
SURFACE DAMAGE IN <2> WITHIN NEXT 3500 FC
PERMANENT A Chapter 55−33−13, Paragraph 5.A. NO − 75 (2.953) 3
ZONE A (FH not relevant)
REFER TO FIGURE TEMPORARY C IMMEDIATELY Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.I. NO − 75 (2.953) 3
102 <3> WITHIN NEXT 600 FC
PERMANENT A Chapter 55−33−13, Paragraph 5.A. NO − 75 (2.953) 3
(FH not relevant)
<4> PERMANENT A IMMEDIATELY Chapter 55−33−13, Paragraph 5.B. NO − 75 (2.953) 3
<5> PERMANENT IMMEDIATELY CONTACT AIRBUS NO
WITHIN NEXT 3500 FC
<1> PERMANENT A Chapter 51−77−12, Paragraph 3.A. NO 200 (7.874) − UNLIMITED
(FH not relevant)
SURFACE DAMAGE IN TEMPORARY C IMMEDIATELY Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.I. NO − 100 (3.937) 2
ZONE B AND C
<3> WITHIN NEXT 600 FC
REFER TO FIGURE PERMANENT A Chapter 55−33−13, Paragraph 5.A. NO − 100 (3.937) 2
103 (FH not relevant)
<4> PERMANENT A IMMEDIATELY Chapter 55−33−13, Paragraph 5.B. NO − 100 (3.937) 2
<5> PERMANENT IMMEDIATELY CONTACT AIRBUS NO
Allowable and Repairable Damage Limits for Surface Damage at the Trailing
Edge Access Panels
Table 102
MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN MAXIMUM
DAMAGE SIZE INSPEC
REPAIR NUMBER
TYPE OF DAMAGE TYPE OF REPAIR TIME LIMIT REPAIR REFERENCE TION DAMAGE REPAIRS
CATEGORY OF DAM
mm  in.  REQUIRED
X = mm (in.) Y = mm (in.) AGE
<6000 <9.300 NO ACTION A NO 200 (7.874) − 5
>6000 >9.300 WITHIN NEXT 600 FC
DEBONDING DAMAGE
and and PERMANENT A Chapter 55−33−13, Paragraph 5.A. NO − 100 (3.937) 3
IN ZONE A (FH not relevant)
<22500 <34.875
>22500 >34.875 PERMANENT A IMMEDIATELY Chapter 55−33−13, Paragraph 5.B. NO − 100 (3.937) 3
Allowable and Repairable Damage Limits for Delamination and Perforating Damage
at the Trailing Edge Access Panels
Table 103

Page 107
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN MAXIMUM

DAMAGE SIZE INSPEC

REPAIR NUMBER
TYPE OF DAMAGE TYPE OF REPAIR TIME LIMIT REPAIR REFERENCE TION DAMAGE REPAIRS
CATEGORY OF DAM

mm
in.
REQUIRED
X = mm (in.) Y = mm (in.) AGE
<2500 <3.875 NO ACTION A NO 200 (7.874) − 2
>2500 >3.875 WITHIN NEXT 600 FC
DEBONDING DAMAGE
and and PERMANENT A Chapter 55−33−13, Paragraph 5.A. NO − 100 (3.937) 2
IN ZONE B OR C (FH not relevant)
<6000 <9.300
>6000 >9.300 PERMANENT A IMMEDIATELY Chapter 55−33−13, Paragraph 5.B. NO − 100 (3.937) 2
TEMPORARY C IMMEDIATELY Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.I.
<5000 <7.750 WITHIN NEXT 3500 FC NO 200 (7.874) − 3
PERMANENT A Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.H.
(FH not relevant)
>5000 >7.750 TEMPORARY C IMMEDIATELY Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.I.
DELAMINATION AND
PERFORATING DAMAGE and and WITHIN NEXT 600 FC NO − 100 (3.937) 3
<22500 <34.875 PERMANENT A Chapter 55−33−13, Paragraph 5.C.
IN ZONE A (FH not relevant)
>22500 >34.875
and and PERMANENT A IMMEDIATELY Chapter 55−33−13, Paragraph 5.D. NO − 100 (3.937) 3
<50000 <77.500
>50000 >77.500 PERMANENT IMMEDIATELY CONTACT AIRBUS
TEMPORARY C IMMEDIATELY Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.I.
<2500 <3.875 WITHIN NEXT 3500 FC NO 200 (7.874) − 2
PERMANENT A Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.H.
(FH not relevant)
>2500 >3.875 TEMPORARY C IMMEDIATELY Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.I.
DELAMINATION AND
PERFORATING DAMAGE and and WITHIN NEXT 600 FC NO − 100 (3.937) 2
<6000 <9.300 PERMANENT A Chapter 55−33−13, Paragraph 5.E.
IN ZONE B (FH not relevant)
>6000 >9.300
and and PERMANENT A IMMEDIATELY Chapter 55−33−13, Paragraph 5.F. NO − 100 (3.937) 2
<30000 <46.500
>30000 >46.500 PERMANENT IMMEDIATELY CONTACT AIRBUS
Allowable and Repairable Damage Limits for Delamination and Perforating Damage
at the Trailing Edge Access Panels
Table 103

Page 108
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 May 01/08
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN MAXIMUM

DAMAGE SIZE INSPEC

REPAIR NUMBER
TYPE OF DAMAGE TYPE OF REPAIR TIME LIMIT REPAIR REFERENCE TION DAMAGE REPAIRS
CATEGORY OF DAM

mm
in.
REQUIRED
X = mm (in.) Y = mm (in.) AGE
TEMPORARY C IMMEDIATELY Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.I.
<2500 <3.875 WITHIN NEXT 3500 FC NO 200 (7.874) − 2
PERMANENT A Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.H.
(FH not relevant)
>2500 >3.875 TEMPORARY C IMMEDIATELY Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.I.
DELAMINATION AND
PERFORATING DAMAGE and and WITHIN NEXT 600 FC NO − 100 (3.937) 2
<6000 <9.300 PERMANENT A Chapter 55−33−13, Paragraph 5.G.
IN ZONE C (FH not relevant)
>6000 >9.300
and and PERMANENT A IMMEDIATELY Chapter 55−33−13, Paragraph 5.G. NO − 100 (3.937) 2
<30000 <46.500
>30000 >46.500 PERMANENT IMMEDIATELY CONTACT AIRBUS
Allowable and Repairable Damage Limits for Delamination and Perforating Damage
at the Trailing Edge Access Panels
Table 103

Printed in Germany
55−33−13 PagesMay109/110
01/08
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TRAILING EDGE − VERTICAL STABILIZER

1. General

These repairs are applicable for the Trailing Edge Access Panels of the
Vertical Stabilizer. The general repairs are listed in Table 201, the spe
cific repairs are listed in Table 202. The appropriate repairs are de
scribed in more detail in the relevant Chapter.

NOTE: Refer to each repair to determine the repair applicability.

NOTE: For Damage/Repair Data Recording, refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

2. Safety Precautions
There are risks to you and other persons when you work with composite re
pair materials. To prevent risks, read and obey the warnings given below.

WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.
WARNING: OBEY THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS WHEN YOU USE CLEANING AGENTS,
ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND PAINTS. THESE MATERIALS ARE DANGEROUS.

WARNING: WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND FILTER MASK WHEN YOU CUT,
ABRADE OR DRILL COMPOSITE MATERIALS. THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MA
TERIALS CAN GET INTO YOUR LUNGS OR ON TO YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE YOU
INJURY. IMMEDIATELY REMOVE DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.
WARNING: CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.
WHEN YOU WORK WITH CFRP COMPOSITE MATERIALS, IMMEDIATELY REMOVE
DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRIC POWER ON
THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST ONLY USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIRS CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE REFER

TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN IN THE
INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH
3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER FIGURE REMARKS

No General Repairs Applicable − − −
Repair of Delamination or Impact De
201
lamination which does not show Cracks 55−30−00
INAC −
or Holes in Zone ’A’ INACTIVE
TIVE
No further application

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER FIGURE REMARKS

Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks 202
55−30−00
and Holes in Zone ’A’ INAC −
INACTIVE
No further application TIVE
Repair of Abrasions or Scratches in 203
55−30−00
Zone ’A’ INAC −
INACTIVE
No further application TIVE
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks,
204
Holes and Honeycomb Damage in Zone 55−30−00
INAC −
’A’ INACTIVE
TIVE
No further application
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks,
205
Holes, Abrasions, Scratches or Dela 55−30−00
INAC −
mination Damage in Zone ’C’ INACTIVE
TIVE
No further application
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks,
206
Holes and Hoenycomb Damage in Zone 55−30−00
INAC −
’C’ INACTIVE
TIVE
No further application

Table 201
4. Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE Repair

Category
Surface Repair in Sandwich Areas (Wet lay 5.A. − A
up)
Surface Repair in Sandwich Areas (Hot bond) 5.B. − A
Repair in Sandwich Areas (Wet lay up) 5.C. − A
Repair in Sandwich Areas (Hot bond) 5.D. − A
Edge Band Repair in Zone B (Wet lay up) 5.E. − A
Edge Band Repair in Zone B (Hot bond) 5.F. − A
Edge Band Repair in Zone C (Wet lay up) 5.G. 201 A
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, 5.H. 202
Holes, Abrasions, Scratches or Delamination INACTIVE INACTIVE
in Zone ’B’
No further application
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes 5.I. 203
and Honeycomb Damage in Zone ’B’ INACTIVE INACTIVE
No further application

Table 202

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE Repair

Category
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, 5.J. 204
Holes, Abrasions, Scratches or Delamination INACTIVE INACTIVE
in Zone ’C’
No further application
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes 5.K. 205
and Honeycomb Damage in Zone ’C’ INACTIVE INACTIVE
No further application
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, 5.L. 206
Holes, Abrasions, Scratches or Delamination INACTIVE INACTIVE
in Zone ’G’
No further application
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes 5.M. 207
and Honeycomb Damage in Zone ’G’ INACTIVE INACTIVE
No further application
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes 5.N. 208
and Honeycomb Damage, Abrasions, Scratches INACTIVE INACTIVE
or Delamination in Zone ’J’
No further application
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes 5.O. 209
and Honeycomb Damage, Abrasions, Scratches INACTIVE INACTIVE
or Delamination in Zone ’K’
No further application

Table 202
5. Trailing Edge Access Panels − Vertical Stabilizer − Repairs

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 203.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND AFTER
MODIFICATION 160500.

A. Surface Repair in Sandwich Areas (Wet lay up).

NOTE: This repair is applicable to the surface of the Trailing Edge Ac
cess Panels, if the honeycomb core is not damaged.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3.

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Repair Effectivity per Aircraft Type and Weight Vari
ant
Table 203
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−070 or 08−001C

pound (Laminating Resin)
− Special Material (Carbon
Fabric)
− Special Material (Glass
Fabric)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Low Density Comp.)
(2) Repair Instruction
(Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
Para. 6.B. (2))
AR Carbon Fabric 8H Satin 370 g/m
(Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
Para. 6.B.(8))
AR Material No. 05−007 (Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(8))
AR Material No. 08−022 (Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(4))

Perform the repair procedure as given in Chapter 51−77−13, Para.

2.A.(2) without core restoration.
NOTE: For ply lay up/orientation refer to Chapter 55−33−13, Page
Block 001. Replace one ply 0° Carbon tape from original lay−up
by 2 plies 0/90° Carbon fabric 8H satin 370 g/m. Apply one
additional ply on top of the repair plies with 0/90_ orienta
tion.
NOTE: Close core cells as given in Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 5. H.

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 204.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND AFTER
MODIFICATION 160500.
B. Surface Repair in Sandwich Areas (Hot bond).

NOTE: This repair is applicable to the surface of the Trailing Edge Ac
cess Panels, if the honeycomb core is not damaged.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Repair Effectivity per Aircraft Type and Weight Vari
ant
Table 204
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Glass Prepreg
− Carbon Prepreg
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Low Density Comp.)
(2) Repair Instruction
AR AIK EHG−250−68−37 (Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(9))
AR Carbon Prepreg 8H Satin 370 g/m
(Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
Para. 6.B.(9))
AR Material No. 08−022 (Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(4))

Page 205
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Perform the repair procedure as given in Chapter 51−77−13, Para.

2.A.(3) or 2.A.(5) without core restoration.
NOTE: For ply lay up/orientation refer to Chapter 55−33−13, Page
Block 001. Replace one ply 0° Carbon tape from original lay−up
by 2 plies 0/90° Carbon prepreg 8H satin 370 g/m. Apply one
additional ply on top of the repair plies with 0/90_ orienta
tion.
NOTE: Close core cells as given in Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 5. H.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 205.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND AFTER
MODIFICATION 160500.

C. Repair in Sandwich Areas (Wet lay up).

NOTE: This repair is applicable to the Trailing Edge Access Panels, if
the skin and honeycomb core are damaged.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Repair Effectivity per Aircraft Type and Weight Vari
ant
Table 205
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

Page 206
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−070 or 08−001C

pound (Lamination Resin)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Adhesive Paste)
− Special Material (Carbon
Fabric)
− Special Material (Glass
Fabric)
− Honeycomb Core
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Low Density Comp.)
(2) Repair Instruction
(Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
Para. 6.B. (2))
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(1))
AR Carbon Fabric 8H Satin 370 g/m
(Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
Para. 6.B.(8))
AR Material No. 05−007 (Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(8))
AR Hexagonal Core 3.2−48 (Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(11))
AR Material No. 08−022 (Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(4))

Perform the repair procedure as given in Chapter 51−77−13, Para.

2.A.(2).

NOTE: For ply lay up/orientation refer to Chapter 55−33−13, Page

Block 001. Replace one ply 0° Carbon tape from original lay−up
by 2 plies 0/90° Carbon fabric 8H satin 370 g/m. Apply one
additional ply on top of the repair plies with 0/90_ orienta
tion.

NOTE: Close core cells as given in Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 5. H.

Page 207
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 206.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND AFTER
MODIFICATION 160500.
D. Repair in Sandwich Areas (Hot bond).

NOTE: This repair is applicable to the Trailing Edge Access Panels, if

the skin and honeycomb core are damaged.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Repair Effectivity per Aircraft Type and Weight Vari
ant
Table 206
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

Page 208
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Glass Prepreg AR AIK EHG−250−68−37 (Refer to

− Carbon Prepreg
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Low Density Comp.)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Adhesive Film)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Foaming Adhesive)
− Honeycomb Core
(2) Repair Instruction
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(9))
AR Carbon Prepreg 8H Satin 370 g/m
(Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
Para. 6.B.(9))
AR Material No. 08−022 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (4))
AR Material No. 08−042A (Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(6))
AR Material No. 08−047A (Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(5))
AR Hexagonal Core 3.2−48 (Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(11))

Perform the repair procedure as given in Chapter 51−77−13, Para.

2.A.(3) from both sides.

NOTE: For ply lay up/orientation refer to Chapter 55−33−13, Page

Block 001. Replace one ply 0° Carbon tape from original lay−up
by 2 plies 0/90° Carbon prepreg 8H satin 370 g/m. Apply one
additional ply on top of the repair plies with 0/90_ orienta
tion.

NOTE: Close core cells as given in Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 5. H.

Page 209
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 207.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND AFTER
MODIFICATION 160500.
E. Edge Band Repair in Zone B (Wet lay up).

NOTE: This repair is applicable to the Trailing Edge Access Panels in

Zone B if either the edge, or the edge including honeycomb core is
damaged.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Repair Effectivity per Aircraft Type and Weight Vari
ant
Table 207
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

Page 210
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−070 or 08−001C

pound (Lamination Resin)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Adhesive Paste)
− Special Material (Carbon
Fabric)
− Special Material (Glass
Fabric)
− Honeycomb Core
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Low Density Comp.)
(2) Repair Instruction
(Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
Para. 6.B.(2))
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(1))
AR Carbon Fabric 8H Satin 370 g/m
(Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
Para. 6.B.(8))
AR Material No. 05−007 (Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(8))
AR Hexagonal Core 3.2−48 (Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(11))
AR Material No. 08−022 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (4))

Perform the repair procedure as given in Chapter 51−77−13, Para. 2.F.

or 2.G.

NOTE: For ply lay up/orientation refer to Chapter 55−33−13, Page

Block 001. Replace one ply 0° Carbon tape from original lay−up
by 2 plies 0/90° Carbon fabric 8H satin 370 g/m. Apply one
additional ply on top of the repair plies with 0/90_ orienta
tion.

NOTE: Close core cells as given in Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 5. H.

Page 211
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 208.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND AFTER
MODIFICATION 160500.
F. Edge Band Repair in Zone B (Hot bond).

NOTE: This repair is applicable to the Trailing Edge Access Panels if

either the edge, or the edge including honeycomb core is damaged.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Repair Effectivity per Aircraft Type and Weight Vari
ant
Table 208
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

Page 212
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Glass Prepreg AR AIK EHG−250−68−37 (Refer to

− Carbon Prepreg
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Low Density Comp.)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Adhesive Film)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Foaming Adhesive)
− Honeycomb Core
(2) Repair Instruction
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(9))
AR Carbon Prepreg 8H Satin 370 g/m
(Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
Para. 6.B.(9))
AR Material No. 08−022 (Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(4))
AR Material No. 08−042A (Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(6))
AR Material No. 08−047A (Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(5))
AR Hexagonal Core 3.2−48 (Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(11))

Perform the repair procedure as given in Chapter 51−77−13, Para. 2.F.

or 2.G..

NOTE: For ply lay up/orientation refer to Chapter 55−33−13, Page

Block 001. Replace one ply 0° Carbon tape from original lay−up
by 2 plies 0/90° Carbon prepreg 8H satin 370 g/m. Apply one
additional ply on top of the repair plies with 0/90_ orienta
tion.

NOTE: Close core cells as given in Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 5. H.

Page 213
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 209.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND AFTER
MODIFICATION 160500.
G. Edge Band Repair in Zone C (Wet lay up).

NOTE: This repair is applicable to the Trailing Edge Access Panels in

Zone C if either the edge, or the edge including honeycomb core is
damaged.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Repair Effectivity per Aircraft Type and Weight Vari
ant
Table 209
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

Page 214
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−070 or 08−001C

pound (Lamination Resin)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Adhesive Paste)
− Special Material (Carbon
Fabric)
− Special Material (Glass
Fabric)
− Honeycomb Core
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Low Density Comp.)
(2) Repair Instruction
(Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
Para. 6.B.(2))
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(1))
AR Carbon Fabric 8H Satin 370 g/m
(Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
Para. 6.B.(8))
AR Material No. 05−007 (Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(8))
AR Hexagonal Core 3.2−48 (Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(11))
AR Material No. 08−022 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (4))

Refer to Figure 201.

Perform the repair procedure as given in Chapter 51−77−13, Para. 2.F.

or 2.G.

Printed in Germany
55−33−13 PagesFeb215/216
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Access Panel Wet−Lay−Up Repair in Zone C

Figure 201

Printed in Germany
55−33−13 PagesFeb217/218
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

H. Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes, Abrasions, Scratches or De

lamination in Zone ’B’.
NOTE: This repair is deleted and superseded by Paragraph 5.A. thru 5.G..

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−001C (Refer to

pound (Lamination Resin) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
pound (Epoxy Resin) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Special Material (Microbal AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to
loons) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Cleaning Agent AR Material No. 11−003 or 11−004
(Refer to Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−074 (Refer to
pound (Masking Tape) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−052 (Refer to
pound (Self Adhesive Alu Chapter 51−35−00)
minium Tape)
− Glass Fabric (dry) Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para
graph 6.B.(8)
− Epoxy Prepeg Glass Fabric AR LN.29549−8.4321.1A−EP (Refer to
Chapter 51−33−00)
− Epoxy Prepeg Glass Fabric AR LN.29549−8.4321.2A−EP (Refer to
Chapter 51−33−00)
− Backing Material AR Hostaphan Foil RN75 or equiva
lent
− Parting film AR E−3760
− Abrasive Cloth AR Grade 200, 400
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 202)

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

CAUTION: ONLY USE A MECHANICAL PROCEDURE TO REMOVE THE SURFACE

PROTECTION. REFER TO CHAPTER 51−77−11, PARAGRAPH 4.D. FOR
FULL DATA.

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area.

(b) Remove the damaged material. Cut the skin into a regular shape
and chamfer the undamaged skin into an overlap (Refer to Figure
202).

Page 219
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(c) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(e) Put some bonding and adhesive compound (masking tape) (Material
No. 08−074) around the outer edge of the overlap area (Refer to
Figure 202). This will help you to remove unwanted adhesive from
the repair area.

(f) If the damage depth is more than 1.5 mm (0.06 in.), an aluminum
backing plate must be made to lay up the repair plies (Refer to
Figure 202).

(g) Put parting film over the aluminum backing plate. Use clamps to
attach the backing plate to the repair area (Refer to Figure
202).
(h) Find out the number of dry−fabric layers necessary to make the
room temperature (RT) repair (Refer to Figure 202).

(i) Get the correct dry−fabric material (Refer to Chapter 55−30−00

Figure 108).
NOTE: Also refer to Chapter 55−30−00, Figure 108 for the pre−im
pregnated sheet data necessary to make the hot−bonded repair
125 C° (257.0 F°).

(j) Prepare the repair layers (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

4.H.).
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.C. for data about
the preparation and laying−up of pre−impregnated fabric
sheet.

WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−001C) IS DAN

GEROUS.
(k) Apply a layer of bonding and adhesive compound (lamination resin)
(Material No. 08−001C) to the repair area with a brush or a
spatula.

(l) Remove the backing material from one side of the first repair
layer.
(m) Put the first repair layer in its repair position. Remove
wrinkles or air bubbles with a roller. Do this from the center
of the repair layer to the edges.

Page 220
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(n) Remove the backing material from the other side of the repair
layer.
(o) Do the steps (k) thru (n) for each repair layer necessary for
the room temperature repair. Cover the repair with a layer of
parting film.

(p) Let the bonding and adhesive compound (lamination resin) cure for
24 hours at room temperature under vacuum conditions.
NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(q) After the cure time, remove the parting film, bonding and adhe
sive compound (masking tape) and any unwanted adhesive from the
repair area. Use abrasive cloth to smooth area of repair at out
side by grinding careful only outer cover − layer (Ply No. 0)
and equalize surface to contour. Use 200 grade first and then
finish with 400 grade.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(r) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(s) Remove the aluminum backing plate from the repair area.
(t) Do the steps (h) thru (r) to the other side of the repair (Re
fer to Figure 202).

(u) Cut the edge of the repair to blend with the existing edge (Re
fer to Figure 202).
(v) Do an inspection of the repair (Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Para
graph 5.).

(w) Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter

51−75−12).
(3) Temporary Repair

Page 221
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: REFER TO THE RELATED ALLOWABLE DAMAGE AND REPAIR LIMITS IN

CHAPTER 55−30−00, FIGURES 123, 125 AND 127, TO FIND OUT THE
TIME LIMIT FOR THIS TEMPORARY REPAIR.

ADVISE THE INSPECTION DEPARTMENT THAT A PERMANENT REPAIR IS

REQUIRED WITHIN THE FLIGHT HOURS (FH) GIVEN IN CHAPTER
55−30−00, PAGE BLOCK 101.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Remove the damaged material which is above the aircraft skin
surface.

(b) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

WARNING: SPECIAL MATERIAL (MICROBALLOONS) (MATERIAL NO. 05−057) IS

DANGEROUS.

WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) IS DAN

GEROUS.

(d) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).

(e) Fill the damaged area with the adhesive paste.

(f) Let the adhesive paste cure for 24 hours at room temperature.

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.

(g) After the cure time, use abrasive cloth to smooth area of repair
by grinding careful and equalize surface to contour. Use abrasive
cloth 200 grade first and then finish with 400 grade.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(h) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

Page 222
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−052) IS DAN

GEROUS.
(i) Put a protective layer of bonding and adhesive compound (self
adhesive aluminium tape) (Material No. 08−052) over the repair
area. Smooth out from the center to remove air and press the
edges down tightly.

(j) Do an inspection of the repair.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 202).

(a) Remove the self adhesive aluminum tape and the filler.

(b) Do all of the repair steps in Paragraph (2) (Permanent Repair).

Printed in Germany
55−33−13 PagesFeb223/224
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes, Abrasions, Scratches or Dela

mination in Zone ’B’
Figure 202

Printed in Germany
55−33−13 PagesFeb225/226
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

I. Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes and Honeycomb Damage in Zone

’B’
NOTE: This repair is deleted and superseded by Paragraph 5.A. thru 5.G..

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−001C (Refer to

pound (Lamination Resin) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
pound (Epoxy Resin) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Special Material (Microbal AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to
loons) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Cleaning Agent AR Material No. 11−003 or 11−004
(Refer to Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−074 (Refer to
pound (Masking Tape) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−052 (Refer to
pound (Self Adhesive Alu Chapter 51−35−00)
minium Tape)
− Honeycomb Hexagonal Nomex AR LN29967 A2 (Refer to Chapter
Cured 51−33−00)
− Glass Fabric (dry) AR Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para
graph 6.B.(8)
− Epoxy Prepeg Glass Fabric AR LN29549−8.4321.1A−EP (Refer to
Chapter 51−33−00)
− Epoxy Prepeg Glass Fabric AR LN29549−8.4321.2A−EP (Refer to
Chapter 51−33−00)
− Backing Material AR Hostaphan foil RN75 or equiva
lent
− Parting Film AR E−3760
− Abrasive Cloth AR Grade 200, 400
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 203)

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

CAUTION: ONLY USE A MECHANICAL PROCEDURE TO REMOVE THE SURFACE

PROTECTION. REFER TO CHAPTER 51−77−11, PARAGRAPH 4.D. FOR
FULL DATA.

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area.

Page 227
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Remove the damaged material. Cut the skin and honeycomb into a
regular shape and chamfer the undamaged skin into an overlap
(Refer to Figure 203).

(c) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(e) Put some bonding and adhesive compound (masking tape) (Material
No. 08−074) around the outer edge of the overlap area (Refer to
Figure 203). This will help you to remove unwanted adhesive from
the repair area.

(f) Make the Nomex honeycomb core plug (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
Paragraph 4.I.).

WARNING: SPECIAL MATERIAL (MICROBALLOONS) (MATERIAL NO. 05−057) IS

DANGEROUS.

WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) IS DAN

GEROUS.

(g) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).

(h) Fill the honeycomb cells at the joint of the honeycomb core plug
to the adjacent honeycomb material with the adhesive paste (Refer
to Figure 203).
(i) Put the Nomex honeycomb core plug in its repair position. The
plug must be level with the inside of the aircraft skin (Refer
to Figure 203).

(j) Let the adhesive paste cure for 24 hours at room temperature
(RT).
NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(k) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(l) An aluminum backing plate must be made to lay up the repair

plies (Refer to Figure 203).

Page 228
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(m) Put parting film over the aluminum backing plate. Use clamps to
attach the backing plate to the repair area (Refer to Figure
203).

(n) Find out the number of dry−fabric layers necessary to make the
room temperature repair (Refer to Figure 203).

(o) Get the correct dry−fabric material (Refer to Chapter 55−30−00,

Figure 108).
NOTE: Also refer to Chapter 55−30−00, Figure 108 for the pre−im
pregnated sheet data necessary to make the hot−bonded repair
(125 C° (257.0 F°)).

(p) Prepare the repair layers (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

4.H.).
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.C. for data about
the preparation and laying−up of pre−impregnated fabric
sheet.

WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−001C) IS DAN

GEROUS.

(q) Apply a layer of bonding and adhesive compound (lamination resin)

(Material No. 08−001C) to the repair area with a brush or a
spatula.

(r) Remove the backing material from one side of the first repair
layer.

(s) Put the first repair layer in its repair position. Remove
wrinkles or air bubbles with a roller. Do this from the center
of the repair layer to the edges.

(t) Remove the backing material from the other side of the repair
layer.

(u) Do the steps (q) thru (t) for each repair layer necessary for
the room temperature repair. Cover the repair with a layer of
parting film.
(v) Let the bonding and adhesive compound (lamination resin) cure for
24 hours at room temperature under vacuum conditions.

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.

(w) After the cure time, remove the parting film, bonding and adhe
sive compound (masking tape) (Material No. 08−074) and any un
wanted adhesive from the repair area. Use abrasive cloth to
smooth area of repair at outside by grinding careful only outer
cover − layer (Ply No. 0) and equalize surface to contour. Use
200 grade first and then finish with 400 grade.

Page 229
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(x) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(y) Remove the aluminum backing plate from the repair.

(z) Do the steps (n) thru (x) to the other side of the repair (Re
fer to Figure 203).
(aa)Cut the edge of repair to blend with the existing edge (Refer to
Figure 203).

(ab)Do an inspection of the repair (Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Para

graph 5.).
(ac)Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter
51−75−12).

(3) Temporary Repair

CAUTION: REFER TO THE RELATED ALLOWABLE DAMAGE AND REPAIR LIMITS IN

CHAPTER 55−30−00, FIGURES 123, 125 AND 127, TO FIND OUT THE
TIME LIMIT FOR THIS TEMPORARY REPAIR.

ADVISE THE INSPECTION DEPARTMENT THAT A PERMANENT REPAIR IS

REQUIRED WITHIN THE FLIGHT HOURS (FH) GIVEN IN CHAPTER
55−30−00, PAGE BLOCK 101.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Remove the damaged material which is above the aircraft skin
surface.

(b) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).
WARNING: SPECIAL MATERIAL (MICROBALLOONS) (MATERIAL NO. 05−057) IS
DANGEROUS.

WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) IS DAN

GEROUS.

(d) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).

Page 230
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(e) Fill the damaged skin and exposed honeycomb material with the
adhesive paste.
(f) Let the adhesive paste cure for 24 hours at room temperature.

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.

(g) After the cure time, use abrasive cloth to smooth area of repair
by grinding careful and equalize surface to contour. Use abrasive
cloth 200 grade first and then finish with 400 grade.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(h) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−052) IS DAN

GEROUS.

(i) Put a protective layer of bonding and adhesive compound (self

adhesive aluminum tape) (Material No. 08−052) over the repair
area. Smooth out from the center to remove air and press the
edges down tightly.

(j) Do an inspection of the repair.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 203).

(a) Remove the self adhesive aluminum tape and the filler.

(b) Do all of the repair steps in Paragraph (2) (Permanent Repair).

Printed in Germany
55−33−13 PagesFeb231/232
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes and Honeycomb Damage in Zone ’B’
Figure 203

Printed in Germany
55−33−13 PagesFeb233/234
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

J. Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes, Abrasions, Scratches or De

lamination in Zone ’C’
NOTE: This repair is deleted and superseded by Paragraph 5.A. thru 5.G..

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−001C (Refer to

pound (Lamination Resin) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
pound (Epoxy Resin) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Special Material (Microbal AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to
loons) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Cleaning Agent AR Material No. 11−003 or 11−004
(Refer to Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−074 (Refer to
pound (Masking Tape) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−052 (Refer to
pound (Self Adhesive Alu Chapter 51−35−00)
minium Tape)
− Glassfabric (dry) AR Refer to Chapter 51−77−11 Para
graph 6.B.(8)
− Epoxy Prepeg Glass Fabric AR LN29549−8.4321.1A−EP (Refer to
Chapter 51−33−00)
− Epoxy Prepeg Glass Fabric AR LN29549−8.4321.2A−EP (Refer to
Chapter 51−33−00)
− Backing Material AR Hostaphan foil RN75 or equiva
lent
− Parting Film AR E−3760
− Abrasive Cloth AR Grade 200, 400
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 204)

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

CAUTION: ONLY USE A MECHANICAL PROCEDURE TO REMOVE THE SURFACE

PROTECTION. REFER TO CHAPTER 51−77−11, PARAGRAPH 4.D. FOR
FULL DATA.

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area.

(b) Remove the damaged material. Cut the skin into a regular shape
and chamfer the undamaged skin into an overlap (Refer to Figure
204).

Page 235
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(c) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(e) Put some bonding and adhesive compound (masking tape) (Material
No. 08−074) around the outer edge of the overlap area (Refer to
Figure 204). This will help you to remove unwanted adhesive from
the repair area.

(f) If the damage depth is more than 1.5 mm (0.06 in.), an aluminum
backing plate must be made to lay up the repair plies (Refer to
Figure 204).

(g) Put parting film over the aluminum backing plate. Use clamps to
attach the backing plate to the repair area (Refer to Figure
204).
(h) Find out the number of dry−fabric layers necessary to make the
room temperature (RT) repair (Refer to Figure 204).

(i) Get the correct dry−fabric material (Refer to Chapter 55−30−00,

Figure 109).
NOTE: Also refer to Chapter 55−30−00, Figure 109 for the pre−im
pregnated sheet data necessary to make the hot−bonded repair
(125 C° (257.0 F°)).

(j) Prepare the repair layers (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

4.H.).
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.C. for data about
the preparation and laying−up of pre−impregnated fabric
sheet.

WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−001C) IS DAN

GEROUS.
(k) Apply a layer of bonding and adhesive compound (lamination resin)
(Material No. 08−001C) to the repair area with a brush or a
spatula.

(l) Remove the backing material from one side of the first repair
layer.
(m) Put the first repair layer in its repair position. Remove
wrinkles or air bubbles with a roller. Do this from the center
of the repair layer to the edges.

Page 236
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(n) Remove the backing material from the other side of the repair
layer.
(o) Do the steps (k) thru (n) for each repair layer necessary for
the room temperature repair. Cover the repair with a layer of
parting film.

(p) Let the bonding and adhesive compound (lamination resin) cure for
24 hours at room temperature under vacuum conditions.
NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.

(q) After the cure time, remove the parting film, bonding and adhe
sive compound (masking tape) and unwanted adhesive from the re
pair area. Use abrasive cloth to smooth area of repair at out
side by grinding careful only outer cover−layer (Ply No. 0) and
equalize surface to contour. Use abrasive cloth 200 grade first
and then finish with 400 grade.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(r) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(s) Remove the aluminum backing plate from the repair area.

(t) Do the steps (h) thru (r) to the other side of the repair (Re
fer to Figure 204).

(u) Cut the edge of the repair to blend with the existing edge (Re
fer to Figure 204).

(v) Do an inspection of the repair (Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Para

graph 5.).

(w) Replace the intial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter

51−75−12).

(3) Temporary Repair

CAUTION: REFER TO THE RELATED ALLOWABLE DAMAGE AND REPAIR LIMITS IN
CHAPTER 55−30−00, FIGURE 123, 125 AND 127, TO FIND OUT THE
TIME LIMIT FOR THIS TEMPORARY REPAIR.

ADVISE THE INSPECTION DEPARTMENT THAT A PERMANENT REPAIR IS

REQUIRED WITHIN THE FLIGHT HOURS (FH) GIVEN IN CHAPTER
55−30−00, PAGE BLOCK 101.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Remove the damaged material which is above the aircraft skin
surface.

Page 237
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

WARNING: SPECIAL MATERIAL (MICROBALLOONS) (MATERIAL NO. 05−057) IS

DANGEROUS.

WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) IS DAN

GEROUS.

(d) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).

(e) Fill the damaged area with the adhesive paste.

(f) Let the adhesive paste cure for 24 hours at room temperature.

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.

(g) After the cure time, use abrasive cloth to smooth area of repair
by grinding careful and equalize surface to contour. Use abrasive
cloth 200 grade first and then finish with 400 grade.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(h) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−052) IS DAN

GEROUS.

(i) Put a protective layer of bonding and adhesive compound (self

adhesive aluminum tape) (Material No. 08−052) over the repair
area. Smooth out from the center to remove air and press the
edges down tightly.
(j) Do an inspection of the repair.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 204).

(a) Remove the self adhesive aluminum tape.

(b) Do all of the repair steps in Paragraph (2) (Permanent Repair).

Page 238
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes, Abrasions, Scratches or Dela

mination in Zone ’C’
Figure 204

Printed in Germany
55−33−13 PagesFeb239/240
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

K. Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes and Honeycomb Damage in Zone

’C’
NOTE: This repair is deleted and superseded by Paragraph 5.A. thru 5.G..

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−001C (Refer to

pound (Lamination Resin) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
pound (Epoxy Resin) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Special Material (Microbal AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to
loons) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Cleaning Agent AR Material No. 11−003 or 11−004
(Refer to Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−074 (Refer to
pound (Masking Tape) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−052 (Refer to
pound (Self Adhesive Alu Chapter 51−35−00)
minium Tape)
− Glassfabric (dry) AR Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para
graph 6.B.(8)
− Epoxy Prepeg Glass Fabric AR LN29549−8.4321.1A−EP (Refer to
Chapter 51−33−00)
− Epoxy Prepeg Glass Fabric AR LN29549−8.4321.2A−EP (Refer to
Chapter 51−33−00)
− Honeycomb Hexagonal Nomex AR LN29967 A2 (Refer to Chapter
Cured 51−33−00)
− Backing Material AR Hostaphan foil RN75 or equiva
lent
− Parting Film AR E−3760
− Abrasive Cloth AR Grade 200, 400
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 205)

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

CAUTION: ONLY USE A MECHANICAL PROCEDURE TO REMOVE THE SURFACE

PROTECTION. REFER TO CHAPTER 51−77−11, PARAGRAPH 4.D. FOR
FULL DATA.

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area.

Page 241
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Remove the damaged material. Cut the skin and honeycomb into a
regular shape and chamfer the undamaged skin into an overlap
(Refer to Figure 205).

(c) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(e) Put some bonding and adhesive compound (masking tape) (Material
No. 08−074) around the outer edge of the overlap area (Refer to
Figure 205). This will help you to remove unwanted adhesive from
the repair area.

(f) Make the Nomex honeycomb core plug (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
Paragraph 4.I).

WARNING: SPECIAL MATERIAL (MICROBALLOONS) (MATERIAL NO. 05−057) IS

DANGEROUS.

WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) IS DAN

GEROUS.

(g) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).

(h) Fill the honeycomb cells, at the joint of the honeycomb core
plug to the adjacent honeycomb material with the adhesive paste
(Refer to Figure 205).
(i) Put the Nomex honeycomb core plug in its repair position. The
plug must be level with the inside of the aircraft skin (Refer
to Figure 205).

(j) Let the adhesive paste cure for 24 hours at room temperature
(RT).
NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(k) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(l) An aluminum backing plate must be made to lay up the repair

plies (Refer to Figure 205).

Page 242
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(m) Put parting film over the aluminum backing plate. Use clamps to
attach the backing plate to the repair area (Refer to Figure
205).

(n) Find out the number of dry−fabric layers necessary to make the
room temperature repair (Refer to Figure 205).

(o) Get the correct dry−fabric material (Refer to Chapter 55−30−00,

Figure 109).
NOTE: Also refer to Chapter 55−30−00, Figure 109 for the pre−im
pregnated sheet data necessary to make the hot−bonded repair
(125 C° (257.0 F°)).

(p) Prepare the repair layers (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

4.H.).
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.C. for data about
the preparation and laying−up of pre−impregnated fabric
sheet.

WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−001C) IS DAN

GEROUS.

(q) Apply a layer of bonding and adhesive compound (lamination resin)

(Material No. 08−001C) to the repair area with a brush or a
spatula.

(r) Remove the backing material from one side of the first repair
layer.

(s) Put the first repair layer in its repair position. Remove
wrinkles or air bubbles with a roller. Do this from the center
of the repair layer to the edges.

(t) Remove the backing material from the other side of the repair
layer.

(u) Do the steps (q) thru (t) for each repair layer necessary for
the room temperature repair. Cover the repair with a layer of
parting film.
(v) Let the bonding and adhesive compound (lamination resin) cure for
24 hours at room temperature under vacuum conditions.

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.

(w) After the cure time, remove the parting film, bonding and adhe
sive compound (masking tape) and unwanted adhesive from the re
pair area. Use abrasive cloth to smooth area of repair at out
side by grinding careful only outer cover−layer (Ply No. 0) and
equalize surface to contour. Use abrasive cloth 200 grade first
and then finish with 400 grade.

Page 243
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(x) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(y) Remove the aluminum backing plate from the repair.

(z) Do the steps (n) thru (x) to the other side of the repair (Re
fer to Figure 205).
WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(aa)Cut the edge of the repair to blend with the existing edge (Re
fer to Figure 205).

(ab)Do an inspection of the repair (Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Para

graph 5.).

(ac)Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter

51−75−12).

(3) Temporary Repair

CAUTION: REFER TO THE RELATED ALLOWABLE DAMAGE AND REPAIR LIMITS IN
CHAPTER 55−30−00, FIGURES 123, 125 AND 127, TO FIND OUT THE
TIME LIMIT FOR THIS TEMPORARY REPAIR.

ADVISE THE INSPECTION DEPARTMENT THAT A PERMANENT REPAIR IS

REQUIRED WITHIN THE FLIGHT HOURS (FH) GIVEN IN CHAPTER
55−30−00, PAGE BLOCK 101.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Remove the damaged material which is above the aircraft skin
surface.

(b) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

Page 244
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: SPECIAL MATERIAL (MICROBALLOONS) (MATERIAL NO. 05−057) IS

DANGEROUS.
WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) IS DAN
GEROUS.

(d) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with microballoons (Material No. 05−057).

(e) Fill the damaged skin and exposed honeycomb material with the
adhesive paste.

(f) Let the adhesive paste cure for 24 hours at room temperature.

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.
(g) After the cure time, use abrasive cloth to smooth area of repair
by grinding careful and equalize surface to contour. Use abrasive
cloth 200 grade first and then finish with 400 grade.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(h) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−052) IS DAN

GEROUS.
(i) Put a protective layer of bonding and adhesive compound (self
adhesive aluminum tape) (Material No. 08−052) over the repair
area. Smooth out from the center to remove air and press the
edges down tightly.

(j) Do an inspection of the repair.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 205).

(a) Remove the self adhesive aluminum tape and the filler.

(b) Do all of the repair steps in Paragraph (2) (Permanent Repair).

Printed in Germany
55−33−13 PagesFeb245/246
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes and Honeycomb Damage in Zone ’C’
Figure 205

Printed in Germany
55−33−13 PagesFeb247/248
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

L. Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes, Abrasions, Scratches or De

lamination in Zone ’G’
NOTE: This repair is deleted and superseded by Paragraph 5.A. thru 5.G..

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−001C (Refer to

pound (Lamination Resin) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
pound (Epoxy Resin) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Special Material (Microbal AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to
loons) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Cleaning Agent AR Material No. 11−003 or 11−004
(Refer to Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−074 (Refer to
pound (Masking Tape) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−052 (Refer to
pound (Self Adhesive Alu Chapter 51−35−00)
minium Tape)
− Glassfabric (dry) AR Refer to Chapter 51−77−11 Para
graph 6.B.(8)
− Epoxy Prepeg Glass Fabric AR LN29549−8.4321.1A−EP (Refer to
Chapter 51−33−00)
− Epoxy Prepeg Glass Fabric AR LN29549−8.4320.2A−EP (Refer to
Chapter 51−33−00)
− Epoxy Prepeg Cabon Fabric AR DAN 1208 B40 (Refer to Chapter
51−33−00)
− Backing Material AR Hostaphan foil RN75 or equiva
lent
− Parting Film AR E−3760
− Abrasive Cloth AR Grade 200, 400
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 206)

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

CAUTION: ONLY USE A MECHANICAL PROCEDURE TO REMOVE THE SURFACE

PROTECTION. REFER TO CHAPTER 51−77−11, PARAGRAPH 4.D. FOR
FULL DATA.

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area.

Page 249
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) To remove the delamination damage, abrade the delaminated layers.

Abrade the repair area into a regular shape (Refer to Figure
206).

(c) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(e) Put some bonding and adhesive compound (masking tape) (Material
No. 08−074) around the outer edge of the overlap area (Refer to
Figure 206). This will help you to remove unwanted adhesive from
the repair area.

(f) When all of the composite layers are removed after step (b), you
must obey these instructions:

WARNING: SPECIAL MATERIAL (MICROBALLOONS) (MATERIAL NO. 05−057) IS

DANGEROUS.

WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) IS

DANGEROUS.

1 Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material

No. 08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).

2 Put the mixed adhesive paste into the honeycomb core (Refer to
Figure 206).

3 Make the mixed adhesive paste smooth with the surface of the
honeycomb core (Refer to Figure 206).

4 Let the adhesive paste cure for 24 hours at room temperature

(RT).

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

5 Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).
(g) Find out the number of dry−fabric layers necessary to make the
room temperature repair (Refer to Figure 206).

Page 250
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(h) Get the correct dry−fabric material. Refer to Chapter 55−30−00,

Figure 113.
NOTE: Also refer to Chapter 55−30−00, Figure 113 for the pre−im
pregnated sheet data necessary to make the hot−bonded repair
(125 C° (257.0 F°)).

(i) Prepare the repair layers (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

4.H.).
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.C. for data about
the preparation and laying−up of the pre−impregnated fabric
sheet.

WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−001C) IS DAN

GEROUS.
(j) Apply a layer of bonding and adhesive compound (lamination resin)
(Material No. 08−001C) to the repair area with a brush or a
spatula.

(k) Remove the backing material from one side of the first repair
layer.
(l) Put the first repair layer in its repair position. Remove
wrinkles or air bubbles with a roller. Do this from the center
of the repair layer to the edges.

(m) Remove the backing material from the other side of the repair
layer.

(n) Do the steps (j) thru (m) for each repair layer necessary for
the room temperature repair. Cover the repair with a layer of
parting film.

(o) Let the bonding and adhesive compound (lamination resin) cure for
24 hours at room temperature under vacuum conditions.

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.

(p) After the cure time, remove the parting film, bonding and adhe
sive compound (masking tape) and unwanted adhesive from the re
pair area. Use abrasive cloth to smooth area of repair at out
side by grinding careful only outer cover−layer (Ply No. 0) and
equalize surface to contour. Use abrasive cloth 200 grade first
and then finish with 400 grade.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(q) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

Page 251
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(r) Do an inspection of the repair (Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Para

graph 5.).
(s) Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter
51−75−12).

(3) Temporary Repair

CAUTION: REFER TO THE RELATED ALLOWABLE DAMAGE AND REPAIR LIMITS IN

CHAPTER 55−30−00, FIGURES 124, 126 AND 128 TO FIND OUT THE
TIME LIMIT FOR THIS TEMPORARY REPAIR.

ADVISE THE INSPECTION DEPARTMENT THAT A PERMANENT REPAIR IS

REQUIRED WITHIN THE FLIGHT HOURS (FH) GIVEN IN CHAPTER
55−30−00, PAGE BLOCK 101.

(a) Remove the damaged material which is above the aircraft surface.
(b) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−052) IS DAN

GEROUS.
(d) Put a protective layer of bonding and adhesive compound (self
adhesive aluminum tape) (Material No. 08−052) over the repair
area. Smooth out from the center to remove air and press the
edges down tightly.

(e) Do an inspection of the repair.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 206)

(a) Remove the self adhesive aluminum tape.

(b) Do all the repair steps in Paragraph (2) (Permanent Repair).

Page 252
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes, Abrasions, Scratches or Dela

mination in Zone ’G’
Figure 206

Printed in Germany
55−33−13 PagesFeb253/254
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

M. Repair of Impact Delmination, Cracks, Holes and Honeycomb Damage in Zone

’G’
NOTE: This repair is deleted and superseded by Paragraph 5.A. thru 5.G..

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−001C (Refer to

pound (Lamination Resin) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
pound (Epoxy Resin) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Special Material (Microbal AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to
loons) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Cleaning Agent AR Material No. 11−003 or 11−004
(Refer to Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−074 (Refer to
pound (Masking Tape) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−052 (Refer to
pound (Self Adhesive Alu Chapter 51−35−00)
minium Tape)
− Glassfabric (dry) AR Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para
graph 6.B.(8)
− Epoxy Prepreg Glass Fabric AR LN29549−8.4321.1A−EP (Refer to
Chapter 51−33−00)
− Epoxy Prepreg Glass Fabric AR LN29549−8.4320.2A−EP (Refer to
Chapter 51−33−00)
− Epoxy Prepreg Carbon Fabric AR DAN 1208 B40 (Refer to Chapter
51−33−00)
− Honeycomb Hexagonal Nomex AR LN29967 A2 (Refer to Chapter
Cured 51−33−00)
− Pre−Cured Sheet (Doubler) AR Refer to Chapter 55−31−00, Fig
ure 203, Type 5
− Backing Material AR Hostaphan foil RN75 or equiva
lent
− Parting Film AR E−3760
− Abrasive Cloth AR Grade 200, 400
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 207)

Page 255
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

CAUTION: ONLY USE A MECHANICAL PROCEDURE TO REMOVE THE SURFACE

PROTECTION. REFER TO CHAPTER 51−77−11, PARAGRAPH 4.D. FOR
FULL DATA.

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area.

(b) Remove the damaged material. Cut the skin and the honeycomb into
a regular shape and chamfer the undamaged skin into an overlap
(Refer to Figure 207).

(c) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(e) Put some bonding and adhesive compound (masking tape) (Material
No. 08−074) around the outer edge of the overlap area (Refer to
Figure 207). This will help you to remove unwanted adhesive from
the repair area.

(f) If you have access from one side only, you must make a doubler
(Refer to Figure 207 and Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.H.(1) thru
(7)).
NOTE: When you have access to both sides of this repair, do not
make the doubler. You must do the steps (l) thru (ac) (Re
fer to Figure 207).

(g) Cut the cured doubler to size (Refer to Figure 207).

WARNING: SPECIAL MATERIAL (MICROBALLOONS) (MATERIAL NO. 05−057) IS
DANGEROUS.

WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) IS DAN

GEROUS.

(h) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).

(i) Put the adhesive paste onto the doubler. Put the doubler in its
repair position (Refer to Figure 207).

(j) Cure the adhesive paste in accordance with Chapter 51−77−11,

Paragraph 5.C..

(k) Make the Nomex honeycomb core plug (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
Paragraph 4.I.).

Page 256
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: SPECIAL MATERIAL (MICROBALLOONS) (MATERIAL NO. 05−057) IS

DANGEROUS.
WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) IS DAN
GEROUS.

(l) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).
(m) Fill the honeycomb cells, at the joint of the honeycomb plug to
the adjacent honeycomb material, with the adhesive paste (Refer
to Figure 207).

(n) Put the Nomex honeycomb plug in its repair position. The plug
must be level with the inside of the aircraft skin (Refer to
Figure 207).

(o) Let the adhesive paste cure for 24 hours at room temperature.

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A..
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(p) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(q) Find out the number of dry−fabric layers necessary to make the
room temperature repair (Refer to Figure 207).

(r) Get the correct dry−fabric material (Refer to Chapter 55−30−00,

Figure 113).

NOTE: Also refer to Chapter 55−30−00, Figure 113, for the pre−im
pregnated sheet data necessary to make the hot−bonded repair
(125 C° (257.0 F°)).

(s) Prepare the repair layers (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

4.H).

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.C. for data about

the preparation and laying−up of pre−impregnated fabric
sheet.

WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−001C) IS DAN

GEROUS.

(t) Apply a layer of bonding and adhesive compound (lamination resin)

(Material No. 08−001C) to the repair area with a brush or a
spatula.

Page 257
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(u) Remove the backing material from one side of the first repair
layer.
(v) Put the first repair layer in its repair position. Remove
wrinkles or air bubbles with a roller. Do this from the center
of the repair layer to the edges.

(w) Remove the backing material from the other side of the repair
layer.
(x) Do the steps (u) thru (x) for each repair layer necessary for
the room temperature repair. Cover the repair with a layer of
parting film.

(y) Let the bonding and adhesive compound (lamination resin) cure for
24 hours at room temperature under vacuum conditions.

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.

(z) After the cure time, remove the parting film, bonding and adhe
sive compound (masking tape) and unwanted adhesive from the re
pair area. Use abrasive cloth to smooth area of repair at out
side by grinding careful only outer cover−layer (Ply No. 0) and
equalize surface to contour. Use abrasive cloth 200 grade first
and then finish with 400 grade.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(aa)Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(ab)Do an inspection of the repair (Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Para

graph 5.).
(ac)Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter
51−75−12).

(3) Temporary Repair

CAUTION: REFER TO THE RELATED ALLOWABLE DAMAGE AND REPAIR LIMITS IN

CHAPTER 55−30−00, FIGURES 124, 126 AND 128 TO FIND OUT THE
TIME LIMIT FOR THIS TEMPORARY REPAIR.

ADVISE THE INSPECTION DEPARTMENT THAT A PERMANENT REPAIR IS

REQUIRED WITHIN THE FLIGHT HOURS (FH) GIVEN IN CHAPTER
55−30−00, PAGE BLOCK 101.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Remove the damaged material which is above the aircraft skin
surface.

Page 258
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

WARNING: SPECIAL MATERIAL (MICROBALLOONS) (MATERIAL NO. 05−057) IS

DANGEROUS.

WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) IS DAN

GEROUS.

(d) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).

(e) Fill the damaged skin and exposed honeycomb material with the
adhesive paste.

(f) Let the adhesive paste cure for 24 hours at room temperature.
NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.

(g) After the cure time, use abrasive cloth to smooth area of repair
by grinding careful and equalize surface to contour. Use abrasive
cloth 200 grade first and then finish with 400 grade.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(h) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).
WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−052) IS DAN
GEROUS.

(i) Put a protective layer of bonding and adhesive compound (self

adhesive aluminum tape) (Material No. 08−052) over the repair
area. Smooth out from the center to remove air and press the
edges down tightly.

(j) Do an inspection of the repair.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 207).

(a) Remove the self adhesive aluminum tape and the filler.
(b) Do all of the repair steps in Paragraph (2) (Permanent repair).

Printed in Germany
55−33−13 PagesFeb259/260
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes and Honeycomb Damage in Zone ’G’
Figure 207

Printed in Germany
55−33−13 PagesFeb261/262
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

N. Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes and Honeycomb Damage, Abra

sions, Scratches or Delamination in Zone ’J’
NOTE: This repair is deleted and superseded by Paragraph 5.A. thru 5.G..

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−001C (Refer to

pound (Lamination Resin) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
pound (Epoxy Resin) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Special Material (Microbal AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to
loons) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Cleaning Agent AR Material No. 11−003 or 11−004
(Refer to Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−074 (Refer to
pound (Masking Tape) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−052 (Refer to
pound (Self Adhesive Alu Chapter 51−35−00)
minium Tape)
− Glassfabric (dry) AR Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Para
graph 6.B.(8)
− Epoxy Prepreg Glass Fabric AR LN29549−8.4321.1A−EP (Refer to
Chapter 51−33−00)
− Epoxy Prepreg Glass Fabric AR LN29549−8.4320.2A−EP (Refer to
Chapter 51−33−00)
− Epoxy Prepreg Carbon Fabric AR DAN 1208 B40 (Refer to Chapter
51−33−00)
− Honeycomb Hexagonal Nomex AR LN29967 A2 (Refer to Chapter
Cured 51−33−00)
− Backing Material AR Hostaphan foil RN75 or equiva
lent
− Parting Film AR E−3760
− Abrasive Cloth AR Grade 200, 400
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 208)

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

CAUTION: ONLY USE A MECHANICAL PROCEDURE TO REMOVE THE SURFACE

PROTECTION. REFER TO CHAPTER 51−77−11, PARAGRAPH 4.D. FOR
FULL DATA.

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area.

Page 263
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Remove the damaged material. Cut the skin and the honeycomb into
a regular shape and chamfer the undamaged skin into an overlap
(Refer to Figure 208).

(c) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(e) Put some bonding and adhesive compound (masking tape) around the
outer edge of the overlap area (Refer to Figure 208). This will
help you to remove unwanted adhesive from the repair area.

(f) If total material thickness is removed, an aluminum backing plate

must be made to position the Nomex honeycomb core plug (Refer to
Figure 208).

(g) Put parting film over the aluminum backing plate. Use clamps to
attach the backing plate to the repair area (Refer to Figure
208).

(h) Make the Nomex honeycomb core plug (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
Paragraph 4.I.).
WARNING: SPECIAL MATERIAL (MICROBALLOONS) (MATERIAL NO. 05−057) IS
DANGEROUS.

WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) IS DAN

GEROUS.

(i) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).

(j) Fill the honeycomb cells, at the joint of the honeycomb material,
with the adhesive paste (Refer to Figure 208).

(k) Position the Nomex honeycomb plug (Refer to Figure 208).

(l) Let the adhesive paste cure for 24 hours at room temperature
(RT).

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.

Page 264
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(m) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(n) Find out the number of dry−fabric layers necessary to make the
room temperature repair (Refer to Figure 208).

(o) Get the correct dry−fabric material (Refer to Chapter 55−30−00,

Figure 115).

NOTE: Also refer to Chapter 55−30−00, Figure 115 for the pre−im
pregnated sheet data necessary to make the hot−bonded repair
(125 C° (257.0 F°)).
(p) Prepare the repair layers (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph
4.H.).

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.C. for data about

the preparation and laying−up of pre−impregnated fabric
sheet.
WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−001C) IS DAN
GEROUS.

(q) Apply a layer of bonding and adhesive compound (lamination resin)

(Material No. 08−001C) to the repair area with a brush or a
spatula.
(r) Remove the backing material from one side of the first repair
layer.

(s) Put the first repair layer in its repair position. Remove
wrinkles or air bubbles with a roller. Do this from the center
of the repair layer to the edges.
(t) Remove the backing material from the other side of the repair
layer.

(u) Do the steps (q) thru (t) for each repair layer necessary for
the room temperature repair. Cover the repair with a layer of
parting film.

(v) Let the bonding and adhesive compound (lamination resin) cure for
24 hours at room temperature under vacuum conditions.

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.
(w) After the cure time, remove the parting film, bonding and adhe
sive compound (masking tape) and unwanted adhesive from the re
pair area. Use abrasive cloth to smooth area of repair at out
side by grinding careful only outer cover−layer (Ply No. 0) and

Page 265
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

equalize surface to contour. Use abrasive cloth 200 grade first

and then finish with 400 grade.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(x) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(y) Remove the aluminum backing plate from the repair area.
(z) Do the steps (n) thru (x) to the other side of the repair (Re
fer to Figure 208).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(aa)Cut the edge of the repair to blend with the existing edge (Re
fer to Figure 208).

(ab)Do an inspection of the repair (Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Para

graph 5.).

(ac)Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter

51−75−12).

(3) Temporary Repair

CAUTION: REFER TO THE RELATED ALLOWABLE DAMAGE AND REPAIR LIMITS IN

CHAPTER 55−30−00, FIGURES 123, 125 AND 127, TO FIND OUT THE
TIME LIMIT FOR THIS TEMPORARY REPAIR.
ADVISE THE INSPECTION DEPARTMENT THAT A PERMANENT REPAIR IS
REQUIRED WITHIN THE FLIGHT HOURS (FH) GIVEN IN CHAPTER
55−30−00, PAGE BLOCK 101.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Remove the damaged material which is above the aircraft skin
surface.

(b) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vaccuum
cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

Page 266
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: SPECIAL MATERIAL (MICROBALLOONS) (MATERIAL NO. 05−057) IS

DANGEROUS.
WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) IS DAN
GEROUS.

(d) Mix the boding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).
(e) Fill the damaged skin and exposed honeycomb material with the
adhesive paste.

(f) Let the adhesive paste cure for 24 hours at room temperature.

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.

(g) After the cure time, use abrasive cloth to smooth area of repair
by grinding careful and equalize surface to contour. Use abrasive
cloth 200 grade first and then finish with 400 grade.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(h) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−052) IS DAN

GEROUS.
(i) Put a protective layer of bonding and adhesive compound (self
adhesive aluminum tape) (Material No. 08−052) over the repair
area. Smooth out from the center to remove air and press the
edges down tightly.
(j) Do an inspection of the repair.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 208)

(a) Remove the self adhesive aluminum tape and the filler.

(b) Do all of the repair steps in Paragraph (2) (Permanent Repair).

Printed in Germany
55−33−13 PagesFeb267/268
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes and Honeycomb Damage, Abrasions,

Scratches or Delamination in Zone ’J’
Figure 208

Printed in Germany
55−33−13 PagesFeb269/270
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

O. Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes and Honeycomb Damage, Abra

sions, Scratches or Delamination in Zone ’K’
NOTE: This repair is deleted and superseded by Paragraph 5.A. thru 5.G..

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−001C (Refer to

pound (Lamination Resin) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
pound (Epoxy Resin) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Special Material (Microbal AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to
loons) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Cleaning Agent AR Material No. 11−003 or 11−004
(Refer to Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−074 (Refer to
pound (Masking Tape) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−052 (Refer to
pound (Self Adhesive Alu Chapter 51−35−00)
minium Tape)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−008 (Refer to
pound (Polyesterfiller) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Epoxy Prepreg Glass Fabric AR LN29549−8.4321.1A−EP (Refer to
Chapter 51−33−00)
− Epoxy Prepreg Glass Fabric AR LN29549−8.4320.2A−EP (Refer to
Chapter 51−33−00)
− Epoxy Prepreg Carbon Tape AR DAN 1050 B40 (Refer to Chapter
51−33−00)
− Honeycomb Hexagonal Nomex AR LN29967 A2 (Refer to Chapter
Cured 51−33−00)
− Backing Material AR Hostaphan foil RN75 or equiva
lent
− Parting Film AR E−3760
− Abrasive Cloth AR Grade 200, 400
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 209)

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

CAUTION: ONLY USE A MECHANICAL PROCEDURE TO REMOVE THE SURFACE

PROTECTION. REFER TO CHAPTER 51−77−11, PARAGRAPH 4.D. FOR
FULL DATA.

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area.

Page 271
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Cut out the damage and chamfer the structure to the correct re
pair shape and dimensions.
(c) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(e) Put some bonding and adhesive compound (masking tape) around the
outer edge of the overlap area (Refer to Figure 209). This will
help you to remove unwanted adhesive from the repair area.
(f) If total material thickness is removed, an aluminum backing plate
must be made to position the Nomex honeycomb core plug (Refer to
Figure 209).

(g) Put parting film over the aluminum backing plate. Use clamps to
attach the backing plate to the repair area (Refer to Figure
209).

(h) Make the Nomex honeycomb core plug (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
Paragraph 4.I.).

WARNING: SPECIAL MATERIAL (MICROBALLOONS) (MATERIAL NO. 05−057) IS

DANGEROUS.

WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) IS DAN

GEROUS.

(i) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) and the special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057) to make an adhesive paste.

(j) Fill the honeycomb cells, at the joint of the honeycomb core
plug and the adjacent honeycomb material, with the adhesive
paste.

(k) Put the honeycomb core plug in its repair position (Refer to
Figure 209).

(l) Let the adhesive paste cure for 24 hours at room temperature
(RT).

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.

Page 272
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(m) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(n) Get the correct pre−impregnated fabric and tape material for the
hot−bond repair (Refer to Chapter 55−30−00, Figure 116).

(o) Prepare and then lay−up the repair plies for the hot−bond repair
on the outer surface of the trailing edge panel (Refer to Chap
ter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.C.).

(p) Install the vacuum−cure equipment over the laminate repair area.
(Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Figure 10).
NOTE: For the best results install a caulplate with the vacuum−
cure equipment. The caulplate will apply the heat and pres
sure equally over the repair area.

(q) Cure the repair plies under vacuum conditions (minimum 80 % vac
uum). Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.D. for full data.
(r) After the repair plies have cured, remove the vacuum−cure equip
ment from the repair area.

(s) Remove the backing plate and parting film. Do steps (o) thru (r)
for the inner surface of the trailing edge panel.
(t) Use abrasive cloth to smooth area of repair at outside by grind
ing careful only outer cover−layer (Ply No. 0) and equalize sur
face to contour. Use abrasive cloth 200 grade first and then
finish with 400 grade.

(u) If necessary apply bonding and adhesive compound (polyesterfiller)

(Material No. 08−008).

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(v) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).
(w) Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter
51−75−12).

(3) Temporary Repair

Page 273
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: REFER TO THE RELATED ALLOWABLE DAMAGE AND REPAIR LIMITS IN

CHAPTER 55−30−00, FIGURE 123, 125 AND 127, TO FIND OUT THE
TIME LIMIT FOR THIS TEMPORARY REPAIR.

ADVISE THE INSPECTION DEPARTMENT THAT A PERMANENT REPAIR IS

REQUIRED WITHIN THE FLIGHT HOURS (FH) GIVEN IN CHAPTER
55−30−00, PAGE BLOCK 101.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Remove the damaged material which is above the aircraft skin
surface.

(b) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(c) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

WARNING: SPECIAL MATERIAL (MICROBALLOONS) (MATERIAL NO. 05−057) IS

DANGEROUS.

WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) IS DAN

GEROUS.

(d) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).

(e) Fill the damaged skin and exposed honeycomb material with the
adhesive paste.

(f) Let the adhesive paste cure for 24 hours at room temperature.
NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.

(g) After the cure time, use abrasive cloth to smooth area of repair
by grinding careful and equalize surface to contour. Use abrasive
cloth 200 grade first and then finish with 400 grade.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(h) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

Page 274
Printed in Germany
55−33−13 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−052) IS DAN

GEROUS.
(i) Put a protective layer of bonding and adhesive compound (self
adhesive aluminum tape) (Material No. 08−052) over the repair
area. Smooth out from the center to remove air and press the
edges down tightly.

(j) Do an inspection of the repair.

(4) Permanent Repair after Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 209).

(a) Remove the self adhesive aluminum tape and the filler.

(b) Do all of the repair steps in Paragraph (2) (Permanent Repair).

Printed in Germany
55−33−13 PagesFeb275/276
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes and Honeycomb Damage, Abrasions,

Scratches or Delamination in Zone ’K’
Figure 209

Printed in Germany
55−33−13 PagesFeb277/278
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

VERTICAL STABILIZER TIP

1. Structural Arrangement

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Structural Arrangement Figure 1

1 Tip − Vertical Stabilizer 55−34−11

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−30−00, Page Block 001, where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−34−00 NovPage 1
01/06
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structural Arrangement
Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55-34-00 FebPage 2
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TIP − VERTICAL STABILIZER

1. Identification Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

− Tip Figure 1 (sheet 1)

− Tip − Ply Lay−up Figure 1 (sheet 2 and 3)
− Tip − Hoisting Point Figure 1 (sheet 4 thru 6)
− Filler − Ply Lay−up Figure 1 (sheet 7)
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55−30−00, Page Block 001, where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55−34−11 AugPage 1
01/10
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Tip
Figure 1 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-34-11 MayPage 2
01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Tip - Ply Lay-up

Figure 1 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-34-11 Pages 3/4
May 01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Tip - Ply Lay-up

Figure 1 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55-34-11 Pages 5/6
May 01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Tip − Hoisting Point

Figure 1 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55−34−11 NovPage 7
01/07
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Tip − Hoisting Point

Figure 1 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55−34−11 NovPage 8
01/07
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Tip − Hoisting Point

Figure 1 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55−34−11 Pages 9/10
Nov 01/07
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Filler − Ply Lay−up

Figure 1 (sheet 7)

Printed in Germany
55−34−11 Pages 11/12
Nov 01/07
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Tip, assy D55370028000 PB101

PB201
1A Tip, assy D55370028002 PB101 A20805K0840C
PB201
1B Tip, assy D55370028004 PB101 A20805K0840B
PB201
1C Tip, assy D55370036000 PB101 A22956P2798A
PB201
1D Tip, assy D55370036002 PB101 A36624K10584A
PB201
1E Tip, assy D55370036004 PB101 A151639K15020A
PB201
5 Filler Composite D55370058000
5A Filler Composite D55370058002 A20805K0840H
A32337K7963K
10 Protection, T42 D55370056202 B22956P2798
lightning strike ABS5044D004 0.4 (0.016)
15 Protection, T42 D55370056204 B22956P2798
lightning strike ABS5044D004 205
0.4 (0.016)
20 Protection, T42 D55370056200 A20805K0840J
lightning strike ABS5044A025 2.5 (0.098) A32337K7963J
A151639K15020A
25 Bush, hoisting
A55371593000 A20805K0840J
point assy A32337K7963J
A151639K15020A
30 Lug, hoisting NSA9006−12 A20805K0840F
35 Plug, mounting Composite D55370057208 A20805K0840J
A32337K7963J
35A Plug, mounting Composite D55370057224 A151639K15020A
40 Plug 5.2206.0 D53370217200 A20805K0840E
45 Retainer NSA936222−01 A20805K0840J
A32337K7963J
A151639K15020A
ASSY Dwg.: D55370010, D55370028, D55370037, D55370050

Key to Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−34−11 Pages 13/14
Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

FIN TIP − VERTICAL STABILIZER

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 101.

CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO

PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION 160500,

MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS ALLOWABLE DAMAGE IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001

AND AFTER MODIFICATION 160500.
CAUTION: THIS ALLOWABLE DAMAGE IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

1. General

This topic contains the allowable damage and related data for the fin tip
of the vertical stabilizer. This data is necessary for you to find the
correct repair procedure.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 101
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUCTION
of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data about all
weight variants and their required information for allowable damage
and repair applicability.

NOTE: For definition of allowable damage, refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For Damage/Repair Data Recording, refer to Chapter 51−11−14.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories, refer to Chapter

51−11−15.

2. Damage Evaluation
Before you repair the damaged structure you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−10 for data.

3. Delamination Damage
The two types of delamination damage which can occur to the composite
structure are as follows:
A. Impact Delamination

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−34−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

This is when the structure is hit by an object and separation is usual

ly caused between many of the plies.
B. Non−Impact Delamination

This is when separation occurs between two plies for a reason other than
when it is hit by an object.

4. The Distance Between Damaged Areas

There is a minimum permitted distance between areas of delamination and be
tween repair areas. The dimension for this distance is given in the appli
cable allowable damage and repair limits figure. If you have less than the
permitted distance between delaminated or repair areas, work on them to
gether as one large damaged area. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10 Para.3. to find
out how to measure the distances between delaminated or repair areas.
5. Repair Zones

The fin tip of the vertical stabilizer structure is divided into repair
zones. These repair zones show the zones of different structural importance
of the component. When you do a damage evaluation (Refer to Paragraph 2.)
you must refer to the repair zone data, shown in Figure 101 .
6. Allowable Damage

Allowable damage is damage that does not affect the necessary strength or
function of a component. You do not have to repair this type of damage. If
this damage has any rough or sharp edges, smooth these out with the cor
rect abrasive cloth. Replace the surface paint if necessary. The allowable
damage data for the fin tip is listed in Figure 102 and 103.

7. Repair Limits

The repair limits data gives the time limits in which to make temporary
and permanent repairs. These time limits are given in flight cycles (FC).
The repair limits also tell if it is necessary to make a room temperature
(RT) or hot−bond repair. To find the above given repair limits data appli
cable to a damaged area, you must know the subsequent data:
− the repair zone applicable to the damaged area,
− the area length or depth (as applicable) of the damage to the structure,
− the type of structure (for example, monolithic or honeycomb),
− the type of damage (surface damage, erosion damage, ..).
The repair limits data for the fin tip is listed in Figure 102, 103 and
Table 102, 103.

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−34−11 Feb 01/15
STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Repair
Zones
for
Fin
Tip
Figure
101

Page
103




55−34−11 Aug
01/05
Printed in Germany
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable and Repairable Damage Size for Surface Damage at Fin Tip in Zone A
Figure 102

Page 104
Printed in Germany
55−34−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable and Repairable Damage Size for Surface Damage at Fin Tip in Zones
B and C
Figure 103

Printed in Germany
55−34−11 PagesFeb105/106
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

DAMAGE REPAIRS MAXIMUM

TYPE OF RE REPAIR INSPECTION
TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE SIZE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR REFERENCE NUMBER OF
PAIR CATEGORY REQUIRED X = mm (in.) Y = mm (in.) DAMAGE
WITHIN NEXT 3500 FC
<1> PERMANENT A Chapter 51−77−12, Paragraph 3.A. NO 200 (7.874) − UNLIMITED
(FH not relevant)
TEMPORARY C IMMEDIATELY Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.I.
<2> WITHIN NEXT 3500 FC NO − 75 (2.953) 5
SURFACE DAMAGE IN PERMANENT A Chapter 55−34−11, Paragraph 5.A.
(FH not relevant)
ZONE A
TEMPORARY C IMMEDIATELY Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.I.
REFER TO FIGURE 102
<3> WITHIN NEXT 600 FC NO − 75 (2.953) 5
PERMANENT A Chapter 55−34−11, Paragraph 5.A.
(FH not relevant)
<4> PERMANENT A IMMEDIATELY Chapter 55−34−11, Paragraph 5.B. NO − 75 (2.953) 5
<5> PERMANENT IMMEDIATELY CONTACT AIRBUS NO
WITHIN NEXT 3500 FC
<1> PERMANENT A Chapter 51−77−12, Paragraph 3.A. NO 200 (7.874) − UNLIMITED
(FH not relevant)
SURFACE DAMAGE IN TEMPORARY C IMMEDIATELY Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.I.
ZONE B <3> WITHIN NEXT 600 FC NO − 75 (2.953) 3
PERMANENT A Chapter 55−34−11, Paragraph 5.A.
REFER TO FIGURE 103 (FH not relevant)
<4> PERMANENT A IMMEDIATELY Chapter 55−34−11, Paragraph 5.B. NO − 75 (2.953) 3
<5> PERMANENT IMMEDIATELY CONTACT AIRBUS NO
WITHIN NEXT 3500 FC
<1> PERMANENT A Chapter 51−77−12, Paragraph 3.A. NO 200 (7.874) − UNLIMITED
(FH not relevant)
SURFACE DAMAGE IN TEMPORARY C IMMEDIATELY Chapter 51−77−12, Paragraph 2.A.
75 (2.953)
ZONE C <6> WITHIN NEXT 600 FC NO 3
PERMANENT A Chapter 55−34−11, Paragraph 5.C. −
REFER TO FIGURE 103 (FH not relevant)
<4> PERMANENT A IMMEDIATELY Chapter 55−34−11, Paragraph 5.D. NO − 75 (2.953) 3
<5> PERMANENT IMMEDIATELY CONTACT AIRBUS NO
Allowable and Repairable Damage Limits for Surface Damage at the Fin Tip in
all Zones
Table 102

Page 107
Printed in Germany
55−34−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN MAXIMUM NUM

NUM
DAMAGE SIZE TYPE OF RE
RE REPAIR INSPECTION
TYPE OF DAMAGE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR REFERENCE DAMAGE "X" REPAIRS "Y" BER OF DAM
PAIR CATEGORY REQUIRED
mm  in.  mm in. mm in. AG
AGE
<6000 <9.300 NO ACTION A 200 7.874 − − 5
>9.300
>6000
and within next 600 FC
DEBONDING DAMAGE IN and PERMANENT A Chapter 55−34−11, Paragraph 5.A. NO − − 100 3.937 5
<34.87 (FH not relevant)
ZONE A <22500
5
>34.87
>22500 PERMANENT A IMMEDIATELY Chapter 55−34−11, Paragraph 5.B. NO − − 100 3.937 5
5
<2500 <3.875 NO ACTION A 200 7.874 − − 3
>2500 >3.875
DEBONDING DAMAGE IN within next 600 FC
and and PERMANENT A Chapter 55−34−11, Paragraph 5.A. NO − − 100 3.937 3
ZONE B OR C (FH not relevant)
<6000 <9.300
>6000 >9.300 PERMANENT A IMMEDIATELY Chapter 55−34−11, Paragraph 5.B. NO − − 100 3.937 3
TEMPORARY C IMMEDIATELY Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.I.
<5000 <7.750 within next 3500 FC NO 200 7.874 − − 5
PERMANENT A Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.H.
(FH not relevant)
>7.750 TEMPORARY C IMMEDIATELY Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.I.
>5000
and
and within next 600 FC NO − − 100 3.937 5
DELAMINATION AND <34.87 PERMANENT A Chapter 55−34−11, Paragraph 5.E.
<22500 (FH not relevant)
PERFORATION DAMAGE 5
IN
N ZONE
ON A >34.87
>22500
5 and
and PERMANENT A IMMEDIATELY Chapter 55−34−11, Paragraph 5.F. NO − − 100 3.937 5
<77.50
<50000
0
>77.50
>50000 PERMANENT IMMEDIATELY CONTACT AIRBUS
0
Allowable and Repairable Damage Limits for Delamination and Perforation Damage
at the Fin Tip in all Zones
Table 103

Page 108
Printed in Germany
55−34−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN MAXIMUM NUM

DAMAGE SIZE TYPE OF RE REPAIR INSPECTION
TYPE OF DAMAGE TO BE PERFORMED REPAIR REFERENCE DAMAGE "X" REPAIRS "Y" BER OF DAM
PAIR CATEGORY REQUIRED
mm  in.  mm in. mm in. AGE
TEMPORARY C IMMEDIATELY Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.I.
<2500 <3.875 within next 3500 FC NO 200 7.874 − − 3
PERMANENT A Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.H.
(FH not relevant)
>2500 >3.875 TEMPORARY C IMMEDIATELY Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.I.
and and within next 600 FC NO − − 100 3.937 3
DELAMINATION AND PERMANENT A Chapter 55−34−11, Paragraph 5.G.
<6000 <9.300 (FH not relevant)
PERFORATION DAMAGE
IN ZONE B >9.300
>6000
and
and PERMANENT A IMMEDIATELY Chapter 55−34−11, Paragraph 5.H. NO − − 100 3.937 3
<46.50
<30000
0
>46.50
>30000 PERMANENT IMMEDIATELY CONTACT AIRBUS
0
TEMPORARY C IMMEDIATELY Chapter 51−77−12, Paragraph 2.A.
<2500 <3.875 within next 3500 FC NO 200 7.874 − − 3
PERMANENT A Chapter 51−77−12, Paragraph 3.B.
(FH not relevant)
>2500 >3.875 TEMPORARY C IMMEDIATELY Chapter 51−77−12, Paragraph 2.A.
and and within next 600 FC Chapter 51−77−12, Paragraph NO − − 100 3.937 3
DELAMINATION DAMAGE <6000 <9.300 PERMANENT A
(FH not relevant) 3.D.(1)
IN ZONE C
>9.300
>6000
and Chapter 51−77−12, Paragraph
and PERMANENT A IMMEDIATELY NO − − 100 3.937 3
<46.50 3.D.(2)
<30000
0
>46.50
>30000 PERMANENT IMMEDIATELY CONTACT AIRBUS
0
PERFORATION DAMAGE
PERMANENT IMMEDIATELY CONTACT AIRBUS
IN ZONE C
Allowable and Repairable Damage Limits for Delamination and Perforation Damage
at the Fin Tip in all Zones
Table 103

Printed in Germany
55−34−11 PagesFeb109/110
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

FIN TIP − VERTICAL STABILIZER

1. General

These repairs are applicable for the Fin Tip of the Vertical Stabilizer.
The general repairs are listed in Table 201, the specific repairs are
listed in Table 202. The appropriate repairs are described in more detail
in the relevant Chapter or Paragraph.

NOTE: Refer to each repair to determine the repair applicability.

NOTE: For detailed definition of Repair Categories, refer to Chapter

51−11−14.
NOTE: For Damage/Repair Data Recording, refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

2. Safety Precautions

There are risks to you and other persons when you work with composite re
pair materials. To prevent risks, read and obey the warnings given below:
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.

WARNING: WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND FILTER MASK WHEN YOU CUT,
ABRADE OR DRILL COMPOSITE MATERIALS. THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MA
TERIALS CAN GET INTO YOUR LUNGS OR ON TO YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE YOU
INJURY. IMMEDIATELY REMOVE DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.
WARNING: CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.
WHEN YOU WORK WITH CFRP COMPOSITE MATERIALS, IMMEDIATELY REMOVE
DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRIC POWER ON
THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST ONLY USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIRS CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE REFER

TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN IN THE
INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH
3, IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−34−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER FIGURE REMARKS

Repair of Delamination or Impact De 55−30−00 201 −
lamination which does not show Cracks INACTIVE INAC
or Holes in Zone ’A’ TIVE
No further application
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks 55−30−00 202 −
and Holes in Zone ’A’ INACTIVE INAC
No further application TIVE
Repair of Abrasions or Scratches in 55−30−00 203 −
Zone ’A’ INACTIVE INAC
No further application TIVE
Repair of Impact Delamination, 55−30−00 204 −
Cracks, Holes and Honeycomb Damage in INACTIVE INAC
Zone ’A’ TIVE
No further application
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks 55−30−00 205 −
and Holes, Abrasions, Scratches or INACTIVE INAC
Delamination Damage in Zone ’C’ TIVE
No further application
Repair of Impact Delamination, 55−30−00 206 −
Cracks, Holes and Honeycomb Damage in INACTIVE INAC
Zone ’C’ TIVE
No further application

Table 201
4. Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE REPAIR

CATEGORY
Surface Repair in Sandwich Areas (Wet lay 5.A. − A
up)
Surface Repair in Sandwich Areas (Hot bond) 5.B. − A
Surface Repair in Monolithic Area (Wet lay 5.C. − A
up)
Surface Repair in Monolithic Area (Hot 5.D. − A
bond)
Repair in Sandwich Areas (Wet lay up) 5.E. − A
Repair in Sandwich Areas (Hot bond) 5.F. − A

Table 202

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−34−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE REPAIR

CATEGORY
Edge Band (Wet lay up) 5.G. − A
Edge Band (Hot bond) 5.H. − A
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, 5.I. 201
Holes, Abrasions, Scratches or Delamination INACTIVE INACTIVE
in Zone ’D’
This Repair is deleted and superseded by
Paragraph 5.A thru 5.H.
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes 5.J. 202
and Honeycomb Damage, Abrasions, Scratches INACTIVE INACTIVE
or Delamination in Zone ’D’ This
Repair is deleted and superseded by Para
graph 5.A thru 5.H.

Table 202
5. Fin Tip − Vertical Stabilizer − Repairs

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 203.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND AFTER
MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

A. Surface Repair in Sandwich Areas (Wet lay up).

NOTE: This repair is applicable to the surface of the fin tip, if the
honeycomb core is not damaged.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Repair Effectivity per Aircraft Type and Weight Vari
ant
Table 203
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−34−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−070 or 08−001C

pound (Laminating Resin)
− Special Material (Glass
Fabric)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Low Density Comp.)
(2) Repair Instruction
(Refer to Chapter 51−35−00) and
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(2))
AR Material No. 05−007 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (8))
AR Material No. 08−022 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00) and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (4))

Perform the repair procedure as given in Chapter 51−77−13, Para.

2.A.(2) without core restoration.
NOTE: For ply lay up/orientation refer to Chapter 55−34−11, Figure 1
(PB 001). Apply one additional ply on top of the repair plies
with 0/90_ orientation.

NOTE: Close core cells as given in Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 5. H.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 204.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND AFTER
MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

B. Surface Repair in Sandwich Areas (Hot bond).

NOTE: This repair is applicable to the surface of the fin tip, if the
honeycomb core is not damaged.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3.

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−34−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Repair Effectivity per Aircraft Type and Weight Vari
ant
Table 204
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Glass Prepreg AR AIK EHG−250−68−37 (Refer to

− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Low Density Comp.)
(2) Repair Instruction
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(9))
AR Material No. 08−022 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (4))

Perform the repair procedure as given in Chapter 51−77−13, Para.

2.A.(3) or 2.A.(5) without core restoration.
NOTE: For ply lay up/orientation refer to Chapter 55−34−11, Figure 1
(PB 001). Apply one additional ply on top of the repair plies
with 0/90_ orientation.

NOTE: Close core cells as given in Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 5. H.

Page 205
Printed in Germany
55−34−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 205.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND AFTER
MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

C. Surface Repair in Monolithic Area (Wet lay up).

NOTE: This repair applicable to the fin tip, if the surface is damaged
by erosion.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Repair Effectivity per Aircraft Type and Weight Vari
ant
Table 205
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Laminating Resin)
− Special Material (Glass
Fabric)
(2) Repair Instruction
AR Material No. 08−070 or 08−001C
(Refer to Chapter 51−35−00 and
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(2))
AR Material No. 05−007 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00) and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (8))

Page 206
Printed in Germany
55−34−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Perform the repair procedure as given in Chapter 51−77−12, Para.

3.D.(1).
NOTE: Restore only the number of plies, which are damaged by erosion.

NOTE: For ply lay up/orientation refer to Chapter 55−34−11, Figure 1

(PB 001). Apply one additional ply on top of the repair plies
with 0/90_ orientation.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 206.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND AFTER
MODIFICATION 160500.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

D. Surface Repair in Monolithic Area (Hot bond).

NOTE: This repair applicable to the fin tip, if the surface is damaged
by erosion.
NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Repair Effectivity per Aircraft Type and Weight Vari
ant
Table 206
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Glass Prepreg AR AIK EHG−250−68−37 (Refer to

Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(9))
(2) Repair Instruction

Page 207
Printed in Germany
55−34−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Perform the repair procedure as given in Chapter 51−77−12, Para.

3.D.(2).
NOTE: Restore only the number of plies, which are damaged by erosion.

NOTE: For ply lay up/orientation refer to Chapter 55−34−11, Figure 1

(PB 001). Apply one additional ply on top of the repair plies
with 0/90_ orientation.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 207.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND AFTER
MODIFICATION 160500.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

E. Repair in Sandwich Areas (Wet lay up).

NOTE: This repair applicable to the leading fin tip, if the skin and
honeycomb core are damaged.
NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Repair Effectivity per Aircraft Type and Weight Vari
ant
Table 207
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

Page 208
Printed in Germany
55−34−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−070 or 08−001C

pound (Laminating Resin)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Adhesive Paste)
− Special Material (Glass
Fabric)
− Honeycomb Core
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Low Density Comp.)
(2) Repair Instruction
(Refer to Chapter 51−35−00 and
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(2))
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (1))
AR Material No. 05−007 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (8))
AR Hexagonal Core 3.2−48 (Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(11))
AR Material No. 08−022 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (4))

Perform the repair procedure as given in Chapter 51−77−13, Para.

2.A.(2).

NOTE: For ply lay up/orientation refer to Chapter 55−34−11, Figure 1

(PB 001). Apply one additional ply on top of the repair plies
with 0/90_ orientation.

NOTE: Close core cells as given in Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 5. H.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 208.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND AFTER
MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

F. Repair in Sandwich Areas (Hot bond).

NOTE: This repair applicable to the fin tip, if the skin and honeycomb
core are damaged.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3.

Page 209
Printed in Germany
55−34−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Repair Effectivity per Aircraft Type and Weight Vari
ant
Table 208
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Glass Prepreg AR AIK EHG−250−68−37 (Refer to

− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Low Density Comp.)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Adhesive Film)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Foaming Adhesive)
− Honeycomb Core
(2) Repair Instruction
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(9))
AR Material No. 08−022 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (4))
AR Material No. 08−042A (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (6))
AR Material No. 08−047A (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (5))
AR Hexagonal Core 3.2−48 (Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(11))

Perform the repair procedure as given in Chapter 51−77−13, Para.

2.A.(3) from both sides.
NOTE: For ply lay up/orientation refer to Chapter 55−34−11, Figure 1
(PB 001). Apply one additional ply on top of the repair plies
with 0/90_ orientation.

NOTE: Close core cells as given in Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 5. H.

Page 210
Printed in Germany
55−34−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 209.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND AFTER
MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

G. Edge Band Repair (Wet lay up).

NOTE: This repair is applicable if either the edge, or the edge includ
ing honeycomb core is damaged.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Repair Effectivity per Aircraft Type and Weight Vari
ant
Table 209
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

Page 211
Printed in Germany
55−34−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−070 or 08−001C

pound (Laminating Resin)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Adhesive Paste)
− Special Material (Glass
Fabric)
− Honeycomb Core
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Low Density Comp.)
(2) Repair Instruction
(Refer to Chapter 51−35−00 and
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.(2))
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (1))
AR Material No. 05−007 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (8))
AR Hexagonal Core 3.2−48 (Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(11))
AR Material No. 08−022 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (4))

Perform the repair procedure as given in Chapter 51−77−13, Para. 2.F.

or 2.G.

NOTE: For ply lay up/orientation refer to Chapter 55−34−11, Figure 1

(PB 001). Apply one additional ply on top of the repair plies
with 0/90_ orientation.

NOTE: Close core cells as given in Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 5. H.

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 210.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 AND AFTER
MODIFICATION 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

H. Edge Band Repair (Hot bond).

NOTE: This repair is applicable if either the edge, or the edge includ
ing honeycomb core is damaged.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3.

Page 212
Printed in Germany
55−34−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Repair Effectivity per Aircraft Type and Weight Vari
ant
Table 210
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23 ’Weight Variant Information’ in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Glass Prepreg AR AIK EHG−250−68−37 (Refer to

− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Low Density Comp.)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Adhesive Film)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
pound (Foaming Adhesive)
− Honeycomb Core
(2) Repair Instruction
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(9))
AR Material No. 08−022 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (4))
AR Material No. 08−042A (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (6))
AR Material No. 08−047A (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00 and Chapter
51−77−11, Para. 6.B. (5))
AR Hexagonal Core 3.2−48 (Refer to
Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 6.B.
(11))

Perform the repair procedure as given in Chapter 51−77−13, Para. 2.F.

or 2.G..
NOTE: For ply lay up/orientation refer to Chapter 55−34−11, Figure 1
(PB 001). Apply one additional ply on top of the repair plies
with 0/90_ orientation.

NOTE: Close core cells as given in Chapter 51−77−11, Para. 5. H.

I. Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes, Abrasions, Scratches or De

lamination in Zone ’D’

NOTE: This Repair is deleted and superseded by Paragraph 5.A thru 5.H.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

Page 213
Printed in Germany
55−34−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−001C (Refer to

pound (Laminating Resin) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
pound (Epoxy Resin) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Special Material (Microbal AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to
loons) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Cleaning Agent AR Material No. 11−003 or 11−004
(Refer to Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−074 (Refer to
pound (Masking Tape) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−052 (Refer to
pound (Self Adhesive Alu Chapter 51−35−00)
minum Tape)
− Glassfabric (dry) AR (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
Paragraph 6.B.(8))
− Epoxide Prepreg Glassfabric AR LN29549−8.4321.1A−EP (Refer to
Chapter 51−33−00)
− Epoxide Prepreg Glassfabric AR LN29549−8.4321.2A−EP (Refer to
Chapter 51−33−00)
− Backing Material AR Hostaphan foil RN75 or equiva
lent
− Parting Film AR E−3760
− Abrasive Cloth AR Grade 200, 400
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 201)

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

CAUTION: ONLY USE A MECHANICAL PROCEDURE TO REMOVE THE SURFACE

PROTECTION. REFER TO CHAPTER 51−77−11, PARAGRAPH 4.D. FOR
FULL DATA.

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area.

(b) Remove the damaged material. Cut the skin into a regular shape
and chamfer the undamaged skin into an overlap (Refer to Figure
201).
(c) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

(d) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).
(e) Put some bonding and adhesive compound (masking tape) (Material
No. 08−074) around the outer edge of the overlap area (Refer to

Page 214
Printed in Germany
55−34−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Figure 201). This will help you to remove unwanted adhesive from
the repair area.
(f) If the damage depth is more than 4.0 mm (0.157 in.) you must
make a backing plate to the inside contour of the damaged area
of the tip (Refer to the manufacturer).

(g) Put parting film over the backing plate. Use bonding and adhesive
compound (masking tape) (Material No. 08−074) to attach the back
ing plate to the inside surface of the repair area (Refer to
Figure 201).

(h) Find out the number of dry−fabric layers necessary to make the
room temperature repair. Refer to Figure 201.
(i) Get the correct dry−fabric material (Refer to Chapter 55−30−00,
Figure 110).

NOTE: Also refer to Chapter 55−30−00, Figure 110 for the pre−im
pregnated sheet data necessary to make the hot−bonded repair
(125 C° (257.0 F°)).
(j) Prepare the repair layers (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph
4.H.).

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.C. for data about

the preparation and laying−up of pre−impregnated fabric
sheet.
(k) Apply a layer of bonding and adhesive compound (laminating resin)
(Material No. 08−001C) to the repair area with a brush or a
spatula.

(l) Remove the backing material from one side of the first repair
layer.
(m) Put the first repair layer in its repair position. Remove
wrinkles or air bubbles with a roller. Do this from the center
of the repair layer to the edges.

(n) Remove the backing material from the other side of the repair
layer.

(o) Do the steps 5.I.(2)(k) thru 5.I.(2)(n) for each repair layer
necessary for the room temperature repair. Cover the repair with
a layer of parting film.

(p) Let the laminating resin cure for 24 hours at room temperature
under vacuum conditions.

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.

(q) Remove the aluminum backing plate from the repair area.

Page 215
Printed in Germany
55−34−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(r) After the cure time, remove the parting film, masking tape and
any unwanted laminating resin from the repair area. Use abrasive
cloth to smooth area of repair at outside by grinding carefully
only outer cover − layer (Ply No. 0) and equalize surface to
contour. Use 200 grade first and finish with 400 grade.

(s) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).
(t) Do an inspection of the repair (Refer to Chapter 51−77−10 Para
graph 5.).

(u) Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter

51−75−12).
(3) Temporary Repair

CAUTION: REFER TO THE RELATED ALLOWABLE DAMAGE AND REPAIR LIMITS IN

CHAPTER 55−30−00, FIGURES 129, 131 OR 133 TO FIND OUT THE
TIME LIMIT FOR THIS TEMPORARY REPAIR.

ADVISE THE INSPECTION DEPARTMENT THAT A PERMANENT REPAIR IS

REQUIRED WITHIN THE FLIGHT HOURS (FH) GIVEN IN CHAPTER
55−30−00.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Remove damaged material which is above the aircraft surface.

(b) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

(c) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(d) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material
No. 08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).

(e) Fill the damaged area with the epoxy resin paste.

(f) Let the epoxy resin paste cure for 24 hours at room temperature.
NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.

(g) After the cure time, use abrasive cloth to smooth area of repair
by grinding careful and equalize surface to contour. Use abrasive
cloth 200 grade first and then finish with 400 grade.
(h) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(i) Put a protective layer of bonding and adhesive compound (self

adhesive aluminum tape) (Material No. 08−052) over the repair

Page 216
Printed in Germany
55−34−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

area. Smooth out from the center to remove air and press the
edges down tightly.
(j) Do an inspection of the repair.

(4) Permanent Repair After Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 201)

(a) Remove the self adhesive aluminum tape and the filler.

(b) Do all of the repair steps in Paragraph (2) (Permanent Repair).

Printed in Germany
55−34−11 PagesFeb217/218
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes, Abrasions, Scratches or Dela

mination in Zone ’D’
Figure 201

Printed in Germany
55−34−11 PagesFeb219/220
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

J. Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes and Honeycomb Damage, Abra

sions, Scratches or Delamination in Zone ’D’
NOTE: This Repair is deleted and superseded by Paragraph 5.A thru 5.H.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−001C (Refer to

pound (Laminating Resin) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
pound (Epoxy Resin) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Special Material (Microbal AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to
loons) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Cleaning Agent AR Material No. 11−003 or 11−004
(Refer to Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−074 (Refer to
pound (Masking Tape) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com AR Material No. 08−052 (Refer to
pound (Self Adhesive Alu Chapter 51−35−00)
minum Tape)
− Glassfabric (dry) AR (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
Paragraph 6.B.(8))
− Epoxide Prepreg Glassfabric AR LN29549−8.4321.1A−EP (Refer to
Chapter 51−33−00)
− Epoxide Prepreg Glassfabric AR LN29549−8.4321.2A−EP (Refer to
Chapter 51−33−00)
− Nomex Honeycomb AR LN29967A4 (Refer to Chapter
51−33−00)
− Backing Material AR Hostaphan foil RN75 or equiva
lent
− Parting Film AR E−3760
− Abrasive Cloth AR Grade 200, 400
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 202)

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

CAUTION: ONLY USE A MECHANICAL PROCEDURE TO REMOVE THE SURFACE

PROTECTION. REFER TO CHAPTER 51−77−11, PARAGRAPH 4.D. FOR
FULL DATA.

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area.

Page 221
Printed in Germany
55−34−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Remove the damaged material. Cut the skin and the honeycomb into
a regular shape and chamfer the undamaged skin into an overlap
(Refer to Figure 202).

(c) Remove unwanted material with a vacuum cleaner.

(d) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(e) Put some bonding and adhesive compound (masking tape) (Material
No. 08−074) around the outer edge of the overlap area (Refer to
Figure 202). This will help you to remove unwanted adhesive from
the repair area.

(f) If the damage depth is more than 2.5 mm (0.098 in.), you must
make a backing plate to the inside contour of the damaged area
of the tip (Refer to the manufacturer).

(g) Put parting film over the backing plate. Use bonding and adhesive
compound (masking tape) (Material No. 08−074) to attach the back
ing plate to the inside surface of the repair area (Refer to
Figure 202).

(h) Make a Nomex honeycomb core plug (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,

Paragraph 4.I.).

(i) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).

(j) Fill the honeycomb cells at the joint of the honeycomb plug to
the adjacent honeycomb material with the epoxy resin paste (Refer
to Figure 202).
(k) Put the Nomex honeycomb core plug in its repair position. (Refer
to Figure 202).

(l) Let the epoxy resin paste cure for 24 hours at room temperature.

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A..
(m) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(n) Find out the number of dry−fabric layers necessary to make the
room temperature repair (Refer to Figure 202).
(o) Get the correct dry−fabric material (Refer to Chapter 55−30−00
Figure 110).

NOTE: Also refer to Chapter 55−30−00, Figure 110 for the pre−im
pregnated sheet data necessary to make the hot−bonded repair
(125 C° (257.0 F°)).

Page 222
Printed in Germany
55−34−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(p) Prepare the repair layers (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

4.H..
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.C. for data about
the preparation and laying−up of the pre−impregnated fabric
sheet.

(q) Apply a layer of laminating resin (Material No. 08−001C) to the

repair area with a brush or a spatula.
(r) Remove the backing material from one side of the first repair
layer.

(s) Put the first repair layer in its repair position. Remove
wrinkles or air bubbles with a roller. Do this from the center
of the repair layer to the edges.
(t) Remove the backing material from the other side of the repair
layer.

(u) Do the steps (q) thru (t) for each repair layer necessary for
the room temperature repair. Cover the repair with a layer of
parting film.

(v) Let the laminating resin cure for 24 hours at room temperature
under vacuum conditions.

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.
(w) Remove the backing plate from the repair area.

(x) Do the steps (n) thru (v) to the other side of the repair (Re
fer to Figure 202).

(y) After the cure time, remove the parting film, masking tape and
any unwanted laminating resin from the repair area. Use abrasive
cloth to smooth area of repair at outside by grinding carefully
only outer cover − layer (Ply No. 0) and equalize surface to
contour. Use 200 grade first and then finish with 400 grade.

(z) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(aa)Do an inspection of the repair (Refer to Chapter 51−77−10 Para

graph 5.).

(ab)Replace the initial type of surface protection (Refer to Chapter

51−75−12).

(3) Temporary Repair

Page 223
Printed in Germany
55−34−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: REFER TO THE RELATED ALLOWABLE DAMAGE AND REPAIR LIMITS IN

CHAPTER 55−30−00, FIGURES 129, 131 OR 133, TO FIND OUT THE
TIME LIMIT FOR THIS TEMPORARY REPAIR.

ADVISE THE INSPECTION DEPARTMENT THAT A PERMANENT REPAIR IS

REQUIRED WITHIN THE FLIGHT HOURS (FH) GIVEN IN CHAPTER
55−30−00.

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(a) Remove the damaged material which is above the aircraft surface.

(b) Remove the waste from the repair area with a vacuum cleaner.

(c) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).
(d) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).

(e) Fill the damaged skin and exposed honeycomb material with the
epoxy resin paste.
(f) Let the epoxy resin paste cure for 24 hours at room temperature.

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.

(g) After the cure time, use abrasive cloth to smooth area of repair
by grinding careful and equalize surface to contour. Use abrasive
cloth 200 grade first and then finish with 400 grade.

(h) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(i) Put a protective layer of bonding and adhesive compound (self

adhesive aluminum tape) (Material No. 08−052) over the repair
area. Smooth out from the center to remove air and press the
edges down tightly.

(j) Do an inspection of the repair.

(4) Permanent Repair After Temporary Repair (Refer to Figure 202).

(a) Remove the bonding and adhesive compound (self adhesive aluminum
tape) (Material No. 08−052) and the filler.

(b) Do all of the repair steps in Paragraph (2) (Permanent Repair).

Page 224
Printed in Germany
55−34−11 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL
REPAIR
MANUAL

Repair
of
Impact
Delamination,
Cracks,
Holes
and
Honeycomb
Damage,
Abrasions,
Scratches
or
Delamination
in
Zone
’D’
Figure
202

55−34−11 Pages
225/226
Printed in Germany
Aug
01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

VERTICAL STABILIZER ATTACH FITTINGS

1. Identification Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

- Attach Fittings Arrangement Figure 1
1 Attach Fittings - Actuator 55-36-20
2 Attach Fittings - Control Unit 55-36-21
3 Attach Fittings - Miscellaneous 55-36-22
4 Hinge Arms - Vertical Stabilizer 55-36-42
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55-30-00 Page Block 001, where you can find the ModÈ
ification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55-36-00 MayPage 1
01/03
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Attach Fittings Arrangement

Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55-36-00 MayPage 2
01/03
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ATTACH FITTINGS - ACTUATOR

1. Identification Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

- Attach Fittings - Actuator AC1, AC2 and Figure 1
AC3
- Attach Fittings - Actuator AC1, AC2 and Figure 2
AC3 Cross-sectional Dimensions
- Attach Fittings - Actuator AC1, AC2 and Figure 3
AC3
- Attach Fittings - Actuator AC1, AC2 and Figure 4
AC3
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55-30-00 Page Block 001, where you can find the ModÈ
ification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55-36-20 MayPage 1
01/03
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Attach Fittings - Actuator AC1, AC2 and AC3

Figure 1 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-36-20 MayPage 2
01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Attach Fittings - Actuator AC1, AC2 and AC3

Figure 1 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-36-20 MayPage 3
01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

1 Fitting, AC1 Composite D55371190000 A20005K0003D

5 Fitting, AC2 Composite D55371191000 A20005K0003D
10 Fitting, AC3 Composite D55371192000 A20005K0003D
15 Plate, connecting Composite D55371197000 A20005K0003D
20 Plate, connecting Composite D55371197002 A20005K0003D
25 Plate, connecting Composite D55371197004 A20005K0003D
30 Bush 1.4546.9 D55371022202 Replace A20005K0003D
LN1013AN50
35 Washer 1.4546.9 D55371024200 Replace A20005K0003D
LN1013AN40
40 Bush 1.4546.9 D55371022200 Replace A20005K0003D
LN1013AN40
ASSY Dwg.: D55371187, D55371188, D55371189

Key to Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55-36-20 MayPage 4
01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Attach Fittings - Actuator AC1, AC2 and AC3 Cross-sectional Dimensions

Figure 2

Printed in Germany
55-36-20 Pages 5/6
May 01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Attach Fittings - Actuator AC1, AC2 and AC3

Figure 3

Printed in Germany
55-36-20 FebPage 7
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Fitting, AC1 T7451 D55371300200 A21733K1872B

DAN26F110
1A Fitting, AC1 T7451 D55371300202 A22111K2225A
DAN26F110
5 Fitting, AC2 T7451 D55371301200 A21733K1872B
DAN26F110
5A Fitting, AC2 T7451 D55371301202 A22111K2225A
DAN26F110
10 Fitting, AC3 T7451 D55371302200 A21733K1872B
DAN26F110
10A Fitting, AC3 T7451 D55371302202 A22111K2225A
DAN26F110
13 Bush 1.4548.4 D55371307204 A21733K1872B
LN668−32 A22111K2225A
15 Plate, connect T7351 D55371303210 A21733K1872B
ing AC1 DAN26H16 A22111K2225
20 Plate, connect T7351 D55371303208 A21733K1872B
ing AC2 DAN26H16 A22111K2225A
25 Plate, connect T7351 D55371303206 A21733K1872B
ing AC3 DAN26H16 A22111K2225A
ASSY Dwg.: D55371304, D55371305, D55371306

Key to Figure 3

Printed in Germany
55−36−20 FebPage 8
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Attach Fittings - Actuator AC1, AC2 and AC3

Figure 4

Printed in Germany
55-36-20 FebPage 9
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Fitting, AC1 T7451 D55371300204 A25484K4399E

DAN26F110
1A Fitting, AC1 T7451 D55371300206 A26500K4924D
DAN26F110
5 Fitting, AC2 T7451 D55371301204 A25484K4399E
DAN26F110
5A Fitting, AC2 T7451 D55371301206 A26500K4924D
DAN26F110
10 Fitting, AC3 T7451 D55371302204 A25484K4399
DAN26F110
13 Bush 1.4548.4 D55371307204 A25484K4399
LN668CB320
15 Plate, connect T7351 D55371303210 A25484K4399
ing AC1 DAN26H16
20 Plate, connect T7351 D55371303208 A25484K4399
ing AC2 DAN26H16
25 Plate, connect T7351 D55371303206 A25484K4399
ing AC3 DAN26H16
ASSY Dwg.: D55371304, D55371305, D55371306

Key to Figure 4

Printed in Germany
55−36−20 FebPage01/1510
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ATTACH FITTINGS - ACTUATOR

1. General
No Allowable Damage information is specified. In case of any damage contact
AIRBUS INDUSTRIE.

Printed in Germany
55-36-20 Page 101
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ATTACH FITTINGS - ACTUATOR

1. General
No General and/or Specific Repairs are specified. In case of any damage
contact AIRBUS INDUSTRIE.

Printed in Germany
55-36-20 Page 201
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ATTACH FITTINGS - CONTROL UNIT

1. Identification Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

- Attach Fittings - Control Unit Figure 1 (sheet 1)
- Attach Fittings - Control Unit Figure 1 (sheet 2)
Cross-sectional Dimensions
- Ply Lay-up Attach Fittings - Control Figure 1 (sheet 3 thru 5)
Unit
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55-30-00 Page Block 001, where you can find the ModÈ
ification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55-36-21 MayPage 1
01/03
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Attach Fittings - Control Unit

Figure 1 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-36-21 MayPage 2
01/03
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Attach Fittings - Control Unit Cross-sectional Dimensions

Figure 1 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-36-21 FebPage 3
01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ply Lay-up Attach Fittings - Control Unit

Figure 1 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55-36-21 MayPage 4
01/03
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ply Lay-up Attach Fittings - Control Unit

Figure 1 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55-36-21 MayPage 5
01/03
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Ply Lay-up Attach Fittings - Control Unit

Figure 1 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55-36-21 FebPage 6
01/02
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Figure 1 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55-36-21 MayPage 7
01/03
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

1 Fitting, control Composite D55371194002

unit
1A Fitting, control Composite D55371194006 01 A20365K0284
unit
1B Fitting, control D55371335002 01 A21733K1872C
unit assy
1C Fitting, control D55371335006 A25484K4399
unit assy
5 Fitting, control Composite D55371194000
unit
5A Fitting, control Composite D55371194004 01 A20365K0284
unit
5B Fitting, control D55371335000 01 A21733K1872C
unit assy
5C Fitting, control D55371335004 A25484K4399
unit assy
ASSY Dwg.: D55371020, D55371041

Key to Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55-36-21 MayPage 8
01/03
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ATTACH FITTINGS - CONTROL UNIT

1. General
No Allowable Damage information is specified. In case of any damage contact
AIRBUS INDUSTRIE.

Printed in Germany
55-36-21 Page 101
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ATTACH FITTINGS - CONTROL UNIT

1. General
No General and/or Specific Repairs are specified. In case of any damage
contact AIRBUS INDUSTRIE.

Printed in Germany
55-36-21 Page 201
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ATTACH FITTINGS - MISCELLANEOUS

1. Identification Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

- Attach Fittings - Miscellaneous Figure 1 (sheets 1, 2, 5
and 6)
- Z-force Fitting - Ply Lay-up Figure 1 (sheet 3)
- Spring Rod Fitting - Ply Lay-up Figure 1 (sheet 4)
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55-30-00 Page Block 001, where you can find the ModÈ
ification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55-36-22 MayPage 1
01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Attach Fittings - Miscellaneous

Figure 1 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-36-22 MayPage 2
01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Attach Fittings - Miscellaneous

Figure 1 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-36-22 Pages 3/4
May 01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Z-force Fitting - Ply Lay-up

Figure 1 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55-36-22 Pages 5/6
May 01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Spring Rod Fitting - Ply Lay-up

Figure 1 (sheet 4)

Printed in Germany
55-36-22 MayPage 7
01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Attach Fittings - Miscellaneous

Figure 1 (sheet 5)

Printed in Germany
55-36-22 MayPage 8
01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Attach Fittings - Miscellaneous

Figure 1 (sheet 6)

Printed in Germany
55-36-22 MayPage 9
01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Fitting T7351 D55371275200

DAN26H32 201
1A Fitting DAN2000T6 D55371278202 02 A21347K0792A
203
1B Fitting DAN2000T6 D55371278208 A25484K4399
209 A153007K15376A
5 Fitting T7351 D55371274200 A20005K0003C
DAN26H50
5A Fitting DAN2000T6 D55371278200 02 A21347K0792B
10 Fitting T7351 D55371277200
DAN26H35
10A Fitting DAN2000T6 D55371278204 A21347K0792A
10B Fitting DAN2000T6 D55371278206 A25484K4399
A153007K15376A
15 Fitting, spring D55371196000
rod assy
15A Fitting, spring D55371336000 01 A21733K1872C
rod assy
15B Fitting, spring D55371336002 A25484K4399
rod assy A153007K15376A
20 Fitting, Z−force D55371193000
assy
20A Fitting, Z−force D55371193002 01 A20364K0341B
assy
20B Fitting, Z−force D55371334000 A21733K1872
assy A153007K15376A
20C Fitting, Z−force D55371334000 A153007K15376A
assy
25 Fitting T7351 D55371275203 B21238K1248A
DAN26H32
30 Fitting T7351 D55371277201 B21238K1248A
DAN26H35
35 Fitting T7351 D55371275202 B21238K1248A
DAN26H32
ASSY Dwg.: D55371020, D55371041, D55371052

Key to Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−36−22 FebPage01/1510
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ATTACH FITTINGS - MISCELLANEOUS

1. General
No Allowable Damage information is specified. In case of any damage contact
AIRBUS INDUSTRIE.

Printed in Germany
55-36-22 Page 101
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

ATTACH FITTINGS - MISCELLANEOUS

1. General
No General and/or Specific Repairs are specified. In case of any damage
contact AIRBUS INDUSTRIE.

Printed in Germany
55-36-22 Page 201
Feb 01/02
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

HINGE ARMS - VERTICAL STABILIZER

1. Identification Scheme

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

- Attach Fittings - Hinge Arms valid beÈ Figure 1
fore Modification 21733K1872
- Attach Fittings - Hinge Arms valid afÈ Figure 2
ter Modification 21733K1872
- Attach Fittings - Cross-sectional DimenÈ Figure 3
sions valid before Modification
21733K1872
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55-30-00 Page Block 001, where you can find the ModÈ
ification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55-36-42 MayPage 1
01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Attach Fittings - Hinge Arms valid before Modification 21733K1872

Figure 1 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-36-42 MayPage 2
01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Attach Fittings - Hinge Arms valid before Modification 21733K1872

Figure 1 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-36-42 MayPage 3
01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Attach Fittings - Hinge Arms valid before Modification 21733K1872

Figure 1 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55-36-42 MayPage 4
01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

1 Arm, hinge BR7 D55371230000 PB101

assy PB201
1A Arm, hinge BR7 D55371230002 01 PB101 A20005K0003A
assy PB201
1B Arm, hinge BR7 D55371230004 01 PB101 A20365K0908
assy PB201
1C Arm, hinge BR7 D55371297000 01 PB101 A20805K0740
assy PB201
5 Arm, hinge BR6 D55371225000 PB101
assy PB201
5A Arm, hinge BR6 D55371225002 01 PB101 A20005K0003A
assy PB201
5B Arm, hinge BR6 D55371225004 01 PB101 A20365K0908
assy PB201
5C Arm, hinge BR6 D55371296000 01 PB101 A20805K0740
assy PB201
10 Arm, hinge BR5 D55371220000 PB101
assy PB201
10A Arm, hinge BR5 D55371220002 01 PB101 A20005K0003A
assy PB201
10B Arm, hinge BR5 D55371220004 01 PB101 A20365K0908
assy PB201
10C Arm, hinge BR5 D55371295000 01 PB101 A20805K0740
assy PB201
15 Arm, hinge BR4 D55371215000 PB101
assy PB201
15A Arm, hinge BR4 D55371215002 01 PB101 A20005K0003A
assy PB201
15B Arm, hinge BR4 D55371215004 01 PB101 A20365K0908
assy PB201
15C Arm, hinge BR4 D55371294000 01 PB101 A20805K0740
assy PB201
20 Arm, hinge BR3 D55371210000 PB101
assy PB201
20A Arm, hinge BR3 D55371210002 01 PB101 A20005K0003A
assy PB201
20B Arm, hinge BR3 D55371210004 01 PB101 A20365K0908
assy PB201
ASSY Dwg.: D55371020

Key to Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55-36-42 MayPage 5
01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

20C Arm, hinge BR3 D55371293000 01 PB101 A20805K0740

assy PB201
25 Arm, hinge BR2 D55371205000 PB101
assy PB201
25A Arm, hinge BR2 D55371205002 01 PB101 A20005K0003A
assy PB201
25B Arm, hinge BR2 D55371205004 01 PB101 A20365K0908
assy PB201
25C Arm, hinge BR2 D55371292000 01 PB101 A20805K0740
assy PB201
30 Arm, hinge BR1 D55371200000 PB101
assy PB201
30A Arm, hinge BR1 D55371200002 01 PB101 A20005K0003A
assy PB201
30B Arm, hinge BR1 D55371200004 01 PB101 A20365K0908
assy PB201
30C Arm, hinge BR1 D55371291000 01 PB101 A20805K0740
assy PB201
35 Fitting, hinge D55371235000 PB101
BR1−BR5 assy PB201
35A Fitting, hinge D55371235006 01 PB101 A20365K0908A
BR1−BR5 assy PB201
40 Fitting, hinge D55371235002 PB101
BR6 assy PB201
45 Fitting, hinge D55371235004 PB101
BR7 assy PB201
45A Fitting, hinge D55371235008 01 PB101 A20365K0908A
BR7 assy PB201
50 Plate, deflect
1.4544.9 D55371237200
ing BR1 DIN65389AG0−8
50A Plate, deflect
1.4544.9 D55371237220 A20805K0740
ing BR1 DIN65389AG0−8
55 Plate, deflect
1.4544.9 D55371237202
ing BR2 DIN65389AG0−8
55A Plate, deflect
1.4544.9 D55371237222 A20805K0740
ing BR2 DIN65389AG0−8
60 Plate, deflect
1.4544.9 D55371237204
ing BR3 DIN65389AG0−8
ASSY Dwg.: D55371020, D55371200, D55371205, D55371210, D55371225, D55371230,
D55371291, D55371292

Key to Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−36−42 NovPage 6
01/08
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

60A Plate, deflect
1.4544.9 D55371237224 A20805K0740

ing BR3 DIN65389AG0−8
65 Plate, deflect
1.4544.9 D55371237206
ing BR4 DIN65389AG0−8
65A Plate, deflect
1.4544.9 D55371237226 A20805K0740
ing BR4 DIN65389AG0−8
70 Plate, deflect
1.4544.9 D55371237208
ing BR5 DIN65389AG0−8
70A Plate, deflect
1.4544.9 D55371237228 A20805K0740
ing BR5 DIN65389AG0−8
75 Plate, deflect
1.4544.9 D55371237210
ing BR6 DIN65389AG0−8
75A Plate, deflect
1.4544.9 D55371237230 A20805K0740
ing BR6 DIN65389AG0−8
80 Plate, deflect
1.4544.9 D55371237212
ing BR7 DIN65389AG0−8
80A Plate, deflect
1.4544.9 D55371237232 A20805K0740
ing BR7 DIN65389AG0−8
85 Angle T351 A55371652226
ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
90 Doubler, BR1 Composite D55371236200 A20005K0003C
95 Doubler, BR2 Composite D55371236202 A20005K0003C
100 Doubler, BR3 Composite D55371236204 A20005K0003C
105 Doubler, BR3−BR4 Composite D55371236214 A20005K0003C
110 Doubler, BR4 Composite D55371236206 A20005K0003C
120 Doubler, BR5 Composite D55371236208 A20005K0003C
125 Doubler, BR6 Composite D55371236210 A20005K0003C
130 Doubler, BR7 Composite D55371238200 A20005K0003C
201
ASSY Dwg.: D55371200, D55371205, D55371210, D55371215, D55371220, D55371225,
D55371230, D55371293, D55371294, D55371295, D55371296, D55371297

Key to Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−36−42 NovPage 7
01/08
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Attach Fittings - Hinge Arms valid after Modification 21733K1872

Figure 2 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-36-42 MayPage 8
01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Attach Fittings - Hinge Arms valid after Modification 21733K1872

Figure 2 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-36-42 MayPage 9
01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Attach Fittings - Hinge Arms valid after Modification 21733K1872

Figure 2 (sheet 3)

Printed in Germany
55-36-42 MayPage01/0510
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/ OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE OR PARTNUMBER C REPAIR SB/RC

1 Arm, hinge BR7 T7451 D55371317200 PB201

DAN26F80
1A Arm, hinge BR7 T7451 D55371317202 PB201 A22111K2225
DAN26F80
1B Arm, hinge BR7 T7451 D55371317204 A26500K4924Q
DAN26F130 A29999K15400A
5 Arm, hinge BR6 T7451 D55371316200 PB201 A29999K15400A
DAN26F90
10 Arm, hinge BR5 T7451 D55371315200 PB201 A29999K15400A
DAN26F110
15 Arm, hinge BR4 T7451 D55371314200 PB201 A29999K15400A
DAN26F110
20 Arm, hinge BR3 T7451 D55371313200 PB201
DAN26F110
20A Arm, hinge BR3 T7451 D55371313202 A29999K15400A
DAN26F110 A26500K4924Q
25 Arm, hinge BR2 T7451 D55371312200 PB201 A29999K15400A
DAN26F110
30 Arm, hinge BR1 D55371321000 PB201 A29999K15400A
assy
35 Fitting, hinge D55371318000 PB201 A29999K15400A
BR1 BR2 BR5
assy
40 Fitting, hinge D55371318002 PB201 A29999K15400A
BR3 BR4 assy
45 Fitting, hinge D55371318006 PB201 A29999K15400A
BR6 assy
50 Fitting, hinge D55371318004 PB201 A29999K15400A
BR7 assy
55 Angle, bonding D55371256014 A29999K15400A
assy
60 Angle, bonding D55371256016 A29999K15400A
assy
65 Angle, bonding D55371256018 A29999K15400A
assy
70 Plate, cover T351 D55371311204
ABS5044A014 1.4 (0.055)
75 Angle T351 D55371311206
ABS5044A016 207
1.6 (0.063)
ASSY Dwg.: D55371020, D55371041, D55371052, D55371321

Key to Figure 2

Printed in Germany
55−36−42 FebPage01/1411
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

SPECIFICATION THICKNESS IN I ACTION STATUS

ITEM NOMENCLATURE AND/OR MM(IN.) AND/OR C OR (MOD/PROP)
SECTION CODE PARTNUMBER REPAIR SB/RC

85 Plate, cover T351 D55371311208

ABS5044A015 1.5 (0.059)
90 Angle T3511 A92491877200
LN9496A040
95 Angle T3511 A92491264200
LN9496A320
100 Angle T351 A55371652226
ABS5044A012 1.2 (0.047)
ASSY Dwg.: D55371321

Key to Figure 2

Printed in Germany
55−36−42 NovPage01/0812
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Attach Fittings - Cross-sectional Dimensions valid before Modification

21733K1872
Figure 3 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55-36-42 Pages 13/14
May 01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Attach Fittings - Cross-sectional Dimensions valid before Modification

21733K1872
Figure 3 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55-36-42 Pages 15/16
May 01/05
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

HINGE ARMS − VERTICAL STABILIZER

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT PARAGRAPH.

CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO

PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: OBEY THE GIVEN INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE WHICH LEADS TO THE
APPLICABLE INSPECTION PROGRAM DEFINED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPEC
TIONS, IF NECESSARY.

1. General
This topic contains the allowable damage and related data applicable to the
Hinge Arms BR1 thru BR7 of the vertical stabilizer. This data is necessary
to find the correct repair procedure.

NOTE: For definition of allowable damage, refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For the definition of repair categories, refer to Chapter 51−11−14.

NOTE: For Damage/Repair Data Recording, refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

2. Damage Evaluation

Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.
3. Allowable Damage Description/Criteria

INSPEC
TION
INSTRUC
CRITERIA/ PARA REPAIR
DESCRIPTION FIGURE TION
TYPE GRAPH CATEGORY
REF
ERENCE
(IIR)
A −
Allowable
Vertical−stabilizer 55−36−42
Damage Lim 6.A. 101
Hinge−Arms BR1 and BR7 B −1−001−0
its
0
Vertical−stabilizer
Corrosion 6.C. 103 A −
Hinge−Arms BR1 thru BR7
Allowable Damage Description/Criteria
Table 101

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

4. Type of Damage

The two types of delamination damage which can occur to the composite
structure are as follows:

A. Delamination with or without visible Cracks and Holes.

This is when the structure is hit by an object which results in separa

tion between the plies.
B. Superficial Damage

This is when the structure is damaged only on the external surface, with
no damage to the internal structure. Nicks and scratches are examples of
superficial damage.

5. Allowable Damage
Allowable damage is damage, that does not affect the necessary strength or
function of a component.

6. Hinge Arms − Vertical Stabilizer

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 102.
CAUTION: THIS ALLOWABLE DAMAGE IS APPLICABLE BEFORE MODIFICATION 21733.

CAUTION: FOR A320−200 ONLY, THIS ALLOWABLE DAMAGE MUST BE INSPECTED AT DE
FINED INTERVALS. THE INSPECTION INSTRUCTION REFERENCE (IIR) IS
55−36−42−1−001−00 AND IS DESCRIBED IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR INSPEC
TIONS (SRI) SECTION OF THE SRM. INFORM YOUR PLANNING DEPARTMENT
AND PROVIDE THEM WITH THE NECESSARY INFORMATION.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION

160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS ALLOWABLE DAMAGE IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001

AND 160500.

CAUTION: THIS ALLOWABLE DAMAGE IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

A. Vertical−stabilizer Hinge−Arms BR1 and BR7

NOTE: This allowable damage information is applicable for damage to the

vertical stabilizer hinge arms BR1 and BR7 and is effective as
follows:

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005,
A320−200 006, 007, 008, 009, 010, 011,
012, 013, 014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 102
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23. Weight Variant Information in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

For allowable damage limits, refer to Figure 101 and 102.

B. The column "Action or Repair" in Page Block 001 gives references for re
pairs. These are necessary if allowable damage limits are more than
shown.

Page 103
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Hinge Arms − Vertical Stabilizer
Figure 101

Page 104
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Damaged Areas for Hinge Arms BR1 and BR7 − Vertical Stabilizer
Figure 102

Page 105
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR
CRAFT TYPE GIVEN IN TABLE 103.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS ALLOWABLE DAMAGE IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001

AND 160500.

CAUTION: THIS ALLOWABLE DAMAGE IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

C. Corrosion on the Vertical−stabilizer Hinge−Arms, BR1 thru BR7

NOTE: This allowable damage information is applicable for corrosion to

the vertical stabilizer hinge arms BR1 thru BR7 and is effective
as follows:

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005,
A320−200 006, 007, 008, 009, 010, 011,
012, 013, 014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 103
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23. Weight Variant Information in the INTRODUC
TION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary data
about all weight variants and their required information for allow
able damage and repair applicability.

(1) For allowable damage limits, refer to Figure 103 and Table 104.

(2) For minimum allowable thickness, refer to Table 105.

(3) For trailing edge panel attachment flanges of hinge arm zones, refer
to Figure 104.

Page 106
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for Corrosion on Hinge Arms − Vertical
Stabilizer
Figure 103
Page 107
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage on Hinge Arms − BR1 thru BR7

Figure 104 (sheet 1)

Page 108
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Aug 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage on Hinge Arms − BR1 thru BR7

Figure 104 (sheet 2)

Printed in Germany
55−36−42 PagesAug109/110
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

TYPE OF DAMAGE LOCATION DAMAGE SIZE TYPE OF REPAIR REPAIR CATEGORY REPAIR REFERENCE TIME LIMIT INSPECTION REQUIRED
Refer to Chapter
Corrosion BR1 Angle <1> Permanent A 55−36−42, Page Block None No
201
Refer to Chapter
Corrosion BR1 Plate <2> Permanent A 55−36−42, Page Block None No
201
Refer to Chapter
Corrosion BR2 Plate <3> Permanent A 55−36−42, Page Block None No
201
Refer to Chapter
Corrosion BR3 and BR4 Plate <4> Permanent A 55−36−42, Page Block None No
201
Refer to Chapter
Corrosion BR5 thru BR7 Plate <1> Permanent A 55−36−42, Page Block None No
201
Allowable Damage Limits for Corrosion − BR1 thru BR7
Table 104
LOCATION BR1 BR2 BR3 BR4 BR5 BR6 BR7
2 mm (0.079 in) 2 mm (0.079 in)
NOMINAL THICKNESS 2.8 mm (0.11 in) 2.5 mm (0.098 in) 3 mm (0.118 in) 3 mm (0.118 in) 2.5 mm (0.098 in)
3 mm (0.118 in) 2.5 mm (0.098 in)
1.4 mm (0.055 in)
<1>
MINIMUM THICKNESS FOR ZONE A 1 8 mm (0
1.8 (0.071
071 in) 2.5
2 5 mm (0
(0.098
098 in) 2.5
2 5 mm (0
(0.098
098 in) 2.1
2 1 mm (0
(0.083
083 in) 2 mm (0
(0.079
079 in) 2 mm (0
(0.079
079 in)
1 mm (0.039 in)
<2>
1.2 mm (0.047 in)
<1>
MINIMUM THICKNESS FOR ZONE B 1 8 mm (0
1.8 (0.071
071 in) 1.8
1 8 mm (0
(0.071
071 in) 1.8
1 8 mm (0
(0.071
071 in) 1.8
1 8 mm (0
(0.071
071 in) 2 mm (0
(0.079
079 in) 2 mm (0
(0.079
079 in)
1 mm (0.039 in)
<2>
Minimum Allowable Thickness of Trailing Edge Panel Attachment Flanges of
Hinge Arms
Table 105
<1> Minimum Thickness for Angle, refer to the relevant Figure.

<2> Minimum Thickness for Plates, refer to the relevant Figure.

Printed in Germany
55−36−42 PagesAug111/112
01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

HINGE ARMS − VERTICAL STABILIZER

1. General

These repairs are applicable for the hinge arms of the vertical stabilizer.
The general repairs are listed in Table 201, the specific repairs are
listed in Table 202. The appropriate repairs are described in more detail
in the relevant Chapter.

NOTE: Refer to each repair to determine the repair applicability.

NOTE: For the definition of repair categories, refer to Chapter 51−11−14.

NOTE: For Damage/Repair Data Recording, refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

2. Safety Precautions

There are risks to you and other persons when you work with composite re
pair materials. To prevent risks, read and obey the warnings given below.

WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.

WARNING: OBEY THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS WHEN YOU USE CLEANING AGENTS,
ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND PAINTS. THESE MATERIALS ARE DANGEROUS.

WARNING: WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND FILTER MASK WHEN YOU CUT,
ABRADE OR DRILL COMPOSITE MATERIALS. THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MA
TERIALS CAN GET INTO YOUR LUNGS OR ON TO YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE YOU
INJURY. IMMEDIATELY REMOVE DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.

WHEN YOU WORK WITH CFRP COMPOSITE MATERIALS, IMMEDIATELY REMOVE
DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.
WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRIC POWER ON
THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST ONLY USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIRS CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE REFER

TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN IN THE
INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

3. Repair Scheme for General Repairs

REPAIR PROCEDURE CHAPTER FIGURE REMARKS

No General Repairs applicable − − −
General Repairs
Table 201

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

4. Repair Scheme for Specific Repairs

REPAIR
REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE
CATEGORY
Repair by Replacement of Hinge Fittings at
the Vertical Stabilizer Hinge Arms before 5.A. A 201
Modification 21733K1872
Repair for Lightning Strike Damage on Hinge
Arm BR1 and BR7 before Modification 5.B. A 202
21733K1872
Repair by Replacement of Hinge Arms and Hinge
Fittings BR1 thru BR7 at the Vertical Stabi 5.C. A 203
lizer
Repair for Trailing Edge Panel attachment
Flanges of Hinge Arms BR1 thru BR7 at the 5.D. A 204
Vertical Stabilizer
Specific Repairs
Table 202
CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE GIV
EN IN TABLE 203.

CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION 160500,

MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR PROCEDURE IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001

AND 160500.
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR PROCEDURE IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

5. Hinge Arms − Vertical Stabilizer − Repairs

A. Repair by Replacement of Hinge Fittings at the Vertical Stabilizer Hinge

Arms.
NOTE: This repair is applicable before Modification 21733K1872.

NOTE: You can use this repair information for all the hinge fittings.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

NOTE: This repair must be done with the rudder in situ.

NOTE: This repair information is valid as shown in Table 203.

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005,
A320−200 006, 007, 008, 009, 010, 011,
012, 013, 014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 203
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23. ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary
data about all the weight variants and their required information
for allowable damage and repair applicability.

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Hinge Fitting 1 Refer to Figure 201

2 Bonding Angle 2 Refer to Figure 201
3 Bonding Strip 2 Refer to Figure 201
4 Bonding Strip 2 Refer to Figure 201

− Sealant (Corrosion Inhabit AR Material No. 09−016 (Refer to

ing Fillet Consistency)
− Cleaning Agent (Methyl−
Ethyl−Ketone)
− Cleaning Agent (Trichloroe
thane Methly Chloroform)
− Structure Paint (Anti Cor
rosion Primer Polyurethane)
− Structure Paint (Polyure
thane Top Coat, Grey)
− Structure Paint (Wash
Primer)
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 201)
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−003 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−004 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−001 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−002 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−020 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)

(a) Ensure that the rudder is in neutral position. For this, make
sure that the rudder lower trailing edge is aligned with the
triangle of reference located on the fuselage tail cone.

(b) Remove or open the trailing edge panel 1 LH.

(c) Put the rigging pin 98D27207516160, part of Rigging Pin Set−Rud
der Control (98D27207516000) or the rigging pin 98D27207547000 in
the rudder cable quadrant (in accordance with the AMM Chapter
55−31−11).

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(d) Put the rigging pin 98D27207516330, part of Rigging Pin Set−Rud
der Control (98D27207516000) or the rigging pin 98D27207548000 in
the rudder control unit (in accordance with the AMM Chapter
55−31−11).

(e) Remove or open the trailing edge access panels where necessary.

CAUTION: USE THE SPECIAL FIXTURE, PART NUMBER 98D27207508000, FOR THE
SUPPORT OF THE RUDDER IN ORDER TO CHANGE THE HINGE FITTING
AT RIB 9.THIS Z−FORCE FITTING SUPPORTS THE VERTICAL LOAD OF
THE RUDDER.

(f) Remove the rudder hinge bolt (Refer to AMM Chapter 55−36−41).

(g) Remove the bolts that attach the hinge fitting to the vertical
stabilizer hinge arm.
(h) Remove the hinge fitting. Keep the bolts until the drilling op
eration is completed.

(i) Attach a new hinge fitting to the rudder with the rudder hinge
bolt.
(j) Align the hinge fitting with the hinge arm of the vertical sta
bilizer. Put the deflector plate in position and hold the assem
bly together with a clamp.

(k) Make a pilot drill guide that will fit into the original fasten
er holes.
WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

(l) Put the pilot drill guide in position and transfer−drill the pi
lot holes through the hinge fitting.

(m) Remove the pilot drill guide and complete the drilling. Deburr
the holes.

NOTE: Initially drill these holes to the original diameter (for

Fastener Hole and Drill Data refer to Chapter 51−44−21). If
all the holes are in the limits you can refit the bolts.
Tighten the bolts in the correct torque value of 0.6 daNm.
If there are holes in excess of the limits drill all holes
oversize (Refer to Chapter 51−44−21). You must then use HI−
LOK fasteners.

(n) To drill oversize holes, initially use the bolts to put the re
pair assembly in position and hold it. Transfer−drill, remove the
parts and deburr.

(o) Manufacture the bonding angles (Refer to Figure 201 sheet 2).

(p) Put the bonding angles in position.

(q) Transfer drill the fastener holes and deburr.

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(r) Remove the unwanted material with a vacuum cleaner and then clean
the repair area with the cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone)
(Material No. 11−003 or cleaning agent (trichloroethane methly
chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

NOTE: Ensure that there is no surface protection on faying sur

face between hinge arm, deflecting plate and bonding angles.
Abrade existing paint to blank material if necessary.
(s) Put the bonding angles in position and install the fasteners.

(t) Put the hinge fitting and deflecting plate with bonding strips in
position at the hinge arm and attach them together.

(u) Connect the bonding strips to the bonding angles.

(v) Apply a bead of sealant (corrosion inhabiting fillet consistency)
(Material No. 09−016) around the joint edges.

(w) Treat the repair area with structure paint (wash primer) (Materi
al No. 16−020).

(x) Apply structure paint (anti corrosion primer) (Material No.

16−001) to the repair area.

(y) Then apply structure paint (polyurethane top coat, grey) (Materi
al No. 16−002) to the repair area.

(z) Install the rudder hinge bolt.

(aa)Remove the special fixture, Part No. 98D27207508000 and the rig
ging pins

(ab)Re−install and close the trailing edge access panel.

(3) Temporary Repair

There is no temporary repair applicable.

Printed in Germany
55−36−42 PagesFeb205/206
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Fittings − Repair by Replacement

Figure 201 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−36−42 PagesJun207/208
01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Fittings − Repair by Replacement

Figure 201 (sheet 2)

Page 209
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 204.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR PROCEDURE IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001

AND 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR PROCEDURE IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

B. Repair for Lightning Strike Damage on Hinge Arm BR1 and BR7

NOTE: This repair is applicable before Modification 21733K1872.

NOTE: This repair must be done with the rudder in situ.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

NOTE: This repair information is valid as shown in Table 204.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005,
A320−200 006, 007, 008, 009, 010, 011,
012, 013, 014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 204
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23. ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary
data about all the weight variants and their required information
for allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 210
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Repair Strap 2 Refer to Figure 202

2 Repair Strap 2 Refer to Figure 202
3 Filler AR Refer to Figure 202
4 Bonding Angle 2 Refer to Figure 202
5 Bonding Strip 2 Refer to Figure 202
6 Bonding Strip 2 Refer to Figure 202

− Special Material (Microbal
AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to

loons)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com

pound (Epoxy Resin)
− Sealant (Corrosion
Inhabiting Fillet
Consistency)
− Cleaning Agent (Methyl−
Ethyl−Ketone)
− Cleaning Agent (Trichloroe

thane Methly Chloroform)
− Structure Paint (Polyure

thane Primer)
− Structure Paint (Polyure

thane Top Coat, Grey)
− Structure Paint (Wash
Primer)
− Abrasive Cloth
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 202)
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 09−016 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−003 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−004 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−001 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−002 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−020 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Grade 240

(a) Ensure that the rudder is in neutral position. For this, make
sure that the rudder lower trailing edge is aligned with the
triangle of reference located on the fuselage tail cone.
(b) Remove or open the trailing edge panel 1 LH.

(c) Put the rigging pin 98D27207516160, part of Rigging Pin Set−Rud

der Control (98D27207516000) or the rigging pin 98D27207547000 in
the rudder cable quadrant (in accordance with the AMM Chapter
55−31−11).
(d) Put the rigging pin 98D27207516330, part of Rigging Pin Set−Rud

der Control (98D27207516000) or the rigging pin 98D27207548000 in
the rudder control unit (in accordance with the AMM Chapter
55−31−11).
(e) Remove the trailing edge access panels where necessary.

Page 211
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Jun 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(f) Remove the existing fastener in the repair area.

(g) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone)

(Material No. 11−003 or cleaning agent (trichloroethane methly
chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

(h) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).
(i) Fill the holes caused by lightning strike damage with the adhe
sive paste.

(j) Let the adhesive paste cure for 24 hours at room temperature
(RT).
NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A..

(k) Use abrasive cloth, grade 240, to prepare a smooth surface.

(l) Manufacture the repair straps, filler pieces and bonding angles.
(m) Fix the repair straps, filler pieces and bonding angles in the
correct position and transfer−drill the fastener holes using of a
pilot drill guide.

(n) Drill the holes in the correct dimension (Refer to Chapter

51−44−21).
(o) Deburr the holes.

(p) Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone)

(Material No. 11−003 or cleaning agent (trichloroethane methly
chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).
NOTE: Ensure that there is no surface protection on faying sur
face between hinge arm, filler pieces, repair straps and
bonding angles.

(q) Attach the filler pieces and repair straps together with the
bonding strips and install the fasteners (Refer to Figure 202).
(r) Attach the bonding angles and install the fasteners.

(s) Connect the bonding strips with the bonding angles.

(t) Make a bead of sealant (corrosion inhabiting fillet consistency)

(Material No. 09−016) around the joint edges.
(u) Treat the repair area with structure paint (wash primer) (Materi
al No. 16−020).

(v) Apply structure paint (anti corrosion primer polyurethane) (Mate

rial No. 16−001) to the repair area.

Page 212
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(w) Then apply structure paint (polyurethane top coat, grey) (Materi
al No. 16−002) to the repair area.
(3) Temporary Repair

There is no temporary repair applicable.

Printed in Germany
55−36−42 PagesFeb213/214
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Hinge Arms − Repair for Lightning Strike Damage

Figure 202

Printed in Germany
55−36−42 PagesJun215/216
01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 204.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR PROCEDURE IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001

AND 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR PROCEDURE IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

C. Repair by Replacement of Hinge Arms and Hinge Fittings BR1 thru BR7 at
the Vertical Stabilizer

NOTE: For Replacement of CFRP Hinge Arms and Hinge Fittings are only
metal parts available.

NOTE: This repair must be done with the rudder in situ.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

NOTE: This repair information is valid as shown in Table 205.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005,
A320−200 006, 007, 008, 009, 010, 011,
012, 013, 014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 205
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23. ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary
data about all the weight variants and their required information
for allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 217
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

1 Hinge Arm/Hinge Fitting BR7 1 Refer to Figure 203

2 Hinge Arm/Hinge Fitting BR1 1 Refer to Figure 203
thru BR6
3 Shim Resin/Shim Plate AR Refer to Figure 203
4 Bonding Angle AR Refer to Figure 203
5 Bonding Strap BR1 thru BR7 AR Refer to Figure 203

− Special Material (Microbal
AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to

loons)
− Special Material (Fluoro

carbon Release Agent)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com

pound (Epoxy Resin)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com

pound (Masking Tape)
− Sealant (Sealant−Brush Con

sistency)
− Sealant (Corrosion Inhabit

ing Fillet Consistency)
− Cleaning Agent (Methyl−
Ethyl−Ketone)
− Cleaning Agent (Trichloroe

thane Methly Chloroform)
− Storage Preservation (Cor

rosion Preventive Compound,
Temporary)
− Storage Preservation (Cor

rosion Preventive Compound,
Temporary)
− Structure Paint Corrosion
Preventive, Temporary Pro

tective Compound
− Structure Paint (Polyure

thane Top Coat, Grey)
− Structure Paint (Flexible
Polyurethane)
− Structure Paint (Wash
Primer)
− Plastic Foil
− Industrial Alcohol
− Abrasive Cloth
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 05−020 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 08−074 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 09−013 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 09−016 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−003 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 11−004 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 15−005A (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 15−006 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−001 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−002 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−003 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Material No. 16−020 (Refer to
Chapter 51−35−00)
AR Local purchase
AR Local Purchase
AR Grade 240

Page 218
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Feb 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 203)

(a) Ensure that the rudder is in neutral position. For this, make
sure that the rudder lower trailing edge is aligned with the
triangle of reference located on the fuselage tail cone.

(b) Remove or open the trailing edge panel 1LH.

(c) Put the rigging pin 98D27207516160, part of Rigging Pin Set −
Rudder Control (98D27207516000) or the rigging pin 98D27207547000
in the rudder cable quadrant (in accordance with the AMM Chap

ter 55−31−11).

(d) Put the rigging pin 98D27207516330, part of Rigging Pin Set −
Rudder Control (98D27207516000) or the rigging pin 98D27207548000
in the rudder control unit (in accordance with the AMM Chapter
55−31−11).

(e) Remove or open the trailing edge access panels, if necessary re

move the vertical stabilizer tip or side fairings.

(f) Remove the trailing edge access panel support frame.

(g) Remove the electric, hydraulic and mechanical systems in the re

pair area when necessary (Refer to AMM Chapter 27−24−51 and
27−21−47).

CAUTION: TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE SURFACE PROTECTION, HYDRAULIC, ME

CHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS, THE AREA SURROUNDING THE
REPAIR MUST BE COVERED WITH PLASTIC FOIL AND MASKING TAPE.

CAUTION: USE THE SPECIAL FIXTURE, PART NUMBER 98D27207508000, FOR THE
SUPPORT OF THE RUDDER IN ORDER TO CHANGE THE HINGE ARM AT
RIB 9. THIS Z−FORCE FITTING SUPPORTS THE VERTICAL LOAD OF
THE RUDDER.
(h) Remove the bonding straps from the damaged hinge arm and hinge
fitting.

(i) Remove the hinge bolt (Refer to AMM Chapter 55−36−41).

(j) Remove the fasteners that secure the hinge fitting to the hinge
arm (Refer to Chapter 51−42−21).

(k) Turn the hinge fitting sideways out of the hinge arm.

(l) Remove the fasteners that secure the hinge arm to the sparbox
(Refer to Chapter 51−42−21).
(m) Carefully ease the hinge arm from between the sparbox flanges, if
necessary a plastic wedge may be used to assist in this step.

(n) Lower the hinge arm until you can take it out of the sparbox
flanges.

Page 219
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Feb 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(o) Remove the hinge fitting.

(p) Carefully clean the repair area using a plastic scraper.

(q) Manufacture a drill template (Refer to Figure 203).

1 Cut out a metal sheet in the dimension of the faying surface

of the hinge arm to the vertical stabilizer spar box.

2 Make a temporarily alignment mark on the original hinge arm as

shown in Figure 203.

3 Clamp the hinge arm and the drill template together.

4 Transfer drill the fastener holes from the original hinge arm
to the template (Refer to Chapter 51−44−21).
5 Transfer also the temporarily alignment mark to the drill tem

plate.

6 Unclamp the drill template from the original hinge arm.

(r) Make a temporarily alignment mark on the new hinge arm as shown
in Figure 203.
(s) Clamp the new hinge arm and the drill template together in the
correct position.

(t) Transfer drill the fastener holes from the drill template to the
new hinge arm (Refer to Chapter 51−44−21).
(u) Unclamp the drill template from the new hinge arm.

(v) Place the new hinge arm and new hinge fitting in their final
position.

(w) Secure the new hinge fitting to the new hinge arm with screw−
pins.

(x) Temporarily install the hinge fitting bolt to fix the assembly on
the rudder side.

(y) Lightly secure the new hinge arm to the sparbox with screw−pins.
NOTE: Do not clamp to tightly, movement of the hinge arm must be
possible.

(z) Remove the quick release fasteners from the trailing edge access
panels and vertical stabilizer tip in the repair area.

(aa)Temporarily install the vertical stabilizer tip and the trailing

edge access panels to check the position of the new hinge arm.
It will be necessary to remove one access panel to make any nec

essary adjustment.

Page 220
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Feb 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ab)Remove the trailing edge access panels and vertical stabilizer

tip.
(ac)Check the distance between the hinge arm and rear spar and spar
box flanges, to ascertain the thickness of shim material required
(Refer to Figure 203).

(ad)Remove the new hinge arm and new hinge fitting.

(ae)Cut the shim plates (Repair Material List, Item 3) to the cor
rect size to fill up the gap between the new hinge arm and
sparbox.

NOTE: A gap of 0.3 mm (0.012 in.) for the shim resin on step
(ar) must be maintained.
(af)Clean the repair parts with cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone)
(Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent (trichloroethane methly
chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

(ag)Apply a coat of the prepared bonding and adhesive compound

(epoxy resin) (Material No. 08−051) to the faying surfaces of the
new hinge arm. Position and secure the shim plates to the new
rudder hinge bearing. Allow the resin to cure. If necessary the
curing time can be accelerated by the application of heat (Refer
to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 5.E and 6).

NOTE: The maximum temperature must not exceed 70 C° (158.0 F°).

(ah)Abrade the shim material to the correct thickness.

(ai)Clean the repair area and repair parts with cleaning agent
(methyl−ethyl−ketone) (Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent
(trichloroethane methly chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).
(aj)Close the fastener holes in the rear spar with bonding and adhe
sive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No. 08−051).

WARNING: SPECIAL MATERIAL IS DANGEROUS.

(ak)Apply special material (fluorocarbon release agent) (Material No.

05−020) to the repair area on the rear spar and sparbox flanges.
(al)Apply a thick layer of bonding and adhesive compound (masking
tape) (Material No. 08−074) around the upper and lower edges of
the new hinge arm. This is to prevent the resin flowing off the
faying surface during the following work steps.

(am)Apply a thick layer of prepared bonding and adhesive compound

(epoxy resin) (Material No. 08−051) on the faying surface of the
new hinge arm to the rear spar.

(an)Place the hinge arm in its approximate position, avoid compres

sing the shim resin at this stage.

Page 221
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(ao)Place the new hinge fitting in its final position and secure
with screw−pins.
(ap)Place the hinge bolt in position, adjusting the new hinge arm as
necessary.

(aq)Lightly secure the new hinge arm with screw−pins, do not over
compress the shim resin or place the hinge bolt in shear.

(ar)Fill the gap between the sparbox flanges and the contact faces
of the new hinge arm with prepared bonding and adhesive compound
(epoxy resin) (Material No. 08−051). Do this by injecting the
shim resin throughout the existing fastener holes in turn and
ensuring that no air is trapped in the gap.
(as)Remove the excess shim resin and ensure that the fastener holes
are clean.

(at)Allow the shim resin to cure (Refer to Figure 203).

(au)Transfer drill the fastener holes from the sparbox flanges to the
new hinge arm.
(av)Drill the fastener holes to their final diameter. Refer to Figure
203 and Chapter 51−44−21.

(aw)Deburr the holes.

(ax)Install the fasteners wet with sealant (sealant−brush consistency)

(Material No. 09−013). Refer to Figure 203 and Chapter 51−42−21.

(ay)Transfer drill the pilot holes from the new hinge fitting to the
new hinge arm.

(az)Drill the fastener holes to their final diameter. Refer to Figure

203 and Chapter 51−44−21.
(ba)Deburr the fastener holes.

(bb)Install the fasteners wet with sealant (sealant−brush consistency)

(Material No. 09−013). Refer to Figure 203 and Chapter 51−42−21.

(bc)Temporarily install the trailing edge access panels and vertical

stabilizer tip for installation of the quick release fastener
mountings on the new hinge arm (Refer to Figure 203).

(bd)Transfer drill the quick release fastener holes from the trailing
edge access panels and vertical stabilizer tip to the new hinge
arm.
(be)Remove the vertical stabilizer tip and open the trailing edge
access panels.

(bf)Deburr the holes.

Page 222
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(bg)Install the quick release fastener mountings on the new hinge arm
(Refer to Figure 203) with sealant (sealant−brush consistency)
(Material No. 09−013).

(bh)Re−install the quick release fasteners in the trailing edge ac

cess panels and vertical stabilizer tip.

(bi)Re−install the trailing edge access panel support frame, as fol

lows:
1 Place the support frame in position.

2 Temporarily fix the support frame to the near hinge arm.

3 Temporarily fix the support frame to the trailing edge access

panels.
4 Clamp the support frame and the new hinge arm together.

5 Open the trailing edge access panels.

6 Transfer drill the fastener holes from the support frame to the
new hinge arm (Refer to Figure 203).
7 Remove the support frame.

8 Deburr the fastener holes.

9 Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone)

(Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent (trichloroethane methly
chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

10 Apply structure paint (wash primer) (Material No. 16−020) to

the fastener holes.

11 Apply structure paint (anti corrosion primer polyurethane) (Ma

terial No. 16−001) to the fastener holes.
12 Install the support frame with sealant (sealant−brush consisten
cy) (Material No. 09−013).

(bj)Clean the repair area with cleaning agent (methyl−ethyl−ketone)

(Material No. 11−003) or cleaning agent (trichloroethane methly
chloroform) (Material No. 11−004).

(bk)Install the new bonding straps (Refer to Figure 203).

(bl)Cover the bonding points with sealant (corrosion inhabiting fil

let consistency) (Material No. 09−016).
(bm)Apply a bead of sealant (corrosion inhabiting fillet consistency)
(Material No. 09−016) around the repair edges (Refer to Chapter
51−76−00) and allow the sealant to cure.

Page 223
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(bn)Apply structure paint (flexible polyurethane) (Material No.

16−003) to the sealant bead.
(bo)Clean the fasteners as required in Chapter 51−42−11, Paragraph
2.J.(2).

(bp)Apply structure paint (anti corrosion primer polyurethane) (Mate

rial No. 16−001) to the fasteners.

(bq)Apply structure paint (polyurethane top coat, grey) (Material No.

16−002) to the fasteners.

(br)Install the rudder hinge bolt.

(bs)Check the distance between the trailing edge access panels and
rudder shell flanges. When necessary apply shim plates (Repair
Material List, Item 3) to the contact faces of the new hinge
arm.

(bt)Apply storage preservation (corrosion preventive compound, tempo

rary) (Material No. 15−005A) or storage preservation (corrosion
preventive compound, temporary) (Material No. 15−006) to the re
pair area.

(bu)Re−install the vertical stabilizer tip (Refer to AMM Chapter

55−34−11) and trailing edge access panels (Refer to AMM Chapter
55−33−13).
(3) Temporary Repair

There is no temporary repair applicable.

Page 224
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair by Replacement of Hinge Arms and Hinge Fittings

Figure 203 (sheet 1)

Printed in Germany
55−36−42 PagesFeb225/226
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair by Replacement of Hinge Arms and Hinge Fittings

Figure 203 (sheet 2)

Page 227
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair by Replacement of Hinge Arms and Hinge Fittings

Figure 203 (sheet 3)

Page 228
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair by Replacement of Hinge Arms and Hinge Fittings

Figure 203 (sheet 4)

Page 229
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Repair by Replacement of Hinge Arms and Hinge Fittings

Figure 203 (sheet 5)

Page 230
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

CAUTION: OBEY THE REPAIR EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT TYPE
GIVEN IN TABLE 206.
CAUTION: ALL AIRCRAFT AFTER MODIFICATION 160001 OR AFTER MODIFICATION
160500, MUST REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT 017 APPLICABILITY.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR PROCEDURE IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160001

AND 160500.

CAUTION: THIS REPAIR PROCEDURE IS ALSO APPLICABLE AFTER MODIFICATION 160080.

D. Repair for Trailing Edge Panel attachment Flanges of Hinge Arms BR1 thru
BR7 at the Vertical Stabilizer.

NOTE: This repair must be done with the rudder in situ.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.
NOTE: This repair information is applicable for corrosion at the trailing
edge panel attachment flanges of the hinge arms BR1 thru BR7 and
is effective as follows:

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 000, 001, 002
000, 001, 002, 003, 004, 005,
A320−200 006, 007, 008, 009, 010, 011,
012, 013, 014, 015, 016, 017, 018
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 206
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23. ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary
data about all the weight variants and their required information
for allowable damage and repair applicability.
(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Cleaning Agent (Methyl− AR Material No. 11−003 (Refer to

Ethyl−Ketone) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Cleaning Agent (Trichloroe AR Material No. 11−004 (Refer to
thane Methyl Chloroform) Chapter 51−35−00)
(2) Repair Instructions (Refer to Figure 204).

(a) Ensure that the rudder is in neutral position. For this, make
sure that the rudder lower trailing edge is aligned with the
triangle of reference located on the fuselage tail cone.

Page 231
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(b) Remove the trailing edge panels where necessary (in accordance
with AMM Chapter 55−33−13).
(c) Clean the repair area using cleaning agent (Methyl−Ethyl−Ketone
or Trichloroethane Methyl Chloroform) (Material No. 11−003 or
11−004).

(d) Remove the fasteners and anchor nuts.

(e) Deburr the rivet holes.

(f) Blend out corrosion at trailing edge (in accordance with Chapter
51−74−00).

NOTE: For the minimum remaining flange thickness, refer to Chapter

55−36−42, Page Block 101.
(g) Perform a HFEC inspection of the affected area to make sure that
there is no corrosion (Refer to NTM Task 51−10−08−250−802).

(h) Perform surface protection before re−installation of the recep

tacles (Refer to Chapter 51−75−12).
(i) A minimum distance of 1.5 mm (0.059 in) between edge of the re
ceptacle hole and edge of attachment pins must be maintained. If
minimum dimension cannot be achieved, rotate receptacle clockwise
until the minimum thickness and edge margin requirement are ful
filled. Drill new rivet holes and reinstall the receptacle.
(j) The minimum distance between local rework and web must be 10 mm
(0.394 in).

(k) Unnecessary holes have to be plugged with fasteners ABS0218 or

aluminum−pins MS20426AD3 (Refer to Chapter 51−42−21).

Page 232
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Panel Attachment Flanges of Hinge Arms BR1 thru BR7
Figure 204 (sheet 1)

Page 233
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Trailing Edge Panel Attachment Flanges of Hinge Arms BR1 thru BR7
Figure 204 (sheet 2)

Page 234
Printed in Germany
55−36−42 Feb 01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

RUDDER

1. Modification/Service Bulletin List

This list shows the modifications and the Manufacturer Serial Number (MSN)
of the aircrafts which have these modifications. Modifications with the same
number, but with a different suffix letter show a different effectivity,
refer to column ’S’.

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

20005K0003 A320 0004−0011

20005K0003 A A320 0012−0027
20005K0003 B A320 0028−0219
20364K0261 A320 0012−0266,0268,0269
20516K1486 A320 0061−0266,0268,0269
20911K2155 A320 0156−9999
21733K1872 A320 0267,0270−9999
21733K1872 A A320 0267,0270−0479
21733K1872 B A320 0267,0270−0536
21733K1872 C A320 0267,0270−0273,0275−9999
22111K2225 A320 0400−0536
22111K2225 A A320 0400−3190
22171K2203 A320 0220−0266,0268,0269
24125K3546 A320 0537−9999
24125K3546 A A320 0537−0639
25484K4399 A320 0640−9999
25484K4399 A A320 0640−1705,1710−1725
25484K4399 B A320 0640−2439
25775K4741 A320 0480−1326
27775K6005 A320 1327−9999
27775K6005 A A320 1327−1705,1710−1725
27775K6005 B A320 1708,1728−9999
27775K6005 C A320 1708,1728−1882,1884−1894
27775K6005 D A320 1883,1895−9999
27775K6005 E A320 1883,1895−2439
27960K10907 A320 3215−9999
27960K10907 A A320 3215−5796,5801−9999
27960K10907 B A320 3215−6178,6182−6187
29998K3247 A320 0480−0536
31448K7354 A320 1708,1728−1879,1885−1894
32493K8013 A320 1883,1895−9999
32493K8013 A A320 1883,1895−2439
33920K8924 A320 0274 SB55−1030
35242K9942 A320 2441−9999

Printed in Germany
55−40−00 NovPage 1
01/14
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MODIFICATION/ EFFECTIVITY SERVICE

PROPOSAL S A/C (MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER) BULLETIN

35242K9942 A A320 2441−3213

35242K9942 B A320 2441−3567
36570K10590 A320 3192−9999
38552K11749 A320 3568−9999
38552K11749 A A320 3568−4651,4653−4676,4711
151767K15000 A320 4652,4677−4709,4712−5181,5183−9999
151767K15000 A A320 0640−5796,5801−9999
151767K15000 B A320 4652,4677−4709,4712−5796,5801−9999
151767K15000 C A320 4652,4677−4709,4712−6178,6182−6187
151767K15000 D A320 4652,4677−4709,4712−6029,6032−6039,
6043−6048,6051,6054,6058,6060,6064,
6066
155892K17414 A320 6180, 6188−9999
155892K17414 A A320 6030,6041,6050,6055,6057,6061,6062,
6069−9999

Printed in Germany
55−40−00 NovPage 2
01/14
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Structural Arrangement
Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−40−00 Pages 3/4
Nov 01/08
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

RUDDER MAIN STRUCTURE

1. Structural Arrangement

ITEM NOMENCLATURE REFER TO

- Rudder Main Structure Figure 1
1 Ribs 55-41-12
2 Rudder Assy 55-41-13
3 Miscellaneous Structure 55-41-19

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 55-40-00, Page Block 001, where you can find the
Modification/Service Bulletin List.

Printed in Germany
55-41-00 FebPage 1
01/05
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rudder − Main Structure

Figure 1

Printed in Germany
55−41−00 FebPage 2
01/15
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

RUDDER − MAIN STRUCTURE

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIRCRAFT
TYPE GIVEN IN THE RELEVANT PARAGRAPH.

CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE

REFER TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN IN
THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: FOR ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO

PARAGRAPH 3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

1. General
This topic contains the allowable damage and related data applicable to the
main structure of the rudder.

NOTE: For definition of allowable damage refer to Chapter 51−11−11.

NOTE: For the definition of repair categories, refer to Chapter 51−11−14.

NOTE: For Damage/Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

2. Damage Evaluation

Before you repair the damaged structure you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

3. Delamination Damage
The two types of delamination damage which can occur to the composite
structure are as follows:

A. Impact Delamination

This is when the structure is hit by an object and separation is usual

ly caused between many of the plies.
B. Non−Impact Delamination

This is when separation occurs between two plies for a reason other than
when it is hit by an object.

4. The Distance Between Damaged Areas

There is a minimum permitted distance between areas of delamination and be

tween repair areas. The dimension for this distance is given in the appli

cable allowable damage and repair limits figure. If you have less than the
permitted distance between delaminated or repair areas, work on them to

Page 101
Printed in Germany
55−41−00 Feb 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

gether as one large damaged area. Refer to Figure 102 to find out how to
measure the distances between delaminated or repaired areas.
5. Repair Zones

Each of the components of the rudder main structure is divided into repair
zones. These repair zones show the zones of different structural importance
of the component. When you do a damage evaluation (Refer to Paragraph 2.)
you must refer to the repair zone data. The repair zones data for the rud

der main structure is given in Figures 103, 110 and 114.

6. Allowable Damage

Allowable damage is damage that does not affect the necessary strength or
function of a component. You do not have to repair this type of damage. If
this damage has any rough or sharp edges, smooth these out with the cor

rect abrasive cloth. Replace the surface paint if necessary.

7. Repair Limits

The repair limits data gives the time limits in which to make temporary
and permanent repairs. These time limits are given in flight cycles (FC) or
flight hours (FH). The repair limits also tell if it is necessary to make
a room temperature (RT) or hot−bond repair. To find the above given repair
limits data applicable to a damaged area, you must know the subsequent
data:
− The repair zone applicable to the damaged area
− The area, length or depth (as applicable) of the damage to the structure
− The type of structure (for example, monolithic or honeycomb)
− The type of damage (for example, abrasion, delamination, scratch).
For the allowable damage data and the repair limits for the rudder main
structure, refer to Table 101.

Page 102
Printed in Germany
55−41−00 Feb 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

8. Allowable Damage Description/Criteria

REPAIR
ITEM <1> DESCRIPTION CRITERIA/TYPE PARAGRAPH
CATEGORY
Skin Panels
This allowable damage
data is inactive
since revision dated Allowable Damage and 9.A.
1 −
Feb 01/12, it has Repair Limits INACTIVE
been moved to Chapter
55−41−13, Page Block
101.
Spar
This allowable damage
data is inactive
since revision dated Allowable Damage and 9.B.
2 −
Feb 01/12, it has Repair Limits INACTIVE
been moved to Chapter
55−41−18, Page Block
101.

Table 101

Page 103
Printed in Germany
55−41−00 Feb 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

REPAIR
ITEM <1> DESCRIPTION CRITERIA/TYPE PARAGRAPH
CATEGORY
Lower Rib
This allowable damage
data is inactive
3 since revision dated
Feb 01/12, it has
been moved to Chapter
55−41−12, Page Block
101. Allowable Damage
g and 9.C.
A C
A,
Upper Rib <2> Repair Limits INACTIVE
This allowable damage
data is inactive
4 since revision dated
Feb 01/12, it has
been moved to Chapter
55−41−12, Page Block
101.

Table 101
<1> Refer to Figure 101.

<2> Only effective before Modification 24125K3546.

NOTE: For the effectivity of the given Modification, refer to Modification

Service Bulletin List in Chapter 55−40−00 Page Block 001.

NOTE: You must also refer to the repair zones data before you can find the
allowable damage and repair limits applicable to the damaged structure.

Page 104
Printed in Germany
55−41−00 Feb 01/12
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rudder Main Structure

Figure 101

Page 105
Printed in Germany
55−41−00 Feb 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

How to measure the Distance between Damaged Areas

Figure 102

Page 106
Printed in Germany
55−41−00 Feb 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

9. Rudder Main Structure − Allowable Damage

A. Skin Panels
NOTE: This allowable damage data is inactive since revision dated Feb
01/12, it has been moved to Chapter 55−41−13, Page Block 101.

These are the allowable damage data and repair limits applicable for the
rudder skin panels.

NOTE: Refer to the introduction for possible weight variant exclusions.

NOTE: Refer to Figure 102 to find out how to measure the distances be

tween delaminated or repaired areas.

(1) For scratches and/or abrasions refer to Figures 104 and 105.

(2) For impact and other delaminations without visible cracks and/or
holes, refer to Figures 106 and 107.

(3) For impact delaminations with cracks and/or holes, refer to Figures
108 and 109.

Page 107
Printed in Germany
55−41−00 Feb 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rudder Skin Panels − Repair Zones

Figure 103

Page 108
Printed in Germany
55−41−00 Feb 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Rudder Skin Panels Repair Zones
B, G, H and J
Figure 104

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Rudder Skin Panels Repair Zones L
and F
Figure 105

Page 109
Printed in Germany
55−41−00 Feb 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Rudder Skin Panels Repair Zones
B, G, H and J
Figure 106

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Rudder Skin Panels Repair Zones F
and L
Figure 107

Page 110
Printed in Germany
55−41−00 Feb 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Rudder Skin Panels Repair Zones
B, G, H and J
Figure 108

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Rudder Skin Panels Repair Zones F
and L
Figure 109

Page 111
Printed in Germany
55−41−00 Feb 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

B. Spar

NOTE: This allowable damage data is inactive since revision dated Feb
01/12, it has been moved to Chapter 55−41−18, Page Block 101.

These are the allowable damage data and repair limits applicable for the
rudder spar.

NOTE: Refer to the introduction for possible weight variant exclusions.

NOTE: Refer to Figure 102 to find out how to measure the distances be

tween delaminated or repaired areas.

(1) For scratches and/or abrasions refer to Figure 111.

(2) For impact and other delaminations without visible cracks and/or
holes, refer to Figure 112.
(3) For impact delaminations with cracks and/or holes, refer to Figure
113.

Page 112
Printed in Germany
55−41−00 Feb 01/12
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rudder Spar − Repair Zones

Figure 110

Page 113
Printed in Germany
55−41−00 Feb 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Rudder Spar Repair Zones G, H
Figure 111

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Rudder Spar Repair Zones G and H
Figure 112

Page 114
Printed in Germany
55−41−00 Feb 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Rudder Spar Repair Zones G and H
Figure 113

CAUTION: OBEY THE ALLOWABLE DAMAGE EFFECTIVITY PER WEIGHT VARIANT AND AIR

CRAFT TYPE GIVEN TABLE 102.

C. Ribs
NOTE: This allowable damage data is inactive since revision dated Feb
01/12, it has been moved to Chapter 55−41−12, Page Block 101.

This is the allowable damage data and repair limits applicable for the
upper and lower rudder ribs.

NOTE: Refer to Figure 102 to find out how to measure the distances be

tween delaminated or repaired areas.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT VARIANT

A320−100 ALL
A320−200 ALL
Effectivity per Weight Variant and Aircraft Type
Table 102
NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 23. ’Weight Variant Information’ in the
INTRODUCTION of the SRM. Tables in the subparagraphs give necessary
data about all weight variants and their required information for
allowable damage and repair applicability.

Page 115
Printed in Germany
55−41−00 Feb 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) For the allowable damage data and repair limits for the lower rudder
rib, refer to Figure 115 and Tables 103 and 104.

Page 116
Printed in Germany
55−41−00 Feb 01/12
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Rudder Rib − Repair Zones

Figure 114

Page 117
Printed in Germany
55−41−00 Feb 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Allowable Damage and Repair Limits for the Rudder Rib Repair Zone H
Figure 115

Page 118
Printed in Germany
55−41−00 Feb 01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN

DAMAGE REPAIR TYPE OF INSPECTION MAXIMUM NUMBER
TYPE OF DAMAGE TIME LIMIT REPAIR REFERENCE DAMAGE X DAMAGE Y
SIZE CATEGORY REPAIR REQUIRED OF DAMAGE
mm in. mm in.
within next 3500 FC
<1> A Permanent Chapter 51−77−12, Paragraph 3.A. NO 200 7.874 − − unlimited
(FH not relevant)
Surface Damage C Temporary immediately Chapter 51−77−13, Paragraph 2.I.
in Zone H Refer <2> within next 150 FC NO − − 75 2.953 5
A Permanent Chapter 55−41−12 Page Block 201, Paragraph 5.A.
to Figure 115 (FH not relevant)
<3> A Permanent immediately Chapter 55−41−12 Page Block 201, Paragraph 5.A. NO − − 75 2.953 5
<4> − Permanent immediately Refer to Airbus − − − − − −
Allowable and Repairable Damage Limits for Surface Damage at the Rudder Rib
in all Zones
Table 103

Printed in Germany
55−41−00 PagesFeb119/120
01/12
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

Printed in Germany
55−41−00 PagesFeb121/122
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN

REPAIR TYPE OF INSPECTION MAXIMUM NUMBER
TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE SIZE TIME LIMIT REPAIR REFERENCE DAMAGE X DAMAGE Y
CATEGORY REPAIR REQUIRED OF DAMAGE
mm in. mm in.
within next 3500 FC
<350 mm
(0.543 in.
) A Permanent Chapter 51−77−12, Paragraph 3.B. NO 200 7.874 − − 5
(FH not relevant)
>350 mm
(0.543
in.
) and within next 1500 FC Chapter 55−41−12 Page Block 201,
Delamination A Permanent NO − − 100 3.937 5
(FH not relevant) Paragraph 5.B.
and Perforation <625 mm
(0.969 in.
)
Damage in Zone >625 mm
(0.969
H Refer to in.
) and within next 150 FC Chapter 55−41−12 Page Block 201,
Figure 115 A Permanent NO − − 100 3.937 5
<2500 mm
(3.875 (FH not relevant) Paragraph 5.B.
in.
)
>2500 mm
(3.875
− Permanent immediately Refer to Airbus − − − − − −
in.
)
Allowable and Repairable Damage Limits for Delamination and Perforation Damage
at the Rudder Rib in Zone H
Table 104

Printed in Germany
55−41−00 PagesFeb123/124
01/12
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

RUDDER − MAIN STRUCTURE

1. General

This topic contains general repair procedures for the main structure of the
rudder. Refer to Table 201 to find the repair scheme for these repair pro

cedures. For general repair data applicable to composite structures, refer
to Chapter 51−77−00. The appropriate repairs are described in more detail
in the relevant Chapter.

NOTE: Refer to each repair to determine the repair applicability

NOTE: For Damage/Repair Data Recording refer to Chapter 51−11−15.

2. Safety Precautions

There are risks to you and other persons when you work with composite re

pair materials. To prevent risks, read and obey the warnings given below.

WARNING: OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS WHEN YOU USE CLEANING AGENTS,
ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND PAINTS. THESE MATERIALS ARE DANGEROUS.
WARNING: WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND FILTER MASK WHEN YOU CUT,
ABRADE OR DRILL COMPOSITE MATERIALS. THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MA

TERIALS CAN GET INTO YOUR LUNGS OR ONTO YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE YOU
INJURY. IMMEDIATELY REMOVE DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.

WHEN YOU WORK WITH CFRP COMPOSITE MATERIALS, IMMEDIATELY REMOVE
DUST WITH A VACUUM CLEANER.

WARNING: USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN YOU USE MAINS ELECTRIC POWER ON
THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST ONLY USE POWER TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE
EXPLOSION PROOF.
CAUTION: FOR REPAIRS CONTAINING NO WEIGHT VARIANT EFFECTIVITY TABLE REFER
TO THE WEIGHT VARIANT EXCLUSION TABLE, PARAGRAPH 23, GIVEN IN THE
INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.

CAUTION: FOR REPAIR EFFECTIVITY RELATED TO AIRCRAFT TYPE REFER TO PARAGRAPH

3, GIVEN IN THE INTRODUCTION OF THE SRM.
3. Repair Scheme

REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE

Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes and 9.A. INAC
201
Honeycomb Damage in Zone ’B’. This repair data TIVE
is INACTIVE since revision dated Feb 01/10.
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes and 9.B. INAC
202
Honeycomb Damage in Zone ’B’. This repair data TIVE
is INACTIVE since revision dated Feb 01/10.

Page 201
Printed in Germany
55−41−00 May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE

Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes and 9.C. INAC
203
Abrasions in Zone ’B’. This repair data is INAC
TIVE
TIVE since revision dated Feb 01/10.
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks and Hole 9.D. INAC
204
Damage in Zone ’F’. This repair data is INACTIVE TIVE
since revision dated Feb 01/10.
Repair of Abrasions and Scratches in Zone ’F’. 9.E. INAC
205
This repair data is INACTIVE since revision dated TIVE
Feb 01/10.
Repair of Impact Delamination without visible 9.F. INAC
206
Cracks or Holes in Zone ’F’. This repair data is TIVE
INACTIVE since revision dated Feb 01/10.
Repair of Delamination, Cracks, Holes and Honey
9.G. INAC
207
comb Damage in Zone ’F’. This repair data is IN
TIVE
ACTIVE since revision dated Feb 01/10.
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes and 9.H. INAC
208
Honeycomb Damage in Zone ’G’. This repair data TIVE
is INACTIVE since revision dated Feb 01/10.
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes and 9.I. INAC
209
Abrasions in Zone ’H’. This repair data is INAC
TIVE
TIVE since revision dated Feb 01/10.
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes and 9.J. INAC
210
Honeycomb Damage in Zone ’H’. This repair data TIVE
is INACTIVE since revision dated Feb 01/10.
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes and 9.K. INAC
211
Honeycomb Damage in Zone ’H’. This repair data TIVE
is INACTIVE since revision dated Feb 01/10.
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes and 9.L. INAC
212
Abrasions in Zone ’J’. This repair data is INAC
TIVE
TIVE since revision dated May 01/13, it has been
moved to Chapter 55−41−13, Page Block 201.
Repair of Delamination at Rudder Spar. This re
9.M. INAC
213
pair data is INACTIVE since revision dated May TIVE
01/13, it has been moved to Chapter 55−41−18,
Page Block 201.
Repair of Impact Delamination at Rudder Spar 9.N. INAC
214
Stiffener. This repair data is INACTIVE since TIVE
revision dated May 01/13, it has been moved to
Chapter 55−41−18, Page Block 201.

Table 201

Page 202
Printed in Germany
55−41−00 May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

REPAIR PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH FIGURE

In Situ Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, 9.O. INAC
215
Holes and Honeycomb Damage in Zone ’B’. This re
TIVE
pair data is INACTIVE since revision dated Feb
01/10.
In Situ Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, 9.P. INAC
216
Holes and Honeycomb Damage in Zone ’H’. This re
TIVE
pair data is INACTIVE since revision dated Feb
01/10.
Repair of Delamination or Impact Delamination 9.Q. INAC
217
without visible Cracks or Holes in Zone ’L’. TIVE
This repair data is INACTIVE since revision dated
Feb 01/10.
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks and Holes 9.R. INAC
218
in Zone ’L’. This repair data is INACTIVE since TIVE
revision dated Feb 01/10.
Repair of Abrasions and Scratches in Zone ’L’. 9.S. INAC
219
This repair data is INACTIVE since revision dated TIVE
Feb 01/10.
Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes and 9.T. INAC
220
Honeycomb Damage in Zone ’L’. This repair data TIVE
is INACTIVE since revision dated Feb 01/10.

Table 201
4. Damage Evaluation
Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage evaluation.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

5. Types of Repairs

There are three groups of repairs for the aircraft structure:

− permanent repairs,
− temporary repairs,
− permanent repairs after temporary repairs.

A. Permanent Repairs

You can find the permanent repair procedures, if applicable, in the spe

cific chapters.
There are three types of permanent repairs for the rudder structure.
These are as follows:

(1) Laminate Repairs

Page 203
Printed in Germany
55−41−00 May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

To make a laminate repair you must use one of the subsequent proce

dures:
(a) The hot−bond laminate repair procedure.

(b) The room temperature (RT) laminate repair procedure.

NOTE: You can refer to Chapter 51−77−11 for general data about
laminate repair procedures.
(2) Pre−cured Repairs

To make a pre−cured type repair, you must make the repair pieces
from pre−cured composite materials. These repair pieces are then at

tached to the aircraft structure with fasteners. For a pre−cured re

pair, the repair adhesive is used only as a shim. Refer to Chapter
51−77−11 for general data about pre−cured repair procedures.
NOTE: The repair adhesive is used as a shim material to a maximum
thickness of 1.5 mm (0.059 in.).

(3) Delamination Repairs with Fasteners

This type of permanent repair uses fasteners to hold the delaminated

layers, inside the composite material, together.

B. Temporary Repairs

You can find the temporary repair procedures, if applicable, in the spe

cific chapters. You must only make a temporary repair if you have the
subsequent conditions:
− you do not have the correct materials to make a permanent repair,
− you do not have the time to make a permanent repair.
NOTE: Some of the specific repair procedures do not have temporary repair
solutions.
C. Permanent Repairs after Temporary Repairs

You can find the permanent repair after the temporary repair procedures,
if applicable, in the specific chapters. You must make a permanent re

pair after a temporary repair in the given flight hour (FH) limit. Refer
to the applicable allowable damage and repair limits data to find this
FH limit.

6. Special Tools
To work with composite materials, it is necessary to use special tools.
Here are some examples:
− explosion proof tools are necessary if CFRP dust is caused,
− tools to cut or drill pre−cured CFRP materials must have very hard cut

ting edges (for example cutting wheels with diamond edges and twist−drills
made from high speed steel),

Page 204
Printed in Germany
55−41−00 May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

− tools to drill composite materials must have specially shaped cutting

edges.
Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 3.C. to find data about all the tools
and equipment necessary to make composite repairs.

7. Repair Materials

A. General
All of the materials necessary to make a repair are shown in the appli

cable repair materials list (Refer to Paragraph 9.).

B. Pre−cured CFRP Materials

Some of the specific repairs to the rudder have a numbered reference to

pre−cured section or sheet materials. Airspares can supply these materi

als. Refer to Chapter 55−31−00 Page Block 201 Config. 1, Figures 203 and
204 for data. Before you use pre−cured CFRP materials supplied by Air

spares, you must make a visual inspection of them. Before you use pre−
cured CFRP materials not supplied by Airspares, you must make a nonde

structive test (NDT) inspection of them.
NOTE: If you make the pre−cured CFRP materials yourself, make sure that
the pre−impregnated sheets are in their correct lay−up sequence.

8. Repair Environment

Before you make a permanent repair, make sure that you have the correct
environmental conditions (for example when the aircraft is in a warm and
dry aircraft hangar). It is important that the repair environment is clean
and has a stable room temperature during the repair procedure.

9. Rudder − Main Structure − Repairs

A. Repair of Impact Delamination, Cracks, Holes and Honeycomb Damage in Zone

’B’

NOTE: This repair data is INACTIVE since revision dated Feb 01/10.

NOTE: Before you repair the damaged structure, you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Chapter 51−77−10, Paragraph 3. for data.

Page 205
Printed in Germany
55−41−00 May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(1) Repair Materials

ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL/REMARKS

− Bonding and Adhesive Com
AR Material No. 08−001C (Refer to

pound (Lamination Resin) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
AR Material No. 08−051 (Refer to
pound (Epoxy Resin) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Special Material (Microbal
AR Material No. 05−057 (Refer to
loons) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Cleaning Agent AR Material No. 11−003 or 11−004
(Refer to Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
AR Material No. 08−074 (Refer to
pound (Masking Tape) Chapter 51−35−00)
− Bonding and Adhesive Com
AR Material No. 08−052 (Refer to
pound (Self Adhesive Alu
Chapter 51−35−00)
minum Tape)
− Honeycomb Hexagonal Nomex − AR Material No. LN29967A2 (Refer to
Cured Chapter 51−33−00)
− Glassfabric (dry) AR (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
Paragraph 6.B.(8))
− Epoxide Prepreg Glassfabric AR LN29549−8.4321.1A−EP (Refer to
Chapter 51−33−00)
− Epoxide Prepreg Glassfabric AR LN29549−8.4321.2A−EP (Refer to
Chapter 51−33−00)
− Backing Material AR Hostaphan foil RN75 or equiva

lent
− Parting Film AR E−3760
− Abrasive Cloth AR Grade 200, 400
(2) Permanent Repair (Refer to Figure 201).

WARNING: THE DUST FROM COMPOSITE MATERIALS IS DANGEROUS.

CAUTION: ONLY USE A MECHANICAL PROCEDURE TO REMOVE THE SURFACE

PROTECTION. REFER TO CHAPTER 51−77−11, PARAGRAPH 4.D. FOR
FULL DATA.

(a) Remove the surface protection from the repair area.

(b) Remove the damaged material. Cut the skin and honeycomb into a
regular shape and chamfer the undamaged skin into an overlap
(Refer to Figure 201).
(c) Remove unwanted material from the repair area with a vacuum
cleaner.

Page 206
Printed in Germany
55−41−00 Feb 01/10
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(d) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 11−004).

(e) Put some bonding and adhesive compound (masking tape) (Material
No. 08−074) around the outer edge of the overlap area (Refer to
Figure 201). This will help you to remove unwanted adhesive from
the repair area.

(f) If the damage depth is more than 1,0 mm (0.04 in.), make an
aluminum backing plate to lay up the repair plies (Refer to Fig

ure 201).
(g) Put parting film over the aluminum backing plate. Use clamps to
attach the backing plate to the repair area (Refer to Figure
201).

(h) Find out the number of dry−fabric layers necessary to make the
room temperature repair (Refer to Figure 201).
(i) Get the correct dry−fabric material (Refer to Chapter 55−30−00,
Figure 108).

NOTE: Also refer to Figure 108 for the pre−impregnated sheet data
necessary to make the hot−bonded repair (125 C° (257 F°)).

(j) Prepare the repair layers (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph

4.H.).

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.C. and 5.B. for data
about the preparation and laying up of pre−impregnated fab

ric sheet.
WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−001C) IS DAN

GEROUS.

(k) Apply a layer of bonding and adhesive compound (lamination resin)

(Material No. 08−001C) to the repair area with a brush or a
spatula.
(l) Remove the backing material from one side of the first repair
layer.

(m) Put the first repair layer in its repair position. Remove
wrinkles or air bubbles with a roller. Do this from the center
of the repair layer to the edges.
(n) Remove the backing material from the other side of the repair
layer.

Page 207
Printed in Germany
55−41−00 May 01/13
 STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL

(o) Do the steps (k) thru (n) for each repair layer necessary for
the room temperature repair. Cover the repair with a layer of
parting film.

(p) Let the lamination resin cure for 24 hours at room temperature
under vacuum conditions.

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.
(q) Make the Nomex honeycomb core plug (Refer to Chapter 51−77−11,
Paragraph 4.I.).

WARNING: SPECIAL MATERIAL (MATERIAL NO. 05−057) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUND (MATERIAL NO. 08−051) IS DAN

GEROUS.

(r) Mix the bonding and adhesive compound (epoxy resin) (Material No.
08−051) with special material (microballoons) (Material No.
05−057).

(s) Apply a layer of the epoxy resin paste to the cured repair
plies.

(t) Fill the honeycomb cells at the joint of the honeycomb core plug
to the adjacent honeycomb material with the epoxy resin paste
(Refer to Figure 201).

(u) Put the Nomex honeycomb core plug in its repair position. The
plug must be level with the inside of the aircraft skin (Refer
to Figure 201).

(v) Let the epoxy resin paste cure for 24 hours at room temperature.

NOTE: If a cure time of less than 24 hours is necessary, refer

to Chapter 51−77−11, Paragraph 4.A. for data.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−003) IS DANGEROUS.

WARNING: CLEANING AGENT (MATERIAL NO. 11−004) IS DANGEROUS.

(w) Clean the repair area with the cleaning agent (Material No.
11−003 or 1